diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2013-05-06 22:17:47 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2013-05-06 22:17:47 +0000 |
| commit | 97be36944506368e0d4ceba9aac964bdb09df0ab (patch) | |
| tree | 7f237115f9857f5690a59db4854af8388998356d | |
| parent | 9c014b016ad2023abb6061e05ab16b2c4c3e4a3c (diff) | |
babel 3.9a (at long last)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@30253 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
294 files changed, 9308 insertions, 74130 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb deleted file mode 100644 index b4ae253092a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb +++ /dev/null @@ -1,605 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi - Hebrew Package for babel system and LaTeX2e - -This new support package for Hebrew language is based on the old LaTeX 2.09 -hebrew.sty and is backward compatible with it. A new babel-based language -switching interface is also supported. - -Bi-directional support uses TeX--XeT or newer e-TeX engine. - -The package is available on-line at http://www.dsg.technion.ac.il/heblatex/ -or at ftp://tochna.technion.ac.il/pub/staff/lavva/heblatex/. It consists of: - - 1. Hebrew package for babel/LaTeX 2e: heblatex.tar.gz or heblatex.zip. - 2. Hebrew fonts (available also on CTAN or ftp.cc.huji.ac.il): - hebfonts.tar.gz or hebfonts.zip. - 3. Examples of hebrew documents: hebexmpl.tar.gz or hebexmpl.zip. - 4. This README.html file, available also in plain text format as - README.txt. - -The babel/LaTeX 2e edition of the hebrew package, as well as documentation -(including this README file) was developed and will be supported by Boris -Lavva, lavva@tx.technion.ac.il. Please direct your additions, modifications, -bug fixes and comments to this address. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Table of contents - - Acknowledgement - Copyright - Installation - Hebrew package usage - Input code pages - Font encodings - Bi-directional sectioning commands - Table of contents, List of figures, List of tables - Hebrew calendar - Document class for preparing Hebrew/English or English/Hebrew thesis - Compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style - Future work - ------------------------------------------------------- -Acknowledgment - -The following people have contributed to Hebrew package in one way or -another, knowingly or unknowingly. In alphabetical order: -Irina Abramovici, Yaniv Bargury, Yael Dubinsky, Sergio Fogel, Dan Haran, -Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman, Alon Ziv. - -Johannes Braams is the author of babel - a multilingual support for LaTeX. - -Tatiana Samoilov and Vitaly Surazhsky found a number of serious bugs in -preliminary version of Hebrew package. - -A number of other people have contributed comments and information. Specific -contributions are acknowledged within the documentation. - -I want to thank my wife, Vita, and son, Mishka, for their infinite love and -patience. - -If you made a contribution and I haven't mentioned it, don't worry, it was -an accident. I'm sorry. Just tell me and I will add you to the next version. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Copyright - -The copyright similar to other LaTeX 2e packages is added to prevent -inconsistency in version numbers and wide-spread distribution of unsupported -macro files (which was common with the old distributions). - -Changes, bug fixes and additions are always welcome, but they should be or -distributed under other name, or incorporated in this package (by mailing -me). - - -------------------------------------------------- - - Copyright 1997-1998 Boris Lavva and any individual authors listed - elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - - For further copyright information, and conditions for modification and - distribution, see any other copyright notices in this file. - - This file is contributed to the Babel system, release 3.6. - - -------------------------------------------------- - This system is distributed in the hope that - it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied - warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - - For error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of this file no more - than one year old, see bugs.txt. - - Please do not request updates from me directly. Primary distribution - will be through the CTAN archives. - - IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT NOTICE: - - You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. - - You are allowed to distribute this file under the condition that it - is distributed together with all the files listed in manifest.txt. - - If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain! - - Permission is granted to customize the declarations in this file to - serve the needs of your installation, provided that you comply with the - conditions in the file legal.txt. - - However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version of - this file under its original name. - - MODIFICATION ADVICE: - If you want to customize this file, it is best to make a copy of the - source file(s) from which it was produced. Use a different name for your - copy(ies) and modify the copy(ies); this will ensure that your modifications - do not get overwritten when you install a new release of the standard system. - - You can then easily distribute your modifications by distributing the - modified and renamed copy of the source file, together with a suitable - .ins file, taking care to observe the conditions in legal.txt; this will - ensure that other users can safely use your modifications. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Installation - - 1. Full LaTeX 2e distribution should be installed, including TeX--XeT or - e-TeX. Known such distributions include: - o teTeX 0.9 for UNIX with e-TeX - (ftp://ftp.informatik.uni-hannover.de/home/te/private/.0.9/) - o NTeX for UNIX with TeX--XeT - (http://darfnix.mathematik.uni-stuttgart.de/pub/tex/ntex/) - o Web2C for Windows 95 and NT (see at CTAN:systems/win32, for - example, ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/systems/win32/) - o TeX Live CD-ROMs distributed by TeX Users Group (TUG), see details - at http://www.tug.org. - 2. If e-TeX is installed, check if its format is available in extended - mode, by running elatex or latex on some .tex file: - ----------------------------------------------------------------------- - - This is e-TeX, Version 3.14159-1.1 (Web2c 7.0) - entering extended mode - ----------------------------------------------------------------------- - - The second line should be "entering extended mode". - 3. If TeX--XeT is installed, it will use a LaTeX 2e format file, called - laxet.fmt from the formats directory. This directory is commonly - located at texmf/web2c or texmf/web2c/ini subdirectories. To produce - format file, run initexxet program on the following laxet.ini file: - ----------------------------------------------------------------------- - - % Prevent dumping of LaTeX2e - \let\xxdump=\dump - \let\dump=\endinput - % LaTeX2e format - \input latex.ltx - % Read latex2e.add - \openin1=latex2e.add - \ifeof1\closein1\message{latex2e.add not found} - \else\closein1\input latex2e.add - \fi - % dump - \let\dump=\xxdump - \let\xxdump=\undefined - \dump - ----------------------------------------------------------------------- - - Put the resulting file laxet.fmt to the formats directory and link (or - copy) the virtexxet program as laxet. - 4. Download the babel sources from the CTAN sites, directory - macros/latex/packages/babel. This version of Hebrew package is tested - with babel version 3.6. - 5. Apply the following changes to the standard babel sources: - o babel.dtx -- after the line 916 (greek) add: - \DeclareOption{hebrew}{\input{rlbabel.def}\input{hebrew.ldf}} - o bbcompat.dtx -- after the line 134 (welsh) add: - %<+hebrew>\input rlbabel.def\input hebrew.ldf\relax - o babel.ins -- after the line 346 (bahasa) add: - \generate{\compatfile{hebrew}} - 6. Download the hebrew package, fonts and examples from the above - mentioned place. - 7. Open heblatex to the babel sources directory. - 8. Run latex babel.ins and then latex hebrew.ins. - 9. Move all *.cls, *.sty, *.def, *.fd, *.ldf to the babel directory - searchable by TeX (run MakeTeXls-R or similar program). Usually, babel - is located at TEXROOT/share/texmf/tex/latex/packages/babel or - TEXROOT/share/texmf/tex/generic/babel. - 10. Install hebrew fonts from hebfonts as following: - o Find your public font sources directory, it is usually: - TEXROOT/share/texmf/fonts/source/public. - o Unpack hebfonts file into the abovenamed public directory. It will - create a new directory called hebrew inside public. - o Find your special.map file - it is usually found at - TEXROOT/share/texmf/fontname/special.map and add the following - lines at the end of this file: - @c Hebrew fonts - jerus10 public hebrew - deads10 public hebrew - oldjaf10 public hebrew - telav10 public hebrew - crml10 public hebrew - crmlsl10 public hebrew - fr public hebrew - frbx public hebrew - frsl public hebrew - hclassic public hebrew - hcaption public hebrew - redis7 public hebrew - redis8 public hebrew - redis9 public hebrew - redis10 public hebrew - redis12 public hebrew - redis17 public hebrew - redisb10 public hebrew - rediss8 public hebrew - rediss9 public hebrew - rediss10 public hebrew - rediss12 public hebrew - shold10 public hebrew - shscr10 public hebrew - shstk10 public hebrew - o Run REHASH from texconfig utility or program MakeTeXls-R or newer - mktexlsr (if available) to build a new ls-R database in - TEXROOT/share/texmf directory. You can add inserted file names - manually to ls-R if you cannot find abovenamed programs. - o Note that only 7-bit (old code) fonts are used by new Hebrew - package. - 11. You can check if your installation succeed by LaTeXing examples from - hebexmpl file. - -Finally, you can prepare the LaTeX documentation of all components of the -new Hebrew package by running: - - ------------------------------------ - - latex hebrew.dtx - makeindex -s bbind.ist hebrew.idx - makeindex -s bbglo.ist -o hebrew.gls hebrew.glo - latex hebrew.dtx - latex hebrew.dtx - - ------------------------------------ - -The same procedure can be applied on babel.dtx (or babel.drv) to create the -babel documentation. Files bbind.ist and bbglo.ist are included with babel -installation. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Hebrew package usage - -The usage is simple, for example: - -\documentclass[12pt,twoside]{book} -\usepackage[hebrew,english,russian,danish,greek,...]{babel} - -LaTeX 2.09 style is also supported (in compatibility mode) to process -existing documents, for example: - -\documentstyle[12pt,hebrew_newcode]{article} - -Languages can be switched by the following macros: - - 1. \sethebrew or \unsethebrew - 2. \selectlanguage{hebrew}, \selectlanguage{english}, etc. - 3. \begin{otherlanguage}{hebrew} ... \end{otherlanguage}, or any other - language - 4. \R{hebrew text} inside the latin text - 5. \L{latin text} inside the hebrew text - -First three commands are equivalent: first one provides switching interface, -compatible with LaTeX 2.09 hebrew style, while second and third --- -babel-based interface. - -Last two commands are used for language and direction switching inside -paragraph. - -hmbox and embox macros should be used for inserting Hebrew and English text -(respectively) inside a mathematical formula. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Input code pages - -Hebrew package supports the following input code pages: - - 1. 7-bit hebrew encoding, also known as old code, defined by Israeli - Standard 960 (si960) - 2. IBM PC code page also known as pc code (cp862) - 3. WINDOWS code page also known as new code (cp1255) - 4. ISO 8859-8 Hebrew/Latin code page commonly used in UNIX, also known as - new code (8859-8 also known as new code) - -The default input encoding can be set using option defined above in -parentheses with inputenc style (but *before* babel), for example : - -\usepackage[cp1255]{inputenc} - -Input encoding can be changed also inside the document by the \inputencoding -command, for example: - -\inputencoding{cp862} - ------------------------------------------------------- -Font encodings - -Various font encodings can be used, including, of course, Local Hebrew -Encoding (LHE), with the aid of fontenc style (but *before* babel), for -example: - -\usepackage[LHE,OT2,LCY,T1]{fontenc} - -Many useful font-switching commands are provided in hebfont package which -can be included *after* the babel: - -\usepackage{hebfont} - -These commands are in format \text<font>{Hebrew text}, for example: -\textoj{Text printed with Old Jaffa font}, \textredis{Text printed with -redis font}. - -In addition, for backward compatibility in LaTeX 2.09 documents, the four -old font-switching commands are supported: -{\jm ...}, {\oj ...}, {\ds ...} and {\ta ...} for Jerusalem, Old Jaffa, Dead -Sea and Tel-Aviv fonts respectively. - -The following TeX fonts are supported: - - * Jerusalem (used as default font) - * Dead Sea (used as bold font) - * Tel-Aviv (used as sans-serif or typewriter font) - * Old Jaffa (used as italic or slanted font and for emphasize) - * Hebrew classic normal and slanted (command \textclas) - * Shalom Old Style (command \textshold) - * Shalom Script (command \textshscr) - * Shalom Stick (command \textshstk) - * Carmel normal and slanted (command \textcrml) - * Frank Ruehl normal, bold and slanted (command \textfr) - * Redis normal, bold and slanted (command \textredis) - ------------------------------------------------------- -Bi-directional sectioning commands - -These commands inserts both Hebrew title to the RL table of contents or list -of figures/tables, and English (or other LR language) title to the LR table -of contents or list of figures/tables. - - 1. \bpart{hebrew}{english} - 2. \bchapter{hebrew}{english} - 3. \bsection{hebrew}{english} - 4. \bsubsection{hebrew}{english} - 5. \bsubsubsection{hebrew}{english} - 6. \bcaption{hebrew}{english} - 7. \bchapternn{hebrew}{english} - replaces \chapter* - 8. \bsectionnn{hebrew}{english} - replaces \section* - -A number of additional bi-directional commands are defined in the -hebtech.cls - thesis document class file, described below. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Table of contents, List of figures, List of tables - -Both Right-to-Left and Left-to-Right versions of the tables (toc, lof and -lot) can be generated simultaneously. The LR files have the default -extensions (.toc, .lof and .lot), while the RL files have reversed -extensions (.cot, .fol and .tol). For example, to include RL tables at the -beginning and LR tables before the end of the document: - - ------------------------------------ - - \begin{document} - \sethebrew - \tableofcontents % Generates .cot file - \listoffigures % Generates .fol file - \listoftables % Generates .tol file - ... - \unsethebrew - \tableofcontents % Generates .toc file - \listoffigures % Generates .lof file - \listoftables % Generates .lot file - \end{document} - - ------------------------------------ - -All 6 files are generated simultaneously in two latex passes ! - ------------------------------------------------------- -Hebrew calendar - -Original Hebrew calendar style was created by Michail Rozman, and corrected -by Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman and Dan Haran. - -This style was adjusted to LaTeX 2e by Boris Lavva, and provided in hebcal -package. It can be included *after* the babel: - -\usepackage{hebcal} - -The following 2 user-level commands are provided with the package: - -\newcount\hd \newcount\hm \newcount\hy - -\hd=10 \hm=3 \hy=1992 - -\HebrewDate{\hd}{\hm}{\hy} - -which converts the requested Gregorian date to Hebrew calendar date and -prints it in Hebrew or English (depends on the current language) and: - -\HebrewToday or \hebrewtoday - -which prints the current Hebrew date (today) . - ------------------------------------------------------- -Document class for preparing Hebrew/English or English/Hebrew thesis - -A useful document class file hebtech for preparing M.Sc. and Ph.D. theses -for the Technion (English/Hebrew and Hebrew/English) is included with this -package too. I believe that it can be adjusted for the needs of other -academic institutions in Israel too. This class automatically includes babel -with hebrew and english option, hebfont and hebcal packages. - -The original version for LaTeX 2.09 and old code Hebrew was created in 1994 -by Irina Abramovici, at Taub Computer Center, Technion. - -How to use this document class? - -\documentclass[12pt]{hebtech} - -The following parameters should be included in thesis preamble (before -\begin{document}): - - 1. Thesis title - \title{hebrew}{english} - 2. Thesis author - \author{hebrew}{english} - 3. Department name, e.g. Electrical Engineering Department - \dept{hebrew}{english} - 4. Domain of research, e.g. Food Processing - \dom{hebrew}{english} - 5. Main advisor - \advisori{hebrew}{english} - 6. Second advisor, if exists - \advisorii{hebrew}{english} - 7. Main sponsor - \donori{hebrew}{english} - 8. Additional sponsor, if exists - \donorii{hebrew}{english} - 9. Set thestype counter to: - o 1 --- for a research thesis - o 2 --- for a project thesis - o 3 --- for a final paper - - \setcounter{thestype}{1} - 10. Set grade counter to: - o 1 --- for master of science - o 2 --- for master - o 3 --- for master of technology - o 4 --- for doctor of science - - \setcounter{grade}{1} - 11. Date is optional, if not included, today's date will be used. The - Gregorian date entered will be printed and get converted the Jewish - date. - \date{28}{2}{1998} - 12. Page style is optional too, if not included, plain will be used. - \pagestyle{thesis} - -In the main document the following additional commands and environments can -be used: - - 1. \makecover - creates Hebrew or English cover page, depending on the - current language. - 2. \maketitle - creates Hebrew or English title page, depending on the - current language. - 3. \begin{acknowledgment} ... \end{acknowledgment} - builds the - acknowledgment page and adds inserted customized acknowledgment in - Hebrew or English, depending on the current language. - 4. \begin{dedication} ... \end{dedication} - builds the dedication page in - Hebrew or English, depending on the current language. - 5. \tableofcontents, \listoffigures, \listoftables - builds tables - depending on the current language (all 6 tables can be used - simultaneously). - 6. \begin{abstract} ... \end{abstract} - builds the abstract pages in - Hebrew or English, depending on the current language, adds contents - line to the 2 tables of contents. - 7. \frontmatter, \mainmatter, \backmatter - should be inserted at the - beginning, before the main part, and at the ending of the thesis to - change numbering and other style parameters. - 8. \bibliography{...} - now adds "References" line to the 2 tables of - contents: English and Hebrew. - -Some useful bi-directional commands, for figures and tables provided in this -file too: - - 1. \bcaptionf{hebrew}{english} - similar to \bcaption but answers to - thesis formatting requirements at the Technion, used for figures. - 2. \bcaptionff{to RL lof}{to LR lof}{hebrew}{english} - a customized one - for figures. - 3. \bcaptiont{hebrew}{english} - similar to \bcaption but answers to - thesis formatting requirements at the Technion, used for tables. - 4. \bcaptiontt{to RL lot}{to LR lot}{hebrew}{english} - a customized one - for tables. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style - -Generally, the new package is compatible with LaTeX 2.09 style file -hebrew.sty, i.e. in most cases one can use the new package on old documents -without any errors. Howver, it does not support Plain TeX, please use -heb_macros.tex, or other TeX macro file for Hebrew instead. - -A few incompatibilities are described below: - - * The macros with Hebrew names are not provided, for example, macro - \hadgesh when the command name "hadgesh" is given in Hebrew is not - supported. The reason is that in new LaTeX 2e it is forbidden to use - 8-bit macros, because all characters 128-255 became to be "active". - However, the following English-coded equivalents are supported for - backward compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style and can be used even in - the new documents: - 1. \hebday (replaced "hayom"). - 2. \hebcopy (for use in letter style) - 3. \hebincl (for use in letter style) - 4. \hebpage (for use in letter style) - 5. \hebto (for use in letter style) - 6. \hadgesh (produces ``poor man's bold'' - heavy printout, it is - advisable to use real bold fonts, e.g. DeadSea instead) - 7. \piska (can be used only in compatibility mode) - 8. \piskapiska (can be used only in compatibility mode) - 9. \makafgadol (=\textendash) - 10. \makafanak (=\textemdash) - 11. \geresh (=\textquoteright) - 12. \opengeresh (=\textquoteright) - 13. \closegeresh (=\textquoteleft) - 14. \openquote (=\textquotedblright) - 15. \closequote (=\textquotedblleft) - 16. \leftquotation (=\textquotedblright) - 17. \rightquotation (=\textquotedblleft) - 18. \undertext (=\underline, can be used only in compatibility mode) - * In \documentstyle line the following 3 styles can be used in Hebrew - documents: - 1. \documentstyle[hebrew_oldcode,...]{...} in old 7-bit documents - (instead of "hebrew"!). - 2. \documentstyle[hebrew_newcode,...]{...} in 8-bit UNIX or Windows - documents. - 3. \documentstyle[hebrew_p,...]{...} in 8-bit DOS documents. - * hebcal style should always be used (instead of older hebcal_p and - hebcal_newcode). - * Font names for the included 7-bit fonts were renamed (for the sake of - multiplatform support) to lowercase names with no more than 8 - characters as following: - o jerus10.mf - for Jerusalem (10pt) - o deads10.mf - for Dead Sea (10pt) - o telav10.mf - for TelAviv (10pt) - o oldjaf10.mf - for Old Jaffa (10pt) - o shold10.mf - for Shalom Old Style (10pt) - o shscr10.mf - for Shalom Script (10pt) - o shstk10.mf - for Shalom Stick (10pt) - o Some other font-related files were renamed too (to lowercase and < - 8 characters): - + frank_ruehl.mf became frruehl.mf - + redisfont.mf became redisfnt.mf - + redisbx10.mf became redisb10.mf - o All other font names remain unchanged - ------------------------------------------------------- -Future work - - 1. Visual enviroments i.e. tabular, tabbing and array have to be supported - for hebrew. Now only left-to-right direction of lines is supported. - 2. Update hebrew package for the future babel-3.7 release. - 3. Hebrew points and dots ("nikud") support should be added, so it can be - used in font-independent way. - Currently, nikud can be used only on font-dependent way: only shalom - and classic families of fonts provide nikud, and hebrew point glyphs - are located in different places. - 4. Machintosh Hebrew/English input code page support should be added. - 5. Type1/TrueType Hebrew fonts should be supported. - ------------------------------------------------------- -Created by Boris Lavva, lavva@tx.technion.ac.il -Last modified March 1, 1998 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9fd45ef96df..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ - Babel Distribution Guide - - 17 March 2008 - - -Welcome to the Babel system! - -This file contains the distribution guide for version 3.8 of the -Babel system. The Babel system is distributed under the terms of -the LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3 or later. A copy of -the LPPL can be found in the LaTeX distribution. - -The Babel system supports multilingual typesetting. -This version of the Babel system is compatible with LaTeX2e. -Whenever the instructions talk about LaTeX, read LaTeX2e. - -This system is maintained by Johannes Braams in cooperation with -various people around the world. - -The Babel system is described in: - - * The LaTeX Companion 2nd edn., Mittelbach and Goossens et al, Addison-Wesley - - -This distribution is described in the files ending with .txt. You -should read install.txt before starting to install Babel. - - * 00readme.txt is this file. - - * changes.txt is a chronological list of the changes to babel - - * install.txt describes how to install Babel. - * install.OzTeX-4 describes how to install Babel on a Mac with a - recent OzTeX distribution (4.0+). - * install.OzTeX-pre4 describes how to install Babel on a Mac with an - old OzTeX distribution (before 4.0). - - * manifest.bbl lists all the files in the Babel distribution. - - * bugs.txt describes how to submit a bug report for Babel. - - * todo.txt lists a few things that haven't been done yet - - * howtoget.txt lists the places where to get the Babel system and - other related software. - -You are not allowed to change the files in this distribution. - -If you want to add your own options to extend Babel with local -language definitions you can do that by adding \DeclareOption -statements to a configuration file, bblopt.cfg. - -If you like the babel system, please send me a postcard with a nice -postage stamp for my collection! - -Please do not request updates from me. Distribution is done only -through mail servers and TeX organisations. - - -Please send bug reports to the LaTeX bug reporting address, -latex-bugs@latex-project.org. Please read the file bugs.txt in this -distribution and follow the guidelines. - -WARNINGS: ---------- -- The file wnhyphen.tex (russian hyphenation pattern file) contains - changes of uppercase and lowercase codes. Amongst these is - \uccode`\~=`\^ which may lead to unexpected results when the ~ - occurs in the argument of \uppercase - -Send any suggestions, additions, complaints, to me: -e-mail: babel at braams.xs4all.nl -address: Kersengaarde 33 - 2723 BP Zoetermeer - The Netherlands -Note that I am more likely to respond to e-mail. ---- Copyright 1997,2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 4bc082f60e6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ - - The Greek fonts - - - The latest version of the "babel" package supports the Greek language. In - order to be able to use the "greek" option correctly someone must have - the correct fonts properly installed. The "greek" option uses the new - fonts designed by Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it). The fonts are - complete, i.e., there are shapes for every possible combination. Moreover, - the fonts include the big slide size fonts, which were missing in the - previous font bundle. - - Where to find them - - All the necessary Greek fonts reside in any of the CTAN nodes. They - reside in the directory languages/greek/cb. The font bundle includes - hyphenation patterns plus usage information for the greek option. - - October 15, 1997 - - Apostolos Syropoulos - - snail mail: 366, 28th October Str. - GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE - - electronic - mail: apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr or - apostolo@obelix.ee.duth.gr diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 04541542785..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ - Hi, - - This is the announcement of babel release 3.8, - - What's new in release 3.8? - Actually babel 3.8 is very much like the later releases of - babel 3.7. Support for a number of languages has been added. - Here is a list of the changes since babel 3.7h: - - Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that - one has to type '{}a when the acute accent is used as a - shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other - problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have - vanished. - - Two new commands, \shorthandon and \shorthandoff have - been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more - shorthands. - - The support for Hebrew has been updated by Tzafrir Cohen - - Support for Slovak has been extended with shorthand - definitions. - - Support for typesetting Sanskrit in transliteration will - be made available in a later release of babel. - - Support for typesetting Kannada, Devnagari and Tamil will - be made available in a later release of babel. - - Support for typesetting interlingua is now available, thanks to - Peter Kleiweg <kleiweg@let.rug.nl>. - - The last remark: where can you get babel 3.8? - It is available in the directory - /tex-archive/macros/latex/rewuired/babel on CTAN. - - Happy LaTeXing! - - Johannes Braams - -TeXniek, Kersengaarde 33, -2723 BP Zoetermeer The Netherlands. -Phone : +31 79 352 28 19 E-mail : johannes at braams.cistron.nl -Fax : +31 70 343 41 85 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b379bd29057..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0d5c85f6dc8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 668d93608d7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e200f1898e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d5a4b8c715a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ - Babel Error Reports - - 20 February 2004 - -ERROR REPORTS - -Before you report an error please check that: - - * The error has not already been reported. If you have WWW - access, you can search the LaTeX bugs database using this URL: - - http://www.latex-project.org/bugs.html - - * The error is not caused by software other than the Babel software - that is produced and maintained by me (please report problems with - other software to the authors or suppliers of that software). - - * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or - of other software. - - * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has - been modified elsewhere. - -If you think you have found a genuine bug in a recent version of the -Babel software please report it in the same way as bugs for LaTeX2e -are reported: - - * Prepare a *short* test file that clearly demonstrates your - problem; see below for a discussion of `short'. - - * Run this file through latex to obtain the transcript file - (often .log) since you will need to submit this file also. - - * Generate a bug report template by running the file - latexbug.tex through LaTeX2e. - - * Fill in the spaces in the generated template file. Please note that - the reporting language is *English* irregardless of the fact, that - the address you are sending the bug report to, might not be in an - English speaking country. Reports received in a language other than - English might not be understandable for the person currently - looking at bug reports! - - * Include all necessary information, especially a complete input - file, a complete transcript file, and all other files used (if they - are not standard). - - Please check carefully to ensure that any non-standard files are - essential to the bug; and remember that I cannot debug files not - supplied by me. - - Any such non-standard files should be included in a `filecontents' - environment at the start of your input file. This allows me to - run your test file without a lot of manual preparation; this is - essential since we have to deal with many reports, not just with - the one written by you. - - * Please note that it is important to make the input file as small - as possible since this will enable me to find and fix the error - quickly. It also helps me because then I can often use it as test - file for future releases. - - I would expect most files to be less than 60 lines, and very - rarely to be longer than 100 lines. - - This can often be achieved by defining a command to be some - arbitrary text and using this several times if it is necessary to - generate longer bits of text. - -Error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of Babel files should be -sent by E-mail to: - - latex-bugs@latex-project.org - -You will receive an acknowledgement by E-mail containing at the -beginning of its subject line a problem reference of the form -category/number, e.g. babel/1234. Please use this subject line in ALL -further E-mails concerning the problem. Otherwise your reply will be -categorized and filed separately. - ---- Copyright 2004 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 20ece3262ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2822 +0,0 @@ - -This file lists changes to the Babel files in reverse chronological order. -NOTE: This file is based on the developers' personal change-log files -and is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to -completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that -are not part of the distribution. - -========================================================================== - - -2009-09-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.ins: Added a line for kurmanji - -2009-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * kurmanji/kurmanji.dtx: Added the support provided by Jörg - Knappen. - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: New version (2.3d) from Daniel - - * danish/danish.dtx: The shorthand "/ introduced in version 1.3q - was still a dutch shorthand. found by Lars Madsen (daleif @ - imf.au.dk) - -2009-09-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian/estonian.dtx: Received a new version of estonian.dtx - from Jaan Vajakas (jv at ut.ee) with the follwoing changes: - - the commands \~o and \~O now work properly in T1 encoding (before, - words containing the commands \~o or \~O were not hyphenated and - with the times package the tilde was placed incorrectly (through - the letter o)) - - in UTF-8 encoding (\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}) now õ and Õ - work properly (before, words containing the letter õ or Õ - were not hyphenated and with the timesi package, the tilde was - placed incorrectly, probably due to the bug with \~o and \~O), - i. e. the bug - http://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=babel/4029 - was fixed - - the command \~ now makes tilde to all letters except Å¡, ž, Å - ja Ž, as in other languages (before, \~ made caron to all letters - except õ and Õ) - - because of this, now e.g. the letter ñ is displayed correctly - with \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} - - now, letters like õ and ñ can be copied and pasted from - Acrobat Reader (before, e.g. õ made with the command \~o became - ~o when copied; the same also with letter õ made directly with - the UTF-8 character õ with \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}) - - when switching from Estonian to another language, high umlaut is - now restored (e.g. in English OT1-encoding the umlaut of the - letters öäü is higher than in Estonian, but before, if the - command \selectlanguage{english} was used after Estonian text, the - umlaut remained low in the following English text) - - words containing the commands ~s, ~z, ~o, "a, "o, "u, ~S, ~Z, - ~O, "A, "O, "U are now also hyphenated in OT1 encoding (before, - words containing the commands ~o, "a, "o, "u were not hyphenated); - words containing letters made directly with characters - šžäöüŠŽÄÖÜ or commands \~s, \~z, \"a, \"o, \"u, - \~S, \~Z, \"A, \"O, \"U are still not hyphenated in OT1 encoding - (also e.g. the German package allows hyphenation in words - containing the command "a but it OT1 encoding it does not allow - hyphenation in words containing directly the charcater ä or - command \"a) - - minor regression: now words containing directly characters õ or - Õ or commands \~o or \~O are not hyphenated any more in OT1 - encoding (this regression is really marginal because firstly, - words containing any other Estonian accented letter were not - hyphenated in OT1 encoding, secondly, the Estonian hyphenation - rules do not work absolutely correctly in OT1 encoding anyway and - thirdly, with e. g. the German package the situation is similar) - -2008-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian/estonian.dtx : Added the translation for Glossary, - provided by Jaan Vajakas. - -2008-07-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): The value of - \languagename, as dumped in the format needs to be the name of the - language in register 0, not the last language loaded. (PR - 4039). Now temporarily store the wanted name to be restored after - all pattern files have been loaded. - -2008-07-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian/estonian.dtx : Replaced the translation of "Proof" (PR - 4030) - -2008-07-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx: Added two missing \end{macro}'s found while - compliling babel.drv - - * danish/danish.dtx: Fixed a small typo - - * galician/galician.dtx: Fixed a small typo - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a new - macro (\bbl@patterns) to enable usig encoding specific hyphenation - patterns as is the case for the Czech ans Slovak support; - requested by Petr Tesarik, the current maintainer of those files. - - * slovak/slovak.dtx: New file received from Petr Tesarik (already - in 2006) - - * czech/czech.dtx: New file received from Petr Tesarik (already in - 2006) - - * base/bbcompat.dtx: two lines were missing for latin.sty; added, - found by Catalin David - - * german/ngermanb.dtx : Corrected a typo found by Daniel - Winkelmann - - * spanish/spanish.dtx : Corrected the Checksum for compilation as - part of Babel and corrected a couple of typos found by Heiko - Oberdiek (PR 4037) - Two consecutive right quotes should be turned into one right - double quote. Found by Takao Nakagawa - - * greek/greek.fdd: New version from Claudio Beccari - - * greek/greek.ins: New version from Claudio Beccari - -2008-06-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * german/germanb.dtx : Fixed a type (\coptions...) found by Daniel - Flipo - - * french/frenchb.dtx : New versino from Daniel Flipo - - * spanish/spanishb.dtx : New version from Javier, fixing a couple - of bugs. - -2008-03-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx (section{Latin shortcuts} : The way the category - code for the equals sign and the caret was being handled was - broken. The restoration of the right catcodes ended up inside the - definition of \ProsodicMarks (PR 3976). Also made - \LatinMarks... aliases for \ProsedicMarks... - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added an extra - \begingroup ... \endgroup in order to protect the current - lowercase cide of the tilde (PR 3851) - (subsection{marks}): Added the check for the value of \@mkboth. If - it is equal to \markboth we need to redefine it too. (PR 3826) - - * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx : Small documentation fix (remove - superfluous double quotes from table) signalled by Michail - Vidiassov (master at iaas dot msu dot ru) - - * cyrillic/russianb.dtx : Small documentation fix (remove - superfluous double quotes from table) signalled by Michail - Vidiassov (master at iaas dot msu dot ru) - -2008-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * portuges/portuges.dtx : Adde the translation for Glossary from - Luiz Carlos Guidolin - - * galician/galician.dtx: New version from Javier Múgica de Rivera - - * spanish/spanish.dtx: New version from Javier Bezos; now at - version 5.0 - -2008-03-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * danish/danish.dtx : Set the \lefthyphenmin parameter to 2 by - default on request by the Danish users through Palle Jørgensen - Also added definitions for"/ and \- (copied from dutch.ldf) as per - the same request. - - * german/germanb.dtx: When the option germanb needs to work like - german it is not sufficient to just change the value of - \CurrentOption. It also needs the setting of \l@germanb and the - four definiing macros. (PR 3992) - - * sorbian/usorbian.dtx : When the lowercase code of the character - ^Y is to be changed we need to make sure that the caret has - category code 7. (PR 3992) - -2008-03-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}): Added some code - to let hyphenref swith the shorthands to system level (PR4006) - (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the setting of the - hyphenmin parameters to the \hyphenrules command (PR3997) - -2008-03-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bahasa/bahasam.dtx: New version from Bob Margolis with corrected - translations. - -2008-03-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * italian/italian.dtx : New version from Claudio, fixing a - cllubpenalty bug - -2008-03-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx: New version from Claudio Beccari, merged with - master source. - - * french/french.dtx New version from Daniel Flipo (2.0e) - -2007-10-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx: The line with - \addtoextraslanguage{\LatinMarksOff} contained a typo; fixing that - brought to light that it needed to be removed as it generated an - error from \begin{document} PR 3960 by David Kastrup - -2007-10-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * sorbian/usorbian.dtx: The Babel option uppersorbian wasn't - supported, reported (PR 3982) by Uwe Stoehr - - * sorbian/lsorbian.dtx: The Babel option lowersorbian wasn't - supported, reported (PR 3982) by Uwe Stoehr - -2006-06-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperanto/esperanto.dtx: The macros \esper and \Esper were - missing the letter 'r'; (PR3866), found by Paul Ebermann - - * finnish/finnish.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from - Heik Oberdiek. - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from - Heik Oberdiek. - - * base/bbcompat.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from - Heiko Oberdiek. - - * albanian/albanian.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from - Heiko Oberdiek. - -2005-12-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx: removed the comment character before the - definition of "` on request from Andrij M. Shvaika - -2005-11-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bahasa/bahasam.dtx: New language added to the distribution - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the option - albanian and malay, meyalu and bahasam for Bahasa Malaysia, added - the options bahasai, indonesian and indon for Bahasa Indonesia. - - * albanian/albanian.dtx: New language added to the distribution - -2005-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx (section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts}): - Claudio changed \allowhyphens to \bbl@allowhyphens to have the - same behaviour with T1 and OT1. - (section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts}): Claudio added - \LatinMarksOn and \LatinMarksOff - (section{Etymological hyphenation}): Claudio added a \nobreak in - the definition of \lt@allowhyphens - - * italian/italian.dtx (subsection{Support for etymological - hyphenation}): Claudio replaced a \it@next with \it@@next and - added a \nobreak in \it@@cwm - -2005-05-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}}): The varioref - \Ref needs to be able to expand \ref; in order to make this work - we now redefine \Ref_ to call \org@ref (found by Frank Mitelbach). - -2005-05-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * hebrew/hebrew.fdd: Typo's in the docstrip guards prevented the - command \ProvidesFile to appear in HE8nachlieli.fd (PR3774), the - file HE8frankruehl.fd was completely useless - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): The way Babel dealt with - adding language information to the marks appeared to rely on - LaTeX's definition of \markboth and \markright, but broke with - classes such as amsart that contain a different definition (PR - 3750 and 3756). Also, the use of \noexpand broke with fancyhdr; - replaced with \protect (found by Frank Mitelbach) - - * italian/italian.dtx: Received a new version of italian.dtx from - Claudio Beccari - -2005-03-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * welsh/welsh.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by Owen - Thomas (owen at llambed.freeserve.co.uk); he also informed me that - the string `a viz' should not be part of the definition for - \today. - -2005-03-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * latin/latin.dtx: Added a comment character in the definition of - \today to prevent an unwanted space in the output. Reported by - Richard Verhoeven (richard.verhoeven at web.de). - -2005-03-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx: Andrew Youn (aty at mintaka.sdsu.edu) and - Hillmar Preusse (hille42 web.de) supplied many error corrections - and enhancements to the text. - -2005-03-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo - -2004-11-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * cyrillic/russianb.dtx : Removed the comment character that - disabled the copde line in which the shorthand ", is declared. PR - 3669 requested this shorthand to be activated. Reported by ichail - Vidiassov (master at iaas.msu.ru) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added an error message - for the case where \aliasshorthand is used in a document without - prio declaration in the preamble of the new shorthand - character. PR 3590, reported by Igor A. Kotelnikov (i.a.kotelnikov - at inp.nsk.su) - -2004-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : Added a numer of comment characters after - PR3720 reported a spurious space in the output. The PR was - reported by Zoltan Gotthardt (gotty at freemail.hu). - -2004-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * english/english.dtx : The selection of hyphenation patters was - biased towards the American patterns. Removed this bias. This - change was prompted by comments from Walter Schmidt (w.a.schmidt\ - at gmx.net). - -2004-06-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx: Added support for Australian and New - Zealand spelling. - * english/english.dtx: Added support for Australian and New - Zealand spelling upon request from Harald Harders (h.harders at - tu-bs.de) - -2004-05-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): When the mark commands are - used with empty argumetns, we don't want to add anything to the - marks. PR3674, found by Ulrich Dirr ud at art-satz.de, stated - that empty marks were no longer empty. - -2004-05-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * russianb.dtx, ukraineb.dtx, bulgarian.dtx : The command for tanh - (\th) conflicts with the T1 definition of \th (the letter - thorn). Therefore changed the definition to be valid only for the - respective language and in math mode only. (PR 3649, found by - Benjamin BAYART (bayartb at jmpl.fr.eu.org)) - -2004-05-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): Now - use \ProvideTextCommand and friends instead of - \DeclareRobustCommand to define the quotation marks in order to - keep kerning working (PR3482, 3661, both reported by Harald - Harders, h.harders at tu-bs.de). - -2004-04-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx : The code that is executed when the hhline - package is loaded needed an extra \string before the colon to - prevent unwanted expansion of the colon in some circumstances. - -2004-04-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo - -2004-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * hebrew/hebrew.dtx: Updated distribution with new files from - Tzafrir Cohen from his ivritex package - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : Use \nobreakspace indefinition of - fnum@figure and fnum@table - - * slovak/slovak.dtx : Tobias Schlemmer (Tobias.Schlemmer at - web.de) provided an extension to the support for Slovak with - shorthand definitions. - -2004-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx : Commented out the redefinitions of - \fnum@figure and \fnum@tabel as they are no longer necessary and - proved to be a problem together with the koma class. Pointed out - by Markus Kohm (komascript at gmx.info) and "Matthias M. Weber" - (mmw at aretaios.de) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Umlauts and trema's}): PR 3603 - mentions a problem in \LaTeX when \add@accent occurs in vertical - mode; this problem can occur with \umlauthigh and \umlatlow as - well. Implemented the same fix: add \leavevemode. Reported by: - Gianfranco Boggio-Togna (gbt at acm.org). - - * polish/polish.dtx : The double closing quote was defined using - \textquotedblleft, it should be \textquotedblright according to - Zbigniew Jedrzejewski-Szmek (zjed@ at tempac.okwf.fuw.edu.pl) - -2004-02-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * czech/czech.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - (tonda.misek at post.cz) (PR 3610) - -2003-11-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Since the equal - sign may be used in TeX programming it needs to have it's default - category code during language definition file processing. When - turkish is loaded this isn't the case. Therefor the macros - Ldfinit, ldf@quit and ldf@finish have been changed accordingly. - Problem reported in PR 3398 by myself as occuring with latin. - -2003-11-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan/catalan.dtx : Fixed a typo, - found by Ignasi Furió (ignasi.furio at uib.es) \AtBeginDocuemnt - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - franciszek holop (fred at pentacom.sk) - -2003-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * danish/danish.dtx : The default setting of the hyphenmin - parameters was missing; noticed by Arne Glenstrup - (panic at com.dtu.dk). - - * catalan/catalan.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - (antispam at wanadoo.es) - - * bahasa/bahasa.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - (Jörg Knappen) (joerg.knappen at uni-mainz.de) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Changed the definition - of \active@prefix to take \@unexpandable@rotect into account in - order to make sure that the showkeys package shows the correct - label (PR3547 by Cyril Carrez (cyril.carrez at enst.fr) - - * english/english.dtx : The default setting of the hyphenmin - parameters was missing. - -2003-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a - seperate error message for the case where the hyphenation patterns - where loade, but the option wasn't specified. (PR 3329 by - was at VR-Web.de (Walter Schmidt)) - -2003-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): Added the command - \bbl@resotre@actives to markright and and markboth. This is needed - for the situation when the output routine kicks in while - \@safe@actives is in effect. PR3335 from Werner Lemberg - (wl@gnu.org) shows that this can happen while LaTeX is processing - a bibitem. - -2003-11-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * spanish/spanish.dtx: Received a new version from Javier Bezos - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo - -2003-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): removed a line - with \let\bbl@pop@language\relax as it prevents the stack - mechanism from working (PR3583, Daniel Flipo) - (subsection{Language options}): Added the interlingua option, - support provided by Peter Kleiweg (kleiweg at let.rug.nl) and Alberto - Mardegan (mardy at despammed.com) - -2003-10-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : When \l@magyar and \l@hungarian were both - undefined to begin with \l@hungarian staied undefined. Fixed this. - -2003-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * hebrew/hebrwe.dtx: Fixed \hebr and \gim which gave missing - endcsname errors; added two \fi to \@@gim which were missing - -2003-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : Added \def\@safe@activesfalse{} to - \hun@tempadef to fix PR3426, submitted by Bálint Aradi - (aradi at surphy.fat.bme.hu) - -2003-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan/catalan.dtx: The commands \l and \L didn't work when the - package fontenc with encoding T1 was loaded after - babel. Postponing them to \begin{document} helps. - -2003-09-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx: The \if-\else-\fi construction which checks - the existnece of \l@magyar and \l@hungarian was malformed, in - effect making l@hungarian undefined when hte patterns were loaded - under that name - -2003-09-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The fix for PR 3383 - didn't make it into the code corretly. \aliasshorthand was broken - as well, the new shorthand was not "deactivated" by verbatim. - -2003-08-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/athnum.dtx: Received a new version from Apostolos - Syropoulos - * french/french.dtx: Received a new version from Daniel flipo - -2003-06-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Create fd file - with fontfamily substitutes with a lowerase filename - -2003-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx (section{The Bulgarian language}): Added - missing closing brace in definition of \@alph@eng; found by Hilmar - Preusse (hille42 at web.de); reported as PR3533 - -2003-06-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * romanian/romanian.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - Costin Stroie (thubi at med.pub.ro) - -2003-06-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): No longer load - Bernard Gaulle french.ldf when the option `french' was specified; - always load frencb.ldf instead. This change was made after reports - that documents are no longer portable when the option `french' is - used. - -2003-05-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{General}): Now define - \FOREIGNLANGUAGE unconditonally as it might turn up in the - argument of \MakeUpperCase (PR3438) - - * galician/galician.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - Xoán Pedracova (xpedra at com.uvigo.es) - - * portuges/portuges.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - Camilo Yamauchi Campo (ccampo at icmc.sc.usp.br) and Xoán Pedracova - (xpedra at com.uvigo.es) - -2003-04-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * italian/italian.dtx: Received a new version of italian.dtx from - Claudio Beccari, removing functionality that has become available - in the LaTeX Kernel. - - * latin/latin.dtx: Received a new version of latin.dtx from - Claudio Beccari; solving PR 3523. - -2003-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx : When loading polutoniko greek after frenchb - LaTeX crashes because frenchb makes the `!' an active - charcter. Found by christian at justen-mack.de (Christian Justen) - (PR 3505) - -2003-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx : Fixed typo which prevented \@SS to be - defined. Found by "Dimitar Vandev" (vandev at math.bas.bg) - - * danish/danish.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by - Morten H{\o}gholm (moho01ab at student.cbs.dk) in PR 3500 - -2003-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.6b) from Daniel which now - takes guillemets in OT1 from OT4, no longer from OT2/wncyr, thus - providing better cooperation between franch and russian. - -2003-03-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues (part 1)}): the - command \textlatin needs to start with \leavevmode in order to - start a paraghraph before the group instead of inside it. found by - Frank Mittelbach. - * greek/greek.dtx (subsection{Greek numbering}): Similar change - for \textgreek. - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.6a) from Daniel which - offers the possibility of having footnotes typeset as required by - the French `Imprimerie Nationale'. - -2003-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use a stack - mechanism to keep track of nested languages. When more than one - level of nesting occurs TeX's grouping mechanism no longer works - as needed. Problem first mentioned by Daniel Flipo - (Daniel.Flipo at univ-lille1.fr) in july 2002. - -2002-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * icelandic/icelandic.dtx : Added translation for Glossary as - supplied by Erlendur S Þorsteinsson (esth at erlendur.com) - -2002-01-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperanto/esperanto.dtx : Added translation for Glossary as - supplied by Dominique Unruh (dominique at unruh.de) - - * basque/basque.dtx : Received a new version from Juan - Aguirregabiria, change the ur;'s for the patterns file, translated - Glossary, revised definition of "-. - -2001-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish/swedish.dtx : Fixed a changes entry (reported by Frederic - Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr)) - * hebrew/hebrew.dtx : Fixed a changes entry (reported by Frederic - Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr)) - -2001-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx: Corrected checksum. (reported by Frederic - Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr)) - -2001-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * finnish/finnish.dtx : According to Niilo Siljamo - (Niilo.Siljamo at fmi.fi) and Matti Rintala (matti.rintala at tut.fi) - the definition of "= should use \bbl@allowhyphens instead of - \allowhyphens. (PR 3378) - -2001-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The user level - shorthands were broken. Fixed this by using the \lccode - trick. PR 3383 found by Nicolae-Alexandru Nicorovici - (nicolae at physics.usyd.edu.au). - -2001-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish/swedish.dtx, finnish/finnish.dtx : Translations for - `Glossary' were provided by Martin Vermeer mv at liisa.pp.fi - -2001-03-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar/magyar.dtx : Make sure the the `-character has catcode - 12 when the .aux file is being read in the second time. (see also - change to catalan.dtx d.d. 1999-11-29. - Found by Gyori Sandor (gyori at szit.bme.hu) - -2001-03-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx (subsection{Caption names}): Added a missing - comment character. - - * base/babel.dtx: Added a number of missing comment characters - which could produce spurious whitespace in documents. - Found by Daniel Flipo (flipo at univ-lille1.fr). - -2001-02-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * cyrillic/{russianb,ukraineb}.dtx : commented out the code that - was copied from amsmath as it genereated a textfont 7 error. This - was reported in PR3226 and PR3245 - -2001-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician/galician.dtx : Added translation for Proof, provided by - "Emilio Perez Gonzalez" (eperez at cesatel.net). - -2001-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan/catalan.dtx : Added setting of hyphenation parameters to - two as required by the Catalan hyphenation patterns cahyph.tex. - -2001-02-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * portuges/portuges.dtx : According to the Portuguese hyphenation - pattern file the \righthyphenmin value should be set to 3 instead - of 2. - Reported by "Walter Schmidt" (was at VR-Web.de) (PR3303) - - * greek/grmath.dtx: New version of this file from Apostolo with - two new options, grlog and enlog. - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.5d) from Daniel which makes - french the internal name instead of frenchb. - -2001-02-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx : Added the translation for "glossary" as - provided by Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua) in PR3306 - -2001-02-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added options - canadien and acadian. - (subsection{Multiple languages}): The CJK package adds an extra - level of grouping to the document through a redefinition of the - \documentclass macro. - Found by Daniel FLIPO (flipo at univ-lille1.fr). - (subsubsection{\pkg{fancyhdr}}): In order to prevent unexpected - results in documents that use fancyhdr combined with the book - class we need to define \FOREIGNLANGUAGE. - Found by Piet van Oostrum (piet at cs.uu.nl) (PR3238) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.5) from Daniel Flipo; - Added support for canadien and acadian on request from "Garst - R. Reese" (reese at isn.net) and the LyX developpers. - -2001-02-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the - canadian option on request from "Garst R. Reese" (reese at isn.net) - and the LyX developpers. - - * english/english.dtx : Added support for loading with the option - canadian. - -2001-02-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * german/ngermanb.dtx : Made the option ngermanb act as if ngerman - was specified. - - * greek/greek.dtx : Regression testing revealed that ^^9f can't be - fed to \initiate@active@char as such. It seemed to work, but made - the caret active and brok in combination with a language that - already had made the caret active. To circumvent this greek now - uses the decimal number notation (159) instead of ^^9f where - possible and makes the tilde act as ^^9f for the purpose of - declaring it active. - -2001-01-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * german/(n)germanb.dtx : Added \frenchspacing to extrasgerman as - it is in german.sty. Reported in PR3090 by Heiko Oberdiek - (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de). - -2001-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/bbcompat.dtx: Added options for USenglish and UKenglish and - made sure that the right files are created from bbcompat for plain - TeX users. British.sty (and the others) were missing. Found by - Bernard Treves Brown (mcnbjtb at fs4.in.umist.ac.uk). - -2001-01-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk/norsk.dtx : Changed \ccname and \alsoname according to a - message from Dag Langmyhr (dag at ifi.uio.no) and Karl Ove - Hufthammer (huftis at bigfoot.com) - -2000-12-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * italian/italian.dtx : Added the translation for Glossary as - provided by Claudio Beccari (Beccari at polito.it). - -2000-10-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk/norsk.dtx: Replaced Glossary with its translation from - Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: Daniel Flipo added - \ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers - -2000-10-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.fdd : Added more font sizes to make the CB fonts - compatible with the EC fonts as suggested by Ken Smith - (kgs at maths.uq.edu.au) - -2000-10-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx: The final sigma in all names should appear as - `s' instead of `c' - -2000-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * samin/samin.dtx: Replaced the word `Glossary' with its - translation supplied by Regnor Jernsletten - (Regnor.Jernsletten at sami.uit.no) - -2000-10-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): When the acute has been - made active for one language, an it gets switched to 'non-active' - for a second language we get a "double superscript" error. using - \textormath prevents this. - Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at wanadoo.es) (PR3266) - - * base/bbplain.dtx: Added \textquotedblleft and \textquoteleft - after PR 3263, found by Enn Saar, (saar at aai.ee) - -2000-10-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): The - optional argument of \cite is used for typesetting. Therefor the - shorthands need only to be turned off in the second - argument. Redefinition of \@citex changed accordingly, also taking - care of natbib and cite.sty versions of it. - Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at wanadoo.es) (PR3262) - -2000-09-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the - samin option; support was provided by Regnor Jernsletten - (Regnor.Jernsletten at sami.uit.no) - -2000-09-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use - the \cs{aftergroup} mechanism to keep the language grouping - correct in auxiliary files ; this involves an extra level of - expansion with \bbl@set@language. - PR3091, found by Igor A. Kotelnikov (kotelnikov at nsu.ru) - -2000-09-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * all relevant language files: Now use \providehyphenmins in order - to provide default values instead of overruling any settings from - the hyphenation patterns file. - -2000-09-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the - bulgarian option; support was provided by Georgi Boshnakov - (mcbssgb2 at fs2.umist.ac.uk) - -2000-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * all language files: Added \glossaryname with the default - translation of "Glossary" after a suggestion from Thomas Henlich - (henlich at mmers1.mw.tu-dresden.de) - - * polish/polish.dtx: according to "Adalbert Jahnz" - (ad_jahnz at hotmail.com) the definitions of \refname and \bibname - were swapped. Corrected. - - * finnish/finnish.dtx: The definition of \- still used - \allowhyphens instead of bbl@allowhyphens; found by Matti Hollberg - (hollberg at arska.fys.utu.fi) and Rintala Matti (bitti at cs.tut.fi) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of - languages}): The macro \save@fs@q starts a paragraph inside a - group when called in vertical mode.It shouldn't do that. Donald - Arseneau (ASND at erich.triumf.ca) proposed a different - implementation in PR3219 - -2000-06-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}}): When babel changes - the definition of \ifthenelse in order to give \pageref it's - original definition it needs to revert \pageref to its babel - version inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments; not after the - \ifthenelse instruction. - PR 3224, found by Heiko Oberdiek (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de) - -2000-02-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk/norsk.dtx: The shorthands are the same for both spelling - variants; no need to use \CurrentOption in \declare@shorthand. The - way it was done didn't work anyway, - Found by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) - -2000-02-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the - command \providehyphenmins to be used in the .ldf files. It will - check whether the hyphenmin parameters were set by the hypheantion - pattern file. - -2000-02-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx : After \selectlanguage{polutonikogreek} the - fonts were not reset when returning to an english environment - PR3168, found by Maarten Wisse, (mwisse at theo.uu.nl) - -2000-01-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk/norsk.dtx : In the definition of "- we should use - \bbl@allowhyphens instead of \allowhyphens. - Found by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) - -2000-01-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * english/english.dtx : When the option USenglish was used the - format of the date was *not* american. Also, in some cases the - control sequence \l@<\Currentoption> was not properly - defined. Found by Walter Schmidt (walter.schmidt at arcormail.de) - -2000-01-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish/swedish.dtx: Additions from Erik Östhols - (erik_osthols at yahoo.com): - - The unnecessary version of "=, which I really only included at - the time because it was there in germanb.dtx, from whence I stole - most (all?) of my ideas then, has been modified to something that - is actually useful for typesetting Swedish, and which was (again) - stolen from the finnish.dtx file. - - The likewise unnecessary "~, again stolen from germanb without - my having a clear idea of why it would be useful, has been - deleted. - - The new and *very* useful version of \- as found in - e. g. finnish.dtx has been included. - - The definitions of "a, "A, "o etc. have been changed to allow - subsequent hyphenation, as in current versions of germanb. - - As typesetting the date as "20 januari 2000" is, if not - uncommon, then at least much less common than some other varieties - of formatting of dates in Sweden, two commands have been added to - provide for the much more common "20/1 2000" and "2000-01-20". - -2000-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish/polish.dtx : The definition of \datepolish contained an - unwanted space which appeared in the output., Found by Ilya Beylin - (ilya at cs.chalmers.se). - -1999-12-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Introduced an extra - level of expansion in the definition of an active caret - - * esperant/esperant.dtx : Moved the check for math mode in the - definition of the ^ to babel.def in case some other language needs - to have ^ as a shorthand character as well. - -1999-12-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan/catalan.dtx : Make sure that the shorthand characters - are turned off outside of catalan. Found by Javier Bezos - (jbezos at arrakis.es) - This also holds for other language definitions: basque.dtx, - breton.dtx, danish.dtx, finnish.dtx, galician.dtx, german.dtx, - icelandic.dtx, ngerman.dtx, norsk.dtx, polish.dtx, portuges.dtx, - serbian.dtx, slovene.dtx, swedish.dtx, usorbian.dtx. - -1999-12-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Need to redefine - \prim@s as well as \pr@m@s as plain TeX uses \next and LaTeX uses - \@let@token. Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at arrakis.es) - -1999-11-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan/catalan.dtx : Make sure the the `-character has catcode - 12 when the .aux file is being read in the second time. If it is - active when \catcode``\active is read errors result. Found by - Javier Bezos (jbezos at arrakis.es) - -1999-11-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * basque/basque.dtx: fixed a few doc errors as suggested by - Jean-François Mertens (jfm at core.ucl.ac.be) - - * norsk/norsk.dtx : Added the french double quotes, changed the - definition of "f based on the german definition; enhanced - documentation; all by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) - -1999-09-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperant/esperant.dtx : Added a chack for math mode to the - definition of the active ^. - -1999-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx : The greek language support now makes use of - the language attribute feature. But in order not to break older - documents some extra code is needed to make the option - polutonikogreek work. - -1999-09-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/bbplain.dtx (section{Support for formats based on - \textsc{plain}\TeX}): Added the command \@ifundefined which is - used in the definition of active charcters since Babel 3.6Z - -1999-09-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The change from 08/27 - was rubbish; now use \let instead of \edef - -1999-08-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * cyrillic/{russianb,ukraineb}.dtx : Made not using the inputenc - package a warning rather than an Error message after user - requests. - -1999-08-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The proposed fix for - PR3050 doesn't work; use \strip@prefix\meaning. - -1999-08-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb/frenchb.dtx (subsection{Date and clean up}): No longer - use \edef to define \today; the accent commands are not expandable - and generate error messaages. (PR 3083, found by Thomas Esser - (te at informatik.uni-hannover.de)) - -1999-06-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): When the shorthand - character is already active make sure it gets expanded once - instead of fully when \normal@char<char> is defined. This can be - acheived by using \expandafter\noexpand (PR 3050, found by Joachim - Becker (jbecker1 at gwdg.de)) - -1999-04-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Only realy initiate a - shorthand once (suggested by Javier Bezos) - - * italian/italian.dtx : Claudio Beccari introduced the " as a - shorthand to insert the compound word mark (when the encoding is - T1) and added support for ISO 31/XI regulations - -1999-04-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.fdd (section{The encoding definition file}): Removed - the refinition of \& from the encoding file as it doesn't belong - there. - - * greek/greek.dtx : Now switch the definition of \& via - \extrasgreek (removed from the font encoding file); the greek - fonts do not contain an &-sign. - -1999-04-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): In some - situations \lefthyphenmin remained equal to -1. This setting is - now inside the group in which patterns are read. Also added the - explicit setting of the hyphenmin paramters for language=0 as this - didn't happen when the first pattern file changes \lefthyphenmin. - For synonym languages the hyphenmin parameters were not set, this - is now accomplished by storing the \languagename in \process@line - Suggested by Vladimir Volovich (vvv at vvv.vsu.ru) - -1999-04-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): It was - reported by Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au) - (PR 3023) and "Igor A. Kotelnikov" (kotelnikov at nsu.ru) that babel - brok the cite package This could be solved by *not* redefining - \bibcite when the cite package is loaded. - During testing it became clear that running the document the first - time produced an error; solved by adding an \AtBeginDocument - action. (babel 3.6v) - -1999-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * base/bbcompat.dtx: Added code to issue a sensible error when the - .sty files are loaded from LaTeXe; but made sure the document can - be processed without complaints about \ProvidesLanguage not defined. - (PR3020, Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au)) - Made sure the .sty and .ldf files can be used from plain TeX - without hyphen.cfg preloaded. - - * base/babel.dtx (section{The Kernel of Babel}): When plain.def is - loaded from switch.def we need to define \adddialect first in - order to access the second part. (babel 3.6u) - -1999-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Removed the braces again - (PR3022) as the cure poses more problems than it solves. Will - need to find a different solution for the active ^ in esperanto. - -1999-04-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * turkish/turkish.dtx : Incorporated corrections received quite - some time ago from "H. Turgut Uyar" (uyar at cs.itu.edu.tr) - -1999-04-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx, babel.dtx : Moved redefinition of \@roman and \@Roman - back the the greek language support because of the problems it - causes with the AMS document classes. This problem needs to be - solved in a different way; \@roman needs to be used in expansion - only places. - Reported by Jean-Francois Mertens (jfm at core.ucl.ac.be)(PR 3017) - -1999-04-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): The - redefinition of \bibcite didn't work for the natbib package; a - redefinition that works for natbib doesn't work without it. - Now bibcite defines itself during the processing of the .aux file - which is done *before* the \AtBeginDocument commands are executed. - Found by Niilo Siljamo (siljamo at sateenkaari.meteo.helsinki.fi) - (PR 3011) (babel 3.6s) - -1999-04-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Re-instated the - loading of babel.def right at the begining of babel.sty as it is - needed to define \ProvidesLanguage. The need for postponing it has - gone, because \bbl@redefine is no longer used as a warning - mechanism against missing options (changed in 3.6p dd 9/4/99) - Found by Werner Struckmann (struck at ips.cs.tu-bs.de) (PR 3006) and - "Walter Schmidt" (wschmi at ibm.net) (PR 3014) babel 3.6r - -1999-04-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues (part 1)}): The parsing of - \@filelist to determine the latinencoding turend out to fail when a - file with (default) extension .tex has been loaded. Now use - \@ifl@aded, assuming all encoding .def files have a ProvidesFile - entry. Found by "Igor A. Kotelnikov" (kotelnikov at nsu.ru), - suggesion by Vladimir Volovich (vvv at vvv.vsu.ru) babel 3.6q - -1999-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish.dtx : Replaced the word `Proof' with its translation - supplied by Andrzej Komisarski (andkom at kki.net.pl) - -1999-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the options - ngerman and naustrian to support the new german orthography, as - supplied by "Walter Schmidt" (wschmi at ibm.net) - -1999-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): The solution for PR2990 wasn't - perfect; the arguments to the \mark... commands need to be stored - in a token register prior to using \edef. - (subsection{Language options}): Now check for the existence of - \bbl@main@language instead of redefining \bbl@redefine to detect - missing options. - -1999-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bahasa.dtx : February should be Pebruari according to - Mohammad DAMT (mdamt at cakraweb.com) - - * babel.dtx : Changed the argument handlling of \process@line in - order to prevent a trailing space from becoming part of a control - sequence when defining a synonym - (from a line such as `=english %') - Found by Thomas Esser (te at informatik.uni-hannover.de), (PR 2851) - -1999-04-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): Removed th use of \head@lang in - passing the current language into the marks. This didn't work for - amsart.cls. Found a new solution wich works for the stansdard - document classes as well as for amsart. - Reported by Vittorio Coti Zelati (zelati at cds.unina.it) (PR 2990) - -1999-04-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Needed to move the - \AtBeginDocument test for the loading of fontenc right up front of - babel.sty; also added a test for `manual' selection of T1 without - loading fontenc (via \renewcommand\encodingdefault{T1}) as - suggested by Claudio Beccari (Beccari at polito.it) - -1999-04-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx : Had to implement a diferent way to check for fontenc - with T1 encoding; now pare \@filelst (PR 3002) - -1999-04-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Need to set - default values for lefthyphenmin and righthyphenmin globally now - that the patterns are read in a group. - - * catalan.dtx, danish.dtx, dutch.dtx, estonian.dtx, finnish.dtx, - galician.dtx, polish.dtx, portuges.dtx, spanish.dtx, germanb.dtx, - swedish.dtx usorbian.dtx : changed the definition of "- as - \allowhyphens is a no-op with T1 now. That is alright for accented - letters but *not* for "- in these files. - Found by Niilo Siljamo (siljamo at sateenkaari.meteo.helsinki.fi) - (PR 2993, 2995) - -1999-04-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek/greek.dtx : Made \greeknumeral accept a counter as its - argument. found by Andreas Schwab - (schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de) (PR 3000) - - * greek/greek.fdd : Got a new version from Apostolos; repaired a - few typo's found by Andreas Schwab - (schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de) (PR 2997) - - * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx (section{The Ukrainian language}): - Replaced \CYRUKRI with \CYRII in \authorname, typo, found by - Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Don't load babel.def from - babel.sty, but rather define \LdfInit temporarily in order to load - babel.def at the right time, preventing problems with the - temporary definition of \bbl at redefine; found by - Walter Schmidt (wschmi at ibm.net), PR 2987 and - Andreas Schwab (schwab at issan.cs.uni-dortmund.de), PR 2998 - -1999-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * croatian.dtx : Changed an occurence of \od into \or; found by - Damir Medak (medak at geoinfo.tuwien.ac.at) (PR 2918) - - * bahasa.dtx : February is Pebruary in bahasa Indonesia according - to Mohammad DAMT (mdamt at cakraweb.com) - -1999-03-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx : added the ukrainian option, provided by Vladimir - Volovich (TeX at vvv.vsu.ru) and Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua) - -1999-02-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * slovak.dtx : repaired a few spelling mistakes found by - Peter Kral (Peter.Kral at swh.sk) - -1998-07-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Language attributes}): Added support for - language attributes. - - * bbplain.dtx : Added defintion of \in@, needed for language - attributes. - -1998-06-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added a definition of - \bbl@redefine before the call to \ProcessOptions. The idea is to - generate a sensible error message when the user forgets to - specifiy a language option. - -1998-06-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk.dtx : Added the suggestions from Rune Kleveland - (runekl at math.uio.no) for the " shorthand. - -1998-06-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * germanb.dtx : Updated the coding for "f from german.dtx version - 2.5d after a discussion about this subject with Heiko Obrerdiek - (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de) - -1998-06-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed definition - of \iflanguage using \bbl@afterelse, \@fristoftwo and - \@secondoftwo in order to evaluate the selected argument *after* - the \fi's have been seen by TeX. (PR 2800) - (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de) Heiko Oberdiek) - -1998-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * install.txt: Changed installation instructions, *not* - advising them to rename hyphen.tex, but to use bplain.tex as a - replacement for plain.tex. - - * bbplain.dtx: Added the source for the format replacement wrapper - files bplain.tex and blplain.tex. This is the result of a - discussion with a number of people about the permissabillity of - renaming hyphen.tex. Don Knuth doesn't allow it. - - * germanb.dtx, polish.dtx, usorbian.dtx: changed the definition of - \mdqon and \mdqoff to use the new commands \shorthandon and - \shorthandoff. - - * babel.dtx (section{The user interface}: Added two commands, - \shorthandon and \shorthandoff as a more general solution to - PR2627. - -1998-03-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * all language definition files: use \def to define \today, in - order to prevent expansions at the wrong time. - -1998-03-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Changed the - redefenition of \bibcite to include \@safe@activesfalse in the - definition of the reference. - -1998-03-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Removed - \@safeactivesfalse from #3 of \@newl@bel and \@testdef - -1998-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Now also execute - \originalTeX from \foreignlanguage in order to reset a possibly - changed output encoding. - -1998-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Added the redefinition - of \TeX and \LaTeX to make them encoding independant. - -1998-03-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Use the T1 encoding when - it is a known encoding, otherwise use OT1 as latin encoding. - -1997-12-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Call - \@safe@activestrue instead of \set@display@protect which casued - errors. - -1997-11-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Removed the check for \write - being primitive. Problem solved in seminar. - -1997-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : Received a new version from Apostolous; replaced the - \greeknumeral coding with an expandable solution - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option - polutonikogreek for typesetting greek text with all accents. - -1997-11-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx : Removed the braces around #1 of \bbl@tempa in the - redefinition of \ProvidesFile in hyphen.cfg (PR 2659) - clase at mathematik.uni-freiburg.de ( Matthias Clasen ) - -1997-10-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb.dtx: Received a new frenchb.dtx from Daniel Flippo - -1997-10-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx : Added "/ for words written together, indicating a - choice as in uitdrukking/opmerking - -1997-10-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * all language definition files: use \edef to define \today; this - save memory, see classses.dtx for the motivation. - -1997-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * turkish.dtx : Added and modified a number of translation as - provided by "H. Turgut Uyar" (uyar at cs.itu.edu.tr) - -1997-09-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb.dtx: Received a new frenchb.dtx from Daniel Flippo. - -1997-09-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added a check for \write - still being primitive. If not it might have been redefined as - \immediate\write and in such a case \protected@write needs to set - \protect to \noexpand instead of making it \@unexpandable@protect - in order to prevent a \protet kreeping in the .aux file. This - problem cropped op with the use of seminar.cls and was found by - Daniel FLIPO (flipo at univ-lille1.fr) - -1997-09-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' and changed - translation of contents from `Spis rzeczy' as suggested by - Tomasz Michniewski (tomekm at ias.wat.waw.pl) - - * bbplain.dtx : repaired a type (\expoandafter) and added missing - \endcsname (PR 2553, found by Nicolai Langfeldt (janl at math.uio.no)) - - * croatian.dtx : Replaced a number of translations with better - ones, provided by Kresimir Fresl (fresl at grad.hr) - -1997-04-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : Selecting the greek language produced unwanted - whitespace because of lines such as \babel@save`\". - Found a few typos in the process. - -1997-04-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): The - definitions of \grq and \grqq should be dependent on the - fontencoding. Taken the code from german.sty (and adapted it to - babel). Found by: Stefan Illy (illy at itpgyro1.fzk.de) and - Bjoern Lorenz (lorenz at rz.charite.hu-berlin.de) - -1997-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : made \greek@alph a synonym for \greeknumeral instead - of having it's own definition. - -1997-04-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx: Make multiple loading of babel.def impossible by - adding a check for the existence of \bbl@afterfi. This was - triggered by PR 2447 where french.sty loaded babel.def for a - second time. - -1997-04-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx (and others): remove empty groups after quote - characters in the shorthand definitions (such as \quotedblbase) in - order to keep possible kerning. - (PR 2454, found by S\o ren Sandmann (sandmann at daimi.aau.dk)) - -1997-04-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx : The definition of "~ was faulty, (forgot to replace - `german' with `dutch'. - Found by Maarten Gelderman (mgelderman at econ.vu.nl) - -1997-03-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): The option - KeepShorthandsActive no longer defines a control sequence. This - didn't always work because of the order in which options are - processed. The presence of the option is now tested in babel.def - with \@ifpackagewith. (PR 2452) - -1997-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): Added the macro - \ProvidesLanguage to identify language definition files instead of - using \ProvidesFile. This is done to prevent problems with the - dummy definition of \ProvidesFile for plain based formats. Some - other packages are confused by it. Now make sure that - \ProvidesFile remains undefined in plain based packages. (PR 2444) - -1997-03-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the possibilty to - add option declarations in a file called bblopts.cfg. - - * kannada.dtx: Extended the user documentation with a description - of the various font changing commands. - - * russianb.dtx : Removed the commands \textlatin, \latintext and - \latinencoding as they are now defined by babel.def. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Encoding issues}): Added the commands - \textlatin, \latintext and \latinencoding to better support - languages that need a different fontencoding. These commands used - to be in russianb.dtx and greek.dtx. - (subsection{marks}): Added redefinition of \markright and - \markboth in order to be able to pass the language attribute to - the headlines. - - * greek.dtx : Removed the commands \textlatin, \latintext and - \latinencoding as they are now defined by babel.def. - Removed the redefinition of \@roman and \@Roman which is also - moved to babel.def - -1997-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added a default option - that loads the file \CurrentOption.ldf if it exists. If not an - error is signalled. - -1997-03-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : Added the \greeknumeral and \Greeknumeral macros to - support (old) greek conventions for number notation. - -1997-03-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : Also change some uppercase codes to get ridd of - accents and breathings in uppercase. (from kdgreek.sty) - -1997-03-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Make shorthands active - during the processing of the .aux file; this is at least needed to - get citations correct. (PR2428) - (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added a redefinition of - \@newl@bel, which replaces the redefinitions of \@lbibitem and - \newlabel. This needed to make the handling of citations correct. - Changed the definition of \@testdef to match \@newl@bel - - -1997-02-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added the - setting of the @safe@actives switch in \@testdef; shorthands might - occure in the first or second argument. - -1997-02-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Now reset the - safe@actives switch *inside* the second and third arguments of - \ifthenelse in order to be able to use shorthands there. - Suggested by Olaf Kummer (kummer at informatik.uni-hamburg.de) in - PR 2421. - -1997-02-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian.dtx : One \changes entry was mistakenly pointing to - dutch. - - * magyar.dtx : One \changes entry was mistakenly pointing to - dutch. - - * dutch.dtx : Changed a \changes entry, replace "\~ with "\~{} to - prevent error messages. - (found by Ingo Saitz (ingo at baer.schneiderberg6.de), PR 2426) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Now always start the user - group of shorthands with the name `user' because of the provided - definition for the case with an empty argument. - -1997-02-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): commented out \peek@token - and \test@token because shorthands are made expandable again. - (subsection{Shorthands}): Changed \@decl@short in such a way that - the control sequence that is constructed is different for a - shorthand with no argument and for a shorthand with an empty - argument. - -1997-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Made \bbl@afterelse and - \bbl@afterfi \long in order to be able to handle \par - as the argument of a shorthand. This is needed in order to make - shorthands fully expandable again. - -1997-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.dtx : Added command \greek@tilde to stand for the tilde - character; change definition of \~ to produce the tilde character - when in greek typesetting. This is necessary to produce the - desired ligature effect. - Found by Rizos Sakellariou (rizos at cs.man.ac.uk) and by - David Kastrup (dak at neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de) as PR 2422. - -1997-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * spanish.dtx : Metion in the user documentation that the - '-character is only active when the option `activeacute' is - specified. - Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es) - - * catalan.dtx : Added \l.l and \L.L to the table listing the - special definitions for catalan. - Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es) - -1997-02-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * english.dtx : fixed small documentation bug - Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es) - -1997-02-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx : Added sanskrit to the driver files - - * bbcompat.dtx: Added sanskrit - - * babel.ins: Added the processing of sanskrit.dtx - -1997-02-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * croatian.dtx : sijev{c}nja should be seij\v{c}nja and there - should be a period after the year. - Found by Ivo Batistic (ivo at ifs.hr) - -1997-01-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * sanskrit.dtx : Update Jan Takashima's original file to babel - release 3.6 - -1997-01-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a couple of - \expandafters to the end of hyphen.cfg as \toks8 is now cleared by - LaTeX (release 1996/12/01), now copy contents of \toks into - \everyjob instead of reference. - (found by Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au) PR 2382 - Ulrik Vieth (vieth at thphy.uni-duesseldorf.de) PR 2385 and - Vincent Jalby (jalby at unilim.fr)) - - * babel.ins: Added missing \usepreamble\mainpreamble line; changed - 1996 in 1997. - - * finnish.dtx: Forgot to remove the code that is now part of - \LdfInit; hence babel.def was loaded twice which led to TeX fatal - errors. - (found by Niilo Siljamo (Niilo.Siljamo at Helsinki.FI) PR 2386) - -1997-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : Got the order of cs's wrong in the definition of - \@tempcntb (found by Ricardo S. C\'armenes - (carmenes at biosun.quimica.uniovi.es) PR 2376) - -1997-01-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx: Somehow a lonely '+' had found its way into babel.dtx - on a line of its own. Removed - (found by Maarten Gelderman (mgelderman at ECON.VU.NL)) - -1997-01-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Optionally disable the - restoration of the category code of shorthand characters for those - who want to have them available in the preamble of the document. - (suggested by Tomas Bautista (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es)) - - * dutch.dtx : Added the "~ shorthand (copied from germanb.dtx) as - suggested on TEX-NL at nic.surfnet.nl - - * bbplain.dtx : missing \@undefined added to definition of - \@begindocumenthook; \newcount is an \outer macro, so it can't be - used directly inside an \if test. - (found by Daniel Flippo) - - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added - \bbl@redefine@long to be able to redefine \ifthenelse as a - \long-command (PR2372) - Changed redefinition of \ifthenelse to make it a \long-command - (PR2372) - -1997-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb.dtx : allow \l@french and \l@francais to be the `name' - of the hyphenation patterns; make \l@frenchb an alias for that. - Use frenchb.cfg as the name of the .cfg file, regardless of the - option that was used. - (subsection{Formatting numbers}): New macros \nombre \decimalsep - and \thousandsep added to format numbers - (subsection{Extra utilities}): Removed \AllTeX, \fup, \french and - \english - - * babel.ins: Added .fd files to instructions at the end - (found by Piet van Oostrum (piet at cs.ruu.nl) PR 2367) - - * greek.fdd (section{The encoding definition file}): Added - (re)definitins of the \TeX and \LaTeX commands to make them - encoding independant; added LGR versions of \copyright, - \texttrademark, \textregistered and \ss - - * cyrillic.fdd (section{The encoding definition files}): Added - (re)definitins of the \TeX and \LaTeX commands to make them - encoding independant; added LCY/LWN versions of \copyright, - \texttrademark, \textregistered and \ss - (found by J"org Knappen (tex at dzdmza.zdv.uni-mainz.de), PR 2357) - -1997-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * spanish.dtx,galician.dtx : Added \leavevmode to the definitinos - of "a and "o because TeX generated an error when they were used in - vertical mode. - (found by Eric Gamess (eric at borabora.univalle.edu.co), PR 2363) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the options - frenchb, UKenglish and USenglish (all aliases) - (found by Daniel Flippo and Vincent Jalby (jalby at unilim.fr)) - -1997-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx : Removed unwanted space tokens by adding a - %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition - of \extrasgalician. They turned up in the output. (just like for - spanish.dtx) - - * catalan.dtx : Removed unwanted space tokens by adding a - %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition - of \extrascatalan. They turned up in the output. (just like for - spanish.dtx) - -1997-01-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * greek.fdd (section{The font definition files}): In some font - substitutions kdgr hadn't been replaced with cmr. - (found by J"org Knappen, PR2358) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Introduced - \foreign@language for the shared code between the otherlanguage* - environment and the \foreignlanguage command. - Switch off language shorthands before activating the extras (to - prevent that the shorthands from one language are still available - in the other. - Add \relax after the setting of the hyphenmin parameters to - prevent the disappearance of a token (when it happens to be a - digit, such as \number\day). - (found by Daniel Hempel (daniel at math.uni-hamburg.de) PR2362) - - * spanish.dtx : Removed two unwanted space tokens by adding a - %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition - of \extrasspanish. They turned up in the output. - (found by Daniel Hempel (daniel at math.uni-hamburg.de) PR2362) - - * bbplain.dtx (section{Support for formats based on - \textsc{plain}\TeX}): add definition of \@begindocumenthook to the - LaTeX2.09 format; otherwise it won't function without one of the - languages loaded. - (found by Olaf Weber (Olaf.Weber at cwi.nl)) - -1997-01-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx (section{The Dutch language}): Use Bew"ys instead of - Bewijs (PR 2360, J"org Knappen) - - * esperant.dtx (section{The Esperanto language}): Fixed typo in - table caption (funtion -) function) (PR 2360, Knappen) - - * tb1202.tex, tb1401.tex: fixed a few typos found by Ulrik Vieth, - (vieth at thphy.uni-duesseldorf.de) (PR 2356) - -1997-01-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): When \LdfInit is - undefined we need to load babel.def from babel.sty. - When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not loaded in the format \cs{l@english} - might not be defined; assume english is language 0 before calling - \main@language{english}. - (found by J"org Knappen (tex at mzdmza.zdv.uni-mainz.de) PR2354) - -1997-01-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : The redefinition of \dump tried to detect - LaTeX2.09; it did that with \document; that cs is also defined by - AMSTeX, hence an error occured building a Babel-AMSTeX format. - Now use \@ztryfc to detect LaTeX2.09 (Hope that is obscure - enough). (Found by Thomas Esser) - -1996-12-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for extending macros}): Added a - check for an expansion of \relax to the definition of \addto; - \addto\x{...} yields \x -> {\x ...} when \x expands to \relax. - This results in a stack overflow when \x is called. - -1996-12-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * italian.dtx, russian.dtx : Added braces around second argument - of \LdfInit - (found by (tim at maths.tcd.ie) (Timothy Murphy), PR 2384) - - -------------------------------------------------------- -1996-12-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - Release 3.6 - -1996-12-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option - `welsh'. - -1996-11-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): \selectlanguage now - checks for the existence of \date<lang> instead of \l@<lang>. The - latter might be defined, without the language definition file - being loaded. - -1996-10-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Renamed \init@ldf - and \finish@ldf to \LdfInit, \ldf@finish and introduce - \quit@ldf. The second argument of \ldf@init can now be either a - control sequence or a string to be passed to \csname. - (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added (conditional) - redefinition of \@@vpageref (varioref internal macro) to prevent - problems with active characters (PR 2292) - -1996-10-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the commands - \init@ldf and \finish@ldf to ease the maintenance of the - .ldf-files. - -1996-10-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): \main@language now - also sets \languagename and \l@<languagename> for use by other - packages in the preamble of a document - (suggested by Jan Vroonhof (vroonhof at math.ethz.ch)) - -1996-10-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : Make this file be processed twice, once during - format generation, but only a small portion of the file is loaded - into the format, the second time the file is processed is when it - is loaded from babel.def. This way some code that is not needed in - the format gets removed and the plain format with babel is no - longer incompatible with german.sty. - -1996-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx: Merged in the definitions for `afrikaans' as supplied - by Stoffel Lombard (lombc at b31pc87.up.ac.za) - - * bbcompat.dtx: Added support for `afrikaans' - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added option `afrikaans' - -1996-09-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * slovene.dtx : removed shorthand for \texttt{"L} as it is not - needed for slovenian according to Primoz Peterlin - (peterlin at biofiz.mf.uni-lj.si). - -1996-09-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan.dtx : Added a check for mathmode to the definitino of - \lgem and \Lgem, as the use of these in mathmode makes no sense - according to Goncal Badenes. Not having the check led to an error - message (PR 2261) - -1996-08-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish.dtx : The macros \sob, \spb and \skb need to call - \leavevmode; when they are encountered in vertical mode TeX issues - an error about \lower not being allowed in vertical mode. (found - by Wlodzimierz Macewicz (macewicz at ia.pw.edu.pl)) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): In order to - prevent problems while reading .fd files in the middle of a - document we need to add the " and ' characters to \nfss@catcodes - untill LaTeX does that herself. (found by Tomas Bautista - (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es)) - -1996-08-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : Added default (semi-NFSS2) definition of \ss and - \i because german.sty in combination with a babel format creates - an endless lopp on those glyphs. (Found by Bernd Raichle) - - * danish.dtx : According to Peter Busk Laursen the shorthand "' - needs to typeset the german closing double quote (``). He also - suggested to add the definitions for "~ and "= - -1996-08-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Top level expansion of - \normal@char<char> where the shorthand character is already active - should be the expansion of the active character, not the active - character itself as this causes an endless loop (found by Tomas - Bautista (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es)) - -1996-08-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Redefinition - of \ifthenelse added to circumvent problems with \pageref in the - argument of \isodd (PR's 947, 2053, 2150, 2225) - -1996-08-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bahasa.dtx: Added the setting of the hyphenmin parameters - (PR2232) - -1996-07-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbcompat.dtx: Added .sty files and definition of \CurrentOption - for language definition files that are loaded by more than one - option - -1996-07-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * frenchb.dtx: moved support for multiple options using the same - .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf file. - Rearranged .dtx file to remove long lines of documentation and - code. - -1996-07-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Moved all code necessary - to support multiple options to load the same language definition - file into those language definition files. (PR2213) - - * portuges.dtx, norsk.dtx, magyar.dtx: moved support for multiple - options using the same .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf - files. - -1996-07-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : Added the definition of \scriptsize, - \textquoteright and \textquotedblright (PR 2216) - - * language definition files : Consistently use \@undefined instead - of \undefined and \@empty instead of \empty (PR 2213) - - * english.dtx, german.dtx : moved support for multiple options - using the same .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf files. - -1996-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx : Consistently use \@undefined instead of \undefined - and remove the use of \patterns@loaded (PR 2213) - Added definition of \@empty; use it instead of \empty - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Removed the use of - the control sequence \bbl@eq@ (PR 2213) - (section{Identification}): Save a few csnames by using \bbl@tempa - instead of \@ProvidesFile store the \everyjob message immediately - in \toks8 (PR 2213) - Consistently use \@undefined instead of \undefined (PR 2213) - Use \@empty instead of \empty to be consistent with \LaTeX - (PR 2133) - - * bahasa.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by - knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de (J"org Knappen) (PR 2214) - - ** released Babel 3.6-beta ** - -1996-07-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dst: Added the generation of the font description files to - the main installation file. (PR 2208) - - * babel.dtx : added greek to the driver files, input russianb.dtx - instead of russian.dtx, define \Babel in driver file (PR 2209) - Removed an extra closing brace in changes entry for \dj (PR 2208) - - * esperant.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by - knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de (J"org Knappen) (PR 2207) - -1996-05-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * germanb.dtx : added \allowhyphens in the definitions of "a, "o, - "u, "A, "O, "U, because the underlying macro \lower@umlaut can not - cntain a \allowhyphens. The reason is that for *dutch* we need to - use discretionaries for these same characters in order to make the - trema disappear at a word break. A \allowhyphens inside one of the - arguments of \discretiionary leads to a TeX error. - -1996-05-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added an environment - otherlanguage* wich does not switch the captions and date strings, - only hyphenation and extras. - -1996-04-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * magyar.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by - Alexin Zoltan (alexin at sol.cc.u-szeged.hu) and changed some of the - translations as suggested by Peter Rajczy (rajczy at caesar.elte.hu). - -1996-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): - \bbl@redefinerobust made non-robust macros; fixed adding \space in - the final line of code. - -1996-04-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Umlauts and trema's}): Added a - \allowhyphens in the definition of \lower@umlaut - -1996-04-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * norsk.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by - Orjan Johansen (oerjan at matstat.unit.no) - -1996-03-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Letters}): Replaced the definitions of - \dj@ and \DJ@ with the ones found in PR 2058 (contributed by - Sime Ungar (ungar at math.hr) and David Carlisle) - -1996-03-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added a system level - shorthand for the ` to prevent an endless loop when the user - enters `{}blah in his document. - - * catalan.dtx : Added `` as a shorthand for the double left quote; - getting a single quote and an accented letter from the input ``a - is not quit what would be expected. - -1996-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * czech.dtx (section{The Czech language}): Fixed tow errors found - by Petr Sojka (sojka at daeron.fi.muni.cz) (PR #2082) and added - translation for `Proof' - -1996-01-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Store and restore the lccode - of the ~-character so it remains unchanged by - \initiate@active@char - -1996-01-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}): - Moved \german@dq@disc, \usorbian@dq@disc and \swedish@dq@disc to - babel.def, changing the name to \bbl@disc - -1996-01-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Revert the - previous change; \@setref gets expanded too late which results in - TeX errors because the active character isn't redefined when TeX - tries to use it in constructing a csname. - -1996-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Redefine - \@setref instead of \ref and \pageref for LaTeX2e. This (partly) - solves PR0947 which complains about pageref being used in the - argument of \ifthenelse. This now works as long as the label - doesn't contain active characters. - -1996-01-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * croatian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' and changed - the definition of \datecroatian according to the suggestion by - Sime Ungar (ungar at math.hr) in bug report 2060. - -1996-01-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Use - \strip@prefix only on bbl@tempa (in \@testdef) when \bbl@tempa <> - \relax! - -1996-01-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx: Added the code that implements \newcommand (or - enough of it to make \ProvideTextCommandDefault and friends - work). - -1996-01-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Now use frenchb.dtx from - Daniel Flipo as the source for french support in Babel. - -1996-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Deal with charcters that are - already active: define the top level expansion inside the \if - branch of the category code test; define all lower level expansion - macros needed for the shorthand stuff after of the \else branch - (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Complete rewrite of - \@testdef using meaning to prevent endless complaints from LaTeX - about possibly changed labels. - -1995-12-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Reset the category code of a - shorthand char at the end of the package and re-activate it at - begin document. - -1995-11-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * tb1202.tex, tb1401.tex: Made it possible to run it through LaTeX - without having ltugboat.cls available; also updated address - information. - - * portuges.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' for both - Portuguese and Brazilian - -1995-11-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx: Add execution of the begin document hook to - \@preamblecmds for LaTeX2.09 - -1995-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx: Added \@onlypreamble and handling of this - -1995-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed the - definition of \selectlanguage and \selectlanguage_; the former no - longer processes its argument, that task is now performed by - \selectlanguage_ - -1995-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added the - commands \bbl@redefine and \bbl@redefinerobust and used them to - redefine \newlabel, \@testdef, \ref, \pageref, \label, \@citex, - \nocite, \bibcite, \@bibitem, \@lbibitem - -1995-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * francais.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to - improve hyphenation - -1995-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx : Added '' as shorthand to produce the expected - effect. - -1995-11-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to - improve hyphenation - (As suggested by Claudio Beccari (BECCARI at polito.it)) - - * italian.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to - improve hyphenation - (As suggested by Claudio Beccari (BECCARI at polito.it)) - - * romanian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' - -1995-11-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bbplain.dtx: Added the code that `snatched' \dump as it is still - needed for LaTeX 2.09 - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Removed the code - that `snatched' \dump as it is no longer needed for LaTeX. - -1995-11-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): No longer use - \bblref_ as a cs; instead use \ref_ and check if it isn't defined - already. (PR 1851) - -1995-11-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * slovene.dtx : New translation of Index; replaced slovanian with - slovenian. - - * swedish.dtx : Added translation of Proof (PR 1904) - -1995-09-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * germanb.dtx : Use \glqq, \grqq, \flqq and \frqq in the - definitions of "` "' "< and "> - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): Use - \textormath in the definitions; added some kerning for german - right quotation marks. - - * catalan.dtx: Added '| to disable the accent when an apostrophe - is wanted. - -1995-08-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * germanb.dtx : Added \allowhyphens to the accent producing - shorthands. Not having it prevented hyphenation for accented words - in OT1 encoding. Having it means that TeX possibly misses a - possible breakpoint. Putting \allowhyphens into the definition of - \lower@umlaut (which would make it not appear at all in T1 - encoding) is a no-no because it leads to improper discretionary - errors for dutch (were trema's have to disappear when the word is - hyphenated next to the trema). (PRs 1118, 1147, 1714, 1846) - -1995-08-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a missing - %-character in the definition of \selectlanguage (PR1841) - - * francais.dtx : Added a missing %-character in the definition of - \captionsfrancais (PR1841) - -1995-08-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * spanish.dtx, catalan.dtx, galician.dtx: Combining - \initiate@active@char and \bbl@activate in one \@ifpackagewith - statement leads to an error message about an \inaccessible control - sequence from \select@language. For now split these statements. - -1995-08-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): - Corrected the spelling of \quil... to \guil... - -1995-07-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * francais.dtx : Removed the \space from the definition of the - shorthands. It is not necessary. - -1995-07-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperant.dtx: Added a few ^-shorthands - - * estonian.dtx : Removed the code to change category and oher - codes. - - * italian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' - - * estonian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'; fixed bug - where the second argument of \DeclareShorthand was missing. - -1995-07-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * slovene.dtx,finnish.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' - - * irish.dtx : load irish.cfg instead of danish.cfg - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use \empty instead - of \@empty in the test for the hyphenation exception file; \@empty - is undefined in plain. - - * bbplain.dtx: Added definition of \loadlocalcfg for plain (found - by Enn Saar) - -1995-07-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' - -1995-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * spanish.dtx, galician.dtx: made the use of the active acute - accent optional. - -1995-07-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * catalan.dtx: Removed support for ~n; add `` and '' as - shorthands. - -1995-07-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * francais.dtx, breton.dtx: Postpone the declaration of the - TextCompositeCommands untill \AtBeginDocument - -1995-07-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the options - activegrave and activeacute. - - * catalan.dtx: Made the activation of the grave and acute accents - optional - - * esperant.dtx, dutch.dtx, english.dtx, germanb.dtx, breton.dtx, - irish.dtx, scottish.dtx, italian.dtx, portuges.dtx, swedish.dtx, - magyar.dtx, croatian.dtx, czech.dtx, estonian.dtx, polish.dtx, - romanian.dtx, slovak.dtx, slovene.dtx, turkish.dtx, lsorbian.dtx, - usorbian.dtx, bahas.dtx: Added \proofname to captions and added - loading local configuration file. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Use a - different control sequence for making \ref and \pageref robust to - prevent a clash with the showkeys package. - -1995-07-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx: Changed behaviour of 'a etc. to expand to - "^{\prime} a" in mathmode. - - * spanish.dtx: Changed behaviour of 'a etc. to expand to - "^{\prime} a" in mathmode; added \proofname to captions; added - loading local configuration file. - - * catalan.dtx: Added Goncal's changes; changed behaviour of 'a - etc. to expand to "^{\prime} a" in mathmode; added \proofname to - captions; added \llgem and \Lgem; added loading local - configuration file. - -1995-07-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx: Added comments from Manual Carriba, added - \proofname to captions; added seting of \frenchspacing and added - loading local configuration file. - - * francais.dtx: Also allow the hyphenation patterns to be loaded - for `french', added \proofname to captions; and added loading - local configuration file. - - * finnish.dtx: Now also has active double quote; added by Niilo - Siljamo (siljamo at cc.helsinki.fi), added \proofname to captions; - and added loading local configuration file. - - * danish.dtx : Added \proofname to captions; added seting of - \frenchspacing and added loading local configuration file. - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Load language definition - files *after* manipulating with the identifaction of the - hyphenation patterns; load french.ldf (from Bernard Gaulle's - french package) if it exists. - -1995-06-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added missing brace - in definition of \@activated for plain TeX, found by - te at informatik.uni-hannover.de - -1995-06-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian.dtx: corrected typos - -1995-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx : Changed the order of typesetting the documentation - for the various languages (PR1652) - - * scottish, irish.dtx, esperant.dtx, spanish.dtx, babel.dtx, - glyphs.dtx: corrected typos (PR1652) - - * language.dat: finally corrected typo langauge (PR1656) - - * babel.dst: corrected typos (ldfle -> style, PR1654) - - * install.txt: corrected typo (PR1653) - -1995-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * danish.dtx: Added active double quote character as suggested by - Peter Busk Laursen. - -1995-06-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * estonian.dtx: New language definition file, provided by Enn - Saar, updated for Babel release 3.5 - - * scottish.dtx: New language definition file - -1995-06-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish.dtx: Update for babel release 3.5 - - * slovene.dtx : Introduced the active " for this language; used - for accessing hacek characters and other common usage. - - * portuges.dtx: Added brasilian captions, the usage of - "-shorthands and macros for ordinals. - - * dutch.dtx : added "" shorthand - -1995-06-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * francais.dtx : Added system level shorthands for the active - characters to prevent them from gobbling up a following space - -1995-06-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish.dtx: Use \finnishhyphenmins to store the correct values - of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin as suggested in PR1606. - -1995-05-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - -1995-05-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * swedish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - - * usorbian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - - * italian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - -1995-05-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option - brazilian as an alternative for brazil; added the copying of - \<lang>hyphenmins when alternatives are provided. - - * romanian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - -1995-05-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * turkish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - - * finnish.dtx: Added setting of \frenchspacing for finnish text - -1995-05-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * finnish.dtx: Use \finnishhyphenmins to store the correct values - of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin as suggested in PR1606; - also set a number of hyphenation parameters, as suggested in - PR1027. - - * germanb.dtx: Use \germanhyphenmins to store the correct values - of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin. - - * dutch.dtx: Use \dutchhyphenmins to store the correct values of - \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed - \selectlanguage to first store the name of the current language in - a control sequence and then passing the contents of the control - sequence to \selectlanguage_ instead of passing the entire - construct which strips the optional escape character. - Seperated the setting of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin, using - the new macro \set@hyphenmins. The values shoud be stored in - \<language>hyphenmins. - No longer store the values of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin - which were set in the pattern file through code in - \extras<language>, but store them in \<language>hyphenmins. - -1995-05-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * finnish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - * bahasa.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - -1995-05-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * tb1401.tex: Changed name from babel-new.tex and updated the - coding to make it processable with LaTeX2e - - * tb1202.tex: Changed name from tb-article.tex and updated the - coding to make it processable with LaTeX2e - -1995-04-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the - possibility to add a the name of a file with hyphenation - exceptions to the configuration file language.dat. Now also - support `synonyms' for languages. Both on request from Bernard - Gaulle. - -1995-03-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Changed the extension of - the languages definition files to .ldf to clearly distinguish them - for the files in the previous release. - - * magyar.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - * galician.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active - character handling mechanism. - * catalan.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active - character handling mechanism. - * spanish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active - character handling mechanism. - * portuges.dtx: Updated for release 3.5 - * lsorbian.dtx: new file in release 3.5 - * languages.skeleton: Updated for release 3.5 - -1995-03-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active characters}): Added a - check for the ' in \initiate@active@char - Replaced 16 system level shorthands to deal with hexadecimal - numbers by one. - Added a system shorthand for the '; when it is active its usage in - mathmode needs special care. - -1995-03-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Made \ref and - \pageref robust to prevent the problem reported in PR 1353. - -1995-03-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed the name of - \p@selectlanguage to \csname selectlanguage \endcsname; - Rewrote the entire handling of active chars. - -1995-02-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added \main@language - to be able to postpone the execution of \selectlanguage. It now - also happens only once, not for every language loaded. - -1995-02-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsubsection{Support for active `hat'}): this - section added. - -1995-02-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * germanb.dtx: Removed a lot of code that is now present in - babel.def (things like \flqq, the double quote mechanism, etc.); - Use \Declaredq now. - Brought up to date with german.sty version 2.5b - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the command - \@activated to be used for logging when characters are made - active. Introduced the \if@safe@actives switch which should be - checked on the highest level expansion of an active - character. This first expansion is defined by \UseActive. - (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Removed the meaning trick - and introduced the use of the \if@safe@actives switch. Not all - cross referencing macros need to be aware of this switch. - - * dutch.dtx: Moved the definition of the opening quote character - and \ij and \IJ to glyphs.dtx - - * glyphs.dtx (section{Making glyphs available}): New file to - collect all definitions of missing glyphs for all languages. The - code will be part of babel.def - -1995-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active characters}): Added - \Activate and \Deactivate instead of \Activatedq and \Deactivatedq - as this form is more generic. - -1995-02-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * english.dtx: Moved identification code to the top. - -1995-02-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperant.dtx: Moved identification code to the top. - -1995-02-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx: Updated this language definition file to make use of - the new support macros. Also implemented support for both OT1 and - T1 encoding. Changed the kerning in the faked ij-characters to - match the dc-versions more closely. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active double quote}): Added - this section with generic macros to support making the double - quote character active. A language definition file now only needs - call \Activatedq and use \Declaredq{}{}{} to define its actions. - -1995-02-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * english.dtx (section{The English language}): Only define - american as a dialect when no patterns have been loaded for it. - (PR #735) - -1995-01-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * polish.dtx (section{The Polish language}): The definition of "C - incorrectly used \'c instead of \'C. (PR #1401) - - * turkish.dtx (section{The Turkish language}): removed an extra - closing brace and added a missing \def (PR #1397) - \mont should be \month (PR #1398) - -1995-01-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): lthyphen.cfg has changed - its name; now called hyphen.cfg. - (section{The Package File}): Added a warning about using T1 - fontencoding giving unexpected results. - -1994-11-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx (section{The Catalan language}): Added a few - missing translations and corrected marzal to marzo in the date. - - * catalan.dtx (section{The Catalan language}): Added a few - missing translations. - - * portuges.dtx (section{The Portuguese language}): Added a few - missing translations. - -1994-08-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Moved the last - %</def> inside the macrocode environment. Noted by Frank Poppe - (poppe at swov.nl) - -1994-08-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dst: fixed typo (lhyphen -> lthyphen) - -1994-07-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * finnish.dtx: Added a `.' after the day in the output of \today - for finnish - -1994-07-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): The line with \ProvidesFile - was missing from both babel.drv and user.drv. - Added code to \process@language to detect whether the patterns - file also contains assignments to \left- and \righthyphenmin. When - it doesn't supply a default setting of 2 and 3; store the setting - in \extras<language>. Added \@nopatterns, to be used in the - language specific files. - Also use \PackageError and \PackageWarning when they are - available. - - * language.dat : Commented out dutch, used the default name for - the american english hyphenation patterns, hyphen.tex. Added a - (commented out) line showing ukhyphen.tex. - -1994-06-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * language.skeleton: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * slovak.dtx: Removed the references to babel.com - - * finnish.dtx: Removed the references to babel.com - -1994-06-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * bahasa.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * turkish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * slovene.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * romanian.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * polish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * czech.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * magyar.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * finnish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * swedish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * norsk.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * danish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * galician.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - Renamed \acute and \tilde to \texacute and \texttilde because of a - clash with \mathaccent's - - * catalan.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - Renamed \acute and \tilde to \texacute and \texttilde because of a - clash with \mathaccent's - - * spanish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * portuges.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * italian.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * francais.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * germanb.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * english.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * dutch.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - -1994-06-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperant.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the - identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns - to produce the warning - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added \@nopatterns, - to be used in the language specific files. Also use \PackageError - and \PackageWarning when they are available. - -1994-06-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): redid this bit and made - sure the files are processable with plain TeX. Supply a dummy - definition of \ProvidesFile. - (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added code to - \process@language to detect whether the patterns file also - contains assignments to left- and righthyphenmin. When it doesn't - supply a default setting of 2 and 3; store the setting in - \extras<language>. - - -1994-06-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * esperant.dtx: Removed a superfluous | from the code that - activates the ^ - -1994-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * Makefile: added install.txt - -1994-06-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * babel.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entries (`babel~' was - missing. - - * italian.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`italian-' was - missing. - - * danish.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`danish-' was - missing. - - * swedish.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`swedish-' was - missing). - - * babel.dst: Added a few missing } - - * install.txt: Added a remark about producing the full source - listing. - - * babel.dst: Added the production if bbidx.ist and bbglo.ist - - * Makefile: Added bbidxglo - - * slovene.dtx (section{The Slovanian language}): Removed < and > - from a \changes entry to prevent a problem when generating the - glossary file. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Identification}): Wrong docstrip guard - nesting resulted in a superfluous line in lthyphen.cfg - Updated Checksum - -1994-06-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * language.skeleton: Updated for LaTeX2e; included the small - driver. - - * czech.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * croatian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * slovene.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - (section{The Slovanian language}): Added extra tranlations from - Josef Leydold, (leydold at statrix2.wu-wien.ac.at - - * romanian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * turkish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - (section{The Turkish language}): Added braces behind the use of \i - to prevent a lot of undefined macros. - - * norsk.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * swedish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * babel.ins: lhyphen.cfg has now to be called lthyphen.cfg. - - * babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}): - An end of line ended up in the middle of a || expression. - - * slovak.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - Added setting of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin. - - * finnish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * magyar.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * polish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - Changed the table describing the conventions to really describe - what is iomplemented. - Tried to initialize polish letters by calling \texptl; this should - have been \textpl. - - * danish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - (section{The Danish language}): Peter Busk Larsen proposed a few - changes to the translations. - -1994-05-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * galician.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * catalan.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * spanish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * portuges.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * italian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. Added some of the - suggestions from Claudio Beccari. The others wil have to wait. - - * francais.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * germanb.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - -1994-05-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org) - - * dutch.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * esperant.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * bahasa.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file. - Added missing \begin{macrocode}. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - - * babel.dtx (driver): use the ltxdoc class - Added a small driver to the top of the file as an addition to the - large drivers. - Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9e0397caa9d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ - Fixes since last major release (3.8a) - - 23 November 2005 - -November 23, 2005 Added support for Albanian (submitted by Adi Zaimi) - and Bahasa Malaysia (submitted by Bob Margolis). The - original option bahasa was for Bahasa Indonesia; - that support can now also be loaded with the options - bahasai, indon and indonesian. The new version is - loaded with the options malay, meyalu or bahasam. - -November 17, 2005 New version of latin.dtx and italian.dtx by Clausio - Beccari - -May 21, 2005 Fixed PR's3750 and 3756 and a compatibility problem - with the package fancyhdr - -March 31, 2005 Welsh Translation for Glossary - -March 24, 2005 May enhancements to the documentation - -June 12, 2004 Added the options australian, newzealand - -May 26, 2004 Make sure that an empty mark stays empty - -May 2, 2004 Made the definitions of \glq, \grqq, \flq, \frq, - \flqq, \frqq font encoding dependant - -April 19, 2004 Internal changes to the shorthand mechanism diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cccbf09ad32..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 95ab1227ad6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c862ea489be..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 86d7350913c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt deleted file mode 100644 index deb4194359b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ - Babel Distribution Guide - - 17 March 2008 - - -This file gives you some information as to where to get the latest -version of Babel and other related software. - -The main distribution of Babel is done through the Comprehensive TeX -Archive Network (CTAN). The main CTAN hosts are: - ftp://ftp.dante.de/ - ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/ -In order to reduce network load, it is recommended that you use the -CTAN host or mirror which is located in the closest proximity to your -site. See /tex-archive/CTAN.sites for a list of CTAN mirrors. - -You can find the latest version of Babel in: - /tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/ - -Hyphenation pattern files are not normally part of the Babel distribution. -You can find hyphenation pattern files on CTAN, in the directory: - /tex-archive/language/hyphenation/ - -OTHER RELATED PACKAGES -For the french language Benard Gaulle distributes his french package. -It provides extensive support for typesetting french documents. - -For the german language Bernd Raichle maintains `German-Style'. It is -located in: - /tex-archive/language/german/ - -In one of the directories below /tex-archive/language you can -sometimes find support for languages not (yet) supported by Babel. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4 deleted file mode 100644 index 615c989009a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -Babel installation guide for the Mac with OzTeX. -These instructions apply for OzTeX versions 4.0+ -Filedate: september 26, 2000 - -(Originally provided by Andrew Trevorrow <akt@netspace.net.au>) - - -This document explains how to install Babel from the files provided in -the OzTeX distribution. See install.txt if you need more information. -(Ignore the old install.OzTeX-pre4 file!) - -Copy the following folders from the OzTeX Distribution to corresponding -locations in your local texmf folder: - - :texmf:source:generic:babel: (*.ins, *.dtx, etc) - :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen: (hyphenation files) - -If you prefer to use a different folder structure then you'll need to -make suitable changes to the search paths in "Add Babel" (included below). - -Copy the "Add Babel" config file to your config folder (eg. myconfigs), -make any necessary changes, then add this line at the start of your -Local config file: - - load_config = ":myconfigs:Add Babel" - -"Add Babel" increases some TeX parameters, so you'll also need to -increase OzTeX's preferred memory size to at least 4500K. - -Start up OzTeX, tick the LaTeX format in the TeX menu, then TeX the -babel.ins file in the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder. -Answer "y" to any request to overwrite an existing file. -Lots of files will be generated (*.ldf, *.sty, *.def, *.cfg, *.fd). -There is no need to move these files into another folder; it makes -life simpler if the files are kept in :texmf:source:generic:babel: -(that's where "Add Babel" assumes they'll be kept). - -Edit the language.dat file in :texmf:source:generic:babel: and -create an entry for each language that you want to hyphenate. -See the example entries and use the names of hyphenation files -provided in the :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen: folder. - -Now you need to generate a new LaTeX format file. This needs to -be done in the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder so that INITEX -will use the hyphen.cfg file created in the above step. -Select "TeX..." and make sure the open dialog shows files in -the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder, then hit Cancel. -Select INITEX and type "LaTeX.ltx" in response to the ** prompt. - -You can save LaTeX.fmt in the default location for format files -(:TeX:Formats:) but it is better if you put it in a new folder -called something like :texmf:formats: and then set - - format_folder = :texmf:formats: - -in the OzTeX-only section of your Local config file. (You'll -also need to move the other format files into this folder.) -That way you will avoid clobbering your own formats when you -install a new version OzTeX. - -You are now ready to use Babel (see user.dvi). - -------------------------------------------- -Save the text below as the file 'Add Babel -------------------------------------------- -% This config file installs the Babel macros for use with OzTeX 4.0 and later. -% Copy this file to your own config folder (eg. myconfigs), make any necessary -% changes, then add this line at the start of your Local file: -% -% load_config = ":myconfigs:Add Babel" - -current_app = OzTeX OzTtH -input_folders = $c :texmf:source:generic:babel: | - :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen: - -current_app = OzTeX -% Babel needs some larger TeX parameters. You'll also need to increase -% OzTeX's preferred memory size to at least 4500K. -trie_size = 65000 -trie_op_size = 5000 -% If you need to increase other TeX parameters then do it here. - -% Best to restore all apps when finished. -current_app = OzTeX OzMF OzMP OzTtH - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4 deleted file mode 100644 index f0d7e4de8cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ - -Babel installation guide for the Mac with OzTeX. -These instructions apply for OzTeX versions 2.1 as well as 3.0. -Filedate: April 30, 1999 - -(Originally provided by Jan Geenen, <geenenjw@cobweb.nl> for OzTeX 1.9; - updated for 2.1 by Giuseppe P. Cavarretta, <gc@gea.geo.uniroma1.it>) - - 1. To create a workable babel package, first create a folder named Babel - and put it in the TeX-inputs folder; in this new folder you must - download from a CTAN site the following files: - a. babel.dtx - b. babel.ins - c. language.dat - d. <language>.dtx; For every <language> you want to use in your - documents, ie. dutch.dtx, english.dtx, etc. - e. hyphenation files; You need these for every language for which - you want to produce the right hyphenation. - ie. nehyph2.tex. - f. bbidxglo.dtx - g. documentation files. 00readme, install.txt, tb-article.tex, etc, - see manifest.txt - - If you are in doubt, you have much hard-disk space and low-cost - connection to the internet, get the entire babel directory (a good - practice anyway). Remember that the hyphenation files, i.e. ithyph.tex - or nehyph.tex, are not included in the babel package; you have to - get them from ctan/tex-archive/language/<your_language>. - - 2. Read the documentation: - a. install.txt - b. 00readme - c. OzTeX User Guide version 2.1 - - 3. Check your files if they obey the Mac-conventions for end of line. - If not, then edit them and save as same with the option LF Macintosh. - If you got them by dowloading directly from CTAN into the Mac they - should be OK. - - 4. Open the file language.dat and for every language that you will - hyphenate make an entrance, for example: - - % Any comment you like - dutch nehyph2.tex %nederlands - latin lahyph.tex %latin - english hyphen.tex %english - - 5. Put the file nehyph.tex (and/or whateverhyph.tex) in the folder Plain. - - 6. TeX the file babel.ins. A lot of files will be generated ! - Eventually, delete those related to languages that you think you - will never use (never say never !). The following files should be - produced by this: - a. babel.sty - b. babel.def - c. switch.def - d. hyphen.cfg - e. plain.def - f. For all the languages for which you downloaded a .dtx-file the - run will produce a .ldf-file and a .sty-file. - If you didn't download them all, the installation process will - stop, telling you it can't find a .dtx-file; after the prompt - type: r and hit the Return-key. The install program will resume - ie. dutch.dtx gives dutch.ldf and dutch.sty - g. the bbind.ist and bbglo.ist files are for printing the - documentation. - - 7. The install-run ends with these remarks: - a. To finish the installation you have to move all the files with - names ending in .ldf, .sty, .def or.fd into a directory - searched by TeX. - Action: If you hadn't done it before, create a new folder, call it - Babel and put in the files ending with the mentioned suffixes. - Drag and drop the Babel-folder into the TeX-inputs-folder. - b. For making a format the following files have to be in a - directory which is searched by Initex: hypen.cfg, language.dat - and files with the hyphenation patterns. - Action: Create a new folder, call it InitexBabel and put in it the - recommended files. Drag and drop the InitexBabel folder into - the TeX-inputs folder. - The language.sty files which you do not need throw them in the - thrashcan. - - 8. The goal is to generate a new latex-format file. To gain some - experience in generating such a format file use only one - hyphenation by disableing the others by putting in front of every - line a %-sign in the file language.dat. Relax, if you follow the - instructions listed here it should work immediately. You may get - an out of memory error during format building when you trie to - load many languages: if this happens, try to increase the - trie_size in the file Configs:Default. After that, run INITeX - anew. - - 9. Disable the file hyphen.ltx by adding a %-sign in front of the filename. - :TeX-inputs:LaTeX:hyphen.ltx. - (LaTeX will search for another. cfg file) - - 8. Choose in the TeX menu LaTeX - - 9. Choose in the TeX-menu INITEX and after the two ** type - latex.ltx and push the <return> button. You will readily notice if - the hyphenation files you selected have been used. - You will now be asked into which folder you want to save the new - format file you created: choose the folder TeX-formats. - Rename the new format file from latex.fmt to LaTeX.fmt; - this will overwrite the pre-existing LaTeX.fmt. - If you wish to keep the original LaTeX.fmt file, - choose a different name or rename the pre-existing LaTeX.fmt to - whatever_name.fmt you like. Remember that if you want to use format - files having new names, you must add such new names into the file - Configs:Default as follows: - - format_files = LaTeX AMSTeX Plain Your_new_format - -10. Start using babel. - a. Put the command \usepackage[your language]{babel} in the - preamble of your production file product.tex - b. TeX product.tex - -Good luck! - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ee83d65b9d8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,157 +0,0 @@ - Babel Installation Guide - - 20 February 2004 - - - When you install the babel system you have first to decide - whether you want to make a new format file. If you don't, you - miss some of the functionality of the babel system, but you - can then skip steps 2 through 6 . If you do want to build a - new format, start with step 1. - - When you want to produce the full listing of all the source - files in the babel system run babel.drv through LaTeX, then - use MakeIndex to produce babel.ind using the command: - makeindex -s bbind.ist babel - and use MakeIndex to produce babel.gls using the command: - makeindex -s bbglo.ist -o babel.gls babel.glo - Then run LaTeX on babel.drv again. - - 1 Make sure that you have the Docstrip (version 2) program - available (it is part of the LaTeX2e distribution); then - run the file babel.ins through TeX. - This strips all the .dtx files of the comments and produces - fast loadable versions of the files. - The installation files that are part of the babel - distribution all contain \usedir{tex/generic/babel} - commands. The effect of this is that TeX will attempt to - write the files it produces into your TDS compliant - directory tree. If you have a different tree you should - either change these commands or comment them out. Using the - file docstrip.cfg you can instruct docstrip about the `root' - of the TDS tree. On my Win95 TeX-Live installation I have: -\BaseDirectory{D:/TeX-Local/texmf} -%\BaseDirectory{D:/TeX-Live/texmf} -\UseTDS - whereas on my Linux installation I use: -\BaseDirectory{/usr/local/TeX} -%\BaseDirectory{/usr/TeX/texmf} -\UseTDS - If all of these are correct and TeX still complains about - not being able to store the files it is possible that the - file texmf.cnf prohibits writing into the system trees. - Look for the line with openout_any; if it's value is 'p' - (paranoid) change it to 'r' (restricted). - If all of the above doesn't work for you (or you commented - out the \usedir lines) you will have to move the resulting - .ldf, .sty, .def, .cfg and .fd files yourself into a - directory where TeX can find them. - Do that now. - On some operating systems you might get an error message - such as: - -! I can't write on file `./catalan.sty'. -<to be read again> - \edef -l.455 } - -Please type another output file name: - - In such a case you have run into a maximum number of open - files limit in your computer. You can get around this by - telling docstrip to open less files at a time (from bug - report Babel/2592, answer by David Carlisle): - - As long as you have a reasonably new copy of docstrip, - you can make a docstrip.cfg file at your site to tell - docstrip that you have operating system limits on the - number of open files. - Make a file docstrip.cfg with the two lines: - -\maxfiles{8} -\maxoutfiles{8} - - and docstrip will keep below 8 the number of files it has - open. (You may need to experiment to see how large your - system lets you make these numbers, the default is 16) - See docstrip.dtx - % \subsection{Setting maximum numbers of streams} - for more details. - - Docstrip also produces two files called babel.drv and - user.drv. You can use babel.drv to produce the full - documented source listing of the babel system. (Which is - also provided as babel.dvi) You can use user.drv to produce - a short document that describes the features of each - language specific file. - - 2 Make sure you have the hyphenation patterns available for - the languages that you intend to use. If you don't have - them, you may be able to find them in CTAN, in the directory: - /tex-archive/language/hyphenation. - If you happen to have a set of patterns that is not - available there you could make it available by either - putting it in the /incoming directory or sending it to me. - - 3 The docstripping process will have produced a file called - hyphen.cfg. This file will be loaded when you build a - LaTeX format. To build a plain format with the babel system - preloaded you can use the file bplain.tex as a wrapper for - plain.tex. When you run it through iniTeX plain.tex will be - loaded, as well as hyphen.cfg. When you type \dump at the - end you will get bplain.fmt which you can use as your - plain TeX format. Renaming hyphen.tex to something else is - not permitted by Don Knuth. - - 4 Check the hyphenation patterns that you have available and - want to load into the format. For each language that you - want to hyphenate correctly you need a hyphenation pattern. - List them all in the file `language.dat'. The file that is - in the distribution serves as an example of what you have to - put in there. - The files containing hyphenation patterns should be found - somewhere on TeX's `input path'. What that means depends on - the implementation of TeX you use: - - With emTeX there is an environment variable TEXINPUT in - which you can list the directories to search through, - adding a ! to a directory will make emTeX do a recursive - search through the directory tree. - - With Unix TeX the `system directories' do not need to be - specified in the environment variable TEXINPUTS; there - adding a double / to a directory name means recursive - searching of the directory tree. - - 5 Run iniTeX, telling it to load your favorite macro package - (ie plain or latex). - When you build a LaTeX format iniTeX will find the file - hyphen.cfg (provided that you have stored it in the - correct place). - When you build a plain TeX format using the supplied file - bplain.tex iniTeX will also find hyphen.cfg. - - *Beware*: some implementations of TeX only look in the - current directory when the \openin primitive is used. If - your TeX does that you need to put the file `languages.dat' - in the same directory where you build your format. - - 6 When the iniTeX run in step 5 stops with a message about - not enough memory (trie_size = ...) and "you can ask a - wizard to enlarge me" You have tried to load more - hyphenation patterns into TeX's memory then it has room for. - In that case you can either remove one or more languages - from the file language.dat or be your own wizard and enlarge - TeX. I can not tell you how to do that for all - implementations of TeX as it differs with each - implementation. Your distribution should contain a - description of what to. - - With emTeX you can influence the size of some of the - memory arrays with command line switches (/mt:65000 for - the trie_size). - - With Unix TeX you have to change a file called tex.ch and - rebuild TeX using the supplied Makefile. The change you - need to make is to enlarge the trie_size and - trie_op_size. - - With Web2C TeX (version 7 and newer) you can change the - value of the trie_size in the file web2c/texmf.cnf. - ---- Copyright 2004 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat deleted file mode 100644 index 75141062f8c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -% File : language.dat -% Purpose : specify which hypenation patterns to load -% while running iniTeX -=USenglish -american ushyphen.tex -=english -UKenglish ukhyphen.tex -=british -french frhyphen.tex -dutch nehyph2.tex -german dehypht.tex -ngerman dehyphn.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton deleted file mode 100644 index fab9bffd259..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{0} -%%% docstring = " This file can act as a template for -%%% people who want to provide extra -%%% languages to be included in the babel -%%% distribution. -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{<language>.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{<language>} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{<language>.dtx} - [2008/03/17 v1.6 <Language> support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for -% the <Language> language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{<language>.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{<language>.dtx} -% -% \changes{v1.1}{1994/02/27}{Rearranged the file a little} -% \changes{v1.2}{1994/06/04}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{v1.3}{1995/05/13}{Update for \babel\ release 3.5} -% \changes{v1.4}{1996/10/30}{Update for \babel\ release 3.6} -% \changes{v1.5}{1997/03/18}{Update for \babel\ release 3.7} -% \changes{v1.6}{2004/02/20}{Update for \babel\ release 3.8} -% -% \section{The <Language> language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% <Language> languagee. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{<language>}{captions<language>} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{<language>} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@<language>| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\l@<language> - \@nopatterns{<Language>} - \adddialect\l@<language>0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% For the <Dialect> version of these definitions we just add a -% ``dialect''. Also, the macros |\captions<dialect>| and -% |\extras<dialect>| are |\let| to their \texttt{<language>} -% counterparts when these parts are defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\adddialect\l@<dialect>\l@<language> -% \end{macrocode} -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the <Language> language. -% -% Now we declare the |<attrib>| language attribute. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{<language>}{<attrib>}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% This code adds the expansion of |\extras<attrib><language>| to -% |\extras<language>|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extras<language> - \expandafter{\extras<attrib><language>}% - \let\captions<language>\captions<attrib><language> - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\<language>hyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{<language>}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captions<language>} -% The macro |\captions<language>| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captions<language>{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captions<dialect>} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\captions<dialect>\captions<language> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\date<language>} -% The macro |\date<language>| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce <Language> dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\date<language>{% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\date<dialect>} -% The macro |\date<dialect>| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce <Dialect> dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\date<dialect>{% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extras<language>} -% \begin{macro}{\noextras<language>} -% The macro |\extras<language>| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the <Language> language. The macro -% |\noextras<language>| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extras<language>|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other -% language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extras<language>{} -\addto\noextras<language>{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extras<dialect>} -% \begin{macro}{\noextras<dialect>} -% Also for the ``<dialect>'' variant no extra definitions are -% needed at the moment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\extras<dialect>\extras<language> -\let\noextras<dialect>\noextras<language> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{<language>} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl deleted file mode 100644 index b786a435846..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ - Babel Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions - - 29 March 2005 - - -COPYRIGHT -========= - -This distribution is -Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 2003 2004 2005 -Johannes L. Braams and the individual authors listed in the -language definition files. - - -License -======= - -Babel is free software that can be redistributed and/or modified -under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified -in the file lppl.txt. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -The use of Babel is unrestricted. - -This Work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution -is given in the file `manifest.bbl'. - -Files generated by means of unpacking the distribution (using, for -example, the docstrip program) may be distributed at the distributor's -discretion. However if they are distributed then a copy of the base -system must be distributed together with them. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl deleted file mode 100644 index 9a8eb0003d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ -% -% CONTENTS OF THE Babel DISTRIBUTION (3.8m, 2009/09/19) -% ==================================================== -% -% Documentation: -% -------------- -% -% 00readme.txt -- The distribution guide. -% announce.txt -- A short announcement of the release -% 00readme.heb -- Information about the hebrew support -% fixes.txt -- A list of fixes since the last release (2004/02/20) -% howtoget.txt -- How and where to get Babel and related software -% install.txt -- How to install Babel. -% install.OzTeX-4 -- How to install Babel on a Mac with OzTeX 4.0+. -% install.OzTeX-pre4-- How to install Babel on a Mac with older OzTeX. -% GreekFonts.txt -- How to get the fonts on which the current -% support for Greek typesetting is absed. -% manifest.bbl -- This file. -% bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for babel. -% todo.txt -- A list of things that need to be done for a -% future release of the babel system. -% changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order. -% tb1202.tex -- The source of the original article that appeared -% in TUGboat, Volume 12 (1991), No. 2 -% tb1401.tex -- The source of an update article that appeared in -% TUGboat, Volume 14 (1993), No. 1 -% tb1604.tex -- The source of an update article that never -% appeared in TUGboat, but was presented at -% EuroTeX 1995, Arnhem. -% -% Kernel files: -% ------------- -% -% babel.dtx -- The source for the common parts of Babel -% base.ins -- Unpacks the kernel files of Babel -% babel.ins -- Unpacks all the source files -% bbcompat.dtx -- The source for compatibility mode files -% bbplain.dtx -- The source for plain compatibility -% bbidxglo.dtx -- The source for MakeIndex files needed to -% typeset the documentation -% -% Language specific files: -% ------------------------ -% albanian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Albanian language -% bahasa.dtx -- Support for the Bahasa Indonesia language -% bahasam.dtx -- Support for the Bahasa Malaysia language -% bahasa.ins -- Installation script for the Bahasa languages -% basque.dtx/ins -- Support for the Basque language -% breton.dtx/ins -- Support for the Breton language -% bulgarian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Bulgarian language -% catalan.dtx/ins -- Support for the Catalan language -% croatian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Croatian language -% czech.dtx/ins -- Support for the Czech language -% danish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Danish language -% dutch.dtx/ins -- Support for the Dutch language -% english.dtx/ins -- Support for the English language -% esperanto.dtx/ins -- Support for the Esperanto language -% estonian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Estonian language -% finnish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Finnish language -% frenchb.dtx/ins -- Support for the French language -% galician.dtx/ins -- Support for the Galician language -% germanb.dtx/ins -- Support for the German language -% ngermanb.dtx -- Support for the German language (new orthography) -% greek.dtx/ins -- Support for the Greek language -% greek.fdd -- Font definitions for typesetting Greek texts -% grmath.dtx -- Defines greek names for math operators -% grsymb.dtx -- Provides acces to old Greek symbols in the cb fonts -% usage.tex -- Describes the use of the Greek support -% athnum.dtx -- Implementes Athenian Numerals -% heb209.dtx -- Hebrew in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode -% hebinp.dtx -- Input encoding file for Hebrew -% hebrew.dtx/ins/fdd-- Support for the Hebrew language -% hebtech.dtx -- Technion thesis class -% icelandic.dtx/ins -- Support for the Icelandic language -% interlingua.dtx/ins -- Support for the Interlingua language -% irish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Irish Gaelic language -% italian.dtx /ins -- Support for the Italian language -% kurmanji.dtx/ins -- Support for the Kurmanji language -% latin.dtx/ins -- Support for the Latin language -% lsorbian.dtx -- Support for the Lower Sorbian language -% sorbian.ins -- Installation script for the Sorbian languages -% magyar.dtx/ins -- Support for the Hungarian language -% norsk.dtx/ins -- Support for the Norwegian languages -% polish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Polish language -% portuges.dtx/ins -- Support for the Portuguese language -% romanian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Rumanian language -% russianb.dtx/ins -- Support for the Russian language -% samin.dtx/ins -- Support for the North Sami language -% scottish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Scottish Gaelic language -% serbian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Serbian language -% slovak.dtx/ins -- Support for the Slovakian language -% slovene.dtx/ins -- Support for the Slovenian language -% spanish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Spanish language -% swedish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Swedish language -% turkish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Turkish language -% ukraineb.dtx/ins -- Support for the Ukrainian language -% usorbian.dtx -- Support for the Upper Sorbian language -% welsh.dtx/ins -- Support for the Welsh language -% -% Example files: -% -------------- -% language.dat -- an example file which show how to specify -% hyphenation files -% language.skeleton -- An example file that can be used to build new -% language definition files from scratch. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 23aa4052c1b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d10f1e87a75..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fcba890a048..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 687b7401c07..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -Things that still need to be done (2008/03/17) : -================================================ - -- The language attribute mechanism is not completely mature yet. It is - currently not possible to switch attibutes on and off in the middle - of a document. This restriction might be lifted in a future release. - -- I started work on support for hyphenation patterns depending on - the encoding. So far this only works when loading the pattern file. - The encoding information isn't then subsequently stored as an - attribute for that hyphenation register. - -- An interface is needed to be able to change the definition of - things like \figurename and keep the change over language - switches. (PR3291) - -- Jean-François Mertens <jfm@core.ucl.ac.be> has developped a fully - expandable way of `sanitizing' active characters. It needs thorough - testing by a larger number of users before it could be included in - the ditribution. - -- A suggestion has been made by Ole Laursen <olau@hardworking.dk> to - make the comma active to be used as decimal delimiter instead of the - dot. This could be provided as an option as more European languages - need the comma for that purpose. - -- I have a contribution wich provides support for typesetting the - Serbian language in the Cyrillic alphabet; this is not yet - integrated. - -- I have a contribution with support for the Thai language which also - needs attention to integrate it with babel
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0cbafdd1ffb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +Guidelines for contributed languages +------------------------------------ + +Now language files are "outsourced" and are located in a separate +directory, so that they are contributed directly to CTAN (please, do +not send to me language styles just to upload them to CTAN). Of +course, placing your style files in this directory is not mandatory, +but if you want to do it, here are a few guidelines. + +- Do not hesitate stating on the file heads you are the author and the + maintainer, if you actually are. There is no need to state the babel + maintainer(s) as authors if they have not contributed significantly + to your language files. +- Fonts are not strictly part of a language, so they are best placed + in the corresponding TeX tree. This includes not only tfm, vf, ps1, + otf, mf files and the like, but also fd ones. +- Font and input encodings are usually best placed in the + corresponding tree, too, but sometimes they belong more naturally to + the babel style. Note you may also need to define a LICR. +- Babel ldf files may just interface a framework, as it happens often + with Oriental language/scripts. This framework is best placed in its + own directory. +- And do not forget providing a manual (as a stand-alone document). + +If your need further assistance and technical advice in the +development of language styles, I am willing to help you. And of +course, you can make any suggestion you like. + +------------ +Javier Bezos +2013/03/25 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4a7aca9979e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +Babel 3.9e +---------- + +This is Babel 3.9e. + +Version 3.9a fixed lots of bugs and added some new features, intended +mainly to make it compatible somehow with Unicode engines. Some bugs +have not been fixed to avoid backward incompatibilities, but they have +been documented. Most of the new features (like package options) are +intended to overcome issues in previous releases without changing +significantly the behaviour of Babel. + +Languages are not part of the Babel core any more; in particular, it +shall be no longer necessary to synchronize Babel core releases with +releases of Babel language files. See CONTRIB for further details +about contributing a language. + +To install it, just tex babel.ins and move the generated files to the +corresponding place in your TeX distribution. Unlike former releases, +formats must not be recreated, but it is recommended, at least the +first time Babel is updated from 3.8 (or previous versions). + +Changes are described in babel.pdf with the label "New 3.9". The +manual has been expanded to include tips and tricks, but it will be +improved in next releases. + +Please, report bugs and suggestions to: + +http://latex-project.org/bugs-upload.html + +You may also report them to the author more informally on: + +http://www.tex-tipografia.com/contact.html + +New +--- +* babel.dtx +3.9b - Fixed an idiot slip in hyphen.cfg: a \def instead of \let +3.9c - Added the "modifiers" mechanism + - Option shorthands accepts t for ~ and c for , + - \foreinglanguage inserted a par (because of an empty line + in the doc part) +3.9d - Fixed undefined \@expandtwoargs in Plain + - Code reorganized (just an "internal" change) +3.9e - Fixed a bug introduced in 3.9c which mangled key=value + options. +* bbunicode.dtx +1.0b - Improvements by Elie Roux for LuaTeX. + +------------ +Javier Bezos +2013-04-22 + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..db6652a0e48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/blplain.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/blplain.tex index e80adaa89fa..4c03de82a1a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/blplain.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/blplain.tex @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbplain.dtx (with options: `blplain') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -40,8 +41,10 @@ %% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e %% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 %% by Johannes Braams -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. \catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character \catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character \catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bplain.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/bplain.tex index ca43c2c328d..982620aa760 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bplain.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/bplain.tex @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbplain.dtx (with options: `bplain') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -40,8 +41,10 @@ %% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e %% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 %% by Johannes Braams -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. \catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character \catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character \catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist index 09dff7636a4..86a4f9bef48 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ %% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. %% --------------------------------------------------------- %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved. %% %% This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist index 31d43c8abb4..774aae454e5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ %% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. %% --------------------------------------------------------- %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved. %% %% This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index e1f0952ee11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,302 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{251} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{albanian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{albanian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{albanian.dtx} - [2007/10/20 v1.0c albanian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007 -% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -% babel at braamsdot xs4all dot nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the albanian language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Adi Zaimi (adizaimi at yahoo.com). -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{albanian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{albanian.dtx} -% \changes{albanian-1.0a}{2005/11/21}{Started first version of the file} -% \changes{albanian-1.0b}{2005/12/10}{A number of corrections in the -% translations from Adi Zaimi} -% \changes{albanian-1.0c}{2006/06/05}{Small documentation fix} -% -% \section{The Albanian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Albanian language. -% -% Albanian is written in a latin script, but it has 36 letters, -% 9 which are diletters (dh, gj, ll, nj, rr, sh, th, xh, zh), -% and two extra special characters. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:albanian-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the uppercase \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"`| & for Albanian left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for Albanian right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{albanian.ldf}}\label{tab:albanian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% Apart from defining shorthands we need to make sure that the -% first paragraph of each section is intended. Furthermore the -% following new math operators are defined (|\tg|, |\ctg|, -% |\arctg|, |\arcctg|, |\sh|, |\ch|, |\th|, |\cth|, |\arsh|, -% |\arch|, |\arth|, |\arcth|, |\Prob|, |\Expect|, |\Variance|). -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{albanian}\captionsalbanian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{albanian} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@albanian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@albanian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Albanian} - \adddialect\l@albanian0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Albanian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsalbanian} -% The macro |\captionsalbanian| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsalbanian{% - \def\prefacename{Parathenia}% - \def\refname{Referencat}% - \def\abstractname{P\"ermbledhja}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitulli}% - \def\appendixname{Shtesa}% - \def\contentsname{P\"ermbajta}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurat}% - \def\listtablename{Tabelat}% - \def\indexname{Indeksi}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Pjesa}% - \def\enclname{Lidhja}% - \def\ccname{Kopja}% - \def\headtoname{P\"er}% - \def\pagename{Faqe}% - \def\seename{shiko}% - \def\alsoname{shiko dhe}% - \def\proofname{V\"ertetim}% - \def\glossaryname{P\"erhasja e Fjal\"eve}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datealbanian} -% The macro |\datealbanian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Albanian dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datealbanian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Janar\or Shkurt\or Mars\or Prill\or Maj\or - Qershor\or Korrik\or Gusht\or Shtator\or Tetor\or N\"entor\or - Dhjetor\fi \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasalbanian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasalbanian} -% The macro |\extrasalbanian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Albanian language. The macro -% |\noextrasalbanian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasalbanian|. -% -% For Albanian the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the -% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the albanian group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasalbanian{\languageshorthands{albanian}} -\addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters -% such as \v{c}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"e}{\textormath{\v e}{\check e}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"E}{\textormath{\v E}{\check E}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar -% to the german and french quotation marks. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -% In albanian the first paragraph of each section should be indented. -% Add this code only in \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\fmtname plain \else - \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} - \addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@frenchindent} - \addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mathalbanian} -% Some math functions in Albanian math books have other names: -% e.g. |sinh| in Albanian is written as |sh| etc. So we define a -% number of new math operators. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh -\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth -\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits} -\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits} -\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits} -\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{albanian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 07d34783ec4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2005/11/21} -\def\batchfile{albanian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{albanian.ldf}{\from{albanian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 3ea1f5325aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,277 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%% \CheckSum{125} -%\iffalse -% -%% This is file `athnum.dtx' -%% (c) 1997-2007 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -% -% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to -% -% Apostolos Syropoulos -% 366, 28th October Str. -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE -% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr -% -%\fi -% -% \iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\def\PiIt#1{{% - \newdimen\boxW \newdimen\boxH - \settowidth{\boxW}{#1}% - \settoheight{\boxH}{#1}% - \addtolength{\boxW}{0.8pt} - \vbox{% - \hrule width\boxW\hbox{% - \vrule height\boxH\mbox{#1}% - \vrule height\boxH}}\kern.5pt}} -\GetFileInfo{athnum.drv} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{athnum.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% \fi -% -%\title{Athenian Numerals II\footnote{The documentation of this -% package is essentially the same as that of the package `grnumalt'. -% The `II' serves as a means to distinguish the two documents.}} -% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\366, 28th October Str.\\ -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\ Email:\texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}} -% \date{2003/08/24} -%\maketitle -% -%\MakeShortVerb{\|} -% -%\section{Introduction} -% -% This \LaTeX\ package implements the macro -% \DescribeMacro{\athnum} -% |\athnum|. The macro transforms an Arabic numeral, i.e., the kind -% of numerals we all use (e.g., 1, 5, 789 etc), to the corresponding -% {\itshape Athenian} numeral. Athenian numerals were in use only in -% ancient Athens. The package can be used only in conjunction with the -% |greek| option of the |babel| package. -% -%\section{The Numbering System} -% -% The athenian numbering system, like the roman one, employs -% letters to denote important numbers. Multiple occurrence of a letter denote -% a multiple of the ``important'' number, e.g., the letter I denotes 1, so -% III denotes 3. Here are the basic digits used in the Athenian numbering -% system: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item I denotes the number one (1) -% \item $\Pi$ denotes the number five (5) -% \item $\Delta$ denotes the number ten (10) -% \item H denotes the number one hundred (100) -% \item X denotes the number one thousand (1000) -% \item M denotes the number ten thousands (10000) -%\end{itemize} -% Moreover, the letters $\Delta$, H, X, and M under the letter $\Pi$, -% denote five times their original value, e.g., the symbol -% \PiIt{X}, denotes the number 5000, and the symbol -% \PiIt{$\Delta$}, denotes the number 50. It must be noted that -% the numbering system does not provide negative numerals or a symbol for -% zero. -% -% The Athenian numbering system is described, among others, in an article in -% Encyclopedia $\Delta o\mu\acute{\eta}$, Vol. 2, page 280, 7th edition, -% Athens, October 2, 1975. -% -% \section{The Code} -% Before we do anything further, we have to identify the package. -% \StopEventually -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/01/01] -\ProvidesPackage{athnum}[2003/08/24\space v1.1] -\typeout{Package: `athnum' v1.1\space <2003/08/24> (A. Syropoulos)} -% \end{macrocode} -% Next we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least -% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{% - \PackageError{athnum}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - }} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% As it is mentioned in the introduction, the Athenian numerals employ -% some special digits. These digits are included in the |cb| fonts of -% Claudio Beccari, and so we must provide access commands. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiDelta}{LGR}{\char"02\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiEta}{LGR}{\char"03\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiChi}{LGR}{\char"04\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiMu}{LGR}{\char"05\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -%\begin{macro}{\@@athnum} -% Now, we turn our attention to the definition of the macro -% |\@@athnum|. This macro uses one integer variable (or counter in -% \TeX's jargon.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@ath@num -% \end{macrocode} -% The macro |\@@athnum| is also defined as a robust command. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\@@athnum}[1]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% After assigning to variable |\@ath@num| the value of the macro's argument, -%we make sure that the argument is in the expected range, i.e., it is greater -% than zero, and less or equal to $249999$. In case it isn't, we simply -% produce a |\space|, warn the user about it and quit. Although, the -% |\athnum| macro is capable to produce an Athenian numeral for even greater -% intergers, the following argument by Claudio Beccari convised me to place -% this above upper limit: -% \begin{quote} -% According to psychological perception studies (that ancient Athenians -% and Romans perfectly knew without needing to study Freud and Jung) -% living beings (which includes at least all vertebrates, not only -% humans) can perceive up to four randomly set objects of the same kind -% without the need of counting, the latter activity being a specific -% acquired ability of human kind; the biquinary numbering notation -% used by the Athenians and the Romans exploits this natural -% characteristic of human beings. -% \end{quote} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ath@num#1\relax - \ifnum\@ath@num<\@ne% - \space% - \PackageWarning{athnum}{% - Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}% - \else\ifnum\@ath@num>249999% - \space% - \PackageWarning{athnum}{% - Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Having done all the necessary checks, we are now ready to do the actual -% computation. If the number is greater than $49999$, then it certainly -% has at least one \PiIt{M} ``digit''. We find all such digits by continuously -% subtracting $50000$ from |\@ath@num|, until |\@ath@num| becomes less than -% $50000$. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>49999\do{% - \PiMu\advance\@ath@num-50000}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We now check for tens of thousands. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>9999\do{% - M\advance\@ath@num-\@M}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Since a number can have only one \PiIt{X} ``digit'' (equivalent to 5000), it -% is easy to check it out and produce the corresponding numeral in case it does -% have one. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\@ath@num>4999% - \PiChi\advance\@ath@num-5000% - \fi\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Next, we check for thousands, the same way we checked for tens of thousands. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>999\do{% - Q\advance\@ath@num-\@m}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Like the five thousands, a numeral can have at most one \PiIt{H} ``digit'' -% (equivalent to 500). -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\@ath@num>499% - \PiEta\advance\@ath@num-500% - \fi\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% It is time to check hundreds, which follow the same pattern as thousands -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>99\do{% - H\advance\@ath@num-100}% -% \end{macrocode} -% A numeral can have only one \PiIt{$\Delta$} ``digit'' (equivalent to 50). -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\@ath@num>49% - \PiDelta\advance\@ath@num-50% - \fi\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Let's check now decades. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>9\do{% - D\advance\@ath@num by-10}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We check for five and, finally, for the digits 1, 2, 3, and 4. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@whilenum\@ath@num>4\do{% - P\advance\@ath@num-5}% - \ifcase\@ath@num\or I\or II\or III\or IIII\fi% - \fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{macro}{\@athnum} -% The command |\@athnum| has one argument, which -% is a counter. It calls the command |\@@athnum| to process the value of -% the counter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@athnum#1{% - \expandafter\@@athnum\expandafter{\the#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\athnum} -% The command |\athnum| is a wrapper that declares -% a new counter in a local scope, assigns to it the argument of the command -% and calls the macro |\@athnum|. This way the command can process correctly -% either a number or a counter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\athnum#1{% - \@ath@num#1\relax - \@athnum{\@ath@num}} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \section*{Acknowledgment} -% I would like to thank Claudio Beccari for reading the documentation -% and for his very helpful suggestions. In addition, Antonis Tsolomitis -% spotted a bug in the first version, which is corrected in the present -% version. -% \section*{Dedication} -% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son -% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center} -% \Finale -% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 1abb084a20b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5900 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{3882} -%% -% \def\filename{babel.dtx} -% \let\thisfilename\filename -% -%\iffalse -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/10}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from -% December 1994} -% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/18}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from -% June 1998} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01] -% \end{macrocode} -% -%% File 'babel.dtx' -%\fi -%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package] -%\iffalse -% -% Babel DOCUMENT-STYLE option for LaTeX version 2.09 or plain TeX; -%% Babel package for LaTeX2e. -% -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% all rights reserved. -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\usepackage{supertabular} -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}} -\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}} -\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{babel.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/16}{Make multiple loading of -% \file{babel.def} impossible} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\ifx\bbl@afterfi\@undefined -\else - \bbl@afterfi\endinput -\fi -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx} -%</dtx> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{babel.dtx} -% -% \changes{babel~2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added text about \file{german.sty}} -% \changes{babel~2.0b}{1990/04/18}{Changed order of code to prevent -% plain \TeX from seeing all of it} -% \changes{babel~2.1}{1990/04/24}{Modified user interface, -% \cs{langTeX} no longer necessary} -% \changes{babel~2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments} -% \changes{babel~2.1b}{1990/05/01}{rename \cs{language} to -% \cs{current@language}} -% \changes{babel~2.1c}{1990/05/22}{abstract for report fixed, missing -% \texttt{\}}, found by Nicolas Brouard} -% \changes{babel~2.1d}{1990/07/04}{Missing right brace in definition of -% abstract environment, found by Werenfried Spit} -% \changes{babel~2.1e}{1990/07/16}{Incorporated more comments from -% Nico} -% \changes{babel~2.2}{1990/07/17}{Renamed \cs{newlanguage} to -% \cs{addlanguage}} -% \changes{babel~2.2a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation -% somewhat} -% \changes{babel~3.0}{1991/04/23}{Moved part of the code to hyphen.doc -% in preparation for \TeX~3.0} -% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/21}{Updated comments in various places} -% \changes{babel~3.0b}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log} -% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} and -% \file{latexhax.sty} to \file{.com}} -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Added the support for active -% characters and for extending a macro} -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed the need for -% \file{latexhax}} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Some Changes by br} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1992/02/15}{Fixups of the code and -% documentation} -% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/06}{Included driver file, and prepared -% for distribution} -% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/01/30}{Updated for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added language definition file for -% bahasa} -% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Added a small driver to be able to -% process just this file} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/03}{Provided common code to handle the -% active double quote} -% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{corrected a few typos (PR1652)} -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Merged glyphs.dtx into this file} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/13}{repaired a typo} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{replaced \cs{tmp}, \cs{bbl@tmp} and -% \cs{bbl@temp} with \cs{bbl@tempa}} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} to be consistent with \LaTeX} -% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/05/05}{Fixed a few typos in \cs{changes} -% entries which made typesetting the code impossible} -% \changes{babel~3.7h}{2001/03/01}{Added a number of missing comment -% characters which caused spurious white space} -% \changes{babel~3.8e}{2005/03/24}{Many enhancements to the text by -% Andrew Young} -% -% \title {Babel, a multilingual package for use with \LaTeX's standard -% document classes\thanks{During the development ideas from Nico -% Poppelier, Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used. -% Bernd Raichle has provided many helpful suggestions.}} -% -% \author{Johannes Braams\\ -% Kersengaarde 33\\ -% 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\ -% The Netherlands\\ -% \texttt{babel\char64 braams.xs4all.nl}} -% -% \date{Printed \today} -% -% \maketitle -% -% \begin{abstract} -% The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of -% document classes that are meant to be used, but also serve as -% examples for other users to create their own document classes. -% These document classes have become very popular among \LaTeX\ -% users. But it should be kept in mind that they were designed for -% American tastes and typography. At one time they contained a -% number of hard-wired texts. This report describes \babel{}, a -% package that makes use of the new capabilities of \TeX\ version 3 -% to provide an environment in which documents can be typeset in -% a language other than US English, or in more than one language. -% \end{abstract} -% -% \tableofcontents -% -% \section{The user interface}\label{U-I} -% -% The user interface of this package is quite simple. It consists -% of a set of commands that switch from one language to another, and -% a set of commands that deal with shorthands. It is also possible -% to find out what the current language is. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\selectlanguage} -% When a user wants to switch from one language to another he can -% do so using the macro |\selectlanguage|. This macro takes the -% language, defined previously by a language definition file, as -% its argument. It calls several macros that should be defined in -% the language definition files to activate the special definitions -% for the language chosen. -% -% \DescribeEnv{otherlanguage} -% The environment \Lenv{otherlanguage} does basically the same as -% |\selectlanguage|, except the language change is local to the -% environment. This environment is required for intermixing -% left-to-right typesetting with right-to-left typesetting. -% The language to switch to is specified as an -% argument to |\begin{otherlanguage}|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\foreignlanguage} -% The command |\foreignlanguage| takes two arguments; the second -% argument is a phrase to be typeset according to the rules of the -% language named in its first argument. This command only switches -% the extra definitions and the hyphenation rules for the language, -% \emph{not} the names and dates. -% -% \DescribeEnv{otherlanguage*} -% In the environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} only the typesetting -% is done according to the rules of the other language, but the -% text-strings such as `figure', `table', etc. are left as they -% were set outside this environment. -% -% \DescribeEnv{hyphenrules} -% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select -% \emph{only} the hyphenation rules to be used. This can for -% instance be used to select `nohyphenation', provided that in -% \file{language.dat} the `language' nohyphenation is defined by -% loading \file{serohyph.tex}. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\languagename} -% The control sequence |\languagename| contains the name of the -% current language. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\iflanguage} -% If more than one language is used, it might be necessary to know -% which language is active at a specific time. This can be checked -% by a call to |\iflanguage|. This macro takes three arguments. -% The first argument is the name of a language; the second and -% third arguments are the actions to take if the result of the test -% is \texttt{true} or \texttt{false} respectively. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\useshorthands} -% The command |\useshorthands| initiates the definition of -% user-defined shorthand sequences. It has one argument, the -% character that starts these personal shorthands. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\defineshorthand} -% The command |\defineshorthand| takes two arguments: the first -% is a one- or two-character shorthand sequence, and the second is -% the code the shorthand should expand to. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\aliasshorthand} -% The command |\aliasshorthand| can be used to let another -% character perform the same functions as the default shorthand -% character. If one prefers for example to use the character |/| -% over |"| in typing polish texts, this can be achieved by entering -% |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. \emph{Please note} that the substitute -% shorthand character must have been declared in the preamble of -% your document, using a command such as |\useshorthands{/}| in this -% example. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\languageshorthands} -% The command |\languageshorthands| can be used to switch the -% shorthands on the language level. It takes one argument, the -% name of a language. Note that for this to work the language -% should have been specified as an option when loading the \babel\ -% package. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\shorthandon} -% \DescribeMacro{\shorthandoff} -% It is sometimes necessary to switch a shorthand -% character off temporarily, because it must be used in an -% entirely different way. For this purpose, the user commands -% |\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon| are provided. They each take a -% list of characters as their arguments. The command |\shorthandoff| -% sets the |\catcode| for each of the characters in its argument to -% other (12); the command |\shorthandon| sets the |\catcode| to -% active (13). Both commands only work on `known' -% shorthand characters. If a character is not known to be a -% shorthand character its category code will be left unchanged. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\languageattribute} -% This is a user-level command, to be used in the preamble of a -% document (after |\usepackage[...]{babel}|), that declares which -% attributes are to be used for a given language. It takes two -% arguments: the first is the name of the language; the second, -% a (list of) attribute(s) to used. -% The command checks whether the language is known in this document -% and whether the attribute(s) are known for this language. -% -% \subsection{Languages supported by \Babel} -% -% In the following table all the languages supported by \Babel\ are -% listed, together with the names of the options with which you can -% load \babel\ for each language. -% -% \begin{center} -% \tablehead{Language & Option(s)\\\hline} -% \tabletail{\hline} -% \begin{supertabular}{l p{8cm}} -% Afrikaans & afrikaans\\ -% Bahasa & bahasa, indonesian, indon, bahasai, -% bahasam, malay, meyalu\\ -% Basque & basque\\ -% Breton & breton\\ -% Bulgarian & bulgarian\\ -% Catalan & catalan\\ -% Croatian & croatian\\ -% Czech & czech\\ -% Danish & danish\\ -% Dutch & dutch\\ -% English & english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, -% british, canadian, australian, newzealand\\ -% Esperanto & esperanto\\ -% Estonian & estonian\\ -% Finnish & finnish\\ -% French & french, francais, canadien, acadian\\ -% Galician & galician\\ -% German & austrian, german, germanb, ngerman, naustrian\\ -% Greek & greek, polutonikogreek \\ -% Hebrew & hebrew \\ -% Hungarian & magyar, hungarian\\ -% Icelandic & icelandic \\ -% Interlingua & interlingua \\ -% Irish Gaelic & irish\\ -% Italian & italian\\ -%^^A Kannada & kannada \\ -% Latin & latin \\ -% Lower Sorbian & lowersorbian\\ -%^^A Devnagari & nagari \\ -% North Sami & samin \\ -% Norwegian & norsk, nynorsk\\ -% Polish & polish\\ -% Portuguese & portuges, portuguese, brazilian, brazil\\ -% Romanian & romanian\\ -% Russian & russian\\ -%^^A Sanskrit & sanskrit\\ -% Scottish Gaelic & scottish\\ -% Spanish & spanish\\ -% Slovakian & slovak\\ -% Slovenian & slovene\\ -% Swedish & swedish\\ -% Serbian & serbian\\ -%^^A Tamil & tamil \\ -% Turkish & turkish\\ -% Ukrainian & ukrainian\\ -% Upper Sorbian & uppersorbian\\ -% Welsh & welsh\\ -% \end{supertabular} -% \end{center} -% -% For some languages \babel\ supports the options -% \Lopt{activeacute} and \Lopt{activegrave}; for typestting Russian -% texts, \babel\ knows about the options \Lopt{LWN} and \Lopt{LCY} -% to specify the fontencoding of the cyrillic font used. Currently -% only \Lopt{LWN} is supported. -% -% \subsection{Workarounds} -% -% If you use the document class \cls{book} \emph{and} you use -% |\ref| inside the argument of |\chapter|, -% \LaTeX\ will keep complaining about an undefined -% label. The reason is that the argument of |\ref| is passed through -% |\uppercase| at some time during processing. To prevent such -% problems, you could revert to using uppercase labels, or you can -% use |\lowercase{\ref{foo}}| inside the argument of |\chapter|. -% -% \section{Changes for \LaTeXe} -% -% With the advent of \LaTeXe\ the interface to \babel\ in the -% preamble of the document has changed. With \LaTeX2.09 one used to -% call up the \babel\ system with a line such as: -% -%\begin{verbatim} -%\documentstyle[dutch,english]{article} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% which would tell \LaTeX\ that the document would be written in -% two languages, Dutch and English, and that English would be the -% first language in use. -% -% The \LaTeXe\ way of providing the same information is: -% -%\begin{verbatim} -%\documentclass{article} -%\usepackage[dutch,english]{babel} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% or, making \Lopt{dutch} and \Lopt{english} global options in -% order to let other packages detect and use them: -% -%\begin{verbatim} -%\documentclass[dutch,english]{article} -%\usepackage{babel} -%\usepackage{varioref} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% In this last example, the package \texttt{varioref} will also see -% the options and will be able to use them. -% -% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.7} -% -% In \Babel\ version 3.7 a number of bugs that were found in -% version~3.6 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions -% have occurred: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that -% one has to type |'{}a| when the acute accent is used as a -% shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other -% problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have -% vanished. -% \item Two new commands, |\shorthandon| and |\shorthandoff| have -% been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more -% shorthands. -%^^A \item Support for typesetting Sanskrit in transliteration is now -%^^A available, thanks to Jun Takashima. -%^^A \item Support for typesetting Kannada, Devnagari and Tamil is now -%^^A available thanks to Jun Takashima. -% \item Support for typesetting Greek has been enhanced. Code from -% the \pkg{kdgreek} package (suggested by the author) was added -% and |\greeknumeral| has been added. -% \item Support for typesetting Basque is now available thanks to -% Juan Aguirregabiria. -% \item Support for typesetting Serbian with Latin script is now -% available thanks to Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} and Jankovic -% Slobodan. -% \item Support for typesetting Hebrew (and potential support for -% typesetting other right-to-left written languages) is now -% available thanks to Rama Porrat and Boris Lavva. -% \item Support for typesetting Bulgarian is now available thanks to -% Georgi Boshnakov. -% \item Support for typesetting Latin is now available, thanks to -% Claudio Beccari and Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski. -% \item Support for typesetting North Sami is now available, thanks -% to Regnor Jernsletten. -% \item The options \Lopt{canadian}, \Lopt{canadien} and -% \Lopt{acadien} have been added for Canadian English and French -% use. -% \item A language attribute has been added to the |\mark...| -% commands in order to make sure that a Greek header line comes -% out right on the last page before a language switch. -% \item Hyphenation pattern files are now read \emph{inside a -% group}; therefore any changes a pattern file needs to make to -% lowercase codes, uppercase codes, and category codes are kept -% local to that group. If they are needed for the language, these -% changes will need to be repeated and stored in |\extras...| -% \item The concept of language attributes is introduced. It is -% intended to give the user some control over the -% features a language-definition file provides. Its -% first use is for the Greek language, where the user can choose -% the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ -% (``Polutoniko'' or multi-accented) Greek way of typesetting -% texts. These attributes will possibly find wider use in future -% releases. -% \item The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} is introduced. -% \item The syntax of the file \file{language.dat} has been -% extended to allow (optionally) specifying the font -% encoding to be used while processing the patterns file. -% \item The command |\providehyphenmins| should now be used in -% language definition files in order to be able to keep any -% settings provided by the pattern file. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.6} -% -% In \Babel\ version 3.6 a number of bugs that were found in -% version~3.5 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions -% have occurred: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item A new environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} is introduced. it -% only switches the `specials', but leaves the `captions' -% untouched. -% \item The shorthands are no longer fully expandable. Some -% problems could only be solved by peeking at the token following -% an active character. The advantage is that |'{}a| works as -% expected for languages that have the |'| active. -% \item Support for typesetting french texts is much enhanced; the -% file \file{francais.ldf} is now replaced by \file{frenchb.ldf} -% which is maintained by Daniel Flipo. -% \item Support for typesetting the russian language is again -% available. The language definition file was originally -% developed by Olga Lapko from CyrTUG. The fonts needed to -% typeset the russian language are now part of the \babel\ -% distribution. The support is not yet up to the level which is -% needed according to Olga, but this is a start. -% \item Support for typesetting greek texts is now also -% available. What is offered in this release is a first attempt; -% it will be enhanced later on by Yannis Haralambous. -% \item in \babel\ 3.6j some hooks have been added for the -% development of support for Hebrew typesetting. -% \item Support for typesetting texts in Afrikaans (a variant of -% Dutch, spoken in South Africa) has been added to -% \file{dutch.ldf}. -% \item Support for typesetting Welsh texts is now available. -% \item A new command |\aliasshorthand| is introduced. It seems -% that in Poland various conventions are used to type the -% necessary Polish letters. It is now possible to use the -% character~|/| as a shorthand character instead of the -% character~|"|, by issuing the command |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. -% \item The shorthand mechanism now deals correctly with characters -% that are already active. -% \item Shorthand characters are made active at |\begin{document}|, -% not earlier. This is to prevent problems with other packages. -% \item A \emph{preambleonly} command |\substitutefontfamily| has -% been added to create \file{.fd} files on the fly when the font -% families of the Latin text differ from the families used for -% the Cyrillic or Greek parts of the text. -% \item Three new commands |\LdfInit|, |\ldf@quit| and -% |\ldf@finish| are introduced that perform a number of standard -% tasks. -% \item In babel 3.6k the language Ukrainian has been added and the -% support for Russian typesetting has been adapted to the package -% 'cyrillic' to be released with the December 1998 release of -% \LaTeXe. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.5} -% -% In \Babel\ version 3.5 a lot of changes have been made when -% compared with the previous release. Here is a list of the most -% important ones: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item the selection of the language is delayed until -% |\begin{document}|, which means you must -% add appropriate |\selectlanguage| commands if you include -% |\hyphenation| lists in the preamble of your document. -% \item \babel\ now has a \Lenv{language} environment and a new -% command |\foreignlanguage|; -% \item the way active characters are dealt with is completely -% changed. They are called `shorthands'; one can have three -% levels of shorthands: on the user level, the language level, and -% on `system level'. A consequence of the new way of handling -% active characters is that they are now written to auxiliary -% files `verbatim'; -% \item A language change now also writes information in the -% \file{.aux} file, as the change might also affect typesetting -% the table of contents. The consequence is that an .aux file -% generated by a LaTeX format with babel preloaded gives errors -% when read with a LaTeX format without babel; but I think this -% probably doesn't occur; -% \item \babel\ is now compatible with the \pkg{inputenc} and -% \pkg{fontenc} packages; -% \item the language definition files now have a new extension, -% \file{ldf}; -% \item the syntax of the file \file{language.dat} is extended to -% be compatible with the \pkg{french} package by Bernard Gaulle; -% \item each language definition file looks for a configuration -% file which has the same name, but the extension \file{.cfg}. It -% can contain any valid \LaTeX\ code. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{The interface between the core of \babel{} and the language -% definition files} -% -% In the core of the \babel{} system, several macros are defined -% for use in language definition files. Their purpose -% is to make a new language known. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\addlanguage} -% The macro |\addlanguage| is a non-outer version of the macro -% |\newlanguage|, defined in \file{plain.tex} version~3.x. For -% older versions of \file{plain.tex} and \file{lplain.tex} a -% substitute definition is used. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\adddialect} -% The macro |\adddialect| can be used when two -% languages can (or must) use the same hyphenation -% patterns. This can also be useful for -% languages for which no patterns are preloaded in the format. In -% such cases the default behaviour of the \babel{} system is to -% define this language as a `dialect' of the language for which the -% patterns were loaded as |\language0|. -% -% The language definition files must conform to a number of -% conventions, because these files have to fill -% in the gaps left by the common code in \file{babel.def}, i.\,e., -% the definitions of the macros that produce texts. Also the -% language-switching possibility which has been built into the -% \babel{} system has its implications. -% -% The following assumptions are made: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Some of the language-specific definitions might be used by -% plain \TeX\ users, so the files have to be coded so that they -% can be read by both \LaTeX\ and plain \TeX. The current -% format can be checked by looking at the value of the macro -% |\fmtname|. -% -% \item The common part of the \babel{} system redefines a number -% of macros and environments (defined previously in the document -% style) to put in the names of macros that replace the previously -% hard-wired texts. These macros have to be defined in the -% language definition files. -% -% \item The language definition files define five macros, used to -% activate and deactivate the language-specific definitions. These -% macros are |\|\langvar|hyphenmins|, |\captions|\langvar, -% |\date|\langvar, |\extras|\langvar\ and |\noextras|\langvar; where -% \langvar\ is either the name of the language definition file or -% the name of the \LaTeX\ option that is to be used. These -% macros and their functions are discussed below. -% -% \item When a language definition file is loaded, it can define -% |\l@|\langvar\ to be a dialect of |\language0| when -% |\l@|\langvar\ is undefined. -% -% \item The language definition files can be read in the preamble of -% the document, but also in the middle of document processing. This -% means that they have to function independently of the current -% |\catcode| of the \texttt{@}~sign. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \DescribeMacro{\providehyphenmins} -% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language -% definition files to set the |\lefthyphenmin| and -% |\righthyphenmin|. This macro will check whether these parameters -% were provided by the hyphenation file before it takes any action. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\langhyphenmins} -% The macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is used to store the values of -% the |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\captionslang} -% The macro |\captions|\langvar\ defines the macros that -% hold the texts to replace the original hard-wired texts. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\datelang} -% The macro |\date|\langvar\ defines |\today| and -% -% \DescribeMacro{\extraslang} -% The macro |\extras|\langvar\ contains all the extra definitions -% needed for a specific language. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\noextraslang} -% Because we want to let the user switch -% between languages, but we do not know what state \TeX\ might be in -% after the execution of |\extras|\langvar, a macro that brings -% \TeX\ into a predefined state is needed. It will be no surprise -% that the name of this macro is |\noextras|\langvar. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@declare@ttribute} -% This is a command to be used in the language definition files for -% declaring a language attribute. It takes three arguments: the -% name of the language, the attribute to be defined, and the code -% to be executed when the attribute is to be used. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\main@language} -% To postpone the activation of the definitions needed for a -% language until the beginning of a document, all language -% definition files should use |\main@language| instead of -% |\selectlanguage|. This will just store the name of the language, -% and the proper language will be activated at the start of the -% document. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\ProvidesLanguage} -% The macro |\ProvidesLanguage| should be used to identify the -% language definition files. Its syntax is similar to the syntax -% of the \LaTeX\ command |\ProvidesPackage|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\LdfInit} -% The macro |\LdfInit| performs a couple of standard checks that -% must be made at the beginning of a language definition file, -% such as checking the category code of the @-sign, preventing -% the \file{.ldf} file from being processed twice, etc. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\ldf@quit} -% The macro |\ldf@quit| does work needed -% if a \file{.ldf} file was processed -% earlier. This includes resetting the category code -% of the @-sign, preparing the language to be activated at -% |\begin{document}| time, and ending the input stream. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\ldf@finish} -% The macro |\ldf@finish| does work needed -% at the end of each \file{.ldf} file. This -% includes resetting the category code of the @-sign, -% loading a local configuration file, and preparing the language -% to be activated at |\begin{document}| time. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\loadlocalcfg} -% After processing a language definition file, -% \LaTeX\ can be instructed to load a local configuration -% file. This file can, for instance, be used to add strings to -% |\captions|\langvar\ to support local document -% classes. The user will be informed that this -% configuration file has been loaded. This macro is called by -% |\ldf@finish|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\substitutefontfamily} -% This command takes three arguments, a font encoding and two font -% family names. It creates a font description file for the first -% font in the given encoding. This \file{.fd} file will instruct -% \LaTeX\ to use a font from the second family when a font from the -% first family in the given encoding seems to be needed. -% -% \subsection{Support for active characters} -% -% In quite a number of language definition files, active characters -% are introduced. To facilitate this, some support macros are -% provided. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\initiate@active@char} -% The internal macro |\initiate@active@char| is used in language -% definition files to instruct \LaTeX\ to give a character the -% category code `active'. When a character has been made active it -% will remain that way until the end of the document. Its -% definition may vary. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@activate} -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@deactivate} -% The command |\bbl@activate| is used to change the way an active -% character expands. |\bbl@activate| `switches on' the active -% behaviour of the character. |\bbl@deactivate| lets the active -% character expand to its former (mostly) non-active self. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\declare@shorthand} -% The macro |\declare@shorthand| is used to define the various -% shorthands. It takes three arguments: the name for the collection -% of shorthands this definition belongs to; the character -% (sequence) that makes up the shorthand, i.e.\ |~| or |"a|; and the -% code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@add@special} -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@remove@special} -% The \TeX book states: ``Plain \TeX\ includes a macro called -% |\dospecials| that is -% essentially a set macro, representing the set of all characters -% that have a special category code.'' \cite[p.~380]{DEK} It is -% used to set text `verbatim'. To make this work if more -% characters get a special category code, you have to add this -% character to the macro |\dospecial|. \LaTeX\ adds another macro -% called |\@sanitize| representing the same character set, but -% without the curly braces. The macros -% |\bbl@add@special|\meta{char} and -% |\bbl@remove@special|\meta{char} add and remove the character -% \meta{char} to these two sets. -% -% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions} -% -% Language definition files may want to \emph{re}define macros that -% already exist. Therefor a mechanism for saving (and restoring) -% the original definition of those macros is provided. We provide -% two macros for this\footnote{This mechanism was introduced by -% Bernd Raichle.}. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\babel@save} To save the current meaning of any -% control sequence, the macro |\babel@save| is provided. It takes -% one argument, \meta{csname}, the control sequence for which the -% meaning has to be saved. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\babel@savevariable} A second macro is provided to -% save the current value of a variable. In this context, anything -% that is allowed after the |\the| primitive is considered to be a -% variable. The macro takes one argument, the \meta{variable}. -% -% The effect of the preceding macros is to append a piece of code -% to the current definition of |\originalTeX|. When -% |\originalTeX| is expanded, this code restores the previous -% definition of the control sequence or the previous value of the -% variable. -% -% \subsection{Support for extending macros} -% -% \DescribeMacro{\addto} -% The macro |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\ -% code}|}| can be used to extend the definition of a macro. The -% macro need not be defined. This macro can, for instance, be used -% in adding instructions to a macro like |\extrasenglish|. -% -% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages} -% -% \DescribeMacro{\allowhyphens} -% In a couple of European languages compound words are used. This -% means that when \TeX\ has to hyphenate such a compound word, it -% only does so at the `\texttt{-}' that is used in such words. To -% allow hyphenation in the rest of such a compound word, the macro -% |\allowhyphens| can be used. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\set@low@box} -% For some languages, quotes need to be lowered to the baseline. For -% this purpose the macro |\set@low@box| is available. It takes one -% argument and puts that argument in an |\hbox|, at the -% baseline. The result is available in |\box0| for further -% processing. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\save@sf@q} -% Sometimes it is necessary to preserve the |\spacefactor|. For -% this purpose the macro |\save@sf@q| is available. It takes one -% argument, saves the current spacefactor, executes the argument, -% and restores the spacefactor. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@frenchspacing} -% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% The commands |\bbl@frenchspacing| and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| can -% be used to properly switch French spacing on and off. -% -% \section{Compatibility with \file{german.sty}}\label{l-h} -% -% The file \file{german.sty} has been -% one of the sources of inspiration for the \babel{} -% system. Because of this I wanted to include \file{german.sty} in -% the \babel{} system. To be able to do that I had to allow for -% one incompatibility: in the definition of the macro -% |\selectlanguage| in \file{german.sty} the argument is used as the -% {$\langle \it number \rangle$} for an |\ifcase|. So in this case -% a call to |\selectlanguage| might look like -% |\selectlanguage{\german}|. -% -% In the definition of the macro |\selectlanguage| in -% \file{babel.def} the argument is used as a part of other -% macronames, so a call to |\selectlanguage| now looks like -% |\selectlanguage{german}|. Notice the absence of the escape -% character. As of version~3.1a of \babel{} both syntaxes are -% allowed. -% -% All other features of the original \file{german.sty} have been -% copied into a new file, called \file{germanb.sty}\footnote{The -% `b' is added to the name to distinguish the file from Partls' -% file.}. -% -% Although the \babel{} system was developed to be used with -% \LaTeX, some of the features implemented in the language -% definition files might be needed by plain \TeX\ users. Care has -% been taken that all files in the system can be processed by plain -% \TeX. -% -% \section{Compatibility with \file{ngerman.sty}} -% -% When used with the options \Lopt{ngerman} or \Lopt{naustrian}, -% \babel{} will provide all features of the package \pkg{ngerman}. -% There is however one exception: The commands for special -% hyphenation of double consonants (|"ff| etc.) and ck (|"ck|), -% which are no longer required with the new German orthography, are -% undefined. With the \pkg{ngerman} package, however, these -% commands will generate appropriate warning messages only. -% -% \section{Compatibility with the \pkg{french} package} -% -% It has been reported to me that the package \pkg{french} by -% Bernard Gaulle (\texttt{gaulle@idris.fr}) works -% together with \babel. On the other hand, it seems \emph{not} to -% work well together with a lot of other packages. Therefore I have -% decided to no longer load \file{french.ldf} by default. Instead, -% when you want to use the package by Bernard Gaulle, you will have -% to request it specifically, by passing either \Lopt{frenchle} or -% \Lopt{frenchpro} as an option to \babel. -% -%\StopEventually{% -% \clearpage -% \let\filename\thisfilename -% \section{Conclusion} -% -% A system of document options has been presented that enable the -% user of \LaTeX\ to adapt the standard document classes of \LaTeX\ -% to the language he or she prefers to use. These options offer the -% possibility of switching between languages in one document. The -% basic interface consists of using one option, which is the same -% for \emph{all} standard document classes. -% -% In some cases the language definition files provide macros that -% can be useful to plain \TeX\ users as well as to \LaTeX\ users. -% The \babel{} system has been implemented so that it -% can be used by both groups of users. -% -% \section{Acknowledgements} -% -% I would like to thank all who volunteered as $\beta$-testers for -% their time. I would like to mention Julio Sanchez who supplied -% the option file for the Spanish language and Maurizio Codogno who -% supplied the option file for the Italian language. Michel Goossens -% supplied contributions for most of the other languages. Nico -% Poppelier helped polish the text of the documentation and -% supplied parts of the macros for the Dutch language. Paul -% Wackers and Werenfried Spit helped find and repair bugs. -% -% During the further development of the babel system I received -% much help from Bernd Raichle, for which I am grateful. -% -% \begin{thebibliography}{9} -% \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth, -% \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986. -% \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport, -% \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley, -% 1986. -% \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus. -% \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van -% tekst.} -% SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout -% design and typography. -% \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl, -% \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72. -% \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport, -% in: \TeXhax\ Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 February 1989. -% \bibitem{BEP} Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier, -% \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles}, -% \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406. -% \bibitem{ilatex} Joachim Schrod, -% \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use}, -% \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90. -% \end{thebibliography} -% } -% -% \section{Identification} -% -% The file \file{babel.sty}\footnote{The file described in this -% section is called \texttt{\filename}, has version -% number~\fileversion\ and was last revised on~\filedate.} is meant -% for \LaTeXe, therefor we make sure that the format file used is -% the right one. -% -% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesLanguage} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/18}{Added macro to prevent problems -% with unexpected \cs{ProvidesFile} in plain formats because of -% \babel.} -% The identification code for each file is something that was -% introduced in \LaTeXe. When the command |\ProvidesFile| does not -% exist, a dummy definition is provided temporarily. For use in the -% language definition file the command |\ProvidesLanguage| is -% defined by \babel. -% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Redid the identification code, -% provided dummy definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for plain \TeX} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/26}{Store version in \cs{fileversion}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/18}{Need to temporarily change the -% definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for December 1995 release} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Save a few csnames; use -% \cs{bbl@tempa} instead of \cs{\@ProvidesFile} and store message -% in \cs{toks8}} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!package> -\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined - \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% - \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% -%<*kernel&patterns> - \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }% -%</kernel&patterns> - \let\ProvidesFile\@undefined - } -% \end{macrocode} -% As an alternative for |\ProvidesFile| we define -% |\ProvidesLanguage| here to be used in the language definition -% files. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel> - \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{% - \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% - } -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% In this case we save the original definition of |\ProvidesFile| in -% |\bbl@tempa| and restore it after we have stored the version of -% the file in |\toks8|. -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/04}{Removed superfluous braces} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel&patterns> - \let\bbl@tempa\ProvidesFile - \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% - \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }% - \bbl@tempa#1[#2 #3 #4]% - \let\ProvidesFile\bbl@tempa} -%</kernel&patterns> -% \end{macrocode} -% When |\ProvidesFile| is defined we give |\ProvidesLanguage| a -% similar definition. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{% - \begingroup - \catcode`\ 10 % - \@makeother\/% - \@ifnextchar[%] - {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}} - \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{% - \wlog{Language: #1 #2}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}% - \endgroup} -%</kernel> -\fi -%</!package> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Identify each file that is produced from this source file. -% \changes{babel~3.4c}{1995/04/28}{lhyphen.cfg has become -% lthyphen.cfg} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/01/25}{lthyphen.cfg has become hyphen.cfg} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+package>\ProvidesPackage{babel} -%<+core>\ProvidesFile{babel.def} -%<+kernel&patterns>\ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg} -%<+kernel&!patterns>\ProvidesFile{switch.def} -%<+driver&!user>\ProvidesFile{babel.drv} -%<+driver&user>\ProvidesFile{user.drv} - [2008/07/08 v3.8m % -%<+package> The Babel package] -%<+core> Babel common definitions] -%<+kernel> Babel language switching mechanism] -%<+driver>] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The Package File} -% -% In order to make use of the features of \LaTeXe, the \babel\ -% system contains a package file, \file{babel.sty}. This file -% is loaded by the |\usepackage| command and defines all the -% language options known in the \babel\ system. It also takes care -% of a number of compatibility issues with other packages. -% -% \subsection{Language options} -% -% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \cs{LdfInit} is undefined we -% need to load \file{babel.def} from \file{babel.sty}} -% \changes{babel~3.6l}{1999/04/03}{Don't load \file{babel.def} now, -% but rather define \cs{LdfInit} temporarily in order to load -% \file{babel.def} at the right time, preventing problems with the -% temporary definition of \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% \changes{babel~3.6r}{1999/04/12}{We \textbf{do} need to load -% \file{babel.def} right now as \cs{ProvidesLanguage} needs to be -% defined before the \file{.ldf} files are read and the reason for -% for 3.6l has been removed} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -\ifx\LdfInit\@undefined\input babel.def\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For all the languages supported we need to declare an option. -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/14}{Changed extension of language -% definition files to \texttt{ldf}} -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load language definition files -% \emph{after} the check for the hyphenation patterns} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/04}{Added option \Lopt{afrikaans}} -% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{acadian}} -% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added option \Lopt{australian}} -% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added option \Lopt{albanian}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{acadian}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{albanian}{\input{albanian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\input{dutch.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{american}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{australian}{\input{english.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Austrian is really a dialect of German. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Added the \Lopt{Basque} option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{austrian}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added synonyms \Lopt{indonesian}, -% \Lopt{indon} and \Lopt{bahasai} for the original bahasa -% (indonesia) support} -% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added \Lopt{malay}, \Lopt{meyaluy} -% and \Lopt{bahasam} for the Bahasa Malaysia support} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{indon}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{malay}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{basque}{\input{basque.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{brazil}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/25}{Added \Lopt{brazilian} as -% alternative for \Lopt{brazil}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{breton}{\input{breton.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Added \Lopt{british} as an -% alternative for \Lopt{english} with a preference for british -% hyphenation} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added the \Lopt{bulgarian} option} -% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/07}{Added option \Lopt{canadian}} -% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{canadien}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{british}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bulgarian}{\input{bulgarian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{canadian}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{canadien}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{catalan}{\input{catalan.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{croatian}{\input{croatian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{czech}{\input{czech.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{danish}{\input{danish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{dutch}{\input{dutch.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/06}{Added the \Lopt{estonian} option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{english}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\input{esperanto.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{estonian}{\input{estonian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{finnish}{\input{finnish.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The \babel\ support or French used to be stored in -% \file{francais.ldf}; therefor the \LaTeX2.09 option used to be -% \Lopt{francais}. The hyphenation patterns may be loaded as either -% `french' or as `francais'. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/10}{Now use the file \file{frenchb.ldf} -% from Daniel Flipo for french support} -% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added option \Lopt{frenchb} an -% alias for \Lopt{francais}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{francais}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{frenchb}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% With \LaTeXe\ we can now also use the option \Lopt{french} and -% still call the file \file{frenchb.ldf}. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load \file{french.ldf} when it is -% found instead of \file{frenchb.ldf}} -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/07}{\emph{only} load -% \file{frenchb.ldf}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{french}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}% -\DeclareOption{galician}{\input{galician.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{german}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{germanb}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/31}{Added the \Lopt{greek} option} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{polutonikogreek} -% option} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{set the correct language attribute -% for polutoniko greek} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{greek}{\input{greek.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{% - \input{greek.ldf}% - \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Added the \Lopt{hebrew} option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{hebrew}{% - \input{rlbabel.def}% - \input{hebrew.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \Lopt{hungarian} is just a synonym for \Lopt{magyar} -%^^A \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/21}{Added the \Lopt{kannada} option} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Added the \Lopt{icelandic} option} -%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/30}{{Added the \Lopt{nagari} option} -% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added the \Lopt{latin} option} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{interlingua} -% option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\input{magyar.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{icelandic}{\input{icelandic.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{interlingua}{\input{interlingua.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{irish}{\input{irish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{italian}{\input{italian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{latin}{\input{latin.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\input{lsorbian.ldf}} -%^^A\DeclareOption{kannada}{\input{kannada.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{magyar}{\input{magyar.ldf}} -%^^A\DeclareOption{nagari}{\input{nagari.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% `New' German orthography, including Austrian variant: -% \changes{babel~3.6p}{1999/04/10}{Added the \Lopt{ngerman} and -% \Lopt{naustrian} options} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added the \Lopt{samin} option} -% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added the \Lopt{newzealand} option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{norsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{samin}{\input{samin.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% For Norwegian two spelling variants are provided. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{polish}{\input{polish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{portuges}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{romanian}{\input{romanian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{russian}{\input{russianb.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/02/07}{Added the \Lopt{sanskrit} option} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/21}{Added the \Lopt{ukrainian} option} -%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/30}{Added the \Lopt{tamil} option} -% \begin{macrocode} -%^^A\DeclareOption{sanskrit}{\input{sanskrit.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{scottish}{\input{scottish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{serbian}{\input{serbian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{slovak}{\input{slovak.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{slovene}{\input{slovene.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{spanish}{\input{spanish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{swedish}{\input{swedish.ldf}} -%^^A\DeclareOption{tamil}{\input{tamil.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{turkish}{\input{turkish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\input{ukraineb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\input{usorbian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{welsh}{\input{welsh.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added options \Lopt{UKenglish} and -% \Lopt{USenglish}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\input{english.ldf}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For all those languages for which the option name is the same as -% the name of the language specific file we specify a default -% option, which tries to load the file specified. If this doesn't -% succeed an error is signalled. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/12}{Added default option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption*{% - \InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.ldf}{}{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - Language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf not found}{% - Maybe you misspelled the language option?}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Another way to extend the list of `known' options for \babel\ is -% to create the file \file{bblopts.cfg} in which one can add -% option declarations. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added the possibility to have a -% \file{bblopts.cfg} file with option declarations.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}{% - \typeout{*************************************^^J% - * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J% - *}% - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Apart from all the language options we also have a few options -% that influence the behaviour of language definition files. -% -% The following options don't do anything themselves, they are just -% defined in order to make it possible for language definition -% files to check if one of them was specified by the user. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{Added options to influence -% behaviour of active acute and grave accents} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{activeacute}{} -\DeclareOption{activegrave}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% The next option tells \babel\ to leave shorthand characters -% active at the end of processing the package. This is \emph{not} -% the default as it can cause problems with other packages, but for -% those who want to use the shorthand characters in the preamble of -% their documents this can help. -% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Added option -% \Lopt{KeepShorthandsActive}} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{No longer define the control -% sequence \cs{KeepShorthandsActive}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The options have to be processed in the order in which the user -% specified them: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions* -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/13}{Added an error message for when no -% language option was specified} -% In order to catch the case where the user forgot to specify a -% language we check whether |\bbl@main@language|, has become -% defined. If not, no language has been loaded and an error -% message is displayed. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{No longer us a redefinition of an -% internal macro, just check \cs{bbl@main@language} and load -% \file{babel.def}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined - \PackageError{babel}{% - You haven't specified a language option}{% - You need to specify a language, either as a global - option\MessageBreak - or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space - command; \MessageBreak - You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.} -% \end{macrocode} -% To prevent undefined command errors when the user insists on -% continuing we load \file{babel.def} here. He should expect more -% errors though. -% \begin{macrocode} - \input{babel.def} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\substitutefontfamily} -% The command |\substitutefontfamily| creates an \file{.fd} file on -% the fly. The first argument is an encoding mnemonic, the second -% and third arguments are font family names. -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/15}{create file with lowercase name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{% - \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}% - \immediate\write15{% - \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}% - [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day} - \space generated font description file]^^J - \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J - }% - \closeout15 - } -% \end{macrocode} -% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The Kernel of Babel} -% -% The kernel of the \babel\ system is stored in either -% \file{hyphen.cfg} or \file{switch.def} and \file{babel.def}. The -% file \file{hyphen.cfg} is a file that can be loaded into the -% format, which is necessary when you want to be able to switch -% hyphenation patterns. The file \file{babel.def} contains some -% \TeX\ code that can be read in at run time. When \file{babel.def} -% is loaded it checks if \file{hyphen.cfg} is in the format; if -% not the file \file{switch.def} is loaded. -% -% Because plain \TeX\ users might want to use some of the features -% of the \babel{} system too, care has to be taken that plain \TeX\ -% can process the files. For this reason the current format will -% have to be checked in a number of places. Some of the code below -% is common to plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX, some of it is for the -% \LaTeX\ case only. -% -% When the command |\AtBeginDocument| doesn't exist we assume that -% we are dealing with a plain-based format. In that case the file -% \file{plain.def} is needed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel|core> -\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% But we need to use the second part of \file{plain.def} (when we -% load it from \file{switch.def}) which we can do by defining -% |\adddialect|. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/20}{define \cs{adddialect} before -% loading \file{plain.def} here} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<kernel&!patterns> \def\adddialect{} - \input plain.def\relax -\fi -%</kernel|core> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Check the presence of the command |\iflanguage|, if it is -% undefined read the file \file{switch.def}. -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\ifx\iflanguage\@undefined - \input switch.def\relax -\fi -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/02}{Removed \cs{babel@core@loaded}, no -% longer needed with the advent of \cs{LdfInit}} -% -% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 1)} -% -% The first thing we need to do is to determine, at -% |\begin{document}|, which latin fontencoding to use. -% -% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from -% \file{.ldf} files} -% When text is being typeset in an encoding other than `latin' -% (\texttt{OT1} or \texttt{T1}), it would be nice to still have -% Roman numerals come out in the Latin encoding. -% So we first assume that the current encoding at the end -% of processing the package is the Latin encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}} -% \end{macrocode} -% But this might be overruled with a later loading of the package -% \pkg{fontenc}. Therefor we check at the execution of -% |\begin{document}| whether it was loaded with the \Lopt{T1} -% option. The normal way to do this (using |\@ifpackageloaded|) is -% disabled for this package. Now we have to revert to parsing the -% internal macro |\@filelist| which contains all the filenames -% loaded. -% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/15}{Use T1 encoding when it is a known -% encoding} -% \changes{babel~3.6m}{1999/04/06}{Can't use \cs{@ifpackageloaded} -% need to parse \cs{@filelist}} -% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{moved checking for fontenc right to -% the top of \file{babel.sty}} -% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{Added a check for `manual' selection -% of \texttt{T1} encoding, without loading \pkg{fontenc}} -% \changes{babel~3.6q}{1999/04/12}{Better solution then parsing -% \cs{@filelist}, use \cs{@ifl@aded}} -% \changes{babel~3.6u}{1999/04/20}{Moved this code to -% \file{babel.def}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \gdef\latinencoding{OT1}% - \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one - \xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}% - \else - \@ifl@aded{def}{t1enc}{\xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}}{}% - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\latintext} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from -% \file{.ldf} files} -% Then we can define the command |\latintext| which is a -% declarative switch to a latin font-encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{% - \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textlatin} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from -% \file{.ldf} files} -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/19}{added \cs{leavevmode} to prevent a -% paragraph starting \emph{inside} the group} -% \changes{babel~3.7k}{2003/10/12}{Use \cs{DeclareTextFontComand}} -% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the -% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches -% it operates in a local scope. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@undefined\DeclareTextFontCommand - \DeclareRobustCommand{\textlatin}[1]{\leavevmode{\latintext #1}} -\else - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext} -\fi -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We also need to redefine a number of commands to ensure that the -% right font encoding is used, but this can't be done before -% \file{babel.def} is loaded. -% \changes{babel~3.6o}{1999/04/07}{Moved the rest of the font encoding -% related definitions to their original place} -% -% \subsection{Multiple languages} -% -% With \TeX\ version~3.0 it has become possible to load hyphenation -% patterns for more than one language. This means that some extra -% administration has to be taken care of. The user has to know for -% which languages patterns have been loaded, and what values of -% |\language| have been used. -% -% Some discussion has been going on in the \TeX\ world about how to -% use |\language|. Some have suggested to set a fixed standard, -% i.\,e., patterns for each language should \emph{always} be loaded -% in the same location. It has also been suggested to use the -% \textsc{iso} list for this purpose. Others have pointed out that -% the \textsc{iso} list contains more than 256~languages, which -% have \emph{not} been numbered consecutively. -% -% I think the best way to use |\language|, is to use it -% dynamically. This code implements an algorithm to do so. It uses -% an external file in which the person who maintains a \TeX\ -% environment has to record for which languages he has hyphenation -% patterns \emph{and} in which files these are stored\footnote{This -% is because different operating systems sometimes use \emph{very} -% different file-naming conventions.}. When hyphenation exceptions -% are stored in a separate file this can be indicated by naming -% that file \emph{after} the file with the hyphenation patterns. -% -% This ``configuration file'' can contain empty lines and comments, -% as well as lines which start with an equals (\texttt{=}) -% sign. Such a line will instruct \LaTeX\ that the hyphenation -% patterns just processed have to be known under an alternative -% name. Here is an example: -% \begin{verbatim} -% % File : language.dat -% % Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load. -% english english.hyphenations -% =british -% -% dutch hyphen.dutch exceptions.dutch % Nederlands -% german hyphen.ger -% \end{verbatim} -% -% As the file \file{switch.def} needs to be read only once, we -% check whether it was read before. If it was, the command -% |\iflanguage| is already defined, so we can stop processing. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel> -%<*!patterns> -\expandafter\ifx\csname iflanguage\endcsname\relax \else -\expandafter\endinput -\fi -%</!patterns> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\language} -% Plain \TeX\ version~3.0 provides the primitive |\language| that -% is used to store the current language. When used with a pre-3.0 -% version this function has to be implemented by allocating a -% counter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\language\@undefined - \csname newcount\endcsname\language -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\last@language} -% Another counter is used to store the last language defined. For -% pre-3.0 formats an extra counter has to be allocated, -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined - \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language -% \end{macrocode} -% plain \TeX\ version 3.0 uses |\count 19| for this purpose. -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \countdef\last@language=19 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\addlanguage} -% -% To add languages to \TeX's memory plain \TeX\ version~3.0 -% supplies |\newlanguage|, in a pre-3.0 environment a similar macro -% has to be provided. For both cases a new macro is defined here, -% because the original |\newlanguage| was defined to be |\outer|. -% -% For a format based on plain version~2.x, the definition of -% |\newlanguage| can not be copied because |\count 19| is used for -% other purposes in these formats. Therefor |\addlanguage| is -% defined using a definition based on the macros used to define -% |\newlanguage| in plain \TeX\ version~3.0. -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added a \texttt{\%}, removed -% \texttt{by}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined - \def\addlanguage#1{% - \global\advance\last@language \@ne - \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi - \else - \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}% - \fi - \global\chardef#1\last@language - \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For formats based on plain version~3.0 the definition of -% |\newlanguage| can be simply copied, removing |\outer|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\adddialect} -% The macro |\adddialect| can be used to add the name of a dialect -% or variant language, for which an already defined hyphenation -% table can be used. -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{relax}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\adddialect#1#2{% - \global\chardef#1#2\relax - \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\iflanguage} -% Users might want to test (in a private package for instance) -% which language is currently active. For this we provide a test -% macro, |\iflanguage|, that has three arguments. It checks -% whether the first argument is a known language. If so, it -% compares the first argument with the value of |\language|. Then, -% depending on the result of the comparison, it executes either the -% second or the third argument. -% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and -% \cs{@esphack}} -% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/21}{Added comment character after -% \texttt{\#2}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous -% \cs{expandafter}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of -% \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Rephrased \cs{ifnum} test} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/10}{Now evaluate the \cs{ifnum} test -% \emph{after} the \cs{fi} from the \cs{ifx} test and use -% \cs{@firstoftwo} and \cs{@secondoftwo}} -% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/29}{Slight enhancement: added braces -% around first argument of \cs{bbl@afterfi}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\iflanguage#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage} -% The macro |\selectlanguage| checks whether the language is -% already defined before it performs its actual task, which is to -% update |\language| and activate language-specific definitions. -% -% To allow the call of |\selectlanguage| either with a control -% sequence name or with a simple string as argument, we have to use -% a trick to delete the optional escape character. -% -% To convert a control sequence to a string, we use the |\string| -% primitive. Next we have to look at the first character of this -% string and compare it with the escape character. Because this -% escape character can be changed by setting the internal integer -% |\escapechar| to a character number, we have to compare this -% number with the character of the string. To do this we have to -% use \TeX's backquote notation to specify the character as a -% number. -% -% If the first character of the |\string|'ed argument is the -% current escape character, the comparison has stripped this -% character and the rest in the `then' part consists of the rest of -% the control sequence name. Otherwise we know that either the -% argument is not a control sequence or |\escapechar| is set to a -% value outside of the character range~$0$--$255$. -% -% If the user gives an empty argument, we provide a default -% argument for |\string|. This argument should expand to nothing. -% -% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/06/06}{Made \cs{selectlanguage} -% robust} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Modified to allow arguments that -% start with an escape character} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Simplified the modification to -% allow the use in a \cs{write} command} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Store the name of the current -% language in a control sequence instead of passing the whole macro -% construct to strip the escape character in the argument of -% \cs{selectlanguage }.} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/30}{Added a missing percent character} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Moved check for escape character -% one level down in the expansion} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\selectlanguage{% - \noexpand\protect - \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Because the command |\selectlanguage| could be used in a moving -% argument it expands to \verb*=\protect\selectlanguage =. -% Therefor, we have to make sure that a macro |\protect| exists. -% If it doesn't it is |\let| to |\relax|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% As \LaTeX$\:$2.09 writes to files \textit{expanded} whereas -% \LaTeXe\ takes care \textit{not} to expand the arguments of -% |\write| statements we need to be a bit clever about the way we -% add information to \file{.aux} files. Therefor we introduce the -% macro |\xstring| which should expand to the right amount of -% |\string|'s. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\documentclass\@undefined - \def\xstring{\string\string\string} -\else - \let\xstring\string -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/04}{Changed the name of the internal -% macro to \cs{selectlanguage }.} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/05}{Added an extra level of expansion to -% separate the switching mechanism from writing to aux files} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Use \cs{aftergroup} to keep the -% language grouping correct in auxiliary files {PR3091}} -% Since version 3.5 \babel\ writes entries to the auxiliary files in -% order to typeset table of contents etc. in the correct language -% environment. -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language} -% \emph{But} when the language change happens \emph{inside} a group -% the end of the group doesn't write anything to the auxiliary -% files. Therefor we need \TeX's |aftergroup| mechanism to help -% us. The command |\aftergroup| stores the token immediately -% following it to be executed when the current group is closed. So -% we define a temporary control sequence |\bbl@pop@language| to be -% executed at the end of the group. It calls |\bbl@set@language| -% with the name of the current language as its argument. -% -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Introduce the language stack -% mechanism} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@language@stack} -% The previous solution works for one level of nesting groups, but -% as soon as more levels are used it is no longer adequate. For -% that case we need to keep track of the nested languages using a -% stack mechanism. This stack is called |\bbl@language@stack| and -% initially empty. -% \begin{macrocode} -\xdef\bbl@language@stack{} -% \end{macrocode} -% When using a stack we need a mechanism to push an element on the -% stack and to retrieve the information afterwards. -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@push@language} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language} -% The stack is simply a list of languagenames, separated with a `+' -% sign; the push function can be simple: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@push@language{% - \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Retrieving information from the stack is a little bit less simple, -% as we need to remove the element from the stack while storing it -% in the macro |\languagename|. For this we first define a helper function. -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@lang} -% This macro stores its first element (which is delimited by the -% `+'-sign) in |\languagename| and stores the rest of the string -% (delimited by `-') in its third argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{% - \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% The reason for the somewhat weird arrangement of arguments to the -% helper function is the fact it is called in the following way: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@pop@language{% - \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack -% \end{macrocode} -% This means that before |\bbl@pop@lang| is executed \TeX\ first -% \emph{expands} the stack, stored in |\bbl@language@stack|. The -% result of that is that the argument string of |\bbl@pop@lang| -% contains one or more language names, each followed by a `+'-sign -% (zero language names won't occur as this macro will only be -% called after something has been pushed on the stack) followed by -% the `-'-sign and finally the reference to the stack. -% \begin{macrocode}$$ - \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Once the name of the previous language is retrieved from the stack, -% it is fed to |\bbl@set@language| to do the actual work of -% switching everything that needs switching. -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Now use the language stack mechanism} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% - \bbl@push@language - \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language - \bbl@set@language{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/12}{Removed the superfluous empty -% definition of \cs{bbl@pop@language}} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@set@language} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Now also define \cs{languagename} -% at this level} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Macro \cs{bbl@set@language} -% introduced} -% The macro |\bbl@set@language| takes care of switching the language -% environment \emph{and} of writing entries on the auxiliary files. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@set@language#1{% - \edef\languagename{% - \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty - \else \string#1\@empty\fi}% - \select@language{\languagename}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We also write a command to change the current language in the -% auxiliary files. -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{write the language change to the -% auxiliary files} -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@filesw - \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% First, check if the user asks for a known language. If so, -% update the value of |\language| and call |\originalTeX| -% to bring \TeX\ in a certain pre-defined state. -% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and -% \cs{@esphack}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous -% \cs{expandafter}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of -% \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added \cs{relax} as first command -% to stop an expansion if \cs{protect} is empty} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/07}{Check for the existence of -% \cs{date...} instead of \cs{l@...}} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Check for the existence of both -% \cs{l@...} and \cs{date...}} -% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\select@language#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax - \@noopterr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \originalTeX -% \end{macrocode} -% The name of the language is stored in the control sequence -% |\languagename|. The contents of this control sequence could be -% tested in the following way: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \edef\tmp{\string english} -% \ifx\languagename\tmp -% ... -% \else -% ... -% \fi -% \end{verbatim} -% The construction with |\string| is necessary because -% |\languagename| returns the name with characters of category code -% \texttt{12} (other). Then we have to \emph{re}define -% |\originalTeX| to compensate for the things that have been -% activated. To save memory space for the macro definition of -% |\originalTeX|, we construct the control sequence name for the -% |\noextras|\langvar\ command at definition time by expanding the -% |\csname| primitive. -% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/06/06}{Replaced \cs{gdef} with \cs{def}} -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{\cs{originalTeX} should only be -% executed once} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added three \cs{expandafter}s -% to save macro space for \cs{originalTeX}} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Moved definition of -% \cs{originalTeX} before \cs{extras\langvar}} -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to -% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX - \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname - \let\originalTeX\@empty}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to -% `none' before switching on the extras} -% \begin{macrocode} - \languageshorthands{none}% - \babel@beginsave -% \end{macrocode} -% Now activate the language-specific definitions. This is done by -% constructing the names of three macros by concatenating three -% words with the argument of |\selectlanguage|, and calling these -% macros. -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Separated the setting of the -% hyphenmin values} -% \begin{macrocode} - \csname captions#1\endcsname - \csname date#1\endcsname - \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% The switching of the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and -% |\righthyphenmin| is somewhat different. First we save their -% current values, then we check if |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is -% defined. If it is not, we set default values (2 and 3), otherwise -% the values in |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| will be used. -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/05}{Addedd default setting of hyphenmin -% parameters} -% \begin{macrocode} - \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin - \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage} -% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment can be used as an -% alternative to using the |\selectlanguage| declarative -% command. When you are typesetting a document which mixes -% left-to-right and right-to-left typesetting you have to use this -% environment in order to let things work as you expect them to. -% -% The first thing this environment does is store the name of the -% language in |\languagename|; it then calls -% \verb*=\selectlanguage = to switch on everything that is needed for -% this language The |\ignorespaces| command is necessary to hide -% the environment when it is entered in horizontal mode. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{environment added} -% \changes{babel~3.5e}{1995/07/07}{changed name} -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{rely on \cs{selectlanguage } to -% keep track of the nesting} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\otherlanguage#1{% - \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}% - \ignorespaces - } -% \end{macrocode} -% The |\endotherlanguage| part of the environment calls -% |\originalTeX| to restore (most of) the settings and tries to -% hide itself when it is called in horizontal mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\endotherlanguage{% - \originalTeX - \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% -% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage*} -% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment is meant to be used when a -% large part of text from a different language needs to be typeset, -% but without changing the translation of words such as `figure'. -% -% This environment makes use of |\foreign@language|. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/29}{environment added} -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{% - \foreign@language{#1}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% At the end of the environment we need to switch off the extra -% definitions. The grouping mechanism of the environment will take -% care of resetting the correct hyphenation rules. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{% - \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\foreignlanguage} -% The |\foreignlanguage| command is another substitute for the -% |\selectlanguage| command. This command takes two arguments, the -% first argument is the name of the language to use for typesetting -% the text specified in the second argument. -% -% Unlike |\selectlanguage| this command doesn't switch -% \emph{everything}, it only switches the hyphenation rules and the -% extra definitions for the language specified. It does this within -% a group and assumes the |\extras|\langvar\ command doesn't make -% any |\global| changes. The coding is very similar to part of -% |\selectlanguage|. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Macro added} -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Added executing \cs{originalTeX}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname} -\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{% - \begingroup - \originalTeX - \foreign@language{#1}% - #2% - \csname noextras#1\endcsname - \endgroup - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\foreign@language} -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{New macro} -% This macro does the work for |\foreignlanguage| and the -% \Lenv{otherlanguage*} environment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\foreign@language#1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First we need to store the name of the language and check that it -% is a known language. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\languagename{#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If it is we can select the proper hyphenation table and switch on -% the extra definitions for this language. -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to -% `none' before switching on the extras} -% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{use \cs{bbl@patterns}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \languageshorthands{none}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we set the left- and right hyphenmin variables. -% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Added \cs{relax} to prevent -% disappearance of the first token after this command.} -% \begin{macrocode} - \csname extras#1\endcsname - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@patterns} -% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Macro added} -% This macro selects the hyphenation patterns by changing the -% \cs{language} register. If special hyphenation patterns -% are available specifically for the current font encoding, -% use them instead of the default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@patterns#1{% - \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \csname l@#1\endcsname - \else - \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{hyphenrules} -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{2000/01/28}{Added environment hyphenrules} -% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select -% \emph{just} the hyphenation rules. This environment does -% \emph{not} change |\languagename| and when the hyphenation rules -% specified were not loaded it has no effect. -% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Also set the hyphenmin paramters to -% the correct value (PR3997)} -% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hyphenrules#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{#1}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - } -\def\endhyphenrules{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\providehyphenmins} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{added macro} -% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language -% definition files to provide a \emph{default} setting for the -% hyphenation parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. If -% the macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is already defined this command -% has no effect. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\set@hyphenmins} -% This macro sets the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and -% |\righthyphenmin|. It expects two values as its argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LdfInit} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added} -% This macro is defined in two versions. The first version is to be -% part of the `kernel' of \babel, ie. the part that is loaded in -% the format; the second version is defined in \file{babel.def}. -% The version in the format just checks the category code of the -% ampersand and then loads \file{babel.def}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\LdfInit{% - \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ - \catcode`\@=11\relax - \input babel.def\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% The category code of the ampersand is restored and the macro -% calls itself again with the new definition from -% \file{babel.def} -% \begin{macrocode} - \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax - \LdfInit} -%</kernel> -% \end{macrocode} -% The second version of this macro takes two arguments. The first -% argument is the name of the language that will be defined in the -% language definition file; the second argument is either a control -% sequence or a string from which a control sequence should be -% constructed. The existence of the control sequence indicates that -% the file has been processed before. -% -% At the start of processing a language definition file we always -% check the category code of the ampersand. We make sure that it is -% a `letter' during the processing of the file. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\def\LdfInit#1#2{% - \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ - \catcode`\@=11\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Another character that needs to have the correct category code -% during processing of language definition files is the equals sign, -% `=', because it is sometimes used in constructions with the -% |\let| primitive. Therefor we store its current catcode and -% restore it later on. -% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{make sure the equals sign has its -% default category code} -% \begin{macrocode} - \chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\= - \catcode`\==12\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we check whether we should perhaps stop the processing of -% this file. To do this we first need to check whether the second -% argument that is passed to |\LdfInit| is a control sequence. We -% do that by looking at the first token after passing |#2| through -% |string|. When it is equal to |\@backslashchar| we are dealing -% with a control sequence which we can compare with |\@undefined|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\bbl@tempa\relax - \expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar - \expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil - \ifx#2\@undefined - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If so, we call |\ldf@quit| (but after the end of this |\if| -% construction) to set the main language, restore the category code -% of the @-sign and call |\endinput|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}} - \fi - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% When |#2| was \emph{not} a control sequence we construct one and -% compare it with |\relax|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax - \else - \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}} - \fi - \fi - \bbl@tempa -% \end{macrocode} -% Finally we check |\originalTeX|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined - \let\originalTeX\@empty - \else - \originalTeX - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ldf@quit} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Macro added} -% This macro interrupts the processing of a language definition file. -% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of -% the equals sign} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ldf@quit#1{% - \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% - \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax - \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax - \endinput -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ldf@finish} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added} -% This macro takes one argument. It is the name of the language -% that was defined in the language definition file. -% -% We load the local configuration file if one is present, we set -% the main language (taking into account that the argument might be -% a control sequence that needs to be expanded) and reset the -% category code of the @-sign. -% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of -% the equals sign} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ldf@finish#1{% - \loadlocalcfg{#1}% - \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% - \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax - \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% After the preamble of the document the commands |\LdfInit|, -% |\ldf@quit| and |\ldf@finish| are no longer needed. Therefor -% they are turned into warning messages in \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@onlypreamble\LdfInit -\@onlypreamble\ldf@quit -\@onlypreamble\ldf@finish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\main@language} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{\cs{main@language} now also sets -% \cs{languagename} and \cs{l@languagename} for use by other -% packages in the preamble of a document} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@main@language} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added} -% This command should be used in the various language definition -% files. It stores its argument in |\bbl@main@language|; to be used -% to switch to the correct language at the beginning of the -% document. -% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\main@language#1{% - \def\bbl@main@language{#1}% - \let\languagename\bbl@main@language - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% The default is to use English as the main language. -% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not -% loaded in the format \cs{l@english} might not be defined; assume -% english is language 0} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@english\@undefined - \let\l@english\z@ -\fi -\main@language{english} -% \end{macrocode} -% We also have to make sure that some code gets executed at the -% beginning of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}} -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\originalTeX} -% The macro|\originalTeX| should be known to \TeX\ at this moment. -% As it has to be expandable we |\let| it to |\@empty| instead of -% |\relax|. -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to -% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel> -\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Because this part of the code can be included in a format, we -% make sure that the macro which initialises the save mechanism, -% |\babel@beginsave|, is not considered to be undefined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@nolanerr} -% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{PackageError} in \LaTeXe\ -% mode} -% \begin{macro}{\@nopatterns} -% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Macro added} -% The \babel\ package will signal an error when a documents tries -% to select a language that hasn't been defined earlier. When a -% user selects a language for which no hyphenation patterns were -% loaded into the format he will be given a warning about that -% fact. We revert to the patterns for |\language|=0 in that case. -% In most formats that will be (US)english, but it might also be -% empty. -% \begin{macro}{\@noopterr} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Macro added} -% When the package was loaded without options not everything will -% work as expected. An error message is issued in that case. -% -% When the format knows about |\PackageError| it must be \LaTeXe, -% so we can safely use its error handling interface. Otherwise -% we'll have to `keep it simple'. -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Added a percent sign to remove -% unwanted white space} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/15}{Added \cs{@activated} to log active -% characters} -% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/19}{Added missing closing brace} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\PackageError\@undefined - \def\@nolanerr#1{% - \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}% - \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}} - \def\@nopatterns#1{% - \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}% - \message{the language `#1'}% - \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \def\@noopterr#1{% - \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage} - \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}} - \def\@activated#1{% - \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}} -\else - \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}% - {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} - \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}% - {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak - the language `#1'\MessageBreak - I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}% - {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}} - \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{% - \PackageInfo{babel}{% - Making #1 an active character}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following code is meant to be read by ini\TeX\ because it -% should instruct \TeX\ to read hyphenation patterns. To this end -% the \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{patterns} can be used to -% include this code in the file \file{hyphen.cfg}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*patterns> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Removed the use of -% \cs{patterns@loaded} altogether} -% -% \begin{macro}{\process@line} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro} -% Each line in the file \file{language.dat} is processed by -% |\process@line| after it is read. The first thing this macro does -% is to check whether the line starts with \texttt{=}. -% When the first token of a line is an \texttt{=}, the macro -% |\process@synonym| is called; otherwise the macro -% |\process@language| will continue. -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Simplified code, removing -% \cs{bbl@eq@}} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{added an extra argument in order to -% prevent a trailing space from becoming part of the control -% sequence when defining a synonym (PR 2851)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\process@line#1#2 #3/{% - \ifx=#1 - \process@synonym#2 / - \else - \process@language#1#2 #3/% - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\process@synonym} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro} -% This macro takes care of the lines which start with an -% \texttt{=}. It needs an empty token register to begin with. -% \begin{macrocode} -\toks@{} -\def\process@synonym#1 /{% - \ifnum\last@language=\m@ne -% \end{macrocode} -% When no languages have been loaded yet, the name following the -% \texttt{=} will be a synonym for hyphenation register 0. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname0\relax - \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language0} -% \end{macrocode} -% As no hyphenation patterns are read in yet, we can not yet set -% the hyphenmin parameters. Therefor a command to do so is stored -% in a token register and executed when the first pattern file has -% been processed. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Use a token register to temporarily -% store a command to set hyphenmin parameters for the synonym which -% is defined \emph{before} the first pattern file is processed} -% \begin{macrocode} - \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Otherwise the name will be a synonym for the language loaded last. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language - \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language} -% \end{macrocode} -% We also need to copy the hyphenmin parameters for the synonym. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Now also store hyphenmin parameters -% for language synonyms} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\process@language} -% The macro |\process@language| is used to process a non-empty line -% from the `configuration file'. It has three arguments, each -% delimited by white space. The third argument is optional, -% so a |/| character is expected to delimit the last -% argument. The first argument is the `name' of a language; the -% second is the name of the file that contains the patterns. The -% optional third argument is the name of a file containing -% hyphenation exceptions. -% -% The first thing to do is call |\addlanguage| to allocate a -% pattern register and to make that register `active'. -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous -% \cs{expandafter}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/21}{Reinserted \cs{expandafter}} -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/27}{Added the collection of pattern -% names.} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Also store \cs{languagename} for -% possible later use in \cs{process@synonym}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\process@language#1 #2 #3/{% - \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname - \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname - \def\languagename{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then the `name' of the language that will be loaded now is -% added to the token register |\toks8|. and finally -% the pattern file is read. -% \begin{macrocode} - \global\toks8\expandafter{\the\toks8#1, }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Allow for the encoding to be used -% as part of the language name} -% For some hyphenation patterns it is needed to load them with a -% specific font encoding selected. This can be specified in the -% file \file{language.dat} by adding for instance `\texttt{:T1}' to -% the name of the language. The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the -% font encoding from the language name and stores it in -% |\bbl@hyph@enc|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \begingroup - \bbl@get@enc#1:\@@@ - \ifx\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty - \else - \fontencoding{\bbl@hyph@enc}\selectfont - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Added code to detect assignments to -% left- and righthyphenmin in the patternfile.} -% Some pattern files contain assignments to |\lefthyphenmin| and -% |\righthyphenmin|. \TeX\ does not keep track of these -% assignments. Therefor we try to detect such assignments and -% store them in the |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| macro. When no -% assignments were made we provide a default setting. -% \begin{macrocode} - \lefthyphenmin\m@ne -% \end{macrocode} -% Some pattern files contain changes to the |\lccode| en |\uccode| -% arrays. Such changes should remain local to the language; -% therefor we process the pattern file in a group; the |\patterns| -% command acts globally so its effect will be remembered. -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Read pattern files in a group} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/05}{need to set hyphenmin values -% globally} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Set \cs{lefthyphenmin} to \cs{m@ne} -% \emph{inside} the group; explicitly set the hyphenmin parameters -% for language 0} -% \begin{macrocode} - \input #2\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we globally store the settings of |\lefthyphenmin| and -% |\righthyphenmin| and close the group. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/25}{Only set hyphenmin values when the -% pattern file changed them} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne - \else - \expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{% - \the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}% - \fi - \endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% If the counter |\language| is still equal to zero we set the -% hyphenmin parameters to the values for the language loaded on -% pattern register 0. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\the\language=\z@ - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Now execute the contents of token register zero as it may -% contain commands which set the hyphenmin parameters for synonyms -% that were defined before the first pattern file is read in. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Added the execution of the contents -% of \cs{toks@}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \the\toks@ - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Empty the token register after use. -% \begin{macrocode} - \toks@{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% When the hyphenation patterns have been processed we need to see -% if a file with hyphenation exceptions needs to be read. This is -% the case when the third argument is not empty and when it does -% not contain a space token. -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Added optional reading of file with -% hyphenation exceptions} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/25}{Use \cs{empty} instead of -% \cs{@empty} as the latter is unknown in plain} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% - \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty - \else - \ifx\bbl@tempa\space - \else - \input #3\relax - \fi - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@get@enc} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Added macro} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@hyph@enc} -% The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the font encoding from the -% language name and stores it in |\bbl@hyph@enc|. It uses delimited -% arguments to achieve this. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2\@@@{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First store both arguments in temporary macros, -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@tempa{#1}% - \def\bbl@tempb{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% then, if the second argument was empty, no font encoding was -% specified and we're done. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty - \let\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% But if the second argument was \emph{not} empty it will now have -% a superfluous colon attached to it which we need to remove. This -% done by feeding it to |\bbl@get@enc|. The string that we are -% after will then be in the first argument and be stored in -% |\bbl@tempa|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@get@enc#2\@@@ - \edef\bbl@hyph@enc{\bbl@tempa}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\readconfigfile} -% The configuration file can now be opened for reading. -% \begin{macrocode} -\openin1 = language.dat -% \end{macrocode} -% -% See if the file exists, if not, use the default hyphenation file -% \file{hyphen.tex}. The user will be informed about this. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifeof1 - \message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space - I will try the file hyphen.tex} - \input hyphen.tex\relax - \def\l@english{0}% - \def\languagename{english}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Pattern registers are allocated using count register -% |\last@language|. Its initial value is~0. The definition of the -% macro |\newlanguage| is such that it first increments the count -% register and then defines the language. In order to have the -% first patterns loaded in pattern register number~0 we initialize -% |\last@language| with the value~$-1$. -% -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/05/21}{Removed use of \cs{toks0}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \last@language\m@ne -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We now read lines from the file until the end is found -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \loop -% \end{macrocode} -% -% While reading from the input, it is useful to switch off -% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping -% off spaces from the contents of the control sequence. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \endlinechar\m@ne - \read1 to \bbl@line - \endlinechar`\^^M -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Empty lines are skipped. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\bbl@line\@empty - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we add a space and a |/| character to the end of -% |\bbl@line|. This is needed to be able to recognize the third, -% optional, argument of |\process@language| later on. -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Now add a \cs{space} and a / -% character} -% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Store the name of the language -% loaded in register 0 (PR 4039)} -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space/}% - \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line - \ifx\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined - \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\languagename - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Check for the end of the file. To avoid a new \texttt{if} -% control sequence we create the necessary |\iftrue| or |\iffalse| -% with the help of |\csname|. But there is one complication with -% this approach: when skipping the \texttt{loop...repeat} \TeX\ has -% to read |\if|/|\fi| pairs. So we have to insert a `dummy' -% |\iftrue|. -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Removed the extra \texttt{if} -% control sequence} -% \begin{macrocode} - \iftrue \csname fi\endcsname - \csname if\ifeof1 false\else true\fi\endcsname - \repeat -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Reactivate the default patterns, -% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Also restore the name of the -% language in \cs{languagenme} (PR 4039)} -% \begin{macrocode} - \language=0 - \let\languagename\bbl@defaultlanguage - \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% and close the configuration file. -% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Free macro space for -% \cs{process@language}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\closein1 -% \end{macrocode} -% Also remove some macros from memory -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\process@language\@undefined -\let\process@synonym\@undefined -\let\process@line\@undefined -\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined -\let\bbl@tempb\@undefined -\let\bbl@eq@\@undefined -\let\bbl@line\@undefined -\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/08}{Moved the fiddling with \cs{dump} -% to \file{bbplain.dtx} as it is no longer needed for \LaTeX} -% We add a message about the fact that babel is loaded in the -% format and with which language patterns to the \cs{everyjob} -% register. -% \changes{babel~3.6h}{1997/01/23}{Added a couple of \cs{expandafter}s -% to copy the contents of \cs{toks8} into \cs{everyjob} instead of -% the reference} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\addto@hook\@undefined -\else - \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{% - \expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\the\toks8 loaded.}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Here the code for ini\TeX\ ends. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</patterns> -%</kernel> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Support for active characters} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@special} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% The macro |\bbl@add@special| is used to add a new character (or -% single character control sequence) to the macro |\dospecials| -% (and |\@sanitize| if \LaTeX\ is used). -% -% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we -% redefine the macros |\do| and |\@makeother| to add themselves and -% the given character without expansion. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core|shorthands> -\def\bbl@add@special#1{\begingroup - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% - \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}% -% \end{macrocode} -% To add the character to the macros, we expand the original macros -% with the additional character inside the redefinition of the -% macros. Because |\@sanitize| can be undefined, we put the -% definition inside a conditional. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else - \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}% - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The macro |\x| contains at this moment the following:\\ -% |\endgroup\def\dospecials{|\textit{old contents}% -% |\do|\meta{char}|}|.\\ -% If |\@sanitize| is defined, it contains an additional definition -% of this macro. The last thing we have to do, is the expansion of -% |\x|. Then |\endgroup| is executed, which restores the old -% meaning of |\x|, |\do| and |\@makeother|. After the group is -% closed, the new definition of |\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize|) is -% assigned. -% \begin{macrocode} - \x} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@remove@special} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% The companion of the former macro is |\bbl@remove@special|. It -% is used to remove a character from the set macros |\dospecials| -% and |\@sanitize|. -% -% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we define -% a help macro |\x|, which expands to empty if the characters -% match, otherwise it expands to its nonexpandable input. Because -% \TeX\ inserts a |\relax|, if the corresponding |\else| or |\fi| -% is scanned before the comparison is evaluated, we provide a `stop -% sign' which should expand to nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@remove@special#1{\begingroup - \def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty - \else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% With the help of this macro we define |\do| and |\make@other|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\do{\x\do}% - \def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The rest of the work is similar to |\bbl@add@special|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else - \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}% - \fi}% - \x} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Shorthands} -% -% \begin{macro}{\initiate@active@char} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/03}{Renamed macro} -% A language definition file can call this macro to make a -% character active. This macro takes one argument, the character -% that is to be made active. When the character was already active -% this macro does nothing. Otherwise, this macro defines the -% control sequence |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the -% character in its `normal state' and it defines the active -% character to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char} by default -% (\m{char} being the character to be made active). Later its -% definition can be changed to expand to |\active@char|\m{char} -% by calling |\bbl@activate{|\m{char}|}|. -% -% For example, to make the double quote character active one could -% have the following line in a language definition file: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \initiate@active@char{"} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterelse} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterfi} -% Because the code that is used in the handling of active -% characters may need to look ahead, we take extra care to `throw' -% it over the |\else| and |\fi| parts of an -% |\if|-statement\footnote{This code is based on code presented in -% TUGboat vol. 12, no2, June 1991 in ``An expansion Power Lemma'' -% by Sonja Maus.}. These macros will break if another |\if...\fi| -% statement appears in one of the arguments. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Made \cs{bbl@afterelse} and -% \cs{bbl@afterfi} \cs{long}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} -\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/02/23}{Commented out \c{peek@token} and -% \cs{test@token} as shorthands are made expandable again} -% -% \begin{macro}{\peek@token} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/06}{macro added} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1998/03/10}{Renamed \cs{test@token} to -% \cs{bbl@test@token} to prevent a clash with Arab\TeX} -% To prevent error messages when a shorthand, which -% normally takes an argument, sees a |\par|, or |}|, or similar -% tokens, we need to be able to `peek' at what is coming up next in -% the input stream. Depending on the category code of the token -% that is seen, we need to either continue the code for the active -% character, or insert the non-active version of that character in -% the output. The macro |\peek@token| therefore takes two -% arguments, with which it constructs the control sequence to -% expand next. It |\let|'s |\bbl@nexta| and |\bbl@nextb| to the two -% possible macros. This is necessary for |\bbl@test@token| to take -% the right decision. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\peek@token#1#2{% -% \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@nexta\csname #1\string#2\endcsname -% \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@nextb -% \csname system@active\string#2\endcsname -% \futurelet\bbl@token\bbl@test@token} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@test@token} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/06}{macro added} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1998/03/10}{renamed \cs{bbl@token} to -% \cs{bbl@test@token} to prevent a clash with Arab\TeX} -% When the result of peeking at the next token has yielded a token -% with category `letter', `other' or `active' it is safe to proceed -% with evaluating the code for the shorthand. When a token is found -% with any other category code proceeding is unsafe and therefor -% the original shorthand character is inserted in the output. The -% macro that calls |\bbl@test@token| needs to setup |\bbl@nexta| -% and |\bbl@nextb| in order to achieve this. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\bbl@test@token{% -% \let\bbl@next\bbl@nexta -% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token a% -% \else -% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token=% -% \else -% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token\noexpand\bbl@next -% \else -% \let\bbl@next\bbl@nextb -% \fi -% \fi -% \fi -% \bbl@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -%^^A -%^^A Tekens met mathcode >"8000 zorgen voor problemen. -%^^A hier kan op getest worden door ze catcode13 te geven -%^^A en te vragen of er een undefined macro ontstaat: -%^^A \ifx#1\undefined{matchcode<"8000}\else get active definition -%^^A using \let \fi -%^^A -% The macro |\initiate@active@char| takes all the necessary actions -% to make its argument a shorthand character. The real work is -% performed once for each character. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/30}{Only execute -% \cs{initiate@active@char} once for each character} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\initiate@active@char#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string##1\endcsname\relax - \bbl@afterfi{\@initiate@active@char{#1}}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that the definition of |\@initiate@active@char| needs an -% active character, for this the |~| is used. Some of the changes -% we need, do not have to become available later on, so we do it -% inside a group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \catcode`\~\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\@initiate@active@char##1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% If the character is already active we provide the default -% expansion under this shorthand mechanism. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Deal correctly with already active -% characters, provide top level expansion and define all lower -% level expansion macros outside of the \cs{else} branch.} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/13}{Top level expansion of -% \cs{normal@char char} where char is already active, should be the -% expansion of the active character, not the active character -% itself as this causes an endless loop} -% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/08/19}{Make sure the active character -% doesn't get expanded more then once by the \cs{edef} by adding -% \cs{expandafter}\cs{strip@prefix}\cs{meaning}} -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/06}{previous change was rubbish; use -% \cs{let} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifcat\noexpand##1\noexpand~\relax - \@ifundefined{normal@char\string##1}{% - \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname##1% - \expandafter\gdef - \expandafter##1% - \expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}{}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Otherwise we write a message in the transcript file, -% \begin{macrocode} - \@activated{##1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% and define |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the character in -% its default state. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{##1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% If we are making the right quote active we need to change -% |\pr@m@s| as well. -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added a check for right quote and -% adapt \cs{pr@m@s} if necessary} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{The redefinition needs to take -% place one level higher, \cs{prim@s} needs to be redefined.} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx##1'% - \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s -% \end{macrocode} -% Also, make sure that a single |'| in math mode `does the right -% thing'. -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Insert a check for math mode in the -% definition of \cs{normal@char'}} -% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/02}{use \cs{textormath} to get rid of -% the \cs{fi} (PR 3266)} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{% - \textormath{##1}{^\bgroup\prim@s}}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% If we are using the caret as a shorthand character special care -% should be taken to make sure math still works. Therefor an extra -% level of expansion is introduced with a check for math mode on -% the upper level. -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Introduced an extra level of -% expansion in the definition of an active caret} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx##1^% - \gdef\bbl@act@caret{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string^\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname - \fi}% - \fi} - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% To prevent problems with the loading of other packages after -% \babel\ we reset the catcode of the character at the end of the -% package. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/01}{Restore the category code of a -% shorthand char at end of package} -% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Made restoring of the category code -% of shorthand characters optional} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{Use \cs{@ifpackagewith} to -% determine whether shorthand characters need to remain active} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}{}{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\catcode`\noexpand##1\the\catcode`##1}% - \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we set the lowercase code of the |~| equal to that of the -% character to be made active and execute the rest of the code -% inside a |\lowercase| `environment'. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{store the \cs{lccode} of the tie -% before changing it} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempcnta=\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`##1% - \lowercase{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Make the character active and add it to |\dospecials| and -% |\@sanitize|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \catcode`~\active - \expandafter\bbl@add@special - \csname \string##1\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Also re-activate it again at |\begin{document}|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{% - \catcode`##1\active -% \end{macrocode} -% We also need to make sure that the shorthands are active during -% the processing of the \file{.aux} file. Otherwise some citations -% may give unexpected results in the printout when a shorthand was -% used in the optional argument of |\bibitem| for example. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Make shorthands active during -% \file{.aux} file processing} -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{% - \string\catcode`##1\string\active}% - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Define the character to expand to -% \begin{center} -% |\active@prefix| \m{char} |\normal@char|\m{char} -% \end{center} -% (where |\active@char|\m{char} is \emph{one} control sequence!). -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{restore the \cs{lccode} of the tie} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\gdef - \expandafter~% - \expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% For the active caret we first expand to |\bbl@act@caret| in order -% to be able to handle math mode correctly. -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Make an exception for the active -% caret which needs an extra level of expansion} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx##1^% - \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{\bbl@act@caret}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% We define the first level expansion of |\active@char|\m{char} to -% check the status of the |@safe@actives| flag. If it is set to -% true we expand to the `normal' version of this character, -% otherwise we call |\@active@char|\m{char}. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{% - \if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname - \fi}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The next level of the code checks whether a user has defined a -% shorthand for himself with this character. First we check for a -% single character shorthand. If that doesn't exist we check for a -% shorthand with an argument. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the user-level active char -% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{user@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\user@group##1% - {user@active@arg\string##1}{language@active\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% When there is also no user-level shorthand with an argument we -% will check whether there is a language defined shorthand for -% this active character. Before the next token is absorbed as -% argument we need to make sure that this is safe. Therefor -% |\peek@token| is called to decide that. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether -% it is safe to proceed} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token} -% again and make the \cs{...active@arg...} commands \cs{long}} -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in -% order to prevent it from breaking up} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again} -% \begin{macrocode} - \long\@namedef{user@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse - \csname language@active\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@% - \endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% In order to do the right thing when a shorthand with an argument -% is used by itself at the end of the line we provide a definition -% for the case of an empty argument. For that case we let the -% shorthand character expand to its non-active self. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{\user@group @sh@\string##1@@}{% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Like the shorthands that can be defined by the user, a language -% definition file can also define shorthands with and without an -% argument, so we need two more macros to check if they exist. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the language-level active char -% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{language@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\language@group##1% - {language@active@arg\string##1}{system@active\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether -% it is safe to proceed} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token} -% again} -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in -% order to prevent it from breaking up} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again} -% \begin{macrocode} - \long\@namedef{language@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse - \csname system@active\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@% - \endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% And the same goes for the system level. -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{system@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\system@group##1% - {system@active@arg\string##1}{normal@char\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% When no shorthands were found the `normal' version of the active -% character is inserted. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether -% it is safe to proceed} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token} -% again} -% \begin{macrocode} - \long\@namedef{system@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% When a shorthand combination such as |''| ends up in a heading -% \TeX\ would see |\protect'\protect'|. To prevent this from -% happening a shorthand needs to be defined at user level. -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/09}{Added an extra shorthand -% combination on user level to catch an interfering \cs{protect}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{user@sh@\string##1@\string\protect@}{% - \csname user@active\string##1\endcsname}% - }% - }\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@sh@select} -% This command helps the shorthand supporting macros to select how -% to proceed. Note that this macro needs to be expandable as do all -% the shorthand macros in order for them to work in expansion-only -% environments such as the argument of |\hyphenation|. -% -% This macro expects the name of a group of shorthands in its first -% argument and a shorthand character in its second argument. It -% will expand to either |\bbl@firstcs| or |\bbl@scndcs|. Hence two -% more arguments need to follow it. -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Added command} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\active@prefix} -% The command |\active@prefix| which is used in the expansion of -% active characters has a function similar to |\OT1-cmd| in that it -% |\protect|s the active character whenever |\protect| is -% \emph{not} |\@typeset@protect|. -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{\cs{@protected@cmd} has vanished -% from \file{ltoutenc.dtx}} -% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/17}{Added handling of the situation -% where \cs{protect} is set to \cs{@unexpandable@protect}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\active@prefix#1{% - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% When |\protect| is set to |\@unexpandable@protect| we make sure -% that the active character is als \emph{not} expanded by inserting -% |\noexpand| in front of it. The |\@gobble| is needed to remove -% a token such as |\activechar:| (when the double colon was the -% active character to be dealt with). -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterfi\noexpand#1\@gobble - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterfi\protect#1\@gobble - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@safe@actives} -% In some circumstances it is necessary to be able to change the -% expansion of an active character on the fly. For this purpose the -% switch |@safe@actives| is available. The setting of this switch -% should be checked in the first level expansion of -% |\active@char|\m{char}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@safe@actives -\@safe@activesfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@restore@actives} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{New macro added} -% When the output routine kicks in while the -% active characters were made ``safe'' this must be undone in -% the headers to prevent unexpected typeset results. For this -% situation we define a command to make them ``unsafe'' again. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@activate} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro} -% -% This macro takes one argument, like |\initiate@active@char|. The -% macro is used to change the definition of an active character to -% expand to |\active@char|\m{char} instead of -% |\normal@char|\m{char}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@activate#1{% - \expandafter\def - \expandafter#1\expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix - \expandafter#1\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@deactivate} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro} -% This macro takes one argument, like |\bbl@activate|. The macro -% doesn't really make a character non-active; it changes its -% definition to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@deactivate#1{% - \expandafter\def - \expandafter#1\expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix - \expandafter#1\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@firstcs} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@scndcs} -% These macros have two arguments. They use one of their arguments -% to build a control sequence from. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname} -\def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\declare@shorthand} -% The command |\declare@shorthand| is used to declare a shorthand -% on a certain level. It takes three arguments: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item a name for the collection of shorthands, i.e. `system', or -% `dutch'; -% \item the character (sequence) that makes up the shorthand, -% i.e. |~| or |"a|; -% \item the code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered. -% \end{enumerate} -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Make a `note' when a shorthand with -% an argument is defined.} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/23}{Make it possible to distinguish the -% constructed control sequences for the case with argument} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{We need to support shorthands with -% and without argument in different groups; added the name of the -% group to the storage macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil} -\def\@decl@short#1#2#3\@nil#4{% - \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% - \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty - \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs - \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}% - \else - \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs - \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textormath} -% Some of the shorthands that will be declared by the language -% definition files have to be usable in both text and mathmode. To -% achieve this the helper macro |\textormath| is provided. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\textormath#1#2{% - \ifmmode - \bbl@afterelse#2% - \else - \bbl@afterfi#1% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\user@group} -% \begin{macro}{\language@group} -% \begin{macro}{\system@group} -% The current concept of `shorthands' supports three levels or -% groups of shorthands. For each level the name of the level or -% group is stored in a macro. The default is to have a user group; -% use language group `english' and have a system group called -% `system'. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/24}{Have a user group called `user' by -% default} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\user@group{user} -\def\language@group{english} -\def\system@group{system} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\useshorthands} -% This is the user level command to tell \LaTeX\ that user level -% shorthands will be used in the document. It takes one argument, -% the character that starts a shorthand. -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2001/11/11}{When \TeX\ has seen a character -% its category code is fixed; need to use a `stand-in' for the -% call of \cs{bbl@activate}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\useshorthands#1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First note that this is user level. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\user@group{user}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then initialize the character for use as a shorthand character. -% \begin{macrocode} - \initiate@active@char{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Now that \TeX\ has seen the character its category code is -% fixed, but for the actions of |\bbl@activate| to succeed we need -% it to be active. Hence the trick with the |\lccode| to circumvent -% this. -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/09/11}{The change from 11/112001 was -% incomplete} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempcnta\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`#1% - \lowercase{\catcode`~\active\bbl@activate{~}}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\defineshorthand} -% Currently we only support one group of user level shorthands, -% called `user'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\defineshorthand{\declare@shorthand{user}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\languageshorthands} -% A user level command to change the language from which shorthands -% are used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\aliasshorthand} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{New command} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\aliasshorthand#1#2{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First the new shorthand needs to be initialized, -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax - \ifx\document\@notprerr - \@notshorthand{#2} - \else - \initiate@active@char{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we need to use the |\lccode| trick to make the new shorthand -% behave like the old one. Therefore we save the current |\lccode| -% of the |~|-character and restore it later. Then we |\let| the new -% shorthand character be equal to the original. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempcnta\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`#2% - \lowercase{\let~#1}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta - \fi - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@notshorthand} -% \changes{v3.8d}{2004/11/20}{Error message added} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@notshorthand#1{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - The character `\string #1' should be made - a shorthand character;\MessageBreak - add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to - the preamble.\MessageBreak - I will ignore your instruction}{}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\shorthandon} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} -% \begin{macro}{\shorthandoff} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} -% The first level definition of these macros just passes the -% argument on to |\bbl@switch@sh|, adding |\@nil| at the end to -% denote the end of the list of characters. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{on}#1\@nil} -\newcommand*\shorthandoff[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{off}#1\@nil} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} -% The macro |\bbl@switch@sh| takes the list of characters apart one -% by one and subsequently switches the category code of the -% shorthand character according to the first argument of -% |\bbl@switch@sh|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2#3\@nil{% -% \end{macrocode} -% But before any of this switching takes place we make sure that -% the character we are dealing with is known as a shorthand -% character. If it is, a macro such as |\active@char"| should -% exist. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{active@char\string#2}{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - The character '\string #2' is not a shorthand character - in \languagename}{% - Maybe you made a typing mistake?\MessageBreak - I will ignore your instruction}}{% - \csname bbl@switch@sh@#1\endcsname#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Now that, as the first character in the list has been taken care -% of, we pass the rest of the list back to |\bbl@switch@sh|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx#3\@empty\else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh{#1}#3\@nil - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh@off} -% All that is left to do is define the actual switching -% macros. Switching off is easy, we just set the category code to -% `other' (12). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@switch@sh@off#1{\catcode`#112\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh@on} -% But switching the shorthand character back on is a bit more -% tricky. It involves making sure that we have an active character -% to begin with when the macro is being defined. It also needs the -% use of |\lowercase| and |\lccode| trickery to get everything to -% work out as expected. And to keep things local that need to -% remain local a group is opened, which is closed as soon as |\x| -% gets executed. -% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added a group in order to protect -% the current lowercase code of the tilde (PR 3851)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \catcode`\~\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\bbl@switch@sh@on##1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`~=`##1% - \lowercase{\endgroup - \catcode`~\active - }% - }% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% The next operation makes the above definition effective. -% \begin{macrocode} -\x -% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% To prevent problems with constructs such as |\char"01A| when the -% double quote is made active, we define a shorthand on -% system level. -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Replaced 16 system shorthands to -% deal with hex numbers by one} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{"}{\csname normal@char\string"\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When the right quote is made active we need to take care of -% handling it correctly in mathmode. Therefore we define a -% shorthand at system level to make it expand to a non-active right -% quote in textmode, but expand to its original definition in -% mathmode. (Note that the right quote is `active' in mathmode -% because of its mathcode.) -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added a system shorthand for the -% right quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{'}{% - \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}% - {\sp\bgroup\prim@s}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When the left quote is made active we need to take care of -% handling it correctly when it is followed by for instance an open -% brace token. Therefore we define a shorthand at system level to -% make it expand to a non-active left quote. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/06}{Added a system shorthand for the -% left quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{`}{\csname normal@char\string`\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@prim@s} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/01}{Need to redefine \cs{prim@s} as -% well as plain \TeX's definition uses \cs{next}} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pr@m@s} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added macro} -% One of the internal macros that are involved in substituting -% |\prime| for each right quote in mathmode is |\prim@s|. This -% checks if the next character is a right quote. When the right -% quote is active, the definition of this macro needs to be adapted -% to look for an active right quote. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@prim@s{% - \prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s} -\begingroup - \catcode`\'\active\let'\relax - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \ifx'\@let@token - \expandafter\pr@@@s - \else - \ifx^\@let@token - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pr@@@t - \else - \egroup - \fi - \fi}% - } -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</core|shorthands> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Normally the |~| is active and expands to \verb*=\penalty\@M\ =. -% When it is written to the \file{.aux} file it is written -% expanded. To prevent that and to be able to use the character |~| -% as a start character for a shorthand, it is redefined here as a -% one character shorthand on system level. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{No need to reset the category code -% of the tilde as \cs{initiate@active@char} now correctly deals -% with active characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\initiate@active@char{~} -\declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ } -\bbl@activate{~} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\OT1dqpos} -% \begin{macro}{\T1dqpos} -% The position of the double quote character is different for the -% OT1 and T1 encodings. It will later be selected using the -% |\f@encoding| macro. Therefor we define two macros here to store -% the position of the character in these encodings. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname OT1dqpos\endcsname{127} -\expandafter\def\csname T1dqpos\endcsname{4} -% \end{macrocode} -% When the macro |\f@encoding| is undefined (as it is in plain -% \TeX) we define it here to expand to \texttt{OT1} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\f@encoding\@undefined - \def\f@encoding{OT1} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Language attributes} -% -% Language attributes provide a means to give the user control over -% which features of the language definition files he wants to -% enable. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1998/07/02}{Added support for language -% attributes} -% \begin{macro}{\languageattribute} -% The macro |\languageattribute| checks whether its arguments are -% valid and then activates the selected language attribute. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\languageattribute[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First check whether the language is known. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Than process each attribute in the list. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{% -% \end{macrocode} -% We want to make sure that each attribute is selected only once; -% therefor we store the already selected attributes in -% |\bbl@known@attribs|. When that control sequence is not yet -% defined this attribute is certainly not selected before. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined - \in@false - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we need to see if the attribute occurs in the list of -% already selected attributes. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-\bbl@attr,}% - {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}% - \bbl@tempa - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% When the attribute was in the list we issue a warning; this might -% not be the users intention. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifin@ - \PackageWarning{Babel}{% - You have more than once selected the attribute - '\bbl@attr'\MessageBreak for language #1}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% When we end up here the attribute is not selected before. So, we -% add it to the list of selected attributes and execute the -% associated \TeX-code. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempa{% - \noexpand\bbl@add@list\noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{#1-\bbl@attr}}% - \bbl@tempa - \edef\bbl@tempa{#1-\bbl@attr}% - \expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes% - {\csname#1@attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}% - {\@attrerr{#1}{\bbl@attr}}% - \fi - } - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@onlypreamble\languageattribute -% \end{macrocode} -% The error text to be issued when an unknown attribute is -% selected. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}% - {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@declare@ttribute} -% This command adds the new language/attribute combination to the -% list of known attributes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{% - \bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then it defines a control sequence to be executed when the -% attribute is used in a document. The result of this should be -% that the macro |\extras...| for the current language is extended, -% otherwise the attribute will not work as its code is removed from -% memory at |\begin{document}|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifattributeset} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/12}{macro added} -% This internal macro has 4 arguments. It can be used to interpret -% \TeX\ code based on whether a certain attribute was set. This -% command should appear inside the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| -% because the attributes are set in the document preamble, -% \emph{after} \babel\ is loaded. -% -% The first argument is the language, the second argument the -% attribute being checked, and the third and fourth arguments are -% the true and false clauses. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First we need to find out if any attributes were set; if not -% we're done. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined - \in@false - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% The we need to check the list of known attributes. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-#2,}% - {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}% - \bbl@tempa - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% When we're this far |\ifin@| has a value indicating if the -% attribute in question was set or not. Just to be safe the code to -% be executed is `thrown over the |\fi|'. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifin@ - \bbl@afterelse#3% - \else - \bbl@afterfi#4% - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@list} -% This internal macro adds its second argument to a comma -% separated list in its first argument. When the list is not -% defined yet (or empty), it will be initiated -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@add@list#1#2{% - \ifx#1\@undefined - \def#1{#2}% - \else - \ifx#1\@empty - \def#1{#2}% - \else - \edef#1{#1,#2}% - \fi - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifknown@ttrib} -% An internal macro to check whether a given language/attribute is -% known. The macro takes 4 arguments, the language/attribute, the -% attribute list, the \TeX-code to be executed when the attribute -% is known and the \TeX-code to be executed otherwise. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@ifknown@ttrib#1#2{% -% \end{macrocode} -% We first assume the attribute is unknown. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\bbl@tempa\@secondoftwo -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we loop over the list of known attributes, trying to find a -% match. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\bbl@tempb:=#2\do{% - \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\expandafter,\bbl@tempb,}{,#1,}% - \ifin@ -% \end{macrocode} -% When a match is found the definition of |\bbl@tempa| is changed. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo - \else - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Finally we execute |\bbl@tempa|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@tempa -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@clear@ttribs} -% This macro removes all the attribute code from \LaTeX's memory at -% |\begin{document}| time (if any is present). -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{When \cs{bbl@attributes} is -% undefined this should be a no-op} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@clear@ttribs{% - \ifx\bbl@attributes\@undefined\else - \@for\bbl@tempa:=\bbl@attributes\do{% - \expandafter\bbl@clear@ttrib\bbl@tempa. - }% - \let\bbl@attributes\@undefined - \fi - } -\def\bbl@clear@ttrib#1-#2.{% - \expandafter\let\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname\@undefined} -\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@clear@ttribs} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions} -% -% To save the meaning of control sequences using |\babel@save|, we -% use temporary control sequences. To save hash table entries for -% these control sequences, we don't use the name of the control -% sequence to be saved to construct the temporary name. Instead we -% simply use the value of a counter, which is reset to zero each -% time we begin to save new values. This works well because we -% release the saved meanings before we begin to save a new set of -% control sequence meanings (see |\selectlanguage| and -% |\originalTeX|). -% -% \begin{macro}{\babel@savecnt} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% \begin{macro}{\babel@beginsave} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% The initialization of a new save cycle: reset the counter to -% zero. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\babel@beginsave{\babel@savecnt\z@} -% \end{macrocode} -% Before it's forgotten, allocate the counter and initialize all. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\babel@savecnt -\babel@beginsave -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\babel@save} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% The macro |\babel@save|\meta{csname} saves the current meaning of -% the control sequence \meta{csname} to -% |\originalTeX|\footnote{\cs{originalTeX} has to be -% expandable, i.\,e.\ you shouldn't let it to \cs{relax}.}. -% To do this, we let the current meaning to a temporary control -% sequence, the restore commands are appended to |\originalTeX| and -% the counter is incremented. -% \changes{babel~3.2c}{1992/03/17}{missing backslash led to errors -% when executing \cs{originalTeX}} -% \changes{babel~3.2d}{1992/07/02}{saving in \cs{babel@i} and -% restoring from \cs{@babel@i} doesn't work very well...} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\babel@save#1{% - \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname #1\relax - \begingroup - \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX \let#1=}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand - \csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}% - \x - \advance\babel@savecnt\@ne} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\babel@savevariable} -% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} -% The macro |\babel@savevariable|\meta{variable} saves the value of -% the variable. \meta{variable} can be anything allowed after the -% |\the| primitive. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\babel@savevariable#1{\begingroup - \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX #1=}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \the#1\relax}}% - \x} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchspacing} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% Some languages need to have |\frenchspacing| in effect. Others -% don't want that. The command |\bbl@frenchspacing| switches it on -% when it isn't already in effect and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| -% switches it off if necessary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@frenchspacing{% - \ifnum\the\sfcode`\.=\@m - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax - \else - \frenchspacing - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing - \fi} -\let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Support for extending macros} -% -% \begin{macro}{\addto} -% For each language four control sequences have to be defined that -% control the language-specific definitions. To be able to add -% something to these macro once they have been defined the macro -% |\addto| is introduced. It takes two arguments, a \meta{control -% sequence} and \TeX-code to be added to the \meta{control -% sequence}. -% -% If the \meta{control sequence} has not been defined before it is -% defined now. -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Added macro} -% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/04}{Changed to use toks register} -% \changes{babel~3.6b}{1996/12/30}{Also check if control sequence -% expands to \cs{relax}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\addto#1#2{% - \ifx#1\@undefined - \def#1{#2}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% The control sequence could also expand to |\relax|, in which case -% a circular definition results. The net result is a stack overflow. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx#1\relax - \def#1{#2}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Otherwise the replacement text for the \meta{control sequence} is -% expanded and stored in a token register, together with the -% \TeX-code to be added. Finally the \meta{control sequence} is -% \emph{re}defined, using the contents of the token register. -% \begin{macrocode} - {\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}% - \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}% - \fi - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages} -% -% \begin{macro}{\allowhyphens} -% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language -% definition files} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \cs{allowhyphens} a no-op for -% T1 fontencoding} -% This macro makes hyphenation possible. Basically its definition -% is nothing more than |\nobreak| |\hskip| \texttt{0pt plus -% 0pt}\footnote{\TeX\ begins and ends a word for hyphenation at a -% glue node. The penalty prevents a linebreak at this glue node.}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@t@one{T1} -\def\allowhyphens{% - \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi} -\def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\set@low@box} -% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language -% definition files} -% The following macro is used to lower quotes to the same level as -% the comma. It prepares its argument in box register~0. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}% - \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@% - \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\save@sf@q} -% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language -% definition files} -% The macro |\save@sf@q| is used to save and reset the current -% space factor. -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/19}{PR3119, don't start a paragraph in -% a local group} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\save@sf@q #1{\leavevmode - \begingroup - \edef\@SF{\spacefactor \the\spacefactor}#1\@SF - \endgroup -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@disc} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/24}{Macro moved from language -% definition files} -% For some languages the macro |\bbl@disc| is used to ease the -% insertion of discretionaries for letters that behave `abnormally' -% at a breakpoint. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@disc#1#2{% - \nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Repaired a typo (itlaic, PR1652)} -% -% \subsection{Making glyphs available} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on -% \filedate.} makes a number of glyphs available that either do not -% exist in the \texttt{OT1} encoding and have to be `faked', or -% that are not accessible through \file{T1enc.def}. -% -% \subsection{Quotation marks} -% -% \begin{macro}{\quotedblbase} -% In the \texttt{T1} encoding the opening double quote at the -% baseline is available as a separate character, accessible via -% |\quotedblbase|. In the \texttt{OT1} encoding it is not -% available, therefor we make it available by lowering the normal -% open quote character to the baseline. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{% - \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}% - \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\quotesinglbase} -% We also need the single quote character at the baseline. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{% - \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}% - \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft} -% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright} -% The guillemet characters are not available in \texttt{OT1} -% encoding. They are faked. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode - \ll - \else - \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\allowhyphens}% - \fi} -\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode - \gg - \else - \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\allowhyphens}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotright}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotright}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglleft} -% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglright} -% The single guillemets are not available in \texttt{OT1} -% encoding. They are faked. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode - <% - \else - \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\allowhyphens}% - \fi} -\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode - >% - \else - \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\allowhyphens}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Letters} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ij} -% \begin{macro}{\IJ} -% The dutch language uses the letter `ij'. It is available in -% \texttt{T1} encoded fonts, but not in the \texttt{OT1} encoded -% fonts. Therefor we fake it for the \texttt{OT1} encoding. -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Changed the kerning in the faked ij -% to match the dc-version of it} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{% - \allowhyphens i\kern-0.02em j\allowhyphens} -\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{% - \allowhyphens I\kern-0.02em J\allowhyphens} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188} -\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ij}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\IJ}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\IJ}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dj} -% \begin{macro}{\DJ} -% The croatian language needs the letters |\dj| and |\DJ|; they are -% available in the \texttt{T1} encoding, but not in the -% \texttt{OT1} encoding by default. -% -% Some code to construct these glyphs for the \texttt{OT1} encoding -% was made available to me by Stipcevic Mario, -% (\texttt{stipcevic@olimp.irb.hr}). -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/28}{New definition of \cs{dj}, see PR -% 2058} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\crrtic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.3em} -\def\crttic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.33em} -% -\def\ddj@{% - \setbox0\hbox{d}\dimen@=\ht0 - \advance\dimen@1ex - \dimen@.45\dimen@ - \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@ii.5ex - \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crrtic@}}}} -\def\DDJ@{% - \setbox0\hbox{D}\dimen@=.55\ht0 - \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@ii.15ex % correction for the dash position - \advance\dimen@ii-.15\fontdimen7\font % correction for cmtt font - \dimen\thr@@\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen7\font\dimen@ - \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crttic@}}}} -% -\DeclareTextCommand{\dj}{OT1}{\ddj@ d} -\DeclareTextCommand{\DJ}{OT1}{\DDJ@ D} -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or -% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\dj}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\dj}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\DJ}{% - \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\DJ}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SS} -% For the \texttt{T1} encoding |\SS| is defined and selects a -% specific glyph from the font, but for other encodings it is not -% available. Therefor we make it available here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\SS}{OT1}{SS} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\SS}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\SS}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks} -% -% Shorthands are provided for a number of different quotation -% marks, which make them usable both outside and inside mathmode. -% -% \begin{macro}{\glq} -% \begin{macro}{\grq} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grq} -% dependent on the font encoding} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{glq} fontencoding -% dependent as well} -% The `german' single quotes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glq} -% \end{macrocode} -% The definition of |\grq| depends on the fontencoding. With -% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{OT1}{% - \save@sf@q{\kern-.0125em% - \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}% - \kern.07em\relax}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\glqq} -% \begin{macro}{\grqq} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grqq} -% dependent on the font encoding} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{grqq} fontencoding -% dependent as well} -% The `german' double quotes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% The definition of |\grqq| depends on the fontencoding. With -% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{OT1}{% - \save@sf@q{\kern-.07em% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}% - \kern.07em\relax}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\flq} -% \begin{macro}{\frq} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of -% \cs{quilsingl...}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these -% definitions} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flq} and \cs{frq} -% fontencoding dependent} -% The `french' single guillemets. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\flqq} -% \begin{macro}{\frqq} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of -% \cs{quillemot...}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these -% definitions} -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flqq} and \cs{frqq} -% fontencoding dependent} -% The `french' double guillemets. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{OT1}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{T1}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Umlauts and trema's} -% -% The command |\"| needs to have a different effect for different -% languages. For German for instance, the `umlaut' should be -% positioned lower than the default position for placing it over -% the letters a, o, u, A, O and U. When placed over an e, i, E or I -% it can retain its normal position. For Dutch the same glyph is -% always placed in the lower position. -% -% \begin{macro}{\umlauthigh} -% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to -% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.} -% \begin{macro}{\umlautlow} -% To be able to provide both positions of |\"| we provide two -% commands to switch the positioning, the default will be -% |\umlauthigh| (the normal positioning). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\umlauthigh{% - \def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup% - \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname - ##1\allowhyphens\egroup}% - \let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta} -\def\umlautlow{% - \def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}} -\def\umlautelow{% - \def\bbl@umlaute{\protect\lower@umlaut}} -\umlauthigh -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lower@umlaut} -% The command |\lower@umlaut| is used to position the |\"| closer -% the the letter. -% -% We want the umlaut character lowered, nearer to the letter. To do -% this we need an extra \meta{dimen} register. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname U@D\endcsname\relax - \csname newdimen\endcsname\U@D -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The following code fools \TeX's \texttt{make\_accent} procedure -% about the current x-height of the font to force another placement -% of the umlaut character. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lower@umlaut#1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First we have to save the current x-height of the font, because -% we'll change this font dimension and this is always done -% globally. -% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to -% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.} -% \begin{macrocode} - \leavevmode\bgroup - \U@D 1ex% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we compute the new x-height in such a way that the umlaut -% character is lowered to the base character. The value of -% \texttt{.45ex} depends on the \MF\ parameters with which the -% fonts were built. (Just try out, which value will look best.) -% \begin{macrocode} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{% - \expandafter\char\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname}% - \dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@ -% \end{macrocode} -% If the new x-height is too low, it is not changed. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Finally we call the |\accent| primitive, reset the old x-height -% and insert the base character in the argument. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{Added a \cs{allowhyphens}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/06/25}{removed \cs{allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname - \fontdimen5\font\U@D #1% - \egroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For all vowels we declare |\"| to be a composite command which -% uses |\bbl@umlauta| or |\bbl@umlaute| to position the umlaut -% character. We need to be sure that these definitions override the -% ones that are provided when the package \pkg{fontenc} with -% option \Lopt{OT1} is used. Therefor these declarations are -% postponed until the beginning of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{a}{\bbl@umlauta{a}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{e}{\bbl@umlaute{e}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{\i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{o}{\bbl@umlauta{o}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{u}{\bbl@umlauta{u}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{A}{\bbl@umlauta{A}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{E}{\bbl@umlaute{E}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{I}{\bbl@umlaute{I}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The redefinition of the style commands} -% -% The rest of the code in this file can only be processed by -% \LaTeX, so we check the current format. If it is plain \TeX, -% processing should stop here. But, because of the need to limit -% the scope of the definition of |\format|, a macro that is used -% locally in the following |\if|~statement, this comparison is done -% inside a group. To prevent \TeX\ from complaining about an -% unclosed group, the processing of the command |\endinput| is -% deferred until after the group is closed. This is accomplished by -% the command |\aftergroup|. -% \begin{macrocode} -{\def\format{lplain} -\ifx\fmtname\format -\else - \def\format{LaTeX2e} - \ifx\fmtname\format - \else - \aftergroup\endinput - \fi -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that we're sure that the code is seen by \LaTeX\ only, we -% have to find out what the main (primary) document style is -% because we want to redefine some macros. This is only necessary -% for releases of \LaTeX\ dated before December~1991. Therefor -% this part of the code can optionally be included in -% \file{babel.def} by specifying the \texttt{docstrip} option -% \texttt{names}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*names> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The standard styles can be distinguished by checking whether some -% macros are defined. In table~\ref{styles} an overview is given of -% the macros that can be used for this purpose. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \DeleteShortVerb{\|} -% \begin{tabular}{|lcp{8cm}|} -% \hline -% article & : & both the \verb+\chapter+ and \verb+\opening+ -% macros are undefined\\ -% report and book & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is defined and -% the \verb+\opening+ is undefined\\ -% letter & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is undefined and -% the \verb+\opening+ is defined\\ -% \hline -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{How to determine the main document style}\label{styles} -% \MakeShortVerb{\|} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \noindent The macros that have to be redefined for the -% \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles happen to be -% the same, so there is no need to distinguish between those two -% styles. -% -% \begin{macro}{\doc@style} -% First a parameter |\doc@style| is defined to identify the current -% document style. This parameter might have been defined by a -% document style that already uses macros instead of hard-wired -% texts, such as \file{artikel1.sty}~\cite{BEP}, so the existence of -% |\doc@style| is checked. If this macro is undefined, i.\,e., if -% the document style is unknown and could therefore contain -% hard-wired texts, |\doc@style| is defined to the default -% value~`0'. -% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@undefined\doc@style - \def\doc@style{0}% -% \end{macrocode} -% This parameter is defined in the following \texttt{if} -% construction (see table~\ref{styles}): -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\@undefined\opening - \ifx\@undefined\chapter - \def\doc@style{1}% - \else - \def\doc@style{2}% - \fi - \else - \def\doc@style{3}% - \fi% -\fi% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed definition of -% \cs{if@restonecol}} -% -% \subsubsection{Redefinition of macros} -% -% Now here comes the real work: we start to redefine things and -% replace hard-wired texts by macros. These redefinitions should be -% carried out conditionally, in case it has already been done. -% -% For the \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} environments we have -% in all styles: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{figurename}{\def\fnum@figure{\figurename{} \thefigure}}{} -\@ifundefined{tablename}{\def\fnum@table{\tablename{} \thetable}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The rest of the macros have to be treated differently for each -% style. When |\doc@style| still has its default value nothing -% needs to be done. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifcase \doc@style\relax -\or -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This means that \file{babel.def} is read after the -% \texttt{article} style, where no |\chapter| and |\opening| -% commands are defined\footnote{A fact that was pointed out to me -% by Nico Poppelier and was already used in Piet van Oostrum's -% document style option~\texttt{nl}.}. -% -% First we have the |\tableofcontents|, -% |\listoffigures| and |\listoftables|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{contentsname}% - {\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}% - \@starttoc{toc}}}{} - -\@ifundefined{listfigurename}% - {\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}% - \@starttoc{lof}}}{} - -\@ifundefined{listtablename}% - {\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}% - \@starttoc{lot}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then the |\thebibliography| and |\theindex| environments. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{refname}% - {\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname - \@mkboth{\uppercase{\refname}}{\uppercase{\refname}}}% - \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% - \leftmargin\labelwidth - \advance\leftmargin\labelsep - \usecounter{enumi}}% - \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}% - \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{} - -\@ifundefined{indexname}% - {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]% - \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}% - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@\let\item\@idxitem}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |abstract| environment: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{abstractname}% - {\def\abstract{\if@twocolumn - \section*{\abstractname}% - \else \small - \begin{center}% - {\bf \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}% - \end{center}% - \quotation - \fi}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And last but not least, the macro |\part|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{partname}% -{\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart - \hspace{1em}#1}\else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi - {\parindent\z@ \raggedright - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \Large \bf \partname{} \thepart - \par \nobreak - \fi - \huge \bf - #2\markboth{}{}\par}% - \nobreak - \vskip 3ex\@afterheading}% -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This is all that needs to be done for the \texttt{article} style. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\or -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next case is formed by the two styles \texttt{book} and -% \texttt{report}. Basically we have to do the same as for the -% \texttt{article} style, except now we must also change the -% |\chapter| command. -% -% The tables of contents, figures and tables: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{contentsname}% - {\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}% - \@starttoc{toc}% - \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn - \csname fi\endcsname}}{} - -\@ifundefined{listfigurename}% - {\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}% - \@starttoc{lof}% - \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn - \csname fi\endcsname}}{} - -\@ifundefined{listtablename}% - {\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \fi\chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth - {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}% - \@starttoc{lot}% - \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn - \csname fi\endcsname}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Again, the |bibliography| and |index| environments; notice that -% in this case we use |\bibname| instead of |\refname| as in the -% definitions for the \texttt{article} style. The reason for this -% is that in the \texttt{article} document style the term -% `References' is used in the definition of |\thebibliography|. In -% the \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles the term -% `Bibliography' is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{bibname}% - {\def\thebibliography#1{\chapter*{\bibname - \@mkboth{\uppercase{\bibname}}{\uppercase{\bibname}}}% - \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% - \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep - \usecounter{enumi}}% - \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}% - \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{} - -\@ifundefined{indexname}% - {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]% - \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}% - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@ \let\item\@idxitem}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here is the |abstract| environment: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{abstractname}% - {\def\abstract{\titlepage - \null\vfil - \begin{center}% - {\bf \abstractname}% - \end{center}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And last but not least the |\chapter|, |\appendix| and -% |\part| macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chaptername}{\def\@chapapp{\chaptername}}{} -% -\@ifundefined{appendixname}% - {\def\appendix{\par - \setcounter{chapter}{0}% - \setcounter{section}{0}% - \def\@chapapp{\appendixname}% - \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}}}{} -% -\@ifundefined{partname}% - {\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart - \hspace{1em}#1}\else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi - \markboth{}{}% - {\centering - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \huge\bf \partname{} \thepart - \par - \vskip 20pt \fi - \Huge \bf - #1\par}\@endpart}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\or -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we address the case where \file{babel.def} is read after the -% \texttt{letter} style. The \texttt{letter} document style -% defines the macro |\opening| and some other macros that are -% specific to \texttt{letter}. This means that we have to redefine -% other macros, compared to the previous two cases. -% -% First two macros for the material at the end of a letter, the -% |\cc| and |\encl| macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{ccname}% - {\def\cc#1{\par\noindent - \parbox[t]{\textwidth}% - {\@hangfrom{\rm \ccname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{} - -\@ifundefined{enclname}% - {\def\encl#1{\par\noindent - \parbox[t]{\textwidth}% - {\@hangfrom{\rm \enclname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The last thing we have to do here is to redefine the -% \texttt{headings} pagestyle: -% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{headtoname}% - {\def\ps@headings{% - \def\@oddhead{\sl \headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname \hfil - \@date \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}% - \def\@oddfoot{}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This was the last of the four standard document styles, so if -% |\doc@style| has another value we do nothing and just close the -% \texttt{if} construction. -% \begin{macrocode} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Here ends the code that can be optionally included when a version -% of \LaTeX\ is in use that is dated \emph{before} December~1991. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</names> -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Cross referencing macros} -% -% The \LaTeX\ book states: -% \begin{quote} -% The \emph{key} argument is any sequence of letters, digits, and -% punctuation symbols; upper- and lowercase letters are regarded as -% different. -% \end{quote} -% When the above quote should still be true when a document is -% typeset in a language that has active characters, special care -% has to be taken of the category codes of these characters when -% they appear in an argument of the cross referencing macros. -% -% When a cross referencing command processes its argument, all -% tokens in this argument should be character tokens with category -% `letter' or `other'. -% -% The only way to accomplish this in most cases is to use the trick -% described in the \TeX book~\cite{DEK} (Appendix~D, page~382). -% The primitive |\meaning| applied to a token expands to the -% current meaning of this token. For example, `|\meaning\A|' with -% |\A| defined as `|\def\A#1{\B}|' expands to the characters -% `|macro:#1->\B|' with all category codes set to `other' or -% `space'. -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added} -% To redefine a command, we save the old meaning of the macro. -% Then we redefine it to call the original macro with the -% `sanitized' argument. The reason why we do it this way is that -% we don't want to redefine the \LaTeX\ macros completely in case -% their definitions change (they have changed in the past). -% -% Because we need to redefine a number of commands we define the -% command |\bbl@redefine| which takes care of this. It creates a -% new control sequence, |\org@...| -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core|shorthands> -\def\bbl@redefine#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine@long} -% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Macro added} -% This version of |\babel@redefine| can be used to redefine |\long| -% commands such as |\ifthenelse|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefinerobust} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added} -% For commands that are redefined, but which \textit{might} be -% robust we need a slightly more intelligent macro. A robust -% command |foo| is defined to expand to |\protect|\verb*|\foo |. So -% it is necessary to check whether \verb*|\foo | exists. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname \bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}% - \else - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The result of the code above is that the command that is being -% redefined is always robust afterwards. Therefor all we need to do -% now is define \verb*|\foo |. -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/09}{Define \cs*{foo } instead of -% \cs{foo}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\newlabel} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% The macro |\label| writes a line with a |\newlabel| command -% into the |.aux| file to define labels. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\bbl@redefine\newlabel#1#2{% -% \@safe@activestrue\org@newlabel{#1}{#2}\@safe@activesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@newl@bel} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Now redefine \cs{@newl@bel} instead -% of \cs{@lbibitem} and \cs{newlabel}} -% We need to change the definition of the \LaTeX-internal macro -% |\@newl@bel|. This is needed because we need to make sure that -% shorthand characters expand to their non-active version. -% -%^^A The following lines commented out in preparation for a change -%^^A in the LaTeX definition of \@enwl@bel... JLB 2000/10/01 -%^^A -%^^A To play it safe when redefining a \LaTeX-internal command we -%^^A first check whether its definition didn't change. -%^^A \begin{macrocode} -%^^A\CheckCommand*\@newl@bel[3]{% -%^^A \@ifundefined{#1@#2}% -%^^A \relax -%^^A {\gdef \@multiplelabels {% -%^^A \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% -%^^A \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}% -%^^A \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}} -%^^A \end{macrocode} -%^^A Then we give the new definition. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First we open a new group to keep the changed setting of -% |\protect| local and then we set the |@safe@actives| switch to -% true to make sure that any shorthand that appears in any of the -% arguments immediately expands to its non-active self. -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/12/19}{Call \cs{@safe@activestrue} -% directly} -% \begin{macrocode} - {% - \@safe@activestrue - \@ifundefined{#1@#2}% - \relax - {% - \gdef \@multiplelabels {% - \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% - \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}% - }% - \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}% - }% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@testdef} -% An internal \LaTeX\ macro used to test if the labels that have -% been written on the |.aux| file have changed. It is called by -% the |\enddocument| macro. This macro needs to be completely -% rewritten, using |\meaning|. The reason for this is that in some -% cases the expansion of |\#1@#2| contains the same characters as -% the |#3|; but the character codes differ. Therefor \LaTeX\ keeps -% reporting that the labels may have changed. -% \changes{babel~3.4g}{1994/08/30}{Moved the \cs{def} inside the -% macrocode environment} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Complete rewrite of this macro as -% the same character ended up with different category codes in the -% labels that are being compared. Now use \cs{meaning}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/16}{Use \cs{strip@prefix} only on -% \cs{bbl@tempa} when it is not \cs{relax}} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/28}{Make sure that shorthands don't get -% expanded at the wrong moment.} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{\cs{@safe@activesfalse} is now -% part of the label definition} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/13}{Removed \cs{@safe@activesfalse} -% from the label definition} -% \begin{macrocode} -\CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{% - \def\reserved@a{#3}% - \expandafter \ifx \csname #1@#2\endcsname \reserved@a - \else - \@tempswatrue - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Now that we made sure that |\@testdef| still has the same -% definition we can rewrite it. First we make the shorthands -% `safe'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@testdef #1#2#3{% - \@safe@activestrue -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we use |\bbl@tempa| as an `alias' for the macro that -% contains the label which is being checked. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we define |\bbl@tempb| just as |\@newl@bel| does it. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@tempb{#3}% - \@safe@activesfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% When the label is defined we replace the definition of -% |\bbl@tempa| by its meaning. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax - \else - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% We do the same for |\bbl@tempb|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% -% \end{macrocode} -% If the label didn't change, |\bbl@tempa| and |\bbl@tempb| should -% be identical macros. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx \bbl@tempa \bbl@tempb - \else - \@tempswatrue - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ref} -% \begin{macro}{\pageref} -% The same holds for the macro |\ref| that references a label -% and |\pageref| to reference a page. So we redefine |\ref| and -% |\pageref|. While we change these macros, we make them robust as -% well (if they weren't already) to prevent problems if they should -% become expanded at the wrong moment. -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/07}{Made \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} -% robust (PR1353)} -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{use a different control sequence -% while making \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} robust} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/06}{redefine \cs*{ref } if it exists -% instead of \cs{ref}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefinerobust}} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/19}{redefine \cs{\@setref} instead of -% \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} in \LaTeXe.} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/21}{Reverse the previous change as it -% inhibits the use of active characters in labels} -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -\bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@citex} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% The macro used to cite from a bibliography, |\cite|, uses an -% internal macro, |\@citex|. -% It is this internal macro that picks up the argument(s), -% so we redefine this internal macro and leave |\cite| alone. The -% first argument is used for typesetting, so the shorthands need -% only be deactivated in the second argument. -% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/01}{The shorthands need to be -% deactivated for the second argument of \cs{@citex} only.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{% - \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse - \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Unfortunately, the packages \pkg{natbib} and \pkg{cite} need a -% different definition of |\@citex|... -% To begin with, \pkg{natbib} has a definition for |\@citex| with -% \emph{three} arguments... We only know that a package is loaded -% when |\begin{document}| is executed, so we need to postpone the -% different redefinition. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Notice that we use |\def| here instead of |\bbl@redefine| because -% |\org@@citex| is already defined and we don't want to overwrite -% that definition (it would result in parameter stack overflow -% because of a circular definition). -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{% - \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse - \org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}% - }{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The package \pkg{cite} has a definition of |\@citex| where the -% shorthands need to be turned off in both arguments. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{% - \def\@citex[#1]#2{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}% - }{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\nocite} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% The macro |\nocite| which is used to instruct BiB\TeX\ to -% extract uncited references from the database. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\nocite#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibcite} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% The macro that is used in the |.aux| file to define citation -% labels. When packages such as \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{cite} are not -% loaded its second argument is used to typeset the citation -% label. In that case, this second argument can contain active -% characters but is used in an environment where -% |\@safe@activestrue| is in effect. This switch needs to be reset -% inside the |\hbox| which contains the citation label. In order to -% determine during \file{.aux} file processing which definition of -% |\bibcite| is needed we define |\bibcite| in such a way that it -% redefines itself with the proper definition. -% \changes{babel~3.6s}{1999/04/13}{Need to determine `online' which -% definition of \cs{bibcite} is needed} -% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Also check for \pkg{cite} it can't -% handle \cs{@safe@activesfalse} in its second argument} -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\bibcite{% -% \end{macrocode} -% We call |\bbl@cite@choice| to select the proper definition for -% |\bibcite|. This new definition is then activated. -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@cite@choice - \bibcite} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@bibcite} -% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@bibcite} added} -% The macro |\bbl@bibcite| holds the definition of |\bibcite| -% needed when neither \pkg{natbib} nor \pkg{cite} is loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{% - \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@cite@choice} -% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@cite@choice} added} -% The macro |\bbl@cite@choice| determines which definition of -% |\bibcite| is needed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@cite@choice{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First we give |\bibcite| its default definition. -% \begin{macrocode} - \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite -% \end{macrocode} -% Then, when \pkg{natbib} is loaded we restore the original -% definition of |\bibcite| . -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% For \pkg{cite} we do the same. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure this only happens once. -% \begin{macrocode} - \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When a document is run for the first time, no \file{.aux} file is -% available, and |\bibcite| will not yet be properly defined. In -% this case, this has to happen before the document starts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem} -% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} -% One of the two internal \LaTeX\ macros called by |\bibitem| -% that write the citation label on the |.aux| file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{marks} -% -% \begin{macro}{\markright} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added redefinition of \cs{mark...} -% commands} -% Because the output routine is asynchronous, we must -% pass the current language attribute to the head lines, together -% with the text that is put into them. To achieve this we need to -% adapt the definition of |\markright| and |\markboth| somewhat. -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/08}{Removed the use of \cs{head@lang} -% (PR 2990)} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{Avoid expanding the arguments by -% storing them in token registers} -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to -% the mark} -% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to -% an empty mark; prevented this by checking the contents of the -% argument} -% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of -% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing -% it into the token registers} -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\markright#1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% First of all we temporarily store the language switching command, -% using an expanded definition in order to get the current value of -% |\languagename|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect - \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then, we check whether the argument is empty; if it is, we -% just make sure the scratch token register is empty. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@arg{#1}% - \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty - \toks@{}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Next, we store the argument to |\markright| in the scratch token -% register, together with the expansion of |\bbl@tempb| (containing -% the language switching command) as defined before. This way -% these commands will not be expanded by using |\edef| later -% on, and we make sure that the text is typeset using the -% correct language settings. While doing so, we make sure that -% active characters that may end up in the mark are not disabled by -% the output routine kicking in while \cs{@safe@activestrue} is in -% effect. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{% - \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we define a temporary control sequence using |\edef|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\bbl@tempa{% -% \end{macrocode} -% When |\bbl@tempa| is executed, only |\languagename| will be -% expanded, because of the way the token register was filled. -% \begin{macrocode} - \noexpand\org@markright{\the\toks@}}% - \bbl@tempa -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\markboth} -% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} -% The definition of |\markboth| is equivalent to that of -% |\markright|, except that we need two token registers. The -% documentclasses \cls{report} and \cls{book} define and set the -% headings for the page. While doing so they also store a copy of -% |\markboth| in |\@mkboth|. Therefor we need to check whether -% |\@mkboth| has already been set. If so we neeed to do that again -% with the new definition of |\makrboth|. -% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to -% the mark} -% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to -% an empty mark, prevented this by checking the contents of the -% arguments} -% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of -% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing -% it into the token registers} -% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added setting of \cs{@mkboth} (PR -% 3826)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@mkboth\markboth - \def\bbl@tempc{\let\@mkboth\markboth} -\else - \def\bbl@tempc{} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we can start the new definition of |\markboth| -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@redefine\markboth#1#2{% - \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect - \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}% - \def\bbl@arg{#1}% - \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty - \toks@{}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{% - \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}% - \fi - \def\bbl@arg{#2}% - \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty - \toks8{}% - \else - \expandafter\toks8\expandafter{% - \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#2}}% - \fi - \edef\bbl@tempa{% - \noexpand\org@markboth{\the\toks@}{\the\toks8}}% - \bbl@tempa -} -% \end{macrocode} -% and copy it to |\@mkboth| if necesary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@tempc -%</core|shorthands> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 2)} -% -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/16}{Removed redefinition of \cs{@roman} -% and \cs{@Roman}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TeX} -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ logos -% encoding-independent} -% Because documents may use font encodings other than one of the -% latin encodings, we make sure that the logos of \TeX\ and -% \LaTeX\ always come out in the right encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}} -\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}} -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Preventing clashes with other packages} -% -% \subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ifthenelse} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/11}{Redefinition of \cs{ifthenelse} -% added to circumvent problems with \cs{pageref} in the argument of -% \cs{isodd}} -% Sometimes a document writer wants to create a special effect -% depending on the page a certain fragment of text appears on. This -% can be achieved by the following piece of code: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \ifthenelse{\isodd{\pageref{some:label}}} -% {code for odd pages} -% {code for even pages} -% \end{verbatim} -% In order for this to work the argument of |\isodd| needs to be -% fully expandable. With the above redefinition of |\pageref| it is -% not in the case of this example. To overcome that, we add some -% code to the definition of |\ifthenelse| to make things work. -% -% The first thing we need to do is check if the package -% \pkg{ifthen} is loaded. This should be done at |\begin{document}| -% time. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we can redefine |\ifthenelse|: -% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{\cs{ifthenelse} needs to be long} -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{% -% \end{macrocode} -% We want to revert the definition of |\pageref| to its original -% definition for the duration of |\ifthenelse|, so we first need to -% store its current meaning. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\bbl@tempa\pageref - \let\pageref\org@pageref -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we can set the |\@safe@actives| switch and call the original -% |\ifthenelse|. In order to be able to use shorthands in the -% second and third arguments of |\ifthenelse| the resetting of the -% switch \emph{and} the definition of |\pageref| happens inside -% those arguments. -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/25}{Now reset the @safe@actives switch -% inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments of \cs{ifthenelse}} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/06/29}{\cs{pageref} needs to have its -% babel definition reinstated in the second and third arguments} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@safe@activestrue - \org@ifthenelse{#1}{% - \let\pageref\bbl@tempa - \@safe@activesfalse - #2}{% - \let\pageref\bbl@tempa - \@safe@activesfalse - #3}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% When the package wasn't loaded we do nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} - }{}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@@vpageref} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Redefinition of \cs{@@vpageref} -% added to circumvent problems with active \texttt{:} in the -% argument of \cs{vref} when \pkg{varioref} is used} -% \begin{macro}{\vrefpagenum} -% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/18}{Added redefinition of -% \cs{vrefpagenum} which deals with ranges of pages} -% \begin{macro}{\Ref} -% \changes{babel~3.8g}{2005/05/21}{We also need to adapt \cs{Ref} -% which needs to be able to uppercase the first letter of the -% expansion of \cs{ref}} -% When the package varioref is in use we need to modify its -% internal command |\@@vpageref| in order to prevent problems when -% an active character ends up in the argument of |\vref|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{% - \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{% - \@safe@activestrue - \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}% - \@safe@activesfalse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The same needs to happen for |\vrefpagenum|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{% - \@safe@activestrue - \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}% - \@safe@activesfalse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The package \pkg{varioref} defines |\Ref| to be a robust command -% wich uppercases the first character of the reference text. In -% order to be able to do that it needs to access the exandable form -% of |\ref|. So we employ a little trick here. We redefine the -% (internal) command \verb*|\Ref | to call |\org@ref| instead of -% |\ref|. The disadvantgage of this solution is that whenever the -% derfinition of |\Ref| changes, this definition needs to be updated -% as well. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{% - \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa} - }{}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{\pkg{hhline}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hhline} -% Delaying the activation of the shorthand characters has introduced -% a problem with the \pkg{hhline} package. The reason is that it -% uses the `:' character which is made active by the french support -% in \babel. Therefor we need to \emph{reload} the package when -% the `:' is an active character. -% -% So at |\begin{document}| we check whether \pkg{hhline} is loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we check whether the expansion of |\normal@char:| is not -% equal to |\relax|. -% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{added \cs{string} to prevent -% unwanted expansion of the colon} -% \begin{macrocode} - {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% In that case we simply reload the package. Note that this happens -% \emph{after} the category code of the @-sign has been changed to -% other, so we need to temporarily change it to letter again. -% \begin{macrocode} - \makeatletter - \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother - \fi}% - {}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands} -% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Inform \pkg{hyperref} to use -% shorthands at system level (PR4006)} -% Although a number of interworking problems between \pkg{babel} -% and \pkg{hyperref} are tackled by \pkg{hyperref} itself we need -% to take care of correctly handling the shorthand characters. -% When they get expanded inside a bookmark a warning will appear in -% the log file which can be prevented. This is done by informing -% \pkg{hyperref} that it should the shorthands as defined on the -% system level rather than at the user level. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}% - {}% - {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% - \languageshorthands{system}}% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{General} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE} -% The package \pkg{fancyhdr} treats the running head and fout lines -% somewhat differently as the standard classes. A symptom of this is -% that the command |\foreignlanguage| which \babel\ adds to the -% marks can end up inside the argument of |\MakeUppercase|. To -% prevent unexpected results we need to define |\FOREIGNLANGUAGE| -% here. -% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/05/23}{Define \cs{FOREIGNLANGUAGE} -% unconditionally} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{% - \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\nfss@catcodes} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/18}{Need to add the double quote and -% acute characters to \cs{nfss@catcodes} to prevent problems when -% reading in .fd files} -% \LaTeX's font selection scheme sometimes wants to read font -% definition files in the middle of processing the document. In -% order to guard against any characters having the wrong -% |\catcode|s it always calls |\nfss@catcodes| before loading a -% file. Unfortunately, the characters |"| and |'| are not dealt -% with. Therefor we have to add them until \LaTeX\ does that -% herself. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core|shorthands> -\ifx\nfss@catcodes\@undefined -\else - \addto\nfss@catcodes{% - \@makeother\'% - \@makeother\"% - } -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</core|shorthands> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Local Language Configuration} -% -% \begin{macro}{\loadlocalcfg} -% At some sites it may be necessary to add site-specific actions to -% a language definition file. This can be done by creating a file -% with the same name as the language definition file, but with the -% extension \file{.cfg}. For instance the file \file{norsk.cfg} -% will be loaded when the language definition file \file{norsk.ldf} -% is loaded. -% -% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Added macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*core> -% \end{macrocode} -% For plain-based formats we don't want to override the definition -% of |\loadlocalcfg| from \file{plain.def}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined - \def\loadlocalcfg#1{% - \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg} - {\typeout{*************************************^^J% - * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J% - *}% - } - {}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Just to be compatible with \LaTeX$\:$2.09 we add a few more lines -% of code: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined - \def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand} - \long\def \protected@write#1#2#3{% - \begingroup - \let\thepage\relax - #2% - \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}% - \reserved@a - \endgroup - \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi - } -\fi -%</core> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \clearpage -% \section{Driver files for the documented source code} -% -% Since \babel\ version 3.4 all source files that are part of the -% \babel\ system can be typeset separately. But to typeset -% them all in one document, the file \file{babel.drv} can be used. -% If you only want the information on how to use the \babel\ system -% and what goodies are provided by the language-specific files, you -% can run the file \file{user.drv} through \LaTeX\ to get a user -% guide. -% -% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Use the ltxdoc class instead of -% article} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Now need packages t1enc and -% supertabular to be loaded; the documentation for icelandic needs -% its \file{.ldf} file to be present} -% \changes{babel~3.8a}{2004/02/20}{Also load package url} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\usepackage{url,t1enc,supertabular} -\usepackage[icelandic,english]{babel} -\DoNotIndex{\!,\',\,,\.,\-,\:,\;,\?,\/,\^,\`,\@M} -\DoNotIndex{\@,\@ne,\@m,\@afterheading,\@date,\@endpart} -\DoNotIndex{\@hangfrom,\@idxitem,\@makeschapterhead,\@mkboth} -\DoNotIndex{\@oddfoot,\@oddhead,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue} -\DoNotIndex{\@starttoc,\@unused} -\DoNotIndex{\accent,\active} -\DoNotIndex{\addcontentsline,\advance,\Alph,\arabic} -\DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\begingroup,\bf,\box,\c@secnumdepth} -\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\centering,\char,\chardef,\clubpenalty} -\DoNotIndex{\columnsep,\columnseprule,\crcr,\csname} -\DoNotIndex{\day,\def,\dimen,\discretionary,\divide,\dp,\do} -\DoNotIndex{\edef,\else,\@empty,\end,\endgroup,\endcsname,\endinput} -\DoNotIndex{\errhelp,\errmessage,\expandafter,\fi,\filedate} -\DoNotIndex{\fileversion,\fmtname,\fnum@figure,\fnum@table,\fontdimen} -\DoNotIndex{\gdef,\global} -\DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hidewidth,\hfil,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\Huge,\huge} -\DoNotIndex{\ialign,\if@twocolumn,\ifcase,\ifcat,\ifhmode,\ifmmode} -\DoNotIndex{\ifnum,\ifx,\immediate,\ignorespaces,\input,\item} -\DoNotIndex{\kern} -\DoNotIndex{\labelsep,\Large,\large,\labelwidth,\lccode,\leftmargin} -\DoNotIndex{\lineskip,\leavevmode,\let,\list,\ll,\long,\lower} -\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\mathchar,\mathaccent,\markboth,\month,\multiply} -\DoNotIndex{\newblock,\newbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newif,\newwrite} -\DoNotIndex{\nobreak,\noexpand,\noindent,\null,\number} -\DoNotIndex{\onecolumn,\or} -\DoNotIndex{\p@,par, \parbox,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty} -\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ps@headings} -\DoNotIndex{\quotation} -\DoNotIndex{\raggedright,\raise,\refstepcounter,\relax,\rm,\setbox} -\DoNotIndex{\section,\setcounter,\settowidth,\scriptscriptstyle} -\DoNotIndex{\sfcode,\sl,\sloppy,\small,\space,\spacefactor,\strut} -\DoNotIndex{\string} -\DoNotIndex{\textwidth,\the,\thechapter,\thefigure,\thepage,\thepart} -\DoNotIndex{\thetable,\thispagestyle,\titlepage,\tracingmacros} -\DoNotIndex{\tw@,\twocolumn,\typeout,\uppercase,\usecounter} -\DoNotIndex{\vbox,\vfil,\vskip,\vspace,\vss} -\DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\year,\z@,\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here |\dlqq| is defined so that an example of |"'| can be -% given. -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeatletter -\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}% - \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@ - \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@ - \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code lines are numbered within sections, -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!user> -\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{section} -\renewcommand\theCodelineNo{% - \reset@font\scriptsize\thesection.\arabic{CodelineNo}} -% \end{macrocode} -% which should also be visible in the index; hence this -% redefinition of a macro from \file{doc.sty}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\codeline@wrindex[1]{\if@filesw - \immediate\write\@indexfile - {\string\indexentry{#1}% - {\number\c@section.\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The glossary environment is used or the change log, but its -% definition needs changing for this document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{theglossary}{% - \glossary@prologue% - \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}% - {} -%</!user> -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A few shorthands used in the documentation -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/06}{Added definition of \cs{Babel}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}} -\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}} -\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some more definitions needed in the documentation. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\newcommand*\note[1]{\textbf{#1}} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*\langdeffile[1]{% -%<-user> \clearpage - \DocInput{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When a full index should be generated uncomment the line with -% |\EnableCrossrefs|. Beware, processing may take some time. -% Use |\DisableCrossrefs| when the index is ready. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \EnableCrossrefs -\DisableCrossrefs -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Inlude the change log. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<-user>\RecordChanges -% \end{macrocode} -% The index should use the linenumbers of the code. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<-user>\CodelineIndex -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Set everything in |\MacroFont| instead of |\AltMacroFont| -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For the user guide we only want the description parts of all the -% files. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+user>\OnlyDescription -% \end{macrocode} -% Here starts the document -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\DocInput{babel.dtx} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% All the language definition files. -% \changes{babel~3.2e}{1992/07/07}{Added slovak} -% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{Added catalan and galician} -% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{Added turkish} -% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added bahasa} -% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/16}{Added breton, irish, scottish} -% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/19}{Added lsorbian, usorbian} -% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Changed the order of including the -% language files somewhat (PR1652)} -% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/06}{Added greek} -% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/12/14}{Added welsh} -%^^A \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/07}{Added sanskrit} -% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/22}{Added basque} -^^A% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/22}{Added kannada} -% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Added icelandic} -% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added Latin} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/09}{Added ukrainian} -% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/05/09}{Added hebrew and serbian} -% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/11/22}{Added missing hebrew files} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added bulgarian} -% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added samin} -% \changes{babel~3.8a}{2004/02/20}{Added interlingua} -% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added albanian and bahasam} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+user>\clearpage -\langdeffile{esperanto.dtx} -\langdeffile{interlingua.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{dutch.dtx} -\langdeffile{english.dtx} -\langdeffile{germanb.dtx} -\langdeffile{ngermanb.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{breton.dtx} -\langdeffile{welsh.dtx} -\langdeffile{irish.dtx} -\langdeffile{scottish.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{greek.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{frenchb.dtx} -\langdeffile{italian.dtx} -\langdeffile{latin.dtx} -\langdeffile{portuges.dtx} -\langdeffile{spanish.dtx} -\langdeffile{catalan.dtx} -\langdeffile{galician.dtx} -\langdeffile{basque.dtx} -\langdeffile{romanian.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{danish.dtx} -\langdeffile{icelandic.dtx} -\langdeffile{norsk.dtx} -\langdeffile{swedish.dtx} -\langdeffile{samin.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{finnish.dtx} -\langdeffile{magyar.dtx} -\langdeffile{estonian.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{albanian.dtx} -\langdeffile{croatian.dtx} -\langdeffile{czech.dtx} -\langdeffile{polish.dtx} -\langdeffile{serbian.dtx} -\langdeffile{slovak.dtx} -\langdeffile{slovene.dtx} -\langdeffile{russianb.dtx} -\langdeffile{bulgarian.dtx} -\langdeffile{ukraineb.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{lsorbian.dtx} -\langdeffile{usorbian.dtx} -\langdeffile{turkish.dtx} -% -\langdeffile{hebrew.dtx} -\DocInput{hebinp.dtx} -\DocInput{hebrew.fdd} -\DocInput{heb209.dtx} -\langdeffile{bahasa.dtx} -\langdeffile{bahasam.dtx} -%\langdeffile{sanskrit.dtx} -%\langdeffile{kannada.dtx} -%\langdeffile{nagari.dtx} -%\langdeffile{tamil.dtx} -\clearpage -\DocInput{bbplain.dtx} -% \end{macrocode} -% Finally print the index and change log (not for the user guide). -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!user> -\clearpage -\def\filename{index} -\PrintIndex -\clearpage -\def\filename{changes} -\PrintChanges -%</!user> -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -% -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 707152523f1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,252 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -%% Copyright 2009 Johannes L. Braams -%% -%% This file is part of the `babel' system. -%% -\def\filedate{2009/09/25} -\def\batchfile{babel.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\ifx\askonceonly\undefined - \let\OriginalAsk\Ask - \def\askonceonly{% - \def\Ask##1##2{% - \OriginalAsk{##1}{##2}% - \global\let\Ask\OriginalAsk - \Ask\noprompt{% - By default you will be asked this question for every file.^^J% - If you enter `y' now,^^J% - I will asssume `y' for all future questions^^J% - without prompting.}% - \ifx\y\noprompt\let\noprompt\yes\fi - \ifx\yes\noprompt\gdef\Ask####1####2{\def####1{y}}\fi}} - } -\fi -%% This is the preamble that will be placed on -%% unpacked files - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent -\askonceonly -% -% Make some arrangements to use docstrip files in subdirectories -% unchanged... -% To do this I need to insert a path in front of the source file -% name, for this purpose I need to save the definition of an -% internal docstrip macro: -\let\ds@@from\@from -% -% Then it is convenient to have a special command to load docstrip -% files in subdirectories, it takes the directory path in the first -% argument, the name of the file in the second: -\def\BblInstallSubDir#1#2{% - \def\@from##1{\ds@@from{#1/##1}} - \batchinput{#1/#2.ins} - \let\@from\ds@@from} -% -% When a flat distribution is used a much simpler command -% is needed. -\def\BblInstallFlat#1#2{% - \batchinput{#2.ins}} - -% Now choose which installation to use. -\let\BblInstall\BblInstallFlat %% For now... - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} -% -% First produce the base files for the babel system -% -\BblInstall{base}{base} -% -% Languages have their own subdirectory -% -\BblInstall{albanian}{albanian} -\BblInstall{bahasa}{bahasa} -\BblInstall{basque}{basque} -\BblInstall{breton}{breton} -\BblInstall{bulgarian}{bulgarian} -\BblInstall{catalan}{catalan} -\BblInstall{croatian}{croatian} -\BblInstall{cyrillic}{russianb} -\BblInstall{cyrillic}{ukraineb} -\BblInstall{czech}{czech} -\BblInstall{danish}{danish} -\BblInstall{dutch}{dutch} -\BblInstall{english}{english} -\BblInstall{esperanto}{esperanto} -\BblInstall{estonian}{estonian} -\BblInstall{finnish}{finnish} -\BblInstall{frenchb}{frenchb} -\BblInstall{galician}{galician} -\BblInstall{german}{german} -\BblInstall{greek}{greek} -\BblInstall{hebrew}{hebrew} -\BblInstall{icelandic}{icelandic} -\BblInstall{interlingua}{interlingua} -\BblInstall{irish}{irish} -\BblInstall{italian}{italian} -%\BblInstall{kannada}{kannada} -\BblInstall{kurmanji}{kurmanji} -\BblInstall{latin}{latin} -\BblInstall{magyar}{magyar} -%\BblInstall{nagari}{nagari} -\BblInstall{norsk}{norsk} -\BblInstall{polish}{polish} -\BblInstall{portuges}{portuges} -\BblInstall{romanian}{romanian} -%\BblInstall{tamil}{tamil} -\BblInstall{samin}{samin} -%\BblInstall{sanskrit}{sanskrit} -\BblInstall{scottish}{scottish} -\BblInstall{serbian}{serbian} -\BblInstall{slovak}{slovak} -\BblInstall{slovene}{slovene} -\BblInstall{sorbian}{sorbian} -\BblInstall{spanish}{spanish} -\BblInstall{swedish}{swedish} -\BblInstall{turkish}{turkish} -\BblInstall{welsh}{welsh} - -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move all the files} -\Msg{* with names ending in .ldf, .sty, .def or .fd into a} -\Msg{* directory searched by TeX} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* For making a format the following files have to be in a} -\Msg{* directory which is searched by IniTeX:} -\Msg{* \space\space hyphen.cfg} -\Msg{* \space\space language.dat} -\Msg{* \space\space and files with hyphenation patterns} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce source listings you can run files with names} -\Msg{* ending in .dtx and/or .drv through LaTeX} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the complete source listing MakeIndex needs to be} -\Msg{* able to find the following files} -\Msg{* \space\space bbind.ist} -\Msg{* \space\space bbglo.ist} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{***********************************************************} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 51e20f9571c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,286 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{148} -%\iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{bahasa.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bahasa} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{bahasa.dtx} - [2008/03/15 v1.0l Bahasa Indonesia support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `bahasa.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Bahasa Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de) -% Terry Mart (mart at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) -% Institut f\"ur Kernphysik -% Johannes Gutenberg-Universit\"at Mainz -% D-55099 Mainz -% Germany -% -%% Please report errors to: J"org Knappen -%% knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the bahasa indonesia / bahasa melayu language definition -% file. The original version of this file was written by Terry -% Mart (mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) and J"org Knappen -% (knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{bahasa.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{bahasa.dtx} -% -% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The Bahasa Indonesian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Bahasa Indonesia / Bahasa Melayu language. Bahasa just means -% `language' in Bahasa Indonesia / Bahasa Melayu. Since both -% national versions of the language use the same writing, although -% differing in pronounciation, this file can be used for both -% languages. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{bahasa-v1.0k}{2005/11/23}{Make it possible that this file -% is loaded by variuos options} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{bahasa} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@bahasa| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% For both Bahasa Indonesia and Bahasa Malaysia the same set of -% hyphenation patterns can be used which are available in the file -% \file{inhyph.tex}. However it could be loaded using any of the -% possible Babel options fot the Indonesian and Malaysian -% languase. So first we try to find out whether this is the case. -% -% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@patterns} to produce -% the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined - \ifx\l@indon\@undefined - \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined - \ifx\l@malay\@undefined - \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bahasa Indonesia} - \adddialect\l@bahasa0\relax - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@meyalu - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@malay - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasam - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@indonesian - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@indon - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasai - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that we are sure the |\l@bahasa| has some valid definition we -% need to make sure that a name to access the hyphenation patterns, -% corresponding to the option used, is available. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname - \l@bahasa -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Bahasa language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbahasa} -% The macro |\captionsbahasa| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/09}{Replaced `Proof' by `Bukti' -% (PR2214)} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0i}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pendahuluan}% - \def\refname{Pustaka}% - \def\abstractname{Ringkasan}% (sometime it's called 'intisari' - % or 'ikhtisar') - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% - \def\chaptername{Bab}% - \def\appendixname{Lampiran}% - \def\contentsname{Daftar Isi}% - \def\listfigurename{Daftar Gambar}% - \def\listtablename{Daftar Tabel}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Gambar}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Bagian}% -% Subject: Subyek -% From: Dari - \def\enclname{Lampiran}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{Kepada}% - \def\pagename{Halaman}% -% Notes (Endnotes): Catatan - \def\seename{lihat}% - \def\alsoname{lihat juga}% - \def\proofname{Bukti}% - \def\glossaryname{Daftar Istilah}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datebahasa} -% The macro |\datebahasa| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Bahasa Indonesian dates. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}} -% \changes{bahasa~1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef} -% to save memory} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0g}{1999/03/12}{Februari should be spelled as -% Pebruari} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januari\or Pebruari\or Maret\or April\or Mei\or Juni\or - Juli\or Agustus\or September\or Oktober\or Nopember\or Desember\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasbahasa} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbahasa} -% The macro |\extrasbahasa| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Bahasa language. The macro |\extrasbahasa| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasbahasa|. For the moment these -% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the -% other language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bahasahyphenmins} -% The bahasa hyphenation patterns should be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/08/07}{use \cs{bahasahyphenmins} to store -% the correct values} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 954122314c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2005/11/23} -\def\batchfile{bahasa.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{bahasai.ldf}{\from{bahasa.dtx}{code}} - \file{bahasam.ldf}{\from{bahasam.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 6b55a397746..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,297 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{148} -%\iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{bahasam.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bahasam} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{bahasam.dtx} - [2008/01/27 v1.0k Bahasa Malaysia support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `bahasam.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Bahasa Malaysia Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de) -% Terry Mart (mart at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) -% Institut f\"ur Kernphysik -% Johannes Gutenberg-Universit\"at Mainz -% D-55099 Mainz -% Germany -% -%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008 -%% by Bob Margolis, (bob.margolis at ntlworld.com) -% derived from J"ork Knappen's work - see above. -%% [With help from Awangku Merali Pengiran Mohamed (Sarawak)] -% gratefully acknowledged. -% Yateley, -% UK -% -%% Please report errors to: Bob Margolis -%% bob.margolis at ntlworld.com -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Bahasa Malaysia language definition -% file. The original version of this file was written by Terry -% Mart (mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) and J"org Knappen -% (knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{bahasam.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{bahasam.dtx} -% -% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% \changes{bahasam-0.9f}{2005/11/22}{A number of changes to make this -% specific to Bahasa Mayasia} -% -% \section{The Bahasa Malaysia language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Bahasa Malaysia language. Bahasa just means -% `language' in Bahasa Malaysia. A number of terms differ from those used -% in bahasa indonesia. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{bahasam-v1.0j}{2005/11/23}{Make it possible that this file -% is loaded by variuos options} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{bahasa} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@bahasa| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% For both Bahasa Malaysia and Bahasa Indonesia the same set of -% hyphenation patterns can be used which are available in the file -% \file{inhyph.tex}. However it could be loaded using any of the -% possible Babel options fot the Malaysian and Indonesian -% languase. So first we try to find out whether this is the case. -% -% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@patterns} to produce -% the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@malay\@undefined - \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined - \ifx\l@indon\@undefined - \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bahasa Malaysia} - \adddialect\l@malay0\relax - \else - \let\l@malay\l@indonesian - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@indon - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasai - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasa - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasam - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@meyalu - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that we are sure the |\l@malay| has some valid definition we -% need to make sure that a name to access the hyphenation patterns, -% corresponding to the option used, is available. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname - \l@malay -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Bahasa language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbahasam} -% The macro |\captionsbahasam| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/09}{Replaced `Proof' by `Bukti' -% (PR2214)} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0i}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary} -% \changes{bahasam-1.0k}{2008/01/27}{Inserted changes from Awangku Merali } -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Prakata}% - \def\refname{Rujukan}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrak}% (sometime it's called 'intisari' - % or 'ikhtisar') - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% - \def\chaptername{Bab}% - \def\appendixname{Lampiran}% - \def\contentsname{Kandungan}% - \def\listfigurename{Senarai Gambar}% - \def\listtablename{Senarai Jadual}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Gambar}% - \def\tablename{Jadual}% - \def\partname{Bahagian}% -% Subject: Perkara -% From: Dari - \def\enclname{Lampiran}% - \def\ccname{sk}% (short form for 'Salinan Kepada') - \def\headtoname{Kepada}% - \def\pagename{Halaman}% -% Notes (Endnotes): Catatan - \def\seename{sila rujuk}% - \def\alsoname{rujuk juga}% - \def\proofname{Bukti}% - \def\glossaryname{Istilah}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datebahasam} -% The macro |\datebahasam| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Bahasa Malaysian dates. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}} -% \changes{bahasa~1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef} -% to save memory} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0g}{1999/03/12}{Februari should be spelled as -% Pebruari} -% \changes{bahasam-1.0k}{2008/01/27}{Februari restored to BM spelling; -% see Collins Kamus Dwibahasa 2005} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januari\or Februari\or Mac\or April\or Mei\or Jun\or - Julai\or Ogos\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Disember\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasbahasam} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbahasam} -% The macro |\extrasbahasa| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Bahasa language. The macro |\extrasbahasa| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasbahasa|. For the moment these -% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the -% other language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bahasamhyphenmins} -% The bahasam hyphenation patterns should be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/08/07}{use \cs{bahasamhyphenmins} to store -% the correct values} -% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 33789ccdfd4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,390 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{193} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{basque.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{basque} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{basque.dtx} - [2005/03/29 v1.0f Basque support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `Basque.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Basque Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2005 -%% by Juan M. Aguirregabiria -% The University of the Basque Country -% Dept. of Theoretical Physics -% Apdo. 644 -% E-48080 Bilbao -% Spain -% tel: +34 946 012 593 -% fax: +34 944 648 500 -% e-mail: wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es -% WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html -% based on the -% Spanish Language Definition File -% Copyright (C) 1991 - 1998 -% by Julio Sanchez -% GMV, SA -% c/ Isaac Newton 11 -% PTM - Tres Cantos -% E-28760 Madrid -% Spain -% tel: +34 1 807 21 85 -% fax +34 1 807 21 99 -% jsanchez at gmv.es -% -% Acknowledgements: I am indebted to Zunbeltz Izaola, -% who suggested the use of \discretionary in "- -% -%% Please report errors to: Juan M. Aguirregabiria <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> -%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl>) -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the basque language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{basque.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{basque.dtx} -% -% \section{The Basque language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The original author is Juan M. Aguirregabiria, -% (\texttt{wtpagagj@lg.ehu.es}) and is based on the Spanish file -% by Julio S\'anchez, -% (\texttt{jsanchez@gmv.es}).} defines all the language definition -% macro's for the Basque language. -% -% For this language the characters |~| and |"| are made -% active. In table~\ref{tab:basque-quote} an overview is given of -% their purpose. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |~n| & a n with tilde. Works for uppercase too. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{basque.ldf}} -% \label{tab:basque-quote} -% \end{table} -% These active accent characters behave according to their original -% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in -% that table. -% -% \changes{basque-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{Changed url's for the patterns -% file} -% This option includes support for working with extended, 8-bit -% fonts, if available. Support is based on -% providing an appropriate definition for the accent macros on -% entry to the Basque language. This is automatically done by -% \LaTeXe\ or NFSS2. If T1 encoding is chosen, and provided that -% adequate hyphenation patterns\footnote{One source for such -% patterns is the archive at \texttt{tp.lc.ehu.es} that can be -% accessed by anonymous FTP or in -% \texttt{http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma/basque.html}} are available. -% The easiest way to use the new encoding with \LaTeXe{} is -% to load the package \texttt{t1enc} with |\usepackage|. This must -% be done before loading \babel. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{basque}\captionsbasque -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{basque} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@basque| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@basque\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Basque} - \adddialect\l@basque0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Basque language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbasque} -% The macro |\captionsbasque| defines all strings used in -% the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{basque-1.0e}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{basque-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{Added translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsbasque{% - \def\prefacename{Hitzaurrea}% - \def\refname{Erreferentziak}% - \def\abstractname{Laburpena}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitulua}% - \def\appendixname{Eranskina}% - \def\contentsname{Gaien Aurkibidea}% - \def\listfigurename{Irudien Zerrenda}% - \def\listtablename{Taulen Zerrenda}% - \def\indexname{Kontzeptuen Aurkibidea}% - \def\figurename{Irudia}% - \def\tablename{Taula}% - \def\partname{Atala}% - \def\enclname{Erantsia}% - \def\ccname{Kopia}% - \def\headtoname{Nori}% - \def\pagename{Orria}% - \def\seename{Ikusi}% - \def\alsoname{Ikusi, halaber}% - \def\proofname{Frogapena}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosarioa}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datebasque} -% The macro |\datebasque| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Basque -% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \changes{basque-1.0c}{1999/11/22}{fixed typo in April's name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datebasque{% - \def\today{\number\year.eko\space\ifcase\month\or - urtarrilaren\or otsailaren\or martxoaren\or apirilaren\or - maiatzaren\or ekainaren\or uztailaren\or abuztuaren\or - irailaren\or urriaren\or azaroaren\or - abenduaren\fi~\number\day}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasbasque} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbasque} -% The macro |\extrasbasque| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Basque language. The macro |\noextrasbasque| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasbasque|. For Basque, some -% characters are made active or are redefined. In particular, the -% \texttt{"} character and the |~| character receive new -% meanings. Therefore these characters have to be treated as -% `special' characters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbasque{\languageshorthands{basque}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\initiate@active@char{~} -\addto\extrasbasque{% - \bbl@activate{"}% - \bbl@activate{~}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{basque-1.0d}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Basque} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasbasque{ - \bbl@deactivate{"}\bbl@deactivate{~}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Apart from the active characters some other macros get a new -% definition. Therefore we store the current one to be able to -% restore them later. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbasque{% - \babel@save\"% - \babel@save\~% - \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}% - \def\~{\protect\@tilde}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\basquehyphenmins} -% Basque hyphenation uses |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| -% both set to~2. -% \changes{basque-1.0e}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dieresia} -% \begin{macro}{\texttilde} -% The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresia|, because -% the we do not know what is its definition, since it depends on -% the encoding we are using or on special macros that the user -% might have loaded. The expansion of the macro might use the \TeX\ -% |\accent| primitive using some particular accent that the font -% provides or might check if a combined accent exists in the font. -% These two cases happen with respectively OT1 and T1 encodings. -% For this reason we save the definition of |\"| and use that in -% the definition of other macros. We do likewise for |\'| and -% |\~|. The present coding of this option file is incorrect in that -% it can break when the encoding changes. We do not use -% |\tilde| as the macro name because it is already defined as -% |\mathaccent|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\dieresia\" -\let\texttilde\~ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@umlaut} -% \begin{macro}{\@tilde} -% We check the encoding and if not using T1, we make the accents -% expand but enabling hyphenation beyond the accent. If this is the -% case, not all break positions will be found in words that contain -% accents, but this is a limitation in \TeX. An unsolved problem -% here is that the encoding can change at any time. The definitions -% below are made in such a way that a change between two 256-char -% encodings are supported, but changes between a 128-char and a -% 256-char encoding are not properly supported. We check if T1 is -% in use. If not, we will give a warning and proceed redefining the -% accent macros so that \TeX{} at least finds the breaks that are -% not too close to the accent. The warning will only be printed to -% the log file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined - \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens} - \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens} -\else - \edef\bbl@next{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@next - \let\@umlaut\dieresia - \let\@tilde\texttilde - \else - \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space - instead of T1.} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens} - \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define our shorthands: the french quotes, -% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% ordinals\footnote{The code for the ordinals was taken from the -% answer provided by Raymond Chen -% (\texttt{raymond@math.berkeley.edu}) to a question by Joseph Gil -% (\texttt{yogi@cs.ubc.ca}) in \texttt{comp.text.tex}.}, -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{basque}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tildes, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{~n}{\textormath{\~n}{\@tilde n}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{~N}{\textormath{\~N}{\@tilde N}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands. -% -% The shorthand |"-| should be used in places where a word contains -% an explictit hyphenation character. According to the Academy of -% the Basque language, when a word break occurs at an explicit -% hyphen it must appear \emph{both} at the end of the first line -% \emph{and} at the beginning of the second line. -% \changes{changes-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{The hyphen char needs to appear -% at the beginning of the line as well.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"-}{% - \nobreak\discretionary{-}{-}{-}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{basque} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -% -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins deleted file mode 100644 index ccebb561bae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{basque.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{basque.ldf}{\from{basque.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index e87500aaf14..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,365 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{263} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{breton.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{breton} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{breton.dtx} - [2005/03/29 v1.0h Breton support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `breton.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Breton Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005 -%% by Christian Rolland -% Universite de Bretagne occidentale -% Departement d'informatique -% 6, avenue Le Gorgeu -% BP 452 -% 29275 Brest Cedex -- FRANCE -% Christian.Rolland at univ-brest.fr (Internet) -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Breton language definition file. It is based on the -% language definition file for french, version 4.5c -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{breton.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{breton.dtx} -% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \changes{breton-1.0}{1994/09/21}{First release} -% -% \section{The Breton language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Breton -% language. -% -% There are not really typographic rules for the Breton -% language. It is a local language (it's one of the celtic -% languages) which is spoken in Brittany (West of France). So we -% have a synthesis between french typographic rules and english -% typographic rules. The characters \texttt{:}, \texttt{;}, -% \texttt{!} and \texttt{?} are made active in order to get a -% whitespace automatically before these characters. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{breton}\captionsbreton -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{breton} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@breton| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@breton\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Breton} - \adddialect\l@breton0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the -% English language. The reason for this is that a user might want -% to switch back and forth between languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbreton} -% The macro |\captionsbreton| defines all strings used in the -% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{breton-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{breton-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsbreton{% - \def\prefacename{Rakskrid}% - \def\refname{Daveenno\`u}% - \def\abstractname{Dvierra\~n}% - \def\bibname{Lennadurezh}% - \def\chaptername{Pennad}% - \def\appendixname{Stagadenn}% - \def\contentsname{Taolenn}% - \def\listfigurename{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% - \def\listtablename{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% - \def\indexname{Meneger}% - \def\figurename{Figurenn}% - \def\tablename{Taolenn}% - \def\partname{Lodenn}% - \def\enclname{Diello\`u kevret}% - \def\ccname{Eilskrid da}% - \def\headtoname{evit} - \def\pagename{Pajenn}% - \def\seename{Gwelout}% - \def\alsoname{Gwelout ivez}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datebreton} -% The macro |\datebreton| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce Breton dates. -% \changes{breton-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{breton-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datebreton{% - \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$\else - \number\day\fi \space a\space viz\space\ifcase\month\or - Genver\or C'hwevrer\or Meurzh\or Ebrel\or Mae\or Mezheven\or - Gouere\or Eost\or Gwengolo\or Here\or Du\or Kerzu\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasbreton} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbreton} -% The macro |\extrasbreton| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Breton language. The macro -% |\noextrasbreton| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasbreton|. -% -% The category code of the characters \texttt{:}, \texttt{;}, -% \texttt{!} and \texttt{?} is made |\active| to insert a little -% white space. -% \changes{breton-1.0b}{1995/03/07}{Use the new mechanism for dealing -% with active chars} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{;} -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{?} -% \end{macrocode} -% We specify that the breton group of shorthands should be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbreton{\languageshorthands{breton}} -% \end{macrocode} -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbreton{% - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{breton-1.0g}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of Breton} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasbreton{% - \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The last thing |\extrasbreton| needs to do is to make sure that -% |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the -% execution of |\noextrasbreton| will switch it of again. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbreton{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasbreton{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@;@} -% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;}, -% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!} when the user types a space in front of -% these characters. This should only happen outside mathmode, hence -% the test with |\ifmmode|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{;}{% - \ifmmode - \string;\space - \else\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space' and -% replace it by a |\thinspace|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string;\space - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@:@} -% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@!@} -% Because these definitions are very similar only one is displayed -% in a way that the definition can be easily checked. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{:}{% - \ifmmode\string:\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi - \fi - \string:\space - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{!}{% - \ifmmode\string!\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi - \fi - \string!\space - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@?@} -% For the question mark something different has to be done. In this -% case the amount of white space that replaces the space character -% depends on the dimensions of the font. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{?}{% - \ifmmode - \string?\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip - \kern\fontdimen2\font - \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font - \fi - \fi - \string?\space - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% All that is left to do now is provide the breton user with some -% extra utilities. -% -% Some definitions for special characters. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{OT1}{64} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{OT1}{92} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{T1}{16} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\boi}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{OT1}{94} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{2} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{OT1}{126} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{3} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{23} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{6} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\degre}{OT1} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following macros are used in the redefinition of |\^| and -% |\"| to handle the letter i. -% \changes{breton-1.0c}{1995/07/07}{Postpone the -% \cs{DeclareTextCompositeCommand}s untill \cs{AtBeginDocument}} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\^}{OT1}{i}{\^\i} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\"\i}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And some more macros for numbering. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\kentan{1\/${}^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$} -\def\eil{2\/${}^{\rm l}$} -\def\re{\/${}^{\rm re}$} -\def\trede{3\re} -\def\pevare{4\re} -\def\vet{\/${}^{\rm vet}$} -\def\pempvet{5\vet} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{breton} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 595e0cba1bd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{breton.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{breton.ldf}{\from{breton.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 313018acd81..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1039 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1268} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bulgarian} - [2008/03/21 v1.0g Bulgarian support from the babel system] -% -%% File `bulgarian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989-2008 -%% by Johannes Braams,TeXniek -% -%% Bulgarian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995-2008 -%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> -%% Johannes Braams,TeXniek -% -%% Adapted from russianb.dtx -%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> -% -%% Please report errors to:J.L.Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand\langvar{$\langle\it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand\note[1]{} -\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{bulgarian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{bulgarian.dtx} -% -% \changes{bulgarian-0.99}{2000/06/10}{% -% This is a prerelease version of this file. -% Features needing further testing are removed.} -% -% \section{The Bulgarian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. This file was initially derived from the August-1998 -% version of \file{russianb.dtx}. -% -% It is (reasonably) backward compatible with the 1994/1996 -% (non-babel) bulgarian style (bulgaria.sty) by Georgi -% Boshnakov---files prepared for that style should compile -% successfully (with vastly improved appearance due to usage of -% standard fonts).} provides the language-specific macros for the -% Bulgarian language. -% -% Users should take note of the vaious ``cyrillic'' dashes -% available now (see below). These should remove many causes of -% headache. Also, although by default the Bulgarian quotation marks -% will appear automatically when typesetting in Bulgarian, it is -% better to use the new commands \cs{"'} and \cs{"'} which -% explicitly typeset them. -% Note: automatic switch to Bulgarian quotation is withdrawn -% for the moment and may not be reintroduced at all. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compound words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y| -% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint -% in following surname. \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A'' -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$).\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$).\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by\file{bulgarian}}\label{tab:bulgarian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote} can also be typeset -% by using the commands in table~\ref{tab:bmore-quote}. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``).\\^^A%'' -% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$).\\ -% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$).\\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined -% by \babel}\label{tab:bmore-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and -% `|>>|' in 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY}, -% \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*}) and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in -% 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}). -% -% The quotation marks traditionally used in Bulgarian were borrowed -% from German o they keep their original names. French quotation -% marks may be seen as well in older books. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{bulgarian}{captionsbulgarian} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{bulgarian} will be an `unknown' language, in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@bulgarian| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@bulgarian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bulgarian} - \adddialect\l@bulgarian0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding} -% -% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be -% which is active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the -% \pkg{fontenc} package is loaded later, then \ldots too bad! -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic -% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}. -% If the user wants to use a font encoding other than the default -% (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the corresponding file -% \emph{before} \file{bulgarian.sty}. -% This may be done in the following way: -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc} %overwrite the default encoding; -% \usepackage[english,bulgarian]{babel} -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% Note: most people would prefer the \texttt{T2A} to \texttt{X2}, -% because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and users -% should be very careful to switch the language every time they -% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Bulgarian phrase or vice -% versa. On the other hand, switching the language is a good -% practice anyway. With a decent text processing program it does -% not involve more work than switching between the Bulgarian and -% English keyboard. Moreover that the far most common disruption -% occurs as a result of forgetting to switch back to cyrillic -% keyboard. -% -% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to -% \LaTeX\ in the order they were loaded. We set the -% |\cyrillicencoding| to the \emph{last} loaded encoding in the -% list of supported Cyrillic encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN}, -% \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B}, -% \texttt{T2A}, if any. -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not -% load any of supported encodings. So, we have to set -% |\cyrillicencoding| to some default value. We test the presence -% of the encoding definition files in the order from less -% preferable to more preferable encodings. We use the lowercase -% names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of \file{LCYenc.def}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems -% not to have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete. \MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files: \MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def, \MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we -% don't want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \PackageInfo{babel} -% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Bulgarian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\bulgarianhyphenmins - \language\l@bulgarian} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english} -\let\Bul\Bulgarian -\let\Bg\Bulgarian -\let\cyrillictext\Bulgarian -\let\cyr\Bulgarian -\let\Eng\English -\def\selectenglanguage{\selectlanguage{english}} -\def\selectbglanguage{\selectlanguage{bulgarian}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters,we -% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly -% produce Latin letters. -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with |\@alph| -% inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where -% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|' -% (|\fontencoding| is robust). -% -% \changes{bulgarian-1.0c}{2003/06/14}{Added missing closing brace} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\@Alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or - K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or - X\or Y\or Z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or - x\or y\or z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}% - \let\@Alph\@Alph@eng - \let\@alph\@alph@eng -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding -% dependent in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are -% defined as |\r{A}| and |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable -% results when the font encoding does not contain the Latin letters -% `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase -% Greek letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable -% family), to avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some -% math family does not contain these characters in places of OT1 -% encoding. The code was taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and -% further explanation there. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12 -% uppercase greek letters: -\def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax - "0000\@nil#1} -\def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{% -\ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax -\ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi - \fi} -\@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi -\@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi -\@tempa\Omega -% some accents: -\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent} -\expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil -\ifx\@tempb\@tempc -\def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}% -\def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}% -\def\do#1"#2{} -\def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil - \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF - \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}% - \fi} -\@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave -\@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar -\fi -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The user should use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit -% Cyrillic font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic -% input encodings. We do not assume any default input encoding, so -% the user should explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by -% |\usepackage{inputenc}|. We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so -% \pkg{inputenc} should be used before \babel. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% -\def\reserved@a{LWN}% -\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else -\def\reserved@a{OT2}% -\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else -\PackageWarning{babel}% -{No input encoding specified for Bulgarian language}\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch -% between Cyrillic and Roman encodings. -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext} -% \begin{macro}{\latintext} -% -% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding -% to the Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches -% back. This assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin -% one. These commands are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces -% of text the commands |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be -% used. -% -% We comment out |\latintext| since it is defined in the core of -% babel (babel.def). We add the shorthand |\lat| for |\latintext|. -% Note that |\cyrillictext| has been defined above. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% \DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{% -% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont -% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}} -\let\lat\latintext -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic} -% \begin{macro}{\textlatin} -% -% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the -% requested font encoding. -% |\textlatin| is commented out since it is defined in the core of -% babel. (It is defined there with |\DeclareRobustCommand| instead.) -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -% \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Bulgarian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbulgarian} -% -% The macro |\captionsbulgarian| defines all strings used in the -% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two -% commands |\cyr| and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp. Latin encoding. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsbulgarian{% - \def\prefacename{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrg\cyro\cyrv\cyro\cyrr}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrb\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrk\cyrt}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro\cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\chaptername{% - {\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}% - \def\appendixname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\listfigurename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% - \def\listtablename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% - \def\indexname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrz\cyrb\cyru\cyrch\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}% - \def\authorname{% - {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}% - \def\figurename{% - {\cyr\CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\tablename{% - {\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}% - \def\partname{% - {\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt}}% - \def\enclname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\ccname{% - {\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\headtoname{% - {\cyr\CYRZ\cyra}}% - \def\pagename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrt\cyrr.}}% - \def\seename{% - {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.}}% - \def\alsoname{% - {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.\ \cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrshch\cyro\ \cyri}}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- Needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -%% -% \begin{macro}{\datebulgarian} -% -% The macro |\datebulgarian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Bulgarian dates. -% It also provides the command |\todayRoman| which produces the -% date with the month in capital roman numerals, a popular format -% for dates in Bulgarian. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datebulgarian{% - \def\month@bulgarian{\ifcase\month\or - \cyrya\cyrn\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\or - \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrishrt\or - \cyryu\cyrn\cyri\or - \cyryu\cyrl\cyri\or - \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrp\cyrt\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyro\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrn\cyro\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\fi}% - \def\month@Roman{\expandafter\@Roman\month}% - \def\today{\number\day~\month@bulgarian\ \number\year~\cyrg.}% - \def\todayRoman{\number\day.\,\month@Roman.\,\number\year~\cyrg.}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\todayRoman} -% -% The month is often written with roman numbers in Bulgarian dates. -% Here we define date in this format: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Romannumeral#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}} -\def\todayRoman{\number\day.\Romannumeral{\month}.\number\year~\cyrg.} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasbulgarian} -% -% The macro |\extrasbulgarian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Bulgarian language. -% The macro |\noextrasbulgarian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasbulgarian|. -% -% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic -% encoding whenever we enter `bulgarian'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\cyrillictext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the -% current font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming -% that \LaTeX\ uses \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as -% default. Therefore we switch back to |\latinencoding| whenever -% the Bulgarian language is no longer `active'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Bulgarian the \texttt{"} character also is made active. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need extra active -% characters. The character |"| is used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote}. We specify that the Bulgarian -% group of shorthands should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\languageshorthands{bulgarian}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain -% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence, -% the ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these -% characters are useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define -% the shorthands to emulate these ligatures (optionally). -% -% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use -% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the -% primary encoding, but it does not contain these characters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanishligs> -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown} -%</spanishligs> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it -% available, the math accent |\"|can now be typed as `|"|'. -% \changes{bulgarian-1.0c}{2003/04/10}{repaired typo} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019} - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french -% quotes. We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty. -% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{">}{\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some additional commands: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"|}{% -\textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% -\allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different. -% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"-}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a -% hyphen sign: -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bulgarian@sh@tmp{% - \if\bulgarian@sh@next-\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning -% of this token is written to |\bulgarian@sh@next| and -% |\bulgarian@sh@tmp| is called. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \futurelet\bulgarian@sh@next\bulgarian@sh@tmp} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bulgarian@sh@hyphen{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must -% `eat' two last hyphen signs of our emdash \dots : -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bulgarian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cdash} -% -% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro: -% |\cdash|: -% -% \changes{bulgarian-1.0e}{2006/03/31}{Two occurences of \cmd{temp} -% were changed into tab followed by emp} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash -% to create in next step -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text: -% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of -% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after -% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\ -% started with ``---where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line). -% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user:he may put -% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this -% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after -% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a -% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash -% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font? -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi -\cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames -% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters -% around; after the dash some space is added -% |\exhyphenalty| \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip| -% must follow the emdash); \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -%\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash} -% -% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash. -% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't -% been defined in a fontenc file. For T2*fonts, cyrdash will be -% placed in the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature -% |---|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% Is there an IF necessary? -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined -\def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials. -% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the -% following surname. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The Bulgarian hyphenation patterns can be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{bulgarian-1.0b}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the action |\extrasbulgarian| has to execute is to make sure -% that the command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not -% the case the execution of |\noextrasbulgarian| will switch it off -% again. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Make the double quotes produce the traditional quotes -% used in Bulgarian texts (these are the German quotes). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% \initiate@active@char{`} -% \initiate@active@char{'} -% \addto\extrasbulgarian{% -% \bbl@activate{`}} -% \addto\extrasbulgarian{% -% \bbl@activate{'}} -% \addto\noextrasbulgarian{% -% \bbl@deactivate{`}} -% \addto\noextrasbulgarian{% -% \bbl@deactivate{'}} -% \def\mlron{\bbl@activate{`}\bbl@activate{'}} -% \def\mlroff{\bbl@deactivate{`}\bbl@deactivate{'}} -% \declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{``}{\glqq} -% \declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{''}{\grqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Next we add a new enumeration style for Bulgarian manuscripts with -% Cyrillic letters,and later on we define some math operator names in -% accordance with Bulgarian typesetting traditions. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@Alph@bul} -% -% We begin by defining |\@Alph@bul| which works like |\@Alph|, but -% produces (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The -% letters ISHRT, HRDSN and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such -% enumeration. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\enumBul{\let\@Alph\@Alph@bul \let\@alph\@alph@bul} -\def\enumEng{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng} -\def\enumLat{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\enumBul} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\enumLat} -\def\@Alph@bul#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or \CYRB\or \CYRV\or \CYRG\or \CYRD\or \CYRE\or \CYRZH\or - \CYRZ\or \CYRI\or \CYRK\or \CYRL\or \CYRM\or \CYRN\or \CYRO\or - \CYRP\or \CYRR\or \CYRS\or \CYRT\or \CYRU\or \CYRF\or \CYRH\or - \CYRC\or \CYRCH\or \CYRSH\or \CYRSHCH\or \CYRYU\or \CYRYA\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\def\@Alph@eng#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or - N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or Y\or Z\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@alph@bul} -% -% The macro |\@alph@bul| is similar to |\@Alph@bul|; -% it produces lowercase Bulgarian letters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@alph@bul#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or \cyrb\or \cyrv\or \cyrg\or \cyrd\or \cyre\or \cyrzh\or - \cyrz\or \cyri\or \cyrk\or \cyrl\or \cyrm\or \cyrn\or \cyro\or - \cyrp\or \cyrr\or \cyrs\or \cyrt\or \cyru\or \cyrf\or \cyrh\or - \cyrc\or \cyrch\or \cyrsh\or \cyrshch\or \cyryu\or \cyrya\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\def\@alph@eng#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or - n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. To use Cyrillic letters -% in math mode user should load the |textmath| package -% \emph{before} loading fontenc package (or \babel). Note,that by -% default Cyrillic letters are taken from upright font in math mode -% (unlike Latin letters). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\RequirePackage{textmath} -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different -% variants. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some math functions in Bulgarian math books have other names: -% e.g., \texttt{sinh} in Bulgarian is written as \texttt{sh} -% etc. So we define a number of new math operators. -% -% |\sinh|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\cosh|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\tan|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\arctan|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\arccot|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1 -% encoding: -% |\tanh|: -% \changes{bulgarian-1.0d}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th} -% only for this language} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\cot|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\coth|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\csc|: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This is for compatibility with older Bulgarian packages. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration -% file, setting the main language to be switched on at -% |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of \texttt{@} -% to its original value. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{bulgarian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 467e11c6ff9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2000/09/21} -\def\batchfile{bulgarian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{bulgarian.ldf}{\from{bulgarian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index b8185af4df8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,712 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{517} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{catalan.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{catalan} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{catalan.dtx} - [2005/03/29 v2.2p Catalan support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `catalan.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Catalan Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2005 -%% by Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be> -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel at braams.cistron.nl -%% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Catalan language definition file. -% This file was developped out of spanish.sty and suggestions by -% Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be> and Joerg Knappen -% <knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de>. -% -% The file spanish.sty was written by Julio Sanchez, -% (jsanchez@gmv.es) The code for the catalan language has been -% removed and now is in this file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{catalan.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{catalan.dtx} -% -% \changes{catalan-2.0b}{1993/09/23}{Incorporated the changes from -% \file{spanish.sty}} -% \changes{catalan-2.1}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/04}{Made the activation of the grave -% and acute accents optional} -% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Removed the use of the tilde for -% catalan} -% \changes{catalan-2.2f}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% \changes{catalan-2.2k}{1999/05/05}{A wrong \cs{changes} entry made -% typesetting impossible} -% -% \section{The Catalan language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macro's for the -% Catalan language. -% -% For this language only the double quote character (|"|) is made -% active by default. In table~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-def} an -% overview is given of the new macros defined and the new meanings -% of |"|. Additionally to that, the user can explicitly activate -% the acute accent or apostrophe (|'|) and/or the grave accent -% (|`|) characters by using the \Lopt{activeacute} and -% \Lopt{activegrave} options. In that case, the definitions shown -% in table~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-opt} also become -% available\footnote{Please note that if the acute accent character -% is active, it is necessary to take special care of coding -% apostrophes in a way which cannot be confounded with -% accents. Therefore, it is necessary to type \texttt{l'\{\}estri} -% instead of \texttt{l'estri}.}. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\l.l| & geminated-l digraph (similar to -% l$\cdot$l). |\L.L| produces the uppercase version.\\ -% |\lgem| & geminated-l digraph (similar to -% l$\cdot$l). |\Lgem| produces the uppercase version.\\ -% |\up| & Macro to help typing raised ordinals, like {1\raise -% 1ex\hbox{\small er}}. Takes one argument.\\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"i| & i with diaeresis, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following vowels: -% i, u (both lowercase and uppercase).\\ -% |"c| & c-cedilla (\c{c}). Valid for both uppercase and -% lowercase c.\\ -% |"l| & geminated-l digraph (similar to -% l$\cdot$l). Valid for both uppercase and lowercase l.\\ -% |"<| & French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |">| & French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |"-| & explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{catalan.ldf} -% (activated by default)} -% \label{tab:catalan-quote-def} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |'e| & acute accented a, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following -% vowels: e, i, o, u (both lowercase and uppercase).\\ -% |`a| & grave accented a, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following -% vowels: a, e, o (both lowercase and uppercase). -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{catalan.ldf} -% (activated only when using the options \Lopt{activeacute} and -% \Lopt{activegrave})} -% \label{tab:catalan-quote-opt} -% \end{table} -% These active accents characters behave according to their original -% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in -% that table. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Removed code to load -% \file{latexhax.com}} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{catalan}\captionscatalan -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{catalan} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@catalan| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@catalan\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Catalan} - \adddialect\l@catalan0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Catalan language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\catalanhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{catalan-2.2n}{2001/02/19}{Set the hyphenation parameters -% both to two as required by \texttt{cahyph.tex}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{catalan}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionscatalan} -% The macro |\captionscatalan| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{catalan-1.1}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Added some names} -% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/11/09}{Added a few missing translations} -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/03}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{catalan-2.2d}{1995/07/10}{added translation of Proof} -% \changes{catalan-2.2d}{1995/11/15}{Translations revised} -% \changes{catalan-2.2m}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{catalan-2.2p}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for -% Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionscatalan{% - \def\prefacename{Pr\`oleg}% - \def\refname{Refer\`encies}% - \def\abstractname{Resum}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tol}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\`endix}% - \def\contentsname{\'Index}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Index de figures}% - \def\listtablename{\'Index de taules}% - \def\indexname{\'Index alfab\`etic}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Taula}% - \def\partname{Part}% - \def\enclname{Adjunt}% - \def\ccname{C\`opies a}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{P\`agina}% - \def\seename{Vegeu}% - \def\alsoname{Vegeu tamb\'e}% - \def\proofname{Demostraci\'o}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossari}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datecatalan} -% The macro |\datecatalan| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Catalan dates. Months are written in -% lowercase\footnote{This seems to be the common practice. See for -% example: E.~Coromina, \emph{El 9 Nou: Manual de redacci\'o i -% estil}, Ed.~Eumo, Vic, 1993}. -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Month names in lowercase} -% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datecatalan{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - de gener\or de febrer\or de mar\c{c}\or d'abril\or de maig\or - de juny\or de juliol\or d'agost\or de setembre\or d'octubre\or - de novembre\or de desembre\fi - \space de~\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrascatalan} -% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Macro completely rewritten} -% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/11}{Handling of active characters -% completely rewritten} -% -% \begin{macro}{\noextrascatalan} -% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Macro completely rewritten} -% -% The macro |\extrascatalan| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Catalan language. The macro |\noextrascatalan| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrascatalan|. -% -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/11/10}{Now give the apostrophe a -% lowercase code} -% To improve hyphenation we give the grave character (\texttt{'}) a -% non-zero lower case code; when we do that \TeX\ will find more -% breakpoints in words that contain this character in its r\^ole as -% apostrophe. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \lccode`'=`'} -\addto\noextrascatalan{% - \lccode`'=0} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Catalan, some characters are made active or are redefined. In -% particular, the \texttt{"} character receives a new meaning; this -% can also happen for the \texttt{'} character and the \texttt{`} -% character when the options \Lopt{activegrave} and/or -% \Lopt{activeacute} are specified. -% -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/07}{Make activating the accent -% characters optional} -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/08/17}{Need to split up the -% \cs{@ifpackagewith} statements} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrascatalan{\languageshorthands{catalan}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Because the grave character is being used in constructs such as -% |\catcode``=\active| it needs to have it's original category code%'' -% when the auxiliary file is being read. Note that this file is -% read twice, once at the beginning of the document; then there is -% no problem; but the second time it is read at the end of the -% document to check whether any labels changes. It's this second -% time round that the actived grave character leads to error -% messages. -% \changes{catalan-2.2l}{1999/11/29}{Make sure that the grave accent -% has catcode 12 \emph{before} it is made \cs{active}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \AtBeginDocument{% - \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi} - \initiate@active@char{`}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{`}}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \initiate@active@char{'}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{'}}% - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Now make sure that the characters that have been turned into -% shorthanfd characters expand to `normal' characters outside the -% catalan environment. -% \changes{catalan-2.2l}{1999/12/16}{Don't forget do deactivate the -% shorthands} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{`}}}{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{'}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/11}{All the code for handling active -% characters is now moved to \file{babel.def}} -% -% Apart from the active characters some other macros get a new -% definition. Therefore we store the current ones to be able -% to restore them later. -% When their current meanings are saved, we can safely redefine -% them. -% -% We provide new definitions for the accent macros when one or -% both of the options \Lopt{activegrave} or \Lopt{activeacute} -% were specified. -% -% \changes{catalan-2.2h}{1997/01/08}{Added some comment signs to -% prevent unwanted spaces in the output} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \babel@save\"% - \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}}% -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \babel@save\`% - \addto\extrascatalan{\def\`{\protect\@grave}} - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \babel@save\'% - \addto\extrascatalan{\def\'{\protect\@acute}} - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% All the code above is necessary because we need a few extra -% active characters. These characters are then used as indicated in -% tables~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-def} -% and~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-opt}. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dieresis} -% \begin{macro}{\textacute} -% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Renamed from \cs{acute} as that -% is a \cs{mathaccent}} -% \begin{macro}{\textgrave} -% -% The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresis|, because -% the definition of |\"| might not be the default plain \TeX\ -% one. If the user uses \textsc{PostScript} fonts with the Adobe -% font encoding the \texttt{"} character is not in the same -% position as in Knuth's font encoding. In this case |\"| will not -% be defined as |\accent"7F 1|, but as |\accent'310 #1|. Something -% similar happens when using fonts that follow the Cork -% encoding. For this reason we save the definition of |\"| and use -% that in the definition of other macros. We do likewise for |\`|, -% and |\'|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\dieresis\" -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{\let\textgrave\`}{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\let\textacute\'}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@umlaut} -% \begin{macro}{\@acute} -% \begin{macro}{\@grave} -% We check the encoding and if not using T1, we make the accents -% expand but enabling hyphenation beyond the accent. If this is the -% case, not all break positions will be found in words that contain -% accents, but this is a limitation in \TeX. An unsolved problem -% here is that the encoding can change at any time. The definitions -% below are made in such a way that a change between two 256-char -% encodings are supported, but changes between a 128-char and a -% 256-char encoding are not properly supported. We check if T1 is -% in use. If not, we will give a warning and proceed redefining the -% accent macros so that \TeX{} at least finds the breaks that are -% not too close to the accent. The warning will only be printed to -% the log file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined - \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} -\else - \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one - \let\@umlaut\dieresis - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \let\@acute\textacute}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \let\@grave\textgrave}{} - \else - \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space - instead of T1.} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% If the user setup has extended fonts, the Ferguson macros are -% required to be defined. We check for their existance and, if -% defined, expand to whatever they are defined to. For instance, -% |\'a| would check for the existance of a |\@ac@a| macro. It is -% assumed to expand to the code of the accented letter. If it is -% not defined, we assume that no extended codes are available and -% expand to the original definition but enabling hyphenation beyond -% the accent. This is as best as we can do. It is better if you -% have extended fonts or ML-\TeX{} because the hyphenation -% algorithm can work on the whole word. The following macros are -% directly derived from ML-\TeX{}.\footnote{A problem is perceived -% here with these macros when used in a multilingual environment -% where extended hyphenation patterns are available for some but -% not all languages. Assume that no extended patterns exist at some -% site for French and that \file{french.sty} would adopt this -% scheme too. In that case, \mbox{\texttt{'e}} in French would -% produce the combined accented letter, but hyphenation around it -% would be suppressed. Both language options would need an -% independent method to know whether they have extended patterns -% available. The precise impact of this problem and the possible -% solutions are under study.} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/14}{All the code to deal with active -% characters is now in \file{babel.def}} -% -% Now we can define our shorthands: the diaeresis and ``ela -% geminada'' support, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"i}{\textormath{\@umlaut\i}{\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"l}{\lgem{}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"u}{\textormath{\@umlaut u}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"I}{\textormath{\@umlaut I}{\ddot I}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"L}{\Lgem{}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"U}{\textormath{\@umlaut U}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% cedille, -% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{cedile now produced by double -% quote shorthand} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"c}{\textormath{\c c}{^{\prime} c}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"C}{\textormath{\c C}{^{\prime} C}} -% \end{macrocode} -% `french' quote characters, -% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Added shorthands for guillemets} -% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% grave accents, -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/03/05}{Added `{}` as an axtra shorthand} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`a}{\textormath{\@grave a}{\grave a}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`e}{\textormath{\@grave e}{\grave e}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`o}{\textormath{\@grave o}{\grave o}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`A}{\textormath{\@grave A}{\grave A}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`E}{\textormath{\@grave E}{\grave E}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`O}{\textormath{\@grave O}{\grave O}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{``}{\textquotedblleft}%'' - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% acute accents, -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/03}{Changed mathmode definition of -% acute shorthands to expand to a single prime followed by the next -% character in the input} -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/09/05}{Added vertical bar as argument to -% active acute} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'a}{\textormath{\@acute a}{^{\prime} a}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'e}{\textormath{\@acute e}{^{\prime} e}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'i}{\textormath{\@acute\i{}}{^{\prime} i}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'o}{\textormath{\@acute o}{^{\prime} o}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'u}{\textormath{\@acute u}{^{\prime} u}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'A}{\textormath{\@acute A}{^{\prime} A}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'E}{\textormath{\@acute E}{^{\prime} E}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'I}{\textormath{\@acute I}{^{\prime} I}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'O}{\textormath{\@acute O}{^{\prime} O}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'U}{\textormath{\@acute U}{^{\prime} U}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'|}{% - \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}{^{\prime}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% the acute accent, -% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Added '{}' as an axtra shorthand, -% removed 'n as a shorthand} -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% and finally, some support definitions -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% -% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version -% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while -% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated -% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is -% unfortunate for Catalan but not as much as for Dutch or German, -% where long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a -% means to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the -% ones that \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation -% patterns. However, the average length of words in Catalan makes -% this desirable and so it is kept here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \babel@save{\-}% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lgem} -% \begin{macro}{\Lgem} -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Added support for typing the -% catalan ``ela geminada'' with the macros \cs{lgem} and \cs{Lgem}} -% \changes{catalan-2.2f}{1996/09/20}{Added a check for math mode as -% the use of \cs{lgem} and \cs{Lgem} in math mode is not sensible.} -% -% Here we define a macro for typing the catalan ``ela geminada'' -% (geminated l). The macros |\lgem| and |\Lgem| have been chosen -% for its lowercase and uppercase representation, -% respectively\footnote{The macro names \cs{ll} and \cs{LL} were -% not taken because of the fact that \cs{ll} is already used in -% mathematical mode.}. -% -% The code used in the actual macro used is a combination of the -% one proposed by Feruglio and Fuster\footnote{G.~Valiente and -% R.~Fuster, Typesetting Catalan Texts with \TeX, \emph{TUGboat} -% \textbf{14}(3), 1993.} and the proposal\footnote{G. Valiente, -% Modern Catalan Typographical Conventions, \emph{TUGboat} -% \textbf{16}(3), 1995.} from Valiente presented at the \TeX\ Users -% Group Annual Meeting in 1995. This last proposal has not been -% fully implemented due to its limitation to CM fonts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\leftllkern \newdimen\rightllkern \newdimen\raiselldim -\def\lgem{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname l% - \else - \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt% - \setbox0\hbox{l}\setbox1\hbox{l\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}% - \advance\raiselldim by \the\fontdimen5\the\font - \advance\raiselldim by -\ht2% - \leftllkern=-.25\wd0% - \advance\leftllkern by \wd1% - \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0% - \rightllkern=-.25\wd0% - \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1% - \advance\rightllkern by \wd0% - \allowhyphens\discretionary{l-}{l}% - {\hbox{l}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}% - \kern\rightllkern\hbox{l}}\allowhyphens - \fi - } -\def\Lgem{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname L% - \else - \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt% - \setbox0\hbox{L}\setbox1\hbox{L\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}% - \advance\raiselldim by .5\ht0% - \advance\raiselldim by -.5\ht2% - \leftllkern=-.125\wd0% - \advance\leftllkern by \wd1% - \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0% - \rightllkern=-\wd0% - \divide\rightllkern by 6% - \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1% - \advance\rightllkern by \wd0% - \allowhyphens\discretionary{L-}{L}% - {\hbox{L}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}% - \kern\rightllkern\hbox{L}}\allowhyphens - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l.l} -% \begin{macro}{\L.L} -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/06/26}{Added redefinition of \cs{l} and -% \cs{L}} -% It seems to be the most natural way of entering the ``ela -% geminda'' to use the sequences |\l.l| and |\L.L|. These are not -% really macro's by themselves but the macros |\l| and |\L| with -% delimited arguments. Therefor we define two macros that check if -% the next character is a period. If not the ``polish l'' will be -% typeset, otherwise a ``ela geminada'' will be typeset and the -% next two tokens will be `eaten'. -% \changes{catalan-2.2o}{2003/09/19}{Postpone the redefinition of -% \cs{l} and \cs{L} until begin document to prevent overwriting by -% fontenc} -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \let\lslash\l - \let\Lslash\L - \DeclareRobustCommand\l{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@l\lslash} - \DeclareRobustCommand\L{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@L\Lslash}} -\def\bbl@l#1#2{\lgem} -\def\bbl@L#1#2{\Lgem} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\up} -% -% A macro for typesetting things like 1\raise1ex\hbox{\small er} as -% proposed by Raymon Seroul\footnote{This macro has been borrowed -% from francais.dtx}. -% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Added definition of macro -% \cs{up}, which can be used to type ordinals} -% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/02/29}{Now use \cs{textsuperscript} and -% make \cs{up} robust} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{catalan} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 982e9b8bbaf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{catalan.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{catalan.ldf}{\from{catalan.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 3389033b0b4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,226 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{87} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{croatian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{croatian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{croatian.dtx} - [2005/03/29 v1.3l Croatian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `croatian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Croatian language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Alan Pai\'{c} (paica@cernvm.cern.ch) -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{croatian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{croatian.dtx} -% -% \changes{croatian-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{croatian-1.0c}{1992/01/25}{Removed some typos} -% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{croatian-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Croatian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Alan Pai\'{c} -% (\texttt{paica@cernvm.cern.ch}).} defines all the -% language definition macros for the Croatian language. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{croatian}\captionscroatian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{croatian} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@croatian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{croatian-1.0b}{1991/10/07}{Removed use of -% \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@croatian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Croatian} - \adddialect\l@croatian0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Croatian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionscroatian} -% The macro |\captionscroatian| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, -% \cs{alsoname} and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{croatian-1.2}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{croatian-1.3d}{1995/05/08}{Added a few translations} -% \changes{croatian-1.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{croatian-1.3f}{1996/01/18}{Added translation of Proof} -% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1997/09/11}{Replaced some of the -% translations with `better' words} -% \changes{croatian-1.3k}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{croatian-1.3l}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionscroatian{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografija}% - \def\chaptername{Poglavlje}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatak}% - \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}% - \def\listfigurename{Popis slika}% - \def\listtablename{Popis tablica}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tablica}% - \def\partname{Dio}% - \def\enclname{Prilozi}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prima}% - \def\pagename{Stranica}% - \def\seename{Vidjeti}% - \def\alsoname{Vidjeti i}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Kazalo}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datecroatian} -% The macro |\datecroatian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Croatian dates. -% \changes{croatian-1.3f}{1996/01/18}{in croatian language, the -% genitive for the name of the month has to be used} -% \changes{croatian-1.3h}{1997/02/06}{\texttt{sijev\{c\}nja} should be -% \texttt{seij\cs{v}\{c\}nja} and there should be a period after -% the year} -% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{croatian-1.3j}{1999/03/12}{changed \cs{od} into \cs{or}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datecroatian{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - sije\v{c}nja\or velja\v{c}e\or o\v{z}ujka\or travnja\or svibnja\or - lipnja\or srpnja\or kolovoza\or rujna\or listopada\or studenog\or - prosinca\fi \space \number\year.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrascroatian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrascroatian} -% The macro |\extrascroatian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Croatian language. The macro -% |\noextrascroatian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrascroatian|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other language -% definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrascroatian{} -\addto\noextrascroatian{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{croatian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index babb296ae01..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{croatian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{croatian.ldf}{\from{croatian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index e4ae1a91aa0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1157 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1142} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{czech.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<+code>\ProvidesLanguage{czech} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{czech.dtx} - [2008/07/06 v3.1a Czech support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `czech.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008 -%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz) -%% -%% Czech Language Definition File -% This file is also based on CSLaTeX -% by Ji\v r\'i Zlatu\v ska, Zden\v ek Wagner, -% Jaroslav \v Snajdr and Petr Ol\v s\'ak. -% -%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik -%% babel at tesarici.cz -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Czech language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{czech.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \def\CS{$\cal C\kern-.1667em -% \lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal S$}\kern-.075em$} -% -% \GetFileInfo{czech.dtx} -% -% \changes{czech-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com} -% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{czech-1.2}{1993/07/11}{Included some features from Kasal's -% czech.sty} -% \changes{czech-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{czech-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/09/10}{Implemented the functionality of -% \CS\LaTeX's czech.sty. The version number was bumped to 3.0 -% to minimize confusion by being higher than the last version -% of \CS\LaTeX.} -% -% \section{The Czech Language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. It was rewritten by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik -% (\texttt{babel@tesarici.cz}).} defines all the language definition -% macros for the Czech language. It is meant as a replacement of -% \CS\LaTeX, the most-widely used standard for typesetting Czech -% documents in \LaTeX. -% -% \subsection{Usage} -% For this language |\frenchspacing| is set. -% -% Additionally, two macros are defined |\q| and |\w| for easy -% access to two accents are defined. -% -% The command |\q| is used with the letters (\texttt{t}, -% \texttt{d}, \texttt{l}, and \texttt{L}) and adds a \texttt{'} to -% them to simulate a `hook' that should be there. The result looks -% like t\kern-2pt\char'47. The command |\w| is used to put the -% ring-accent which appears in \aa ngstr\o m over the letters -% \texttt{u} and \texttt{U}. -% -% \subsection{Compatibility} -% -% Great care has been taken to ensure backward compatibility with -% \CS\LaTeX. In particular, documents which load this file with -% |\usepackage{czech}| should produce identical output with no -% modifications to the source. Additionally, all the \CS\LaTeX{} -% options are recognized: -% -% \label{tab:czech-options} -% \begin{list}{} -% {\def\makelabel#1{\sbox0{\Lopt{#1}}% -% \ifdim\wd0>\labelwidth -% \setbox0\vbox{\box0\hbox{}} \wd0=0pt \fi -% \box0\hfil} -% \setlength{\labelwidth}{2\parindent} -% \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\parindent} -% \setlength{\rightmargin}{\parindent}} -% \item[IL2, T1, OT1] -% These options set the default font encoding. Please note -% that their use is deprecated. You should use the |fontenc| -% package to select font encoding. -% -% \item[split, nosplit] -% These options control whether hyphenated words are -% automatically split according to Czech typesetting rules. -% With the \Lopt{split} option ``je-li'' is hyphenated as -% ``je-/-li''. The \Lopt{nosplit} option disables this behavior. -% -% The use of this option is strongly discouraged, as it breaks -% too many common things---hyphens cannot be used in labels, -% negative arguments to \TeX{} primitives will not work in -% horizontal mode (use \cs{minus} as a workaround), and there are -% a few other peculiarities with using this mode. -% -% \item[nocaptions] -% -% This option was used in \CS\LaTeX{} to set up Czech/Slovak -% typesetting rules, but leave the original captions and dates. -% The recommended way to achieve this is to use English as the main -% language of the document and use the environment |otherlanguage*| -% for Czech text. -% -% \item[olduv] -% There are two version of \cs{uv}. The older one allows the use -% of \cs{verb} inside the quotes but breaks any respective kerning -% with the quotes (like that in \CS{} fonts). The newer one honors -% the kerning in the font but does not allow \cs{verb} inside the -% quotes. -% -% The new version is used by default in \LaTeXe{} and the old version -% is used with plain \TeX. You may use \Lopt{olduv} to override the -% default in \LaTeXe. -% -% \item[cstex] -% This option was used to include the commands \cs{csprimeson} and -% \cs{csprimesoff}. Since these commands are always included now, -% it has been removed and the empty definition lasts for compatibility. -% \end{list} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \subsection{Implementation} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{czech} might be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@czech| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{czech-1.0b}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{czech-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce -% the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@czech\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Czech} - \adddialect\l@czech0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need to define these macros early in the process. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@iltw@{IL2} -\newif\ifcs@splithyphens -\cs@splithyphensfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If Babel is not loaded, we provide compatibility with \CS\LaTeX. -% However, if macro \cs{@ifpackageloaded} is not defined, we assume -% to be loaded from plain and provide compatibility with csplain. -% Of course, this does not work well with \LaTeX$\:$2.09, but I -% doubt anyone will ever want to use this file with \LaTeX$\:$2.09. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined - \let\cs@compat@plain\relax - \message{csplain compatibility mode} -\else - \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{% - \let\cs@compat@latex\relax - \message{cslatex compatibility mode}} -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \ProvidesPackage{czech}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Czech style] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Declare \CS\LaTeX{} options (see also the descriptions on page -% \pageref{tab:czech-options}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}} - \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}} - \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}} - \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse} - \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue} - \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax} - \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax} - \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Make |IL2| encoding the default. This can be overriden with -% the other font encoding options. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, process the user-supplied options. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Standard \LaTeXe{} does not include the IL2 encoding in the format. -% The encoding can be loaded later using the fontenc package, but -% \CS\LaTeX{} included IL2 by default. This means existing documents -% for \CS\LaTeX{} do not load that package, so load the encoding -% ourselves in compatibility mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \input il2enc.def - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Restore the definition of \cs{CurrentOption}, clobbered by processing -% the options. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\CurrentOption{czech} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Czech language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsczech} -% The macro \cs{captionsczech} defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% -% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{czech-1.3f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{czech-1.3g}{1996/02/12}{Fixed two errors and provided -% translation for `proof'} -% \changes{czech-1.3j}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{czech-1.3k}{2004/02/18}{Added translation for Glossary} -% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/11/25}{Updated some translations. Former -% translations were: `Dodatek' for \cs{appendixname} and `Index' -% for \cs{indexname}. Also removed spurious colon at the end of -% \cs{ccname}.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{P\v{r}edmluva}% - \def\refname{Reference}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitola}% - \def\appendixname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}% - \def\contentsname{Obsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% - \def\listtablename{Seznam tabulek}% - \def\indexname{Rejst\v{r}\'{\i}k}% - \def\figurename{Obr\'azek}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{\v{C}\'ast}% - \def\enclname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}% - \def\ccname{Na v\v{e}dom\'{\i}}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strana}% - \def\seename{viz}% - \def\alsoname{viz tak\'e}% - \def\proofname{D\r{u}kaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateczech} -% The macro \cs{dateczech} redefines the command \cs{today} -% to produce Czech dates. -% -% \CS\LaTeX{} allows line break between the day and the month. -% However, this behavior has been agreed upon to be a bad thing by -% the csTeX mailing list in December 2005 and has not been adopted. -% -% \changes{czech-1.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{czech-1.3i}{1998/03/28}{Use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or ledna\or \'unora\or - b\v{r}ezna\or dubna\or kv\v{e}tna\or \v{c}ervna\or \v{c}ervence\or - srpna\or z\'a\v{r}\'\i\or \v{r}\'{\i}jna\or listopadu\or - prosince\fi \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasczech} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasczech} -% The macro |\extrasczech| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Czech language. The macro |\noextrasczech| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasczech|. This means saving the -% meaning of two one-letter control sequences before defining them. -% -% For Czech texts \cs{frenchspacing} should be in effect. Language -% group for shorthands is also set here. -% \changes{czech-1.3e}{1995/03/14}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} and -% \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}} -% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{move \cs{languageshorthands} here, -% so that the language group is always initialized correctly} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing - \languageshorthands{czech}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{czech-1.1a}{1992/07/07}{Removed typo, \cs{q} was restored -% twice, once too many.} -% \changes{czech-1.3e}{1995/03/15}{Use \LaTeX's \cs{v} and \cs{r} -% accent commands} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\q\let\q\v - \babel@save\w\let\w\r} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sq} -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original single and double quote characters in -% \cs{sq} and \cs{dq} to make them available later. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\sq{'} - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/12/10}{Added default for setting hyphenmin -% parameters. Values taken from \CS\LaTeX.} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\v} -% \LaTeX's normal |\v| accent places a caron over the letter that -% follows it (\v{o}). This is not what we want for the letters d, -% t, l and L; for those the accent should change shape. This is -% acheived by the following. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{% - t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{% - d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lcaron} -% \begin{macro}{\Lcaron} -% For the letters \texttt{l} and \texttt{L} we want to disinguish -% between normal fonts and monospaced fonts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em% - \else - l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}% - \fi} -\def\Lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}% - \else - L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Initialize active quotes. \CS\LaTeX{} provides a way of -% converting English-style quotes into Czech-style ones. Both -% single and double quotes are affected, i.e. |``text''| is -% converted to something like |,,text``| and |`text'| is converted -% to |,text`|. This conversion can be switched on and off with -% \cs{csprimeson} and \cs{csprimesoff}.\footnote{By the way, the -% names of these macros are misleading, because the handling of -% primes in math mode is rather marginal, the most important thing -% being the handling of quotes\ldots} -% -% These quotes present various troubles, e.g. the kerning is broken, -% apostrophes are converted to closing single quote, some primitives -% are broken (most notably the |\catcode`\|\meta{char} syntax will -% not work any more), and writing them to \file{.aux} files cannot -% be handled correctly. For these reasons, these commands are only -% available in \CS\LaTeX{} compatibility mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s - \def\csprimeson{% - \catcode`\`\active \catcode`\'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s} - \def\csprimesoff{% - \catcode`\`12 \catcode`\'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s} - \begingroup\catcode`\`\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote} - \def\cs@openquote{% - \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq - \else \expandafter\clq - \fi}% - }\x - \begingroup\catcode`\'\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote} - {^\bgroup\prim@s}} - \def\cs@closequote{% - \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq - \else \expandafter\crq - \fi}% - }\x - \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= } - \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The way I recommend for typesetting quotes in Czech documents -% is to use shorthands similar to those used in German. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \initiate@active@char{"} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} - \expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"`}{\clqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"'}{\crqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"<}{\flqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{">}{\frqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clqq} -% This is the CS opening quote, which is similar to the German -% quote (\cs{glqq}) but the kerning is different. -% -% For the OT1 encoding, the quote is constructed from the right -% double quote (i.e. the ``Opening quotes'' character) by moving -% it down to the baseline and shifting it to the right, or to the -% left if italic correction is positive. -% -% For T1, the ``German Opening quotes'' is used. It is moved to -% the right and the total width is enlarged. This is done in an -% attempt to minimize the difference between the OT1 and T1 -% versions. -% -% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/20}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to allow an opening -% quote at the beginning of a paragraph} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{% - \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}% - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne - \leavevmode - \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em - \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1} - {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\crqq} -% For OT1, the CS closing quote is basically the same as -% \cs{grqq}, only the \cs{textormath} macro is not used, because -% as far as I know, \cs{grqq} does not work in math mode anyway. -% -% For T1, the character is slightly wider and shifted to the -% right to match its OT1 counterpart. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clq} -% \begin{macro}{\crq} -% -% Single CS quotes are similar to double quotes (see the -% discussion above). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1} - {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1} - {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\uv} -% There are two versions of \cs{uv}. The older one opens a group -% and uses \cs{aftergroup} to typeset the closing quotes. This -% version allows using \cs{verb} inside the quotes, because the -% enclosed text is not passed as an argument, but unfortunately -% it breaks any kerning with the quotes. Although the kerning -% with the opening quote could be fixed, the kerning with the -% closing quote cannot. -% -% The newer version is defined as a command with one parameter. -% It preserves kerning but since the quoted text is passed as an -% argument, it cannot contain \cs{verb}. -% -% Decide which version of \cs{uv} should be used. For sake -% of compatibility, we use the older version with plain \TeX{} -% and the newer version with \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi -\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes - \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=} - \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@wordlen} -% Declare a counter to hold the length of the word after the -% hyphen. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\cs@wordlen -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@endash} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@emdash} -% Store the original hyphen in a macro. Ditto for the ligatures. -% -% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{ensure correct catcode for the -% saved hyphen} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\-12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@hyphen{-} - \def\cs@endash{--} - \def\cs@emdash{---} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@boxhyphen} -% Provide a non-breakable hyphen to be used when a compound word -% is too short to be split, i.e. the second part is shorter than -% \cs{righthyphenmin}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@splithyphen} -% The macro \cs{cs@splithyphen} inserts a split hyphen, while -% allowing both parts of the compound word to be hyphenated at -% other places too. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@ - \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@} -}\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{-} -% To minimize the effects of activating the hyphen character, -% the active definition expands to the non-active character -% in all cases where hyphenation cannot occur, i.e. if not -% typesetting (check \cs{protect}), not in horizontal mode, -% or in inner horizontal mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{-} -\declare@shorthand{czech}{-}{% - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \ifhmode - \ifinner - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyph@n} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyph@n} -% If we encounter a hyphen, check whether it is followed -% by a second or a third hyphen and if so, insert the -% corresponding ligature. -% -% If we don't find a hyphen, the token found will be placed -% in \cs{cs@token} for further analysis, and it will also stay -% in the input. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\-\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n} - \def\cs@firsthyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen - \fi} - \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{% - \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n} - \def\cs@secondhyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash - \fi} -}\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkhyphen} -% Check that hyphenation is enabled, and if so, start analyzing -% the rest of the word, i.e. initialize \cs{cs@word} and \cs{cs@wordlen} -% and start processing input with \cs{cs@scanword}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@checkhyphen{% - \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\- - \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@ - \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword - \else - \cs@hyphen - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@scanword} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@continuescan} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@gettoken} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@gett@ken} -% Each token is first analyzed with \cs{cs@scanword}, which expands -% the token and passes the first token of the result to -% \cs{cs@gett@ken}. If the expanded token is not identical to the -% unexpanded one, presume that it might be expanded further and -% pass it back to \cs{cs@scanword} until you get an unexpandable -% token. Then analyze it in \cs{cs@examinetoken}. -% -% The \cs{cs@continuescan} macro does the same thing as -% \cs{cs@scanword}, but it does not require the first token to be -% in \cs{cs@token} already. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken} -\def\cs@gett@ken{% - \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}% - \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}% - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@examinetoken} -% Examine the token in \cs{cs@token}: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% If it is a letter (catcode 11) or other (catcode 12), add it -% to \cs{cs@word} with \cs{cs@addparam}. -% -% \item -% If it is the \cs{char} primitive, add it with \cs{cs@expandchar}. -% -% \item -% If the token starts or ends a group, ignore it with -% \cs{cs@ignoretoken}. -% -% \item -% Otherwise analyze the meaning of the token with -% \cs{cs@checkchardef} to detect primitives defined with -% \cs{chardef}. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@examinetoken{% - \ifcat A\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifcat 0\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifx\char\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }% - \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}% - \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}% - \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}% - \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}% - \else - \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkchardef} -% Check the meaning of a token and if it is a primitive defined -% with \cs{chardef}, pass it to \cs{\cs@examinechar} as if it were -% a \cs{char} sequence. Otherwise, there are no more word characters, -% so do the final actions in \cs{cs@nosplit}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{% - \def\cs@token{#1}% - \ifx\cs@token\@empty - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }% - \else - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@ignoretoken} -% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} but do not update the \cs{cs@wordlen} -% counter. This is mainly useful for group starting and ending -% primitives, which need to be preserved, but do not affect the word -% boundary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@addparam} -% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. Note that -% this macro can only be used for tokens which can be passed as -% a parameter. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@addparam#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@expandchar} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@examinechar} -% Add a \cs{char} sequence to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. -% The charcode is first parsed in \cs{cs@expandchar} and then the -% resulting \cs{chardef}-defined sequence is analyzed in -% \cs{cs@examinechar}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=} -\def\cs@examinechar{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkcode} -% Check the lccode of a character. If it is zero, it does not count -% to the current word, so finish it with \cs{cs@nosplit}. Otherwise -% update the \cs{cs@wordlen} counter and go on scanning the word -% with \cs{cs@continuescan}. When enough characters are gathered in -% \cs{cs@word} to allow word break, insert the split hyphen and -% finish. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@checkcode#1{% - \ifnum0=#1 - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \else - \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne - \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen - \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}% - \else - \cs@splithyphen - \def\cs@next{\cs@word}% - \fi - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@nosplit} -% Insert a non-breakable hyphen followed by the saved word. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen} -% The \cs{minus} sequence can be used where the active hyphen -% does not work, e.g. in arguments to \TeX{} primitives in outer -% horizontal mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\minus\cs@hyphen -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\standardhyphens} -% \begin{macro}{\splithyphens} -% These macros control whether split hyphens are allowed in Czech -% and/or Slovak texts. You may use them in any language, but the -% split hyphen is only activated for Czech and Slovak. -% -% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{activate with split hyphens and -% deactivate with standard hyphens, not vice versa} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens} -\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@splitattr} -% Now we declare the |split| language attribute. This is -% similar to the |split| package option of cslatex, but it -% only affects Czech, not Slovak. -% -% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{attribute added} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{czech}{split}{% - \addto\extrasczech{\cs@splitattr}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@activatehyphens} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@deactivatehyphens} -% These macros are defined as \cs{relax} by default to prevent -% activating/deactivating the hyphen character. They are redefined -% when the language is switched to Czech/Slovak. At that moment -% the hyphen is also activated if split hyphens were requested with -% \cs{splithyphens}. -% -% When the language is de-activated, de-activate the hyphen and -% restore the bogus definitions of these macros. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax -\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}% - \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}% - \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \cs@deactivatehyphens - \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax - \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@looseness} -% \begin{macro}{\looseness} -% One of the most common situations where an active hyphen will not -% work properly is the \cs{looseness} primitive. Change its definition -% so that it deactivates the hyphen if needed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\cs@looseness\looseness -\def\looseness{% - \ifcs@splithyphens - \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi - \cs@looseness} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@selectlanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@main@language} -% Specifying the |nocaptions| option means that captions and dates -% are not redefined by default, but they can be switched on later -% with \cs{captionsczech} and/or \cs{dateczech}. -% -% We mimic this behavior by redefining \cs{selectlanguage}. This -% macro is called once at the beginning of the document to set the -% main language of the document. If this is \cs{cs@main@language}, -% it disables the macros for setting captions and date. In any -% case, it restores the original definition of \cs{selectlanguage} -% and expands it. -% -% The definition of \cs{selectlanguage} can be shared between Czech -% and Slovak; the actual language is stored in \cs{cs@main@language}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else - \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption} - \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined - \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage - \def\selectlanguage{% - \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect - \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language - \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage - \else - \expandafter\selectlanguage - \fi} - \def\cs@selectlanguage{% - \cs@tempdisable{captions}% - \cs@tempdisable{date}% - \selectlanguage} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@tempdisable} -% \cs{cs@tempdisable} disables a language setup macro temporarily, -% i.e. the macro with the name of \meta{\#1}|\bbl@main@language| -% just restores the original definition and purges the saved macro -% from memory. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@tempdisable#1{% - \def\@tempa{cs@#1}% - \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}% - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname - \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{% - \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname - \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname - \noexpand\@undefined}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% These macros are not needed, once the initialization is over. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language - \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect - \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage - \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The encoding of mathematical fonts should be changed to IL2. This -% allows to use accented letter in some font families. Besides, -% documents do not use CM fonts if there are equivalents in CS-fonts, -% so there is no need to have both bitmaps of CM-font and CS-font. -% -% \cs{@font@warning} and \cs{@font@info} are temporarily redefined -% to avoid annoying font warnings. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined -\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else - \def\cs@check@enc{ - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble - \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined - \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined - \fi - \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined} - \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc} -\fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@undoiltw@} -% -% The thing is that \LaTeXe{} core only supports the T1 encoding -% and does not bother changing the uc/lc/sfcodes when encoding -% is switched. :( However, the IL2 encoding \emph{does} change -% these codes, so if encoding is switched back from IL2, we must -% also undo the effect of this change to be compatible with -% \LaTeXe. OK, this is not the right\textsuperscript{TM} solution -% but it works. Cheers to Petr Ol\v s\'ak. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@undoiltw@{% - \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000 - \sfcode159=1000 - \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000 - \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000 - \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000 - \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000 - \uccode181=149 - \uccode185=153 - \uccode187=155 - \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0 - \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000 - \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{@@enc@update} -% -% Redefine the \LaTeXe{} internal function \cs{@@enc@update} to -% change the encodings correctly. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined -\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else - \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update - \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi - \cs@enc@update - \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language - \expandafter\ifx - \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename - \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi - \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax - \fi} -\fi\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 587a0a8f89f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{czech.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{czech.ldf}{\from{czech.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index ba05ec2f826..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,337 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{160} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{danish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{danish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{danish.dtx} - [2009/09/19 v1.3r Danish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `danish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Danish language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{danish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -% A contribution was made by Henning Larsen (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch) -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{danish.dtx} -% -% \changes{danish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{danish-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{danish-1.3f}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{danish-1.3g}{1995/06/08}{Added the active double quote -% character as suggested by Peter Busk Laursen} -% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Danish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Henning Larsen -% (\texttt{larsen@cernvm.cern.ch})} defines all the -% language definition macros for the Danish language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:danish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for -% words that should break at some sign such as -% ``entrada/salida.''\\ -% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (looks like ,,)\\ -% |"'| & normal double right quotes\\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{danish.ldf}} -% \label{tab:danish-quote} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{danish}\captionsdanish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{danish} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@danish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{danish-1.0b}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{danish-1.3f}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@danish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Danish} - \adddialect\l@danish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\englishhyphenmins} -% \changes{danish-1.3p}{2003/11/17}{Added default for setting of -% hyphenmin parameters} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Set lefthyphenmin to two} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Danish language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsdanish} -% The macro |\captionsdanish| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{danish-1.2}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{danish-1.2b}{1993/10/23}{Added a few translations} -% \changes{danish-1.3c}{1994/06/04}{Included some revisions from Peter -% Busk Larsen} -% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{danish-1.3i}{1995/07/13}{Added translation of `Proof'} -% \changes{danish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{danish-1.3o}{2003/04/10}{Added translation of `Glossary'} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsdanish{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Litteratur}% - \def\abstractname{Resum\'e}% - \def\bibname{Litteratur}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Bilag}% - \def\contentsname{Indhold}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlagt}% - \def\ccname{Kopi til}% or Kopi sendt til - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Se}% - \def\alsoname{Se ogs{\aa}}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloseliste}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datedanish} -% The macro |\datedanish| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Danish dates. -% \changes{danish-1.3a}{1994/03/23}{Added `.' to definition of -% \cs{today}} -% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datedanish{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or marts\or april\or maj\or juni\or - juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasdanish} -% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{bbl@frenchspacing}} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasdanish} -% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}} -% The macro |\extrasdanish| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Danish language. The macro |\noextrasdanish| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasdanish|. -% -% Danish typesetting requires |\frenchspacing| to be in effect. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For Danish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is -% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in -% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the danish group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasdanish{\languageshorthands{danish}} -\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{danish-1.3m}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Danish} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% First we define access to the low opening double quote and -% guillemets for quotations, -% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/08/15}{Changed definition of \texttt{"'} -% to print \texttt{``} instead of \texttt{''}} -% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after double -% quote and guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define commands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|. -% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/08/15}{Added definition of -% \texttt{"\char126} and \texttt{"\char61}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To enable hyphenation in two words, written together but -% separated by a slash, as in `uitdrukking/opmerking' we define the -% command |"/|. -% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Added definition of \texttt{"/} -% from \texttt{dutch.ldf}} -% \changes{danish-1.3r}{2009/09/19}{Made "/ a real Danish shorthand} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"/}{\textormath - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Added redefinition of \cs{-} from -% \texttt{dutch.ldf}} -% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version -% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while -% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated -% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is -% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where -% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means -% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that -% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{danish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 5b113c61593..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{danish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{danish.ldf}{\from{danish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 24e2031922d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,560 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{300} -%\iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{dutch.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{dutch} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{dutch.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v3.8i Dutch support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `dutch.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Dutch Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Dutch language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\makeatletter -\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}% - \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@ - \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@ - \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}} -\makeatother -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{dutch.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -% \fi -% \GetFileInfo{dutch.dtx} -% -% \changes{dutch-2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added checking of format} -% \changes{dutch-2.0b}{1990/04/02}{Added extrasdutch} -% \changes{dutch-2.0c}{1990/04/18}{Added grqq macros} -% \changes{dutch-2.1}{1990/04/24}{reflect change to version 2.1 in -% babel and changes in german v2.3} -% \changes{dutch-2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments} -% \changes{dutch-2.1b}{1990/07/04}{Incorporated more comments by Nico} -% \changes{dutch-2.1c}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos} -% \changes{dutch-2.2}{1990/07/16}{Fixed problem with the use of -% \texttt{"} in moving arguments while \texttt{"} is active} -% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{When using PostScript fonts with the -% Adobe font-encoding, the dieresis-accent is located elsewhere, -% modified code} -% \changes{dutch-2.3a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation somewhat} -% \changes{dutch-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0} -% \changes{dutch-3.0a}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log} -% \changes{dutch-3.1}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer} -% \changes{dutch-3.2a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com} -% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Rewritten parts of the code to use -% the new features of babel version 3.1} -% \changes{dutch-3.6}{1994/02/02}{Update or LaTeX2e} -% \changes{dutch-3.6c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}, -% moved identification after the loading of babel.def} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Moved identification code to the -% top of the file} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Rewrote the code with respect to -% the active double quote character} -% \changes{dutch-3.7f}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{Merged in the definitions for -% `afrikaans'} -% -% \section{The Dutch language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Dutch -% language and the `Afrikaans' version\footnote{contributed by -% Stoffel Lombard (\texttt{lombc@b31pc87.up.ac.za})} of it. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:dutch-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% One of the reasons for this is that in the Dutch language a word -% with a dieresis can be hyphenated just before the letter with the -% umlaut, but the dieresis has to disappear if the word is broken -% between the previous letter and the accented letter. -% -% In~\cite{treebus} the quoting conventions for the Dutch language -% are discussed. The preferred convention is the single-quote -% Anglo-American convention, i.e. `This is a quote'. An -% alternative is the slightly old-fashioned Dutch method with -% initial double quotes lowered to the baseline, \dlqq This is a -% quote'', which should be typed as \texttt{"`This is a quote"'}. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"a| & |\"a| which hyphenates as |-a|; -% also implemented for the other letters. \\ -% |"y| & puts a negative kern between \texttt{i} and \texttt{j}\\ -% |"Y| & puts a negative kern between \texttt{I} and \texttt{J}\\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"~| & to produce a hyphencharcter without the following -% |\discretionary{}{}{}|.\\ -% |""| & to produce an invisible `breakpoint'.\\ -% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (see example below).\\ -% |"'| & normal double right quotes. \\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{dutch.ldf}} -% \label{tab:dutch-quote} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{Removed code to load -% \file{latexhax.com}} -% \changes{dutch-3.2a}{1991/07/15}{Added reset of catcode of @ before -% \cs{endinput}.} -% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{Moved code to the beginning of the -% file and added \cs{selectlanguage} call} -% \begin{macrocode} -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{made check dependant on -% \cs{CurrentOption}} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{dutch} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@dutch| or |l@afrikaans| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% First we try to establish with which option we are being -% processed. -% -% \changes{dutch-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if language -% undefined} -% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{Added warning, if no dutch patterns -% loaded} -% \changes{dutch-3.6c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce -% the warning} -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{this needs a more complicated check -% as `afrikaans' may or may not have its own hyphenation patterns} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{dutch} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa -% \end{macrocode} -% If it is \Lopt{dutch} then we first check if the Dutch -% hyphenation patterns wer loaded, -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\l@dutch\undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% if no we issue a warning and make dutch a `dialect' of either the -% hyphenation patterns that were loaded in slot 0 or of `afrikaans' -% when it is available. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@nopatterns{Dutch} - \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined - \adddialect\l@dutch0 - \else - \adddialect\l@dutch\l@afrikaans - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Dutch language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsdutch} -% The macro |\captionsdutch| defines all strings used -% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be -% \cs{headpagename}} -% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{added \cs{seename} and -% \cs{alsoname}} -% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{added \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{dutch-3.5}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7c}{1995/06/08}{We need the \texttt{"} to be active -% while defining \cs{captionsdutch}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7d}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{dutch-3.8b}{1997/01/06}{Use \texttt{Bew"ys} instead of -% \texttt{Bewijs}} -% \changes{dutch-3.8h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \begingroup - \catcode`\"\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\captionsdutch{% - \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}% - \def\refname{Referenties}% - \def\abstractname{Samenvatting}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Hoofdstuk}% - \def\appendixname{B"ylage}% - \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgave}% - \def\listfigurename{L"yst van figuren}% - \def\listtablename{L"yst van tabellen}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Figuur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Deel}% - \def\enclname{B"ylage(n)}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{Aan}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{zie}% - \def\alsoname{zie ook}% - \def\proofname{Bew"ys}% - \def\glossaryname{Verklarende Woordenl"yst}% - } - }\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datedutch} -% The macro |\datedutch| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Dutch dates. -% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\datedutch{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or mei\or juni\or - juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or november\or - december\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% When the option with which this file is being process was not -% \Lopt{dutch} we assume it was \Lopt{afrikaans}. We perform a -% similar check on the availability of the hyphenation paterns. -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined - \@nopatterns{Afrikaans} - \ifx\l@dutch\undefined - \adddialect\l@afrikaans0 - \else - \adddialect\l@afrikaans\l@dutch - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsafrikaans} -% Now is the time to define the words for `Afrikaans'. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\captionsafrikaans{% - \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}% - \def\refname{Verwysings}% - \def\abstractname{Samevatting}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Hoofstuk}% - \def\appendixname{Bylae}% - \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgawe}% - \def\listfigurename{Lys van figure}% - \def\listtablename{Lys van tabelle}% - \def\indexname{Inhoud}% - \def\figurename{Figuur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Deel}% - \def\enclname{Bylae(n)}% - \def\ccname{a.a.}% - \def\headtoname{Aan}% - \def\pagename{Bladsy}% - \def\seename{sien}% - \def\alsoname{sien ook}% - \def\proofname{Bewys}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateafrikaans} -% Here is the `Afrikaans' version of the date macro. -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\dateafrikaans{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januarie\or Februarie\or Maart\or April\or Mei\or Junie\or - Julie\or Augustus\or September\or Oktober\or November\or - Desember\fi - \space \number\year}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasdutch} -% \begin{macro}{\extrasafrikaans} -% \changes{dutch-3.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to prevent -% white space} -% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/6}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{Save all redefined macros} -% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Macro complete rewritten} -% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{modified handling of -% \cs{dospecials} and \cs{@sanitize}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasdutch} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasafrikaans} -% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{Added \cs{dieresis}} -% \changes{dutch-3.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to prevent -% white space} -% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{Try to restore everything to its -% former state} -% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Macro complete rewritten} -% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{modified handling of \cs{dospecials} -% and \cs{@sanitize}} -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{Made all definitions dependant on -% \cs{CurrentOption}} -% -% The macros |\extrasdutch| and |\captionsafrikaans| will perform -% all the extra definitions needed for the Dutch language. The -% macros |\noextrasdutch| and |noextrasafrikaans| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasdutch| and |\captionsafrikaans|. -% -% For Dutch the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the -% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the dutch group of shorthands should -% be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -% \end{macrocode} -% Both version of the language use the same set of shorthand -% definitions althoug the `ij' is not used in Afrikaans. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{dutch}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The `umlaut' character should be positioned lower on \emph{all} -% vowels in Dutch texts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \umlautlow\umlautelow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{% - \umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dutchhyphenmins} -% \begin{macro}{\afrikaanshyphenmins} -% The dutch hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~3. -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{dutchhyphenmins} to store -% the correct values} -% \changes{dutch-3.8h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{save@sf@q} macro from -% germanb and rewrote all quote macros to use it} -% \changes{dutch-3.4b}{1991/02/16}{moved definition of -% \cs{allowhyphens}, \cs{set@low@box} and \cs{save@sf@q} to -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Removed \cs{dlqq}, \cs{@dlqq}, -% \cs{drqq}, \cs{@drqq} and \cs{dieresis}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/15}{moved the definition of the double -% quote character at the baseline to \file{glyhps.def}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@trema} -% In the Dutch language vowels with a trema are treated -% specially. If a hyphenation occurs before a vowel-plus-trema, the -% trema should disappear. To be able to do this we could first -% define the hyphenation break behaviour for the five vowels, both -% lowercase and uppercase, in terms of |\discretionary|. But this -% results in a large |\if|-construct in the definition of the -% active |"|. Because we think a user should not use |"| when he -% really means something like |''| we chose not to distinguish -% between vowels and consonants. Therefore we have one macro -% |\@trema| which specifies the hyphenation break behaviour for all -% letters. -% -% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{\cs{dieresis} instead of -% \cs{accent127}} -% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{renamed \cs{@umlaut} to -% \cs{@trema}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@trema#1{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{#1}{\"{#1}}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/15}{Moved the definition of \cs{ij} and -% \cs{IJ} to \file{glyphs.def}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{The support macros for the active -% double quote have been moved to \file{babel.def}} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the tremas, -% -% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{\cs{dieresis} instead of -% \cs{accent127}} -% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{added case for \texttt{"y} and -% \texttt{"Y}} -% \changes{dutch-3.2b}{1991/07/16}{removed typo (allowhpyhens)} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Now use \cs{Declaredq{dutch}} to -% define the functions of the active double quote} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of -% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}} -% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/03/05}{Use more general mechanism of -% \cs{declare@shorthand}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"a}{\textormath{\@trema a}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"e}{\textormath{\@trema e}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"i}{\textormath - {\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\"{\i}}\allowhyphens}% - {\ddot \imath}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"o}{\textormath{\@trema o}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"u}{\textormath{\@trema u}{\ddot u}} -% \end{macrocode} -% dutch quotes, -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after double -% quote characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \changes{dutch-3.7b}{1995/06/04}{Added \texttt{""} shorthand} -% \changes{dutch-3.8c}{1997/01/14}{Added the \texttt{"\~{}} shorthand} -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/04/01}{Forgot to replace `german' by -% `dutch' when copying definition for \texttt{"\~{}}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"y}{\textormath{\ij{}}{\ddot y}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"Y}{\textormath{\IJ{}}{\ddot Y}} -% \end{macrocode} -% To enable hyphenation in two words, written together but -% separated by a slash, as in `uitdrukking/opmerking' we define the -% command |"/|. -% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/03}{Added a shorthand with the slash -% character} -% \changes{dutch-3.8i}{2003/09/15}{\texttt{"/} should use -% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"/}{\textormath - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% -% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version -% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while -% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated -% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is -% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where -% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means -% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that -% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns. -% \changes{dutch-3.8i}{2003/09/15}{\cs{-} should use -% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 1437c660a7e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{dutch.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{dutch.ldf}{\from{dutch.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 9054cc2957b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,451 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{360} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{english.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{english} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{english.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v3.3o English support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File 'english.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the English language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{english.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{english.dtx} -% -% \changes{english-2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added checking of format} -% \changes{english-2.1}{1990/04/24}{Reflect changes in babel 2.1} -% \changes{english-2.1a}{1990/05/14}{Incorporated Nico's comments} -% \changes{english-2.1b}{1990/05/14}{merged \file{USenglish.sty} into -% this file} -% \changes{english-2.1c}{1990/05/22}{fixed typo in definition for -% american language found by Werenfried Spit (nspit@fys.ruu.nl)} -% \changes{english-2.1d}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos} -% \changes{english-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0} -% \changes{english-3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer} -% \changes{english-3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{english-3.1}{1991/11/05}{Rewrote parts of the code to use -% the new features of babel version 3.1} -% \changes{english-3.3}{1994/02/08}{Update or \LaTeXe} -% \changes{english-3.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved the identification after the loading of -% \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The English language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% English language as well as for the American and Australian -% version of this language. For the Australian version the British -% hyphenation patterns will be used, if available, for the Canadian -% variant the American patterns are selected. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{english} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@english| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{english-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if -% language undefined} -% \changes{english-3.0d}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{english-3.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Allow british as the name of the -% UK patterns} -% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Also allow american english -% hyphenation patterns to be used for `english'} -% We allow for the british english patterns to be loaded as either -% `british', or `UKenglish'. When neither of those is -% known we try to define |\l@english| as an alias for |\l@american| -% or |\l@USenglish|. -% \changes{english-3.3k}{2001/02/07}{Added support for canadian} -% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for australian and -% newzealand} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@english\@undefined - \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined - \ifx\l@british\@undefined - \ifx\l@american\@undefined - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined - \ifx\l@canadian\@undefined - \ifx\l@australian\@undefined - \ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined - \@nopatterns{English} - \adddialect\l@english0 - \else - \let\l@english\l@newzealand - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@australian - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@canadian - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@USenglish - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@american - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@british - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@UKenglish - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Because we allow `british' to be used as the babel option we need -% to make sure that it will be recognised by |\selectlanguage|. In -% the code above we have made sure that |\l@english| was defined. -% Now we want to make sure that |\l@british| and |\l@UKenglish| are -% defined as well. When either of them is we make them equal to -% each other, when neither is we fall back to the default, -% |\l@english|. -% \changes{english-3.3o}{2004/06/14}{Make sure that british patterns -% are used if they were loaded} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@british\@undefined - \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined - \adddialect\l@british\l@english - \adddialect\l@UKenglish\l@english - \else - \let\l@british\l@UKenglish - \fi -\else - \let\l@UKenglish\l@british -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% `American' is a version of `English' which can have its own -% hyphenation patterns. The default english patterns are in fact -% for american english. We allow for the patterns to be loaded as -% `english' `american' or `USenglish'. -% \changes{english-3.0}{1990/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} for -% american} -% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{english-3.3d}{1995/02/01}{Only define american as a -% dialect when no separate patterns have been loaded} -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Allow USenglish as the name of -% the american patterns} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@american\@undefined - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% When the patterns are not know as `american' or `USenglish' we -% add a ``dialect''. -% \begin{macrocode} - \adddialect\l@american\l@english - \else - \let\l@american\l@USenglish - \fi -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Make sure that USenglish is known, even if the patterns were -% loaded as `american'. -% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Ensure that \cs{l@USenglish} is -% alway defined} -% \changes{english-3.3l}{2001/04/15}{Added missing backslash} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined - \let\l@USenglish\l@american - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% - -% \changes{english-3.3k}{2001/02/07}{Added support for canadian} -% `Canadian' english spelling is a hybrid of British and American -% spelling. Although so far no special `translations' have been -% reported we allow this file to be loaded by the option -% \Lopt{candian} as well. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@canadian\@undefined - \adddialect\l@canadian\l@american -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for australian and -% newzealand} -% `Australian' and `New Zealand' english spelling seem to be the -% same as British spelling. Although so far no special -% `translations' have been reported we allow this file to be loaded -% by the options \Lopt{australian} and \Lopt{newzealand} as well. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@australian\@undefined - \adddialect\l@australian\l@british -\fi -\ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined - \adddialect\l@newzealand\l@british -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% - -% \begin{macro}{\englishhyphenmins} -% \changes{english-3.3m}{2003/11/17}{Added default for setting of -% hyphenmin parameters} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the English language. -% \begin{macro}{\captionsenglish} -% The macro |\captionsenglish| defines all strings used -% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be -% \cs{headpagename}} -% \changes{english-3.1a}{1991/11/11}{added \cs{seename} and -% \cs{alsoname}} -% \changes{english-3.1b}{1992/01/26}{added \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{english-3.2}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{english-3.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the -% fly} -% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Preface}% - \def\refname{References}% - \def\abstractname{Abstract}% - \def\bibname{Bibliography}% - \def\chaptername{Chapter}% - \def\appendixname{Appendix}% - \def\contentsname{Contents}% - \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}% - \def\listtablename{List of Tables}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Figure}% - \def\tablename{Table}% - \def\partname{Part}% - \def\enclname{encl}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{To}% - \def\pagename{Page}% - \def\seename{see}% - \def\alsoname{see also}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateenglish} -% In order to define |\today| correctly we need to know whether it -% should be `english', `australian', or `american'. We can find -% this out by checking the value of |\CurrentOption|. -% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Make sure that the value of -% \cs{today} is correct for both options `american' and -% `USenglish'} -% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for `Australian' -% and `Newzealand'} -% \changes{english-3.3o}{2004/06/14}{Explicitly choose the UK form of -% date} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{british} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{UKenglish} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{american} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{USenglish} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{canadian} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{australian} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{newzealand} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\dateenglish| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce English dates. -% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the -% fly} -% \changes{english-3.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{english-3.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{UK} -\ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\ifcase\day\or - 1st\or 2nd\or 3rd\or 4th\or 5th\or - 6th\or 7th\or 8th\or 9th\or 10th\or - 11th\or 12th\or 13th\or 14th\or 15th\or - 16th\or 17th\or 18th\or 19th\or 20th\or - 21st\or 22nd\or 23rd\or 24th\or 25th\or - 26th\or 27th\or 28th\or 29th\or 30th\or - 31st\fi~\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi\space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateaustralian} -% Now, test for `australian' or `american'. -% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Add australian date} -% \begin{macrocode} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\dateaustralian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Australian resp.\ New Zealand dates. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bbl@tempa{AU} - \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi\space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateamerican} -% The macro |\dateamerican| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce American dates. -% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{english-3.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{english-3.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \else - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi \space\number\day, \number\year}} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasenglish} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasenglish} -% The macro |\extrasenglish| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the English language. The macro |\noextrasenglish| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasenglish|. For the moment -% these macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility -% with the other language definition files. -% -% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequences on -% the fly} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 67c897423da..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{english.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{english.ldf}{\from{english.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 41ba9465429..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,343 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{261} -%\iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{esperanto.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{esperanto} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{esperant.dtx} - [2007/10/20 v1.4t Esperanto support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File 'esperanto.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Esperanto language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Ruiz-Altaba Marti (ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch) Code from -% esperant.sty version 1.1 by Joerg Knappen -% (\texttt{knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}) was included in -% version 1.2. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{esperanto.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{esperanto.dtx} -% -% \changes{esperanto-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with -% babel~3.2a} -% \changes{esperanto-1.2}{1992/02/18}{Included code from -% \texttt{esperant.sty}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4a}{1994/02/04}{Updated for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4d}{1994/06/25}{Removed the use of -% \cs{filedate}, moved Identification after loading of -% \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4e}{1995/02/09}{Moved identification code to -% the top of the file} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4f}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typos (PR1652)} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The Esperanto language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Ruiz-Altaba Marti -% (\texttt{ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch}). Code from the file -% \texttt{esperant.sty} by J\"org Knappen -% (\texttt{knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}) was included.} defines -% all the language-specific macros for the Esperanto language. -% -% For this language the character |^| is made active. -% In table~\ref{tab:esp-act} an overview is given of its purpose. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4j}{1997/01/06}{fixed typo in table caption -% (funtion instead of function)} -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |^c| & gives \^c with hyphenation in the rest of the word -% allowed, this works for c, C, g, G, H, J, s, S, z, Z\\ -% |^h| & prevents h\llap{\^{}} from becoming too tall\\ -% |^j| & gives \^\j\\ -% |^u| & gives \u u, with hyphenation in the rest of the word -% allowed\\ -% |^U| & gives \u U, with hyphenation in the rest of the word -% allowed\\ -% \verb=^|= & inserts a |\discretionary{-}{}{}|\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The functions of the active character for Esperanto.} -% \label{tab:esp-act} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{esperanto}\captionsesperanto -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{esperanto} will be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@esperanto| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \changes{esperanto-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of -% \cs{makeatletter}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4d}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{@nopatterns} for the -% warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@esperanto\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Esperanto} - \adddialect\l@esperanto0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the -% Esperanto language. The reason for this is that a user might want -% to switch back and forth between languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsesperanto} -% The macro |\captionsesperanto| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, -% \cs{alsoname} and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/10}{Repaired a number of mistakes, -% indicated by D. Ederveen} -% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4a}{1994/02/04}{added missing closing brace} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/07/06}{Replaced `Proof' by `Pruvo' -% PR 2207} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4p}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4q}{2002/01/07}{Added translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsesperanto{% - \def\prefacename{Anta\u{u}parolo}% - \def\refname{Cita\^\j{}oj}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografio}% - \def\chaptername{{\^C}apitro}% - \def\appendixname{Apendico}% - \def\contentsname{Enhavo}% - \def\listfigurename{Listo de figuroj}% - \def\listtablename{Listo de tabeloj}% - \def\indexname{Indekso}% - \def\figurename{Figuro}% - \def\tablename{Tabelo}% - \def\partname{Parto}% - \def\enclname{Aldono(j)}% - \def\ccname{Kopie al}% - \def\headtoname{Al}% - \def\pagename{Pa\^go}% - \def\subjectname{Temo}% - \def\seename{vidu}% a^u: vd. - \def\alsoname{vidu anka\u{u}}% a^u vd. anka\u{u} - \def\proofname{Pruvo}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosaro}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateesperanto} -% The macro |\dateesperanto| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Esperanto dates. -% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/10}{Removed the capitals from -% \cs{today}} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4k}{1998/03/27}{Removed Rthe use of \cs{edef} -% again} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateesperanto{% - \def\today{\number\day{--a}~de~\ifcase\month\or - januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or - julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or - decembro\fi,\space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasesperanto} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasesperanto} -% The macro |\extrasesperanto| performs all the extra definitions -% needed for the Esperanto language. The macro |\noextrasesperanto| -% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasesperanto|. -% -% For Esperanto the |^| character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{^} -% \end{macrocode} -% Because the character |^| is used in math mode with quite a -% different purpose we need to add an extra level of evaluation to -% the definition of the active |^|. It checks whether math mode is -% active; if so the shorthand mechanism is bypassed by a direct -% call of |\normal@char^|. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4n}{1999/09/30}{Added a check for math mode to -% the definition of the shorthand character} -% \changes{esperant0-1.4o}{1999/12/18}{Moved the check for math to -% babel.def} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasesperanto{\languageshorthands{esperanto}} -\addto\extrasesperanto{\bbl@activate{^}} -\addto\noextrasesperanto{\bbl@deactivate{^}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a -% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4l}{1999/04/11}{Added a shorthand definition on -% system level} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% And here are the uses of the active |^|: -% \changes{esperanto-1.4h}{1995/07/27}{Added a few shorthands} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^c}{\^{c}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^C}{\^{C}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^g}{\^{g}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^G}{\^{G}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^h}{h\llap{\^{}}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^H}{\^{H}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^j}{\^{\j}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^J}{\^{J}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^s}{\^{s}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^S}{\^{S}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^u}{\u u\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^U}{\u U\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Esper} -% \begin{macro}{\esper} -% In \file{esperant.sty} J\"org Knappen provides the macros -% |\esper| and |\Esper| that can be used instead of |\alph| and -% |\Alph|. These macros are available in this file as well. -% -% Their definition takes place in two steps. First the toplevel. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\esper#1{\@esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}} -\def\Esper#1{\@Esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Then the second level. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4q}{2002/01/08}{Removed the extra level of -% expansion for more than five items, as was done in \LaTeX} -% \changes{esperanto-1.4t}{2006/06/05}{Added the missing `r' in these -% macros} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@esper#1{% - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or \^c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or \^g\or - h\or h\llap{\^{}}\or i\or j\or \^\j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or - p\or r\or s\or \^s\or t\or u\or \u{u}\or v\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\def\@Esper#1{% - \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or \^C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or \^G\or - H\or \^H\or I\or J\or \^J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or - P\or R\or S\or \^S\or T\or U\or \u{U}\or V\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hodiau} -% \begin{macro}{\hodiaun} -% In \file{esperant.sty} J\"org Knappen provides two alternative -% macros for |\today|, |\hodiau| and |\hodiaun|. The second macro -% produces an accusative version of the date in Esperanto. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\dateesperanto{\def\hodiau{la \today}} -\def\hodiaun{la \number\day --an~de~\ifcase\month\or - januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or - julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or - decembro\fi, \space \number\year} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{esperanto} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 89776ece1d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2000/09/26} -\def\batchfile{esperanto.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{esperanto.ldf}{\from{esperanto.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 48a39bfac0d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,468 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{327} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{estonian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{estonian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{estonian.dtx} - [2009/03/08 v1.0k Estonian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `estonian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Estonian language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2009 -%% by Enn Saar, Tartu Astrophysical Observatory -% Tartu Astrophysical Observatory -% EE-2444 T\~oravere -% Estonia -% tel: +372 7 410 267 -% fax: +372 7 410 205 -% saar@aai.ee -% -% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: Jaan Vajakas jv at ut.ee -%% (or Enn Saar saar at aai.ee -%% or J. L. Braams babel at braams.xs4all.nl) -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Estonian language definition file. The original -% version of this file was written by Enn Saar (saar@aai.ee). -% Modified by Jaan Vajakas (jv@ut.ee). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{estonian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \changes{estonian-1.0b}{1995/06/16}{corrected typos} -% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/03/07}{corrected documentation of the -% commands |"-| and |\-|} -% -% \GetFileInfo{estonian.dtx} -% -% \section{The Estonian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The original author is Enn Saar, -% (\texttt{saar@aai.ee}).} defines the language definition macro's -% for the Estonian language. -% -% This file was written as part of the TWGML project, and borrows -% heavily from the \babel\ German and Spanish language files -% \file{germanb.ldf} and \file{spanish.ldf}. -% -% Estonian has the same umlauts as German (\"a, \"o, \"u), but in -% addition to this, we have also \~o, and two recent characters -% \v s and \v z, so we need at least two active characters. -% We shall use |"| and |~| to type Estonian accents on ASCII -% keyboards (in the 7-bit character world). Their use is given in -% table~\ref{tab:estonian-quote}. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |~o| & |\~o|, (and uppercase); \\ -% |"a| & |\"a|, (and uppercase); \\ -% |"o| & |\"o|, (and uppercase); \\ -% |"u| & |\"u|, (and uppercase); \\ -% |~s| & |\v s|, (and uppercase); \\ -% |~z| & |\v z|, (and uppercase); \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position;\\ -% |"-| & like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word;\\ -% |"`| & for Estonian low left double quotes (same as German);\\ -% |"'| & for Estonian right double quotes;\\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (also rather popular)\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes.\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{estonian.ldf}}\label{tab:estonian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% These active accent characters behave according to their original -% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in -% that table; the original quote character can be typed using the -% macro |\dq|. -% -% We support also the T1 output encoding (and Cork-encoded text -% input). You can choose the T1 encoding by the command -% |\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}|. This package must be loaded before -% \babel. As the standard Estonian hyphenation file -% \file{eehyph.tex} is in the Cork encoding, choosing this encoding -% will give you better hyphenation. -% -% As mentioned in the Spanish style file, it may happen that some -% packages fail (usually in a \cs{message}). In this case you -% should change the order of the \cs{usepackage} declarations -% or the order of the style options in \cs{documentclass}. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \subsection{Implementation} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{estonian}\captionsestonian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If Estonian is not included in the format file (does not have -% hyphenation patterns), we shall use English hyphenation. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@estonian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Estonian} - \adddialect\l@estonian0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now come the commands to switch to (and from) Estonian. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsestonian} -% The macro |\captionsestonian| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% -% \changes{estonian-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{Added translation of `Proof'} -% \changes{estonian-1.0h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{estonian-1.0j}{2008/07/07}{Replaced the translation of -% `Proof'} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{Added translation of -% `Glossary'} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsestonian{% - \def\prefacename{Sissejuhatus}% - \def\refname{Viited}% - \def\bibname{Kirjandus}% - \def\appendixname{Lisa}% - \def\contentsname{Sisukord}% - \def\listfigurename{Joonised}% - \def\listtablename{Tabelid}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Joonis}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Osa}% - \def\enclname{Lisa(d)}% - \def\ccname{Koopia(d)}% - \def\headtoname{}% - \def\pagename{Lk.}% - \def\seename{vt.}% - \def\alsoname{vt. ka}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% These captions contain accented characters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"\active -\def\x{\endgroup -\addto\captionsestonian{% - \def\abstractname{Kokkuv~ote}% - \def\chaptername{Peat"ukk}% - \def\proofname{T~oestus}% - \def\glossaryname{S~onastik}% -}}\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateestonian} -% The macro |\dateestonian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Estonian dates. -% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\month@estonian{\ifcase\month\or - jaanuar\or veebruar\or m"arts\or aprill\or mai\or juuni\or - juuli\or august\or september\or oktoober\or november\or - detsember\fi}} -\x -\def\dateestonian{% - \def\today{\number\day.\space\month@estonian - \space\number\year.\space a.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Some useful macros, copied from the spanish package (and renamed |es@...| to |et@...|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\et@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1} - -\@ifundefined{documentclass} - {\let\ifet@latex\iffalse} - {\let\ifet@latex\iftrue} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasestonian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasestonian} -% The macro |\extrasestonian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for Estonian. The macro |\noextrasestonian| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasestonian|. For Estonian, -% |"| is made active and has to be treated as `special' (|~| is -% active already). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\initiate@active@char{~} -\addto\extrasestonian{\languageshorthands{estonian}} -\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@activate{"}\bbl@activate{~}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{Removed the code that changes -% category, lower case, uper case and space factor codes } -% -% Estonian does not use extra spaces after sentences. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasestonian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\estonianhyphenmins} -% For Estonian, |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| are -% both~2. -% \changes{estonian-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The standard \TeX\ accents are too high for Estonian typography, -% we have to lower them (following the \babel\ German style). -% For umlauts, we can use |\umlautlow| in \file{babel.ldf}. -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{use \cs{umlauthigh} to restore -% umlauts (before, |\babel@save\"| was used but that did not work)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasestonian{\umlautlow} -\addto\noextrasestonian{\umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Redefine tilde (as in \file{spanish.ldf}). In case of \LaTeX, we -% redefine the internal macro for the OT1 encoding because in case of -% T1, the display and hyphenation of words containing |\~o| works -% better without redefining it (e. g. words containing |\et@gentilde| -% are not hyphenated unless |\allowhyphens| is used; when copied from -% Acrobat Reader, pasting an \~o generated using |\et@gentilde{o}| -% gives |~o| rather than \~o; when the times package is used with T1 -% encoding, |\et@gentilde| places the tilde through the letter o). -% In plain \TeX\ there is no encoding infrastructure, so we just -% redefine |\~|. -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{redefine -% |\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname| instead of |\~| (before, -% redefining |\~| resulted in no hyphenation of words containing -% |\~o| in T1 and incorrect display of |\~o| with the times package)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifet@latex - \addto\extrasestonian{% - \expandafter\et@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\et@gentilde}} -\else - \addto\extrasestonian{\et@sdef\~{\et@gentilde}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\et@gentilde} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{use tilde for all letters except -% s and z (instead of using caron for all letters except o), like -% other \babel\ language packages do (this fixes the display of \~n -% when using the utf8 package)} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{do not redefine caron any -% more because the default one looks good enough} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{renamed macros \cs{gentilde} and -% \cs{newtilde} to \cs{et@gentilde} and \cs{et@newtilde}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\et@gentilde#1{% - \if#1s\v{#1}\else\if#1S\v{#1}\else% - \if#1z\v{#1}\else\if#1Z\v{#1}\else% - \et@newtilde{#1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\et@newtilde} -% For a detailed explanation of the following code see the -% definition of \cs{lower@umlaut} in \file{babel.dtx}. -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/04}{merged updates in the definition -% \cs{lower@umlaut} into \cs{et@newtilde}: removed \cs{allowhyphens} -% and added \cs{bgroup}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\et@newtilde#1{% - \leavevmode\bgroup\U@D 1ex% - {\setbox\z@\hbox{\char126}\dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@ - \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}% - \accent126\fontdimen5\font\U@D #1% - \egroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We save the double quote character in |\dq|, and tilde in |\til|. -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{removed macros \cs{dieresis} and -% \cs{texttilde} that were used to store the original definitions of -% |\"| and |\~|, as they would have no purpose now} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dq{"} - \def\noexpand\til{~}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If the encoding is T1, we have to tell \TeX\ about our redefined -% accents. -% -% \changes{estonian-1.0g}{1999/04/11}{use \cs{bbl@t@one} instead of -% \cs{bbl@next}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{s}{178} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{S}{146} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{z}{186} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{Z}{154} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{'}{17} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{`}{18} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{<}{19} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{>}{20} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If the encoding differs from T1, we expand the accents, enabling -% hyphenation beyond the accent. In this case \TeX\ will not find -% all possible breaks, and we have to warn people. -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{removed definitions of macros -% |\@umlaut| and |\@tilde| as they seemed to have no purpose} -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \wlog{Warning: Hyphenation would work better for the T1 encoding.} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we define the shorthands: umlauts, -% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{The second argument was missing -% in the definition of some of the double-quote shorthands} -% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/08}{use \cs{allowhyphens} to allow hyphenation in words containing |"a|, |"A|, |"o|, |"O|, |"u| or |"U|} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% German and French quotes, -% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% double quote and guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tildes and carons -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~o}{\textormath{\~{o}\allowhyphens}{\tilde o}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~O}{\textormath{\~{O}\allowhyphens}{\tilde O}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check Z}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{""}{\dq} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~~}{\til} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{estonian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 8032b81de79..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{estonian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{estonian.ldf}{\from{estonian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index c8a019bd0a5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,363 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{172} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{finnish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{finnish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{finnish.dtx} - [2007/10/20 v1.3q Finnish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `finnish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Finnish language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Mikko KANERVA (KANERVA@CERNVM) and Keranen Reino -% (KERANEN@CERNVM). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{finnish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{finnish.dtx} -% -% \changes{finnish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1991/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{finnish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{finnish-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{finnish-1.3d}{1994/06/30}{Removed a few references to -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{finnish-1.3q}{2006/06/05}{Small documentation fix} -% -% \section{The Finnish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Mikko KANERVA -% (\texttt{KANERVA@CERNVM}) and Keranen Reino -% (\texttt{KERANEN@CERNVM}).} defines all the language definition -% macros for the Finnish language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:finnish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% |"=| & an explicit hyphen sign for expressions such as -% ``pakastekaapit ja -arkut''.\\ -% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for -% words that should break at some sign such as -% ``entrada/salida.''\\ -% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (looks like ,,)\\ -% |"'| & normal double right quotes\\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{finnish.ldf}} -% \label{tab:finnish-quote} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{finnish}\captionsfinnish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{finnish} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@finnish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{finnish-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{finnish-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@finnish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Finnish} - \adddialect\l@finnish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the -% Finnish language. The reason for this is that a user might want -% to switch back and forth between languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsfinnish} -% The macro |\captionsfinnish| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{finnish-1.1.2}{1993/09/16}{Added translations} -% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{finnish-1.3h}{1995/07/25}{Added finnish word for `Proof'} -% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{finnish-1.3o}{2001/03/12}{Provided translation for -% Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsfinnish{% - \def\prefacename{Esipuhe}% - \def\refname{Viitteet}% - \def\abstractname{Tiivistelm\"a} - \def\bibname{Kirjallisuutta}% - \def\chaptername{Luku}% - \def\appendixname{Liite}% - \def\contentsname{Sis\"alt\"o}% /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */ - \def\listfigurename{Kuvat}% - \def\listtablename{Taulukot}% - \def\indexname{Hakemisto}% - \def\figurename{Kuva}% - \def\tablename{Taulukko}% - \def\partname{Osa}% - \def\enclname{Liitteet}% - \def\ccname{Jakelu}% - \def\headtoname{Vastaanottaja}% - \def\pagename{Sivu}% - \def\seename{katso}% - \def\alsoname{katso my\"os}% - \def\proofname{Todistus}% - \def\glossaryname{Sanasto}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datefinnish} -% The macro |\datefinnish| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Finnish dates. -% \changes{finnish-1.3e}{1994/07/12}{Added a`.' after the number of -% the day} -% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today} -% to save memory} -% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datefinnish{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or - toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or - syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasfinnish} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasfinnish} -% Finnish has many long words (some of them compound, some not). -% For this reason hyphenation is very often the only solution in -% line breaking. For this reason the values of |\hyphenpenalty|, -% |\exhyphenpenalty| and |\doublehyphendemerits| should be -% decreased. (In one of the manuals of style Matti Rintala noticed -% a paragraph with ten lines, eight of which ended in a hyphen!) -% -% Matti Rintala noticed that with these changes \TeX\ handles -% Finnish very well, although sometimes the values of |\tolerance| -% and |\emergencystretch| must be increased. However, I don't think -% changing these values in \file{finnish.ldf} is appropriate, as -% the looseness of the font (and the line width) affect the correct -% choice of these parameters. -% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/13}{Added the setting of more -% hyphenation parameters, according to PR1027} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfinnish{% - \babel@savevariable\hyphenpenalty\hyphenpenalty=30% - \babel@savevariable\exhyphenpenalty\exhyphenpenalty=30% - \babel@savevariable\doublehyphendemerits\doublehyphendemerits=5000% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits=5000% - } -\addto\noextrasfinnish{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Another thing |\extrasfinnish| needs to do is to ensure that -% |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the -% execution of |\noextrasfinnish| will switch it of again. -% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/15}{Added the setting of -% \cs{frenchspacing}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Finnish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is -% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in -% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the finnish group of shorthands -% should be used. -% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added the active double quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\languageshorthands{finnish}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{1999/12/16}{Deactive shorthands ouside of Finnish} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% The `umlaut' character should be positioned lower on \emph{all} -% vowels in Finnish texts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\umlautlow\umlautelow} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% First we define access to the low opening double quote and -% guillemets for quotations, -% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% double quote and guillemot characters} -% \changes{finnish-1.3m}{1999/04/13}{Added misisng closing brace} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|. -% \changes{finnish-1.3p}{2001/11/13}{\texttt{\symbol{34}\symbol{61}} -% should also use \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% -% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version -% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while -% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated -% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is -% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch, Finnish and German, -% where long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a -% means to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the -% ones that \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns. -% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added change of \cs{-}} -% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{\cs{allowhyphens} should have -% been \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\babel@save\-} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\finishhyphenmins} -% The finnish hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{finnishhyphenmins} to -% store the correct values} -% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{finnish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 849e124a163..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{finnish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{finnish.ldf}{\from{finnish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index ffdf03fcc99..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3117 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{2599} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. Nothing to write to the .cfg file, if generated. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{frenchb.dtx} -%</dtx> -% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/04}{Argument of \cs{ProvidesLanguage} changed -% from `french' to `frenchb', otherwise \cs{listfiles} prints -% no date/version information. The bug with \cs{listfiles} -% (introduced in v.1.5!), was pointed out by Ulrike Fischer.} -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{frenchb} -%\ProvidesFile{frenchb.dtx} -%<*!cfg> - [2010/08/21 v2.5a French support from the babel system] -%</!cfg> -%<*cfg> -%% frenchb.cfg: configuration file for frenchb.ldf -%% Daniel Flipo daniel.flipo at free.fr -%</cfg> -%% File `frenchb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%<*!cfg> -%% Frenchb language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg -% -%% Please report errors to: Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg -%% daniel.flipo at free.fr -%</!cfg> -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the French language definition file. -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} -\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{lmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% - {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{lmr}\selectfont\char19}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% - {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{lmr}\selectfont\char20}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -\begin{center} - \textbf{\Large A Babel language definition file for French}\\[3mm]^^A\] - Daniel \textsc{Flipo}\\ - \texttt{daniel.flipo@free.fr} -\end{center} - \RecordChanges - \DocInput{frenchb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -% \fi -% \GetFileInfo{frenchb.dtx} -% -% \section{The French language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.}, defines all the language definition macros for the -% French language. -% -% Customisation for the French language is achieved following the -% book ``Lexique des r\`egles typographiques en usage \`a -% l'Imprimerie nationale'' troisi\`eme \'edition (1994), -% ISBN-2-11-081075-0. -% -% First version released: 1.1 (1996/05/31) as part of -% \babel-3.6beta. -% -% |frenchb| has been improved using helpful suggestions from many -% people, mainly from Jacques Andr\'e, Michel Bovani, Thierry Bouche, -% and Vincent Jalby. Thanks to all of them! -% -% This new version (2.x) has been designed to be used with \LaTeXe{} -% and Plain\TeX{} formats only. \LaTeX-2.09 is no longer supported. -% Changes between version 1.6 and \fileversion{} are listed in -% subsection~\ref{ssec-changes} p.~\pageref{ssec-changes}. -% -% An extensive documentation is available in French here:\\ -% |http://daniel.flipo.free.fr/frenchb| -% -% \subsection{Basic interface} -% -% In a multilingual document, some typographic rules are language -% dependent, i.e. spaces before `double punctuation' (|:| |;| |!| -% |?|) in French, others concern the general layout (i.e. layout of -% lists, footnotes, indentation of first paragraphs of sections) and -% should apply to the whole document. -% -% Starting with version~2.2, |frenchb| behaves differently according -% to \babel's \emph{main language} defined as the \emph{last} -% option\footnote{Its name is kept in \texttt{\textbackslash -% bbl@main@language}.} at \babel's loading. When French is -% not \babel's main language, |frenchb| no longer alters the global -% layout of the document (even in parts where French is the current -% language): the layout of lists, footnotes, indentation of first -% paragraphs of sections are not customised by |frenchb|. -% -% When French is loaded as the last option of \babel, |frenchb| -% makes the following changes to the global layout, \emph{both in -% French and in all other languages}\footnote{% -% For each item, hooks are provided to reset standard -% \LaTeX{} settings or to emulate the behavior of former versions -% of \texttt{frenchb} (see command -% \texttt{\textbackslash frenchbsetup\{\}}, -% section~\ref{ssec-custom}).}: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item the first paragraph of each section is indented -% (\LaTeX{} only); -% \item the default items in itemize environment are set to `--' -% instead of `\textbullet', and all vertical spacing and glue -% is deleted; it is possible to change `--' to something else -% (`---' for instance) using |\frenchbsetup{}|; -% \item vertical spacing in general \LaTeX{} lists is -% shortened; -% \item footnotes are displayed ``\`a la fran\c{c}aise''. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% Regarding local typography, the command |\selectlanguage{french}| -% switches to the French language\footnote{% -% \texttt{\textbackslash selectlanguage\{francais\}} -% and \texttt{\textbackslash selectlanguage\{frenchb\}} are kept -% for backward compatibility but should no longer be used.}, -% with the following effects: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item French hyphenation patterns are made active; -% \item `double punctuation' (|:| |;| |!| |?|) is made -% active%\footnote{Actually, they are active in the whole -% document, only their expansions differ in French and -% outside French.} for correct spacing in French; -% \item |\today| prints the date in French; -% \item the caption names are translated into French -% (\LaTeX{} only); -% \item the space after |\dots| is removed in French. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% Some commands are provided in |frenchb| to make typesetting -% easier: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item French quotation marks can be entered using the commands -% |\og| and |\fg| which work in \LaTeXe and Plain\TeX, -% their appearance depending on what is available to draw -% them; even if you use \LaTeXe{} \emph{and} |T1|-encoding, -% you should refrain from entering them as -% |<<~French quotation marks~>>|: |\og| and |\fg| provide -% better horizontal spacing. -% |\og| and |\fg| can be used outside French, they typeset -% then English quotes `` and ''. -% \item A command |\up| is provided to typeset superscripts like -% |M\up{me}| (abbreviation for ``Madame''), |1\up{er}| (for -% ``premier''). Other commands are also provided for -% ordinals: |\ier|, |\iere|, |\iers|, |\ieres|, |\ieme|, -% |\iemes| (|3\iemes| prints 3\textsuperscript{es}). -% \item Family names should be typeset in small capitals and never -% be hyphenated, the macro |\bsc| (boxed small caps) does -% this, e.g., |Leslie~\bsc{Lamport}| will produce -% Leslie~\mbox{\textsc{Lamport}}. Note that composed names -% (such as Dupont-Durant) may now be hyphenated on explicit -% hyphens, this differs from |frenchb|~v.1.x. -% \item Commands |\primo|, |\secundo|, |\tertio| and |\quarto| -% print 1\textsuperscript{o}, 2\textsuperscript{o}, -% 3\textsuperscript{o}, 4\textsuperscript{o}. -% |\FrenchEnumerate{6}| prints 6\textsuperscript{o}. -% \item Abbreviations for ``Num\'ero(s)'' and ``num\'ero(s)'' -% (N\textsuperscript{o} N\textsuperscript{os} -% n\textsuperscript{o} and n\textsuperscript{os}~) -% are obtained via the commands |\No|, |\Nos|, |\no|, |\nos|. -% \item Two commands are provided to typeset the symbol for -% ``degr\'e'': |\degre| prints the raw character and -% |\degres| should be used to typeset temperatures (e.g., -% ``|20~\degres C|'' with an unbreakable space), or for -% alcohols' strengths (e.g., ``|45\degres|'' with \emph{no} -% space in French). -% \item In math mode the comma has to be surrounded with -% braces to avoid a spurious space being inserted after it, -% in decimal numbers for instance (see the \TeX{}book p.~134). -% The command |\DecimalMathComma| makes the comma be an -% ordinary character \emph{in French only} (no space added); -% as a counterpart, if |\DecimalMathComma| is active, an -% explicit space has to be added in lists and intervals: -% |$[0,\ 1]$|, |$(x,\ y)$|. |\StandardMathComma| switches back -% to the standard behaviour of the comma. -% \item A command |\nombre| was provided in 1.x versions to easily -% format numbers in slices of three digits separated either -% by a comma in English or with a space in French; |\nombre| -% is now mapped to |\numprint| from \file{numprint.sty}, see -% \file{numprint.pdf} for more information. -% \item |frenchb| has been designed to take advantage of the |xspace| -% package if present: adding |\usepackage{xspace}| in the -% preamble will force macros like |\fg|, |\ier|, |\ieme|, -% |\dots|, \dots, to respect the spaces you type after them, -% for instance typing `|1\ier juin|' will print -% `1\textsuperscript{er} juin' (no need for a forced space -% after |1\ier|). -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \subsection{Customisation} -% \label{ssec-custom} -% -% Up to version 1.6, customisation of |frenchb| was achieved -% by entering commands in \file{frenchb.cfg}. This possibility -% remains for compatibility, but \emph{should not longer be used}. -% Version 2.0 introduces a new command |\frenchbsetup{}| using -% the \file{keyval} syntax which should make it easier to choose -% among the many options available. The command |\frenchbsetup{}| -% is to appear in the preamble only (after loading \babel). -% -% \vspace{.5\baselineskip} -% |\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}| prints all available options to -% the \file{.log} file, it is just meant as a remainder of the -% list of offered options. As usual with \file{keyval} syntax, -% boolean options (as |ShowOptions|) can be entered as -% |ShowOptions=true| or just |ShowOptions|, the `|=true|' part -% can be omitted. -% -% \vspace{.5\baselineskip} -% The other options are listed below. Their default value is shown -% between brackets, sometimes followed be a `\texttt{*}'. -% The `\texttt{*}' means that the default shown applies when -% |frenchb| is loaded as the \emph{last} option of \babel{} -% ---\babel's \emph{main language}---, and is toggled otherwise: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item |StandardLayout=true [false*]| forces |frenchb| not to -% interfere with the layout: no action on any kind of lists, -% first paragraphs of sections are not indented (as in English), -% no action on footnotes. This option replaces the former -% command |\StandardLayout|. It can be used to avoid conflicts -% with classes or packages which customise lists or footnotes. -% \item |GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true*]| can be used, when French -% is the main language, to emulate what prior versions of -% |frenchb| (pre-2.2) did: lists, and first paragraphs -% of sections will be displayed the standard way in other -% languages than French, and ``\`a la fran\c{c}aise'' in French. -% Note that the layout of footnotes is language independent -% anyway (see below |FrenchFootnotes| and |AutoSpaceFootnotes|). -% This option replaces the former command |\FrenchLayout|. -% \item |ReduceListSpacing=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally -% reduces the values of the vertical spaces used in the -% environment |list| in French; setting this option to |false| -% reverts to the standard settings of |list|. This option -% replaces the former command |\FrenchListSpacingfalse|. -% \item |CompactItemize=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally -% redefines the |itemize| environment to -% suppresse any vertical space between items of |itemize| lists -% in French; setting this option to |false| reverts to the -% standard settings of |itemize| lists. This option replaces -% the former command |\FrenchItemizeSpacingfalse|. -% \item |StandardItemLabels=true [false*]| when set to |true| this -% option stops |frenchb| from changing the labels in |itemize| -% lists in French. -% \item |ItemLabels=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|, -% \dots, |[\textendash*]|; when |StandardItemLabels=false| (the -% default), this option enables to choose the label used in -% |itemize| lists for all levels. The next three options do -% the same but each one for one level only. Note that the -% example |\ding{43}| requires |\usepackage{pifont}|. -% \item |ItemLabeli=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|, -% \dots,|[\textendash*]| -% \item |ItemLabelii=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|, -% \dots, |[\textendash*]| -% \item |ItemLabeliii=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|, -% \dots, |[\textendash*]| -% \item |ItemLabeliv=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|, -% \dots, |[\textendash*]| -% \item |StandardLists=true [false*]| forbids |frenchb| to -% customise any kind of list. Do activate the option -% |StandardLists| when using classes or packages that customise -% lists too (|enumitem|, |paralist|, \dots{}) to avoid conflicts. -% This option is just a shorthand for |ReduceListSpacing=false| -% and |CompactItemize=false| and |StandardItemLabels=true|. -% \item |IndentFirst=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally forces -% indentation of the first paragraph of sections. -% When this option is set to |false|, the first paragraph of -% will look the same in French and in English (not indented). -% \item |FrenchFootnotes=false [true*]| reverts to the standard -% layout of footnotes. By default |frenchb| typesets leading -% numbers as `1.\hspace{.5em}' instead of `$\hbox{}^1$', but -% has no effect on footnotes numbered with symbols (as in the -% |\thanks| command). The former commands |\StandardFootnotes| -% and |\FrenchFootnotes| are still there, |\StandardFootnotes| -% can be useful when some footnotes are numbered with letters -% (inside minipages for instance). -% \item |AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true*]| ; by default |frenchb| -% adds a thin space in the running text before the number or -% symbol calling the footnote. Making this option |false| -% reverts to the standard setting (no space added). -% \item |FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]| ; then -% |\up=\textsuperscript| (option added in version 2.1). -% Should only be made |false| to recompile older documents. -% By default |\up| now relies on |\fup| designed to produce -% better looking superscripts. -% \item |AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]|; in French, the user -% \emph{should} input a space before the four characters `|:;!?|' -% but as many people forget about it (even among native French -% writers!), the default behaviour of |frenchb| is to -% automatically add a |\thinspace| before `|;|' `|!|' `|?|' and a -% normal (unbreakable) space before~`|:|' (this is recommended by -% the French Imprimerie nationale). This is convenient in most -% cases but can lead to addition of spurious spaces in URLs or in -% MS-DOS paths but only if they are no typed using |\texttt| or -% verbatim mode. When the current font is a monospaced -% (typewriter) font, |AutoSpacePunctuation| is locally switched -% to |false|, no spurious space is added in that case, so the -% default behaviour of of |frenchb| in that area should be fine -% in most circumstances. -% -% Choosing |AutoSpacePunctuation=false| will ensure that -% a proper space will be added before `|:;!?|' \emph{if and only -% if} a (normal) space has been typed in. Those who are unsure -% about their typing in this area should stick to the default -% option and type |\string;| |\string:| |\string!| |\string?| -% instead of |;| |:| |!| |?| in case an unwanted space is -% added by |frenchb|. -% \item |ThinColonSpace=true [false]| changes the normal -% (unbreakable) space added before the colon `:' to a thin space, -% so that the same amount of space is added before any of the -% four double punctuation characters. The default setting is -% supported by the French Imprimerie nationale. -% \item |LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]| ; by default |frenchb| -% inhibits the uppercasing of superscripts (for instance when they -% are moved to page headers). Making this option |false| -% will disable this behaviour (not recommended). -% \item |PartNameFull=false [true]|; when true, |frenchb| numbers -% the title of |\part{}| commands as ``Premi\`ere partie'', -% ``Deuxi\`eme partie'' and so on. With some classes which change -% the|\part{}| command (AMS and SMF classes do so), you will get -% ``Premi\`ere partie~I'', ``Deuxi\`eme partie~II'' instead; -% when this occurs, this option should be set to |false|, -% part titles will then be printed as ``Partie I'', ``Partie II''. -% \item |SuppressWarning=true [false]|; when true |frenchb| issues -% no warnings if |\@makecaption| has been redefined or if the -% bigfoot package is in use. -% \item |og=|\texttt{\guillemotleft}, |fg=|\texttt{\guillemotright}; -% when guillemets characters are available on the keyboard -% (through a compose key for instance), it is nice to use them -% instead of typing |\og| and |\fg|. This option tells |frenchb| -% which characters are opening and closing French guillemets -% (they depend on the input encoding), then you can type either -% \texttt{\guillemotleft{} guillemets \guillemotright}, or -% \texttt{\guillemotleft{}guillemets\guillemotright} (with or -% without spaces), to get properly typeset French quotes. -% This option requires \file{inputenc} to be loaded with the -% proper encoding, it works with 8-bits encodings (latin1, -% latin9, ansinew, applemac,\dots) and multi-byte encodings -% (utf8 and utf8x). -% \end{itemize} -% -% \subsection{Hyphenation checks} -% \label{ssec-hyphen} -% -% Once you have built your format, a good precaution would be to -% perform some basic tests about hyphenation in French. For -% \LaTeXe{} I suggest this: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item run the following file, with the encoding suitable for -% your machine (\textit{my-encoding} will be |latin1| for -% \textsc{unix} machines, |ansinew| for PCs running~Windows, -% |applemac| or |latin1| for Macintoshs, or |utf8|\dots\\[3mm]^^A\] -% |%%% Test file for French hyphenation.|\\ -% |\documentclass{article}|\\ -% |\usepackage[|\textit{my-encoding}|]{inputenc}|\\ -% |\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % Use LM fonts|\\ -% |\usepackage{lmodern} % for French|\\ -% |\usepackage[frenchb]{babel}|\\ -% |\begin{document}|\\ -% |\showhyphens{signal container \'ev\'enement alg\`ebre}|\\ -% |\showhyphens{|\texttt{signal container \'ev\'enement -% alg\`ebre}|}|\\ -% |\end{document}| -% \item check the hyphenations proposed by \TeX{} in your log-file; -% in French you should get with both 7-bit and 8-bit encodings\\ -% \texttt{si-gnal contai-ner \'ev\'e-ne-ment al-g\`ebre}.\\ -% Do not care about how accented characters are displayed in the -% log-file, what matters is the position of the `|-|' hyphen -% signs \emph{only}. -% \end{itemize} -% If they are all correct, your installation (probably) works fine, -% if one (or more) is (are) wrong, ask a local wizard to see what's -% going wrong and perform the test again (or e-mail me about what -% happens).\\ -% Frequent mismatches: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item you get |sig-nal con-tainer|, this probably means that the -% hyphenation patterns you are using are for US-English, not for -% French; -% \item you get no hyphen at all in \texttt{\'ev\'e-ne-ment}, this -% probably means that you are using CM fonts and the macro -% |\accent| to produce accented characters. -% Using 8-bits fonts with built-in accented characters avoids -% this kind of mismatch. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \textbf{Options' order} -- Please remember that options are read -% in the order they appear inside the |\frenchbsetup| command. -% Someone wishing that |frenchb| leaves the layout of lists -% and footnotes untouched but caring for indentation of first -% paragraph of sections could choose -% |\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout,IndentFirst}| and get the expected -% layout. Choosing |\frenchbsetup{IndentFirst,StandardLayout}| -% would not lead to the expected result: option |IndentFirst| would -% be overwritten by |StandardLayout|. -% -% \subsection{Changes} -% \label{ssec-changes} -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.0?} -% -% Here is the list of all changes: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Support for \LaTeX-2.09 and for \LaTeXe{} in compatibility -% mode has been dropped. This version is meant for \LaTeXe{} and -% Plain based formats (like \file{bplain}). \LaTeXe{} formats -% based on ml\TeX{} are no longer supported either (plenty of -% good 8-bits fonts are available now, so T1 encoding should -% be preferred for typesetting in French). A warning is issued -% when OT1 encoding is in use at the |\begin{document}|. -% \item Customisation should now be handled by command -% |\frenchbsetup{}|, \file{frenchb.cfg} (kept for compatibility) -% should no longer be used. See section~\ref{ssec-custom} for -% the list of available options. -% \item Captions in figures and table have changed in French: former -% abbreviations ``Fig.'' and ``Tab.'' have been replaced by full -% names ``Figure'' and ``Table''. If this leads to formatting -% problems in captions, you can add the following two commands to -% your preamble (after loading \babel) to get the former captions\\ -% |\addto\captionsfrench{\def\figurename{{\scshape Fig.}}}|\\ -% |\addto\captionsfrench{\def\tablename{{\scshape Tab.}}}|. -% \item The |\nombre| command is now provided by the \file{numprint} -% package which has to be loaded \emph{after} \babel{} with the -% option |autolanguage| if number formatting should depend on the -% current language. -% \item The |\bsc| command no longer uses an |\hbox| to stop -% hyphenation of names but a |\kern0pt| instead. This change -% enables \file{microtype} to fine tune the length of the -% argument of |\bsc|; as a side-effect, compound names like -% Dupont-Durand can now be hyphenated on explicit hyphens. -% You can get back to the former behaviour of |\bsc| by adding\\ -% |\renewcommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\hbox{\scshape #1}}|\\ -% to the preamble of your document. -% \item Footnotes are now displayed ``\`a la fran\c caise'' for the -% whole document, except with an explicit\\ -% |\frenchbsetup{AutoSpaceFootnotes=false,FrenchFootnotes=false}|.\\ -% Add this command if you want standard footnotes. It is still -% possible to revert locally to the standard layout of footnotes -% by adding |\StandardFootnotes| (inside a |minipage| environment -% for instance). -% \end{itemize} -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.1?} -% -% New command |\fup| to typeset better looking superscripts. -% Former command |\up| is now defined as |\fup|, but an option -% |\frenchbsetup{FrenchSuperscripts=false}| is provided for -% backward compatibility. |\fup| was designed using ideas from -% Jacques Andr\'e, Thierry Bouche and Ren\'e Fritz, thanks to them! -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.2?} -% -% Starting with version~2.2a, |frenchb| alters the layout of -% lists, footnotes, and the indentation of first paragraphs of -% sections) \emph{only if} French is the ``main language'' -% (i.e. babel's last language option). The layout is global for -% the whole document: lists, etc. look the same in French and in -% other languages, everything is typeset ``\`a la fran\c caise'' -% if French is the ``main language'', otherwise |frenchb| doesn't -% change anything regarding lists, footnotes, and indentation of -% paragraphs. -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.3?} -% -% Starting with version~2.3a, |frenchb| no longer inserts spaces -% automatically before `|:;!?|' when a typewriter font is in use; -% this was suggested by Yannis Haralambous to prevent -% spurious spaces in computer source code or expressions like -% \texttt{C\string:/foo}, \texttt{http\string://foo.bar}, -% etc. An option (|OriginalTypewriter|) is provided to get back -% to the former behaviour of |frenchb|. -% -% Another probably invisible change: lowercase conversion in -% |\up{}| is now achieved by the \LaTeX{} command |\MakeLowercase| -% instead of \TeX's |\lowercase| command. This prevents error -% messages when diacritics are used inside |\up{}| (diacritics -% should \emph{never} be used in superscripts though!). -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.4?} -% -% A new option |SuppressWarning| has been added (desactivated by -% default) to suppress warnings if |\@makecaption| has been -% redefined or if the bigfoot package is in use. -% -% French hyphenation patterns are now coded in Unicode, see file -% \file{hyph-fr.tex}. Extra code has been added to deal with -% hyphenation of the French ``apostrophe'' with XeTeX and LuaTeX -% engines. -% -% Better compatibility with the enumitem package. -% -% When typewriter fonts are in use (hence in verbatim mode) no -% space is added after `\guillemotleft' and before -% `\guillemotright' when they are entered as characters -% (see |\frenchbsetup|). -% -% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.5?} -% -% The main change is that active characters are no longer used -% in French with (recent) Xe\TeX-based engines (they still are -% with \TeX-based engines). All the functionalities (automatic -% insertion of missing spaces before |:;!?| or bare replacement -% of typed spaces with suitable unbreabable ones, tuning of the -% spaces width) remain available and the user interface is -% unchanged. The use of active characters is replaced by the -% |\XeTeXinterchartoks| mechanism (as in package -% \file{polyglossia}). -% -% A new command |\NoAutoSpacing| has been added. It should be used -% \emph{inside a group} instead of |\shorthandoff{;:!?}| whenever -% active characters or automatic spacing of French punctuation or -% quote characters conflict with other packages; it is designed to -% work with \TeX- and Xe\TeX-based engines. -% -% Bug correction: \file{frenchb.ldf} no longer messes up -% |\frenchspacing| and |\nonfrenchspacing| in other languages. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \subsection{File frenchb.cfg} -% \label{sec-cfg} -% -% \file{frenchb.cfg} is now a dummy file just kept for compatibility -% with previous versions. -% -% \iffalse -%<*cfg> -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%%%%%%%% WARNING: THIS FILE SHOULD NO LONGER BE USED %%%%%%%%% -%% If you want to customise frenchb, please DO NOT hack into the code! -%% Do no put any code in this file either, please use the new command -%% \frenchbsetup{} with the proper options to customise frenchb. -%% -%% Add \frenchbsetup{ShowOptions} to your preamble to see the list of -%% available options and/or read the documentation. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \end{macrocode} -% \iffalse -%</cfg> -% \fi -% -% \subsection{Initial setup} -% -% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/02}{Argument of \cs{ProvidesLanguage} changed -% above from `french' to `frenchb' (otherwise \cs{listfiles} prints -% no date/version information). The real name of current language -% (french) as to be corrected before calling \cs{LdfInit}.} -% -% \iffalse -%<*code> -% \fi -% -% While this file was read through the option \Lopt{frenchb} we make -% it behave as if \Lopt{french} was specified. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CurrentOption{french} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\LdfInit\CurrentOption\datefrench -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/04}{Avoid warning ``\cs{end} occurred -% when \cs{ifx} ... incomplete'' with LaTeX-2.09.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ifLaTeXe} -% No support is provided for late \LaTeX-2.09: issue a warning -% and exit if \LaTeX-2.09 is in use. Plain is still supported. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifLaTeXe -\let\bbl@tempa\relax -\ifx\magnification\@undefined - \ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined - \PackageError{frenchb.ldf} - {LaTeX-2.09 format is no longer supported.\MessageBreak - Aborting here} - {Please upgrade to LaTeX2e!} - \let\bbl@tempa\endinput - \else - \LaTeXetrue - \fi -\fi -\bbl@tempa -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Check if hyphenation patterns for the French language have been -% loaded in language.dat; we allow for the names `french', -% `francais', `canadien' or `acadian'. The latter two are both -% names used in Canada for variants of French that are in use in -% that country. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@french\@undefined - \ifx\l@francais\@undefined - \ifx\l@canadien\@undefined - \ifx\l@acadian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{French} - \adddialect\l@french0 - \else - \let\l@french\l@acadian - \fi - \else - \let\l@french\l@canadien - \fi - \else - \let\l@french\l@francais - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Now |\l@french| is always defined. -% -% The internal name for the French language is |french|; -% |francais| and |frenchb| are synonymous for |french|: -% first let both names use the same hyphenation patterns. -% Later we will have to set aliases for |\captionsfrench|, -% |\datefrench|, |\extrasfrench| and |\noextrasfrench|. -% As French uses the standard values of |\lefthyphenmin| (2) -% and |\righthyphenmin| (3), no special setting is required here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@francais\@undefined - \let\l@francais\l@french -\fi -\ifx\l@frenchb\@undefined - \let\l@frenchb\l@french -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% When this language definition file was loaded for one of the -% Canadian versions of French we need to make sure that a suitable -% hyphenation pattern register will be found by \TeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@canadien\@undefined - \let\l@canadien\l@french -\fi -\ifx\l@acadian\@undefined - \let\l@acadian\l@french -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This language definition can be loaded for different variants of -% the French language. The `key' \babel\ macros are only defined -% once, using `french' as the language name, but |frenchb| and -% |francais| are synonymous. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datefrancais{\datefrench} -\def\datefrenchb{\datefrench} -\def\extrasfrancais{\extrasfrench} -\def\extrasfrenchb{\extrasfrench} -\def\noextrasfrancais{\noextrasfrench} -\def\noextrasfrenchb{\noextrasfrench} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasfrench} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasfrench} -% The macro |\extrasfrench| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the French language. -% The macro |\noextrasfrench| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasfrench|.\\ -% In French, character ``apostrophe'' is a letter in expressions -% like |l'ambulance| (French hyphenation patterns provide entries -% for this kind of words). This means that the |\lccode| of -% ``apostrophe'' has to be non null in French for proper hyphenation -% of those expressions, and has to be reset to null when exiting -% French. -% -% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{Added a new `if' \cs{FBunicode} and -% some \cs{lccode} definitions to \cs{extrasfrench} and -% \cs{noextrasfrench}.} -% -% French hyphenation patterns are now coded in Unicode, see file -% \file{hyph-fr.tex}. XeTeX and LuaTeX engines require some extra -% code to deal with the French ``apostrophe''. -% Let's define a new `if' |\FBunicode| which will be true for XeTeX -% and LuaTeX engines and false for 8-bits engines. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFBunicode -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname luatexversion\endcsname\relax -\else - \FBunicodetrue -\fi -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXrevision\endcsname\relax -\else - \FBunicodetrue -\fi -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=`\' - \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019="2019\fi} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=0 - \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019=0\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% One more thing |\extrasfrench| needs to do is to make sure that -% ``Frenchspacing'' is in effect. |\noextrasfrench| will switch -% ``Frenchspacing'' off again if necessary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Punctuation} -% \label{sec-punct} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/10}{Punctation is no longer made active -% with XeTeX-based engines.} -% -% As long as no better solution is available, the `double -% punctuation' characters (|;| |!| |?| and |:|) have to be made -% |\active| for an automatic control of the amount of space to -% insert before them. Xe\TeX{} provides an alternative to active -% characters and Lua\TeX{} will hopefully do so as well in the -% (near?) future. -% -% Before doing so, we have to save the standard definition of -% |\@makecaption| (which includes two ':') to compare it later to -% its definition at the |\begin{document}|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\STD@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - #1: #2\par - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/10}{Define \cs{Fthinspace} for those who want -% to customise the width of the space before ; ! and ?.} -% -% According to the I.N. specifications, the `:' requires a normal -% space before it, but some people prefer a |\thinspace| (just -% like the other three). We define |\Fcolonspace| to hold the -% required amount of space (user customisable). In case some users -% are not satisfied with |\thinspace|'s width, it is also -% customisable. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\space} -\newcommand*{\Fthinspace}{\thinspace} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Check the availability of |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| and decide -% whether the `double punctuation' characters (|;| |!| |?| and |:|) -% have to be made |\active| or not. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFB@active@punct \FB@active@puncttrue -\newif\ifFB@xetex@punct -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXinterchartokenstate\endcsname\relax -\else - \FB@xetex@puncttrue\FB@active@punctfalse -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| is available, we use the -% ``inter char'' mechanism (as in polyglossia, see -% \file{gloss-french.ldf}) to provide correct spacing in French -% before the four characters |;| |!| |?| and |:| and for French -% quotes (\texttt{\guillemotleft} and \texttt{\guillemotright}). -% -% It is assumed that for every character used in French text-mode -% (except spaces), |\XeTeXcharclass| value is 0 before entering -% French. |\XeTeXcharclass| value for spaces is assumed to be 255. -% Otherwise, the spacing before the `double punctuation' characters -% will not be correct. -% -% We switch |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| to 1 and change the -% |\XeTeXcharclass| values of |;| |!| |?| |:| |(| |]| -% \texttt{\guillemotleft} and \texttt{\guillemotright} when -% entering French. Special care is taken to restore them to their -% inital values when leaving French. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue -\ifFB@xetex@punct - \PackageInfo{frenchb.ldf}{No need for active punctuation characters - \MessageBreak with this version of XeTeX! reported} -% \end{macrocode} -% We will need the following code (borrowed from -% \file{zhsusefulmacros.sty}) for loops: -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{@for}{% - \def\@nnil{\@nil}% - \def\@empty{}% - \def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}% - \long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}% - \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else - \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}% - \long\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else - #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}% - \long\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil - \expandafter\@fornoop \else - #4\relax\expandafter\@iforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}% - \def\@tfor#1:={\@tf@r#1 }% - \long\def\@tf@r#1#2\do#3{\def\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\space\else - \@tforloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}% - \long\def\@tforloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil - \expandafter\@fornoop \else - #4\relax\expandafter\@tforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}% - }{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% New character classes, -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcount\FB@interchartokenstateORI - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthick - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthin - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctnul - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilo - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilf -% \end{macrocode} -% We define a command to store the |\XeTeXcharclass| values which -% will be modified for French (as a comma separated list) and a -% command to retrieve them. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \newcommand*{\FB@charclassesORI}{} - \def\FB@charclassesORI{} - \def\empty{} - \def\FB@parse#1,#2\endparse{\def\FB@class{#1}% - \def\FB@charclassesORI{#2}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following command will be executed when entering French, it -% first saves the values to be modified, then fits them to our -% needs. It also redefines |\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon| -% (locally) to avoid error messages with XeTeX-based engines. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@french}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Saving must not be repeated if saved values are already in. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty - \FB@interchartokenstateORI=\XeTeXinterchartokenstate - \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do - {\edef\FB@charclassesORI{\FB@charclassesORI% - \the\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char,}}% - \let\shorthandonORI\shorthandon - \let\shorthandoffORI\shorthandoff - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the classes and interactions between classes. -% \begin{macrocode} - \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=1 - \XeTeXcharclass `\: = \FB@punctthick - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthick = {% - \ifhmode\FDP@colonspace\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthick = {% - \FDP@colonspace}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthick = {% - \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace\fi}% - \@for\FB@char:={`\;,`\!,`\?}\do - {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctthin}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthin = {% - \ifhmode\FDP@thinspace\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthin = {% - \FDP@thinspace}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthin = {% - \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% This avoids spurious spaces in (!), (???), etc. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\FB@char:={`\[,`\(}\do - {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctnul}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctnul \FB@punctthin = {}% - \XeTeXcharclass"00AB = \FB@punctguilo - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo \z@ = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo 255 = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\ignorespaces\fi}% - \XeTeXcharclass"00BB = \FB@punctguilf - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctthin \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\unskip\FBguill@spacing\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% With Xe(La)TeX, French defines no active shorthands. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\shorthandoff##1{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{\protect\shorthandoff{;:!?} is - helpless with XeTeX,\MessageBreak use \protect\NoAutoSpacing - \space *inside a group* instead;\MessageBreak reported}% - }% - \def\shorthandon##1{}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following command will be executed when leaving French for -% restoring values and commands modified in French. -% When French is not the main language, |\noextrasfrench| is -% executed `AtBeginDocument', so the test on -% |\FB@charclassesORI| is mandatory. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}{% - \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty - \else - \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do - {\expandafter\FB@parse\FB@charclassesORI\endparse - \XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@class}% - \def\FB@charclassesORI{}% - \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=\FB@interchartokenstateORI - \let\shorthandon\shorthandonORI - \let\shorthandoff\shorthandoffORI - \fi - } - \addto\extrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@french} - \addto\noextrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Otherwise we need to make the four characters |;| |!| |?| and |:| -% `active' and provide their definitions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifFB@active@punct - \initiate@active@char{:}% - \initiate@active@char{;}% - \initiate@active@char{!}% - \initiate@active@char{?}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We first tune the amount of space before \texttt{;} -% \texttt{!} \texttt{?} and \texttt{:}. This should only happen -% in horizontal mode, hence the test |\ifhmode|. -% -% In horizontal mode, if a space has been typed before `;' we -% remove it and put an unbreakable |\thinspace| instead. If no -% space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace| which will be -% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added -% thin space, or as |\@empty|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{french}{;}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we can insert a |;| character. -% \begin{macrocode} - \string;} -% \end{macrocode} -% The next three definitions are very similar. -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{french}{!}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!} - \declare@shorthand{french}{?}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string?} - \declare@shorthand{french}{:}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace - \else - \FDP@colonspace - \fi - \fi - \string:} -% \end{macrocode} -% When the active characters appear in an environment where their -% French behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected' -% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well. -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:} - \declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!} - \declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?} - \declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;} -%} -% \end{macrocode} -% We specify that the French group of shorthands should be used when -% switching to French. -% \begin{macrocode} - \addto\extrasfrench{% - \languageshorthands{french}% -% \end{macrocode} -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. Don't misunderstand the following code: they keep being -% active all along the document, even when leaving French. -% \begin{macrocode} - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}% - } - \addto\noextrasfrench{% - \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A new `if' |\FBAutoSpacePunctuation| needs to be defined now. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{\cs{NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP} and -% \cs{AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} now set the flag -% \cs{ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation} accordingly (LaTeX only).} -% -% \changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/10}{Execute \cs{AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% also in LaTeX to define \cs{FDP@colonspace}: needed for -% tex4ht, pointed out by MPG.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% |\FDP@thinspace| and |\FDP@colonspace| are defined as unbreakable -% spaces by |\autospace@beforeFDP| or as |\@empty| by -% |\noautospace@beforeFDP| (internal commands), user commands -% |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| and |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| do the same and -% take care of the flag |\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation| in \LaTeX{}. -% Set the default now for Plain (done later for \LaTeX). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\autospace@beforeFDP{% - \def\FDP@thinspace{\penalty\@M\Fthinspace}% - \def\FDP@colonspace{\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace}} -\def\noautospace@beforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty - \let\FDP@colonspace\@empty} -\ifLaTeXe - \def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\autospace@beforeFDP - \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue} - \def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\noautospace@beforeFDP - \FBAutoSpacePunctuationfalse} -\else - \let\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP\autospace@beforeFDP - \let\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP\noautospace@beforeFDP - \fi -\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{In LaTeX, frenchb no longer adds spaces -% before `double punctuation' characters in computer code. -% Suggested by Yannis Haralambous.} -% -% \changes{v2.3c}{2009/02/07}{Commands \cs{ttfamily}, \cs{rmfamily} -% and \cs{sffamily} have to be robust. Bug introduced in 2.3a, -% pointed out by Manuel P\'egouri\'e-Gonnard.} -% -% In \LaTeXe{} |\ttfamily| (and hence |\texttt|) will be redefined -% `AtBeginDocument' as |\ttfamilyFB| so that no space -% is added before the four |; : ! ?| characters, even if -% |AutoSpacePunctuation| is true. |\rmfamily| and |\sffamily| need -% to be redefined also (|\ttfamily| is not always used inside a -% group, its effect can be cancelled by |\rmfamily| or |\sffamily|). -% -% These redefinitions can be canceled if necessary, for instance to -% recompile older documents, see option |OriginalTypewriter| below. -% -% \changes{v2.4c}{2010/05/23}{In \cs{ttfamilyFB}, also cancel -% automatic spaces inside French guillemets entered as characters -% (see \cs{frenchbsetup}).} -% -% To be consistent with what is done for `double punctuation' -% characters, |\ttfamilyFB| also switches off insertion of spaces -% inside French guillemets \emph{when they are typed in as -% characters} with the `og'/`fg' option in |\frenchbsetup{}|. -% This is also a workaround for the weird behaviour of these -% characters in verbatim mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifLaTeXe - \let\ttfamilyORI\ttfamily - \let\rmfamilyORI\rmfamily - \let\sffamilyORI\sffamily - \DeclareRobustCommand\ttfamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse - \noautospace@beforeFDP\ttfamilyORI}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\rmfamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI - \fi}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\sffamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI - \fi}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/14}{New command \cs{NoAutoSpacing}, -% suggested by MPG.} -% -% The following command will switch off active punctuation -% characters (if any) and disable automatic spacing for French quote -% characters. It is engine independent (works for \TeX{} and -% Xe\TeX{} based engines) and is meant to be used inside a group. -% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpacing} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\NoAutoSpacing}{\FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse - \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi - \ifFB@xetex@punct\XeTeXinterchartokenstate=0\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Commands for French quotation marks} -% \label{sec-quotes} -% -% \begin{macro}{\og} -% \begin{macro}{\fg} -% The top macros for quotation marks will be called |\og| -% (``\underline{o}uvrez \underline{g}uillemets'') and |\fg| -% (``\underline{f}ermez \underline{g}uillemets''). -% Another option for typesetting quotes in multilingual texts -% is to use the package \file{csquotes.sty} and its command -% |\enquote|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\og}{\@empty} -\newcommand*{\fg}{\@empty} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft} -% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright} -% \begin{macro}{\textquoteddblleft} -% \begin{macro}{\textquoteddblright} -% \LaTeX{} users are supposed to use 8-bit output encodings (T1, -% LY1,\dots) to typeset French, those who still stick to OT1 should -% call |aeguill.sty| or a similar package. In both cases the -% commands |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright| will print the -% French opening and closing quote characters from the output font. -% For XeLaTeX, |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright| are defined -% by package \file{xunicode.sty}. -% We will check `AtBeginDocument' that the proper output encodings -% are in use (see end of section~\ref{sec-keyval}). -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Change \cs{guillemotleft} and -% \cs{guillemotright} definitions for Unicode anf provide -% definitions for \cs{textquotedblleft} and -% \cs{textquotedbright}. Insures correct printing of quotes -% by \cs{og} and \cs{fg} in French and outside.} - -% We give the following definitions for non-LaTeX users only as a -% fall-back, they are welcome to change them for anything better. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifLaTeXe -\else - \ifFBunicode - \def\guillemotleft{\char"00AB} - \def\guillemotright{\char"00BB} - \def\textquotedblleft{\char"201C} - \def\textquotedblright{\char"201D} - \else - \def\guillemotleft{\leavevmode\raise0.25ex - \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}} - \def\guillemotright{\raise0.25ex - \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}} - \def\textquotedblleft{``} - \def\textquotedblright{''} - \fi - \let\xspace\relax -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step is to provide correct spacing after |\guillemotleft| -% and before |\guillemotright|: a space precedes and follows -% quotation marks but no line break is allowed neither \emph{after} -% the opening one, nor \emph{before} the closing one. -% |\FBguill@spacing| which does the spacing, has been fine tuned by -% Thierry Bouche. French quotes (including spacing) are printed by -% |\FB@og| and |\FB@fg|, the expansion of the top level commands -% |\og| and |\og| is different in and outside French. -% We'll try to be smart to users of David~Carlisle's \file{xspace} -% package: if this package is loaded there will be no need for |{}| -% or |\ | to get a space after |\fg|, otherwise |\xspace| will be -% defined as |\relax| (done at the end of this file). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FBguill@spacing}{\penalty\@M\hskip.8\fontdimen2\font - plus.3\fontdimen3\font - minus.8\fontdimen4\font} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@og}{\leavevmode\guillemotleft - \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi - \guillemotright\xspace} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The top level definitions for French quotation marks are switched -% on and off through the |\extrasfrench| |\noextrasfrench| -% mechanism. Outside French, |\og| and |\fg| will typeset standard -% English opening and closing double quotes. -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{\cs{og} and \cs{fg} do not print -% correctly in English when using XeTeX, fixed by using -% \cs{textquotedblleft} and \cs{textquotedblright} defined above.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifLaTeXe - \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\FB@og}% - \renewcommand*{\fg}{\FB@fg}} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\textquotedblleft}% - \renewcommand*{\fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \textquotedblright}} -\else - \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\let\og\FB@og - \let\fg\FB@fg} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\def\og{\textquotedblleft}% - \def\fg{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi\textquotedblright}} -\fi -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchguillemets} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Date in French} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datefrench} -% The macro |\datefrench| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce French dates. -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{2 '\cs{relax}' added in -% \cs{today}'s definition.} -% -% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/25}{\cs{today} changed (correction in 2.0 -% was wrong: \cs{today} was printed without spaces in toc).} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Replaced \cs{'}e and \cs{\char94}u -% by c.s. to work with XeTeX.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{{\number\day}\ifnum1=\day {\ier}\fi \space - \ifcase\month - \or janvier\or f{\FBeacute}vrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or - juin\or juillet\or ao{\FBucirconflexe}t\or septembre\or - octobre\or novembre\or d{\FBeacute}cembre\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Extra utilities} -% -% Let's provide the French user with some extra utilities. -% -% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/24}{Command \cs{fup} added to produce -% better superscripts than \cs{textsuperscript}.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\up} -% -% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Provide a temporary definition -% (hyperref safe) of \cs{up} in case it has to be expanded in -% the preamble (by beamer's \cs{title} command for instance).} -% -% \changes{v2.4d}{2010/07/28}{Command \cs{up} defined with -% \cs{providecommand} instead of \cs{newcommand} as \cs{up} may be -% defined elsewhere (catalan.ldf). -% Bug pointed out by Felip Many\'e i Ballester.} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the -% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE. -% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing -% \cs{realsuperscript}.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fup} -% -% \changes{v2.1b}{2008/04/02}{Command \cs{fup} changed to use -% real superscripts from fourier v. 1.6.} -% -% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{\cs{newif} and \cs{newdimen} moved -% before \cs{ifLaTeXe} to avoid an error with plainTeX.} -% -% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/09/30}{\cs{lowercase} changed to -% \cs{MakeLowercase} as the former doesn't work for non ASCII -% characters in encodings like applemac, utf-8,\dots} -% -% |\up| eases the typesetting of superscripts like -% `1\textsuperscript{er}'. Up to version 2.0 of |frenchb| |\up| was -% just a shortcut for |\textsuperscript| in \LaTeXe, but several -% users complained that |\textsuperscript| typesets superscripts -% too high and too big, so we now define |\fup| as an attempt to -% produce better looking superscripts. |\up| is defined as |\fup| -% but can be redefined by |\frenchbsetup{FrenchSuperscripts=false}| -% as |\textsuperscript| for compatibility with previous versions. -% -% When a font has built-in superscripts, the best thing to do is -% to just use them, otherwise |\fup| has to simulate superscripts -% by scaling and raising ordinary letters. Scaling is done using -% package \file{scalefnt} which will be loaded at the end of -% \babel's loading (|frenchb| being an option of babel, it cannot -% load a package while being read). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFB@poorman -\newdimen\FB@Mht -\ifLaTeXe - \AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{scalefnt}} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\FB@up@fake| holds the definition of fake superscripts. -% The scaling ratio is 0.65, raising is computed to put the top of -% lower case letters (like `m') just under the top of upper case -% letters (like `M'), precisely 12\% down. The chosen settings -% look correct for most fonts, but can be tuned by the end-user -% if necessary by changing |\FBsupR| and |\FBsupS| commands. -% -% |\FB@lc| is defined as |\MakeLowercase| to inhibit the uppercasing -% of superscripts (this may happen in page headers with the standard -% classes but is wrong); |\FB@lc| can be redefined to do nothing -% by option |LowercaseSuperscripts=false| of |\frenchbsetup{}|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\FBsupR}{-0.12} - \newcommand*{\FBsupS}{0.65} - \newcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{\MakeLowercase{#1}} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up@fake}[1]{% - \settoheight{\FB@Mht}{M}% - \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{\FBsupR \FB@Mht}% - \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{-\FBsupS ex}% - \raisebox{\FB@Mht}{\scalefont{\FBsupS}{\FB@lc{#1}}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% The only packages I currently know to take advantage of real -% superscripts are a) \file{xltxtra} used in conjunction with -% XeLaTeX and OpenType fonts having the font feature -% 'VerticalPosition=Superior' (\file{xltxtra} defines -% |\realsuperscript| and |\fakesuperscript|) and b) \file{fourier} -% (from version 1.6) when Expert Utopia fonts are available. -% -% |\FB@up| checks whether the current font is a Type1 `Expert' -% (or `Pro') font with real superscripts or not (the code works -% currently only with \file{fourier-1.6} but could work with any -% Expert Type1 font with built-in superscripts, see below), and -% decides to use real or fake superscripts. -% It works as follows: the content of |\f@family| (family name of -% the current font) is split by |\FB@split| into two pieces, the -% first three characters (`|fut|' for Fourier, `|ppl|' for Adobe's -% Palatino, \dots) stored in |\FB@firstthree| and the rest stored -% in |\FB@suffix| which is expected to be `|x|' or `|j|' for expert -% fonts. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\FB@split#1#2#3#4\@nil{\def\FB@firstthree{#1#2#3}% - \def\FB@suffix{#4}} - \def\FB@x{x} - \def\FB@j{j} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up}[1]{% - \bgroup \FB@poormantrue - \expandafter\FB@split\f@family\@nil -% \end{macrocode} -% Then |\FB@up| looks for a \file{.fd} file named \file{t1fut-sup.fd} -% (Fourier) or \file{t1ppl-sup.fd} (Palatino), etc. supposed to -% define the subfamily (|fut-sup| or |ppl-sup|, etc.) giving access -% to the built-in superscripts. If the \file{.fd} file is not found -% by |\IfFileExists|, |\FB@up| falls back on fake superscripts, -% otherwise |\FB@suffix| is checked to decide whether to use fake or -% real superscripts. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\reserved@a{\lowercase{% - \noexpand\IfFileExists{\f@encoding\FB@firstthree -sup.fd}}}% - \reserved@a - {\ifx\FB@suffix\FB@x \FB@poormanfalse\fi - \ifx\FB@suffix\FB@j \FB@poormanfalse\fi - \ifFB@poorman \FB@up@fake{#1}% - \else \FB@up@real{#1}% - \fi}% - {\FB@up@fake{#1}}% - \egroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\FB@up@real| just picks up the superscripts from the subfamily -% (and forces lowercase). -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\FB@up@real}[1]{\bgroup - \fontfamily{\FB@firstthree -sup}\selectfont \FB@lc{#1}\egroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\fup| is now defined as |\FB@up| unless |\realsuperscript| is -% defined (occurs with XeLaTeX calling \file{xltxtra.sty}). -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\fup}[1]{% - \@ifundefined{realsuperscript}% - {\FB@up{#1}\let\realsuperscript\undefined}% - {\bgroup\let\fakesuperscript\FB@up@fake - \realsuperscript{\FB@lc{#1}}\egroup}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Temporary definition of |\up|, redefined `AtBeginDocument'as -% |\fup| or |\textsuperscript| later on while processing the options -% of |\frenchbsetup{}|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand*{\up}{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% Poor man's definition of |\up| for Plain. -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \providecommand*{\up}[1]{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\sevenrm #1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ieme} -% \begin{macro}{\ier} -% \begin{macro}{\iere} -% \begin{macro}{\iemes} -% \begin{macro}{\iers} -% \begin{macro}{\ieres} -% Some handy macros for those who don't know how to abbreviate ordinals: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ieme{\up{\lowercase{e}}\xspace} -\def\iemes{\up{\lowercase{es}}\xspace} -\def\ier{\up{\lowercase{er}}\xspace} -\def\iers{\up{\lowercase{ers}}\xspace} -\def\iere{\up{\lowercase{re}}\xspace} -\def\ieres{\up{\lowercase{res}}\xspace} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Added commands \cs{Nos} and \cs{nos}.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\No} -% \begin{macro}{\no} -% \begin{macro}{\Nos} -% \begin{macro}{\nos} -% \begin{macro}{\primo} -% \begin{macro}{\fprimo)} -% And some more macros relying on |\up| for numbering, -% first two support macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FrenchEnumerate}[1]{% - #1\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.3em} -\newcommand*{\FrenchPopularEnumerate}[1]{% - #1\up{\lowercase{o}})\kern+.3em} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Typing |\primo| should result in `$1^{\rm o}$\kern+.3em', -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\primo{\FrenchEnumerate1} -\def\secundo{\FrenchEnumerate2} -\def\tertio{\FrenchEnumerate3} -\def\quarto{\FrenchEnumerate4} -% \end{macrocode} -% while typing |\fprimo)| gives `1$^{\rm o}$)\kern+.3em. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fprimo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate1} -\def\fsecundo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate2} -\def\ftertio){\FrenchPopularEnumerate3} -\def\fquarto){\FrenchPopularEnumerate4} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Let's provide four macros for the common abbreviations -% of ``Num\'ero''. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\No}{N\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\no}{n\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Nos}{N\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\nos}{n\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bsc} -% As family names should be written in small capitals and never be -% hyphenated, we provide a command (its name comes from Boxed Small -% Caps) to input them easily. Note that this command has changed -% with version~2 of |frenchb|: a |\kern0pt| is used instead of |\hbox| -% because |\hbox| would break microtype's font expansion; as a -% (positive?) side effect, composed names (such as Dupont-Durand) -% can now be hyphenated on explicit hyphens. -% Usage: |Jean~\bsc{Duchemin}|. -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{hbox} dropped, replaced by -% \cs{kern0pt}.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\begingroup\kern0pt - \scshape #1\endgroup} -\ifLaTeXe\else\let\scshape\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Some definitions for special characters. We won't define |\tilde| -% as a Text Symbol not to conflict with the macro |\tilde| for math -% mode and use the name |\tild| instead. Note that |\boi| may -% \emph{not} be used in math mode, its name in math mode is -% |\backslash|. |\degre| can be accessed by the command |\r{}| -% for ring accent. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifLaTeXe - \DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{94} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{126} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{T1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{T1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{T1} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\boi}{\textbackslash} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degre}{\r{}} -\else - \def\T@one{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\T@one - \newcommand*{\degre}{\char6} - \else - \newcommand*{\degre}{\char23} - \fi - \newcommand*{\at}{\char64} - \newcommand*{\circonflexe}{\char94} - \newcommand*{\tild}{\char126} - \newcommand*{\boi}{$\backslash$} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{New definitions needed for XeTeX to print -% properly some dates and captions: using c.s. like \cs{'e} do not -% work with XeTeX (OK with XeLaTeX).} -% -% French dates and captions make use of four non-ascii characters -% (\texttt{\`a}, \texttt{\`e}, \texttt{\'e} and \texttt{\^u}). -% This is fine except for (plain) XeTeX (|\accent| commands are not -% implemented), so we define four new commands to deal with this -% issue; we also redefine |\degre| (it is an accent in LaTeX). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FBagrave}{\`a} -\newcommand*{\FBegrave}{\`e} -\newcommand*{\FBeacute}{\'e} -\newcommand*{\FBucirconflexe}{\^u} -\ifFBunicode - \ifLaTeXe - \else - \def\degre{\char"00B0} - \def\FBagrave{\char"00E0} - \def\FBegrave{\char"00E8} - \def\FBeacute{\char"00E9} - \def\FBucirconflexe{\char"00FB} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\degres} -% We now define a macro |\degres| for typesetting the abbreviation -% for `degrees' (as in `degrees Celsius'). As the bounding box of -% the character `degree' has \emph{very} different widths in CM/EC -% and PostScript fonts, we fix the width of the bounding box of -% |\degres| to 0.3\,em, this lets the symbol `degree' stick to the -% preceding (e.g., |45\degres|) or following character -% (e.g., |20~\degres C|). -% -% If the \TeX{} Companion fonts are available (\file{textcomp.sty}), -% we pick up |\textdegree| from them instead of using emulating -% `degrees' from the |\r{}| accent. Otherwise we overwrite the -% (poor) definition of |\textdegree| given in \file{latin1.def}, -% \file{applemac.def} etc. (called by \file{inputenc.sty}) by -% our definition of |\degres|. We also advice the user (once only) -% to use TS1-encoding. -% -% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Provide a temporary definition (hyperref -% safe) of \cs{degres} in case it has to be expanded in the preamble -% (by beamer's \cs{title} command for instance).} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifLaTeXe - \newcommand*{\degres}{\degre} - \def\Warning@degree@TSone{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - Degrees would look better in TS1-encoding: - \MessageBreak add \protect - \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble. - \MessageBreak Degrees used}} - \ifFBunicode\global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax\fi - \AtBeginDocument{\expandafter\ifx\csname M@TS1\endcsname\relax - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}% - \Warning@degree@TSone - \global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax}% - \let\textdegree\degres - \else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{% - \hbox{\UseTextSymbol{TS1}{\textdegree}}}% - \fi} -\else - \newcommand*{\degres}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Formatting numbers} -% \label{sec-numbers} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DecimalMathComma} -% \begin{macro}{\StandardMathComma} -% As mentioned in the \TeX{}book p.~134, the comma is of type -% |\mathpunct| in math mode: it is automatically followed by a -% space. This is convenient in lists and intervals but -% unpleasant when the comma is used as a decimal separator -% in French: it has to be entered as |{,}|. -% |\DecimalMathComma| makes the comma be an ordinary character -% (of type |\mathord|) in French \emph{only} (no space added); -% |\StandardMathComma| switches back to the standard behaviour -% of the comma. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\std@mcc -\newcount\dec@mcc -\std@mcc=\mathcode`\, -\dec@mcc=\std@mcc -\@tempcnta=\std@mcc -\divide\@tempcnta by "1000 -\multiply\@tempcnta by "1000 -\advance\dec@mcc by -\@tempcnta -\newcommand*{\DecimalMathComma}{\iflanguage{french}% - {\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}{}% - \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}} -\newcommand*{\StandardMathComma}{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc - \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\nombre} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{nombre} requires now numprint.sty.} -% -% The command |\nombre| is now borrowed from \file{numprint.sty} for -% \LaTeXe. There is no point to maintain the former tricky code -% when a package is dedicated to do the same job and more. -% For Plain based formats, |\nombre| no longer formats numbers, -% it prints them as is and issues a warning about the change. -% -% Fake command |\nombre| for Plain based formats, warning users of -% |frenchb| v.1.x. of the change. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\nombre}[1]{{#1}\message{% - *** \noexpand\nombre no longer formats numbers\string! ***}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next definitions only make sense for \LaTeXe. Let's cleanup -% and exit if the format in Plain based. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\FBstop@here\relax -\def\FBclean@on@exit{\let\ifLaTeXe\undefined - \let\LaTeXetrue\undefined - \let\LaTeXefalse\undefined} -\ifx\magnification\@undefined -\else - \def\FBstop@here{\let\STD@makecaption\relax - \FBclean@on@exit - \ldf@quit\CurrentOption\endinput} -\fi -\FBstop@here -% \end{macrocode} -% -% What follows now is for \LaTeXe{} \emph{only}. -% We redefine |\nombre| for \LaTeXe. A warning is issued -% at the first call of |\nombre| if |\numprint| is not -% defined, suggesting what to do. The package \file{numprint} -% is \emph{not} loaded automatically by |frenchb| because of -% possible options conflict. -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the -% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE. -% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing -% \cs{numprint}.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand*{\nombre}[1]{\Warning@nombre\numprint{#1}} -\newcommand*{\Warning@nombre}{% - \@ifundefined{numprint}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - \protect\nombre\space now relies on package numprint.sty, - \MessageBreak add \protect - \usepackage[autolanguage]{numprint}\MessageBreak - to your preamble *after* loading babel, \MessageBreak - see file numprint.pdf for other options.\MessageBreak - \protect\nombre\space called}% - \global\let\Warning@nombre\relax - \global\let\numprint\undefined - }{}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{There is no need to define here -% numprint's command \cs{npstylefrench}, it will be redefined -% `AtBeginDocument' by \cs{FBprocess@options}.} -% -% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{\cs{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers} added -% for compatibility with frenchb-1.x.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - Type \protect\frenchbsetup{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers} - \MessageBreak Command \protect\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers\space - is no longer\MessageBreak defined in frenchb v.2,}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Caption names} -% -% The next step consists of defining the French equivalents for -% the \LaTeX{} caption names. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsfrench} -% Let's first define |\captionsfrench| which sets all strings used -% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{`Fig.' changed to `Figure' and -% `Tab.' to `Table'.} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/15}{Set \cs{CaptionSeparator} in -% \cs{extrasfrench} now instead of \cs{captionsfrench} -% because it has to be reset when leaving French.} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/16}{\cs{emph} deleted in \cs{seename} -% and \cs{alsoname} to match what is done for the other languages. -% Suggested by Marc Baudoin.} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Replaced \cs{'e}, \cs{`e} and \cs{`a} -% by c.s. to work with XeTeX.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\refname{R{\FBeacute}f{\FBeacute}rences}% - \def\abstractname{R{\FBeacute}sum{\FBeacute}}% - \def\bibname{Bibliographie}% - \def\prefacename{Pr{\FBeacute}face}% - \def\chaptername{Chapitre}% - \def\appendixname{Annexe}% - \def\contentsname{Table des mati{\FBegrave}res}% - \def\listfigurename{Table des figures}% - \def\listtablename{Liste des tableaux}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% - \def\tablename{{\scshape Table}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% ``Premi\`ere partie'' instead of ``Part I''. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\partname{\protect\@Fpt partie}% - \def\@Fpt{{\ifcase\value{part}\or Premi{\FBegrave}re\or - Deuxi{\FBegrave}me\or Troisi{\FBegrave}me\or - Quatri{\FBegrave}me\or Cinqui{\FBegrave}me\or - Sixi{\FBegrave}me\or Septi{\FBegrave}me\or Huiti{\FBegrave}me\or - Neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or Dixi{\FBegrave}me\or Onzi{\FBegrave}me\or - Douzi{\FBegrave}me\or Treizi{\FBegrave}me\or - Quatorzi{\FBegrave}me\or Quinzi{\FBegrave}me\or - Seizi{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-septi{\FBegrave}me\or - Dix-huiti{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or - Vingti{\FBegrave}me\fi}\space\def\thepart{}}% - \def\pagename{page}% - \def\seename{voir}% - \def\alsoname{voir aussi}% - \def\enclname{P.~J. }% - \def\ccname{Copie {\FBagrave} }% - \def\headtoname{}% - \def\proofname{D{\FBeacute}monstration}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossaire}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% As some users who choose |frenchb| or |francais| as option of -% \babel, might customise |\captionsfrenchb| or |\captionsfrancais| -% in the preamble, we merge their changes at the |\begin{document}| -% when they do so. -% The other variants of French (canadien, acadian) are defined by -% checking if the relevant option was used and then adding one extra -% level of expansion. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\let\captions@French\captionsfrench - \@ifundefined{captionsfrenchb}% - {\let\captions@Frenchb\relax}% - {\let\captions@Frenchb\captionsfrenchb}% - \@ifundefined{captionsfrancais}% - {\let\captions@Francais\relax}% - {\let\captions@Francais\captionsfrancais}% - \def\captionsfrench{\captions@French - \captions@Francais\captions@Frenchb}% - \def\captionsfrancais{\captionsfrench}% - \def\captionsfrenchb{\captionsfrench}% - \iflanguage{french}{\captionsfrench}{}% - } -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{canadien}{% - \def\captionscanadien{\captionsfrench}% - \def\datecanadien{\datefrench}% - \def\extrascanadien{\extrasfrench}% - \def\noextrascanadien{\noextrasfrench}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{acadian}{% - \def\captionsacadian{\captionsfrench}% - \def\dateacadian{\datefrench}% - \def\extrasacadian{\extrasfrench}% - \def\noextrasacadian{\noextrasfrench}% - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CaptionSeparator} -% Let's consider now captions in figures and tables. -% In French, captions in figures and tables should be printed with -% endash (`--') instead of the standard `:'. -% -% The standard definition of |\@makecaption| (e.g., the one provided -% in article.cls, report.cls, book.cls which is frozen for \LaTeXe{} -% according to Frank Mittelbach), has been saved in -% |\STD@makecaption| before making `:' active -% (see section~\ref{sec-punct}). `AtBeginDocument' we compare it to -% its current definition (some classes like koma-script classes, -% AMS classes, ua-thesis.cls\dots change it). -% If they are identical, |frenchb| just adds a hook called -% |\CaptionSeparator| to |\@makecaption|, |\CaptionSeparator| -% defaults to `: ' as in the standard |\@makecaption|, and will be -% changed to ` -- ' in French. -% If the definitions differ, |frenchb| doesn't overwrite the changes, -% but prints a message in the .log file. -% -% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{\cs{PackageWarning} changed to -% \cs{FBWarning} (in case \cs{@makecaption} has been customized). -% \cs{FBWarning} is defined as \cs{PackageWarning} by default but -% can be made silent using \cs{frenchbsetup}, (suggested by MPG).} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\PackageWarning{#1}{#2}} -\def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space} -\long\def\FB@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1\CaptionSeparator #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - #1\CaptionSeparator #2\par - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\@makecaption\STD@makecaption - \global\let\@makecaption\FB@makecaption - \else - \@ifundefined{@makecaption}% - {\let\@makecaption\undefined}% - {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {The definition of \protect\@makecaption\space - has been changed,\MessageBreak - frenchb will NOT customise it;\MessageBreak reported}% - }% - \fi - \let\FB@makecaption\relax - \let\STD@makecaption\relax -} -\addto\extrasfrench{% - \def\CaptionSeparator{\space\textendash\space}} -\addto\noextrasfrench{% - \def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{French lists} -% \label{sec-lists} -% -% \begin{macro}{\listFB} -% \begin{macro}{\listORI} -% Vertical spacing in general lists should be shorter in French -% texts than the defaults provided by \LaTeX. -% Note that the easy way, just changing values of vertical spacing -% parameters when entering French and restoring them to their -% defaults on exit would not work; as most lists are based on -% |\list| we will define a variant of |\list| (|\listFB|) to -% be used in French. -% -% The amount of vertical space before and after a list is given by -% |\topsep| + |\parskip| (+ |\partopsep| if the list starts a new -% paragraph). IMHO, |\parskip| should be added \emph{only} when -% the list starts a new paragraph, so I subtract |\parskip| from -% |\topsep| and add it back to |\partopsep|; this will normally -% make no difference because |\parskip|'s default value is 0pt, but -% will be noticeable when |\parskip| is \emph{not} null. -% -% |\endlist| is not redefined, but |\endlistORI| is provided for -% the users who prefer to define their own lists from the original -% command, they can code: |\begin{listORI}{}{} \end{listORI}|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\listORI\list -\let\endlistORI\endlist -\def\FB@listsettings{% - \setlength{\itemsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% - \setlength{\parsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% - \setlength{\topsep}{0.8ex plus 0.4ex minus 0.4ex}% - \setlength{\partopsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% -% \end{macrocode} -% |\parskip| is of type `skip', its mean value only (\emph{not -% the glue}) should be subtracted from |\topsep| and added to -% |\partopsep|, so convert |\parskip| to a `dimen' using -% |\@tempdima|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempdima=\parskip - \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}% - \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}% -\def\listFB#1#2{\listORI{#1}{\FB@listsettings #2}}% -\let\endlistFB\endlist -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\itemizeFB} -% \begin{macro}{\itemizeORI} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchlabelitems} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems} -% Let's now consider French itemize lists. They differ from those -% provided by the standard \LaTeXe{} classes: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item vertical spacing between items, before and after -% the list, should be \emph{null} with \emph{no glue} added; -% \item the item labels of a first level list should be vertically -% aligned on the paragraph's first character (i.e. at -% |\parindent| from the left margin); -% \item the `\textbullet' is never used in French itemize-lists, -% a long dash `--' is preferred for all levels. The item label -% used in French is stored in |\FrenchLabelItem}|, it defaults -% to `--' and can be changed using |\frenchbsetup{}| (see -% section~\ref{sec-keyval}). -% \end{itemize} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{\textendash} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{\FrenchLabelItem} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\bbl@frenchlabelitems| saves current itemize labels and changes -% them to their value in French. This code should never be executed -% twice in a row, so we need a new flag that will be set and reset -% by |\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems| and |\bbl@frenchlabelitems|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFB@enterFrench \FB@enterFrenchtrue -\def\bbl@frenchlabelitems{% - \ifFB@enterFrench - \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi - \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii - \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii - \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv - \let\labelitemi\Frlabelitemi - \let\labelitemii\Frlabelitemii - \let\labelitemiii\Frlabelitemiii - \let\labelitemiv\Frlabelitemiv - \FB@enterFrenchfalse - \fi -} -\let\itemizeORI\itemize -\let\enditemizeORI\enditemize -\let\enditemizeFB\enditemize -\def\itemizeFB{% - \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else - \advance\@itemdepth\@ne - \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% - \expandafter - \listORI - \csname\@itemitem\endcsname - {\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}% - \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% - \ifnum\@listdepth=0 - \setlength{\itemindent}{\parindent}% - \else - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\parindent}% - \fi - \setlength{\itemsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% |\parskip| is of type `skip', its mean value only (\emph{not -% the glue}) should be subtracted from |\topsep| and added to -% |\partopsep|, so convert |\parskip| to a `dimen' using -% |\@tempdima|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempdima=\parskip - \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}% - \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% The user's changes in labelitems are saved when leaving French for -% further use when switching back to French. This code should never -% be executed twice in a row (toggle with |\bbl@frenchlabelitems|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems{% - \ifFB@enterFrench - \else - \let\Frlabelitemi\labelitemi - \let\Frlabelitemii\labelitemii - \let\Frlabelitemiii\labelitemiii - \let\Frlabelitemiv\labelitemiv - \let\labelitemi\@ltiORI - \let\labelitemii\@ltiiORI - \let\labelitemiii\@ltiiiORI - \let\labelitemiv\@ltivORI - \FB@enterFrenchtrue - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{French indentation of sections} -% \label{sec-indent} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -% In French the first paragraph of each section should be indented, -% this is another difference with US-English. This is controlled by -% the flag |\if@afterindent|. -% -% \changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/16}{Bug correction: previous versions of -% frenchb set the flag \cs{if@afterindent} to false outside -% French which is correct for English but wrong for some languages -% like Spanish. Pointed out by Juan Jos\'e Torrens.} -% -% We will need to save the value of the flag |\if@afterindent| -% `AtBeginDocument' before eventually changing its value. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Formatting footnotes} -% \label{sec-footnotes} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{Footnotes are now printed -% by default `\`a la fran\c caise' for the whole document.} -% -% \changes{v2.0b}{2007/04/18}{Footnotes: Just do nothing -% (except warning) when the bigfoot package is loaded.} -% -% The \file{bigfoot} package deeply changes the way footnotes are -% handled. When |bigfoot| is loaded, we just warn the user that -% |frenchb| will drop the customisation of footnotes. -% -% The layout of footnotes is controlled by two flags -% |\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes| and |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| which are -% set by options of |\frenchbsetup{}| (see section~\ref{sec-keyval}). -% Notice that the layout of footnotes \emph{does not depend} on the -% current language (just think of two footnotes on the same page -% looking different because one was called in a French part, the -% other one in English!). -% -% When |\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes| is true, |\@footnotemark| (whose -% definition is saved at the |\begin{document}| in order to include -% any customisation that packages might have done) is redefined to -% add a thin space before the number or symbol calling a footnote -% (any space typed in is removed first). This has no effect on -% the layout of the footnote itself. -% -% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{\cs{PackageWarning} changed to -% \cs{FBWarning} (when bigfoot package in use).} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}% - {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {bigfoot package in use.\MessageBreak - frenchb will NOT customise footnotes;\MessageBreak - reported}}% - {\let\@footnotemarkORI\@footnotemark - \def\@footnotemarkFB{\leavevmode\unskip\unkern - \,\@footnotemarkORI}% - \ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes - \let\@footnotemark\@footnotemarkFB - \fi}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We then define |\@makefntextFB|, a variant of |\@makefntext| -% which is responsible for the layout of footnotes, to match the -% specifications of the French `Imprimerie Nationale': footnotes -% will be indented by |\parindentFFN|, numbers (if any) typeset on -% the baseline (instead of superscripts) and followed by a dot -% and an half quad space. Whenever symbols are used to number -% footnotes (as in |\thanks| for instance), we switch back to the -% standard layout (the French layout of footnotes is meant for -% footnotes numbered by Arabic or Roman digits). -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{parindentFFN} not changed if -% already defined (required by JA for cah-gut.cls).} -% -% \changes{v2.3b}{2008/12/06}{New commands \cs{dotFFN} and -% \cs{kernFFN} for more flexibility (suggested by JA).} -% -% The value of |\parindentFFN| will be redefined at the -% |\begin{document}|, as the maximum of |\parindent| and 1.5em -% \emph{unless} it has been set in the preamble (the weird value -% 10in is just for testing whether |\parindentFFN| has been set -% or not). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dotFFN}{.} -\newcommand*{\kernFFN}{\kern .5em} -\newdimen\parindentFFN -\parindentFFN=10in -\def\ftnISsymbol{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote} -\long\def\@makefntextFB#1{\ifx\thefootnote\ftnISsymbol - \@makefntextORI{#1}% - \else - \parindent=\parindentFFN - \rule\z@\footnotesep - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@thefnmark}% - \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\z@ - \llap{\@thefnmark}\dotFFN\kernFFN - \fi #1 - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We save the standard definition of |\@makefntext| at the -% |\begin{document}|, and then redefine |\@makefntext| according to -% the value of flag |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| (true or false). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}{}% - {\ifdim\parindentFFN<10in - \else - \parindentFFN=\parindent - \ifdim\parindentFFN<1.5em\parindentFFN=1.5em\fi - \fi - \let\@makefntextORI\@makefntext - \long\def\@makefntext#1{% - \ifFBFrenchFootnotes - \@makefntextFB{#1}% - \else - \@makefntextORI{#1}% - \fi}% - }% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For compatibility reasons, we provide definitions for the commands -% dealing with the layout of footnotes in |frenchb| version~1.6. -% |\frenchbsetup{}| (see in section \ref{sec-keyval}) should be -% preferred for setting these options. |\StandardFootnotes| may -% still be used locally (in minipages for instance), that's why the -% test |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| is done inside |\@makefntext|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\AddThinSpaceBeforeFootnotes}{\FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue} -\newcommand*{\FrenchFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotestrue} -\newcommand*{\StandardFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Global layout} -% \label{sec-global} -% -% In multilingual documents, some typographic rules must depend -% on the current language (e.g., hyphenation, typesetting of -% numbers, spacing before double punctuation\dots), others should, -% IMHO, be kept global to the document: especially the layout of -% lists (see~\ref{sec-lists}) and footnotes -% (see~\ref{sec-footnotes}), and the indentation of the first -% paragraph of sections (see~\ref{sec-indent}). -% -% From version 2.2 on, if |frenchb| is \babel's ``main language'' -% (i.e. last language option at \babel's loading), |frenchb| -% customises the layout (i.e. lists, indentation of the first -% paragraphs of sections and footnotes) in the whole document -% regardless the current language. On the other hand, if |frenchb| -% is \emph{not} \babel's ``main language'', it leaves the layout -% unchanged both in French and in other languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\FrenchLayout} -% \begin{macro}{\StandardLayout} -% The former commands |\FrenchLayout| and |\StandardLayout| are kept -% for compatibility reasons but should no longer be used. -% -% \changes{v2.0g}{2008/03/23}{Flag \cs{ifFBStandardLayout} not checked -% by \cs{FBprocess@options}, low-level flags have to be set -% one by one.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FrenchLayout}{% - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {\protect\FrenchLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak - \protect\frenchbsetup{GlobalLayoutFrench} instead.}% -} -\newcommand*{\StandardLayout}{% - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \FBIndentFirstfalse - \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {\protect\StandardLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak - \protect\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} instead.}% -} -\@onlypreamble\FrenchLayout -\@onlypreamble\StandardLayout -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Dots\dots} -% \label{sec-dots} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FBtextellipsis} -% \LaTeXe's standard definition of |\dots| in text-mode is -% |\textellipsis| which includes a |\kern| at the end; -% this space is not wanted in some cases (before a closing brace -% for instance) and |\kern| breaks hyphenation of the next word. -% We define |\FBtextellipsis| for French (in \LaTeXe{} only). -% -% The |\if| construction in the \LaTeXe{} definition of |\dots| -% doesn't allow the use of |xspace| (|xspace| is always followed -% by a |\fi|), so we use the AMS-\LaTeX{} construction of |\dots|; -% this has to be done `AtBeginDocument' not to be overwritten -% when \file{amsmath.sty} is loaded after \babel. -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{Added special case for LY1 encoding, -% see bug report from Bruno Voisin (2004/05/18).} -% -% LY1 has a ready made character for |\textellipsis|, it should be -% used in French too (pointed out by Bruno Voisin). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\FBtextellipsis}{LY1}{133} -\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\FBtextellipsis}{% - .\kern\fontdimen3\font.\kern\fontdimen3\font.\xspace} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\Mdots@| and |\Tdots@ORI| hold the definitions of |\dots| in -% Math and Text mode. They default to those of amsmath-2.0, and -% will revert to standard \LaTeX{} definitions `AtBeginDocument', -% if amsmath has not been loaded. |\Mdots@| doesn't change when -% switching from/to French, while |\Tdots@| is |\FBtextellipsis| -% in French and |\Tdots@ORI| otherwise. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\Tdots@ORI}{\@xp\textellipsis} -\newcommand*{\Tdots@}{\Tdots@ORI} -\newcommand*{\Mdots@}{\@xp\mdots@} -\AtBeginDocument{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\dots}{\relax - \csname\ifmmode M\else T\fi dots@\endcsname}% - \@ifundefined{@xp}{\let\@xp\relax}{}% - \@ifundefined{mdots@}{\let\Tdots@ORI\textellipsis - \let\Mdots@\mathellipsis - \let\mdots@\undefined}{}} -\def\bbl@frenchdots{\let\Tdots@\FBtextellipsis} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchdots{\let\Tdots@\Tdots@ORI} -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchdots} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchdots} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Setup options: keyval stuff} -% \label{sec-keyval} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{New command \cs{frenchbsetup} added -% for global customisation.} -% -% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{Option ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers added.} -% -% \changes{v2.0d}{2007/07/15}{Options og and fg changed: limit -% the definition to French so that quote characters can be used -% in German.} -% -% \changes{v2.0e}{2007/10/05}{New option: StandardLists.} -% -% \changes{v2.0f}{2008/03/23}{Two typos corrected in -% option StandardLists: [false] $\to$ [true] and -% StandardLayout $\to$ StandardLists.} -% -% \changes{v2.0f}{2008/03/23}{StandardLayout option had no -% effect on lists. Test moved to \cs{FBprocess@options}.} -% -% \changes{v2.0g}{2008/03/23}{Revert previous change to -% StandardLayout. This option must set the three flags -% \cs{FBReduceListSpacingfalse}, \cs{FBCompactItemizefalse}, -% and \cs{FBStandardItemLabeltrue} instead of -% \cs{FBStandardListstrue}, so that later options can still -% change their value before executing \cs{FBprocess@options}. -% Same thing for option StandardLists.} -% -% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/24}{New option: FrenchSuperscripts -% to define \cs{up} as \cs{fup} or as \cs{textsuperscript}.} -% -% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/30}{New option: LowercaseSuperscripts.} -% -% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{The global layout of the document is -% no longer changed when frenchb is not the last option of babel -% (\cs{bbl@main@language}). Suggested by Ulrike Fischer.} -% -% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{Values of flags -% \cs{ifFBReduceListSpacing}, \cs{ifFBCompactItemize}, -% \cs{ifFBStandardItemLabels}, \cs{ifFBIndentFirst}, -% \cs{ifFBFrenchFootnotes}, \cs{ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes} changed: -% default now means `StandardLayout', it will be changed to -% `FrenchLayout' AtEndOfPackage only if french is -% \cs{bbl@main@language}.} -% -% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{When frenchb is babel's last option, -% French becomes the document's main language, so -% GlobalLayoutFrench applies.} -% -% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{New option: OriginalTypewriter. Now -% frenchb switches to \cs{noautospace@beforeFDP} when a tt-font is -% in use. When OriginalTypewriter is set to true, frenchb behaves -% as in pre-2.3 versions.} -% -% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{New option SuppressWarning.} -% -% We first define a collection of conditionals with their defaults -% (true or false). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFBStandardLayout \FBStandardLayouttrue -\newif\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse -\newif\ifFBReduceListSpacing \FBReduceListSpacingfalse -\newif\ifFBCompactItemize \FBCompactItemizefalse -\newif\ifFBStandardItemLabels \FBStandardItemLabelstrue -\newif\ifFBStandardLists \FBStandardListstrue -\newif\ifFBIndentFirst \FBIndentFirstfalse -\newif\ifFBFrenchFootnotes \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse -\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse -\newif\ifFBOriginalTypewriter \FBOriginalTypewriterfalse -\newif\ifFBThinColonSpace \FBThinColonSpacefalse -\newif\ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers \FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbersfalse -\newif\ifFBFrenchSuperscripts \FBFrenchSuperscriptstrue -\newif\ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts \FBLowercaseSuperscriptstrue -\newif\ifFBPartNameFull \FBPartNameFulltrue -\newif\ifFBSuppressWarning \FBSuppressWarningfalse -\newif\ifFBShowOptions \FBShowOptionsfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The defaults values of these flags have been set so that |frenchb| -% does not change anything regarding the global layout. -% |\bbl@main@language| (set by the last option of babel) controls -% the global layout of the document. We check the current language -% `AtEndOfPackage' (it is |\bbl@main@language|); if it is French, -% the values of some flags have to be changed to ensure a French -% looking layout for the whole document (even in parts written in -% languages other than French); the end-user will then be able to -% customise the values of all these flags with |\frenchbsetup{}|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \iflanguage{french}{\FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue}% - {}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frenchbsetup} -% From version 2.0 on, all setup options are handled by \emph{one} -% command |\frenchbsetup| using the keyval syntax. -% Let's now define this command which reads and sets the options -% to be processed later (at |\begin{document}|) by -% |\FBprocess@options|. It can only be called in the preamble. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\frenchbsetup}[1]{% - \setkeys{FB}{#1}% -}% -\@onlypreamble\frenchbsetup -% \end{macrocode} -% |frenchb| being an option of babel, it cannot load a package -% (keyval) while |frenchb.ldf| is read, so we defer the loading of -% \file{keyval} and the options setup at the end of \babel's loading. -% -% |StandardLayout| resets the layout in French to the standard layout -% defined par the \LaTeX{} class and packages loaded. It deals with -% lists, indentation of first paragraphs of sections and footnotes. -% Other keys, entered \emph{after} |StandardLayout| in -% |\frenchbsetup|, can overrule some of the |StandardLayout| -% settings. -% -% When French is the main language, |GlobalLayoutFrench| forces the -% layout in French and (as far as possible) outside French to meet -% the French typographic standards. -% -% \changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/16}{Warning added to \cs{GlobalLayoutFrench} -% when French is not the main language.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \RequirePackage{keyval}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardLayout}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardLayout#1\endcsname - \ifFBStandardLayout - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \FBIndentFirstfalse - \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse - \else - \FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{GlobalLayoutFrench}[true]% - {\csname FBGlobalLayoutFrench#1\endcsname - \ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \iflanguage{french}% - {\FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `GlobalLayoutFrench' skipped: - \MessageBreak French is *not* - babel's last option.\MessageBreak}% - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse}% - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{ReduceListSpacing}[true]% - {\csname FBReduceListSpacing#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{CompactItemize}[true]% - {\csname FBCompactItemize#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardItemLabels}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardItemLabels#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabels}{% - \renewcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeli}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabelii}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliii}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliv}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardLists}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardLists#1\endcsname - \ifFBStandardLists - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \else - \FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{IndentFirst}[true]% - {\csname FBIndentFirst#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{FrenchFootnotes}[true]% - {\csname FBFrenchFootnotes#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{AutoSpaceFootnotes}[true]% - {\csname FBAutoSpaceFootnotes#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{AutoSpacePunctuation}[true]% - {\csname FBAutoSpacePunctuation#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{OriginalTypewriter}[true]% - {\csname FBOriginalTypewriter#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ThinColonSpace}[true]% - {\csname FBThinColonSpace#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}[true]% - {\csname FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{FrenchSuperscripts}[true]% - {\csname FBFrenchSuperscripts#1\endcsname} - \define@key{FB}{LowercaseSuperscripts}[true]% - {\csname FBLowercaseSuperscripts#1\endcsname} - \define@key{FB}{PartNameFull}[true]% - {\csname FBPartNameFull#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{SuppressWarning}[true]% - {\csname FBSuppressWarning#1\endcsname - \ifFBSuppressWarning - \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\relax}% - \else - \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{% - \PackageWarning{##1}{##2}}% - \fi} - \define@key{FB}{ShowOptions}[true]% - {\csname FBShowOptions#1\endcsname}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Inputing French quotes as \emph{single characters} when they are -% available on the keyboard (through a compose key for instance) -% is more comfortable than typing |\og| and |\fg|. -% The purpose of the following code is to map the French quote -% characters to |\og\ignorespaces| and |{\fg}| respectively when -% the current language is French, and to |\guillemotleft| and -% |\guillemotright| otherwise (think of German quotes); thus correct -% unbreakable spaces will be added automatically to French quotes. -% The quote characters typed in depend on the input encoding, -% it can be single-byte (latin1, latin9, applemac,\dots) or -% multi-bytes (utf-8, utf8x). We first check whether XeTeX is used -% or not, if not the package \file{inputenc} has to be loaded before -% the |\begin{document}| with the proper coding option, so we check -% if |\DeclareInputText| is defined. -% -% \changes{v2.4c}{2010/05/23}{In \cs{ttfamilyFB}, also cancel -% automatic spaces inside French guillemets coded as characters -% (see \cs{frenchbsetup}).} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the -% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE. -% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing -% \cs{XeTeXrevision}, \cs{DeclareInputText}, \cs{uc@dclc}, -% \cs{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}, \cs{mule@def} in \cs{og} and -% \cs{fg}.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \define@key{FB}{og}{% - \newcommand*{\FB@@og}{% - \iflanguage{french}% - {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@og\ignorespaces - \else\guillemotleft - \fi}% - {\guillemotleft}}% - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\AtBeginDocument - {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `og' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}% - \let\DeclareInputText\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% if |\uc@dclc| is undefined, utf8x is not loaded\dots -% \begin{macrocode} - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}% -% \end{macrocode} -% if |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| is undefined, utf8 is not loaded -% either, we assume 8-bit character input encoding. -% Package \file{MULEenc.sty} (from CJK) defines |\mule@def| to map -% characters to control sequences. -% \begin{macrocode} - {\@tempcnta`#1\relax - \@ifundefined{mule@def}% - {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{\FB@@og}% - \let\mule@def\undefined}% - {\mule@def{11}{{\FB@@og}}}% - \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% utf8 loaded, use |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter|, -% \begin{macrocode} - {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\FB@@og}}% - \let\uc@dclc\undefined - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% utf8x loaded, use |\uc@dclc|, -% \begin{macrocode} - {\uc@dclc{171}{default}{\FB@@og}}% - }% - }% - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% XeTeX in use, -% \begin{macrocode} - {\ifFB@xetex@punct -% \end{macrocode} -% |XeTeXinterchartokenstate| is defined, nothing to do here, see -% subsection~\ref{sec-punct}. -% \begin{macrocode} - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% then an old XeTeX in use, the following trick for defining the -% active quote character is borrowed from \file{inputenc.dtx}. -% \begin{macrocode} - \catcode`#1=\active - \bgroup - \uccode`\~`#1% - \uppercase{% - \egroup - \def~% - }{\FB@@og}% - \fi - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Same code for the closing quote. -% \begin{macrocode} - \define@key{FB}{fg}{% - \newcommand*{\FB@@fg}{% - \iflanguage{french}% - {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@fg - \else\guillemotright - \fi}% - {\guillemotright}}% - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\AtBeginDocument - {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `fg' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}% - \let\DeclareInputText\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}% - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}% - {\@tempcnta`#1\relax - \@ifundefined{mule@def}% - {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{{\FB@@fg}}% - \let\mule@def\undefined - }% - {\mule@def{27}{{\FB@@fg}}}% - \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined - }% - {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{{\FB@@fg}}% - }% - \let\uc@dclc\undefined - }% - {\uc@dclc{187}{default}{{\FB@@fg}}}% - }% - }% - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% - {\ifFB@xetex@punct - \else - \catcode`#1=\active - \bgroup - \uccode`\~`#1% - \uppercase{% - \egroup - \def~% - }{{\FB@@fg}}% - \fi - }% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FBprocess@options} -% |\FBprocess@options| processes the options, it is called \emph{once} -% at |\begin{document}|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\FBprocess@options}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Nothing has to be done here for |StandardLayout| and -% |StandardLists| (the involved flags have already been set in -% |\frenchbsetup{}| or before (at babel's EndOfPackage). -% -% The next three options deal with the layout of lists in French. -% -% |ReduceListSpacing| reduces the vertical spaces between list -% items in French (done by changing |\list| to |\listFB|). -% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true (the default), the same is -% done outside French except for languages that force a different -% setting. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBReduceListSpacing - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listFB - \let\endlist\endlistFB}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \let\list\listFB - \let\endlist\endlistFB - \else - \let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |CompactItemize| suppresses the vertical spacing between list -% items in French (done by changing |\itemize| to |\itemizeFB|). -% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true the same is done outside French. -% -% \changes{v2.4b}{2010/04/30}{Set flag CompactItemize=false when the -% enumitem package is loaded (ensures compatibility).} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{enumitem}{% - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Setting CompactItemize=false for compatibility\MessageBreak - with enumitem package,}}% - {}% - \ifFBCompactItemize - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeFB - \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \let\itemize\itemizeFB - \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB - \else - \let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |StandardItemLabels| resets labelitems in French to their -% standard values set by the \LaTeX{} class and packages loaded. -% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true labelitems are identical inside -% and outside French. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBStandardItemLabels - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchlabelitems}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \bbl@frenchlabelitems - \else - \bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems - \fi}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |IndentFirst| forces the first paragraphs of sections to be -% indented just like the other ones in French. -% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true, the same is done outside French -% except for languages that force a different setting. -% |\bbl@nonfrenchindent| has been designed to be smart with other -% languages (like Spanish) who also indent every first paragraphs of -% sections (see section~\ref{sec-indent}). -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBIndentFirst - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchindent}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \bbl@frenchindent - \else - \bbl@nonfrenchindent - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The layout of footnotes is handled at the |\begin{document}| -% depending on the values of flags |FrenchFootnotes| -% and |AutoSpaceFootnotes| (see section~\ref{sec-footnotes}), -% nothing has to be done here for footnotes. -% -% |AutoSpacePunctuation| adds an unbreakable space (in French only) -% before the four active characters (:;!?) even if none has been -% typed before them. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When |OriginalTypewriter| is set to |false| (the default), -% |\ttfamily|, |\rmfamily| and |\sffamily| are redefined as -% |\ttfamilyFB|, |\rmfamilyFB| and |\sffamilyFB| respectively -% to prevent addition of automatic spaces before the four active -% characters in computer code. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBOriginalTypewriter - \else - \let\ttfamily\ttfamilyFB - \let\rmfamily\rmfamilyFB - \let\sffamily\sffamilyFB - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |ThinColonSpace| changes the normal unbreakable space typeset in -% French before `:' to a thin space. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBThinColonSpace\renewcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\Fthinspace}\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When |true|, |ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers| redefines |numprint.sty|'s -% command |\npstylefrench| to set |\npthousandsep| to |\,| -% (thinspace) instead of |~| (default) . This option has no effect -% if package \file{numprint.sty} is not loaded with `|autolanguage|'. -% As old versions of \file{numprint.sty} did not define -% |\npstylefrench|, we have to provide this command. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{numprint}% - {\ifnprt@autolanguage - \providecommand*{\npstylefrench}{}% - \ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers - \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{% - \npthousandsep{\,}% - \npdecimalsign{,}% - \npproductsign{\cdot}% - \npunitseparator{\,}% - \npdegreeseparator{}% - \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}% - }% - \else - \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{% - \npthousandsep{~}% - \npdecimalsign{,}% - \npproductsign{\cdot}% - \npunitseparator{\,}% - \npdegreeseparator{}% - \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}% - }% - \fi - \npaddtolanguage{french}{french}% - \fi}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |FrenchSuperscripts|: if |true| |\up=\fup|, else -% |\up=\textsuperscript|. Anyway |\up*=\FB@up@fake|. The star-form -% |\up*{}| is provided for fonts that lack some superior letters: -% Adobe Jenson Pro and Utopia Expert have no ``g superior'' for -% instance. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBFrenchSuperscripts - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}{\fup}}% - \else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}% - {\textsuperscript}}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |LowercaseSuperscripts|: if |true| let |\FB@lc| be |\lowercase|, -% else |\FB@lc| is redefined to do nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts - \else - \renewcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{##1}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |PartNameFull|: if |false|, redefine |\partname|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBPartNameFull - \else\addto\captionsfrench{\def\partname{Partie}}\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |ShowOptions|: if |true|, print the list of all options to the -% \file{.log} file. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifFBShowOptions - \GenericWarning{* }{% - * **** List of possible options for frenchb ****\MessageBreak - [Default values between brackets when frenchb is loaded *LAST*]% - \MessageBreak - ShowOptions=true [false]\MessageBreak - StandardLayout=true [false]\MessageBreak - GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true]\MessageBreak - StandardLists=true [false]\MessageBreak - IndentFirst=false [true]\MessageBreak - ReduceListSpacing=false [true]\MessageBreak - CompactItemize=false [true]\MessageBreak - StandardItemLabels=true [false]\MessageBreak - ItemLabels=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeli=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabelii=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeliii=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeliv=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - FrenchFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak - AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak - AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]\MessageBreak - OriginalTypewriter=true [false]\MessageBreak - ThinColonSpace=true [false]\MessageBreak - ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true [false]\MessageBreak - FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak - LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak - PartNameFull=false [true]\MessageBreak - SuppressWarning=true [false]\MessageBreak - og= <left quote character>, fg= <right quote character> - \MessageBreak - ********************************************* - \MessageBreak\protect\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}} - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/15}{AtBeginDocument, save again the -% definitions of the `list' and `itemize' environments and the -% values of labelitems. As of frenchb v.1.6, `ORI' values were -% set when reading frenchb.ldf, later changes were ignored.} -% -% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/06}{Added warning for OT1 encoding.} -% -% \changes{v2.1b}{2008/04/07}{Disable some commands in bookmarks.} -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the -% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE. -% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing -% \cs{pdfstringdefDisableCommands} AtBeginDocument.} -% -% At |\begin{document}| we save again the value of |\if@afterindent| -% and definitions of the `list' and `itemize' environments and the -% values of labelitems so that all changes made in the preamble are -% taken into account in languages other than French and in French -% with the StandardLayout option. -% We also have to provide an |\xspace| command in case the -% \file{xspace.sty} package is not loaded. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \let\@aifORI\@afterindenttrue - \else \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \fi - \let\listORI\list - \let\endlistORI\endlist - \let\itemizeORI\itemize - \let\enditemizeORI\enditemize - \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi - \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii - \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii - \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv - \providecommand*{\xspace}{\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Let's redefine some commands in \file{hyperref}'s bookmarks. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}{}% - {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% - \let\up\relax - \def\ieme{e\xspace}% - \def\iemes{es\xspace}% - \def\ier{er\xspace}% - \def\iers{ers\xspace}% - \def\iere{re\xspace}% - \def\ieres{res\xspace}% - \def\FrenchEnumerate#1{#1\degre\space}% - \def\FrenchPopularEnumerate#1{#1\degre)\space}% - \def\No{N\degre\space}% - \def\no{n\degre\space}% - \def\Nos{N\degre\space}% - \def\nos{n\degre\space}% - \def\og{\guillemotleft\space}% - \def\fg{\space\guillemotright}% - \let\bsc\textsc - \let\degres\degre - }% - \let\pdfstringdefDisableCommands\undefined}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% It is time to process the options set with |\frenchboptions{}|. -% Then we need to execute either |\extrasfrench| and -% |\captionsfrench| or |\noextrasfrench| according to the current -% language at the |\begin{document}| (these three commands have been -% updated by |\FBprocess@options|). \emph{But}, when French is the -% main language, |\extrasfrench| is executed \emph{again} now -% (French has been switched on `AtBeginDocument' some time before). -% This is harmless, except for |\bbl@frenchspacing| which will -% redefine |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| to |\relax|, this will be -% wrong if the user switches to English. -% When French is \emph{not} the main language, |\noextrasfrench| -% executes |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| (=|\nonfrenchspacing|), thus -% eventually overwriting a |\frenchspacing| command issued by the -% main language (German, Spanish, etc.). -% So we have to define |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| as |\relax| here -% and restore it's meaning afterwards. -% -% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/15}{Define \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing} locally -% as \cs{relax}, otherwise the \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} command -% included in germanb.ldf is overwritten here by -% \cs{noextrasfrench}. Bug pointed out by Ulrike Fischer.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \FBprocess@options - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI\bbl@nonfrenchspacing - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax - \iflanguage{french}{\extrasfrench\captionsfrench}{\noextrasfrench}% - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI -% \end{macrocode} -% Some warnings are issued when output font encodings are not -% properly set. With XeLaTeX, \file{fontspec.sty} and -% \file{xunicode.sty} should be loaded; with (pdf)\LaTeX, a warning -% is issued when OT1 encoding is in use at the |\begin{document}|. -% Mind that |\encodingdefault| is defined as `long', defining -% |\FBOTone| with |\newcommand*| would fail! -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\begingroup \newcommand{\FBOTone}{OT1}% - \ifx\encodingdefault\FBOTone - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {OT1 encoding should not be used for French. - \MessageBreak - Add \protect\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} to the - preamble\MessageBreak of your document,}% - \fi - \endgroup - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUTFcharacter}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Add \protect\usepackage{xltxtra} to the\MessageBreak - preamble of your document,}% - \let\DeclareUTFcharacter\undefined}% - {}% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Clean up and exit} -% -% Load |frenchb.cfg| (should do nothing, just for compatibility). -% \begin{macrocode} -\loadlocalcfg{frenchb} -% \end{macrocode} -% Final cleaning. -% The macro |\ldf@quit| takes care for setting the main language -% to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and resetting the -% category code of \texttt{@} to its original value. -% The config file searched for has to be |frenchb.cfg|, and -% |\CurrentOption| has been set to `french', so -% |\ldf@finish\CurrentOption| cannot be used: we first load -% |frenchb.cfg|, then call |\ldf@quit\CurrentOption|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\FBclean@on@exit -\ldf@quit\CurrentOption -% \end{macrocode} -% \iffalse -%</code> -%<*dtx> -% \fi -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -% \iffalse -%</dtx> -% \fi -% -% \Finale -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 6bf6dd29fb8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/10/30} -\def\batchfile{frenchb.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{frenchb.ldf}{\from{frenchb.dtx}{code}} - } -\nopreamble -\nopostamble -\generate{\file{frenchb.cfg}{\from{frenchb.dtx}{cfg}} - } - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput - - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 3e7e5c4d999..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2437 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{2264} -% \ProvidesFile{galician.dtx} -% [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `galician.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Galcian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006 -%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008 -%% by Javier A. M\'ugica -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably) -%% jmugica at digi21.net -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Galician language definition file. -% The original version of the file spanish.dtx was written by Javier Bezos. -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass[galician,a4paper]{ltxdoc} -\usepackage[activeacute]{babel} -%Small suport for the input encoding -\catcode`\á=\active \defá{\'a} -\catcode`\é=\active \defé{\'e} -\catcode`\í=\active \defí{\'\i} -\catcode`\ó=\active \defó{\'o} -\catcode`\ú=\active \defú{\'u} -\catcode`\ñ=\active \defñ{\~n} -%end - -%\usepackage{ps} - -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} - -\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{2\arrayrulewidth} -\newcommand\toprule{\cline{1-2}\\[-2ex]} -\newcommand\botrule{\\[.6ex]\cline{1-2}} -\newcommand\hmk{$\string|$} - -\newcommand\New[1]{% - \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\sffamily Novo en #1}} - -\newcommand\nm[1]{\unskip\,$^{#1}$} -\newcommand\nt[1]{\quad$^{#1}$\,\ignorespaces} - -\makeatletter - \renewcommand\@biblabel{} -\makeatother - -\newcommand\DOT[1]{\msc{DOT},~#1} -\newcommand\DTL[1]{\msc{DTL},~#1} -\newcommand\MEA[1]{\msc{MEA},~#1} - -\raggedright -\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-2pc} -\addtolength{\textwidth}{2pc} -\setlength{\parindent}{1em} - -\OnlyDescription -\begin{document} - \DocInput{galician.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \begingroup -% -% \catcode`\{=11 -% \catcode`\[=1 -% -% \gdef\ignoringuser[^^A -% \bgroup -% \let\end{userdtx\fi -% \let\end{userdrv\fi -% \aftergroup\endgroup -% \catcode`\{=11 -% \catcode`f=14 ^^A kills \if... and \fi -% \catcode`l=14 ^^A kills \else -% \catcode`o=14 ^^A kills \or -% \catcode`p=14 ^^A kills \repeat -% \iffalse} -% -% \endgroup -% -% ^^A\def\langdeffile{} -% \newenvironment{userdtx} -% {\ifx\langdeffile\undefined -% \else\expandafter\ignoringuser -% \fi}{} -% -% \newenvironment{userdrv} -% {\ifx\langdeffile\undefined -% \expandafter\ignoringuser -% \else\fi}{} -% -% \begin{userdtx} -%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by galician.dtx ========= -% -% \title{Estilo \textsf{galician} para o sistema \babel\\[10pt] -% \large Versión 4.3, de 29 de xaneiro do 2007} -% -% \author{Javier Múgica\footnote{O autor orixinal foi Javier Bezos. -% Foi traduciro por min do castelán en xaneiro do 2007, e desde -% entón e mantido e actualizado por min.}} -% -% \date{} ^^A@# -% -% \maketitle -% -% {\small\tableofcontents} -% -%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal} -% -% En \babel{} considérase que a última lingua citada en |\usepackage| e |\documentclass|, -% por esta orde, é a lingua principal. Se a lingua principal é |galician|, actívase o grupo -% |\layoutgalician| que adapta varios elementos ós usos tipogr'aficos galegos do seguinte modo: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |enumerate| e |itemize|\vadjust{\nobreak}\\[1ex] -% -% O primeiro usa a seguinte secuencia:\vadjust{\nobreak}\\ -% \quad 1.\\ -% \qquad \emph{a})\\ -% \quad\qquad 1)\\ -% \qquad\qquad \emph{a$'$})\\ -% O segundo a seguinte:\\ -% \quad\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex -% {\hss\vrule height .95ex width .8ex depth -.15ex\hss}\\ -% \qquad\textbullet\\ -% \quad\qquad $\circ$\\ -% \qquad\qquad $\diamond$ -% -% Dúas órdenes permiten outros estilos en |itemize|: con |\galiciandashitems| cámbiase a raias en tódo-los niveis -% e con |\galiciansignitems|, a \textbullet{} $\circ$ -% $\diamond$ $\triangleright$. -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\alph| e |\Alph|\\[1ex] -% -% Inclúen o e'ne, pero non k, j, w nin y. -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\fnsymbol|\\[1ex] -% -% Empréganse un, dous, tres... asteriscos (*, **, ***, etc.), -% en lugar da sucesi'on angloamericana de cruces, barras, -% etc.\footnote{\DOT{162}.} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\guillemotleft| e |\guillemotright|\\[1ex] -% -% As comiñas latinas para |OT1| son menos angulosas e xenéranse cunhas puntas de frecha |lasy|. -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\roman|\\[1ex] -% -% Os números romanos en minúscula son propios das obras inglesas e non se empregan no continente. -% Por iso se redefine |\roman| para que produza versalitas. -% -% \begin{quote}\small -% \textbf{Nota.} MakeIndex non pode entender a forma na que -% |\roman| escribe o n'umero de p'axina, polo que -% elimina as liñas afectadas. Por iso o aquivo |.idx| -% ten que ser convertido antes de ser procesado con MakeIndex. -% Con este paquete proporciónase a utilidade |glromidx.tex| que se -% encarga diso. Simplemente componse ese arquivo con \LaTeX{} -% e a continuaci'on respóndese ás preguntas que se formulan. -% Este proceso non é necesario se non se introduciu ningunha -% entrada de 'indice en p'axinas numeradas con |\roman| (o que ser'a -% o máis normal). Se un s'imbolo propio de \emph{MakeIndex} xenerara -% problemas, debe encerrarse entre chaves: \verb={"|}=. -% \end{quote} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\section|, |\subsection|, etc.\\[1ex] -% -% Os n'umeros nos t'itulos est'an seguidos dun punto tanto no texto coma -% no 'indice. Adem'ais, o primeiro parágrafo tra-lo título non elimina a sangr'ia -% (de novo, un costume angloamericano). -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% Estes cambios funcionan coas clases est'andar ~---con otras -% tal vez algún deles non teña efecto--- e persisten durante -% todo o documento (non se poden desactivar). Ningún deles é -% necesario para compoñer o documento, aínda que naturalmente -% o resultado ser'a distinto. -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\selectgalician*|\vadjust{\nobreak}\\[1ex] -% -% Se non se desexan estes cambios, chega con usar no -% pre'ambulo |\selectgalician*| (con asterisco) ou <<borralos>> con: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \let\layoutgalician\relax -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Descripci'on} -% -% \subsection{Traduccións} -% -% Certas ordes defínense para proporcionar traduccións -% ó galego dalgúns términos, tal e como se describe no cadro 1. -% -% \begin{table} -% \center\small -% \caption{Traduccións} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l} -% \toprule -% |\refname| & Referencias\\ -% |\abstractname| & Resumo\\ -% |\bibname| & Bibliograf'ia\\ -% |\chaptername| & Cap'itulo\\ -% |\appendixname| & Ap'endice\\ -% |\contentsname| & 'Indice xeral\nm{a}\\ -% |\listfigurename| & 'Indice de figuras\\ -% |\listtablename| & 'Indice de cadros\\ -% |\indexname| & 'Indice alfab'etico\\ -% |\figurename| & Figura\\ -% |\tablename| & Cadro\\ -% |\partname| & Parte\\ -% |\enclname| & Adxunto\\ -% |\ccname| & Copia a\\ -% |\headtoname| & A\\ -% |\pagename| & P'axina\\ -% |\seename| & v'exase\\ -% |\alsoname| & v'exase tam'en\\ -% |\proofname| & Demostraci'on -% \botrule -% \end{tabular} -% -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% -% \begin{minipage}{6cm}\footnotesize -% \nt{a} Pero s'olo <<'Indice>> en \textsf{article}. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{table} -% -% Non existe para o índice unha terminolox'ia unificada. Tal vez -% \emph{'Indice xeral} é o que m'ais se usa, as'i que a -% iso me ateño salvo en |article|, onde se compón coma secci'on -% e polo tanto resulta algo ostentoso.\footnote{\'O contrario que en -% ingl'es, en galego o 'indice por antonomasia é o xeral.} -% -% Para o 'indice alfab'etico tense proposto \emph{'Indice de materias} -% ou \emph{'Indice anal'itico}, aínda que estes 'indices non soamente -% adoitan incluír materias, mais tamén nomes; \emph{'Indice alfab'etico} -% é m'ais preciso.\footnote{\'E a usada en \DOT{300} as'i coma na meirande -% parte dos libros que consultei ó azar nunha biblioteca. (J.B.)} -% -% En canto ós de cadros e figuras, tam'en é posible dicir -% \emph{lista}, pero paréceme preferible \emph{'indice}, que -% implica a correspondencia coas p'axinas. -% -% \emph{Table} debe traducirse por \emph{cadro}, xa que \emph{táboa} -% é un \emph{falso amigo};\,\footnote{V'exanse as definicións -% do \msc{DGII} e \DTL{67 ss.}} esa é a pr'actica tradicional. -% (Por exemplo, <<cadro de estados medievais>> frente a <<táboa de logaritmos>>.) -% -% As traducción escríbense con min'usculas, salvo a inicial. Evítase -% o anglicismo de comenzar con mai'usculas os substantivos.\footnote{\DOT{197}.} -% -% A orde |\today| dá a data actual. Con |\galiciandatedo| e |\galiciandatede| -% óptase por \textit{do} (predeterminado) ou \textit{de}. -% -% \subsection{Abreviacións} -% -% (O que en \babel{} denomínase `shorthands'.) A lista completa -% pódese atopar no cadro~2. Nos seguintes apartados daranse máis -% detalles sobre algunhas delas. -% -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \center\small -% \caption{Abreviacións} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l} -% \toprule -% |'a 'e 'i 'o 'u| & 'a 'e 'i 'o 'u\\ -% |'A 'E 'I 'O 'U| & 'A 'E 'I 'O 'U\\ -% |'n 'N| & 'n 'N\nm{a}\\ -% |"u "U| & "u "U\\ -% |"i "I| & "i "I\\ -% |"a "A "o "O| & Ordinais: 1"a, 1"A, 1"o, 1"O\\ -% |"rr "RR| & rr, pero -r cando se divide\\ -% |"-| & Coma |\-|, pero permite m'ais divisións\\ -% |"=| & Coma |-|, pero permite máis divisións\nm{b}\\ -% |"~| & Gui'on estil'istico\nm{c}\\ -% |~- ~-- ~---| & Coma |-|, |--| e |---|, pero sen divisi'on\\ -% |""| & Permite máis divisións antes e despois\nm{d}\\ -% |"/| & Unha barra algo m'ais baixa\\ -% \verb+"|+ & Divide un logotipo\nm{e}\\ -% |<< >>| & << >>\\ -% |"< ">| & |\begin{quoting}| |\end{quoting}|\nm{f}\\ -% |?` !`| & ?` !`\nm{g}\\ -% |"? "!| & "? "! aliñados coa liña base\nm{h} -% \botrule -% \end{tabular} -% -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% -% \begin{minipage}{11cm} -% \footnotesize -% \nt{a} A forma |~n| debe considerarse en extinci'on. -% \nt{b} |"=| ven a ser o mesmo que |""-""|. -% \nt{c} Esta abreviaci'on ten un uso distinto noutras -% linguas. \nt{d} Coma en <<entrada/saída>>. -% \nt{e} Carece de uso en galego. \nt{f} V'exase sec.~2.7. -% \nt{g} Non proporcionadas por este paquete, mais por cada tipo; -% figuran aqu'i coma simple recordatorio. \nt{h} 'Utiles en -% r'otulos en mai'usculas. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{table} -% -% Para poder usar ap'ostrofos coma abreviacións de acentos -% é necesaria a opci'on |activeacute| en |\usepackage|. -% Pode cambiarse este comportamento coa orde |\gl@acuteactive| -% no arquivo de configuraci'on |galician.cfg|; nese caso os -% ap'ostrofos actívanse sempre. -% -% Os caracteres usados coma abreviacións compórtanse coma -% outras ordes de \TeX{} e polo tanto faise caso omiso -% dos espacios que poidan seguir: \verb*|' a| é o mesmo que |'a|. -% Eso tam'en implica que tras eses caracteres non pode vir unha -% chave de peche e que deber'a escribirse |{... '{}}| en lugar -% de |{... '}|; en modo matem'atico non hai problema e |$x^{a'}$| -% ($x^{a'}$) é v'alido. -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] -% |\deactivatetilden|\\[1ex] -% -% Esta orde desactiva as abreviacións |~n| e |~N| debido ós problemas -% que presentan. Pode usarse no arquivo de configuraci'on (v'exase -% m'ais abaixo). -% -% % \item[$\diamond$] -% |\galiciandeactivate{<caracteres>}|\\[1ex] -% -% Permite desactivar as abreviacións correspondentes ós caracteres dados. -% Para evitar entrar en conflicto con outras linguas, ó sair de |galician| -% reactívanse,\footnote{O punto para os decimais non é estrictamente -% unha abreviaci'on e non se reactiva.} polo que se se desexa que -% persista cómpre engadi-la orde a |\shorthandsgalician| con |\addto|. -% A orde |\renewcommand\shorthandsgalician{}| é unha variante optimizada de -%\begin{verbatim} -% \addto\shorthandsgalician{\galiciandeactivate{.'"~<>}} -%\end{verbatim} -% e é o recomendado se se desea prescindir do mecanismo de abreviacións. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \subsection{Coma decimal} -% -% En \textsf{galician} tómase partido, coma en castelán, por separar -% a parte enteira e a parte decimal mediante unha coma. O punto é -% tradicional en inglés, non en galego, e ademáis chegouse a unha -% normalización internacional pola que os milleiros sepáranse por -% un espacio fino e os decimais con coma. -% -% Dado que \TeX\ usa a coma coma separador en intervalos ou expresións -% similares, o que engade un espacio fino, \textsf{galician} converte -% todo punto en modo matem'atico nunha coma sempre que estea seguido -% dunha cifra, pero non notras circunstancias: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |$1\,234.567\,890$| \quad \= $1\,234.567\,890$\\ -% |$f(1,2)=12.34.$| \> $f(1,2)=12.34.$\\ -% |$1{.}000$| \> $1{.}000$, mais\\ -% |1.000| \> 1.000, pois non é modo matem'atico. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% As ordes |\decimalcomma| e |\decimalpoint| establecen se se usa -% unha coma, que é o valor predeterminado, ou un punto, mentras que -% |\galiciandecimal{<math>}| permite darlle unha definici'on -% arbitraria.\footnote{Internamente o mecanismo é o dunha abreviaci'on, -% e pódese desactivar coma as outras.} -% -% \subsection{Divisi'on de palabras} -% -% \textsf{Galician} comproba a codificaci'on no momento no que se -% emprega un acento: se a codificaci'on é |OT1| tómanse medidas para -% facilitar a divisi'on, que pese a todo nunca ser'a perfecta, mentres -% que con |T1| accédese directamente ó car'acter correspondente. -% -% Para matizar a divisi'on de palabras hai catro posibilidades, dúas -% delas co m'etodo de abreviacións: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item a orde |\-| é un gui'on opcional que non permite m'ais -% divisións (coma en \TeX), -% -% \item |"-| é similar pero permite m'ais divisións, -% -% \item un |-| é un gui'on que non permite m'ais divisións nin -% antes nin despois (coma en \TeX), e -% -% \item |"=| é o equivalente que s'i as permite,\footnote{Non -% é unha boa idea usar esta orde, pero en medidas moi curtas -% puede resultar necesario.} -% -% \end{itemize} -% Por exemplo (coas posibles divisións marcadas con \hmk): -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |Zaragoza-Barcelona|\qquad \= Zaragoza-\hmk Barcelona\\ -% |Zaragoza"=Barcelona| \> -% Za\hmk ra\hmk go\hmk za-\hmk Bar\hmk ce\hmk lo\hmk na\\ -% |semi\-aperto| \> semi\hmk aperto\\ -% |semi"-aperto| \> se\hmk mi\hmk aper\hmk to.\footnotemark -% \end{tabbing}\footnotetext{Xusto antes e despóis de -% {\ttfamily\string"\string-} e {\ttfamily\string"\string=} -% aplícanse os correspondentes valores de -% {\ttfamily\string\...hyphenmin}, o que implica que a -% divis'on semia\hmk perto non é posible. -% Este é un comportamento correcto.} -% \end{quote} -% -% Adem'ais hai abreviacións que evitan divisións: |~-|, que resulta -% 'util para expresar unha serie de n'umeros sen que o gui'on os -% divida (12~-14, |12~-14|), e |~---|, que é a forma que debe usarse -% para abrir incisos con raias, xa que do contrario pode haber unha -% divisi'on entre a raia de abrir e a palabra que lle sigue: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |Os concertos ~---ou academias--- que organiz'ou...| -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% Mentras que este gui'on evita toda posible divisi'on nos elementos -% que une, a raia (---) e a semirraia (--) permítenas nas palabras -% que a precedan ou sigan. -% -% A abreviaci'on |"~| úsase cando se quere que o gui'on tam'en apareza -% ó comienzo da seguinte liña. Por exemplo: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |infra"~vermello| \quad \= in\hmk fra-ver\hmk mello, pero infra-\hmk-vermello. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% Outra abreviaci'on é |"rr| que sirve para o 'unico cambio de escritura do -% castelán en caso de haber divisi'on.\footnote{En galego non atopei un -% pronunciamento ó respecto. A \msc{RAE} indica que ó a'nadir un prefixo -% que reamta en vocal a unha palabra que comenza con \emph{r}, esta 'ultima debe -% dobrarse a menos que se unan por un gui'on. Por exemplo: -% |extra"{}rradio| divídese en ex\hmk trarra\hmk dio, mais extra-\hmk radio.} -% -% \subsection{Ordinais} -% -% As abreviaturas sempre levan punto, salvo algunhas nas que se -% substitúe por unha barra (e salvo as siglas e s'imbolos, naturalmente), -% que precede ás letras voladitas.\footnote{\DTL{196}. V'exase tam'en \DOT{222 e 227}.} -% Por ello, \textsf{galician} proporciona a orde |\sptext| que facilita a -% creaci'on destas abreviaturas. Por exemplo: |adm\sptext{'on}|, que dá -% adm\sptext{'on}. Hai catro abreviacións asociadas a ordinais: -% |"a|, |"A|, |"o| e |"O| que equivalen a |\sptext{a}|, etc.\footnote{Moitos -% tipos engaden un pequeno subliñado que debe evitarse, e polo tanto non se debe -% escribi-los ordinais con \textsf{inputenc}.} -% -% Para axustar o tamano o mellor posible, úsase o de 'indices en curso. -% Esto funciona ben salvo para tama'nos moi grandes ou moi pequenos, onde -% os resultados son meramente aceptables. -% -% En Plain \TeX{} execútase a orde |\sptextfont| para a letra voladita, -% de xeito que |{\bf\let\sptextfont\bf 1"o}| dá o resultado correcto -% (|\mit| se é para cursiva). Para usar un tipo novo con |\sptext| hai -% que definir tam'en as variantes matem'aticas con |\newfam|. -% -% \subsection{Funcións matem'aticas} -% -% En castelán, tradicionalmente formáronse as abreviacións -% do que en \TeX\ coñecense coma operadores a partir do nome castelán, -% o que implica a presencia do acento en l'im, m'ax, m'in, 'inf e m'od. -% Parece que isto e tamén o máis adecuado para o galego. -% -% Con |galician| pódense seguir varios criterios por medio das seguintes -% ordes: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[$\diamond$] |\accentedoperators| |\unaccentedoperators|\\[1ex] -% Activa ou desactiva os acentos. -% Por omisi'on acent'uanse, coma por exemplo: $\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$ -% (|$\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$|). -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\spacedoperators| |\unspacedoperators|\\[1ex] -% Activa ou desactiva o espacio entre "<arc"> e la funci'on. Por omisi'on -% non se espacia. -% \end{itemize} -% -% O i sen punto tam'en é accesible directamente en modo matem'atico -% coa orde |\dotlessi|, de forma que se pode escribir |\acute{\dotlessi}|. -% Por exemplo, -% |$V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$| dá $V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$. -% -% Tam'en engádense |\sen|, |\cosec|, |\arcsen|, |\tx|, |\arctx|, e |senh|, -% que dan as funcións respectivas. Ademáis |\sin|,\New{galician~4.3} -% |sinh| e |arcsin| producen os mesmos resultados que |\sen|, |\senh| -% e |\arcsen| respectivamente. Outras funcións trigonom'etricas -% atópanse almacenadas no par'ametro |\galicianoperators|, -% que inicialmente inclúe cotx e txh. Deste xeito pódense cambiar por -% outras e engadir máis, coma por exemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewcommand{\galicianoperators}{cotan arc\,ctx tanh} -%\end{verbatim} -% (separadas con espacio). Cando se selecciona |galician| créanse -% ordes con eses nomes e que dan esas funcións (sempre con |\nolimits|). -% Adem'ais das letras sen acentuar acéptanse as ordes |\,| e |\acute|, que -% se pasan por alto para forma-lo nome. Por exemplo, |arc\,ctg| escribirase -% no documento coma |\arcctg|, |M\acute{a}x| coma |\Max| e |cr\acute{i}t| -% coma |\crit| (hai que usar |i| e non |\dotlessi|). A orde |\,| responde -% a |\|(|un|)|spacedoperators|, e |\acute| a |\|(|un|)|accentedoperators|. -% -% |\renewcommand{\galicianoperators}| haberá de estar no pre'ambulo do documento, -% despois de |\sepackage[galician]{babel}| e antes de |\selectgalician| ou de -% |\begin{document}|. -% -% \subsection{Entrecomiñados} -% -% O entorno |quoting| entrecomiña un texto, engadindo comiñas de seguir ó -% comienzo de cada parágrafo ou no seu interior.\footnote{Pódese atopar unha -% detallada exposici'on das comiñas en \DTL{44 ss.} De alí tomouse alg'un exemplo.} -% Tam'en pódense empregrar as abreviacións |"<| e |">| que se limitan a chamar -% a |quoting|, que por ser entorno considera os seus cambios internos coma locais. -% (É dicir, |"< ... ">| implica |{"< ... ">}|.) As abreviacións |<<| e |>>| -% contin'uan dando sen m'ais os caracteres de comiñas de abrir e pechar. -% -% Por exemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% "<Chámanse "<comiñas de seguir"> as que son de peche, pero colócanse -% ó comenzo de cada parágrafo cando se transcribe un texto -% entrecomiñado con m'ais dun par'agrafo. -% -% No seu interior, coma de costume, úsanse as inglesas."> -%\end{verbatim} -% que ten por resultad: -% \begin{quotation}\small -% "<Chámanse "<comillas de seguir"> as que son de peche, pero colócanse -% ó comenzo de cada par'agrafo cando se transcribe un texto -% entrecomiñado con m'ais dun par'agrafo. -% -% No seu interior, coma de costume, úsanse as inglesas."> -% \end{quotation} -% -% Este entorno pódese redefinir. Por exemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewenvironment{quoting}{\itshape}{} -%\end{verbatim} -% pero non implica un novo par'agrafo, xa que est'a pensado -% para ser usado tam'en no texto. -% -% En caso de incluír uns entornos |quoting| dentro doutros, modifícanse -% as comiñas dos niveis interiores, que tam'en engadense ás de seguir: -%\begin{verbatim} -% "<O di'alogo desenvolveuse desta forma: -% -% "<---Eu no fun ---grit'ou Antonio. -% -% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">. -% -% Mais al'i ningúen se aclarou."> -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{quotation}\small -% "<O di'alogo desenvolveuse desta forma: -% -% "<---Eu no fun ---grit'ou Antonio. -% -% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">. -% -% Mais al'i ningúen se aclarou."> -% \end{quotation} -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[$\diamond$] -% |\lquoti| |\rquoti| |\lquotii| |\rquotii| |\lquotiii| -% |\rquotiii|\\[1ex] -% -% Controlan as comiñas en |quoting|, segundo o nivel no que nos -% atopemos. |\lquoti| son as comiñas de abrir m'ais exteriores, -% |\lquotii| as de segundo nivel, etc., e o mesmo para as de pechar -% con |\rquoti|... Para as de seguir sempre se usan as de pechar. -% Os valores predefinidos est'an no cadro 3. -% \begin{table} -% \center\small -% \caption{Entrecomiñados} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l} -% \toprule -% |\lquoti| &|<<|\\ -% |\rquoti| &|>>|\\ -% |\lquotii| &|``|\\ -% |\rquotii| &|''|\\ -% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\ -% |\rquotiii| &|'| -% \botrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% \newenvironment{dialog} -% {\def\lquoti{}\begin{quoting}---\ignorespaces} -% {\def\rquoti{}\end{quoting}} -% -% As comiñas de seguir tam'en empréganse en di'alogos, incluso -% se non as hai de abrir e pechar. Coa axuda do seguinte entorno, -%\begin{verbatim} -% \newenvironment{dialog} -% {\def\lquoti{}\begin{quoting}---\ignorespaces} -% {\def\rquoti{}\end{quoting}} -%\end{verbatim} -% podemos obter -% \begin{quotation}\small -% \begin{dialog}% -% O di'alogo desenvolveuse deste xeito: -% -% "<---Eu non fun ---grit'ou Antonio. -% -% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">. -% -% Mais al'i ninguén se aclarou. -% \end{dialog} -% \end{quotation} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] -% |\activatequoting \deactivatequoting|\\[1ex] -% -% As incompatibilidades potenciais destas abreviacións son enormes. -% Por exemplo, en \textsf{ifthen} cancélanse as comparacións entre -% n'umeros;\,\footnote{E en |\string\ifnum|, etc. usado polos -% desenroladores nos paquetes.} tam'en resultan inoperantes |@>>>| -% e |@<<<| de \textsf{amstex}.\footnote{Aínda que neste caso cabe -% empregar os sin'onimos |@)))| e |@(((|.} Por iso, dase a posibilidade -% de cancelalas e reactivalas con estas ordes, aínda que se se -% est'a a usar con \textsf{xmltex} xa se desactivan por completo de -% modo autom'atico. O entorno |quoting| sempre permanece disponible. -% \footnote{Algúns tipos posúen as ligaduras |<{}<| e |>{}>| de -% forma interna para xenerar os caracteres de comiñas, polo que -% neles tamb'en podemos usalos siempre.} -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \subsection{Espaciado} -% -% O espaciado en galego afástase relativamente pouco do ingl'es; -% Non obstante, o espacio tra-los signos de puntuaci'on debe -% de ser o mesmo que o que hai entre palabras. Ou dito en -% t'erminos de \TeX, |\frenchspacing| est'a activo. -% -% Tam'en noutros dous sitios hai diferencias. O primero son os -% puntos suspensivos, para os que se redefine |\dots| e |\cdots|,\New{galician 4.3} -% que os dan menos espaciados, e para |\dots| no texto engádese a -% continuación un espacio igual que o que seguiría a un punto. -% Por exemplo: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |\dots non sei se canta\dots ou chora.|\quad \dots non sei se canta\dots ou chora.\\ -% |$f(x_1,\dots,x_n,y_1,\ldots,y_m)$|\quad $f(x_1,\dots,x_n,y_1,\ldots,y_m)$\\ -% |$1+2+\cdots+n$|\quad $1+2+\cdots+n$ -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% Tam'en poder'ianse escribir os tres puntos sen m'ais... , e na -% pr'actica non hai diferencia. |galician| realiza as modificacións -% a moi baixo nivel, para que sexan compatibles cos cambios que tamén -% introduce |amsmath| nestes comandos. -% -% O segundo sitio é un espacio fino antes do signo |\%| (que m'ais -% exactamente é |\,|, logo pódese <<recuperar>> co seu oposto |\!|, -% se |\%| no segue a unha cifra). -% -% \subsection{Pequenas e medianas versais} -% -% |\lsc| pódese empregar para letras en versalitas. Tamén existe -% |\msc|,\New{galician 4.3} que selecciona un tipo lixeiramente maior. -% Por exemplo: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |\lsc{DOG}, \lsc{RenFe}| \quad \= No \lsc{DOG} publicouse que \lsc{ReNFe} deber'a...\\ -% |\msc{DOG}, \msc{ReNFe}| \quad \= No \msc{DOG} publicouse que \msc{ReNFe} deber'a... -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% Tam'en pode ser 'util para alguns usos dos n'umeros romanos: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |s'eculo \msc{XVII}| \quad \= s'eculo \msc{XVII}\\ -% |cap'itulo \msc{II}| \quad \= cap'itulo \msc{II}. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% Para evitar que con un tipo que carece de versalitas acabe -% aparecendo (por substituci'on) un texto de min'usculas inténtase -% usar nestes casos as versais \emph{reais} dun tama'no menor. -% Queda simplemente aceptable, pero é mellor que nada. (\LaTeX{} -% tende a substituír versalitas por versalitas, pero hai -% excepcións, como coas negritas.) -% -% \subsection{Miscel'anea} -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[$\bullet$] Pódese escribir |\'i| para |\'{\i}|. -% -% \item[$\bullet$] Hai unha abreviaci'on adicional como utilidade -% tipogr'afica m'ais que especificamente galega. En certos -% tipos, coma Times, o extremo inferior da barra est'a na liña -% de base e expresións coma <<am/pm>> resultan pouco est'eticas. -% |"/| produce unha barra que, de ser necesario, báixase lexeiramente. -% Computer Modern ten unha barra ben dese'nada e non é posible -% ilustrar aqu'i este punto, pero en todo caso escribir'iase |am"/pm|.^^A -% \footnote{En \MEA{141} recórrese a unha soluci'on que é a 'unica -% sinxela en programas de maquetaci'on: usar un corpo menor. Pero -% con \TeX{} é moito m'ais doado automatiza-las tareas.} -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Selecci'on da lingua} -% -% Por omisi'on, \babel{} deixa <<dormidas>> as linguas ata que se -% chega a |\begin{document}| co fin de evitar conflictos polas -% abreviacións; a cambio, prívase da posibilidade de usar as linguas -% no pre'ambulo en ordes coma |\savebox|, |\title|, |\newtheorem|, etc. -% -% A orde |\selectgalician| permite activar |galician| coas súas -% extensións e abreviacións antes de |\begin{document}|.\footnote{^^A -% Algúns detalles, que apenas afectan a \texttt{galician}, seguen sen -% activarse ata o comenzo do documento.} -% Deste xeito, poder'iamos dicir -%\begin{verbatim} -% \documentclass{book} -% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% \usepackage[galician]{babel} -% \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% \usepackage[centerlast]{caption2} -% ... % M'ais paquetes -% -% \selectgalician -% -% \title{T'itulo} -% \author{Autor} -% \newcommand{\pste}{para"-psicoloxicamente} -% \newsavebox{\mybox} -% \savebox{\mybox}{m'ais cosas} -% ... % M'ais definicións -% -% \begin{document} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \section{Adaptaci'on} -% \subsection{Configuraci'on} -% -% Nas súas 'ultimas versions, \babel{} proporciona a posibilidade -% de cargar autom'aticamente un arquivo co mesmo nome que o -% principal, pero con extensi'on |.cfg|. \textsf{Galician} -% proporciona unhas poucas ordes para seren usadas neste arquivo: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@activeacute|\\[1ex] -% Activa as abreviacións con ap'ostrofos, sen que sexa -% necesario incluír |activeacute| coma opci'on en |\usepackage|. -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@enumerate{<leveli>}|% -% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\\[1ex] -% Cambia os valores preestablecidos por |galician| para -% |enumerate|. \textit{leveln} consiste nunha letra, que -% indica qu'e formato ter'a o n'umero, seguida de cualquera -% texto. A letra ten que ser: |1| (ar'abigo), |a| -% (min'uscula \emph{cursiva}\,\footnote{A letra é cursiva -% mais non os signos que a poidan seguir. M'ais ben debera -% dicirse destacada, xa que se usa |\string\emph|. V'exase -% \DTL{11}.}), |A| (versal), |i| (romano \emph{versalita}, -% con |\msc|), |I| (romano versal) ou finalmente |o| (ordinal\, -% \footnote{O normal é non engadir ning'un signo tras ordinal.}). -% -% Esta orde non est'a pensada para facer cambios elaborados, se -% non solamente para meros reaxustes. Os valores preestablecidos -% equivalen a -%\begin{verbatim} -% \gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$)} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@itemize{<leveli>}|% -% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\\[1ex] -% O mesmo para |itemize|, s'olo que os argumentos úsanse -% de forma literal. Os valores orixinais de \LaTeX{} son -% similares a -%\begin{verbatim} -% \gl@itemize{\textbullet}{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash} -% {\textasteriskcentered}{\textperiodcentered} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@operators|\\[1ex] -% Todo o relativo a operadores cancélase con -%\begin{verbatim} -% \let\gl@operators\relax -%\end{verbatim} -% É boa idea incluílo se no se van usar, xa que aforra memoria. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% Outros axustes 'utiles neste contexto son |\galicianoperators|, -% |\selectgalician| e |\deactivatequoting|. -% -% -% Recordemos que tódo-los cambios operados dende este arquivo -% restan compatibilidade ó documento, polo que se se distribúe -% conven adxuntarlo co entorno |filecontents|. -% -% \subsection{Outros cambios} -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item A orde |\addto| permite -% cambiar algunha das convencións internas. Esto resulta -% interesante coas traduccións, xa que as formas proporcionadas -% poden non ser as desexadas. Para iso é necesario que -% |galician| non estea seleccionado. Por exemplo, para cambiar -% \emph{'Indice de figuras} por \emph{Lista de figuras}: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \addto\captionsgalician{% -% \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \item Para voltar elimina-la sangr'ia tra-la secci'on: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \def\@afterindentfalse{\let\if@afterindent\iffalse} -% \@afterindentfalse -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \item Para que |\roman| proporcione n'umeros romanos en -% min'uscula, segundo a forma inglesa: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \def\@roman#1{\romannumeral #1}; -%\end{verbatim} -% e para que emprege |\lsc| en troques de |\msc|: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@lsc{\romannumeral##1}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \item -% Os extras atópanse organizados en varios grupos: -% |\textgalician|, |\mathgalician|, |\shorthandsgalician| -% e |\layoutgalician|. Poden cancelarse con: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewcommand\textgalician{} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Formatos distintos a \LaTeXe} -% -% O estilo |galician| funciona con outros formatos, aínda que con un -% subconxunto das funcións disponibles en \LaTeXe{}. Con Plain hai -% que facer -%\begin{verbatim} -% \input galician.sty -%\end{verbatim} -% e con \LaTeX2.09, incluir |galician| entre as opcións de estilo. -% -% Inclúense: traduccións, case todas as abreviacións, coma decimal, -% utilidades para a divisi'on de palabras, ordinais nunha versi'on -% simplificada (e non moi elegante), funcións matem'aticas, -% entrecomiñados en \LaTeX2.09, espaciado e |\'i|. -% A selecci'on da lingua é inmediata ó cargar o arquivo. -% -% En cambio non est'an disponibles: entrecomiñados en Plain, -% |\lsc|, |\msc| nin as adaptacións proporcionadas por |\layoutgalician|. -% -% A partir desta versi'on, o arquivo de configuraci'on lese sempre, -% polo que aqueles que xa estean escritos espec'ificamante para \LaTeXe{} -% poden presentar problemas se se usan con outros formatos. Se as -% versións que se usan non son moi antigas, pódese comprobar o formato -% coa variable |\fmtname|, que vale |LaTeX2e| ou |plain|. Por exemplo, -%\begin{verbatim} -% \def\temp{LaTeX2e} -% \ifx\temp\fmtname -% ... -% \fi -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \section{Bibliograf'ias} -% -% O arquivo |glbst.tex| que se xenera con \textsf{galician} -% serve para que a utilidade \textsf{custom-bib} traballe en -% conxunci'on con \babel. Define unha serie de ordes, que poden -% consultarse no propio arquivo, que se utilizan para as -% traduccións se se selecciona |babel| coma lingua ó xenerar un -% estilo bibliogr'afico. -% -% \section{Incompatibilidades con versións anteriores} -% -% ^^A\begin{itemize} -% -% O t'ermino correspondente a |\tablename| estaba traducido -% incorrectamente coma <<Táboa>>. Coma queira que <<táboa>> é a -% palabra con que pode aparecer no propio texto, ou ben pode -% haber un artigo feminino ante |\tablename|, pode reponerse o -% valor antigo con: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \addto\captionsgalician{% -% \def\tablename{Táboa}% -% \def\listtablename{\'Indice de táboas}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% ^^A\end{itemize} -% -% \section*{Referencias} -% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Referencias} -% -% \begingroup -% \small -% \leftskip1.5cm \parindent-1.5cm -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DGII}}\textit{Diccionario de galego}, -% Ir Indo. Vigo, 2004. -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DOT}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de ortograf'ia t'ecnica}, -% Germ'an S'anchez Ruip'erez/Pir'amide. Madrid, 1987. -% (Biblioteca del libro.) -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DTL}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de tipograf'ia y del libro}, -% Paraninfo. Madrid, 3"a ed., 1992. -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{MEA}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa, -% \textit{Manual de edici'on y autoedici'on}, -% Pir'amide. Madrid 1994. -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{OELG}}Xos'e Feix'o Cid, -% \textit{Ortografía e estilo da lingua galega}, -% Pir'amide. Vigo, 2002. -% -% \leftskip0pt \parindent0pt \vspace{6pt} -% -% {\itshape -% Como normalmente o primeiro contacto con \TeX{} é por unha tesis, -% cito libros que est'an relacionados co tema ós que tiven acceso. -% Est'an por orde de preferencia; en particular, os dous 'ultimos -% parécenme pouco recomendables. (J. B.)} -% -% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt} -% -% Umberto Eco, -% \textit{C'omo se hace una tesis}, Gedisa. -% Barcelona 1982. -% -% Antonia Rigo Arnavat e Gabriel Genesc\`a Due'nas, -% \textit{C'omo presentar una tesis y trabajos de investigaci'on}, -% Eumo-Octaedro. Barcelona, 2002. -% -% Prudenci Comes, -% \textit{Gu'ia para la redacci'on y presentaci'on de trabajos -% cient'ificos, informes t'ecnicos y tesinas}, -% Oikos-Tau. Barcelona, 1971. -% -% Javier Lasso de la Vega, -% \textit{C'omo se hace una tesis doctoral}, -% Fundacion Universitaria Espa~nola. Madrid, 1977. -% -% Jos'e Romera Castillo e outros, -% \textit{Manual de estilo}, -% Universidad Nacional de Educaci'on a Distancia. Madrid, 1996. -% -% Restituto Sierra Bravo, -% \textit{Tesis doctorales y trabajos de investigaci'on cient'ifica}, -% Paraninfo. Madrid, 1986. -% -% \parindent0pc \leftskip0pc \vspace{6pt} -% -% {\itshape -% Para outras cuestións tipogr'aficas, as referencias -% usadas son, entre outras:} -% -% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt} -% -% Javier Bezos, -% \textit{Tipograf'ia espa'nola con \TeX}, documento electr'onico -% disponible en -% \textsf{http://perso.wanadoo.es/jbezos/tipografia.html}. -% -% Ra'ul Cabanes Mart'inez, -% <<El sistema internacional de unidades: ese desconocido>>, -% \textit{Mundo Electr'onico}, n"o 142, p'axs.~119~-125. 1984. -% -% \textit{The Chicago Manual of Style}, University of Chicago -% Press, 14"a~ed., esp.~p'axs.~333~-335. Chicago, 1993. -% -% Jos'e Fern'andez Castillo, -% \textit{Normas para correctores y compositores tip'ografos}, -% Espasa-Calpe. Madrid, 1959. -% -% IRANOR [AENOR], Normas \msc{UNE} n'umeros 5010 (<<Signos -% matem'aticos>>), 5028 (<<S'imbolos -% geom'etricos>>) e 5029 (<<Impresi'on de los -% s'imbolos de magnitudes y unidades y de los n'umeros>>). -% [Obsoletas.] -% -% Real Academia Espa'nola, -% \textit{Esbozo de una nueva gram'atica de la -% lengua espa'nola}, Espasa-Calpe. Madrid, 1973. -% -% V.\ Mart'inez Sicluna, -% \textit{Teor'ia y pr'actica de la tipograf'ia}, -% Gustavo Gili. Barcelona, 1945. -% -% Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de ortograf'ia de la lengua espa'nola}, -% Paraninfo. Madrid, 1996. -% -% Juan Mart'inez Val, \textit{Tipograf'ia pr'actica}, -% Laberinto. Madrid, 2002. -% -% Juan Jos'e Morato, \textit{Gu'ia pr'actica del compositor -% tipogr'afico}, Hernando, 2"a ed. Madrid, 1908 (1"a ed., 1900, -% 3"a ed., 1933). -% -% Marion Neubauer, -% <<Feinheiten bei wissenschaftlichen Publikationen>>, -% \textit{Die \TeX nisches Kom\"odie}, parte I, vol. 8, n"o 4, -% p'axs. 23-40. 1996; parte II, vol. 9, n"o 1, p'axs.~25~-44. 1997. -% -% Jos'e Polo, -% \textit{Ortograf'ia y ciencia del lenguaje}, Paraninfo. Madrid, 1974. -% -% Pedro Valle, -% \textit{C'omo corregir sin ofender}, Lumen. Buenos Aires, 1998. -% -% Hugh C. Wolfe, <<S'imbolos, unidades y nomenclatura>>, -% \textit{Enciclopedia de F'isica}, t.~2, p'axs.~1423~-1451. -% dir. Rita G. Lerner e George L. Trigg, Alianza. Madrid, 1987, -% -% \endgroup -% -% \end{userdtx} -% -% \begin{userdrv} -%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by user.drv ========= -% -% \GetFileInfo{galician.dtx} -% -% \section{This file} -% -% This file defines all the language-specific macros for the -% Galician language. The file galician.dtx was translated in -% January 2007 by Javier A. M\'ugica from spanish.dtx. It was -% given the version number 4.3, based on the version for spanish.dtx -% at those times, that was 4.2b. The original author from -% v4.0 to 4.2b was Javier Bezos. Previous versions were written -% by Julio S\'anchez. - -% I decided to make \emph{tabula rasa} of all |\changes| -% logs. Only changes from spanish 4.2b to galician 4.3 and thereafter -% are documented. The change history for the original spanish.dtx -% can be found in that file. -% -% \section{The Galcian language} -% -% Custumization is made following mainly the books on the subject -% by Jos\'e Mart\'\i nez de Sousa and Xos\'e Feix\'o Cid. -% By typesetting |galician.dtx| directly you will get the full -% documentation (regrettably is in Galician only, but it is -% pretty long). References in this part refers to that document. -% There are several aditional features documented in the Galician -% version only. -% -% This style provides: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Translations following the International \LaTeX{} -% conventions, as well as |\today|. -% -% \item Shorthands listed in Table~\ref{tab:galician-quote-def}. -% Examples in subsection~3.4 are illustrative. Note that -% |"~| has a special meaning in \textsf{galician} -% different to other languages, and is used mainly in linguistic -% contexts. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |'a| & acute accented a. Also for: e, i, o, u (both -% lowercase and uppercase).\\ -% |'n| & \~n (also uppercase).\\ -% |~n| & \~n (also uppercase). Deprecated.\\ -% |"u| & \"u (also uppercase).\\ -% |"i| & \"i (also uppercase).\\ -% |"a| & Ordinal numbers (also |"A|, |"o|, |"O|).\\ -% |"rr| & rr, but -r when hyphenated\\ -% |"-| & Like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest -% the word.\\ -% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest -% the word.\\ -% |"~| & The hyphen is repeated at the very beginning of -% the next line if the word is hyphenated at this -% point.\\ -% |""| & Like |"-| but producing no hyphen sign.\\ -% |~-| & Like |-| but with no break after the hyphen. Also for: -% en-dashes (|~--|) and em-dashes (|~---|). \\ -% |"/| & A slash slightly lowered, if necessary.\\ -% \verb+"|+ & disable ligatures at this point.\\ -% |<<| & Left guillemets.\\ -% |>>| & Right guillemets.\\ -% |"<| & |\begin{quoting}|. (See text.)\\ -% |">| & |\end{quoting}|. (See text.) -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{galician.ldf}} -% \label{tab:galician-quote-def} -% \end{table} -% -% \item |\deactivatetilden| deactivates the |~n| and |~N| shorthands. -% -% \item \emph{In math mode} a dot followed by a digit is replaced -% by a decimal comma. -% -% \item Galicians ordinals and abbeviations with |\sptext| -% as, for instance, |1\sptext{o}|. The -% preceptive dot is included. -% -% \item Accented functions: l\'\i m, m\'ax, m\'\i n, m\'od. You may -% globally omit the accents with |\unaccentedoperators|. Spaced -% functions: arc\,cos, etc. You may globally kill that space with -% |\unspacedoperators|. |\dotlessi| is provided for use in math mode. -% -% \item A |quoting| environment and a related pair of shorthands |<<| -% and |>>|. The command -% |\deactivatequoting| deactivates these shorthand in case -% you want to use |<| and |>| in some AMS commands and numerical -% comparisons. -% -% \item The command |\selectgalician| selects the |galician| language -% \emph{and} its shorthands. (Intended for the preamble.) -% -% \item |\frenchspacing| is used. -% -% \item |\dots| is redefined. It is now equal to typing tree points -% in a row (it preserves the space following). -% -% \item There is a small space before |\%|. -% -% \item |\msc| provides lowercase small caps. (See subsection~3.10.) -% \end{itemize} -% -% Just in case |galician| is the main language, the group -% |\layoutgalician| is activated, which modifies the standard -% classes through the whole document (it cannot be deactivated) -% in the following way: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Both |enumerate| and |itemize| are adapted to Galician rules. -% -% \item Both |\alph| and |\Alph| include \textit{\~n} after \textit{n}. -% -% \item Symbol footmarks are one, two, three, etc., asteriscs. -% -% \item |OT1| guillemets are generated with two |lasy| symbols instead -% of small |\ll| and |\gg|. -% -% \item |\roman| is redefined to write small caps roman numerals, since -% lowercase roman numerals are not allowed. However, \textit{MakeIndex} -% rejects entries containing pages in that format. The |.idx| file must -% be preprocessed if the document has this kind of entries with -% the provided |romanidx.tex| tool---just \TeX{} it and follow the -% instructions. -% -% \item There is a dot after section numbers in titles and toc. -% \end{itemize} -% This group is ignored if you write |\selectgalician*| in the -% preamble. -% -% Some additional commands are provided to be used in the -% |galician.cfg| file: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item With |\gl@activeacute| acute accents are always active, -% overriding the default \textsf{babel} behaviour. -% -% \item |\gl@enumerate| sets the labels to be used by |enumerate|. The -% same applies to |\gl@itemize| and |itemize|. -% -% \item |\gl@operators| stores the operator commands. -% All of them are canceled with -%\begin{verbatim} -% \let\gl@operators\relax -%\end{verbatim} -% \end{itemize} -% The commands |\deactivatequoting|, |\deactivatetilden| and -% |\selectgalician| may be used in this file, too. -% -% A subset of these commands is provided for -% use in Plain \TeX{} (with |\input galician.sty|). -% -% \end{userdrv} -% -%\StopEventually{} -% -%^^A ========== End of manual =============== -% -% \begin{userdtx} -% \section{The Code} -% \end{userdtx} -% -% \begin{userdrv} -% \subsection{The Code} -% \end{userdrv} -% -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Reversed "<, "> and <<, >>.} -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Removed the Spanish et sign.} -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/26}{Removed the shorthand for \c{c}. It -% existed in medieval galician-portuguese, but that does not seem a -% reason to be included here.} -% -% This file provides definition for both \LaTeXe{} and non -% \LaTeXe{} formats. -% -% Identify the |ldf| file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\ProvidesLanguage{galician.ldf} - [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{galician} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@galician| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\LdfInit{galician}\captionsgalician -\ifx\undefined\l@galician - \@nopatterns{Galician} - \adddialect\l@galician0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We define some tools which will be used in that style file: -% (1) we make sure that |~| is active, (2) |\gl@delayed| delays -% the expansion of the code in conditionals (in fact, quite similar -% to |\bbl@afterfi|). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\gl@savedcatcodes{% - \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~ - \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"} -\catcode`\~=\active -\catcode`\"=12 -\long\def\gl@delayed#1\then#2\else#3\fi{% - #1% - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi - {#2}{#3}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Two tests are introduced. The first one tells us if the format is -% \LaTeXe{}, and the second one if the format is Plain or any other. -% If both are false, the format is \LaTeX2.09{}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\gl@delayed -\expandafter\ifx\csname documentclass\endcsname\relax\then - \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iffalse -\else - \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iftrue -\fi -\gl@delayed -\expandafter\ifx\csname newenvironment\endcsname\relax\then - \let\ifes@plain\iftrue -\else - \let\ifes@plain\iffalse -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Translations for captions. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsgalician{% - \def\prefacename{Prefacio}% - \def\refname{Referencias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\'endice}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Indice de figuras}% - \def\listtablename{\'Indice de cadros}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice alfab\'etico}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Cadro}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Adxunto}% - \def\ccname{Copia a}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{P\'axina}% - \def\seename{v\'exase}% - \def\alsoname{v\'exase tam\'en}% - \def\proofname{Demostraci\'on}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosario}} - -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax - \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice}} -\else - \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice xeral}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And the date. -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{Set the default to \textit{do}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dategalician{% - \def\today{\the\day~de \ifcase\month\or xaneiro\or febreiro\or - marzo\or abril\or maio\or xu\~no\or xullo\or agosto\or - setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or decembro\fi - \ \ifnum\year>1999\gl@yearl\else de\fi~\the\year}} -\def\galiciandatedo{\def\gl@yearl{do}} -\def\galiciandatede{\def\gl@yearl{de}} -\galiciandatedo -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The basic macros to select the language, in the preamble or the -% config file. Use of |\selectlanguage| should be avoided at this -% early stage because the active chars are not yet -% active. |\selectgalician| makes them active. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\selectgalician{% - \def\selectgalician{% - \def\selectgalician{% - \PackageWarning{galician}{Extra \string\selectgalician ignored}}% - \gl@select}} - -\@onlypreamble\selectgalician - -\def\gl@select{% - \let\gl@select\@undefined - \selectlanguage{galician}% - \catcode`\"\active\catcode`\~=\active} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Instead of joining all the extras directly in |\extrasgalician|, -% we subdivide them in three further groups. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\extrasgalician{% - \textgalician - \mathgalician - \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty - \galiciandeactivate{."'~<>}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \else - \shorthandsgalician - \fi} -\def\noextrasgalician{% - \ifx\textgalician\@empty\else - \notextgalician - \fi - \ifx\mathgalician\@empty\else - \nomathgalician - \fi - \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty\else - \noshorthandsgalician - \fi - \gl@reviveshorthands} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And the first of these sub-groups is defined. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\sptext - \def\sptext{\protect\gl@sptext}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The definition of |\sptext| is more elaborated than that of -% |\textsuperscript|. With uppercase superscript text -% the scriptscriptsize is used. The mandatory dot is already -% included. There are two versions, depending on the -% format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{% - {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.15ex - \else - \fontsize\ssf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.5ex - \fi - \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}} -\else %<<<<<< - \let\sptextfont\rm - \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{% - {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \advance\dimen@-0.75ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \else - \advance\dimen@-0.8ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \fi}} -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, lowercase small caps. First, we test if there are actual -% small caps for the current font. If not, faked small caps are -% used. |\msc| tries a slightly larger font. -% Javier B. wrote: ``The \cs{selectfont} in \cs{gl@lsc} could -% seem redundant, but it's not''. I cannot see how it can't be -% redundant (it is the last thing executed by |\scshape|), but -% I keep it. -% -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/00/26}{Added \cs{msc}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\lsc - \def\lsc{\protect\gl@lsc} - \babel@save\msc - \def\msc{\protect\gl@msc}} - - \def\gl@@msc{\expandafter\@tempdima\f@size pt \divide\@tempdima by 200 \multiply\@tempdima by 219 - \edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdima}\selectfont} - \def\gl@msc{\let\gl@do@msc\gl@@msc\lsc} - \let\gl@do@msc\relax - - \def\gl@lsc#1{% - \leavevmode - \hbox{\gl@do@msc\scshape\selectfont - \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series - /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont - \PackageInfo{galician}{Replacing undefined sc font\MessageBreak - shape by faked small caps}% - \MakeUppercase{#1}% - \else - \MakeLowercase{#1}% - \fi}\let\gl@do@msc\relax} -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |quoting| environment. This part is not available -% in Plain, hence the test. Overriding the default |\everypar| is -% a bit tricky. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifgl@listquot - -\ifes@plain\else %<<<<<< - \csname newtoks\endcsname\gl@quottoks - \csname newcount\endcsname\gl@quotdepth - - \ifx\quoting\c@undefined\def\next{\let\next\relax\newenvironment} - \else\def\next{\PackageInfo{galician}{Redefining quoting}\let\next\relax\renewenvironment} - \fi - \next{quoting} - {\leavevmode - \advance\gl@quotdepth1 - \csname lquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname% - \ifnum\gl@quotdepth=\@ne - \gl@listquotfalse - \let\gl@quotpar\everypar - \let\everypar\gl@quottoks - \everypar\expandafter{\the\gl@quotpar}% - \gl@quotpar{\the\everypar - \ifgl@listquot\global\gl@listquotfalse\else\gl@quotcont\fi}% - \fi - \toks@\expandafter{\gl@quotcont}% - \edef\gl@quotcont{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\noexpand - \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}} - {\csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname} - - \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}} - \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}} - \def\lquotii{``} - \def\rquotii{''} - \def\lquotiii{`} - \def\rquotiii{'} - - \let\gl@quotcont\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If there is a margin par inside quoting, we don't add the -% quotes. |\gl@listqout| stores the quotes to be used before -% item labels; otherwise they could appear after the labels. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \addto\@marginparreset{\let\gl@quotcont\@empty} - - \def\gl@listquot{% - \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname - \global\gl@listquottrue} -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, the |\frenchspacing|, followed by |\...dots| and |\%| -% Instead of redefining |\ldots| and |\cdots|, we redefine |\ldotp| -% and |\cdotp|, so that this is compatible with amsmath. -% In LaTeX we also redefine |\textellipsis|, and for plain or -% other we redefine |\dots|. -% -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/27}{\cs{...} is removed and instead -% \cs{dots} and \cs{dots} are changed, by redefining \cs{ldotc}, -% \cs{dotc} and \cs{textellipsis} or \cs{dots}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\textgalician{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\notextgalician{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} - -\mathchardef\gl@cdot="0201 -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\textellipsis - \babel@save\ldotp - \babel@save\cdotp% - \def\textellipsis{\hbox{...}\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} }% - \mathchardef\ldotp="013A% - \mathchardef\cdotp="0201% -} -\else %<<<<<< -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\dots - \babel@save\ldotp - \babel@save\cdotp - \mathchardef\ldotp="013A% - \mathchardef\cdotp="0201% - \def\dots{\ifmmode\ldots\else...\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} \fi}% -} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\textgalician{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \babel@save\%% - \def\%{\unskip\,\percentsign{}}} -\else - \addto\textgalician{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \babel@save\%% - \def\%{\unskip\ifmmode\,\else$\m@th\,$\fi\percentsign{}}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We follow with the math group. It's not easy to add an accent -% in an operator. The difficulty is that we must avoid using -% text (that is, |\mbox|) because we have no control on font -% and size, and at time we should access |\i|, which is a text -% command forbidden in math mode. |\dotlessi| must be -% converted to uppercase if necessary in \LaTeXe. There are -% two versions, depending on the format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\mathgalician{% - \babel@save\dotlessi - \def\dotlessi{\protect\gl@dotlessi}} - -\let\nomathgalician\relax %% Unused, but called - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@texti{\i} - \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\gl@texti} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne - \imath - \else - \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter - \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil - \escapechar=\count@ - \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}% - {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}% - \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname - \advance\count@"7000 - \mathchar\count@ - \fi}% - \else - \i - \fi} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\gl@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - \mathchar"7010 - \else - \i - \fi} -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The switches for accents and spaces in math. -% -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{Set the default to \cs{unspacedoperators}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\accentedoperators{% - \def\gl@op@ac##1{\acute{##1}}% - \def\gl@op@i{\acute{\dotlessi}}} -\def\unaccentedoperators{% - \def\gl@op@ac##1{##1}% - \def\gl@op@i{i}} -\accentedoperators - -\def\spacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\,} -\def\unspacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\@empty} -\unspacedoperators -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The operators are stored in |\gl@operators|, which in turn is -% included in the math group. Since |\operator@font| is -% defined in \LaTeXe{} only, we need to define them in the plain variant. -% -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{\cs{sin}, \cs{arcsin} and \cs{sinh} -% are set to produce the same as \cs{sen}, \cs{arcsen} and \cs{senh}} -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/27}{cosec and senh moved from -% \cs{galicianoperators} to the main group} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\mathgalician{% - \gl@operators} - -\ifes@LaTeXe\else %<<<<<< - \let\operator@font\rm - \def\@empty{} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\def\gl@operators{% - \babel@save\lim \def\lim{\mathop{\operator@font l\protect\gl@op@i m}}% - \babel@save\limsup \def\limsup{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,sup}}% - \babel@save\liminf \def\liminf{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,inf}}% - \babel@save\max \def\max{\mathop{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac ax}}% - \babel@save\inf \def\inf{\mathop{\operator@font \protect\gl@op@i nf}}% - \babel@save\min \def\min{\mathop{\operator@font m\protect\gl@op@i n}}% - \babel@save\bmod - \def\bmod{% - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu% - \mathbin{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu% - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}% - \babel@save\pmod - \def\pmod##1{% - \allowbreak\mkern18mu({\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\,\,##1)}% - \def\gl@a##1 {% - \gl@delayed - \if^##1^\then % is it empty? do nothing and continue - \gl@a - \else - \gl@delayed - \if&##1\then % is it &? do nothing and finish - \else - \begingroup - \let\,\@empty % \, is ignored when def'ing the macro name - \let\acute\@firstofone % same - \edef\gl@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}% - \def\,{\noexpand\gl@op@sp}% - \def\acute####1{% - \if i####1% - \noexpand\gl@op@i - \else - \noexpand\gl@op@ac####1% - \fi}% - \edef\gl@a{\endgroup - \noexpand\babel@save\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b - \def\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b{% - \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\nolimits}}% - \gl@a % It restores itself - \gl@a - \fi - \fi}% - \let\gl@b\galicianoperators - \addto\gl@b{ }% - \expandafter\gl@a\gl@b sen tx cosec arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tx senh & %\, will be set to \gl@op@sp - % - \babel@save\sin \let\sin\sen - \babel@save\arcsin \let\arcsin\arcsen - \babel@save\sinh \let\sinh\senh -} - -\def\galicianoperators{cotx txh} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now comes the text shorthands. They are grouped in -% |\shorthandsgalician| and this style performs some -% operations before the babel shortands are called. -% The goals are to allow espression like |$a^{x'}$| -% and to deactivate the shorthands making them of -% category `other'. After providing a |\'i| shorthand, -% the new macros are defined. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}} - -\def\gl@set@shorthand#1{% - \expandafter\edef\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname - {\the\catcode`#1}% - \initiate@active@char{#1}% - \catcode`#1=\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname gl@math\string#1\expandafter\endcsname - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname} - -\def\gl@use@shorthand{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx\thepage\relax\then - \string - \else{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect\then - \noexpand - \else - \gl@use@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\def\gl@text@sh#1{\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname} -\def\gl@math@sh#1{\csname gl@math\string#1\endcsname} - -\def\gl@use@sh{% - \gl@delayed - \if@safe@actives\then - \string - \else{% - \gl@delayed - \ifmmode\then - \gl@math@sh - \else - \gl@text@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\gdef\gl@activate#1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \def~{\gl@use@shorthand~}}} - -\def\galiciandeactivate#1{% - \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\gl@spdeactivate\@tempa}} - -\def\gl@spdeactivate#1{% - \if.#1% - \mathcode`\.=\gl@period@code - \else - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \expandafter\let\expandafter~% - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \catcode`#1\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \fi} - -\def\gl@reviveshorthands{% - \gl@restore{"}\gl@restore{~}% - \gl@restore{<}\gl@restore{>}% - \gl@quoting} - -\def\gl@restore#1{% - \catcode`#1=\active - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \bbl@deactivate{~}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% But \textsf{galician} allows two category codes for |'|, -% so both should be taken into account in \cs{bbl@pr@m@s}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\'=12 -\lccode`~=`' \lccode`'=`' -\lowercase{% -\gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx~\@let@token\then - \pr@@@s - \else - {\gl@delayed - \ifx'\@let@token\then - \pr@@@s - \else - {\gl@delayed - \ifx^\@let@token\then - \pr@@@t - \else - \egroup - \fi}% - \fi}% - \fi}} -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname @tabacckludge\endcsname\relax - \let\gl@tak\a -\else - \let\gl@tak\@tabacckludge -\fi - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\expandafter\gl@tak\string#1} - \let\a\@tabacckludge -\else\ifes@plain %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname a\string#1\endcsname} -\fi\fi %<<<<<< - -\expandafter\ifx\csname add@accent\endcsname\relax - \def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Instead of redefining |\'|, we redefine the internal macro for the OT1 encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\@text@composite - \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite - {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3% - \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}% - \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 } -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The shorthands are activated in the aux file. Now, we begin -% the shorthands group. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\shorthandsgalician{\languageshorthands{galician}} -\let\noshorthandsgalician\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% First, decimal comma. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\galiciandecimal#1{\def\gl@decimal{{#1}}} -\def\decimalcomma{\galiciandecimal{,}} -\def\decimalpoint{\galiciandecimal{.}} -\decimalcomma - -\gl@set@shorthand{.} - -\@namedef{gl@math\string.}{% - \@ifnextchar\egroup - {\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}% - {\gl@text@sh.}} - -\declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \mathchardef\gl@period@code\the\mathcode`\.% - \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}% - \mathcode`\.="8000 % - \gl@activate{.}} - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \catcode`\.=12 - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{% - \string\catcode`\string\.=12}% - \fi} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.1}{\gl@decimal1} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.2}{\gl@decimal2} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.3}{\gl@decimal3} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.4}{\gl@decimal4} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.5}{\gl@decimal5} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.6}{\gl@decimal6} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.7}{\gl@decimal7} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.8}{\gl@decimal8} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.9}{\gl@decimal9} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.0}{\gl@decimal0} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now accents and tools -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\gl@set@shorthand{"} -\def\gl@umlaut#1{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We override the default |"| of babel, intended for german. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{"}% - \gl@activate{~}% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut - \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname - \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\gl@accent\~{126}}% - \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname - \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\gl@accent\'{19}}} -\else %<<<<<< - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{"}% - \gl@activate{~}% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut - \babel@save\~% - \def\~{\gl@accent\~{126}}% - \babel@save\'% - \def\'#1{\if#1i\gl@accent\'{19}\i\else\gl@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}} -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Removed the shorthands "er and "ER, -% they don't exist in galician.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"a}{\protect\gl@sptext{a}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"A}{\protect\gl@sptext{A}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"o}{\protect\gl@sptext{o}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"O}{\protect\gl@sptext{O}} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"u}{\"u} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"U}{\"U} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"i}{\"i} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"I}{\"I} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"<}{\begin{quoting}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{">}{\end{quoting}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"=}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\char\hyphenchar\font\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"~} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {\char\hyphenchar\font}{\char\hyphenchar\font}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"r} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {}{r}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"R} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {}{R}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"/} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}% - \dimen@\ht\z@ - \advance\dimen@-1ex - \advance\dimen@\dp\z@ - \dimen@.31\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@ - \ifdim\dimen@>0pt - \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em - \else - \box\z@ - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"?} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"!} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} - -\gl@set@shorthand{~} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~n}{\~n} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~N}{\~N} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~-}{% - \leavevmode - \bgroup - \let\@sptoken\gl@dashes % This assignation changes the - \@ifnextchar-% \@ifnextchar behaviour - {\gl@dashes}% - {\hbox{\char\hyphenchar\font}\egroup}} -\def\gl@dashes-{% - \@ifnextchar-% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}} - -\def\deactivatetilden{% - \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The shorthands for |quoting|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname XML@catcodes\endcsname\relax - \addto\gl@select{% - \catcode`\<\active\catcode`\>=\active - \gl@quoting} - - \gl@set@shorthand{<} - \gl@set@shorthand{>} - - \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname} - \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname} - - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{<}% - \gl@activate{>}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \AtBeginDocument{% - \gl@quoting - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\gl@quoting}% - \fi}% - \fi %<<<<<< - - \def\activatequoting{% - \catcode`>=\active \catcode`<=\active - \let\gl@quoting\activatequoting} - \def\deactivatequoting{% - \catcode`>=12 \catcode`<=12 - \let\gl@quoting\deactivatequoting} - - \declare@shorthand{galician}{<<}{\guillemotleft{}} - \declare@shorthand{galician}{>>}{\guillemotright{}} -\fi - -\let\gl@quoting\relax -\let\deactivatequoting\relax -\let\activatequoting\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The acute accents are stored in a macro. If |activeacute| was set -% as an option it's executed. If not is not deleted for a possible -% later use in the |cfg| file. In non \LaTeXe{} formats is always -% executed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gl@activeacute{% - \gl@set@shorthand{'}% - \addto\shorthandsgalician{\gl@activate{'}}% - \addto\gl@reviveshorthands{\gl@restore{'}}% - \addto\gl@select{\catcode`'=\active}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'a}{\@tabacckludge'a}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'A}{\@tabacckludge'A}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'e}{\@tabacckludge'e}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'E}{\@tabacckludge'E}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'i}{\@tabacckludge'i}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'I}{\@tabacckludge'I}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'o}{\@tabacckludge'o}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'O}{\@tabacckludge'O}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'u}{\@tabacckludge'u}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'U}{\@tabacckludge'U}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'n}{\~n}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'N}{\~N}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{''}{\textquotedblright}% - \let\gl@activeacute\relax} - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\gl@activeacute}{} -\else %<<<<<< - \gl@activeacute -\fi %<<<<<<% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And the customization. By default these macros only -% store the values and do nothing. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gl@enumerate#1#2#3#4{% - \def\gl@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} - -\def\gl@itemize#1#2#3#4{% - \def\gl@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The part formerly in the |.lld| file comes here. It performs -% layout adaptation of \LaTeX{} to ``orthodox'' Galician rules. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - -\gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$} -\def\galiciandashitems{\gl@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}} -\def\galiciansymbitems{% - \gl@itemize - {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex - {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}% - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}} -\def\galiciansignitems{% - \gl@itemize - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}% - {$\m@th\triangleright$}} -\galiciansymbitems - -\def\gl@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{% - \if#21% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2a% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}% - \else\if#2A% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2i% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2I% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2o% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\protect\gl@sptext{o}}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname} - \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname - {\noexpand\gl@listquot\the\toks@#3}} - -\addto\layoutgalician{% - \def\gl@enumerate##1##2##3##4{% - \gl@enumdef{i}##1\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{ii}##2\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{iii}##3\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{iv}##4\@empty\@empty\@@}% - \def\gl@itemize##1##2##3##4{% - \def\labelitemi{\gl@listquot##1}% - \def\labelitemii{\gl@listquot##2}% - \def\labelitemiii{\gl@listquot##3}% - \def\labelitemiv{\gl@listquot##4}}% - \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}% - \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi\theenumii}% - \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}% - \expandafter\gl@enumerate\gl@enum - \expandafter\gl@itemize\gl@item - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode\ll - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char40 \kern-0.19em\char40 }}% - \fi}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode\gg - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char41 \kern-0.19em\char41 }}% - \fi}% - \def\@fnsymbol##1% - {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or - *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or - l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or - x\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@Alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or - L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or - X\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue - \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname.\quad}% - \def\numberline##1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1\if&##1&\else.\fi\hfil}}% - \def\@roman##1{\protect\gl@roman{\number##1}}% - \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@msc{\romannumeral##1}}% - \def\glromanindex##1##2{##1{\protect\gl@msc{##2}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need to execute the following code when babel has been -% run, in order to see if |galician| is the main language. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \let\gl@activeacute\@undefined - \def\bbl@tempa{galician}% - \ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa - \AtBeginDocument{\layoutgalician}% - \addto\gl@select{% - \@ifstar{\let\layoutgalician\relax}% - {\layoutgalician\let\layoutgalician\relax}}% - \fi - \selectgalician} - -\fi %<<<<<< -% \end{macrocode} -% -% After restoring the catcode of |~| and setting the minimal -% values for hyphenation, the |.ldf| is finished. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\gl@savedcatcodes - -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \ldf@finish{galician} -\else %<<<<<< - \gl@select - \ldf@finish{galician} - \csname activatequoting\endcsname -\fi %<<<<<< - -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% That's all in the main file. Now the file with -% \textsf{custom-bib} macros. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bblbst> -\def\bbland{e} -\def\bbleditors{directores} \def\bbleds{dirs.\@} -\def\bbleditor{director} \def\bbled{dir.\@} -\def\bbledby{dirixido por} -\def\bbledition{edici\'on} \def\bbledn{ed.\@} -\def\bbletal{e outros} -\def\bblvolume{volumen} \def\bblvol{vol.\@} -\def\bblof{de} -\def\bblnumber{n\'umero} \def\bblno{n\sptext{o}} -\def\bblin{en} -\def\bblpages{p\'axinas} \def\bblpp{p\'axs.\@} -\def\bblpage{p\'axina} \def\bblp{p\'ax.\@} -\def\bblchapter{cap\'itulo} \def\bblchap{cap.\@} -\def\bbltechreport{informe t\'ecnico} -\def\bbltechrep{inf.\@ t\'ec.\@} -\def\bblmthesis{proxecto de fin de carreira} -\def\bblphdthesis{tesis doutoral} -\def\bblfirst {primeira} \def\bblfirsto {1\sptext{a}} -\def\bblsecond{segunda} \def\bblsecondo{2\sptext{a}} -\def\bblthird {terceira} \def\bblthirdo {3\sptext{a}} -\def\bblfourth{cuarta} \def\bblfourtho{4\sptext{a}} -\def\bblfifth {quinta} \def\bblfiftho {5\sptext{a}} -\def\bblth{\sptext{a}} -\let\bblst\bblth \let\bblnd\bblth \let\bblrd\bblth -\def\bbljan{xaneiro} \def\bblfeb{febreiro} \def\bblmar{marzo} -\def\bblapr{abril} \def\bblmay{maio} \def\bbljun{xu\~no} -\def\bbljul{xullo} \def\bblaug{agosto} \def\bblsep{setembro} -\def\bbloct{outubro}\def\bblnov{novembro}\def\bbldec{decembro} -%</bblbst> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |galician| option writes a macro in the page field of -% \textit{MakeIndex} in entries with medium caps number, and they -% are rejected. This program is a preprocessor which moves this -% macro to the entry field. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*indexgl> -\makeatletter - -\newcount\gl@converted -\newcount\gl@processed - -\def\gl@encap{`\|} -\def\gl@openrange{`\(} -\def\gl@closerange{`\)} - -\def\gl@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1} -\def\gl@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2} - -\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J% - (extension por omision .idx):} - -\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} -\ifin@ - \edef\gl@input@file{\expandafter\gl@split@file\answer\@@} - \edef\gl@input@ext{\expandafter\gl@split@ext\answer\@@} -\else - \edef\gl@input@file{\answer} - \def\gl@input@ext{idx} -\fi - -\typein[\answer]{^^JArquivo de destino^^J% - (arquivo por omision: \gl@input@file.eix,^^J% - extension por omision .eix):} -\ifx\answer\@empty - \edef\gl@output{\gl@input@file.eix} -\else - \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} - \ifin@ - \edef\gl@output{\answer} - \else - \edef\gl@output{\answer.eix} - \fi -\fi - -\typein[\answer]{% - ^^J?Usouse algun esquema especial de controles^^J% - de MakeIndex para encap, open_range ou close_range?^^J% - [s/n] (n por omision)} - -\if s\answer - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J% - (\string| por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@encap{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J% - (\string( por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@openrange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J% - (\string) por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@closerange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi -\fi - -\newwrite\gl@indexfile -\immediate\openout\gl@indexfile=\gl@output - -\newif\ifgl@encapsulated - -\def\gl@roman#1{\romannumeral#1 } -\edef\gl@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\} - -\def\indexentry{% - \begingroup - \@sanitize - \gl@indexentry} - -\begingroup - -\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\gl@encap\relax -\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\gl@openrange\relax -\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\gl@closerange\relax - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@indexentry#1{% - \endgroup - \advance\gl@processed\@ne - \gl@encapsulatedfalse - \gl@bar@idx#1|\@@ - \gl@idxentry}% -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@idxentry#1{% - \in@{\gl@roman}{#1}% - \ifin@ - \advance\gl@converted\@ne - \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\gl@b|\ifgl@encapsulated\gl@p\fi glromanindex% - {\ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@slash\gl@a\fi}}{#1}}% - \else - \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\gl@b\ifgl@encapsulated|\gl@p\gl@a\fi}{#1}}% - \fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{% - \def\gl@b{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}% - \ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@encapsulatedtrue\gl@bar@eat#2\fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\gl@p{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}% - \edef\gl@t{(}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p - \else\edef\gl@t{)}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p - \else - \edef\gl@a{\gl@p\gl@a}\let\gl@p\@empty% - \fi\fi} -} - -\endgroup - -\input \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext - -\immediate\closeout\gl@indexfile - -\typeout{*****************} -\typeout{procesouse: \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext } -\typeout{Li'nas lidas: \the\gl@processed} -\typeout{Li'nas convertidas: \the\gl@converted} -\typeout{Resultado en: \gl@output} -\ifnum\gl@converted>\z@ - \typeout{Xenere o 'indice a partir deste arquivo} -\else - \typeout{Non se realizou ning'un tipo de conversi'on} - \typeout{P'odese xenerar o arquivo directamente^^J% - de \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext} -\fi -\typeout{*****************} -\@@end -%</indexgl> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -% -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 215b447ea06..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\batchfile{galician.ins} -\def\filedate{2007/01/29} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined - \Msg{**********************************************} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} - \Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{**********************************************} - \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} - \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} - \batchmode - \csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\keepsilent - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{galician.ldf}{\from{galician.dtx}{code}}% - \file{glbst.tex}{\from{galician.dtx}{bblbst}}% - \file{glromidx.tex}{\from{galician.dtx}{indexgl}}} -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins deleted file mode 100644 index b7b7db1c49e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{german.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{germanb.ldf}{\from{germanb.dtx}{code}} - \file{ngermanb.ldf}{\from{ngermanb.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index ab3b7956fdd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,557 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{366} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{germanb.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{germanb} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{germanb.dtx} - [2008/06/01 v2.6m German support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `germanb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Germanb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% This file is based on german.tex version 2.5d, -% by Bernd Raichle, Hubert Partl et.al. -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{germanb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{germanb.dtx} -% -% \changes{germanb-1.0a}{1990/05/14}{Incorporated Nico's comments} -% \changes{germanb-1.0b}{1990/05/22}{fixed typo in definition for -% austrian language found by Werenfried Spit -% \texttt{nspit@fys.ruu.nl}} -% \changes{germanb-1.0c}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos} -% \changes{germanb-1.1}{1990/07/30}{When using PostScript fonts with -% the Adobe fontencoding, the dieresis-accent is located elsewhere, -% modified code} -% \changes{germanb-1.1a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation -% somewhat} -% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0} -% \changes{germanb-2.0a}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change -% log} -% \changes{germanb-2.1}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer} -% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Removed global assignments, -% brought uptodate with \file{german.tex} v2.3d} -% \changes{germanb-2.2a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{germanb-2.3}{1991/11/05}{Rewritten parts of the code to use -% the new features of babel version 3.1} -% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Brought up-to-date with -% \file{german.tex} v2.3e (plus some bug fixes) [br]} -% \changes{germanb-2.5}{1994/02/08}{Update or \LaTeXe} -% \changes{germanb-2.5c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved the identification after the loading of -% \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Moved the identification to the -% top of the file} -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Rewrote the code that handles the -% active double quote character} -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The German language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% German language as well as for the Austrian dialect of this -% language\footnote{This file is a re-implementation of Hubert -% Partl's \file{german.sty} version 2.5b, see~\cite{HP}.}. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:german-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the German -% language some character combinations change when a word is broken -% between the combination. Also the vertical placement of the -% umlaut can be controlled this way. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"a| & |\"a|, also implemented for the other -% lowercase and uppercase vowels. \\ -% |"s| & to produce the German \ss{} (like |\ss{}|). \\ -% |"z| & to produce the German \ss{} (like |\ss{}|). \\ -% |"ck|& for |ck| to be hyphenated as |k-k|. \\ -% |"ff|& for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|, -% this is also implemented for l, m, n, p, r and t\\ -% |"S| & for |SS| to be |\uppercase{"s}|. \\ -% |"Z| & for |SZ| to be |\uppercase{"z}|. \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{german.ldf}}\label{tab:german-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:german-quote} can also be typeset by -% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:more-quote}. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\ -% |\glq| & for German left single quotes (looks like ,). \\ -% |\grq| & for German right single quotes (looks like `). \\ -% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\flq| & for (French) left single quotes (similar to $<$). \\ -% |\frq| & for (French) right single quotes (similar to $>$). \\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined -% by \file{german.ldf}}\label{tab:more-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{germanb} we make -% it behave as if \Lopt{german} was specified. -% \changes{german-2.6l}{2008/03/17}{Making germanb behave like german -% needs some more work besides defining \cs{CurrentOption}} -% \changes{germanb-2.6m}{2008/06/01}{Correted a typo} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{germanb} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{german} - \ifx\l@german\@undefined - \@nopatterns{German} - \adddialect\l@german0 - \fi - \let\l@germanb\l@german - \AtBeginDocument{% - \let\captionsgermanb\captionsgerman - \let\dategermanb\dategerman - \let\extrasgermanb\extrasgerman - \let\noextrasgermanb\noextrasgerman - } -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{german} will be an `unknown' language, so we -% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@german| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if -% language undefined} -% \changes{germanb-2.2d}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added warning, if no german -% patterns loaded} -% \changes{germanb-2.5c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@german\@undefined - \@nopatterns{German} - \adddialect\l@german0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For the Austrian version of these definitions we just add another -% language. -% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} for -% austrian} -% \begin{macrocode} -\adddialect\l@austrian\l@german -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the German language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsgerman} -% \begin{macro}{\captionsaustrian} -% Either the macro |\captionsgerman| or the macro -% |\captionsaustrian| will define all strings used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% -% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be -% \cs{headpagename}} -% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{prefacename}, -% \cs{seename} and \cs{alsoname}} -% \changes{germanb-2.4}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{germanb-2.6b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the -% fly} -% \changes{germanb-2.6j}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Vorwort}% - \def\refname{Literatur}% - \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}% - \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Anhang}% - \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt - \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% - \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Abbildung}% - \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel - \def\partname{Teil}% - \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n) - \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an - \def\headtoname{An}% - \def\pagename{Seite}% - \def\seename{siehe}% - \def\alsoname{siehe auch}% - \def\proofname{Beweis}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossar}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dategerman} -% The macro |\dategerman| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce German dates. -% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{month@german}} -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\month@german{\ifcase\month\or - Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or - Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi} -\def\dategerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@german - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateaustrian} -% The macro |\dateaustrian| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce Austrian version of the German dates. -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month - J\"anner\else \month@german\fi \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasgerman} -% \begin{macro}{\extrasaustrian} -% \changes{germanb-2.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to -% prevent white space} -% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Save all redefined macros} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasgerman} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasaustrian} -% \changes{germanb-1.1}{1990/07/30}{Added \cs{dieresis}} -% \changes{germanb-2.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to -% prevent white space} -% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Try to restore everything to its -% former state} -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence -% \cs{extrasgerman} or \cs{extrasaustrian} on the fly} -% -% Either the macro |\extrasgerman| or the macros |\extrasaustrian| -% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the German -% language. The macro |\noextrasgerman| is used to cancel the -% actions of |\extrasgerman|. -% -% For German (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"} character is -% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{german}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{germanb-2.6i}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% German} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasgerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{All the code to handle the active -% double quote has been moved to \file{babel.def}} -% -% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German words which -% contain `\ss' (in the \texttt{OT1} position |^^Y|) we have to -% give the character a nonzero |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX -% book). -% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/04/08}{Use decimal number instead of -% hat-notation as the hat may be activated} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}% - \lccode25=25} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Removeed \cs{3} as it is no -% longer in \file{german.ldf}} -% -% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots. -% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% The german hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{germanhyphenmins} to store -% the correct values} -% \changes{germanb-2.6j}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% For German texts we need to make sure that |\frenchspacing| is -% turned on. -% \changes{germanb-2.6k}{2001/01/26}{Turn frenchspacing on, as in -% \texttt{german.sty}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{\cs{umlautlow} and -% \cs{umlauthigh} moved to \file{glyphs.dtx}, as well as -% \cs{newumlaut} (now \cs{lower@umlaut}} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active -% character. This character is then used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:german-quote}. -% -% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{save@sf@q} macro and -% rewrote all quote macros to use it} -% \changes{germanb-2.3h}{1991/02/16}{moved definition of -% \cs{allowhyphens}, \cs{set@low@box} and \cs{save@sf@q} to -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Moved all quotation characters to -% \file{glyphs.dtx}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/01/24}{Moved \cs{german@dq@disc} to -% babel.def, calling it \cs{bbl@disc}} -% -% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of -% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts, -% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/05/30}{added the \cs{allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tremas, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}% - {\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -% \end{macrocode} -% german es-zet (sharp s), -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/05/08}{use \cs{SS} instead of -% \texttt{SS}, removed braces after \cs{ss}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"S}{\SS} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"Z}{SZ} -% \end{macrocode} -% german and french quotes, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{">}{\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% discretionary commands -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -% \end{macrocode} -% We need to treat |"f| a bit differently in order to preserve the -% ff-ligature. -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/06/15}{Copied the coding for \texttt{"f} -% from german.dtx version 2.5d} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}} -\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M - \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= } -\def\bbl@insertff{% - \if f\bbl@nextff - \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}} -\let\bbl@nextff=f -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% \begin{macro}{\ck} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}. -% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and -% \cs{shorthandoff}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 0e878bf22d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,864 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{636} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{greek.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{greek} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{greek.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v1.3l Greek support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `greek.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Greek language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997, 2005 -%% by Apostolos Syropoulos -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: Apostolos Syropoulos -%% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or -%% apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr -%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl) -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the greek language definition file. The original -% version of this file was written by Apostolos Syropoulos. -% It was then enhanced by adding code from kdgreek.sty from David -% Kastrup <dak@neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de> with his -% consent. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{greek.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{greek.dtx} -% -% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Classical Greek is now a dialect} -% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1997/11/01}{Classical Greek is now called -% ``Polutoniko'' Greek. The previous name was at least misleading} -% \changes{greek-1.2c}{1998/06/26}{This version conforms to version -% 2.0 of the CB fonts and consequently we added a few new -% symbol-producing commands} -% \changes{greek-1.3a}{1998/07/04}{polutoniko is now an attribute to -% Greek, no longer a `dialect'} -% -% \section{The Greek language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The original author is Apostolos Syropoulos -% (\texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}), code from -% \file{kdgreek.sty} by David Kastrup -% \texttt{dak@neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de} was used to -% enhance the support for typesetting greek texts.} defines all the -% language definition macros for the Greek language, i.e., -% as it used today with only one accent, and the attribute -% $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ (``Polutoniko'') -% for typesetting greek text with all accents. This separation -% arose out of the need to simplify things, for only very few -% people will be really interested to typeset polytonic Greek -% text. -% -% \DescribeMacro\greektext -% \DescribeMacro\latintext -% The commands |\greektext| and |\latintext| can be used to switch -% to greek or latin fonts. These are declarations. -% -% \DescribeMacro\textgreek -% \DescribeMacro\textlatin -% The commands |\textgreek| and |\textlatin| both take one argument -% which is then typeset using the requested font encoding. -% \DescribeMacro\textol -% The command |\greekol| switches to the greek outline font family, -% while the command |\textol| typests a short text in outline font. -% A number of extra greek characters are made available through the -% added text commands |\stigma|, |\qoppa|, |\sampi|, |\ddigamma|, -% |\Digamma|, |\euro|, |\permill|, and |\vardigamma|. -% -% \subsection{Typing conventions} -% -% Entering greek text can be quite difficult because of the many -% diacritical signs that need to be added for various purposes. -% The fonts that are used to typeset Greek make this a lot -% easier by offering a lot of ligatures. But in order for this to -% work, some characters need to be considered as letters. These -% characters are |<|, |>|, |~|, |`|, |'|, |"| and -% \verb=|=. Therefore their |\lccode| is changed when Greek is in -% effect. In order to let |\uppercase| give correct results, the -% |\uccode| of these characters is set to a non-existing character -% to make them disappear. Of course not all characters are needed -% when typesetting ``modern'' $\mu o\nu o\tau o\nu -% \iota\kappa\acute{o}$. In that case we only need the |'| and |"| -% symbols which are treated in the proper way. -% -% \subsection{Greek numbering} -% -% The Greek alphabetical numbering system, like the Roman one, is -% still used in everyday life for short enumerations. Unfortunately -% most Greeks don't know how to write Greek numbers bigger than 20 or -% 30. Nevertheless, in official editions of the last century and -% beginning of this century this numbering system was also used for -% dates and numbers in the range of several thousands. Nowadays -% this numbering system is primary used by the Eastern Orthodox -% Church and by certain scholars. It is hence necessary to be able -% to typeset any Greek numeral up to \hbox{999\,999}. Here are the -% conventions: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item There is no Greek numeral for any number less than or equal -% to $0$. -% \item Numbers from $1$ to $9$ are denoted by letters alpha, beta, -% gamma, delta, epsilon, stigma, zeta, eta, theta, followed by a -% mark similar to the mathematical symbol ``prime''. (Nowadays -% instead of letter stigma the digraph sigma tau is used for number -% $6$. Mainly because the letter stigma is not always available, so -% people opt to write down the first two letters of its name as an -% alternative. In our implementation we produce the letter stigma, -% not the digraph sigma tau.) -% \item Decades from $10$ to $90$ are denoted by letters iota, -% kappa, lambda, mu, nu, xi, omikron, pi, qoppa, again followed by -% the numeric mark. The qoppa used for this purpose has a special -% zig-zag form, which doesn't resemble at all the original -% `q'-like qoppa. -% \item Hundreds from $100$ to $900$ are denoted by letters rho, -% sigma, tau, upsilon, phi, chi, psi, omega, sampi, followed by the -% numeric mark. -% \item Any number between $1$ and $999$ is obtained by a group of -% letters denoting the hundreds decades and units, followed by a -% numeric mark. -% \item To denote thousands one uses the same method, but this time -% the mark is placed in front of the letter, and under the baseline -% (it is inverted by 180 degrees). When a group of letters denoting -% thousands is followed by a group of letters denoting a number -% under $1000$, then both marks are used. -% \end{itemize} -% -% Using these conventions one obtains numbers up to \hbox{999\,999}. -% \DescribeMacro{\greeknumeral} -% The command |\greeknumeral| makes it possible to typeset Greek -% numerals. There is also an -% \DescribeMacro{\Greeknumeral} -% ``uppercase'' version of this macro: |\Greeknumeral|. -% -% Another system which was in wide use only in Athens, could -% express any positive number. This system is implemented in -% package |athnum|. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% When the option \Lopt{polutonikogreek} was used, redefine -% |\CurrentOption| to prevent problems later on. -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\CurrentOption{greek}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{greek} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@greek| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@greek\@undefined - \@nopatterns{greek} - \adddialect\l@greek0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we declare the |polutoniko| language attribute. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{greek}{polutoniko}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% This code adds the expansion of |\extraspolutonikogreek| to -% |\extrasgreek| and changes the definition of |\today| for Greek -% to produce polytonic month names. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extrasgreek - \expandafter{\extraspolutonikogreek}% - \let\captionsgreek\captionspolutonikogreek - \let\gr@month\gr@c@month -% \end{macrocode} -% We need to take some extra precautions in order not to break -% older documents which still use the old \Lopt{polutonikogreek} -% option. -% \changes{greek-1.3f}{1999/09/29}{Added some code to make older -% documents work} -% \changes{greek-1.3g}{2000/02/04}{\cs{noextraspolutonikogreek} was -% missing} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\l@polutonikogreek\l@greek - \let\datepolutonikogreek\dategreek - \let\extraspolutonikogreek\extrasgreek - \let\noextraspolutonikogreek\noextrasgreek - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Typesetting Greek texts implies that a special set of fonts needs -% to be used. The current support for greek uses the |cb| fonts -% created by Claudio Beccari\footnote{Apostolos Syropoulos wishes -% to thank him for his patience, collaboration, cooments and -% suggestions.}. The |cb| fonts provide all sorts of \textit{font -% combinations}. In order to use these fonts we define the Local -% GReek encoding (LGR, see the file \file{greek.fdd}). We make sure -% that this encoding is known to \LaTeX, and if it isn't we abort. -% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{filename \file{lgrenc.def} now -% lowercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\InputIfFileExists{lgrenc.def}{% - \message{Loading the definitions for the Greek font encoding}}{% - \errhelp{I can't find the lgrenc.def file for the Greek fonts}% - \errmessage{Since I do not know what the LGR encoding means^^J - I can't typeset Greek.^^J - I stop here, while you get a suitable lgrenc.def file}\@@end - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch -% between Greek and Roman encodings. -% -% \begin{macro}{\greektext} -% The command |\greektext| will switch from Latin font encoding to -% the Greek font encoding. This assumes that the `normal' font -% encoding is a Latin one. This command is a \emph{declaration}, -% for shorter pieces of text the command |\textgreek| should be -% used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\greektext}{% - \fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont - \def\encodingdefault{LGR}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textgreek} -% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the -% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches -% it operates in a local scope. -% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/09/23}{Added a level of braces to keep -% encoding change local} -% \changes{greek-1.3k}{2003/03/19}{Added \cs{leavevmode} as was done -% with \cs{latintext}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\textgreek}[1]{\leavevmode{\greektext #1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textol} -% A last aspect of the set of fonts provided with this version of -% support for typesetting Greek texts is that it contains an -% outline family. In order to make it available we define the command -% |\textol|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\outlfamily{\usefont{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n}} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textol}{\outlfamily} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step consists in defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Greek language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\greekhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{greek-1.3h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -% Yannis Haralambous has suggested this value -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\@ne\@ne} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added caption name for proof} -% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/28}{Fixed typo, \texttt{bl'epe ep'ishc} -% instead of \texttt{bl'pe ep'ishc}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsgreek} -% The macro |\captionsgreek| defines all strings used in the -% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{greek-1.3h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{greek-1.3i}{2000/10/02}{The final sigma in all names appears -% as `s' instead of `c'.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsgreek{% - \def\prefacename{Pr'ologos}% - \def\refname{Anafor'es}% - \def\abstractname{Per'ilhyh}% - \def\bibname{Bibliograf'ia}% - \def\chaptername{Kef'alaio}% - \def\appendixname{Par'arthma}% - \def\contentsname{Perieq'omena}% - \def\listfigurename{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% - \def\listtablename{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% - \def\indexname{Euret'hrio}% - \def\figurename{Sq'hma}% - \def\tablename{P'inakas}% - \def\partname{M'eros}% - \def\enclname{Sunhmm'ena}% - \def\ccname{Koinopo'ihsh}% - \def\headtoname{Pros}% - \def\pagename{Sel'ida}% - \def\seename{bl'epe}% - \def\alsoname{bl'epe ep'ishs}% - \def\proofname{Ap'odeixh}% - \def\glossaryname{Glwss'ari}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added caption names for -% \cs{polutonikogreek}} -% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/28}{Fixed typo, \texttt{bl'epe >ep'ishc} -% instead of \texttt{bl'pe >ep'ishc}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionspolutonikogreek} -% For texts written in the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau -% o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ (polytonic greek) the translations are -% the same as above, but some words are spelled differently. For -% now we just add extra definitions to |\captionsgreek| in order to -% override the earlier definitions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\captionspolutonikogreek\captionsgreek -\addto\captionspolutonikogreek{% - \def\refname{>Anafor`es}% - \def\indexname{E<uret'hrio}% - \def\figurename{Sq~hma}% - \def\headtoname{Pr`os}% - \def\alsoname{bl'epe >ep'ishs}% - \def\proofname{>Ap'odeixh}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\gr@month} -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Macro added} -% \begin{macro}{\dategreek} -% The macro |\dategreek| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce greek dates. The name of the month is now produced -% by the macro |\gr@month| since it is needed in the definition -% of the macro |\Grtoday|. -% \changes{greek-1.1a}{1997/03/03}{Fixed typo, \texttt{Oktwbr'iou} -% instead of \texttt{Oktobr'iou}} -% \changes{greek-1.1d}{1997/10/12}{Macro \cs{gr@month} now produces -% the name of the month} -% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}} -% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gr@month{% - \ifcase\month\or - Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or - Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or - Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi} -\def\dategreek{% - \def\today{\number\day \space \gr@month\space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\gr@c@greek} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added macro \cs{gr@cl@month}} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added macro -% \cs{datepolutonikogreek}} -% \changes{greek-1.3a}{1997/10/28}{removed macro -% \cs{datepolutonikogreek}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gr@c@month{% - \ifcase\month\or >Ianouar'iou\or - Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or >April'iou\or Ma"'iou\or - >Ioun'iou\or >Ioul'iou\or A>ugo'ustou\or Septembr'iou\or - >Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Grtoday} -% \changes{greek-1.1}{1996/10/28}{Added macro \cs{Grtoday}} -% The macro |\Grtoday| produces the current date, only that the -% month and the day are shown as greek numerals instead of arabic -% as it is usually the case. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Grtoday{% - \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\day}\space - \gr@c@month \space - \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasgreek} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasgreek} -% The macro |\extrasgreek| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Greek language. The macro |\noextrasgreek| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasgreek|. For the moment these -% macros switch the fontencoding used and the definition of the -% internal macros |\@alph| and |\@Alph| because in Greek we do use -% the Greek numerals. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasgreek{\greektext} -\addto\noextrasgreek{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\gr@ill@value} -% When the argument of |\greeknumeral| has a value outside of the -% acceptable bounds ($0 < x < 999999$) a warning will be issued -% (and nothing will be printed). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gr@ill@value#1{% - \PackageWarning{babel}{Illegal value (#1) for greeknumeral}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\anw@true} -% \begin{macro}{\anw@false} -% \begin{macro}{\anw@print} -% When a a large number with three \emph{trailing} zero's is to be -% printed those zeros \emph{and} the numeric mark need to be -% discarded. As each `digit' is processed by a separate macro -% \emph{and} because the processing needs to be expandable we need -% some helper macros that help remember to \emph{not} print the -% numeric mark (|\anwtonos|). -% -% The command |\anw@false| switches the printing of the numeric -% mark off by making |\anw@print| expand to nothing. The command -% |\anw@true| (re)enables the printing of the numeric marc. These -% macro's need to be robust in order to prevent improper expansion -% during writing to files or during |\uppercase|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@false{% - \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@true{% - \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{\anwtonos}} -\anw@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\greeknumeral} -% The command |\greeknumeral| needs to be \emph{fully} expandable -% in order to get the right information in auxiliary -% files. Therefore we use a big |\if|-construction to check the -% value of the argument and start the parsing at the right level. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\greeknumeral#1{% -% \end{macrocode} -% If the value is negative or zero nothing is printed and a warning -% is issued. -% \changes{greek-1.3b}{1999/04/03}{Added \cs{expandafter} and -% \cs{number} (PR3000) in order to make a counter an acceptable -% argument} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum#1<\@ne\space\gr@ill@value{#1}% - \else - \ifnum#1<10\expandafter\gr@num@i\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<100\expandafter\gr@num@ii\number#1% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% We use the available shorthands for 1.000 (|\@m|) and 10.000 -% (|\@M|) to save a few tokens. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum#1<\@m\expandafter\gr@num@iii\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<\@M\expandafter\gr@num@iv\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<100000\expandafter\gr@num@v\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<1000000\expandafter\gr@num@vi\number#1% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If the value is too large, nothing is printed and a warning -% is issued. -% \begin{macrocode} - \space\gr@ill@value{#1}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Greeknumeral} -% The command |\Greeknumeral| prints uppercase greek numerals. -% The parsing is performed by the macro |\greeknumeral|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Greeknumeral#1{% - \expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\greeknumeral{#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\greek@alph} -% \begin{macro}{\greek@Alph} -% In the previous release of this language definition the -% commands |\greek@aplh| and |\greek@Alph| were kept just for -% reasons of compatibility. Here again they become meaningful macros. -% They are definited in a way that even page numbering with greek -% numerals is possible. Since the macros |\@alph| and |\@Alph| will -% lose their original meaning while the Greek option is active, we -% must save their original value. -% macros |\@alph| -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\latin@alph\@alph -\let\latin@Alph\@Alph -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we define the Greek versions; the additional |\expandafter|s -% are needed in order to make sure the table of contents will be -% correct, e.g., when we have appendixes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\greek@alph#1{\expandafter\greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}} -\def\greek@Alph#1{\expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can set up the switching. -% \changes{greek-1.1a}{1997/03/03}{removed two superfluous @'s which -% made \cs{@alph} undefined} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \let\@alph\greek@alph - \let\@Alph\greek@Alph} -\addto\noextrasgreek{% - \let\@alph\latin@alph - \let\@Alph\latin@Alph} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\greek@roman} -% \begin{macro}{\greek@Roman} -% \changes{greek-1.2e}{1999/04/16}{Moved redefinition of \cs{@roman} -% back to the language specific file} -% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/27}{\cs{@roman} and \cs{@Roman} need to -% be added to \cs{extraspolutonikogreek}} -% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{@roman} and \cs{@Roman} need -% \emph{not} be in \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} when they are already -% in \cs{extrasgreek}} -% -% To prevent roman numerals being typeset in greek letters we need -% to adopt the internal \LaTeX\ commands |\@roman| and -% |\@Roman|. \textbf{Note that this may cause errors where -% |\@roman| ends up in a situation where it needs to be expanded; -% problems are known to exist with the AMS document classes.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\latin@roman\@roman -\let\latin@Roman\@Roman -\def\greek@roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@roman{#1}}} -\def\greek@Roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@Roman{#1}}} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \let\@roman\greek@roman - \let\@Roman\greek@Roman} -\addto\noextrasgreek{% - \let\@roman\latin@roman - \let\@Roman\latin@Roman} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\greek@amp} -% \begin{macro}{\ltx@amp} -% The greek fonts do not contain an ampersand, so the \LaTeX\ -% command |\&| dosn't give the expected result if we do not do -% something about it. -% \changes{greek-1.2f}{1999/04/25}{Now switch the definition of -% \cs{\&} from \cs{extrasgreek}} -% \changes{greek-1.3c}{1999/05/17}{Added a missing opening brace} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ltx@amp\& -\def\greek@amp{\textlatin{\ltx@amp}} -\addto\extrasgreek{\let\&\greek@amp} -\addto\noextrasgreek{\let\&\ltx@amp} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% What is left now is the definition of a set of macros to produce -% the various digits. -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@i} -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@ii} -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@iii} -% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1997/11/13}{No longer use \cs{\let} in the -% expansion of the \cs{gr@num@x} macros as they ned to be -% expandable} -% As there is no representation for $0$ in this system the zeros -% are simply discarded. When we have a large number with three -% \emph{trailing} zero's also the numeric mark is discarded. -% Therefore these macros need to pass the information to each other -% about the (non-)translation of a zero. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gr@num@i#1{% - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\anw@print} -\def\gr@num@ii#1{% - \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@i} -\def\gr@num@iii#1{% - \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\anw@false\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@ii} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@iv} -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@v} -% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@vi} -% The first three `digits' always have the numeric mark, except -% when one is discarded because it's value is zero. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gr@num@iv#1{% - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi - \gr@num@iii} -\def\gr@num@v#1{% - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi - \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi - \gr@num@iv} -\def\gr@num@vi#1{% - \katwtonos - \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi - \gr@num@v} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\greek@tilde} -% \changes{greek-1.0c}{1997/02/19}{Added command} -% In greek typesetting we need a number of characters with more -% than one accent. In the underlying family of fonts (the -% |cb| fonts) this is solved using Knuth's ligature -% mechanism. -% Characters we need to have ligatures with are the tilde, the -% acute and grave accent characters, the rough and smooth breathings, -% the subscript, and the double quote character. -% In text input the |~| is normaly used to produce an -% unbreakable space. The command |\~| normally produces a tilde -% accent. For polytonic Greek we change the definition of |\~| -% to produce the tilde character itself, making sure it has category -% code 12. -% \changes{greek-1.3k}{2003/04/10}{Make sure the character `!' is not -% active during the definition of \cs{greek@tilde}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \@ifundefined{active@char\string!}{}{\catcode`!=12\relax} - \catcode`\~=12 - \lccode`\!=`\~ - \lowercase{\def\x{\endgroup - \def\greek@tilde{!}}\x} -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@save\~\let\~\greek@tilde} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% In order to get correct hyphenation we need to set the lower case -% code of a number of characters. The `v' character has a special -% usage for the |cb| fonts: in fact this ligature mechanism detects -% the end of a word and assures that a final sigma is typeset with -% the proper sign wich is different from that of an initial or -% medial sigma; the `v 'after an \textit{isolated} sigma fools -% the ligature mechanism in order to typeset $\sigma$ in place of -% $\varsigma$. Because of this we make sure its lowercase code is -% not changed. For ``modern'' greek we have to deal only with |'| -% and |"| and so things are easy. -% \changes{greek-1.1c}{1997/04/30}{fixed two typos} -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added lowercase code for v} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Definitions for ``modern'' Greek are -% now the definitions of ``Polutoniko'' Greek} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added lowercase codes for ``modern'' -% greek} -% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{extrasgreek} and -% \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} should be complementary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`v}\lccode`v=`v% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\'}\lccode`\'=`\'% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\"}\lccode`\"=`\"} -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\<}\lccode`\<=`\<% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\>}\lccode`\>=`\>% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\~}\lccode`\~=`\~% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\|}\lccode`\|=`\|% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\`}\lccode`\`=`\`} -% \end{macrocode} -% And in order to get rid of all accents and breathings when a -% string is |\uppercase|d we also change a number of uppercase -% codes. -% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Added setting of \cs{uccode}s -% (after \file{kdgreek.sty})} -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added uppercase code for special -% letter ``v''. Uppercase code for accents is now \texttt{9f}, -% instead of \texttt{ff}} -% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added uppercase codes for ``modern'' -% Greek. The old codes are now for ``Polutoniko'' Greek} -% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{extrasgreek} and -% \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} should be complementary} -% {\catcode`|=12\relax\gdef\indexbar{\cs{|}}} -% \changes{greek-1.3g}{1999/11/17}{uc code of \indexbar{} is now just -% \indexbar{} to reflect recent changes in the cb fonts} -% \changes{greek-1.3i}{2000/10/02}{uc code of `v' is switched to V -% so that mixed text appears correctly in headers.} -% \changes{greek-1.3j}{2001/02/03}{Because other languages might -% make the caret active, we can't use the double caret notation -% here} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\"}\uccode`\"=`\"% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\'}\uccode`\'=159} %% 159 == ^^9f -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\~}\uccode`\~=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\>}\uccode`\>=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\<}\uccode`\<=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\|}\uccode`\|=`\|% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\`}\uccode`\`=159} -% \end{macrocode} -% For this to work we make the character |^^9f| a shorthand that -% expands to nothing. In order for this to work we need to make a -% character look like |^^9f| in \TeX's eyes. The trick is to have -% another character and assign it a different lowercase code. The -% execute the macros needed in a |\lowercase| environment. Usually -% the tile |~| character is used for such purposes. Before we do -% this we save it's original lowercase code to restore it once -% we're done. -% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Added shorthand for \cs{char255}} -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Shorthand is changed. Active -% character is now \cs{char159}} -% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{Need shorthand to exist for -% ``monotoniko'' Greek, not ``polutoniko'' Greek} -% \changes{greek-1.3j}{2001/02/03}{Ues the tilde as an alias for -% character 159} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@tempcnta=\lccode`\~ -\lccode`\~=159 -\lowercase{% - \initiate@active@char{~}% - \declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{}} -\lccode`\~=\@tempcnta -% \end{macrocode} -% We can also make the tilde character itself expand to a tilde with -% category code 12 to make the typing of texts easier. -% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Made tilde expand to a tilde with -% \cs{catcode 12}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{\languageshorthands{greek}}% -\declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{\greek@tilde} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \changes{greek-1.1c}{1997/03/10}{Added a couple of symbols, needed -% for \cs{greeknumeral}} -% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Most symbols are removed and are -% now defined in package grsymb} -% \changes{greek-1.2c}{1998/06/26}{Package grsymb has been eliminated -% because the CB fonts v2.0 do not inlcude certain symbols and so -% the remaining symbol definitions have been moved here} -% We now define a few symbols which are used in the typesetting of -% greek numerals, as well as some other symbols which are usefull, -% such as the $\epsilon\upsilon\rho\omega$ symbol, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\anwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FE\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\katwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FF\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\qoppa}{LGR}{\char"12\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\stigma}{LGR}{\char"06\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\sampi}{LGR}{\char"1B\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Since the |~| cannot be used to produce an unbreakable white -% space we must redefine at least the commands |\fnum@figure| and -% |\fnum@table| so they do not produce a |~| instead of white -% space. -% \changes{greek-1.3l}{2004/02/19}{Commented these lines out as this -% change has made it into \LaTeX{} itself.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure} -%\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd deleted file mode 100644 index ab884f0b51a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,651 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{183} -% -% \iffalse This is a META comment -% -%<*fdd> -\ProvidesFile{greek.fdd} -%</fdd> -% -%<LGRenc, >\ProvidesFile{lgrenc.def} -%<LGRcmr, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmr.fd} -%<LGRcmro, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmro.fd} -%<LGRcmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmtt.fd} -%<LGRcmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmss.fd} -%<LGRlcmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmss.fd} -%<LGRlcmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmtt.fd} -%<LGRlmr, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmr.fd} -%<LGRlmro, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmro.fd} -%<LGRlmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmss.fd} -%<LGRlmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmtt.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % -%<LGRenc, > Greek Encoding] -%<LGRcmr, > Greek Computer Modern] -%<LGRcmro, > Greek Computer Modern Outline] -%<LGRcmtt, > Greek Computer Modern Typewriter] -%<LGRcmss, > Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif] -%<LGRlcmss, > Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif slide sizes] -%<LGRlcmtt, > Greek Computer Modern Typewriter slide sizes] -%<LGRlmr, > Greek Latin Modern] -%<LGRlmro, > Greek Latin Modern Outline] -%<LGRlmtt, > Greek Latin Modern Typewriter] -%<LGRlmss, > Greek Latin Modern Sans Serif] -%<*fdd> -] -%</fdd> -% -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\GetFileInfo{greek.fdd} -\providecommand\dsc{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}} -\title{The file \texttt{greek.fdd} for use with - \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version - number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}} -\date{\filedate} -\author{Claudio Beccari, Apostolos Syropoulos and Johannes Braams} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\begin{document} -\maketitle -\DocInput{greek.fdd} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% -%\fi -% -% \changes{greekfdd-2.0}{1997/10/12}{Changed to use Claudio Beccari's -% fonts} -% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Produce files with lowercase -% names} -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2}{1998/05/16}{Added support for CB fonts v2.xx} -% \changes{greekfdd-2.3}{2008/06/17}{Added support for CB fonts v2.xx -% with extra families and Latin Modern compatibility} -% -% \section{Introduction} -% -% The file `greek.fdd' provides font definitions for typesetting -% greek texts. This version of the file has been updated, since -% now the official fonts for the \Lopt{greek} option of the -% \textsf{babel} package are the |cb| fonts. -% -% The font definition files prduced from this documented source -% make the |cb| fonts compatible with both the Computer Modern -% collection (both CM and EC) and the Latin Modern one. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \section{The \texttt{docstrip} modules} -% The following modules are used to direct \texttt{docstrip} in -% generating external files: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\ -% LGRenc & The encoding definition file\\ -% LGRcmr & The Roman font shapes\\ -% LGRcmro & The Outline Roman font shapes\\ -% LGRcmss & The Sans Serif font shapes\\ -% LGRcmtt & The typewriter font shapes\\ -% LGRlcmss & The slide size Sans Serif font shapes\\ -% LGRlcmtt & The slide size typewriter fonts\\ -% LGRlmr & The Roman font shapes\\ -% LGRlmro & The Outline Roman font shapes\\ -% LGRlmss & The Sans Serif font shapes\\ -% LGRlmtt & The typewriter font shapes\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% A typical \dsc\ command file would then have entries like: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\generateFile{lgrcmr.fd}{t}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmr}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \section{The encoding definition file} -% -% This file defines the fontencoding \texttt{LGR} for greek -% text. Moreover, it provides the |\EC@family| macro, since the -% Greek fonts have the same naming conventions as the Latin -% ones produced by J\"{o}rg Knappen that are now the official -% fonts of \LaTeXe. It also makes some definitions to ensure -% that commands such as |\TeX|, |\copyright| give ``expected -% results'' (\TeX, \copyright). -% -% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Removed some unwanted spaces} -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2e}{2000/10/26}{Added more font sizes to make -% the CB fonts compatible with the EC fonts} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRenc> -\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -% \end{macrocode} -% First we define a few commands in the \texttt{LGR} encoding. -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2c}{1999/04/05}{Fixed typos, \cs{textrademark} -% misses a `t', \cs{copyright} should be \cs{textcopyright}} -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2d}{1999/04/25}{removed redefinition of \cs{\&}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LGR}{% - \textcircled{\textlatin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LGR}{% - \textcircled{\textlatin{\textsc r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LGR}{% - \textsuperscript{\textlatin{TM}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\SS}{LGR}{% - \textlatin{SS}} -%</LGRenc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The font definition files} -% -% In the previous release of the greek option we used -% the \texttt{kd} family of fonts, which were made by -% K.J.~Dryllerakis. Now, we have switched to the |cb| fonts by -% Claudio Beccari, mainly because these fonts are complete, in any -% sense of the word, and moreover fit nicely with the Computer -% Modern font family. -% -% We begin with the definitions for the Greek Computer Modern fonts. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRcmr> -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmr}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} {grmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sl} {grmo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{it} {grmi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sc} {grmc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ui} {grmu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{li} {grml} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{rs} {gmmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ro} {gmmo} -% -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sc} {grxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} {grxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sl} {grxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{it} {grxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ui} {grxu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{li} {grxl} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{rs} {gmxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ro} {gmxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{b}{li} {grbl} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<->ssub*cmr/bx/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{} -%</LGRcmr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The greek outline family is now complete with the same five -% shapes and the two series as the roman family. -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2b}{1999/04/03}{grmu should be gomu here...} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRcmro> -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmro}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n} {gomn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sl} {gomo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{it} {gomi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sc} {gomc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{ui} {gomu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sc} {goxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{n} {goxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sl} {goxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{it} {goxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{ui} {goxu} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{n} - {<->ssub*cmro/bx/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmro/bx/sc}{} -%</LGRcmro> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then we have the \texttt{typewriter} fonts... -% -% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Set the \cs{hyphenchar} of the tt -% font to $-1$} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRcmtt> -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}% \hyphenchar = -1 -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{n} {gttn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sl} {gtto} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sc} {gttc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{it} {gtti} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{ui} {gttu} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sl} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{ui} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/ui}{} -%</LGRcmtt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we come to the Sans Serif font to be used in greek -% texts. -% \changes{greekfdd-2.2b}{1999/04/03}{the last two lines had m instead -% of x in the fontname} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRcmss> -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmss}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{n} {gsmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sl} {gsmo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sc} {gsmc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{it} {gsmi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{ui} {gsmu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{iv} {gsme} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{uv} {gsma} -% -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{n} {gsxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sl} {gsxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sc} {gsxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{it} {gsxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{ui} {gsxu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{iv} {gsxe} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{uv} {gsxa} -%</LGRcmss> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We have finished with the ``regular'' fonts. We now provide the fonts -% definition files for the fonts used only in slides. First comes the -% typewriter font. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlcmtt> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gltn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glto}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - ssub * lcmtt/m/it}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - ssub * lcmtt/m/Iit}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gltc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljc}{} -%</LGRlcmtt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And then the Sans Serif font. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlcmss> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmss}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glin}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glio}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmu}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glic}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwc}{} -%</LGRlcmss> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And now come the font definition files compatible with the Latin -% Modern family names and sizes; notice that the Latin Modern fonts -% are available only as scalable PostScript fonts, therefore they -% cope with continuous scaling; also the |cb| fonts are distributed -% as scalable PostScript fonts, so it makes sense to use the same -% size and family specifications as the LM fonts. -% -% We start with the Latin Modern Regular. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlmr> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{n}% - {<-5.5> grmn0500 <5.5-6.5> grmn0600 - <6.5-7.5> grmn0700 <7.5-8.5> grmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> grmn0900 <9.5-11> grmn1000 - <11-15> grmn1200 <15-> grmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{rs}% - {<-5.5> gmmn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmmn0600 - <6.5-7.5> gmmn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gmmn0900 <9.5-11> gmmn1000 - <11-15> gmmn1200 <15-> gmmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sl}% - {<-8.5> grmo0800 <8.5-9.5> grmo0900 - <9.5-11> grmo1000 <11-15> grmo1200 - <15-> grmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ro}% - {<-8.5> gmmo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmmo0900 - <9.5-11> gmmo1000 <11-15> gmmo1200 - <15-> gmmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{it}% - {<-7.5> grmi0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmi0800 <8.5-9.5> grmi0900 - <9.5-11> grmi1000 <11-15> grmi1200 - <15-> grmi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{li}% - {<-7.5> grml0700 - <7.5-8.5> grml0800 <8.5-9.5> grml0900 - <9.5-11> grml1000 <11-15> grml1200 - <15-> grml1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ui}% - {<-7.5> grmu0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmu0800 <8.5-9.5> grmu0900 - <9.5-11> grmu1000 <11-15> grmu1200 - <15-> grmu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sc}% - {<-7.5> grmc0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmc0800 <8.5-9.5> grmc0900 - <9.5-11> grmc1000 <11-15> grmc1200 - <15-> grmc1728}{} -% slanted CSC is changed to unslanted CSC -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{scsl}% - {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{} -%%%%%%%% bold and bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{n} - {<-5.5> grxn0500 <5.5-6.5> grx0600 - <6.5-7.5> grxn0700 <7.5-8.5> grxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> grxn0900 <9.5-11> grxn1000 - <11-15> grxn1200 <15-> grxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{rs} - {<-5.5> gmxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmx0600 - <6.5-7.5> gmxn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gmxn0900 <9.5-11> gmxn1000 - <11-15> gmxn1200 <15-> gmxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{it} - {<-7.5> grxi0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxi0800 <8.5-9.5> grxi0900 - <9.5-11> grxi1000 <11-15> grxi1200 - <15-> grxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{b}{li} - {<-7.5> grbl0700 - <7.5-8.5> grbl0800 <8.5-9.5> grbl0900 - <9.5-11> grbl1000 <11-15> grbl1200 - <15-> grbl1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{li} - {<-7.5> grxl0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxl0800 <8.5-9.5> grxl0900 - <9.5-11> grxl1000 <11-15> grxl1200 - <15-> grxl1728 - }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ui} - {<-7.5> grxu0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxu0800 <8.5-9.5> grxu0900 - <9.5-11> grxu1000 <11-15> grxu1200 - <15-> grxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> grxo0800 <8.5-9.5> grxo0900 - <9.5-11> grxo1000 <11-15> grxo1200 - <15-> grxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ro} - {<-8.5> gmxo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmxo0900 - <9.5-11> gmxo1000 <11-15> gmxo1200 - <15-> gmxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sc}% - {<-7.5> grxc0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxc0800 <8.5-9.5> grxc0900 - <9.5-11> grxc1000 <11-15> grxc1200 - <15-> grxc1728}{} -%</LGRlmr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then the Latin Modern Regular Outline -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlmro> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmro}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{n}% - {<-5.5> gomn0500 <5.5-6.5> gomn0600 - <6.5-7.5> gomn0700 <7.5-8.5> gomn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gomn0900 <9.5-11> gomn1000 - <11-15> gomn1200 <15-> gmr1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sl}% - {<-8.5> gomo0800 <8.5-9.5> gomo0900 - <9.5-11> gomo1000 <11-15> gomo1200 - <15-> gomo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{it}% - {<-7.5> gomi0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomi0800 <8.5-9.5> gomi0900 - <9.5-11> gomi1000 <11-15> gomi1200 - <15-> gomi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{ui}% - {<-7.5> gomu0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomu0800 <8.5-9.5> gomu0900 - <9.5-11> gomu1000 <11-15> gomu1200 - <15-> gomu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sc}% - {<-7.5> gomc0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomc0800 <8.5-9.5> gomc0900 - <9.5-11> gomc1000 <11-15> gomc1200 - <15-> gomc1728}{} -% slanted CSC is changed to unslanted CSC -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{scsl}% - {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{} -%%%%%%%% bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{n} - {<-5.5> goxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gox0600 - <6.5-7.5> goxn0700 <7.5-8.5> goxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> goxn0900 <9.5-11> goxn1000 - <11-15> goxn1200 <15-> goxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{it} - {<-7.5> goxi0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxi0800 <8.5-9.5> goxi0900 - <9.5-11> goxi1000 <11-> goxi1200 - <15-> goxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{ui} - {<-7.5> goxu0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxu0800 <8.5-9.5> goxu0900 - <9.5-11> goxu1000 <11-> goxu1200 - <15-> goxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> goxo0800 <8.5-9.5> goxo0900 - <9.5-11> goxo1000 <11-15> goxo1200 - <15-> goxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sc}% - {<-7.5> goxc0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxc0800 <8.5-9.5> goxc0900 - <9.5-11> goxc1000 <11-15> goxc1200 - <15-> goxc1728}{} -%</LGRlmro> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the Latin Modern Sans Serif -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlmss> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmss}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{n} - {<-8.5> gsmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmn0900 <9.5-11> gsmn1000 - <11-15.5> gsmn1200 <15.5-> gsmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{it} - {<-8.5> gsmi0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmi0900 <9.5-11> gsmi1000 - <11-15.5> gsmi1200 <15.5-> gsmi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{iv} - {<-8.5> gsme0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsme0900 <9.5-11> gsme1000 - <11-15.5> gsme1200 <15.5-> gsme1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{ui} - {<-8.5> gsmu0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmu0900 <9.5-11> gsmu1000 - <11-15.5> gsmu1200 <15.5-> gsmu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{uv} - {<-8.5> gsma0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsma0900 <9.5-11> gsma1000 - <11-15.5> gsma1200 <15.5-> gsma1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sl} - {<-8.5> gsmo0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmo0900 <9.5-11> gsmo1000 - <11-15.5> gsmo1200 <15.5-> gsmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sc} - {<-8.5> gsmc0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmc0900 <9.5-11> gsmc1000 - <11-15.5> gsmc1200 <15.5-> gsmc1728}{} -%%%%%%%% semibold condensed series substituted with medium series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{n} -{<-> ssub*lmss/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{sl} -{<-> ssub*/lmss/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{it} -{<->ssub*lmss/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%%%% bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{n} - {<-8.5> gsxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxn0900 <9.5-11> gsxn1000 - <11-15.5> gsxn1200 <15.5-> gsxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> gsxo0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxo0900 <9.5-11> gsxo1000 - <11-15.5> gsxo1200 <15.5-> gsxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{it} - {<-8.5> gsxi0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxi0900 <9.5-11> gsxi1000 - <11-15.5> gsxi1200 <15.5-> gsxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{iv} - {<-8.5> gsxe0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxe0900 <9.5-11> gsxe1000 - <11-15.5> gsxe1200 <15.5-> gsxe1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{ui} - {<-8.5> gsxu0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxu0900 <9.5-11> gsxu1000 - <11-15.5> gsxu1200 <15.5-> gsxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{uv} - {<-8.5> gsxa0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxa0900 <9.5-11> gsxa1000 - <11-15.5> gsxa1200 <15.5-> gsxa1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sc} - {<-8.5> gsxc0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxc0900 <9.5-11> gsxc1000 - <11-15.5> gsxc1200 <15.5-> gsxc1728}{} -%</LGRlmss> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And finally the Latin Modern typewriter font. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LGRlmtt> -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{n} - {<-8.5> gttn0800 <8.5-9.5> gttn0900 - <9.5-11> gttn1000 <11-15> gttn1200 - <15-> gttn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> ssub*lgr/lmtt/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sl} - {<-8.5> gtto0800 <8.5-9.5> gtto0900 - <9.5-11> gtto1000 <11-15> gtto1200 - <15-> gtto1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sc} - {<-8.5> gttc0800 <8.5-9.5> gttc0900 - <9.5-11> gttc1000 <11-15> gttc1200 - <15-> gttc1728}{} -% shape undefined, substituted with unslanted -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{scsl}{<-> ssub*lmtt/m/sc}{} -%</LGRlmtt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The slide fonts have not been mapped to the Latin Modern -% families and sizes, because there are no slide fonts in the LM -% collection. Moreover nowadays the traditional slide fonts are -% very seldom used, since slides are produced with other classes -% different from the class |slides|, and they use different fonts. -% -% The next line goes into all files and in addition prevents \dsc{} -% from adding any further code from the main source file (such as a -% character table. -% \begin{macrocode} -\endinput -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 69e4a247c2c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2008/07/06} -\def\batchfile{greek.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{greek.ldf}{\from{greek.dtx}{code}} - \file{athnum.sty}{\from{athnum.dtx}{package}} - \file{grmath.sty}{\from{grmath.dtx}{package}} - \file{grsymb.sty}{\from{grsymb.dtx}{package}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble -\generate{\file{lgrenc.def}{\from{greek.fdd}{LGRenc}} - \file{lgrcmr.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmr}} - \file{lgrcmro.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmro}} - \file{lgrcmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmtt}} - \file{lgrcmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmss}} - \file{lgrlcmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlcmtt}} - \file{lgrlcmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlcmss}} - \file{lgrlmr.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmr}} - \file{lgrlmro.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmro}} - \file{lgrlmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmtt}} - \file{lgrlmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmss}} - } - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 000daadcd86..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,168 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%% \CheckSum{126} -% -%\iffalse -% -%% This is file `grmath.sty' -%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -% You are allowed to modify this file as long the initial copyright notice -% appears in the modified file. -% -% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to -% -% Apostolos Syropoulos -% 366, 28th October Str. -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE -% -% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr -% -%\fi -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\GetFileInfo{grmath.drv} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{grmath.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -% -% \changes{grmath-1.2}{2001/02/12}{Package provides options ``grlog'' -% (default) and ``enlog'' that create Greek and Latin names -% log functions} -% -% \title{Greek log-like Operators} -% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\ -% 366, 28th October Str.\\ -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\ -% E-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}} -% \date{2001/02/12} -% \maketitle -% -% \MakeShortVerb{|} -% \section{What is this all about?} -% -% In Greece, until recently, it was common practice to write down most -% log-like functions as abbreviations of their Greek names. Consequently, -% high school students and even university freshmen were not familiar with -% the Latin names employed in international literature. However, this practice -% is fading away in universities but it is still in wide use in books for -% high schools, mainly because the Latin names would produce nothing but -% confusion. The package |grmath| redefines most log-like definitions -% so that they produce the Greek name, instead of the Latin one. The package -% can be used only in conjunction with the |greek| option of the |babel| -% package. The new option |enlog| allows one to keep the Latin names for -% the log functions. -% \StopEventually -% -% \section{The Implementation} -% -% As usual we must first identify ourselves. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -\ProvidesPackage{grmath}[2001/02/12\space v1.2] -\typeout{Package: `grmath' v1.2\space <2001/02/12> (A. Syropoulos)} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next thing we do is to process the options. The default option -% ``grlog'' generates Greek names for log functions and the ``enlog'' -% option generates Latin names for log functions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{grlog}{% - \def\log{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_{10}}\nolimits} - \def\ln{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_% - {\mathgroup\symoperators e}}\nolimits} -} -\DeclareOption{enlog}{% - \def\log{\mathop{\operator@font log}\nolimits} - \def\ln{\mathop{\operator@font ln}\nolimits} -} -\ExecuteOptions{grlog} -\ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least -% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{% - \PackageError{grmath}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - }} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We define the mathematical font which will be used to typeset -% the log-like functions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareSymbolFont{groperators}{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} -\SetSymbolFont{groperators}{bold}{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We are now ready to proceed with the redefinitions of the log-like -% operator names. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators hm}\nolimits} -\def\cos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sun}\nolimits} -\def\tan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators ef}\nolimits} -\def\arcsin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxhm}\nolimits} -\def\arccos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsun}\nolimits} -\def\arctan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxef}\nolimits} -\def\cot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sf}\nolimits} -\def\sec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators tem}\nolimits} -\def\csc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators stem}\nolimits} -\def\gcd{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators MKD}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% In the standard \LaTeX\ distribution there is no provision for a -% Least Common Multiple (lcm) log-like operator. Since, this operator -% appears quite often in greek literature we opt to include it. Moreover, -% we include three more log-like functions: |\arccot|, |\arcsec| and -% |\arccsc|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lcm{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators EKP}\nolimits} -\def\arccot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsf}\nolimits} -\def\arcsec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxtem}\nolimits} -\def\arccsc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxstem}\nolimits} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section*{Dedication} -% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son -% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center} -% \Finale -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 189ca4afe5c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%% \CheckSum{55} -% -%\iffalse -% -%% This is file `grsymb.sty' -%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -% You are allowed to modify this file as long the initial copyright notice -% appears in the modified file. -% -% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to -% -% Apostolos Syropoulos -% 366, 28th October Str. -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE -% -% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr -% -%\fi -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\GetFileInfo{grsymb.drv} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{grsymb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -% -% \title{Greek Symbols} -% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\ -% 366, 28th October Str.\\ -% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\ -% E-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}} -% \date{1997/09/21} -% \maketitle -% -% \MakeShortVerb{|} -% \section{Introduction} -% -% There are certain symbols which were in use in ancient Greece and which -% are of use to scholars even today. These symbols are various forms of -% qoppa and stigma, and the letter digamma. These special symbols are -% provided by the \texttt{cb} fonts which are now the official fonts for -% the \texttt{greek} option of the \texttt{babel} package. Moreover, these -% fonts provide a few more symbols such as a symbol for Euro, etc. The `tao' -% symbol although is not a greek symbol, survives mainly for reasons of -% compatibility. This little package provides access commands for these -% symbols. The package can be used only in conjunction with the |greek| -% option of the |babel| package. -% -% \StopEventually -% -% \section{The Implementation} -% -% First comes the identification part. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -\ProvidesPackage{grsymb}[1997/09/21\space v1.0] -\typeout{Package: `grsymb' v1.0\space <1997/09/21> (A. Syropoulos)} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Next we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least -% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \PackageError{grsymb}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Now, we proceed with the definitions of the various symbols. Please note -% that |\ddigamma| is intensionally spelled erroneously, in order to avoid -% conflicts with the command |\digamma| that is defined by the package -% |amssymb|. Although the tao symbol is not a greek symbol, it is included -% mainly for reasons of compatibility. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\tao}{LGR}{\char"01\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Qoppa}{LGR}{\char"14\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\varqoppa}{LGR}{\char"13\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Sampi}{LGR}{\char"1A\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Stigma}{LGR}{\char"08\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\VarQoppa}{LGR}{\char"15\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section*{Dedication} -% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son -% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center} -% \Finale -\endinput
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 69101ca7660..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{8} -% -% \iffalse meta-comment -%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva. -% -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -%\fi -% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}} -% \providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -% \GetFileInfo{heb209.dtx} -% -% \changes{heb209~1.0a}{1998/01/06}{% -% Initial version. Provides hebrew\_newcode, hebrew\_oldcode and -% hebrew\_p style files for \LaTeX~2.09 (by Boris Lavva)} -% -% \section{Hebrew in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}\label{sec:heb209} -% -% |\documentstyle| command in the preamble of \LaTeX\ document -% indicates that it is a \LaTeX~2.09 document, and should be processed -% in \emph{compatibility mode}. In such documents, one of the following -% three Hebrew style options can be included: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item \texttt{hebrew\_newcode} indicates that document will use UNIX -% ISO 8859-8 or Windows cp1255 input encoding, i.e.\ \emph{Alef} -% letter will be represented as 224. -% \item \texttt{hebrew\_p} indicates that document is encoded with IBM -% PC cp862 encoding, i.e.\ \emph{Alef} letter will be represented as -% 128. -% \item \texttt{hebrew\_oldcode} indicates that document uses old 7-bit -% encoding, as defined in Israeli Standard 960, i.e.\ \emph{Alef} is -% character number 96. -% \end{enumerate} -% Note, that other hebrew-related styles, such as \texttt{hebcal} can -% be included \emph{after} the abovenamed Hebrew style option, for -% example: -% \begin{quote} -% |\documentstyle[12pt,hebrew_p,hebcal]{report}|. -% \end{quote} -% -% Any Hebrew document which compiled under \LaTeX~2.09 should compile -% under compatibility mode, unless it uses low-level commands such as -% |\tenrm|. -% -% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules} -% -% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct -% \dst{} in generating the external files: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% newcode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_newcode.sty} \\ -% pccode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_p.sty} \\ -% oldcode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_oldcode.sty} -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \iffalse -% \subsection{A driver for this document} -% -% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for -% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you -% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by -% the \dst{} program. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\title{Hebrew \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility style files} -\author{Boris Lavva} -\date{Printed \today} -\begin{document} - \maketitle - \DocInput{heb209.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% \fi -% -% \subsection{Obsolete style files} -% -% For each of the Hebrew \LaTeX~2.09 Hebrew styles, we produce a -% file which uses correct input encoding and calls \babel\ with -% Hebrew and English language options. -% This means that any styles which say |\input hebrew_newcode.sty| -% or |\documentstyle[|\ldots|hebrew_newcode|\ldots|]{|\ldots|}| -% should still work. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*newcode|pccode|oldcode> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -%</newcode|pccode|oldcode> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*newcode> -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_newcode.sty} -\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc} -%</newcode> -%<*pccode> -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_p.sty} -\RequirePackage[cp862]{inputenc} -%</pccode> -%<*oldcode> -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_oldcode.sty} -\RequirePackage[si960]{inputenc} -%</oldcode> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*newcode|pccode|oldcode> -\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel} -%</newcode|pccode|oldcode> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a6a9d60c394..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,550 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{446} -% -% \iffalse -%<si960> \ProvidesFile{si960.def} -%<8859-8> \ProvidesFile{8859-8.def} -%<cp862> \ProvidesFile{cp862.def} -%<cp1255> \ProvidesFile{cp1255.def} -%<*driver> -\ProvidesFile{hebinp.drv} -%</driver> -% \fi -% \ProvidesFile{hebinp.dtx} - [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file] -% \iffalse meta-comment -%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -% -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -% \fi -% -% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}} -% \GetFileInfo{hebinp.dtx} -% -% \changes{hebinp~1.0a}{1997/12/07}{% -% Initial version. Provides 8859-8, cp862, cp1255, and old 7-bit -% input encodings (by Boris Lavva)} -% \changes{hebinp~1.1}{2001/02/27}{% -% Renamed hebrew letters: \cs{alef} to \cs{hebalef} etc. -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebinp~1.1a}{2001/07/22}{% -% Renamed CP1255 nikud \cs{patah} to \cs{hebpatah etc}. -% Added the macro \cs{DisableNikud} - may not be a good idea -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% -% \section{Hebrew input encodings}\label{sec:hebinp} -% -% Hebrew input encodings defined in file |hebinp.dtx|\footnote{The -% files described in this section have version number \fileversion\ -% and were last revised on \filedate.} should be used with |inputenc| -% \LaTeXe{} package. This package allows the user -% to specify an input encoding from this file (for example, ISO -% Hebrew/Latin 8859-8, IBM Hebrew codepage 862 or MS Windows -% Hebrew codepage 1255) by saying: -% \begin{quote} -% |\usepackage[|\emph{encoding name}|]{inputenc}| -% \end{quote} -% The encoding can also be selected in the document with: -% \begin{quote} -% |\inputencoding{|\emph{encoding name}|}| -% \end{quote} -% The only practical use of this command within a document is when -% using text from several documents to build up a composite work such -% as a volume of journal articles. Therefore this command will be -% used only in vertical mode. -% -% The encodings provided by this package are: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item |si960| 7-bit Hebrew encoding for the range 32--127. This -% encoding also known as ``old-code'' and defined by Israeli -% Standard SI-960. -% \item |8859-8| ISO 8859-8 Hebrew/Latin encoding commonly used in -% UNIX systems. This encoding also known as ``new-code'' and -% includes hebrew letters in positions starting from 224. -% \item |cp862| IBM 862 code page commonly used by DOS on -% IBM-compatible personal computers. This encoding also known as -% ``pc-code'' and includes hebrew letters in positions starting -% from 128. -% \item |cp1255| MS Windows 1255 (hebrew) code page which is similar to -% 8859-8. In addition to hebrew letters, this encoding contains -% also hebrew vowels and dots (nikud). -% \end{itemize} -% Each encoding has an associated |.def| file, for example -% |8859-8.def| which defines the behaviour of each input character, -% using the commands: -% \begin{quote} -% |\DeclareInputText{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{text}|}| \\ -% |\DeclareInputMath{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{math}|}| -% \end{quote} -% This defines the input character \emph{slot} to be the -% \emph{text} material or \emph{math} material respectively. -% For example, |8859-8.def| defines slots |"EA| (letter hebalef) -% and |"B5| ($\mu$) by saying: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef} -% \DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu} -%\end{verbatim} -% Note that the \emph{commands} should be robust, and should not be -% dependent on the output encoding. The same \emph{slot} should not -% have both a text and a math declaration for it. (This restriction -% may be removed in future releases of inputenc). -% -% The |.def| file may also define commands using the declarations:\\ -% |\providecommand| or |\ProvideTextCommandDefault|. -% For example, |8859-8.def| defines: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}} -% \DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter} -%\end{verbatim} -% The use of the `provide' forms here will ensure that a -% better definition will not be over-written; their use is -% recommended since, in general, the best defintion depends on the -% fonts available. -% -% See the documentation in |inputenc.dtx| for details of how to -% declare input definitions for various encodings. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \iffalse -% \subsection{A driver for this document} -% -% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for -% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you -% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by -% the \dst{} program. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\title{Hebrew input encodings for use with \LaTeXe} -\author{Boris Lavva} -\date{Printed \today} -\begin{document} - \maketitle - \DocInput{hebinp.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% \fi -% -% \subsection{Default definitions for characters} -% -% First, we insert a |\makeatletter| at the beginning of all |.def| -% files to use |@| symbol in the macros' names. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<-driver>\makeatletter -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some input characters map to internal functions which are not in -% either the |T1| or |OT1| font encoding. For this reason default -% definitions are provided in the encoding file: these will be -% used unless some other output encoding is used which supports -% those glyphs. In some cases this default defintion has to be -% simply an error message. -% -% Note that this works reasonably well only because the encoding -% files for both |OT1| and |T1| are loaded in the standard LaTeX -% format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}} -%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -%<*8859-8|cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}} -%</8859-8|cp1255> -%<*cp862|cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}} -%</cp862|cp1255> -%<*cp862> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textpeseta}{Pt} -%</cp862> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The name |\textblacksquare| is derived from the AMS symbol name -% since Adobe seem not to want this symbol. The default -% definition, as a rule, makes no claim to being a good design. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*cp862> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textblacksquare} - {\vrule \@width .3em \@height .4em \@depth -.1em\relax} -%</cp862> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some commands can't be faked, so we have them generate an error -% message. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen} -%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -%<*8859-8> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency} -%</8859-8> -%<*cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\newsheqel} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\newsheqel} -%</cp1255> -%<*8859-8|cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar} -%</8859-8|cp1255> -%<*cp1255> -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand} -%</cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Characters that are supposed to be used only in math will be defined -% by |\providecommand| because \LaTeXe{} assumes that the font -% encoding for math fonts is static. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8|cp1255> -\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}} -\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}} -%</8859-8|cp1255> -%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}} -%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255> -%<*cp862> -\providecommand{\mathordmasculine}{{^o}} -\providecommand{\mathordfeminine}{{^a}} -%</cp862> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The SI-960 encoding} -% -%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the -%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file. -% -% \subsection{The ISO 8859-8 encoding and the MS Windows cp1255 encoding} -% -% The |8859-8.def| encoding file defines the characters in the ISO -% 8859-8 encoding. -% -% The MS Windows Hebrew character set incorporates the Hebrew -% letter repertoire of ISO 8859-8, and uses the same code points -% (starting from 224). It has also some important additions in the -% 128--159 and 190--224 ranges. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*cp1255> -\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase} -\DeclareInputText{131}{\textflorin} -\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase} -\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots} -\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag} -\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag} -\DeclareInputText{136}{\^{}} -\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand} -\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft} -\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft} -\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright} -\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft} -\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright} -\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet} -\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash} -\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash} -\DeclareInputText{152}{\~{}} -\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark} -\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright} -%</cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8|cp1255> -\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace} -\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent} -\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds} -%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency} -%<+cp1255>\DeclareInputText{164}{\newsheqel} -\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen} -\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar} -\DeclareInputText{167}{\S} -\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}} -\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright} -%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputMath{170}{\times} -\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft} -\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot} -\DeclareInputText{173}{\-} -\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered} -\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}} -\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree} -\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm} -\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior} -\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}} -\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu} -\DeclareInputText{182}{\P} -\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered} -%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ } -\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior} -%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputMath{186}{\div} -\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright} -\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter} -\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf} -\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters} -%</8859-8|cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Hebrew vowels and dots (nikud) are included only to MS Windows cp1255 -% page and start from the position 192. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*cp1255> -\DeclareInputText{192}{\hebsheva} -\DeclareInputText{193}{\hebhatafsegol} -\DeclareInputText{194}{\hebhatafpatah} -\DeclareInputText{195}{\hebhatafqamats} -\DeclareInputText{196}{\hebhiriq} -\DeclareInputText{197}{\hebtsere} -\DeclareInputText{198}{\hebsegol} -\DeclareInputText{199}{\hebpatah} -\DeclareInputText{200}{\hebqamats} -\DeclareInputText{201}{\hebholam} -\DeclareInputText{203}{\hebqubuts} -\DeclareInputText{204}{\hebdagesh} -\DeclareInputText{205}{\hebmeteg} -\DeclareInputText{206}{\hebmaqaf} -\DeclareInputText{207}{\hebrafe} -\DeclareInputText{208}{\hebpaseq} -\DeclareInputText{209}{\hebshindot} -\DeclareInputText{210}{\hebsindot} -\DeclareInputText{211}{\hebsofpasuq} -\DeclareInputText{212}{\hebdoublevav} -\DeclareInputText{213}{\hebvavyod} -\DeclareInputText{214}{\hebdoubleyod} -%</cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Hebrew letters start from the position 224 in both encodings. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8|cp1255> -\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef} -\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet} -\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel} -\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet} -\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe} -\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav} -\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin} -\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet} -\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet} -\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod} -\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf} -\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf} -\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed} -\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem} -\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem} -\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun} -\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun} -\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh} -\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin} -\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe} -\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe} -\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi} -\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi} -\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof} -\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh} -\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin} -\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav} -%</8859-8|cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Special symbols which define the direction of symbols explicitly. -% Currently, they are not used in \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*cp1255> -\DeclareInputText{253}{\lefttorightmark} -\DeclareInputText{254}{\righttoleftmark} -%</cp1255> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The IBM code page 862} -% -% The |cp862.def| encoding file defines the characters in the IBM -% codepage 862 encoding. The DOS graphics `letters' and a few -% other positions are ignored (left undefined). -% -% Hebrew letters start from the position 128. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*cp862> -\DeclareInputText{128}{\hebalef} -\DeclareInputText{129}{\hebbet} -\DeclareInputText{130}{\hebgimel} -\DeclareInputText{131}{\hebdalet} -\DeclareInputText{132}{\hebhe} -\DeclareInputText{133}{\hebvav} -\DeclareInputText{134}{\hebzayin} -\DeclareInputText{135}{\hebhet} -\DeclareInputText{136}{\hebtet} -\DeclareInputText{137}{\hebyod} -\DeclareInputText{138}{\hebfinalkaf} -\DeclareInputText{139}{\hebkaf} -\DeclareInputText{140}{\heblamed} -\DeclareInputText{141}{\hebfinalmem} -\DeclareInputText{142}{\hebmem} -\DeclareInputText{143}{\hebfinalnun} -\DeclareInputText{144}{\hebnun} -\DeclareInputText{145}{\hebsamekh} -\DeclareInputText{146}{\hebayin} -\DeclareInputText{147}{\hebfinalpe} -\DeclareInputText{148}{\hebpe} -\DeclareInputText{149}{\hebfinaltsadi} -\DeclareInputText{150}{\hebtsadi} -\DeclareInputText{151}{\hebqof} -\DeclareInputText{152}{\hebresh} -\DeclareInputText{153}{\hebshin} -\DeclareInputText{154}{\hebtav} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareInputText{155}{\textcent} -\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds} -\DeclareInputText{157}{\textyen} -\DeclareInputText{158}{\textpeseta} -\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin} -\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a} -\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i} -\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o} -\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u} -\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n} -\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N} -\DeclareInputMath{166}{\mathordfeminine} -\DeclareInputMath{167}{\mathordmasculine} -\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown} -\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot} -\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf} -\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter} -\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown} -\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft} -\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareInputMath{224}{\alpha} -\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss} -\DeclareInputMath{226}{\Gamma} -\DeclareInputMath{227}{\pi} -\DeclareInputMath{228}{\Sigma} -\DeclareInputMath{229}{\sigma} -\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu} -\DeclareInputMath{231}{\tau} -\DeclareInputMath{232}{\Phi} -\DeclareInputMath{233}{\Theta} -\DeclareInputMath{234}{\Omega} -\DeclareInputMath{235}{\delta} -\DeclareInputMath{236}{\infty} -\DeclareInputMath{237}{\phi} -\DeclareInputMath{238}{\varepsilon} -\DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap} -\DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv} -\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm} -\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge} -\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le} -\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div} -\DeclareInputMath{247}{\approx} -\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree} -\DeclareInputText{249}{\textperiodcentered} -\DeclareInputText{250}{\textbullet} -\DeclareInputMath{251}{\surd} -\DeclareInputMath{252}{\mathnsuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior} -\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare} -\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace} -%</cp862> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DisableNikud} -% A utility macro to ignore any nikud character that may appear in the -% input. This allows you to ignore cp1255 nikud characters that happened to -% appear in the input. -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*8859-8> -\newcommand{\DisableNikud}{% - \DeclareInputText{192}{}% - \DeclareInputText{193}{}% - \DeclareInputText{194}{}% - \DeclareInputText{195}{}% - \DeclareInputText{196}{}% - \DeclareInputText{197}{}% - \DeclareInputText{198}{}% - \DeclareInputText{199}{}% - \DeclareInputText{200}{}% - \DeclareInputText{201}{}% - \DeclareInputText{203}{}% - \DeclareInputText{204}{}% - \DeclareInputText{205}{}% - \DeclareInputText{206}{}% - \DeclareInputText{207}{}% - \DeclareInputText{208}{}% - \DeclareInputText{209}{}% - \DeclareInputText{210}{}% - \DeclareInputText{211}{}% - \DeclareInputText{212}{}% - \DeclareInputText{213}{}% - \DeclareInputText{214}{}% -} -%</8859-8> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Finally, we reset the category code of the |@| sign at the end of -% all |.def| files. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<-driver>\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 19f0fbf0fc8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3329 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{3345} -% -% \iffalse meta-comment -%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -% -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -%<*calendar> -%% TeX & LaTeX macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one -%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Michail Rozman, misha@iop.tartu.ew.su -%% -%</calendar> -% \fi -% -% -% \iffalse -%<hebrew>\ProvidesFile{hebrew.ldf} -%<rightleft>\ProvidesFile{rlbabel.def} -%<calendar>\ProvidesPackage{hebcal} -%<*driver> -\ProvidesFile{hebrew.drv} -%</driver> -% \fi -% \ProvidesFile{hebrew.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v2.3h % -% \iffalse -%<hebrew> Hebrew language definition from the babel system -%<rightleft> Right-to-Left support from the babel system -%<calendar> Hebrew calendar -%<driver> Driver file for hebrew support -% \fi - Hebrew language support from the babel system] -% -% \iffalse -% \subsection{A driver for this document} -% -% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for -% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are -% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the \dst{} -% program. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\makeatletter -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code lines are numbered within sections, -% \begin{macrocode} -\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{section} -\renewcommand\theCodelineNo{% - \reset@font\scriptsize\thesection.\arabic{CodelineNo}} -% \end{macrocode} -% which should also be visible in the index; hence this -% redefinition of a macro from \file{doc.sty}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\codeline@wrindex[1]{\if@filesw - \immediate\write\@indexfile - {\string\indexentry{#1}% - {\number\c@section.\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The glossary environment is used or the change log, but its -% definition needs changing for this document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{theglossary}{% - \glossary@prologue% - \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}% - {} -\makeatother -\DisableCrossrefs -\CodelineIndex -\RecordChanges -\title{Hebrew language support from the \babel\ system} -\author{Boris Lavva} -\date{Printed \today} -\begin{document} - \maketitle - \tableofcontents - \DocInput{hebrew.dtx} - \DocInput{hebinp.dtx} - \DocInput{hebrew.fdd} - \DocInput{heb209.dtx} - \clearpage - \def\filename{index} - \PrintIndex - \clearpage - \def\filename{changes} - \PrintChanges -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% \fi -% -% \providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}} -% \providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \providecommand\XeT{X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT\@} -% \providecommand\scrunch{\setlength{\itemsep}{-.05in}} -% \GetFileInfo{hebrew.dtx} -% -% \changes{hebrew~0.1}{??/??/??}{% -% Preliminary \LaTeX\ Hebrew option (by Sergio Fogel)} -% \changes{hebrew~0.2}{??/??/??}{% -% Corrections and additions (by Rama Porrat)} -% \changes{hebrew~0.6}{??/??/??}{Additions (by Yael Dubinsky)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.2}{??/??/??}{% -% Bilingual tables, penalties, documentation and more changes -% (by Yaniv Bargury)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.30}{1992/05/15}{% -% Font selection, various (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.31}{1993/02/22}{Bug fixes (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.32}{1993/03/10}{Made font-change command -% for numbers `\cs{protect}'ed (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.33}{1993/03/11}{% -% Made \cs{refstepcounter} work using \cs{@ltor} (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.34}{1993/03/22}{% -% Moved font loading to another file. Added \cs{mainsec}. -% Made all text strings be produced by control codes (similar to -% \LaTeX 2.09 Mar '92). Fixed \cs{noindent} (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.35}{1993/03/22}{% -% Moved the texts to a file selected by the current encoding -% (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.36}{1993/03/24}{Use \TeX\ tricks to redefine -% \cs{theXXXX} without keeping old definitions. -% Use only \cs{@eng} for direction/font change (removed \cs{@ltor}). -% Switched from use of \cs{mainsec} to code taken from \babel\ -% system (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.37}{1993/03/28}{% -% Use \cs{add@around} in defining font size commands. Small bug -% fixes (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.38}{1993/04/20}{% -% \cs{everypar} changed so that \cs{noindent} works unmodified -% (by Alon Ziv, thanks to Chris Rowley)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.39}{1993/08/10}{% -% Redefined primitive sectioning commands. Changed \cs{include} so -% it finds \texttt{.h}, \texttt{.xet}, and \texttt{.ltx} files (no -% extension needed). Reinstated use of \cs{@ltor} (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.40}{1993/09/01}{Added the \cs{@brackets} hack -% (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.41}{1993/09/09}{% -% Reworked towards using NFSS2. Changed some macro names to be more -% logical: renamed \cs{@ltor} to \cs{@number}, \cs{@eng} to -% \cs{@latin}, and (in \texttt{hebrew.ldf}) \cs{@heb} to -% \cs{@hebrew} (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~1.42}{1993/09/22}{% -% Made list environments work better. Fixed thebibliography -% environment (by Alon Ziv)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.0a}{1998/01/01}{% -% Completely rewritten for \LaTeXe\ and \babel\ support. Various -% input and font encodings (with NFSS2) are supported too. The -% original \pkg{hebrew.sty} is divided to a number of packages and -% definition files for better readability and extensibility. Added -% some user- and code-level documentation inside the \texttt{.dtx} -% and \texttt{.fdd} files, and \LaTeX -driven installation with -% \pkg{hebrew.ins} (by Boris Lavva)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.1}{2000/11/23}{% -% corrections from Sivan Toledo: sender name in letter, and section name in -% headings. (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.2}{2000/12/11}{% -% renamed hebrew letters to heb* (e.g.: alef renamed to hebalef) -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3}{2001/02/27}{ -% added several \cs{@ifclassloaded}\{slides\} to allow the use of the -% slides class. (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3a}{2001/07/09}{ -% The documentation should now be built fine (broken since at least -% 2.1, and probably 2.0) (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3b}{2001/08/16}{ -% minor clean-ups. The documentation builds now with no warnings. -% Also removed \cs{R} from the caption macro (added in 2.1) -% Added internal \cs{@ensure@L} and \cs{@ensure@R} -% (Is there a real need for them? Maybe should they be exposed?) -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3c}{2001/10/05}{ -% a temporary fix to the \cs{gim} macro. Should be replaced by stuff -% from hebcal. -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3d}{2002/01/04}{ -% Initial support for the prosper class. Added \cs{arabicnorl} . -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3e}{2002/08/09}{ -% Removing hebtech from this distriution (not relevant to babel), -% added \cs{HeblatexEncoding}. some docs cleanup -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3f}{2002/12/26}{ -% redefined \cs{list} instead of redefining every environment -% that uses it. some pscolor handling, removed HeblatexEncoding -% (don't use 2.3e) (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebrew~2.3g}{2003/06/05}{ -% Reimplemented the printing of Hebrew numerals and Hebrew -% counters; modified \pkg{hebcal.sty} to use this implementation -% when typesetting Hebrew dates; added option |full| to package -% \pkg{hebcal}; also removed some gratuitous -% spaces inserted by \pkg{hebcal.sty} by adding comment marks. -% CAUTION: the changes to \pkg{hebcal.sty} make it dependent on -% \pkg{babel} and not useable as a stand-alone package. Is this a -% problem? (by Ron Artstein)} -% -% \section{The Hebrew language}\label{sec:hebrew} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The Hebrew language support -% files described in this section have version number \fileversion\ -% and were last revised on \filedate.} provides the following -% packages and files for Hebrew language support: -% \begin{description} -% \item[\file{hebrew.ldf}] file defines all the language-specific -% macros for the Hebrew language. -% \item[\file{rlbabel.def}] file is used by |hebrew.ldf| for -% bidirectional versions of the major \LaTeX{} commands and -% environments. It is designed to be used with other right-to-left -% languages, not only with Hebrew. -% \item[\pkg{hebcal.sty}] package defines a set of macros for -% computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one. -% \end{description} -% -% Additional Hebrew input and font encoding definition files that -% should be included and used with \file{hebrew.ldf} are: -% \begin{description} -% \item[\file{hebinp.dtx}] provides Hebrew input encodings, such as -% ISO 8859-8, MS Windows codepage 1255 or IBM PC codepage 862 -% (see Section~\ref{sec:hebinp} on page~\pageref{sec:hebinp}). -% \item[\file{hebrew.fdd}] contains Hebrew font encodings, related -% font definition files and \pkg{hebfont} package that -% provides Hebrew font switching commands (see -% Section~\ref{sec:hebfdd} on page~\pageref{sec:hebfdd} for -% further details). -% \end{description} -% -% \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility files are included with -% \file{heb209.dtx} and gives possibility to compile existing -% \LaTeX~2.09 Hebrew documents with small (if any) changes (see -% Section~\ref{sec:heb209} on page~\pageref{sec:heb209} for -% details). -% -% Finally, optional document class \pkg{hebtech} may be useful for -% writing theses and dissertations in both Hebrew and English (and -% any other languages included with \babel). It designed to meet -% requirements of the Graduate School of the Technion --- Israel -% Institute of Technology. -% -% \emph{As of version 2.3e hebtech is no longer distributed together -% with heblatex. It should be part of a new "hebclasses" package} -% -% \subsection{Acknowledgement} -% -% The following people have contributed to Hebrew package in one -% way or another, knowingly or unknowingly. In alphabetical order: -% Irina Abramovici, Yaniv Bargury, Yael Dubinsky, Sergio Fogel, -% Dan Haran, Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman, Alon Ziv. -% -% Tatiana Samoilov and Vitaly Surazhsky found a number of serious -% bugs in preliminary version of Hebrew package. -% -% A number of other people have contributed comments and -% information. Specific contributions are acknowledged within the -% document. -% -% I want to thank my wife, Vita, and son, Mishka, for their -% infinite love and patience. -% -% If you made a contribution and I haven't mentioned it, don't -% worry, it was an accident. I'm sorry. Just tell me and I will add -% you to the next version. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules} -% -% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct -% \dst{} in generating external files: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll} -% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\[4pt] -% hebrew & produce Hebrew language support file\\ -% rightleft & create right-to-left support file\\ -% calendar & create Hebrew calendar package -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like: -% \begin{quote} -% |\generateFile{hebrew.ldf}{t}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{hebrew}}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \subsection{Hebrew language definitions} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the |@| -% sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hebrew> -\LdfInit{hebrew}{captionshebrew} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, |hebrew| will be an `unknown' language, in which case we -% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@hebrew| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@hebrew\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Hebrew}% - \adddialect\l@hebrew0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebrewencoding} -% \emph{FIX DOCS REGARDING 8BIT} -% -% Typesetting Hebrew texts implies that a special input and output -% encoding needs to be used. Generally, the user may choose -% between different available Hebrew encodings provided. The -% current support for Hebrew uses all available fonts from the -% Hebrew University of Jerusalem encoded in `old-code' 7-bit -% encoding also known as Israeli Standard SI-960. We define for -% these fonts the Local Hebrew Encoding |LHE| (see the file -% |hebrew.fdd| for more details), and the |LHE| encoding definition -% file should be loaded by default. -% -% Other fonts are available in windows-cp1255 (a superset of ISO-8859-8 -% with nikud). For those, the encoding |HE8| should be used. Such fonts -% are, e.g., windows' TrueType fonts (once cnverted to Type1 or MetaFont) -% and IBM's Type1 fonts. -% -% However, if an user wants to use another font encoding, for -% example, cyrillic encoding T2 and extended latin encoding T1, --- -% he/she has to load the corresponding file \emph{before} the -% \pkg{hebrew} package. This may be done in the following way: -% \begin{quote} -% |\usepackage[LHE,T2,T1]{fontenc}|\\ -% |\usepackage[hebrew,russian,english]{babel}| -% \end{quote} -% We make sure that the |LHE| encoding is known to \LaTeX{} at end -% of this package. -% -% Also note that if you want to use the encoding |HE8| , you should define -% the following in your document, \emph{before loading babel}: -% \begin{quote} -% |\def\HeblatexEncoding{HE8}|\\ -% |\def\HeblatexEncodingFile{he8enc}| -% \end{quote} -% \changes{hebrew-2.3h}{2004/02/20}{Make LHE the default encoding for -% compatibility reasons} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand{\HeblatexEncoding}{LHE}% -\providecommand{\HeblatexEncodingFile}{lheenc}% -\newcommand{\heblatex@set@encoding}[2]{ -} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifpackageloaded{fontenc}{% - \@ifl@aded{def}{% - \HeblatexEncodingFile}{\def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}}{}% - }{% - \input{\HeblatexEncodingFile.def}% - \def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}% - }} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We also need to load inputenc package with one of the Hebrew -% input encodings. By default, we set up the |8859-8| codepage. -% If an user wants to use many input encodings in the same -% document, for example, the MS Windows Hebrew codepage |cp1255| -% and the standard IBM PC Russian codepage |cp866|, he/she has to -% load the corresponding file \emph{before} the hebrew package -% too. This may be done in the following way: -% \begin{quote} -% |\usepackage[cp1255,cp866]{inputenc}|\\ -% |\usepackage[hebrew,russian,english]{babel}| -% \end{quote} -% -% An user can switch input encodings in the document using the -% command |\inputencoding|, for example, to use the |cp1255|: -% \begin{quote} -% |\inputencoding{cp1255}| -% \end{quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Hebrew language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebrewhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. They are set -% to~2. -% \changes{hebrew~2.0b}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionshebrew} -% The macro |\captionshebrew| replaces all captions used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeXe with their Hebrew -% equivalents. -% \changes{hebrew-2.0b}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionshebrew{% - \def\prefacename{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebbet\hebvav\hebalef}}% - \def\refname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebmem\hebqof\hebvav\hebresh\hebvav\hebtav}}% - \def\abstractname{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebqof\hebtsadi\hebyod\hebresh}}% - \def\bibname{\@ensure@R{\hebbet\hebyod\hebbet\heblamed\hebyod\hebvav% - \hebgimel\hebresh\hebpe\hebyod\hebhe}}% - \def\chaptername{\@ensure@R{\hebpe\hebresh\hebqof}}% - \def\appendixname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun\hebsamekh\hebpe\hebhet}}% - \def\contentsname{\@ensure@R{% - \hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % - \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% - \def\listfigurename{\@ensure@R{% - \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% - \def\listtablename{\@ensure@R{% - \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ - \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% - \def\indexname{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebpe\hebtav\hebhet}}% - \def\figurename{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh}}% - \def\tablename{\@ensure@R{\hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebhe}}% - \def\partname{\@ensure@R{\hebhet\heblamed\hebqof}}% - \def\enclname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}% - \def\ccname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof\hebyod% - \hebfinalmem}}% - \def\headtoname{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\heblamed}}% - \def\pagename{\@ensure@R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}% - \def\psname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun.\hebbet.}}% - \def\seename{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe}}% - \def\alsoname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe \hebgimel% - \hebmemesof}}% - \def\proofname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebvav\hebkaf\hebhet\hebhe}} - \def\glossaryname{\@ensure@L{Glossary}}% <-- Needs translation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\slidelabel} -% Here we fix the macro |slidelabel| of the seminar package. Note -% that this still won't work well enough when overlays will be -% involved -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{seminar}{% - \def\slidelabel{\bf \if@rl\R{\hebshin\hebqof\hebfinalpe{} \theslide}% - \else\L{Slide \theslide}% - \fi}% -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here we provide an user with translation of Gregorian dates -% to Hebrew. In addition, the \pkg{hebcal} package can be used -% to create Hebrew calendar dates. -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebmonth} -% The macro |\hebmonth{|\emph{month}|}| produces month names in -% Hebrew. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hebmonth#1{% - \ifcase#1\or \hebyod\hebnun\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or % - \hebpe\hebbet\hebresh\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or % - \hebmem\hebresh\hebfinaltsadi\or % - \hebalef\hebpe\hebresh\hebyod\heblamed\or % - \hebmem\hebalef\hebyod\or \hebyod\hebvav\hebnun\hebyod\or % - \hebyod\hebvav\heblamed\hebyod\or % - \hebalef\hebvav\hebgimel\hebvav\hebsamekh\hebtet\or % - \hebsamekh\hebpe\hebtet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebalef\hebvav\hebqof\hebtet\hebvav\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebnun\hebvav\hebbet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebdalet\hebtsadi\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebdate} -% The macro |\hebdate{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}|}{|\emph{year}|}| -% translates a given Gregorian date to Hebrew. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hebdate#1#2#3{% - \beginR\beginL\number#1\endL\ \hebbet\hebmonth{#2} - \beginL\number#3\endL\endR} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebday} -% The macro |\hebday| will replace |\today| command when in Hebrew -% mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hebday{\hebdate{\day}{\month}{\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datehebrew} -% The macro |\datehebrew| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Gregorian dates in Hebrew. It uses the macro |\hebday|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datehebrew{\let\today=\hebday} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\extrashebrew| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Hebrew language. The macro |\noextrashebrew| -% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrashebrew|. -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrashebrew} -% We switch font encoding to Hebrew and direction to -% right-to-left. We cannot use the regular language switching -% commands (for example, |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| or -% |\selectlanguage{hebrew}|), when in restricted horizontal mode, -% because it will result in \emph{unbalanced} |\beginR| or -% |\beginL| primitives. -% Instead, in \TeX 's restricted horizontal mode, the -% |\L{|\emph{latin text}|}| and |\R{|\emph{hebrew text}|}|, or -% |\embox{|\emph{latin text}|}| and |\hmbox{|\emph{hebrew text}|}| -% should be used. -% -% Hence, we use |\beginR| and |\beginL| switching commands only -% when not in restricted horizontal mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrashebrew{% - \tohebrew% - \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginR\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\noextrashebrew} -% The macro |\noextrashebrew| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrashebrew|. We switch back to the previous font encoding and -% restore left-to-right direction. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrashebrew{% - \fromhebrew% - \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginL\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Generally, we can switch to- and from- Hebrew by means of -% standard \babel -defined commands, for example, -% \begin{quote} -% |\selectlanguage{hebrew}| -% \end{quote} -% or -% \begin{quote} -% |\begin{otherlanguage}{hebrew}|\\ -% \hspace*{1.5em} some Hebrew text\\ -% |\end{otherlanguage}| -% \end{quote} -% Now we define two additional commands that offer the possibility -% to switch to and from Hebrew language. These commands are -% backward compatible with the previous versions of -% \pkg{hebrew.sty}. -% -% \begin{macro}{\sethebrew} -% \begin{macro}{\unsethebrew} -% The command |\sethebrew| will switch from the current font encoding -% to the hebrew font encoding, and from the current direction of -% text to the right-to-left mode. The command |\unsethebrew| switches -% back. -% -% Both commands use standard right-to-left switching macros -% |\setrllanguage{|\emph{ r2l language name}|}| and -% |\unsetrllanguage{|\emph{r2l language name}|}|, that -% defined in the \file{rlbabel.def} file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sethebrew{\setrllanguage{hebrew}} -\def\unsethebrew{\unsetrllanguage{hebrew}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebrewtext} -% \begin{macro}{\nohebrewtext} -% The following two commands are \emph{obsolete} and work only -% in \LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode. They are synonyms of -% |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| defined above. -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@compatibility - \let\hebrewtext=\sethebrew - \let\nohebrewtext=\unsethebrew -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tohebrew} -% \begin{macro}{\fromhebrew} -% These two commands change only the current font encoding to- and -% from- Hebrew encoding. Their implementation uses -% |\@torl{|\emph{language name}|}| and |\@fromrl| macros defined in -% \file{rlbabel.def} file. Both commands may be useful \emph{only} -% for package and class writers, not for regular users. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tohebrew{\@torl{hebrew}}% -\def\fromhebrew{\@fromrl} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@hebrew} -% Sometimes we need to preserve Hebrew mode without knowing in -% which environment we are located now. For these cases, the -% |\@hebrew{|\emph{hebrew text}|}| macro will be useful. Not that -% this macro is similar to the |\@number| and |\@latin| macros -% defined in \file{rlbabel.def} file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@hebrew#1{\beginR{{\tohebrew#1}}\endR} -\def\@hebrew{\protect\@@hebrew} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew numerals} -% -% We provide commands to print numbers in the traditional -% notation using Hebrew letters. We need commands that print -% a Hebrew number from a decimal input, as well as commands -% to print the value of a counter as a Hebrew number. -% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@apost} -% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@final} -% Hebrew numbers can be written in various styles: with or without -% apostrophes, and with the letters kaf, mem, nun, pe, tsadi as either -% final or initial forms when they are the last letters in the -% sequence. We provide two flags to set the style options. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@gim@apost % whether we print apostrophes -\newif\if@gim@final % whether we use final or initial letters -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\hebrewnumeral} -% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewnumeral} -% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewnumeralfinal} -% The commands that print a Hebrew number -% must specify the style locally: relying on a global style -% option could cause a counter to -% print in an inconsistent manner---for instance, page numbers -% might appear in different styles if the global style option -% changed mid-way through a document. -% The commands only allow three of the four possible flag -% combinations (I do not know of a use that requires the -% combination of final letters and no apostrophes --RA). -% -% Each command sets the style flags and calls |\@hebrew@numeral|. -% Double braces are used in order to protect the values of -% |\@tempcnta| and |\@tempcntb|, which are changed by this call; -% they also keep the flag assignments local (this is not important -% because the global values are never used). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\hebrewnumeral}[1] % no apostrophe, no final letters - {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@apostfalse\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeral}[1] % apostrophe, no final letters - {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeralfinal}[1] % apostrophe, final letters - {{\@gim@finaltrue\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\alph} -% \begin{macro}{\@alph} -% \begin{macro}{\Alph} -% \begin{macro}{\@Alph} -% \begin{macro}{\Alphfinal} -% \begin{macro}{\@Alphfinal} -% Counter-printing commands are based on the above commands. The -% natural name for the counter-printing commands is |\alph|, because -% Hebrew numerals are the only way to represent numbers with -% Hebrew letters (kaf always means~20, never~11). Hebrew has no -% uppercase letters, hence no need for the familiar meaning of |\Alph|; -% we therefore define |\alph| to print counters as Hebrew numerals -% without apostrophes, and |\Alph| to print with apostrophes. A third -% form, |\Alphfinal|, is provided to print with apostrophes and final -% letters, as is required for Hebrew year designators. The commands -% |\alph| and |\Alph| are defined in \pkg{latex.ltx}, and we only -% need to redefine the internal commands |\@alph| and -% |\@Alph|; for |\Alphfinal| we need to provide both a wrapper and -% an internal command. -% The counter printing commands are made semi-robust: without the -% |\protect|, commands like |\theenumii| break (I'm not quite clear -% on why this happens, --RA); at the same time, we cannot make the -% commands too robust (e.g.~with |\DeclareRobustCommand|) because -% this would enter the command name rather than its value into -% files like |.aux|, |.toc| etc\@. -% The old meanings of meaning of |\@alph| and |\@Alph| are saved -% upon entering Hebrew mode and restored upon exiting it. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrashebrew{% - \let\saved@alph=\@alph% - \let\saved@Alph=\@Alph% - \renewcommand*{\@alph}[1]{\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}% - \renewcommand*{\@Alph}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}% - \def\Alphfinal#1{\expandafter\@Alphfinal\csname c@#1\endcsname}% - \providecommand*{\@Alphfinal}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeralfinal{\number#1}}} -\addto\noextrashebrew{% - \let\@alph=\saved@alph% - \let\@Alph=\saved@Alph} -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that |\alph| (without apostrophes) is already the -% appropriate choice for the second-level enumerate label, and -% |\Alph| (with apostrophes) is an appropriate choice for appendix; -% however, the default \LaTeX\ labels need to be redefined for -% appropriate cross-referencing, see below. -% \LaTeX\ default class files specify |\Alph| for -% the fourth-level enumerate level, this should probably be changed. -% Also, the way labels get flushed left by default looks inappropriate -% for Hebrew numerals, so we should redefine |\labelenumii| as well -% as |\labelenumiv| (presently not implemented). -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\theenumii} -% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv} -% \begin{macro}{\label} -% Cross-references to counter labels need to be printed according -% to the language environment in which a label was issued, not -% the environment in which it is called: for example, a label~(1b) -% issued in a Latin environment should be referred to as~(1b) in a -% Hebrew text, and label~(2dalet) issued in a Hebrew environment -% should be referred to as~(2dalet) in a Latin text. This was the -% unanimous opinion in a poll sent to the Ivri\TeX\ list. -% We therefore redefine |\theenumii| and |\theenumiv|, so that an -% explicit language instruction gets written to the |.aux| file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand{\theenumii} - {\if@rl\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumii}% - \else\protect\L{\protect\@@alph{\number\c@enumii}}\fi} -\renewcommand{\theenumiv} - {\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumiv}% - \else\protect\L{\protect\@@Alph{\number\c@enumiv}}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% We also need to control for the font and direction in which a -% counter label is printed. Direction is straightforward: a Latin -% label like~(1b) should be written left-to-right when called in a -% Hebrew text, and a Hebrew label like~(2dalet) should be written -% right-to-left when called in a Latin text. The font question is -% more delicate, because we should decide whether the numerals -% should be typeset in the font of the language enviroment in which -% the label was issued, or that of the environment in which it is -% called. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% A purely numeric label like~(23) looks best if it is set in the -% font of the surrounding language. -% \item -% But a mixed alphanumeric label like~(1b) lookes weird if -% the~`1' is taken from the Hebrew font; likewise, (2dalet) looks -% weird if the~`2' is taken from a Latin font. -% \item -% Finally, mixing the two possibilities is worst, because a -% single Hebrew sentence referring to examples~(1b) and~(2) would -% take the~`1' from the Latin font and the~`2' from the Hebrew -% font, and this looks really awful. (It is also very hard to -% implement). -% \end{itemize} -% In light of the conflicting considerations it seems like there's -% no perfect solution. I have chosen to implement the top option, -% where numerals are taken from the font of the surrounding -% language, because it seems to me that reference to purely numeric -% labels is the most common, so this gives a good solution to the -% majority of cases and a mediocre solution to the minority. -% -% We redefine the |\label| command which writes to the -% |.aux| file. Depending on the language environment we issue -% appropriate |\beginR/L|$\cdots$|\endR/L| commands to control the -% direction without affecting the font. Since these commands do not -% affect the value of |\if@rl|, we cannot use the macro -% |\@brackets| to determine the correct brackets to be used with -% |\p@enumiii|; instead, we let the language environment determine an -% explicit definition. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\label#1{\@bsphack - \if@rl - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii)\theenumii(}% - \protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginR\@currentlabel\endR}{\thepage}}}% - \else - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii(\theenumii)}% - \protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginL\@currentlabel\endL}{\thepage}}}% - \fi - \@esphack} -% \end{macrocode} -% NOTE: it appears that the definition of |\label| is -% language-independent and thus belongs in \pkg{rlbabel.def}, but -% this is not the case. The decision to typeset label numerals -% in the font of the surrounding language is reasonable for Hebrew, -% because mixed-font (1b) and (2dalet) are somewhat acceptable. The -% same may not be acceptable for Arabic, whose numeral glyphs are -% radically different from those in the Latin fonts. The decision -% about the direction may also be different for Arabic, which is -% more right-to-left oriented than Hebrew (two examples: dates like -% 15/6/2003 are written left-to-right in Hebrew but right-to-left -% in Arabic; equations like $1+2=3$ are written left-to-right in -% Hebrew but right-to-left in Arabic elementary school textbooks -% using Arabic numeral glyphs). My personal hunch is that a label -% like~(1b) in an Arabic text would be typeset left-to-right if -% the~`1' is a Western glyph, but right-to-left if the~`1' is an -% Arabic glyph. But this is just a guess, I'd have to ask Arab -% typesetters to find the correct answer. --RA. -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% The following code provides for the proper printing of appendix -% numbers in tables of contents. Section and chapter headings are -% normally bilingual: regardless of the text language, the author -% supplies each section/chapter with two headings---one for the -% Hebrew table of contents and one for the Latin table of contents. -% It makes sense that the label should be a Latin letter in the -% Latin table of contents and a Hebrew letter in the Hebrew table -% of contents. The definition is similar to that of |\theenumii| -% and |\theenumiv| above, but additional |\protect| commands ensure -% that the entire condition is written the |.aux| file. The -% appendix number will therefore be typeset according to the -% environment in which it is used rather than issued: a Hebrew -% number (with apostrophes) in a Hebrew environment and a Latin -% capital letter in a Latin environment (the command -% |\@@Alph| is set in \pkg{rlbabel.def} to hold the default meaning -% of \LaTeX\ [latin] |\@Alph|, regardless of the mode in which it is -% issued). The net result is that -% the second appendix will be marked with~`B' in the Latin table of -% contents and with `bet' in the Hebrew table of contents; the mark -% in the main text will depend on the language of the appendix itself. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \let\@@appendix=\appendix% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix% - \renewcommand\thesection - {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@section}% - \protect\else\@@Alph\c@section\protect\fi}}} - {\renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix% - \renewcommand\thechapter - {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@chapter}% - \protect\else\@@Alph\c@chapter\protect\fi}}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% QUESTION: is this also the appropriate way to refer to an -% appendix in the text, or should we retain the original label the -% same way we did with |enumerate| labels? -% ANOTHER QUESTION: are similar redefinitions needed for other -% counters that generate texts in bilingual lists like |.lof/.fol| -% and |.lot/.tol|? --RA. -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@hebrew@numeral} -% The command |\@hebrew@numeral| prints a Hebrew number. The groups -% of thousands, millions, billions are separated by apostrophes and -% typeset without apostrophes or final letters; the remainder -% (under 1000) is typeset conventionally, with the selected styles -% for apostrophes and final letters. -% The function calls on |\gim@no@mil| to typeset each -% three-digit block. The algorithm -% is recursive, but the maximum recursion depth is~4 because \TeX\ -% only allows numbers up to $2^{31}-1 = 2{,}147{,}483{,}647$. -% The typesetting routine is wrapped in |\@hebrew| in order to -% ensure that numbers are always typeset in Hebrew mode. -% -% Initialize: |\@tempcnta| holds the value, |\@tempcntb| is used for -% calculations. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@hebrew@numeral}[1] -{\@hebrew{\@tempcnta=#1\@tempcntb=#1\relax - \divide\@tempcntb by 1000 -% \end{macrocode} -% If we're under 1000, call |\gim@nomil| -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\@tempcntb=0\gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% If we're above 1000 then force no apostrophe and no final letter -% styles for the value above~1000, recur for the value above~1000, -% add an apostrophe, and call |\gim@nomil| for the remainder. -% \begin{macrocode} - \else{\@gim@apostfalse\@gim@finalfalse\@hebrew@numeral\@tempcntb}'% - \multiply\@tempcntb by 1000\relax - \advance\@tempcnta by -\@tempcntb\relax - \gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax - \fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -% NOTE: is it the case that 15,000 and 16,000 are written as -% yod-he and yod-vav, rather than tet-vav and tet-zayin? This -% vaguely rings a bell, but I'm not certain. If this is the case, -% then the current behavior is incorrect and should be changed. --RA. -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\gim@nomil} -% The command |\gim@nomil| typesets an integer between 0~and~999 -% (for~0 it typesets nothing). The code has been modified from the -% old |hebcal.sty| -% (appropriate credits---Boris Lavva and Michail Rozman ?). -% |\@tempcnta| holds the total value that remains to be typeset. -% At each stage we find the highest valued letter that is -% less than or equal to |\@tempcnta|, and call on |\gim@print| to -% subtract this value and print the letter. -% -% Initialize: |\@tempcnta| holds the value, there is no previous -% letter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\gim@nomil}[1]{\@tempcnta=#1\@gim@prevfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% Find the hundreds digit. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 100\relax % hundreds digit - \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no hundreds - \or\gim@print{100}{\hebqof}% - \or\gim@print{200}{\hebresh}% - \or\gim@print{300}{\hebshin}% - \or\gim@print{400}{\hebtav}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{500}{\hebqof}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{600}{\hebresh}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{700}{\hebshin}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{800}{\hebtav}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\hebtav\gim@print{900}{\hebqof}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Find the tens digit. The numbers 15 and 16 are traditionally -% printed as tet-vav ($9+6$) and tet-zayin ($9+7$) to avoid -% spelling the Lord's name. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 10\relax % tens digit - \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no tens - \or % number between 10 and 19 - \ifnum\@tempcnta = 16 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-zayin - \else\ifnum\@tempcnta = 15 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-vav - \else \gim@print{10}{\hebyod}% - \fi % \@tempcnta = 15 - \fi % \@tempcnta = 16 -% \end{macrocode} -% Initial or final forms are selected according to the current -% style option; |\gim@print| will force a non-final letter in -% non-final position by means of a local style change. -% \begin{macrocode} - \or\gim@print{20}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalkaf\else\hebkaf\fi}% - \or\gim@print{30}{\heblamed}% - \or\gim@print{40}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalmem\else\hebmem\fi}% - \or\gim@print{50}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalnun\else\hebnun\fi}% - \or\gim@print{60}{\hebsamekh}% - \or\gim@print{70}{\hebayin}% - \or\gim@print{80}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalpe\else\hebpe\fi}% - \or\gim@print{90}{\if@gim@final\hebfinaltsadi\else\hebtsadi\fi}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Print the ones digit. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifcase\@tempcnta % print nothing if no ones - \or\gim@print{1}{\hebalef}% - \or\gim@print{2}{\hebbet}% - \or\gim@print{3}{\hebgimel}% - \or\gim@print{4}{\hebdalet}% - \or\gim@print{5}{\hebhe}% - \or\gim@print{6}{\hebvav}% - \or\gim@print{7}{\hebzayin}% - \or\gim@print{8}{\hebhet}% - \or\gim@print{9}{\hebtet}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\gim@print} -% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@prev} -% The actual printing routine typesets a digit with the appropriate -% apostrophes: if a number sequence consists of a -% single letter then it is followed by a single apostrophe, and if -% it consists of more than one letter then a double -% apostrophe is inserted before the last letter. -% We typeset the letters one at a time, keeping a flag that tells -% us if any previous letters had been typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@gim@prev % flag if a previous letter has been typeset -% \end{macrocode} -% For each letter, we -% first subtract its value from the total. Then, -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% if the result is zero then this is the last letter; we check -% the flag to see if this is the only letter and print it with -% the appropriate apostrophe; -% \item -% if the result is not zero then there remain additional letters -% to be typeset; we print without an apostrophe and set the -% `previous letter' flag. -% \end{itemize} -% |\@tempcnta| holds the total value that remains to be typeset. -% We first deduct the letter's value from |\@tempcnta|, -% so |\@tempcnta| is zero if and only if this is the last letter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\gim@print}[2]{% #2 is a letter, #1 is its value. - \advance\@tempcnta by -#1\relax% deduct the value from the remainder -% \end{macrocode} -% If this is the last letter, we print with the appropriate -% apostrophe (depending on the style option): -% if there is a preceding letter, print |"x| if the style calls for -% apostrophes, |x| if it doesn't; -% otherwise, this is the only letter: print |x'| if the style calls -% for apostrophes, |x| if it doesn't. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\@tempcnta=0% if this is the last letter - \if@gim@prev\if@gim@apost"\fi#2% - \else#2\if@gim@apost'\fi\fi% -% \end{macrocode} -% If this is not the last letter: print a non-final form (by -% forcing a local style option) and set the `previous letter' flag. -% \begin{macrocode} - \else{\@gim@finalfalse#2}\@gim@prevtrue\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hebr} -% \begin{macro}{\gim} -% The older Hebrew counter commands |\hebr| and |\gim| are retained -% in order to keep older documents from breaking. They are set to -% be equivalent to |\alph|, and their use is deprecated. Note that -% |\hebr| gives different results than it had in the past---it -% now typesets 11 as yod-alef rather than kaf. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\hebr=\alph -\let\gim=\alph -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% For backward compatibility with `older' \pkg{hebrew.sty} -% packages, we define Hebrew equivalents of some useful \LaTeX\ -% commands. Note, however, that 8-bit macros defined in Hebrew -% are no longer supported. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hebcopy{\protect\R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof}} -\def\hebincl{\protect\R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}} -\def\hebpage{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}} -\def\hebto{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebdalet}} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\hadgesh| produce ``poor man's bold'' (heavy printout), when -% used with normal font glyphs. It is advisable to use bold font -% (for example, \emph{Dead Sea}) instead of this macro. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hadgesh#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}% - \kern-.025em\copy0\kern-\wd0 - \kern.05em\copy0\kern-\wd0 - \kern-.025em\raise.0433em\box0 } -% \end{macrocode} -% |\piska| and |\piskapiska| sometimes used in `older' hebrew -% sources, and should not be used in \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@compatibility - \def\piska#1{\item{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent} - \def\piskapiska#1{\itemitem{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The following commands are simply synonyms for the standard ones, -% provided with \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\makafgadol=\textendash -\let\makafanak=\textemdash -\let\geresh=\textquoteright -\let\opengeresh=\textquoteright -\let\closegeresh=\textquoteleft -\let\openquote=\textquotedblright -\let\closequote=\textquotedblleft -\let\leftquotation=\textquotedblright -\let\rightquotation=\textquotedblleft -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need to ensure that Hebrew is used as the default -% right-to-left language at |\begin{document}|. The mechanism of -% defining the |\@rllanguagename| is the same as in \babel 's -% |\languagename|: the last right-to-left language in the -% |\usepackage{babel}| line is set as the default right-to-left -% language at document beginning. -% -% For example, the following code: -% \begin{quote} -% |\usepackage[russian,hebrew,arabic,greek,english]{babel}| -% \end{quote} -% will set the Arabic language as the default right-to-left -% language and the English language as the default language. -% As a result, the commands |\L{}| and |\embox{}| will use English -% and |\R{}| and |\hmbox{}| will use Arabic by default. These -% defaults can be changed with the next |\sethebrew| or -% |\selectlanguage{|\emph{language name}|}| command. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\def\@rllanguagename{hebrew}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration -% file, setting the main language to be switched on at -% |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of |@| to its -% original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{hebrew} -%</hebrew> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Right to left support} -% -% This file \pkg{rlbabel.def} defines necessary bidirectional macro -% support for \LaTeXe. It is designed for use not only with Hebrew, -% but with any Right-to-Left languages, supported by \babel. The -% macros provided in this file are language and encoding -% independent. -% -% Right-to-left languages will use \TeX\ extensions, namely \TeX\ -% primitives |\beginL|, |\endL| and |\beginR|, |\endR|, currently -% implemented only in $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ and in \TeX{-}{-}\XeT. -% -% If $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ is used, we should switch it to the -% \emph{enhanced} mode: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*rightleft> -\ifx\TeXXeTstate\undefined\else% - \TeXXeTstate=1 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Note, that $\varepsilon$-\TeX 's format file should be created -% for \emph{extended} mode. Mode can be checked by running -% $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ on some \TeX{} file, for example: -% \begin{quote} -% |This is e-TeX, Version 3.14159-1.1 (Web2c 7.0)|\\ -% |entering extended mode| -% \end{quote} -% The second line should be \texttt{entering extended mode}. -% -% We check if user uses Right-to-Left enabled engine instead of -% regular Knuth's \TeX: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\beginL\@undefined% - \newlinechar`\^^J - \typeout{^^JTo avoid this error message,^^J% - run TeX--XeT or e-TeX engine instead of regular TeX.^^J} - \errmessage{Right-to-Left Support Error: use TeX--XeT or e-TeX - engine}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Switching from LR to RL mode and back} -% -% \cs{@torl} and \cs{@fromrl} are called each time the horizontal -% direction changes. They do all that is necessary besides changing -% the direction. Currently their task is to change the encoding -% information and mode (condition \cs{if@rl}). They should not -% normally be called by users: user-level macros, such as -% \cs{sethebrew} and \cs{unsethebrew}, as well as \babel 's -% \cs{selectlanguage} are defined in language-definition files and -% should be used to change default language (and direction). -% -% Local direction changing commands (for small pieces of text): -% |\L{}|, |\R{}|, |\embox{}| and |\hmbox{}| are defined below in -% this file in language-independent manner. -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@rl} -% \begin{description}\scrunch -% \item[|\@rltrue|] means that the main mode is currently -% Right-to-Left. -% \item[|\@rlfalse|] means that the main mode is currently -% Left-to-Right. -% \end{description} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@rl -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@rlmain} -% This is the main direction of the document. Unlike |\if@rl| -% it is set once and never changes. -% \begin{description}\scrunch -% \item[|\@rltrue|] means that the document is Right-to-Left. -% \item[|\@rlfalse|] means that the document is Left-to-Right. -% \end{description} -% Practically |\if@rlmain| is set according to the value of |\if@rl| -% in the beginning of the run. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% Here we set the main document direction - \newif\if@rlmain% - \if@rl% e.g: if the options to babel were [english,hebrew] - \@rlmaintrue% - \else% e.g: if the options to babel were [hebrew,english] - \@rlmainfalse% - \fi% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@torl} -% Switches current direction to Right-to-Left: saves current -% Left-to-Right encoding in |\lr@encodingdefault|, sets required -% Right-to-Left language name in |\@rllanguagename| (similar to -% \babel 's |\languagename|) and changes derection. -% -% The Right-to-Left language encoding should be defined in |.ldf| -% file as special macro created by concatenation of the language -% name and string \texttt{encoding}, for example, for Hebrew it -% will be |\hebrewencoding|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\@torl}[1]{% - \if@rl\else% - \let\lr@encodingdefault=\encodingdefault% - \fi% - \def\@rllanguagename{#1}% - \def\encodingdefault{\csname#1encoding\endcsname}% - \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}% - \selectfont% - \@rltrue} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@fromrl} -% Opposite to |\@torl|, switches current direction to -% Left-to-Right: restores saved Left-to-Right encoding -% (|\lr@encodingdefault|) and changes direction. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fromrl}{% - \if@rl% - \let\encodingdefault=\lr@encodingdefault% - \fi% - \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}% - \selectfont% - \@rlfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage} -% This standard \babel 's macro should be redefined to support -% bidirectional tables. We divide |\selectlanguage| implementation -% to two parts, and the first part calls the second -% |\@@selectlanguage|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% - \edef\languagename{% - \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty - \else \string#1\@empty\fi}% - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@@selectlanguage} -% This new internal macro redefines a final part of the standard -% \babel 's |\select|\-|language| implementation. -% -% Standard \LaTeX\ provides us with 3 tables: Table of Contents -% (|.toc|), List of Figures (|.lof|), and List of Tables -% (|.lot|). In multi-lingual texts mixing Left-to-Right languages -% with Right-to-Left ones, the use of various directions in one -% table results in very ugly output. Therefore, these 3 standard -% tables will be used now only for Left-to-Right languages, and we -% will add 3 Right-to-Left tables (their extensions are simply -% reversed ones): RL Table of Contents (|.cot|), RL List of Figures -% (|.fol|), and RL List of Tables (|.lof|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@selectlanguage#1{% - \select@language{#1}% - \if@filesw - \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{#1}}% - \if@rl% - \addtocontents{cot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{fol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{tol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \else% - \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \fi% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\setrllanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\unsetrllanguage} -% The |\setrllanguage| and |\unsetrllanguage| pair of macros is -% proved to very useful in bilingual texts, for example, in -% Hebrew-English texts. The language-specific commands, for example, -% |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| use these macros as basis. -% -% Implementation saves and restores other language in -% |\other@languagename| variable, and uses internal macro -% |\@@selectlanguage|, defined above, to switch between languages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\other@languagename=\languagename -\DeclareRobustCommand{\setrllanguage}[1]{% - \if@rl\else% - \let\other@languagename=\languagename% - \fi% - \def\languagename{#1}% - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\unsetrllanguage}[1]{% - \if@rl% - \let\languagename=\other@languagename% - \fi - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\L} -% \begin{macro}{\R} -% \begin{macro}{\HeblatexRedefineL} -% Macros for changing direction, originally taken from TUGboat. -% Usage: |\L{|\emph{Left to Right text}|}| and |\R{|\emph{Right to -% Left text}|}|. Numbers should also be enclosed in |\L{}|, as in -% |\L{123}|. -% -% Note, that these macros do not receive language name as -% parameter. Instead, the saved |\@rllanguagename| will be -% used. We assume that each Right-to-Left language defines -% |\to|\emph{languagename} and |\from|\emph{languagename} macros in -% language definition file, for example, for Hebrew: |\tohebrew| -% and |\fromhebrew| macros in \pkg{hebrew.ldf} file. -% -% The macros \cs{L} and \cs{R} include `protect' to to make them robust and -% allow use, for example, in tables. -% -% Due to the fact that some packages have different definitions for \cs{L} -% the macro |\HeblatexRedefineL| is provided to overide them. This may -% be required with hyperref, for instance. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\next=\ -\def\HeblatexRedefineL{% - \def\L{\protect\pL}% -} -\HeblatexRedefineL -\def\pL{\protect\afterassignment\moreL \let\next= } -\def\moreL{\bracetext \aftergroup\endL \beginL\csname - from\@rllanguagename\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\R{\protect\pR} -\def\pR{\protect\afterassignment\moreR \let\next= } -\def\moreR{\bracetext \aftergroup\endR \beginR\csname - to\@rllanguagename\endcsname} -\def\bracetext{\ifcat\next{\else\ifcat\next}\fi - \errmessage{Missing left brace has been substituted}\fi \bgroup} -\everydisplay{\if@rl\aftergroup\beginR\fi } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R} -% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@L} -% Two small internal macros, a-la |\ensuremath| -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@ensure@R#1{\if@rl#1\else\R{#1}\fi} -\def\@ensure@L#1{\if@rl\L{#1}\else#1\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Take care of Right-to-Left indentation in every paragraph. -% Originally, \cs{noindent} was redefined for right-to-left by -% Yaniv Bargury, then the implementation was rewritten by Alon Ziv -% using an idea by Chris Rowley: \cs{noindent} now works -% unmodified. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rl@everypar{\if@rl{\setbox\z@\lastbox\beginR\usebox\z@}\fi} -\let\o@everypar=\everypar -\def\everypar#1{\o@everypar{\rl@everypar#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hmbox} -% \begin{macro}{\embox} -% Useful vbox commands. All text in math formulas is best enclosed -% in these: LR text in |\embox| and RL text in |\hmbox|. |\mbox{}| -% is useless for both cases, since it typesets in Left-to-Right -% even for Right-to-Left languages (additions by Yaniv Bargury). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\hmbox}[1]{\mbox{\R{#1}}} -\newcommand{\embox}[1]{\mbox{\L{#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@brackets} -% When in Right-to-Left mode, brackets should be swapped. This -% macro receives 3 parameters: left bracket, content, right -% bracket. Brackets can be square brackets, braces, or -% parentheses. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@brackets#1#2#3{\protect\if@rl #3#2#1\protect\else - #1#2#3\protect\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@number} -% \begin{macro}{\@latin} -% \cs{@number} preserves numbers direction from Left to Right. -% \cs{@latin} in addition switches current encoding to the latin. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@number#1{\ifmmode\else\beginL\fi#1\ifmmode\else\endL\fi} -\def\@@latin#1{\@@number{{\@fromrl#1}}} -\def\@number{\protect\@@number} -\def\@latin{\protect\@@latin} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Counters} -% -% To make counter references work in Right to Left text, we need -% to surround their original definitions with an -% |\@number{|\ldots|}| or |\@latin{|\ldots|}|. Note, that -% language-specific counters, such as \cs{hebr} or \cs{gim} are -% provided with language definition file. -% -% We start with saving the original definitions: -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@arabic=\@arabic -\let\@@roman=\@roman -\let\@@Roman=\@Roman -\let\@@alph=\@alph -\let\@@Alph=\@Alph -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\@roman} -% \begin{macro}{\@Roman} -% Arabic and roman numbers should be from Left to Right. In -% addition, roman numerals, both lower- and upper-case should be in -% latin encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@arabic#1{\@number{\@@arabic#1}} -\def\@roman#1{\@latin{\@@roman#1}} -\def\@Roman#1{\@latin{\@@Roman#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\arabicnorl} -% This macro preserves the original definition of |\arabic| -% (overrides the overriding of |\@arabic|) -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arabicnorl#1{\expandafter\@@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\make@lr} -% In Right to Left documents all counters defined in the standard -% document classes \emph{article}, \emph{report} and \emph{book} -% provided with \LaTeXe, such as |\thesection|, |\thefigure|, -% |\theequation| should be typed as numbers from left to right. To -% ensure direction, we use the following -% |\make@lr{|\emph{counter}|}| macro: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\make@lr#1{\begingroup - \toks@=\expandafter{#1}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand#1{\noexpand\@number{\the\toks@}}}% - \x} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% - \@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \make@lr\thesection - \make@lr\thesubsection - \make@lr\thesubsubsection - \make@lr\theparagraph - \make@lr\thesubparagraph - \make@lr\thefigure - \make@lr\thetable - } - \make@lr\theequation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Preserving logos} -% -% Preserve \TeX, \LaTeX\ and \LaTeXe\ logos. -% \begin{macro}{\TeX} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@TeX\TeX -\def\TeX{\@latin{\@@TeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@LaTeX\LaTeX -\def\LaTeX{\@latin{\@@LaTeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXe} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@LaTeXe\LaTeXe -\def\LaTeXe{\@latin{\@@LaTeXe}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{List environments} -% -% List environments in Right-to-Left languages, are ticked and -% indented from the right instead of from the left. All the -% definitions that caused indentation are revised for Right-to-Left -% languages. \LaTeX\ keeps track on the indentation with the -% \cs{leftmargin} and \cs{rightmargin} values. -% -% \begin{macro}{list} -% Thus we need to override the definition of the |\list| macro: when -% in RTL mode, the right margins are the begining of the line. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\list#1#2{% - \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax - \@toodeep - \else - \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne - \fi - \rightmargin\z@ - \listparindent\z@ - \itemindent\z@ - \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname - \def\@itemlabel{#1}% - \let\makelabel\@mklab - \@nmbrlistfalse - #2\relax - \@trivlist - \parskip\parsep - \parindent\listparindent - \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin - \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin -% \end{macrocode} -% The only change in the macro is the |\if@rl| case: -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@rl - \advance\@totalleftmargin \rightmargin - \else - \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin - \fi - \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth - \ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii} -% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii} -% The \cs{labelenumii} and \cs{p@enumiii} commands use -% \emph{parentheses}. They are revised to work Right-to-Left with -% the help of \cs{@brackets} macro defined above. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelenumii{\@brackets(\theenumii)} -\def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\@brackets(\theenumii)} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Tables of moving stuff} -% -% Tables of moving arguments: table of contents (|toc|), list of -% figures (|lof|) and list of tables (|lot|) are handles here. These -% three default \LaTeX\ tables will be used now exclusively for -% Left to Right stuff. -% -% Three additional Right-to-Left tables: RL table of contents -% (|cot|), RL list of figures (|fol|), and RL list of tables -% (|tol|) are added. -% These three tables will be used exclusively for Right to -% Left stuff. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\@listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\@listoftables} -% We define 3 new macros similar to the standard \LaTeX\ tables, -% but with one parameter --- table file extension. These macros -% will help us to define our additional tables below. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{% - \section*{\contentsname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}% - \@starttoc{#1}} - \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{% - \section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}} - \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{% - \section*{\listtablename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}}}% - {% else report or book - \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{% - \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn% - \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi} - \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{% - \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn% - \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi} - \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{% - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\else\@restonecolfalse\fi% - \chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lrtableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\lrlistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\lrlistoftables} -% Left-to-Right tables are called now |\lr|\emph{xxx} and defined -% with the aid of three macros defined above (extensions |toc|, -% |lof|, and |lot|). -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\lrtableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{toc}}% - \newcommand\lrlistoffigures{\@listoffigures{lof}}% - \newcommand\lrlistoftables{\@listoftables{lot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rltableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\rllistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\rllistoftables} -% Right-to-Left tables will be called |\rl|\emph{xxx} and defined -% with the aid of three macros defined above (extensions |cot|, -% |fol|, and |tol|). -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\rltableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{cot}}% - \newcommand\rllistoffigures{\@listoffigures{fol}}% - \newcommand\rllistoftables{\@listoftables{tol}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% Let |\|\emph{xxx} be |\rl|\emph{xxx} if the current direction is -% Right-to-Left and |\lr|\emph{xxx} if it is Left-to-Right. -% \begin{macrocode} - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{\if@rl\rltableofcontents% - \else\lrtableofcontents\fi} - \renewcommand\listoffigures{\if@rl\rllistoffigures% - \else\lrlistoffigures\fi} - \renewcommand\listoftables{\if@rl\rllistoftables% - \else\lrlistoftables\fi}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% The following makes problems when making a Right-to-Left tables, -% since it uses \cs{leftskip} and \cs{rightskip} which are both -% mode dependent. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% - \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - {\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi #2\relax - \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@tocrmarg \parfillskip - -\if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax - \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi \@tempdima - \null\nobreak\hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi - {#4}\nobreak - \leaders\hbox{$\m@th - \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep - mu$}\hfill - \nobreak - \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor \beginL#5\endL}% - \par}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@part} -% This standard macro was redefined for table of contents since it -% uses \cs{rightskip} which is mode dependent. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other -\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{% - \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% - \begingroup - \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% - \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth - \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth - {\leavevmode - \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}}\par - \nobreak - \global\@nobreaktrue - \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}% - \endgroup - \fi}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% Part is redefined to support new Right-to-Left table of contents -% (|cot|) as well as the Left-to-Right one (|toc|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% article class - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}% - \fi - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \Large\bfseries \partname~\thepart - \par\nobreak - \fi - \huge \bfseries #2% - \markboth{}{}\par}% - \nobreak - \vskip 3ex - \@afterheading}% -}{% report and book classes - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}% - \fi - \markboth{}{}% - {\centering - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \huge\bfseries \partname~\thepart - \par - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \Huge \bfseries #2\par}% - \@endpart}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% Section was redefined from the \pkg{latex.ltx} file. It is -% changed to support both Left-to-Right (|toc|) and Right-to-Left -% (|cot|) table of contents simultaneously. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty - \else - \refstepcounter{#1}% - \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% - \fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #6{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \else - \def\@svsechd{% - #6{\hskip #3\relax - \@svsec #8}% - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#5}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@caption} -% Caption was redefined from the \pkg{latex.ltx} file. It is -% changed to support Left-to-Right list of figures and list of -% tables (|lof| and |lot|) as well as new Right-to-Left lists -% (|fol| and |tol|) simultaneously. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{% - \par - \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}% - \def\@fignm{figure} - \ifx#1\@fignm\addcontentsline{fol}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi% - \def\@tblnm{table} - \ifx#1\@tblnm\addcontentsline{tol}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi% - \begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \if@minipage - \@setminipage - \fi - \normalsize - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par - \endgroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} -% This standard macro was redefined for table of contents since it -% uses \cs{rightskip} which is mode dependent. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{}{% - \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{% - \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@ - \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}% - \begingroup - \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth - \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth - \leavevmode \bfseries - \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi\@tempdima - \hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi - #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}\par - \penalty\@highpenalty - \endgroup - \fi}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@section} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph} -% The toc entry for section did not work in article style. -% Also it does not print dots, which is funny when most of your -% work is divided into sections. -% -% It was revised to use |\@dottedtocline| as in \pkg{report.sty} -% (by Yaniv Bargury) and was updated later for all kinds of -% sections (by Boris Lavva). -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% -\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}} -\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Two-column mode} -% -% This is the support of \texttt{twocolumn} option for the standard -% \LaTeXe\ classes. -% The following code was originally borrowed from the Arab\TeX\ -% package, file \pkg{latexext.sty}, copyright by Klaus Lagally, -% Institut fuer Informatik, Universitaet Stuttgart. It was updated -% for this package by Boris Lavva. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol} -% \begin{macro}{\set@outputdblcol} -% \begin{macro}{rl@outputdblcol} -% First column is \cs{@leftcolumn} will be shown at the right side, -% Second column is \cs{@outputbox} will be shown at the left side. -% -% |\set@outputdblcol| IS CURRENTLY DISABLED. TODO: REMOVE IT [tzafrir] -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol -%\def\set@outputdblcol{% -% \if@rl\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{\rl@outputdblcol}% -% \else\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{\@@outputdblcol}\fi} -\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{% - \if@rlmain% - \rl@outputdblcol% - \else% - \@@outputdblcol% - \fi% -} -\newcommand{\rl@outputdblcol}{% - \if@firstcolumn - \global \@firstcolumnfalse - \global \setbox\@leftcolumn \box\@outputbox - \else - \global \@firstcolumntrue - \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {\hb@xt@\textwidth {% - \hskip\columnwidth% - \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil - \hb@xt@\columnwidth {% - \box\@leftcolumn \hss}% - \hb@xt@\columnwidth {% - \hskip-\textwidth% - \box\@outputbox \hss}% - \hskip\columnsep% - \hskip\columnwidth}}% - \@combinedblfloats - \@outputpage - \begingroup - \@dblfloatplacement - \@startdblcolumn - \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi - {\@outputpage - \@startdblcolumn}% - \endgroup - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Footnotes} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule} -% The Right-to-Left footnote rule is simply reversed default -% Left-to-Right one. Footnotes can be used in RL or LR main -% modes, but changing mode while a footnote is pending is still -% unsolved. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@footnoterule=\footnoterule -\def\footnoterule{\if@rl\hb@xt@\hsize{\hss\vbox{\@@footnoterule}}% - \else\@@footnoterule\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Headings and two-side support} -% -% When using \texttt{headings} or \texttt{myheadings} modes, we -% have to ensure that the language and direction of heading is the -% same as the whole chapter/part of the document. This is -% implementing by setting special variable \cs{headlanguage} when -% starting new chapter/part. -% -% In addition, when selecting the \texttt{twoside} option (default in -% \texttt{book} document class), the LR and RL modes need to be set -% properly for things on the heading and footing. This is done -% here too. -% -% \begin{macro}{ps@headings} -% \begin{macro}{ps@myheadings} -% \begin{macro}{headeven} -% \begin{macro}{headodd} -% First, we will support the standard \pkg{letter} class: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{% - \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\headtoname{} - \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \pagename{} \thepage\protect\if@rl\endR\fi} - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead} - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}} - \fi - \def\headfirst{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\fromlocation \hfill % - \telephonenum\protect\if@rl\endR\fi} - \def\ps@firstpage{% - \let\@oddhead\@empty - \def\@oddfoot{\raisebox{-45\p@}[\z@]{% - \hb@xt@\textwidth{\hspace*{100\p@}% - \ifcase \@ptsize\relax - \normalsize - \or - \small - \or - \footnotesize - \fi - \select@language{\headlanguage}\headfirst}}\hss}} -% - \renewcommand{\opening}[1]{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - \ifx\@empty\fromaddress% - \thispagestyle{firstpage}% - {\raggedleft\@date\par}% - \else % home address - \thispagestyle{empty}% - {\raggedleft - \if@rl\begin{tabular}{@{\beginR\csname% - to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}r@{\endR}}\ignorespaces - \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]% - \@date \end{tabular}\par% - \else\begin{tabular}{l}\ignorespaces - \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]% - \@date \end{tabular}\par% - \fi}% - \fi - \vspace{2\parskip}% - {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}% - \vspace{2\parskip}% - #1\par\nobreak} -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Then, the \pkg{article}, \pkg{report} and \pkg{book} document -% classes are supported. Note, that in one-sided mode -% \cs{markright} was changed to \cs{markboth}. -% \begin{macrocode} -{% article, report, book - \def\headeven{\protect\if@rl\beginR\thepage\hfil\rightmark\endR - \protect\else\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark} - \protect\fi} - \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\leftmark\hfil\thepage\endR - \protect\else{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage - \protect\fi} - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \if@twoside % two-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection\quad - \fi - ##1}}} - \else % one-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}}} - \fi -% - \def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark\@gobble - }}{% report and book - \if@twoside % two-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven} - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}} - \else % one-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}} - \fi - \def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark\@gobble - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - }}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Postscript Porblems} -% Any command that is implemented by PostScript directives, e.g -% commands from the ps-tricks package, needs to be fixed, because the -% PostScript directives are being interpeted after the document has been -% converted by \TeX to visual Hebrew (DVI, PostScript and PDF have visual -% Hebrew). -% -% For instance: Suppose you wrote in your document: -% -% |\textcolor{cyan}{some ltr text}| -% -% This would be interpeted by \TeX to something like: -% -% |[postscript:make color cyan]some LTR text[postscript:make color black]| -% -% -% However, with the bidirectionality support we get: -% -% |\textcolor{cyan}{\hebalef\hebbet}| -% -% Translated to: -% -% |[postscript:make color black]{bet}{alef}[postscript:make color cyan]| -% -% While we want: -% -% |[postscript:make color cyan]{bet}{alef}[postscript:make color black]| -% -% The following code will probably work at least with code that stays in the -% same line: -% \begin{macro}{@textcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - %I assume that \@textcolor is only defined by the package color - \ifx\@textcolor\@undefined\else% - % If that macro was defined before the beginning of the document, - % that is: the package was loaded: redefine it with bidi support - \def\@textcolor#1#2#3{% - \if@rl% - \beginL\protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}\beginR#3\endR}\endL% - \else% - \protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}#3}% - \fi% - }% - \fi% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\thetrueSlideCounter} -% This macro probably needs to be overriden for when using |prosper|, -% (waiting for feedback. Tzafrir) -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{prosper}{% - \def\thetrueSlideCounter{\arabicnorl{trueSlideCounter}} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Miscellaneous internal \LaTeX\ macros} -% -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedleft} -% \cs{raggedright} was changed from \pkg{latex.ltx} file to support -% Right-to-Left mode, because of the bug in its implementation. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\raggedright{% - \let\\\@centercr - \leftskip\z@skip\rightskip\@flushglue - \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% Swap meanings of \cs{raggedright} and \cs{raggedleft} in -% Right-to-Left mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@raggedleft=\raggedleft -\let\@@raggedright=\raggedright -\renewcommand\raggedleft{\if@rl\@@raggedright% - \else\@@raggedleft\fi} -\renewcommand\raggedright{\if@rl\@@raggedleft% - \else\@@raggedright\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\author} -% \cs{author} is inserted with \texttt{tabular} environment, and -% will be used in restricted horizontal mode. Therefore we have to -% add explicit direction change command when in Right-to-Left -% mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@author=\author -\renewcommand{\author}[1]{\@@author{\if@rl\beginR #1\endR\else #1\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} -% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase} -% There are no uppercase and lowercase letters in most -% Right-to-Left languages, therefore we should redefine -% \cs{MakeUppercase} and \cs{MakeLowercase} \LaTeXe\ commands. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@MakeUppercase=\MakeUppercase -\def\MakeUppercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeUppercase{#1}\fi} -\let\@@MakeLowercase=\MakeLowercase -\def\MakeLowercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeLowercase{#1}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\underline} -% We should explicitly use \cs{L} and \cs{R} commands in -% \cs{underline}d text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@@@underline=\underline -\def\underline#1{\@@@underline{\if@rl\R{#1}\else #1\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \cs{undertext} was added for \LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@compatibility - \let\undertext=\underline -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@xnthm} -% \begin{macro}{\@opargbegintheorem} -% The following has been inserted to correct the appearance of the -% number in \cs{newtheorem} to reorder theorem number components. A -% similar correction in the definition of \cs{@opargbegintheorem} -% was added too. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% - \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname - {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\noexpand\@number - {\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep - \@thmcounter{#1}}}% - \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% - \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} -% -\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{% - \trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ - \@brackets({#3})}]\itshape} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} -% The following was added for pretty printing of the chapter -% numbers, for supporting Right-to-Left tables (\texttt{cot}, -% \texttt{fol}, and \texttt{tol}), to save \cs{headlanguage} -% for use in running headers, and to start two-column mode -% depending on chapter's main language. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{}{% - % For pretty priniting - \def\@@chapapp{Chapter} - \def\@@thechapter{\@@arabic\c@chapter} - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - %\set@outputdblcol% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\@@chapapp\space\@@thechapter.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1} - \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1} - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1} - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{fol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{tol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi} - % - \def\@schapter#1{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - %\set@outputdblcol% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]% - \else - \@makeschapterhead{#1}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% Changed mainly for pretty printing of appendix numbers, and to -% start two-column mode with the right language (if needed). -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \renewcommand\appendix{\par - \setcounter{section}{0}% - \setcounter{subsection}{0}% - \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}} - }{% report and book - \renewcommand\appendix{\par - %\set@outputdblcol% - \setcounter{chapter}{0}% - \setcounter{section}{0}% - \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}% - % For pretty priniting - \def\@@chapapp{Appendix}% - \def\@@thechapter{\@@Alph\c@chapter} - \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Bibliography and citations} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@cite} -% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel} -% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem} -% Citations are produced by the macro -% |\@cite{|\emph{LABEL}|}{|\emph{NOTE}|}|. Both the citation label -% and the note is typeset in the current direction. We have to use -% \cs{@brackets} macro in \cs{@cite} and \cs{@biblabel} macros. In -% addition, when using \emph{alpha} or similar bibliography style, -% the \cs{@lbibitem} is used and have to be update to support bot -% Right-to-Left and Left-to-Right citations. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@cite#1#2{\@brackets[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]} -\def\@biblabel#1{\@brackets[{#1}]} -\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw - {\let\protect\noexpand - \immediate - \if@rl\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\R{#1}}}% - \else\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\L{#1}}}\fi% - }\fi\ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} -% Use \cs{rightmargin} instead of \cs{leftmargin} when in RL mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1] - {\section*{\refname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\refname}% - {\MakeUppercase\refname}}% - \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% - \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth - \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep - \@openbib@code - \usecounter{enumiv}% - \let\p@enumiv\@empty - \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty - \widowpenalty4000% - \sfcode`\.\@m} - {\def\@noitemerr - {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% - \endlist}}% -{\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{% - \chapter*{\bibname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\bibname}% - {\MakeUppercase\bibname}}% - \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% - \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth - \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep - \@openbib@code - \usecounter{enumiv}% - \let\p@enumiv\@empty - \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty - \widowpenalty4000% - \sfcode`\.\@m} - {\def\@noitemerr - {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% - \endlist}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim} -% All kinds of verbs (\cs{verb},\cs{verb*},\texttt{verbatim} and -% \texttt{verbatim*}) now can be used in Right-to-Left mode. Errors -% in latin mode solved too. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@verbatim{% - \let\do\@makeother \dospecials% - \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} -% Captions are set always centered. This allows us to use bilingual -% captions, for example: |\caption{\R{RLtext} \\ \L{LRtext}}|, -% which will be formatted as: -% \begin{center} -% Right to left caption here (RLtext) \\ -% Left to right caption here (LRtext) -% \end{center} -% See also \cs{bcaption} command below. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip% - \begin{center}% - #1: #2% - \end{center} \par% - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Additional bidirectional commands} -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Section headings are typeset with the default global -% direction. -% \item Text in section headings in the reverse language \emph{do -% not} have to be protected for the reflection command, as in: -% |\protect\L{|\emph{Latin Text}|}|, because \cs{L} and \cs{R} are -% robust now. -% \item Table of contents, list of figures and list of tables -% should be typeset with the \cs{tableofcontents}, -% \cs{listoffigures} and \cs{listoftables} commands respectively. -% \item The above tables will be typeset in the main direction (and -% language) in effect where the above commands are placed. -% \item Only 2 tables of each kind are supported: one for -% Right-to-Left and another for Left-to-Right directions. -% \end{itemize} -% -% How to include line to both tables? One has to use bidirectional -% sectioning commands as following: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item Use the |\b|\emph{xxx} version of the sectioning commands -% in the text instead of the |\|\emph{xxx} version (\emph{xxx} is -% one of: \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, \texttt{section}, -% \texttt{subsection}, \texttt{subsubsection}, \texttt{caption}). -% \item Syntax of the |\b|\emph{xxx} command is -% |\b|\emph{xxx}|{|\emph{RL text}|}{|\emph{LR text}|}|. -% Both arguments are typeset in proper direction by default (no -% need to change direction for the text inside). -% \item The section header inside the document will be typeset in -% the global direction in effect at the time. i.e. The |{|\emph{RL -% text}|}| will be typeset if Right-to-Left mode is in effect and -% |{|\emph{LR text}|}| otherwise. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bpart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bpart}[2]{\part{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bchapter} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bchapter}[2]{\chapter{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bsection} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bsection}[2]{\section{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bsubsection} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bsubsection}[2]{\subsection{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bsubsubsection} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bsubsubsection}[2]{\subsubsection{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bcaption} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bcaption}[2]{% - \caption[\protect\if@rl \R{#1}\protect\else \L{#2}\protect\fi]{% - \if@rl\R{#1}\protect\\ \L{#2} - \else\L{#2}\protect\\ \R{#1}\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following definition is a modified version of \cs{bchapter}, meant -% as a bilingual twin for \cs{chapter*} and \cs{section*} -% (added by Irina Abramovici). -% -% \begin{macro}{\bchapternn} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bchapternn}[2]{\chapter*{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bsectionnn} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\bsectionnn}[2]{\section*{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Finally, at end of \babel\ package, the \cs{headlanguage} and -% two-column mode will be initialized according to the current -% language. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{\rlAtEndOfPackage} -% -\def\rlAtEndOfPackage{% - \global\let\headlanguage=\languagename%\set@outputdblcol% -} -%</rightleft> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Hebrew calendar} -% -% The original version of the package \pkg{hebcal.sty}\footnote{The -% following description of \pkg{hebcal} package is based on the -% comments included with original source by the author, Michail -% Rozman.} for \TeX\ and \LaTeX2.09, entitled ``\TeX{} \& \LaTeX{} -% macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one'' was created -% by Michail Rozman, |misha@iop.tartu.ew.su|\footnote{Please direct -% any comments, bug reports, questions, etc. about the package to -% this address.} -% -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lr@{}c@{}ll} -% Released: &Tammuz 12, 5751&--&June 24, 1991 &\\ -% Corrected:&Shebat 10, 5752&--&January 15, 1992&by Rama Porrat\\ -% Corrected:&Adar II 5, 5752&--&March 10, 1992 &by Misha\\ -% Corrected:&Tebeth, 5756 &--&January 1996 &Dan Haran\\ -% &&&&(haran@math.tau.ac.il) -% \end{tabular} -% -% The package was adjusted for \babel{} and \LaTeXe{} by Boris -% Lavva. -% -% Changes to the printing routine (only) by Ron Artstein, June 1, -% 2003. -% -% This package should be included \emph{after} the \pkg{babel} with -% \pkg{hebrew} option, as following: -% \begin{quote} -% |\documentclass[|\ldots|]{|\ldots|}|\\ -% |\usepackage[hebrew,|\ldots|,|\emph{other languages}|,| -% \ldots|]{babel}|\\ -% |\usepackage{hebcal}| -% \end{quote} -% -% Two main user-level commands are provided by this package: -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Hebrewtoday} -% Computes today's Hebrew date and prints it. If we are presently -% in Hebrew mode, the date will be printed in Hebrew, otherwise --- -% in English (like Shebat 10, 5752). -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Hebrewdate} -% Computes the Hebrew date from the given Gregorian date and -% prints it. If we are presently in Hebrew mode, the date will be -% printed in Hebrew, otherwise --- in English (like Shebat 10, -% 5752). An example of usage is shown below: -% \begin{quote} -% |\newcount\hd \newcount\hm \newcount\hy|\\ -% |\hd=10 \hm=3 \hy=1992|\\ -% |\Hebrewdate{\hd}{\hm}{\hy}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \DescribeMacro{full} -% The package option |full| sets the flag |\@full@hebrew@year|, -% which causes years from the current millenium to be printed with -% the thousands digit (he-tav-shin-samekh-gimel). Without this -% option, thousands are not printed for the current millenium. -% NOTE: should this be a command option rather than a package -% option? --RA. -% -% \subsubsection{Introduction} -% -% The Hebrew calendar is inherently complicated: it is lunisolar -- -% each year starts close to the autumn equinox, but each month must -% strictly start at a new moon. Thus Hebrew calendar must be -% harmonized simultaneously with both lunar and solar events. In -% addition, for reasons of the religious practice, the year cannot -% start on Sunday, Wednesday or Friday. -% -% For the full description of Hebrew calendar and for the list of -% references see: -% \begin{quote} -% Nachum Dershowitz and Edward M. Reingold, -% \emph{``Calendarical Calculations''}, Software--Pract.Exper., -% vol. 20 (9), pp.899--928 (September 1990). -% \end{quote} -% |C| translation of |LISP| programs from the above article -% available from Mr. Wayne Geiser, |geiser%pictel@uunet.uu.net|. -% -% The 4\textsuperscript{th} distribution (July 1989) of hdate/hcal -% (Hebrew calendar programs similar to UNIX date/cal) by Mr. Amos -% Shapir, |amos@shum.huji.ac.il|, contains short and very clear -% description of algorithms. -% -% \subsubsection{Registers, Commands, Formatting Macros} -% -% The command |\Hebrewtoday| produces today's date for Hebrew -% calendar. It is similar to the standard \LaTeXe{} command -% |\today|. In addition three numerical registers |\Hebrewday|, -% |\Hebrewmonth| and |\Hebrewyear| are set. -% For setting this registers without producing of date string -% command |\Hebrewsetreg| can be used. -% -% The command -% |\Hebrewdate{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}|}{|\emph{Gyear}|}| -% produces Hebrew calendar date corresponding to Gregorian date -% |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear|. Three numerical registers |\Hebrewday|, -% |\Hebrewmonth| and |\Hebrewyear| are set. -% -% For converting arbitrary Gregorian date |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear| -% to Hebrew date |Hday.Hmonth.Hyear| without producing date string -% the command: -% \begin{center} -% |\HebrewFromGregorian{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}|}{|% -% \emph{Gyear}|}{|\emph{Hday}|}{|\emph{Hmonth}|}{|\emph{Hyear}|}| -% \end{center} -% can be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*calendar> -\newif\if@full@hebrew@year -\@full@hebrew@yearfalse -\DeclareOption{full}{\@full@hebrew@yeartrue} -\ProcessOptions -\newcount\Hebrewday \newcount\Hebrewmonth \newcount\Hebrewyear -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewdate} -% Hebrew calendar date corresponding to Gregorian date -% |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear|. If Hebrew (right-to-left) fonts \& macros -% are not loaded, we have to use English format. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Hebrewdate#1#2#3{% - \HebrewFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3} - {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \ifundefined{if@rl}% - \FormatForEnglish{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \else% - \FormatDate{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewtoday} -% Today's date in Hebrew calendar. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Hebrewtoday{\Hebrewdate{\day}{\month}{\year}} -\let\hebrewtoday=\Hebrewtoday -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewsetreg} -% Set registers: today's date in hebrew calendar. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Hebrewsetreg{% - \HebrewFromGregorian{\day}{\month}{\year} - {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FormatDate} -% Prints a Hebrew calendar date |Hebrewday.Hebrewmonth.Hebrewyear|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\FormatDate#1#2#3{% - \if@rl% - \FormatForHebrew{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \else% - \FormatForEnglish{#1}{#2}{#3} - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% To prepare another language version of Hebrew calendar commands, -% one should change or add commands here. -% -% We start with Hebrew language macros. -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewYearName} -% Prints Hebrew year as a Hebrew number. Disambiguates strings by -% adding lamed-pe-gimel to years of the first Jewish millenium and -% to years divisible by 1000. Suppresses the thousands digit in the -% current millenium unless the package option |full| is selected. -% NOTE: should this be provided as a command option rather than a -% package option? --RA. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewYearName#1{{% - \@tempcnta=#1\divide\@tempcnta by 1000\multiply\@tempcnta by 1000 - \ifnum#1=\@tempcnta\relax % divisible by 1000: disambiguate - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(% - \else % not divisible by 1000 - \ifnum#1<1000\relax % first millennium: disambiguate - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(% - \else - \ifnum#1<5000 - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}% - \else - \ifnum#1<6000 % current millenium, print without thousands - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \if@full@hebrew@year\else\advance\@tempcnta by -5000\fi - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{\@tempcnta}% - \else % #1>6000 - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewMonthName} -% The macro |\HebrewMonthName{|\emph{month}|}{|\emph{year}|}| -% returns the name of month in the `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewMonthName#1#2{% - \ifnum #1 = 7 % - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'% - \else \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh% - \fi% - \else% - \ifcase#1% - % nothing for 0 - \or\hebtav\hebshin\hebresh\hebyod% - \or\hebhet\hebshin\hebvav\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebkaf\hebsamekh\heblamed\hebvav% - \or\hebtet\hebbet\hebtav% - \or\hebshin\hebbet\hebtet% - \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebalef'% - \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'% - \or\hebnun\hebyod\hebsamekh\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebalef\hebyod\hebyod\hebresh% - \or\hebsamekh\hebyod\hebvav\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebtav\hebmem\hebvav\hebzayin% - \or\hebalef\hebbet% - \or\hebalef\heblamed\hebvav\heblamed% - \fi% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewDayName} -% Name of day in Hebrew letters (gimatria). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewDayName#1{\Hebrewnumeral{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\FormatForHebrew} -% The macro |\FormatForHebrew{|\emph{hday}|}{|\emph{hmonth} -% |}{|\emph{hyear}|}| returns the formatted Hebrew date in Hebrew -% language. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\FormatForHebrew#1#2#3{% - \HebrewDayName{#1}~\hebbet\HebrewMonthName{#2}{#3},~% - \HebrewYearName{#3}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We continue with two English language macros for Hebrew calendar. -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish} -% The macro |\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{|\emph{month}|}{|% -% \emph{year}|}| is similar to |\Hebrew|\-|Month|\-|Name| described -% above. It returns the name of month in the Hebrew `year' in -% English. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish#1#2{% - \ifnum #1 = 7% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap Adar II\else Adar\fi% - \else% - \ifcase #1% - % nothing for 0 - \or Tishrei% - \or Heshvan% - \or Kislev% - \or Tebeth% - \or Shebat% - \or Adar I% - \or Adar II% - \or Nisan% - \or Iyar% - \or Sivan% - \or Tammuz% - \or Av% - \or Elul% - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FormatForEnglish} -% The macro |\FormatForEnglish{|\emph{hday}|}{|\emph{hmonth} -% |}{|\emph{hyear}|}| is similar to |\Format|\-|For|\-|Hebrew| -% macro described above and returns the formatted Hebrew date in -% English. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\FormatForEnglish#1#2#3{% - \HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{#2}{#3} \number#1,\ \number#3} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Auxiliary Macros} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@common -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\Remainder} -% |\Remainder{|\emph{a}|}{|\emph{b}|}{|\emph{c}|}| calculates -% $c = a\%b == a-b\times\frac{a}{b}$ -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Remainder#1#2#3{% - #3 = #1% % c = a - \divide #3 by #2% % c = a/b - \multiply #3 by -#2% % c = -b(a/b) - \advance #3 by #1}% % c = a - b(a/b) -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@Divisible -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\CheckIfDivisible} -% |\CheckIfDivisible{|\emph{a}|}{|\emph{b}|}| sets -% |\@Divisibletrue| if $a\%b == 0$ -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CheckIfDivisible#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmp = 0% \tmp == \count0 - temporary variable - \Remainder{#1}{#2}{\tmp}% - \ifnum \tmp = 0% - \global\@Divisibletrue% - \else% - \global\@Divisiblefalse% - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ifundefined} -% From the \TeX book, ex. 7.7: -% \begin{quote} -% |\ifundefined{|\emph{command}|}<true text>\else<false text>\fi| -% \end{quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ifundefined#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Gregorian Part} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@GregorianLeap -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\IfGregorianLeap} -% Conditional which is true if Gregorian `year' is a leap year: -% $((year\%4==0)\wedge(year\%100\neq 0))\vee(year\%400==0)$ -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\IfGregorianLeap#1{% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{4}% - \if@Divisible% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{100}% - \if@Divisible% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{400}% - \if@Divisible% - \@GregorianLeaptrue% - \else% - \@GregorianLeapfalse% - \fi% - \else% - \@GregorianLeaptrue% - \fi% - \else% - \@GregorianLeapfalse% - \fi% - \if@GregorianLeap} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths} -% The macro |\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{|\emph{month}|}{|^^A -% \emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| calculates the number of days in -% months prior to `month' in the `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{% - {% - #3 = \ifcase #1% - 0 \or% % no month number 0 - 0 \or% - 31 \or% - 59 \or% - 90 \or% - 120 \or% - 151 \or% - 181 \or% - 212 \or% - 243 \or% - 273 \or% - 304 \or% - 334% - \fi% - \IfGregorianLeap{#2}% - \ifnum #1 > 2% % if month after February - \advance #3 by 1% % add leap day - \fi% - \fi% - \global\@common = #3}% - #3 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\GregorianDaysInPriorYears} -% The macro |\GregorianDaysInPriorYears{|\emph{year}|}{|^^A -% \emph{days}|}| calculates the number of days in years prior to -% the `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\GregorianDaysInPriorYears#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpc = 4% % \tmpc==\count4 - \countdef\tmpb = 2% % \tmpb==\count2 - \tmpb = #1% % - \advance \tmpb by -1% % - \tmpc = \tmpb% % \tmpc = \tmpb = year-1 - \multiply \tmpc by 365% % Days in prior years = - #2 = \tmpc% % = 365*(year-1) ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 4% % \tmpc = (year-1)/4 - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus Julian leap days ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 100% % \tmpc = (year-1)/100 - \advance #2 by -\tmpc% % ... minus century years ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 400% % \tmpc = (year-1)/400 - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus 4-century years. - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AbsoluteFromGregorian} -% The macro |\AbsoluteFromGregorian{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}^^A -% |}{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{absdate}|}| calculates the absolute date -% (days since $01.01.0001$) from Gregorian date |day.month.year|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\AbsoluteFromGregorian#1#2#3#4{% - {% - \countdef\tmpd = 0% % \tmpd==\count0 - #4 = #1% % days so far this month - \GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{\tmpd}% - \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior months - \GregorianDaysInPriorYears{#3}{\tmpd}% - \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior years - \global\@common = #4}% - #4 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew Part} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@HebrewLeap -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\CheckLeapHebrewYear} -% Set |\@HebrewLeaptrue| if Hebrew `year' is a leap year, i.e.\ if -% $(1+7\times year)\%19 < 7$ then \emph{true} else \emph{false} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CheckLeapHebrewYear#1{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 -% - \tmpa = #1% - \multiply \tmpa by 7% - \advance \tmpa by 1% - \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% - \ifnum \tmpb < 7% % \tmpb = (7*year+1)%19 - \global\@HebrewLeaptrue% - \else% - \global\@HebrewLeapfalse% - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewElapsedMonths} -% The macro |\HebrewElapsedMonths{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{months}|}| -% determines the number of months elapsed from the Sunday prior to -% the start of the Hebrew calendar to the mean conjunction of -% Tishri of Hebrew `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewElapsedMonths#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 - \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2 -% - \tmpa = #1% % - \advance \tmpa by -1% % - #2 = \tmpa% % #2 = \tmpa = year-1 - \divide #2 by 19% % Number of complete Meton cycles - \multiply #2 by 235% % #2 = 235*((year-1)/19) -% - \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% \tmpa = years%19-years this cycle - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \multiply \tmpb by 12% % - \advance #2 by \tmpb% % add regular months this cycle -% - \multiply \tmpc by 7% % - \advance \tmpc by 1% % - \divide \tmpc by 19% % \tmpc = (1+7*((year-1)%19))/19 - -% % number of leap months this cycle - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % add leap months -% - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewElapsedDays} -% The macro |\HebrewElapsedDays{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| -% determines the number of days elapsed from the Sunday prior to -% the start of the Hebrew calendar to the mean conjunction of -% Tishri of Hebrew `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewElapsedDays#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 - \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2 -% - \HebrewElapsedMonths{#1}{#2}% - \tmpa = #2% % - \multiply \tmpa by 13753% % - \advance \tmpa by 5604% % \tmpa=MonthsElapsed*13758 + 5604 - \Remainder{\tmpa}{25920}{\tmpc}% \tmpc == ConjunctionParts - \divide \tmpa by 25920% -% - \multiply #2 by 29% - \advance #2 by 1% - \advance #2 by \tmpa% % #2 = 1 + MonthsElapsed*29 + -% % PartsElapsed/25920 - \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek - \ifnum \tmpc < 19440% - \ifnum \tmpc < 9924% - \else% % New moon at 9 h. 204 p. or later - \ifnum \tmpa = 2% % on Tuesday ... - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% of a common year - \if@HebrewLeap% - \else% - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \ifnum \tmpc < 16789% - \else% % New moon at 15 h. 589 p. or later - \ifnum \tmpa = 1% % on Monday ... - \advance #1 by -1% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% at the end of leap year - \if@HebrewLeap% - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \else% - \advance #2 by 1% % new moon at or after midday - \fi% -% - \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek - \ifnum \tmpa = 0% % if Sunday ... - \advance #2 by 1% - \else% % - \ifnum \tmpa = 3% % Wednesday ... - \advance #2 by 1% - \else% - \ifnum \tmpa = 5% % or Friday - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DaysInHebrewYear} -% The macro |\DaysInHebrewYear{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| -% calculates the number of days in Hebrew `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\DaysInHebrewYear#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpe = 12% % \tmpe==\count12 -% - \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{\tmpe}% - \advance #1 by 1% - \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{#2}% - \advance #2 by -\tmpe% - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths} -% The macro |\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{|\emph{month}|}{|^^A -% \emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| calculates the nu\-mber of days in -% months prior to `month' in the `year'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{% - {% - \countdef\tmpf= 14% % \tmpf==\count14 -% - #3 = \ifcase #1% % Days in prior month of regular year - 0 \or% % no month number 0 - 0 \or% % Tishri - 30 \or% % Heshvan - 59 \or% % Kislev - 89 \or% % Tebeth - 118 \or% % Shebat - 148 \or% % Adar I - 148 \or% % Adar II - 177 \or% % Nisan - 207 \or% % Iyar - 236 \or% % Sivan - 266 \or% % Tammuz - 295 \or% % Av - 325 \or% % Elul - 400% % Dummy - \fi% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap% % in leap year - \ifnum #1 > 6% % if month after Adar I - \advance #3 by 30% % add 30 days - \fi% - \fi% - \DaysInHebrewYear{#2}{\tmpf}% - \ifnum #1 > 3% - \ifnum \tmpf = 353% % - \advance #3 by -1% % - \fi% % Short Kislev - \ifnum \tmpf = 383% % - \advance #3 by -1% % - \fi% % - \fi% -% - \ifnum #1 > 2% - \ifnum \tmpf = 355% % - \advance #3 by 1% % - \fi% % Long Heshvan - \ifnum \tmpf = 385% % - \advance #3 by 1% % - \fi% % - \fi% - \global\@common = #3}% - #3 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AbsoluteFromHebrew} -% The macro |\AbsoluteFromHebrew{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}^^A -% |}{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{absdate}|}| calculates the absolute date -% of Hebrew date |day.month.year|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\AbsoluteFromHebrew#1#2#3#4{% - {% - #4 = #1% - \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{#1}% - \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior months this year - \HebrewElapsedDays{#3}{#1}% - \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior years - \advance #4 by -1373429% % Subtract days before Gregorian - \global\@common = #4}% % 01.01.0001 - #4 = \@common} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HebrewFromGregorian} -% The macro |\HebrewFromGregorian{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}^^A -% |}{|\emph{Gyear}|}{|\emph{Hday}|}{|\emph{Hmonth}|}|\-|{|^^A -% \emph{Hyear}|}| evaluates Hebrew date |Hday|, |Hmonth|, |Hyear| -% from Gregorian date |Gday|, |Gmonth|, |Gyear|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HebrewFromGregorian#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - {% - \countdef\tmpx= 17% % \tmpx==\count17 - \countdef\tmpy= 18% % \tmpy==\count18 - \countdef\tmpz= 19% % \tmpz==\count19 -% - #6 = #3% % - \global\advance #6 by 3761% approximation from above - \AbsoluteFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \tmpz = 1 \tmpy = 1% - \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \ifnum \tmpx > #4% % - \global\advance #6 by -1% Hyear = Gyear + 3760 - \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \fi% % - \advance #4 by -\tmpx% % Days in this year - \advance #4 by 1% % - #5 = #4% % - \divide #5 by 30% % Approximation for month from below - \loop% % Search for month - \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#5}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \ifnum \tmpx < #4% - \advance #5 by 1% - \tmpy = \tmpx% - \repeat% - \global\advance #5 by -1% - \global\advance #4 by -\tmpy}} -%</calendar> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd deleted file mode 100644 index f61d06f430e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1297 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{610} -% -% \iffalse meta-comment -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -% -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -% \fi -% \iffalse -%<LHEenc>\ProvidesFile{lheenc.def} -%<LHEcmr>\ProvidesFile{lhecmr.fd} -%<LHEcmss>\ProvidesFile{lhecmss.fd} -%<LHEcmtt>\ProvidesFile{lhecmtt.fd} -%<LHEclas>\ProvidesFile{lheclas.fd} -%<LHEshold>\ProvidesFile{lheshold.fd} -%<LHEshscr>\ProvidesFile{lheshscr.fd} -%<LHEshstk>\ProvidesFile{lheshstk.fd} -%<LHEfr>\ProvidesFile{lhefr.fd} -%<LHEcrml>\ProvidesFile{lhecrml.fd} -%<LHEredis>\ProvidesFile{lheredis.fd} -%<HE8enc>\ProvidesFile{HE8enc.def} -%<HE8cmr>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmr.fd} -%<HE8cmss>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmss.fd} -%<HE8cmtt>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmtt.fd} -% The recoded Omega font (only Hebrew glyphs. Lacks other glyphs) -%<HE8OmegaHebrew>\ProvidesFile{HE8OmegaHebrew.fd} -% The culmus fonts: -%<HE8aharoni>\ProvidesFile{HE8aharoni.fd} -%<HE8david>\ProvidesFile{HE8david.fd} -%<HE8drugulin>\ProvidesFile{HE8drugulin.fd} -%<HE8ellinia>\ProvidesFile{HE8ellinia.fd} -%<HE8frankruehl>\ProvidesFile{HE8frankruehl.fd} -%<HE8yad>\ProvidesFile{HE8yad.fd} -%<HE8miriam>\ProvidesFile{HE8miriam.fd} -%<HE8nachlieli>\ProvidesFile{HE8nachlieli.fd} -% The IBM Type1 fonts (not freely distributable -%<HE8CourierShalom>\ProvidesFile{HE8CourierShalom.fd} -%<HE8HelveticaNarkissTam>\ProvidesFile{HE8HelveticaNarkissTam.fd} -%<HE8TimesNarkissim>\ProvidesFile{HE8TimesNarkissim.fd} -% Placeholders for windows fonts: -%<HE8mfdavid>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfdavid.fd} -%<HE8mffrank>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrank.fd} -%<HE8mffrankthick>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrankthick.fd} -%<HE8mffrankthin>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrankthin.fd} -%<HE8mfmiriam>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfmiriam.fd} -%<HE8mfmiriamwide>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfmiriamwide.fd} -%<HE8mfnarkistam>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfnarkistam.fd} -%<hebfont>\ProvidesPackage{hebfont} -%<*driver> -\ProvidesFile{hebrew.drv} -%</driver> -% \fi -% \ProvidesFile{hebrew.fdd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % -% \iffalse -%<LHEenc> 7-bit Hebrew font encoding -%<LHEcmr> Hebrew default font -%<LHEcmss> Hebrew sans-serif font -%<LHEcmtt> Hebrew typewriter font -%<LHEclas> Hebrew classic font (by Joel M. Hoffman) -%<LHEshold> Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher) -%<LHEshscr> Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher) -%<LHEshstk> Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher) -%<LHEfr> Hebrew frank-ruehl font -%<LHEcrml> Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany) -%<LHEredis> Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J. Goldberg) -%<HE8enc> 8-bit Hebrew font encoding -%<HE8cmr> Hebrew default font -%<HE8cmss> Hebrew sans-serif font -%<HE8cmtt> Hebrew typewriter font -%<HE8OmegaHebrew> Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???) -%<HE8aharoni> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8david> Hebrew serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8drugulin> Hebrew old serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8ellinia> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8frankruehl> Hebrew serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8yad> Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus) -%<HE8miriam> Hebrew monospaced font (Culmus) -%<HE8nachlieli> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus) -%<HE8CourierShalom> Hebrew Shalom (Courier) font (by IBM) -%<HE8HelveticaNarkissTam> Hebrew NarkisTam (Helvetica) (by Zvi Narkis) -%<HE8TimesNarkissim> Hebrew Narkissim (Times) (by Zvi Narkis) -%<HE8mfdavid> Hebrew David font (by ???) -%<HE8mffrank> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl font (by ??) -%<HE8mffrankthick> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thick) font (by ??) -%<HE8mffrankthin> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thin) font (by ??) -%<HE8mfmiriam> Hebrew Miriam font (by ???) -%<HE8mfmiriamwide> Hebrew Miriam (wide) font (by ???) -%<HE8mfnarkistam> Hebrew Narkis Tam font (by ???) -%<hebfont> Hebrew font switching commands -%<driver> Driver file for hebrew.fdd file -% \fi -% Hebrew font encodings support - (test version: still liable to change)] -% -% \font\manual=logo10 -% \providecommand\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -% \providecommand\PS{\textsc{PostScript}} -% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}} -% \providecommand\LHE{\texttt{LHE}} -% \providecommand\HEH{\texttt{HE8}} -% \providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \GetFileInfo{hebrew.fdd} -% -% \changes{hebfdd-1.0a}{1998/01/01}{% -% Initial version. Supports only 7-bit LHE font encoding and all -% available Hebrew \TeX\ fonts (by Boris Lavva)} -% \changes{hebfdd-1.0b}{2001/08/16}{% -% fixed lhecmr.fd to use oldjaf10 for a slanted font -% available Hebrew \TeX\ fonts (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebfdd-1.1a}{2001/08/16}{% -% Adding 8-bit HE8 fonts. Note that most of them cannot be distributed -% with heb\LaTeX\ (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebfdd-1.2a}{2003/08/19}{% -% Adding configurations for the Culmus fonts, currently 0.90 -% (by Tzafrir Cohen)} -% \changes{hebfdd-1.2b}{2004/02/20}{Reinstated the test whether LHE or -% HE8 is to be used} -% -% \changes{hebrew-1.2c}{2005/05/18}{Typo's in the docstrip guards made -% HE8nachlieli.fd unusable} -% \section{Hebrew font encodings}\label{sec:hebfdd} -% -% % Don't forget to update the docs... -% \subsection{THIS SECTION IS OUT OF DATE. UPDATE DOCS TO MATCH HE8 -% ENCODING} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The files described in this -% section have version number \fileversion{} and were last revised -% on \filedate.} contains the Local Hebrew Encoding (\LHE) -% definition, the external font information needed to use the -% Hebrew 7-bit fonts (old code fonts) and \pkg{hebfont} package -% that provides Hebrew font switching commands. -% -% Using this file as an input, |lheenc.def| encoding definition -% file, all |.fd| files (font definition files) and font switching -% package for available Hebrew fonts are generated. We chose to use -% 7-bit encoding as default font encoding, because: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item There are many 7-bit encoded Hebrew fonts available, more -% then for any other encoding. -% \item Available \TeX{} Hebrew fonts do not include latin -% alphabet, and we can safely map Hebrew glyphs to the -% \texttt{ASCII} positions (0 -- 127). -% \end{enumerate} -% -% Current definition of the \LHE{} encoding supports only Hebrew -% letters (|\hebalef|--|\hebtav|), but not Hebrew points, such as -% |\hebdagesh|, |\hebqamats|, |\hebpatah|, |\hebshindot|, etc. We -% are working now on such addition. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \iffalse -% \subsection{A driver for this document} -% -% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for -% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are -% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the \dst{} -% program. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\title{Hebrew font encodings for use with \LaTeXe} -\author{Boris Lavva} -\date{Printed \today} -\begin{document} - \maketitle - \DocInput{hebrew.fdd} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% \fi -% -% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules} -% -% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct -% \dst{} in generating external files: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll} -% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\[4pt] -% HE8enc & produce the encoding definition for CodePage 1255 -% (\HEH)\\[4pt] -% HE8cmr & make Hebrew default font in \HEH\\ -% HE8cmss & make Hebrew sans-serif font in \HEH\\ -% HE8cmtt & make Hebrew typewriter font in \HEH\\ -% HE8OmegaHebrew & Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???)\\ -% HE8aharoni & Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8david & Hebrew serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8drugulin & Hebrew old serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8ellinia & Hebrew isans-serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8frankruehl & Hebrew serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8KtavYad & Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8MiriamMono & Hebrew monospaced font\\ -% HE8Nachlieli & Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)\\ -% HE8CourierShalom & Hebrew Shalom (Courier) font (by IBM)\\ -% HE8HelveticaNarkissTam &Hebrew NarkisTam (Helvetica) (by Zvi Narkis)\\ -% HE8TimesNarkissim & Hebrew Narkissim (Times) (by Zvi Narkis) \\ -% HE8mfdavid & Hebrew David font (by ???)\\ -% HE8mffrank & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl font (by ??)\\ -% HE8mffrankthick & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thick) font (by ??)\\ -% HE8mffrankthin & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thin) font (by ??)\\ -% HE8mfmiriam & Hebrew Miriam font (by ???)\\ -% HE8mfmiriamwide & Hebrew Miriam (wide) font (by ???)\\ -% HE8mfnarkistam & Hebrew Narkis Tam font (by ???)\\ -% LHEenc & produce the encoding definition for Local Hebrew -% Encoding (\LHE)\\[4pt] -% LHEcmr & make Hebrew default font in \LHE\\ -% LHEcmss & make Hebrew sans-serif font in \LHE\\ -% LHEcmtt & make Hebrew typewriter font in \LHE\\ -% LHEclas & make Hebrew classic font (by Joel M.~Hoffman) in \LHE\\ -% LHEshold & make Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher) -% in \LHE\\ -% LHEshscr & make Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher) -% in \LHE\\ -% LHEshstk & make Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher) -% in \LHE\\ -% LHEfr & make Hebrew frank-ruehl font in \LHE\\ -% LHEcrml & make Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany) in \LHE\\ -% LHEredis & make Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J.~Goldberg) -% in \LHE\\[4pt] -% nowarn & option for font definition files, that used\\ -% & to produce ``silent'' font substitutions without -% giving warnings\\[4pt] -% hebfont & create Hebrew font switching commands package -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\generateFile{lhecmr.fd}{t}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmr,nowarn}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \subsection{The \LHE encoding definition file} -% -% The Hebrew font encoding \LHE{} is based upon the old-code encoding -% also known as the Israeli Standard SI-960. Many Hebrew \TeX{} -% fonts from the Hebrew University of Jerusalem are encoded -% in this encoding. It only uses the lower 128 positions of the font -% table. As local encoding its name start with the letter `L'. -% -% First we define the Local Hebrew Encoding; specify a default -% for the font substitution process for the \LHE{} encoding and -% supply a font to be used when all else fails. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEenc> -\DeclareFontEncoding{LHE}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -%</LHEenc> -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we define a few commands in the \LHE{} encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEenc> -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LHE}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LHE}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LHE}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -%</LHEenc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Because not everyone can input Hebrew input text directly from -% the keyboard we need to define control sequences for all the -% Hebrew glyphs in the fonts. In addition, we want to support -% many input encodings for Hebrew and to keep the language -% definition file (|hebrew.ldf|) independent of the -% encoding. Therefore, we exploit the standard \LaTeXe{} font -% encoding mechanism to define control sequences for all the Hebrew -% glyphs in the fonts in encoding-specific way. The language -% definition file uses only the control sequences and doesn't need -% to check the current font or input encoding. -% -% In the \LHE{} encoding (7-bit encoding) all the Hebrew glyphes -% reside in the \emph{lower} half of the font. Currently, only the -% Hebrew letters are supported. They use the same positions as the -% latin small letters in |ASCII| encoding and the position of |`|. -% -% The symbol |`| (glyph 96) is used by Hebrew letter \emph{Alef}, -% so we need to define its |lccode| to allow hyphenation. All other -% letters retain the same |lccode|s as their latin counterparts. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+LHEenc>\lccode``=`` -% \end{macrocode} -% Hebrew letters occupy the positions 96--122 in \LHE{} encoding: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEenc> -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{LHE}{96} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{LHE}{97} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{LHE}{98} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{LHE}{99} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{LHE}{100} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{LHE}{101} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{LHE}{102} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{LHE}{103} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{LHE}{104} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{LHE}{105} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{LHE}{106} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{LHE}{107} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{LHE}{108} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{LHE}{109} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{LHE}{110} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{LHE}{111} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{LHE}{112} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{LHE}{113} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{LHE}{114} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{LHE}{115} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{LHE}{116} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{LHE}{117} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{LHE}{118} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{LHE}{119} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{LHE}{120} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{LHE}{121} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{LHE}{122} -%</LHEenc> -% \end{macrocode} -% Letter |\hebsin| is defined as a synonym of |\hebshin|: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+LHEenc>\let\hebsin=\hebshin -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The font definition files (in \LHE{} encoding)} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew default font} -% -% It uses \emph{Jerusalem} font for regular font, \emph{Old -% Jaffa} font for italic shape and small-caps, \emph{Dead Sea} -% font for bold face, and \emph{Tel-Aviv} for bold-italic -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEcmr> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n} - {<-> jerus10 }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sl} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sc} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-> telav10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{it} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%</LHEcmr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew sans-serif font} -% -% We use \emph{Tel Aviv} font for the Sans family. \emph{Old -% Jaffa} font is used for italic shape and \emph{Dead Sea} -% used for bold face. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEcmss> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{n} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sl} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/m/it}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/m/it}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{b}{n} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{sl} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%</LHEcmss> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew typewriter font} -% -% We use \emph{Tel Aviv} font as the typewriter font. \emph{Old -% Jaffa} font is used for italic shape and \emph{Dead Sea} -% used for bold face. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEcmtt> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{n} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sl} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/m/it}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/bx/n}{} -%</LHEcmtt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew classic font} -% -% \emph{Hclassic} and \emph{hcaption} fonts are distributed freely -% from |CTAN| sites and copyrighted by Joel M.~Hoffman, of 19 -% Hillcrest Lane, Rye, NY 10580 USA, e-mail: -% |72700.402@compuserve.com|. -% -% Hclassic is a modernized Classical Hebrew font (in the same way -% that Knuth's |cmr| family is a modernized Roman font --- but his -% fonts are much nicer). Hcaption is a slanted version of hclassic -% font. Both fonts contain all of the Hebrew consonants, -% the (rarely used) ligature \emph{alef-lamed} and two versions of -% the letter \emph{ayin} for use with and without -% vowels. Hclassic also contains all of the vowels found in Hebrew, -% a symbol for \emph{meteg}, and dots for use as a \emph{dagesh} -% and for differentiating \emph{shin} and \emph{sin} letters. -% -% Currently, only the Hebrew consonants (\emph{hebalef} -- \emph{hebtav}) -% from these fonts are supported by \LaTeXe{}, however one can use -% vowels and dots directly with \PlainTeX{} macros. We are working -% on generic vowels and dots support for \LaTeXe. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEclas> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{clas}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{n} - {<-> s * [0.83345] hclassic }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * clas/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * clas/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sl} - {<-> s * [0.69389] hcaption }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * clas/m/sl}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * clas/m/sl}{} -%</LHEclas> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew shalom fonts} -% -% All three shalom fonts (\emph{ShalomScript10}, -% \emph{ShalomStick10} and \emph{ShalomOldStyle10}) have been -% created by Jonathan Brecher, of 9 Skyview Road, Lexington, MA -% 02173-1112 USA, e-mail: |brecher@husc.harvard.edu|. -% -% All shalom fonts have been written in \PS{} via Fontographer on a -% Mac. The fonts have been converted to \MF{} by Rama Porrat -% (e-mail: |rama@cc.huji.ac.il|), using -% the utility typo, a font editor + converter between font formats -% (a commercial product). |ShalomScript10.mf| is the \MF{} -% equivalent of |ShalomScript.ps|, |ShalomStick10.mf| came from -% |ShalomStick.ps| and |ShalomOldStyle10.mf| originated in -% |ShalomOldStyle.ps|. -% -% The fonts differ in the letters' style. ShalomScript10 contains -% hand writing Hebrew letters; ShalomStick10 contains sans-serif -% letters, and ShalomOldStyle10 contains old style letters. All -% three fonts contain vowels and dots (nikud). While converting to -% \MF{}, letters and symbols within the fonts have been arranged -% so as to get a usable font for writing Hebrew documents in \TeX{} -% or \LaTeX{}, with as well as without vowels. -% -% Currently, only the Hebrew consonants (\emph{hebalef} -- \emph{hebtav}) -% from these fonts are supported by \LaTeXe{}, however one can use -% vowels and dots directly with \PlainTeX{} macros. We are working -% on generic vowels and dots support for \LaTeXe. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEshold> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shold}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shold}{m}{n} - {<-> shold10 }{} -%</LHEshold> -%<*LHEshscr> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shscr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shscr}{m}{n} - {<-> shscr10 }{} -%</LHEshscr> -%<*LHEshstk> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shstk}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shstk}{m}{n} - {<-> shstk10 }{} -%</LHEshstk> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew frank-ruehl font} -% -% \emph{Frank Ruehl} font was written in \MF{} and includes three -% shapes: regular, bold extaneded and slanted. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEfr> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{fr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{n} - {<-> fr }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sl} - {<-> frsl }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/m/sl}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{n} - {<-> frbx }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{b}{n} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{sl} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%</LHEfr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew carmel font} -% -% \emph{Carmel} font includes regular and slanted shapes. It was -% created by Dr.~Samy Zafrany of the Technion, Haifa, Israel with -% the intention of making nice fonts for headers and emphasized -% text. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEcrml> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{crml}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{n} - {<-> crml10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * crml/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * crml/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sl} - {<-> crmlsl10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * crml/m/sl}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * crml/m/sl}{} -%</LHEcrml> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew redis font} -% -% \emph{Redis} font has been created by Prof.~Jacques J.~Goldberg -% of the Technion. Haifa, Israel. The font is available in regular, -% slanted and bold extanded shapes. This font contains a full set -% of Hebrew letters in a ``sans-serif vectorized'' style, and -% selected punctuation. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*LHEredis> -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{redis}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{n}{% - <5> <6> redis7 - <7> <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * redis - <10.95> redis10 - <14.4> redis12 - <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redis17}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sc} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/m/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sl}{% - <5> <6> <7> rediss8 - <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * rediss - <10.95> rediss10 - <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> rediss12}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/m/sl}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{n}{% - <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <10.95> <12> - <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redisb10}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{b}{n} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{sl} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{it} -%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{} -%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%</LHEredis> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The \HEH encoding definition file} -% -% The Hebrew font encoding \HEH{} is based upon an extention by -% Microsoft to the ISO-8859-8 standard. This is an 8bit encoding. The -% extentions include hebrew points (``Nikud''). -% -% First we define the Codepage 1255; specify a default -% for the font substitution process for the \HEH{} encoding and -% supply a font to be used when all else fails. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8enc> -\DeclareFontEncoding{HE8}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -%</HE8enc> -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we define a few commands in the \HEH{} encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8enc> -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -%</HE8enc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{CHECK HERE FOR HE8 UPDATES} -% -% Because not everyone can input Hebrew input text directly from -% the keyboard we need to define control sequences for all the -% Hebrew glyphs in the fonts. In addition, we want to support -% many input encodings for Hebrew and to keep the language -% definition file (|hebrew.ldf|) independent of the -% encoding. Therefore, we exploit the standard \LaTeXe{} font -% encoding mechanism to define control sequences for all the Hebrew -% glyphs in the fonts in encoding-specific way. The language -% definition file uses only the control sequences and doesn't need -% to check the current font or input encoding. -% -% % In the \LHE{} encoding (7-bit encoding) all the Hebrew glyphes -% % reside in the \emph{lower} half of the font. Currently, only the -% % Hebrew letters are supported. They use the same positions as the -% % latin small letters in |ASCII| encoding and the position of |`|. -% -% Some general symbols: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8enc> -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -%</HE8enc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The hebrew points: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8enc> -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sheva}{HE8}{192} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafsegol}{HE8}{193} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafpatah}{HE8}{194} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafqamats}{HE8}{195} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hiriq}{HE8}{196} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tsere}{HE8}{197} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\segol}{HE8}{198} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\patah}{HE8}{199} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\qamats}{HE8}{200} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\holam}{HE8}{201} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\qubuts}{HE8}{203} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\dagesh}{HE8}{204} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\meteg}{HE8}{205} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\maqaf}{HE8}{206} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\rafe}{HE8}{207} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\paseq}{HE8}{208} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\shindot}{HE8}{209} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sindot}{HE8}{210} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sofpasuq}{HE8}{211} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\doublevav}{HE8}{212} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\vavyod}{HE8}{213} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\doubleyod}{HE8}{214} -%</HE8enc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Hebrew letters occupy the positions 224--250 in \HEH{} encoding [WHAT -% ABOUT OTHER MARKS]: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8enc> -% \lccode``=`` % probably not needed (Tzafrir) -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{HE8}{224} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{HE8}{225} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{HE8}{226} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{HE8}{227} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{HE8}{228} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{HE8}{229} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{HE8}{230} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{HE8}{231} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{HE8}{232} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{HE8}{233} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{HE8}{234} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{HE8}{235} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{HE8}{236} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{HE8}{237} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{HE8}{238} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{HE8}{239} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{HE8}{240} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{HE8}{241} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{HE8}{242} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{HE8}{243} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{HE8}{244} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{HE8}{245} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{HE8}{246} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{HE8}{247} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{HE8}{248} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{HE8}{249} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{HE8}{250} -%</HE8enc> -% \end{macrocode} -% Letter |\hebsin| is defined as a synonym of |\hebshin|: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<+HE8enc>\let\hebsin=\hebshin -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The font definition files (in \HEH{} encoding)} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew default font} -% -% It uses \emph{OmegaHebrew} font for regular font, \emph{Old -% Jaffa} font for italic shape and small-caps, \emph{Dead Sea} -% font for bold face, and \emph{Tel-Aviv} for bold-italic -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8cmr> -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n} - {<-> david }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{it} - {<-> davidi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sl} - {<-> davidi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sc} - {<-> david }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{n} - {<-> davidb }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<-> davidb }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-> davidbi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{it} - {<-> davidbi }{} -%</HE8cmr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew sans-serif font} -% -% Until we have a real sans-serif font in this distribution, this file -% will remain a copy of the roman fonts definitons above. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8cmss> -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{it} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sl} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sc} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{b}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{sl} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{it} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%</HE8cmss> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew typewriter font} -% -% Until we have a real sans-serif font in this distribution, this file -% will remain a copy of the roman fonts definitons above. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8cmtt> -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sl} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sc} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{b}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{sl} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{it} - {<-> miriam }{} -%</HE8cmtt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit OmegaHebrew font} -% -% \emph{OmegaHebrew} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8OmegaHebrew> -\def\OmegaHebrewscale{0.9} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{m}{n}{<-> [\OmegaHebrewscale] OmegaHebrew }{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8OmegaHebrew> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit Aharoni font} -% -% \emph{Aharoni} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8aharoni> -\def\Aharoniscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{aharoni}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharoni}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{b}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonibi}{} - -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8aharoni> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit David font} -% -% \emph{David} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8david> -\def\Davidscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{david}{\hyphenchar\font45} - -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] david}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{b}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidbi}{} - - -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8david> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit Drugulin font} -% -% \emph{Drugulin} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8drugulin> -\def\Drugulinscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{drugulin}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{b}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8drugulin> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit Ellinia font} -% -% \emph{Ellinia} is a sans-serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8ellinia> -\def\Elliniascale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{ellinia}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] ellinia}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{it} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniai}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniai}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{b}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniab}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniab}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniabi}{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8ellinia> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit FrankRuehl font} -% -% \emph{FrankRuehl} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8frankruehl> -\def\FrankRuehlscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{frank}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frank}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{sl} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{b}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankbi}{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8frankruehl> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit KtavYad font} -% -% \emph{KtavYad} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8yad> -\def\KtavYadscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{yad}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{sl} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{b}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8yad> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit MiriamMono font} -% -% \emph{MiriamMono} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8miriam> -\def\MiriamMonoscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{miriam}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriam}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{sl} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{b}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriambi}{} - -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8miriam> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{8Bit Nachlieli font} -% -% \emph{Nachlieli} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project -% [FILL IN CREDITS] -% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION] -% shapes: [FILL IN] -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*HE8nachlieli> -\def\Nachlieliscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{nachlieli}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlieli}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{b}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielibi}{} -%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir] -%</HE8nachlieli> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Hebrew font switching commands} -% -% The \pkg{hebfont} package defines a number of high-level commands -% (all starting with |\text..| similar to the standard \LaTeXe{} -% font-change commands, for example |\textbf|) that have one -% argument and typeset this argument in the requested way. These -% commands are defined for all available Hebrew fonts defined above -% and change only font parameters but not direction. -% -% For example, to use Hebrew Classic font family, the following -% sequence of commands should be included in a \LaTeXe{} document: -% \begin{quote} -% |\sethebrew|\\ -% |\textclas{Hebrew text printed with Classic fonts}| -% \end{quote} -% or to use Hebrew with Classic fonts locally: -% \begin{quote} -% |\R{\textclas{Hebrew text printed with Classic fonts}}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \begin{table}[t] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lll} -% \textit{Command} & \textit{Corresponds to} & -% \textit{Font family} \\[4pt] -% |\textjm{..}| & |\rmfamily| & Jerusalem font \\ -% |\textds{..}| & |\bfseries| & Dead Sea font \\ -% |\textoj{..}| & |\itshape| & Old Jaffa font \\ -% & |\slshape| & \\ -% & |\emph| & \\ -% |\textta{..}| & |\sffamily| & Tel-Aviv font \\ -% & |\ttfamily| & \\[2pt] -% |\textcrml{..}| & |\fontfamily{crml}| & Carmel fonts \\[2pt] -% |\textfr{..}| & |\fontfamily{fr}| & Frank-Ruehl fonts \\[2pt] -% |\textredis{..}| & |\fontfamily{redis}| & Redis fonts \\[2pt] -% |\textclas{..}| & |\fontfamily{redis}| & Classic fonts \\[2pt] -% |\textshold{..}| & |\fontfamily{shold}| & Shalom Old Style font \\ -% |\textshscr{..}| & |\fontfamily{shscr}| & Shalom Script font \\ -% |\textshstk{..}| & |\fontfamily{shstk}| & Shalom Stick font -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \caption{Hebrew font-change commands with arguments} -% \label{tab:fntcmds} -% \begin{quote} -% The font change commands provided here all start with |\text..| -% to emphasize that they are for use in normal text and to be -% easily memorable. -% \end{quote} -% \end{table} -% -% We declare \LaTeXe{} font commands, e.g.\ |\textjm{|\ldots|}| -% for all available fonts. Table~\ref{tab:fntcmds} shows the -% meanings of all these new high-level commands. -% -% \begin{macro}{\textjm} -% Switches to \emph{Jerusalem} font which is default regular Hebrew -% font (``roman'' family). Commands |\textrm{|\ldots|}| and -% old-style |{\rm |\ldots|}| will produce the same result. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hebfont> -\def\ivritex@tmp{HE8} -\ifx\ivritex@tmp\HeblatexEncoding % - % compatibility with hebfonts: - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont} - - % an attempt to give some replacements to the original hebfonts: - % - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - % note that redis is larger than shstk - - - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textaha}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdav}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdru}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textel} {\fontfamily{ellinia}\selectfont} - % \textfr is already declared above - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textmir}{\fontfamily{miriam}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textna} {\fontfamily{nachlieli}\selectfont} - % is this necessary: - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textyad} {\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont} - -\else% -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textds} -% Switches to \emph{Dead Sea} font which is default bold font in -% Hebrew. Commands |\textbf{|\ldots|}| and old-style -% |{\bf |\ldots|}| will produce the same result. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textoj} -% Switches to \emph{Old Jaffa} font which is default italic font in -% Hebrew. Commands |\textit{|\ldots|}|, |\textsl{|\ldots|}|, -% |\emph{|\ldots|}| and old-style |{\it |\ldots|}| or -% |{\em |\ldots|}| will produce the same result. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textta} -% Switches to \emph{Tel-Aviv} font which is default sans-serif font -% in Hebrew. Commands |\textsf{|\ldots|}|, |\texttt{|\ldots|}| and -% old-style |{\sf |\ldots|}| or |{\tt |\ldots|}| will produce the -% same result (because sans-serif is used as typewriter font when -% in Hebrew mode). -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textcrml} -% Switches to \emph{Carmel} font. Regular and slanted variants of -% carmel font will be used.. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{crml}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textfr} -% Switches to \emph{Frank-Ruehl} font family. Regular, bold and -% slanted frank ruehl fonts will be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{fr}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textredis} -% Switches to \emph{Redis} font family. Regular, bold and slanted -% redis fonts of various sizes will be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{redis}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textclas} -% Switches to \emph{Classic} font family. The normal font will be -% hclassic and slanted --- hcaption. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{clas}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textshold} -% Switches to \emph{Shalom Old Style} font. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{shold}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textshscr} -% Switches to \emph{Shalom Script} font. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{shscr}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textshstk} -% Switches to \emph{Shalom Stick} font. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{shstk}\selectfont} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Finally, for backward compatibility with \LaTeX2.09. four old -% font commands, e.g.\ |{\jm |\ldots|}| are defined too (see -% Table~\ref{tab:oldcmds}). -% \begin{table}[t] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lll} -% \textit{Old font command} & \textit{Font name} & -% \textit{Comment}\\[4pt] -% |{\jm ..}| & Jerusalem & default regular (roman) font \\ -% |{\ds ..}| & Dead Sea & default bold font \\ -% |{\oj ..}| & Old Jaffa & default italic and slanted font \\ -% & & used also to emphasize text \\ -% |{\ta ..}| & Tel-Aviv & default sans-serif and typewriter font\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \caption{Hebrew old font-change commands for compatibility mode} -% \label{tab:oldcmds} -% \end{table} -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@compatibility - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\jm}{\normalfont\rmfamily\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\jm} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ds}{\normalfont\bfseries\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\ds} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\oj}{\normalfont\itshape\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\oj} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ta}{\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\ta} -\fi -%</hebfont> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 80f35a41eca..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,215 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -%% -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 1998 Boris Lavva. -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is contributed to the `babel' system. -%% -%% You are allowed to distribute this file together with all files -%% mentioned in manifest.bbl. -%% -%% You are not allowed to modify its contents. -%% -\def\filedate{2004/02/20} -\def\batchfile{hebrew.ins} -\input docstrip - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\Msg{*** Generating hebrew font encoding files ***} -\usepreamble\fdpreamble -\generate{\file{lheenc.def}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEenc}} - \file{lhecmr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmr,nowarn}} - \file{lhecmss.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmss,nowarn}} - \file{lhecmtt.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmtt,nowarn}} - \file{lheclas.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEclas,nowarn}} - \file{he8enc.def}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8enc}} - \file{he8cmr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmr,nowarn}} - \file{he8cmss.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmss,nowarn}} - \file{he8cmtt.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmtt,nowarn}} - \file{he8aharoni.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8aharoni,nowarn}} - \file{he8david.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8david,nowarn}} - \file{he8drugulin.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8drugulin,nowarn}} - \file{he8frankruehl.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8frankruehl,nowarn}} - \file{he8yad.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8yad,nowarn}} - \file{he8miriam.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8miriam,nowarn}} - \file{he8nachlieli.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8nachlieli,nowarn}} - \file{he8OmegaHebrew.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8OmegaHebrew,nowarn}} - \file{lheshold.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshold,nowarn}} - \file{lheshscr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshscr,nowarn}} - \file{lheshstk.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshstk,nowarn}} - \file{lhefr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEfr,nowarn}} - \file{lhecrml.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcrml,nowarn}} - \file{lheredis.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEredis,nowarn}} - \file{hebfont.sty}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{hebfont}} - } - -\Msg{*** Generating hebrew input encoding files ***} -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{8859-8.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{8859-8}} - \file{cp1255.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{cp1255}} - \file{cp862.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{cp862}} - \file{si960.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{si960}} - } - -\Msg{*** Generating hebrew language support files ***} -\generate{\file{hebrew.ldf}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{hebrew}} - \file{rlbabel.def}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{rightleft}} - \file{hebcal.sty}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{calendar}} - } - -\Msg{*** Generating hebrew 2.09 compatibility files ***} -\generate{\file{hebrew_newcode.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{newcode}} - \file{hebrew_p.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{pccode}} - \file{hebrew_oldcode.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{oldcode}} - } - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{*************************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.cls, *.sty, *.ldf, *.fd and *.def} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run `hebrew.dtx' through LaTeX} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{*************************************************************} -} - -\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 7b4be56c383..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,749 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{546} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{icelandic.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{icelandic} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{icelandic.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v1.1g Icelandic support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File iceland.dtx -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989--2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Icelandic Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1996--2005 -%% by Einar \'Arnason <einar@lif.hi.is> -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: Einar \'Arnason -%% einar at lif.hi.is -%% or to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -%% -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\usepackage{t1enc} -\usepackage[icelandic,english]{babel} -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} -\begin{center} - \textbf{\Large A Babel language definition file for - Icelandic}\\[3mm]^^A\] - Einar \'Arnason\\ - \texttt{einar@lif.hi.is} -\end{center} - \DocInput{icelandic.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{iceland.dtx} -% -% -% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1997/05/21}{Removed code already present in -% \file{babel.def}} -% -% \section{The Icelandic language} -% -% \subsection{Overview} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. } defines all the language definition macros for -% the Icelandic language -% -% Customization for the Icelandic language was made following -% several official and semiofficial publications~\cite{74:_augl, -% 77:_augl,88:_reglur,94:_si,97:_forst_fs}. These publications do -% not always agree and we indicate those instances. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-extras} an overview is given of its -% purpose. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{otherlanguage*}{icelandic} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |"`| & for Icelandic left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for Icelandic right double quotes. \\ -% |">| & for Icelandic `french' left double quotes -% (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |"<| & for Icelandic `french' right double quotes -% (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |"o| & for old Icelandic "o \\ -% |"O| & for old Icelandic "O \\ -% |"ó| & for old Icelandic "ó \\ -% |"Ó| & for old Icelandic "Ó \\ -% |"e| & for old Icelandic "e \\ -% |"E| & for old Icelandic "E \\ -% |"é| & for old Icelandic "é \\ -% |"É| & for old Icelandic "É \\ -% |\tala| & for typesetting numbers\\ -% |\grada| & for the `degree' symbol\\ -% |\gradur| & for `degrees', e.g. 5~\gradur C\\ -% |\upp| & for textsuperscript \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{otherlanguage*} -% \caption{The shorthands and extra definitions made -% by \file{icelandic.ldf}}\label{tab:icelandic-extras} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% The shorthands in table~\ref{tab:icelandic-extras} can also be -% typeset by using the commands in -% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-commands}. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{otherlanguage*}{icelandic} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\ilqq| & for Icelandic left double quotes -% (looks like ,,). \\ -% |\irqq| & for Icelandic right double quotes -% (looks like ``). \\ -% |\ilq| & for Icelandic left single quotes -% (looks like ,). \\ -% |\irq| & for Icelandic right single quotes -% (looks like `). \\ -% |\iflqq| & for Icelandic `french' left double quotes -% (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\ifrqq| & for Icelandic `french' right double quotes -% (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |\ifrq| & for Icelandic `french' right single quotes -% (similar to $<$).\\ -% |\iflq| & for Icelandic `french' left single quotes -% (similar to $>$). \\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\ -% |\oob| & for old Icelandic "o \\ -% |\Oob| & for old Icelandic "O \\ -% |\ooob| & for old Icelandic "ó \\ -% |\OOob| & for old Icelandic "Ó \\ -% |\eob| & for old Icelandic "e \\ -% |\Eob| & for old Icelandic "E \\ -% |\eeob| & for old Icelandic "é \\ -% |\EEob| & for old Icelandic "É \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{otherlanguage*} -% \caption{Commands which produce quotes and old Icelandic -% diacritics, defined by -% \file{icelandic.ldf}}\label{tab:icelandic-commands} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{thebibliography}{1} -% -% \bibitem{88:_reglur} -% Alþingi. -% \newblock {\em Reglur um frágang þingskjala og prentun umræðna}, -% 1988. -% -% \bibitem{74:_augl} -% Auglýsing um greinarmerkjasetningu. -% \newblock Stj.tíð B, nr. 133/1974, 1974. -% -% \bibitem{77:_augl} -% Auglýsing um breyting auglýsingu nr. 132/1974 um íslenska -% stafsetningu. -% \newblock Stj.tíð B, nr. 261/1977, 1977. -% -% \bibitem{unknown72:_first_gramm_treat} -% Einar Haugen, editor. -% \newblock {\em First Grammatical Treatise}. -% \newblock Longman, London, 2 edition, 1972. -% -% \bibitem{97:_forst_fs} -% Staðlaráð Íslands og Fagráð í upplýsingatækni, Reykjavík. -% \newblock {\em Forstaðall FS 130:1997}, 1997. -% -% \bibitem{94:_si} -% STRÍ Staðlaráð Íslands. -% \newblock {\em SI - kerfið}, 2 edition, 1994. -% -% \end{thebibliography} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% -% \subsection{\TeX{}nical details} -% -% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{icelandic} we make -% it behave as if \Lopt{icelandic} was specified. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{icelandic} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{icelandic} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{icelandic} will be an `unknown' language, so we -% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@icelandic| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@icelandic\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Icelandic} - \adddialect\l@icelandic0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@Two@E} -% We will need a new `if' : |\if@Two@E| is true if and only if -% \LaTeXe{} is running \emph{not} in compatibility mode. It is -% used in the definitions of the command |\tala| and |\upp|. -% The definition is somewhat complicated, due to the fact that -% |\if@compatibility| is not recognized as a |\if| in -% \LaTeX-2.09 based formats. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@Two@E \@Two@Etrue -\def\@FI@{\fi} -\ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined - \@Two@Efalse \def\@FI@{\relax} -\else - \if@compatibility \@Two@Efalse \fi -\@FI@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasicelandic} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasicelandic} -% -% The macro |\extrasicelandic| -% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the Icelandic -% language. The macro |\noextrasicelandic| is used to cancel the -% actions of |\extrasicelandic|. -% -% For Icelandic the \texttt{"} character is -% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{icelandic}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{icelandic-1.1e}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Icelandic} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasicelandic{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The icelandic hyphenation patterns can be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{icelandic-1.1f}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} -% to provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active -% character. This character is then used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-commands}. -% -% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% \subsection{Captionnames and date} -% -% The next step consists of defining the Icelandic equivalents for -% the \LaTeX{} captionnames. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsicelandic} -% The macro |\captionsicelandic| will define all strings used -% used in the four standard document classes provided -% with \LaTeX. -% \changes{icelandic-1.1f}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{icelandic-1.1g}{2002/01/00}{Only use 7-bit ASCII characters -% in order to keep the texts input encoding independant} -% \changes{icelandic-1.1g}{2002/01/09}{Added translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Form\'{a}li}% - \def\refname{Heimildir}% - \def\abstractname{\'{U}tdr\'{a}ttur}% - \def\bibname{Heimildir}% - \def\chaptername{Kafli}% - \def\appendixname{Vi{\dh}auki}% - \def\contentsname{Efnisyfirlit}% - \def\listfigurename{Myndaskr\'{a}}% - \def\listtablename{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% - \def\indexname{Atri{\dh}isor{\dh}askr\'{a}}% - \def\figurename{Mynd}% - \def\tablename{Tafla}% - \def\partname{Hluti}% - \def\enclname{Hj\'{a}lagt}% - \def\ccname{Samrit}% - \def\headtoname{Til:}% in letter - \def\pagename{Bla{\dh}s\'{\i}{\dh}a}% - \def\seename{Sj\'{a}}% - \def\alsoname{Sj\'{a} einnig}% - \def\proofname{S\"{o}nnun}% - \def\glossaryname{Or{\dh}alisti}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateicelandic} -% The macro |\dateicelandic| redefines the command |\today| -% to produce Icelandic dates. -% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateicelandic{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - jan\'{u}ar\or febr\'{u}ar\or mars\or apr\'{\i}l\or ma\'{\i}\or - j\'{u}n\'{\i}\or j\'{u}l\'{\i}\or \'{a}g\'{u}st\or september\or - okt\'{o}ber\or n\'{o}vember\or desember\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Icelandic quotation marks} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the icelandic and icelandic `french' quotes. -% The icelandic `french' guillemets are the reverse of french -% guillemets. We define single icelandic `french' quotes for -% compatibility. Shorthands are provided for a number of different -% quotation marks, which make them useable both outside and -% inside mathmode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ilq\grq -\let\irq\grq -\let\iflq\frq -\let\ifrq\flq -\let\ilqq\glqq -\let\irqq\grqq -\let\iflqq\frqq -\let\ifrqq\flqq -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"<}{\flqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Old Icelandic} -% \label{oldicelandic} -% -% \changes{icelandic-1.1}{1997/04/24}{Added definitions for old -% icelandic.} -% -% In old Icelandic some letters have special diacritical marks, -% described for example in \emph{First Grammatical -% Treatise}~\cite{unknown72:_first_gramm_treat,97:_forst_fs}. We -% provide these in the \texttt{T1} encoding with the `ogonek'. The -% ogonek is placed with the letters `o', and `O', `ó' and `Ó', `e' -% and `E', and `é' and `É'. Shorthands are provided for these as -% well. -% -% The following code by Leszek Holenderski lifted from -% \texttt{polish.dtx} is designed to position the diacritics -% correctly for every font in every size. These macros need a -% few extra dimension variables. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\pl@left -\newdimen\pl@down -\newdimen\pl@right -\newdimen\pl@temp -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sob} -% The macro |\sob| is used to put the `ogonek' in the right -% place. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\k{}}\setbox2\hbox{p}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\oob} -% \begin{macro}{\Oob} -% \begin{macro}{\ooob} -% \begin{macro}{\OOob} -% \begin{macro}{\eob} -% \begin{macro}{\Eob} -% \begin{macro}{\eeob} -% \begin{macro}{\EEob} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\oob}{T1}{\sob {o}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Oob}{T1}{\sob {O}{.7}{0}{0}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ooob}{T1}{\sob {ó}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\OOob}{T1}{\sob {Ó}{.7}{0}{0}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\sob {e}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\sob {E}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eeob}{T1}{\sob {é}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\EEob}{T1}{\sob {É}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"o}{\oob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"O}{\Oob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"ó}{\ooob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"Ó}{\OOob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"e}{\eob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"E}{\Eob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"é}{\eeob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"É}{\EEob} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Formatting numbers} -% \label{numbers} -% -% \changes{icelandic-1.1a}{1997/04/26}{Added definitions for -% formatting numbers in Icelandic and some extra utilities.} -% This section is lifted from \texttt{frenchb.dtx} by D. Flipo. -% In English the decimal part starts with a point and thousands -% should be separated by a comma: an approximation of $1000\pi$ -% should be inputed as |$3{,}141.592{,}653$| in math-mode and -% as |3,141.592,653| in text. -% \changes{icelandic-1.1b}{1997/05/05}{Added references to various -% publications used} -% -% In Icelandic the decimal part starts with a comma and thousands -% should be separated by a space~\cite{88:_reglur} or by a -% period~\cite{97:_forst_fs}; we have the space. The above -% approximation of $1000\pi$ should be inputed as -% |$3\;141{,}592\;653$| in math-mode and as something like -% |3~141,592~653| in text. Braces are mandatory around the comma in -% math-mode, the reason is mentioned in the \TeX{}book p.~134: -% the comma is of type |\mathpunct| (thus normally followed by a -% space) while the point is of type |\mathord| (no space added). -% -% Thierry Bouche suggested that a second type of comma, of type -% |\mathord| would be useful in math-mode, and proposed to -% introduce a command (named |\decimalsep| in this package), -% the expansion of which would depend on the current language. -% -% Vincent Jalby suggested a command |\nombre| to conveniently -% typeset numbers: inputting |\nombre{3141,592653}| either in -% text or in math-mode will format this number properly according -% to the current language (Icelandic or non-Icelandic). We use -% |\nombre| to define command |\tala| in Icelandic. -% -% |\tala| accepts an optional argument which happens to be -% useful with the extension `dcolumn', it specifies the decimal -% separator used in the \emph{source code}: -% |\newcolumntype{d}{D{,}{\decimalsep}{-1}}| \\ -% |\begin{tabular}{|d|}\hline | \\ -% | 3,14 \\ | \\ -% | \tala[,]{123,4567} \\ | \\ -% | \tala[,]{9876,543}\\\hline| \\ -% |\end{tabular} | \\ -% will print a column of numbers aligned on the decimal point -% (comma or point depending on the current language), each slice -% of 3 digits being separated by a space or a comma according to -% the current language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\decimalsep} -% \begin{macro}{\thousandsep} -% We need a internal definition, valid in both text and math-mode, -% for the comma (|\@comma@|) and another one for the unbreakable -% fixed length space (no glue) used in Icelandic (|\f@thousandsep|). -% -% The commands |\decimalsep| and |\thousandsep| get default -% definitions (for the English language) when |icelandic| is loaded; -% these definitions will be updated when the current language is -% switched to or from Icelandic. -% \begin{macrocode} -\mathchardef\m@comma="013B \def\@comma@{\ifmmode\m@comma\else,\fi} -\def\f@thousandsep{\ifmmode\mskip5.5mu\else\penalty\@M\kern.3em\fi} -\newcommand{\decimalsep}{.} \newcommand{\thousandsep}{\@comma@} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\decimalsep{\@comma@}% - \def\thousandsep{\f@thousandsep}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\decimalsep{.}% - \def\thousandsep{\@comma@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tala} -% The decimal separator used when \emph{inputing} a number -% with |\tala| \emph{has to be a comma}. -% |\tala| splits the inputed number into two parts: what -% comes before the first comma will be formatted by -% \cs{@integerpart} while the rest (if not empty) will be -% formatted by \cs{@decimalpart}. Both parts, once formatted -% separately will be merged together with between them, either -% the decimal separator \cs{decimalsep} or (in \LaTeXe{} -% \emph{only}) the optional argument of |\tala|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@Two@E - \newcommand{\tala}[2][\decimalsep]{% - \def\@decimalsep{#1}\@tala#2\@empty,\@empty,\@nil} -\else - \newcommand{\tala}[1]{% - \def\@decimalsep{\decimalsep}\@tala#1\@empty,\@empty,\@nil} -\fi -\def\@tala#1,#2,#3\@nil{% - \ifx\@empty#2% - \@integerpart{#1}% - \else - \@integerpart{#1}\@decimalsep\@decimalpart{#2}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% The easiest bit is the decimal part: -% We attempt to read the first four digits of the decimal part, if -% it has less than 4 digits, we just have to print them, otherwise -% |\thousandsep| has to be appended after the third digit, and the -% algorithm is applied recursively to the rest of the decimal part. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@decimalpart#1{\@@decimalpart#1\@empty\@empty\@empty} -\def\@@decimalpart#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3% - \ifx\@empty#4% - \else - \thousandsep\expandafter\@@decimalpart\expandafter#4% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Formatting the integer part is more difficult because the slices -% of 3 digits start from the \emph{bottom} while the number is -% read from the top! -% This (tricky) code is borrowed from David Carlisle's comma.sty. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@integerpart#1{\@@integerpart{}#1\@empty\@empty\@empty} -\def\@@integerpart#1#2#3#4{% - \ifx\@empty#2% - \@addthousandsep#1\relax - \else - \ifx\@empty#3% - \@addthousandsep\@empty\@empty#1#2\relax - \else - \ifx\@empty#4% - \@addthousandsep\@empty#1#2#3\relax - \else - \@@integerpartafterfi{#1#2#3#4}% - \fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\@@integerpartafterfi#1\fi\fi\fi{\fi\fi\fi\@@integerpart{#1}} -\def\@addthousandsep#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3% - \if#4\relax - \else - \thousandsep\expandafter\@addthousandsep\expandafter#4% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Extra utilities} -% -% We now provide the Icelandic user with some extra utilities. -% -% \begin{macro}{\upp} -% |\upp| is for typesetting superscripts. |\upp| relies on -% \begin{macro}{\upp@size} -% The internal macro |\upp@size| holds the size at which the -% superscript will be typeset. The reason for this is that we have -% to specify it differently for different formats. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\sevenrm\@undefined - \ifx\@ptsize\@undefined - \let\upp@size\small - \else - \ifx\selectfont\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% In this case the format is the original \LaTeX-2.09: -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifcase\@ptsize - \let\upp@size\ixpt\or - \let\upp@size\xpt\or - \let\upp@size\xipt - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% When |\selectfont| is defined we probably have NFSS available: -% \begin{macrocode} - \else - \ifcase\@ptsize - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@ixpt{10pt}\selectfont}\or - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xpt{11pt}\selectfont}\or - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xipt{12pt}\selectfont} - \fi - \fi - \fi -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% If we end up here it must be a plain based \TeX{} format, so: -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\upp@size\sevenrm -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% Now we can define |\upp|. When \LaTeXe{} runs in -% compatibility mode (\LaTeX-2.09 emulation), |\textsuperscript| is -% also defined, but does no good job, so we give two different -% definitions for |\upp| using |\if@Two@E|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@Two@E - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{% - \leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\upp@size#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Some definitions for special characters. -% |\grada| needs a special treatment: it is |\char6| -% in T1-encoding and |\char23| in OT1-encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\fmtname\LaTeXeFmtName - \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{T1}{6} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{OT1}{23} -\else - \def\T@one{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\T@one - \newcommand{\grada}{\char6} - \else - \newcommand{\grada}{\char23} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\gradur} -% Macro for typesetting the abbreviation for `degrees' (as in -% `degrees Celsius'). As the bounding box of the character `degree' -% has \emph{very} different widths in CMR/DC and PostScript fonts, -% we fix the width of the bounding box of |\gradur| to 0.3\,em, -% this lets the symbol `degree' stick to the preceding -% (e.g., |45\gradur|) or following character (e.g., |20~\gradur C|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gradur}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\grada\hss}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 21ba5daade9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2000/09/26} -\def\batchfile{icelandic.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{icelandic.ldf}{\from{icelandic.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 56b109fdca7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,207 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{85} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{interlingua.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{interlingua} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{interlingua.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v1.6 Interlingua support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for -% the Interlingua language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\usepackage{url} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{interlingua.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{interlingua.dtx} -% -% \section{The Interlingua language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Interlingua language. This file was contributed by Peter -% Kleiweg, kleiweg at let.rug.nl. -% -% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common -% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French, -% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy, -% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages. The site -% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua -% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want -% to read some sample of it. -% -% You can have a look at the grammar at -% \url{http://www.geocities.com/linguablau} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{interlingua}{captionsinterlingua} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{interlingua} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@interlingua| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\l@interlingua - \@nopatterns{Interlingua} - \adddialect\l@interlingua0\fi -% \end{macrocode} - -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Interlingua language. -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\interlinguahyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{interlingua}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsinterlingua} -% The macro |\captionsinterlingua| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captionsinterlingua{% - \def\prefacename{Prefacio}% - \def\refname{Referentias}% - \def\abstractname{Summario}% - \def\bibname{Bibliographia}% - \def\chaptername{Capitulo}% - \def\appendixname{Appendice}% - \def\contentsname{Contento}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de tabellas}% - \def\indexname{Indice}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabella}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Incluso}% - \def\ccname{Copia}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{vide}% - \def\alsoname{vide etiam}% - \def\proofname{Prova}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossario}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - - -% \begin{macro}{\dateinterlingua} -% The macro |\dateinterlingua| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Interlingua dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateinterlingua{% - \def\today{le~\number\day\space de \ifcase\month\or - januario\or februario\or martio\or april\or maio\or junio\or - julio\or augusto\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or - decembre\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% - -% \begin{macro}{\extrasinterlingua} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasinterlingua} -% The macro |\extrasinterlingua| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Interlingua language. The macro -% |\noextrasinterlingua| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasinterlingua|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other -% language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasinterlingua{} -\addto\noextrasinterlingua{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{interlingua} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 679af1e10c4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2003/11/13} -\def\batchfile{interlingua.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{interlingua.ldf}{\from{interlingua.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 221c08f91a5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,218 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{122} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{irish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{irish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{irish.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v1.0h Irish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `irish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Irish language definition file. -% -% The Gaeilge or Irish Gaelic terms were tranlated from those -% provided by Fraser Grant \texttt{FRASER@CERNVM} by Marion Gunn. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{irish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{irish.dtx} -% -% \changes{irish-1.0b}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typo (PR1652)} -% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Irish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Marion Gunn.} defines all -% the language definition macros for the Irish language. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{irish}\captionsirish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{irish} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@irish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@irish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{irish} - \adddialect\l@irish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Irish language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\irishhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/06/08}{Added definition of -% \cs{hyphenmins}} -% \changes{irish-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsirish} -% The macro |\captionsirish| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{irish-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/06/08}{Added missing translations provided -% in PR 2719} -% \changes{irish-1.0h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsirish{% - \def\prefacename{R\'eamhr\'a}% <-- also "Brollach" - \def\refname{Tagairt\'{\i}}% - \def\abstractname{Achoimre}% - \def\bibname{Leabharliosta}% - \def\chaptername{Caibidil}% - \def\appendixname{Aguis\'{\i}n}% - \def\contentsname{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% - \def\listfigurename{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% - \def\listtablename{T\'abla\'{\i}}% - \def\indexname{Inn\'eacs}% - \def\figurename{L\'ear\'aid}% - \def\tablename{T\'abla}% - \def\partname{Cuid}% - \def\enclname{faoi iamh}% - \def\ccname{cc}% abrv. `c\'oip chuig' - \def\headtoname{Go}% - \def\pagename{Leathanach}% - \def\seename{f\'each}% - \def\alsoname{f\'each freisin}% - \def\proofname{Cruth\'unas}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateirish} -% The macro |\dateirish| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Irish dates. -% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateirish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or - Ean\'air\or Feabhra\or M\'arta\or Aibre\'an\or - Bealtaine\or Meitheamh\or I\'uil\or L\'unasa\or - Me\'an F\'omhair\or Deireadh F\'omhair\or - M\'{\i} na Samhna\or M\'{\i} na Nollag\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasirish} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasirish} -% The macro |\extrasirish| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Irish language. The macro |\noextrasirish| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasirish|. For the moment these -% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the -% other language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasirish{} -\addto\noextrasirish{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{irish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 33a3172ee2b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{irish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{irish.ldf}{\from{irish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index d054726438b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,876 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{424} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{italian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{italian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{italian.dtx} - [2008/03/14 v1.2t Italian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `italian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% Claudio Beccari -%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Italian language definition file. -% The original version of this file was written by Maurizio -% Codogno, (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it). Several features were added -% by Claudio Beccari, (beccari@polito.it). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{italian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{italian.dtx} -% -% \changes{italian-0.99}{1990/07/11}{First version, from english.doc} -% \changes{italian-1.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0} -% \changes{italian-1.0a}{1991/05/23}{removed typo} -% \changes{italian-1.0b}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer} -% \changes{italian-1.0e}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{italian-1.2}{1994/02/09}{Update for\ LaTeXe} -% \changes{italian-1.2e}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{italian-1.2f}{1995/05/28}{Updated for babel 3.5} -% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/24}{Added \cs{unit}, \cs{ap}, and -% \cs{ped} macros} -% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/01/05}{Added support for etymological -% hyphenation} -% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/02/02}{Completely modified etymological -% hyphenation facility} -% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/05/28}{Added several commands for the -% caporali double quotes and for simplifying the accented vowel input} -% \changes{italian-1.2o}{2000/12/12}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{italian-1.2p}{2002/07/10}{Removed redefinition of -% \cs{add@acc} since its functionality has been introduced into the -% kernel of LaTeX 2001/06/01} -% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Added test for avoiding conflict -% with package units.sty; adjusted caporali functionality, since -% the previous one did not work with the standard (although obsolete) -% slides class file} -% \changes{italian-1.2s}{2007/01/12}{Corrected email of CB} -% \section{The Italian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The original author is Maurizio Codogno, -% (\texttt{mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it}). It has been largely revised -% by Johannes Braams and Claudio Beccari} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Italian language. -% -% The features of this language definition file are the following: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item The Italian hyphenation is invoked, provided that file -% \texttt{ithyph.tex} was loaded when the \LaTeXe\ format was -% built; in case it was not, read the information coming with your -% distribution of the \TeX\ software, and the \babel\ -% documentation. -% \item The language dependent fixed words to be inserted by such -% commands as |\chapter|, |\caption|, |\tableofcontents|, -% etc. are redefined in accordance with the Italian -% typographical practice. -% \item Since Italian can be easily hyphenated and Italian practice -% allows to break a word before the last two letters, hyphenation -% parameters have been set accordingly, but a very high demerit -% value has been set in order to avoid word breaks in the -% penultimate line of a paragraph. Specifically the |\clubpenalty|, -% and the |\widowpenalty| are set to rather high values and -% |\finalhyphendemerits| is set to such a high value that -% hyphenation is prohibited between the last two lines of a -% paragraph. In orer to make it consistent, also |\@clubpenalty| -% is set to the same value; actualy the latter value is the -% reset value after every sectioning command, so that after the -% first section, |\clubpenalty| is reset to the low default value. -% Thanks to Enrico Gregorio for spotting this serious bug. -% \item Some language specific shortcuts have been defined so as to -% allow etymological hyphenation, specifically |"| inserts a -% break point in any word boundary that the typesetter chooses, -% provided it is not followed by and accented letter (very unlikely -% in Italian, where compulsory accents fall only on the last and -% ending vowel of a word, but may take place with compound words -% that include foreign roots), and \verb="|= when the desired break -% point falls before an accented letter. -% \item The shortcut |""| introduces the raised (English) opening -% double quotes; this shortcut proves its usefulness when one -% reminds that the Italian keyboard misses the backtick key, and -% the backtick on a Windows based platform may be obtained only by -% pressing the \texttt{Alt} key while inputting the numerical code -% 0096; very, very annoying! -% \item The shortcuts |"<| and |">| insert the French guillemots, -% sometimes used in Italian typography; with the T1 font encoding -% the ligatures |<<| and |>>| should insert such signs directly, -% but not all the virtual fonts that claim to follow the T1 font -% encoding actually contain the guillemots; with the OT1 encoding -% the guillemots are not available and must be faked in some -% way. By using the |"<| and |">| shortcuts (even with the T1 -% encoding) the necessary tests are performed and in case the -% suitable glyphs are taken from other fonts normally available -% with any good, modern \LaTeX\ distribution. -% \item Three new specific commands |\unit|, |\ped|, and |\ap| are -% introduced so as to enable the correct composition of technical -% mathematics according to the ISO~31/XI recommendations. |\unit| -% does not get redefined if the \babel\ package is loaded \emph{after} -% the package \texttt{units.sty} whose homonymous command plays -% a different role and follows a different syntax. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% For this language a limited number of shortcuts has been defined, -% table~\ref{t:itshrtct}, some of which are used to overcome -% certain limitations of the Italian keyboard; in -% section~\ref{s:itkbd} there are other comments and hints in order -% to overcome some other keyboard limitations. -% -% \begin{table}[htb]\centering -% \begin{tabular}{cp{80mm}} -% |"| & inserts a compound word mark where hyphenation is legal; -% it allows etymological hyphenation which is recommended -% for technical terms, chemical names and the like; it -% does not work if the next character is represented with -% a control sequence or is an accented character.\\ -% \texttt{\string"\string|} -% & the same as the above without the limitation on -% characters represented with control sequences or accented -% ones.\\ -% |""| & inserts open quotes ``.\\ %^^A'' emacs matching -% |"<| & inserts open guillemots.\\ -% |">| & inserts closed guillemots.\\ -% |"/| & equivalent to |\slash| -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Shortcuts for the Italian language}\label{t:itshrtct} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{% -% \begin{thebibliography}{1} -% \bibitem{CBec} Beccari C., ``Computer Aided Hyphenation for -% Italian and Modern Latin'', \textsf{TUGboat} vol.~13, n.~1, -% pp.~23-33 (1992). -% \bibitem{Becc2} Beccari C., ``Typesetting mathematics for science -% and technology according to ISO\,31/XI'', \textsf{TUGboat} -% vol.~18, n.~1, pp.~39-48 (1997). -% \end{thebibliography}} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{italian-1.2j}{1996/12/29}{Added braces around second arg of -% \cs{LdfInit}} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{italian}{captionsitalian}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{italian} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@italian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{italian-1.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if -% language undefined} -% \changes{italian-1.0h}{1991/10/08}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{italian-1.2e}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@italian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Italian}% - \adddialect\l@italian0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Italian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsitalian} -% The macro |\captionsitalian| defines all strings used -% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be -% \cs{headpagename}} -% \changes{italian-1.0d}{1991/07/01}{`contiene' substitued by `Allegati' -% as suggested by Marco Bozzo (\texttt{BOZZO@CERNVM}).} -% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{italian-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Changed some of the words -% following suggestions from Claudio Beccari} -% \changes{italian-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{italian-1.2h}{1995/07/27}{Added translation of `Proof'} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsitalian{% - \def\prefacename{Prefazione}% - \def\refname{Riferimenti bibliografici}% - \def\abstractname{Sommario}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Capitolo}% - \def\appendixname{Appendice}% - \def\contentsname{Indice}% - \def\listfigurename{Elenco delle figure}% - \def\listtablename{Elenco delle tabelle}% - \def\indexname{Indice analitico}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabella}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Allegati}% - \def\ccname{e~p.~c.}% - \def\headtoname{Per}% - \def\pagename{Pag.}% % in Italian the abbreviation is preferred - \def\seename{vedi}% - \def\alsoname{vedi anche}% - \def\proofname{Dimostrazione}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossario}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateitalian} -% The macro |\dateitalian| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce Italian dates. -% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateitalian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - gennaio\or febbraio\or marzo\or aprile\or maggio\or giugno\or - luglio\or agosto\or settembre\or ottobre\or novembre\or - dicembre\fi\space \number\year}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\italianhyphenmins} -% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of left and -% righthyphenmin according to Claudio Beccari's suggestion} -% -% The italian hyphenation patterns can be used with both -% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasitalian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasitalian} -% -% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of club- and -% widowpenalty} -% Lower the chance that clubs or widows occur. -% \changes{italian-1.2t}{2007/12/10}{Added \cs{@clubpenalty} to the -% italian specific settings, otherwise any sectioning command restores -% it to the default value valid for english and most other languages} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty - \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty - \clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000\@clubpenalty\clubpenalty}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of -% finalhyphendemerits} -% -% Never ever break a word between the last two lines of a paragraph -% in italian texts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits - \finalhyphendemerits50000000}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{italian-1.2h}{1995/11/10}{Now give the apostrophe a -% lowercase code} -% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/5}{Changed example ``begl'italiani'' -% (obsolete spelling) with another, ``nell'altezza'', that behaves -% the same way} -% In order to enable the hyphenation of words such as -% ``nell'altezza'' we give the \texttt{'} a non-zero lower case -% code. When we do that \TeX\ finds the following hyphenation -% points |nel-l'al-tez-za| instead of none. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \lccode`'=`'}% -\addto\noextrasitalian{% - \lccode`'=0}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/01/05}{Support for etymological -% hyphenation} -% -% \subsection{Support for etymological hyphenation} -% -% In his article on Italian hyphenation \cite{CBec} Beccari pointed -% out that the Italian language gets hyphenated on a phonetic -% basis, although etymological hyphenation is allowed; this is in -% contrast with what happens in Latin, for example, where -% etymological hyphenation is always used. Since the patterns for -% both languages would become too complicated in order to cope with -% etymological hyphenation, in his paper Beccari proposed the -% definition of an active character `|_|' such that it could insert -% a ``soft'' discretionary hyphen at the compound word -% boundary. For several reasons that idea and the specific active -% character proved to be unpractical and was abandoned. -% -% This problem is so important with the majority of the European -% languages, that \babel\ from the very beginning developed -% the tradition of making the |"| character active so as to perform -% several actions that turned useful with every language. -% One of these actions consisted in defining the shortcut \verb="|= -% that was extensively used in German and in many other languages -% in order to insert a discretionary hyphen such that hyphenation -% would not be precluded in the rest of the word as it happens with -% the standard \TeX\ command |\-|. -% -% Meanwhile the \texttt{ec} fonts with the double Cork encoding -% (thus formerly called the \texttt{dc} fonts) have become more or -% less standard and are widely used by virtually all Europeans that -% write languages with many special national characters; by so -% doing they avoid the use of the |\accent| primitive which would -% be required with the standard \texttt{cm} fonts; with the latter -% fonts the primitive command |\accent| is such that hyphenation -% becomes almost impossible, in any case strongly impeached. -% -% The \texttt{ec} fonts contain a special character, named -% ``compound word mark'', that occupies position 23 in the font -% scheme and may be input with the sequence |^^W|. Up to now, -% apparently, this special character has never been used in a -% practical way for the typesetting of languages rich of compound -% words; also it has never been inserted in the hyphenation pattern -% files of any language. Beccari modified his pattern file -% \file{ithyph.tex v4.8b} for Italian so as to contain five new -% patterns that involve |^^W|, and he tried to give the -% \babel\ active character |"| a new shortcut definition, -% so as to allow the insertion of the ``compound word mark'' in the -% proper place within any word where two semantic fragments join -% up. With such facility for marking the compound word boundaries, -% etymological hyphenation becomes possible even if the patterns -% know nothing about etymology (but the typesetter hopefully -% does!). -% In Italian such etymological hyphenation is desirable with -% technical terms, chemical names, and the like. -% -% Even this solution proved to be inconvenient on certain UN*X -% platforms, so Beccari resorted to another approach that uses the -% \babel\ active character |"| and relies on the category -% code of the character that follows |"|. -% -% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/02/02}{Completely new etymological -% hyphenation facility} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"}% -\addto\extrasitalian{\bbl@activate{"}\languageshorthands{italian}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\it@cwm} -% The active character |"| is now defined for language |italian| so -% as to perform different actions in math mode compared to text -% mode; specifically in math mode a double quote is inserted so as -% to produce a double prime sign, while in text mode the temporary -% macro |\it@next| is defined so as to defer any further action -% until the next token category code has been tested. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{italian}{"}{% -\ifmmode - \def\it@next{''}% -\else - \def\it@next{\futurelet\it@temp\it@cwm}% -\fi -\it@next -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\it@cwm} -% The \cs{it@next} service control sequence is such that upon its -% execution a temporary variable \cs{it@temp} is made equivalent to -% the next token in the input list without actually removing -% it. Such temporary token is then tested by the macro \cs{it@cwm} -% and if it is found to be a letter token, then it introduces a -% compound word separator control sequence \cs{it@allowhyphens} -% whose expansion introduces a discretionary hyphen and an -% unbreakable space; in case the token is not a letter, then it is -% tested against \verb=|=$_{12}$: if so a compound word separator -% is inserted and the \verb=|= token is removed, otherwise another -% test is performed so as to see if another double quote sign -% follows: in this case a double open quote mark is inserted, -% otherwise two other tests are performed so as to see if -% guillemets have to be inserted, otherwise nothing is done. -% The double quote shortcut for inserting a double open quote sign -% is useful for people who are inputting Italian text by means of -% an Italian keyboard that unfortunately misses the grave or -% backtick key. -% By this shortcut |""| becomes equivalent to |``| for inserting -% raised open high double quotes. -% \changes{italian-1.2r}{2005/11/17}{Added \cs{nobreak} to -% \cs{it@@cwm} and corrected \cs{it@next}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\it@@cwm{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}% -\def\it@@ocap#1{\it@ocap}\def\it@@ccap#1{\it@ccap}% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@cwm}{\let\it@@next\relax -\ifcat\noexpand\it@temp a% - \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm}% -\else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string|% - \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm\@gobble}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string<% - \def\it@@next{\it@@ocap}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string>% - \def\it@@next{\it@@ccap}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp\string/% - \def\it@@next{\slash\@gobble}% - \else - \ifx\it@temp"% - \def\it@@next{``\@gobble}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -\it@@next}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{sloppypar} -% By this definition of |"| if one types |macro"istruzione| the -% possible break points become \textsf{ma-cro-istru-zio-ne}, while -% without the |"| mark they would be \textsf{ma-croi-stru-zio-ne}, -% according to the phonetic rules such that the |macro| prefix is -% not taken as a unit. -% A chemical name such as \texttt{des"clor"fenir"amina"cloridrato} -% is breakable as \textsf{des-clor-fe-nir-ami-na-clo-ri-dra-to} -% instead of \textsf{de-sclor-fe-ni-ra-mi-na-...} -% -% In other language description files a shortcut is defined so as -% to allow a break point without actually inserting any hyphen -% sign; examples are given such as \mbox{entrada/salida}; actually -% if one wants to allow a breakpoint after the slash, it is much -% clearer to type |\slash| instead of |/| and \LaTeX\ does -% everything by itself; here the shortcut |"/| was introduced to -% stand for |\slash| so that one can type |input"/output| and allow -% a line break after the slash. -% This shortcut works only for the slash, since in Italian such -% constructs are extremely rare. -% \end{sloppypar} -% -% Attention: the expansion of |"| takes place before the actual -% expansion of OT1 or T1 accented sequences such as |\`{a}|; -% therefore this etymological hyphenation facility works as it -% should only when the semantic word fragments \textit{do not -% start} with an accented letter; this in Italian is always -% avoidable, because compulsory accents fall only on the last -% vowel, but it may be necessary to mark a compound word where one -% or more components come from a foreign language and contain -% diacritical marks according to the spelling rules of that -% language. In this case the special shorthand \verb!"|! may be -% used that performs exactly as |"| normally does, except that the -% \verb!|! sign is removed from the token input list: -% \verb!kilo"|{\"o}rsted! gets hyphenated as -% \texttt{ki-lo-\"or-sted}. -% -% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/05}{Added useful macros for -% fulfilling ISO 31/XI regulations} -% -% \subsection{Facilities required by the ISO 31/XI regulations} -% The ISO 31/XI regulations require that units of measure are -% typeset in upright font in any circumstance, math or text, and -% that in text mode they are separated from the numerical -% indication of the measure with an unbreakable (thin) space. -% The command |\unit| that was defined for achieving this -% goal happened to conflict with the homonymous command defined by -% the package \texttt{units.sty}; we therefore need to test if that -% package has already been loaded so as to avoid conflicts; we assume -% that if the user loads that package, s/he wants to use that package -% facilities and command syntax. -% -% The same regulations require also that super and subscripts -% (apices and pedices) are in upright font, \emph{not in math -% italics}, when they represent ``adjectives'' or appositions to -% mathematical or physical variables that do not represent -% countable or measurable entities such as, for example, -% $V_{\mathrm{max}}$ or $V_{\mathrm{rms}}$ for a maximum or a root -% mean square voltage, compared to $V_i$ or $V_T$ as the $i$-th -% voltage in a set, or a voltage that depends on the thermodynamic -% temperature $T$. See \cite{Becc2} for a complete description of -% the ISO regulations in connection with typesetting. -% -% More rarely it happens to use superscripts that are not -% mathematical variables, such as the notation -% $\mathbf{A}^{\!\mathrm{T}}$ to denote the transpose of matrix -% $\mathbf{A}$; text superscripts are useful also as ordinals or -% in old fashioned abbreviations in text mode; for example the -% feminine ordinal $1^{\mathrm{a}}$ or the old fashioned obsolete -% abbreviation F$^{\mathrm{lli}}$ for \mbox{Fratelli} in company -% names (compare with ``Bros.'' for \underline{bro}ther\underline{s} -% in American English); text subscripts are mostly used in logos. -% -% \begin{macro}{\unit} -% \begin{macro}{\ap} -% \begin{macro}{\ped} -% First we define the new (internal) commands |\bbl@unit|, |\bbl@ap|, -% and |\bbl@ped| as robust ones. -% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Added testing for avoiding conflicts -% with the units.sty package} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@unit}[1]{% - \textormath{\,\mbox{#1}}{\,\mathrm{#1}}}% - }% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ap}[1]{% - \textormath{\textsuperscript{#1}}{^{\mathrm{#1}}}}% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ped}[1]{% - \textormath{$_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont#1}}$}{_\mathrm{#1}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we can use |\let| to define the user level commands, but in -% case the macros already have a different meaning before entering -% in Italian mode typesetting, we first memorize their meaning so -% as to restore them on exit. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{% - \addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@save\unit\let\unit\bbl@unit}% - }% -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@save\ap\let\ap\bbl@ap - \babel@save\ped\let\ped\bbl@ped - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Accents}\label{s:itkbd} -% Most of the other language description files introduce a number -% of shortcuts for inserting accents and other language specific -% diacritical marks in a more comfortable way compared with the -% lengthy standard \TeX\ conventions. When an Italian keyboard is -% being used on a Windows based platform, it exhibits such -% limitations that up to now no convenient shortcuts have been -% developed; the reason lies in the fact that the Italian keyboard -% lacks the grave accent (also known as ``backtick''), which is -% compulsory on all accented vowels except the `e', but, on the -% opposite, it carries the keys with all the accented lowercase -% vowels; the keyboard lacks also the tie |~| (tilde) key, while -% the curly braces require pressing three keys simultaneously. -% -% The best solution Italians have found so far is to use a smart -% editor that accepts shortcut definitions such that, for example, -% by striking |"(| one gets directly |{| on the screen and the same -% sign is saved into the \file{.tex} file; the same smart editor -% should be capable of translating the accented characters into the -% standard \TeX\ sequences when writing a file to disk (for the -% sake of file portability), and to transform the standard \TeX\ -% sequences into the corresponding signs when loading a \file{.tex} -% file from disk to memory. Such smart editors do exist and can be -% downloaded from the \textsc{ctan} archives. -% -% \changes{italian-1.2p}{2002/07/10}{Removed redefinition of \cs{add@acc} since its -% functionality has been introduced into the kernel of LaTeX 2001/06/01} -% -% For what concerns the missing backtick key, -% which is used also for inputting the open quotes, it must be -% noticed that the shortcut |""| described above completely solves -% the problem for \textit{double} raised open quotes; according to -% the traditions of particular publishing houses, since there are -% no compulsory regulations on the matter, the French guillemets -% may be used; in this case the T1 font encoding solves the problem -% by means of its built in ligatures |<<| and |>>|. But\dots -% -% \subsection{\emph{Caporali} or French double quotes} -% Although the T1 font encoding ligatures solve the problem, there -% are some circumstances where even the T1 font encoding cannot be -% used, either because the author\slash typesetter wants to use the -% OT1 encoding, or because s/he uses a font set that does -% not comply completely with the T1 font encoding; some virtual -% fonts, for example, are supposed to implement the double Cork -% font encoding but actually miss some glyphs; one such virtual -% font set is given by the \texttt{ae} virtual fonts, because they -% are supposed to implement such double font encoding simply using -% the \texttt{cm} fonts, of which the type~1 PostScript version -% exists and is freely available. Since guillemets (in Italian -% \emph{caporali}) do not exist in any \texttt{cm} latin font, -% their glyphs must be substituted with something else that -% approaches them. -% -% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Redefined the caporali machinery -% so as to avoid incompatibilities with the slides class, as there -% are no Cyrillic slides fonts as there are for Latins script} -% -% Since in French typesetting guillemets are compulsory, the French -% language definition file resorts to a clever font substitution; -% such file exploits the \LaTeXe\ font selection machinery so as to -% get the guillemets from the Cyrillic fonts, because it suffices -% to locally change the default encoding. There are several sets of -% Cyrillic fonts, but the ones that obey the OT2 font encoding are -% generally distributed with all recent implementations of the -% \TeX\ software; they are part of the American Mathematical -% Society fonts and come both as \textsf{METAFONT} source files and -% Type~1 PostScript \texttt{.pfb} files. The availability of such -% fonts should be guaranteed by the presence of the -% \texttt{OT2cmr.fd} font description file. Actually the presence -% of this file does not guarantee the completeness of your \TeX\ -% implementation; should \LaTeX\ complain about a missing Cyrillic -% \texttt{.tfm} file (that kind of file that contains the font -% metric parameters) and/or about missing Cyrillic \texttt(.mf) -% files, then your \TeX\ system is \emph{incomplete} and you should -% download such fonts from the \textsc{ctan} archives. Temporarily -% you may issue the command |\LtxSymbCaporali| so as to approximate -% the missing glyphs with the \LaTeX\ symbol fonts. In some case -% warning messages are issued so as to inform the typesetter about -% the necessity of resorting to some \emph{poor man} solution. -% -% In spite of these alternate fonts, we must avoid invoking unusual -% fonts if the available encoding allows to use built in caporali. -% As far as I know (CB) the only T1-encoded font families that miss -% the guillemets are the AE ones; we therefore first test if the -% default encoding id the T1 one and in this case if the AE families -% are the default ones; in order for this to work properly it is -% necessary to load these optional packages \emph{before} \babel. -% If the T1 encoding is not the default one when the Italian language -% is specified, then some substitutions must be done. -% -% \begin{macro}{\LtxSymbCaporali} -% \begin{macro}{\it@ocap} -% \begin{macro}{\it@ccap} -% We define some macros for substituting the default guillemets; first the -% emulation by means of the \LaTeX\ symbols; each one of these macro sets -% actually redefines the control sequences |\it@ocap| and |\it@ccap| that -% are the ones effectively activated by the shortcuts |"<| and |">|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\LtxSymbCaporali{% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{\mbox{% - \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont(\kern-0.20em(}% - \ignorespaces}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \mbox{% - \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont)\kern-0.20em)}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Then the substitution with any specific font that contains such -% glyphs; it might be the CBgreek fonts, the Cyrillic one, the -% super-cm ones, the lm ones, or any other the user might prefer -% (the code is adapted from the one that appears in the -% \texttt{frenchb.ld} file; thanks to Daniel Flipo). -% By default if the user did not select the T1 encoding, the -% existence of the CBgreek fonts is tested; if they exist the -% guillemets are taken from this font, and since its families are a -% superset of the default CM ones and they apply also to typeset -% slides with the standard class \texttt{slides}. If the CBgreek -% fonts are not found, then the existence of the Cyrillic ones is -% tested, although this choice is not suited for typesetting -% slides; otherwise the poor man solution of the \LaTeX\ special -% symbols is used. In any case the user can force the use of the -% Cyrillic guillemets substitution by issuing the declaration -% |\CyrillicCaporali| just before the |\begin{document}| statement; -% in alternative the user can specify with -% \begin{flushleft} -% |\CaporaliFrom|\marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{opening number}\marg{closing number} -% \end{flushleft} -% the encoding and family of the font s/he prefers, and the slot -% numbers of the opening and closing guillemets respectively. For -% example if the T1-encoded Latin Modern fonts are desired the -% specific command should be -% \begin {flushleft} -% |\CaporaliFrom{T1}{lmr}{19}{20}| -% \end{flushleft} -% These user choices might be necessary for assuring the correct -% typesetting with fonts that contain the required glyphs and are -% available also in PostScript form so as to use them directly with -% \texttt{pdflatex}, for example. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CaporaliFrom#1#2#3#4{% - \DeclareFontEncoding{#1}{}{}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{T1}{% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{T1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{OT1}{% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{OT1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Then we set a boolean variable and test the default family; -% if such family has a name that starts with the letters ``ae'' -% then we have no built in guillemets; of course if the AE font -% family is chosen after the \babel\ package is loaded, the test -% does not perform as required. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\get@ae#1#2#3!{\def\bbl@ae{#1#2}}% -\def\@ifT@one@noCap{\expandafter\get@ae\f@family!% -\def\bbl@temp{ae}\ifx\bbl@ae\bbl@temp\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We set another couple of boolean variables for testing the -% existence of the CBgreek or the Cyrillic fonts -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@CBgreekEncKnown -\IfFileExists{lgrcmr.fd}% - {\@CBgreekEncKnowntrue}{\@CBgreekEncKnownfalse} -\newif\if@CyrEncKnown -\IfFileExists{ot2cmr.fd}% - {\@CyrEncKnowntrue}{\@CyrEncKnownfalse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin {macro}{\CBgreekCaporali} -% \begin {macro}{\CyrillicCaporali} -% \begin {macro}{\T@unoCaporali} -% Next we define the macros |\CBgreekCaporali|, |\T@unoCaporali|, -% and |\CyrillicCaporali|; with the latter one we test the loaded -% class, and if it's \texttt{slides} nothing gets done. In any case -% each one of these declarations, if used, must be specified in the -% preamble. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CBgreekCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{% - \IfFileExists{lgrlcmss.fd}{\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - {\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}% - {\LtxSymbCaporali}}% - {\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip - \fi{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}% - }% -\def\CyrillicCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{\relax}% - {\DeclareFontEncoding{OT2}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - {\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char62\relax}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char60\relax}\ignorespaces}}}% -\@onlypreamble{\CBgreekCaporali}\@onlypreamble{\CyrillicCaporali}% -\def\T@unoCaporali{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{<<\ignorespaces}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi>>}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% Now we can do some real setting; first we start testing the encoding; -% if the encoding is T1 we test if the font family is the AE one; if so, -% we further test for other possibilities -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one - \@ifT@one@noCap{% - \if@CBgreekEncKnown - \CBgreekCaporali - \else - \if@CyrEncKnown - \CyrilicCaporali - \else - \LtxSymbCaporali - \fi - \fi}% - {\T@unoCaporali}% -% \end{macrocode} -% But if the default encoding is not the T1 one, then the -% substitutions must be performed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \if@CBgreekEncKnown - \CBgreekCaporali - \else - \if@CyrEncKnown - \CyrilicCaporali - \else - \LtxSymbCaporali - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Finishing commands} -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{italian}% -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 4ea2ac191dd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -%% -%% Questo file serve per generare dal file italian.dtx il file -%% italian.ldf mediante il programma LaTeX/docstrip che toglie -%% praticamente tutti i commenti e ne rende il caricamento molto -%% veloce. La documentazione puo' essere ottenuta passando a -%% LaTeX2e il file sorgente italian.dtx -%% -\def\filedate{2001/01/19} -\def\batchfile{italian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{italian.ldf}{\from{italian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index f4587a51186..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,401 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{344} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{kurmanji.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{kurmanji} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{kurmanji.dtx} - [2009/06/25 v1.1 Kurmanji support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for -% the Kurmanji language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{kurmanji.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{kurmanji.dtx} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Removed old changes from -% language.skeleton} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Corrected some typographical errors -% in the documentation} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Added documentation about the date} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Rewrote the code for Kurmanji date} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Set both hyphenmins to two} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Use frenchspacing} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Make month > 12 an error} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Documentation of hyphenmins} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Page, Chapter, and Apppendix inflected} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}} -% -% \section{The Kurmanji language} -% -% The Kurmanji language belongs to the Kurdish languages. -% Of the Kurdish languages, Kurmanji has the largest -% number of speakers and is written with the turkish based latin alphabet -% by Mir Celadet Bedirxan. Kurmanji is spoken in Turkey, Syria and by -% the majority of the Kurdish diaspora in Europe. -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Kurmanji language. Versions 1.0 and 1.1 of this file were -% contributed by -% J\"org Knappen and Medeni Shemd\^e. The code for the active |^| -% was lifted from esperanto.dtx. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |^c| & gives \c c with hyphenation in the rest of the word -% allowed, this works for c, C, s, S\\ -% |^e| & gives \^e, with hyphenation in the rest of the word -% allowed, this works for e, E, i, I, u, U\\ -% \verb=^|= & inserts a |\discretionary{-}{}{}|\\ -% |"`| & gives lower left double german style quotes, like~,,\\ -% |"'| & gives upper right double igerman style quotes, like~``\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The functions of the active character for Kurmanji.} -% \label{tab:kur-act} -% \end{table} -% -% \subsection{The date in Kurmanji} -% -% Currently, there is no agreed set of month names for the gregorian calendar -% in Kurmanji. We provide two lists of month names, |\datekurmanji| selects -% month names based on traditional sources, |\datekurmanjialternate| gives -% another selection. In addition, we provide macros |\januaryname| to -% |\decembername| allowing the user to redefine each single month name -% according to their preferences. -% -% The predefinded month names can be found in table~\ref{tab:kur-mon}. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{tabular}{lll} -% English & Kurmanji (traditional) & Kurmanji (alternate) \\ \hline -% January & \c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n & R\^ebendan\\ -% February & Sibat & Re\c{s}emih\\ -% March & Adar & Adar\\ -% April & N{\^\i}san & Cotan\\ -% May & Gulan & Gulan\\ -% June & Hez{\^\i}ran & P\^u\c{s}per\\ -% July & T{\^\i}rmeh & T{\^\i}rmeh\\ -% August & Tebax & Gelav\^ej\\ -% September& \^Ilon & Gelarezan\\ -% Oktober & \c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n & Kew\c{c}\^er\\ -% November & \c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n & Sermawez\\ -% December & \c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n & Berfandar -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Month names in Kurmanji.} -% \label{tab:kur-mon} -% \end{table} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}} -% The macro \cs{ontoday} gives the date in the inflected form. This form is -% used in the head of a letter and looks like 25'\^e Hez{\^\i}ran\^e 2009. -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats} -% In addition to the date formats with month names we provide three -% numerical date formats: \cs{datesymd} provides the date in the swedish style -% YYYY-MM-DD, \cs{datesdmy} provides the date in the style D/M YYYY (also -% popular in sweden), and \cs{dategdmy} provides the date in the style -% D. M. YYYY (popular in germany and many other countries). -% These commands should be issued after \cs{begin{document}}. -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{kurmanji}{captionskurmanji} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{kurmanji} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@kurmanji| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\l@kurmanji - \@nopatterns{Kurmanji} - \adddialect\l@kurmanji0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Kurmanji language. -% -% Now we declare the |<attrib>| language attribute. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{kurmanji}{<attrib>}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% This code adds the expansion of |\extras<attrib>kurmanji| to -% |\extraskurmanji|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraskurmanji - \expandafter{\extras<attrib>kurmanji}% - \let\captionskurmanji\captions<attrib>kurmanji - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Set both hyphenmins to two} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Documentation of hyphenmins} -% The kurmanji hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \begin{macro}{\kurmanjihyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{kurmanji}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Page, Chapter, and Apppendix inflected} -% \begin{macro}{\captionskurmanji} -% The macro |\captionskurmanji| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captionskurmanji{% - \def\prefacename{Pe\c{s}gotin}% % Gotina Pe\c{s}\^i - \def\refname{Pirtuken bijart{\^\i}}% - \def\abstractname{Kurteb{\^\i}r}% % En\c{c}am - \def\bibname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya Pirtukan}% - \def\chaptername{Ser\^e}% - \def\appendixname{Teb{\^\i}n{\^\i}ya}% - \def\contentsname{Nav\^erok}% % Navedank - \def\listfigurename{Hejmara Dimena}% - \def\listtablename{Hejmara Kevalen}% - \def\indexname{Endeks}% - \def\figurename{Dimen\^e}% % Weney\^e - \def\tablename{Kevala}% - \def\partname{B\^e\c{s}a}% - \def\enclname{Dumahik}% % Duvik - \def\ccname{Belavker}% - \def\headtoname{Ji bo}% % Ji ... re - \def\pagename{R\^upel\^e}% - \def\seename{bin\^era}% % bala xwe bida - \def\alsoname{le v\^eya ji bin\^era}% - \def\proofname{Del{\^\i}l}% - \def\glossaryname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya l\^ekol{\^\i}n\^e}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Rewrote the code for Kurmanji date} -% \begin{macro}{\datekurmanji} -% \begin{macro}{\datekurmanjialternate} -% The macro |\datekurmanji| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Kurmanji dates. We choose the traditional names for the months. -% The macro |\datekurmanjialternate| -% defines an alternate set of month names. It is -% also very common to use numbers for the month. -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Make month > 12 an error} -% We define the general date format in terms of macros |\januaryname| to -% |\decembername| which can be redefined by the user. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datekurmanji{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or - \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or - \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or - \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi~\number\year}% - \def\ontoday{\number\day'\^e~\ifcase\month\or - \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or - \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or - \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or - \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi\^e~\number\year}% - \def\januaryname{\c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\februaryname{Sibat}% - \def\marchname{Adar}% - \def\aprilname{N\^{\i}san}% - \def\mayname{Gulan}% - \def\junename{Hez{\^\i}ran}% - \def\julyname{T{\^\i}rmeh}% - \def\augustname{Tebax}% - \def\septembername{\^Ilon}% - \def\octobername{\c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\novembername{\c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\decembername{\c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}% -} -\def\datekurmanjialternate{% - \datekurmanji - \def\januaryname{R\^ebendan}% - \def\februaryname{Re\c{s}emih}% - \def\aprilname{Cotan}% % Avr\^el - \def\junename{P\^u\c{s}per}% - \def\augustname{Gelav\^ej}% - \def\septembername{Gelarezan}% % Rezber - \def\octobername{Kew\c{c}\^er}% - \def\novembername{Sermawez}% - \def\decembername{Berfandar}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats} -% \begin{macro}{\datesymd} -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added} -% The macro |\datesymd| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, common in Sweden. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datesymd{% - \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datesdmy} -% The macro |\datesdmy| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Swedish dates in the format DD/MM YYYY, also common in -% Sweden. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datesdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dategdmy} -% The macros |\dategdmy| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% german style dates in the format D. M. YYYY. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dategdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day.\space\number\month.\space\number\year}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extraskurmanji} -% \begin{macro}{\noextraskurmanji} -% The macro |\extraskurmanji| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Kurmanji language. The macro -% |\noextraskurmanji| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extraskurmanji|. -% -% For Kurmanji the |^| character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{^} -% \end{macrocode} -% Because the character |^| is used in math mode with quite a -% different purpose we need to add an extra level of evaluation to -% the definition of the active |^|. It checks whether math mode is -% active; if so the shorthand mechanism is bypassed by a direct -% call of |\normal@char^|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\languageshorthands{kurmanji}} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@activate{^}} -\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@deactivate{^}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a -% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% And here are the uses of the active |^|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^c}{\c{c}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^C}{\c{C}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^e}{\^e\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^E}{\^E\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^i}{{\^\i}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^I}{\^I\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^s}{\c{s}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^S}{\c{S}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^u}{\^u\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^U}{\^U\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Use frenchspacing} -% For typesetting Kurmanji text, frenchspacing is preferred. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} - -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{kurmanji} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins deleted file mode 100644 index ca18be14cba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2009/09/19} -\def\batchfile{kurmanji.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{kurmanji.ldf}{\from{kurmanji.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat deleted file mode 100644 index 75141062f8c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -% File : language.dat -% Purpose : specify which hypenation patterns to load -% while running iniTeX -=USenglish -american ushyphen.tex -=english -UKenglish ukhyphen.tex -=british -french frhyphen.tex -dutch nehyph2.tex -german dehypht.tex -ngerman dehyphn.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 138c6771271..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,670 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{454} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{latin.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesFile{latin.ldf} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{latin.dtx}% - [2008/07/06 v2.0l Latin support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `latin.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% Claudio Beccari -%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Latin language definition file. -% The original version of this file was written by -% Claudio Beccari, (claudio.beccari@polito.it) and includes contributions -% by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski, (\texttt{kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl}). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand*\pkg[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{latin.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{latin.dtx} -% -% \changes{latin-0.99}{1999/12/06}{First version, from italian.dtx (CB)} -% \changes{latin-0.99}{1999/12/06}{Added shortcuts for breve, macron, -% and etymological hyphenation (CB)} -% \changes{latin-1.2}{2000/01/31}{Added suggestions from Krzysztof -% Konrad \.Zelechowski (CB)} -% \changes{latin-2.0}{2000/02/10}{Completely new etymological -% hyphenation (CB)} -% \changes{latin-2.0a}{2000/10/15}{Revised by JB} -% \changes{latin-2.0b}{2000/12/13}{Simplified shortcuts for -% etymological hyphenation; modified breve and macro shortcuts; -% language attribute medieval declared} -% \changes{latin-2.0c}{2001/06/04}{Restored caret and equals sign -% category codes before exiting} -% \changes{latin-2.0d}{2001/06/04}{Restored caret and equals sign -% category codes before exiting} -% \changes{latin-2.0e}{2003/04/11}{Introduced the language attribute -% `withprosodicmarks'; modified use of breve and macron shortcuts -% in order to avoid possible conflicts with other packages} -% \changes{latin-2.0i}{2008/02/17}{Corrected the \cs{@clubpenalty} -% problem} -% \changes{latin-2.0j}{2008/03/17}{Added a missing comment char and a -% missing closing brace} -% \changes{latin-2.0l}{2008/07/06}{Added two missing \cs{end} macro's} -% -% \section{The Latin language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The original author is Claudio Beccari with -% contributions by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski, -% (\texttt{kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl})} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Latin language both in modern -% and medieval spelling. -% -% For this language the |\clubpenalty|, |\widowpenalty| are set to -% rather high values and |\finalhyphendemerits| is set to such a -% high value that hyphenation is prohibited between the last two -% lines of a paragraph. -% -% For this language two ``styles'' of typesetting are implemented: -% ``regular'' or modern-spelling Latin, and medieval Latin. -% The medieval Latin specific commands can be activated by means of -% the language attribute |medieval|; the medieval spelling differs -% from the modern one by the systematic use of the lower case `u' -% also where in modern spelling the letter `v' is used; when -% typesetting with capital letters, on the opposite, the letter 'V' -% is used also in place of 'U'. -% Medieval spelling also includes the ligatures |\ae| (\ae), |\oe| -% (\oe), |\AE| (\AE), and |\OE| (\OE) that are not used in modern -% spelling, nor were used in the classical times. -% -% Furthermore a third typesetting style |withprosodicmarks| is -% defined in order to use special shortcuts for inserting breves -% and macrons when typesetting grammars, dictionaries, teaching -% texts, and the like, where prosodic marks are important for the -% complete information on the words or the verses. The shortcuts, -% listed in table~\ref{t:lashrtct} and described in -% section~\ref{s:shrtcts}, may interfere with other packages; -% therefore by default this third style is off and no interference -% is introduced. If this third style is used and interference is -% experienced, there are special commands for turning on and off -% the specific short hand commands of this style. -% -% For what concerns \textsf{babel} and typesetting with \LaTeX, the -% differences between the two styles of spelling reveal themselves -% in the strings used to name for example the ``Preface'' that -% becomes ``Praefatio'' or ``Pr\ae fatio'' respectively. -% Hyphenation rules are also different, but the hyphenation pattern -% file \file{lahyph.tex} takes care of both versions of the -% language. Needless to say that such patterns must be loaded in -% the \LaTeX\ format by running |initex| (or whatever the name -% if the initializer) on |latex.ltx|. -% -% The name strings for chapters, figures, tables, etcetera, are -% suggested by prof. Raffaella Tabacco, a classicist of the -% University of Turin, Italy, to whom we address our warmest -% thanks. The names suggested by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski, -% when different, are used as the names for the medieval variety, -% since he made a word and spelling choice more suited for this -% variety. -% -% For this language some shortcuts are defined according to -% table~\ref{t:lashrtct}; all of them are supposed to work with -% both spelling styles, except where the opposite is explicitly -% stated. -% \begin{table}[htb]\centering -% \begin{tabular}{cp{80mm}} -% |^i| & inserts the breve accent as \u{\i}; valid also for the -% other lowercase vowels, but it does not operate on the -% medieval ligatures \ae\ and \oe.\\ -% |=a| & inserts the macron accent as \=a; valid also for the -% other lowercase vowels, but it does not operate on the -% medieval ligatures \ae\ and \oe.\\ -% |"| & inserts a compound word mark where hyphenation is legal; -% the next character must not be a medieval ligature \ae\ -% or \oe, nor an accented letter (foreign names).\\ -% \texttt{\string"\string|} -% & same as above, but operates also when the next character -% is a medieval ligature or an accented letter. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[]{Shortcuts defined for the Latin language. The -% characters \texttt{\string^} and \texttt{\string=} are -% active only when the language attribute -% \texttt{withprosodicmarks} has been declared, -% otherwise they are disabled; see -% section~\ref{s:shrtcts} for more details.}% -% \label{t:lashrtct} -% \end{table} -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{latin}{captionslatin} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{latin} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@latin| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@latin\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Latin} - \adddialect\l@latin0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% Now we declare the |medieval| language attribute. -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{medieval}{% - \addto\captionslatin{\def\prefacename{Pr{\ae}fatio}}% - \def\november{Nouembris}% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin - \expandafter{\extrasmedievallatin}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The third typesetting style |withprosodicmarks| is defined here -% \begin{macrocode} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{withprosodicmarks}{% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin - \expandafter{\extraswithprosodicmarks}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% It must be remembered that the |medieval| and the |withprosodicmarks| -% styles may be used together. -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Latin language\footnote{Most of these names were -% kindly suggested by Raffaella Tabacco.}. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionslatin} -% The macro |\captionslatin| defines all strings used -% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captionslatin}{% - \def\prefacename{Praefatio}% - \def\refname{Conspectus librorum}% - \def\abstractname{Summarium}% - \def\bibname{Conspectus librorum}% - \def\chaptername{Caput}% - \def\appendixname{Additamentum}% - \def\contentsname{Index}% - \def\listfigurename{Conspectus descriptionum}% - \def\listtablename{Conspectus tabularum}% - \def\indexname{Index rerum notabilium}% - \def\figurename{Descriptio}% - \def\tablename{Tabula}% - \def\partname{Pars}% - \def\enclname{Adduntur}% Or " Additur" ? Or simply Add.? - \def\ccname{Exemplar}% Use the recipient's dative - \def\headtoname{\ignorespaces}% Use the recipient's dative - \def\pagename{Charta}% - \def\seename{cfr.}% - \def\alsoname{cfr.}% R.Tabacco never saw "cfr. atque" or similar forms - \def\proofname{Demonstratio}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossarium}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% In the above definitions there are some points that might change -% in the future or that require a minimum of attention from the -% typesetter. -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item the \cs{enclname} is translated by a passive verb, that -% literally means ``(they) are being added''; if just one -% enclosure is joined to the document, the plural passive is not -% suited any more; nevertheless a generic plural passive might be -% incorrect but suited for most circumstances. On the opposite -% ``Additur'', the corresponding singular passive, might be more -% correct with one enclosure and less suited in general: what -% about the abbreviation ``Add.'' that works in both cases, but -% certainly is less elegant? -% \item The \cs{headtoname} is empty and gobbles the possible -% following space; in practice the typesetter should use the -% dative of the recipient's name; since nowadays not all such -% names can be translated into Latin, they might result -% indeclinable. The clever use of an appellative by the -% typesetter such as ``Domino'' or ``Dominae'' might solve the -% problem, but the header might get too impressive. The typesetter -% must make a decision on his own. -% \item The same holds true for the copy recipient's name in the -% ``Cc'' field of \cs{ccname}. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datelatin} -% The macro |\datelatin| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Latin dates; the choice of faked small caps Latin numerals is -% arbitrary and may be changed in the future. For medieval latin -% the spelling of `Novembris' should be \textit{Nouembris}. This is -% taken care of by using a control sequence which can be redefined -% when the attribute `medieval' is selected. -% \changes{latin-2.0f}{2005/03/30}{Added a comment character to -% prevent unwanted space} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datelatin{% - \def\november{Novembris}% - \def\today{% - {\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont - \uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\day}}~\ifcase\month\or - Ianuarii\or Februarii\or Martii\or Aprilis\or Maii\or Iunii\or - Iulii\or Augusti\or Septembris\or Octobris\or \november\or - Decembris\fi - \space{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\year}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\romandate} -% Thomas Martin Widmann (\texttt{viralbus@daimi.au.dk}) developed a -% macro originally named |\latindate| (but to be renamed -% |\romandate| so as not to conflict with the standard \babel\ -% conventions) that should compute and translate the current date -% into a date \textit{ab urbe condita} with days numbered according -% to the kalendae and idus; for the moment this is a placeholder -% for Thomas' macro, waiting for a self standing one that keeps -% local all the intermediate data, counters, etc. If he succeeds, -% here is the place to add his macro. -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\latinhyphenmins} -% The Latin hyphenation patterns can be used with both -% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{latin-2.0a}{2000/10/15}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extraslatin} -% \begin{macro}{\noextraslatin} -% Lower the chance that clubs or widows occur. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraslatin{% - \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty - \clubpenalty3000\@clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000} -% \end{macrocode} -% Never ever break a word between the last two lines of a paragraph -% in latin texts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraslatin{% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits - \finalhyphendemerits50000000} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% With medieval Latin we need the suitable correspondence between -% upper case V and lower case u, since in that spelling there is -% only one sign, and the u shape is the (uncial) version of the -% capital V. Everything else is identical with Latin. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasmedievallatin{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\V}% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\u}% - \lccode`\V=`\u \uccode`\u=`\V} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SetLatinLigatures} -% We need also the lccodes for \ae\ and \oe; since they occupy -% different positions in the OT1 \TeX-fontencoding compared to the -% T1 one, we must save the lc- and the uccodes for both encodings, -% but we specify the new lc- and uccodes separately as it appears -% natural not to change encoding while typesetting the same -% language. The encoding is assumed to be set before starting to -% use the Latin language, so that if Latin is the default language, -% the font encoding must be chosen before requiring the \pkg{babel} -% package with the |latin| option, in any case before any -% |\selectlanguage| or |\foreignlanguage| command. -% -% All this fuss is made in order to allow the use of the medieval -% ligatures \ae\ and \oe\ while typesetting with the medieval -% spelling; I have my doubts that the medieval spelling should be -% used at all in modern books, reports, and the like; the uncial -% `u' shape of the lower case `v' and the above ligatures were -% fancy styles of the copyists who were able to write faster with -% those rounded glyphs; with typesetting there is no question of -% handling a quill penn\dots Since my (CB) opinion may be wrong, I -% managed to set up the instruments and it is up to the typesetter -% to use them or not. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasmedievallatin{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^c6}% T1 \AE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^f7}% T1 \oe - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^f7}% T1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^d7}% T1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1d}% OT1 \AE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \oe - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1e}% OT1 \OE - \SetLatinLigatures} -\providecommand\SetLatinLigatures{% - \def\@tempA{T1}\ifx\@tempA\f@encoding - \catcode`\^^e6=11 \lccode`\^^e6=`\^^e6 \uccode`\^^e6=`\^^c6 % \ae - \catcode`\^^c6=11 \lccode`\^^c6=`\^^e6 % \AE - \catcode`\^^f7=11 \lccode`\^^f7=`\^^f7 \uccode`\^^f7=`\^^d7 % \oe - \catcode`\^^d7=11 \lccode`\^^d7=`\^^f7 % \OE - \else - \catcode`\^^1a=11 \lccode`\^^1a=`\^^1a \uccode`\^^1a=`\^^1d % \ae - \catcode`\^^1d=11 \lccode`\^^1d=`\^^1a % \AE (^^]) - \catcode`\^^1b=11 \lccode`\^^1b=`\^^1b \uccode`\^^1b=`\^^1e % \oe - \catcode`\^^1e=11 \lccode`\^^1e=`\^^1b % \OE (^^^) - \fi - \let\@tempA\@undefined - } -% \end{macrocode} -% With the above definitions we are sure that |\MakeUppercase| -% works properly and |\MakeUppercase{C{\ae}sar}| correctly `yields -% `C{\AE}SAR''; correspondingly |\MakeUppercase{Heluetia}| -% correctly yields ``HELVETIA''. -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts} -% For writing dictionaries or didactic texts (in modern spelling -% only) we defined a third language attribute, or a third -% typesetting style, a couple of other active characters are -% defined: |^| for marking a vowel with the breve sign, and |=| for -% marking a vowel with the macro sign. Please take notice that -% neither the OT1 font encoding, nor the T1 one for most vowels, -% contain directly the marked vowels, therefore hyphenation of -% words containing these ``accents'' may become problematic; for -% this reason the above active characters not only introduce the -% required accent, but also an unbreakable zero skip that in -% practice does not introduce a discretionary break, but allows -% breaks in the rest of the word. -% -% It must be remarked that the active characters |^| and |=| may -% have other meanings in other contexts. For example the equals -% sign is used by the graphic extensions for specifying keyword -% options for handling the graphic elements to be included in the -% document. At the same time, as mentioned in the previous -% paragraph, diacritical marking in Latin is used only for -% typesetting certain kind of documents, such as grammars and -% dictionaries. It is reasonable that the breve and macron active -% characters are switched on and off at will, and in particular -% that they are off by default if the attribute |withprosodicmarks| -% has not been set. -% -% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarksOn} -% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarksOff} -% We begin by adding to the normal typesetting style the -% definitions of the new commands |\ProsodicMarksOn| and -% |\ProsodicMarksOff| that should produce error messages when the -% third style is not declared: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraslatin{\def\ProsodicMarksOn{% - \GenericError{(latin)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}% - {Latin language error: \string\ProsodicMarksOn\space - is defined by setting the\MessageBreak - language attribute to `withprosodicmarks'\MessageBreak - If you continue you are likely to encounter\MessageBreak - fatal errors that I can't recover}% - {See the Latin language description in the babel - documentation for explanation}{\@ehd}}} -\addto\extraslatin{\let\ProsodicMarksOff\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then we temporarily set the caret and the equals sign to active -% characters so that they can receive their definitions. But first -% we store their current category codes to restore them later on. -% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Save current category codes of -% equals sign and caret in order to restore them later} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@tempcnta=\catcode`\= -\@tempcntb=\catcode`\^ -\catcode`\= \active -\catcode`\^ \active -% \end{macrocode} -% Now we can add the necessary declarations to the macros that are -% being activated when the Latin language and its typesetting -% styles are declared: -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraslatin{\languageshorthands{latin}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{^}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{=}}% -\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{^}}% -\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{=}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\ProsodicMarks} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarks} -% Next we define the defining macro for the active characters -% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Use \cs{active} instead of 13} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ProsodicMarks{% - \def\ProsodicMarksOn{\catcode`\^ \active\catcode`\= \active}% - \def\ProsodicMarksOff{\catcode`\^ 7\catcode`\= 12\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Notice that with the above redefinitions of the commands -% |\ProsodicMarksOn| and |\ProsodicMarksOff|, the operation of the -% newly defined shortcuts may be switched on and off at will, so -% that even if a picture has to be inserted in the document by -% means of the commands and keyword options of the |graphicx| -% package, it suffices to switch them off before invoking the -% picture including command, and switched on again afterwards; or, -% even better, since the picture very likely is being inserted -% within a |figure| environment, it suffices to switch them off -% within the environment, being conscious that their deactivation -% remains local to the environment. -% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{changed \cs{allowhyphens} to -% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \initiate@active@char{^}% - \initiate@active@char{=}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^a}{% - \textormath{\u{a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{a}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^e}{% - \textormath{\u{e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{e}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^i}{% - \textormath{\u{\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{\imath}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^o}{% - \textormath{\u{o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^u}{% - \textormath{\u{u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{u}}}% -% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=a}{% - \textormath{\={a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{a}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=e}{% - \textormath{\={e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{e}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=i}{% - \textormath{\={\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{\imath}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=o}{% - \textormath{\={o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{o}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=u}{% - \textormath{\={u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{u}}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Notice that the short hand definitions are given only for lower -% case letters; it would not be difficult to extend the set of -% definitions to upper case letters, but it appears of very little -% use in view of the kind of documents where prosodic marks are -% supposed to be used. Nevertheless in those rare cases when it's -% required to set some uppercase letters with their prosodic -% marks, it is always possible to use the standard \LaTeX\ commands -% such as |\u{I}| for typesetting \u{I}, or |\={A}| for -% typesetting~\=A. -% -% Finally we restore the caret and equals sign initial default -% category codes. -% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Restore category codes rather then -% return them to their \TeX\ default values. \emph{And} do that -% outside of the command definition} -% \begin{macrocode} -\catcode`\= \@tempcnta -\catcode`\^ \@tempcntb -% \end{macrocode} -% so as to avoid conflicts with other packages or other \babel\ -% options. -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LatinMarksOn} -% \begin{macro}{\LatinMarksOff} -% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{Added two commands} -% \changes{latin-2.0h}{2007/10/19}{Added missing backslash} -% We define two new commands so as to switch on and off the breve -% and macron shortcuts. -% \changes{latin-2.0h}{2007/10/20}{Removed the setting of -% \cs{LatinMarksOff} from \cs{extraslatin}} -% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Set the \cs{LatinMarks...} commands -% equal to the \cs{ProsodicMarks..} commands for compatibility} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOn\ProsodicMarksOn} -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOff\ProsodicMarksOff} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% It must be understood that by using the above prosodic marks, -% line breaking is somewhat impeached; since such prosodic marks -% are used almost exclusively in dictionaries, grammars, and poems -% (only in school textbooks), this shouldn't be of any importance -% for what concerns the quality of typesetting. -% -% \section{Etymological hyphenation} -% In order to deal in a clean way with prefixes and compound words -% to be divided etymologically, the active character |"| is given -% a special definition so as to behave as a discretionary break -% with hyphenation allowed after it. -% Most of the code for dealing with the active |"| is already -% contained in the core of \babel, but we are going to use it as a -% single character shorthand for Latin. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"}% -\addto\extraslatin{\bbl@activate{"}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A temporary macro is defined so as to take different actions in math -% mode and text mode: specifically in the former case the macro inserts a -% double quote as it should in math mode, otherwise another delayed macro -% comes into action. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{latin}{"}{% - \ifmmode - \def\lt@@next{''}% - \else - \def\lt@@next{\futurelet\lt@temp\lt@cwm}% - \fi - \lt@@next -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% In text mode the \cs{lt@next} control sequence is such that upon -% its execution a temporary variable \cs{lt@temp} is made -% equivalent to the next token in the input list without actually -% removing it. Such temporary token is then tested by the macro -% \cs{lt@cwm} and if it is found to be a letter token, then it -% introduces a compound word separator control sequence -% \cs{lt@allowhyphens} whose expansion introduces a discretionary -% hyphen and an unbreakable space; in case the token is not a -% letter, the token is tested again to find if it is the character -% \texttt{\string|}, in which case it is gobbled and a -% discretionary break is introduced. -% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{Added a \cs{nobreak}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lt@allowhyphens{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip} -\newcommand*{\lt@cwm}{\let\lt@n@xt\relax - \ifcat\noexpand\lt@temp a% - \let\lt@n@xt\lt@allowhyphens - \else - \if\noexpand\lt@temp\string|% - \def\lt@n@xt{\lt@allowhyphens\@gobble}% - \fi - \fi - \lt@n@xt}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Attention: the category code comparison does not work if the -% temporary control sequence \cs{lt@temp} has been let equal to an -% implicit character, such as |\ae|; therefore this etymological -% hyphenation facility does not work with medieval Latin spelling -% when |"| immediately precedes a ligature. In order to overcome -% this drawback the shorthand \verb!"|! may be used in such cases; -% it behaves exactly as |"|, but it does not test the implicit -% character control sequence. An input such as -% \verb!super"|{\ae}quitas!\footnote{This word does not exist in -% ``regular'' Latin, and it is used just as an example.} gets -% hyphenated as \texttt{su-per-{\ae}qui-tas} instead of -% \texttt{su-pe-r\ae-qui-tas}. -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{latin} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 763ed018ff2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{latin.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. - -Copyright 1999-2007 Claudio Beccari All rights reserved. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{latin.ldf}{\from{latin.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index f5adbe47631..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,265 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{152} -% \iffalse -% -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{lsorbian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.dtx} - [2008/03/17 v1.0g Lower Sorbian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `lsorbian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Lower Sorbian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by Eduard Werner -% Werner, Eduard", -% Serbski institut z. t., -% Dw\'orni\v{s}\'cowa 6 -% 02625 Budy\v{s}in/Bautzen -% Germany", -% (??)3591 497223", -% edi at kaihh.hanse.de", -% -%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de -%% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Lower Sorbian definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{lsorbian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{lsorbian.dtx} -% -% \changes{lsorbian-0.1}{1994/10/10}{First version} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Lower Sorbian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. It was written by Eduard Werner -% (\texttt{edi@kaihh.hanse.de}).} It defines all the -% language-specific macros for Lower Sorbian. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under -% more than one name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{lsorbian} will be an `unknown' language, in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@lsorbian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under -% more than one name.} -% As -% \babel\ also knwos the option \Lopt{lowersorbian} we have to -% check that as well. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@lowersorbian\@undefined - \ifx\l@lsorbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Lsorbian} - \adddialect\l@lsorbian\z@ - \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian - \else - \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian - \fi -\else - \let\l@lsorbian\l@lowersorbian -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Lower Sorbian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionslsorbian} -% The macro |\captionslsorbian| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0f}{2000/09/22}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Zawod}% - \def\refname{Referency}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitl}% - \def\appendixname{Dodawki}% - \def\contentsname{Wop\'simje\'se}% - \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}% - \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Wobraz}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{\'Z\v el}% - \def\enclname{P\'si\l oga}% - \def\ccname{CC}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{gl.}% - \def\alsoname{gl.~teke}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\newdatelsorbian} -% The macro |\newdatelsorbian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Lower Sorbian dates. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or maja\or - junija\or julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or - nowembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\olddatelsorbian} -% The macro |\olddatelsorbian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce old-style Lower Sorbian dates. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - wjelikego ro\v zka\or - ma\l ego ro\v zka\or - nal\v etnika\or - jat\v sownika\or - ro\v zownika\or - sma\v znika\or - pra\v znika\or - \v znje\'nca\or - po\v znje\'nca\or - winowca\or - nazymnika\or - godownika\fi \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The default will be the new-style dates. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname - \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extraslsorbian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextraslsorbian} -% The macro |\extraslsorbian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the lsorbian language. The macro -% |\noextraslsorbian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extraslsorbian|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other language -% definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index febd734ad76..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1411 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1538} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{magyar.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{magyar} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{magyar.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v1.4j Magyar support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `magyar.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Magyar Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% \'Arp\'ad B\'IR\'O -%% J\'ozsef B\'ERCES -% -% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Hungarian language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Attila Koppanyi (attila@cernvm.cern.ch). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{magyar.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{magyar.dtx} -% -% \changes{magyar-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Further spelling corrections} -% \changes{magyar-1.1e}{1994/02/09}{Still more spelling corrections} -% \changes{magyar-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{magyar-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{magyar-1.3g}{1996/07/12}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/04}{order inverting in -% headings/titles/captions; definite article handling; active char -% for special hyphenation} -% \changes{magyar-1.4d}{2001/11/15}{Corrected checksum} -% \changes{magyar-1.4j}{2004/11/17}{Added missing comment characters -% in the redefinitions of \cs{ps@headings} to prevent spurious -% spaces} -% -% \section{The Hungarian language} -% -% The file option \file{\filename} defines all the -% language definition macros for the Hungarian language. -% -% The \babel{} support for the Hungarian language until file -% version 1.3i was essentially changing the English document -% elements to Hungarian ones, but because of the differences -% between these too languages this was actually unusable (`Part I' -% was transferred to `R\'esz I' which is not usable instead of `I.\ -% r\'esz'). To enhance the typesetting facilities for Hungarian -% the following should be considered: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item In Hungarian documents there is a period after -% the part, section, subsection \mbox{etc.} numbers. -% -% \item In the part, chapter, appendix name the number -% (or letter) goes before the name, so `Part I' translates to -% `I.\ r\'esz'. -% -% \item The same is true with captions -% (`Table 2.1' goes to `2.1.\ t\'abl\'azat'). -% -% \item There is a period after the caption name instead of a colon. -% (`Table 2.1:' goes to `2.1.\ t\'abl\'azat.') -% -% \item There is a period at the end of the title in a run-in head -% (when |afterskip<0| in |\@startsection|). -% -% \item Special hyphenation rules must be applied -% for the so-called long double consonants (ccs, ssz,\dots). -% -% \item The opening quotation mark is like the German one -% (the closing is the same as in English). -% -% \item In Hungarian figure, table, \mbox{etc.} -% referencing a definite article is also incorporated. -% The Hungarian definite articles behave like the English -% indefinite ones (`a/an'). `a' is used for words beginning -% with a consonant and `az' goes for a vowel. -% Since some numbers begin with a vowel some others -% with a consonant some commands should be provided for -% automatic definite article generation. -% \end{itemize} -% -% Until file version 1.3i\footnote{That file was -% last revised on 1996/12/23 with a contribution by the next -% authors: Attila Kopp\'anyi (\texttt{attila@cernvm.cern.ch}), -% \'Arp\'ad B\'{\i}r\'o (\texttt{JZP1104@HUSZEG11.bitnet}), -% Istv\'an Hamecz (\texttt{hami@ursus.bke.hu)} and -% Dezs\H{o} Horv\'ath (\texttt{horvath@pisa.infn.it}).} -% the special typesetting rules of the Hungarian language -% mentioned above were not taken into consideration. -% This version (\fileversion)\footnote{It was written by J\'ozsef -% B\'erces (\texttt{jozsi@docs4.mht.bme.hu}) with some help from -% Ferenc Wettl (\texttt{wettl@math.bme.hu}) and an idea from David -% Carlisle (\texttt{david@dcarlisle.demon.co.uk}).} -% enables \babel{} to typeset `good-looking' Hungarian texts. -% -% \DescribeMacro\ontoday -% The |\ontoday| command works like |\today| but -% produces a slightly different date format used in expressions such -% as `on February 10th'. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Az -% The commands |\Az#1| and |\az#1| write the correct -% definite article for the argument and the argument itself -% (separated with a |~|). The star-forms (|\Az*| and |\az*|) -% produce the article only. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Azr -% |\Azr#1| and |\azr#1| treat the argument as a label so expand -% it then write the definite article for |\r@#1|, a non-breakable -% space then the label expansion. The star-forms do not print -% the label expansion. |\Azr(#1| and |\azr(#1| are used for -% equation referencing with the syntax |\azr(|\textit{label}|)|. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Aref -% There are two aliases |\Aref| and |\aref| for |\Azr| and |\azr|, -% respectively. During the preparation of a document it is not -% known in general, if the code `|a~\ref{|\textit{label}|}|' or the code -% `|az~\ref{|\textit{label}|}|' is the grammatically correct one. Writing -% `|\aref{|\textit{label}|}|' instead of the previous ones solves the -% problem. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Azp -% |\Azp#1| and |\azp#1| also treat the argument as a label but -% use the label's page for definite article determination. -% There are star-forms giving only the definite article without -% the page number. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Apageref -% There are aliases |\Apageref| and |\apageref| for |\Azp| and -% |\azp|, respectively. The code |\apageref{|\textit{label}|}| -% is equivalent either to |a~\pageref{|\textit{label}|}| or -% to |az~\pageref{|\textit{label}|}|. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Azc -% |\Azc| and |\azc| work like the |\cite| command but -% (of course) they insert the definite article. There can be -% several comma separated cite labels and in that case the -% definite article is given for the first one. -% They accept |\cite|'s optional argument. -% There are star-forms giving the definite article only. -% -% \DescribeMacro\Acite -% There are aliases |\Acite| and |\acite| for -% |\Azc| and |\azc|, respectively. -% -% For this language the character |`| is made active. -% Table~\ref{tab:hun-actives} shows the shortcuts. -% The main reason for the activation of the |`| character -% is to handle the special hyphenation of the long double -% consonants. -% \begin{table} -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{45mm}p{47mm}} -% shortcut & explanation & example \\ -% \hline -% |``| & same as |\glqq| in \babel{}, or -% |\quotedblbase| in T1 -% (opening quotation mark, like ,,) -% & |``id\'ezet''|$\longrightarrow$,,id\'ezet'{}' \\ -% |`c|, |`C| & ccs is hyphenated as cs-cs -% & |lo`ccsan|$\longrightarrow$locs-csan \\ -% |`d|, |`D| & ddz is hyphenated as dz-dz -% & |e`ddz\"unk|$\longrightarrow$edz-dz\"unk \\ -% |`g|, |`G| & ggy is hyphenated as gy-gy -% & |po`ggy\'asz|$\longrightarrow$pogy-gy\'asz \\ -% |`l|, |`L| & lly is hyphenated as ly-ly -% & |Kod\'a`llyal|$\longrightarrow$Kod\'aly-lyal \\ -% |`n|, |`N| & nny is hyphenated as ny-ny -% & |me`nnyei|$\longrightarrow$meny-nyei \\ -% |`s|, |`S| & ssz is hyphenated as sz-sz -% & |vi`ssza|$\longrightarrow$visz-sza \\ -% |`t|, |`T| & tty is hyphenated as ty-ty -% & |po`ttyan|$\longrightarrow$poty-tyan \\ -% |`z|, |`Z| & zzs is hyphenated as zs-zs -% & |ri`zzsel|$\longrightarrow$rizs-zsel \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The shortcuts defined in \file{magyar.ldf}} -% \label{tab:hun-actives} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{magyar-1.3h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{magyar}{caption\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{magyar} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@magyar| or |\l@hungarian| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \changes{magyar-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{magyar-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \changes{magyar-1.4d}{2003/09/18}{The \cs{else} clause got outside -% of the \cs{if} statement, breaking the Hungarian support} -% \changes{magyar-1.4g}{2003/10/07}{Further change to make it work -% when neither \cs{l@magyar} nor \cs{l@hugarian} are defined} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@magyar\@undefined - \ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Magyar} - \adddialect\l@magyar0 - \else - \let\l@magyar\l@hungarian - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The statement above makes sure that |\l@magyar| is always -% defined; if |\l@hungarian| is still undefined we make it equal to -% |\l@magyar|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined - \let\l@hungarian\l@magyar -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Hungarian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsmagyar} -% The macro |\captionsmagyar| defines all strings used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{magyar-1.1c}{1994/01/05}{Added translations, fixed typos} -% \changes{magyar-1.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{magyar-1.3f}{1996/04/18}{translated Proof and replaced some -% translations} -% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/04}{the initial letter of fejezet, -% t\'abl\'azat, r\'esz, l\'asd changed to lowercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{El\H osz\'o}% -% \end{macrocode} -% For the list of references at the end of an article we have a -% choice between two words, `Referenci\'ak' (a Hungarian version of -% the English word) and `Hivatkoz\'asok'. The latter seems to -% be in more widespread use. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\refname{Hivatkoz\'asok}% -% \end{macrocode} -% If you have a document with a summary instead of an abstract you -% might want to replace the word `Kivonat' with -% `\"Osszefoglal\'o'. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\abstractname{Kivonat}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The Hungarian version of `Bibliography' is `Bibliogr\'afia', but -% a more natural word to use is `Irodalomjegyz\'ek'. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bibname{Irodalomjegyz\'ek}% - \def\chaptername{fejezet}% - \def\appendixname{F\"uggel\'ek}% - \def\contentsname{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% - \def\listtablename{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% - \def\indexname{T\'argymutat\'o}% - \def\figurename{\'abra}% - \def\tablename{t\'abl\'azat}% - \def\partname{r\'esz}% - \def\enclname{Mell\'eklet}% - \def\ccname{K\"orlev\'el--c\'\i mzettek}% - \def\headtoname{C\'\i mzett}% - \def\pagename{oldal}% - \def\seename{l\'asd}% - \def\alsoname{l\'asd m\'eg}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Besides the Hungarian word for Proof, `Bizony\'\i t\'as' we can -% also name Corollary (K\"ovetkezm\'eny), Theorem (T\'etel) and -% Lemma (Lemma). -% \changes{magyar-1.4b}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{magyar-1.4h}{2003/11/20}{Inserted translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\proofname{Bizony\'\i t\'as}% - \def\glossaryname{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datemagyar} -% The macro |\datemagyar| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Hungarian dates. -% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Rewritten to produce the correct -% date format} -% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/10}{Use \cs{number}\cs{day} instead of -% \cs{ifcase} construct} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{% - \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or - \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or - j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or - okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi - \space\number\day.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ondatemagyar} -% The macro |\ondatemagyar| produces Hungarian dates which have the -% meaning `\emph{on this day}'. It does not redefine the command -% |\today|. -% \changes{magyar-1.1c}{1994/01/05}{The date number should not be -% followed by a dot.} -% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Renamed from \cs{datemagyar}; -% nolonger redefines \cs{today}.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{ondate\CurrentOption}{% - \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or - \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or - j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or - okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi - \space\ifcase\day\or - 1-j\'en\or 2-\'an\or 3-\'an\or 4-\'en\or 5-\'en\or - 6-\'an\or 7-\'en\or 8-\'an\or 9-\'en\or 10-\'en\or - 11-\'en\or 12-\'en\or 13-\'an\or 14-\'en\or 15-\'en\or - 16-\'an\or 17-\'en\or 18-\'an\or 19-\'en\or 20-\'an\or - 21-\'en\or 22-\'en\or 23-\'an\or 24-\'en\or 25-\'en\or - 26-\'an\or 27-\'en\or 28-\'an\or 29-\'en\or 30-\'an\or - 31-\'en\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasmagyar} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasmagyar} -% The macro |\extrasmagyar| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Hungarian language. The macro |\noextrasmagyar| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasmagyar|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ontoday - \csname ondate\CurrentOption\endcsname} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\let\ontoday\@undefined} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we redefine some commands included into \file{latex.ltx}. -% The original form of a command is always saved with -% |\babel@save| and the changes are added to |\extrasmagyar|. -% This ensures that the Hungarian version of a macro is alive -% \emph{only} if the Hungarian language is active. -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table} -% In figure and table captions the order of the figure/table -% number and |\figurename|\hspace{0pt}/|\tablename| must be changed. -% To achieve this |\fnum@figure| and |\fnum@table| are -% redefined and added to |\extrasmagyar|. -% \changes{magyar-1.4i}{2004/02/20}{Use \cs{nobreakspace} instead of -% tilde} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\fnum@figure - \def\fnum@figure{\thefigure.\nobreakspace\figurename}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\fnum@table - \def\fnum@table{\thetable.\nobreakspace\tablename}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} -% The colon in a figure/table caption must be replaced by a dot -% by redefining |\@makecaption|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makecaption - \def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1. #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - {#1. #2\csname par\endcsname} - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@caption} -% There should be a dot after the figure/table number in lof/lot, -% so |\@caption| is redefined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@caption - \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{% - \csname par\endcsname - \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}{\ignorespaces #2}}% - \begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \if@minipage - \@setminipage - \fi - \normalsize - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #3}\csname par\endcsname - \endgroup}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat} -% In order to have a dot after the section number -% |\@seccntformat| is redefined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@seccntformat - \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% Alas, |\@sect| must also be redefined to have that dot in toc too. -% On the other hand, we include a dot after a run-in head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@sect - \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty - \else - \refstepcounter{#1}% - \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% - \fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #6{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \fi - #7}% - \else - \def\@svsechd{% - #6{\hskip #3\relax - \@svsec #8.}% - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \fi - #7}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#5}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% In order to have that dot after a run-in head when the star form of the -% sectioning commands is used, we have to redefine |\@ssect|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@ssect - \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{% - \@tempskipa #3\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #4{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}% - \endgroup - \else - \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5.}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#3}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@begintheorem} -% \begin{macro}{\@opargbegintheorem} -% Order changing and dot insertion in theorem by redefining -% |\@begintheorem| and |\@opargbegintheorem|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@begintheorem - \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1.}]\itshape}% - \babel@save\@opargbegintheorem - \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1\ (#3).}]\itshape}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The next step is to redefine some macros included into the -% class files. It is determined which class file is loaded -% then the original form of the macro is saved and the changes -% are added to |\extrasmagyar|. -% -% First we check if the \file{book.cls} is loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{book}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings} -% The look of the headings is changed: we have to insert some dots -% and change the order of chapter number and |\chaptername|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% At the beginning of a part we need \mbox{eg.} `I.\ r\'esz' -% instead of `Part I' (in toc too). -% To achieve this |\@part| is redefined. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@part - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart.\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \fi - \markboth{}{}% - {\centering - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \huge\bfseries \thepart.\nobreakspace\partname - \csname par\endcsname - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \Huge \bfseries #2\csname par\endcsname}% - \@endpart}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% The same changes are made to chapter. -% First the screen typeout and the toc are changed by -% redefining |\@chapter|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@chapter - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead} -% Then the look of the chapter-start is modified by redefining -% |\@makechapterhead|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makechapterhead - \def\@makechapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{} - \csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \fi - \interlinepenalty\@M - \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% This the end of the book class modification. -% \begin{macrocode} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we check if \file{report.cls} is loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{report}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings} -% First the headings are modified just in case of the book class. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% Chapter-start modification with |\@chapter| -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@chapter - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead} -% and |\@makechapterhead|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makechapterhead - \def\@makechapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{} - \csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \interlinepenalty\@M - \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% End of report class modification. -% \begin{macrocode} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Checking if \file{article.cls} is loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings} -% Changing headings by redefining |\ps@headings|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright {% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% No more necessary changes specific to the article class. -% \begin{macrocode} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And now this is the turn of \file{letter.cls}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings} -% In the headings the page number must be followed by a dot -% and then |\pagename|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead} - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}} - \fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% End of letter class. -% \begin{macrocode} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% After making the changes to the \LaTeX{} -% macros we define some new ones to handle the problem -% with definite articles. -% \begin{macro}{\az} -% |\az| is a user-level command which decides if the next -% character is a star. |\@az| is called for |\az*| and -% |\az@| for |\az|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\az{a\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Az} -% |\Az| is used at the beginning of a sentence. Otherwise it behaves -% the same as |\az|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Az{A\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\az@} -% |\az@| is called if there is no star after |\az| or |\Az|. -% It calls |\@az| and writes |#1| separating with a non-breakable -% space. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\az@#1{\@az{#1}\nobreakspace#1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@az} -% This macro calls |\hun@tempadef| to remove the accents from -% the argument then calls |\@@az| that determines if a `z' -% should be written after a/A (written by |\az|/|\Az|). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@az#1{% - \hun@tempadef{relax}{relax}{#1}% - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hun@tempadef} -% The macro |\hun@tempadef| has three tasks: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Accent removal. Accented letters confuse -% |\@@az|, the main definite article determinator -% macro, so they must be changed to their non-accented -% counterparts. Special letters must also be changed, -% \mbox{eg.} \oe$\,\rightarrow\,$o. -% \item Labels must be expanded. -% \item To handle Roman numerals correctly, commands starting -% with |\hun@| are defined for labels containing Roman -% numbers with the Roman numerals -% replaced by their Arabic representation. -% This macro can check if there is a |\hun@| command. -% \end{itemize} -% There are three arguments: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item The primary command that should be expanded if it exists. -% This is usually the |\hun@| command for a label. -% \item The secondary command which is used if the first one -% is |\relax|. This is usually the original \LaTeX{} -% command for a label. -% \item This is used if the first two is |\relax|. For this one -% no expansion is carried out but the accents are still -% removed and special letters are changed. -% \end{enumerate} -% \changes{magyar-1.4f}{2003/09/29}{Added -% \cs{def}\cs{safe@activesfalse{}} as a fix for PR3426} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hun@tempadef#1#2#3{% - \begingroup - \def\@safe@activesfalse{}% - \def\setbox ##1{}% to get rid of accents and special letters - \def\hbox ##1{}% - \def\accent ##1 ##2{##2}% - \def\add@accent ##1##2{##2}% - \def\@text@composite@x ##1##2{##2}% - \def\i{i}\def\j{j}% - \def\ae{a}\def\AE{A}\def\oe{o}\def\OE{O}% - \def\ss{s}\def\L{L}% - \def\d{}\def\b{}\def\c{}\def\t{}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax - \xdef\@tempa{#3}% - \else - \xdef\@tempa{\csname #2\endcsname}% - \fi - \else - \xdef\@tempa{\csname #1\endcsname}% - \fi - \endgroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following macros are used to determine the definite -% article for a label's expansion. -% \begin{macro}{\aref} -% |\aref| is an alias for |\azr|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\aref{\azr} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Aref} -% |\Aref| is an alias for |\Azr|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Aref{\Azr} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azr} -% |\azr| calls |\@azr| if the next character is a star, -% otherwise it calls |\azr@|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azr{a\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Azr} -% |\Azr| is the same as |\azr| except that it writes `A' -% instead of `a'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Azr{A\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azr@} -% |\azr@| decides if the next character is |(| and -% in that case it calls |\azr@@@| which writes an extra |(| -% for equation referencing. Otherwise |\azr@@| is called. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azr@{\@ifnextchar ({\azr@@@}{\azr@@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azr@@} -% Calls |\@azr| then writes the label's expansion preceded by -% a non-breakable space. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azr@@#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace\ref{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azr@@@} -% Same as |\azr@@| but inserts a |(| between the -% non-breakable space and the label expansion. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azr@@@(#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace(\ref{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@azr} -% Calls |\hun@tempadef| to choose between the label's -% |\hun@| or original \LaTeX{} command and to expand -% it with accent removal and special letter substitution. -% Then calls |\@@az|, the core macro of definite article handling. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@azr#1{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@firstoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following commands are used to generate the definite article -% for the page number of a label. -% \begin{macro}{\apageref} -% |\apageref| is an alias for |\azp|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\apageref{\azp} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Apageref} -% |\Apageref| is an alias for |\Azp|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Apageref{\Azp} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azp} -% Checks if the next character is |*| and calls -% |\@azp| or |\azp@|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azp{a\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Azp} -% Same as |\azp| except that it writes `A' instead of `a'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Azp{A\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azp@} -% Calls |\@azp| then writes the label's page preceded by -% a non-breakable space. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azp@#1{\@azp{#1}\nobreakspace\pageref{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@azp} -% Calls |\hun@tempadef| then takes the label's page and passes -% it to |\@@az|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@azp#1{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following macros are used to give the definite article to -% citations. -% \begin{macro}{\acite} -% This is an alias for |\azc|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\acite{\azc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Acite} -% This is an alias for |\Azc|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Acite{\Azc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azc} -% Checks if the next character is a star and -% calls |\@azc| or |\azc@|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azc{a\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Azc} -% Same as |\azc| but used at the beginning of sentences. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Azc{A\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azc@} -% If there is no star we accept an optional argument, -% just like the |\cite| command. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azc@{\@ifnextchar [{\azc@@}{\azc@@[]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\azc@@} -% First calls |\@azc| then |\cite|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\azc@@[#1]#2{% - \@azc{#2}\nobreakspace\def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\cite{#2}\else\cite[#1]{#2}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@azc} -% This is an auxiliary macro to get the first cite label -% from a comma-separated list. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@azc#1{\@@azc#1,\hbox!} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@@azc} -% This one uses only the first argument, that is the first -% element of the comma-separated list of cite labels. -% Calls |\hun@tempadef| to expand the cite label with accent -% removal and special letter replacement. -% Then |\@@az|, the core macro, is called. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@azc#1,#2\hbox#3!{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@b@#1}{b@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hun@number@lehgth} -% This macro is used to count the number of digits in its -% argument until a non-digit character is found or -% the end of the argument is reached. -% It must be called as -% |\hun@number@lehgth|\textit{arg}|\hbox\hbox!| and -% |\count@| must be zeroed. -% It is called by |\@@az|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hun@number@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \ifcat\noexpand#11% - \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname>47 - \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname<58 - \advance\count@ by \@ne - \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hun@alph@lehgth} -% This is used to count the number of letters until a -% non-letter is found or the end of the argument is reached. -% It must be called as -% |\hun@alph@lehgth|\textit{arg}|\hbox\hbox!| and -% |\count@| must be set to zero. -% It is called by |\@@az@string|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \ifcat\noexpand#1A% - \advance\count@ by \@ne - \hun@alph@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@@az@string} -% This macro is called by |\@@az| if the argument begins -% with a letter. -% The task of |\@@az@string| is to determine if the argument -% starts with a vowel and in that case |\let\@tempa\@tempb|. -% After checking if the first letter is A, E, I, O, or U, -% |\hun@alph@lehgth| is called -% to determine the length of the argument. If it gives 1 -% (that is the argument is a single-letter one or the second -% character is not letter) then the letters L, M, N, R, S, X, and Y -% are also considered as a vowel since their Hungarian pronounced -% name starts with a vowel. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@az@string#1#2{% - \ifx#1A% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1E% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1I% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1O% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1U% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \else - \count@\z@ - \hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox\hbox!% - \ifnum\count@=\@ne - \ifx#1F% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1L% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1M% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1N% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1R% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1S% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1X% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1Y% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@@az} -% This macro is the core of definite article handling. -% It determines if the argument needs `az' or `a' definite -% article by setting |\@tempa| to `z' or |\@empty|. -% It sets |\@tempa| to `z' if -% \begin{itemize} -% \item the first character of the argument is 5; or -% \item the first character of the argument is 1 and -% the $\mathit{length\ of\ the\ number} \pmod 3 = 1$ -% (one--egy, thousand--ezer, million--egymilli\'o,\dots); or -% \item the first character of the argument is -% a, A, e, E, i, I, o, O, u, or U; or -% \item the first character of the argument is -% l, L, m, M, n, N, r, R, s, S, x, X, y, or Y -% and the length of the argument is 1 or the second -% character is a non-letter. -% \end{itemize} -% At the end it calls |\@tempa|, that is, it either typesets a `z' -% or nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@az#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \let\@tempa\@empty - \def\@tempb{z}% - \uppercase{% - \ifx5#1% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx1#1% - \count@\@ne - \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!% - \loop - \ifnum\count@>\thr@@ - \advance\count@-\thr@@ - \repeat - \ifnum\count@=\@ne - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi - \else - \@@az@string{#1}{#2}% - \fi\fi - }% - \@tempa} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter} -% |\refstepcounter| must be redefined in order to keep -% |\@currentlabel| unexpanded. This is necessary to enable -% the |\label| command to write a |\hunnewlabel| command -% to the aux file with the Roman numerals substituted by -% their Arabic representations. -% Of course, the original definition of |\refstepcounter| is -% saved and restored if the Hungarian language is switched off. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\refstepcounter - \def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}% - \def\@currentlabel{\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\label} -% |\label| is redefined to write another line into the aux -% file: |\hunnewlabel{ }{ }| where the Roman numerals -% are replaced their Arabic representations. -% The original definition of |\label| is saved into -% |\old@label| and it is also called by |\label|. -% On leaving the Hungarian typesetting mode |\label|'s -% original is restored since it is added to |\noextrasmagyar|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \let\old@label\label - \def\label#1{\@bsphack - \old@label{#1}% - \begingroup - \let\romannumeral\number - \def\@roman##1{\number ##1}% - \def\@Roman##1{\number ##1}% - {\toks0={\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\number}% - \def\number##1{\the\toks0 ##1}\xdef\tempb@{\thepage}}% - \edef\@tempa##1{\noexpand\protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\noexpand\string\noexpand\hunnewlabel - {##1}{{\@currentlabel}{\tempb@}}}}% - \@tempa{#1}% - \endgroup - \@esphack}% -} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \let\label\old@label -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\hunnewlabel} -% Finally, |\hunnewlabel| is defined. -% It checks if the label's expansion (|#2|) differs from that -% one given in the |\newlabel| command. If yes -% (that is, the label contains some Roman numerals), -% it defines the macro |\hun@r@|\textit{label}, -% otherwise it does nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hunnewlabel#1#2{% - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\@tempa - \relax% \message{No need for def: #1}% - \else - \global\expandafter\let\csname hun@r@#1\endcsname\@tempa% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For Hungarian the |`| character is made active. -% \changes{magyar-1.4c}{2001/03/05}{Make sure that the grave accent -% has catcode 12 \emph{before} it is made \cs{active}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi} -\initiate@active@char{`} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \languageshorthands{magyar}% - \bbl@activate{`}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{`}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The character sequence |``| is declared as a shorthand -% in order to produce -% the opening quotation sign appropriate for Hungarian. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{``}{\glqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In Hungarian there are some long double consonants which -% must be hyphenated specially. -% For all these long double consonants (except dzzs, that is -% extremely very-very rare) a shortcut is defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{c}{cs}}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{C}{CS}}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{d}{dz}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{D}{DZ}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{g}{gy}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{G}{GY}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{l}{ly}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{L}{LY}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{n}{ny}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{N}{NY}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{s}{sz}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{S}{SZ}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{t}{ty}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{T}{TY}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{z}{zs}}{z}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`Z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{Z}{ZS}}{Z}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{magyar-1.3h}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins deleted file mode 100644 index ea4b4851d12..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{magyar.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{magyar.ldf}{\from{magyar.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 481a274d284..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,359 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{266} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{ngermanb} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.dtx} - [2008/07/06 v2.6n new German support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `ngermanb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% new Germanb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek, -%% Walter Schmidt. -% This file is based on german.tex version 2.5e -% by Bernd Raichle, Hubert Partl et.al. -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. -\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{ngermanb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{ngermanb.dtx} -% -% \changes{ngermanb-2.6f}{1999/03/24}{Renamed from \file{germanb.ldf}; -% language names changed from \texttt{german} and \texttt{austrian} -% to \texttt{ngerman} and \texttt{naustrian}.} -% -% \section{The German language -- new orthography} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% German language with the `new orthography' introduced in -% August 1998. This includes also the Austrian dialect of this -% language. -% -% As with the `traditional' German orthography, -% the character |"| is made active, and -% the commands in table~\ref{tab:german-quote} can be used, except -% for |"ck| and |"ff| etc., which are no longer required. -% -% The internal language names are |ngerman| and |naustrian|. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{ngermanb} we make -% it behave as if \Lopt{ngerman} was specified. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{ngermanb} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{ngerman} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{ngerman} will be an `unknown' language, so we -% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@ngerman| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@ngerman\@undefined - \@nopatterns{ngerman} - \adddialect\l@ngerman0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For the Austrian version of these definitions we just add another -% language. -% \begin{macrocode} -\adddialect\l@naustrian\l@ngerman -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the German language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsngerman} -% \begin{macro}{\captionsnaustrian} -% \changes{ngermab-v2.6n}{2008/07/06}{Corrected typo -% \cs{captionnsgerman}} -% Either the macro |\captionsngerman| or the macro -% |\captionsnaustrian| will define all strings used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. -% -% \changes{ngermanb-2.6k}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Vorwort}% - \def\refname{Literatur}% - \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}% - \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Anhang}% - \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt - \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% - \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Abbildung}% - \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel - \def\partname{Teil}% - \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n) - \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an - \def\headtoname{An}% - \def\pagename{Seite}% - \def\seename{siehe}% - \def\alsoname{siehe auch}% - \def\proofname{Beweis}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossar}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datengerman} -% The macro |\datengerman| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce German dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\month@ngerman{\ifcase\month\or - Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or - Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi} -\def\datengerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@ngerman - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateanustrian} -% The macro |\datenaustrian| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce Austrian version of the German dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datenaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month - J\"anner\else \month@ngerman\fi \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasngerman} -% \begin{macro}{\extrasnaustrian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasngerman} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasnaustrian} -% Either the macro |\extrasngerman| or the macros |\extrasnaustrian| -% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the German -% language. The macro |\noextrasngerman| is used to cancel the -% actions of |\extrasngerman|. -% -% For German (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"} character is -% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{ngerman}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{ngermanb-2.6j}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% German} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasngerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German words which -% contain `\ss' (in the \texttt{OT1} position |^^Y|) we have to -% give the character a nonzero |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX -% book). -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}% - \lccode25=25} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots. -% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% The current -% version of the `new' German hyphenation patterns (\file{dehyphn.tex} -% is to be used with |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{ngermanb-2.6k}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% For German texts we need to make sure that |\frenchspacing| is -% turned on. -% \changes{ngermanb-2.6m}{2001/01/26}{Turn frenchspacing on, as in -% \texttt{german.sty}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active -% character. This character is then used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:german-quote}. -% -% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tremas, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}% - {\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -% \end{macrocode} -% german es-zet (sharp s), -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"S}{\SS} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"Z}{SZ} -% \end{macrocode} -% german and french quotes, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{">}{\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 6fe166ca066..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,453 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%\CheckSum{305} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{norsk.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{norsk} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{norsk.dtx} - [2005/03/30 v2.0h Norsk support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%%File `norsk.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Norwegian language definition file. Contributions -% were made by Haavard Helstrup (HAAVARD@CERNVM) and Alv Kjetil -% Holme (HOLMEA@CERNVM); the `nynorsk' variant has been supplied by -% Per Steinar Iversen (iversen@vxcern.cern.ch) and Terje Engeset -% Petterst (TERJEEP@VSFYS1.FI.UIB.NO) -% -% Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) added the shorthand -% definitions -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{norsk.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{norsk.dtx} -% -% \changes{norsk-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{norsk-1.1c}{1993/11/11}{Added a couple of translations -% (from Per Norman Oma, TeX@itk.unit.no)} -% \changes{norsk-1.2a}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{norsk-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/07/12}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% -% \section{The Norwegian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. Contributions were made by Haavard Helstrup -% (\texttt{HAAVARD@CERNVM)} and Alv Kjetil Holme -% (\texttt{HOLMEA@CERNVM}); the `nynorsk' variant has been supplied -% by Per Steinar Iversen \texttt{iversen@vxcern.cern.ch}) and Terje -% Engeset Petterst (\texttt{TERJEEP@VSFYS1.FI.UIB.NO)}; the -% shorthand definitions were provided by Rune Kleveland -% (\texttt{runekl@math.uio.no}).} defines all the language definition -% macros for the Norwegian language as well as for an alternative -% variant `nynorsk' of this language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:norsk-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{.7\textwidth}} -% |"ff|& for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|, -% this is also implemented for b, d, f, g, l, m, n, -% p, r, s, and t. (|o"ppussing|) \\ -% |"ee|& Hyphenate |"ee| as |\'e-e|. (|komit"een|) \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation in the -% composing words. Use this for compound words when the -% hyphenation patterns fail to hyphenate -% properly. (|alpin"-anlegg|) \\ -% \verb="|= & Like |"-|, but inserts 0.03em space. Use it if -% the compound point is spanned by a ligature. -% (\verb=hoff"|intriger=) \\ -% |""| & Like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign. -% (|i""g\aa{}r|) \\ -% |"~| & Like |-|, but allows no hyphenation at all. (|E"~cup|)\\ -% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the composing -% words. (|marksistisk"=leninistisk|) \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{norsk.sty}}\label{tab:norsk-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Describe the use of double quote as -% active character} -% -% Rune Kleveland distributes a Norwegian dictionary for ispell -% (570000 words). It can be found at -% |http://www.uio.no/~runekl/dictionary.html|. -% -% This dictionary supports the spellings |spi"sslede| for -% `spisslede' (hyphenated spiss-slede) and other such words, and -% also suggest the spelling |spi"sslede| for `spisslede' and -% `spissslede'. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{norsk} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@norsk| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{norsk-1.0c}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{norsk-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce -% the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@norsk\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Norsk} - \adddialect\l@norsk0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\norskhyphenmins} -% Some sets of Norwegian hyphenation patterns can be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~1 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2, but -% the most common set |nohyph.tex| can't. So we use -% |\lefthyphenmin=2| by default. -% \changes{norsk-1.2f}{1995/07/02}{Added setting of hyphenmin -% parameters} -% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Changed setting of hyphenmin -% parameters to 2~2} -% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we have to decide which version of the captions should be -% made available. This can be done by checking the contents of -% |\CurrentOption|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{norsk} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Norwegian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsnorsk} -% The macro |\captionsnorsk| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} and -% \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{norsk-1.1b}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{norsk-1.2f}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{norsk-1.2g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Proof' by its -% translation} -% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{norsk-2.0g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Glossary' by its -% translation} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\captionsnorsk{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Referanser}% - \def\abstractname{Sammendrag}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% or Litteraturoversikt - % or Litteratur or Referanser - \def\chaptername{Kapittel}% - \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks - \def\contentsname{Innhold}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% or Figurliste - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlegg}% - \def\ccname{Kopi sendt}% - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Se}% - \def\alsoname{Se ogs\aa{}}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}% - } -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For the `nynorsk' version of these definitions we just add a -% ``dialect''. -% \begin{macrocode} - \adddialect\l@nynorsk\l@norsk -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsnynorsk} -% The macro |\captionsnynorsk| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX, but using a -% different spelling than in the command |\captionsnorsk|. -% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} and -% \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{norsk-1.1b}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{norsk-1.2g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Proof' by its -% translation} -% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{norsk-2.0g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Glossary' by its -% translation} -% \changes{norks-2.0h}{2001/01/12}{Changed \cs{ccname} and \cs{alsoname}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\captionsnynorsk{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Referansar}% - \def\abstractname{Samandrag}% - \def\bibname{Litteratur}% or Litteraturoversyn - % or Referansar - \def\chaptername{Kapittel}% - \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks - \def\contentsname{Innhald}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurar}% or Figurliste - \def\listtablename{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlegg}% - \def\ccname{Kopi til}% - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Sj\aa{}}% - \def\alsoname{Sj\aa{} \`{o}g}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}% - } -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datenorsk} -% The macro |\datenorsk| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Norwegian dates. -% \changes{norsk-1.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{norsk-1.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or - juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember - \fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasnorsk} -% \begin{macro}{\extrasnynorsk} -% The macro |\extrasnorsk| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Norwegian language. The macro |\noextrasnorsk| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasnorsk|. -% -% Norwegian typesetting requires |\frencspacing| to be in effect. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% For Norsk the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. -% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Made double quote character active} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \languageshorthands{norsk}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{norsk-2.0c}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Norsk} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need to define a number of -% shorthand commands. These sharthand commands are then used as -% indicated in table~\ref{tab:norsk-quote}. -% -% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the discretionary shorthand commands. -% The number of words where such hyphenation is required is for -% each character -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{*{11}c} -% b&d&f &g&k &l &n&p &r&s &t \\ -% 4&4&15&3&43&30&8&12&1&33&35 -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% taken from a list of 83000 ispell-roots. -% -% \changes{norsk-2.0d}{2000/02/29}{Shorthands are the same for both -% spelling variants, no need to use \cs{CurrentOption}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"e}{\textormath{\bbl@disc e{\'e}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"E}{\textormath{\bbl@disc E{\'E}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"k}{\textormath{\bbl@disc k{kk}}{k}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"K}{\textormath{\bbl@disc K{KK}}{K}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -% \end{macrocode} -% We need to treat |"f| a bit differently in order to preserve the -% ff-ligature. -% \changes{norsk-2.0b}{1999/11/19}{Copied the coding for \texttt{"f} -% from germanb.dtx version 2.6g} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}} -\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M - \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= } -\def\bbl@insertff{% - \if f\bbl@nextff - \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}} -\let\bbl@nextff=f -% \end{macrocode} -% We now define the French double quotes and some commands -% concerning hyphenation: -% \changes{norsk-2.0b}{1999/11/22}{added the french double quotes} -% \changes{norsk-2.0d}{2000/01/28}{Use \cs{bbl@allowhyphens} in -% \texttt{"-}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"-}{\penalty\@M\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 9ec2729e642..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{norsk.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{norsk.ldf}{\from{norsk.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a2e66978558..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,563 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{543} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{polish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{polish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{polish.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.2l Polish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `polish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Polish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Elmar Schalueck, Michael Janich -% Universitaet-Gesamthochschule Paderborn -% Warburger Strasse 100 -% 4790 Paderborn -% Germany -% elmar at uni-paderborn.de -% massa at uni-paderborn.de -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Polish language definition file. It was developped -% out of Polish.tex, which was written by Elmar Schalueck and -% Michael Janich. Polish.tex was based on code by Leszek -% Holenderski, Jerzy Ryll and J. S. Bie\'n from Faculty of -% Mathematics,Informatics and Mechanics of Warsaw University, exept -% of Jerzy Ryll (Instytut Informatyki Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego). -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{polish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{polish.dtx} -% -% \changes{polish-1.1c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of babel.def} -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Polish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the -% Polish language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:polish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"a| & or |\aob|, for tailed-a (like \c{a})\\ -% |"A| & or |\Aob|, for tailed-A (like \c{A})\\ -% |"e| & or |\eob|, for tailed-e (like \c{e})\\ -% |"E| & or |\Eob|, for tailed-E (like \c{E})\\ -% |"c| & or |\'c|, for accented c (like \'c), -% same with uppercase letters and n,o,s\\ -% |"l| & or |\lpb{}|, for l with stroke (like \l)\\ -% |"L| & or |\Lpb{}|, for L with stroke (like \L)\\ -% |"r| & or |\zkb{}|, for pointed z (like \.z), cf. -% pronounciation\\ -% |"R| & or |\Zkb{}|, for pointed Z (like \.Z)\\ -% |"z| & or |\'z|, for accented z\\ -% |"Z| & or |\'Z|, for accented Z\\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{polish.sty}} -% \label{tab:polish-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{polish}\captionspolish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{polish} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@polish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{polish-1.1c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@polish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Polish} - \adddialect\l@polish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Polish language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionspolish} -% The macro |\captionspolish| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{polish-1.2b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1997/09/11}{Added translation for Proof and -% changed translation of Contents} -% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/09/19}{\cs{bibname} and \cs{refname} were -% swapped} -% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionspolish{% - \def\prefacename{Przedmowa}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Streszczenie}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Rozdzia\l}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatek}% - \def\contentsname{Spis tre\'sci}% - \def\listfigurename{Spis rysunk\'ow}% - \def\listtablename{Spis tablic}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Rysunek}% - \def\tablename{Tablica}% - \def\partname{Cz\eob{}\'s\'c}% - \def\enclname{Za\l\aob{}cznik}% - \def\ccname{Kopie:}% - \def\headtoname{Do}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{Por\'ownaj}% - \def\alsoname{Por\'ownaj tak\.ze}% - \def\proofname{Dow\'od}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datepolish} -% The macro |\datepolish| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Polish dates. -% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/01/08}{A missing comment character caused -% an unwanted space character in the output} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datepolish{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - stycznia\or lutego\or marca\or kwietnia\or maja\or czerwca\or lipca\or - sierpnia\or wrze\'snia\or pa\'zdziernika\or listopada\or grudnia\fi - \space\number\year}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extraspolish} -% \begin{macro}{\noextraspolish} -% The macro |\extraspolish| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Polish language. The macro |\noextraspolish| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extraspolish|. -% -% For Polish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is -% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in -% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the polish group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extraspolish{\languageshorthands{polish}} -\addto\extraspolish{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{polish-1.2h}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Polish} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextraspolish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need an extra -% active character. This character is then used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:polish-quote}. -% -% If you have problems at the end of a word with a linebreak, use -% the other version without hyphenation tricks. Some TeX wizard may -% produce a better solution with forcasting another token to decide -% whether the character after the double quote is the last in a -% word. Do it and let us know. -% -% In Polish texts some letters get special diacritical marks. -% Leszek Holenderski designed the following code to position the -% diacritics correctly for every font in every size. These macros -% need a few extra dimension variables. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\pl@left -\newdimen\pl@down -\newdimen\pl@right -\newdimen\pl@temp -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sob} -% The macro |\sob| is used to put the `ogonek' in the right -% place. -% -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{This macro is meant to be used in -% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{$_\mathchar'454$}\setbox2\hbox{p}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\aob} -% \begin{macro}{\Aob} -% \begin{macro}{\eob} -% \begin{macro}{\Eob} -% The ogonek is placed with the letters `a', `A', `e', and `E'. -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{Use the constructed version of the -% characters only in OT1; use proper characters in T1.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{OT1}{\sob a{.66}{.20}{0}{.90}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{OT1}{\sob A{.80}{.50}{0}{.90}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{OT1}{\sob e{.50}{.35}{0}{.93}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{OT1}{\sob E{.60}{.35}{0}{.90}} -% \end{macrocode} -% For the 'new' \texttt{T1} encoding we can provide simpler -% definitions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{T1}{\k a} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{T1}{\k A} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\k e} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\k E} -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct the characters by default from the OT1 encoding. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\aob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Aob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\eob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Eob}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\spb} -% The macro |\spb| is used to put the `poprzeczka' in the -% right place. -% -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{\cs{spb} is meant to be used in -% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\spb#1#2#3#4#5{% - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'023}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \ht1=\pl@down \dp1=-\pl@down - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\skb} -% The macro |\skb| is used to put the `kropka' in the -% right place. -% -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{\cs{skb} is meant to be used in -% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\skb#1#2#3#4#5{% - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'056}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textpl} -% For the `poprzeczka' and the `kropka' in text fonts we don't need -% any special coding, but we can (almost) use what is already -% available. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\textpl{% - \def\lpb{\plll}% - \def\Lpb{\pLLL}% - \def\zkb{\.z}% - \def\Zkb{\.Z}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Initially we assume that typesetting is done with text fonts. -% \changes{polish-1.0a}{1993/11/05}{Initially execute `textpl} -% \begin{macrocode} -\textpl -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\lll=\l \let\LLL=\L -\def\plll{\lll} -\def\pLLL{\LLL} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\telepl} -% But for the `teletype' font in `OT1' encoding we have to take some -% special actions, involving the macros defined above. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\telepl{% - \def\lpb{\spb l{.45}{.5}{.4}{.8}}% - \def\Lpb{\spb L{.23}{.5}{.4}{.8}}% - \def\zkb{\skb z{.5}{.5}{1.2}{0}}% - \def\Zkb{\skb Z{.5}{.5}{1.1}{0}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% To activate these codes the font changing commands as they are -% defined in \LaTeX\ are modified. The same is done for plain -% \TeX's font changing commands. -% -% When |\selectfont| is undefined the current format is spposed to be -% either plain (based) or \LaTeX$\:$2.09. -% \changes{polish-1.2a}{1995/06/06}{Don't modify \cs{rm} and friends for -% \LaTeXe, take \cs{selectfont } instead} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\selectfont\@undefined - \ifx\prm\@undefined \addto\rm{\textpl}\else \addto\prm{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\pit\@undefined \addto\it{\textpl}\else \addto\pit{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\pbf\@undefined \addto\bf{\textpl}\else \addto\pbf{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psl\@undefined \addto\sl{\textpl}\else \addto\psl{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psf\@undefined \else \addto\psf{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psc\@undefined \else \addto\psc{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\ptt\@undefined \addto\tt{\telepl}\else \addto\ptt{\telepl}\fi -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% When |\selectfont| exists we assume \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\addto\csname selectfont \endcsname{% - \csname\f@encoding @pl\endcsname} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Currently we support the OT1 and T1 encodings. For T1 we don't -% have to make a difference between typewriter fonts and other -% fonts, they all have the same glyphs. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\let\csname T1@pl\endcsname\textpl -% \end{macrocode} -% For OT1 we need to check the current font family, stored in -% |\f@family|. Unfortunately we need a hack as |\ttdefault| is -% defined as a |\long| macro, while |\f@family| is not. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\csname OT1@pl\endcsname{% - \long\edef\curr@family{\f@family}% - \ifx\curr@family\ttdefault - \telepl - \else - \textpl - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros for diacritics, -% \changes{polish-1.1d}{1995/01/31}{The dqmacro for C used \cs{'c}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"a}{\textormath{\aob}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"A}{\textormath{\Aob}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"c}{\textormath{\'c}{\acute c}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"C}{\textormath{\'C}{\acute C}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"e}{\textormath{\eob}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"E}{\textormath{\Eob}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"l}{\textormath{\lpb}{\ddot l}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"L}{\textormath{\Lpb}{\ddot L}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"n}{\textormath{\'n}{\acute n}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"N}{\textormath{\'N}{\acute N}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"o}{\textormath{\'o}{\acute o}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"O}{\textormath{\'O}{\acute O}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"s}{\textormath{\'s}{\acute s}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"S}{\textormath{\'S}{\acute S}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\polishrz} -% \begin{macro}{\polishzx} -% \changes{polish-1.2j}{2000/11/11}{Added support for two -% notationstyles for kropka and accented z} -% The command |\polishrz| defines the shorthands |"r|, |"z| and -% |"x| to produce pointed z, accented z and |"x|. This is the -% default as these shorthands were defined by this language -% definition file for quite some time. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\polishrz}{% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot r}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot R}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute Z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\dq x}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\dq X}% - } -\polishrz -% \end{macrocode} -% The command |\polishzx| switches to a different set of -% shorthands, |"z|, |"x| and |"r| to produce pointed z, accented z -% and |"r|; a different shorthand notation also in use. -% \changes{polish-1.2k}{2003/10/12}{Fixed a typo} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\polishzx}{% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot Z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute x}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute X}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\dq r}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\dq R}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar -% to the german and french quotation marks. -% \changes{polish-1.2e}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% double quote and guillemot characters} -% \changes{polish-1.2l}{2004/02/18}{Changed closing quote} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behavew a little different from |\-|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for reasons of compatibility with \file{polish.tex}. -% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and -% \cs{shorthandoff}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{polish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 00a5e50a92b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{polish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{polish.ldf}{\from{polish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 7797f125413..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,475 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{320} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{portuges.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{portuges} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{portuges.dtx} - [2008/03/18 v1.2q Portuguese support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `portuges.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Portuguese Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Portuguese language definition file. The Portuguese -% words were contributed by Jose Pedro Ramalhete, (JRAMALHE@CERNVM -% or Jose-Pedro_Ramalhete@MACMAIL). -% -% Arnaldo Viegas de Lima <arnaldo@VNET.IBM.COM> contributed -% brasilian translations and suggestions for enhancements. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{portuges.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{portuges.dtx} -% -% \changes{portuges-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{portuges-1.2}{1994/02/26}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{portuges-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Enhanced support for brasilian} -% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The Portuguese language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. Contributions were made by Jose Pedro Ramalhete -% (\texttt{JRAMALHE@CERNVM} or -% \texttt{Jose-Pedro\_Ramalhete@MACMAIL}) and Arnaldo Viegas de -% Lima \texttt{arnaldo@VNET.IBM.COM}.} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Portuguese language as well as -% for the Brasilian version of this language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:port-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word.\\ -% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for -% words that should break at some sign such as -% ``entrada/salida.''\\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{portuges.ldf}} -% \label{tab:port-quote} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{portuges} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@portuges| to see whether we have to do something here. Since -% it is possible to load this file with any of the following four -% options to babel: \Lopt{portuges}, \Lopt{portuguese}, -% \Lopt{brazil} and \Lopt{brazilian} we also allow that the -% hyphenation patterns are loaded under any of these four names. We -% just have to find out which one was used. -% -% \changes{portuges-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{portuges-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@portuges\@undefined - \ifx\l@portuguese\@undefined - \ifx\l@brazil\@undefined - \ifx\l@brazilian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Portuguese} - \adddialect\l@portuges0 - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@brazilian - \fi - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@brazil - \fi - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@portuguese - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% By now |\l@portuges| is defined. When the language definition -% file was loaded under a different name we make sure that the -% hyphenation patterns can be found. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we have to decide whether this language definition file was -% loaded for Portuguese or Brasilian use. This can be done by -% checking the contents of |\CurrentOption|. When it doesn't -% contain either `portuges' or `portuguese' we make |\bbl@tempb| -% empty. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tempa{portuguese} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \let\bbl@tempb\@empty -\else - \def\bbl@tempa{portuges} - \ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \let\bbl@tempb\@empty - \else - \def\bbl@tempb{brazil} - \fi -\fi -\ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and from) -% the Portuguese language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsportuges} -% The macro |\captionsportuges| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2e}{1994/11/09}{Added a few missing -% translations} -% \changes{portuges-1.2h}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{portuges-1.2i}{1995/11/25}{Substituted `Prova' for `Proof'} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}% - \def\refname{Refer\^encias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Some discussion took place around the correct translations for -% `Table of Contents' and `Index'. the translations differ for -% Portuguese and Brasilian based the following history: -% \begin{quote} -% The whole issue is that some books without a real index at the -% end misused the term `\'Indice' as table of contents. Then, -% what happens is that some books apeared with `\'Indice' at the -% begining and a `\'Indice Remissivo' at the end. Remissivo is a -% redundant word in this case, but was introduced to make up the -% difference. So in Brasil people started using `Sum\'ario' and -% `\'Indice Remissivo'. In Portugal this seems not to be very -% common, therefore we chose `\'Indice' instead of `\'Indice -% Remissivo'. -% \end{quote} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\contentsname{Conte\'udo}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Anexo}% - \def\ccname{Com c\'opia a}% - \def\headtoname{Para}% - \def\pagename{P\'agina}% - \def\seename{ver}% - \def\alsoname{ver tamb\'em}% -% \end{macrocode} -% An alternate term for `Proof' could be `Prova'. -% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2p}{2003/05/23}{Substituted `Gloss\'ario' for -% `Glossary'} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateportuges} -% The macro |\dateportuges| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Portuguese dates. -% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2n}{2001/01/27}{Removed spurious space after -% Dezembro} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or - Janeiro\or Fevereiro\or Mar\c{c}o\or Abril\or Maio\or Junho\or - Julho\or Agosto\or Setembro\or Outubro\or Novembro\or Dezembro% - \fi - \space de\space\number\year}} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For the Brasilian version of these definitions we just add a -% ``dialect''. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter - \adddialect\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsbrazil} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{The captions for brasilian and -% portuguese are different now} -% -% The ``captions'' are different for both versions of the language, -% so we define the macro |\captionsbrazil| here. -% \changes{portuges-1.2i}{1995/11/25}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2q}{2008/03/18}{Substituted `Gloss\'ario' for -% `Glossary'} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}% - \def\refname{Refer\^encias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Refer\^encias Bibliogr\'aficas}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}% - \def\contentsname{Sum\'ario}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice Remissivo}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Anexo}% - \def\ccname{C\'opia para}% - \def\headtoname{Para}% - \def\pagename{P\'agina}% - \def\seename{veja}% - \def\alsoname{veja tamb\'em}% - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datebrazil} -% The macro |\datebrazil| redefines the command -% |\today| to produce Brasilian dates, for which the names -% of the months are not capitalized. -% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{portuges-1.2n}{2001/01/27}{Removed spurious space after -% dezembro} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or - janeiro\or fevereiro\or mar\c{c}o\or abril\or maio\or junho\or - julho\or agosto\or setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or dezembro% - \fi - \space de\space\number\year}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\portugeshyphenmins} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added setting of hyphenmin -% values} -% Set correct values for |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \changes{portuges-1.2o}{2001/02/16}{Set \cs{righthyphenmin} to 3 if -% not provided by the pattern file.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasportuges} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added the definition of some -% \texttt{"} shorthands} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasportuges} -% The macro |\extrasportuges| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Portuguese language. The macro -% |\noextrasportuges| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasportuges|. -% -% For Portuguese the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is -% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in -% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the portuguese group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{portuges}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Basque} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasportuges{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% First we define access to the guillemets for quotations, -% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% -% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version -% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while -% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated -% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is -% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where -% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means -% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that -% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ord} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro} -% \begin{macro}{\ro} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro} -% \begin{macro}{\orda} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro} -% \begin{macro}{\ra} -% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro} -% We also provide an easy way to typeset ordinals, both in the male -% (|\ord| or |\ro|) and the female (|orda| or |\ra|) form. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ord{$^{\rm o}$} -\def\orda{$^{\rm a}$} -\let\ro\ord\let\ra\orda -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/11/03}{ow use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins deleted file mode 100644 index e4e3c2e0296..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{portuges.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{portuges.ldf}{\from{portuges.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 88950570306..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{89} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{romanian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{romanian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{romanian.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.2l Romanian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `romanian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Romanian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Romanian language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Umstatter Horst (hhu at cernvm.cern.ch) and Robert -% Juhasz (robertj at uni-paderborn.de) -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{romanian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{romanian.dtx} -% -% \changes{romanian-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com} -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{romanian-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for LaTeX2e} -% \changes{romanian-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of babel.def} -% \changes{romanian-1.2e}{1995/05/25}{Updated for babel release 3.5} -% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Romanian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Umstatter Horst -% (\texttt{hhu@cernvm.cern.ch}).} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Romanian language. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{romanian}\captionsromanian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{romanian} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@romanian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{romanian-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of -% \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{romanian-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@romanian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Romanian} - \adddialect\l@romanian0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Romanian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsromanian} -% The macro |\captionsromanian| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/17}{Translation errors found by -% Robert Juhasz fixed} -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{romanian-1.2f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{romanian-1.2g}{1995/11/10}{Added translation of `Proof'} -% \changes{romanian-1.2k}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{romanian-1.2l}{2003/06/10}{Added translation for Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode}ls -\addto\captionsromanian{% - \def\prefacename{Prefa\c{t}\u{a}}% - \def\refname{Bibliografie}% - \def\abstractname{Rezumat}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Capitolul}% - \def\appendixname{Anexa}% - \def\contentsname{Cuprins}% - \def\listfigurename{List\u{a} de figuri}% - \def\listtablename{List\u{a} de tabele}% - \def\indexname{Glosar}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% % sau Plan\c{s}a - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Partea}% - \def\enclname{Anex\u{a}}% % sau Anexe - \def\ccname{Copie}% - \def\headtoname{Pentru}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{Vezi}% - \def\alsoname{Vezi de asemenea}% - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{t}ie} % - \def\glossaryname{Glosar}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateromanian} -% The macro |\dateromanian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Romanian dates. -% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/17}{Translation errors found by Robert -% Juhasz fixed} -% \changes{romanian-1.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{romanian-1.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateromanian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - ianuarie\or februarie\or martie\or aprilie\or mai\or - iunie\or iulie\or august\or septembrie\or octombrie\or - noiembrie\or decembrie\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasromanian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasromanian} -% The macro |\extrasromanian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Romanian language. The macro -% |\noextrasromanian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasromanian| For the moment these macros are empty but they -% are defined for compatibility with the other language definition -% files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasromanian{} -\addto\noextrasromanian{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{romanian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 749b4561ea7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{romanian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{romanian.ldf}{\from{romanian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 381cb2b26a3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1238 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1461} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{russianb.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{russianb} - [2008/03/21 v1.1r Russian support from the babel system] -% -%% File `russianb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Russianb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008 -%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings -%% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru -%% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand\note[1]{} -\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{russianb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{russianb.dtx} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1c}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% \changes{russianb-1.1k}{1999/08/19}{replaced all \cs{penalty}\cs{@M} -% with \cs{nobreak}} -% -% \section{The Russian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this section -% has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on \filedate. -% This file was initially derived from the original version of -% \file{german.sty}, which has some definitions for Russian. Later the -% definitions from \file{russian.sty} version 1.0b (for \LaTeX\ 2.09), -% \file{russian.sty} version v2.5c (for \LaTeXe) and \file{francais.sty} -% version 4.5c and \file{germanb.sty} version 2.5c were added.} defines -% all the language-specific macros for the Russian language. It needs the -% file \file{cyrcod} for success documentation with Russian encodings -% (see below). -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote} an overview is given of its purpose. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Added definitions of Cyrillic emdash stuff and thinspace} -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y| -% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint -% in following surname. \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A'' -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{russianb}}\label{tab:russian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:russian-quote} can also be typeset by -% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:rmore-quote}. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A'' -% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\ -% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined -% by \babel}\label{tab:rmore-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and `|>>|' in -% 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*}) -% and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings -% (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}). -% -% The quotation marks traditionally used in Russian were borrowed from -% other languages (e.g., French and German) so they keep their original -% names. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is loaded -% more than once, checking the category code of the \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{russianb-1.1e}{1996/12/29}{Added closing brace to second -% argument of \cs{LdfInit}} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{russian}{captionsrussian} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{russianb} will be an `unknown' language, in which case -% we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of |\l@russian| -% to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@russian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Russian} - \adddialect\l@russian0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding} -% -% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be which is -% active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the \pkg{fontenc} package -% is loaded later, then\ldots too bad! -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic -% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}.\@ -% Hopefully, \texttt{X2} will eventually replace the two latter encodings -% (\texttt{LCY} and \texttt{LWN}).\@ If the user wants to use another -% font encoding than the default (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the -% corresponding file \emph{before} \file{russianb.sty}. This may be done -% in the following way: -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% % override the default X2 encoding used in Babel -% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc} -% \usepackage[english,russian]{babel} -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% Note: for the Russian language, the \texttt{T2A} encoding is better than -% \texttt{X2}, because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and -% users should be very careful to switch the language every time they -% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Russian phrase or vice versa. -% -% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to \LaTeX\ in -% the order they were loaded. We set the |\cyrillicencoding| to the -% \emph{last} loaded encoding in the list of supported Cyrillic -% encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN}, \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, -% \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2A}, if any. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not load -% any of supported encodings. So, we have to set |\cyrillicencoding| to -% some default value. We test the presence of the encoding definition -% files in the order from less preferable to more preferable encodings. -% We use the lowercase names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of -% \file{LCYenc.def}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems not to -% have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we don't -% want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \PackageInfo{babel} -% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Russian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\russianhyphenmins - \language\l@russian}% -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english}% -\let\Rus\Russian -\let\Eng\English -\let\cyrillictext\Russian -\let\cyr\Russian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters, we -% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly -% produce Latin letters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with -% |\@alph| inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where -% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|' -% (|\fontencoding| is robust). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or - i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or - q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or - y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or - I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or - Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or - Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding dependent -% in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are defined as |\r{A}| and -% |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable results when the font encoding -% does not contain the Latin letters `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase Greek -% letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable family), to -% avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some math family does -% not contain these characters in places of OT1 encoding. The code was -% taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and further explanation there. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1n}{2001/02/21}{As this code generates a -% textfont 7 error it is commented out for now.} -% \begin{macrocode} -% \begingroup\catcode`\"=12 -% % uppercase greek letters: -% \def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax -% "0000\@nil#1} -% \def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{% -% \ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax -% \ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi -% \fi} -% \@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi -% \@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi -% \@tempa\Omega -% % some accents: -% \def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent} -% \expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil -% \ifx\@tempb\@tempc -% \def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}% -% \def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}% -% \def\do#1"#2{} -% \def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil -% \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF -% \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}% -% \fi} -% \@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave -% \@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar -% \fi -% \endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The user should use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit Cyrillic -% font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic input encodings. -% We do not assume any default input encoding, so the user should -% explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by |\usepackage{inputenc}|. -% We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so \pkg{inputenc} should be used -% before \babel. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1l}{1999/08/27}{Made not using inputenc a -% warning instead of an error} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% - \def\reserved@a{LWN}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \def\reserved@a{OT2}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \PackageWarning{babel}% - {No input encoding specified for Russian language} - \fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch between -% Cyrillic and Roman encodings. -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext} -% \begin{macro}{\latintext} -% -% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding to the -% Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches back. This -% assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin one. These commands -% are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces of text the commands -% |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be used. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1o}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already -% defined by the core of \babel} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{% -% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont -% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}} -\let\lat\latintext -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic} -% \begin{macro}{\textlatin} -% -% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the -% requested font encoding. -% \changes{russianb-1.1o}{2003/10/12}{\cs{textlatin} already defined -% by the core of \babel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -%\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% We make the \TeX -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\ltxTeX\undefined\let\ltxTeX\TeX\fi -%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\TeX}{\textlatin{\ltxTeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and \LaTeX\ logos encoding independent. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\ltxLaTeX\undefined\let\ltxLaTeX\LaTeX\fi -%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\LaTeX}{\textlatin{\ltxLaTeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Russian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsrussian} -% -% The macro |\captionsrussian| defines all strings used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two commands |\cyr| -% and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp.\ Latin encoding. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsrussian{% -% FIXME: Where is the \prefacename used? - \def\prefacename{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyri\cyrs\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyri\cyre}}% -% {\cyr\CYRV\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyrl\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyrery}}% -% \def\refname{% -% {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% -% \def\bibname{% -% {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro -% \cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}% -% for reports according to GOST: -% \def\bibname{% -% {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk -% \ \cyri\cyrs\cyrp\cyro\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrz\cyro\cyrv\cyra\cyrn -% \cyrn\cyrery\cyrh\ \cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrch\cyrn\cyri -% \cyrk\cyro\cyrv}}% - \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}% -% \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% -% \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}}% - \def\appendixname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% There are two names for the Table of Contents that are used in Russian -% publications. For books (and reports) the second variant is -% appropriate, but for proceedings the first variant is preferred: -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{thechapter}% - {\def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}% - {\def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRO\cyrg\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyrl\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}% - \def\listfigurename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyri\cyrl\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrishrt}}% -% \def\listfigurename{% -% {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk -% \ \cyrr\cyri\cyrs\cyru\cyrn\cyrk\cyro\cyrv}}% - \def\listtablename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc}}% - \def\indexname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyre\cyrt\cyrn\cyrery\cyrishrt - \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\authorname{% - {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrishrt - \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}% - \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}% - \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl.}}% - \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrs\cyrh.}}% -% \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrz}}% - \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrh.}}% -% \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv}}% - \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}% -% \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr.}}% - \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.}}% - \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyrzh\cyre}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{russianb-1.1m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt - \cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrs\cyrt\cyrv\cyro}}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\daterussian} -% -% The macro |\daterussian| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Russian dates. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\daterussian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - \cyrya\cyrn\cyrv\cyra\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyra\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\cyra\or - \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrya\or - \cyri\cyryu\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyri\cyryu\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\cyra\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrn\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrn\cyro\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyra\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\fi - \ \number\year~\cyrg.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasrussian} -% -% The macro |\extrasrussian| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Russian language. The macro |\noextrasrussian| is used -% to cancel the actions of |\extrasrussian|. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/20}{Added switch to \texttt{LWN} -% encoding} -% -% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic -% encoding whenever we enter `russian'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{\cyrillictext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the current -% font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming that \LaTeX\ uses -% \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as default. Therefore we switch back to -% |\latinencoding| whenever the Russian language is no longer `active'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasrussian{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/20}{Added changing of -% \cs{verbatim@font}} -% -% In order to get both Latin and Cyrillic letters in verbatim text we -% need to change the definition of an internal \LaTeX\ command somewhat: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\verbatim@font{% -% \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding -% \normalfont\ttfamily -% \expandafter\def\csname\cyrillicencoding-cmd\endcsname##1##2{% -% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect -% \begingroup\UseTextSymbol\cyrillicencoding##1\endgroup -% \else\noexpand##1\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The category code of the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{;}', -% `\texttt{!}', and `\texttt{?}' is made |\active| to insert a little -% white space. -% -% For Russian (as well as for German) the \texttt{"} character also is -% made active. -% -% Note: It is \emph{very} questionable whether the Russian typesetting -% tradition requires additional spacing before those punctuation signs. -% Therefore, we make the corresponding code optional. If you need it, -% then define the \texttt{frenchpunct} docstrip option in -% \file{babel.ins}. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Added a hook to insert space -% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).} -% -% Borrowed from french. -% Some users dislike automatic insertion of a space before -% `double punctuation', and prefer to decide themselves whether a -% space should be added or not; so a hook |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| -% is provided: if this command is added (in file |russianb.cfg|, or -% anywhere in a document) |russianb| will respect your typing, and -% introduce a suitable space before `double punctuation' \emph{if -% and only if} a space is typed in the source file before those -% signs. -% -% The command |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| switches back to the -% default behavior of |russianb|. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/03/07}{Use the new mechanism for dealing -% with active characters} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchpunct> -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{;} -%</frenchpunct> -%<*frenchpunct|spanishligs> -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{?} -%</frenchpunct|spanishligs> -\initiate@active@char{"} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need extra active characters. -% The character |"| is used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote}. -% -% We specify that the Russian group of shorthands should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{\languageshorthands{russian}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{% -%<frenchpunct> \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% -%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasrussian{% -%<frenchpunct> \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% -%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain -% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence, the -% ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these characters are -% useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define the shorthands to -% emulate these ligatures (optionally). -% -% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use -% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the primary -% encoding, but it does not contain these characters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanishligs> -\declare@shorthand{russian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown} -%</spanishligs> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@;@} -% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@:@} -% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@!@} -% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@?@} -% -% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;}, -% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!}. This should only happen in horizontal mode, -% hence the test with |\ifhmode|. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use new \cs{DefineActiveNoArg}} -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use the more general mechanism of -% \cs{declare@shorthand}} -% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/08}{Updated to reflect the latest -% french definitions} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchpunct> -\declare@shorthand{russian}{;}{% - \ifhmode -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% \thinspace changed to kern.1em (space bit thinner)} -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Added a hook to insert space -% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).} -% -% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space', `unskip' if -% it exists and place a |0.1em| kerning. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If no space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace| -% which will be -% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added -% thinspace, or as |\@empty|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can insert a `|;|' character. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \string;} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The other definitions are very similar. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{:}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string:} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{!}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{?}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string?} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Added a hook to insert space -% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).} -% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% \begin{macro}{\FDP@thinspace} -% |\FDP@thinspace| is defined as unbreakable -% spaces if |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is activated or as |\@empty| if -% |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is in use. -% The default is |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{% - \def\FDP@thinspace{\nobreak\kern.1em}} -\def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty} -\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FDPon} -% \begin{macro}{\FDPoff} -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{One more chance to avoid -% spaces before double punctuation} -% -% The next macros allow to switch on/off activeness of double -% punctuation signs. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\FDPon{\bbl@activate{:}% - \bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{?}% - \bbl@activate{!}} -\def\FDPoff{\bbl@deactivate{:}% - \bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{?}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@:@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@!@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@?@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@;@} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Added system level shorthands} -% -% When the active characters appear in an environment where their -% Russian behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected' -% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:} -\declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;} -%</frenchpunct> -%<*frenchpunct&!spanishligs> -\declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!} -\declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?} -%</frenchpunct&!spanishligs> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a couple of -% `support' macros. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it -% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as `|"|'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of -% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french quotes. -% We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty. -% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{">}{\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some additional commands: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different. -% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"-}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a hyphen -% sign: -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\russian@sh@tmp{% - \if\russian@sh@next-\expandafter\russian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\russian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning of -% this token is written to |\russian@sh@next| and |\russian@sh@tmp| is -% called. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \futurelet\russian@sh@next\russian@sh@tmp} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\russian@sh@hyphen{% - \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Rearranging of cyrillic emdash stuff} -% -% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must `eat' -% two last hyphen signs of our emdash\dots : -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\russian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\cdash} -% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro: -% |\cdash|: -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash -% to create in next step -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text: -% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of -% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after -% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\ -% started with ``--- where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line). -% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user: he may put -% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this -% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after -% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a -% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash -% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font ? -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi - \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames -% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters -% around; after the dash some space is added -% |\exhyphenalty| \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip| -% must follow the emdash); \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -%\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash} -% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash. -% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't been -% defined in a fontenc file. For T2* fonts, cyrdash will be placed in -% the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature |---|. -% \begin{macrocode} -% Is there an IF necessary? -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined - \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Add macro for thinspace between initials} -% -% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials. -% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the following -% surname. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1r}{2004/11/21}{Removed the commanet character -% before the next code line, see R3669} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{% -% Add commands for switch on/off -% doublequote activeness. Borrowed from german.} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The Russian hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{use \cs{russianhyphenmins} to -% store the correct values} -% \changes{russianb-1.1m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% temporary hack: -\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined - \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the action |\extrasrussian| has to execute is to make sure that the -% command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the -% execution of |\noextrasrussian| will switch it off again. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasrussian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Next we add a new enumeration style for Russian manuscripts with -% Cyrillic letters, and later on we define some math operator names in -% accordance with Russian typesetting traditions. -% -% \begin{macro}{\Asbuk} -% -% We begin by defining |\Asbuk| which works like |\Alph|, but produces -% (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The letters YO, -% ISHRT, HRDSN, ERY, and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such -% enumeration. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRZH\or - \CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or - \CYRP\or\CYRR\or\CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or - \CYRC\or\CYRCH\or\CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYREREV\or\CYRYU\or - \CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\asbuk} -% -% The macro |\asbuk| is similar to |\alph|; it produces lowercase -% Russian letters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrzh\or - \cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or - \cyrp\or\cyrr\or\cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or - \cyrc\or\cyrch\or\cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyrerev\or\cyryu\or - \cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. To use Cyrillic letters in -% math mode user should load the |textmath| package \emph{before} -% loading fontenc package (or \babel). Note, that by default Cyrillic -% letters are taken from upright font in math mode (unlike Latin -% letters). -% \begin{macrocode} -%\RequirePackage{textmath} -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different variants. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -% -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some math functions in Russian math books have other names: e.g., -% \texttt{sinh} in Russian is written as \texttt{sh} etc. So we define a -% number of new math operators. -% -% |\sinh|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\cosh|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\tan|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\arctan|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% arcctg: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1 encoding: -% -% |\tanh|: -% \changes{russianb-1.1q}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th} -% only for this language} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% |\cot|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\coth|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\csc|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And finally some other Russian mathematical symbols: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits} -\def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} -\def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} -\def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} -\def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} -\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This is for compatibility with older Russian packages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration file, -% setting the main language to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and -% resetting the category code of \texttt{@} to its original value. -% -% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{russian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 3c721f17114..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,147 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/03/13} -\def\batchfile{russianb.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} -\keepsilent - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble - -\generate{\file{russianb.ldf}{\from{russianb.dtx}{code}}} - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index b3d951204c7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{120} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{samin.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{samin} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{samin.dtx} - [2004/02/20 v1.0c North Sami support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for -% the North Sami language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{samin.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{samin.dtx} -% -% \section{The North Sami language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. It was written by Regnor Jernsletten, -% (\texttt{Regnor.Jernsletten@sami.uit.no}) or -% (\texttt{Regnor.Jernsletten@eunet.no}).} -% defines all the language definition macros for the North Sami language. -% -% Several Sami dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden -% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there -% will eventually be a need for more \texttt{.dtx} files for e.g. Lule -% and South Sami. Hence the name \file{samin.dtx} (and not -% \file{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sami case. -% -% There are currently no hyphenation patterns available for the North -% Sami language, but you might consider using the patterns for Finnish -% (\file{fi8hyph.tex}), Norwegian (\file{nohyph.tex}) or Swedish -% (\file{sehyph.tex}). Add a line for the \texttt{samin} language to -% the \file{language.dat} file, and rebuild the \LaTeX\ format file. -% See the documentation for your \LaTeX\ distribution. -% -% A note on writing North Sami in \LaTeX: The TI encoding and EC fonts -% do not include the T WITH STROKE letter, which you will need a -% workaround for. My suggestion is to place the lines\\ -% |\newcommand{\tx}{\mbox{t\hspace{-.35em}-}}|\\ -% |\newcommand{\txx}{\mbox{T\hspace{-.5em}-}}|\\ -% in the preamble of your documents. They define the commands\\ -% |\txx{}| for LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH STROKE and \\ -% |\tx{}| for LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH STROKE. -% -% \subsection{The code of \file{samin.dtx}} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{samin}{captionssamin} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{samin} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@samin| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\l@samin - \@nopatterns{Samin} - \adddialect\l@samin0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the North Sami language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\saminhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{samin-1.0b}{2000/09/26}{use \cs{providehyphenmins}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{samin}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionssamin} -% The macro |\captionssamin| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{samin-1.0b}{2000/09/26}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{samin-1.0c}{2000/10/04}{Provided the translation for -% glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captionssamin{% - \def\prefacename{Ovdas\'atni}% - \def\refname{\v Cujuhusat}% - \def\abstractname{\v Coahkk\'aigeassu}% - \def\bibname{Girjj\'ala\v svuohta}% - \def\chaptername{Kapihttal}% - \def\appendixname{\v Cuovus}% - \def\contentsname{Sisdoallu}% - \def\listfigurename{Govvosat}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeallat}% - \def\indexname{Registtar}% - \def\figurename{Govus}% - \def\tablename{Tabealla}% - \def\partname{Oassi}% - \def\enclname{Mielddus}% - \def\ccname{Kopia s\'addejuvvon}% - \def\headtoname{Vuost\'aiv\'aldi}% - \def\pagename{Siidu}% - \def\seename{geah\v ca}% - \def\alsoname{geah\v ca maidd\'ai}% - \def\proofname{Duo\dj{}a\v stus}% - \def\glossaryname{S\'atnelistu}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datesamin} -% The macro |\datesamin| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce North Sami dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datesamin{% - \def\today{\ifcase\month\or - o\dj{}\dj{}ajagem\'anu\or - guovvam\'anu\or - njuk\v cam\'anu\or - cuo\ng{}om\'anu\or - miessem\'anu\or - geassem\'anu\or - suoidnem\'anu\or - borgem\'anu\or - \v cak\v cam\'anu\or - golggotm\'anu\or - sk\'abmam\'anu\or - juovlam\'anu\fi - \space\number\day.~b.\space\number\year}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrassamin} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrassamin} -% The macro |\extrassamin| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the North Sami language. The macro -% |\noextrassamin| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrassamin|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other -% language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrassamin{} -\addto\noextrassamin{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{samin} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins deleted file mode 100644 index e94cf6f90ab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{2000/09/26} -\def\batchfile{samin.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{samin.ldf}{\from{samin.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 82613e5cd0b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,209 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{95} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{scottish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{scottish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{scottish.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.0g Scottish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `scottish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Scottish language definition file. -% -% The Gaidhlig or Scottish Gaelic terms were provided by Fraser -% Grant \texttt{FRASER@CERNVM}. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{scottish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{scottish.dtx} -% -% \changes{scottish-1.0b}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typos (PR1652)} -% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Scottish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Fraser Grant -% (\texttt{FRASER@CERNVM}).} defines all the language definition -% macros for the Scottish language. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{scottish}\captionsscottish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{scottish} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@scottish| to see whether we have to do something -% here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@scottish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{scottish} - \adddialect\l@scottish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Scottish language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsscottish} -% The macro |\captionsscottish| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{scottish-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{scottish-1.0g}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsscottish{% - \def\prefacename{Preface}% <-- needs translation - \def\refname{Iomraidh}% - \def\abstractname{Br\`{\i}gh}% - \def\bibname{Leabhraichean}% - \def\chaptername{Caibideil}% - \def\appendixname{Ath-sgr`{\i}obhadh}% - \def\contentsname{Cl\`ar-obrach}% - \def\listfigurename{Liosta Dhealbh }% - \def\listtablename{Liosta Chl\`ar}% - \def\indexname{Cl\`ar-innse}% - \def\figurename{Dealbh}% - \def\tablename{Cl\`ar}% - \def\partname{Cuid}% - \def\enclname{a-staigh}% - \def\ccname{lethbhreac gu}% - \def\headtoname{gu}% - \def\pagename{t.d.}% abrv. `taobh duilleag' - \def\seename{see}% <-- needs translation - \def\alsoname{see also}% <-- needs translation - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datescottish} -% The macro |\datescottish| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Scottish dates. -% \changes{scottish-1.0e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{scottish-1.0e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datescottish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or - am Faoilteach\or an Gearran\or am M\`art\or an Giblean\or - an C\`eitean\or an t-\`Og mhios\or an t-Iuchar\or - L\`unasdal\or an Sultuine\or an D\`amhar\or - an t-Samhainn\or an Dubhlachd\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasscottish} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasscottish} -% The macro |\extrasscottish| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Scottish language. The macro -% |\noextrasscottish| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasscottish|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other language -% definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasscottish{} -\addto\noextrasscottish{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{scottish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 5937bb1c446..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{scottish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{scottish.ldf}{\from{scottish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 60179088835..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,312 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{263} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{serbian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{serbian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{serbian.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.0d Serbocroatian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Serbocroatian language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} (dejan@yunix.com) and Jankovic -% Slobodan <slobodan@archimed.filfak.ac.ni.yu> -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{serbian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{serbian.dtx} -% \changes{serbian-1.0b}{1998/06/16}{Added suggestions for shorthands -% and so on from Jankovic Slobodan} -% -% \section{The Serbocroatian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. A contribution was made by Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} -% (\texttt{dejan@yunix.com}).} defines all the language definition -% macros for the Serbian language, typeset in a latin script. In a -% future version support for typesetting in a cyrillic script may -% be added. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:serbian-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the Serbian -% language some special characters are used. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the -% lowercase and uppercase s and z. \\ -% |"d| & |\dj|, also implemented for |"D| \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"`| & for Serbian left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for Serbian right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{serbian.ldf}}\label{tab:serbian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% Apart from defining shorthands we need to make sure taht the -% first paragraph of each section is intended. Furthermore the -% following new math operators are defined (|\tg|, |\ctg|, -% |\arctg|, |\arcctg|, |\sh|, |\ch|, |\th|, |\cth|, |\arsh|, -% |\arch|, |\arth|, |\arcth|, |\Prob|, |\Expect|, |\Variance|). -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{serbian}\captionsserbian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{serbian} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@serbian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@serbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Serbian} - \adddialect\l@serbian0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Serbocroatian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsserbian} -% The macro |\captionsserbian| defines all strings used -% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{serbian-1.0d}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsserbian{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografija}% - \def\chaptername{Glava}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatak}% - \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}% - \def\listfigurename{Slike}% - \def\listtablename{Tabele}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Deo}% - \def\enclname{Prilozi}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prima}% - \def\pagename{Strana}% - \def\seename{Vidi}% - \def\alsoname{Vidi tako\dj e}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateserbian} -% The macro |\dateserbian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Serbocroatian dates. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateserbian{% - \def\today{\number\day .~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or mart\or april\or maj\or - juni\or juli\or avgust\or septembar\or oktobar\or novembar\or - decembar\fi \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasserbian} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasserbian} -% The macro |\extrasserbian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Serbocroatian language. The macro -% |\noextrasserbian| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extrasserbian|. -% -% For Serbian the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the -% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the serbian group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \changes{serbian-1.0b}{1998/06/16}{Introduced the active \texttt{"}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasserbian{\languageshorthands{serbian}} -\addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{serbian-1.0c}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Serbian} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters -% such as \v{c}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"d}{\textormath{\dj}{\dj}}%% -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"D}{\textormath{\DJ}{\DJ}}%% -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar -% to the german and french quotation marks. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|. -% \changes{serbian-1.0d}{2000/09/20}{Changed definition of \texttt{"-} -% to be the same as for other languages} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent} -% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -% In Serbian the first paragraph of each section should be indented. -% Add this code only in \LaTeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\fmtname plain \else - \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} - \addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@frenchindent} - \addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mathserbian} -% Some math functions in Serbian math books have other names: -% e.g. |sinh| in Serbian is written as |sh| etc. So we define a -% number of new math operators. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh -\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth -\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits} -\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits} -\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits} -\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{serbian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 137084466d2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/03/13} -\def\batchfile{serbian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} -\keepsilent - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble - -\generate{\file{serbian.ldf}{\from{serbian.dtx}{code}}} - -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index d2d0c00a79b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1310 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1382} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{slovak.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<+code>\ProvidesLanguage{slovak} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{slovak.dtx} - [2008/07/06 v3.1a Slovak support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `slovak.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Slovak Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2001 -%% by Jana Chlebikova -% Department of Artificial Intelligence -% Faculty of Mathematics and Physics -% Mlynska dolina -% 84215 Bratislava -% Slovakia -% (42)(7) 720003 l. 835 -% (42)(7) 725882 -% chlebikj at mff.uniba.cs (Internet) -% and Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Copyright (C) 2002-2005 -%% by Tobias Schlemmer -% Braunsdorfer Stra\ss e 101 -% 01159 Dresden -% Deutschland -% Tobias.Schlemmer at web.de -% -%% Copyright (C) 2005-2008 -%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz) -% -% This file is also based on CSLaTeX -% by Ji\v r\'i Zlatu\v ska, Zden\v ek Wagner, -% Jaroslav \v Snajdr and Petr Ol\v s\'ak. -% -%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik -%% babel at tesarici.cz -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Slovak language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{slovak.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \def\CS{$\cal C\kern-.1667em -% \lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal S$}\kern-.075em$} -% -% \GetFileInfo{slovak.dtx} -% -% \changes{slovak-1.0}{1992/07/15}{First version} -% \changes{slovak-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{slovak-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{slovak-1.3a}{2004/02/20}{Added contributed shorthand -% definitions} -% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/09/10}{Implemented the functionality of -% \CS\LaTeX's slovak.sty. The version number was bumped to 3.0 -% to minimize confusion by being higher than the last version -% of \CS\LaTeX.} -% -% \section{The Slovak language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. It was originally written by Jana Chlebikova -% (\texttt{chlebik@euromath.dk}) and modified by Tobias Schlemmer -% (\texttt{Tobias.Schlemmer@web.de}). It was then rewritten by -% Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (\texttt{babel@tesarici.cz}).} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Slovak language. -% -% For this language the macro |\q| is defined. It was used with the -% letters (\texttt{t}, \texttt{d}, \texttt{l}, and \texttt{L}) and -% adds a \texttt{'} to them to simulate a `hook' that should be -% there. The result looks like t\kern-2pt\char'47. Since the the T1 -% font encoding has the corresponding characters it is mapped to |\v|. -% Therefore we recommend using T1 font encoding. If you don't want to -% use this encoding, please, feel free to redefine |\q| in your file. -% I think babel will honour this |;-)|. -% -% For this language the characters |"|, |'| and |^| are made -% active. In table~\ref{tab:slovak-quote} an overview is given of -% its purpose. Also the vertical placement of the -% umlaut can be controlled this way. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"a| & |\"a|, also implemented for the other -% lowercase and uppercase vowels. \\ -% |^d| & |\q d|, also implemented for l, t and L. \\ -% |^c| & |\v c|, also implemented for C, D, N, n, T, Z and z. \\ -% |^o| & |\^o|, also implemented for O. \\ -% |'a| & |\'a|, also implemented for the other lowercase and -% uppercase l, r, y and vowels. \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{slovak.ldf}}\label{tab:slovak-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:slovak-quote} can also be typeset by -% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:smore-quote}. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\ -% |\glq| & for German left single quotes (looks like ,). \\ -% |\grq| & for German right single quotes (looks like `). \\ -% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% |\flq| & for (French) left single quotes (similar to $<$). \\ -% |\frq| & for (French) right single quotes (similar to $>$). \\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\ -% |\sq| & the original single quote (|'|). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined -% by \file{slovak.ldf}}\label{tab:smore-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \subsection{Compatibility} -% -% Great care has been taken to ensure backward compatibility with -% \CS\LaTeX. In particular, documents which load this file with -% |\usepackage{slovak}| should produce identical output with no -% modifications to the source. Additionally, all the \CS\LaTeX{} -% options are recognized: -% -% \label{tab:slovak-options} -% \begin{list}{} -% {\def\makelabel#1{\sbox0{\Lopt{#1}}% -% \ifdim\wd0>\labelwidth -% \setbox0\vbox{\box0\hbox{}} \wd0=0pt \fi -% \box0\hfil} -% \setlength{\labelwidth}{2\parindent} -% \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\parindent} -% \setlength{\rightmargin}{\parindent}} -% \item[IL2, T1, OT1] -% These options set the default font encoding. Please note -% that their use is deprecated. You should use the |fontenc| -% package to select font encoding. -% -% \item[split, nosplit] -% These options control whether hyphenated words are -% automatically split according to Slovak typesetting rules. -% With the \Lopt{split} option ``je-li'' is hyphenated as -% ``je-/-li''. The \Lopt{nosplit} option disables this behavior. -% -% The use of this option is strongly discouraged, as it breaks -% too many common things---hyphens cannot be used in labels, -% negative arguments to \TeX{} primitives will not work in -% horizontal mode (use \cs{minus} as a workaround), and there are -% a few other peculiarities with using this mode. -% -% \item[nocaptions] -% -% This option was used in \CS\LaTeX{} to set up Czech/Slovak -% typesetting rules, but leave the original captions and dates. -% The recommended way to achieve this is to use English as the main -% language of the document and use the environment |otherlanguage*| -% for Czech text. -% -% \item[olduv] -% There are two version of \cs{uv}. The older one allows the use -% of \cs{verb} inside the quotes but breaks any respective kerning -% with the quotes (like that in \CS{} fonts). The newer one honors -% the kerning in the font but does not allow \cs{verb} inside the -% quotes. -% -% The new version is used by default in \LaTeXe{} and the old version -% is used with plain \TeX. You may use \Lopt{olduv} to override the -% default in \LaTeXe. -% -% \item[cstex] -% This option was used to include the commands \cs{csprimeson} and -% \cs{csprimesoff}. Since these commands are always included now, -% it has been removed and the empty definition lasts for compatibility. -% \end{list} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% \subsection{Implementation} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{slovak} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@slovak| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{slovak-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@slovak\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Slovak} - \adddialect\l@slovak0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need to define these macros early in the process. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@iltw@{IL2} -\newif\ifcs@splithyphens -\cs@splithyphensfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If Babel is not loaded, we provide compatibility with \CS\LaTeX. -% However, if macro \cs{@ifpackageloaded} is not defined, we assume -% to be loaded from plain and provide compatibility with csplain. -% Of course, this does not work well with \LaTeX$\:$2.09, but I -% doubt anyone will ever want to use this file with \LaTeX$\:$2.09. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined - \let\cs@compat@plain\relax - \message{csplain compatibility mode} -\else - \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{% - \let\cs@compat@latex\relax - \message{cslatex compatibility mode}} -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \ProvidesPackage{slovak}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Slovak style] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Declare \CS\LaTeX{} options (see also the descriptions on page -% \pageref{tab:slovak-options}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}} - \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}} - \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}} - \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse} - \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue} - \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax} - \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax} - \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Make |IL2| encoding the default. This can be overriden with -% the other font encoding options. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, process the user-supplied options. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Standard \LaTeXe{} does not include the IL2 encoding in the format. -% The encoding can be loaded later using the fontenc package, but -% \CS\LaTeX{} included IL2 by default. This means existing documents -% for \CS\LaTeX{} do not load that package, so load the encoding -% ourselves in compatibility mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \input il2enc.def - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Restore the definition of \cs{CurrentOption}, clobbered by processing -% the options. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\CurrentOption{slovak} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Slovak language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsslovak} -% The macro \cs{captionsslovak} defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{slovak-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{slovak-1.2k}{1999/02/28}{Repaired a few spelling mistakes} -% \changes{slovak-1.2l}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/12/22}{Updated some translations. Former -% translations were: `\'Uvod' for \cs{prefacename}, `Referencie' for -% \cs{refname}, `Index' for \cs{indexname}, `Obr\'azok' for -% \cs{figurename}, `Pr\'ilohy' for \cs{enclname}, `CC' for \cs{ccname}, -% `Komu' for \cs{headtoname}, `Strana' for \cs{pagename}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Predhovor}% - \def\refname{Literat\'ura}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literat\'ura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitola}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatok}% - \def\contentsname{Obsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% - \def\listtablename{Zoznam tabuliek}% - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Obr.}% - \def\tablename{Tabu\v{l}ka}% - \def\partname{\v{C}as\v{t}}% - \def\enclname{Pr\'{\i}loha}% - \def\ccname{cc.}% - \def\headtoname{Pre}% - \def\pagename{Str.}% - \def\seename{vi\v{d}}% - \def\alsoname{vi\v{d} tie\v{z}}% - \def\proofname{D\^okaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateslovak} -% The macro \cs{dateslovak} redefines the command \cs{today} -% to produce Slovak dates. -% \changes{slovak-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{slovak-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}} -% \changes{slovak-1.2k}{1999/02/28}{Repaired a spelling mistake} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ara\or febru\'ara\or marca\or apr\'{\i}la\or m\'aja\or - j\'una\or j\'ula\or augusta\or septembra\or okt\'obra\or - novembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasslovak} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasslovak} -% The macro \cs{extrasslovak} will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Slovak language. The macro \cs{noextrasslovak} is -% used to cancel the actions of \cs{extrasslovak}. -% -% For Slovak texts \cs{frenchspacing} should be in effect. Language -% group for shorthands is also set here. -% \changes{slovak-3.0}{1995/04/21}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} and -% \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}} -% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{move \cs{languageshorthands} here, -% so that the language group is always initialized correctly} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing - \languageshorthands{slovak}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{slovak-1.2e}{1995/05/28}{Use \LaTeX's \cs{v} accent -% command} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\q\let\q\v} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Slovak three characters are used to define shorthands, they -% need to be made active. -% \changes{slovak-1.3a}{2004/02/20}{Make three characters available -% for shorthands} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else - \initiate@active@char{^} - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{^}} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{^}} - \initiate@active@char{"} - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{"}\umlautlow} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{"}\umlauthigh} - \initiate@active@char{'} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{'}} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{'}}% - }{} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sq} -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original single and double quote characters in -% \cs{sq} and \cs{dq} to make them available later. The math -% accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\sq{'} - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{slovak-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added setting of left- and -% righthyphenmin} -% -% The slovak hyphenation patterns should be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~3. -% \changes{slovak-1.2e}{1995/05/28}{Now use \cs{slovakhyphenmins}} -% \changes{slovak-1.2l}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/12/22}{Changed default \cs{righthyphenmin} -% to 3 characters.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a -% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else - \declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts, -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tremas, -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}\allowhyphens}{\ddot e}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}\allowhyphens}{\ddot E}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}\allowhyphens}% - {\ddot\imath}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}\allowhyphens}{\ddot I}} -% \end{macrocode} -% other slovak characters -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^c}{\textormath{\v{c}\allowhyphens}{\check{c}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^d}{\textormath{\q{d}\allowhyphens}{\check{d}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^l}{\textormath{\q{l}\allowhyphens}{\check{l}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^n}{\textormath{\v{n}\allowhyphens}{\check{n}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^o}{\textormath{\^{o}\allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check{s}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^t}{\textormath{\q{t}\allowhyphens}{\check{t}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check{z}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^C}{\textormath{\v{C}\allowhyphens}{\check{C}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^D}{\textormath{\v{D}\allowhyphens}{\check{D}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^L}{\textormath{\q{L}\allowhyphens}{\check{L}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^N}{\textormath{\v{N}\allowhyphens}{\check{N}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^O}{\textormath{\^{O}\allowhyphens}{\hat{O}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check{S}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^T}{\textormath{\v{T}\allowhyphens}{\check{T}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check{Z}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% acute accents, -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'a}{\textormath{\'a\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}a}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'e}{\textormath{\'e\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}e}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'i}{\textormath{\'\i{}\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}i}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'l}{\textormath{\'l\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'o}{\textormath{\'o\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}o}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'r}{\textormath{\'r\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}r}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'u}{\textormath{\'u\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}u}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'y}{\textormath{\'y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}y}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'A}{\textormath{\'A\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}A}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'E}{\textormath{\'E\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}E}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'I}{\textormath{\'I\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}I}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'L}{\textormath{\'L\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'O}{\textormath{\'O\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}O}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'R}{\textormath{\'R\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}R}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'U}{\textormath{\'U\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}U}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'Y}{\textormath{\'Y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}Y}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} - }{} - % \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\v} -% \LaTeX's normal |\v| accent places a caron over the letter that -% follows it (\v{o}). This is not what we want for the letters d, -% t, l and L; for those the accent should change shape. This is -% acheived by the following. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{% - t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{% - d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lcaron} -% \begin{macro}{\Lcaron} -% For the letters \texttt{l} and \texttt{L} we want to disinguish -% between normal fonts and monospaced fonts. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em% - \else - l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}% - \fi} -\def\Lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}% - \else - L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Initialize active quotes. \CS\LaTeX{} provides a way of -% converting English-style quotes into Slovak-style ones. Both -% single and double quotes are affected, i.e. |``text''| is -% converted to something like |,,text``| and |`text'| is converted -% to |,text`|. This conversion can be switched on and off with -% \cs{csprimeson} and \cs{csprimesoff}.\footnote{By the way, the -% names of these macros are misleading, because the handling of -% primes in math mode is rather marginal, the most important thing -% being the handling of quotes\ldots} -% -% These quotes present various troubles, e.g. the kerning is broken, -% apostrophes are converted to closing single quote, some primitives -% are broken (most notably the |\catcode`\|\meta{char} syntax will -% not work any more), and writing them to \file{.aux} files cannot -% be handled correctly. For these reasons, these commands are only -% available in \CS\LaTeX{} compatibility mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s - \def\csprimeson{% - \catcode``\active \catcode`'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s} - \def\csprimesoff{% - \catcode``12 \catcode`'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s} - \begingroup\catcode``\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote} - \def\cs@openquote{% - \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq - \else \expandafter\clq - \fi}% - }\x - \begingroup\catcode`'\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote} - {^\bgroup\prim@s}} - \def\cs@closequote{% - \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq - \else \expandafter\crq - \fi}% - }\x - \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= } - \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The way I recommend for typesetting quotes in Slovak documents -% is to use shorthands similar to those used in German. -% -% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/21}{|"`| and |"'| changed from German quotes -% to Slovak quotes} -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"`}{\clqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"'}{\crqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"<}{\flqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{">}{\frqq} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clqq} -% This is the CS opening quote, which is similar to the German -% quote (\cs{glqq}) but the kerning is different. -% -% For the OT1 encoding, the quote is constructed from the right -% double quote (i.e. the ``Opening quotes'' character) by moving -% it down to the baseline and shifting it to the right, or to the -% left if italic correction is positive. -% -% For T1, the ``German Opening quotes'' is used. It is moved to -% the right and the total width is enlarged. This is done in an -% attempt to minimize the difference between the OT1 and T1 -% versions. -% -% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/20}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to allow an opening -% quote at the beginning of a paragraph} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{% - \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}% - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne - \leavevmode - \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em - \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1} - {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\crqq} -% For OT1, the CS closing quote is basically the same as -% \cs{grqq}, only the \cs{textormath} macro is not used, because -% as far as I know, \cs{grqq} does not work in math mode anyway. -% -% For T1, the character is slightly wider and shifted to the -% right to match its OT1 counterpart. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clq} -% \begin{macro}{\crq} -% -% Single CS quotes are similar to double quotes (see the -% discussion above). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1} - {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1} - {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\uv} -% There are two versions of \cs{uv}. The older one opens a group -% and uses \cs{aftergroup} to typeset the closing quotes. This -% version allows using \cs{verb} inside the quotes, because the -% enclosed text is not passed as an argument, but unfortunately -% it breaks any kerning with the quotes. Although the kerning -% with the opening quote could be fixed, the kerning with the -% closing quote cannot. -% -% The newer version is defined as a command with one parameter. -% It preserves kerning but since the quoted text is passed as an -% argument, it cannot contain \cs{verb}. -% -% Decide which version of \cs{uv} should be used. For sake -% of compatibility, we use the older version with plain \TeX{} -% and the newer version with \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi -\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes - \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=} - \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@wordlen} -% Declare a counter to hold the length of the word after the -% hyphen. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\cs@wordlen -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@endash} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@emdash} -% Store the original hyphen in a macro. Ditto for the ligatures. -% -% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{ensure correct catcode for the -% saved hyphen} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\-12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@hyphen{-} - \def\cs@endash{--} - \def\cs@emdash{---} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@boxhyphen} -% Provide a non-breakable hyphen to be used when a compound word -% is too short to be split, i.e. the second part is shorter than -% \cs{righthyphenmin}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@splithyphen} -% The macro \cs{cs@splithyphen} inserts a split hyphen, while -% allowing both parts of the compound word to be hyphenated at -% other places too. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@ - \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@} -}\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{-} -% To minimize the effects of activating the hyphen character, -% the active definition expands to the non-active character -% in all cases where hyphenation cannot occur, i.e. if not -% typesetting (check \cs{protect}), not in horizontal mode, -% or in inner horizontal mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{-} -\declare@shorthand{slovak}{-}{% - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \ifhmode - \ifinner - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyph@n} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyphen} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyph@n} -% If we encounter a hyphen, check whether it is followed -% by a second or a third hyphen and if so, insert the -% corresponding ligature. -% -% If we don't find a hyphen, the token found will be placed -% in \cs{cs@token} for further analysis, and it will also stay -% in the input. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup\catcode`\-\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n} - \def\cs@firsthyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen - \fi} - \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{% - \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n} - \def\cs@secondhyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash - \fi} -}\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkhyphen} -% Check that hyphenation is enabled, and if so, start analyzing -% the rest of the word, i.e. initialize \cs{cs@word} and \cs{cs@wordlen} -% and start processing input with \cs{cs@scanword}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@checkhyphen{% - \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\- - \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@ - \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword - \else - \cs@hyphen - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@scanword} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@continuescan} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@gettoken} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@gett@ken} -% Each token is first analyzed with \cs{cs@scanword}, which expands -% the token and passes the first token of the result to -% \cs{cs@gett@ken}. If the expanded token is not identical to the -% unexpanded one, presume that it might be expanded further and -% pass it back to \cs{cs@scanword} until you get an unexpandable -% token. Then analyze it in \cs{cs@examinetoken}. -% -% The \cs{cs@continuescan} macro does the same thing as -% \cs{cs@scanword}, but it does not require the first token to be -% in \cs{cs@token} already. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken} -\def\cs@gett@ken{% - \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}% - \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}% - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@examinetoken} -% Examine the token in \cs{cs@token}: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% If it is a letter (catcode 11) or other (catcode 12), add it -% to \cs{cs@word} with \cs{cs@addparam}. -% -% \item -% If it is the \cs{char} primitive, add it with \cs{cs@expandchar}. -% -% \item -% If the token starts or ends a group, ignore it with -% \cs{cs@ignoretoken}. -% -% \item -% Otherwise analyze the meaning of the token with -% \cs{cs@checkchardef} to detect primitives defined with -% \cs{chardef}. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@examinetoken{% - \ifcat A\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifcat 0\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifx\char\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }% - \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}% - \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}% - \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}% - \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}% - \else - \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkchardef} -% Check the meaning of a token and if it is a primitive defined -% with \cs{chardef}, pass it to \cs{\cs@examinechar} as if it were -% a \cs{char} sequence. Otherwise, there are no more word characters, -% so do the final actions in \cs{cs@nosplit}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{% - \def\cs@token{#1}% - \ifx\cs@token\@empty - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }% - \else - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@ignoretoken} -% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} but do not update the \cs{cs@wordlen} -% counter. This is mainly useful for group starting and ending -% primitives, which need to be preserved, but do not affect the word -% boundary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@addparam} -% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. Note that -% this macro can only be used for tokens which can be passed as -% a parameter. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@addparam#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@expandchar} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@examinechar} -% Add a \cs{char} sequence to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. -% The charcode is first parsed in \cs{cs@expandchar} and then the -% resulting \cs{chardef}-defined sequence is analyzed in -% \cs{cs@examinechar}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=} -\def\cs@examinechar{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkcode} -% Check the lccode of a character. If it is zero, it does not count -% to the current word, so finish it with \cs{cs@nosplit}. Otherwise -% update the \cs{cs@wordlen} counter and go on scanning the word -% with \cs{cs@continuescan}. When enough characters are gathered in -% \cs{cs@word} to allow word break, insert the split hyphen and -% finish. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@checkcode#1{% - \ifnum0=#1 - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \else - \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne - \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen - \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}% - \else - \cs@splithyphen - \def\cs@next{\cs@word}% - \fi - \fi \cs@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@nosplit} -% Insert a non-breakable hyphen followed by the saved word. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen} -% The \cs{minus} sequence can be used where the active hyphen -% does not work, e.g. in arguments to \TeX{} primitives in outer -% horizontal mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\minus\cs@hyphen -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{\standardhyphens} -% \begin{macro}{\splithyphens} -% These macros control whether split hyphens are allowed in Czech -% and/or Slovak texts. You may use them in any language, but the -% split hyphen is only activated for Czech and Slovak. -% -% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{activate with split hyphens and -% deactivate with standard hyphens, not vice versa} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens} -\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@splitattr} -% Now we declare the |split| language attribute. This is -% similar to the |split| package option of cslatex, but it -% only affects Slovak, not Czech. -% -% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{attribute added} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{slovak}{split}{% - \addto\extrasslovak{\cs@splitattr}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@activatehyphens} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@deactivatehyphens} -% These macros are defined as \cs{relax} by default to prevent -% activating/deactivating the hyphen character. They are redefined -% when the language is switched to Czech/Slovak. At that moment -% the hyphen is also activated if split hyphens were requested with -% \cs{splithyphens}. -% -% When the language is de-activated, de-activate the hyphen and -% restore the bogus definitions of these macros. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax -\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}% - \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}% - \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \cs@deactivatehyphens - \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax - \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@looseness} -% \begin{macro}{\looseness} -% One of the most common situations where an active hyphen will not -% work properly is the \cs{looseness} primitive. Change its definition -% so that it deactivates the hyphen if needed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\cs@looseness\looseness -\def\looseness{% - \ifcs@splithyphens - \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi - \cs@looseness} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@selectlanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\cs@main@language} -% Specifying the |nocaptions| option means that captions and dates -% are not redefined by default, but they can be switched on later -% with \cs{captionsslovak} and/or \cs{dateslovak}. -% -% We mimic this behavior by redefining \cs{selectlanguage}. This -% macro is called once at the beginning of the document to set the -% main language of the document. If this is \cs{cs@main@language}, -% it disables the macros for setting captions and date. In any -% case, it restores the original definition of \cs{selectlanguage} -% and expands it. -% -% The definition of \cs{selectlanguage} can be shared between Czech -% and Slovak; the actual language is stored in \cs{cs@main@language}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else - \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption} - \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined - \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage - \def\selectlanguage{% - \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect - \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language - \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage - \else - \expandafter\selectlanguage - \fi} - \def\cs@selectlanguage{% - \cs@tempdisable{captions}% - \cs@tempdisable{date}% - \selectlanguage} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cs@tempdisable} -% \cs{cs@tempdisable} disables a language setup macro temporarily, -% i.e. the macro with the name of \meta{\#1}|\bbl@main@language| -% just restores the original definition and purges the saved macro -% from memory. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\cs@tempdisable#1{% - \def\@tempa{cs@#1}% - \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}% - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname - \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{% - \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname - \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname - \noexpand\@undefined}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% These macros are not needed, once the initialization is over. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language - \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect - \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage - \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The encoding of mathematical fonts should be changed to IL2. This -% allows to use accented letter in some font families. Besides, -% documents do not use CM fonts if there are equivalents in CS-fonts, -% so there is no need to have both bitmaps of CM-font and CS-font. -% -% \cs{@font@warning} and \cs{@font@info} are temporarily redefined -% to avoid annoying font warnings. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined -\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else - \def\cs@check@enc{ - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble - \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined - \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined - \fi - \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined} - \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc} -\fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{cs@undoiltw@} -% -% The thing is that \LaTeXe{} core only supports the T1 encoding -% and does not bother changing the uc/lc/sfcodes when encoding -% is switched. :( However, the IL2 encoding \emph{does} change -% these codes, so if encoding is switched back from IL2, we must -% also undo the effect of this change to be compatible with -% \LaTeXe. OK, this is not the right\textsuperscript{TM} solution -% but it works. Cheers to Petr Ol\v s\'ak. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cs@undoiltw@{% - \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000 - \sfcode159=1000 - \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000 - \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000 - \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000 - \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000 - \uccode181=149 - \uccode185=153 - \uccode187=155 - \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0 - \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000 - \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{@@enc@update} -% -% Redefine the \LaTeXe{} internal function \cs{@@enc@update} to -% change the encodings correctly. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined -\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else - \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update - \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi - \cs@enc@update - \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language - \expandafter\ifx - \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename - \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi - \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax - \fi} -\fi\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins deleted file mode 100644 index c8c7d88326d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{slovak.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{slovak.ldf}{\from{slovak.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 391f39e7f9d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,302 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{142} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{slovene.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{slovene} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{slovene.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.2m Slovene support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `slovene.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Slovenian language definition file. The Slovenian -% words were contributed by Danilo Zavrtanik, University of -% Ljubljana (Slovenia, former Yugoslavia). -% The usage of the active " was introduced by -% Leon \v{Z}lajpah -% Jo\v{z}ef Stefan Institute, -% Jamova 39, Ljubljana, -% Slovenia -% e-mail: leon.zlajpah at ijs.si -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{{textsf \1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{slovene.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{slovene.dtx} -% -% \changes{slovene-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com} -% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{slovene-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{slovene-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1995/11/03}{Replaced `Slovanian' with correct -% `Slovenian'} -% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% -% \section{The Slovenian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. Contributions were made by Danilo Zavrtanik, -% University of Ljubljana (YU) and Leon \v{Z}lajpah -% (\texttt{leon.zlajpah@ijs.si}).} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Slovenian language. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:slovene-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the Slovene -% language some special characters are used. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the -% lowercase and uppercase s and z. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\ -% |"`| & for Slovene left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\ -% |"'| & for Slovene right double quotes. \\ -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{slovene.ldf}}\label{tab:slovene-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{slovene}\captionsslovene -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{slovene} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@slovene| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{slovene-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no -% hyphenation patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{slovene-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@slovene\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Slovene} - \adddialect\l@slovene0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the -% Slovenian language. The reason for this is that a user might want -% to switch back and forth between languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsslovene} -% The macro |\captionsslovene| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{slovene-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added extra translations from -% Josef Leydold, \texttt{leydold@statrix2.wu-wien.ac.at}} -% \changes{slovene-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{slovene-1.2h}{1995/07/25}{Added translation of `Proof'} -% \changes{slovene-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsslovene{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Povzetek}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Poglavje}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatek}% - \def\contentsname{Kazalo}% - \def\listfigurename{Slike}% - \def\listtablename{Tabele}% - \def\indexname{Stvarno kazalo}% used to be Indeks - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Priloge}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prejme}% - \def\pagename{Stran}% - \def\seename{glej}% - \def\alsoname{glej tudi}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateslovene} -% The macro |\dateslovene| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Slovenian dates. -% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateslovene{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or marec\or april\or maj\or junij\or - julij\or avgust\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasslovene} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasslovene} -% The macro |\extrasslovene| performs all the extra definitions -% needed for the Slovenian language. The macro |\noextrasslovene| -% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasslovene|. -% -% For Slovene the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the -% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for -% shorthands; we specify that the slovenian group of shorthands -% should be used. -% -% \changes{slovene-1.2f}{1995/06/04}{Introduced the active \texttt{"}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasslovene{\languageshorthands{slovene}} -\addto\extrasslovene{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{slovene-1.2l}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Slovene} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasslovene{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters -% such as \v{c}. -% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/09/21}{removed shorthand for \texttt{"L} -% as it is not needed for slovenian} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar -% to the german and french quotation marks. -% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% double quote and guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation -% breakpoints that behavew a little different from |\-|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature. -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{slovene} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 86760a5e13f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{slovene.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{slovene.ldf}{\from{slovene.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 5fb2d701233..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{sorbian.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{lsorbian.ldf}{\from{lsorbian.dtx}{code}} - \file{usorbian.ldf}{\from{usorbian.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a1661503d1e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2758 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \ProvidesFile{spanish.dtx} -% [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `spanish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Spanish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011 -%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com) -%% and -%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es) -% -%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably) -%% www.tex-tipografia.com -%% J.L. Braams -%% www.latex-project.org -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Spanish language definition file. -% The original version of this file was written by Javier Bezos. -% The latest release is available on CTAN:/language/spanish/ -% \fi -% -% \iffalse -%<*filedriver> -\let\ooverb\verb -\documentclass[spanish,a4paper]{ltxdoc} -\let\verb\ooverb -\usepackage{babel} -\usepackage{hyperref} - -\let\meta\emph - -\usepackage{pslatex,mathptmx,color} -\usepackage[cp1252]{inputenc} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\newcommand\act[1]{% - \\% - \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}}% - \textsf{#1}\ignorespaces} -\newcommand\deact[1]{% - \\% - \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{red}{$\times$}}% - \texttt{#1}\ignorespaces} -\newcommand\txt{\makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{blue}{$\Rightarrow$}}\ignorespaces} -\newcommand\con{\makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{magenta}{$\star$}}\ignorespaces} -\newcommand\alw{% - \\% - \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}}% - Se define siempre, sin depender de un grupo.} -\newcommand\opp{\qquad Opción de paquete} - -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} - -\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{2\arrayrulewidth} -\newcommand\toprule[1]{\cline{1-#1}\\[-2ex]} -\newcommand\botrule[1]{\\[.6ex]\cline{1-#1}} -\newcommand\hmk{$\string|$} - -\newenvironment{decl}[1][]% - {\par\small\addvspace{4.5ex plus 1ex}% - \vskip-\parskip - \ifx\relax#1\relax - \def\@decl@date{}% - \else - \def\@decl@date{\NEWfeature{#1}}% - \fi - \noindent - \begin{tabular}{|l|}\hline\ignorespaces}% - {\\\hline\end{tabular}\nobreak\@decl@date\par\nobreak - \vspace{2.3ex}\vskip-\parskip} - -\newcommand\New[1]{% - \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\sffamily Nuevo en #1}} - -\newcommand\nm[1]{\unskip\,$^{#1}$} -\newcommand\nt[1]{\quad$^{#1}$\,\ignorespaces} - -\makeatletter - \renewcommand\@biblabel{} -\makeatother - -\newcommand\DOT[1]{\lsc{DOT},~#1} -\newcommand\DTL[1]{\lsc{DTL},~#1} -\newcommand\MEA[1]{\lsc{MEA},~#1} - -\raggedright -\setlength{\parindent}{0em} -\setlength{\parskip}{3pt} - -\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-4pc} -\addtolength{\textwidth}{7pc} - -\OnlyDescription -\begin{document} - \DocInput{spanish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% -% \begingroup -% \ifx\langdeffile\undefined -% -%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by spanish.dtx ========= -% -% -% \title{Estilo \textsf{spanish}\\ -% para el sistema \babel.\footnote{Este -% archivo está actualmente en la versión -% 5.0k con fecha 6 de octubre del 2011. ^^A@# -% Esta copia del manual se compuso el~\today.}} -% -% \author{Javier Bezos\footnote{Por favor, envíen comentarios y -% sugerencias en http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html. Han -% colaborado de una u otra forma muchas personas, a las cuales -% agradezco sus comentarios y sugerencias; en particular, han sido muy -% activos Juan Luis Varona y José Luis Rivera. Para más información -% sobre los criterios seguidos, véase la referencia: Javier Bezos, -% \textit{Tipografía española con \TeX.} Para información sobre -% actualizaciones: http://www.cervantex.es/}} -% -% \date{6 de octubre del 2011} ^^A@# -% -% \maketitle -% -% {\small\tableofcontents} -% -% \section*{Símbolos empleados} -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[\textcolor{blue}{$\Rightarrow$}] Macros para -% ser usadas en el texto (generan texto o lo estructuran). -% \item[\textcolor{magenta}{$\star$}] Macros de -% configuración y preferencias. -% \item[\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}] Grupo que -% activa la orden. -% \item[\textcolor{red}{$\times$}] Opciones de -% paquete que anulan la orden. En redonda van las destinadas -% específicamente a anular ese punto, y en cursiva las que además -% anulan otros aspectos del estilo. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \section{Uso de \textsf{spanish} para babel} -% -% El estilo \textsf{spanish} para babel adapta una serie de elementos -% de los documentos de \LaTeX\ al castellano, tanto en las -% traducciones como en la tipografía. Para usarlo, basta con dar -% la opción \textsf{spanish} al cargar babel: \begin{verbatim} -% \usepackage[spanish]{babel} \end{verbatim} -% -% Esto es todo lo que hace falta para conseguir que el documento tenga -% un aspecto español. En caso de estar en México, véase, además, el -% apartado \ref{paises} (<<Opciones por países>>):\footnote{En próximas -% versiones se añadirán más países.} -%\begin{verbatim} -%\usepackage[spanish,mexico]{babel} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% El estilo \textsf{spanish} se puede cargar junto con otras lenguas (véase el -% manual de babel). Si \textsf{spanish} es la última de las lenguas cargadas, -% entonces se considera la lengua principal y se hacen una serie de -% ajustes tipográficos adicionales. En particular, se modifican -% órdenes y entornos como: -%\begin{center} -%\begin{tabular}{lll} -% |enumerate| & |\roman| & |\section|\\ -% |itemize| & |\fnsymbol| & |\subsection|\\ -% |\%| & |\alph| & |\subsubsection|\\ -% & |\Alph| & \\ -%\end{tabular} -%\end{center} -% -% El estilo está pensado para que sea muy configurable. Para ello, se -% proporcionan una serie de opciones de paquete, que en caso de -% emplearse deben ir \textit{después} de \textsf{spanish}. Por -% ejemplo: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \usepackage[french,spanish,es-noindentfirst]{babel} \end{verbatim} -% carga los estilos para el francés y el español, esta última como -% lengua principal; además, evita que \textsf{spanish} sangre el -% primer párrafo tras un título. Otras opciones se pueden ajustar por -% medio de macros, en particular aquellas que se puede desear cambiar -% en medio del documento (por ejemplo, el formato de la fecha). -% -% Los cambios están organizados en una serie de grupos: -% \textsf{captions, date, text, math} y \textsf{shorthands}. -% Los tres ultimos corresponden a lo que en babel sería normalmente -% \textsf{extras}. -% -% \section{\textsf{spanish} como lengua principal} -% -% Si la lengua principal es \textsf{spanish}, se introducen una serie de -% cambios en el momento de cargar la lengua para adaptar varios -% elementos a los usos tipográficos españoles. Estos cambios -% funcionan con las clases estándar "+--con otras tal vez alguno de -% ellos no tenga efecto--- y persisten durante todo el documento. -% Ninguno de ellos es necesario para componer el documento, aunque -% naturalmente el resultado será distinto. -% -% \subsection{Listas} -% -% \begin{decl} \txt |\begin{enumerate} ... \end{enumerate}|% -% \deact{es-nolists, es-noenumerate, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal, -% es-sloppy}} \end{decl} -% -% Usa la siguiente secuencia:\\ -% \quad 1.\\ -% \qquad \emph{a})\\ -% \quad\qquad 1)\\ -% \qquad\qquad \emph{a$'$}) -% -% \begin{decl} \txt |\begin{itemize} ... \end{itemize}|% -% \deact{es-nolists, es-noitemize, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal, -% es-sloppy}} \end{decl} -% -% Usa la siguiente secuencia:\\ -% \quad\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex -% {\hss\vrule height .95ex width .8ex depth -.15ex\hss}\\ -% \qquad\textbullet\\ -% \quad\qquad $\circ$\\ -% \qquad\qquad $\diamond$ -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishdashitems \spanishsignitems| -% \end{decl} -% -% Dos órdenes para cambiar a otros estilos en -% |itemize|: rayas en todos los niveles y \textbullet{} $\circ$ -% $\diamond$ $\triangleright$, respectivamente. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-nolists|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Desactiva los cambios en las listas (aunque |\es@enumerate| y -% |\es@itemize| siguen disponibles). -% -% \subsection{Contadores} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\alph \Alph|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Incluyen la eñe. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\fnsymbol|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Se emplean uno, dos, tres... asteriscos (*, **, ***, etc.), -% en lugar de la sucesión angloamericana de cruces, barras, -% etc.\footnote{\DOT{162}.} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\roman|\deact{es-ucroman, es-lcroman, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Como en castellano no se usan números romanos en minúscula, -% |\roman| se redefine para que los dé en -% versalitas.\footnote{\DTL{197}.} La opción de paquete -% |es-minimal| los desactiva con |es-ucroman|, y |es-sloppy| -% con |es-lcroman|. - -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-ucroman|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Opción de paquete adicional, que pasa todos los romanos a versales, -% en caso de que no se quiera la versalita o por incompatibilidad con -% algún paquete que use de forma indebida |\roman|.\footnote{En -% el momento de escribir esto, como mínimo son: \textsf{dramatist, -% epiolmec, flashcards, lipsum, ntheorem, ntheorem-hyper, -% texmate.} Otros paquetes como \textsf{hyperref, easy} y \textsf{exam} -% ya han sido corregidos.} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-lcroman|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Como último recurso, de haber problemas con el valor predeterminado -% o con |es-ucroman|, con esta opción de paquete puede dejarse la -% definición de \LaTeX, aunque en español los romanos en minúscula -% sean una falta ortográfica. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-preindex|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% \textit{MakeIndex} no puede entender la forma en que |\roman| -% escribe el número de página, por lo que elimina las líneas -% afectadas. Por ello el archivo |.idx| ha de ser convertido antes de -% procesarlo con \textit{MakeIndex}. Con este paquete se proporciona -% la utilidad |romanidx.sty| que se encarga de ello. Simplemente se -% compone ese archivo con \LaTeX{} y a continuación se responde a las -% preguntas que se formulan; el archivo resultante, es decir, el que -% hay que procesar con \textit{MakeIndex,} tiene la extensión -% \texttt{eix}. Este proceso no es necesario si no se introdujo -% ninguna entrada de índice en páginas numeradas con |\roman| (lo -% cual será lo más normal). Si un símbolo propio de -% \emph{MakeIndex} generara problemas, debe encerrarse entre llaves: -% \verb={"|}=. -% -% Con la opción de paquete |es-preindex| se llama desde el -% documento |romanidx.sty|, de forma que no es necesaria su ejecución -% aparte. Tampoco pide ningún dato, sino que ha de darse en el -% documento principal con la siguiente orden. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishindexchars|\marg{encap}\marg{open\_range}\marg{close\_range} -% \end{decl} -% -% De usarse |es-preindex| con un estilo de índice que no tiene los -% valores predeterminados de estos tres caracteres especiales, hay que -% darlos con esta orden (es decir, por omisión es -% \verb+\spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}+). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishscroman \spanishlcroman \spanishucroman| -% \end{decl} -% -% Finalmente, tres macros permiten cambios temporales en el -% documento de |\roman| a versalitas, minúsculas y mayúsculas, -% respectivamente. -% -% \subsection{Otros} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\guillemotleft \guillemotright|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Las comillas latinas para |OT1| son menos angulosas y se generan -% con unas puntas de flecha de |lasy|. En T1 no hay cambios. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\section|, |\subsection|, etc., -% |\tableofcontents|\deact{es-nosectiondot, es-noindentfirst, \textit{es-nolayout, -% es-mininal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Los números en los títulos están seguidos de un punto -% tanto en el texto como en el índice. Además, -% el primer párrafo tras el título no elimina la sangría. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-nolayout|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Si no se desea ninguno de estos cambios, basta con usar esta opción -% de paquete. -% -% \section{Traducciones} -% -% \subsection{Nombres} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\refname|, |\tablename|, |\contentsname|, etc.\\ -% \con |\spanishrefname|, |\spanishtablename|, |\spanishcontentsname|, etc. -% \act{captions} -% \end{decl} -% -% Establecen las traducciones al castellano de algunos términos, -% tal y como se describe en el cuadro 1. Para cambiar el texto -% de ellas, conviene redefinir la forma que empieza con -% |\spanish...|, ya que, al contrario que las órdenes -% |\refname|, |\abstractname|, etc., se pueden redefinir cuando -% se desee y entran en acción al momento y de forma permanente, sin -% necesidad de |\addto|. -% -% \begin{table} -% \center\small -% \newcommand\name[2]{% -% \texttt{\textbackslash#1name}&% -% \texttt{\textbackslash spanish#1name}&} -% \caption{Traducciones} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l@{\hspace{3em}}l} -% \toprule3 -% \name{ref} & Referencias\\ -% \name{abstract} & Resumen\\ -% \name{bib} & Bibliografía\\ -% \name{chapter} & Capítulo\\ -% \name{appendix} & Apéndice\\ -% \name{contents} & índice general\nm{a}\\ -% \name{listfigure} & índice de figuras\\ -% \name{listtable} & índice de cuadros\\ -% \name{index} & índice alfabético\\ -% \name{figure} & Figura\\ -% \name{table} & Cuadro\\ -% \name{part} & Parte\\ -% \name{encl} & Adjunto\\ -% \name{cc} & Copia a\\ -% \name{headto} & A\\ -% \name{page} & página\\ -% \name{see} & véase\\ -% \name{also} & véase también\\ -% \name{proof} & Demostración -% \botrule3 -% \end{tabular} -% -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% -% \begin{minipage}{10cm}\footnotesize -% \nt{a} Pero sólo <<índice>> en \textsf{article}. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-uppernames|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Aunque sea un anglicismo,\footnote{\DOT{197}.} con esta opción de -% paquete los sustantivos tienen mayúscula inicial. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-tabla|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% En caso de que todos los cuadros sean tablas, esta opción permite -% cambiar \textit{cuadro} por \textit{tabla} (en cierto modo, -% \textit{cuadro} es a \textit{tabla} lo que \texttt{table} es a -% \texttt{tabular}). -% -% \subsection{Fechas} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\today \Today| -% \act{date} -% \end{decl} -% -% Fecha actual, en la forma \textit{1 de enero de -% 2004.} Con |\Today| el mes va en mayúscula. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishdatedel \spanishdatede| -% \end{decl} -% -% Con la primera se cambia el formato para que a partir del 2000 se -% emplee \textit{del} y no \textit{de} (recomendado). La segunda -% hace justo lo contrario (predeterminado). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishreverseddate| -% \end{decl} -% -% Cambia el formato de |\today| a la forma -% \textit{enero 1 del 2004.} Con |\Today| el mes va en -% mayúscula. -% -% \section{Abreviaciones (\textit{shorthands})} -% -% La lista completa se puede encontrar en el cuadro 2. En los -% siguientes apartados se darán más detalles sobre algunas de -% ellas. -% -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \center\small -% \caption{Abreviaciones} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l@{\hspace{3em}}l} -% \toprule2 -% |á é í ó ú| & á é í ó ú\\ -% |á é í ó ú| & á é í ó ú\\ -% |ñ ñ| & ñ ñ\nm{a}\\ -% |"u "U| & "u "U\\ -% |"i "I| & "i "I\\ -% |"a "A "o "O| & Ordinales: 1"a, 1"A, 1"o, 1"O\\ -% |"er "ER| & Ordinales: 1"er, 1"ER\\ -% |"c "C| & "c "C\\ -% |"rr "RR| & rr, pero -r cuando se divide\\ -% |"y| & El antiguo signo para <<y>>\\ -% |"-| & Como |\-|, pero permite más divisiones\\ -% |"=| & Como |-|, pero permite mas divisiones\nm{b}\\ -% |"~| & Guión estilístico\nm{c}\\ -% |"+ "+- "+--| & Como |-|, |--| y |---|, pero sin división\\ -% |~- ~-- ~---| & Lo mismo que el anterior.\\ -% |""| & Permite mas divisiones antes y después\nm{d}\\ -% |"/| & Una barra algo más baja\\ -% \verb+"|+ & Divide un logotipo\nm{e}\\ -% |"< ">| & "< ">\\ -% |"` "'| & |\begin{quoting}| |\end{quoting}|\nm{f}\\ -% |<< >>| & Lo mismo que el anterior.\\ -% |?` !`| & ?` !`\nm{g}\\ -%|"? "!| & "? "! alineados con la linea base\nm{h} -% \botrule2 -% \end{tabular} -% -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% -% \begin{minipage}{11cm} -% \footnotesize -% \nt{a} La forma |~n| no está activada por omisión a partir de -% la versión 5. -% \nt{b} |"=| viene a ser lo mismo que |""-""|. -% \nt{c} Esta abreviación tiene un uso distinto -% en otras lenguas de babel. -% \nt{d} Como en <<entrada/salida>>. -% \nt{e} Carece de uso en castellano. -% \nt{f} Véase sec.~2.7. -% \nt{g} No proporcionadas por este paquete, sino por cada tipo; -% figuran aquí como simple recordatorio. -% \nt{h} útiles en rótulos en mayúsculas. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{table} -% -% Los caracteres usados como abreviaciones se comportan -% como otras órdenes de \TeX{} y por tanto se hace caso -% omiso de los espacios que le puedan seguir: \verb*|' a| es lo mismo -% que |á|. Eso también implica que tras esos caracteres no -% puede ir una llave de cierre y que deberá escribirse -% |{... '{}}| en lugar de |{... '}|; en modo matemático no hay -% ningún problema y |$x^{a'}$| ($x^{a'}$) es válido. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |activeacute|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Para poder usar apóstrofos como abreviaciones de acentos es -% necesaria esta opción en |\usepackage|. Puede cambiarse este -% comportamiento con |\es@acuteactive| en el archivo de -% configuración |spanish.cfg|; en ese caso los apóstrofos se activan -% siempre. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-tilden|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Esta orden activa las abreviaciones |~n| y |~N| por compatibilidad -% con versiones anteriores de \textsf{spanish} (y siempre que no se -% empleado también |es-notilde|). En la versión 5 no están -% activadas de forma predeterminada. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishdeactivate|\marg{caracteres} -% \end{decl} -% -% Permite desactivar las abreviaciones correspondientes a los -% caracteres dados. Para evitar entrar en conflicto con otras lenguas, -% al salir de \textsf{spanish} se reactivan,\footnote{El punto para -% los decimales no es estrictamente una abreviación y no se -% reactiva.} por lo que si se desea que -% persistan hay que añadir la orden a |\shorthandsspanish| con -%|\addto|. La orden |\renewcommand\shorthandsspanish{}| es una -% variante optimizada de -%\begin{verbatim} -% \addto\shorthandsspanish{\spanishdeactivate{.'"~<>}} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-noshorthands|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% No activa ninguna abreviación. -% -% \subsection{Coma decimal} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |.|\textit{número}\act{shorthands}\deact{es-nodecimaldot, -% \textit{es-noshorthands, es-minimal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% En \textsf{spanish}, el punto en matemáticas sirve como marca decimal -% genérica que puede representarse como coma o punto; funciona -% por tanto como marcado lógico del signo para decimales. Por -% omisión, se siguen las normas internacionales ISO y la legislación -% de diversos países (como de España y México) de emplear la coma. -% Ya que \TeX\ usa la coma como separador en intervalos o expresiones -% similares, lo que añade un espacio fino, \textsf{spanish} -% interpreta todo punto en modo matemático de esta forma siempre -% que esté seguido de una cifra, pero no en otras circunstancias: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |$1\,234.567\,890$| \quad \= $1\,234.567\,890$\\ -% |$f(1,2)=12.34.$| \> $f(1,2)=12.34.$\\ -% |$1{.}000$| \> $1{.}000$, pero\\ -% |1.000| \> 1.000, pues no es modo matemático. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\decimalcomma \decimalpoint \spanishdecimal|\marg{math} -% \end{decl} -% -% Las dos primeras establecen si se usa una coma (predeterminado) -% o un punto, mientras que |\spanishdecimal|\marg{math} -% permite darle una definición arbitraria. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-nodecimaldot|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Cancela el mecanismo del punto decimal. -% -% \subsection{División de palabras} -% -% \textsf{Spanish} comprueba la codificación en el momento en que se -% usa un acento: si es |OT1|, se toman medidas para facilitar la -% división, que pese a todo nunca será perfecta, y si es |T1|, -% se accede directamente al carácter correspondiente. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |"- "= "~|\act{shorthands} -% \deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Para matizar la división de palabras hay cuatro posibilidades, dos -% de ellas con el método de abreviaciones: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item |\-| es un guión opcional que no permite -% más divisiones, -% -% \item |"-| es similar pero permite más divisiones, -% -% \item |-| es un guión que no permite más divisiones ni -% antes ni después, y -% -% \item |"=| es el equivalente que sí las permite,\footnote{No -% es una buena idea usar esta orden, pero en -% medidas muy cortas puede resultar necesario.} -% -% \end{itemize} -% Por ejemplo (con las posibles divisiones marcadas con \hmk): -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |Zaragoza-Barcelona|\qquad \= Zaragoza-\hmk Barcelona\\ -% |Zaragoza"=Barcelona| \> -% Za\hmk ra\hmk go\hmk za-\hmk Bar\hmk ce\hmk lo\hmk na\\ -% |semi\-abierto| \> semi\hmk abierto\\ -% |semi"-abierto| \> se\hmk mi\hmk abier\hmk to.\footnotemark -% \end{tabbing}\footnotetext{Justo antes y después de -% {\ttfamily\string"\string-} y {\ttfamily\string"\string=} se -% aplican los correspondientes -% valores de {\ttfamily\string\...hyphenmin} lo que implica que la -% divisón semia\hmk bierto no es posible. -% éste es un comportamiento correcto.} -% \end{quote} -% -% Con la abreviación |"~|, el guión -% también aparece al comienzo de la siguiente línea. Por ejemplo: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |infra"~rojo| \quad \= in\hmk fra-ro\hmk jo, pero infra-\hmk-rojo. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% \begin{decl} -%\txt |"+ "+- "+--|\act{shorthands}\deact{\emph{no-shorthands, -% es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -%\vskip-1.5pc\vskip0pt -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |~- ~-- ~---|\act{shorthands}\deact{es-notilde, \emph{no-shorthands, -% es-minimal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} - -% Evitan divisiones: |~-|, que resulta útil para expresar una serie -% de números sin que el guión los divida (12~-14, |12~-14|), y -% |~---|, que es la forma que debe usarse para abrir incisos con -% rayas, ya que de lo contrario puede haber una división entre la -% raya de abrir y la palabra que le sigue: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -%|Los conciertos ~---o % academias--- que organizó...| -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% También pueden emplearse para esta misma función las abreviaciones -% |"+|, |"+-| y |"+---|. Mientras que este guión evita toda posible -% división en los elementos que une, la raya (---) y la semirraya -% (--) las permiten en las palabras que le precedan o le sigan. -% -% Otra abreviación es |"rr| que sirve para el -% único cambio de escritura del castellano en caso de haber división. -% La \lsc{RAE} indica que al añadir un prefijo que termina en vocal a -% una palabra que comienza con \emph{r}, ésta última debe -% doblarse a menos que se unan por un guión. Por ejemplo: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |extra"rradio| \quad \= ex\hmk trarra\hmk dio, pero extra-\hmk -% radio. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% No hay acuerdo sobre si esta regla y otras similares han de -% aplicarse o no, aunque la opinión mayoritaria actual está en -% contra. -% -% \subsection{Otros} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |"/|\act{shorthands}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Es una utilidad tipográfica más que específicamente española. -% En ciertos tipos, como Times, el extremo inferior de la barra está -% en la línea de base y expresiones como <<am/pm>> resultan poco -% estéticas. |"/| produce una barra que, de ser necesario, se baja -% ligeramente. Computer Modern tiene una barra bien diseñada y no es -% posible ilustrar aquí este punto, pero se escribiría -% |am"/pm|. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |"y|\act{shorthand}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% El signo \textit{et tironiano}, que en español se empleó muy a -% menudo, se puede <<imitar>> con |"y|, siempre que se haya cargado el -% paquete |graphics|; de no ser así, se usa la letra $\tau$, aunque -% la variante normal de \TeX{} no es demasiado apropiada. -% -% \section{Funciones de texto y matemáticas} -% -% \subsection{Abreviaturas} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\sptext|\marg{texto}\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Pone un punto y le sigue el argumento en voladitas. Para -% abreviaturas como |adm\sptext{ón}| que da adm\sptext{ón}. Hay seis -% abreviaciones asociadas a ordinales: |"a|, |"A|, |"o|, |"O|, |"er| y -% |"ER| que equivalen a |\sptext{a}|, etc. Muchos tipos -% añaden un pequeño subrayado que debe evitarse, y por tanto no se -% deben escribir los ordinales con \textsf{inputenc}. -% -% Para ajustar el tamaño lo mejor posible, se usa el de -% índices en curso. Esto funciona bien salvo para tamaños muy -% grandes o muy pequeños, donde los resultados son meramente -% aceptables. -% -% En Plain \TeX{} se ejecuta |\sptextfont| para la -% letra voladita, de forma que |{\bf\let\sptextfont\bf 1"o}| da el -% resultado correcto (|\mit| si es para cursiva). Para usar un tipo -% nuevo con |\sptext| hay que definir también las variantes -% matemáticas con |\newfam|. -% -% \subsection{Espaciado} -% -% El espaciado español difiere relativamente poco del inglés, con -% alguna excepción; una de ellas es que en \textsf{spanish} -% |\frenchspacing| está activo. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\...|\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Puntos suspensivos menos espaciados que |\dots|. El espacio -% que sigue se conserva: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |\... y solo estaba\... ella.|\quad\=\... y solo estaba\... ella. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% También podrían escribirse los tres puntos sin más |...|, y en -% la práctica no hay diferencia, a menos que se cambie el -% valor del espacio tras punto; en ese caso, la forma con barra -% da los valores apropiados \emph{dentro} de una sentencia, y -% los tres puntos \emph{al final} de ella. Esta orden no -% interfiere con el valor original de |\.| (un punto suprascrito). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\%|\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-minimal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Se añade un espacio fino antes del signo (en concreto |\,|), con -% lo cual se puede "<recuperar"> con su opuesto |\!| si |\%| no sigue -% a una cifra; también se puede emplear |\percentsign|). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishplainpercent| -% \end{decl} -% -% Orden para que |\%| no añada el espacio fino. Puede ser útil -% en cuadros, si |\%| aparece siempre entre paréntesis. -% -% \subsection{Fuentes} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\lsc|\marg{texto}\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Pasa \textit{texto} a versalitas: -% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing} -% |\lsc{RAE}| \quad \= \lsc{RAE}\\ -% |\lsc{ReNFe}| \quad \= \lsc{ReNFe}.\\ -% |siglo \lsc{XVII}| \quad \= siglo \lsc{XVII}\\ -% |capítulo \lsc{II}| \quad \= capítulo \lsc{II}. -% \end{tabbing}\end{quote} -% -% Para evitar que con un tipo que carece de versalitas acabe -% apareciendo (por substitución) un texto de minúsculas se intenta -% usar en estos casos las versales \emph{reales} de un tamaño menor -% (\LaTeX\ tiende a sustituir versalitas por versalitas, pero hay -% excepciones, como con las negritas). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\í|\alw -% \end{decl} -% -% Lo mismo que |í|. -% -% \subsection{Entrecomillados} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\begin{quoting} ... \end{quoting}|\alw -% \end{decl} -% -% El entorno |quoting| entrecomilla un texto, añadiendo comillas de -% seguir al comienzo de cada párrafo en su interior.\footnote{Se puede -% encontrar una detallada exposición de las comillas en \DTL{44 ss.} -% De ahí se ha tomado algún ejemplo.} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |<< >>|\act{shorthands}\deact{es-noquoting, \textit{es-noshorthands, es-minimal, -% es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -%\vskip-1.5pc\vskip0pt -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |"` "'|\act{shorthands}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% También se pueden emplear las abreviaciones |<<| y |>>| (o -% alternativamente |"`| y |"'|) que se limitan a llamar a |quoting|, -% que por ser entorno considera sus cambios internos como locales. -% (Es decir, |<< ... >>| implica |{<< ... >>}|.) Las abreviaciones -% |"<| y |">| continúan dando sin más los caracteres de comillas de -% abrir y cerrar, respectivamente. -% -% Por ejemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% <<Se llaman <<comillas de seguir>> a las que son de cierre, -% pero se colocan al comienzo de cada párrafo cuando se transcribe -% un texto entrecomillado con más de un párrafo. -% -% En su interior, como de costumbre, se usan inglesas.>> -%\end{verbatim} -% cuyo resultado es: -% \begin{quotation}\small -% <<Se llaman <<comillas de seguir>> a las que son de cierre, -% pero se colocan al comienzo de cada párrafo cuando se transcribe -% un texto entrecomillado con más de un párrafo. -% -% En su interior, como de costumbre, se usan inglesas.>> -% \end{quotation} -% -% También se añaden comillas de seguir en listas, excepto con la -% opción \texttt{es-nolists} o cualquier otra que las desactive. -% -% Este entorno se puede redefinir, como por ejemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewenvironment{quoting}{\itshape}{} -%\end{verbatim} -% pero en principio no implica un nuevo párrafo, ya que -% está pensado para ser usado también en el texto. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\lquoti| |\rquoti| |\lquotii| |\rquotii| |\lquotiii| -% |\rquotiii| -% \end{decl} -% -% Controlan las comillas en |quoting|, según el -% nivel en que nos encontremos. |\lquoti| son las comillas de abrir -% más exteriores, |\lquotii| las de segundo nivel, etc., y lo mismo -% para las de cerrar con |\rquoti|... Para las de seguir siempre se -% usan las de cerrar. Los valores predefinidos están en el cuadro 3. -% \begin{table} -% \center\small -% \caption{Entrecomillados} -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l} -% \toprule2 -% |\lquoti| &|"<|\\ -% |\rquoti| &|">|\\ -% |\lquotii| &|``|\\ -% |\rquotii| &|''|\\ -% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\ -% |\rquotiii| &|'| -% \botrule2 -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\activatequoting \deactivatequoting| -% \end{decl} -% -% Las incompatibilidades potenciales de estas abreviaciones son -% enormes. Por ejemplo, en \textsf{ifthen} se cancelan las -% comparaciones entre números;\,\footnote{Y en \texttt{\textbackslash -% ifnum}, -% \texttt{\textbackslash ifdim}, etc., usado por los desarrolladores en -% los paquetes.} también -% resultan inoperantes |@>>>| y |@<<<| de -% \textsf{amstex}.\footnote{Aunque en -% este caso cabe usar los sinónimos |@)))| y |@(((|.} -% Por ello, se da la posibilidad de cancelarlas y reactivarlas con -% estas órdenes, aunque si se está usando -% \textsf{xmltex} ya se -% desactivan por completo de forma automática. El entorno -% |quoting| siempre permanece disponible.\footnote{Algunos tipos -% disponen de esta ligadura de forma interna para -% generar los caracteres de comillas, por lo que en ellos también -% podemos usarlos siempre, aunque los ajustes proporcionados por -% \textsf{spanish} se pueden perder; por otra parte, tampoco se -% usan demasiado a menudo.} -% -% \subsection{Funciones matemáticas} -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\lim \limsup \liminf \bmod \pmod \sen \tg| -% etc.\act{math}\deact{\textit{es-minimal, es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% Tradicionalmente, las abreviaciones de lo que en \TeX\ se conocen -% como operadores se han formado a partir del nombre castellano, lo -% que implica la presencia del acento en lím (en sus tres formas -% |\lim|, |\limsup| y |\liminf|), máx, mín, ínf y mód (en sus dos -% formas |\bmod| y |\pmod|). -% -% Con \textsf{spanish} pueden seguirse varias convenciones con ayuda -% de las siguientes órdenes: -% \begin{decl} \con |\accentedoperators| |\unaccentedoperators| -% \end{decl} -% Activa o desactiva los acentos. -% Por omisión se acentúan, como por ejemplo: $\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$ -% (|$\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$|). -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spacedoperators| |\unspacedoperators| -% \end{decl} -% Activa o desactiva el espacio entre "<arc"> y la función. -% Lo habitual ha sido con espacio; así pues, por omisión -% se espacia. -% -% También se añaden |\sen|, |\arcsen|, |\tg| y |\arctg|, -% que dan las funciones respectivas. -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\spanishoperators| -% \end{decl} -% -% Otras funciones trigonométricas se encuentran almacenadas en el -% parámetro |\spanishoperators|, que inicialmente incluye cotg, -% cosec, senh y tgh. La razón por la que estas funciones se han -% separado es porque su forma no está normalizada en el ámbito -% hispanohablante. De esta forma se puede cambiar por otras con, por -% ejemplo: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewcommand{\spanishoperators}{ctg arc\,ctg sh ch th} -%\end{verbatim} -% (separadas con espacio). Cuando se selecciona \textsf{spanish} se crean -% órdenes con esos nombres -% y que dan esas funciones (siempre con |\nolimits|). Además de -% las letras sin acentuar se aceptan las órdenes |\,| y |\acute|, que -% se pasan por alto para formar el nombre. Por ejemplo, |arc\,ctg| -% se escribe en el documento con -% |\arcctg|, |M\acute{a}x| como |\Max| y |cr\acute{i}t| como |\crit| -% (hay que usar |i| y no |\dotlessi|). -% La orden |\,| responde a |\|(|un|)|spacedoperators|, y |\acute| -% a |\|(|un|)|accentedoperators|. -% -% Conviene que |\spanishoperators| esté en el preámbulo del -% documento en sí, antes de |\selectspanish| o de -% |\begin{document}|. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \txt |\dotlessi|\act{math}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}} -% \end{decl} -% -% La \textit{i} sin punto también es accesible directamente en modo -% matemático con |\dotlessi|, de forma que se puede escribir -% |\acute{\dotlessi}|. Por ejemplo, -% |$V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$| da -% $V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$. -% -% -% \section{Opciones generales} -% -% Están pensadas principalmente para documentos basados en una clase -% o un estilo editorial muy preciso que no debe tocarse. Para conocer -% los cambios exactos, véanse las diferentes entradas que describen -% las funciones de \textsf{spanish}. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-minimal|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Anula la mayoría de los cambios pero deja unas cuantas utilidades -% que pueden resultar utiles en el momento de escribir el texto. -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |es-sloppy|\opp -% \end{decl} -% -% Anula, además, todas las ligaduras sin excepción, la eñe en listas y los -% grupos \textsf{text} y \textsf{math}. -% -% \section{Selección} -% -% \begin{decl} -% |\selectspanish| -% \end{decl} -% -% Por omisión, \babel{} deja <<dormidas>> las lenguas hasta que se -% llega a |\begin{document}| con el fin de evitar conflictos por -% las abreviaciones; a cambio, -% se priva de la posibilidad de usar las lenguas en el preámbulo -% en órdenes como |\savebox|, |\title|, |\newtheorem|, etc. -% -% La orden |\selectspanish| permite activar \textsf{spanish} con sus -% extensiones y abreviaciones antes de -% |\begin{document}|.\footnote{Algunos detalles, que -% apenas afectan a \textsf{spanish}, siguen sin activarse hasta el -% comienzo del documento.} -% De esta forma, podríamos decir -%\begin{verbatim} -% \documentclass{book} -% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% \usepackage[cp1252]{inputenc} -% \usepackage[spanish,activeacute,es-notilde]{babel} -% ... % Mas paquetes -% -% \selectspanish -% -% \title{Título} -% \author{Autor} -% \newcommand{\pste}{para"-psicológicamente} -% ... % Mas definiciones -% -% \begin{document} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \section{Adaptación} -% -% \subsection{Opciones por países} -% \label{paises} -% -% % \begin{decl} \con |mexico| \quad |mexico-com| -% \end{decl} -% -% La primera cambia \textit{cuadro} a \textit{tabla} y desactiva tanto -% |<||<>||>| como el punto decimal. También cambia -% |"`| y |"'| a ``\,`\,"<\,">\,'\,''. Es decir, aparte de -% redefinir las comillas, equivale a: -% a: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\usepackage[spanish,es-nodecimaldot,es-tabla,es-noquoting]{spanish} -%\end{verbatim} -% La segunda es similar -% pero sí activa el punto decimal. (Obsérvese que no van precedidas -% de |es-|.) -% -% Probablemente, esta opción también sea apropiada en algunos -% países de América Central y del Sur. -% -% \subsection{Configuración} -% -% En sus últimas versiones, \babel{} ofrece la posibilidad -% de cargar automáticamente un archivo con el mismo nombre que -% el principal, pero con extensión |.cfg|. \textsf{Spanish} -% proporciona unas pocas órdenes para ser usadas en este archivo: -% -% \begin{decl} -% \con |\es@activeacute| -% \end{decl} -% Activa las abreviaciones con apóstrofos, sin que sea -% necesario incluir |activeacute| como opción en |\usepackage|. -% -% \begin{decl} \con |\es@enumerate{<leveli>}|% -% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\alw -% \end{decl} -% Cambia los valores preestablecidos por \textsf{spanish} para -% |enumerate|. \textit{leveln} consiste en una letra, que -% indica qué formato tendrá el número, seguida -% de cualquier texto. La letra tiene que ser: |1| (arábigo), -% |a| (minúscula \emph{cursiva}\,\footnote{La letra es cursiva -% pero no los signos que le puedan seguir. Más bien debería -% decirse destacada, ya que se usa |\string\emph|. -% Véase \DTL{11}.}), |A| (versal), -% |i| (romano \emph{versalita}), |I| (romano versal) o -% finalmente |o| (ordinal\,\footnote{Lo normal es no añadir ningún -% signo tras ordinal.}). -% -% Esta orden no está pensada para hacer cambios elaborados, sino -% sólo meros reajustes. Los valores preestablecidos -% equivalen a -%\begin{verbatim} -% \es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$)} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{decl} \con |\es@itemize{<leveli>}|% -% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\alw -% \end{decl} -% Lo mismo para |itemize|, sólo que los argumentos se -% usan de forma literal. Los valores originales de \LaTeX{} son -% similares a -%\begin{verbatim} -% \es@itemize{\textbullet}{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash} -% {\textasteriskcentered}{\textperiodcentered} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{decl}\con |\es@operators|\act{math} -% \end{decl} -% Todo lo relativo a operadores se cancela con -%\begin{verbatim} -% \let\es@operators\relax -%\end{verbatim} -% Es buena idea incluirlo si no se van a usar, ya que ahorra memoria. -% -% Otros ajustes útiles en este contexto son |\spanishoperators|, -% |\selectspanish| y |\deactivatequoting|. -% -% -% Recordemos que todos los cambios -% operados desde este archivo restan compatibilidad al -% documento, por lo que si se distribuye conviene adjuntarlo -% con el entorno |filecontents|. -% -% \subsection{Pasar opciones desde un paquete o clase} -% -% \begin{decl} \con |\spanishoptions| -% \end{decl} -% -% Como |\PassOptionsToPackage| añade opciones al comienzo y -% las opciones específicas de \textsf{spanish} han de ir al final, definiendo -% esta macro se puede controlar el comportamiento de \textsf{spanish} antes -% de su carga. -% -% \subsection{Otros cambios} -% -% Las adaptaciones se encuentran organizadas en varios grupos, a los -% que corresponden sendas macros: -% |\textspanish|, |\mathspanish|, -% |\shorthandsspanish|, |\datespanish| y |\captionsspanish|. Pueden -% cancelarse con: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \renewcommand\textspanish{} -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \section{Plain \TeX} -% -% Con Plain hay que hacer: -%\begin{verbatim} -% \input spanish.sty -%\end{verbatim} -% -% Se incluyen: traducciones, casi todas las abreviaciones, coma -% decimal, utilidades para división de palabras, ordinales en una -% versión simplificada (y no muy elegante), funciones matemáticas, -% |\í| y espaciado. La selección de la lengua es inmediata al -% cargar el archivo. -% -% En cambio no están disponibles: entrecomillados, -% |\lsc| ni las adaptaciones de lengua principal. -% -% \section{Compatibilidad con versiones anteriores} -% -% En versiones de \textsf{babel} bastante antiguas, las abreviaciones -% con |'| se activaban por omisión, mientras que ahora es necesario -% |activeacute|. -% -% En la versión 4, la abreviación |~n| se consideró para extinguir. -% En la versión 5 sigue estando, pero \textit{no} se activa por -% omisión, sino que hay que emplear |es-tilden|. -% -% En la versión 5 el grupo \textsf{layout} no se retrasa a -% |\begin{document}|, como en la 4, sino que se ejecuta -% inmediatamente. Esto permite cambios en el preámbulo con otros -% paquetes. Con ello, además, |\selectspanish*| carece de utilidad. -% La opción de paquete |es-delayed| restaura el comportamiento -% anterior, por si hubiera alguna incompatibilidad. -% -% La compatibilidad con la versión 2.09 de \LaTeX{} se ha suprimido. -% -% \section*{Referencias} -% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Referencias} -% -% \begingroup -% \small -% \leftskip1.5cm \parindent-1.5cm -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DRAE}}\textit{Diccionario de la Academia -% Española}, Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 21"a ed., 1992. -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DOT}}José Martínez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de ortografía técnica}, -% Madrid, Germán Sánchez Ruipérez/Pirámide, 1987. -% (Biblioteca del libro.) -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DTL}}José Martínez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de tipografía y del libro}, -% Madrid, Paraninfo, 3"a ed., 1992. -% -% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{MEA}}José Martínez de Sousa, -% \textit{Manual de edición y autoedición}, -% Madrid, Pirámide, 1994. -% -% \leftskip0pt \parindent0pt \vspace{6pt} -% -% {\itshape -% Para otras cuestiones tipográficas, las referencias -% usadas son, entre otras:} -% -% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt} -% -% Asociación de Academias de la Lengua Española, -% \textit{Diccionario panhispánico de dudas}, Madrid, Santillana, 2005. -% -% Javier Bezos, -% \textit{Tipografía española con \TeX}, documento electrónico -% disponible en -% \textsf{http://perso.wanadoo.es/jbezos/tipografia.html}. -% -% Javier Bezos, -% \textit{Tipografía y notaciones científicas}, Gijón, -% Trea, 2008. -% -% Bureau International des Poids et mesures, -% \textit{Le Sist\`{e}me international dúnités}, -% 8"a ed., París, {\footnotesize BIPM}, 2006, -% \textsf{http://www.bipm.org/""fr/""si/""si\_brochure/}, 2006-11-10. -% -% Jorge de Buen, -% \textit{Manual de diseño editorial,} México, Santillana, 2000. -% -% -% \textit{The Chicago Manual of Style}, Chicago, University of -% Chicago Press, 14"a~ed., 1993, esp.~págs.~333~-335. -% -% José Fernández Castillo, -% \textit{Normas para correctores y compositores tipógrafos}, -% Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 1959. -% -% IRANOR [AENOR], Normas \lsc{UNE} números 5010 (<<Signos -% matemáticos>>), 5028 (<<Símbolos -% geométricos>>) y 5029 (<<Impresión de los -% símbolos de magnitudes y unidades y de los números>>). -% [Obsoletas.] -% -% Llerena, Mario, -% \textit{Un manual de estilo,} Miami, Unilit, 1999. -% -% Real Academia Española, -% \textit{Esbozo de una nueva gramática de la -% lengua española}, Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 1973. -% -% V.\ Martínez Sicluna, -% \textit{Teoría y práctica de la tipografía}, -% Barcelona, Gustavo Gili, 1945. -% -% José Martínez de Sousa, -% \textit{Diccionario de ortografía de la lengua española}, -% Madrid, Paraninfo, 1996. -% -% Juan Martínez Val, \textit{Tipografía práctica}, Madrid, -% Laberinto, 2002. -% -% Juan José Morato, \textit{Guía práctica del compositor -% tipográfico}, Madrid, Hernando, 2"a ed., 1908 (1"a ed., 1900, -% 3"a ed., 1933). -% -% Marion Neubauer, -% <<Feinheiten bei wissenschaftlichen Publikationen>>, -% \textit{Die \TeX nisches Kom\"odie}, parte I, vol. 8, n"o 4, 1996, -% págs. 23-40; parte II, vol. 9, n"o 1, 1997, págs.~25~-44. -% -% Notimex, \textit{Manual de operación y estilo editorial}, México, -% Notimex, 1999. -% -% José Polo, -% \textit{Ortografía y ciencia del lenguaje}, Madrid, Paraninfo, -% 1974. -% -% Siglo 21, \textit{Libro de estilo}, México, Alda, -% $\mathrm{^s}\!$/$\mathrm{_f}$ -% (impr. 1995). -% -% Pedro Valle, -% \textit{Cómo corregir sin ofender}, Buenos Aires, Lumen, 1998. -% -% Hugh C. Wolfe, <<Símbolos, unidades y nomenclatura>>, -% \textit{Enciclopedia de Física}, dir. Rita G. Lerner y George L. -% Trigg, Madrid, Alianza, 1987, t.~2, págs.~1423~-1451. -% -%\endgroup -% -% \else -% -%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by user.drv ========= -% -% \GetFileInfo{spanish.dtx} -% -% \section{The Spanish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. The maintainer from v4.0 on is Javier Bezos -% (http://www.tex-tipografia.com). Previous -% versions were made by Julio S\'anchez. The English documentation -% has been improved by José Luis Rivera; thanks to him it is now a lot -% clearer.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Spanish -% language. -% -% Spanish support is implemented following mainly the guidelines given -% by Jos\'e Mart\'\i nez de Sousa. You may get the the full -% documentation (more comprehensive, but regrettably only in Spanish) -% by typesetting |spanish.dtx| directly. There are examples and some -% additional features documented in the Spanish version only. -% Cross-references in this section point to that document. -% -% \paragraph{Features} This style provides: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Translations following the International \LaTeX{} -% conventions, as well as |\today|. -% -% \item Shorthands listed in Table~\ref{tab:spanish-quote-def}. -% Examples in subsection~3.4 are illustrative. Notice that |"~| has a -% special meaning in \textsf{spanish} different to other languages, -% and is used mainly in linguistic contexts. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |'a| & Acute accented a. Works for e, i, o, u, too (both -% lowercase and uppercase).\\ -% |'n| & \~n (uppercase too).\\ -% |"i| & \"i (uppercase too).\\ -% |"u| & \"u (uppercase too).\\ -% |"a| |"o| & Ordinal numbers (uppercase |"A|, |"O| too).\\ -% |"er "ER| & Ordinal 1.\textsuperscript{er} 1.\textsuperscript{\textsc{er}}\\ -% |"c| & \c{c} (uppercase too).\\ -% |"rr| & rr, but -r when hyphenated.\\ -% |"y| & An old ligature for ``et'' (like the English \&).\\ -% |"-| & Like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest -% the word.\\ -% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest -% the word.\\ -% |"~| & The hyphen is repeated at the very beginning of -% the next line if the word is hyphenated at this -% point.\\ -% |""| & Like |"-| but producing no hyphen sign.\\ -% |~-| & Like |"-| but with no break after the hyphen. Works for -% en-dashes (|~--|) and em-dashes (|~---|). |"+|, |"+-| -% and |"+--| are synonymous.\\ -% |"/| & A slash slightly lowered, if necessary.\\ -% \verb+"|+ & Disable ligatures at this point.\\ -% |"<| & Left guillemets.\\ -% |">| & Right guillemets.\\ -% |<<| |>>| & |\begin{quoting}| and |\end{quoting}|. (See below.) -% |"`| and |"'| are synonymous.\\ -% |"? "!| & Opening question and exlamation marks (?`!`) -% aligned on the baseline, useful for all-caps headings, etc. -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{spanish.ldf}} -% \label{tab:spanish-quote-def} -% \end{table} -% -% \item |\frenchspacing|. -% -% \item \emph{In math mode}, a dot followed by a digit is replaced -% by a decimal comma. -% -% \item Spanish ordinals and abbreviations with the |\sptext|\marg{text} -% command as, for instance, |1\sptext{er}|. The preceptive dot is included. -% -% \item Accented (l\'\i m, m\'ax, m\'\i n, m\'od) and spaced -% (arc\,cos, etc.) functions. -% -% \item |\dotlessi| is provided for use in math mode. -% -% \item A |quoting| environment and a related pair of shorthands |<<| -% and |>>|. Useful for traditional spanish multi-paragraph quoting. -% -% \item There is a small space before the percent |\%| sign. -% -% \item |\lsc| provides lowercase small caps. (See subsection~3.10.) -% -% \item Ellipsis is best typed as |...| or, within a sentence, as |\...| -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% If \textsf{spanish} is the main language, the command -% |\layoutspanish| is added to the main group, modifying the standard -% classes throughout the whole document in the following way: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item Paragraphs are set with |\indentfirst|. -% -% \item Both |enumerate| and |itemize| are adapted to Spanish rules. -% -% \item Both |\alph| and |\Alph| include \textit{\~n} after \textit{n}. -% -% \item Symbol footmarks are one, two, three, etc., asterisks. -% -% \item |OT1| guillemets are generated with two |lasy| symbols instead -% of small |\ll| and |\gg|. -% -% \item |\roman| is redefined to write small caps Roman numerals, since -% lowercase Roman numerals are discouraged (see below). -% -% \item There is a dot after section numbers in titles, headings, and toc. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% A subset of these features is implemented for Plain \TeX{} -% (accesible with the command |\input spanish.sty|). Most -% significantly, |\lsc|, the |quoting| environment, and features -% provided by |\layoutspanish| are missing. -% -% \paragraph{Customization} -% -% Beginning with version 5.0, customization is made following two paths: -% via |options| or via |commands|; these options and commands override -% the layout for Spanish documents at different levels: options are meant for -% use at the preamble only, while commands may be used in the configuration -% file or at document level. -% -% Global options control the overall appearance of the document, and may -% be set on the |{babel}| call, right after calling |spanish|, or -% shortly before the call to |{babel}|, to ensure their proper loading -% at runtime. Thus, the following calls are roughly equivalent: -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \usepackage[...,spanish,es-nosectiondot,es-nodecimaldot,...]{babel} -% -% \def\spanishoptions{es-nosectiondot,es-nodecimaldot} -% \usepackage[...,spanish,...]{babel} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{table} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{cccc}\hline -% Basic Options & |es-minimal| & |es-sloppy| & |es-noshorthands| \\\hline -% |es-noindentfirst| & X & X & \\ -% |es-nosectiondot| & X & X & \\ -% |es-nolists| & X & X & \\ -% |es-noquoting| & X & X & X \\ -% |es-notilde| & X & X & X \\ -% |es-nodecimaldot| & X & X & X \\ -% |es-nolayout| & & X & \\ -% |es-ucroman| & X & & \\ -% |es-lcroman| & X & X & \\\hline -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Spanish Customization Options} -% \label{tab:SpanishCustomizationOptions} -% \end{table} -% -% Some global options are built upon lower level options, and may be -% used as shorthand for more global customizations. -% Table~\ref{tab:SpanishCustomizationOptions} gives an overview of the -% global options constructed this way. Most of these options are -% self-explanatory: they disable the changes made to the basic \LaTeX\ -% layout by |spanish|. |es-lcroman| however, and a few others, need a -% bit of explanation, and they may be described as follows: -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item Traditional Spanish typography discourages the use of -% lowercase Roman numerals; instead, a smallcaps variant is -% implemented. However, since |Makeindex| seems to choke on the code -% implementing lowercase Roman numerals (via the |\lsc| macro), two -% workarounds are implemented: the |es-ucroman| option converts all -% Roman numerals to uppercase, and the |es-lcroman| option turns all -% Roman numerals to lowercase; the former should be preferred over the -% latter. Three macros control local changes to Roman numbers: -% |\spanishscroman|, |\spanishucroman|, and |\spanishlcroman|. -% -% \item The |es-preindex| option calls the |romanidx.sty| package -% automatically to fix index entries in smallcaps roman form. An -% additional macro, -% |\spanishindexchars|\marg{encap}\marg{openrange}\marg{closerange} -% determines the characters delimiting index entries. Defaults are -% \verb=\spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}=. -% -% \item The |es-tilden| option restores the old tilde |~| shorthand -% for \~n. This shorthand is however \emph{strongly} deprecated. -% -% \item The |es-nolayout| option disables layout changes in the -% document when |spanish| is the main language. These changes affect -% enumerated and itemized lists, enumerations (alphabetic order -% excludes \~n), and symbolic footnotes. -% -% \item The |es-noshorthands| disables the shorthand mechanism -% completely: neither |"| nor |'| nor |<| nor |>| nor |~| nor |.| work -% at all. -% -% \item The |es-noquoting| option disables the macros |<<| and |>>| -% calling the |quoting| environment; the alternative macros |"`| and -% |"'| are still available. -% -% \item The |es-uppernames| option makes uppercase versions of -% captions for chapter, tablename, etc. -% -% \item The |es-tabla| option changes ``cuadro'' for ``tabla'' in -% captions. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% Finally, the Spanish 5 series begins the implementation of national -% variations of Spanish typography, beginning with Mexico. Thus the -% global options |mexico| and |mexico-com| are adapted to practices -% spread in Mexico, and perhaps Central America, the Caribbean, and -% some countries in South America.\footnote{The main difference is -% that |mexico| disables the |decimaldot| mechanism, while -% |mexico-com| keeps it enabled; both change the |quoting| -% environment, disabling the use of guillemets.} -% -% Many of the global options are implemented via macros, which may be -% included in the configuration file |spanish.cfg|, in the preamble, -% after the call to |babel|, and in the body of the document. These -% macros are the following. -% -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item The macros |\spanishdashitems| and |\spanishsignitems| change -% the values of itemized lists to a series of dashes or an alternative -% series of symbols, respectively. -% -% \item The command |\deactivatequoting| deactivates the |<<| and |>>| -% shorthands if you want to use |<| and |>| in numerical comparisons -% and some AMS\TeX\ commands. -% -% \item You may kill the space in spaced operators with -% |\unspacedoperators|. -% -% \item You may kill the accents on accented operators with -% |\unaccentedoperators|. -% -% \item The command |\decimalpoint| resets the decimal separator to -% its default (dot) value, while |\spanishdecimal|\marg{symbol} allows -% for an arbitrary definition. -% -% \item |\spanishplainpercent| prevents the addition of a thinspace before -% the percent sign in texts. This might be useful for parenthesized percent -% signs in tables, etc. -% -% \item The macros |\spanishdatedel| and |\spanishdatede| control the -% if the article is given in years (|del| or |de|). -% -% \item The macro |\spanishreverseddate| sets the date of the format -% ``Month Day del Year''. -% -% \item The macro |\Today| gives months in uppercase. -% -% \item The macros |\spanish|\textit{caption} change the value of the \emph{caption} -% automatically (no need to add an |\addto|). -% -% \item The command |\spanishdeactivate|\marg{characters} disables the -% shorthand characters listed in the argument. Elegible characters -% are the set |.'"~<>|. These shorthand characters may be globally -% deactivated for Spanish adding this command to |\shorthandsspanish|. -% -% \item Extras are divided in groups controlled by the commands -% |\textspanish|, |\mathspanish|, |\shorthandsspanish| y -% |\layoutspanish|; their values may be cancelled typing -% |\renewcommand|\marg{command}|{}|, or changed at will (check the -% Spanish documentation or the code for details). -% -% \item The command |\spanishoperators|\marg{operators} defines -% command names for operators in Spanish. There is no standard name -% for some of them, so they may be created or changed at will. For -% instance, the command -% |\renewcommand{\spanishoperators}{arc\,ctg m\acute{i}n}| -% creates commands for these functions. The command -% |\,| adds thinspaces at the appropriate places for spaced operators -% (like |\arcctg| in this case), and the command |\acute|\marg{letter} -% adds an accent to the letter included in the definition (thus, -% |m\acute{i}n| defines the accented function |\min| (m\'\i{}n); -% please notice that |\dotlessi| is not necessary). -% -% \item The commands -% |\lquoti|\marg{string} |\rquoti|\marg{string} -% |\lquotii|\marg{string} |\rquotii|\marg{string} -% |\lquotiii|\marg{string} |\rquotiii|\marg{string} -% set the quoting signs in the |quoting| environment, -% nested from outside in. They may be |\renew|ed at will. -% Default values are shown in table~\ref{tab:spanish-quote-ref}. -% \begin{table} -% \center\small -% \vspace{1.5ex} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l} -% |\lquoti| &|"<|\\ -% |\rquoti| &|">|\\ -% |\lquotii| &|``|\\ -% |\rquotii| &|''|\\ -% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\ -% |\rquotiii| &|'| -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{Default quoting signs set for the \texttt{quoting} environment.} -% \label{tab:spanish-quote-ref} -% \end{table} -% -% \item The command |\selectspanish*| is obsolete: if |spanish| is the -% main language, all its features are available right after loading -% |babel|. The |es-delayed| option is provided to restore the -% previous behavior and macros for backwards compatibility. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \fi -% \endgroup -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -%^^A ========== End of manual =============== -% -% \ifx\langdeffile\undefined -% -% \section{The Code} -% -% \else -% -% \subsection{The Code} -% -% \fi -% -% \changes{spanish~5.0a}{2007/02/21}{Reimplemented in full, which some -% parts rewritten from scratch. Added the es- mechanism and the mexico -% option. Many bug fixes.} -% \changes{spanish~5.0d}{2008/05/25}{Fixed two bugs: misplaced -% subscripts with lim and the like; problem with \cs{roman} and hyperref.} -% \changes{spanish~5.0h}{2009/01/02}{Removed unnecessary \cs{string}s -% with two acutes. Added es-noenumerate, es-noitemize.} -% \changes{spanish~5.0i}{2009/05/11}{romanidx not working. Some \cs{es@roman} -% replaced with \cs{es@scroman}.} -% \changes{spanish~5.0j}{2010/01/06}{Overdot \cs{.} was not robust.} -% \changes{spanish~5.0j}{2010/04/04}{Colon in saved catcodes, because -% babel doesn't restore it after french} -% \changes{spanish~5.0k}{2011/08/08}{When saving ., check if -% \cs{mathcode} is 8000} -% -% This file is for both \LaTeXe{} and Plain formats. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\ProvidesLanguage{spanish.ldf} - [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{spanish}\captionsspanish - -\edef\es@savedcatcodes{% - \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~ - \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\" - \catcode`\noexpand\:=\the\catcode`\:} -\catcode`\~=\active -\catcode`\"=12 -\catcode`\:=12 - -\ifx\undefined\l@spanish - \@nopatterns{Spanish} - \adddialect\l@spanish0 -\fi - -\def\es@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1} -\def\es@sDRC#1{\babel@save#1\DeclareRobustCommand*#1} - -\@ifundefined{documentclass} - {\let\ifes@latex\iffalse} - {\let\ifes@latex\iftrue} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Package options for spanish. To avoid error messages dummy -% options are created on the fly when neccessary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@latex - -\@ifundefined{spanishoptions}{} -{\PassOptionsToPackage{\spanishoptions}{babel}} - -\def\es@genoption#1#2#3{% - \DeclareOption{#1}{}% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{#1}% - {\def\es@a{#1}% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\es@b\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname - \addto\es@b{,#2}% - \expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\es@b - \AtEndOfPackage{#3}}% - {}} - -\es@genoption{es-minimal} - {es-ucroman,es-noindentfirst,es-nosectiondot,es-noenumerate,% - es-noitemize,es-noquoting,es-notilde,es-nodecimaldot} - {\spanishplainpercent - \let\es@operators\relax} -\es@genoption{es-nolists} - {es-noenumerate,es-noitemize}{} -\es@genoption{es-sloppy} - {es-nolayout,es-noshorthands}{} -\es@genoption{es-noshorthands} - {es-noquoting,es-nodecimaldot,es-notilde}{} -\es@genoption{mexico} - {mexico-com,es-nodecimaldot}{} -\es@genoption{mexico-com} - {es-tabla,es-noquoting} - {\def\lquoti{``}\def\rquoti{''}% - \def\lquotii{`}\def\rquotii{'}% - \def\lquotiii{\guillemotleft{}}% - \def\rquotiii{\guillemotright{}}} - -\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{% - \DeclareOption{es-#1}{}% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{es-#1}{#2}{#3}}% - -\def\es@optlayout#1#2{\es@ifoption{#1}{}{\addto\layoutspanish{#2}}} - -\else - -\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{\@namedef{spanish#1}{#2}} - -\fi - -\let\es@uclc\@secondoftwo -\es@ifoption{uppernames}{\let\es@uclc\@firstoftwo}{} - -\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro} -\es@ifoption{tabla}{\def\es@tablename{Ttabla}}{} -\es@ifoption{cuadro}{\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Captions follow a two step schema, so that, say, |\refname| is -% defined as |\spanishrefname| which in turn contains the string -% to be printed. The final definition of |\captionsspanish| -% is built below. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captionsspanish{% - \es@a{preface}{Prefacio}% - \es@a{ref}{Referencias}% - \es@a{abstract}{Resumen}% - \es@a{bib}{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}% - \es@a{chapter}{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \es@a{appendix}{Ap\'{e}ndice}% - \es@a{listfigure}{\'{I}ndice de \es@uclc Ffiguras}% - \es@a{listtable}{\'{I}ndice de \expandafter\es@uclc\es@tablename s}% - \es@a{index}{\'{I}ndice \es@uclc Aalfab\'{e}tico}% - \es@a{figure}{Figura}% - \es@a{table}{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\es@tablename}% - \es@a{part}{Parte}% - \es@a{encl}{Adjunto}% - \es@a{cc}{Copia a}% - \es@a{headto}{A}% - \es@a{page}{p\'{a}gina}% - \es@a{see}{v\'{e}ase}% - \es@a{also}{v\'{e}ase tambi\'{e}n}% - \es@a{proof}{Demostraci\'{o}n}% - \es@a{glossary}{Glosario}% - \@ifundefined{chapter} - {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice}}% - {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice \es@uclc Ggeneral}}} - -\def\es@a#1{\@namedef{spanish#1name}} -\captionsspanish -\def\es@a#1#2{% - \def\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1name\endcsname - {\expandafter\noexpand\csname spanish#1name\endcsname}} -\edef\captionsspanish{\captionsspanish} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now two macros for dates (upper and lowercase). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@month#1{% - \expandafter#1\ifcase\month\or Eenero\or Ffebrero\or - Mmarzo\or Aabril\or Mmayo\or Jjunio\or Jjulio\or Aagosto\or - Sseptiembre\or Ooctubre\or Nnoviembre\or Ddiciembre\fi} - -\def\es@today#1{% - \ifcase\es@datefmt - \the\day~de \es@month#1% - \else - \es@month#1~\the\day - \fi - \ de\ifnum\year>1999\es@yearl\fi~\the\year} - -\def\datespanish{% - \def\today{\es@today\@secondoftwo}% - \def\Today{\es@today\@firstoftwo}} -\newcount\es@datefmt -\def\spanishreverseddate{\es@datefmt\@ne} -\def\spanishdatedel{\def\es@yearl{l}} -\def\spanishdatede{\let\es@yearl\@empty} -\spanishdatede -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The basic macros to select the language in the preamble or the -% config file. Use of |\selectlanguage| should be avoided at this -% early stage because the active chars are not yet -% active. |\selectspanish| makes them active. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\selectspanish{% - \def\selectspanish{% - \def\selectspanish{% - \PackageWarning{spanish}{Extra \string\selectspanish ignored}}% - \es@select}} -\@onlypreamble\selectspanish -\def\es@select{% - \let\es@select\@undefined - \selectlanguage{spanish}} - -\let\es@shlist\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Instead of joining all the extras directly in |\extrasspanish|, -% we subdivide them in three further groups. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\extrasspanish{% - \textspanish - \mathspanish - \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty - \expandafter\spanishdeactivate\expandafter{\es@shlist}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \else - \shorthandsspanish - \fi} -\def\noextrasspanish{% - \ifx\textspanish\@empty\else - \notextspanish - \fi - \ifx\mathspanish\@empty\else - \nomathspanish - \fi - \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty\else - \noshorthandsspanish - \fi - \csname es@restorelist\endcsname} - -\addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\sptext{\es@sptext}} - -\def\es@orddot{.} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The definition of |\sptext| is more elaborated than that of -% |\textsuperscript|. With uppercase superscript text -% the scriptscriptsize is used. The mandatory dot is already -% included. There are two versions, depending on the -% format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@latex - \def\es@sptext#1{% - {\es@orddot - \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.15ex - \else - \fontsize\ssf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.5ex - \fi - \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}} -\else - \let\sptextfont\rm - \def\es@sptext#1{% - {\es@orddot - \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \advance\dimen@-0.75ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \else - \advance\dimen@-0.8ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \fi}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Lowercase small caps. We check if the current font has small -% caps. If not, we fakes them. \cs{selectfont} in \cs{es@lsc} -% seems redundant, but it's not. An intermediate macro allows -% using an optimized variant for Roman numerals. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@latex - \addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\lsc{\es@lsc}} - \def\es@lsc{\es@xlsc\MakeUppercase\MakeLowercase} - \def\es@xlsc#1#2#3{% - \leavevmode - \hbox{% - \scshape\selectfont - \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series - /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont - \PackageWarning{spanish}{Replacing `\curr@fontshape' by - \MessageBreak faked small caps}% - #1{#3}% - \else - #2{#3}% - \fi}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |quoting| environment (not available in Plain). Overriding -% the default |\everypar| is a bit tricky. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifes@listquot - -\ifes@latex - \csname newtoks\endcsname\es@quottoks - \csname newcount\endcsname\es@quotdepth - \newenvironment{quoting} - {\leavevmode - \advance\es@quotdepth\@ne - \csname lquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname% - \ifnum\es@quotdepth=\@ne - \es@listquotfalse - \let\es@quotpar\everypar - \let\everypar\es@quottoks - \everypar\expandafter{\the\es@quotpar}% - \es@quotpar{\the\everypar - \ifes@listquot\global\es@listquotfalse\else\es@quotcont\fi}% - \fi - \toks@\expandafter{\es@quotcont}% - \edef\es@quotcont{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\noexpand - \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}} - {\csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname} - \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}} - \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}} - \def\lquotii{``} - \def\rquotii{''} - \def\lquotiii{`} - \def\rquotiii{'} - \let\es@quotcont\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If there is a marginpar inside quoting, we don't add the -% quotes. |\es@listqout| stores the quotes to be used before -% item labels; otherwise they could appear after the labels. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \addto\@marginparreset{\let\es@quotcont\@empty} - \DeclareRobustCommand\es@listquot{% - \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname - \global\es@listquottrue} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\frenchspacing|, |\...| and |\%|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\textspanish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\notextspanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\addto\textspanish{% - \let\es@save@dot\.% - \es@sDRC\.{\@ifnextchar.{\es@dots}{\es@save@dot}}} -\def\es@dots..{\leavevmode\hbox{...}\spacefactor\@M} -\def\es@sppercent{\unskip\textormath{$\m@th\,$}{\,}} -\def\spanishplainpercent{\let\es@sppercent\@empty} -\addto\textspanish{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \es@sDRC\%{\es@sppercent\percentsign{}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, the math group. It's not easy to add an accent to an -% operator, because we must avoid using text (that is, |\mbox|) -% where we have no control on font and size, and at the same time -% we need |\i|, which is forbidden in math mode. |\dotlessi| must -% be converted to uppercase if necessary in \LaTeXe. There are two -% versions, depending on the format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\mathspanish{\es@sDRC\dotlessi{\es@dotlessi}} -\let\nomathspanish\relax - -\ifes@latex - \def\es@texti{\i} - \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\es@texti} -\fi - -\ifes@latex - \def\es@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne - \imath - \else - \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter - \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil - \escapechar=\count@ - \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}% - {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}% - \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname - \advance\count@"7000 - \mathchar\count@ - \fi}% - \else - \i - \fi} -\else - \def\es@dotlessi{\textormath{\i}{\mathchar"7010}} -\fi - -\def\accentedoperators{% - \def\es@op@ac##1{\acute{\if i##1\dotlessi\else##1\fi}}} -\def\unaccentedoperators{% - \def\es@op@ac##1{##1}} -\accentedoperators -\def\spacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\,} -\def\unspacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\@empty} -\spacedoperators -\addto\mathspanish{\es@operators} - -\ifes@latex\else - \let\operator@font\rm -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Operators are stored in |\es@operators|, which is -% included in the math group. Since |\operator@font| is -% defined in \LaTeXe{} only, we define it in the plain variant. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@operators{% - \es@sdef\bmod{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu - \mathbin{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}% - \@ifundefined{@amsmath@err}% - {\es@sdef\pmod##11{\allowbreak\mkern18mu - ({\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##11)}}% - {\es@sdef\mod##1{\allowbreak\if@display\mkern18mu - \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##1}% - \es@sdef\pmod##1{\pod{{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}% - \mkern6mu##1}}}% - \def\es@a##1 {% - \if^##1^% empty? continue - \bbl@afterelse - \es@a - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\if&##1% &? finish - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \begingroup - \let\,\@empty % ignore when def'ing name - \let\acute\@firstofone % id - \edef\es@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}% - \def\,{\noexpand\es@op@sp}% - \def\acute{\noexpand\es@op@ac}% - \edef\es@a{\endgroup - \noexpand\es@sdef\expandafter\noexpand\es@b{% - \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\es@c}}% - \es@a % restores itself - \es@a - \fi}% - \fi}% - \let\es@b\spanishoperators - \addto\es@b{ }% - \let\es@c\@empty - \expandafter\es@a\es@b l\acute{i}m l\acute{i}m\,sup - l\acute{i}m\,inf m\acute{a}x \acute{i}nf m\acute{i}n & % - \def\es@c{\nolimits}% - \expandafter\es@a\es@b sen tg arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tg & } -\def\spanishoperators{cotg cosec senh tgh } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now comes the text shorthands. They are grouped in -% |\shorthandsspanish| and this style performs some -% operations before the babel shortands are called. -% The aims are to allow espression like |$a^{x'}$| -% and to deactivate shorthands by making them of -% category `other.' After providing a |\'i| shorthand, -% the new macros are defined. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}} - -\def\es@set@shorthand#1{% - \expandafter\edef\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname - {\the\catcode`#1}% - \initiate@active@char{#1}% - \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \if.#1\else - \addto\es@restorelist{\es@restore{#1}}% - \addto\es@select{\shorthandon{#1}}% - \addto\shorthandsspanish{\es@activate{#1}}% - \addto\es@shlist{#1}% - \fi} - -\def\es@use@shorthand{% - \if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse - \string - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\ifx\thepage\relax - \bbl@afterelse - \string - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \es@use@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\def\es@use@sh#1{% - \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \bbl@afterelse - \noexpand#1% - \else% - \bbl@afterfi - \textormath - {\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}% - {\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \fi} - -\gdef\es@activate#1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \def~{\es@use@shorthand~}}} - -\def\spanishdeactivate#1{% - \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\es@spdeactivate\@tempa}} - -\def\es@spdeactivate#1{% - \if.#1% - \mathcode`\.=\es@period@math\relax - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let~\es@period@code}% - \else - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \expandafter\let\expandafter~% - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% |\es@restore| is used in the list |\es@restorelist|, which in -% turn restores all shorthands as defined by \babel. The latter -% macros also has |\es@quoting|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@restore#1{% - \shorthandon{#1}% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \bbl@deactivate{~}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To selectively define the shorthands we have a couple of -% macros, which defines a certain combination if the first -% character has been activated as a shorthand. The second -% one is intended for a few shorthands with an alternative -% form. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@declare#1{% - \@ifundefined{es@savecat\expandafter\string\@firstoftwo#1}% - {\@gobble}% - {\declare@shorthand{spanish}{#1}}} -\def\es@declarealt#1#2#3{% - \es@declare{#1}{#3}% - \es@declare{#2}{#3}} - -\ifes@latex\else - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname} -\fi - -\@ifundefined{add@accent}{\def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Instead of redefining |\'|, we redefine the internal -% macro for the OT1 encoding. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifes@latex - \def\es@accent#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\@text@composite - \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite - {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3% - \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}% - \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}} -\else - \def\es@accent#1#2#3{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 } -\fi - -\addto\shorthandsspanish{\languageshorthands{spanish}}% -\es@ifoption{noshorthands}{}{\es@set@shorthand{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We override the default |"| of babel, intended for german. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@umlaut#1{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 } - -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\es@umlaut} -\let\noshorthandsspanish\relax - -\ifes@latex -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\es@accent\~{126}}% - \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\es@accent\'{19}}} -\else -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \es@sdef\~{\es@accent\~{126}}% - \es@sdef\'#1{\if#1i\es@accent\'{19}\i\else\es@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}} -\fi - -\def\es@sptext@r#1#2{\es@sptext{#1#2}} -\es@declare{"a}{\sptext{a}} -\es@declare{"A}{\sptext{A}} -\es@declare{"o}{\sptext{o}} -\es@declare{"O}{\sptext{O}} -\es@declare{"e}{\protect\es@sptext@r{e}} -\es@declare{"E}{\protect\es@sptext@r{E}} -\es@declare{"u}{\"u} -\es@declare{"U}{\"U} -\es@declare{"i}{\"{\i}} -\es@declare{"I}{\"I} -\es@declare{"c}{\c{c}} -\es@declare{"C}{\c{C}} -\es@declare{"<}{\guillemotleft{}} -\es@declare{">}{\guillemotright{}} -\def\es@chf{\char\hyphenchar\font} -\es@declare{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"=}{\bbl@allowhyphens\es@chf\hskip\z@skip} -\es@declare{"~} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{\es@chf}{\es@chf}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"r} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{r}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"R} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{R}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"y} - {\@ifundefined{scalebox}% - {\ensuremath{\tau}}% - {\raisebox{1ex}{\scalebox{-1}{\resizebox{.45em}{1ex}{2}}}}} -\es@declare{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\es@declare{"/} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}% - \dimen@\ht\z@ - \advance\dimen@-1ex - \advance\dimen@\dp\z@ - \dimen@.31\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@ - \ifdim\dimen@>0pt - \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em - \else - \box\z@ - \fi} -\es@declare{"?} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} -\es@declare{"!} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} - -\def\spanishdecimal#1{\def\es@decimal{{#1}}} -\def\decimalcomma{\spanishdecimal{,}} -\def\decimalpoint{\spanishdecimal{.}} -\decimalcomma -\es@ifoption{nodecimaldot}{} - {\AtBeginDocument{\bgroup\@fileswfalse}% - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup - \let\es@period@code~% - \es@set@shorthand{.}% - \let~\es@period@code}% - \AtBeginDocument{\egroup}% - \@namedef{normal@char\string.}{% - \@ifnextchar\egroup - {\es@period@code}% - {\csname active@char\string.\endcsname}}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\es@period@code}% - \addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}% - \edef\es@period@math{\the\mathcode`\.}% - \babel@save\es@period@code - \ifnum\es@period@math="8000 - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let\es@period@code~}% - \else - \mathchardef\es@period@code\es@period@math\relax - \mathcode`\.="8000 % - \fi - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\babel@save~}% - \es@activate{.}}% - \def\es@a#1{\es@declare{.#1}{\es@decimal#1}}% - \es@a1\es@a2\es@a3\es@a4\es@a5\es@a6\es@a7\es@a8\es@a9\es@a0} - - -\es@ifoption{notilde}{}{\es@set@shorthand{~}} -\def\deactivatetilden{% - \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax} -\es@ifoption{tilden} - {\es@declare{~n}{\~n}% - \es@declare{~N}{\~N}} - {\let\deactivatetilden\relax} -\es@declarealt{~-}{"+}{% - \leavevmode - \bgroup - \let\@sptoken\es@dashes % Changes \@ifnextchar behaviour - \@ifnextchar-% - {\es@dashes}% - {\hbox{\es@chf}\egroup}} -\def\es@dashes-{% - \@ifnextchar-% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}} - -\es@ifoption{noquoting}% - {\let\es@quoting\relax - \let\activatequoting\relax - \let\deactivatequoting\relax} - {\@ifundefined{XML@catcodes}% - {\es@set@shorthand{<}% - \es@set@shorthand{>}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}% - \addto\es@restorelist{\es@quoting}% - \addto\es@select{\es@quoting}% - \ifes@latex - \AtBeginDocument{% - \es@quoting - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@nameuse{es@quoting}}% - \fi}% - \fi - \def\activatequoting{% - \shorthandon{<>}% - \let\es@quoting\activatequoting}% - \def\deactivatequoting{% - \shorthandoff{<>}% - \let\es@quoting\deactivatequoting}}{}} - -\es@declarealt{<<}{"`}{\begin{quoting}} -\es@declarealt{>>}{"'}{\end{quoting}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Acute accent shorthands are stored in a macro. If |activeacute| -% was set as an option it's executed. If not is not deleted for a -% possible later use in the |cfg| file. In non \LaTeXe{} formats -% it's always executed. -% -% \changes{spanish~5.0e}{2008/07/06}{Two acutes in a row should be -% turned into a double right quote} -% \changes{spanish~5.0g}{2008/07/20}{Fixed bad kerning before two -% acutes} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\'=12 -\gdef\es@activeacute{% - \es@set@shorthand{'}% - \def\es@a##1{\es@declare{'##1}{\@tabacckludge'##1}}% - \es@a a\es@a e\es@a i\es@a o\es@a u% - \es@a A\es@a E\es@a I\es@a O\es@a U% - \es@declare{'n}{\~n}% - \es@declare{'N}{\~N}% - \es@declare{''}{''}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% But \textsf{spanish} allows two category codes for |'|, -% so both should be taken into account in \cs{bbl@pr@m@s}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\es@pr@m@s\bbl@pr@m@s - \def\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \ifx'\@let@token - \bbl@afterelse - \pr@@@s - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \es@pr@m@s - \fi}% - \let\es@activeacute\relax} -\endgroup - -\ifes@latex - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\es@activeacute}{} -\else - \es@activeacute -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And the customization. By default these macros only -% store the values and do nothing. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{\def\es@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} -\def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{\def\es@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} - -\ifes@latex -\es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$} -\def\spanishdashitems{\es@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}} -\def\spanishsymbitems{% - \es@itemize - {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex - {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}% - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}} -\def\spanishsignitems{% - \es@itemize{\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}% - {$\m@th\triangleright$}} -\spanishsymbitems -\def\es@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{% - \if#21% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2a% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}% - \else\if#2A% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2i% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2I% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2o% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\sptext{o}}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}% - \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname - {\noexpand\es@listquot\the\toks@#3}} -\def\es@guillemot#1#2{% - \ifmmode#1% - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char#2 \kern-0.19em\char#2 }}% - \fi} -\def\layoutspanish{% - \let\layoutspanish\@empty - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\ll{40}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\gg{41}}% - \def\@fnsymbol##1% - {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or - *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - k\or l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or - w\or x\or y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@Alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or - K\or L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or - W\or X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}} - -\es@optlayout{noenumerate}{% - \def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{% - \es@enumdef{i}#1\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{ii}#2\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{iii}#3\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{iv}#4\@empty\@empty\@@}% - \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}% - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\theenumii}% - \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}% - \expandafter\es@enumerate\es@enum} -\es@optlayout{noitemize}{% - \def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{% - \def\labelitemi{\es@listquot#1}% - \def\labelitemii{\es@listquot#2}% - \def\labelitemiii{\es@listquot#3}% - \def\labelitemiv{\es@listquot#4}}% - \expandafter\es@itemize\es@item} -\let\esromanindex\@secondoftwo -\es@ifoption{ucroman} - {\def\es@romandef{% - \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\uppercase{##2}}}% - \def\@roman{\@Roman}}} - {\def\es@romandef{% - \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\es@scroman{##2}}}% - \def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\number##1}}% - \def\es@roman##1{\es@scroman{\romannumeral##1}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\es@scroman{\es@xlsc\uppercase\@firstofone}}} -\es@optlayout{lcroman}{\es@romandef} -\newcommand\spanishlcroman{\def\@roman##1{\romannumeral##1}} -\newcommand\spanishucroman{\def\@roman{\@Roman}} -\newcommand\spanishscroman{\def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\romannumeral##1}}} -\es@optlayout{noindentfirst}{% - \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} -\es@optlayout{nosectiondot}{% - \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}% - \def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1\if&\else.\fi\hfil}}} -\es@ifoption{nolayout}{\let\layoutspanish\relax}{} -\es@ifoption{sloppy}{\let\textspanish\relax\let\mathspanish\relax}{} -\es@ifoption{delayed}{}{\def\es@layoutspanish{\layoutspanish}} -\es@ifoption{preindex}{\AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{romanidx}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need to execute the following code when babel has been -% run, in order to see if |spanish| is the main language. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfPackage{% -\let\es@activeacute\@undefined -\def\bbl@tempa{spanish}% -\ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa - \@nameuse{es@layoutspanish}% - \addto\es@select{% - \@ifstar{\PackageError{spanish}% - {Old syntax--use es-nolayout}% - {If you don't want changes in layout\MessageBreak - use the es-nolayout package option}}% - {}}% - \AtBeginDocument{\layoutspanish}% -\fi -\selectspanish} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% After restoring the catcode of |~| and setting the minimal -% values for hyphenation, the |.ldf| is finished. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\es@savedcatcodes -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ifes@latex\else - \es@select -\fi -\ldf@finish{spanish} -\csname activatequoting\endcsname -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% That's all in the main file. -% -% The |spanish| option writes a macro in the page field of -% \textit{MakeIndex} in entries with small caps number, and they -% are rejected. This program is a preprocessor which moves this -% macro to the entry field. It can be called from the main -% document as a package or with the package option |es-preindex|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*indexes> -\makeatletter - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\def\spanishindexchars#1#2#3{% - \edef\es@encap{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1\endcsname}% - \edef\es@openrange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#2\endcsname}% - \edef\es@closerange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#3\endcsname}}% - \spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}% - \ifx\documentclass\@twoclasseserror - \edef\es@idxfile{\jobname}% - \AtEndDocument{% - \addto\@defaultsubs{% - \immediate\closeout\@indexfile - \input{romanidx.sty}}}% - \expandafter\endinput - \fi}{} - -\newcount\es@converted -\newcount\es@processed - -\def\es@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1} -\def\es@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2} - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J% - (extension por omision .idx):}} - {\let\answer\es@idxfile} - -\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} -\ifin@ - \edef\es@input@file{\expandafter\es@split@file\answer\@@} - \edef\es@input@ext{\expandafter\es@split@ext\answer\@@} -\else - \edef\es@input@file{\answer} - \def\es@input@ext{idx} -\fi - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo de destino^^J% - (archivo por omision: \es@input@file.eix,^^J% - extension por omision .eix):}} - {\let\answer\es@idxfile} -\ifx\answer\@empty - \edef\es@output{\es@input@file.eix} -\else - \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} - \ifin@ - \edef\es@output{\answer} - \else - \edef\es@output{\answer.eix} - \fi -\fi - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{% - ^^J?Se ha usado algun esquema especial de controles^^J% - de MakeIndex para encap, open_range o close_range?^^J% - [s/n] (n por omision)}} - {\def\answer{n}} - -\if s\answer - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J% - (\string| por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@encap{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J% - (\string( por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@openrange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J% - (\string) por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@closerange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi -\fi - -\newwrite\es@indexfile -\immediate\openout\es@indexfile=\es@output - -\newif\ifes@encapsulated - -\def\es@scroman#1{#1} -\edef\es@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\} - -\def\indexentry{% - \begingroup - \@sanitize - \es@indexentry} - -\begingroup - -\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\es@encap\relax -\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\es@openrange\relax -\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\es@closerange\relax - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@indexentry#1{% - \endgroup - \advance\es@processed\@ne - \es@encapsulatedfalse - \es@bar@idx#1|\@@ - \es@idxentry}% -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@idxentry#1{% - \in@{\es@scroman}{#1}% - \ifin@ - \advance\es@converted\@ne - \immediate\write\es@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\es@b|\ifes@encapsulated\es@p\fi esromanindex% - {\ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@slash\es@a\fi}}{#1}}% - \else - \immediate\write\es@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\es@b\ifes@encapsulated|\es@p\es@a\fi}{#1}}% - \fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{% - \def\es@b{#1}\def\es@a{#2}% - \ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@encapsulatedtrue\es@bar@eat#2\fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\es@p{#1}\def\es@a{#2}% - \edef\es@t{(}\ifx\es@t\es@p - \else\edef\es@t{)}\ifx\es@t\es@p - \else - \edef\es@a{\es@p\es@a}\let\es@p\@empty% - \fi\fi} -} - -\endgroup - -\input \es@input@file.\es@input@ext - -\immediate\closeout\es@indexfile - -\typeout{*****************} -\typeout{Se ha procesado: \es@input@file.\es@input@ext } -\typeout{Lineas leidas: \the\es@processed} -\typeout{Lineas convertidas: \the\es@converted} -\typeout{Resultado en: \es@output} -\ifnum\es@converted>\z@ - \typeout{Genere el indice a partir de ese archivo} -\else - \typeout{No se ha convertido nada. Se puede generar} - \typeout{el .ind directamente de \es@input@file.\es@input@ext} -\fi -\typeout{*****************} - -\@ifundefined{es@sdef}{\@@end}{} - -\endinput -%</indexes> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -% -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput - - - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index d643bded1b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\batchfile{spanish.ins} -\def\filedate{2007/02/21} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined - \Msg{**********************************************} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} - \Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} - \Msg{*} - \Msg{**********************************************} - \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} - \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} - \batchmode - \csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\keepsilent - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{spanish.ldf}{\from{spanish.dtx}{code}}% - \file{romanidx.sty}{\from{spanish.dtx}{indexes}}} -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 6beb68787b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,442 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{272} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{swedish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{swedish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{swedish.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v2.3d Swedish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `swedish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Swedish language definition file. A contribution -% was made by Sten Hellman HELLMAN@CERNVM.CERN.CH -% -% Further enhancements for version 2.0 were provided by -% Erik "Osthols <erik\_osthols@yahoo.com> -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{swedish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{swedish.dtx} -% -% \changes{swedish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in -% \file{babel.com}} -% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a} -% \changes{swedish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for LaTeX2e} -% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/28}{Update for release 3.5} -% \changes{swedish-2.0}{1996/01/24}{Introduced active double quote} -% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the -% beginning.} -% \changes{swedish-2.3d}{2001/11/16}{Fixed a \cs{changes} entry} -% -% \section{The Swedish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. Contributions were made by Sten Hellman -% (\texttt{HELLMAN@CERNVM.CERN.CH}) and Erik \"Osthols -% (\texttt{erik\_osthols@yahoo.com}).} defines all the -% language-specific macros for the Swedish language. This -% file has borrowed heavily from |finnish.dtx| and |germanb.dtx|. -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:swedish-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. The vertical placement of the "umlaut" in some letters -% can be controlled this way. -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |"a| & Gives \"a, also implemented for |"A|, |"o| and |"O|. \\ -% |"w|, |"W| & gives {\aa} and {\AA}. \\ -% |"ff| & for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|. Used for compound -% words, such as \texttt{stra|"|ff{\aa}nge}, which -% should be hyphenated as \texttt{straff-f{\aa}nge}. -% This is also implemented for b, d, f, g, l, m, n, -% p, r, s, and t. \\ -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. This should be -% used for compound words, such as -% ``\texttt{stra|"|ffinr\"attning}'', -% which should not have the ligature ``ffi''. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word, such as e. g. in -% ``x|"-|axeln''. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for words that should break at some sign such as -% \texttt{och/|""|eller}). \\ -% |"~| & for an explicit hyphen without a breakpoint; useful for -% expressions such as ``2|"~|3 veckor'' where no linebreak -% is desirable. \\ -% |"=| & an explicit hyphen sign allowing subsequent hyphenation, -% for expressions such as ``studiebidrag och \newline -% -l{\aa}n''. \\ -% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{swedish.sty}}\label{tab:swedish-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% Two variations for formatting of dates are added. \cs{datesymd} -% makes \cs{today} output dates formatted as YYYY-MM-DD, which is -% commonly used in Sweden today. \cs{datesdmy} formats the date as -% D/M YYYY, which is also very common in Sweden. These commands -% should be issued after \cs{begin{document}}. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{swedish}\captionsswedish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{swedish} will be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@swedish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{swedish-1.0c}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} -% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation -% patterns were loaded.} -% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% producew the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@swedish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Swedish} - \adddialect\l@swedish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the -% Swedish language. The reason for this is that a user might want -% to switch back and forth between languages. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsswedish} -% The macro |\captionsswedish| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{removed type in definition of -% \cs{contentsname}} -% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{added definition for \cs{enclname}} -% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{made definition of \cs{refname} -% pluralis} -% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} -% and \cs{prefacename}} -% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{swedish-1.1b}{1993/09/16}{Added translations} -% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/07/27}{Changed \cs{aa} to -% \cs{csname}\texttt{ aa}\cs{endcsname}, to make \cs{uppercase} do -% the right thing} -% \changes{swedish-1.3f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsswedish{% - \def\prefacename{F\"orord}% - \def\refname{Referenser}% - \def\abstractname{Sammanfattning}% - \def\bibname{Litteraturf\"orteckning}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Bilaga}% - \def\contentsname{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% - \def\indexname{Sakregister}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/19}{Added full stop after ``Bil''} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\enclname{Bil.}% - \def\ccname{Kopia f\"or k\"annedom}% - \def\headtoname{Till}% in letter - \def\pagename{Sida}% - \def\seename{se}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Changed \cs{alsoname} from -% `\texttt{se ocks\aa}'} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\alsoname{se \"aven}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{swedish-1.3g}{1995/11/03}{Replaced `Proof' by its -% translation} -% \changes{swedish-2.3b}{2000/09/26}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{swedish-2.3c}{2001/03/12}{Provided translation for -% Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordlista}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateswedish} -% The macro |\dateswedish| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Swedish dates. -% \changes{swedish-2.2}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{swedish-2.2}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateswedish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day~\ifcase\month\or - januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or - juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or - december\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datesymd} -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added} -% The macro |\datesymd| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, common in Sweden. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datesymd{% - \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datesdmy} -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added} -% The macro |\datesdmy| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Swedish dates in the format DD/MM YYYY, also common in -% Sweden. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datesdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\swedishhyphenmins} -% The swedish hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/06/02}{use \cs{swedishhyphenmins} to -% store the correct values} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{swedish}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasswedish} -% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Added \cs{bbl@frenchspacing}} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasswedish} -% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Added \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}} -% The macro |\extrasswedish| performs all the extra definitions -% needed for the Swedish language. The macro |\noextrasswedish| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasswedish|. -% -% For Swedish texts |\frenchspacing| should be in effect. We make -% sure this is the case and reset it if necessary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Swedish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done -% once, later on its definition may vary. -% \changes{swedish-2.0}{1996/01/24}{Added active double quote -% character} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasswedish{\languageshorthands{swedish}} -\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{swedish-2.2b}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Swedish} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The ``umlaut'' accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the -% ``umlaut'' dots. The redefinition is done with the help of -% |\umlautlow|. -%^^A PROBLEM: -%^^A What happens to ``umlaut'' -%^^A characters entered using e. g. latin input encoding? They should -%^^A be lowered as well. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active -% character. This character is then used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:swedish-quote}. -% -% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a -% couple of `support' macros. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep -% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts and {\aa}. -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{added \cs{allowhyphens}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"w}{\textormath{{\aa}\allowhyphens}{\ddot w}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"W}{\textormath{{\AA}\allowhyphens}{\ddot W}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -% \end{macrocode} -% discretionary commands -%^^A PROBLEM: -%^^A Will these allow subsequent hyphenation? Perhaps we need to -%^^A add \cs{allowhyphens} here as well? -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \def\indexeqs{=} -% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/28}{changed definition of -% \texttt{"\protect\indexeqs}, \cs{-} and \texttt{"~}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"~}{% - \textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\-} -% Redefinition of |\-|. The new version of |\-| should indicate an -% extra hyphenation position, while allowing other hyphenation -% positions to be generated automatically. The standard behaviour -% of \TeX\ in this respect is very unfortunate for languages such -% as Dutch, Finnish, German and Swedish, where long compound words -% are quite normal and all one needs is a means to indicate an -% extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that \TeX\ can -% generate from the hyphenation patterns. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\-} -\addto\extrasswedish{\def\-{\allowhyphens - \discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{swedish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 34916c0021f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{swedish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{swedish.ldf}{\from{swedish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 8b8f6cd3af9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,961 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%%% ==================================================================== -%%% @TeX-file{ -%%% author = "Johannes L. Braams", -%%% version = "1.04", -%%% date = "06 January 1997", -%%% time = "23:15:14 MET", -%%% filename = "tb1202.tex", -%%% address = "TeXniek, -%%% Kersengaarde 33 -%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer -%%% The Netherlands", -%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19", -%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95", -%%% checksum = "19810 933 5016 39417", -%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "", -%%% docstring = "The article on babel that apeared in -%%% TuGboat Volume 12, No. 2. -%%% -%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 -%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the -%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word -%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and -%%% characters. This is produced by Robert -%%% Solovay's checksum utility.", -%%% } -%%% ==================================================================== -% tb32braa.ltx - -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{% - \documentclass{ltugboat} - \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 12 (1991), No. 2} - \def\midrtitle{} - \def\PrelimDraftfooter{} - \let\TBmaketitle\maketitle - \SelfDocumenting - \setcounter{page}{291} - }{% - \documentclass{article} - \newcommand\address[1]{} - \newcommand\netaddress[1]{} - \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}} - \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}} -\usepackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} -\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\makeatletter -% ------------------------------------------------- -% Definitions copied from doc.sty by FMi -% ------------------------------------------------- -{\obeyspaces% -\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces% -\def {\egroup\space\hbox\bgroup\it}\m@ta}} -\def\m@ta#1{\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$\egroup\endgroup} - -% ------------------------------------------------- -% define \dlqq so that we can give an example of "' -% ------------------------------------------------- -\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}% - \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@ - \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@ - \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}} -% -% ------------------------------------------------- -% To demonstrate german double quotes (from german.tex) -% ------------------------------------------------- -\def\allowhyphens{\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip} -\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\dimen\z@\ht\z@ - \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@ - \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@ } -% (this lowers the german left quotes to the same level as the comma.) - -\def\@glqq{{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else - \let\@SF\empty \fi \leavevmode - \set@low@box{''}\box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens\@SF\relax}} -\def\glqq{\protect\@glqq} -\def\@grqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else - \let\@SF\empty \fi \kern-.07em``\kern.07em\@SF\relax}%'' -\def\grqq{\protect\@grqq} -% -% ------------------------------------------------- -% To demonstrate french double quotes (from german.tex) -% ------------------------------------------------- -\def\@flqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else - \let\@SF\empty \fi - \ifmmode \ll \else \leavevmode - \raise .2ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle \ll $}\fi \@SF\relax} -\def\flqq{\protect\@flqq} -\def\@frqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else - \let\@SF\empty \fi - \ifmmode \gg \else \leavevmode - \raise .2ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle \gg $}\fi \@SF\relax} -\def\frqq{\protect\@frqq} -%+ -% Some extra definitions needed in the article -%- -\def\bsl{\char'134} -\makeatother - -\begin{document} -\title {Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use - with \LaTeX's standard document styles% - \thanks{During the development ideas from Nico Poppelier, - Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used.} - } - -\author{Johannes Braams} -\address{% - \TeX niek\\ - Kersengaarde 33\\ - 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\ - The Netherlands} -\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl} -\date{06 January 1997 \\ - Version 1.04} - -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of document - styles that are meant to be used, but also serve as examples for - other users to create their own document styles. These styles have - become very popular among \LaTeX\ users. But it should be kept in - mind that they were designed for American tastes and contain a - number of hard-wired texts. This article describes a set of - document-style options that can be used in combination with the - standard styles, which makes the latter adaptable to other - languages. -\end{abstract} - -\section{Introduction} - -Although Leslie Lamport has stated~\cite{LLth} that one should not try -and write \emph{one} document-style option to be used with \emph{all} -the standard document styles of \LaTeX, that is exactly what I~have -done with this system of style options. The reasons for this approach -will be explained in section~\ref{why}. - -A lot of the ideas incorporated in this set of files come from the -work of Hubert Partl~\cite{HP}, \file{german.tex}. Some parts in the -implementation are different, others are the same. It will be shown -that \file{german.tex} can be modified to fit into this scheme of -style options. - -\section{Why \babel?}\label{why} - -When I~first started using \LaTeX\ I~was very happy with just the -style files that are distributed with the standard distributions of -\TeX\ and \LaTeX. That means, as long as I~made texts in English I~was -happy. Then as other users found out about \LaTeX\ and its advantages, -they started using it for texts in languages other than English. As -I~was the most experienced \LaTeX\ user at the time, they came to me -and asked me `When I'm writing a report in Dutch I~don't want chapters -to be named ``Chapter'', I~want them to be named ``Hoofdstuk'', how do -you change that?'. At that time I~didn't know, but I soon found out. -The first thing I~found was that Leslie Lamport states~\cite[pages -85--86]{LLbook} that you have to redefine the command |\@chapapp| -to get the desired result. This looked rather promising to me, so -I~had a look at the style files to find out how other such strings as -``Figure'' might be redefined. It was then that I~found out that -|\@chapapp| is the \emph{only} string defined this way, whereas -all others are hard-wired into the style. - -My first solution to this problem was to create a new document style -file called \file{artikel.sty} as a ``Dutch'' counterpart to -\file{article.sty}. The same was done for \file{report.sty}. This is -exactly what Leslie Lamport suggests~\cite{LLth}. This approach has -one major drawback however: you get two copies of basically the same -file to maintain. This was discovered when newer releases of the -styles reached our site. The standard styles had to be replaced -\emph{and} edited all over again to get the ``Dutch'' versions back. -About the same time, in early 1988, a discussion on this subject -appeared in \TeXhax. One of the persons commenting was Hubert Partl. -The method he suggested was to modify the standard document styles by -replacing the hard-wired texts by macros such as |\@chapapp|. This -led me to my second attempt at a solution. I~modified the standard -styles (all four of them) as suggested, but while doing that added an -option, implemented like the option \texttt{draft}, by defining a -command |\ds@dutch|. This command would set a variable to indicate -which language was requested. This variable I~used later on in a -|\case| statement. In this |\case| statement a choice is made between -English, Dutch and possibly other languages for texts such as -``Figure'' and ``Contents''. Unfortunately, some of this implied -changing the secondary style files \file{xxx10.sty}, \file{xxx11.sty} -and \file{xxx12.sty}. This was unfortunate because one of the -research groups in our laboratories complained their document style -didn't work properly. It turned out that their style was a modified -\file{article.sty} that had been given a different name, but it still -loaded \file{art10.sty} etc. I~found a temporary solution, but I -still wasn't exactly happy with the situation. Besides this, the -drawback of replacing the document styles with newer versions still -existed. - -When after a while a new version of the \LaTeX\ distribution arrived -at our site, I~began to think about a different way to solve the -problem. In the meantime Hubert Partl had his \file{german.sty} -published in \TUB~\cite{HP}. His article pointed the way to a -different solution. Triggered by the discussion in \TeXhax\ in early -1989 about how to detect which is the main (primary) style when -processing a document, I~started work on what is now available as -\file{dutch.sty} version~1.0, dated may 1989\footnote{This file is - available from \texttt{listserv@hearn.bitnet} as file - \file{dutch.old}.}. While working on this style option I~discovered -that some parts could be borrowed from \file{german.sty}. This -`discovery' and some discussions I had with others at Euro\TeX89, the -fourth European \TeX\ Conference, held in september 1989 in Karlsruhe, -led me towards a more universal approach. The basic idea behind it -was, starting from the algorithm to detect the main style, to design -an approach with one common file that contained macro definitions -needed by a number of language-specific style options. Users specify -the name of any of these language-specific options as an option to the -|\documentstyle| command, and internally the common file is read. - -%This is the situation as it stands now. The rest of this article is -%devoted to a description of how the system of style options described -%above is implemented and what the possibilities are. I~realize that -%with the new \TeX\ 3.0 around and work being done on a new version of -%\LaTeX\ as well some of this work may become obsolete in the near -%future. But, taking into consideration the widespread use of the -%current versions of \TeX\ and \LaTeX\, I~think it may take some time -%before {\em everybody} is working with the new releases. - -%------------------------------------------------------------ -% All text above here was copied from babel.doc, the following -% section is new for this version of the article -%------------------------------------------------------------ -\section{\LaTeX\ and document-style files}\label{lat-docstyle} - -Before the I discuss some of the code in the \babel{} system I would -like to discuss the document-style mechanism used by \LaTeX. Every -\LaTeX\ document should start with a line like: -\begin{verbatim} -\documentstyle[opt1,opt2,...]{docstyle} -\end{verbatim} -This line of code instructs \LaTeX\ to first load the file -\file{docstyle.sty}. When that is done the `options' are processed -\emph{in the order specified}, by reading the files -\file{opt1.sty}\footnote{Except when the documentstyle defines the - control sequence {\tt\bsl ds@\meta{opt1}}; in that case this control - sequence will be executed.}, \file{opt2.sty}, etc. This implies that -definitions, made in the file \file{docstyle.sty} can be overridden in -one of the option files. It is even possible to redefine code from the -very kernel of \LaTeX, but you have to know what you are doing. - -Some care has to be taken in writing document-style options, because a -number of problems can occur. First of all, if a document-style option -should be modest in size; if it tries to redefine most of the code in -\file{docstyle.sty} I think you should write (and maintain) your own, -complete, document style. Next, as it was possible to override -definitions from the main file in an option file, it is of course also -possible to override definitions made in another option file. When -this happens, your document might depend on the order in which you -have specified your document-style options. - -This mechanism of overriding definitions from the main document style -is exploited in the \babel{} system. The macros that contain the -hard-wired texts are redefined in the common part of \babel{}, -replacing each of these texts with a unique macro. These macros have -to be defined in the language-specific files. - -\section{\LaTeX\ and multilingual documents}\label{lat-lingual} - -In a european environment it sometimes happens that one wants to write -a document that contains more than \emph{one} language. I have an -example of a document, published by the {\sc eec}, that contains 9 -(nine) different languages. Also in linguistics one can find documents -written in more than one language, i.e. to compare two languages. - -If you have to write such a multilingual document you should try to -conform to the typographical conventions in use for each language. A -well known example is the type of quotation marks used. \TeX\ supplies -the user with ``quoted text'', but a Dutch user might want to have -\dlqq quoted text'', whereas a German text should contain \glqq quoted -text\grqq\ and a frenchman would perhaps like to see something like -\flqq quoted text\frqq. These language specific conventions should be -implemented in a document-style option file for each language. These -files should then be useable with \emph{all} document styles. - -In such a multilingual document a user would specify the languages -used as options to the |\documentstyle| command. He would also want a -mechanism to be able to switch between these languages in a simple -way. When he would use \TeX\ version 3.0 for the processing of his -document, he would also want the hyphenation to come out right for the -different languages. - -\section{Overview of the \babel{} solution} - -\subsection{The core of the system} - -The problems described in sections~\ref{lat-docstyle} -and~\ref{lat-lingual} can be solved using the \babel{} system of -document-style options. - -The core of this system currently performs three functions. -\begin{enumerate} - -\item\label{switch} It defines a user interface for switching between - languages; - -\item\label{hyphs} It contains code to dynamically load several sets - of hyphenation patterns; - -\item\label{repair} It `repairs' the document styles provided in the - standard distribution of \LaTeX. - -\end{enumerate} - -Obviously part~\ref{hyphs} can only be used while running ini\TeX\ to -create a new format, whereas part~\ref{repair} should \emph{not} be -read by ini\TeX. Part~\ref{repair} should even disappear when \LaTeX\ -version 3.0 arrives, as the style files supplied with the new \LaTeX\ -will no longer be language specific. Part~\ref{switch} can either be -loaded into the format with multiple hyphenation patterns, or it can -be read while processing a document. - -For this reason the core of the \babel{} system is stored in two -separate files, \file{babel.switch}, containing parts~\ref{switch} -and~\ref{hyphs}, and \file{babel.sty} which contains -part~\ref{repair}. The file \file{babel.sty} will instruct \LaTeX\ to -load \file{babel.switch} if necessary, the file \file{babel.switch} -checks the format to see if hyphenation patterns \emph{can} be loaded. - -\subsection{Language specifics} - -The language switching mechanism contains a couple of hooks for the -developers of language-specific document-style options. - -First of all the macro |\originalTeX| should be defined. Its function -is to disable special definitions made for a language to bring \TeX\ -into a `defined' state. A language-specific document-style option -might, for example, introduce an extra active character. It would then -also modify the definitions of |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize|. Such an -option would then define a macro to restore the original definitions -of these macros and restore the extra active character to its normal -category code. It would then |\let \originalTeX| to this `restoration' -macro. - -To enable the language-specific definitions three macros are provided -in the switching mechanism, |\captions|\meta{language}, -|\date|\meta{language} and |\extras|\meta{language}. - -The macro |\captions|\meta{language} should provide definitions for -the macros that replaced the hard-wired texts in the document style -and the macro |\date|\meta{language} should provide a definition for -|\today|. The real fun starts with the macro -|\extras|\meta{language}. This macro should activate all definitions -needed for \meta{language}. - -\section{The user interface} - -The user interface to the \babel{} system is quite simple. He should -specify the languages he wants to use in his document in the list of -document-style options. For instance, for a document in which both the -English and the Dutch language are used, the first line could read: -\begin{verbatim} -\documentstyle[a4,dutch,english]{artikel1} -\end{verbatim} -Please note that in this case the Dutch-specific definitions are -inactive when \LaTeX\ has finished processing document-style option -files. - -If the user then wants to switch from English to Dutch he would -include the command -\begin{verbatim} -\selectlanguage{dutch} -\end{verbatim} -before starting to write Dutch. - -If a user wants to write a document-style option of his own he might -like to define a macro that checks which language is in use at the -time the macro is executed. For this purpose the macro -|\iflanguage{|\meta{language}|}{|\meta{then-clause}|}{|% -\meta{else-clause}|}| is available. - -\section{Implementation of the core of the system} - -In this section I would like to discuss some parts of the -implementation of the \babel{} system. Not all code will be shown, -because some parts of it are just series of slightly modified code -from the standard document styles. The files are fully documented and -interested readers can print them if they have access to the -\texttt{doc} option, described by Frank Mittelbach. - -The description of the macros that follows is based on an environment -using \TeX~3.x, together with a version of \file{lplain.tex} based on -\file{plain.tex} version~3.x. The actual implementation allows for -other situations as well, i.e a version of \file{babel.sty} for -\TeX~2.x will be available. - -\subsection{Switching languages}\label{lang-switch} - -For each language to be used in a document a control sequence of the -form |\l@|\meta{language} has to be defined. This will either be done -while loading hyphenation patterns or while loading the -language-specific file. The implementation of -\hbox{|\selectlanguage{|\meta{language}|}|} and\\ -\hbox{|\iflanguage{|\meta{language}|}{|\meta{then case}|}{|\meta{else - case}|}|} is based on the existence of -\hbox{|\l@|\meta{language}}. - -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\def\selectlanguage#1{% - \@ifundefined{l@#1} - {\@nolanerr{#1}} - {\originalTeX - \language=\expandafter\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\csname captions#1\endcsname - \expandafter\csname date#1\endcsname - \expandafter\csname extras#1\endcsname - \gdef\originalTeX{\expandafter\csname noextras#1\endcsname} - } -} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl selectlanguage}.} -\label{select} -\end{figure*} - -To switch from one language to another the macro |\selectlanguage| is -available. Its definition can be seen in figure~\ref{select}. The -first action it takes is to check whether the \meta{language} is -known, if it is not an error is signalled. If the language is known -|\originalTeX| is called upon to reset any previously set -language-specific definitions. Next the register |\language| is -updated and the three macros that should activate all -language-specific definitions are executed. Finally the macro -|\originalTeX| receives a new replacement text in order to be able to -deactivate the definitions just activated. - -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\def\iflanguage#1#2#3{% - \@ifundefined{l@#1} - {\@nolanerr{#1}} - {\ifnum\language=\expandafter\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - #2 \else #3 - \fi} -} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl iflanguage}} -\label{if} -\end{figure*} - -The macro |\iflanguage| (see figure~\ref{if}) will issue a warning -when its argument is an `unkown' language. It then goes on to compare -the value of |\language| and |\l@|\meta{language} and executes either -its secon or third argument. - -\subsection{Dynamically loading patterns} - -With the advent of \TeX~3.0 it has become possible to build a format -with more than one hyphenation pattern preloaded. The core of the -\babel\ system provides code, to be executed by ini\TeX\ \emph{only}, -to dynamically load hyphenation patterns. The only restriction is that -the implementation of \TeX\ that you use has to have rather high -settings of \texttt{trie\_size} and \texttt{trie\_op\_size} to -actually load several hyphenation patterns. - -For the purpose of dynamically loading hyphenation patterns a -`configuration file' has to be introduced. This file will be read by -ini\TeX. Each line should contain either a comment, nothing or the -name of a language and the name of the file that contains the -hyphenation patterns for that language. In figure~\ref{config} an -example of such a file, instructing ini\TeX\ to load patterns for -three languages, English, Dutch and German. - -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -% File : language.dat -% Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load. -english english.hyphenations - -dutch hyphen.dutch % Nederlands -german hyphen.ger -\end{verbatim} -\caption{An example configuration file}\label{config} -\end{figure*} - -The configuration file will be read line by line using \TeX's |\read| -primitive. Because the name of a file might be followed by a -space-token and comment (as in the example) a macro to process each -line is needed. The definition of this macro, |\process@language|, can -be found in figure~\ref{process}. As can be seen in the definition of -this macro, its second argument \emph{always} has to be followed by a -space-token. The effect of this is that any trailing spaces are -removed. -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\def\process@language#1 #2 {% - \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname - \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname - \input #2} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl process@language}.} -\label{process} -\end{figure*} -The macro strips all spaces following its arguments. It's first -argument is used to define |\l@|\meta{language}. The macro -|\addlanguage| is basically a non-outer version of the plain \TeX\ -macro |\newlanguage|. The second argument of |\process@language| is -the name of the file containing the hyphenation patterns. Before the -file can be read, the register |\language| has to updated. - -The configuration file is read in a |\loop| (see figure~\ref{loop}). -When a record is read from the input file a check is done whether the -record was empty. If it was not, a space token is added to the end of -the string of tokens read. The reason for this is that we have to be -sure there always is at least \emph{one} space token present. When -that has been taken care of the data just read can be processed. The -last thing to do is to check the status of the input file, in order to -decide whether \TeX\ has to continue processing the |\loop|. When all -patterns have been processed the value of |\language| is restored. - -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\loop - \read1 to \@config@line - \ifx\@config@line\empty - \else - \edef\@config@line{\@config@line\space} - \expandafter\process@language\@config@line - \fi - \ifeof1 \@morefalse \fi - \if@more\repeat -\language=0 -\end{verbatim} -\caption{Reading the configuration file line by line} -\label{loop} -\end{figure*} - -\subsection{`Repairing' \LaTeX's standard document styles} - -A large part of the core of the \babel{} system is dedicated to -`repair' the standard document styles. This means redefining the -macros in table~\ref{macros}. - -\begin{table*}[htb] -\DeleteShortVerb{\|} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{l | c c c c} -macro & article & report & book & letter \\ -\hline -\tt\bsl fnum@figure & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ \\ -\tt\bsl fnum@table & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ \\ -\tt\bsl tableofcontents & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl listoffigures & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl listoftables & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl thebibliography & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl theindex & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl abstract & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl part & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl chapter & & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl appendix & & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\ -\tt\bsl cc & & & & $\times$ \\ -\tt\bsl encl & & & & $\times$ \\ -\tt\bsl ps@headings & & & & $\times$ \\ -\end{tabular} -\caption{macros that need to be redefined for the four standard document - styles.} -\label{macros} -\end{center} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} -\end{table*} - -As an example of the way the macros have to be redefined, the -redefinition of |\tableofcontents| is shown in figure~\ref{content}. -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\@ifundefined{contentsname} - {\def\tableofcontents - {\section*{\contentsname - \@mkboth{\uppercase\expandafter{\contentsname}} - {\uppercase\expandafter{\contentsname}} - } - \@starttoc{toc} - } - } - {} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{An example of redefining a command}\label{content} -\end{figure*} - -The standard styles can be distinguished by checking the existence of -the macros |\chapter| (not in \file{article} and \texttt{letter}) and -|\opening| (only in \texttt{letter}). The result of these checks is -stored in the macro |\doc@style|. When |\doc@style| already exists -(which is the case when for instance \file{artikel1.sty} is -used~\cite{BEP}) it is not superseded (see figure~\ref{maindoc}). - -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\@ifundefined{doc@style} - {\def\doc@style{0} - \@ifundefined{opening} - {\@ifundefined{chapter} - {\def\doc@style{1}} - {\def\doc@style{2}} - }{\def\doc@style{3}} - }{\relax} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{Determining the main document style} -\label{maindoc} -\end{figure*} - -\section{Implementing a language specific document-style option file} - -To illustrate the way a language specific file can be implemented the -file \file{dutch.sty} is discussed here. Note that not all of the code -containde in the file \file{dutch.sty} is shown here, only those parts -that are of interest for the scope of this article are included. If -the reader would like to see the complete code, he can print all files -in the \babel{} system, using the file \file{doc.sty}, described by -Frank Mittelbach in~\cite{docsty}. - -\subsection{Compatibilty with plain \TeX} -The file \file{german.tex}~\cite{HP} was written in such a way that it -can be used by both plain \TeX\ users and \LaTeX\ users. This seemed a -good idea, so all files in the \babel{} system can be processed by -both plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX. But some of the ``useful hacks'' from -\LaTeX\ are used, so for a plain \TeX\ user they have to be defined. -For this purpose the format is checked at the start of a language -specific file. If the format is \texttt{plain} an extra file, called -\file{latexhax.sty} is read. -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -{\def\format{plain} -\ifx\fmtname\format - \expandafter\ifx\csname @ifundefined\endcsname\relax - \gdef\next{latexhax.sty} - \aftergroup\input\aftergroup\next - \fi -\fi} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{Conditonal loading of \file{latexhax.sty}} -\end{figure*} - -This file should be read only once, so another check is done on the -existence of one of the commands defined there. - -A new group is started to keep the definition of the macro -|\format|, which is used in the following if statement, local. -When the current format turns out to be plain \TeX\ the file -\file{latexhax.sty} has to be read. But the definitions in that file -should remain valid after the group is closed. This could be -accomplished by making all definitions \texttt{global}, but another -solution is to tell \TeX\ to process the file \file{latexhax.sty} -\emph{after} the current group has been closed. The command -|\aftergroup| puts the next token on a list to be processed after -the group. - -\subsection{Switching to the Dutch language} -In section~\ref{lang-switch} the names of macros needed to switch to a -language have been described. In figure~\ref{switchdutch} these macros -and their definition are shown for the Dutch language. -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\def\captionsdutch{\gdef\refname{Referenties}% - \gdef\abstractname{Samenvatting}% - \gdef\bibname{Bibliografie}% - ... - \gdef\pagename{Pagina}} - -\def\datedutch{% - \gdef\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or - mei\or juni\or juli\or augustus\or - september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi - \space \number\year}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"\active - -\gdef\extrasdutch{% - \global\let\dospecials\dutch@dospecials - \global\let\@sanitize\dutch@sanitize - \catcode`\"\active - \gdef"{\protect\dutch@active@dq} - \gdef\"{\protect\@umlaut} -}\endgroup - -\def\noextrasdutch{% - \catcode`\"12 - \global\let\dospecials\original@dospecials - \global\let\@sanitize\original@sanitize - \global\let\"\dieresis -} -\end{verbatim} -\caption{The macros needed to switch to the Dutch language} -\label{switchdutch} -\end{figure*} - -The definitions of |\captionsdutch| and |\datedutch| are pretty -straightforward and need not be discussed. The macro |\extrasdutch| -will be discussed in some more detail. - -First, because for Dutch (as well as for German) the \texttt{"} -character is made active, the \LaTeX\ macros |\dospecials| and -|\@sanitize| have to be redefined to include this character as well. -The new definitions are implemented as two special commands, so we -globally |\let| the originals to their new versions. Then the -\texttt{"} character is made active and is defined. Then, to prevent -an error when |\"| appears in a moving argument, the macro |\"| is -redefined and made robust. All this is done inside a group to keep the -category code change for the \texttt{"} character local. - -The macro |\extrasdutch| has a counterpart, |\noextrasdutch|, that -cancels the extra definitions made by |\extrasdutch|. It changes the -|\catcode| of the \texttt{"} character back to `other' and globally -|\let|s the macros |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize| to their original -definitions. The original definition of |\"| is restored as well. - -In figure~\ref{specials} the code needed to redefine |\dospecials| and -|\@makeother| is shown. -\begin{figure*}[htb] -\begin{verbatim} -\begingroup - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% - \xdef\dutch@dospecials{\dospecials\do\"}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax -% do nothing if \@sanitize is undefined... - \else - \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}% - \xdef\dutch@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother\"}% - \fi -\endgroup - -\global\let\original@dospecials\dospecials -\global\let\original@sanitize\@sanitize -\end{verbatim} -\caption{Code needed for the redefinition of {\tt\bsl dospecials} and - {\tt\bsl @makeother}.} -\label{specials} -\end{figure*} - -\subsection{An extra active character} - -All the code disccussed sofar is necessary because we need an extra -active character. This character is then used as indicated in -table~\ref{dutch-quote}. One of the reasons for this is that in the -Dutch language a word with an umlaut can be hyphenated just before the -letter with the umlaut, but the umlaut has to disappear if the word is -broken between the previous letter and the accented letter. - -\begin{table*}[htb] -\centering -\begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -\verb="a= & \verb=\"a= which hyphenates as \verb=-a=; - also implemented for the other letters. \\ -\verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -\verb="-= & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation - in the rest of the word. \\ -\verb="`= & lowered double left quotes (see example below).\\ -\verb="'= & normal double right quotes. \\ -\verb=\-= & like the old \verb=\-=, but allowing hyphenation - in the rest of the word. -\end{tabular} -\caption{The extra definitions made by \file{dutch.sty}} -\label{dutch-quote} -\end{table*} - -In~\cite{treebus} the quoting conventions for the Dutch language are -discussed. The preferred convention is the single-quote Anglo-American -convention, i.e. `This is a quote'. An alternative is the slightly -old-fashioned Dutch method with initial double quotes lowered to the -baseline, \dlqq This is a quote'', which should be typed as -\texttt{"`This is a quote"'}. - -\subsubsection{Supporting macro definitions} - -The definition of the active \texttt{"} character needs a couple of -support macros. The macro |\allowhyphens| is used make hyphenation of -word possible where it otherwise would be inhibited by \TeX. Basically -its definition is nothing more than |\nobreak \hskip 0pt plus 0pt|. -\begin{verbatim} -\gdef\allowhyphens{\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip} -\end{verbatim} - -Then a macro is defined to lower the Dutch left double quote to the -same level as the comma. It prepares a low double opening quote in box -register~0. This macro was copied form \file{german.tex}. -\begin{verbatim} -\gdef\set@low@box#1{% - \setbox\tw@\hbox{,} \setbox\z@\hbox{#1} - \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@ - \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@} - \ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@} -\end{verbatim} -The macro |\set@low@box| is used to define low opening quotes. Since -it may be used in arguments to other macros it needs to be protected. -\begin{verbatim} -\gdef\dlqq{\protect\@dlqq} -\gdef\@dlqq{{% - \ifhmode - \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor} - \else - \let\@SF\empty - \fi - \leavevmode\set@low@box{''} - \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens\@SF\relax}} -\end{verbatim} -For reasons of symmetry we also define |"'|. This command is defined -similar to |\dlqq|, except that the quotes aren't lowered to the -baseline. -\begin{verbatim} -\gdef\@drqq{{% - \ifhmode - \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor} - \else - \let\@SF\empty - \fi - ''\@SF\relax}} -\end{verbatim} -The original double quote character is saved in the macro |\dq| to -keep it available. -\begin{verbatim} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 - \gdef\dq{"} -\endgroup -\end{verbatim} -The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresis|. The resason -for this is that if a font with a different encoding scheme is used -the definition of |\"| might not be the plain \TeX\ one. -\begin{verbatim} -\global\let\dieresis\" -\end{verbatim} - -In the Dutch language vowels with a dieresis or umlaut accent are -treated specially. If a hyphenation occurs before a vowel-plus-umlaut, -the umlaut should disappear. To be able to do this, the hyphenation -break behaviour for the five vowels, both lowercase and uppercase, -could be defined first in terms of |\discretionary|. But this results -in a large |\if|-construct in the definition of the active |"|. - -As both Knuth and Lamport have pointed out, a user should not use |"| -when he really means something like |''|. For this reason no -distinction is made between vowels and consonants. Therefore one -macro, |\@umlaut|, specifies the hyphenation break behaviour for all -letters. -\begin{verbatim} -\def\@umlaut#1{% - \allowhyphens% - \discretionary{-}{#1}{\dieresis #1}% - \allowhyphens} -\end{verbatim} - -The last support macro to be defined is |\dutch@active@dq|. -\begin{verbatim} -\gdef\dutch@active@dq#1{% - \if\string#1`\dlqq{}% -\else\if\string#1'\drqq{}% -\else\if\string#1-\allowhyphens-\allowhyphens% -\else\if\string#1|\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% -\else\if\string#1i\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\dieresis\i}% - \allowhyphens% -\else\if\string#1j\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{j}{\dieresis\j}% - \allowhyphens% -\else \@umlaut{#1}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} -\end{verbatim} -The macro reads the next token and performs some appropriate action. -If no special action is defined, it will produce an umlaut accent on -top of argument~1. - -The last definition needed is a replacement for |\-|. The new version -of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while allowing -other hyphenation positions to be generated automatically. The -standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is very unfortunate for -languages such as Dutch and German, where long compound words are -quite normal and all one needs is a means to indicate an extra -hyphenation position on top of the ones that \TeX\ can generate from -the hyphenation patterns. -\begin{verbatim} -\def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Activating the definitions} - -The last action that should be performed by a language specific file, -is activating it's definitions. Before doing that the macro -|\originalTeX| should be definined. -\begin{verbatim} -\@ifundefined{originalTeX}{\let\originalTeX\relax}{} -\end{verbatim} - -Also, the macro |\l@|\meta{language} should be defined. If it hasn't -already been defined, this means that no hyphenation patterns were -loaded for this language. -% This means that \emph{no} hyphenation will take place -\begin{verbatim} -\@ifundefined{l@dutch}{\addlanguage{dutch}}{} -\selectlanguage{dutch} -\end{verbatim} - -\section{Conclusion} - -In this article a system of document-style option files has been -presented that supports the multilingual use of \LaTeX. Some of the -code involved has been discussed. The actual files will me made -available through the international networks. They will be stored in -the fileserver in the Netherlands (address: -\texttt{LISTSERV@HEARN.BITNET}), the file \file{babel readme} will -explain what you need to get to be able to use the system. The system -was developed using the \Lopt{doc} option, so the files available are -fully documented. - -\begin{thebibliography}{9} - \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth, - \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986. - \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport, - \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley, 1986. - \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus. - \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van tekst.} - SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout - design and typography. - \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl, - \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72. - \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport, - in: \TeXhax\ Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 februari 1989. - \bibitem{docsty}Frank Mittelbach, - \emph{The \Lopt{doc}-option}, - \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#2, p.~245--273. - \bibitem{BEP}Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier, - \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles}, - \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406. - \bibitem{ilatex}Joachim Schrod, - \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use}, - \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90. -\end{thebibliography} - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a1f2a78d151..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,266 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%%% ==================================================================== -%%% @TeX-file{ -%%% author = "Johannes L. Braams", -%%% version = "1.02", -%%% date = "06 January 1997", -%%% time = "23:18:11 MET", -%%% filename = "tb1401.tex", -%%% address = "TeXniek, -%%% Kersengaarde 33 -%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer -%%% The Netherlands", -%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19", -%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95", -%%% checksum = "33086 238 1209 9472", -%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "", -%%% docstring = "The update article on babel that appeared -%%% in TUGboat Volume 14 No 1. -%%% -%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 -%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the -%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word -%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and -%%% characters. This is produced by Robert -%%% Solovay's checksum utility.", -%%% } -%%% ==================================================================== -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{% - \documentclass{ltugboat} - \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 14 (1993), No. 1} - \def\midrtitle{} - \def\PrelimDraftfooter{} - \let\TBmaketitle\maketitle - \setcounter{page}{60} - }{% - \documentclass{article} - \newcommand\address[1]{} - \newcommand\netaddress[1]{} - \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}} - \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax} - \newcommand{\plain}{\texttt{plain}}} -\usepackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} -% -\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\makeatletter -% ------------------------------------------------- -% Definitions copied from doc.sty by FMi -% ------------------------------------------------- -{\obeyspaces% -\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces% -\def {\egroup\space\hbox\bgroup\it}\m@ta}} -\def\m@ta#1{\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$\egroup\endgroup} -% -{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12|gdef|bslash{\}} -% -\makeatother -\newcommand{\bsl}{\protect\bslash} - - -\begin{document} -\title{An update on the \babel\ system} -\author{Johannes Braams} -\address{% - \TeX niek\\ - Kersengaarde 33\\ - 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\ - The Netherlands} -\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl} -\date{06 January 1997 \\ - Version 1.02} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - This article describes the changes that have been made to the - \babel\ system, since the article describing the system appeared in - \TUB\ Volume 12, number 2. This article announces the release of a - new version of the \babel\ system. -\end{abstract} - -\section{Introduction} - -Since the publication of the \babel\ system in \TUB~\cite{bab} several -changes have occurred. With the new release of \LaTeX\ -- which -appeared at the end of 1991 -- the internationalised version I\LaTeX, -prepared by Joachim Schrod~\cite{ilatex} was withdrawn. But some of -its functionality was still needed, so a modification of the \babel\ -system was necessary. - -Besides this a couple of bugs were reported and had to be fixed. The -major problem was that the language changing commands were not -`local', they contained global definitions. In the current version -these commands obey grouping correctly. - -Some macros that formerly were in language-specific files have been -moved to the core of the system, because they are being used in -several language-specific files. - -\section{Changes to the core of \babel} - -The changes to the core of the \babel\ system are the most extensive. - -\subsection*{{\tt\bsl selectlanguage}} -The \babel\ user-command |\selectlanguage| now also accepts a control -sequence as its argument. This was included to provide compatibility -for users who were used to the syntax of the original -\file{german.tex}, but wanted to switch to \babel. The escape -character is `peeled off' and the name of the control sequence is then -used as the name of the language to select. - -Another change to the |\selectlanguage| macro is that it now stores -the name of the current language in the control sequence -|\languagename|. The contents of this control sequence could be tested -in the following way: - -\begin{verbatim} - \edef\tmp{\string english} - \ifx\languagename\tmp - ... - \else - ... - \fi -\end{verbatim} - -The construction with |\string| is necessary because -|\languagename| returns the name with characters of category code -\texttt{12} (other). - -\subsection*{Saving macro definitions} - -A new way of handling macros that are temporarily \emph{re}defined was -developed by Bernd Raichle and included in the core of the \babel\ -system. Two new macros, for use in the language-specific files have -been introduced.\\ -These macros, |\babel@savevariable|\meta{register} and -|\babel@save|\meta{macro}, append code to |\originalTeX|. This code -restores the value (or meaning) of what was saved when |\originalTeX| -was executed. - -\subsection*{Special characters} - -Some of the language-specific files introduce one or more characters -that are special in some way. Such characters have to be added to -|\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize| too for \LaTeX) whenever their special -meaning is activated. But, they may have to be removed again when -another language, which doesn't use them, is in effect. - -To this end two new control sequences, that are meant to be used in -the language-specific files are introduced. They are -|\babel@add@special| and |\babel@remove@special| and perform the -necessary tasks. - -\subsection*{Additional facilities} - -A specific request from Joachim Schrod for \babel, was the possibility -to extend the definition of a control sequence on the fly. It should, -for instance, be possible that the user adds a macro of his own to the -definition of |\extrasenglish|. - -This feature is now provided by the macro\\ - |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\ code}|}|. - It is now used throughout the -language-specific files to build the macros |\extras|\meta{lang} and -|\noextras|\meta{lang}. - -The support macros |\allowhyphens|,\\ |\set@low@box| and |\save@sf@q| -have been moved from the language-specific files to the core of the -\babel\ system. - -\subsection{The files} - -In the previous release a file called \file{latexhax.com} was -provided. This was needed to provide some macros normally defined by -\LaTeX, to \plain~\TeX\ users. The need for this file has been removed -in the current release of the \babel\ system. - -In the previous release of the system, four different files were -provided (all derived from \file{hyphen.doc} that were needed for -different combinations of versions of \TeX\ and \file{plain.tex} or -\file{lplain.tex}. This has been changed. In the current version only -two different files are derived from \file{hyphen.doc}. They are -\file{babel.switch} and \file{babel.hyphen}.\\ -The file \file{babel.switch} is needed for people who can't build a -new format or don't have \TeX\ version 3. The file \file{babel.hyphen} -should be loaded into the format by ini\TeX. It provides the macros -from \file{babel.switch}, but additionally it reads the file -\file{language.dat}, which specifies the languages for which -hyphenation patterns should be loaded. - -In the previous release the file \file{babel.com} contained -redefinitions for a lot of \LaTeX\ macros to replace texts with -control sequences. This has been removed, because it is no longer -necessary for releases of \LaTeX\ dated december 1991 or later. Those -who still have an older release of \LaTeX\ can produce a special -version of \file{babel.com} by including the docstrip option -\meta{names} when stripping the file \file{babel.doc}. - -With the release of the new version of Frank Mittelbach's \texttt{doc} -package the stripped files are no longer distributed. The distribution -of babel now includes a file \file{install.babel} with which you can -produce them (give the command \file{tex install.babel}). - -\section{Changes to the language specific files} - -Bernd Raichle has invented a solution for things like |\char"45| -when the |"| is active. His solution (from german 2.3e) has been -included in germanb and is copied for other language specific files -that have an active |"|. - -A few terms have been added to the |\captions|\meta{...} macros, -again following \file{german.tex}. These terms are |\prefacename|, -|\seename| and |\seealsoname|. I don't have the correct -translations for all languages yet, but that will be repaired as soon -as someone provides them to me. - -For the dutch language the behaviour of the active double quote has -been slightly modified. It has been noted that there is a difference -between |"e|, where a `trema' should be produced and |\"u|, where we -should get an `umlaut'. The difference between the two is that the -`trema' should disappear at a hyphenation point, whereas the `umlaut' -should not. - -\begin{thebibliography}{9} - \bibitem{bab} Johannes Braams, - \emph{Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use with - \LaTeX's standard document styles}, - \emph{TUGboat} 12 (1991) \#2, p.~291--301. - \bibitem{ilatex}Joachim Schrod, - \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use}, - \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90. -\end{thebibliography} -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex deleted file mode 100644 index f5f2b74fc4d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,448 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -%%% ==================================================================== -%%% @TeX-file{ -%%% author = "Johannes", -%%% version = "1.0", -%%% date = "05 December 1995", -%%% time = "22:43:54 MET", -%%% filename = "tbstatus.tex", -%%% address = "TeXniek, -%%% Kersengaarde 33 -%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer -%%% The Netherlands", -%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19", -%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95", -%%% checksum = "", -%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "", -%%% docstring = "This article is derived from my -%%% presentation at the EuroTeX'95 conference -%%% and will appear in a future issue of -%%% TuGboat. -%%% -%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 -%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the -%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word -%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and -%%% characters. This is produced by Robert -%%% Solovay's checksum utility.", -%%% } -%%% ==================================================================== -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{% - \documentclass{ltugboat} - \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 16 (1995), No. 4} - %\def\midrtitle{} - %\def\PrelimDraftfooter{} - %\let\TBmaketitle\maketitle - %\SelfDocumenting - \setcounter{page}{1} - }{% - \documentclass{article} - \newcommand\address[1]{} - \newcommand\netaddress[1]{} - \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}} - \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}} -\usepackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} - -\newcommand\figrule{\kern3pt\hrule\kern3pt} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\cls}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\opt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\meta}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\bs{\char'134} -\let\osn\oldstylenums - -\begin{document} - -\title{The status of \babel} -\author{Johannes L. Braams} -\address{% - \TeX niek\\ - Kersengaarde 33\\ - 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\ - The Netherlands} -\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl} -\date{september 1995} -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} - In this article I will give an overview of what has happened to - \babel\ lately. First I will briefly describe the history of \babel; - then I will introduce the concept of `shorthands'. New ways of - changing the `language' have been introduced and \babel\ can now - easily be adapted for local needs. Finally I will discuss some - compatibility issues. -\end{abstract} - -\section{A brief history of \babel} - -The first ideas of developing a set of macros to support typesetting -documents with \TeX\ in languages other than English developed around -the time of the Euro\TeX\ conference in Karls\-ruhe (\osn{1989}). Back -then I had created support for typesetting in Dutch by stealing -\file{german.tex} (by Hubert Partl c.s.) and modifying it for Dutch -conventions. This worked, but I was not completely satisfied as I hate -the duplication of code. Soon after that I found that more `copies' of -\file{german.tex} existed to support other languages. This led me to -the idea of creating a package that combined these kind of language -support packages. It would have to consist of at least two `layers': -all the code the various copies of \file{german.tex} had in common in -one place, loaded only once by \TeX, and a set of files with the code -needed to support language specific needs. During the Karlsruhe -conference the name `\babel' came up in discussions I had. It seemed -an appropriate name and I sticked to it. - -\begin{table}[hbt] - \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{l} - \hline - First ideas at Euro\protect\TeX'89 Karlsruhe\\ - First published in TUGboat 12--2\\ - Update article in TUGboat 14--1\\ - Presentation of new release at Euro\protect\TeX'95\\ - \hline - \end{tabular} - \caption{A brief history of \babel} - \end{center} -\end{table} - -After the conference I started to work on ``\babel, a multilingual -style-option system for use with \LaTeX' standard document styles''. -The first release with support for about half a dozen languages -appeared in the first half of \osn{1990}. In TUGboat volume \osn{12} -number \osn{2} an article appeared describing \babel. Soon thereafter -people started contributing translations for the `standard terms' for -languages not yet present in \babel. The next big update appeared in -\osn{1992}, accompanied by an article in TUGboat volume \osn{14} -number \osn{1}. The main new features were that an interface was added -to `push' and `pop' macro definitions and values of registers. Also -some code was moved from language files to the core of \babel. In -\osn{1994} some changes were needed to get \babel\ to work with -\LaTeXe. As it turned out a lot of problems were still unsolved, -amongst which the incompatibility between \babel\ and the use of -\textsc{T}\osn{1} encoded fonts was most important. - -\noindent Therefore \babel\ version \osn{3}.\osn{5} has appeared. -It's main features are: - -\begin{itemize} -\item complete rewrite of the way active characters are dealt with; -\item new ways to switch the language; -\item A language switch is also written to the \file{.aux} file; -\item possibility to `configure' the language specific files; -\item extended syntax of \file{language.dat}; -\item compatibility with both the \pkg{inputenc} and\\ - \pkg{fontenc} packages; -\item new languages (breton, estonian, irish, scottish, lower and - upper sorbian). -\end{itemize} - -\noindent These changes are described in the remainder of this article. - -\section{Shorthands and active characters} - -During \babel's lifetime the number of languages for which one or more -characters were made active has grown. Until \babel\ release -\osn{3}.\osn{4} this needed a lot of duplication of code for each -extra active character. A situation with which I obviously was not -very happy as I hate the duplication of code. Another problematic -aspect of the way \babel\ dealt with active characters was the way -\babel\ made it possible to still use them in the arguments of cross -referencing commands. \textsf{Babel} did this with a trick that -involves the use of |\meaning|. This resulted in the fact that the -argument of |\label| was no longer expanded by \TeX. - -Because of these problems I set out to find a different implementation -of active characters. A starting point was that a character that is -made active should remain active for the rest of the document; only -it's definition should change. During the development of this new -implementation it was suggested in discussions I had within the -\LaTeX3 team to devise a way to have `different kinds' of active -characters. Out of this discussion came the current `shorthands'. - -\begin{quote} - \textsl{A shorthand is a sequence of one or two characters that - expands to arbitrary \TeX\ code.} -\end{quote} - -These shorthands are implemented in such a way that there are three -levels of shorthands: - -\begin{itemize} -\item user level -\item language level -\item system level -\end{itemize} - -\noindent Shorthands can be used for different kinds of things: -\begin{itemize} -\item the character \verb=~= is redefined by \babel\ as a one - character, system level shorthand; -\item In some languages shorthands such as \verb="a= are defined to be - able to hyphenate the word; -\item In some languages shorthands such as \verb=!= are used to insert - the right amount of white space. -\end{itemize} - -When you want to use or define shorthands you should keep the -following in mind: -\begin{itemize} -\item User level takes precedence over language level; -\item Language level takes precedence over system level; -\item One character shorthands take precedence over two character - shorthands; -\item Shorthands are written unexpanded to \file{.aux} files. -\end{itemize} - -\noindent In table~\ref{tab:sh-ov} an overview is given of the -various shorthand characters that are used for different languages. - -\begin{table}[ht] - \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - \hline - \texttt{\char'176} & system, catalan, estonian, galician, spanish \\ - \texttt{:} & breton, francais, turkish \\ - \texttt{;} & breton, francais \\ - \texttt{!} & breton, francais, turkish \\ - \texttt{?} & breton, francais \\ - \texttt{"} & catalan, danish, dutch, estonian, finnish\\ - & galician, german, polish, portuguese, slovene\\ - & spanish, upper~sorbian\\ - \texttt{`} & catalan (optional)\\ - \texttt{'} & catalan, galician, spanish (optional)\\ - \texttt{\char'136} & esperanto\\ - \texttt{=} & turkish \\ - \hline - \end{tabular} - \caption{Overview of shorthands}\label{tab:sh-ov} - \end{center} -\end{table} - -Note that the acute and grave characters are only used as shorthand -characters when the options \opt{activeacute} and \opt{activegrave} -are used. - -On the user level three additional commands are available to deal with -shorthands: -\begin{description} -\item[\texttt{\bs useshorthands}] This command takes one argument, the - character that should become a shorthand character. -\item[\texttt{\bs defineshorthand}] This command takes two arguments, - the first argument being the shorthand character sequence, the - second argument being the code the shorthand should expand to. -\item[\texttt{\bs languageshorthands}] This last command (which takes - one argument, the name of a language) can be used to switch to the - shorthands of another language, \emph{not} switching other language - facilities. Of course this only works if both languages were - specified as an option when loading the package \babel. -\end{description} - -On the level of the language definition files four new commands are -introduced to interface with the shorthand code. -\begin{description} -\item[\texttt{\bs initiate@active@char}] This command is used to tell - \LaTeX\ that the character in its argument is going to be used as a - shorthand character. It makes the character active, but lets it - expand to its non-active self. -\item[\texttt{\bs bbl@activate}] This can be used to switch - the expansion of an active character to its active code. -\item[\texttt{\bs bbl@deactivate}] This command resets the expansion - of an active character to expand to its non-active self. -\item[\texttt{\bs declare@shorthand}] This command is the internal - command for (and also used by) |\defineshorthand|; it has - \emph{three} arguments: the first argument is the name of the - language for which to define the shorthands, the other two are the - same as for |\defineshorthand|. -\end{description} - -One of the goals of the introduction of shorthands was to reduce the -amount of code needed in the language definition files to support -active characters. This goal has been reached; when a language needs -the double quote character (\texttt{"}) to be active all one has to -put into the language definition file are code fragments such as shown -in figure~\ref{fig:dq}. - -\begin{figure}[ht] - \figrule -\begin{verbatim} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasdutch{% - \languageshorthands{dutch}% - \bbl@activate{"}} -... -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}% - {\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -... -\end{verbatim} - \figrule - \caption{Example of defining a shorthand}\label{fig:dq} -\end{figure} - -Apart from removing a lot of code from language definition files by -introducing shorthands, some other code has been moved to -\file{babel.def} as well. In some language definition files it was -necessary to provide access to glyphs that are not normally easily -available (such as the |\quotedblbase| in the example in -figure~\ref{fig:dq}. Some of these glyphs have to be `constructed' for -\textsc{ot}\osn{1} encoding while they are present in -\textsc{t}\osn{1} encoded fonts. Having all such (encoding dependent) -code together in one place has the advantage these glyphs are the same -for all the language definition files of \babel; also maintenance is -easier this way. - -\section{Switching the language} - -Until release \osn{3}.\osn{5} \babel\ only had \emph{one} command to -switch between languages: |\selectlanguage|. It takes the name of the -language to switch to as an argument; the command is used as a -declaration and always switches everything\footnote{that means the - hyphenation pattern, the \texttt{\bs lefthyphenmin} and \texttt{\bs - righthyphenmin} parameters, the translations of the words, the - date and the specials}. Two new ways to switch to another language -have now been introduced. - -\begin{description} -\item[\texttt{\bs selectlanguage}] This command was available in - \babel\ from the start. -\item[\texttt{\bs foreignlanguage}] This new command is meant to be - used when a short piece of text (such as a quote) comes from another - language. This text should not be longer than \emph{one} paragraph. - For the text the hyphenation patterns and the specials are switched. - The command has two arguments: the name of the language and the text - from that language. -\item[environment `otherlanguage'] This new environment switches the - same aspects as the command |\selectlanguage| does. The difference - is that the switches are local to the environment whereas one either - has to use |\selectlanguage| in a group to get the same effect or - one has to issue multiple |\selectlanguage| commands. Also the - environment is one of the things needed to enable the development of - language definition files that support right-to-left typesetting. -\end{description} - -An aspect of some multilingual documents might be that they have -section titles or figure captions in different languages. For this to -work properly \babel\ now writes some information on the \file{.aux} -file when a language switch from either |\selectlanguage| or the -\Lenv{otherlanguage} environment occurs. \textsf{Babel} nows about -the \file{.toc}, \file{.lof} and \file{.lot} files; if you have added -an extra table of contents you should be aware of this. - -\section{Adapting \babel\ for local usage} - -In the past people have had to find ways to adapt \babel\ to document -classes that have been developed locally (implementing house style for -instance). Some have found ways to that without changing any of the -babel files, others have modified language definition files and have -found themselves having to make these changes each time a new release -of \babel\ is made available\footnote{which doesn't happen too often - \texttt{;-)}.}. It has been suggested to provide an easier way of -doing this. Therefore I have copied the concept of configuration files -from \LaTeXe\ and introduced language configuration files. For each -language definition file that is loaded \LaTeX\ will try to find a -configuration file. Such files have the same name as the language -definition file; except for their extension which has to be -\file{.cfg}. - -\section{Loading hyphenation patterns} - -An important change to the core of \babel\ is that the syntax of -\file{language.dat} has been extended. This was suggested by Bernard -Gaulle, author of the package \pkg{french}. His package supports an -enhanced version of \file{language.dat} in which one can optionally -indicate that a file with a list of hyphenation excpetions has to be -loaded. It is also possible to have more than one name for the same -hyphenation pattern register. - -\begin{figure}[ht] - \figrule -\begin{verbatim} -% File : language.dat -% Purpose : specify which hypenation -% patterns to load while running -% iniTeX -=american -english hyphen.english exceptions.english -=USenglish -french fr8hyph.tex -english ukhyphen.tex -=UKenglish -=british -dutch hyphen.dutch -german hyphen.german -\end{verbatim} - \figrule - \caption{Example of \file{language.dat}}\label{fig:l.d} -\end{figure} - -As you can see in the example of \file{language.dat} in -figure~\ref{fig:l.d}, an equals sign ($=$) on the beginning of a line -now has a significant meaning. It tells \LaTeX\ that the name which -follows the equals sign is to be an alternate name for the hyphenation -patterns that were loaded last. As you probably expect, there is one -exception to this rule: when the first (non-comment) line starts with -an equals sign it will be an alternate name for the \emph{next} -hyphenation patterns that will be loaded. Hence, in the example the -hyphenation patterns stored in the file \file{hyphen.english} will be -known to \TeX\ as: `american', `english' and `USenglish'. You can also -see in figuree~\ref{fig:l.d} that for `english' an extra file is -specified. It will be loaded after \file{hyphen.english} and should -contain some hyphenation exceptions. - -\section{Compatibility with other formats} - -This release of \babel\ has been tested with \LaTeXe; with and -without either of the packages \pkg{inputenc} or \pkg{fontenc}. There -should no longer be any problems using one (or both) of these packages -together with \babel. - -\noindent This release has also been tested with \textsc{Plain}~\TeX, it should -not provide any problems when used with that format. Therefore -\babel~version \osn{3}.\osn{5} should not pose any problems when used -with any format which is based on \textsc{Plain}~\TeX; this has -\emph{not} been tested by me though. Some provisions are made to make -\babel~\osn{3}.\osn{5} work with \LaTeX$\:$\osn{2}.\osn{09}; but not -all features may work as expected as I haven't tested this fully. - -Please note that although it was necessary to copy parts of -\pkg{inputenc} and \pkg{fontenc} this does not mean that you get -\textsc{t}\osn{1} support in \textsc{Plain}~\TeX, simply by adding -\babel. To acheive that much more work is needed. - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 2ec69bc6bee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,309 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{179} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{turkish.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{turkish} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{turkish.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.2m Turkish support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `turkish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -%% Turkish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005 -%% by Mustafa Burc -%% rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de -%% (40) 2503476 -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Turkish language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{turkish.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{turkish.dtx} -% -% \changes{turkish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe} -% \changes{turkish-1.2c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate} -% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}} -% \changes{turkish-1.2h}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The Turkish language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Turkish language\footnote{Mustafa Burc, -% \texttt{z6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de} provided the code for -% this file. It is based on the work by Pierre Mackay; Turgut Uyar, -% \texttt{uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr} supplied additional translations in -% version 1.2j and later}. -% -% Turkish typographic rules specify that a little `white space' -% should be added before the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{!}' -% and `\texttt{=}'. In order to insert this white space -% automatically these characters are made `active'. Also -% |\frenhspacing| is set. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{ow use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{turkish}\captionsturkish -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{turkish} could be an `unknown' language in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@turkish| to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \changes{turkish-1.2c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to -% produce the warning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@turkish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Turkish} - \adddialect\l@turkish0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Turkish language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsturkish} -% The macro |\captionsturkish| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{turkish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be -% \cs{pagename}} -% \changes{turkish-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added braces behind \cs{i} in -% strings} -% \changes{turkish-1.2f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1997/09/29}{Added and modified translations} -% \changes{turkish-1.2k}{1999/04/18}{Incorporated some more -% corrections} -% \changes{turkish-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsturkish{% - \def\prefacename{\"Ons\"oz}% - \def\refname{Kaynaklar}% - \def\abstractname{\"Ozet}% - \def\bibname{Kaynak\c ca}% - \def\chaptername{B\"ol\"um}% - \def\appendixname{Ek}% - \def\contentsname{\.I\c cindekiler}% - \def\listfigurename{\c Sekil Listesi}% - \def\listtablename{Tablo Listesi}% - \def\indexname{Dizin}% - \def\figurename{\c Sekil}% - \def\tablename{Tablo}% - \def\partname{K\i s\i m}% - \def\enclname{\.Ili\c sik}% - \def\ccname{Di\u ger Al\i c\i lar}% - \def\headtoname{Al\i c\i}% - \def\pagename{Sayfa}% - \def\subjectname{\.Ilgili}% - \def\seename{bkz.}% - \def\alsoname{ayr\i ca bkz.}% - \def\proofname{Kan\i t}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateturkish} -% The macro |\dateturkish| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Turkish dates. -% \changes{turkish-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added braces behind \cs{i} in -% strings} -% \changes{turkish-1.2d}{1995/01/31}{removed extra closing brace, -% \cs{mont} should be \cs{month}} -% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{turkish-1.2l}{1999/05/17}{removed dot from the date format} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateturkish{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Ocak\or \c Subat\or Mart\or Nisan\or May\i{}s\or Haziran\or - Temmuz\or A\u gustos\or Eyl\"ul\or Ekim\or Kas\i{}m\or - Aral\i{}k\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasturkish} -% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{Completely rewrote macro} -% \begin{macro}{\noextrasturkish} -% The macro |\extrasturkish| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Turkish language. The macro |\noextrasturkish| is -% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasturkish|. -% -% Turkish typographic rules specify that a little `white space' -% should be added before the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{!}' -% and `\texttt{=}'. In order to insert this white space -% automatically these characters are made |\active|, so they have -% to be treated in a special way. -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{=} -% \end{macrocode} -% We specify that the turkish group of shorthands should be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasturkish{\languageshorthands{turkish}} -% \end{macrocode} -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasturkish{% - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{=}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For Turkish texts |\frenchspacing| should be in effect. We -% make sure this is the case and reset it if necessary. -% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} -% and \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasturkish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasturkish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@!@} -% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@=@} -% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@:@} -% The definitions for the three active characters were made using -% intermediate macros. These are defined now. The insertion of -% extra `white space' should only happen outside math mode, hence -% the check |\ifmmode| in the macros. -% \changes{turkish-1.2d}{1995/01/31}{Added missing \cs{def}} -% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{Use the new mechanism of -% \cs{declare@shorthand}} -%%^^A JLB:: this code breaks during \begin{document} -%%^^A JLB: Needs fixing!! -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{:}{% - \ifmmode - \string:% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string:% - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{!}{% - \ifmmode - \string!% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!% - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{=}{% - \ifmmode - \string=% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\kern\fontdimen2\font - \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font - \fi - \fi - \string=% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{turkish} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 9e7af81a31a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{turkish.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{turkish.ldf}{\from{turkish.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 0bd4b5537af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1158 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{1472} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{ukraineb} - [2008/03/21 v1.1l Ukrainian support from the babel system] -% -%% File `ukraineb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% ukraineb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2008 -%% by Andrij Shvaika ashv at icmp.lviv.ua -% -%% derived from the Russianb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008 -%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings -% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru -% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -% -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand\note[1]{} -\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{ukraineb.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{ukraineb.dtx} -% -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1e}{1999/08/19}{replaced all \cs{penalty}\cs{@M} -% with \cs{nobreak}} -% -% \section{The Ukrainian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion. -% This file was derived from the \file{russianb.dtx} version 1.1g.} -% defines all the language-specific macros for the Ukrainian -% language. It needs the file \file{cyrcod} for success documentation -% with Ukrainian encodings (see below). -% -% For this language the character |"| is made active. In -% table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote} an overview is given of its -% purpose. -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\ -% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation -% in the rest of the word. \\ -% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign -% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y| -% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\ -% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\ -% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing -% hyphenation in the composing words. \\ -% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint -% in following surname. \\ -% |"`| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A'' -% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\ -% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{The extra definitions made -% by \file{ukraineb}}\label{tab:ukrainian-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote} (see, also -% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote}) can also be typeset by using the commands -% in table~\ref{tab:umore-quote} (see, also table~\ref{tab:rmore-quote}). -% -% \begin{table}[htb] -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}} -% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\ -% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\ -% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\ -% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes -% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\ -% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A'' -% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\ -% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\ -% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined -% by \babel}\label{tab:umore-quote} -% \end{center} -% \end{table} -% -% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and `|>>|' in -% 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*}) -% and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings -% (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}). -% -% The quotation marks traditionally used in Ukrainian and Russian -% languages were borrowed from other languages (e.g. French and German) -% so they keep their original names. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is loaded -% more than once, checking the category code of the \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{ukrainian}{captionsukrainian} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{ukraineb} will be an `unknown' language, in which case -% we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of |\l@ukrainian| -% to see whether we have to do something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@ukrainian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Ukrainian} - \adddialect\l@ukrainian0 -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding} -% -% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be which is -% active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the \pkg{fontenc} package -% is loaded later, then\ldots too bad! -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic -% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}.\@ -% Hopefully, \texttt{X2} will eventually replace the two latter encodings -% (\texttt{LCY} and \texttt{LWN}).\@ If the user wants to use another -% font encoding than the default (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the -% corresponding file \emph{before} \file{ukraineb.sty}. This may be done -% in the following way: -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% % override the default X2 encoding used in Babel -% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc} -% \usepackage[english,ukrainian]{babel} -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% Note: for the Ukrainian language, the \texttt{T2A} encoding is better than -% \texttt{X2}, because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and -% users should be very careful to switch the language every time they -% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Ukrainian phrase or vice versa. -% -% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to \LaTeX\ in -% the order they were loaded. We set the |\cyrillicencoding| to the -% \emph{last} loaded encoding in the list of supported Cyrillic -% encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN}, \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, -% \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2A}, if any. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not load -% any of supported encodings. So, we have to set |\cyrillicencoding| to -% some default value. We test the presence of the encoding definition -% files in the order from less preferable to more preferable encodings. -% We use the lowercase names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of -% \file{LCYenc.def}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems not to -% have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we don't -% want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \PackageInfo{babel} -% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \unskip -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Ukrainian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\ukrainianhyphenmins - \language\l@ukrainian}% -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english}% -\let\Ukr\Ukrainian -\let\Eng\English -\let\cyrillictext\Ukrainian -\let\cyr\Ukrainian -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters, we -% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly -% produce Latin letters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with -% |\@alph| inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where -% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|' -% (|\fontencoding| is robust). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or - i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or - q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or - y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or - I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or - Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or - Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding dependent -% in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are defined as |\r{A}| and -% |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable results when the font encoding -% does not contain the Latin letters `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}). -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase Greek -% letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable family), to -% avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some math family does -% not contain these characters in places of OT1 encoding. The code was -% taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and further explanation there. -% -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1i}{2001/02/21}{As this code generates a -% textfont 7 error it is commented out for now.} -% \begin{macrocode} -% \begingroup\catcode`\"=12 -% % uppercase greek letters: -% \def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax -% "0000\@nil#1} -% \def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{% -% \ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax -% \ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi -% \fi} -% \@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi -% \@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi -% \@tempa\Omega -% % some accents: -% \def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent} -% \expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil -% \ifx\@tempb\@tempc -% \def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}% -% \def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}% -% \def\do#1"#2{} -% \def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil -% \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF -% \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}% -% \fi} -% \@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave -% \@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar -% \fi -% \endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The user must use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit Cyrillic -% font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic input encodings. -% We do not assume any default input encoding, so the user should -% explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by |\usepackage{inputenc}|. -% We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so \pkg{inputenc} should be used -% before \babel. -% -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1f}{1999/08/27}{Made not using inputenc a -% warning instead of an error} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% - \def\reserved@a{LWN}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \def\reserved@a{OT2}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \PackageWarning{babel}% - {No input encoding specified for Ukrainian language} - \fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch between -% Cyrillic and Roman encodings. -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext} -% \begin{macro}{\latintext} -% -% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding to the -% Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches back. This -% assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin one. These commands -% are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces of text the commands -% |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be used. -% -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1j}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already -% defined by the core of \babel} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{% -% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont -% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}} -\let\lat\latintext -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic} -% \begin{macro}{\textlatin} -% -% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the -% requested font encoding. -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1j}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already -% defined by the core of \babel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -%\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% We make the \TeX -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\ltxTeX\undefined\let\ltxTeX\TeX\fi -%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\TeX}{\textlatin{\ltxTeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and \LaTeX\ logos encoding independent. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\ltxLaTeX\undefined\let\ltxLaTeX\LaTeX\fi -%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\LaTeX}{\textlatin{\ltxLaTeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Ukrainian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsukrainian} -% -% The macro |\captionsukrainian| defines all strings used in the four -% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two commands |\cyr| -% and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp.\ Latin encoding. -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1d}{1999/04/03}{replace \cs{CYRUKRI} with -% \cs{CYRII} in \cs{authorname} } -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1g}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1h}{2001/02/13}{Added translation for -% `Glossary'} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\captionsukrainian{% - \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRV\cyrs\cyrt\cyru\cyrp}}% -% \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyro\cyrv\cyra}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% -% \def\refname{% -% {\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk -% \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrs\cyri\cyrl\cyra\cyrn\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrya}}% -% \def\abstractname{{\cyr\CYRR\cyre\cyrf\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRB\cyrii\cyrb\cyrl\cyrii\cyro\cyrgup\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyrii\cyrya}}% -% \def\bibname{{\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRR\cyro\cyrz\cyrd\cyrii\cyrl}}% -% \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}% - \def\appendixname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrd\cyra\cyrt\cyro\cyrk}}% - \def\contentsname{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% - \def\listfigurename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% - \def\listtablename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\indexname{{\cyr\CYRP\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}% - \def\authorname{{\cyr\CYRII\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyri\cyrishrt - \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}% - \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}% -% \def\figurename{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs\cyru\cyrn\cyro\cyrk}}% - \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl.}}% -% \def\tablename{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrya}}% - \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyri\cyrn\cyra}}% - \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl\cyra\cyrd\cyrk\cyra}}% - \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyrii\cyrya}}% - \def\headtoname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro}}% - \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}% -% \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrr\cyrii\cyrn\cyrk\cyra}}% - \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.}}% - \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyro\cyrzh}} - \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyrya}}% - \def\glossaryname{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyrn\cyri\cyrk\ % - \cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyrm\cyrii\cyrn\cyrii\cyrv}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dateukrainian} -% -% The macro |\dateukrainian| redefines the command |\today| to produce -% Ukrainian dates. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dateukrainian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - \cyrs\cyrii\cyrch\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyryu\cyrt\cyro\cyrg\cyro\or - \cyrb\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrz\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrk\cyrv\cyrii\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrch\cyre\cyrr\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyri\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrr\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrv\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrs\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrzh\cyro\cyrv\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrp\cyra\cyrd\cyra\or - \cyrg\cyrr\cyru\cyrd\cyrn\cyrya\fi - \space\number\year~\cyrr.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasukrainian} -% -% The macro |\extrasukrainian| will perform all the extra definitions -% needed for the Ukrainian language. The macro |\noextrasukrainian| -% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasukrainian|. -% -% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic -% encoding whenever we enter `ukrainian'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\cyrillictext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the current -% font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming that \LaTeX\ uses -% \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as default. Therefore we switch back to -% |\latinencoding| whenever the Ukrainian language is no longer `active'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\latintext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Next we must allow hyphenation in the Ukrainian words with apostrophe -% whenever we enter `ukrainian'. This solution was proposed by -% Vladimir Volovich <vvv@vvv.vsu.ru> -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=`\'} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=0} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font} -% -% In order to get both Latin and Cyrillic letters in verbatim text we -% need to change the definition of an internal \LaTeX\ command somewhat: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\verbatim@font{% -% \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding -% \normalfont\ttfamily -% \expandafter\def\csname\cyrillicencoding-cmd\endcsname##1##2{% -% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect -% \begingroup\UseTextSymbol\cyrillicencoding##1\endgroup -% \else\noexpand##1\fi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The category code of the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{;}', -% `\texttt{!}', and `\texttt{?}' is made |\active| to insert a little -% white space. -% -% For Ukrainian (as well as for Russian and German) the \texttt{"} -% character also is made active. -% -% Note: It is \emph{very} questionable whether the Russian typesetting -% tradition requires additional spacing before those punctuation signs. -% Therefore, we make the corresponding code optional. If you need it, -% then define the \texttt{frenchpunct} docstrip option in -% \file{babel.ins}. -% -% Borrowed from french. -% Some users dislike automatic insertion of a space before -% `double punctuation', and prefer to decide themselves whether a -% space should be added or not; so a hook |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| -% is provided: if this command is added (in file |ukraineb.cfg|, or -% anywhere in a document) |ukraineb| will respect your typing, and -% introduce a suitable space before `double punctuation' \emph{if -% and only if} a space is typed in the source file before those -% signs. -% -% The command |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| switches back to the -% default behavior of |ukraineb|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchpunct> -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{;} -%</frenchpunct> -%<*frenchpunct|spanishligs> -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{?} -%</frenchpunct|spanishligs> -\initiate@active@char{"} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code above is necessary because we need extra active characters. -% The character |"| is used as indicated in -% table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote}. -% -% We specify that the Ukrainian group of shorthands should be used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\languageshorthands{ukrainian}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may -% vary. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasukrainian{% -%<frenchpunct> \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% -%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{% -%<frenchpunct> \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% -%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain -% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence, the -% ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these characters are -% useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define the shorthands to -% emulate these ligatures (optionally). -% -% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use -% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the primary -% encoding, but it does not contain these characters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanishligs> -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown} -%</spanishligs> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@;@} -% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@:@} -% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@!@} -% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@?@} -% -% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;}, -% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!}. This should only happen in horizontal mode, -% hence the test with |\ifhmode|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchpunct> -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{;}{% - \ifhmode -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space', `unskip' if -% it exists and place a |0.1em| kerning. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If no space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace| -% which will be -% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added -% thinspace, or as |\@empty|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can insert a `|;|' character. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \string;} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The other definitions are very similar. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{:}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string:} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{!}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{?}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string?} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP} -% \begin{macro}{\FDP@thinspace} -% |\FDP@thinspace| is defined as unbreakable -% spaces if |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is activated or as |\@empty| if -% |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is in use. -% The default is |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{% - \def\FDP@thinspace{\nobreak\kern.1em}} -\def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty} -\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FDPon} -% \begin{macro}{\FDPoff} -% -% The next macros allow to switch on/off activeness of double -% punctuation signs. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\FDPon{\bbl@activate{:}% - \bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{?}% - \bbl@activate{!}} -\def\FDPoff{\bbl@deactivate{:}% - \bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{?}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@:@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@!@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@?@} -% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@;@} -% -% When the active characters appear in an environment where their -% Ukrainian behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected' -% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:} -\declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;} -%</frenchpunct> -%<*frenchpunct&!spanishligs> -\declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!} -\declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?} -%</frenchpunct&!spanishligs> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a couple of -% `support' macros. -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it -% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as `|"|'. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french quotes. -% We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty. -% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{">}{\frqq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some additional commands: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different. -% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"-}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a hyphen -% sign: -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\ukrainian@sh@tmp{% - \if\ukrainian@sh@next-\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning of -% this token is written to |\ukrainian@sh@next| and |\ukrainian@sh@tmp| is -% called. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \futurelet\ukrainian@sh@next\ukrainian@sh@tmp} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ukrainian@sh@hyphen{% - \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must `eat' -% two last hyphen signs of our emdash\dots : -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ukrainian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\cdash} -% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro: -% |\cdash|: -% \begin{macrocode} -%\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash -% to create in next step -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text: -% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of -% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after -% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\ -% started with ``--- where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line). -% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user: he may put -% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this -% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after -% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a -% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash -% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font ? -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi - \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames -% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters -% around; after the dash some space is added -% |\exhyphenalty| \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}} -% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip| -% must follow the emdash); \\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -%\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash} -% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash. -% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't been -% defined in a fontenc file. For T2* fonts, cyrdash will be placed in -% the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature |---|. -% \begin{macrocode} -% Is there an IF necessary? -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined - \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials. -% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the following -% surname. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for |"|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The Ukrainian hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin| -% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1g}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% temporary hack: -\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined - \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the action |\extrasukrainian| has to execute is to make sure that the -% command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the -% execution of |\noextrasukrainian| will switch it off again. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Next we add a new enumeration style for Ukrainian manuscripts with -% Cyrillic letters, and later on we define some math operator names in -% accordance with Ukrainian and Russian typesetting traditions. -% -% \begin{macro}{\Asbuk} -% -% We begin by defining |\Asbuk| which works like |\Alph|, but produces -% (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The letters CYRGUP, -% and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such enumeration. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRIE\or - \CYRZH\or\CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRII\or\CYRYI\or\CYRISHRT\or - \CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or\CYRP\or\CYRR\or - \CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or\CYRC\or\CYRCH\or - \CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYRYU\or\CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\asbuk} -% -% The macro |\asbuk| is similar to |\alph|; it produces lowercase -% Ukrainian letters. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrie\or - \cyrzh\or\cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrii\or\cyryi\or\cyrishrt\or - \cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or\cyrp\or\cyrr\or - \cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or\cyrc\or\cyrch\or - \cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyryu\or\cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. The math groups for cyrillic -% letters are defined in the encoding definition files. First, declare -% a new alphabet for symbols, |\cyrmathrm|, based on the symbol font -% for Cyrillic letters defined in the encoding definition file. Note, -% that by default Cyrillic letters are taken from upright font in math -% mode (unlike Latin letters). -% \begin{macrocode} -%\RequirePackage{textmath} -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -% \end{macrocode} -% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different variants. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -% -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some math functions in Ukrainian and Russian math books have other -% names: e.g., \texttt{sinh} in Russian is written as \texttt{sh} etc. -% So we define a number of new math operators. -% -% |\sinh|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\cosh|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\tan|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\arctan|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% arcctg: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1 encoding: -% -% |\tanh|: -% \changes{ukraineb-1.1k}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th} -% only for this language} -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% |\cot|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\coth|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% |\csc|: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And finally some other Ukrainian and Russian mathematical symbols: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits} -\def\nsd{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} -\def\nsk{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} -\def\NSD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRD}}\nolimits} -\def\NSK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRK}}\nolimits} - \def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} % ?????? -\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This is for compatibility with older Ukrainian packages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration file, -% setting the main language to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and -% resetting the category code of \texttt{@} to its original value. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{ukrainian} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins deleted file mode 100644 index fd1c219c3e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,147 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/03/13} -\def\batchfile{ukraineb.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} -\keepsilent - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble - -\generate{\file{ukraineb.ldf}{\from{ukraineb.dtx}{code}}} - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 122cd8b07e4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,243 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -\documentclass[11pt]{article} -\usepackage[american,greek]{babel} -\languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko} -\usepackage{athnum,grmath} -\newcommand{\sg}{\selectlanguage{greek}} -\newcommand{\sa}{\selectlanguage{american}} -\begin{document} -\show\extrasgreek -%\show\extraspolutonikogreek -\selectlanguage{american} - -\title{Writing Greek with the \ttfamily greek\rmfamily\ option of the -\ttfamily babel\rmfamily\ package} -\author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\ - 366, 28th October Str.\\ - GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE\\ - e-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}} -\date{October 15, 1997} -\maketitle -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Overview} -The \texttt{greek} option of the \texttt{babel} package is an attempt to -make it possible for someone to write Greek text with \LaTeX. The current -version of the \texttt{greek} option supports the \sg polutonik'o \sa\ -accentual system of the Greek language. -Moreover, there is now support for Greek numerals. One can produce easily -valid Greek numerals both in uppercase and lowercase forms, e.g, -\textgreek{\greeknumeral{1997}}\ and \textgreek{\Greeknumeral{1997}}. The -labels in second and fourth level enumerations are lowercase -and uppercase Greek numerals correspondingly. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Typing Greek Text} -\TeX\ understands only the basic ASCII characters, so it is not possible -to enter directly Greek letters. Instead, someone enters Latin letters -which are mapped to their Greek ``counterparts'' by \TeX. The following -table shows the transliteration employed: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{|lllllllllllll|}\hline -\textgreek{a}& -\textgreek{b}& -\textgreek{g}& -\textgreek{d}& -\textgreek{e}& -\textgreek{z}& -\textgreek{h}& -\textgreek{j}& -\textgreek{i}& -\textgreek{k}& -\textgreek{l}& -\textgreek{m}& -\textgreek{n}\\ -a& b& g& d& e& z& h& j& i& k& l& m& n\\ -\hline -\textgreek{x}& -\textgreek{o}& -\textgreek{p}& -\textgreek{r}& -\textgreek{sv}& -\textgreek{t}& -\textgreek{u}& -\textgreek{f}& -\textgreek{q}& -\textgreek{y}& -\textgreek{w}& -\textgreek{c}& \hbox{ } \\ -x& o& p& r& s& -t& u& f& q& y& w& c& \hbox{ }\\ \hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -Please, note that in order to produce the letter \textgreek{sv} in isolation -on has to type \texttt{sv}. This feature is due to the strong ligature -that \TeX\ employs. -In the ``modern'' \textgreek{monotonik'o} accentual system only one accent is -used---\textgreek{oxe'ia} (acute). In the traditional \textgreek{polutonik'o} -accentual system we -need more accents and breathing signs. We can produce an accented letter by -prefixing the letter with he symbol that denotes the accent, e.g., -\texttt{>a'erac} produces the word \sg >a'erac.\sa\footnote{For the -technically inclined reader, we must say that \TeX\ uses the ligature table of -the font in order to determine the character that corresponds to the -input character sequence.} Here are the symbols that are recognized: - -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cccc}\hline -Accent & Symbol & Example & Output\\ \hline -acute & \texttt{'} & \texttt{g'ata} & \textgreek{g'ata}\\ -grave & \texttt{`} & \texttt{dad`i} & \textgreek{dad`i}\\ -circumflex & \verb+~+ & \verb+ful~hc+ & \sg\textgreek{ful~hc}\sa\\ -rough breathing & \verb+<+ & \verb+<'otan+ & \sg\textgreek{<'otan}\sa\\ -smooth breathing & \verb+>+ & \verb+>'aneu+ & \sg\textgreek{>'aneu}\sa\\ -subscript & \texttt{|} & \verb+>anate'ilh|+ & \sg\textgreek{>anate'ilh|}\\ -dieresis & \texttt{"}& \texttt{qa"ide'uh|c} & \sg\textgreek{qa"ide'uh|c}\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -Note that the subscript symbol is placed \textbf{after} the letter. -The last thing someone must know in order to be able to write normal Greek -text is the punctuation marks used in the language: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ccc}\hline -Punctuation Sign & Symbol & Output\\ \hline -period & \texttt{.} & \sg\textgreek{.}\sa\\ -semicolon & \texttt{;} & \sg\textgreek{;}\sa\\ -exclamation mark & \texttt{!} & \sg\textgreek{!}\sa\\ -comma & \texttt{,} & \sg\textgreek{,}\sa\\ -colon & \texttt{:} & \sg\textgreek{:}\sa\\ -question mark & \texttt{?} & \sg\textgreek{?}\sa\\ -left apostrophe & \texttt{``} & \sg\textgreek{``}\sa\\ -right apostrophe & \texttt{''} & \sg\textgreek{''}\sa\\ -left quotation mark & \texttt{((} & \sg\textgreek{))}\sa\\ -right quotation mark & \texttt{))} & \sg\textgreek{))}\sa\\ \hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -Using these conventions it is a straightforward exercise to write Greek -\textgreek{polutoniko} text. For example the following excerpt from -\textgreek{D'uskoloc} of \textgreek{M'enandroc} -\sg -\begin{quote} -T'i f'hic? <Id`wn >enj'ede pa~id'' >eleuj'eran\\ -t`ac plhs'ion N'umfac stefano~usan, S'wstrate,\\ ->er~wn 'ap~hljec e>uj'uc? -\end{quote} -\sa can be produced by the following \LaTeX\ code: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{l} -\verb+T'i f'hic? <Id`wn >enj'ede pa~id'' >eleuj'eran+\\ -\verb+t`ac plhs'ion N'umfac stefano~usan, S'wstrate,+\\ -\verb+>er~wn 'ap~hljec e>uj'uc?+ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Producing Greek Text} -Once the Greek language is selected with the command -\begin{center} -\verb+\selectlanguage{greek}+ -\end{center} -whatever we type will be typeset with the Greek fonts. The command -\verb+\textlatin+ can be used for short passages in some language that -uses the Latin alphabet, while the the command \verb+\latintext+ changes -the base fonts to the ones used by languages that use the Latin alphabet. -However, all words will be hyphenated by following the Greek hyphenation -rules! Similar commands are available once someone has selected some -other language. The commands \verb+\textgreek+ and \verb+\greektext+ -behave exactly like their ``latin'' counterparts. For example, the -word \textgreek{M'imhc} has been produced with the command -\verb+\textgreek{M'imhc}+. Please note that certain symbols cannot have -their expected result for Greek text, unless someone has selected the Greek -language, e.g., \verb+~+ is such a symbol. - -As we have mentioned above this version of the \texttt{greek} option of the -\texttt{babel} package supports the use of Greek numerals. The commands -\verb+\greeknumeral+ and \verb+\Greeknumeral+ produce the lowercase and -the uppercase Greek numeral, e.g., -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline -Command & Output\\ \hline -\verb+\Greeknumeral{9999}+ & \sg\textgreek{\Greeknumeral{9999}}\\ -\verb+\greeknumeral{9999}+ & \sg\textgreek{\greeknumeral{9999}}\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -In order to correctly typeset the greek numerals the greek option file -provides the following commands: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline -Command & Output\\ \hline -\verb+\qoppa+ & \textgreek{\qoppa}\\ -\verb+\sampi+ & \textgreek{\sampi}\\ -\verb+\stigma+ & \textgreek{\stigma}\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} - -In traditional Greek typography the first paragraph after a header is -always indented, contrary to the habit of, say, American typography. This -effect can be achieved by using the package \verb+indentfirst+. - -Additional greek symbols are available: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline -Command & Output\\ \hline -\verb+\Digamma+ & \sg\textgreek{\Digamma}\\ -\verb+\ddigamma+ & \sg\textgreek{\ddigamma}\\ -%\verb+\tao+ & \sg\textgreek{\tao}\\ -%\verb+\Qoppa+ & \sg\textgreek{\Qoppa}\\ -%\verb|\VarQoppa| & \sg\textgreek{\VarQoppa}\\ -%\verb+\varqoppa+ & \sg\textgreek{\varqoppa}\\ -%\verb+\Sampi+ & \sg\textgreek{\Sampi}\\ -%\verb|\Stigma| & \sg\textgreek{\Stigma}\\ -\verb|\euro| & \sg\textgreek{\euro}\\ -\verb|\permill| & \sg\textgreek{\permill}\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} - -The package \verb|athnum| provides the command \verb|\athnum|, with which -one can produce the so called \textit{Athenian numerals}: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline -Command & Output\\ \hline -\verb|\athnum{1997}| & \sg\textgreek{\athnum{1997}}\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} - -The package \verb|grmath| renames the basic log-like functions with their -greek counterparts: -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline -Command & Output\\ \hline -\verb|$\sin^{2}x+\cos^{2}x=1$| & $\sin^{2}x+\cos^{2}y=1$\\ -\hline -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 7c02a293cd8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,400 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{344} -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{usorbian.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{usorbian} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{usorbian.dtx} - [2008/03/17 v1.0k Upper Sorbian support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `usorbian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Upper Sorbian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2004 -%% by Eduard Werner -% Werner, Eduard", -% Serbski institut z. t., -% Dw\'orni\v{s}\'cowa 6 -% 02625 Budy\v{s}in/Bautzen -% Germany", -% (??)3591 497223", -% edi at kaihh.hanse.de", -% -%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de -%% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Upper Sorbian definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*\note[1]{} -\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\newfont{\logo}{logo10} -\newcommand*\MF{{\logo METAFONT}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{usorbian.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{usorbian.dtx} -% -% \changes{usorbian-0.1}{1994/10/10}{First version} -% \changes{usorbian-0.1b}{1994/10/18}{Made it possible to run through -% \LaTeX; added \cs{MF} and removed extra \cs{end{macro}}} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0d}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with -% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency -% with \LaTeX} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of -% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.} -% -% \section{The Upper Sorbian language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate. It was written by Eduard Werner -% (\texttt{edi@kaihh.hanse.de}).} It defines all the -% language-specific macros for Upper Sorbian. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform -% initial checks} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under -% more than one name.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{usorbian} will be an `unknown' language, in which -% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of -% |\l@usorbian| to see whether we have to do something here. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Check for the option -% lowersorbian} -% As -% \babel\ also knwos the option \Lopt{uppersorbian} we have to -% check that as well. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\l@uppersorbian\@undefined - \ifx\l@usorbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Usorbian} - \adddialect\l@usorbian\z@ - \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian - \else - \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian - \fi -\else - \let\l@usorbian\l@uppersorbian -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Upper Sorbian language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionsusorbian} -% The macro |\captionsusorbian| defines all strings used in the four -% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{usorbian-0.1c}{1994/11/27}{Removed two typos (Kapitel and -% Dodatki)} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for -% AMS-\LaTeX} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0i}{2000/09/22}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Zawod}% - \def\refname{Referency}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitl}% - \def\appendixname{Dodawki}% - \def\contentsname{Wobsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}% - \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Wobraz}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{D\'z\v el}% - \def\enclname{P\v r\l oha}% - \def\ccname{CC}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{hl.}% - \def\alsoname{hl.~te\v z} - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\newdateusorbian} -% The macro |\newdateusorbian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce Upper Sorbian dates. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or meje\or junija\or - julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or - nowembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\olddateusorbian} -% The macro |\olddateusorbian| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce old-style Upper Sorbian dates. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - wulkeho r\'o\v zka\or ma\l eho r\'o\v zka\or nal\v etnika\or - jutrownika\or r\'o\v zownika\or sma\v znika\or pra\v znika\or - \v znjenca\or po\v znjenca\or winowca\or nazymnika\or - hodownika\fi \space \number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The default will be the new-style dates. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname - \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extrasusorbian} -% The macro |\extrasusorbian| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the Upper Sorbian language. It's pirated -% from |germanb.sty|. The macro |\noextrasusorbian| is used to -% cancel the actions of |\extrasusorbian|. -% -% Because for Upper Sorbian (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"} -% character is made active. This is done once, later on its -% definition may vary. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{usorbian}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0h}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of -% Upper Sorbian} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German Upper Sorbian -% words which contain `\ss' we have to give the character a nonzero -% |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX book). As some of the other -% language definitions turn the character |^| into a shorthand we -% need to make sure that it has it's orginial definition here. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0k}{2008/03/17}{Make sure the caret has the -% right \cs{catcdoe}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\^7 -\def\x{\endgroup - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^Y}% - \lccode`\^^Y`\^^Y}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots. -% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \umlauthigh} -% \end{macrocode} -% The Upper Sorbian hyphenation patterns can be used with -% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0i}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{usorbian-1.0a}{1995/05/27}{Removed stuff that has been -% moved to \file{babel.def}} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dq} -% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it -% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. Also we -% store the original meaning of the command |\"| for future use. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}}{\ddot U}} -% \end{macrocode} -% tremas, -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}{\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -% \end{macrocode} -% usorbian es-zet (sharp s), -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"s}{\textormath{\ss{}}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"S}{SS} -% \end{macrocode} -% german and french quotes, -% \changes{usorbian-1.0f}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after -% double quote and guillemot characters} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% discretionary commands -% \changes{usorbian-1.0c}{1996/01/24}{Now use \cs{bbl@disc}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -% \end{macrocode} -% and some additional commands: -% \begin{macrocode} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mdqon} -% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff} -% \begin{macro}{\ck} -% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands -% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and -% \cs{shorthandoff}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap -% up} -% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one -% option name} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 95965fcfaed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,207 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -% -% This file is part of the Babel system. -% -------------------------------------- -% -% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -% -% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is -% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -% information. -% -% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -% \fi -% \CheckSum{97} -% -% \iffalse -% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the -% transcript. -%<*dtx> -\ProvidesFile{welsh.dtx} -%</dtx> -%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{welsh} -%\fi -%\ProvidesFile{welsh.dtx} - [2005/03/31 v1.0d Welsh support from the babel system] -%\iffalse -%% File `welsh.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -% -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -% -% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source -% code for the Welsh language definition file. -%<*filedriver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax} -\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} -\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$} -\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\begin{document} - \DocInput{welsh.dtx} -\end{document} -%</filedriver> -%\fi -% \GetFileInfo{welsh.dtx} -% -% \section{The Welsh language} -% -% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this -% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on -% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the -% Welsh language. -% -% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or -% available. -% -% \StopEventually{} -% -% The macro |\ldf@init| takes care of preventing that this file is -% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the -% \texttt{@} sign, etc. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\LdfInit{welsh}{captionswelsh} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| -% command, \texttt{welsh} could be an `unknown' language in -% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the -% existence of |\l@welsh| to see whether we have to do -% something here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\l@welsh - \@nopatterns{welsh} - \adddialect\l@welsh0\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and -% from) the Welsh language. -% -% \begin{macro}{\welshhyphenmins} -% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation -% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. -% \changes{welsh-1.0c}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to -% provide a default value} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\captionswelsh} -% The macro |\captionswelsh| defines all strings used in the -% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX. -% \changes{welsh-1.0c}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}} -% \changes{welsh-1.0d}{2005/03/31}{Provided the translation for -% Glossary} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\captionswelsh{% - \def\prefacename{Rhagair}% - \def\refname{Cyfeiriadau}% - \def\abstractname{Crynodeb}% - \def\bibname{Llyfryddiaeth}% - \def\chaptername{Pennod}% - \def\appendixname{Atodiad}% - \def\contentsname{Cynnwys}% - \def\listfigurename{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% - \def\listtablename{Rhestr Dablau}% - \def\indexname{Mynegai}% - \def\figurename{Darlun}% - \def\tablename{Taflen}% - \def\partname{Rhan}% - \def\enclname{amgae\"edig}% - \def\ccname{cop\"\i au}% - \def\headtoname{At}% % `at' on letters meaning `to ( a person)' - % `to (a place)' is `i' in Welsh - \def\pagename{tudalen}% - \def\seename{gweler}% - \def\alsoname{gweler hefyd}% - \def\proofname{Prawf}% - \def\glossaryname{Rhestr termau}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\datewelsh} -% The macro |\datewelsh| redefines the command |\today| to -% produce welsh dates. -% \changes{welsh-1.0b}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define -% \cs{today} to save memory} -% \changes{welsh-1.0b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of -% \cs{edef}} -% \changes{welsh-1.0d}{2005/03/31}{removed `a viz' from the definition -% of \cs{today}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\datewelsh{% - \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\mathrm{a\tilde{n}}}$\else - \number\day\fi\space\ifcase\month\or - Ionawr\or Chwefror\or Mawrth\or Ebrill\or - Mai\or Mehefin\or Gorffennaf\or Awst\or - Medi\or Hydref\or Tachwedd\or Rhagfyr\fi - \space\number\year}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\extraswelsh} -% \begin{macro}{\noextraswelsh} -% The macro |\extraswelsh| will perform all the extra -% definitions needed for the welsh language. The macro -% |\noextraswelsh| is used to cancel the actions of -% |\extraswelsh|. For the moment these macros are empty but -% they are defined for compatibility with the other -% language definition files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\addto\extraswelsh{} -\addto\noextraswelsh{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a -% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on -% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of -% \texttt{@} to its original value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ldf@finish{welsh} -%</code> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale -%\endinput -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins deleted file mode 100644 index a807ec6272b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation -%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through -%% LaTeX or TeX. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file is part of the Babel system. -%% -------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ -%% -\def\filedate{1999/04/11} -\def\batchfile{welsh.ins} -\input docstrip.tex - -{\ifx\generate\undefined -\Msg{**********************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip} -\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{**********************************************} -\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.} -\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path} -\batchmode -\csname @@end\endcsname -\fi} - -\declarepreamble\mainpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\endpreamble - -\declarepreamble\fdpreamble -This is a generated file. - -Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. - -This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. ---------------------------------------------------------- - -It may be distributed and/or modified under the -conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -of this license or (at your option) any later version. -The latest version of this license is in - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. - -This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -such generated files. - -The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -information. - -In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -this file to serve the needs of your installation. - -However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -of this file under its original name. - -\endpreamble - -\keepsilent - -\usedir{tex/generic/babel} - -\usepreamble\mainpreamble -\generate{\file{welsh.ldf}{\from{welsh.dtx}{code}} - } -\usepreamble\fdpreamble - -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with} -\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ccb3254716c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,7306 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. +% Copyright 1989-2012 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors +% listed elsewhere in this file. +% All rights reserved. +% +% This file is part of the Babel system. +% -------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. +% +% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is +% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% \fi +% \CheckSum{5011} +% +% \def\filename{babel.dtx} +% \let\thisfilename\filename +% +%\iffalse +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/10}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from +% December 1994} +% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/18}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from +% June 1998} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01] +% \end{macrocode} +% +%% File 'babel.dtx' +%\fi +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] +%\iffalse +% +% Babel DOCUMENT-STYLE option for LaTeX version 2.09 or plain TeX; +%% Babel package for LaTeX2e. +% +%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, +%% TeXniek +%% all rights reserved. +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +% +%<*filedriver> +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +\raggedright +\addtolength{\textwidth}{25pt} +\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. +\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} +\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}} +\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}} +\newcommand*\xetex{\textsf{xetex}} +\newcommand*\luatex{\textsf{luatex}} +\newcommand*\nb[1]{} +\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\normalfont\itshape#1\/$\rangle$}} +\newcommand*\langlist{% + \meta{language}\texttt{,}\meta{language}\texttt{,}...} +\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}} +\newcommand*\note[1]{} +\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash} +\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*\menv[1]{\char`\{#1\char`\}} +\newcommand*\Eenv[1]{% + \quad\ldots\quad + \texttt{\color{thered}\string\end\menv{#1}}} +\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{1em} +\lefthyphenmin=2 +\righthyphenmin=3 +% Stolen and adapted from microtype: +\usepackage{color} +\definecolor{thered} {rgb}{0.65,0.04,0.07} +\definecolor{thegreen}{rgb}{0.06,0.44,0.08} +\definecolor{thegrey} {gray}{0.8} +\definecolor{theshade}{rgb}{1,1,0.97} +\definecolor{theframe}{gray}{0.6} +\definecolor{lightgray}{gray}{0.95} +\IfFileExists{listings.sty}{ + \usepackage{listings} + \lstset{ + % gobble=1, + columns=flexible, + keepspaces, + basicstyle=\MacroFont, + keywords=[0]{\selectlanguage,\foreignlanguage,\defineshorthand, + \babelhyphen,\babelhyphenation,\spanishhyphenmins,\addto, + \StartBabelCommands,\SetString,\EndBabelCommands,\shorthandoff, + \languageshorthands,\useshorthands,\AddBabelHook,\SetStringLoop, + \SetCase,\AfterBabelLanguage}, + keywordstyle=[0]\color{thered}, + keywords=[1]{ngerman,italian,dutch,english,main,esperanto, + frenchb,shorthands,extrasfrench,extrasrussian,extrasenglish, + stringprocess,afterextras,latin,medieval,spanish,notilde, + lcroman,danish}, + keywordstyle=[1]\color{thegreen}, + comment=[l]\%, + commentstyle=\color{thegrey}\itshape, + alsoother={0123456789_}, + frame=single, + backgroundcolor=\color{theshade}, + rulecolor=\color{theframe}, + framerule=\fboxrule, + } + \let\verbatim\relax + \lstnewenvironment{verbatim}[1][]{\lstset{##1}}{} +}{} +\def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{% + \strut\MacroFont\color{thered}\normalsize\string#1} +\def\Describe#1{% + \par\penalty-500\vskip3ex\noindent + \DescribeMacro{#1}\args} +\def\DescribeOther{\vskip-4ex\Describe} +\makeatletter +\def\args#1{% + \def\bbl@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else#1\vskip1ex\fi\ignorespaces} +\makeatother +\begin{document} +\title{Babel, a multilingual package for use with \LaTeX's standard + document classes\thanks{During the development ideas from Nico + Poppelier, Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used. + Bernd Raichle has provided many helpful suggestions.}} +\author{Johannes Braams\\ + Kersengaarde 33\\ + 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\ + The Netherlands\\ + \normalsize For version 3.9, Javier Bezos\\ + \normalsize \texttt{www.tex-tipografia.com}} + +\date{Typeset \today} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} + The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of document + classes that are meant to be used, but also serve as examples for + other users to create their own document classes. These document + classes have become very popular among \LaTeX\ users. But it should + be kept in mind that they were designed for American tastes and + typography. At one time they even contained a number of hard-wired + texts. + + This report describes \babel{}, a package that makes use of the + capabilities of \TeX\ version 3 and, to some extent, \xetex{} and + \luatex, to provide an environment in which documents can be typeset + in a language other than US English, or in more than one language. + However, no attempt has been done to take full advantage of the + features provided by the latter, which would require a completely + new core (as for example \file{polyglossia} or as part of \LaTeX3). +\end{abstract} + +\tableofcontents + +\section{The user interface}\label{U-I} + +The user interface of this package is quite simple. It consists of a +set of commands that switch from one language to another, and a set of +commands that deal with shorthands. It is also possible to find out +what the current language is. + +In \LaTeX2e\ the preamble of the document: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage[dutch,english]{babel} +\end{verbatim} +would tell \LaTeX\ that the document would be written in two +languages, Dutch and English, and that English would be the first +language in use, and the main one. You can also set the main language +explicitly: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage[main=english,dutch]{babel} +\end{verbatim} +Another approach is making \Lopt{dutch} and \Lopt{english} global +options in order to let other packages detect and use them: + +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[dutch,english]{article} +\usepackage{babel} +\usepackage{varioref} +\end{verbatim} + +In this last example, the package \texttt{varioref} will also see +the options and will be able to use them. + +Languages may be set as global and as package option at the same +time, but in such a case you should set explicitly the main language +with the package option |main|: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[italian]{babel} +\usepackage[ngerman,main=italian]{babel} +\end{verbatim} + +\fbox{New 3.9c} The basic behaviour of some languages can be modified +when loading \babel. Modifiers are set after the language name, and +are prefixed with a dot (only when the language is set as package +option -- neither global options nor the |main| key accept them). An +example is (spaces are not significant and it can be written closed, +too): +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[latin .medieval, spanish .notilde .lcroman, danish]{babel} +\end{verbatim} + +Attributes (described below) are considered modifiers, ie, you can +set an attribute by including it in the modifiers list. However, +modifiers is a more general mechanism. + +Currently \babel{} provides no standard interface for +scripts. Languages sharing the same non-Latin script may define macros +to switch them (eg, |\textcyrillic|), but be aware they may also set +the language to a certain default. (Future versions might add such an +interface.) + +Because of the way \babel{} has evolved, ``language'' can refer to (1) +a set of hyphenation patters as preloaded into the format, (2) a +package option, (3) an |ldf| file, and (4) a name used in the document +to select a language or dialect. So, a package option refers to a +language in a generic way -- sometimes it is the actual language name +used to select it, sometimes it is a file name loading a language with +a different name, sometimes it is a file name loading several +languages. Please, read the documentation for specific languages for +further info. + +Loading directly |sty| files in \LaTeX{} (ie, +|\usepackage|\marg{language}) is deprected and you will get the error +``You have used an old interface to call babel''. + +In Plain, load languages styles with |\input| and then use +|\begindocument| (the latter is defined by \babel): +\begin{verbatim} +\input estonian.sty +\begindocument +\end{verbatim} +Note not all languages provide a |sty| file and some of them are +not compatible with Plain. + +\subsection{Selecting languages} + +The main language is selected automatically when the |document| +environment begins. + +\Describe\selectlanguage{\marg{language}} +When a user wants to switch from one language to another he can +do so using the macro |\selectlanguage|. This macro takes the +language, defined previously by a language definition file, as +its argument. It calls several macros that should be defined in +the language definition files to activate the special definitions +for the language chosen. + +If used inside braces there might be some non-local changes, as this +would be roughly equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} +{\selectlanguage{<inner-language>} ...}\selectlanguage{<outer-language>} +\end{verbatim} +If you want a change which is really local, you must enclose this +code with an additional grouping, like braces |{}|. + +This command can be used as environment, too. + +\Describe{\begin\menv{otherlanguage}}{\marg{language}\Eenv{otherlanguage}} + +The environment \Lenv{otherlanguage} does basically the same as +|\selectlanguage|, except the language change is (mostly) local to the +environment. This environment is required for intermixing +left-to-right typesetting with right-to-left typesetting. +The language to switch to is specified as an +argument to |\begin{otherlanguage}|. + +Actually, there might be some non-local changes, as this environment +is roughly equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} +\begingroup +\selectlanguage{<inner-language>} +... +\endgroup +\selectlanguage{<outer-language>} +\end{verbatim} +If you want a change which is really local, you must enclose this +environment with and additional grouping, like braces |{}|. + +Spaces after the environment are ignored. + +\Describe\foreignlanguage{\oarg{language}\marg{text}} +The command |\foreignlanguage| takes two arguments; the second +argument is a phrase to be typeset according to the rules of the +language named in its first argument. This command (1) only +switches the extra definitions and the hyphenation rules for the +language, \emph{not} the names and dates, (2) does not send +information about the language to auxiliary files (i.e., the +surrounding language is still in force), and (3) it works even if +the language has not been set as package option (but in such a +case it only sets the hyphenation patterns). + +\Describe{\begin\menv{otherlanguage*}}% +{\marg{language}\Eenv{otherlanguage*}} + +Same as |\foreignlanguage| but as environment. Spaces after the +environment are \textit{not} ignored. + +\Describe\languagename{} +The control sequence |\languagename| contains the name of the +current language. However, due to some internal inconsistencies in +catcodes it should \textit{not} be used to test its value (use +\textsf{iflang}, by Heiko Oberdiek). + +\Describe\iflanguage{\marg{language}\marg{true}\marg{false}} + +If more than one language is used, it might be necessary to know which +language is active at a specific time. This can be checked by a call +to |\iflanguage|, but note here ``language'' is used in the \TeX\ +sense, as a set of hyphenation patterns, and \textit{not} as its +\textsf{babel} name. This macro takes three arguments. The first +argument is the name of a language; the second and third arguments are +the actions to take if the result of the test is true or false +respectively. The advice about |\languagename| also applies here -- +use \textsf{iflang} instead of |\iflanguage| if possible. + +\Describe{\begin\menv{hyphenrules}}{\marg{language}\Eenv{hyphenrules}} + +The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select \emph{only} +the hyphenation rules to be used (it can be used as command, +too). This can for instance be used to select `nohyphenation', +provided that in \file{language.dat} the `language' +\textsf{nohyphenation} is defined by loading \file{zerohyph.tex}. It +deactivates language shorthands, too (but not user shorthands). + +Except for these simple uses, |hyphenrules| is discouraged and +|otherlanguage*| (the starred version) is preferred, as the former +does not take into account possible changes in encodings or characters +like, say, |'| done by some languages (eg, \textsf{italian}, +\textsf{frenchb}, \textsf{ukraineb}). To set hyphenation exceptions, +use |\babelhyphenation| (see below). + +\subsection{Shorthands} + +A \textit{shorthand} is a sequence of one or two characters that +expands to arbitrary \TeX{} code. + +Shorthands can be used for different kinds of things, as for example: +(1) in some languages shorthands such as |"a| are defined to be able +to hyphenate the word if the encoding is OT1; (2) in some languages +shorthands such as |!| are used to insert the right amount of white +space; (3) several kinds of discretionaries and breaks can be inserted +easily with |"-|, |"=|, etc. + +The package \textsf{inputenc} as well as \xetex{} an \luatex{} have +alleviated entering non-ASCII characters, but minority languages and +some texts can still require characters not directly available in the +keyboards (and sometimes not even as separated or precomposed Unicode +characters). As to the point 2, now \textsf{pdfTeX} provides +|\knbccode|. Tools of point 3 can be still very useful in general. + +There are three levels of shorthands: \textit{user}, +\textit{language}, and \textit{system} (by order of +precedence). Version 3.9 introduces the \textit{language user} +level on top of the user level, as described below. In most +cases, you will use only shorthands provided by languages. + +Please, note the following: +\begin{enumerate} +\item Activated chars used for two-char shorthands cannot be + followed by a closing brace |}| and the spaces following are + gobbled. With one-char shorthands (eg, |:|), they are preserved. +\item If on a certain level (system, language, user) there is a + one-char shorthand, two-char ones starting with that + char and on the same level are ignored. +\end{enumerate} + +\Describe{\shorthandon}{\marg{shorthands-list}} +\DescribeOther{\shorthandoff}{% +\colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}% +\marg{shorthands-list}} +It is sometimes necessary to switch a shorthand +character off temporarily, because it must be used in an +entirely different way. For this purpose, the user commands +|\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon| are provided. They each take a +list of characters as their arguments. + +The command |\shorthandoff| sets the |\catcode| for each of the +characters in its argument to other (12); the command |\shorthandon| +sets the |\catcode| to active (13). Both commands only work on `known' +shorthand characters. If a character is not known to be a shorthand +character its category code will be left unchanged. + +\fbox{New 3.9} Note however, |\shorthandoff| does not behave as +you would expect with characters like |~| or |^|, because they +usually are not ``other''. For them |\shorthandoff*| is provided, +so that with +\begin{verbatim} +\shorthandoff*{~^} +\end{verbatim} +|~| is still active, very likely with the meaning of a non-breaking +space, and |^| is the superscript character. The catcodes used are +those when the shorthands are defined, usually when language files are +loaded. + +\Describe{\useshorthands}{% +\colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}% +\marg{char}} + +The command |\useshorthands| initiates the definition of user-defined +shorthand sequences. It has one argument, the character that starts +these personal shorthands. + +\fbox{New 3.9} However, user shorthands are not always alive, as they +may be deactivated by languages (for example, if you use |"| for your +user shorthands and switch from \textsf{german} to \textsf{french}, +they stop working). Therefore, a starred version +|\useshorthands*|\marg{char} is provided, which makes sure shorthands +are always activated. + +Currently, if the option |shorthands| is used, you must include any +character to be activated with |\useshorthands|. This restriction will +be lifted in a future release. + +\Describe\defineshorthand{\texttt{[}\langlist\texttt{]}%^^A + \marg{shorthand}\marg{code}} + +The command |\defineshorthand| takes two arguments: the first is +a one- or two-character shorthand sequence, and the second is the +code the shorthand should expand to. + +\fbox{New 3.9} An optional argument allows to (re)define language +and system shorthands (some languages do not activate shorthands, +so you may want to add |\languageshorthands|\marg{lang} to the +corresponding |\extras|\m{lang}). By default, user shorthands are +(re)defined. + +User shorthands override language ones, which in turn override +system shorthands. Language-dependent user shorthands (new in +3.9) take precedence over ``normal'' user shorthands. + +As an example of their applications, let's assume you want a +unified set of shorthand for discretionaries (languages do not +define shorthands consistently, and |"-|, |\-|, |"=| have +different meanings). You could start with, say: +\begin{verbatim} +\useshorthands*{"} +\defineshorthand{"*}{\babelhyphen{soft}} +\defineshorthand{"-}{\babelhyphen{hard}} +\end{verbatim} +However, behaviour of hyphens is language dependent. For example, in +languages like Polish and Portugese, a hard hyphen inside compound +words are repeated at the beginning of the next line. You could set: +\begin{verbatim} +\defineshorthand[*polish,*portugese]{"-}{\babelhyphen{repeat}} +\end{verbatim} +Here, options with |*| set a language-dependent user shorthand, which +means the generic one above only applies for the rest of languages; +without |*| they would (re)define the language shorthands instead, +which are overriden by user ones. + +Now, you have a single unified shorthand (|"-|), with a content-based +meaning (`compound word hyphen') whose visual behavior is that +expected in each context. + +\Describe\aliasshorthand{\marg{original}\marg{alias}} + +The command |\aliasshorthand| can be used to let another +character perform the same functions as the default shorthand +character. If one prefers for example to use the character |/| +over |"| in typing Polish texts, this can be achieved by entering +|\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. \emph{Please note} the substitute +character must \textit{not} have been declared before as +shorthand (in such case, |\aliashorthands| is ignored). + +The following example shows how to replace a shorthand by another +\begin{verbatim} +\aliasshorthand{~}{^} +\AtBeginDocument{\shorthandoff*{~}} +\end{verbatim} +However, shorthands remember somehow the original character, and the +fallback value is that of the latter. So, in this example, if no +shorthand if found, |^| expands to a non-breaking space, because this +is the value of |~| (internally, |^| calls |\active@char~| or +|\normal@char~|). Furthermore, if you change the |system| value of |^| +with |\defineshorthand| nothing happens. + +\Describe\languageshorthands{\marg{language}} The command +|\languageshorthands| can be used to switch the shorthands on the +language level. It takes one argument, the name of a language or +|none| (the latter does what its name suggests).\footnote{Actually, +any name not corresponding to a language group does the same as +\texttt{none}. However, follow this convention because it might be +enforced in future releases of \babel{} to catch possible errors.} +Note that for this to work the language should have been specified as +an option when loading the \babel\ package. For example, you can use +in \textsf{english} the shorthands defined by \textsf{ngerman} with +\begin{verbatim} +\addto\extrasenglish{\languageshorthands{ngerman}} +\end{verbatim} + +Very often, this is a more convenient way to deactivate shorthands +than |\shorthandoff|, as for example if you want to define a macro +to easy typing phonetic characters with \textsf{tipa}: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\myipa}[1]{{\languageshorthands{none}\tipaencoding#1}} +\end{verbatim} + +\Describe\babelshorthand{\marg{shorthand}} +With this command you can use shorthands even if (1) not activated in +\texttt{shorthands} (in this case only shorthands for the current +language are taken into account, ie, not user shorthands), (2) turned +off with |\shorthandoff| or (3) deactivated with |\bbl@deactivate|; +for example, \verb|\babelshorthand{"u}| or \verb|\babelshorthand{:}|. +(You can conveniently define your own macros, or even you own user +shorthands provided they do not ovelap.) + +For your records, here is a list of shorthands, but you must check +them, as they may change:\footnote{Thanks to Enrico Gregorio} + +\begin{description} +\itemsep=-\parskip +\item[Languages with no shorthands] Croatian, English (any variety), + Indonesian, Hebrew, Interlingua, Irish, Lower Sorbian, Malaysian, + North Sami, Romanian, Scottish, Welsh +\item[Languages with only \texttt{"} as defined shorthand character] + Albanian, Bulgarian, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, German (old and new + orthography, also Austrian), Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, + Portuguese (also Brazilian), Russian, Serbian (with Latin script), + Slovene, Swedish, Ukrainian, Upper Sorbian +\item[Basque] |" ' ~| +\item[Breton] |: ; ? !| +\item[Catalan] |" ' `| +\item[Czech] |" -| +\item[Esperanto] |^| +\item[Estonian] |" ~| +\item[French] (all varieties) |: ; ? !| +\item[Galician] |" . ' ~ < >| +\item[Greek] |~| +\item[Hungarian] |`| +\item[Kurmanji] |^| +\item[Latin] |" ^ =| +\item[Slovak] |" ^ ' -| +\item[Spanish] |" . < > '| +\item[Turkish] |: ! =| +\end{description} +In addition, the \babel{} core declares |~| as a one-char shorthand +which is let, like the standard |~|, to a non breaking +space.\footnote{This declaration serves to nothing, but it is +preserved for backward compatibility.} + + +\subsection{Package options} + +\fbox{New 3.9} +These package options are processed before language options, so +that they are taken into account irrespective of its order. + +\Describe{shorthands=}{\meta{char}\meta{char}... +$\string|$ \texttt{off}} +The only language shorthands activated +are those given, like, eg: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[esperanto,frenchb,shorthands=:;!?]{babel} +\end{verbatim} +If \verb|'| is included, \texttt{activeacute} is set; if \verb|`| +is included, \texttt{activegrave} is set. Active characters (like +\verb|~|) should be preceded by \verb|\string| (otherwise they +will be expanded by \LaTeX{} before they are passed to the package +and therefore they will not be recognized); however, |t| is provided +for the common case of |~| (as well as |c| for the comma). + +With |shorthands=off| no language shorthands are defined, +As some languages use this mechanism for tools not available +otherwise, a macro \verb|\babelshorthand| is defined, which allows +using them; see above. + +\Describe{safe=}{\texttt{none} $\string|$ \texttt{ref} +$\string|$ \texttt{bib}} +Some \LaTeX{} macros are redefined so that using +shorthands is safe. With \texttt{safe=bib} only |\nocite|, |\bibcite| and +|\bibitem| are redefined. With |safe=ref| only |\newlabel|, |\ref| +and |\pageref| are redefined (as well as a few macros from +\textsf{varioref} and \textsf{ifthen}). With |safe=none| no macro is +redefined. Of course, in such a case you cannot use shorthands in +these macros. + +\Describe{math=}{\texttt{active} $\string|$ \texttt{normal}} +Shorthands are mainly intended for text, not for math. By setting this +option with the value |normal| they are deactivated in math mode +(default is |active|) and things like |${a'}$| (a closing brace after +a shorthand) are not a source of trouble any more. + +\Describe{config=}{\meta{file}} Instead of loading |bblopts.cfg|, +the file \meta{file}\texttt{.cfg} is loaded. + +\Describe{main=}{\meta{language}} Sets the main language, as +explained above, ie, this language is always the last loaded. The +language may be also given as package or global option or not. + +\Describe{headfoot=}{\meta{language}} By default, headlines and footlines are +not touched (only marks), and if they contain language dependent +macros (which is not usual) there may be unexpected results. With +this option you may set the language in heads and foots. + +\Describe{noconfigs}{} Global and +language default config files are not loaded, so you can make sure +your document is not spoilt by an unexpected \texttt{.cfg} +file. The key |config| still works. + +\Describe{showlanguages}{} Prints to the log the list of languages +loaded when the format was created: number (remember dialects can +share it), name, hyphenation file and exceptions file. + +\Describe{strings=}{\texttt{generic} $\string|$ \texttt{unicode} +$\string|$ \texttt{encoded} $\string|$ \meta{label} $\string|$ \meta{font encoding}} +Selects the encoding +of strings in languages supporting this feature. Predefined labels +are |generic| (for traditional \TeX), |unicode| (for engines like +\xetex{} and \luatex) and |encoded| (for special cases requiring mixed +encodings). Other allowed values are font encoding codes (|T1|, |T2A|, +|LGR|, |L7X|...), but only in languages supporting them. + +\vspace{3ex} +(The following three options have been available in previous versions +of \babel.) + +\Describe{KeepShorthandsActive}{} +Tells babel not to deactivate shorthands after loading a language +file, so that they are also availabe in the preamble. + +\Describe{activeacute}{} For some languages \babel\ supports this +options to set |'| as a shorthand in case it is not done by default. + +\Describe{activegrave}{} +Same for |`|. + +\subsection{The \texttt{base} option} + +With this package option \babel{} just loads some basic macros (those +in |switch.def|), defines |\AfterBabelLanguage| and exits. It also +selects the hyphenations patterns for the last language passed as +option (by its name in |language.dat|). There are two main uses: +classes and packages, and as a last resort in case there are, for some +reason, incompatible languages. It can be used if you just want to +select the hyphenations patterns of a single language. + +\Describe\AfterBabelLanguage{\marg{option-name}\marg{code}} + +This command is currently the only provided by |base|. Executes +\meta{code} when the file loaded by the corresponding package option +is finished (at |\ldf@finish|). The setting is global. So +\begin{verbatim} +\AfterBabelLanguage{frenchb}{...} +\end{verbatim} +does ... at the end of |frenchb.ldf|. It can be used in |ldf| files, +too, but in such a case the code is executed only if +\meta{option-name} is the same as |\CurrentOption| (which could not +be the same as the option name as set in |\usepackage|!). + +For example, consider two languages \textsf{foo} and \textsf{bar} +defining the same |\macro| with |\newcommand|. An error is raised if +you attempt to load both. Here is a way to overcome this problem: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[base]{babel} +\AfterBabelLanguage{foo}{% + \let\macroFoo\macro + \let\macro\relax} +\usepackage[foo,bar]{babel} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Hooks} + +\fbox{New 3.9} A hook is code to be executed at certain events. Some +hooks are predefined when \luatex{} and \xetex{} are used. + +\Describe\AddBabelHook{\marg{name}\marg{event}\marg{code}} + +The same name can be applied to several events. Hooks may be enabled +and disabled for all defined events with +|\EnableBabelHook|\marg{name}, |\DisableBabelHook|\marg{name} + +Current events are: |adddialect|, |write|, |beforeextras|, +|afterextras|, |patterns|, |hyphenation|, |defaultcommands|, |encodedcommands|, +|stopcommands| and |stringprocess|. Four events are used in +\file{hyphen.cfg}, which are handled in a quite different way for +efficiency reasons -- these are |everylanguage|, |loadkernel|, +|loadpatterns| and |loadexceptions|, which, unlike the precedent ones, +only have a single hook and replace a default definition. (Names +containing the string |babel| are reserved; they are used, for +example, by |\useshortands*| to add a hook for the event +|afterextras|.) + +In some of them you can use one or two \TeX{} parameters (|#1|, |#2|), +with the meaning given below: +\begin{description} +\renewcommand\makelabel[1]{% + \hspace\labelsep\normalfont\ttfamily\color{thered}#1} +\itemsep=-\parskip +\item[everylanguage] (language) Executed before patterns are loaded. +\item[loadkernel] (file) By default loads |switch.def|. It can be used + to load a different version of this files or to load nothing. +\item[loadpatterns] (patterns file) Loads the patterns file. Used by + \file{luababel.def}. +\item[loadexceptions] (exceptions file) Loads the exceptions + file. Used by \file{luababel.def}. +\item[adddialect] (language name, dialect name) Used by + \file{luababel.def} to load the patterns if not preloaded. +\item[patterns] (language name, language with encoding) Executed just + after the |\language| has been set. The second argument has the + patterns name actually selected (in the form of either |lang:ENC| or + |lang|). +\item[hyphenation] (language name, language with encoding) Executed + locally just before exceptions given in |\babelhyphenation| are + actually set. +\item[defaultcommands] Used (locally) in |\StartBabelCommands|. +\item[encodedcommands] (input, font encodings) Used (locally) in + |\StartBabelCommands|. Both \xetex{} and \luatex{} make sure the + encoded text is read correctly. +\item[stopcommands] Used to reset the the above, if necessary. +\item[write] This event comes just after the switching commands are + written to the |aux| file. +\item[beforeextras] Just before executing |\extras|\m{language}. This + event and the next one should not contain language-dependent code + (for that, add it to |\extras|\m{language}). +\item[afterextras] Just after executing |\extras|\m{language}. For + example, the following deactivates shorthands in all languages: +\begin{verbatim} +\AddBabelHook{noshort}{afterextras}{\languageshorthands{none}} +\end{verbatim} +\item[stringprocess] Intead of a parameter, you can manipulate the + macro |\BabelString| containing the string to be defined with + |\SetString|. For example, to use an expanded version of the string + in the definition, write: +\begin{verbatim} +\AddBabelHook{myhook}{stringprocess}{% + \protected@edef\BabelString{\BabelString}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{description} + +\subsection{Hyphen tools} + +\Describe\babelhyphen{% + \colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}\marg{type}} +\DescribeOther\babelhyphen{% + \colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}\marg{text}} + +\fbox{New 3.9} It is customary to classify hyphens in two types: (1) +\textit{explicit} or \textit{hard hyphens}, which in \TeX\ are +entered as \verb|-|, and (2) \textit{optional} or \textit{soft +hyphens}, which are entered as \verb|\-|. Strictly, a \textit{soft +hyphen} is not a hyphen, but just a breaking oportunity or, in +\TeX\ terms, a ``discretionary''; a \textit{hard hyphen} is a hyphen +with a breaking oportunity after it. A further type is a +\textit{non-breaking hyphen}, a hyphen without a breaking +oportunity. + +In \TeX, \verb|-| and \verb|\-| forbid further breaking oportunities +in the word. This is the desired behaviour very often, but not +always, and therefore many languages provide shorthands for these +cases. Unfortunately, this has not been done consistently: for +example, in Dutch, Portugese, Catalan or Danish, \verb|"-| is a hard +hyphen, while in German, Spanish, Norwegian, Slovak or Russian, it +is a soft hyphen. Furthermore, some of them even redefine |\-|, so +that you cannot insert a soft hyphen without breaking oportunities +in the rest of the word. + +Therefore, some macros are provide with a set of basic ``hyphens'' +which can be used by themselves, to define a user shorthand, or even +in language files. +\begin{itemize} +\item |\babelhyphen{soft}| and |\babelhyphen{hard}| are self + explanatory. +\item |\babelhyphen{repeat}| inserts a hard hyphen which is repeated + at the beginning of the next line, as done in languages like + Polish, Portugese and Spanish. +\item |\babelhyphen{nobreak}| inserts a hard hyphen without a break + after it (even if a space follows). +\item |\babelhyphen{empty}| inserts a break oportunity without + a hyphen at all. +\item |\babelhyphen|\marg{text} is a hard ``hyphen'' using \m{text} + instead. A typical case is |\babelhyphen{/}|. +\end{itemize} +With all of them hyphenation in the rest of the word is enabled. If +you don't want enabling it, there is a starred counterpart: +|\babelhyphen*{soft}| (which in most cases is equivalent to the +original |\-|), |\babelhyphen*{hard}|, etc. + +Note |hard| is also good for isolated prefixes (eg, \textit{anti-}) +and |nobreak| for isolated suffixes (eg, \textit{-ism}), but in both +cases |\babelhyphen*{nobreak}| is usually better. + +There are also some differences with \LaTeX: (1) the character used is +that set for the current font, while in \LaTeX{} it is hardwired to +|-| (a typical value); (2) the hyphen to be used in fonts with a +negative |\hyphenchar| is |-|, like in \LaTeX, but it can be changed to +another value by redefining |\babelnullhyphen|; (3) a break after the +hyphen is forbidden if preceded by a glue ${>}0$~pt (at the beginning +of a word, provided it is not immediately preceded by, say, a +parenthesis). + +\Describe\babelhyphenation{\texttt{[}\langlist\texttt{]}%^^A + \marg{exceptions}} + +\fbox{New 3.9} Sets hyphenation exceptions for the languages given +or, without the optional argument, for \textit{all} languages (eg, +proper nouns or common loan words, and of course monolingual +documents). Language exceptions take precedence over global ones. + +It can be used only in the preamble, and exceptions are set when the +language is first selected, thus taking into account changes of +|\lccodes|'s done in |\extras|\m{lang} as well as the script specific +encoding (not set in the preamble by default). Multiple +|\babelhyphenation|'s are allowed. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\babelhyphenation{Wal-hal-la Dar-bhan-ga} +\end{verbatim} + +Listed words are saved expanded and therefore it relies on the +LICR. Of course, it also works without the LICR if the input and the +font encondings are the same, like in Unicode based engines. + +\subsection{Language attributes} + +\DescribeMacro{\languageattribute} +This is a user-level command, to be used in the preamble of a +document (after |\usepackage[...]{babel}|), that declares which +attributes are to be used for a given language. It takes two +arguments: the first is the name of the language; the second, +a (list of) attribute(s) to be used. Attributes must be set in the +preamble and only once -- they cannot be turned on and off. +The command checks whether the language is known in this document +and whether the attribute(s) are known for this language. + +Several language definition files use their own methods to set +options. For example, \textsf{frenchb} uses |\frenchbsetup|, +\textsf{magyar} (1.5) uses |\magyarOptions| and \textsf{spanish} +a set of package options (eg, |es-nolayout|). Macros settting +options are also used (eg, |\ProsodicMarksOn| in \textsf{latin}). + +\subsection{Languages supported by \babel} + +In the following table most of the languages supported by \babel\ are +listed, together with the names of the options which you can load +\babel\ with for each language. Note this list is open and the +current options may be different. + +\begin{description} +\itemsep=-\parskip +\sffamily +\item[Afrikaans] afrikaans +\item[Bahasa] bahasa, indonesian, indon, bahasai, + bahasam, malay, meyalu +\item[Basque] basque +\item[Breton] breton +\item[Bulgarian] bulgarian +\item[Catalan] catalan +\item[Croatian] croatian +\item[Czech] czech +\item[Danish] danish +\item[Dutch] dutch +\item[English] english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, + british, canadian, australian, newzealand +\item[Esperanto] esperanto +\item[Estonian] estonian +\item[Finnish] finnish +\item[French] french, francais, canadien, acadian +\item[Galician] galician +\item[German] austrian, german, germanb, ngerman, naustrian +\item[Greek] greek, polutonikogreek +\item[Hebrew] hebrew +\item[Icelandic] icelandic +\item[Interlingua] interlingua +\item[Irish Gaelic] irish +\item[Italian] italian +\item[Latin] latin +\item[Lower Sorbian] lowersorbian +\item[North Sami] samin +\item[Norwegian] norsk, nynorsk +\item[Polish] polish +\item[Portuguese] portuges, portuguese, brazilian, brazil +\item[Romanian] romanian +\item[Russian] russian +\item[Scottish Gaelic] scottish +\item[Spanish] spanish +\item[Slovakian] slovak +\item[Slovenian] slovene +\item[Swedish] swedish +\item[Serbian] serbian +\item[Turkish] turkish +\item[Ukrainian] ukrainian +\item[Upper Sorbian] uppersorbian +\item[Welsh] welsh +\end{description} + +There are more languages not listed above, including \textsf{hindi, +thai, thaicjk, latvian, turkmen, magyar, mongolian, romansh, +lithuanian, spanglish, vietnamese, japanese, pinyin, arabic, farsi, +ibygreek, bgreek, serbianc, frenchle, ethiop} and \textsf{friulan}. + +Most of them work out of the box, but some may require extra fonts, +encoding files, a preprocessor or even a complete framework (like +CJK). For example, if your have the \textsf{velthuis/devnag} package, +you can create a file with extension |.dn|: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage[hindi]{babel} +\begin{document} +{\dn devaanaa.m priya.h} +\end{document} +\end{verbatim} +Then you preprocess it with |devnag| \m{file}, which creates +\m{file}|.tex|; you can then typeset the latter with \LaTeX. + +\subsection{Tips, workarounds and know issues} + +\begin{itemize} +\item If you use the document class \cls{book} \emph{and} you use + |\ref| inside the argument of |\chapter| (or just use |\ref| inside + |\MakeUppercase|), \LaTeX\ will keep complaining about an undefined + label. To prevent such problems, you could revert to using + uppercase labels, you can use |\lowercase{\ref{foo}}| inside the + argument of |\chapter|, or, if you will not use shorthands in + labels, set the |safe| option to |none| or |bib|. + +\item\catcode`\|=12\relax Both \textsf{ltxdoc} and \textsf{babel} use + \verb|\AtBeginDocument| to change some catcodes, and babel reloads + \textsf{hhline} to make sure \verb|:| has the right one, so if you + want to change the catcode of \verb/|/ it has to be done using the + same method at the proper place, with +\begin{verbatim} +\AtBeginDocument{\DeleteShortVerb{\|}} +\end{verbatim} + \textit{before} loading babel. This way, when the document begins + the sequence is (1) make \verb/|/ active (\textsf{ltxdoc}); (2) make + it unactive (your settings); (3) make babel shorthands active + (\textsf{babel)}; (4) reload \textsf{hhline} (\textsf{babel}, now + with the correct catcodes for \verb/|/ and + \verb|:|).\catcode`\|=\active + +\item Documents with several input encodings are not frequent, but + sometimes are useful. You can set different encodings for different + languages as the following example shows: +\begin{verbatim} +\addto\extrasfrench{\inputencoding{latin1}} +\addto\extrasrussian{\inputencoding{koi8-r}} +\end{verbatim} + (A recent version of \textsf{inputenc} is required.) + \item For the hyphenation to work correctly, lccodes cannot change, + because \TeX{} only takes into account the values when the + paragraph is hyphenated, i.e., when it has been + finished.\footnote{This explains why \LaTeX{} assumes the lowercase + mapping of T1 and does not provide a tool for multiple + mappings. Unfortunately, \cs{savinghyphcodes} is not a solution + either, because lccodes for hyphenation are frozen in the format + and cannot be changed.} So, if you write a chunk of French text + with |\foreinglanguage|, the apostrophes might not be taken into + account. This is a limitation of \TeX, not of + \babel. Alternatively, you may use |\useshorthands| to activate |'| + and |\defineshorthand|, or redefine |\textquoteright| (the latter + is called by the non-ASCII right quote). +\item \verb|\bibitem| is out of sync with \verb|\selectlanguage| in + the \file{.aux} file. The reason is \verb|\bibitem| uses + \verb|\immediate| (and others, in fact), while + \verb|\selectlanguage| doesn't. There is no known workaround. +\item Babel does not take into account |\normalsfcodes| and + (non-)French spacing is not always properly (un)set by + languages. However, problems are unlikely to happen and therefore + this part remains untouched in version 3.9 (but it is in the `to + do' list). +\item Using a character mathematically active (ie, with math code + |"8000|) as a shorthand can make \TeX{} enter in an infinite + loop. (Another issue in the `to do' list, although there is a + partial solution.) +\item Also in the `to do' list is a common interface to switch + scripts, to avoid the current problem of languages trying to define + |\text|\m{script} in different ways. +\end{itemize} + +\section{Preloading languages with \file{language.dat}} + +\TeX{} and most engines based on it (pdf\TeX, \xetex, $\epsilon$-\TeX, +the main exception being \luatex) require hyphenation patterns to be +loaded when a format is created (eg, \LaTeX, Xe\LaTeX, +pdf\LaTeX). \babel{} provides a tool which has become standand in many +distributions and based on a ``configuration file'' named +\file{language.dat}. The exact way this file is used depends on the +distribution, so please, read the documentation for the latter (note +also some distributions generate the file with some tool). + +In that file the person who maintains a \TeX\ environment has to record +for which languages he has hyphenation patterns \emph{and} in which +files these are stored\footnote{This is because different operating +systems sometimes use \emph{very} different file-naming +conventions.}. When hyphenation exceptions are stored in a separate +file this can be indicated by naming that file \emph{after} the file +with the hyphenation patterns. + +The file can contain empty lines and comments, as well as lines which +start with an equals (\texttt{=}) sign. Such a line will instruct +\LaTeX\ that the hyphenation patterns just processed have to be known +under an alternative name. Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +% File : language.dat +% Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load. +english english.hyphenations +=british + +dutch hyphen.dutch exceptions.dutch % Nederlands +german hyphen.ger +\end{verbatim} + +You may also set the font encoding the patterns are +intended for by following the language name by a colon and the encoding +code.\footnote{This in not a new feature, but in former +versions it didn't work correctly.} For example: +\begin{verbatim} +german:T1 hyphenT1.ger +german hyphen.ger +\end{verbatim} +With the previous settings, if the enconding when the language is +selected is |T1| then the patterns in \file{hyphenT1.ger} are +used, but otherwise use those in \file{hyphen.ger} (note the encoding +could be set in |\extras|\m{lang}). + +A typical error when using \babel{} is the following: +\begin{verbatim} +No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for +the language `<lang>' into the format. +Please, configure your TeX system to add them and +rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns +preloaded for english instead}} +\end{verbatim} +It simply means you must reconfigure \file{language.dat}, either by +hand or with the tools provided by your distribution. + +\section{The interface between the core of \babel{} and the language +definition files} + +The \textit{language definition files} (ldf) must conform to a +number of conventions, because these files have to fill in the gaps +left by the common code in \file{babel.def}, i.\,e., the +definitions of the macros that produce texts. Also the +language-switching possibility which has been built into the +\babel{} system has its implications. + +The following assumptions are made: +\begin{itemize} +\item Some of the language-specific definitions might be used by plain + \TeX\ users, so the files have to be coded so that they can be read + by both \LaTeX\ and plain \TeX. The current format can be checked by + looking at the value of the macro |\fmtname|. +\item The common part of the \babel{} system redefines a number of + macros and environments (defined previously in the document style) + to put in the names of macros that replace the previously hard-wired + texts. These macros have to be defined in the language definition + files. +\item The language definition files must define five macros, used to + activate and deactivate the language-specific definitions. These + macros are |\|\langvar|hyphenmins|, |\captions|\langvar, + |\date|\langvar, |\extras|\langvar\ and |\noextras|\langvar (the + last two may be left empty); where \langvar\ is either the name of + the language definition file or the name of the \LaTeX\ option that + is to be used. These macros and their functions are discussed + below. You must define all or none for a language (or a dialect); + defining, say, |\date|\langvar\ but not |\captions|\langvar\ does + not raise an error but can lead to unexpected results. +\item When a language definition file is loaded, it can define + |\l@|\langvar\ to be a dialect of |\language0| when |\l@|\langvar\ + is undefined. +\item Language names must be all lowercase. If an unknow language is + selected, \babel{} will attempt setting it after lowercasing its name. +\end{itemize} + +Some recommendations: +\begin{itemize} +\item The preferred shorthand is |"|, which is not used in \LaTeX{} + (quotes are entered as |``| and |''|). Other good choices are + characters which are not used in a certain context (eg, |=| in an + ancient language). Note however |=|, |<|, |>|, |:| and the like + can be dangerous, because they may be used as part of the syntax + of some elements (numeric expressions, key/value pairs, etc.). +\item Captions should not contain shorthands or encoding dependent + commands (the latter is not always possible, but should be clearly + documented). They should be defined using the LICR. You may + also use the new tools for encoded strings, described below. +\item Avoid adding things to |\noextras|\m{lang} except for umlauthigh + and friends, |\bbl@deactivate|, |\bbl@(non)frenchspacing|, and + language specific macros. Use always, if possible, |\bbl@save| and + |\bbl@savevariable| (except if you still want to have access to the + previous value). +\end{itemize} + +There are no special requirements for documenting your language +files. Now they are not included in the base \babel{} manual, so +provide a standalone document suited for your needs (and the +corresponding PDF, if you like), as well as other files you think can +be useful (eg, samples, readme). + +\subsection{Basic macros} + +In the core of the \babel{} system, several macros are defined for use +in language definition files. Their purpose is to make a new language +known. The first two are related to hyphenation patterns. + +\DescribeMacro{\addlanguage} +The macro |\addlanguage| is a non-outer version of the macro +|\newlanguage|, defined in \file{plain.tex} version~3.x. For older +versions of \file{plain.tex} and \file{lplain.tex} a substitute +definition is used. Here ``language'' is used in the \TeX{} sense of +set of hyphenation patterns. + +\DescribeMacro{\adddialect} +The macro |\adddialect| can be used when two languages can (or +must) use the same hyphenation patterns. This can also be useful +for languages for which no patterns are preloaded in the +format. In such cases the default behaviour of the \babel{} +system is to define this language as a `dialect' of the language +for which the patterns were loaded as |\language0|. Here +``language'' is used in the \TeX{} sense of set of hyphenation +patterns. + +\DescribeMacro{\<lang>hyphenmins} +The macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is used to store the values of +the |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. Redefine this macro +to set your own values, with two numbers corresponding to these +two parameters. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand\spanishhyphenmins{34} +\end{verbatim} +(Assigning |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| directly in +|\extras<lang>| has no effect.) + +\DescribeMacro{\providehyphenmins} +The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language +definition files to set |\lefthyphenmin| and +|\righthyphenmin|. This macro will check whether these parameters +were provided by the hyphenation file before it takes any action. +If these values have been already set, this command is ignored +(currenty, default pattern files do \textit{not} set them). + +\DescribeMacro{\captions<lang>} +The macro |\captions|\langvar\ defines the macros that +hold the texts to replace the original hard-wired texts. + +\DescribeMacro{\date<lang>} +The macro |\date|\langvar\ defines |\today|. + +\DescribeMacro{\extras<lang>} +The macro |\extras|\langvar\ contains all the extra definitions needed +for a specific language. This macro, like the following, is a hook -- +you can add thing to it, but it must not be used directly. + +\DescribeMacro{\noextras<lang>} +Because we want to let the user switch +between languages, but we do not know what state \TeX\ might be in +after the execution of |\extras|\langvar, a macro that brings +\TeX\ into a predefined state is needed. It will be no surprise +that the name of this macro is |\noextras|\langvar. + +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@declare@ttribute} +This is a command to be used in the language definition files for +declaring a language attribute. It takes three arguments: the +name of the language, the attribute to be defined, and the code +to be executed when the attribute is to be used. + +\DescribeMacro{\main@language} +To postpone the activation of the definitions needed for a +language until the beginning of a document, all language +definition files should use |\main@language| instead of +|\selectlanguage|. This will just store the name of the language, +and the proper language will be activated at the start of the +document. + +\DescribeMacro{\ProvidesLanguage} +The macro |\ProvidesLanguage| should be used to identify the +language definition files. Its syntax is similar to the syntax +of the \LaTeX\ command |\ProvidesPackage|. + +\DescribeMacro{\LdfInit} +The macro |\LdfInit| performs a couple of standard checks that +must be made at the beginning of a language definition file, +such as checking the category code of the @-sign, preventing +the \file{.ldf} file from being processed twice, etc. + +\DescribeMacro{\ldf@quit} +The macro |\ldf@quit| does work needed +if a \file{.ldf} file was processed +earlier. This includes resetting the category code +of the @-sign, preparing the language to be activated at +|\begin{document}| time, and ending the input stream. + +\DescribeMacro{\ldf@finish} +The macro |\ldf@finish| does work needed +at the end of each \file{.ldf} file. This +includes resetting the category code of the @-sign, +loading a local configuration file, and preparing the language +to be activated at |\begin{document}| time. + +\DescribeMacro{\loadlocalcfg} +After processing a language definition file, +\LaTeX\ can be instructed to load a local configuration +file. This file can, for instance, be used to add strings to +|\captions|\langvar\ to support local document +classes. The user will be informed that this +configuration file has been loaded. This macro is called by +|\ldf@finish|. + +\DescribeMacro{\substitutefontfamily} +(Deprecated.) This command takes three arguments, a font encoding and +two font family names. It creates a font description file for the +first font in the given encoding. This \file{.fd} file will instruct +\LaTeX\ to use a font from the second family when a font from the +first family in the given encoding seems to be needed. + +\subsection{Skeleton} + +Here is the basic structure of an |ldf| file, with a language, a +dialect and an attribute. + +\begin{verbatim} +\ProvidesLanguage{<language>} + [2013/04/22 v0.0 <Language> support from the babel system] +\LdfInit{<language>}{captions<language>} + +\ifx\undefined\l@<language> + \@nopatterns{<Language>} + \adddialect\l@<language>0 +\fi + +\adddialect\l@<dialect>\l@<language> + +\bbl@declare@ttribute{<language>}{<attrib>}{% + \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extras<language> + \expandafter{\extras<attrib><language>}% + \let\captions<language>\captions<attrib><language>} + +\providehyphenmins{<language>}{\tw@\thr@@} + +\def\captions<language>{} +\let\captions<dialect>\captions<language> + +\def\date<language>{} +\def\date<dialect>{} + +\addto\extras<language>{} +\addto\noextras<language>{} +\let\extras<dialect>\extras<language> +\let\noextras<dialect>\noextras<language> + +\ldf@finish{<language>} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Support for active characters} + +In quite a number of language definition files, active characters are +introduced. To facilitate this, some support macros are provided. + +\DescribeMacro{\initiate@active@char} +The internal macro |\initiate@active@char| is used in language +definition files to instruct \LaTeX\ to give a character the category +code `active'. When a character has been made active it will remain +that way until the end of the document. Its definition may vary. + +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@activate} +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@deactivate} +The command |\bbl@activate| is used to change the way an active +character expands. |\bbl@activate| `switches on' the active behaviour +of the character. |\bbl@deactivate| lets the active character expand +to its former (mostly) non-active self. + +\DescribeMacro{\declare@shorthand} +The macro |\declare@shorthand| is used to define the various +shorthands. It takes three arguments: the name for the collection of +shorthands this definition belongs to; the character (sequence) that +makes up the shorthand, i.e.\ |~| or |"a|; and the code to be executed +when the shorthand is encountered. (It does \textit{not} raise an +error if the shorthand character has not been ``initiated''.) + +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@add@special} +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@remove@special} +The \TeX book states: ``Plain \TeX\ includes a macro called +|\dospecials| that is essentially a set macro, representing the set of +all characters that have a special category code.'' \cite[p.~380]{DEK} +It is used to set text `verbatim'. To make this work if more +characters get a special category code, you have to add this character +to the macro |\dospecial|. \LaTeX\ adds another macro called +|\@sanitize| representing the same character set, but without the +curly braces. The macros |\bbl@add@special|\meta{char} and +|\bbl@remove@special|\meta{char} add and remove the character +\meta{char} to these two sets. + +\subsection{Support for saving macro definitions} + +Language definition files may want to \emph{re}define macros that +already exist. Therefor a mechanism for saving (and restoring) the +original definition of those macros is provided. We provide two macros +for this\footnote{This mechanism was introduced by Bernd Raichle.}. + +\DescribeMacro{\babel@save} +To save the current meaning of any control sequence, the macro +|\babel@save| is provided. It takes one argument, \meta{csname}, the +control sequence for which the meaning has to be saved. + +\DescribeMacro{\babel@savevariable} +A second macro is provided to save the current value of a variable. +In this context, anything that is allowed after the |\the| primitive +is considered to be a variable. The macro takes one argument, the +\meta{variable}. + +The effect of the preceding macros is to append a piece of code to +the current definition of |\originalTeX|. When |\originalTeX| is +expanded, this code restores the previous definition of the control +sequence or the previous value of the variable. + +\subsection{Support for extending macros} + +\DescribeMacro{\addto} +The macro |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\ code}|}| can +be used to extend the definition of a macro. The macro need not be +defined (ie, it can be undefined or |\relax|). This macro can, for +instance, be used in adding instructions to a macro like +|\extrasenglish|. + +Be careful when using this macro, because depending on the case the +assignment could be either global (usually) or local (sometimes). That +does not seems very consistent, but this behaviour is preserved for +backward compatibility. If you are using \pkg{etoolbox}, by Philipp +Lehman, consider using the tools provided by this package instead of +|\addto|. + +\subsection{Macros common to a number of languages} + +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@allowhyphens} +In several languages compound words are used. This means that when +\TeX\ has to hyphenate such a compound word, it only does so at the +`\texttt{-}' that is used in such words. To allow hyphenation in the +rest of such a compound word, the macro |\bbl@allowhyphens| can be +used. + +\DescribeMacro{\allowhyphens} +Same as |\bbl@allowhyphens|, but does nothing if the encoding is +|T1|. It is intended mainly for characters provided as real glyphs by +this encoding but constructed with |\accent| in |OT1|. + +Note the previous command (|\bbl@allowhyphens|) has different +applications (hyphens and discretionaries) than this one (composite +chars). Note also prior to version 3.7, |\allowhyphens| had the +behaviour of |\bbl@allowhyphens|. + +\DescribeMacro{\set@low@box} +For some languages, quotes need to be lowered to the baseline. For +this purpose the macro |\set@low@box| is available. It takes one +argument and puts that argument in an |\hbox|, at the baseline. The +result is available in |\box0| for further processing. + +\DescribeMacro{\save@sf@q} +Sometimes it is necessary to preserve the |\spacefactor|. For this +purpose the macro |\save@sf@q| is available. It takes one argument, +saves the current spacefactor, executes the argument, and restores the +spacefactor. + +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@frenchspacing} +\DescribeMacro{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} +The commands |\bbl@frenchspacing| and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| can be +used to properly switch French spacing on and off. + +\subsection{Encoding-dependent strings} + +\fbox{New 3.9} Babel 3.9 provides a way of defining strings in several +encodings, intended mainly for \luatex{} and \xetex. This is the only new +feature requiring changes in language files if you want to make use of +it. + +Furthermore, it must be activated explicitly, with the package option +|strings|. If there is no |strings|, these blocks are ignored, except +|\SetCase|s (and except if forced with |\UseStrings|, see +below). In other words, the old way of defining/switching strings still +works and it's used by default. + +It consist is a series of blocks started with +|\StartBabelCommands|. The last block is closed with +|\EndBabelCommands|. Each block is a single group (ie, local +declarations apply until the next |\StartBabelCommands| or +|\EndBabelCommands|). An |ldf| may contain several series of this +kind. + +Thanks to this new feature, string values and string language +switching are not mixed any more. No need of |\addto|. If the language +is german, just redefine |\germanchaptername|. + +\Describe\StartBabelCommands + {\marg{language-list}\marg{category}\oarg{selector}} + +The \m{language-list} specifies which languages the block is intended +for. A block is taken into account only if the |\CurrentOption| is +listed here. + +A ``selector'' is a name to be used as value in package option +|strings|, optionally followed by extra info about the encodings to be +used. The name |unicode| must be used for \xetex{} and \luatex{} (the +key |strings| has also other two special values: |generic| and +|encoded|). + +If a string is set several times (because several blocks are read), +the first one take precedence (ie, it works much like +|\providecommand|). + +Encoding info is |charset=| followed by a charset, which if given sets +how the strings should be traslated to the internal representation +used by the engine, typically |utf8|, which is the only value +supported currently (default is no traslations). + +A list of font encodings which the strings are expected to work with +can be given after |fontenc=| (separated with spaces, if two or more) -- +recommended, but not mandatory, although blocks without this key are +not taken into account if you have requested |strings=encoded|. + +Blocks without a selector are read always if the key |strings| has +been used. They provide fallback values, and therefore must be the +last blocks; they should be provided always if possible and all +strings should be defined somehow inside it; they can be the only +blocks (mainly LGC scripts using the LICR). Blocks without a selector +can be activated explicitly with |strings=generic| (no block is taken +into account except those). With |strings=encoded|, strings in those +blocks are set as default (internally, |?|). If there is no key +|strings|, string definitions are ignored, but |\SetCase|s are still +honoured (an a |encoded| way). + +The \m{category} is either |captions|, |date| or |extras|. You must +stick to these three categories, even if no error is raised when using +other name.\footnote{In future releases further categories may be +added.\nb{like `monetary', `time', `address', `name', `case' or +`numeric'}} It may be empty, too, but in such a case using +|\SetString| is an error (but not |\SetCase|). + +\begin{verbatim} +\StartBabelCommands\CurrentOption{captions} + [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8] +\SetString{\chaptername}{utf8-string} + +\StartBabelCommands\CurrentOption{captions} +\SetString{\chaptername}{ascii-maybe-LICR-string} + +\EndBabelCommands +\end{verbatim} + +A real example is: +\begin{verbatim}[escapechar=\&] +\StartBabelCommands{austrian}{date} + [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8] + \SetString\monthiname{J&\"a&nner} + +\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{date} + [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8] + \SetString\monthiiiname{M&\"a&rz} + +\StartBabelCommands{austrian}{date} + \SetString\monthiname{J\"{a}nner} + +\StartBabelCommands{german}{date} + \SetString\monthiname{Januar} + +\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{date} + \SetString\monthiiname{Februar} + \SetString\monthiiiname{M\"{a}rz} + \SetString\monthivname{April} + \SetString\monthvname{Mai} + \SetString\monthviname{Juni} + \SetString\monthviiname{Juli} + \SetString\monthviiiname{August} + \SetString\monthixname{September} + \SetString\monthxname{Oktober} + \SetString\monthxiname{November} + \SetString\monthxiiname{Dezenber} + \SetString\today{\number\day.~% + \csname month\romannumeral\month name\endcsname\space + \number\year} + +\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{captions} + \SetString\prefacename{Vorwort} + [etc.] + +\EndBabelCommands +\end{verbatim} + +When used in |ldf| files, previous values of |\|\m{category}\m{language} +are overriden, which means the old way to define strings still works +and used by default (to be precise, is first set to undefined and then +strings are added). However, when used in the preamble or in a +package, new settings are added to the previous ones, if the language +exists (in the \babel{} sense, ie, if |\date|\m{language} exists). + +\Describe\EndBabelCommands{} +Marks the end of the series of blocks. + +\Describe\UseStrings{} +You may also want to omit the old way of defining define strings +altogether. Just add |\UseStrings| after the first +|\StartBabelCommands| and the generic branchs will be taken into +account even if there is no |strings| key. This directive applies to +all subsequent blocks, until |\EndBabelCommands|. + +\Describe\SetString{\marg{macro-name}\marg{string}} +Adds \meta{macro-name} to the current category, and defines globally +\meta{lang-macro-name} to \meta{code} (after applying the +transformation corresponding to the current charset or defined with +the hook |stringprocess|). + +Use this command to define strings, without including any ``logic'' if +possible, which should be a separated macro. See the example above for +the date. + +\Describe\SetStringLoop{\marg{macro-name}\marg{string-list}} +A convenient way to define several ordered names at once. For example, +to define |\abmoniname|, |\abmoniiname|, etc. (and similarly with +|abday|): +\begin{verbatim} +\SetStringLoop{abmon#1name}{en,fb,mr,ab,my,jn,jl,ag,sp,oc,nv,dc} +\SetStringLoop{abday#1name}{lu,ma,mi,ju,vi,sa,do} +\end{verbatim} +|#1| is replaced by the roman numeral. + +\Describe\SetCase{\oarg{map-list}\marg{toupper-code}\marg{tolower-code}} +Sets globally code to be executed at |\MakeUppercase| and +|\MakeLowercase|. The code would be typically things like |\let\BB\bb| +and |\uccode| or |\lccode| (although for the reasons explained above, +changes in lc/uc codes may not work). A \meta{map-list} is a series of +macros using the internal format of |\@uclclist| (eg, +|\bb\BB\cc\CC|). The mandatory arguments take precedence over the +optional one. This command, unlike |\SetString|, is executed always +(even without |strings|), and it is intented for minor readjustments +only. + +For example, as |T1| is the default case mapping in \LaTeX, we could +set for Turkish: +\begin{verbatim}[escapechar=\&] +\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{}[ot1enc, fontenc=OT1] +\SetCase + {\uccode"10=`I\relax} + {\lccode`I="10\relax} + +\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{}[unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8] +\SetCase + {\uccode`i=`&\rmfamily\.{\ttfamily I}&\relax + \uccode`&\i&=`I\relax} + {\lccode`&\rmfamily\.{\ttfamily I}&=`i\relax + \lccode`I=`&\i&\relax} + +\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{} +\SetCase + {\uccode`i="9D\relax + \uccode"19=`I\relax} + {\lccode"9D=`i\relax + \lccode`I="19\relax} + +\EndBabelCommands +\end{verbatim} +(Note the mapping for |OT1| is not complete.) + +\section{Compatibility and changes} + +\subsection{Compatibility with \file{german.sty}}\label{l-h} + +The file \file{german.sty} has been one of the sources of inspiration +for the \babel{} system. Because of this I wanted to include +\file{german.sty} in the \babel{} system. To be able to do that I had +to allow for one incompatibility: in the definition of the macro +|\selectlanguage| in \file{german.sty} the argument is used as the +{$\langle \it number \rangle$} for an |\ifcase|. So in this case a +call to |\selectlanguage| might look like |\selectlanguage{\german}|. + +In the definition of the macro |\selectlanguage| in \file{babel.def} +the argument is used as a part of other macronames, so a call to +|\selectlanguage| now looks like |\selectlanguage{german}|. Notice +the absence of the escape character. As of version~3.1a of \babel{} +both syntaxes are allowed. + +All other features of the original \file{german.sty} have been copied +into a new file, called \file{germanb.sty}\footnote{The `b' is added +to the name to distinguish the file from Partls' file.}. + +Although the \babel{} system was developed to be used with \LaTeX, +some of the features implemented in the language definition files +might be needed by plain \TeX\ users. Care has been taken that all +files in the system can be processed by plain \TeX. + +\subsection{Compatibility with \file{ngerman.sty}} + +When used with the options \Lopt{ngerman} or \Lopt{naustrian}, +\babel{} will provide all features of the package \pkg{ngerman}. +There is however one exception: The commands for special hyphenation +of double consonants (|"ff| etc.) and ck (|"ck|), which are no longer +required with the new German orthography, are undefined. With the +\pkg{ngerman} package, however, these commands will generate +appropriate warning messages only. + +\subsection{Compatibility with the \pkg{french} package} + +It has been reported to me that the package \pkg{french} by Bernard +Gaulle (\texttt{gaulle@idris.fr}) works together with \babel. On the +other hand, it seems \emph{not} to work well together with a lot of +other packages. Therefore I have decided to no longer load +\file{french.ldf} by default. Instead, when you want to use the +package by Bernard Gaulle, you will have to request it specifically, +by passing either \Lopt{frenchle} or \Lopt{frenchpro} as an option to +\babel. + +\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.9} + +Most of changes in version 3.9 are related to bugs, either to fix them +(there were lots), or to provide some alternatives. Even new features +like |\babelhyphen| are intended to solve a certain problem (in this +case, the lacking of a uniform syntax and behaviour for shorthands +across languages). These changes are described in this manual in the +correspondin place. + +\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.7} + +In \babel\ version 3.7 a number of bugs that were found in +version~3.6 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions +have occurred: +\begin{itemize} +\item Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that + one has to type |'{}a| when the acute accent is used as a + shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other + problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have + vanished. +\item Two new commands, |\shorthandon| and |\shorthandoff| have + been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more + shorthands. +\item Support for typesetting Greek has been enhanced. Code from + the \pkg{kdgreek} package (suggested by the author) was added + and |\greeknumeral| has been added. +\item Support for typesetting Basque is now available thanks to + Juan Aguirregabiria. +\item Support for typesetting Serbian with Latin script is now + available thanks to Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} and Jankovic + Slobodan. +\item Support for typesetting Hebrew (and potential support for + typesetting other right-to-left written languages) is now + available thanks to Rama Porrat and Boris Lavva. +\item Support for typesetting Bulgarian is now available thanks to + Georgi Boshnakov. +\item Support for typesetting Latin is now available, thanks to + Claudio Beccari and Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski. +\item Support for typesetting North Sami is now available, thanks + to Regnor Jernsletten. +\item The options \Lopt{canadian}, \Lopt{canadien} and + \Lopt{acadien} have been added for Canadian English and French + use. +\item A language attribute has been added to the |\mark...| + commands in order to make sure that a Greek header line comes + out right on the last page before a language switch. +\item Hyphenation pattern files are now read \emph{inside a + group}; therefore any changes a pattern file needs to make to + lowercase codes, uppercase codes, and category codes are kept + local to that group. If they are needed for the language, these + changes will need to be repeated and stored in |\extras...| +\item The concept of language attributes is introduced. It is + intended to give the user some control over the + features a language-definition file provides. Its + first use is for the Greek language, where the user can choose + the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ + (``Polutoniko'' or multi-accented) Greek way of typesetting + texts. These attributes will possibly find wider use in future + releases. +\item The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} is introduced. +\item The syntax of the file \file{language.dat} has been + extended to allow (optionally) specifying the font + encoding to be used while processing the patterns file. +\item The command |\providehyphenmins| should now be used in + language definition files in order to be able to keep any + settings provided by the pattern file. +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.6} + +In \babel\ version 3.6 a number of bugs that were found in +version~3.5 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions +have occurred: +\begin{itemize} +\item A new environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} is introduced. it + only switches the `specials', but leaves the `captions' + untouched. +\item The shorthands are no longer fully expandable. Some + problems could only be solved by peeking at the token following + an active character. The advantage is that |'{}a| works as + expected for languages that have the |'| active. +\item Support for typesetting french texts is much enhanced; the + file \file{francais.ldf} is now replaced by \file{frenchb.ldf} + which is maintained by Daniel Flipo. +\item Support for typesetting the russian language is again + available. The language definition file was originally + developed by Olga Lapko from CyrTUG. The fonts needed to + typeset the russian language are now part of the \babel\ + distribution. The support is not yet up to the level which is + needed according to Olga, but this is a start. +\item Support for typesetting greek texts is now also + available. What is offered in this release is a first attempt; + it will be enhanced later on by Yannis Haralambous. +\item in \babel\ 3.6j some hooks have been added for the + development of support for Hebrew typesetting. +\item Support for typesetting texts in Afrikaans (a variant of + Dutch, spoken in South Africa) has been added to + \file{dutch.ldf}. +\item Support for typesetting Welsh texts is now available. +\item A new command |\aliasshorthand| is introduced. It seems + that in Poland various conventions are used to type the + necessary Polish letters. It is now possible to use the + character~|/| as a shorthand character instead of the + character~|"|, by issuing the command |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. +\item The shorthand mechanism now deals correctly with characters + that are already active. +\item Shorthand characters are made active at |\begin{document}|, + not earlier. This is to prevent problems with other packages. +\item A \emph{preambleonly} command |\substitutefontfamily| has + been added to create \file{.fd} files on the fly when the font + families of the Latin text differ from the families used for + the Cyrillic or Greek parts of the text. +\item Three new commands |\LdfInit|, |\ldf@quit| and + |\ldf@finish| are introduced that perform a number of standard + tasks. +\item In babel 3.6k the language Ukrainian has been added and the + support for Russian typesetting has been adapted to the package + 'cyrillic' to be released with the December 1998 release of + \LaTeXe. +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.5} + +In \babel\ version 3.5 a lot of changes have been made when compared +with the previous release. Here is a list of the most important ones: +\begin{itemize} +\item the selection of the language is delayed until + |\begin{document}|, which means you must add appropriate + |\selectlanguage| commands if you include |\hyphenation| lists in + the preamble of your document. +\item \babel\ now has a \Lenv{language} environment and a new + command |\foreignlanguage|; +\item the way active characters are dealt with is completely + changed. They are called `shorthands'; one can have three + levels of shorthands: on the user level, the language level, + and on `system level'. A consequence of the new way of handling + active characters is that they are now written to auxiliary + files `verbatim'; +\item A language change now also writes information in the + \file{.aux} file, as the change might also affect typesetting + the table of contents. The consequence is that an \file{.aux} file + generated by a LaTeX format with babel preloaded gives errors + when read with a LaTeX format without babel; but I think this + probably doesn't occur; +\item \babel\ is now compatible with the \pkg{inputenc} and + \pkg{fontenc} packages; +\item the language definition files now have a new extension, + \file{ldf}; +\item the syntax of the file \file{language.dat} is extended to + be compatible with the \pkg{french} package by Bernard Gaulle; +\item each language definition file looks for a configuration + file which has the same name, but the extension \file{.cfg}. It +can contain any valid \LaTeX\ code. +\end{itemize} + +\DocInput{babel.dtx} +\DocInput{bbplain.dtx} +\DocInput{bbunicode.dtx} + +\section{Conclusion} + +A system of document options has been presented that enable the user +of \LaTeX\ to adapt the standard document classes of \LaTeX\ to the +language he or she prefers to use. These options offer the possibility +of switching between languages in one document. The basic interface +consists of using one option, which is the same for \emph{all} +standard document classes. + +In some cases the language definition files provide macros that can be +useful to plain \TeX\ users as well as to \LaTeX\ users. The \babel{} +system has been implemented so that it can be used by both groups of +users. + +\section{Acknowledgements} + +I would like to thank all who volunteered as $\beta$-testers for their +time. I would like to mention Julio Sanchez who supplied the option +file for the Spanish language and Maurizio Codogno who supplied the +option file for the Italian language. Michel Goossens supplied +contributions for most of the other languages. Nico Poppelier helped +polish the text of the documentation and supplied parts of the macros +for the Dutch language. Paul Wackers and Werenfried Spit helped find +and repair bugs. + +During the further development of the babel system I received much +help from Bernd Raichle, for which I am grateful. + +\begin{thebibliography}{9} + \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth, + \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986. + \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport, + \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley, + 1986. + \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus. + \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van + tekst.} + SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout + design and typography. + \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl, + \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72. + \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport, + in: \TeX hax Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 February 1989. + \bibitem{BEP} Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier, + \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles}, + \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406. + \bibitem{ilatex} Joachim Schrod, + \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use}, + \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90. +\end{thebibliography} +\end{document} +%</filedriver> +%\fi +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/16}{Make multiple loading of +% \file{babel.def} impossible} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/05/16}{Now using \cs{ldf@quit} for the test} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*core> +\ifx\ldf@quit\@undefined +\else + \expandafter\endinput +\fi +%</core> +% \end{macrocode} +%<*dtx> +\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx} +%</dtx> +%\fi +% +% \GetFileInfo{babel.dtx} +% +% \changes{babel~2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added text about \file{german.sty}} +% \changes{babel~2.0b}{1990/04/18}{Changed order of code to prevent +% plain \TeX from seeing all of it} +% \changes{babel~2.1}{1990/04/24}{Modified user interface, +% \cs{langTeX} no longer necessary} +% \changes{babel~2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments} +% \changes{babel~2.1b}{1990/05/01}{rename \cs{language} to +% \cs{current@language}} +% \changes{babel~2.1c}{1990/05/22}{abstract for report fixed, missing +% \texttt{\}}, found by Nicolas Brouard} +% \changes{babel~2.1d}{1990/07/04}{Missing right brace in definition of +% abstract environment, found by Werenfried Spit} +% \changes{babel~2.1e}{1990/07/16}{Incorporated more comments from +% Nico} +% \changes{babel~2.2}{1990/07/17}{Renamed \cs{newlanguage} to +% \cs{addlanguage}} +% \changes{babel~2.2a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation +% somewhat} +% \changes{babel~3.0}{1991/04/23}{Moved part of the code to hyphen.doc +% in preparation for \TeX~3.0} +% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/21}{Updated comments in various places} +% \changes{babel~3.0b}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log} +% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} and +% \file{latexhax.sty} to \file{.com}} +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Added the support for active +% characters and for extending a macro} +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed the need for +% \file{latexhax}} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Some Changes by br} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1992/02/15}{Fixups of the code and +% documentation} +% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/06}{Included driver file, and prepared +% for distribution} +% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/01/30}{Updated for \LaTeXe} +% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added language definition file for +% bahasa} +% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Added a small driver to be able to +% process just this file} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/03}{Provided common code to handle the +% active double quote} +% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{corrected a few typos (PR1652)} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Merged glyphs.dtx into this file} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/13}{repaired a typo} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{replaced \cs{tmp}, \cs{bbl@tmp} and +% \cs{bbl@temp} with \cs{bbl@tempa}} +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{replaced \cs{undefined} with +% \cs{@undefined} to be consistent with \LaTeX} +% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/05/05}{Fixed a few typos in \cs{changes} +% entries which made typesetting the code impossible} +% \changes{babel~3.7h}{2001/03/01}{Added a number of missing comment +% characters which caused spurious white space} +% \changes{babel~3.8e}{2005/03/24}{Many enhancements to the text by +% Andrew Young} +% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/04}{Added the ``modifiers'' mechanism} +% +% \section{Identification and loading of required files} +% +% \textit{Code documentation is still under revision.} +% +% The file \file{babel.sty}\footnote{The file described in this +% section is called \texttt{\filename}, has version +% number~\fileversion\ and was last revised on~\filedate.} is meant +% for \LaTeXe, therefor we make sure that the format file used is +% the right one. +% +% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesLanguage} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/18}{Added macro to prevent problems +% with unexpected \cs{ProvidesFile} in plain formats because of +% \babel.} +% The identification code for each file is something that was +% introduced in \LaTeXe. When the command |\ProvidesFile| does not +% exist, a dummy definition is provided temporarily. For use in the +% language definition file the command |\ProvidesLanguage| is +% defined by \babel. +% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Redid the identification code, +% provided dummy definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for plain \TeX} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/26}{Store version in \cs{fileversion}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/18}{Need to temporarily change the +% definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for December 1995 release} +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Save a few csnames; use +% \cs{bbl@tempa} instead of \cs{\@ProvidesFile} and store message +% in \cs{toks8}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/09}{Save info about the babel version +% in the format (switch.def) so that it can be checked later if +% necessary} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +\def\bbl@version{3.9e} +\def\bbl@date{2013/04/15} +%</kernel> +%<*patterns> +\xdef\bbl@format{\jobname} +%</patterns> +%<*core|kernel|patterns> +\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined + \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% + \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% + \let\ProvidesFile\@undefined + } +%</core|kernel|patterns> +% \end{macrocode} +% As an alternative for |\ProvidesFile| we define +% |\ProvidesLanguage| here to be used in the language definition +% files. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> + \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{% + \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% + } +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% When |\ProvidesFile| is defined we give |\ProvidesLanguage| a +% similar definition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{% + \begingroup + \catcode`\ 10 % + \@makeother\/% + \@ifnextchar[%] + {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}} + \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{% + \wlog{Language: #1 #2}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}% + \endgroup} +%</kernel> +%<*core|kernel|patterns> +\fi +%</core|kernel|patterns> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Identify each file that is produced from this source file. +% \changes{babel~3.4c}{1995/04/28}{lhyphen.cfg has become +% lthyphen.cfg} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/01/25}{lthyphen.cfg has become hyphen.cfg} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<package>\ProvidesPackage{babel} +%<core>\ProvidesFile{babel.def} +%<patterns>\ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg} +%<kernel>\ProvidesFile{switch.def} +%<nil>\ProvidesLanguage{nil} +%<driver&!user>\ProvidesFile{babel.drv} +%<driver&user>\ProvidesFile{user.drv} + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % +%<package> The Babel package] +%<core> Babel common definitions] +%<kernel|patterns> Babel language switching mechanism] +%<nil> Nil language] +%<driver>] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Now we make sure all required files are loaded. When the command +% |\AtBeginDocument| doesn't exist we assume that we are dealing +% with a plain-based format or \LaTeX2.09. In that case the file +% \file{plain.def} is needed (which also defines +% |\AtBeginDocument|, and therefore it is not loaded twice). We +% need the first part when the format is created, and |\orig@dump| +% is used as a flag. Otherwise, we need to use the second part, so +% |\orig@dump| is not defined (\file{plain.def} undefines it). +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/21}{Use \cs{orig@dump} as flag instead +% of \cs{adddialect}} +%\begingroup +% \catcode`&=\active +% \gdef\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`@=11\relax\catcode`&=\active}% +% \gdef&{\quad\colorbox{thegrey}{\textsf{#1}}} +%\endgroup +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*core|kernel|patterns> +\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined +%</core|kernel|patterns> +%<*patterns> + \let\orig@dump\dump +%</patterns> +%<*core|kernel|patterns> + \input plain.def\relax +\fi +%</core|kernel|patterns> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Check if the current version of \file{switch.def} has been +% previously loaded (mainly, \file{hyphen.cfg}). If not, load it +% now. We cannot load |babel.def| here because we first need to +% declare and process the package options. +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/11}{Now switch.def is loaded always, so +% that there is no need to rebuild formats just to update babel} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/13}{But switch.def is loaded only if +% loaded in a different version (or not loaded)} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/14}{Added the debug option} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/05}{Added \cs{bbl@add}} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{debug} + {\let\bbl@tempa\relax} + {\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}}% +%</package> +%<*core> +\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e} +%</core> +%<*core|package> +\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else + \input switch.def\relax +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% The following macros just make the code cleaner. |\bbl@add| is +% now used internally instead of |\addto| because of the +% unpredictable behaviour of the latter. (There are some +% duplications, but, you know, I [JBL] never rememer where the code +% ends up when intermingled with docstrip.) +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}} +\def\bbl@add#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + {\def#1{#2}}% + {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}} +\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}% +\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} +\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +%</core|package> +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/02}{Removed \cs{babel@core@loaded}, no +% longer needed with the advent of \cs{LdfInit}} +% +% \section{The Package File} +% +% In order to make use of the features of \LaTeXe, the \babel\ +% system contains a package file, \file{babel.sty}. This file is +% loaded by the |\usepackage| command and defines all the language +% options whose name is different from that of the |.ldf| file +% (like variant spellings). It also takes care of a number of +% compatibility issues with other packages an defines a few +% aditional package options. +% +% +% Apart from all the language options below we also have a few options +% that influence the behaviour of language definition files. +% +% Many of the following options don't do anything themselves, they +% are just defined in order to make it possible for babel and +% language definition files to check if one of them was specified +% by the user. +% +% \subsection{\texttt{base}} +% +% The first option to be processed is |base|, which set the +% hyphenation patterns then resets |ver@babel.sty| so that +% LaTeX forgets about the first loading. After |switch.def| has +% been loaded (above) and |\AfterBabelLanguage| defined, exits. +% +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{Added options to influence +% behaviour of active acute and grave accents} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/05}{preset option started, +% party stolen from fontenc} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/17}{Hooks started} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/07}{Rejected preset, and replaced by +% base} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*package> +\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{% + \global\expandafter\bbl@add\csname#1.ldf-h@@k\endcsname}% +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{base}{% + \DeclareOption*{\bbl@patterns{\CurrentOption}}% + \DeclareOption{base}{}% + \ProcessOptions + \global\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\relax + \global\expandafter\let\csname ver@babel.sty\endcsname\relax + \global\let\@ifl@ter@@\@ifl@ter + \def\@ifl@ter#1#2#3#4#5{\global\let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@@}% + \endinput}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{\texttt{key=value} options and other general option} +% +% The following macros extract language modifiers, and only real +% package options are kept in the option list. Modifiers are saved +% and assigned to |\BabelModifiers| at |\bbl@load@language|; when +% no modifiers have been given, the former is |\relax|. How +% modifiers are handled are left to language styles; they can use +% |\in@|, loop them with |\@for| o load |keyval|). +% \changes{babel~3.9e}{2013/04/15}{Bug fixed - a dot was added in +% key=value pairs} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@csarg\let{tempa\expandafter}\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname +\def\bbl@tempb#1.#2{% + #1\ifx\@empty#2\else,\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempb#2\fi}% +\def\bbl@tempd#1.#2\@nnil{% + \ifx\@empty#2% + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}% + \else + \in@{=}{#1}\ifin@ + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1.#2}% + \else + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}% + \bbl@csarg\edef{mod@#1}{\bbl@tempb#2}% + \fi + \fi} +\let\bbl@tempc\@empty +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempa{% + \expandafter\bbl@tempd\bbl@tempa.\@empty\@nnil} +\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\bbl@tempc +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{activeacute}{} +\DeclareOption{activegrave}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% The next option tells \babel\ to leave shorthand characters +% active at the end of processing the package. This is \emph{not} +% the default as it can cause problems with other packages, but for +% those who want to use the shorthand characters in the preamble of +% their documents this can help. +% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Added option +% \Lopt{KeepShorthandsActive}} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{No longer define the control +% sequence \cs{KeepShorthandsActive}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/14}{Implemented the \texttt{noconfigs} +% option} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/26}{Implemented the +% \texttt{showlanguages} option} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{debug}{} +\DeclareOption{noconfigs}{} +\DeclareOption{showlanguages}{} +\DeclareOption{shorthands=off}{\bbl@tempa shorthands=\bbl@tempa} +\DeclareOption{strings}{\def\bbl@opt@strings{\BabelStringsDefault}} +\DeclareOption{strings=encoded}{\let\bbl@opt@strings\relax} +\DeclareOption{safe=none}{\let\bbl@opt@safe\@empty} +\DeclareOption{safe=bib}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{B}} +\DeclareOption{safe=ref}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{R}} +\DeclareOption{math=active}{} +\DeclareOption{math=normal}{\def\bbl@mathnormal{\noexpand\textormath}} +\def\BabelStringsDefault{generic} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Handling of package options is done in three passes. (I [JBL] am not +% very happy with the idea, anyway.) The first one processes +% options which has been declared above or follow the syntax +% |<key>=<value>|, the second one +% loads the requested languages, except the main one if set with +% the key |main|, and the third one loads the latter. First, we +% ``flag'' valid keys with a nil value. +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/10}{Added the `safe' key, including code +% below for selecting the redefined macros} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@config\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@main\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil +% \end{macrocode} +% The following tool is defined temporarily to store the values of +% options. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@tempa#1=#2\bbl@tempa{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname\@nnil + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname{#2}% + \else + \bbl@error{% + Bad option `#1=#2'. Either you have misspelled the\\% + key or there is a previous setting of `#1'}{% + Valid keys are `shorthands', `config', `strings', `main',\\% + `headfoot', `safe', `math'} + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Now the option list is processed, taking into account only +% currently declared options (including those declared with a |=|), +% and |<key>=<value>| options (the former take precedence). +% Unrecognized options are saved in |\bbl@language@opts|, because +% they are language options. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@language@opts\@empty +\DeclareOption*{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string=}{\CurrentOption}% + \ifin@ + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa + \else + \edef\bbl@language@opts{% + \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi + \CurrentOption}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we finish the first pass (and start over). +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProcessOptions* +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Conditional loading of shorthands} +% +% If there is no |shorthands=<chars>|, the original \textsf{babel} +% macros are left untouched, but if there is, these macros are +% wrapped (in |babel.def|) to define only those given. +% +% A bit of optimization: if there is no |shorthands=|, then +% |\bbl@ifshorthands| is always true, and it is always false if +% |shorthands| is empty. Also, some code makes sense only with +% |shorthands=...|. +% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/07}{Added t and c for tilde and comma} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@sh@string#1{% + \ifx#1\@empty\else + \ifx#1t\string~% + \else\ifx#1c\string,% + \else\string#1% + \fi\fi + \expandafter\bbl@sh@string + \fi} +\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#2}% +\else\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#3}% +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% The following macro tests if a shortand is one of the allowed +% ones. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string#1}{\bbl@opt@shorthands}% + \ifin@ + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% We make sure all chars in the string are `other', with the help +% of an auxiliary macro defined above (which also zaps spaces). +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\bbl@opt@shorthands{% + \expandafter\bbl@sh@string\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty}% +% \end{macrocode} + +% The following is ignored with |shorthands=off|, since it is +% intended to take some aditional actions for certain chars. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@ifshorthand{'}% + {\PassOptionsToPackage{activeacute}{babel}}{} + \bbl@ifshorthand{`}% + {\PassOptionsToPackage{activegrave}{babel}}{} +\fi\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{Code setting language in +% head/foots. Related to babel/3796} +% With |headfoot=lang| we can set the language used in heads/foots. +% For example, in babel/3796 just adds |headfoot=english|. It +% misuses \cs{@resetactivechars} but seems to work. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil\else + \g@addto@macro\@resetactivechars{% + \set@typeset@protect + \expandafter\select@language@x\expandafter{\bbl@opt@headfoot}% + \let\protect\noexpand} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% For the option safe we use a different approach -- +% |\bbl@opt@safe| says which macros are redefined (B for bibs and R +% for refs). By default, both are set. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{bbl@opt@safe}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}}{} +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else + \edef\bbl@language@opts{% + \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi + \bbl@opt@main} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% If the format created a list of loaded languages (in +% |\bbl@languages|), get the name of the 0-th to show the actual +% language used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@languages\@undefined\else + \begingroup + \catcode`\^^I=12 + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{showlanguages}{% + \begingroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{\wlog{#2^^I#1^^I#3^^I#4}}% + \wlog{<*languages>}% + \bbl@languages + \wlog{</languages>}% + \endgroup}{} + \endgroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum#2=\z@ + \gdef\bbl@nulllanguage{#1}% + \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}% + \fi}% + \bbl@languages +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Language options} +% +% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \cs{LdfInit} is undefined we +% need to load \file{babel.def} from \file{babel.sty}} +% \changes{babel~3.6l}{1999/04/03}{Don't load \file{babel.def} now, +% but rather define \cs{LdfInit} temporarily in order to load +% \file{babel.def} at the right time, preventing problems with the +% temporary definition of \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% \changes{babel~3.6r}{1999/04/12}{We \textbf{do} need to load +% \file{babel.def} right now as \cs{ProvidesLanguage} needs to be +% defined before the \file{.ldf} files are read and the reason for +% for 3.6l has been removed} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/15}{Rewritten the loading mechanism, so +% that languages not declared are also correctly recognized, even +% if given as global options} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/12}{Revised the loading mechanism} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/14}{Changed extension of language +% definition files to \texttt{ldf}} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load language definition files +% \emph{after} the check for the hyphenation patterns} +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/04}{Added option \Lopt{afrikaans}} +% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{acadian}} +% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added option \Lopt{australian}} +% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added option \Lopt{albanian}} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Added the \Lopt{Basque} option} +% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added synonyms \Lopt{indonesian}, +% \Lopt{indon} and \Lopt{bahasai} for the original bahasa +% (indonesia) support} +% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added \Lopt{malay}, \Lopt{meyaluy} +% and \Lopt{bahasam} for the Bahasa Malaysia support} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/25}{Added \Lopt{brazilian} as +% alternative for \Lopt{brazil}} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Added \Lopt{british} as an +% alternative for \Lopt{english} with a preference for british +% hyphenation} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added the \Lopt{bulgarian} option} +% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/07}{Added option \Lopt{canadian}} +% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{canadien}} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/06}{Added the \Lopt{estonian} option} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/10}{Now use the file \file{frenchb.ldf} +% from Daniel Flipo for french support} +% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added option \Lopt{frenchb} an +% alias for \Lopt{francais}} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load \file{french.ldf} when it is +% found instead of \file{frenchb.ldf}} +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/07}{\emph{only} load +% \file{frenchb.ldf}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/31}{Added the \Lopt{greek} option} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{polutonikogreek} +% option} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{set the correct language attribute +% for polutoniko greek} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Added the \Lopt{hebrew} option} +% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added the \Lopt{latin} option} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{interlingua} +% option} +% \changes{babel~3.6p}{1999/04/10}{Added the \Lopt{ngerman} and +% \Lopt{naustrian} options} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added the \Lopt{samin} option} +% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added the \Lopt{newzealand} option} +% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added options \Lopt{UKenglish} and +% \Lopt{USenglish}} +% +% Languages are loaded when processing the corresponding option +% \textit{except} if a |main| language has been set. In such a +% case, it is not loaded until all options has been processed. +% The following macro inputs the ldf file and does some additional +% checks (|\input| works, too, but possible errors are not catched). +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@afterlang\relax +\let\BabelModifiers\relax +\let\bbl@loaded\@empty +\def\bbl@load@language#1{% + \InputIfFileExists{#1.ldf}% + {\edef\bbl@loaded{\CurrentOption + \ifx\bbl@loaded\@empty\else,\bbl@loaded\fi}% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@afterlang + \csname\CurrentOption.ldf-h@@k\endcsname + \expandafter\let\expandafter\BabelModifiers + \csname bbl@mod@\CurrentOption\endcsname}% + {\bbl@error{% + Unknow option `\CurrentOption'. Either you misspelled it\\% + or the language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf was not found}{% + Valid options are: shorthands=..., KeepShorthandsActive,\\% + activeacute, activegrave, noconfigs, safe=, main=, math=\\% + headfoot=, strings=, config=, or a language name.}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Now, we set language options whose names are different from |ldf| files. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{acadian}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\bbl@load@language{dutch}} +\DeclareOption{american}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{australian}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{austrian}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}} +\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{brazil}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{british}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{canadian}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{canadien}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{francais}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{french}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}% +\DeclareOption{german}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}} +\DeclareOption{hebrew}{% + \input{rlbabel.def}% + \bbl@load@language{hebrew}} +\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\bbl@load@language{magyar}} +\DeclareOption{indon}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{lsorbian}} +\DeclareOption{malay}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}} +\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}} +\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\bbl@load@language{norsk}} +\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{% + \bbl@load@language{greek}% + \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}} +\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{russian}{\bbl@load@language{russianb}} +\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\bbl@load@language{ukraineb}} +\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{usorbian}} +\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Another way to extend the list of `known' options for \babel\ is +% to create the file \file{bblopts.cfg} in which one can add option +% declarations. However, this mechanism is deprecated -- if you +% want an alternative name for a language, just create a new |.ldf| +% file loading the actual one. You can also set the name +% of the file with the package option |config=<name>|, which will +% load |<name>.cfg| instead. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added the possibility to have a +% \file{bblopts.cfg} file with option declarations.} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/28}{Added the \cs{AfterBabelLanguage} +% mechanism, to be used mainly with the local cfg file.} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/31}{Now you can set the name of the +% local cfg file.} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@opt@config\@nnil + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}{}% + {\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + {}}% +\else + \InputIfFileExists{\bbl@opt@config.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file \bbl@opt@config.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + {\bbl@error{% + Local config file `\bbl@opt@config.cfg' not found}{% + Perhaps you misspelled it.}}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Recognizing global options in packages not having a closed set of +% them is not trivial, as for them to be processed they must be +% defined explicitly. So, package options not yet taken into +% account and stored in |bbl@language@opts| are assumed to be +% languages (note this list also contains the language given with +% |main|). If not declared above, the name of the option and the +% file are the same. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@language@opts{% + \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}% + {\edef\bbl@tempb{% + \noexpand\DeclareOption + {\bbl@tempa}% + {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}% + \bbl@tempb}% + \@empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% Now, we make sure an option is explicitly declared for any +% language set as global option, by checking if an |ldf| +% exists. The previous step was, in fact, somewhat redundant, but +% that way we minimize accesing the file system just to see if the +% option could be a language. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\@classoptionslist{% + \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}% + {\IfFileExists{\bbl@tempa.ldf}% + {\edef\bbl@tempb{% + \noexpand\DeclareOption + {\bbl@tempa}% + {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}% + \bbl@tempb}% + \@empty}% + \@empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% If a main language has been set, store it for the third pass. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else + \expandafter + \let\expandafter\bbl@loadmain\csname ds@\bbl@opt@main\endcsname + \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% And we are done, because all options for this pass has been +% declared. Those already processed in the first pass are just ignored. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/12}{Added default option} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/22}{Default option does nothing} +% +% The options have to be processed in the order in which the user +% specified them (except, of course, global options, which \LaTeX{} +% processes before): +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{% + \bbl@ifsamestring\CurrentOption{#1}{\global\bbl@add\bbl@afterlang}{}} +\DeclareOption*{} +\ProcessOptions* +% \end{macrocode} +% This finished the second pass. Now the third one begins, which +% loads the main language set with the key |main|. A warning is +% raised if the main language is not the same as the last named +% one, or if the value of the key |main| is not a language. Then +% execute directly the option (because it could be used only in +% |main|). After loading all languages, we deactivate +% |\AfterBabelLanguage|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil + \edef\bbl@tempa{\@classoptionslist,\bbl@language@opts} + \let\bbl@tempc\@empty + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempb,}{,\bbl@loaded,}% + \ifin@\edef\bbl@tempc{\bbl@tempb}\fi} + \def\bbl@tempa#1,#2\@nnil{\def\bbl@tempb{#1}} + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@loaded,\@nnil + \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc\else + \bbl@warning{% + Last declared language option is `\bbl@tempc,\\% + but the last processed one was `\bbl@tempb'.\\% + The main language cannot be set as both a global\\% + and a package option. Use `main=\bbl@tempc' as\\% + option. Reported}% + \fi +\else + \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{\bbl@loadmain} + \ExecuteOptions{\bbl@opt@main} + \DeclareOption*{} + \ProcessOptions* +\fi +\def\AfterBabelLanguage{% + \bbl@error + {Too late for \string\AfterBabelLanguage}% + {Languages have been loaded, so I can do nothing}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/13}{Added an error message for when no +% language option was specified} +% In order to catch the case where the user forgot to specify a +% language we check whether |\bbl@main@language|, has become +% defined. If not, no language has been loaded and an error +% message is displayed. +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{No longer us a redefinition of an +% internal macro, just check \cs{bbl@main@language} and load +% \file{babel.def}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/24}{Now babel is not loaded to prevent +% the document from raising errors after fixing it} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined + \bbl@error{% + You haven't specified a language option}{% + You need to specify a language, either as a global option\\% + or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space + command;\\% + You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.} +\fi +%</package> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{The Kernel of Babel} +% +% The kernel of the \babel\ system is stored in either +% \file{hyphen.cfg} or \file{switch.def} and \file{babel.def}. The +% file \file{babel.def} contains most of the code, while +% \file{switch.def} defines the language switching commands; both +% can be read at run time. The file \file{hyphen.cfg} is a file +% that can be loaded into the format, which is necessary when you +% want to be able to switch hyphenation patterns (by default, it +% also inputs \file{switch.def}, for ``historical reasons'', but it +% is not necessary). When \file{babel.def} is loaded it checks if +% the current version of \file{switch.def} is in the format; if not +% it is loaded. A further file, \file{babel.sty}, contains +% \LaTeX-specific stuff. +% +% Because plain \TeX\ users might want to use some of the features +% of the \babel{} system too, care has to be taken that plain \TeX\ +% can process the files. For this reason the current format will +% have to be checked in a number of places. Some of the code below +% is common to plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX, some of it is for the +% \LaTeX\ case only. +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/11}{Added \cs{bbl@for} for loops +% ignoring empties} +% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/06}{Normalize \cs{bbl@afterlang} to relax} +% +% \subsection{Tools} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*core> +\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@undefined + \def\bbl@opt@safe{BR} + \let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil +\fi +\ifx\BabelModifiers\@undefined\let\BabelModifiers\relax\fi +\ifx\bbl@afterlang\@undefined\let\bbl@afterlang\relax\fi +\providecommand\AfterBabelLanguage[2]{} +\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterelse} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterfi} +% Because the code that is used in the handling of active +% characters may need to look ahead, we take extra care to `throw' +% it over the |\else| and |\fi| parts of an +% |\if|-statement\footnote{This code is based on code presented in +% TUGboat vol. 12, no2, June 1991 in ``An expansion Power Lemma'' +% by Sonja Maus.}. These macros will break if another |\if...\fi| +% statement appears in one of the arguments and it is not enclosed +% in braces. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Made \cs{bbl@afterelse} and +% \cs{bbl@afterfi} \cs{long}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} +\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/10}{Removed the \cs{peek@token} and +% \textsc{test@token} stuff} +% The macro |\initiate@active@char| takes all the necessary actions +% to make its argument a shorthand character. The real work is +% performed once for each character. +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/30}{Only execute +% \cs{initiate@active@char} once for each character} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{1999/04/30}{Added \cs{bbl@withactive}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@withactive#1#2{% + \begingroup + \lccode`~=`#2\relax + \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added} +% To redefine a command, we save the old meaning of the macro. +% Then we redefine it to call the original macro with the +% `sanitized' argument. The reason why we do it this way is that +% we don't want to redefine the \LaTeX\ macros completely in case +% their definitions change (they have changed in the past). +% +% Because we need to redefine a number of commands we define the +% command |\bbl@redefine| which takes care of this. It creates a +% new control sequence, |\org@...| +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@redefine#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine@long} +% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Macro added} +% This version of |\babel@redefine| can be used to redefine |\long| +% commands such as |\ifthenelse|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefinerobust} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/09}{Define \cs*{foo } instead of +% \cs{foo}} +% For commands that are redefined, but which \textit{might} be +% robust we need a slightly more intelligent macro. A robust +% command |foo| is defined to expand to |\protect|\verb*|\foo |. So +% it is necessary to check whether \verb*|\foo | exists. The result +% is that the command that is being redefined is always robust +% afterwards. Therefor all we need to do now is define \verb*|\foo |. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}% + \else + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname + \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname + \fi + \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Encoding issues} +% +% The first thing we need to do is to determine, at +% |\begin{document}|, which latin fontencoding to use. +% +% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from +% \file{.ldf} files} +% When text is being typeset in an encoding other than `latin' +% (\texttt{OT1} or \texttt{T1}), it would be nice to still have +% Roman numerals come out in the Latin encoding. +% So we first assume that the current encoding at the end +% of processing the package is the Latin encoding. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}} +% \end{macrocode} +% But this might be overruled with a later loading of the package +% \pkg{fontenc}. Therefor we check at the execution of +% |\begin{document}| whether it was loaded with the \Lopt{T1} +% option. The normal way to do this (using |\@ifpackageloaded|) is +% disabled for this package. Now we have to revert to parsing the +% internal macro |\@filelist| which contains all the filenames +% loaded. +% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/15}{Use T1 encoding when it is a known +% encoding} +% \changes{babel~3.6m}{1999/04/06}{Can't use \cs{@ifpackageloaded} +% need to parse \cs{@filelist}} +% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{moved checking for fontenc right to +% the top of \file{babel.sty}} +% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{Added a check for `manual' selection +% of \texttt{T1} encoding, without loading \pkg{fontenc}} +% \changes{babel~3.6q}{1999/04/12}{Better solution then parsing +% \cs{@filelist}, use \cs{@ifl@aded}} +% \changes{babel~3.6u}{1999/04/20}{Moved this code to +% \file{babel.def}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \gdef\latinencoding{OT1}% + \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one + \xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}% + \else + \@ifl@aded{def}{t1enc}{\xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}}{}% + \fi + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\latintext} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from +% \file{.ldf} files} +% Then we can define the command |\latintext| which is a +% declarative switch to a latin font-encoding. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{% + \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont + \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\textlatin} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from +% \file{.ldf} files} +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/19}{added \cs{leavevmode} to prevent a +% paragraph starting \emph{inside} the group} +% \changes{babel~3.7k}{2003/10/12}{Use \cs{DeclareTextFontComand}} +% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the +% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches +% it operates in a local scope. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@undefined\DeclareTextFontCommand + \DeclareRobustCommand{\textlatin}[1]{\leavevmode{\latintext #1}} +\else + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The second version of this macro takes two arguments. The first +% argument is the name of the language that will be defined in the +% language definition file; the second argument is either a control +% sequence or a string from which a control sequence should be +% constructed. The existence of the control sequence indicates that +% the file has been processed before. +% +% At the start of processing a language definition file we always +% check the category code of the at-sign. We make sure that it is +% a `letter' during the processing of the file. We also save its +% name as the last called option, even if not loaded. +% +% Another character that needs to have the correct category code +% during processing of language definition files is the equals sign, +% `=', because it is sometimes used in constructions with the +% |\let| primitive. Therefor we store its current catcode and +% restore it later on. +% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{make sure the equals sign has its +% default category code} +% +% Now we check whether we should perhaps stop the processing of +% this file. To do this we first need to check whether the second +% argument that is passed to |\LdfInit| is a control sequence. We +% do that by looking at the first token after passing |#2| through +% |string|. When it is equal to |\@backslashchar| we are dealing +% with a control sequence which we can compare with |\@undefined|. +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/11}{\cs{ldf@quit} is not delayed any +% more after \cs{fi} , since \cs{endinput} is not executed immediately} +% If so, we call |\ldf@quit| to set the main language, restore the +% category code of the @-sign and call |\endinput| +% +% When |#2| was \emph{not} a control sequence we construct one and +% compare it with |\relax|. +% +% Finally we check |\originalTeX|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\LdfInit#1#2{% + \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ + \catcode`\@=11\relax + \chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\= + \catcode`\==12\relax + \expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar + \expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil + \ifx#2\@undefined\else + \ldf@quit{#1}% + \fi + \else + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax\else + \ldf@quit{#1}% + \fi + \fi + \let\bbl@screset\@empty + \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined + \let\originalTeX\@empty + \else + \originalTeX + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ldf@quit} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Macro added} +% This macro interrupts the processing of a language definition file. +% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of +% the equals sign} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ldf@quit#1{% + \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% + \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax + \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax + \endinput} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ldf@finish} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added} +% This macro takes one argument. It is the name of the language +% that was defined in the language definition file. +% +% We load the local configuration file if one is present, we set +% the main language (taking into account that the argument might be +% a control sequence that needs to be expanded) and reset the +% category code of the @-sign. +% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of +% the equals sign} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/01}{Added \cs{bbl@afterlang} which +% executes the code delayed with \cs{AfterBabelLanguage}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ldf@finish#1{% + \loadlocalcfg{#1}% + \bbl@afterlang + \let\bbl@afterlang\relax + \let\BabelModifiers\relax + \let\bbl@screset\relax + \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% + \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax + \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% After the preamble of the document the commands |\LdfInit|, +% |\ldf@quit| and |\ldf@finish| are no longer needed. Therefor +% they are turned into warning messages in \LaTeX. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\LdfInit +\@onlypreamble\ldf@quit +\@onlypreamble\ldf@finish +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\main@language} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{\cs{main@language} now also sets +% \cs{languagename} and \cs{l@languagename} for use by other +% packages in the preamble of a document} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@main@language} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added} +% This command should be used in the various language definition +% files. It stores its argument in |\bbl@main@language|; to be used +% to switch to the correct language at the beginning of the +% document. +% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\main@language#1{% + \def\bbl@main@language{#1}% + \let\languagename\bbl@main@language + \bbl@patterns{\languagename}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We also have to make sure that some code gets executed at the +% beginning of the document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Support for active characters} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@special} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% The macro |\bbl@add@special| is used to add a new character (or +% single character control sequence) to the macro |\dospecials| +% (and |\@sanitize| if \LaTeX\ is used). +% +% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we +% redefine the macros |\do| and |\@makeother| to add themselves and +% the given character without expansion. +% +% To add the character to the macros, we expand the original macros +% with the additional character inside the redefinition of the +% macros. Because |\@sanitize| can be undefined, we put the +% definition inside a conditional. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@add@special#1{% + \begingroup + \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% + \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else + \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}% + \fi}% + \x} +% \end{macrocode} +% The macro |\x| contains at this moment the following:\\ +% |\endgroup\def\dospecials{|\textit{old contents}% +% |\do|\meta{char}|}|.\\ +% If |\@sanitize| is defined, it contains an additional definition +% of this macro. The last thing we have to do, is the expansion of +% |\x|. Then |\endgroup| is executed, which restores the old +% meaning of |\x|, |\do| and |\@makeother|. After the group is +% closed, the new definition of |\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize|) is +% assigned. +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@remove@special} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% The companion of the former macro is |\bbl@remove@special|. It +% is used to remove a character from the set macros |\dospecials| +% and |\@sanitize|. +% +% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we define +% a help macro |\x|, which expands to empty if the characters +% match, otherwise it expands to its nonexpandable input. Because +% \TeX\ inserts a |\relax|, if the corresponding |\else| or |\fi| +% is scanned before the comparison is evaluated, we provide a `stop +% sign' which should expand to nothing. +% +% With the help of this macro we define |\do| and |\make@other|. +% +% The rest of the work is similar to |\bbl@add@special|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@remove@special#1{% + \begingroup + \def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty + \else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}% + \def\do{\x\do}% + \def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else + \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}% + \fi}% + \x} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Shorthands} +% +% \begin{macro}{\initiate@active@char} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/03}{Renamed macro} +% A language definition file can call this macro to make a +% character active. This macro takes one argument, the character +% that is to be made active. When the character was already active +% this macro does nothing. Otherwise, this macro defines the +% control sequence |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the +% character in its `normal state' and it defines the active +% character to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char} by default +% (\m{char} being the character to be made active). Later its +% definition can be changed to expand to |\active@char|\m{char} +% by calling |\bbl@activate{|\m{char}|}|. +% +% For example, to make the double quote character active one could +% have |\initiate@active@char{"}| in a language definition file. +% This defines |"| as |\active@prefix "\active@char"| (where the +% first |"| is the character with its original catcode, when the +% shorthand is created, and |\active@char"| is a single token). In +% protected contexts, it expands to |\protect "| or |\noexpand "| +% (ie, with the original |"|); otherwise |\active@char"| is +% executed. This macro in turn expands to |\normal@char"| in +% ``safe'' contexts (eg, |\label|), but |\user@active"| in normal +% ``unsafe'' ones. The latter search a definition in the user, +% language and system levels, in this order, but if none is found, +% |\normal@char"| is used. However, a deactivated shorthand (with +% |\bbl@deactivate| is defined as |\active@prefix "\normal@char"|. +% +% The following macro is used to define shorthands in the three +% levels. It takes 4 arguments: the (string'ed) character, +% |\<level>@group|, |<level>@active| and |<next-level>@active| +% (except in |system|). +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{New macro, with code from +% \cs{@initiate@active@char}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@active@def#1#2#3#4{% + \@namedef{#3#1}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname\relax + \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select#2#1{#3@arg#1}{#4#1}% + \else + \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname + \fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% When there is also no current-level shorthand with an argument we +% will check whether there is a next-level defined shorthand for +% this active character. +% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in +% order to prevent it from breaking up} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again} +% \begin{macrocode} + \long\@namedef{#3@arg#1}##1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname\relax + \bbl@afterelse\csname#4#1\endcsname##1% + \else + \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname + \fi}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Removed an extra hash. Now calls +% \cs{@initiate@active@char} with 3 arguments.} +% |\initiate@active@char| calls |\@initiate@active@char| with 3 +% arguments. All of them are the same character with different +% catcodes: active, other (string'ed) and the original one. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\initiate@active@char#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname\relax + \bbl@withactive + {\expandafter\@initiate@active@char\expandafter}#1\string#1#1% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.9e}{2012/08/18}{Introduced the 3-argument +% \cs{@initiate@active@char}, with different catcodes: active, +% string'ed, and original. Reorganized} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/19}{The catcode is saved} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/09}{The original definition is saved, +% too} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Take into account mathematically +% active chars, to avoid infinite loops} +% The very first thing to do is saving the original catcode and the +% original definition, even if not active, which is possible +% (undefined characters require a special treatement to avoid +% making them |\relax|). +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@initiate@active@char#1#2#3{% + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oricat@#2\endcsname{% + \catcode`#2=\the\catcode`#2\relax}% + \ifx#1\@undefined + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{% + \let\noexpand#1\noexpand\@undefined}% + \else + \expandafter\let\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{% + \let\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% If the character is already active we provide the default +% expansion under this shorthand mechanism. Otherwise we write a +% message in the transcript file, and define |\normal@char|\m{char} +% to expand to the character in its default state. If the character +% is mathematically active when \babel{} is loaded (for example +% |'|) the normal expansion is somewhat different to avoid an +% infinite loop (but it does not prevent the loop if the mathcode +% is set to |"8000| \textit{a posteriori}). +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx#1#3\relax + \expandafter\let\csname normal@char#2\endcsname#3% + \else + \bbl@info{Making #2 an active character}% + \ifnum\mathcode`#2="8000 + \@namedef{normal@char#2}{% + \textormath{#3}{\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}}% + \else + \@namedef{normal@char#2}{#3}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% To prevent problems with the loading of other packages after +% \babel\ we reset the catcode of the character to the original one +% at the end of the package and of each language file (except with +% \textsf{KeepShorthandsActive}). It is re-activate again at +% |\begin{document}|. We also need to make sure that the +% shorthands are active during the processing of the \file{.aux} +% file. Otherwise some citations may give unexpected results in +% the printout when a shorthand was used in the optional argument +% of |\bibitem| for example. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Make shorthands active during +% \file{.aux} file processing}. Then we +% make it active (not strictly necessary, but done for backward +% compatibility). +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/01}{Restore the category code of a +% shorthand char at end of package} +% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Made restoring of the category code +% of shorthand characters optional} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{Use \cs{@ifpackagewith} to +% determine whether shorthand characters need to remain active} +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@restoreactive{#2}% + \AtBeginDocument{% + \catcode`#2\active + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@mainaux{\catcode`\string#2\active}% + \fi}% + \expandafter\bbl@add@special\csname#2\endcsname + \catcode`#2\active + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we have set |\normal@char|\m{char}, we must define +% |\active@char|\m{char}, to be executed when the character is +% activated. We define the first level expansion of +% |\active@char|\m{char} to check the status of the |@safe@actives| +% flag. If it is set to true we expand to the `normal' version of +% this character, otherwise we call |\user@active|\m{char} to start +% the search of a definition in the user, language and system +% levels (or eventually |normal@char|\m{char}). +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Added code for option math=normal} +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo + \if\string^#2% + \def\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\textormath}% + \else + \ifx\bbl@mathnormal\@undefined\else + \let\bbl@tempa\bbl@mathnormal + \fi + \fi + \expandafter\edef\csname active@char#2\endcsname{% + \bbl@tempa + {\noexpand\if@safe@actives + \noexpand\expandafter + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname + \noexpand\else + \noexpand\expandafter + \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname + \noexpand\fi}% + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Shorthands are not defined +% directly, but with a couple of intermediate macros} +% +% We now define the default values which the shorthand is set to +% when activated or deactivated. It is set to the deactivated form +% (globally), so that the character expands to +% \begin{center} +% |\active@prefix| \m{char} |\normal@char|\m{char} +% \end{center} +% (where |\active@char|\m{char} is \emph{one} control sequence!). +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@csarg\edef{active@#2}{% + \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname active@char#2\endcsname}% + \bbl@csarg\edef{normal@#2}{% + \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}% + \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname bbl@normal@#2\endcsname +% \end{macrocode} +% The next level of the code checks whether a user has defined a +% shorthand for himself with this character. First we check for a +% single character shorthand. If that doesn't exist we check for a +% shorthand with an argument. +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the user-level active char +% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Instead of the ``copy-paste pattern'' +% a new macro is used} +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@active@def#2\user@group{user@active}{language@active}% + \bbl@active@def#2\language@group{language@active}{system@active}% + \bbl@active@def#2\system@group{system@active}{normal@char}% +% \end{macrocode} +% In order to do the right thing when a shorthand with an argument +% is used by itself at the end of the line we provide a definition +% for the case of an empty argument. For that case we let the +% shorthand character expand to its non-active self. Also, When a +% shorthand combination such as |''| ends up in a heading \TeX\ +% would see |\protect'\protect'|. To prevent this from happening a +% couple of shorthand needs to be defined at user level. +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/09}{Added an extra shorthand +% combination on user level to catch an interfering \cs{protect}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/8/18}{Use \cs{user@group}, as above, +% instead of the hardwired \texttt{user}} +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@@\endcsname + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@\string\protect@\endcsname + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally, a couple of special cases are taken care of. (1) If we +% are making the right quote (|'|) active we need to change |\pr@m@s| as +% well. Also, make sure that a single |'| in math mode `does the +% right thing'. (2) If we are using the caret (|^|) as a shorthand +% character special care should be taken to make sure math still +% works. Therefor an extra level of expansion is introduced with a +% check for math mode on the upper level. +% +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Insert a check for math mode in +% the definition of \cs{normal@char'}} +% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/02}{use \cs{textormath} to get rid +% of the \cs{fi} (PR 3266)} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{The redefinition needs to take +% place one level higher, \cs{prim@s} needs to be redefined.} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Introduced an extra +% level of expansion in the definition of an active caret} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Make an exception for the active +% caret which needs an extra level of expansion} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/11}{The output routine resets the quote +% to \cs{active@math@prime}, so we redefine the latter with the new +% ``normal'' value} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/20}{Added a couple of missing +% comment characters (PR 4146)} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/29}{Use \cs{textormath} instead of +% \cs{ifmath}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/26}{Compare the char, irrespective of +% its catcode.} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Removed the redeclaration of +% \cs{normal@char'} because it is handled in a generic way above} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/29}{Removed the intermediate step of +% \cs{bbl@act@caret} and moved above} +% \begin{macrocode} + \if\string'#2% + \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s + \let\active@math@prime#1% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Initiating a shorthand makes active the char. That is not +% strictly necessary but it is still done for backward +% compatibility. So we need to restore the original catcode at the +% end of package \textit{and} and the end of the |ldf|. +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/04}{Catcodes are also restored after +% each language, to prevent incompatibilities. Use \cs{string} instead +% of \cs{noexpand} and add \cs{relax}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/18}{Catcodes are deactivated in a separate +% macro, which is made no-op when babel exits} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}% + {\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}% + {\def\bbl@restoreactive#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\AfterBabelLanguage\noexpand\CurrentOption + {\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}% + \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}}% + \bbl@tempa}% + \AtEndOfPackage{\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@sh@select} +% This command helps the shorthand supporting macros to select how +% to proceed. Note that this macro needs to be expandable as do all +% the shorthand macros in order for them to work in expansion-only +% environments such as the argument of |\hyphenation|. +% +% This macro expects the name of a group of shorthands in its first +% argument and a shorthand character in its second argument. It +% will expand to either |\bbl@firstcs| or |\bbl@scndcs|. Hence two +% more arguments need to follow it. +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Added command} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Removed \cs{string}s, because the +% char are already string'ed} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname\relax + \bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs + \else + \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\active@prefix} +% The command |\active@prefix| which is used in the expansion of +% active characters has a function similar to |\OT1-cmd| in that it +% |\protect|s the active character whenever |\protect| is +% \emph{not} |\@typeset@protect|. +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{\cs{@protected@cmd} has vanished +% from \file{ltoutenc.dtx}} +% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/17}{Added handling of the situation +% where \cs{protect} is set to \cs{@unexpandable@protect}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\active@prefix#1{% + \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% When |\protect| is set to |\@unexpandable@protect| we make sure +% that the active character is als \emph{not} expanded by inserting +% |\noexpand| in front of it. The |\@gobble| is needed to remove +% a token such as |\activechar:| (when the double colon was the +% active character to be dealt with). +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect + \noexpand#1% + \else + \protect#1% + \fi + \expandafter\@gobble + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@safe@actives} +% In some circumstances it is necessary to be able to change the +% expansion of an active character on the fly. For this purpose the +% switch |@safe@actives| is available. The setting of this switch +% should be checked in the first level expansion of +% |\active@char|\m{char}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@safe@actives +\@safe@activesfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@restore@actives} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{New macro added} +% When the output routine kicks in while the +% active characters were made ``safe'' this must be undone in +% the headers to prevent unexpected typeset results. For this +% situation we define a command to make them ``unsafe'' again. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@activate} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@deactivate} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/11}{\cs{bbl@withactive} makes sure the +% catcode is active} +% Both macros take one argument, like |\initiate@active@char|. The +% macro is used to change the definition of an active character to +% expand to |\active@char|\m{char} in the case of |\bbl@activate|, +% or |\normal@char|\m{char} in the case of +% |\bbl@deactivate|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@activate#1{% + \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1% + \csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname} +\def\bbl@deactivate#1{% + \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1% + \csname bbl@normal@\string#1\endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@firstcs} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@scndcs} +% These macros have two arguments. They use one of their arguments +% to build a control sequence from. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname} +\def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\declare@shorthand} +% The command |\declare@shorthand| is used to declare a shorthand +% on a certain level. It takes three arguments: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item a name for the collection of shorthands, i.e. `system', or +% `dutch'; +% \item the character (sequence) that makes up the shorthand, +% i.e. |~| or |"a|; +% \item the code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered. +% \end{enumerate} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Make a `note' when a shorthand with +% an argument is defined.} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/23}{Make it possible to distinguish the +% constructed control sequences for the case with argument} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{We need to support shorthands with +% and without argument in different groups; added the name of the +% group to the storage macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/03}{Check if shorthands are redefined} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil} +\def\@decl@short#1#2#3\@nil#4{% + \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty + \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs + \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@}{}% + {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\endcsname\bbl@tempa + \else + \bbl@info + {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\\% + in language \CurrentOption}% + \fi}% + \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}% + \else + \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs + \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{}% + {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@\endcsname\bbl@tempa + \else + \bbl@info + {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\string#3\\% + in language \CurrentOption}% + \fi}% + \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\textormath} +% Some of the shorthands that will be declared by the language +% definition files have to be usable in both text and mathmode. To +% achieve this the helper macro |\textormath| is provided. +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/29}{Failed if an argument had a +% condicional. Use the more robust mechanism of \cs{XXXoftwo}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\textormath{% + \ifmmode + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\user@group} +% \begin{macro}{\language@group} +% \begin{macro}{\system@group} +% The current concept of `shorthands' supports three levels or +% groups of shorthands. For each level the name of the level or +% group is stored in a macro. The default is to have a user group; +% use language group `english' and have a system group called +% `system'. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/24}{Have a user group called `user' by +% default} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\user@group{user} +\def\language@group{english} +\def\system@group{system} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\useshorthands} +% This is the user level command to tell \LaTeX\ that user level +% shorthands will be used in the document. It takes one argument, +% the character that starts a shorthand. First note that this is +% user level, and then initialize and activate the character for +% use as a shorthand character (ie, it's active in the +% preamble). Languages can deactivate shorthands, so a starred +% version is also provided which activates them always after the +% language has been switched. +% +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2001/11/11}{When \TeX\ has seen a character +% its category code is fixed; need to use a `stand-in' for the +% call of \cs{bbl@activate}} +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/09/11}{The change from 11/112001 was +% incomplete} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/05}{Now \cs{bbl@activate} makes sure +% the catcode is active, so this part is simplified} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/12}{User shorhands can be +% defined even with shorthands=off} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\useshorthands{% + \@ifstar\bbl@usesh@s{\bbl@usesh@x{}}} +\def\bbl@usesh@s#1{% + \bbl@usesh@x + {\AddBabelHook{babel-sh-\string#1}{afterextras}{\bbl@activate{#1}}}% + {#1}} +\def\bbl@usesh@x#1#2{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}% + {\def\user@group{user}% + \initiate@active@char{#2}% + #1% + \bbl@activate{#2}}% + {\bbl@error + {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)} + {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\% + turned off in the package options}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\defineshorthand} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/05}{Added optional argument, to provide +% a way to (re)define language shorthands} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/25}{Extended for language-dependent +% user macros, with two new auxiliary macros} +% Currently we only support two groups of user level shorthands, +% named internally |user| and |user@<lang>| (language-dependent +% user shorthands). By default, only the first one is taken into +% account, but if the former is also used (in the optional argument +% of |\defineshorthand|) a new level is inserted for it +% (|user@generic|, done by |\bbl@set@user@generic|); we make also +% sure |{}| and |\protect| are taken into account in this new top +% level. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\user@language@group{user@\language@group} +\def\bbl@set@user@generic#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{user@generic@active#1}% + {\bbl@active@def#1\user@language@group{user@active}{user@generic@active}% + \bbl@active@def#1\user@group{user@generic@active}{language@active}% + \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@@\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#1\endcsname}% + \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@\string\protect@\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#1\endcsname}}% + \@empty} +\newcommand\defineshorthand[3][user]{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{% + \if*\expandafter\@car\bbl@tempb\@nil + \edef\bbl@tempb{user@\expandafter\@gobble\bbl@tempb}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@set@user@generic{\expandafter\string\@car#2\@nil}\bbl@tempb + \fi + \declare@shorthand{\bbl@tempb}{#2}{#3}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\languageshorthands} +% A user level command to change the language from which shorthands +% are used. Unfortunately, \babel{} currently does not keep track +% of defined groups, and therefore there is no way to catch a +% possible change in casing. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\aliasshorthand} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{New command} +% First the new shorthand needs to be initialized, +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\aliasshorthand#1#2{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}% + {\expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax + \ifx\document\@notprerr + \@notshorthand{#2}% + \else + \initiate@active@char{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/06}{Instead of letting the new shorthand to +% the original char, which very often didn't work, we define it +% directly} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/20}{Make sure both characters (old an +% new) are active} +% Then, we define the new shorthand in terms of the original +% one, but note with |\aliasshorthands{"}{/}| is +% |\active@prefix /\active@char/|, so we still need to let the +% lattest to |\active@char"|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\let\csname active@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname active@char\string#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname + \bbl@activate{#2}% + \fi + \fi}% + {\bbl@error + {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)} + {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\% + turned off in the package options}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@notshorthand} +% \changes{v3.8d}{2004/11/20}{Error message added} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@notshorthand#1{% + \bbl@error{% + The character `\string #1' should be made a shorthand character;\\% + add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to + the preamble.\\% + I will ignore your instruction}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\shorthandon} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} +% \begin{macro}{\shorthandoff} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/08}{Added code fo the starred variant +% of \cs{shorthandoff}} +% The first level definition of these macros just passes the +% argument on to |\bbl@switch@sh|, adding |\@nil| at the end to +% denote the end of the list of characters. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh\@ne#1\@nnil} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\shorthandoff{% + \@ifstar{\bbl@shorthandoff\tw@}{\bbl@shorthandoff\z@}} +\def\bbl@shorthandoff#1#2{\bbl@switch@sh#1#2\@nnil} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/21}{Code revised} +% The macro |\bbl@switch@sh| takes the list of characters apart one +% by one and subsequently switches the category code of the +% shorthand character according to the first argument of +% |\bbl@switch@sh|. +% +% But before any of this switching takes place we make sure that +% the character we are dealing with is known as a shorthand +% character. If it is, a macro such as |\active@char"| should +% exist. +% +% Switching off and on is easy -- we just set the category +% code to `other' (12) and |\active|. With the starred version, the +% original catcode and the original definition, saved +% in |@initiate@active@char|, are restored. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{% + \ifx#2\@nnil\else + \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#2}% + {\bbl@error + {I cannot switch `\string#2' on or off--not a shorthand}% + {This character is not a shorthand. Maybe you made\\% + a typing mistake? I will ignore your instruction}}% + {\ifcase#1% + \catcode`#212\relax + \or + \catcode`#2\active + \or + \csname bbl@oricat@\string#2\endcsname + \csname bbl@oridef@\string#2\endcsname + \fi}% + \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh#1% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Conditional loading of shorthands} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/16}{Added code} +% +% Note the value is that at the expansion time, eg, in the preample +% shorhands are usually deactivated. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\babelshorthand{\active@prefix\babelshorthand\bbl@putsh} +\def\bbl@putsh#1{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#1}% + {\bbl@putsh@i#1\@empty\@nnil}% + {\csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}} +\def\bbl@putsh@i#1#2\@nnil{% + \csname\languagename @sh@\string#1@% + \ifx\@empty#2\else\string#2@\fi\endcsname} +\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil\else + \let\bbl@s@initiate@active@char\initiate@active@char + \def\initiate@active@char#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@initiate@active@char{#1}}{}} + \let\bbl@s@switch@sh\bbl@switch@sh + \def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{% + \ifx#2\@nnil\else + \bbl@afterfi + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}{\bbl@s@switch@sh#1{#2}}{\bbl@switch@sh#1}% + \fi} + \let\bbl@s@activate\bbl@activate + \def\bbl@activate#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@activate{#1}}{}} + \let\bbl@s@deactivate\bbl@deactivate + \def\bbl@deactivate#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@deactivate{#1}}{}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Removed redundant system declarations} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@prim@s} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/01}{Need to redefine \cs{prim@s} as +% well as plain \TeX's definition uses \cs{next}} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pr@m@s} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/29}{\cs{bbl@pr@m@s} rewritten to +% take into account catcodes for both the quote and the hat} +% One of the internal macros that are involved in substituting +% |\prime| for each right quote in mathmode is |\prim@s|. This +% checks if the next character is a right quote. When the right +% quote is active, the definition of this macro needs to be adapted +% to look also for an active right quote; the hat could be active, +% too. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@prim@s{% + \prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s} +\def\bbl@if@primes#1#2{% + \ifx#1\@let@token + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else\ifx#2\@let@token + \bbl@afterelse\expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \bbl@afterfi\expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi\fi} +\begingroup + \catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\*=\active \lccode`\*=`\^ + \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=\active \lccode`\"=`\' + \lowercase{% + \gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{% + \bbl@if@primes"'% + \pr@@@s + {\bbl@if@primes*^\pr@@@t\egroup}}} +\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Usually the |~| is active and expands to \verb*=\penalty\@M\ =. +% When it is written to the \file{.aux} file it is written +% expanded. To prevent that and to be able to use the character |~| +% as a start character for a shorthand, it is redefined here as a +% one character shorthand on system level. The system declaration +% is in most cases redundant (when |~| is still a non-break space), +% and in some cases is inconvenient (if |~| has been redefined); +% however, for backward compatibility it is maintained (some +% existing documents may rely on the \babel{} value). +% \begin{macrocode} +\initiate@active@char{~} +\declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ } +\bbl@activate{~} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\OT1dqpos} +% \begin{macro}{\T1dqpos} +% The position of the double quote character is different for the +% OT1 and T1 encodings. It will later be selected using the +% |\f@encoding| macro. Therefor we define two macros here to store +% the position of the character in these encodings. +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\def\csname OT1dqpos\endcsname{127} +\expandafter\def\csname T1dqpos\endcsname{4} +% \end{macrocode} +% When the macro |\f@encoding| is undefined (as it is in plain +% \TeX) we define it here to expand to \texttt{OT1} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\f@encoding\@undefined + \def\f@encoding{OT1} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Language attributes} +% +% Language attributes provide a means to give the user control over +% which features of the language definition files he wants to +% enable. +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1998/07/02}{Added support for language +% attributes} +% \begin{macro}{\languageattribute} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Use \cs{@expandtwoargs} with \cs{in@}} +% The macro |\languageattribute| checks whether its arguments are +% valid and then activates the selected language attribute. +% First check whether the language is known, and then process each +% attribute in the list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\languageattribute[2]{% + \def\bbl@tempc{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempc + \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempc{% + \@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{% +% \end{macrocode} +% We want to make sure that each attribute is selected only once; +% therefor we store the already selected attributes in +% |\bbl@known@attribs|. When that control sequence is not yet +% defined this attribute is certainly not selected before. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined + \in@false + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we need to see if the attribute occurs in the list of +% already selected attributes. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% When the attribute was in the list we issue a warning; this might +% not be the users intention. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifin@ + \bbl@warning{% + You have more than once selected the attribute '\bbl@attr'\\% + for language #1}% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% When we end up here the attribute is not selected before. So, we +% add it to the list of selected attributes and execute the +% associated \TeX-code. +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\bbl@add@list + \noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}}% + \bbl@tempa + \edef\bbl@tempa{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}% + \expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes% + {\csname\bbl@tempc @attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}% + {\@attrerr{\bbl@tempc}{\bbl@attr}}% + \fi}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\languageattribute +% \end{macrocode} +% The error text to be issued when an unknown attribute is +% selected. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{% + \bbl@error + {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}% + {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@declare@ttribute} +% This command adds the new language/attribute combination to the +% list of known attributes. +% +% Then it defines a control sequence to be executed when the +% attribute is used in a document. The result of this should be +% that the macro |\extras...| for the current language is extended, +% otherwise the attribute will not work as its code is removed from +% memory at |\begin{document}|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#2,}{,\BabelModifiers,}% + \ifin@ + \AfterBabelLanguage{#1}{\languageattribute{#1}{#2}}% + \fi + \bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}% + \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifattributeset} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/12}{macro added} +% This internal macro has 4 arguments. It can be used to interpret +% \TeX\ code based on whether a certain attribute was set. This +% command should appear inside the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| +% because the attributes are set in the document preamble, +% \emph{after} \babel\ is loaded. +% +% The first argument is the language, the second argument the +% attribute being checked, and the third and fourth arguments are +% the true and false clauses. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{% +% \end{macrocode} +% First we need to find out if any attributes were set; if not +% we're done. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined + \in@false + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% The we need to check the list of known attributes. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#1-#2,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% When we're this far |\ifin@| has a value indicating if the +% attribute in question was set or not. Just to be safe the code to +% be executed is `thrown over the |\fi|'. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifin@ + \bbl@afterelse#3% + \else + \bbl@afterfi#4% + \fi + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@list} +% This internal macro adds its second argument to a comma +% separated list in its first argument. When the list is not +% defined yet (or empty), it will be initiated +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@add@list#1#2{% + \ifx#1\@undefined + \def#1{#2}% + \else + \ifx#1\@empty + \def#1{#2}% + \else + \edef#1{#1,#2}% + \fi + \fi + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifknown@ttrib} +% An internal macro to check whether a given language/attribute is +% known. The macro takes 4 arguments, the language/attribute, the +% attribute list, the \TeX-code to be executed when the attribute +% is known and the \TeX-code to be executed otherwise. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@ifknown@ttrib#1#2{% +% \end{macrocode} +% We first assume the attribute is unknown. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\bbl@tempa\@secondoftwo +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we loop over the list of known attributes, trying to find a +% match. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@for\bbl@tempb:=#2\do{% + \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\expandafter,\bbl@tempb,}{,#1,}% + \ifin@ +% \end{macrocode} +% When a match is found the definition of |\bbl@tempa| is changed. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo + \else + \fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally we execute |\bbl@tempa|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@tempa +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@clear@ttribs} +% This macro removes all the attribute code from \LaTeX's memory at +% |\begin{document}| time (if any is present). +% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{When \cs{bbl@attributes} is +% undefined this should be a no-op} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@clear@ttribs{% + \ifx\bbl@attributes\@undefined\else + \@for\bbl@tempa:=\bbl@attributes\do{% + \expandafter\bbl@clear@ttrib\bbl@tempa. + }% + \let\bbl@attributes\@undefined + \fi + } +\def\bbl@clear@ttrib#1-#2.{% + \expandafter\let\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname\@undefined} +\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@clear@ttribs} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions} +% +% To save the meaning of control sequences using |\babel@save|, we +% use temporary control sequences. To save hash table entries for +% these control sequences, we don't use the name of the control +% sequence to be saved to construct the temporary name. Instead we +% simply use the value of a counter, which is reset to zero each time +% we begin to save new values. This works well because we release +% the saved meanings before we begin to save a new set of control +% sequence meanings (see |\selectlanguage| and |\originalTeX|). Note +% undefined macros are not undefined any more when saved -- they are +% |\relax|'ed. +% +% \begin{macro}{\babel@savecnt} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% \begin{macro}{\babel@beginsave} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% The initialization of a new save cycle: reset the counter to +% zero. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\babel@beginsave{\babel@savecnt\z@} +% \end{macrocode} +% Before it's forgotten, allocate the counter and initialize all. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcount\babel@savecnt +\babel@beginsave +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\babel@save} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% The macro |\babel@save|\meta{csname} saves the current meaning of +% the control sequence \meta{csname} to +% |\originalTeX|\footnote{\cs{originalTeX} has to be +% expandable, i.\,e.\ you shouldn't let it to \cs{relax}.}. +% To do this, we let the current meaning to a temporary control +% sequence, the restore commands are appended to |\originalTeX| and +% the counter is incremented. +% \changes{babel~3.2c}{1992/03/17}{missing backslash led to errors +% when executing \cs{originalTeX}} +% \changes{babel~3.2d}{1992/07/02}{saving in \cs{babel@i} and +% restoring from \cs{@babel@i} doesn't work very well...} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\babel@save#1{% + \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname#1\relax + \begingroup + \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX\let#1=}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand + \csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}% + \x + \advance\babel@savecnt\@ne} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\babel@savevariable} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro} +% The macro |\babel@savevariable|\meta{variable} saves the value of +% the variable. \meta{variable} can be anything allowed after the +% |\the| primitive. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\babel@savevariable#1{\begingroup + \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX #1=}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \the#1\relax}}% + \x} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchspacing} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} +% Some languages need to have |\frenchspacing| in effect. Others +% don't want that. The command |\bbl@frenchspacing| switches it on +% when it isn't already in effect and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| +% switches it off if necessary. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@frenchspacing{% + \ifnum\the\sfcode`\.=\@m + \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax + \else + \frenchspacing + \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing + \fi} +\let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Support for extending macros} +% +% \begin{macro}{\addto} +% For each language four control sequences have to be defined that +% control the language-specific definitions. To be able to add +% something to these macro once they have been defined the macro +% |\addto| is introduced. It takes two arguments, a \meta{control +% sequence} and \TeX-code to be added to the \meta{control +% sequence}. +% +% If the \meta{control sequence} has not been defined before it is +% defined now. The control sequence could also expand to |\relax|, +% in which case a circular definition results. The net result is a +% stack overflow. Otherwise the replacement text for the +% \meta{control sequence} is expanded and stored in a token +% register, together with the \TeX-code to be added. Finally the +% \meta{control sequence} is \emph{re}defined, using the contents +% of the token register. +% +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/04}{Changed to use toks register} +% \changes{babel~3.6b}{1996/12/30}{Also check if control sequence +% expands to \cs{relax}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addto#1#2{% + \ifx#1\@undefined + \def#1{#2}% + \else + \ifx#1\relax + \def#1{#2}% + \else + {\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}% + \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}% + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Hyphens} +% +% \begin{macro}{\babelhyphenation} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/28}{Macro added} +% +% This macro saves hyphenation exceptions. Two macros are used to +% store them: |\bbl@hyphenation@| for the global ones and +% |\bbl@hyphenation<lang>| for language ones. See |\bbl@patterns| +% above for further details. We make sure there is a space between +% words when multiple commands are used. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\babelhyphenation +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \newcommand\babelhyphenation[2][\@empty]{% + \ifx\bbl@hyphenation@\relax + \let\bbl@hyphenation@\@empty + \fi + \ifx\bbl@hyphlist\@empty\else + \bbl@warning{% + You must not intermingle \string\selectlanguage\space and\\% + \string\babelhyphenation\space or some exception will not\\% + be taken into account. Reported}% + \fi + \ifx\@empty#1% + \protected@edef\bbl@hyphenation@{\bbl@hyphenation@\space#2}% + \else + \edef\bbl@tempb{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb{% + \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempa + \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempa{% + \bbl@csarg\protected@edef{hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}% + \@empty + {\csname bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa\endcsname\space}% + #2}}}% + \fi}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@allowhyphens} +% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language +% definition files} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \cs{allowhyphens} a no-op for +% T1 fontencoding} +% \changes{babel-3.9a}{2012/07/28}{Replaced many \cs{allowhyphens} by +% \cs{bbl@allowhyphen}. They were either no-op or executed always.} +% This macro makes hyphenation possible. Basically its definition +% is nothing more than |\nobreak| |\hskip| \texttt{0pt plus +% 0pt}\footnote{\TeX\ begins and ends a word for hyphenation at a +% glue node. The penalty prevents a linebreak at this glue node.}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@t@one{T1} +\def\allowhyphens{\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{babel-3.9a}{2012/08/27}{Added \cs{babelhyphen} and related +% macros} +% \begin{macro}{\babelhyphen} +% Macros to insert common hyphens. Note the space before |@| in +% |\babelhyphen|. Instead of protecting it with +% |\DeclareRobustCommand|, which could insert a |\relax|, we use +% the same procedure as shorthands. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\babelnullhyphen{\char\hyphenchar\font} +\def\babelhyphen{\active@prefix\babelhyphen\bbl@hyphen} +\def\bbl@hyphen{% + \@ifstar{\bbl@hyphen@i @}{\bbl@hyphen@i\@empty}} +\def\bbl@hyphen@i#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty}% + {\csname bbl@#1usehyphen\endcsname{\discretionary{#2}{}{#2}}}% + {\csname bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty\endcsname}} +% \end{macrocode} +% The following two commands are used to wrap the ``hyphen'' and +% set the behaviour of the rest of the word -- the version with a +% single |@| is used when further hyphenation is allowed, while +% that with |@@| if no more hyphen are allowed. In both cases, if +% the hyphen is preceded by a positive space, breaking after the +% hyphen is disallowed. +% +% There should not be a discretionaty after a hyphen at the +% beginning of a word, so it is prevented if preceded by a +% skip. Unfortunately, this does handle cases like ``(-suffix)''. +% |\nobreak| is always preceded by |\leavevmode|, in case the +% shorthand starts a paragraph. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@usehyphen#1{% + \leavevmode + \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\nobreak\else\nobreak#1\fi + \hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@@usehyphen#1{% + \leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\else#1\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% The following macro inserts the hyphen char. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@hyphenchar{% + \ifnum\hyphenchar\font=\m@ne + \babelnullhyphen + \else + \char\hyphenchar\font + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally, we define the hyphen ``types''. Their names will not +% change, so you may use them in |ldf|'s. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@hy@soft{\bbl@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}} +\def\bbl@hy@@soft{\bbl@@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}} +\def\bbl@hy@hard{\bbl@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar} +\def\bbl@hy@@hard{\bbl@@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar} +\def\bbl@hy@nobreak{\bbl@usehyphen{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}\nobreak}} +\def\bbl@hy@@nobreak{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}} +\def\bbl@hy@repeat{% + \bbl@usehyphen{% + \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}% + \nobreak}} +\def\bbl@hy@@repeat{% + \bbl@@usehyphen{% + \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}}} +\def\bbl@hy@empty{\hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@hy@@empty{\discretionary{}{}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@disc} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/24}{Macro moved from language +% definition files} +% For some languages the macro |\bbl@disc| is used to ease the +% insertion of discretionaries for letters that behave `abnormally' +% at a breakpoint. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@disc#1#2{\nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\bbl@allowhyphens} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages} +% +% \begin{macro}{\set@low@box} +% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language +% definition files} +% The following macro is used to lower quotes to the same level as +% the comma. It prepares its argument in box register~0. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}% + \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@% + \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\save@sf@q} +% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language +% definition files} +% The macro |\save@sf@q| is used to save and reset the current +% space factor. +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/19}{PR3119, don't start a paragraph in +% a local group} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\save@sf@q#1{\leavevmode + \begingroup + \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}#1\@SF + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Repaired a typo (itlaic, PR1652)} +% +% \subsection{Making glyphs available} +% +% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this +% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on +% \filedate.} makes a number of glyphs available that either do not +% exist in the \texttt{OT1} encoding and have to be `faked', or +% that are not accessible through \file{T1enc.def}. +% +% \subsection{Quotation marks} +% +% \begin{macro}{\quotedblbase} +% In the \texttt{T1} encoding the opening double quote at the +% baseline is available as a separate character, accessible via +% |\quotedblbase|. In the \texttt{OT1} encoding it is not +% available, therefor we make it available by lowering the normal +% open quote character to the baseline. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{% + \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}% + \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\quotesinglbase} +% We also need the single quote character at the baseline. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{% + \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}% + \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft} +% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright} +% The guillemet characters are not available in \texttt{OT1} +% encoding. They are faked. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% + \ifmmode + \ll + \else + \save@sf@q{\nobreak + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% + \fi} +\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% + \ifmmode + \gg + \else + \save@sf@q{\nobreak + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotright}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotright}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglleft} +% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglright} +% The single guillemets are not available in \texttt{OT1} +% encoding. They are faked. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{OT1}{% + \ifmmode + <% + \else + \save@sf@q{\nobreak + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% + \fi} +\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{% + \ifmmode + >% + \else + \save@sf@q{\nobreak + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{Letters} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ij} +% \begin{macro}{\IJ} +% The dutch language uses the letter `ij'. It is available in +% \texttt{T1} encoded fonts, but not in the \texttt{OT1} encoded +% fonts. Therefor we fake it for the \texttt{OT1} encoding. +% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Changed the kerning in the faked ij +% to match the dc-version of it} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/28}{Removed the first \cs{allowhyphens}. +% Moved the second one just after the kern.} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{% + i\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens j} +\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{% + I\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens J} +\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188} +\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ij}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\IJ}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\IJ}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\dj} +% \begin{macro}{\DJ} +% The croatian language needs the letters |\dj| and |\DJ|; they are +% available in the \texttt{T1} encoding, but not in the +% \texttt{OT1} encoding by default. +% +% Some code to construct these glyphs for the \texttt{OT1} encoding +% was made available to me by Stipcevic Mario, +% (\texttt{stipcevic@olimp.irb.hr}). +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/28}{New definition of \cs{dj}, see PR +% 2058} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\crrtic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.3em} +\def\crttic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.33em} +\def\ddj@{% + \setbox0\hbox{d}\dimen@=\ht0 + \advance\dimen@1ex + \dimen@.45\dimen@ + \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@ + \advance\dimen@ii.5ex + \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crrtic@}}}} +\def\DDJ@{% + \setbox0\hbox{D}\dimen@=.55\ht0 + \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@ + \advance\dimen@ii.15ex % correction for the dash position + \advance\dimen@ii-.15\fontdimen7\font % correction for cmtt font + \dimen\thr@@\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen7\font\dimen@ + \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crttic@}}}} +% +\DeclareTextCommand{\dj}{OT1}{\ddj@ d} +\DeclareTextCommand{\DJ}{OT1}{\DDJ@ D} +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or +% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\dj}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\dj}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\DJ}{% + \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\DJ}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\SS} +% For the \texttt{T1} encoding |\SS| is defined and selects a +% specific glyph from the font, but for other encodings it is not +% available. Therefor we make it available here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareTextCommand{\SS}{OT1}{SS} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\SS}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\SS}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks} +% +% Shorthands are provided for a number of different quotation +% marks, which make them usable both outside and inside mathmode. +% +% \begin{macro}{\glq} +% \begin{macro}{\grq} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grq} +% dependent on the font encoding} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{glq} fontencoding +% dependent as well} +% The `german' single quotes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glq} +% \end{macrocode} +% The definition of |\grq| depends on the fontencoding. With +% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{OT1}{% + \save@sf@q{\kern-.0125em% + \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}% + \kern.07em\relax}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grq} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\glqq} +% \begin{macro}{\grqq} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grqq} +% dependent on the font encoding} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{grqq} fontencoding +% dependent as well} +% The `german' double quotes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glqq} +% \end{macrocode} +% The definition of |\grqq| depends on the % fontencoding. With +% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{OT1}{% + \save@sf@q{\kern-.07em% + \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}% + \kern.07em\relax}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grqq} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\flq} +% \begin{macro}{\frq} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of +% \cs{quilsingl...}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these +% definitions} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flq} and \cs{frq} +% fontencoding dependent} +% The `french' single guillemets. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flq} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frq} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\flqq} +% \begin{macro}{\frqq} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of +% \cs{quillemot...}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these +% definitions} +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flqq} and \cs{frqq} +% fontencoding dependent} +% The `french' double guillemets. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flqq} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{OT1}{% + \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} +\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{T1}{% + \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frqq} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Umlauts and trema's} +% +% The command |\"| needs to have a different effect for different +% languages. For German for instance, the `umlaut' should be +% positioned lower than the default position for placing it over +% the letters a, o, u, A, O and U. When placed over an e, i, E or I +% it can retain its normal position. For Dutch the same glyph is +% always placed in the lower position. +% +% \begin{macro}{\umlauthigh} +% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to +% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.} +% \begin{macro}{\umlautlow} +% To be able to provide both positions of |\"| we provide two +% commands to switch the positioning, the default will be +% |\umlauthigh| (the normal positioning). +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\umlauthigh{% + \def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup% + \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname + ##1\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}% + \let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta} +\def\umlautlow{% + \def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}} +\def\umlautelow{% + \def\bbl@umlaute{\protect\lower@umlaut}} +\umlauthigh +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\lower@umlaut} +% The command |\lower@umlaut| is used to position the |\"| closer +% the the letter. +% +% We want the umlaut character lowered, nearer to the letter. To do +% this we need an extra \meta{dimen} register. +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\ifx\csname U@D\endcsname\relax + \csname newdimen\endcsname\U@D +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% The following code fools \TeX's \texttt{make\_accent} procedure +% about the current x-height of the font to force another placement +% of the umlaut character. +% First we have to save the current x-height of the font, because +% we'll change this font dimension and this is always done +% globally. +% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to +% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.} +% +% Then we compute the new x-height in such a way that the umlaut +% character is lowered to the base character. The value of +% \texttt{.45ex} depends on the \MF\ parameters with which the +% fonts were built. (Just try out, which value will look best.) +% If the new x-height is too low, it is not changed. +% Finally we call the |\accent| primitive, reset the old x-height +% and insert the base character in the argument. +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{Added a \cs{allowhyphens}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/06/25}{removed \cs{allowhyphens}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\lower@umlaut#1{% + \leavevmode\bgroup + \U@D 1ex% + {\setbox\z@\hbox{% + \expandafter\char\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname}% + \dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@ + \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}% + \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname + \fontdimen5\font\U@D #1% + \egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% For all vowels we declare |\"| to be a composite command which +% uses |\bbl@umlauta| or |\bbl@umlaute| to position the umlaut +% character. We need to be sure that these definitions override the +% ones that are provided when the package \pkg{fontenc} with +% option \Lopt{OT1} is used. Therefor these declarations are +% postponed until the beginning of the document. Note these +% definitions only apply to some languages, but +% babel sets them for \textit{all} languages -- you may want to +% redefine |\bbl@umlauta| and/or |\bbl@umlaute| for a language +% in the corresponding |ldf| (using the babel switching mechanism, +% of course). +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{a}{\bbl@umlauta{a}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{e}{\bbl@umlaute{e}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{\i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{o}{\bbl@umlauta{o}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{u}{\bbl@umlauta{u}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{A}{\bbl@umlauta{A}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{E}{\bbl@umlaute{E}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{I}{\bbl@umlaute{I}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}% + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{Multiencoding strings} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/05}{Added tentative code for string +% declarations} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/24}{Added hooks} +% +% The aim following commands is to provide a commom interface for +% strings in several encodings. They also contains several hooks which +% can be ued by \luatex{} and \xetex. +% +% This is the main command. With the first use it is redefined to +% omit the basic setup in subsequent blocks. We make sure strings +% contain actual letters in the range 128-255, not active characters. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@recatcode#1{% + \@tempcnta="7F + \def\bbl@tempa{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta>"FF\else + \catcode\@tempcnta=#1\relax + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne + \expandafter\bbl@tempa + \fi}% + \bbl@tempa} +\@onlypreamble\StartBabelCommands +\def\StartBabelCommands{% + \begingroup + \bbl@recatcode{11}% + \def\bbl@scuse{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil\def\bbl@opt@strings{generic}\fi}% + \def\UseStrings{\bbl@scuse\aftergroup\bbl@scuse}% + \def\SetStringLoop{\afterassignment\bbl@sclp\def\bbl@templ####1}% + \def\bbl@sclp##1{% + \count@\z@ % dangerous if a hook is used + \@for\bbl@tempm:=##1\do{% + \advance\count@\@ne + \toks@\expandafter{\bbl@tempm}% + \edef\bbl@tempn{% + \expandafter\noexpand + \csname\bbl@templ{\romannumeral\count@}\endcsname% + {\the\toks@}}% + \expandafter\SetString\bbl@tempn}}% + \def\SetCase{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@tolower}{% + \g@addto@macro\@uclclist{% + \reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}% stops processing the list + \@ifundefined{\languagename @bbl@uclc}% and resumes it + {\reserved@a}% + {\csname\languagename @bbl@uclc\endcsname}% + {\bbl@tolower\@empty}{\bbl@toupper\@empty}}% + \gdef\bbl@tolower{\csname\languagename @bbl@lc\endcsname}% + \gdef\bbl@toupper{\csname\languagename @bbl@uc\endcsname}}{}% + \let\SetCase\bbl@setcase + \SetCase}% + \def\bbl@provstring##1{% + \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string##1}{\gdef##1}\@gobble}% + \def\bbl@dftstring##1##2{% + \@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1?{##2}% + \global\let##1##1}% + \def\bbl@encstring##1##2{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempc\bbl@sc@fontenc{% + \@ifundefined{T@\bbl@tempc}% + \@empty + {\@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1\bbl@tempc{##2}% + \global\let##1##1}}}% + \let\StartBabelCommands\bbl@startcmds + \begingroup + \let\bbl@screset\@nnil % local flag - disable 1st stopcommands + \StartBabelCommands} +\def\bbl@startcmds#1#2{% + \ifx\bbl@screset\@nnil\else + \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}% + \fi + \endgroup + \begingroup + \edef\bbl@L{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \edef\bbl@G{\zap@space#2 \@empty}% + \let\bbl@sc@charset\space + \let\bbl@sc@fontenc\space + \let\SetString\@gobbletwo + \let\bbl@stringdef\@gobbletwo + \bbl@startcmds@i} +% \end{macrocode} +% Parse the encoding info to get the label, input, and font parts. +% +% Select the behaviour of |\SetString|. Thre are two main cases: +% |*| blocks, which are always taken into account, and labelled +% blocks, which are not always taken into account. With |*| and +% |strings| set to |encoded| or |generic|, strings are defined +% always; otherwise, they are set only if they are still undefined +% (ie, fallback values). With labelled blocks and +% |strings=encoded|, define the strings, but with another value, +% define strings only if the current label or font encoding is the +% value of |strings|; otherwise (ie, no |strings| or a block whose +% label is not in |strings=|) do nothing. +% +% We presume the current block is not loaded, and therefore set +% (above) a couple of default values to gobble the arguments. Then, +% these macros are redefined if necessary according to several +% parameters. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\bbl@startcmds@i[1][\@empty]{% + \ifx\@empty#1% + \def\bbl@sc@label{generic}% + \bbl@scswitch{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring + \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring + \else + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring + \fi\fi}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@usehooks{defaultcommands}{}% + \else + \def\bbl@tempa##1=##2\@nil{% + \bbl@csarg\edef{sc@\zap@space##1 \@empty}{##2 }}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb{label=#1}{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\@nil}% + \def\bbl@tempa##1 ##2{% + ##1% + \ifx\@empty##2\else\ifx,##1,\else,\fi\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempa##2\fi}% + \edef\bbl@sc@fontenc{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@sc@fontenc\@empty}% + \edef\bbl@sc@label{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@label\@empty}% + \edef\bbl@sc@charset{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@charset\@empty}% + \bbl@scswitch{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring + \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring + \else + \@expandtwoargs + \in@{,\bbl@opt@strings,}{,\bbl@sc@label,\bbl@sc@fontenc,}% + \ifin@ + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring + \fi\fi\fi}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@usehooks{encodedcommands}{{\bbl@sc@charset}{\bbl@sc@fontenc}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% There are two versions of |\bbl@scswitch|. The first version +% is used when |ldf|s are read, and with it blocks not intented for +% the current language (as set in |\CurrentOption|) are ignored; it +% also makes sure |\|\m{group}\m{language} is reset, but only once +% (|\bbl@screset| is used to keep track of this). The second version +% is used in the preamble and packages loaded after \babel{} and +% defines strings for all known languages. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@scswitch#1{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\bbl@L,}% + \ifin@ + \let\bbl@L\CurrentOption + #1\relax + \bbl@scswitch@i + \ifx\bbl@G\@empty\else + \ifx\SetString\@gobbletwo\else + \edef\bbl@GL{\bbl@G\bbl@L}% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@GL,}{,\bbl@screset,}% + \ifin@\else + \global\expandafter\let\csname\bbl@GL\endcsname\@undefined + \xdef\bbl@screset{\bbl@screset,\bbl@GL}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} +\def\bbl@scswitch@i{% + \ifx\bbl@G\@empty + \def\SetString##1##2{% + \bbl@error{Missing group for string \string##1}% + {You must assign strings to some category, typically\\% + captions or extras, but you set none}}% + \fi} +\AtEndOfPackage{\def\bbl@scswitch#1{#1\relax\bbl@scswitch@i}} +\@onlypreamble\EndBabelCommands +\def\EndBabelCommands{% + \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}% + \endgroup + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% First save the ``switcher''. Create it if undefined. Strings are +% defined only if undefined (ie, like |\providescommmand|). With +% the event |stringprocess| you can preprocess the string by +% manipulating the value of |\BabelString|. If there are several +% hooks assigned to this event, preprocessing is done in the same +% order as defined. Finally, the string is set. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@scset#1#2{\def#1{#2}} +\def\bbl@setstring#1#2{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{% + \edef\bbl@LC{\bbl@tempa\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \@ifundefined{\bbl@LC}% eg, \germanchaptername + {\global\expandafter + \bbl@add\csname\bbl@G\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter + {\expandafter\bbl@scset\expandafter#1\csname\bbl@LC\endcsname}}% + {}% + \def\BabelString{#2}% + \bbl@usehooks{stringprocess}{}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@LC\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\BabelString}}} +\newcommand\bbl@setcase[3][]{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uclc\endcsname{\reserved@a#1}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uc\endcsname{#2}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@lc\endcsname{#3}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Hooks} +% +% Note they are loaded in babel.def. switch.def only provides a +% ``hook'' for hooks (with a default value which is a no-op, +% below). Admittedly, the current implementation is a somewhat +% simplistic and does vety little to catch errors, but it is intended +% for developpers, after all. |\bbl@usehooks| is the commands used by +% babel to execute hooks defined for an event. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\AddBabelHook#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hk@#1}{\EnableBabelHook{#1}}{}% + \def\bbl@tempa##1,#2=##2,##3\@empty{\def\bbl@tempb{##2}}% + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@evargs,#2=,\@empty + \@ifundefined{bbl@ev@#1@#2}% + {\bbl@csarg\bbl@add{ev@#2}{\bbl@elt{#1}}% + \bbl@csarg\newcommand}% + {\bbl@csarg\renewcommand}% + {ev@#1@#2}[\bbl@tempb]} +\def\EnableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@firstofone} +\def\DisableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@gobble} +\def\bbl@usehooks#1#2{% + \def\bbl@elt##1{% + \@nameuse{bbl@hk@##1}{\@nameuse{bbl@ev@##1@#1}#2}}% + \@nameuse{bbl@ev@#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% To ensure forward compatibility, arguments in hooks are set +% implicitly. So, if a further argument is added in the future, +% there is no need to change the existing code. Note events +% intended for \textsf{hyphen.cfg} are also loaded (just in +% case you need them). +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@evargs{,% don't delete the comma + everylanguage=1,loadkernel=1,loadpatterns=1,loadexceptions=1,% + adddialect=2,patterns=2,defaultcommands=0,encodedcommands=2,write=0,% + beforeextras=0,afterextras=0,stopcommands=0,stringprocess=0,% + hyphenation=2} +\ifx\directlua\@undefined + \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else + \input xebabel.def + \fi +\else + \input luababel.def +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{The redefinition of the style commands} +% +% The rest of the code in this file can only be processed by +% \LaTeX, so we check the current format. If it is plain \TeX, +% processing should stop here. But, because of the need to limit +% the scope of the definition of |\format|, a macro that is used +% locally in the following |\if|~statement, this comparison is done +% inside a group. To prevent \TeX\ from complaining about an +% unclosed group, the processing of the command |\endinput| is +% deferred until after the group is closed. This is accomplished by +% the command |\aftergroup|. +% \begin{macrocode} +{\def\format{lplain} +\ifx\fmtname\format +\else + \def\format{LaTeX2e} + \ifx\fmtname\format + \else + \aftergroup\endinput + \fi +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Cross referencing macros} +% +% The \LaTeX\ book states: +% \begin{quote} +% The \emph{key} argument is any sequence of letters, digits, and +% punctuation symbols; upper- and lowercase letters are regarded as +% different. +% \end{quote} +% When the above quote should still be true when a document is +% typeset in a language that has active characters, special care +% has to be taken of the category codes of these characters when +% they appear in an argument of the cross referencing macros. +% +% When a cross referencing command processes its argument, all +% tokens in this argument should be character tokens with category +% `letter' or `other'. +% +% The only way to accomplish this in most cases is to use the trick +% described in the \TeX book~\cite{DEK} (Appendix~D, page~382). +% The primitive |\meaning| applied to a token expands to the +% current meaning of this token. For example, `|\meaning\A|' with +% |\A| defined as `|\def\A#1{\B}|' expands to the characters +% `|macro:#1->\B|' with all category codes set to `other' or +% `space'. +% \begin{macro}{\newlabel} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% The macro |\label| writes a line with a |\newlabel| command +% into the |.aux| file to define labels. +% \begin{macrocode} +%\bbl@redefine\newlabel#1#2{% +% \@safe@activestrue\org@newlabel{#1}{#2}\@safe@activesfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@newl@bel} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Now redefine \cs{@newl@bel} instead +% of \cs{@lbibitem} and \cs{newlabel}} +% We need to change the definition of the \LaTeX-internal macro +% |\@newl@bel|. This is needed because we need to make sure that +% shorthand characters expand to their non-active version. +% +% First we open a new group to keep the changed setting of +% |\protect| local and then we set the |@safe@actives| switch to +% true to make sure that any shorthand that appears in any of the +% arguments immediately expands to its non-active self. +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/12/19}{Call \cs{@safe@activestrue} +% directly} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\bbl@opt@safe\@empty\else + \def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{% + {\@safe@activestrue + \@ifundefined{#1@#2}% + \relax + {\gdef\@multiplelabels{% + \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% + \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}% + \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@testdef} +% An internal \LaTeX\ macro used to test if the labels that have +% been written on the |.aux| file have changed. It is called by +% the |\enddocument| macro. This macro needs to be completely +% rewritten, using |\meaning|. The reason for this is that in some +% cases the expansion of |\#1@#2| contains the same characters as +% the |#3|; but the character codes differ. Therefor \LaTeX\ keeps +% reporting that the labels may have changed. +% \changes{babel~3.4g}{1994/08/30}{Moved the \cs{def} inside the +% macrocode environment} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Complete rewrite of this macro as +% the same character ended up with different category codes in the +% labels that are being compared. Now use \cs{meaning}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/16}{Use \cs{strip@prefix} only on +% \cs{bbl@tempa} when it is not \cs{relax}} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/28}{Make sure that shorthands don't get +% expanded at the wrong moment.} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{\cs{@safe@activesfalse} is now +% part of the label definition} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/13}{Removed \cs{@safe@activesfalse} +% from the label definition} +% \begin{macrocode} + \CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{% + \def\reserved@a{#3}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@#2\endcsname\reserved@a + \else + \@tempswatrue + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% Now that we made sure that |\@testdef| still has the same +% definition we can rewrite it. First we make the shorthands +% `safe'. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@testdef#1#2#3{% + \@safe@activestrue +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we use |\bbl@tempa| as an `alias' for the macro that +% contains the label which is being checked. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we define |\bbl@tempb| just as |\@newl@bel| does it. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\bbl@tempb{#3}% + \@safe@activesfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% When the label is defined we replace the definition of +% |\bbl@tempa| by its meaning. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax + \else + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% We do the same for |\bbl@tempb|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% +% \end{macrocode} +% If the label didn't change, |\bbl@tempa| and |\bbl@tempb| should +% be identical macros. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb + \else + \@tempswatrue + \fi} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ref} +% \begin{macro}{\pageref} +% The same holds for the macro |\ref| that references a label +% and |\pageref| to reference a page. So we redefine |\ref| and +% |\pageref|. While we change these macros, we make them robust as +% well (if they weren't already) to prevent problems if they should +% become expanded at the wrong moment. +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/07}{Made \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} +% robust (PR1353)} +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{use a different control sequence +% while making \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} robust} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/06}{redefine \cs*{ref } if it exists +% instead of \cs{ref}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefinerobust}} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/19}{redefine \cs{\@setref} instead of +% \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} in \LaTeXe.} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/21}{Reverse the previous change as it +% inhibits the use of active characters in labels} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} + \bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} +\else + \let\org@ref\ref + \let\org@pageref\pageref +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@citex} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% The macro used to cite from a bibliography, |\cite|, uses an +% internal macro, |\@citex|. +% It is this internal macro that picks up the argument(s), +% so we redefine this internal macro and leave |\cite| alone. The +% first argument is used for typesetting, so the shorthands need +% only be deactivated in the second argument. +% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/01}{The shorthands need to be +% deactivated for the second argument of \cs{@citex} only.} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@expandtwoargs\in@{B}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{% + \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse + \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Unfortunately, the packages \pkg{natbib} and \pkg{cite} need a +% different definition of |\@citex|... +% To begin with, \pkg{natbib} has a definition for |\@citex| with +% \emph{three} arguments... We only know that a package is loaded +% when |\begin{document}| is executed, so we need to postpone the +% different redefinition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Notice that we use |\def| here instead of |\bbl@redefine| because +% |\org@@citex| is already defined and we don't want to overwrite +% that definition (it would result in parameter stack overflow +% because of a circular definition). +% +% (Recent versions of natbib change dynamically |\@citex|, so PR4087 +% doesn't seem fixable in a simple way. Just load natbib before.) +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{% + \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse + \org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}% + }{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% The package \pkg{cite} has a definition of |\@citex| where the +% shorthands need to be turned off in both arguments. +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{% + \def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}% + }{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\nocite} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% The macro |\nocite| which is used to instruct BiB\TeX\ to +% extract uncited references from the database. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@redefine\nocite#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibcite} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% The macro that is used in the |.aux| file to define citation +% labels. When packages such as \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{cite} are not +% loaded its second argument is used to typeset the citation +% label. In that case, this second argument can contain active +% characters but is used in an environment where +% |\@safe@activestrue| is in effect. This switch needs to be reset +% inside the |\hbox| which contains the citation label. In order to +% determine during \file{.aux} file processing which definition of +% |\bibcite| is needed we define |\bibcite| in such a way that it +% redefines itself with the proper definition. +% \changes{babel~3.6s}{1999/04/13}{Need to determine `online' which +% definition of \cs{bibcite} is needed} +% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Also check for \pkg{cite} it can't +% handle \cs{@safe@activesfalse} in its second argument} +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@redefine\bibcite{% +% \end{macrocode} +% We call |\bbl@cite@choice| to select the proper definition for +% |\bibcite|. This new definition is then activated. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@cite@choice + \bibcite} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@bibcite} +% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@bibcite} added} +% The macro |\bbl@bibcite| holds the definition of |\bibcite| +% needed when neither \pkg{natbib} nor \pkg{cite} is loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{% + \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@cite@choice} +% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@cite@choice} added} +% The macro |\bbl@cite@choice| determines which definition of +% |\bibcite| is needed. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\bbl@cite@choice{% +% \end{macrocode} +% First we give |\bibcite| its default definition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite +% \end{macrocode} +% Then, when \pkg{natbib} is loaded we restore the original +% definition of |\bibcite| . +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% For \pkg{cite} we do the same. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure this only happens once. +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% When a document is run for the first time, no \file{.aux} file is +% available, and |\bibcite| will not yet be properly defined. In +% this case, this has to happen before the document starts. +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}} +% One of the two internal \LaTeX\ macros called by |\bibitem| +% that write the citation label on the |.aux| file. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} +\else + \let\org@nocite\nocite + \let\org@@citex\@citex + \let\org@bibcite\bibcite + \let\org@@bibitem\@bibitem +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Marks} +% +% \begin{macro}{\markright} +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added redefinition of \cs{mark...} +% commands} +% Because the output routine is asynchronous, we must +% pass the current language attribute to the head lines, together +% with the text that is put into them. To achieve this we need to +% adapt the definition of |\markright| and |\markboth| somewhat. +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/08}{Removed the use of \cs{head@lang} +% (PR 2990)} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{Avoid expanding the arguments by +% storing them in token registers} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to +% the mark} +% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to +% an empty mark; prevented this by checking the contents of the +% argument} +% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of +% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing +% it into the token registers} +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@redefine\markright#1{% +% \end{macrocode} +% First of all we temporarily store the language switching command, +% using an expanded definition in order to get the current value of +% |\languagename|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect + \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Then, we check whether the argument is empty; if it is, we +% just make sure the scratch token register is empty. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\bbl@arg{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty + \toks@{}% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Next, we store the argument to |\markright| in the scratch token +% register, together with the expansion of |\bbl@tempb| (containing +% the language switching command) as defined before. This way +% these commands will not be expanded by using |\edef| later +% on, and we make sure that the text is typeset using the +% correct language settings. While doing so, we make sure that +% active characters that may end up in the mark are not disabled by +% the output routine kicking in while \cs{@safe@activestrue} is in +% effect. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{% + \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we define a temporary control sequence using |\edef|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\bbl@tempa{% +% \end{macrocode} +% When |\bbl@tempa| is executed, only |\languagename| will be +% expanded, because of the way the token register was filled. +% \begin{macrocode} + \noexpand\org@markright{\the\toks@}}% + \bbl@tempa +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% The definition of |\markboth| is equivalent to that of +% |\markright|, except that we need two token registers. The +% documentclasses \cls{report} and \cls{book} define and set the +% headings for the page. While doing so they also store a copy of +% |\markboth| in |\@mkboth|. Therefor we need to check whether +% |\@mkboth| has already been set. If so we neeed to do that again +% with the new definition of |\makrboth|. +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to +% the mark} +% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to +% an empty mark, prevented this by checking the contents of the +% arguments} +% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of +% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing +% it into the token registers} +% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added setting of \cs{@mkboth} (PR +% 3826)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@mkboth\markboth + \def\bbl@tempc{\let\@mkboth\markboth} +\else + \def\bbl@tempc{} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we can start the new definition of |\markboth| +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@redefine\markboth#1#2{% + \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect + \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}% + \def\bbl@arg{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty + \toks@{}% + \else + \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{% + \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}% + \fi + \def\bbl@arg{#2}% + \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty + \toks8{}% + \else + \expandafter\toks8\expandafter{% + \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#2}}% + \fi + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\org@markboth{\the\toks@}{\the\toks8}}% + \bbl@tempa +} +% \end{macrocode} +% and copy it to |\@mkboth| if necesary. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@tempc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Preventing clashes with other packages} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifthenelse} +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/11}{Redefinition of \cs{ifthenelse} +% added to circumvent problems with \cs{pageref} in the argument of +% \cs{isodd}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Redefine only if `ref' is `safe'}% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/03}{Moved to babel.def} +% Sometimes a document writer wants to create a special effect +% depending on the page a certain fragment of text appears on. This +% can be achieved by the following piece of code: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \ifthenelse{\isodd{\pageref{some:label}}} +% {code for odd pages} +% {code for even pages} +%\end{verbatim} +% In order for this to work the argument of |\isodd| needs to be +% fully expandable. With the above redefinition of |\pageref| it is +% not in the case of this example. To overcome that, we add some +% code to the definition of |\ifthenelse| to make things work. +% +% The first thing we need to do is check if the package +% \pkg{ifthen} is loaded. This should be done at |\begin{document}| +% time. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we can redefine |\ifthenelse|: +% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{\cs{ifthenelse} needs to be long} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/22}{\cs{ref} is also taken into account} +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{% +% \end{macrocode} +% We want to revert the definition of |\pageref| and |\ref| to +% their original definition for the duration of |\ifthenelse|, +% so we first need to store their current meanings. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\bbl@tempa\pageref + \let\pageref\org@pageref + \let\bbl@tempb\ref + \let\ref\org@ref +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we can set the |\@safe@actives| switch and call the original +% |\ifthenelse|. In order to be able to use shorthands in the +% second and third arguments of |\ifthenelse| the resetting of the +% switch \emph{and} the definition of |\pageref| happens inside +% those arguments. When the package wasn't loaded we do nothing. +% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/25}{Now reset the @safe@actives switch +% inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments of \cs{ifthenelse}} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/06/29}{\cs{pageref} needs to have its +% babel definition reinstated in the second and third arguments} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@safe@activestrue + \org@ifthenelse{#1}{% + \let\pageref\bbl@tempa + \let\ref\bbl@tempb + \@safe@activesfalse + #2}{% + \let\pageref\bbl@tempa + \let\ref\bbl@tempb + \@safe@activesfalse + #3}% + }% + }{}% + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@vpageref} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Redefinition of \cs{@@vpageref} +% added to circumvent problems with active \texttt{:} in the +% argument of \cs{vref} when \pkg{varioref} is used} +% \begin{macro}{\vrefpagenum} +% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/18}{Added redefinition of +% \cs{vrefpagenum} which deals with ranges of pages} +% \begin{macro}{\Ref} +% \changes{babel~3.8g}{2005/05/21}{We also need to adapt \cs{Ref} +% which needs to be able to uppercase the first letter of the +% expansion of \cs{ref}} +% When the package varioref is in use we need to modify its +% internal command |\@@vpageref| in order to prevent problems when +% an active character ends up in the argument of |\vref|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{% + \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{% + \@safe@activestrue + \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}% + \@safe@activesfalse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The same needs to happen for |\vrefpagenum|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{% + \@safe@activestrue + \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}% + \@safe@activesfalse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The package \pkg{varioref} defines |\Ref| to be a robust command +% wich uppercases the first character of the reference text. In +% order to be able to do that it needs to access the exandable form +% of |\ref|. So we employ a little trick here. We redefine the +% (internal) command \verb*|\Ref | to call |\org@ref| instead of +% |\ref|. The disadvantgage of this solution is that whenever the +% derfinition of |\Ref| changes, this definition needs to be updated +% as well. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{% + \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa} + }{}% + } +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{hhline}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\hhline} +% Delaying the activation of the shorthand characters has introduced +% a problem with the \pkg{hhline} package. The reason is that it +% uses the `:' character which is made active by the french support +% in \babel. Therefor we need to \emph{reload} the package when +% the `:' is an active character. +% +% So at |\begin{document}| we check whether \pkg{hhline} is loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we check whether the expansion of |\normal@char:| is not +% equal to |\relax|. +% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{added \cs{string} to prevent +% unwanted expansion of the colon} +% \begin{macrocode} + {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% In that case we simply reload the package. Note that this happens +% \emph{after} the category code of the @-sign has been changed to +% other, so we need to temporarily change it to letter again. +% \begin{macrocode} + \makeatletter + \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother + \fi}% + {}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands} +% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Inform \pkg{hyperref} to use +% shorthands at system level (PR4006)} +% +% A number of interworking problems between \pkg{babel} and +% \pkg{hyperref} are tackled by \pkg{hyperref} itself. The +% following code was introduced to prevent some annoying warnings +% but it broke bookmarks. This was quickly fixed in \pkg{hyperref}, +% which essentially made it no-op. However, it will not removed for +% the moment because \pkg{hyperref} is expecting it, . +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}% + {}% + {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% + \languageshorthands{system}}% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{fancyhdr}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE} +% The package \pkg{fancyhdr} treats the running head and fout lines +% somewhat differently as the standard classes. A symptom of this is +% that the command |\foreignlanguage| which \babel\ adds to the +% marks can end up inside the argument of |\MakeUppercase|. To +% prevent unexpected results we need to define |\FOREIGNLANGUAGE| +% here. +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/05/23}{Define \cs{FOREIGNLANGUAGE} +% unconditionally} +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{% + \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\substitutefontfamily} +% The command |\substitutefontfamily| creates an +% \file{.fd} file on the fly. The first argument is an encoding +% mnemonic, the second and third arguments are font family names. +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/15}{create file with lowercase name} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{% + \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}% + \immediate\write15{% + \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}% + [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day} + \space generated font description file]^^J + \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J + }% + \closeout15 + } +% \end{macrocode} +% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 2)} +% +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/16}{Removed redefinition of \cs{@roman} +% and \cs{@Roman}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\TeX} +% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ logos +% encoding-independent} +% Because documents may use font encodings other than one of the +% latin encodings, we make sure that the logos of \TeX\ and +% \LaTeX\ always come out in the right encoding. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}} +\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\nfss@catcodes} +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/18}{Need to add the double quote and +% acute characters to \cs{nfss@catcodes} to prevent problems when +% reading in .fd files} +% \LaTeX's font selection scheme sometimes wants to read font +% definition files in the middle of processing the document. In +% order to guard against any characters having the wrong +% |\catcode|s it always calls |\nfss@catcodes| before loading a +% file. Unfortunately, the characters |"| and |'| are not dealt +% with. Therefor we have to add them until \LaTeX\ does that +% itself. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bbl@add\nfss@catcodes{% + \@makeother\'% + \@makeother\"} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Local Language Configuration} +% +% \begin{macro}{\loadlocalcfg} +% At some sites it may be necessary to add site-specific actions to +% a language definition file. This can be done by creating a file +% with the same name as the language definition file, but with the +% extension \file{.cfg}. For instance the file \file{norsk.cfg} +% will be loaded when the language definition file \file{norsk.ldf} +% is loaded. +% +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Added macro} +% For plain-based formats we don't want to override the definition +% of |\loadlocalcfg| from \file{plain.def}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}% + {\let\loadlocalcfg\@gobble}% + {\def\loadlocalcfg#1{% + \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + \@empty}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Just to be compatible with \LaTeX$\:$2.09 we add a few more lines +% of code: +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined + \def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand} + \long\def\protected@write#1#2#3{% + \begingroup + \let\thepage\relax + #2% + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect + \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}% + \reserved@a + \endgroup + \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally, the default is to use English as the main language. +% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not +% loaded in the format \cs{l@english} might not be defined; assume +% english is language 0} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012-05-17}{Languages are best assigned with +% \cs{chardef}, not \cs{let}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\l@english\@undefined + \chardef\l@english\z@ +\fi +\main@language{english} +%</core> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% Now that we're sure that the code is seen by \LaTeX\ only, we +% have to find out what the main (primary) document style is +% because we want to redefine some macros. This is only necessary +% for releases of \LaTeX\ dated before December~1991. Therefor +% this part of the code can optionally be included in +% \file{babel.def} by specifying the \texttt{docstrip} option +% \texttt{names}. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*names> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The standard styles can be distinguished by checking whether some +% macros are defined. In table~\ref{styles} an overview is given of +% the macros that can be used for this purpose. +% \begin{table}[htb] +% \begin{center} +% \DeleteShortVerb{\|} +% \begin{tabular}{|lcp{8cm}|} +% \hline +% article & : & both the \verb+\chapter+ and \verb+\opening+ +% macros are undefined\\ +% report and book & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is defined and +% the \verb+\opening+ is undefined\\ +% letter & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is undefined and +% the \verb+\opening+ is defined\\ +% \hline +% \end{tabular} +% \caption{How to determine the main document style}\label{styles} +% \MakeShortVerb{\|} +% \end{center} +% \end{table} +% +% \noindent The macros that have to be redefined for the +% \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles happen to be +% the same, so there is no need to distinguish between those two +% styles. +% +% \begin{macro}{\doc@style} +% First a parameter |\doc@style| is defined to identify the current +% document style. This parameter might have been defined by a +% document style that already uses macros instead of hard-wired +% texts, such as \file{artikel1.sty}~\cite{BEP}, so the existence of +% |\doc@style| is checked. If this macro is undefined, i.\,e., if +% the document style is unknown and could therefore contain +% hard-wired texts, |\doc@style| is defined to the default +% value~`0'. +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@undefined\doc@style + \def\doc@style{0}% +% \end{macrocode} +% This parameter is defined in the following \texttt{if} +% construction (see table~\ref{styles}): +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\@undefined\opening + \ifx\@undefined\chapter + \def\doc@style{1}% + \else + \def\doc@style{2}% + \fi + \else + \def\doc@style{3}% + \fi% +\fi% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed definition of +% \cs{if@restonecol}} +% +% \subsubsection{Redefinition of macros} +% +% Now here comes the real work: we start to redefine things and +% replace hard-wired texts by macros. These redefinitions should be +% carried out conditionally, in case it has already been done. +% +% For the \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} environments we have +% in all styles: +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{figurename}{\def\fnum@figure{\figurename{} \thefigure}}{} +\@ifundefined{tablename}{\def\fnum@table{\tablename{} \thetable}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The rest of the macros have to be treated differently for each +% style. When |\doc@style| still has its default value nothing +% needs to be done. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase \doc@style\relax +\or +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This means that \file{babel.def} is read after the +% \texttt{article} style, where no |\chapter| and |\opening| +% commands are defined\footnote{A fact that was pointed out to me +% by Nico Poppelier and was already used in Piet van Oostrum's +% document style option~\texttt{nl}.}. +% +% First we have the |\tableofcontents|, +% |\listoffigures| and |\listoftables|: +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{contentsname}% + {\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}% + \@starttoc{toc}}}{} +\@ifundefined{listfigurename}% + {\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}% + \@starttoc{lof}}}{} +\@ifundefined{listtablename}% + {\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}% + \@starttoc{lot}}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Then the |\thebibliography| and |\theindex| environments. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{refname}% + {\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname + \@mkboth{\uppercase{\refname}}{\uppercase{\refname}}}% + \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep + \usecounter{enumi}}% + \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}% + \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{} +\@ifundefined{indexname}% + {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]% + \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@\let\item\@idxitem}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The |abstract| environment: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{abstractname}% + {\def\abstract{\if@twocolumn + \section*{\abstractname}% + \else \small + \begin{center}% + {\bf \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}% + \end{center}% + \quotation + \fi}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% And last but not least, the macro |\part|: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{partname}% +{\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \refstepcounter{part}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart + \hspace{1em}#1}\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi + {\parindent\z@ \raggedright + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \Large \bf \partname{} \thepart + \par \nobreak + \fi + \huge \bf + #2\markboth{}{}\par}% + \nobreak + \vskip 3ex\@afterheading}% +}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This is all that needs to be done for the \texttt{article} style. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\or +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The next case is formed by the two styles \texttt{book} and +% \texttt{report}. Basically we have to do the same as for the +% \texttt{article} style, except now we must also change the +% |\chapter| command. +% +% The tables of contents, figures and tables: +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{contentsname}% + {\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}% + \@starttoc{toc}% + \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn + \csname fi\endcsname}}{} +\@ifundefined{listfigurename}% + {\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}% + \@starttoc{lof}% + \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn + \csname fi\endcsname}}{} +\@ifundefined{listtablename}% + {\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \fi\chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth + {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}% + \@starttoc{lot}% + \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn + \csname fi\endcsname}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Again, the |bibliography| and |index| environments; notice that +% in this case we use |\bibname| instead of |\refname| as in the +% definitions for the \texttt{article} style. The reason for this +% is that in the \texttt{article} document style the term +% `References' is used in the definition of |\thebibliography|. In +% the \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles the term +% `Bibliography' is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{bibname}% + {\def\thebibliography#1{\chapter*{\bibname + \@mkboth{\uppercase{\bibname}}{\uppercase{\bibname}}}% + \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep + \usecounter{enumi}}% + \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}% + \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{} +\@ifundefined{indexname}% + {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]% + \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@ \let\item\@idxitem}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here is the |abstract| environment: +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{abstractname}% + {\def\abstract{\titlepage + \null\vfil + \begin{center}% + {\bf \abstractname}% + \end{center}}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% And last but not least the |\chapter|, |\appendix| and +% |\part| macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chaptername}{\def\@chapapp{\chaptername}}{} +% +\@ifundefined{appendixname}% + {\def\appendix{\par + \setcounter{chapter}{0}% + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \def\@chapapp{\appendixname}% + \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}}}{} +% +\@ifundefined{partname}% + {\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax + \refstepcounter{part}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart + \hspace{1em}#1}\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi + \markboth{}{}% + {\centering + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax + \huge\bf \partname{} \thepart + \par + \vskip 20pt \fi + \Huge \bf + #1\par}\@endpart}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\or +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Now we address the case where \file{babel.def} is read after the +% \texttt{letter} style. The \texttt{letter} document style +% defines the macro |\opening| and some other macros that are +% specific to \texttt{letter}. This means that we have to redefine +% other macros, compared to the previous two cases. +% +% First two macros for the material at the end of a letter, the +% |\cc| and |\encl| macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ccname}% + {\def\cc#1{\par\noindent + \parbox[t]{\textwidth}% + {\@hangfrom{\rm \ccname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{} +\@ifundefined{enclname}% + {\def\encl#1{\par\noindent + \parbox[t]{\textwidth}% + {\@hangfrom{\rm \enclname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The last thing we have to do here is to redefine the +% \texttt{headings} pagestyle: +% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be +% \cs{pagename}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{headtoname}% + {\def\ps@headings{% + \def\@oddhead{\sl \headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname \hfil + \@date \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}% + \def\@oddfoot{}}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This was the last of the four standard document styles, so if +% |\doc@style| has another value we do nothing and just close the +% \texttt{if} construction. +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi +%</names> +% \end{macrocode} +% Here ends the code that can be optionally included when a version +% of \LaTeX\ is in use that is dated \emph{before} December~1991. +% +% +% We also need to redefine a number of commands to ensure that the +% right font encoding is used, but this can't be done before +% \file{babel.def} is loaded. +% \changes{babel~3.6o}{1999/04/07}{Moved the rest of the font encoding +% related definitions to their original place} +% +% \subsection{Multiple languages} +% +% \begin{macro}{\language} +% Plain \TeX\ version~3.0 provides the primitive |\language| that +% is used to store the current language. When used with a pre-3.0 +% version this function has to be implemented by allocating a +% counter. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel|patterns> +\ifx\language\@undefined + \csname newcount\endcsname\language +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\last@language} +% Another counter is used to store the last language defined. For +% pre-3.0 formats an extra counter has to be allocated. +% +% \begin{macro}{\addlanguage} +% +% To add languages to \TeX's memory plain \TeX\ version~3.0 +% supplies |\newlanguage|, in a pre-3.0 environment a similar macro +% has to be provided. For both cases a new macro is defined here, +% because the original |\newlanguage| was defined to be |\outer|. +% +% For a format based on plain version~2.x, the definition of +% |\newlanguage| can not be copied because |\count 19| is used for +% other purposes in these formats. Therefor |\addlanguage| is +% defined using a definition based on the macros used to define +% |\newlanguage| in plain \TeX\ version~3.0. +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added a \texttt{\%}, removed +% \texttt{by}} +% +% For formats based on plain version~3.0 the definition of +% |\newlanguage| can be simply copied, removing |\outer|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined + \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language + \def\addlanguage#1{% + \global\advance\last@language\@ne + \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi + \else + \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}% + \fi + \global\chardef#1\last@language + \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}} +% \end{macrocode} +% plain \TeX\ version 3.0 uses |\count 19| for this purpose. +% \begin{macrocode} +\else + \countdef\last@language=19 + \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi} +\fi +%</kernel|patterns> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\adddialect} +% The macro |\adddialect| can be used to add the name of a dialect +% or variant language, for which an already defined hyphenation +% table can be used. +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{relax}} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kernel> +\def\adddialect#1#2{% + \global\chardef#1#2\relax + \bbl@usehooks{adddialect}{{#1}{#2}}% + \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/23}{New macro to normalize +% a macro (eg, \cs{languagename}) to lowercase if necessary} +% +% |\bbl@iflanguage| executes code only of the language +% exists. Otherwise raises and error. +% +% The argument of |\bbl@fixname| has to be a macro name, as it may get +% ``fixed'' if casing (lc/uc) is wrong. It's intented to fix a +% long-standing bug when |\foreignlanguage| and the like appear in +% a |\MakeXXXcase|. However, a lowercase form is not imposed to +% improve backward compatibility (perhaps you defined a language +% named |MYLANG|, but unfortunately mixed case names cannot be +% trapped). +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@fixname#1{% + \begingroup + \def\bbl@tempe{l@}% + \edef\bbl@tempd{\noexpand\@ifundefined{\noexpand\bbl@tempe#1}}% + \bbl@tempd + {\lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}% + {\uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}% + \@empty + {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}% + {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}% + \@empty + \edef\bbl@tempd{\endgroup\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \bbl@tempd} +\def\bbl@iflanguage#1{% + \@ifundefined{l@#1}{\@nolanerr{#1}\@gobble}\@firstofone} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\iflanguage} +% Users might want to test (in a private package for instance) +% which language is currently active. For this we provide a test +% macro, |\iflanguage|, that has three arguments. It checks +% whether the first argument is a known language. If so, it +% compares the first argument with the value of |\language|. Then, +% depending on the result of the comparison, it executes either the +% second or the third argument. +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Rephrased \cs{ifnum} test} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/10}{Now evaluate the \cs{ifnum} test +% \emph{after} the \cs{fi} from the \cs{ifx} test and use +% \cs{@firstoftwo} and \cs{@secondoftwo}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\iflanguage#1{% + \bbl@iflanguage{#1}{% + \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage} +% The macro |\selectlanguage| checks whether the language is +% already defined before it performs its actual task, which is to +% update |\language| and activate language-specific definitions. +% +% To allow the call of |\selectlanguage| either with a control +% sequence name or with a simple string as argument, we have to use +% a trick to delete the optional escape character. +% +% To convert a control sequence to a string, we use the |\string| +% primitive. Next we have to look at the first character of this +% string and compare it with the escape character. Because this +% escape character can be changed by setting the internal integer +% |\escapechar| to a character number, we have to compare this +% number with the character of the string. To do this we have to +% use \TeX's backquote notation to specify the character as a +% number. +% +% If the first character of the |\string|'ed argument is the +% current escape character, the comparison has stripped this +% character and the rest in the `then' part consists of the rest of +% the control sequence name. Otherwise we know that either the +% argument is not a control sequence or |\escapechar| is set to a +% value outside of the character range~$0$--$255$. +% +% If the user gives an empty argument, we provide a default +% argument for |\string|. This argument should expand to nothing. +% +% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/06/06}{Made \cs{selectlanguage} +% robust} +% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Modified to allow arguments that +% start with an escape character} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Simplified the modification to +% allow the use in a \cs{write} command} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Store the name of the current +% language in a control sequence instead of passing the whole macro +% construct to strip the escape character in the argument of +% \cs{selectlanguage }.} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Moved check for escape character +% one level down in the expansion} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/16}{\cs{bbl@select@type} keep tracks of +% the selection method: 0 is select, 1 is foreign} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@select@type\z@ +\edef\selectlanguage{% + \noexpand\protect + \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% Because the command |\selectlanguage| could be used in a moving +% argument it expands to \verb*=\protect\selectlanguage =. +% Therefor, we have to make sure that a macro |\protect| exists. +% If it doesn't it is |\let| to |\relax|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% As \LaTeX$\:$2.09 writes to files \textit{expanded} whereas +% \LaTeXe\ takes care \textit{not} to expand the arguments of +% |\write| statements we need to be a bit clever about the way we +% add information to \file{.aux} files. Therefor we introduce the +% macro |\xstring| which should expand to the right amount of +% |\string|'s. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\documentclass\@undefined + \def\xstring{\string\string\string} +\else + \let\xstring\string +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/04}{Changed the name of the internal +% macro to \cs{selectlanguage }.} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/05}{Added an extra level of expansion to +% separate the switching mechanism from writing to aux files} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Use \cs{aftergroup} to keep the +% language grouping correct in auxiliary files {PR3091}} +% Since version 3.5 \babel\ writes entries to the auxiliary files in +% order to typeset table of contents etc. in the correct language +% environment. +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language} +% \emph{But} when the language change happens \emph{inside} a group +% the end of the group doesn't write anything to the auxiliary +% files. Therefor we need \TeX's |aftergroup| mechanism to help +% us. The command |\aftergroup| stores the token immediately +% following it to be executed when the current group is closed. So +% we define a temporary control sequence |\bbl@pop@language| to be +% executed at the end of the group. It calls |\bbl@set@language| +% with the name of the current language as its argument. +% +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Introduce the language stack +% mechanism} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@language@stack} +% The previous solution works for one level of nesting groups, but +% as soon as more levels are used it is no longer adequate. For +% that case we need to keep track of the nested languages using a +% stack mechanism. This stack is called |\bbl@language@stack| and +% initially empty. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@language@stack{} +% \end{macrocode} +% When using a stack we need a mechanism to push an element on the +% stack and to retrieve the information afterwards. +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@push@language} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language} +% The stack is simply a list of languagenames, separated with a `+' +% sign; the push function can be simple: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@push@language{% + \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Retrieving information from the stack is a little bit less simple, +% as we need to remove the element from the stack while storing it +% in the macro |\languagename|. For this we first define a helper function. +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@lang} +% This macro stores its first element (which is delimited by the +% `+'-sign) in |\languagename| and stores the rest of the string +% (delimited by `-') in its third argument. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{% + \edef\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% The reason for the somewhat weird arrangement of arguments to the +% helper function is the fact it is called in the following way. +% This means that before |\bbl@pop@lang| is executed \TeX\ first +% \emph{expands} the stack, stored in |\bbl@language@stack|. The +% result of that is that the argument string of |\bbl@pop@lang| +% contains one or more language names, each followed by a `+'-sign +% (zero language names won't occur as this macro will only be +% called after something has been pushed on the stack) followed by +% the `-'-sign and finally the reference to the stack. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@pop@language{% + \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack + \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}} +% \end{macrocode} +% Once the name of the previous language is retrieved from the stack, +% it is fed to |\bbl@set@language| to do the actual work of +% switching everything that needs switching. +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Now use the language stack mechanism} +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% + \bbl@push@language + \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language + \bbl@set@language{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/12}{Removed the superfluous empty +% definition of \cs{bbl@pop@language}} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@set@language} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Macro \cs{bbl@set@language} +% introduced} +% +% The macro |\bbl@set@language| takes care of switching the +% language environment \emph{and} of writing entries on the +% auxiliary files. For historial reasons, language names can be +% either |language| of |\language|. To catch either form a trick is +% used, but unfortunately as a side effect the catcodes of letters +% in |\languagename| are not well defined. The list of auxiliary +% files can be extended by redefining |\BabelContentsFiles|, but +% make sure they are loaded inside a group (as |aux|, |toc|, +% |lof|, and |lot| do) or the last language of the document will +% remain active afterwards. +% +% We also write a command to change the current language in the +% auxiliary files. +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Write the language change to the +% auxiliary files} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/09}{Added hook} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/07}{Use a loop for contents files, with +% the help of \cs{BabelContentsFiles}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/03/08}{Don't write to aux if language is +% unknown} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\BabelContentsFiles{toc,lof,lot}% +\def\bbl@set@language#1{% + \edef\languagename{% + \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty + \else\string#1\@empty\fi}% + \select@language{\languagename}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax\else + \if@filesw + \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\BabelContentsFiles{% + \addtocontents{\bbl@tempa}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}}% + \bbl@usehooks{write}{}% + \fi + \fi} +\def\select@language#1{% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax + \bbl@error + {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet}% + {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}% + \else + \let\bbl@select@type\z@ + \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}% + \fi}} +% A bit of optmization: +\def\select@language@x#1{% + \ifcase\bbl@select@type + \bbl@ifsamestring\languagename{#1}{}{\select@language{#1}}% + \else + \select@language{#1}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% First, check if the user asks for a known language. If so, +% update the value of |\language| and call |\originalTeX| +% to bring \TeX\ in a certain pre-defined state. +% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and +% \cs{@esphack}} +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous +% \cs{expandafter}} +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of +% \cs{@ifundefined}} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added \cs{relax} as first command +% to stop an expansion if \cs{protect} is empty} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/07}{Check for the existence of +% \cs{date...} instead of \cs{l@...}} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Check for the existence of both +% \cs{l@...} and \cs{date...}} +% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/27}{Moved \cs{bbl@patterns} to the +% correct place, after setting the extras for the current +% language} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/01}{Created \cs{bbl@swith} with code +% shared by \cs{select@language} and \cs{foreing@language}} +% \begin{macrocode} +% \end{macrocode} +% The name of the language is stored in the control sequence +% |\languagename|. +% +% Then we have to \emph{re}define |\originalTeX| to compensate for +% the things that have been activated. To save memory space for +% the macro definition of |\originalTeX|, we construct the control +% sequence name for the |\noextras|\langvar\ command at definition +% time by expanding the |\csname| primitive. +% +% Now activate the language-specific definitions. This is done by +% constructing the names of three macros by concatenating three +% words with the argument of |\selectlanguage|, and calling these +% macros. \nb{What if \cs{hyphenation} was used in |extras|? Patch +% temply set@hyphenmins and hyphenation. It can be done in hooks if +% necessary.} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Separated the setting of the +% hyphenmin values}% +% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/08}{Removed an extra empty line} +% +% The switching of the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and +% |\righthyphenmin| is somewhat different. First we save their +% current values, then we check if |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is +% defined. If it is not, we set default values (2 and 3), otherwise +% the values in |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| will be used. +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/05}{Addedd default setting of hyphenmin +% parameters} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/01}{Adddd \cs{bbl@iflanguagename} and +% \cs{select@language@x}, which is no-op if the language is the same} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/23}{\cs{select@language} sets +% \textsc{languagename} so that it has the correct value in the aux +% file (eg, shorthand expansion was wrong)} +% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/06/06}{Replaced \cs{gdef} with \cs{def}} +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{\cs{originalTeX} should only be +% executed once} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added three \cs{expandafter}s +% to save macro space for \cs{originalTeX}} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Moved definition of +% \cs{originalTeX} before \cs{extras\langvar}} +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to +% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.} +% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to +% `none' before switching on the extras} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/14}{Make sure the save counter is reset +% even in \cs{originalTeX} is used in other contexts} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@switch#1{% + \originalTeX + \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX\expandafter{% + \csname noextras#1\endcsname + \let\originalTeX\@empty + \babel@beginsave}% + \languageshorthands{none}% + \ifcase\bbl@select@type + \csname captions#1\endcsname + \csname date#1\endcsname + \fi + \bbl@usehooks{beforeextras}{}% + \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax + \bbl@usehooks{afterextras}{}% + \bbl@patterns{#1}% + \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin + \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax + \else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins + \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@ifsamestring#1#2{% + \protected@edef\bbl@tempb{#1}% + \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% + \protected@edef\bbl@tempc{#2}% + \edef\bbl@tempc{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempc}% + \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage} +% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment can be used as an +% alternative to using the |\selectlanguage| declarative +% command. When you are typesetting a document which mixes +% left-to-right and right-to-left typesetting you have to use this +% environment in order to let things work as you expect them to. +% +% The first thing this environment does is store the name of the +% language in |\languagename|; it then calls +% \verb*=\selectlanguage = to switch on everything that is needed for +% this language The |\ignorespaces| command is necessary to hide +% the environment when it is entered in horizontal mode. +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{environment added} +% \changes{babel~3.5e}{1995/07/07}{changed name} +% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{rely on \cs{selectlanguage } to +% keep track of the nesting} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/31}{Removed \cs{originalTeX}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\otherlanguage#1{% + \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}% + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% The |\endotherlanguage| part of the environment tries to hide +% itself when it is called in horizontal mode. +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\endotherlanguage{% + \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage*} +% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment is meant to be used when a +% large part of text from a different language needs to be typeset, +% but without changing the translation of words such as `figure'. +% This environment makes use of |\foreign@language|. +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/29}{environment added} +% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{% + \foreign@language{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% At the end of the environment we need to switch off the extra +% definitions. The grouping mechanism of the environment will take +% care of resetting the correct hyphenation rules and ``extras''. +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\let\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% \begin{macro}{\foreignlanguage} +% The |\foreignlanguage| command is another substitute for the +% |\selectlanguage| command. This command takes two arguments, the +% first argument is the name of the language to use for typesetting +% the text specified in the second argument. +% +% Unlike |\selectlanguage| this command doesn't switch +% \emph{everything}, it only switches the hyphenation rules and the +% extra definitions for the language specified. It does this within +% a group and assumes the |\extras|\langvar\ command doesn't make +% any |\global| changes. The coding is very similar to part of +% |\selectlanguage|. +% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Macro added} +% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Added executing \cs{originalTeX}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{Removed unnecesary \cs{noextras} +% just before closing the group} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/31}{Moved \cs{originalTeX} to +% \cs{foreing@language} so that it's also used in +% \texttt{otherlanguage*}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/24}{\cs{foreignlanguage} defined +% similarly to \cs{selectlanguage}, protecting the whole macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\foreignlanguage{% + \noexpand\protect + \expandafter\noexpand\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname} +\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{% + \begingroup + \foreign@language{#1}% + #2% + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\foreign@language} +% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{New macro} This macro does the +% work for |\foreignlanguage| and the \Lenv{otherlanguage*} +% environment. First we need to store the name of the language and +% check that it is a known language. Then it just calls +% |bbl@switch|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\foreign@language#1{% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax + \bbl@warning + {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet\\% + I'll proceed, but expect unexpected results.\\% + Reported}% + \fi + \let\bbl@select@type\@ne + \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@patterns} +% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Macro added} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/28}{Extended to set hyphenation +% exceptions as defined with \cs{babelhyphenation}} +% This macro selects the hyphenation patterns by changing the +% \cs{language} register. If special hyphenation patterns +% are available specifically for the current font encoding, +% use them instead of the default. +% +% It also sets hyphenation exceptions, but only once, because they +% are global (here language |\lccode|'s has been set, +% too). |\bbl@hyphenation@| is set to relax until the very first +% |\babelhyphenation|, so do nothing with this value. If the +% exceptions for a language (by its number, not its name, so that +% |:ENC| is taken into account) has been set, then use +% |\hyphenation| with both global and language exceptions and empty +% the latter to mark they must not be set again. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@hyphlist\@empty +\let\bbl@hyphenation@\relax +\def\bbl@patterns#1{% + \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax + \csname l@#1\endcsname + \edef\bbl@tempa{#1}% + \else + \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname + \edef\bbl@tempa{#1:\f@encoding}% + \fi\relax + \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{patterns}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@}{}{% + \begingroup + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\number\language,}{,\bbl@hyphlist}% + \ifin@\else + \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{hyphenation}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}% + \hyphenation{% + \bbl@hyphenation@ + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@#1}% + \@empty + {\space\csname bbl@hyphenation@#1\endcsname}}% + \xdef\bbl@hyphlist{\bbl@hyphlist\number\language,}% + \fi + \endgroup}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{environment}{hyphenrules} +% \changes{babel~3.7e}{2000/01/28}{Added environment hyphenrules} +% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select +% \emph{just} the hyphenation rules. This environment does +% \emph{not} change |\languagename| and when the hyphenation rules +% specified were not loaded it has no effect. Note however, +% |\lccode|'s and font encodings are not set at all, so in most +% cases you should use |otherlanguage*|. +% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Also set the hyphenmin parameters to +% the correct value (PR3997)} +% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyphenrules#1{% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\bbl@patterns\expandafter{\languagename}% + \languageshorthands{none}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax + \else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins + \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \fi}} +\let\endhyphenrules\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% \begin{macro}{\providehyphenmins} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{added macro} +% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language +% definition files to provide a \emph{default} setting for the +% hyphenation parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. If +% the macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is already defined this command +% has no effect. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\set@hyphenmins} +% This macro sets the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and +% |\righthyphenmin|. It expects two values as its argument. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\relax\righthyphenmin#2\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\LdfInit} +% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added} +% This macro is defined in two versions. The first version is to be +% part of the `kernel' of \babel, ie. the part that is loaded in +% the format; the second version is defined in \file{babel.def}. +% The version in the format just checks the category code of the +% ampersand and then loads \file{babel.def}. +% +% The category code of the ampersand is restored and the macro +% calls itself again with the new definition from +% \file{babel.def} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\LdfInit{% + \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ + \catcode`\@=11\relax + \input babel.def\relax + \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax + \LdfInit} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\originalTeX} +% The macro|\originalTeX| should be known to \TeX\ at this moment. +% As it has to be expandable we |\let| it to |\@empty| instead of +% |\relax|. +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to +% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Because this part of the code can be included in a format, we +% make sure that the macro which initialises the save mechanism, +% |\babel@beginsave|, is not considered to be undefined. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@nolanerr} +% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{PackageError} in \LaTeXe\ +% mode} +% \begin{macro}{\@nopatterns} +% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Macro added} +% The \babel\ package will signal an error when a documents tries +% to select a language that hasn't been defined earlier. When a +% user selects a language for which no hyphenation patterns were +% loaded into the format he will be given a warning about that +% fact. We revert to the patterns for |\language|=0 in that case. +% In most formats that will be (US)english, but it might also be +% empty. +% \begin{macro}{\@noopterr} +% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Macro added} +% When the package was loaded without options not everything will +% work as expected. An error message is issued in that case. +% +% When the format knows about |\PackageError| it must be \LaTeXe, +% so we can safely use its error handling interface. Otherwise +% we'll have to `keep it simple'. +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Added a percent sign to remove +% unwanted white space} +% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/15}{Added \cs{@activated} to log active +% characters} +% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/19}{Added missing closing brace} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{\cs{newcommand}s replaced by +% \cs{def}'s, so that the file can be loaded twice} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/26}{Define generic variants instead of +% duplicating each predefined message} +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\bbl@nulllanguage{\string\language=0} +\ifx\PackageError\@undefined + \def\bbl@error#1#2{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J(babel) }% + \errhelp{#2}\errmessage{\\#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@warning#1{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J(babel) }% + \message{\\#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@info#1{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J}% + \wlog{#1}% + \endgroup} +\else + \def\bbl@error#1#2{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageError{babel}{#1}{#2}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@warning#1{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageWarning{babel}{#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@info#1{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageInfo{babel}{#1}% + \endgroup} +\fi +\def\@nolanerr#1{% + \bbl@error + {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}% + {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} +\def\@nopatterns#1{% + \bbl@warning + {No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for\\% + the language `#1' into the format.\\% + Please, configure your TeX system to add them and\\% + rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns\\% + preloaded for \bbl@nulllanguage\space instead}} +\let\bbl@usehooks\@gobbletwo +%</kernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% The following code is meant to be read by ini\TeX\ because it +% should instruct \TeX\ to read hyphenation patterns. To this end +% the \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{patterns} can be used to +% include this code in the file \file{hyphen.cfg}. Code is at lower +% level than the rest. +% +% |toks8| stores info to be shown when the program is run. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*patterns> +\toks8{Babel <3.9e> and hyphenation patterns for }% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Removed the use of +% \cs{patterns@loaded} altogether} +% +% \begin{macro}{\process@line} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro} +% Each line in the file \file{language.dat} is processed by +% |\process@line| after it is read. The first thing this macro does +% is to check whether the line starts with \texttt{=}. +% When the first token of a line is an \texttt{=}, the macro +% |\process@synonym| is called; otherwise the macro +% |\process@language| will continue. +% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Simplified code, removing +% \cs{bbl@eq@}} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/12}{Use spaces as delimiters, to avoid +% extra spaces. Once parsed, pass them in the traditional way} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\process@line#1#2 #3 #4 {% + \ifx=#1% + \process@synonym{#2}% + \else + \process@language{#1#2}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\process@synonym} +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Use a token register to temporarily +% store a command to set hyphenmin parameters for the synonym which +% is defined \emph{before} the first pattern file is processed} +% +% This macro takes care of the lines which start with an +% \texttt{=}. It needs an empty token register to begin with. +% |\bbl@languages| is also set to empty. +% \begin{macrocode} +\toks@{} +\def\bbl@languages{} +% \end{macrocode} +% When no languages have been loaded yet, the name following the +% \texttt{=} will be a synonym for hyphenation register 0. So, it is stored +% in a token register and executed when the first pattern file has +% been processed. (The |\relax| just helps to the |\if| below +% catching synonyms without a language.) +% +% Otherwise the name will be a synonym for the language loaded last. +% +% We also need to copy the hyphenmin parameters for the synonym. +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Now also store hyphenmin parameters +% for language synonyms} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/25}{Added \cs{bbl@languages}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\process@synonym#1{% + \ifnum\last@language=\m@ne + \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\relax\process@synonym{#1}}% + \else + \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language + \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}% + \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname + \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname + \let\bbl@elt\relax + \edef\bbl@languages{\bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\last@language}{}{}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\process@language} +% The macro |\process@language| is used to process a non-empty line +% from the `configuration file'. It has three arguments, each +% delimited by white space. The first argument is the `name' of a +% language; the second is the name of the file that contains the +% patterns. The optional third argument is the name of a file +% containing hyphenation exceptions. +% +% The first thing to do is call |\addlanguage| to allocate a +% pattern register and to make that register `active'. +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous +% \cs{expandafter}} +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/21}{Reinserted \cs{expandafter}} +% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/27}{Added the collection of pattern +% names.} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Also store \cs{languagename} for +% possible later use in \cs{process@synonym}} +% Then the `name' of the language that will be loaded now is +% added to the token register |\toks8|. and finally +% the pattern file is read. +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Allow for the encoding to be used +% as part of the language name} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/10}{Removed \cs{selectfont} (I presume +% it was intended to catch wrong encoding codes, but I don't think +% this is necessary and as a side effect it might preload fonts)} +% +% For some hyphenation patterns it is needed to load them with a +% specific font encoding selected. This can be specified in the +% file \file{language.dat} by adding for instance `\texttt{:T1}' to +% the name of the language. The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the +% font encoding from the language name and stores it in +% |\bbl@hyph@enc|. The latter can be used in hyphenation files if +% you need to set a behaviour depending on the given encoding (it +% is set to empty if no encoding is given). +% +% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Added code to detect assignments to +% left- and righthyphenmin in the patternfile.} +% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Read pattern files in a group} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/05}{need to set hyphenmin values +% globally} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Set \cs{lefthyphenmin} to \cs{m@ne} +% \emph{inside} the group; explicitly set the hyphenmin parameters +% for language 0} +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/25}{Only set hyphenmin values when the +% pattern file changed them} +% Pattern files may contain assignments to |\lefthyphenmin| and +% |\righthyphenmin|. \TeX\ does not keep track of these +% assignments. Therefor we try to detect such assignments and +% store them in the |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| macro. When no +% assignments were made we provide a default setting. +% +% Some pattern files contain changes to the |\lccode| en |\uccode| +% arrays. Such changes should remain local to the language; +% therefor we process the pattern file in a group; the |\patterns| +% command acts globally so its effect will be remembered. +% +% Then we globally store the settings of |\lefthyphenmin| and +% |\righthyphenmin| and close the group. +% +% When the hyphenation patterns have been processed we need to see +% if a file with hyphenation exceptions needs to be read. This is +% the case when the third argument is not empty and when it does +% not contain a space token. (Note however there is no need to save +% hyphenation exceptions into the format.) +% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Added optional reading of file with +% hyphenation exceptions} +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/25}{Use \cs{empty} instead of +% \cs{@empty} as the latter is unknown in plain} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/25}{Added \cs{bbl@languages}} +% \cs{bbl@languages} saves a snapshot of the loaded languagues in the +% form \cs{bbl@elt}\marg{language-name}\marg{number}% +% \marg{patterns-file}\marg{exceptions-file}. Note the last 2 +% arguments are empty in `dialects' defined in |language.dat| with +% |=|. Note also the language name can have encoding info. +% +% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Added the execution of the contents +% of \cs{toks@}} +% Finally, if the counter |\language| is equal to zero we execute the +% synonyms stored. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\process@language#1#2#3{% + \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname + \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@hook@everylanguage{#1}% + \bbl@get@enc#1::\@@@ + \begingroup + \lefthyphenmin\m@ne + \bbl@hook@loadpatterns{#2}% + \ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne + \else + \expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{% + \the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}% + \fi + \endgroup + \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else + \bbl@hook@loadexceptions{#3}% + \fi + \let\bbl@elt\relax + \edef\bbl@languages{% + \bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\language}{#2}{\bbl@tempa}}% + \ifnum\the\language=\z@ + \the\toks@ + \toks@{}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@get@enc} +% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Added macro} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/11}{Code much simplified} +% \begin{macro}{\bbl@hyph@enc} +% The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the font encoding from the +% language name and stores it in |\bbl@hyph@enc|. It uses delimited +% arguments to achieve this. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2:#3\@@@{\def\bbl@hyph@enc{#2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Now, hooks are defined. For efficiency reasons, they are dealt +% here in a special way. Besides \luatex, format specific +% configuration files are taken into account. +% \changes{babel~3.9b}{2013/03/25}{Fixed an idiot slip: \cs{def} +% intead of \cs{let}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bbl@hook@everylanguage#1{} +\def\bbl@hook@loadpatterns#1{\input #1\relax} +\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\bbl@hook@loadpatterns +\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\bbl@hook@loadpatterns +\begingroup + \def\AddBabelHook#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname\relax + \def\next{\toks1}% + \else + \def\next{\expandafter\gdef\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname####1}% + \fi + \next} + \ifx\directlua\@undefined + \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else + \input xebabel.def + \fi + \else + \input luababel.def + \fi + \openin1 = babel-\bbl@format.cfg + \ifeof1 + \else + \input babel-\bbl@format.cfg\relax + \fi + \closein1 +\endgroup +\bbl@hook@loadkernel{switch.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\readconfigfile} +% The configuration file can now be opened for reading. +% \begin{macrocode} +\openin1 = language.dat +% \end{macrocode} +% +% See if the file exists, if not, use the default hyphenation file +% \file{hyphen.tex}. The user will be informed about this. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\languagename{english}% +\ifeof1 + \message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space + I will try the file hyphen.tex} + \input hyphen.tex\relax + \chardef\l@english\z@ +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Pattern registers are allocated using count register +% |\last@language|. Its initial value is~0. The definition of the +% macro |\newlanguage| is such that it first increments the count +% register and then defines the language. In order to have the +% first patterns loaded in pattern register number~0 we initialize +% |\last@language| with the value~$-1$. +% +% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/05/21}{Removed use of \cs{toks0}} +% \begin{macrocode} + \last@language\m@ne +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We now read lines from the file until the end is found +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \loop +% \end{macrocode} +% +% While reading from the input, it is useful to switch off +% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping +% off spaces from the contents of the control sequence. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \endlinechar\m@ne + \read1 to \bbl@line + \endlinechar`\^^M +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/14}{Test simplified and moved} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/12}{Use only spaces as delimiters and +% not /, as previouly done} +% +% If the file has reached its end, exit from the loop here. If not, +% empty lines are skipped. Add 3 space characters to the end of +% |\bbl@line|. This is needed to be able to recognize the arguments +% of |\process@line| later on. The default language should be the +% very first one. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \if T\ifeof1F\fi T\relax + \ifx\bbl@line\@empty\else + \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space\space\space}% + \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line\relax + \fi + \repeat +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Check for the end of the file. We must reverse the test for +% |\ifeof| without |\else|. Then reactivate the default patterns, +% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Also restore the name of the +% language in \cs{languagename} (PR 4039)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \begingroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{% + \global\language=#2\relax + \gdef\languagename{#1}% + \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}}% + \bbl@languages + \endgroup +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% and close the configuration file. +% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Free macro space for +% \cs{process@language}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\closein1 +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/08}{Moved the fiddling with \cs{dump} +% to \file{bbplain.dtx} as it is no longer needed for \LaTeX} +% We add a message about the fact that babel is loaded in the +% format and with which language patterns to the \cs{everyjob} +% register. +% \changes{babel~3.6h}{1997/01/23}{Added a couple of \cs{expandafter}s +% to copy the contents of \cs{toks8} into \cs{everyjob} instead of +% the reference} +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/25}{The list of languages is not +% printed every job any more (it is saved in \cs{bbl@languages}).} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if/\the\toks@/\else + \errhelp{language.dat loads no language, only synonyms} + \errmessage{Orphan language synonym} +\fi +\ifx\addto@hook\@undefined +\else + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\typeout{\the\toks8 \the\last@language\space languages + loaded.}}% + \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{\bbl@tempa} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Also remove some macros from memory and raise an error +% if |\toks@| is not empty. Finally load \file{switch.def}, but the +% letter is not required and the line inputting it may be commented out. +% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/11}{Raise error if there are synonyms +% without languages} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bbl@line\@undefined +\let\process@line\@undefined +\let\process@synonym\@undefined +\let\process@language\@undefined +\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined +\let\bbl@hyph@enc\@undefined +\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@everylanguage\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadpatterns\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\@undefined +%</patterns> +% \end{macrocode} +% Here the code for ini\TeX\ ends. +% \end{macro} +% +% \section{The `nil' language} +% +% This `language' does nothing, except setting the hyphenation patterns to +% nohyphenation. +% +% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or +% available. +% +% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is +% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the +% \texttt{@} sign, etc. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*nil> +\LdfInit{nil}{datenil} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage| +% command, \texttt{nil} could be an `unknown' language in which +% case we have to make it known. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined + \@nopatterns{nil} + \adddialect\l@nil0 +\else + \let\l@nil\l@nohyphenation +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% This macro is used to store the values of the hyphenation +% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\m@ne\m@ne} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and +% from) the `nil' language. +% \begin{macro}{\captionnil} +% \begin{macro}{\datenil} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\captionsnil\@empty +\let\datenil\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a +% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on +% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of +% \texttt{@} to its original value. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ldf@finish{nil} +%</nil> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/base.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins index ea88bd97fd1..1ddc7d9f07f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/base.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ %% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through %% LaTeX or TeX. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -19,7 +20,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is %% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional @@ -31,6 +32,7 @@ %% %% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 2005-2008 Johannes L. Braams %% %% This file is part of the `babel' system. @@ -40,8 +42,8 @@ %% %% You are not allowed to modify its contents. %% -\def\filedate{2008/03/21} -\def\batchfile{base.ins} +\def\filedate{2013/04/10} +\def\batchfile{babel.ins} \input docstrip.tex {\ifx\generate\undefined @@ -59,29 +61,10 @@ \csname @@end\endcsname \fi} -% The following command will be added to dostrip in the next LaTeX -% release ... -\ifx\askonceonly\undefined - \let\OriginalAsk\Ask - \def\askonceonly{% - \def\Ask##1##2{% - \OriginalAsk{##1}{##2}% - \global\let\Ask\OriginalAsk - \Ask\noprompt{% - By default you will be asked this question for every file.^^J% - If you enter `y' now,^^J% - I will asssume `y' for all future questions^^J% - without prompting.}% - \ifx\y\noprompt\let\noprompt\yes\fi - \ifx\yes\noprompt\gdef\Ask####1####2{\def####1{y}}\fi}} - } -\fi -%% This is the preamble that will be placed on -%% unpacked files - \declarepreamble\mainpreamble This is a generated file. +Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. @@ -98,7 +81,7 @@ version 2003/12/01 or later. This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -116,6 +99,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. \declarepreamble\fdpreamble This is a generated file. +Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. @@ -132,7 +116,7 @@ version 2003/12/01 or later. This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -155,6 +139,7 @@ of this file under its original name. This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. --------------------------------------------------------- +Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved. To produce the documentation in the way you like you are allowed @@ -166,6 +151,7 @@ to change this driver file. This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. --------------------------------------------------------- +Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved. This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program @@ -181,16 +167,23 @@ This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program \usepreamble\mainpreamble \usedir{tex/generic/babel} +\askforoverwritefalse + \generate{\file{babel.sty}{\from{babel.dtx}{package}} \file{babel.def}{\from{babel.dtx}{core}} \file{switch.def}{\from{babel.dtx}{kernel}} - \file{hyphen.cfg}{\from{babel.dtx}{kernel,patterns}} + \file{hyphen.cfg}{\from{babel.dtx}{patterns}} + \file{nil.ldf}{\from{babel.dtx}{nil}} } % Support for plain users \generate{\file{plain.def}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{code}} \file{bplain.tex}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{bplain}} \file{blplain.tex}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{blplain}} } +% Support for Unicode-based engines +\generate{\file{xebabel.def}{\from{bbunicode.dtx}{xetex}} + \file{luababel.def}{\from{bbunicode.dtx}{luatex}} + } % compatibility files @@ -259,15 +252,6 @@ This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program \compatfile{bahasam} } -% driver files - -\usepreamble\drvpreamble - -\usedir{source/generic/babel} - -\generate{\file{babel.drv}{\from{babel.dtx}{driver}} - \file{user.drv}{\from{babel.dtx}{driver,user}}} - % MakeIndex style files \usepreamble\istpreamble diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbcompat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx index 895223cbed6..bf9c637eaeb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbcompat.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ % % This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". % -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. % % The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is % given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbidxglo.dtx index 787b52d01fb..58a43d9adbf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbidxglo.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbidxglo.dtx @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ % % This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". % -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. % % The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is % given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbplain.dtx index dc4516aa865..b454b897fd6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbplain.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbplain.dtx @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % +% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. % Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors % listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. % @@ -16,7 +17,7 @@ % % This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". % -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. % % The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is % given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional @@ -31,16 +32,18 @@ % \iffalse %<*dtx> \ProvidesFile{bbplain.dtx} - [2008/03/21 v1.0r Babel support for plain-based formats] + [2013/04/10 v1.0t Babel support for plain-based formats] %</dtx> % %% File `bbplain.dtx' %% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e %% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 %% by Johannes Braams +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. % -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl % % This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source % code for the extra definitions needed to be able to use babel @@ -66,7 +69,9 @@ % \changes{bbplain-1.0n}{1998/06/08}{Added the source for the format % wrapper files} % -% \section{Not renaming \file{hyphen.tex}} +% \section{Support for Plain \TeX} +% +% \subsection{Not renaming \file{hyphen.tex}} % As Don Knuth has declared that the filename \file{hyphen.tex} may % only be used to designate \emph{his} version of the american % English hyphenation patterns, a new solution has to be found in @@ -154,7 +159,7 @@ % make a copy of blplain.tex, rename it and replace \file{plain.tex} % with the name of your format file. % -% \section{Support for formats based on \textsc{plain}\TeX} +% \subsection{Emulating some \LaTeX{} features} % % The following code duplicates or emulates parts of \LaTeXe\ that % are needed for \babel. @@ -164,45 +169,19 @@ % \changes{bbplain-1.0f}{1996/07/09}{added \cs{@empty}} % \changes{bbplain-1.0h}{1996/10/07}{Only load the necessary parts % into the format, let this file be read agian by babel.def} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*code> -\ifx\adddialect\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{bbplain-1.0h}{2012/12/21}{Use \cs{orig@dump} as flag to +% decide if we are building the format, defined in hyphen.cfg} +% % When |\adddialect| is still undefined we are making a % format. In that case only the first part of this file is needed. % \begin{macrocode} - \def\@empty{} -% \end{macrocode} -% We need to define |\loadlocalcfg| for plain users as the -% \LaTeX\ definition uses |\InputIfFileExists|. -% \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/07/26}{Added definition of -% \cs{loadlocalcfg}} -% \changes{bbplain-1.0d}{1996/01/08}{Also reset category codes after -% loading the configuration file as \cs{AtEndOfPackage} is -% undefined in this case} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\loadlocalcfg#1{% - \openin0#1.cfg - \ifeof0 - \closein0 - \else - \closein0 - {\immediate\write16{*************************************}% - \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}% - \immediate\write16{*}% - } - \input #1.cfg\relax - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% We have to execute \cs{@endofldf} in this case -% \begin{macrocode} - \@endofldf - } +%<*code> +\def\@empty{} +\ifx\orig@dump\@undefined\else % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/11/08}{Moved the \cs{dump} code here from % \file{babel.dtx}} -% % \changes{bbplain-0.1}{1991/10/31}{Added redefinition of \cs{dump} to % add a message to \cs{everyjob}} % We want to add a message to the message \LaTeX$\:$2.09 puts in @@ -220,7 +199,8 @@ % in order to be able to add something to the current contents of % the register. This is necessary because the processing of % hyphenation patterns happens long before \LaTeX\ fills the -% register.\\ +% register. +% % There are some problems with this approach though. % \begin{itemize} % \item When someone wants to use several hyphenation patterns with @@ -234,10 +214,7 @@ % only processed when creating a new format file there is one % command that is sure to be used, |\dump|. Therefore the original % |\dump| is saved in |\org@dump| and a new definition is supplied. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\orig@dump=\dump - \def\dump{% -% \end{macrocode} +% % To make sure that \LaTeX$\:$2.09 executes the % |\@begindocumenthook| we would want to alter |\begin{document}|, % but as this done too often already, we add the new code at the @@ -251,6 +228,7 @@ % \changes{bbplain-1.0j}{1997/01/07}{Add the definition of % \cs{@begindocumenthook} to the \LaTeX2.09 format} % \begin{macrocode} + \def\dump{% \ifx\@ztryfc\@undefined \else \toks0=\expandafter{\@preamblecmds} @@ -276,9 +254,37 @@ % \end{macrocode} % The rest of this file is not processed by ini\TeX\ but during the % normal document run. +% +% We need to define |\loadlocalcfg| for plain users as the +% \LaTeX\ definition uses |\InputIfFileExists|. We have to execute +% \cs{@endofldf} in this case. +% \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/07/26}{Added definition of +% \cs{loadlocalcfg}} +% \changes{bbplain-1.0d}{1996/01/08}{Also reset category codes after +% loading the configuration file as \cs{AtEndOfPackage} is +% undefined in this case} +% \changes{bbplain-1.0s}{2012/12/21}{\cs{loadlocalcfg} not loaded in +% the format} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\loadlocalcfg#1{% + \openin0#1.cfg + \ifeof0 + \closein0 + \else + \closein0 + {\immediate\write16{*************************************}% + \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}% + \immediate\write16{*}% + } + \input #1.cfg\relax + \fi + \@endofldf} +% \end{macrocode} +% % A number of \LaTeX\ macro's that are needed later on. % \changes{bbplain-1.0n}{1998/06/10}{Added \cs{@secondoftwo}} % \changes{bbplain-1.0q}{1999/09/16}{Added \cs{@ifundefined}} +% \changes{bbplain-1.0t}{2013/04/10}{Added \cs{@expandtwoargs}} % \begin{macrocode} \long\def\@firstofone#1{#1} \long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1} @@ -299,12 +305,15 @@ \toks@\expandafter{#1#2}% \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}} \def\@namedef#1{\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname} +\def\@nameuse#1{\csname #1\endcsname} \def\@ifundefined#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\@firstoftwo \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo \fi} +\def\@expandtwoargs#1#2#3{% + \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand#1{#2}{#3}}\reserved@a} % \end{macrocode} % \LaTeXe\ has the command |\@onlypreamble| which adds commands to % a list of commands that are no longer needed after @@ -348,6 +357,7 @@ \@onlypreamble\AtEndOfPackage \def\@endofldf{} \@onlypreamble\@endofldf +\let\bbl@afterlang\@empty % \end{macrocode} % \LaTeX\ needs to be able to switch off writing to its auxiliary % files; plain doesn't have them by default. @@ -428,17 +438,18 @@ % inside conditionally executed code is not possible, hence the % construct with the temporary definition of |\bbl@tempa|. % \changes{bbplain-1.0o}{1998/07/02}{Added definition of \cs{in@}} +% \changes{bbplain-1.0s}{2013/01/15}{Use \cs{bbl@tempa} as documented} % \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbl@tmpa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@} +\def\bbl@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@} \ifx\in@\@undefined \def\in@#1#2{% \def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{% \ifx\in@##2\in@false\else\in@true\fi}% \in@@#2#1\in@\in@@} \else - \let\bbl@tmpa\@empty + \let\bbl@tempa\@empty \fi -\bbl@tmpa +\bbl@tempa % \end{macrocode} % % \LaTeX\ has a macro to check whether a certain package was loaded diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79677ae1edb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2013 Javier Bezos and any individual authors +% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. +% +% This file is part of the Babel system. +% -------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. +% +% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is +% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% \fi +% \CheckSum{795} +% +% \iffalse +%<*dtx> +\ProvidesFile{bbunicode.dtx} + [2013/04/22 v1.0b Babel hooks for Unicode engines] +%</dtx> +% +%% File `bbunicode.dtx' +%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e +%% Copyright (C) 2103 +%% by Javier Bezos +% +%<*filedriver> +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc. +\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}} +\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}} +\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \it lang \rangle$} +\newcommand*{\note}[1]{} +\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\begin{document} + \DocInput{bbunicode.dtx} +\end{document} +%</filedriver> +% \fi +% +% \GetFileInfo{bbunicode.dtx} +% \StopEventually{} +% +% \section{Hooks for XeTeX and LuaTeX} +% +% \subsection{XeTeX} +% +% Unfortunately, the current encoding cannot be retrieved and +% therefore it is reset always to |utf8|, which seems a sensible default. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xetex> +\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode} +\let\xebbl@stop\relax +\AddBabelHook{xetex}{encodedcommands}{% + \def\bbl@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty + \XeTeXinputencoding"bytes"% + \else + \XeTeXinputencoding"#1"% + \fi + \def\xebbl@stop{\XeTeXinputencoding"utf8"}} +\AddBabelHook{xetex}{stopcommands}{% + \xebbl@stop + \let\xebbl@stop\relax} +%</xetex> +% \end{macrocode} +% \subsection{LuaTeX} +% +% This part relies on the |lua| stripts in \pkg{luatex-hyphen} by Khaled +% Hosny, \'{E}lie Roux, and Manuel +% P\'{e}gouri\'{e}-Gonnard. \'{E}lie also improved the code below. +% \changes{bbunicode~1.0b}{2013/04/22}{luatex-hyphen is loaded +% with require. Changes supplied by \'{E}lie Roux.} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*luatex> +\directlua{% + require("luatex-hyphen") + Babel = {} + function Babel.bytes(line) + return line:gsub("(.)", + function (chr) return unicode.utf8.char(string.byte(chr)) end) + end + function Babel.begin_process_input() + if luatexbase and luatexbase.add_to_callback then + luatexbase.add_to_callback('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes,'Babel.bytes') + else + Babel.callback = callback.find('process_input_buffer') + callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes) + end + end + function Babel.end_process_input () + if luatexbase and luatexbase.remove_from_callback then + luatexbase.remove_from_callback('process_input_buffer','Babel.bytes') + else + callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.callback) + end + end +} +\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode} +\let\luabbl@stop\relax +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{encodedcommands}{% + \def\bbl@tempa{utf8}\def\bbl@tempb{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\else + \directlua{Babel.begin_process_input()}% + \def\luabbl@stop{% + \directlua{Babel.end_process_input()}}% + \fi}% +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{stopcommands}{% + \luabbl@stop + \let\luabbl@stop\relax} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{patterns}{% + \ifx\directlua\relax\else + \ifcsname lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language\endcsname \else + \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}% + \directlua{ + luatexhyphen.loadlanguage('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}', + '\the\language')}% + \fi + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{adddialect}{% + \ifx\directlua\relax\else + \directlua{ + luatexhyphen.adddialect('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}', + '\luatexluaescapestring{\string#2}') + }% + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{everylanguage}{% + \directlua{ + processnow = (tex.language == 0) or + (luatexhyphen.lookupname('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}') == nil)}% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}% + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadpatterns}{% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \input #1\relax + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadexceptions}{% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \input #1\relax + \fi + \directlua{processnow = nil}} +%</luatex> +% \end{macrocode} +% +\endinput +%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def deleted file mode 100644 index da8ab9e3241..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,171 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `8859-8.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `8859-8') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. - \ProvidesFile{8859-8.def} - [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file] -%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\makeatletter -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar} -\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}} -\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}} -\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}} -%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the -%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file. -\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace} -\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent} -\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds} -\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency} -\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen} -\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar} -\DeclareInputText{167}{\S} -\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}} -\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright} -\DeclareInputMath{170}{\times} -\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft} -\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot} -\DeclareInputText{173}{\-} -\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered} -\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}} -\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree} -\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm} -\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior} -\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}} -\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu} -\DeclareInputText{182}{\P} -\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered} -\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ } -\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{186}{\div} -\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright} -\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter} -\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf} -\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters} -\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef} -\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet} -\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel} -\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet} -\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe} -\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav} -\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin} -\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet} -\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet} -\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod} -\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf} -\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf} -\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed} -\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem} -\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem} -\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun} -\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun} -\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh} -\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin} -\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe} -\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe} -\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi} -\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi} -\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof} -\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh} -\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin} -\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav} -\newcommand{\DisableNikud}{% - \DeclareInputText{192}{}% - \DeclareInputText{193}{}% - \DeclareInputText{194}{}% - \DeclareInputText{195}{}% - \DeclareInputText{196}{}% - \DeclareInputText{197}{}% - \DeclareInputText{198}{}% - \DeclareInputText{199}{}% - \DeclareInputText{200}{}% - \DeclareInputText{201}{}% - \DeclareInputText{203}{}% - \DeclareInputText{204}{}% - \DeclareInputText{205}{}% - \DeclareInputText{206}{}% - \DeclareInputText{207}{}% - \DeclareInputText{208}{}% - \DeclareInputText{209}{}% - \DeclareInputText{210}{}% - \DeclareInputText{211}{}% - \DeclareInputText{212}{}% - \DeclareInputText{213}{}% - \DeclareInputText{214}{}% -} -\makeatother -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `8859-8.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty index f03265330da..7da72f23079 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `UKenglish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty index 76ba93b37b6..1a7cef61597 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `USenglish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty index e0807fc5516..677aefaf5b0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `afrikaans') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 363feabb3d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `albanian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% albanian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{albanian} - [2007/10/20 v1.0c albanian support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{albanian}\captionsalbanian -\ifx\l@albanian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Albanian} - \adddialect\l@albanian0\fi -\addto\captionsalbanian{% - \def\prefacename{Parathenia}% - \def\refname{Referencat}% - \def\abstractname{P\"ermbledhja}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitulli}% - \def\appendixname{Shtesa}% - \def\contentsname{P\"ermbajta}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurat}% - \def\listtablename{Tabelat}% - \def\indexname{Indeksi}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Pjesa}% - \def\enclname{Lidhja}% - \def\ccname{Kopja}% - \def\headtoname{P\"er}% - \def\pagename{Faqe}% - \def\seename{shiko}% - \def\alsoname{shiko dhe}% - \def\proofname{V\"ertetim}% - \def\glossaryname{P\"erhasja e Fjal\"eve}% - }% -\def\datealbanian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Janar\or Shkurt\or Mars\or Prill\or Maj\or - Qershor\or Korrik\or Gusht\or Shtator\or Tetor\or N\"entor\or - Dhjetor\fi \space \number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasalbanian{\languageshorthands{albanian}} -\addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"e}{\textormath{\v e}{\check e}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"E}{\textormath{\v E}{\check E}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\ifx\fmtname plain \else - \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} - \addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@frenchindent} - \addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -\fi -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh -\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth -\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits} -\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits} -\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits} -\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\ldf@finish{albanian} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `albanian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty index 5f0c385ea80..fa5e1a44c3e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `albanian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty index 8f6d370e595..21e6a01f55c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `american') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty deleted file mode 100644 index ae42f15a2da..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `athnum.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% athnum.dtx (with options: `package') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% \CheckSum{125} -%% This is file `athnum.dtx' -%% (c) 1997-2007 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/01/01] -\ProvidesPackage{athnum}[2003/08/24\space v1.1] -\typeout{Package: `athnum' v1.1\space <2003/08/24> (A. Syropoulos)} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{% - \PackageError{athnum}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - }} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiDelta}{LGR}{\char"02\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiEta}{LGR}{\char"03\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiChi}{LGR}{\char"04\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\PiMu}{LGR}{\char"05\relax} -\newcount\@ath@num -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\@@athnum}[1]{% - \@ath@num#1\relax - \ifnum\@ath@num<\@ne% - \space% - \PackageWarning{athnum}{% - Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}% - \else\ifnum\@ath@num>249999% - \space% - \PackageWarning{athnum}{% - Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}% - \else - \@whilenum\@ath@num>49999\do{% - \PiMu\advance\@ath@num-50000}% - \@whilenum\@ath@num>9999\do{% - M\advance\@ath@num-\@M}% - \ifnum\@ath@num>4999% - \PiChi\advance\@ath@num-5000% - \fi\relax - \@whilenum\@ath@num>999\do{% - Q\advance\@ath@num-\@m}% - \ifnum\@ath@num>499% - \PiEta\advance\@ath@num-500% - \fi\relax - \@whilenum\@ath@num>99\do{% - H\advance\@ath@num-100}% - \ifnum\@ath@num>49% - \PiDelta\advance\@ath@num-50% - \fi\relax - \@whilenum\@ath@num>9\do{% - D\advance\@ath@num by-10}% - \@whilenum\@ath@num>4\do{% - P\advance\@ath@num-5}% - \ifcase\@ath@num\or I\or II\or III\or IIII\fi% - \fi\fi} -\def\@athnum#1{% - \expandafter\@@athnum\expandafter{\the#1}} -\def\athnum#1{% - \@ath@num#1\relax - \@athnum{\@ath@num}} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `athnum.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty index 189be4f1d52..2c1d97af0a8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `austrian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def index 6ba9f816321..840bebbc8a9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% babel.dtx (with options: `core') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -36,18 +37,19 @@ %% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution %% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with %% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% %% File 'babel.dtx' -%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package] +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] %% Babel package for LaTeX2e. %% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, %% TeXniek %% all rights reserved. -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\ifx\bbl@afterfi\@undefined +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +\ifx\ldf@quit\@undefined \else - \bbl@afterfi\endinput + \expandafter\endinput \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% @@ -56,14 +58,60 @@ } \fi \ProvidesFile{babel.def} - [2008/07/08 v3.8m % - Babel common definitions] + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % + Babel common definitions] \ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined \input plain.def\relax \fi -\ifx\iflanguage\@undefined +\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e} +\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else \input switch.def\relax \fi +\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}} +\def\bbl@add#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + {\def#1{#2}}% + {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}} +\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}% +\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} +\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@undefined + \def\bbl@opt@safe{BR} + \let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil +\fi +\ifx\BabelModifiers\@undefined\let\BabelModifiers\relax\fi +\ifx\bbl@afterlang\@undefined\let\bbl@afterlang\relax\fi +\providecommand\AfterBabelLanguage[2]{} +\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}% +\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} +\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +\def\bbl@withactive#1#2{% + \begingroup + \lccode`~=`#2\relax + \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}} +\def\bbl@redefine#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine +\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long +\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}% + \else + \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname + \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname + \fi + \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname} +\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust \AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}} \AtBeginDocument{% \gdef\latinencoding{OT1}% @@ -86,20 +134,17 @@ \catcode`\@=11\relax \chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\= \catcode`\==12\relax - \let\bbl@tempa\relax \expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar \expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil - \ifx#2\@undefined - \else - \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}} + \ifx#2\@undefined\else + \ldf@quit{#1}% \fi \else - \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax - \else - \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}} + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax\else + \ldf@quit{#1}% \fi \fi - \bbl@tempa + \let\bbl@screset\@empty \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined \let\originalTeX\@empty \else @@ -109,215 +154,166 @@ \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax - \endinput -} + \endinput} \def\ldf@finish#1{% \loadlocalcfg{#1}% + \bbl@afterlang + \let\bbl@afterlang\relax + \let\BabelModifiers\relax + \let\bbl@screset\relax \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}% \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax - \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax - } + \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax} \@onlypreamble\LdfInit \@onlypreamble\ldf@quit \@onlypreamble\ldf@finish \def\main@language#1{% \def\bbl@main@language{#1}% \let\languagename\bbl@main@language - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - } -\ifx\l@english\@undefined - \let\l@english\z@ -\fi -\main@language{english} + \bbl@patterns{\languagename}} \AtBeginDocument{% \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}} -\def\bbl@add@special#1{\begingroup +\def\bbl@add@special#1{% + \begingroup \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else - \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}% - \fi}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else + \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}% + \fi}% \x} -\def\bbl@remove@special#1{\begingroup +\def\bbl@remove@special#1{% + \begingroup \def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty \else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}% \def\do{\x\do}% \def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else - \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}% - \fi}% + \edef\x{\endgroup + \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else + \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}% + \fi}% \x} -\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} -\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +\def\bbl@active@def#1#2#3#4{% + \@namedef{#3#1}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname\relax + \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select#2#1{#3@arg#1}{#4#1}% + \else + \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname + \fi}% + \long\@namedef{#3@arg#1}##1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname\relax + \bbl@afterelse\csname#4#1\endcsname##1% + \else + \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname + \fi}}% \def\initiate@active@char#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string##1\endcsname\relax - \bbl@afterfi{\@initiate@active@char{#1}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname\relax + \bbl@withactive + {\expandafter\@initiate@active@char\expandafter}#1\string#1#1% \fi} -\begingroup - \catcode`\~\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\@initiate@active@char##1{% - \ifcat\noexpand##1\noexpand~\relax - \@ifundefined{normal@char\string##1}{% - \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname##1% - \expandafter\gdef - \expandafter##1% - \expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}{}% - \else - \@activated{##1}% - \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{##1}% - \ifx##1'% - \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s - \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{% - \textormath{##1}{^\bgroup\prim@s}}% - \fi - \ifx##1^% - \gdef\bbl@act@caret{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string^\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname - \fi}% - \fi} - \fi - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}{}{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\catcode`\noexpand##1\the\catcode`##1}% - \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}}% - \@tempcnta=\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`##1% - \lowercase{% - \catcode`~\active - \expandafter\bbl@add@special - \csname \string##1\endcsname - \AtBeginDocument{% - \catcode`##1\active - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{% - \string\catcode`##1\string\active}% - \fi}% - \expandafter\gdef - \expandafter~% - \expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta - \fi - \ifx##1^% - \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{\bbl@act@caret}% - \else - \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{% - \if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname - \fi}% - \fi - \@namedef{user@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\user@group##1% - {user@active@arg\string##1}{language@active\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% - \long\@namedef{user@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse - \csname language@active\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@% - \endcsname - \fi}% - \@namedef{\user@group @sh@\string##1@@}{% - \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname} - \@namedef{language@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\language@group##1% - {language@active@arg\string##1}{system@active\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% - \long\@namedef{language@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse - \csname system@active\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@% - \endcsname - \fi}% - \@namedef{system@active\string##1}{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\system@group##1% - {system@active@arg\string##1}{normal@char\string##1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname - \fi}% - \long\@namedef{system@active@arg\string##1}####1{% - \expandafter\ifx - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \relax - \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname####1% - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname - \fi}% - \@namedef{user@sh@\string##1@\string\protect@}{% - \csname user@active\string##1\endcsname}% - }% - }\x +\def\@initiate@active@char#1#2#3{% + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oricat@#2\endcsname{% + \catcode`#2=\the\catcode`#2\relax}% + \ifx#1\@undefined + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{% + \let\noexpand#1\noexpand\@undefined}% + \else + \expandafter\let\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname#1% + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{% + \let\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}% + \fi + \ifx#1#3\relax + \expandafter\let\csname normal@char#2\endcsname#3% + \else + \bbl@info{Making #2 an active character}% + \ifnum\mathcode`#2="8000 + \@namedef{normal@char#2}{% + \textormath{#3}{\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}}% + \else + \@namedef{normal@char#2}{#3}% + \fi + \bbl@restoreactive{#2}% + \AtBeginDocument{% + \catcode`#2\active + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@mainaux{\catcode`\string#2\active}% + \fi}% + \expandafter\bbl@add@special\csname#2\endcsname + \catcode`#2\active + \fi + \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo + \if\string^#2% + \def\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\textormath}% + \else + \ifx\bbl@mathnormal\@undefined\else + \let\bbl@tempa\bbl@mathnormal + \fi + \fi + \expandafter\edef\csname active@char#2\endcsname{% + \bbl@tempa + {\noexpand\if@safe@actives + \noexpand\expandafter + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname + \noexpand\else + \noexpand\expandafter + \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname + \noexpand\fi}% + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}}% + \bbl@csarg\edef{active@#2}{% + \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname active@char#2\endcsname}% + \bbl@csarg\edef{normal@#2}{% + \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}% + \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname bbl@normal@#2\endcsname + \bbl@active@def#2\user@group{user@active}{language@active}% + \bbl@active@def#2\language@group{language@active}{system@active}% + \bbl@active@def#2\system@group{system@active}{normal@char}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@@\endcsname + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@\string\protect@\endcsname + {\expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname}% + \if\string'#2% + \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s + \let\active@math@prime#1% + \fi} +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}% + {\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}% + {\def\bbl@restoreactive#1{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\AfterBabelLanguage\noexpand\CurrentOption + {\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}% + \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}}% + \bbl@tempa}% + \AtEndOfPackage{\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}} \def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname\relax \bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs \else - \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname - \fi -} + \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname + \fi} \def\active@prefix#1{% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect \else \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterfi\noexpand#1\@gobble + \noexpand#1% \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterfi\protect#1\@gobble + \protect#1% \fi + \expandafter\@gobble \fi} \newif\if@safe@actives \@safe@activesfalse \def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi} \def\bbl@activate#1{% - \expandafter\def - \expandafter#1\expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix - \expandafter#1\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}% -} + \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1% + \csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname} \def\bbl@deactivate#1{% - \expandafter\def - \expandafter#1\expandafter{% - \expandafter\active@prefix - \expandafter#1\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% -} + \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1% + \csname bbl@normal@\string#1\endcsname} \def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname} \def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname} \def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil} @@ -325,98 +321,161 @@ \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs + \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@}{}% + {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\endcsname\bbl@tempa + \else + \bbl@info + {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\\% + in language \CurrentOption}% + \fi}% \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}% \else \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs + \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{}% + {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@\endcsname\bbl@tempa + \else + \bbl@info + {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\string#3\\% + in language \CurrentOption}% + \fi}% \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}% \fi} -\def\textormath#1#2{% +\def\textormath{% \ifmmode - \bbl@afterelse#2% + \expandafter\@secondoftwo \else - \bbl@afterfi#1% + \expandafter\@firstoftwo \fi} \def\user@group{user} \def\language@group{english} \def\system@group{system} -\def\useshorthands#1{% - \def\user@group{user}% - \initiate@active@char{#1}% - \@tempcnta\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`#1% - \lowercase{\catcode`~\active\bbl@activate{~}}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta} -\def\defineshorthand{\declare@shorthand{user}} +\def\useshorthands{% + \@ifstar\bbl@usesh@s{\bbl@usesh@x{}}} +\def\bbl@usesh@s#1{% + \bbl@usesh@x + {\AddBabelHook{babel-sh-\string#1}{afterextras}{\bbl@activate{#1}}}% + {#1}} +\def\bbl@usesh@x#1#2{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}% + {\def\user@group{user}% + \initiate@active@char{#2}% + #1% + \bbl@activate{#2}}% + {\bbl@error + {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)} + {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\% + turned off in the package options}}} +\def\user@language@group{user@\language@group} +\def\bbl@set@user@generic#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{user@generic@active#1}% + {\bbl@active@def#1\user@language@group{user@active}{user@generic@active}% + \bbl@active@def#1\user@group{user@generic@active}{language@active}% + \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@@\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#1\endcsname}% + \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@\string\protect@\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#1\endcsname}}% + \@empty} +\newcommand\defineshorthand[3][user]{% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{% + \if*\expandafter\@car\bbl@tempb\@nil + \edef\bbl@tempb{user@\expandafter\@gobble\bbl@tempb}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@set@user@generic{\expandafter\string\@car#2\@nil}\bbl@tempb + \fi + \declare@shorthand{\bbl@tempb}{#2}{#3}}} \def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}} \def\aliasshorthand#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax - \ifx\document\@notprerr - \@notshorthand{#2} - \else - \initiate@active@char{#2}% - \@tempcnta\lccode`\~ - \lccode`~=`#2% - \lowercase{\let~#1}% - \lccode`\~\@tempcnta - \fi - \fi -} + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}% + {\expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax + \ifx\document\@notprerr + \@notshorthand{#2}% + \else + \initiate@active@char{#2}% + \expandafter\let\csname active@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname active@char\string#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname + \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname + \bbl@activate{#2}% + \fi + \fi}% + {\bbl@error + {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)} + {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\% + turned off in the package options}}} \def\@notshorthand#1{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - The character `\string #1' should be made - a shorthand character;\MessageBreak - add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to - the preamble.\MessageBreak - I will ignore your instruction}{}% - } -\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{on}#1\@nil} -\newcommand*\shorthandoff[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{off}#1\@nil} -\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2#3\@nil{% - \@ifundefined{active@char\string#2}{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - The character '\string #2' is not a shorthand character - in \languagename}{% - Maybe you made a typing mistake?\MessageBreak - I will ignore your instruction}}{% - \csname bbl@switch@sh@#1\endcsname#2}% - \ifx#3\@empty\else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh{#1}#3\@nil + \bbl@error{% + The character `\string #1' should be made a shorthand character;\\% + add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to + the preamble.\\% + I will ignore your instruction}{}} +\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh\@ne#1\@nnil} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\shorthandoff{% + \@ifstar{\bbl@shorthandoff\tw@}{\bbl@shorthandoff\z@}} +\def\bbl@shorthandoff#1#2{\bbl@switch@sh#1#2\@nnil} +\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{% + \ifx#2\@nnil\else + \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#2}% + {\bbl@error + {I cannot switch `\string#2' on or off--not a shorthand}% + {This character is not a shorthand. Maybe you made\\% + a typing mistake? I will ignore your instruction}}% + {\ifcase#1% + \catcode`#212\relax + \or + \catcode`#2\active + \or + \csname bbl@oricat@\string#2\endcsname + \csname bbl@oridef@\string#2\endcsname + \fi}% + \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh#1% \fi} -\def\bbl@switch@sh@off#1{\catcode`#112\relax} -\begingroup - \catcode`\~\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\bbl@switch@sh@on##1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`~=`##1% - \lowercase{\endgroup - \catcode`~\active - }% - }% - } -\x -\declare@shorthand{system}{"}{\csname normal@char\string"\endcsname} -\declare@shorthand{system}{'}{% - \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}% - {\sp\bgroup\prim@s}} -\declare@shorthand{system}{`}{\csname normal@char\string`\endcsname} +\def\babelshorthand{\active@prefix\babelshorthand\bbl@putsh} +\def\bbl@putsh#1{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#1}% + {\bbl@putsh@i#1\@empty\@nnil}% + {\csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}} +\def\bbl@putsh@i#1#2\@nnil{% + \csname\languagename @sh@\string#1@% + \ifx\@empty#2\else\string#2@\fi\endcsname} +\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil\else + \let\bbl@s@initiate@active@char\initiate@active@char + \def\initiate@active@char#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@initiate@active@char{#1}}{}} + \let\bbl@s@switch@sh\bbl@switch@sh + \def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{% + \ifx#2\@nnil\else + \bbl@afterfi + \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}{\bbl@s@switch@sh#1{#2}}{\bbl@switch@sh#1}% + \fi} + \let\bbl@s@activate\bbl@activate + \def\bbl@activate#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@activate{#1}}{}} + \let\bbl@s@deactivate\bbl@deactivate + \def\bbl@deactivate#1{% + \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@deactivate{#1}}{}} +\fi \def\bbl@prim@s{% \prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s} +\def\bbl@if@primes#1#2{% + \ifx#1\@let@token + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else\ifx#2\@let@token + \bbl@afterelse\expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \bbl@afterfi\expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi\fi} \begingroup - \catcode`\'\active\let'\relax - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \ifx'\@let@token - \expandafter\pr@@@s - \else - \ifx^\@let@token - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pr@@@t - \else - \egroup - \fi - \fi}% - } -\x + \catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\*=\active \lccode`\*=`\^ + \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=\active \lccode`\"=`\' + \lowercase{% + \gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{% + \bbl@if@primes"'% + \pr@@@s + {\bbl@if@primes*^\pr@@@t\egroup}}} +\endgroup \initiate@active@char{~} \declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ } \bbl@activate{~} @@ -426,48 +485,46 @@ \def\f@encoding{OT1} \fi \newcommand\languageattribute[2]{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else + \def\bbl@tempc{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempc + \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempc{% \@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{% \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined \in@false \else - \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-\bbl@attr,}% - {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}% - \bbl@tempa + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}% \fi \ifin@ - \PackageWarning{Babel}{% - You have more than once selected the attribute - '\bbl@attr'\MessageBreak for language #1}% + \bbl@warning{% + You have more than once selected the attribute '\bbl@attr'\\% + for language #1}% \else \edef\bbl@tempa{% - \noexpand\bbl@add@list\noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{#1-\bbl@attr}}% + \noexpand\bbl@add@list + \noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}}% \bbl@tempa - \edef\bbl@tempa{#1-\bbl@attr}% + \edef\bbl@tempa{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}% \expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes% - {\csname#1@attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}% - {\@attrerr{#1}{\bbl@attr}}% - \fi - } - \fi} + {\csname\bbl@tempc @attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}% + {\@attrerr{\bbl@tempc}{\bbl@attr}}% + \fi}}} \@onlypreamble\languageattribute - \newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}% - {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} +\newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{% + \bbl@error + {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}% + {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} \def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#2,}{,\BabelModifiers,}% + \ifin@ + \AfterBabelLanguage{#1}{\languageattribute{#1}{#2}}% + \fi \bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}% - \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}% - } + \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}} \def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{% \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined \in@false \else - \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-#2,}% - {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}% - \bbl@tempa + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#1-#2,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}% \fi \ifin@ \bbl@afterelse#3% @@ -511,9 +568,9 @@ \newcount\babel@savecnt \babel@beginsave \def\babel@save#1{% - \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname #1\relax + \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname#1\relax \begingroup - \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX \let#1=}% + \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX\let#1=}% \edef\x{\endgroup \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand \csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}% @@ -540,32 +597,88 @@ \def#1{#2}% \else {\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}% - \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}% + \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}% \fi - \fi -} -\def\bbl@t@one{T1} -\def\allowhyphens{% - \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi} + \fi} +\@onlypreamble\babelhyphenation +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \newcommand\babelhyphenation[2][\@empty]{% + \ifx\bbl@hyphenation@\relax + \let\bbl@hyphenation@\@empty + \fi + \ifx\bbl@hyphlist\@empty\else + \bbl@warning{% + You must not intermingle \string\selectlanguage\space and\\% + \string\babelhyphenation\space or some exception will not\\% + be taken into account. Reported}% + \fi + \ifx\@empty#1% + \protected@edef\bbl@hyphenation@{\bbl@hyphenation@\space#2}% + \else + \edef\bbl@tempb{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb{% + \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempa + \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempa{% + \bbl@csarg\protected@edef{hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}% + \@empty + {\csname bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa\endcsname\space}% + #2}}}% + \fi}} \def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@t@one{T1} +\def\allowhyphens{\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi} +\newcommand\babelnullhyphen{\char\hyphenchar\font} +\def\babelhyphen{\active@prefix\babelhyphen\bbl@hyphen} +\def\bbl@hyphen{% + \@ifstar{\bbl@hyphen@i @}{\bbl@hyphen@i\@empty}} +\def\bbl@hyphen@i#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty}% + {\csname bbl@#1usehyphen\endcsname{\discretionary{#2}{}{#2}}}% + {\csname bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty\endcsname}} +\def\bbl@usehyphen#1{% + \leavevmode + \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\nobreak\else\nobreak#1\fi + \hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@@usehyphen#1{% + \leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\else#1\fi} +\def\bbl@hyphenchar{% + \ifnum\hyphenchar\font=\m@ne + \babelnullhyphen + \else + \char\hyphenchar\font + \fi} +\def\bbl@hy@soft{\bbl@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}} +\def\bbl@hy@@soft{\bbl@@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}} +\def\bbl@hy@hard{\bbl@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar} +\def\bbl@hy@@hard{\bbl@@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar} +\def\bbl@hy@nobreak{\bbl@usehyphen{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}\nobreak}} +\def\bbl@hy@@nobreak{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}} +\def\bbl@hy@repeat{% + \bbl@usehyphen{% + \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}% + \nobreak}} +\def\bbl@hy@@repeat{% + \bbl@@usehyphen{% + \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}}} +\def\bbl@hy@empty{\hskip\z@skip} +\def\bbl@hy@@empty{\discretionary{}{}{}} +\def\bbl@disc#1#2{\nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\bbl@allowhyphens} \def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}% \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@% \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@} -\def\save@sf@q #1{\leavevmode - \begingroup - \edef\@SF{\spacefactor \the\spacefactor}#1\@SF - \endgroup -} -\def\bbl@disc#1#2{% - \nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\allowhyphens} +\def\save@sf@q#1{\leavevmode + \begingroup + \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}#1\@SF + \endgroup} \ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{% \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}% - \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}} + \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{% \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}} \ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{% \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}% - \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}} + \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{% \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}} \ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% @@ -573,14 +686,14 @@ \ll \else \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\allowhyphens}% + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% \fi} \ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% \ifmmode \gg \else \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\allowhyphens}% + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% \fi} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{% \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}} @@ -591,23 +704,23 @@ <% \else \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\allowhyphens}% + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% \fi} \ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{% \ifmmode >% \else \save@sf@q{\nobreak - \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\allowhyphens}% + \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\bbl@allowhyphens}% \fi} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{% \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{% \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}} \DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{% - \allowhyphens i\kern-0.02em j\allowhyphens} + i\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens j} \DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{% - \allowhyphens I\kern-0.02em J\allowhyphens} + I\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens J} \DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188} \DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156} \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{% @@ -685,7 +798,7 @@ \def\umlauthigh{% \def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup% \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname - ##1\allowhyphens\egroup}% + ##1\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}% \let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta} \def\umlautlow{% \def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}} @@ -718,6 +831,192 @@ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}% \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}% } +\def\bbl@recatcode#1{% + \@tempcnta="7F + \def\bbl@tempa{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta>"FF\else + \catcode\@tempcnta=#1\relax + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne + \expandafter\bbl@tempa + \fi}% + \bbl@tempa} +\@onlypreamble\StartBabelCommands +\def\StartBabelCommands{% + \begingroup + \bbl@recatcode{11}% + \def\bbl@scuse{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil\def\bbl@opt@strings{generic}\fi}% + \def\UseStrings{\bbl@scuse\aftergroup\bbl@scuse}% + \def\SetStringLoop{\afterassignment\bbl@sclp\def\bbl@templ####1}% + \def\bbl@sclp##1{% + \count@\z@ % dangerous if a hook is used + \@for\bbl@tempm:=##1\do{% + \advance\count@\@ne + \toks@\expandafter{\bbl@tempm}% + \edef\bbl@tempn{% + \expandafter\noexpand + \csname\bbl@templ{\romannumeral\count@}\endcsname% + {\the\toks@}}% + \expandafter\SetString\bbl@tempn}}% + \def\SetCase{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@tolower}{% + \g@addto@macro\@uclclist{% + \reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}% stops processing the list + \@ifundefined{\languagename @bbl@uclc}% and resumes it + {\reserved@a}% + {\csname\languagename @bbl@uclc\endcsname}% + {\bbl@tolower\@empty}{\bbl@toupper\@empty}}% + \gdef\bbl@tolower{\csname\languagename @bbl@lc\endcsname}% + \gdef\bbl@toupper{\csname\languagename @bbl@uc\endcsname}}{}% + \let\SetCase\bbl@setcase + \SetCase}% + \def\bbl@provstring##1{% + \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string##1}{\gdef##1}\@gobble}% + \def\bbl@dftstring##1##2{% + \@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1?{##2}% + \global\let##1##1}% + \def\bbl@encstring##1##2{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempc\bbl@sc@fontenc{% + \@ifundefined{T@\bbl@tempc}% + \@empty + {\@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1\bbl@tempc{##2}% + \global\let##1##1}}}% + \let\StartBabelCommands\bbl@startcmds + \begingroup + \let\bbl@screset\@nnil % local flag - disable 1st stopcommands + \StartBabelCommands} +\def\bbl@startcmds#1#2{% + \ifx\bbl@screset\@nnil\else + \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}% + \fi + \endgroup + \begingroup + \edef\bbl@L{\zap@space#1 \@empty}% + \edef\bbl@G{\zap@space#2 \@empty}% + \let\bbl@sc@charset\space + \let\bbl@sc@fontenc\space + \let\SetString\@gobbletwo + \let\bbl@stringdef\@gobbletwo + \bbl@startcmds@i} +\newcommand\bbl@startcmds@i[1][\@empty]{% + \ifx\@empty#1% + \def\bbl@sc@label{generic}% + \bbl@scswitch{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring + \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring + \else + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring + \fi\fi}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@usehooks{defaultcommands}{}% + \else + \def\bbl@tempa##1=##2\@nil{% + \bbl@csarg\edef{sc@\zap@space##1 \@empty}{##2 }}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb{label=#1}{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\@nil}% + \def\bbl@tempa##1 ##2{% + ##1% + \ifx\@empty##2\else\ifx,##1,\else,\fi\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempa##2\fi}% + \edef\bbl@sc@fontenc{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@sc@fontenc\@empty}% + \edef\bbl@sc@label{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@label\@empty}% + \edef\bbl@sc@charset{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@charset\@empty}% + \bbl@scswitch{% + \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring + \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring + \else + \@expandtwoargs + \in@{,\bbl@opt@strings,}{,\bbl@sc@label,\bbl@sc@fontenc,}% + \ifin@ + \let\SetString\bbl@setstring + \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring + \fi\fi\fi}% + \@expandtwoargs + \bbl@usehooks{encodedcommands}{{\bbl@sc@charset}{\bbl@sc@fontenc}}% + \fi} +\def\bbl@scswitch#1{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\bbl@L,}% + \ifin@ + \let\bbl@L\CurrentOption + #1\relax + \bbl@scswitch@i + \ifx\bbl@G\@empty\else + \ifx\SetString\@gobbletwo\else + \edef\bbl@GL{\bbl@G\bbl@L}% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@GL,}{,\bbl@screset,}% + \ifin@\else + \global\expandafter\let\csname\bbl@GL\endcsname\@undefined + \xdef\bbl@screset{\bbl@screset,\bbl@GL}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} +\def\bbl@scswitch@i{% + \ifx\bbl@G\@empty + \def\SetString##1##2{% + \bbl@error{Missing group for string \string##1}% + {You must assign strings to some category, typically\\% + captions or extras, but you set none}}% + \fi} +\AtEndOfPackage{\def\bbl@scswitch#1{#1\relax\bbl@scswitch@i}} +\@onlypreamble\EndBabelCommands +\def\EndBabelCommands{% + \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}% + \endgroup + \endgroup} +\def\bbl@scset#1#2{\def#1{#2}} +\def\bbl@setstring#1#2{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{% + \edef\bbl@LC{\bbl@tempa\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + \@ifundefined{\bbl@LC}% eg, \germanchaptername + {\global\expandafter + \bbl@add\csname\bbl@G\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter + {\expandafter\bbl@scset\expandafter#1\csname\bbl@LC\endcsname}}% + {}% + \def\BabelString{#2}% + \bbl@usehooks{stringprocess}{}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@LC\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\BabelString}}} +\newcommand\bbl@setcase[3][]{% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uclc\endcsname{\reserved@a#1}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uc\endcsname{#2}% + \expandafter\bbl@stringdef + \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@lc\endcsname{#3}}} +\def\AddBabelHook#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hk@#1}{\EnableBabelHook{#1}}{}% + \def\bbl@tempa##1,#2=##2,##3\@empty{\def\bbl@tempb{##2}}% + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@evargs,#2=,\@empty + \@ifundefined{bbl@ev@#1@#2}% + {\bbl@csarg\bbl@add{ev@#2}{\bbl@elt{#1}}% + \bbl@csarg\newcommand}% + {\bbl@csarg\renewcommand}% + {ev@#1@#2}[\bbl@tempb]} +\def\EnableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@firstofone} +\def\DisableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@gobble} +\def\bbl@usehooks#1#2{% + \def\bbl@elt##1{% + \@nameuse{bbl@hk@##1}{\@nameuse{bbl@ev@##1@#1}#2}}% + \@nameuse{bbl@ev@#1}} +\def\bbl@evargs{,% don't delete the comma + everylanguage=1,loadkernel=1,loadpatterns=1,loadexceptions=1,% + adddialect=2,patterns=2,defaultcommands=0,encodedcommands=2,write=0,% + beforeextras=0,afterextras=0,stopcommands=0,stringprocess=0,% + hyphenation=2} +\ifx\directlua\@undefined + \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else + \input xebabel.def + \fi +\else + \input luababel.def +\fi {\def\format{lplain} \ifx\fmtname\format \else @@ -727,95 +1026,83 @@ \aftergroup\endinput \fi \fi} -\def\bbl@redefine#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine -\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long -\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{% - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname \bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1 - \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect - \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}% - \else - \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname - \fi - \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname} -\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust -\def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{% - {% - \@safe@activestrue +\ifx\bbl@opt@safe\@empty\else + \def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{% + {\@safe@activestrue \@ifundefined{#1@#2}% - \relax - {% - \gdef \@multiplelabels {% + \relax + {\gdef\@multiplelabels{% \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% - \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}% - }% - \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}% - }% - } -\CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{% - \def\reserved@a{#3}% - \expandafter \ifx \csname #1@#2\endcsname \reserved@a - \else - \@tempswatrue - \fi} -\def\@testdef #1#2#3{% - \@safe@activestrue - \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname - \def\bbl@tempb{#3}% - \@safe@activesfalse - \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax - \else - \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}% - \fi - \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% - \ifx \bbl@tempa \bbl@tempb - \else - \@tempswatrue - \fi} -\bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -\bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -\bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{% - \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse - \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% + \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}% + \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}} + \CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{% + \def\reserved@a{#3}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@#2\endcsname\reserved@a + \else + \@tempswatrue + \fi} + \def\@testdef#1#2#3{% + \@safe@activestrue + \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname + \def\bbl@tempb{#3}% + \@safe@activesfalse + \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax + \else + \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}% + \fi + \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb + \else + \@tempswatrue + \fi} +\fi +\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} + \bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} +\else + \let\org@ref\ref + \let\org@pageref\pageref +\fi +\@expandtwoargs\in@{B}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{% + \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse + \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% \def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{% \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse \org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}% }{}} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{% - \def\@citex[#1]#2{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}% - }{}} -\bbl@redefine\nocite#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} -\bbl@redefine\bibcite{% - \bbl@cite@choice - \bibcite} -\def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{% - \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}} -\def\bbl@cite@choice{% - \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% - \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% - \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax - } -\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice} -\bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{% - \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{% + \def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}% + }{}} + \bbl@redefine\nocite#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} + \bbl@redefine\bibcite{% + \bbl@cite@choice + \bibcite} + \def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{% + \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}} + \def\bbl@cite@choice{% + \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% + \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}% + \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax} + \AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice} + \bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{% + \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse} +\else + \let\org@nocite\nocite + \let\org@@citex\@citex + \let\org@bibcite\bibcite + \let\org@@bibitem\@bibitem +\fi \bbl@redefine\markright#1{% \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}% @@ -857,37 +1144,111 @@ \bbl@tempa } \bbl@tempc -\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}} -\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}} -\ifx\nfss@catcodes\@undefined -\else - \addto\nfss@catcodes{% - \@makeother\'% - \@makeother\"% +\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe +\ifin@ + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{% + \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{% + \let\bbl@tempa\pageref + \let\pageref\org@pageref + \let\bbl@tempb\ref + \let\ref\org@ref + \@safe@activestrue + \org@ifthenelse{#1}{% + \let\pageref\bbl@tempa + \let\ref\bbl@tempb + \@safe@activesfalse + #2}{% + \let\pageref\bbl@tempa + \let\ref\bbl@tempb + \@safe@activesfalse + #3}% + }% + }{}% + } + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{% + \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{% + \@safe@activestrue + \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}% + \@safe@activesfalse}% + \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{% + \@safe@activestrue + \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}% + \@safe@activesfalse}% + \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{% + \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa} + }{}% } \fi +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}% + {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax + \else + \makeatletter + \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother + \fi}% + {}}} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}% + {}% + {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% + \languageshorthands{system}}% + }% +} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{% + \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}} +\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{% + \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}% + \immediate\write15{% + \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}% + [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day} + \space generated font description file]^^J + \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J + \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J + }% + \closeout15 + } +\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily +\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}} +\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}} +\bbl@add\nfss@catcodes{% + \@makeother\'% + \@makeother\"} \ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined - \def\loadlocalcfg#1{% - \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg} - {\typeout{*************************************^^J% - * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J% - *}% - } - {}} + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}% + {\let\loadlocalcfg\@gobble}% + {\def\loadlocalcfg#1{% + \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + \@empty}} \fi \ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined \def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand} - \long\def \protected@write#1#2#3{% - \begingroup - \let\thepage\relax - #2% - \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}% - \reserved@a - \endgroup - \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi - } + \long\def\protected@write#1#2#3{% + \begingroup + \let\thepage\relax + #2% + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect + \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}% + \reserved@a + \endgroup + \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi} \fi +\ifx\l@english\@undefined + \chardef\l@english\z@ +\fi +\main@language{english} %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty index add9ef8b471..1fd791be7f7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% babel.dtx (with options: `package') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -36,185 +37,294 @@ %% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution %% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with %% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01] %% File 'babel.dtx' -%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package] +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] %% Babel package for LaTeX2e. %% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, %% TeXniek %% all rights reserved. -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. \ProvidesPackage{babel} - [2008/07/08 v3.8m % + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % The Babel package] -\ifx\LdfInit\@undefined\input babel.def\relax\fi -\DeclareOption{acadian}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{albanian}{\input{albanian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\input{dutch.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{american}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{australian}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{austrian}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{indon}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\input{bahasai.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{malay}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\input{bahasam.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{basque}{\input{basque.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{brazil}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{breton}{\input{breton.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{british}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{bulgarian}{\input{bulgarian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{canadian}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{canadien}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{catalan}{\input{catalan.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{croatian}{\input{croatian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{czech}{\input{czech.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{danish}{\input{danish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{dutch}{\input{dutch.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{english}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\input{esperanto.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{estonian}{\input{estonian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{finnish}{\input{finnish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{francais}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{frenchb}{\input{frenchb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{french}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}% -\DeclareOption{galician}{\input{galician.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{german}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{germanb}{\input{germanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{greek}{\input{greek.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{% - \input{greek.ldf}% - \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}} -\DeclareOption{hebrew}{% - \input{rlbabel.def}% - \input{hebrew.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\input{magyar.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{icelandic}{\input{icelandic.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{interlingua}{\input{interlingua.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{irish}{\input{irish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{italian}{\input{italian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{latin}{\input{latin.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\input{lsorbian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{magyar}{\input{magyar.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{norsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{samin}{\input{samin.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{polish}{\input{polish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{portuges}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\input{portuges.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{romanian}{\input{romanian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{russian}{\input{russianb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{scottish}{\input{scottish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{serbian}{\input{serbian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{slovak}{\input{slovak.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{slovene}{\input{slovene.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{spanish}{\input{spanish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{swedish}{\input{swedish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{turkish}{\input{turkish.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\input{ukraineb.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\input{usorbian.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{welsh}{\input{welsh.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\input{english.ldf}} -\DeclareOption*{% - \InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.ldf}{}{% - \PackageError{babel}{% - Language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf not found}{% - Maybe you misspelled the language option?}}% - } -\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}{% - \typeout{*************************************^^J% - * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J% - *}% - }{} +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{debug} + {\let\bbl@tempa\relax} + {\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}}% +\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else + \input switch.def\relax +\fi +\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}} +\def\bbl@add#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}% + {\def#1{#2}}% + {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}} +\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}% +\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1} +\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1} +\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{% + \global\expandafter\bbl@add\csname#1.ldf-h@@k\endcsname}% +\@ifpackagewith{babel}{base}{% + \DeclareOption*{\bbl@patterns{\CurrentOption}}% + \DeclareOption{base}{}% + \ProcessOptions + \global\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\relax + \global\expandafter\let\csname ver@babel.sty\endcsname\relax + \global\let\@ifl@ter@@\@ifl@ter + \def\@ifl@ter#1#2#3#4#5{\global\let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@@}% + \endinput}{}% +\bbl@csarg\let{tempa\expandafter}\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname +\def\bbl@tempb#1.#2{% + #1\ifx\@empty#2\else,\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempb#2\fi}% +\def\bbl@tempd#1.#2\@nnil{% + \ifx\@empty#2% + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}% + \else + \in@{=}{#1}\ifin@ + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1.#2}% + \else + \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}% + \bbl@csarg\edef{mod@#1}{\bbl@tempb#2}% + \fi + \fi} +\let\bbl@tempc\@empty +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempa{% + \expandafter\bbl@tempd\bbl@tempa.\@empty\@nnil} +\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\bbl@tempc \DeclareOption{activeacute}{} \DeclareOption{activegrave}{} \DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{} +\DeclareOption{debug}{} +\DeclareOption{noconfigs}{} +\DeclareOption{showlanguages}{} +\DeclareOption{shorthands=off}{\bbl@tempa shorthands=\bbl@tempa} +\DeclareOption{strings}{\def\bbl@opt@strings{\BabelStringsDefault}} +\DeclareOption{strings=encoded}{\let\bbl@opt@strings\relax} +\DeclareOption{safe=none}{\let\bbl@opt@safe\@empty} +\DeclareOption{safe=bib}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{B}} +\DeclareOption{safe=ref}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{R}} +\DeclareOption{math=active}{} +\DeclareOption{math=normal}{\def\bbl@mathnormal{\noexpand\textormath}} +\def\BabelStringsDefault{generic} +\let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@config\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@main\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil +\let\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil +\def\bbl@tempa#1=#2\bbl@tempa{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname\@nnil + \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname{#2}% + \else + \bbl@error{% + Bad option `#1=#2'. Either you have misspelled the\\% + key or there is a previous setting of `#1'}{% + Valid keys are `shorthands', `config', `strings', `main',\\% + `headfoot', `safe', `math'} + \fi} +\let\bbl@language@opts\@empty +\DeclareOption*{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string=}{\CurrentOption}% + \ifin@ + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa + \else + \edef\bbl@language@opts{% + \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi + \CurrentOption}% + \fi} \ProcessOptions* +\def\bbl@sh@string#1{% + \ifx#1\@empty\else + \ifx#1t\string~% + \else\ifx#1c\string,% + \else\string#1% + \fi\fi + \expandafter\bbl@sh@string + \fi} +\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#2}% +\else\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#3}% +\else + \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string#1}{\bbl@opt@shorthands}% + \ifin@ + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \fi} + \edef\bbl@opt@shorthands{% + \expandafter\bbl@sh@string\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty}% + + \bbl@ifshorthand{'}% + {\PassOptionsToPackage{activeacute}{babel}}{} + \bbl@ifshorthand{`}% + {\PassOptionsToPackage{activegrave}{babel}}{} +\fi\fi +\ifx\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil\else + \g@addto@macro\@resetactivechars{% + \set@typeset@protect + \expandafter\select@language@x\expandafter{\bbl@opt@headfoot}% + \let\protect\noexpand} +\fi +\@ifundefined{bbl@opt@safe}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}}{} +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else + \edef\bbl@language@opts{% + \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi + \bbl@opt@main} +\fi +\ifx\bbl@languages\@undefined\else + \begingroup + \catcode`\^^I=12 + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{showlanguages}{% + \begingroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{\wlog{#2^^I#1^^I#3^^I#4}}% + \wlog{<*languages>}% + \bbl@languages + \wlog{</languages>}% + \endgroup}{} + \endgroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum#2=\z@ + \gdef\bbl@nulllanguage{#1}% + \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}% + \fi}% + \bbl@languages +\fi +\let\bbl@afterlang\relax +\let\BabelModifiers\relax +\let\bbl@loaded\@empty +\def\bbl@load@language#1{% + \InputIfFileExists{#1.ldf}% + {\edef\bbl@loaded{\CurrentOption + \ifx\bbl@loaded\@empty\else,\bbl@loaded\fi}% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@afterlang + \csname\CurrentOption.ldf-h@@k\endcsname + \expandafter\let\expandafter\BabelModifiers + \csname bbl@mod@\CurrentOption\endcsname}% + {\bbl@error{% + Unknow option `\CurrentOption'. Either you misspelled it\\% + or the language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf was not found}{% + Valid options are: shorthands=..., KeepShorthandsActive,\\% + activeacute, activegrave, noconfigs, safe=, main=, math=\\% + headfoot=, strings=, config=, or a language name.}}} +\DeclareOption{acadian}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\bbl@load@language{dutch}} +\DeclareOption{american}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{australian}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{austrian}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}} +\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{brazil}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{british}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{canadian}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{canadien}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{francais}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}} +\DeclareOption{french}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}% +\DeclareOption{german}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}} +\DeclareOption{hebrew}{% + \input{rlbabel.def}% + \bbl@load@language{hebrew}} +\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\bbl@load@language{magyar}} +\DeclareOption{indon}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}} +\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{lsorbian}} +\DeclareOption{malay}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}} +\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}} +\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}} +\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\bbl@load@language{norsk}} +\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{% + \bbl@load@language{greek}% + \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}} +\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}} +\DeclareOption{russian}{\bbl@load@language{russianb}} +\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\bbl@load@language{ukraineb}} +\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{usorbian}} +\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}} +\ifx\bbl@opt@config\@nnil + \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}{}% + {\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + {}}% +\else + \InputIfFileExists{\bbl@opt@config.cfg}% + {\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file \bbl@opt@config.cfg used^^J% + *}}% + {\bbl@error{% + Local config file `\bbl@opt@config.cfg' not found}{% + Perhaps you misspelled it.}}% +\fi +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@language@opts{% + \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}% + {\edef\bbl@tempb{% + \noexpand\DeclareOption + {\bbl@tempa}% + {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}% + \bbl@tempb}% + \@empty} +\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\@classoptionslist{% + \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}% + {\IfFileExists{\bbl@tempa.ldf}% + {\edef\bbl@tempb{% + \noexpand\DeclareOption + {\bbl@tempa}% + {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}% + \bbl@tempb}% + \@empty}% + \@empty} +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else + \expandafter + \let\expandafter\bbl@loadmain\csname ds@\bbl@opt@main\endcsname + \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{} +\fi +\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{% + \bbl@ifsamestring\CurrentOption{#1}{\global\bbl@add\bbl@afterlang}{}} +\DeclareOption*{} +\ProcessOptions* +\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil + \edef\bbl@tempa{\@classoptionslist,\bbl@language@opts} + \let\bbl@tempc\@empty + \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{% + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempb,}{,\bbl@loaded,}% + \ifin@\edef\bbl@tempc{\bbl@tempb}\fi} + \def\bbl@tempa#1,#2\@nnil{\def\bbl@tempb{#1}} + \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@loaded,\@nnil + \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc\else + \bbl@warning{% + Last declared language option is `\bbl@tempc,\\% + but the last processed one was `\bbl@tempb'.\\% + The main language cannot be set as both a global\\% + and a package option. Use `main=\bbl@tempc' as\\% + option. Reported}% + \fi +\else + \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{\bbl@loadmain} + \ExecuteOptions{\bbl@opt@main} + \DeclareOption*{} + \ProcessOptions* +\fi +\def\AfterBabelLanguage{% + \bbl@error + {Too late for \string\AfterBabelLanguage}% + {Languages have been loaded, so I can do nothing}} \ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined - \PackageError{babel}{% + \bbl@error{% You haven't specified a language option}{% - You need to specify a language, either as a global - option\MessageBreak + You need to specify a language, either as a global option\\% or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space - command; \MessageBreak + command;\\% You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.} - \input{babel.def} \fi -\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{% - \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}% - \immediate\write15{% - \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}% - [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day} - \space generated font description file]^^J - \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J - \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J - }% - \closeout15 - } -\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{% - \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{% - \let\bbl@tempa\pageref - \let\pageref\org@pageref - \@safe@activestrue - \org@ifthenelse{#1}{% - \let\pageref\bbl@tempa - \@safe@activesfalse - #2}{% - \let\pageref\bbl@tempa - \@safe@activesfalse - #3}% - }% - }{}% - } -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{% - \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{% - \@safe@activestrue - \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}% - \@safe@activesfalse}% - \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{% - \@safe@activestrue - \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}% - \@safe@activesfalse}% - \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{% - \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa} - }{}% - } -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}% - {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax - \else - \makeatletter - \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother - \fi}% - {}} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}% - {}% - {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% - \languageshorthands{system}}% - }% -} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{% - \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}} %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty index d7a49e98aa6..556237aacd0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bahasa') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 5cfe93aa9b6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,137 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `bahasai.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% bahasa.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{bahasa} - [2008/03/15 v1.0l Bahasa Indonesia support from the babel system] -%% File `bahasa.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Bahasa Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de) -%% Please report errors to: J"org Knappen -%% knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined - \ifx\l@indon\@undefined - \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined - \ifx\l@malay\@undefined - \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bahasa Indonesia} - \adddialect\l@bahasa0\relax - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@meyalu - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@malay - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasam - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@indonesian - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@indon - \fi - \else - \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasai - \fi -\fi -\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname - \l@bahasa -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pendahuluan}% - \def\refname{Pustaka}% - \def\abstractname{Ringkasan}% (sometime it's called 'intisari' - % or 'ikhtisar') - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% - \def\chaptername{Bab}% - \def\appendixname{Lampiran}% - \def\contentsname{Daftar Isi}% - \def\listfigurename{Daftar Gambar}% - \def\listtablename{Daftar Tabel}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Gambar}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Bagian}% - \def\enclname{Lampiran}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{Kepada}% - \def\pagename{Halaman}% - \def\seename{lihat}% - \def\alsoname{lihat juga}% - \def\proofname{Bukti}% - \def\glossaryname{Daftar Istilah}% - } -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januari\or Pebruari\or Maret\or April\or Mei\or Juni\or - Juli\or Agustus\or September\or Oktober\or Nopember\or Desember\fi - \space \number\year}} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `bahasai.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index eb737cb2109..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,140 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `bahasam.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% bahasam.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{bahasam} - [2008/01/27 v1.0k Bahasa Malaysia support from the babel system] -%% File `bahasam.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Bahasa Malaysia Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de) -%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008 -%% by Bob Margolis, (bob.margolis at ntlworld.com) -%% [With help from Awangku Merali Pengiran Mohamed (Sarawak)] -%% Please report errors to: Bob Margolis -%% bob.margolis at ntlworld.com -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@malay\@undefined - \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined - \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined - \ifx\l@indon\@undefined - \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bahasa Malaysia} - \adddialect\l@malay0\relax - \else - \let\l@malay\l@indonesian - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@indon - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasai - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasa - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@bahasam - \fi - \else - \let\l@malay\l@meyalu - \fi -\fi -\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname - \l@malay -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Prakata}% - \def\refname{Rujukan}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrak}% (sometime it's called 'intisari' - % or 'ikhtisar') - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% - \def\chaptername{Bab}% - \def\appendixname{Lampiran}% - \def\contentsname{Kandungan}% - \def\listfigurename{Senarai Gambar}% - \def\listtablename{Senarai Jadual}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Gambar}% - \def\tablename{Jadual}% - \def\partname{Bahagian}% - \def\enclname{Lampiran}% - \def\ccname{sk}% (short form for 'Salinan Kepada') - \def\headtoname{Kepada}% - \def\pagename{Halaman}% - \def\seename{sila rujuk}% - \def\alsoname{rujuk juga}% - \def\proofname{Bukti}% - \def\glossaryname{Istilah}% - } -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januari\or Februari\or Mac\or April\or Mei\or Jun\or - Julai\or Ogos\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Disember\fi - \space \number\year}} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `bahasam.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty index 5f16558cad3..4fde909d21a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bahasam') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 62163a65297..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `basque.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% basque.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{basque} - [2005/03/29 v1.0f Basque support from the babel system] -%% File `Basque.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Basque Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2005 -%% by Juan M. Aguirregabiria -%% Please report errors to: Juan M. Aguirregabiria <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> -%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl>) -\LdfInit{basque}\captionsbasque -\ifx\l@basque\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Basque} - \adddialect\l@basque0 -\fi -\addto\captionsbasque{% - \def\prefacename{Hitzaurrea}% - \def\refname{Erreferentziak}% - \def\abstractname{Laburpena}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitulua}% - \def\appendixname{Eranskina}% - \def\contentsname{Gaien Aurkibidea}% - \def\listfigurename{Irudien Zerrenda}% - \def\listtablename{Taulen Zerrenda}% - \def\indexname{Kontzeptuen Aurkibidea}% - \def\figurename{Irudia}% - \def\tablename{Taula}% - \def\partname{Atala}% - \def\enclname{Erantsia}% - \def\ccname{Kopia}% - \def\headtoname{Nori}% - \def\pagename{Orria}% - \def\seename{Ikusi}% - \def\alsoname{Ikusi, halaber}% - \def\proofname{Frogapena}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosarioa}% - }% -\def\datebasque{% - \def\today{\number\year.eko\space\ifcase\month\or - urtarrilaren\or otsailaren\or martxoaren\or apirilaren\or - maiatzaren\or ekainaren\or uztailaren\or abuztuaren\or - irailaren\or urriaren\or azaroaren\or - abenduaren\fi~\number\day}} -\addto\extrasbasque{\languageshorthands{basque}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\initiate@active@char{~} -\addto\extrasbasque{% - \bbl@activate{"}% - \bbl@activate{~}} -\addto\noextrasbasque{ - \bbl@deactivate{"}\bbl@deactivate{~}} -\addto\extrasbasque{% - \babel@save\"% - \babel@save\~% - \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}% - \def\~{\protect\@tilde}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\let\dieresia\" -\let\texttilde\~ -\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined - \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens} - \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens} -\else - \edef\bbl@next{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@next - \let\@umlaut\dieresia - \let\@tilde\texttilde - \else - \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space - instead of T1.} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens} - \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens} - \fi -\fi -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} - \declare@shorthand{basque}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{~n}{\textormath{\~n}{\@tilde n}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{~N}{\textormath{\~N}{\@tilde N}} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"-}{% - \nobreak\discretionary{-}{-}{-}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{basque}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\ldf@finish{basque} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `basque.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty index 21d65f169c5..58cf1784e79 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `basque') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index bc70cff0643..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `breton.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% breton.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{breton} - [2005/03/29 v1.0h Breton support from the babel system] -%% File `breton.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Breton Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005 -%% by Christian Rolland -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{breton}\captionsbreton -\ifx\l@breton\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Breton} - \adddialect\l@breton0\fi -\addto\captionsbreton{% - \def\prefacename{Rakskrid}% - \def\refname{Daveenno\`u}% - \def\abstractname{Dvierra\~n}% - \def\bibname{Lennadurezh}% - \def\chaptername{Pennad}% - \def\appendixname{Stagadenn}% - \def\contentsname{Taolenn}% - \def\listfigurename{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% - \def\listtablename{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% - \def\indexname{Meneger}% - \def\figurename{Figurenn}% - \def\tablename{Taolenn}% - \def\partname{Lodenn}% - \def\enclname{Diello\`u kevret}% - \def\ccname{Eilskrid da}% - \def\headtoname{evit} - \def\pagename{Pajenn}% - \def\seename{Gwelout}% - \def\alsoname{Gwelout ivez}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -\def\datebreton{% - \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$\else - \number\day\fi \space a\space viz\space\ifcase\month\or - Genver\or C'hwevrer\or Meurzh\or Ebrel\or Mae\or Mezheven\or - Gouere\or Eost\or Gwengolo\or Here\or Du\or Kerzu\fi - \space\number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{;} -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{?} -\addto\extrasbreton{\languageshorthands{breton}} -\addto\extrasbreton{% - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}} -\addto\noextrasbreton{% - \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}} -\addto\extrasbreton{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasbreton{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{;}{% - \ifmmode - \string;\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string;\space - \fi}% -\declare@shorthand{breton}{:}{% - \ifmmode\string:\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi - \fi - \string:\space - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{!}{% - \ifmmode\string!\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi - \fi - \string!\space - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{breton}{?}{% - \ifmmode - \string?\space - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip - \kern\fontdimen2\font - \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font - \fi - \fi - \string?\space - \fi} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{OT1}{64} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{OT1}{92} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{T1}{16} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\boi}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{OT1}{94} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{2} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{OT1}{126} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{3} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{OT1} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{23} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{6} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\degre}{OT1} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\^}{OT1}{i}{\^\i} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\"\i}} -\def\kentan{1\/${}^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$} -\def\eil{2\/${}^{\rm l}$} -\def\re{\/${}^{\rm re}$} -\def\trede{3\re} -\def\pevare{4\re} -\def\vet{\/${}^{\rm vet}$} -\def\pempvet{5\vet} -\ldf@finish{breton} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `breton.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty index 3efbc192e83..8c9cf8cf920 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `breton') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty index d65787f0662..6e89fd173cf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `british') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 389e8588be0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,365 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `bulgarian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% bulgarian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{bulgarian} - [2008/03/21 v1.0g Bulgarian support from the babel system] -%% File `bulgarian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989-2008 -%% by Johannes Braams,TeXniek -%% Bulgarian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995-2008 -%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> -%% Johannes Braams,TeXniek -%% Adapted from russianb.dtx -%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> -%% Please report errors to:J.L.Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit{bulgarian}{captionsbulgarian} -\ifx\l@bulgarian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Bulgarian} - \adddialect\l@bulgarian0 -\fi -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete. \MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files: \MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def, \MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Bulgarian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\bulgarianhyphenmins - \language\l@bulgarian} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english} -\let\Bul\Bulgarian -\let\Bg\Bulgarian -\let\cyrillictext\Bulgarian -\let\cyr\Bulgarian -\let\Eng\English -\def\selectenglanguage{\selectlanguage{english}} -\def\selectbglanguage{\selectlanguage{bulgarian}} -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else - \def\@Alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or - K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or - X\or Y\or Z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or - x\or y\or z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}% - \let\@Alph\@Alph@eng - \let\@alph\@alph@eng - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} -\fi -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12 -\def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax - "0000\@nil#1} -\def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{% -\ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax -\ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi - \fi} -\@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi -\@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi -\@tempa\Omega -\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent} -\expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil -\ifx\@tempb\@tempc -\def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}% -\def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}% -\def\do#1"#2{} -\def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil - \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF - \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}% - \fi} -\@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave -\@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar -\fi -\endgroup -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% -\def\reserved@a{LWN}% -\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else -\def\reserved@a{OT2}% -\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else -\PackageWarning{babel}% -{No input encoding specified for Bulgarian language}\fi\fi} -\let\lat\latintext -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -\addto\captionsbulgarian{% - \def\prefacename{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrg\cyro\cyrv\cyro\cyrr}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrb\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrk\cyrt}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro\cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\chaptername{% - {\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}% - \def\appendixname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\listfigurename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% - \def\listtablename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% - \def\indexname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrz\cyrb\cyru\cyrch\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}% - \def\authorname{% - {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}% - \def\figurename{% - {\cyr\CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\tablename{% - {\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}% - \def\partname{% - {\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt}}% - \def\enclname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\ccname{% - {\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\headtoname{% - {\cyr\CYRZ\cyra}}% - \def\pagename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrt\cyrr.}}% - \def\seename{% - {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.}}% - \def\alsoname{% - {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.\ \cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrshch\cyro\ \cyri}}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- Needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -%% -\def\datebulgarian{% - \def\month@bulgarian{\ifcase\month\or - \cyrya\cyrn\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\or - \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrishrt\or - \cyryu\cyrn\cyri\or - \cyryu\cyrl\cyri\or - \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrp\cyrt\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyro\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrn\cyro\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or - \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\fi}% - \def\month@Roman{\expandafter\@Roman\month}% - \def\today{\number\day~\month@bulgarian\ \number\year~\cyrg.}% - \def\todayRoman{\number\day.\,\month@Roman.\,\number\year~\cyrg.}% -} -\def\Romannumeral#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}} -\def\todayRoman{\number\day.\Romannumeral{\month}.\number\year~\cyrg.} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\cyrillictext} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\latintext} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\languageshorthands{bulgarian}} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019} - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"|}{% -\textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% -\allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"-}{% - \def\bulgarian@sh@tmp{% - \if\bulgarian@sh@next-\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% - \futurelet\bulgarian@sh@next\bulgarian@sh@tmp} -\def\bulgarian@sh@hyphen{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\def\bulgarian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi -\cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined -\def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\fi -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\def\enumBul{\let\@Alph\@Alph@bul \let\@alph\@alph@bul} -\def\enumEng{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng} -\def\enumLat{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng} -\addto\extrasbulgarian{\enumBul} -\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\enumLat} -\def\@Alph@bul#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or \CYRB\or \CYRV\or \CYRG\or \CYRD\or \CYRE\or \CYRZH\or - \CYRZ\or \CYRI\or \CYRK\or \CYRL\or \CYRM\or \CYRN\or \CYRO\or - \CYRP\or \CYRR\or \CYRS\or \CYRT\or \CYRU\or \CYRF\or \CYRH\or - \CYRC\or \CYRCH\or \CYRSH\or \CYRSHCH\or \CYRYU\or \CYRYA\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\def\@Alph@eng#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or - N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or Y\or Z\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\def\@alph@bul#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or \cyrb\or \cyrv\or \cyrg\or \cyrd\or \cyre\or \cyrzh\or - \cyrz\or \cyri\or \cyrk\or \cyrl\or \cyrm\or \cyrn\or \cyro\or - \cyrp\or \cyrr\or \cyrs\or \cyrt\or \cyru\or \cyrf\or \cyrh\or - \cyrc\or \cyrch\or \cyrsh\or \cyrshch\or \cyryu\or \cyrya\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\def\@alph@eng#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or - n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else - \@ctrerr\fi - } -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -\ldf@finish{bulgarian} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `bulgarian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty index 1e79966e6e6..01a88fccdbb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bulgarian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 05edbcd2f89..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,263 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `catalan.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% catalan.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{catalan} - [2005/03/29 v2.2p Catalan support from the babel system] -%% File `catalan.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Catalan Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2005 -%% by Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be> -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel at braams.cistron.nl -%% -\LdfInit{catalan}\captionscatalan -\ifx\l@catalan\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Catalan} - \adddialect\l@catalan0 -\fi -\providehyphenmins{catalan}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\captionscatalan{% - \def\prefacename{Pr\`oleg}% - \def\refname{Refer\`encies}% - \def\abstractname{Resum}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tol}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\`endix}% - \def\contentsname{\'Index}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Index de figures}% - \def\listtablename{\'Index de taules}% - \def\indexname{\'Index alfab\`etic}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Taula}% - \def\partname{Part}% - \def\enclname{Adjunt}% - \def\ccname{C\`opies a}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{P\`agina}% - \def\seename{Vegeu}% - \def\alsoname{Vegeu tamb\'e}% - \def\proofname{Demostraci\'o}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossari}% -} -\def\datecatalan{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - de gener\or de febrer\or de mar\c{c}\or d'abril\or de maig\or - de juny\or de juliol\or d'agost\or de setembre\or d'octubre\or - de novembre\or de desembre\fi - \space de~\number\year}} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \lccode`'=`'} -\addto\noextrascatalan{% - \lccode`'=0} -\addto\extrascatalan{\languageshorthands{catalan}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{"}} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \AtBeginDocument{% - \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi} - \initiate@active@char{`}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{`}}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \initiate@active@char{'}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{'}}% - }{} -\addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{`}}}{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{'}}}{} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \babel@save\"% - \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}}% -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \babel@save\`% - \addto\extrascatalan{\def\`{\protect\@grave}} - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \babel@save\'% - \addto\extrascatalan{\def\'{\protect\@acute}} - }{} -\let\dieresis\" -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{\let\textgrave\`}{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\let\textacute\'}{} -\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined - \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} -\else - \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one - \let\@umlaut\dieresis - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \let\@acute\textacute}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \let\@grave\textgrave}{} - \else - \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space - instead of T1.} - \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.} - \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{} - \fi -\fi -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"i}{\textormath{\@umlaut\i}{\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"l}{\lgem{}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"u}{\textormath{\@umlaut u}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"I}{\textormath{\@umlaut I}{\ddot I}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"L}{\Lgem{}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"U}{\textormath{\@umlaut U}{\ddot U}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"c}{\textormath{\c c}{^{\prime} c}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"C}{\textormath{\c C}{^{\prime} C}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{% - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`a}{\textormath{\@grave a}{\grave a}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`e}{\textormath{\@grave e}{\grave e}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`o}{\textormath{\@grave o}{\grave o}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`A}{\textormath{\@grave A}{\grave A}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`E}{\textormath{\@grave E}{\grave E}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`O}{\textormath{\@grave O}{\grave O}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{``}{\textquotedblleft}%'' - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'a}{\textormath{\@acute a}{^{\prime} a}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'e}{\textormath{\@acute e}{^{\prime} e}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'i}{\textormath{\@acute\i{}}{^{\prime} i}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'o}{\textormath{\@acute o}{^{\prime} o}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'u}{\textormath{\@acute u}{^{\prime} u}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'A}{\textormath{\@acute A}{^{\prime} A}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'E}{\textormath{\@acute E}{^{\prime} E}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'I}{\textormath{\@acute I}{^{\prime} I}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'O}{\textormath{\@acute O}{^{\prime} O}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'U}{\textormath{\@acute U}{^{\prime} U}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'|}{% - \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}{^{\prime}}} - \declare@shorthand{catalan}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} - }{} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\addto\extrascatalan{% - \babel@save{\-}% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -\newdimen\leftllkern \newdimen\rightllkern \newdimen\raiselldim -\def\lgem{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname l% - \else - \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt% - \setbox0\hbox{l}\setbox1\hbox{l\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}% - \advance\raiselldim by \the\fontdimen5\the\font - \advance\raiselldim by -\ht2% - \leftllkern=-.25\wd0% - \advance\leftllkern by \wd1% - \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0% - \rightllkern=-.25\wd0% - \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1% - \advance\rightllkern by \wd0% - \allowhyphens\discretionary{l-}{l}% - {\hbox{l}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}% - \kern\rightllkern\hbox{l}}\allowhyphens - \fi - } -\def\Lgem{% - \ifmmode - \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname L% - \else - \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt% - \setbox0\hbox{L}\setbox1\hbox{L\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}% - \advance\raiselldim by .5\ht0% - \advance\raiselldim by -.5\ht2% - \leftllkern=-.125\wd0% - \advance\leftllkern by \wd1% - \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0% - \rightllkern=-\wd0% - \divide\rightllkern by 6% - \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1% - \advance\rightllkern by \wd0% - \allowhyphens\discretionary{L-}{L}% - {\hbox{L}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}% - \kern\rightllkern\hbox{L}}\allowhyphens - \fi - } -\AtBeginDocument{% - \let\lslash\l - \let\Lslash\L - \DeclareRobustCommand\l{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@l\lslash} - \DeclareRobustCommand\L{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@L\Lslash}} -\def\bbl@l#1#2{\lgem} -\def\bbl@L#1#2{\Lgem} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}} -\ldf@finish{catalan} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `catalan.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty index 94433d4ffcb..a4f15610c4c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `catalan') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def deleted file mode 100644 index c5c563b5738..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `cp1255.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `cp1255') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. - \ProvidesFile{cp1255.def} - [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file] -%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\makeatletter -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\newsheqel} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\newsheqel} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand} -\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}} -\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}} -\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}} -%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the -%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file. -\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase} -\DeclareInputText{131}{\textflorin} -\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase} -\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots} -\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag} -\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag} -\DeclareInputText{136}{\^{}} -\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand} -\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft} -\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft} -\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright} -\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft} -\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright} -\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet} -\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash} -\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash} -\DeclareInputText{152}{\~{}} -\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark} -\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright} -\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace} -\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent} -\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds} -\DeclareInputText{164}{\newsheqel} -\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen} -\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar} -\DeclareInputText{167}{\S} -\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}} -\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright} -\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft} -\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot} -\DeclareInputText{173}{\-} -\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered} -\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}} -\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree} -\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm} -\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior} -\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}} -\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu} -\DeclareInputText{182}{\P} -\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered} -\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior} -\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright} -\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter} -\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf} -\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters} -\DeclareInputText{192}{\hebsheva} -\DeclareInputText{193}{\hebhatafsegol} -\DeclareInputText{194}{\hebhatafpatah} -\DeclareInputText{195}{\hebhatafqamats} -\DeclareInputText{196}{\hebhiriq} -\DeclareInputText{197}{\hebtsere} -\DeclareInputText{198}{\hebsegol} -\DeclareInputText{199}{\hebpatah} -\DeclareInputText{200}{\hebqamats} -\DeclareInputText{201}{\hebholam} -\DeclareInputText{203}{\hebqubuts} -\DeclareInputText{204}{\hebdagesh} -\DeclareInputText{205}{\hebmeteg} -\DeclareInputText{206}{\hebmaqaf} -\DeclareInputText{207}{\hebrafe} -\DeclareInputText{208}{\hebpaseq} -\DeclareInputText{209}{\hebshindot} -\DeclareInputText{210}{\hebsindot} -\DeclareInputText{211}{\hebsofpasuq} -\DeclareInputText{212}{\hebdoublevav} -\DeclareInputText{213}{\hebvavyod} -\DeclareInputText{214}{\hebdoubleyod} -\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef} -\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet} -\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel} -\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet} -\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe} -\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav} -\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin} -\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet} -\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet} -\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod} -\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf} -\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf} -\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed} -\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem} -\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem} -\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun} -\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun} -\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh} -\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin} -\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe} -\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe} -\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi} -\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi} -\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof} -\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh} -\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin} -\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav} -\DeclareInputText{253}{\lefttorightmark} -\DeclareInputText{254}{\righttoleftmark} -\makeatother -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `cp1255.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def deleted file mode 100644 index 3c3c2f0b48d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `cp862.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `cp862') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. - \ProvidesFile{cp862.def} - [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file] -%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\makeatletter -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textpeseta}{Pt} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textblacksquare} - {\vrule \@width .3em \@height .4em \@depth -.1em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen} - {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen} -\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}} -\providecommand{\mathordmasculine}{{^o}} -\providecommand{\mathordfeminine}{{^a}} -%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the -%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file. -\DeclareInputText{128}{\hebalef} -\DeclareInputText{129}{\hebbet} -\DeclareInputText{130}{\hebgimel} -\DeclareInputText{131}{\hebdalet} -\DeclareInputText{132}{\hebhe} -\DeclareInputText{133}{\hebvav} -\DeclareInputText{134}{\hebzayin} -\DeclareInputText{135}{\hebhet} -\DeclareInputText{136}{\hebtet} -\DeclareInputText{137}{\hebyod} -\DeclareInputText{138}{\hebfinalkaf} -\DeclareInputText{139}{\hebkaf} -\DeclareInputText{140}{\heblamed} -\DeclareInputText{141}{\hebfinalmem} -\DeclareInputText{142}{\hebmem} -\DeclareInputText{143}{\hebfinalnun} -\DeclareInputText{144}{\hebnun} -\DeclareInputText{145}{\hebsamekh} -\DeclareInputText{146}{\hebayin} -\DeclareInputText{147}{\hebfinalpe} -\DeclareInputText{148}{\hebpe} -\DeclareInputText{149}{\hebfinaltsadi} -\DeclareInputText{150}{\hebtsadi} -\DeclareInputText{151}{\hebqof} -\DeclareInputText{152}{\hebresh} -\DeclareInputText{153}{\hebshin} -\DeclareInputText{154}{\hebtav} -\DeclareInputText{155}{\textcent} -\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds} -\DeclareInputText{157}{\textyen} -\DeclareInputText{158}{\textpeseta} -\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin} -\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a} -\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i} -\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o} -\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u} -\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n} -\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N} -\DeclareInputMath{166}{\mathordfeminine} -\DeclareInputMath{167}{\mathordmasculine} -\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown} -\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot} -\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf} -\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter} -\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown} -\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft} -\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright} -\DeclareInputMath{224}{\alpha} -\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss} -\DeclareInputMath{226}{\Gamma} -\DeclareInputMath{227}{\pi} -\DeclareInputMath{228}{\Sigma} -\DeclareInputMath{229}{\sigma} -\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu} -\DeclareInputMath{231}{\tau} -\DeclareInputMath{232}{\Phi} -\DeclareInputMath{233}{\Theta} -\DeclareInputMath{234}{\Omega} -\DeclareInputMath{235}{\delta} -\DeclareInputMath{236}{\infty} -\DeclareInputMath{237}{\phi} -\DeclareInputMath{238}{\varepsilon} -\DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap} -\DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv} -\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm} -\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge} -\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le} -\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div} -\DeclareInputMath{247}{\approx} -\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree} -\DeclareInputText{249}{\textperiodcentered} -\DeclareInputText{250}{\textbullet} -\DeclareInputMath{251}{\surd} -\DeclareInputMath{252}{\mathnsuperior} -\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior} -\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare} -\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace} -\makeatother -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `cp862.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 8f912ec77ce..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `croatian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% croatian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{croatian} - [2005/03/29 v1.3l Croatian support from the babel system] -%% File `croatian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{croatian}\captionscroatian -\ifx\l@croatian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Croatian} - \adddialect\l@croatian0\fi -\addto\captionscroatian{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografija}% - \def\chaptername{Poglavlje}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatak}% - \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}% - \def\listfigurename{Popis slika}% - \def\listtablename{Popis tablica}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tablica}% - \def\partname{Dio}% - \def\enclname{Prilozi}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prima}% - \def\pagename{Stranica}% - \def\seename{Vidjeti}% - \def\alsoname{Vidjeti i}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Kazalo}% - }% -\def\datecroatian{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - sije\v{c}nja\or velja\v{c}e\or o\v{z}ujka\or travnja\or svibnja\or - lipnja\or srpnja\or kolovoza\or rujna\or listopada\or studenog\or - prosinca\fi \space \number\year.}} -\addto\extrascroatian{} -\addto\noextrascroatian{} -\ldf@finish{croatian} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `croatian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty index a42823dbe5d..7cdf2051db8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `croatian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 1c4a22186a5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,452 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `czech.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% czech.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{czech} - [2008/07/06 v3.1a Czech support from the babel system] -%% File `czech.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008 -%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz) -%% -%% Czech Language Definition File -%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik -%% babel at tesarici.cz -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@czech\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Czech} - \adddialect\l@czech0\fi -\def\cs@iltw@{IL2} -\newif\ifcs@splithyphens -\cs@splithyphensfalse -\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined - \let\cs@compat@plain\relax - \message{csplain compatibility mode} -\else - \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{% - \let\cs@compat@latex\relax - \message{cslatex compatibility mode}} -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \ProvidesPackage{czech}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Czech style] - \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}} - \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}} - \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}} - \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse} - \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue} - \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax} - \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax} - \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax} - \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@} - \ProcessOptions - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \input il2enc.def - \fi - \def\CurrentOption{czech} -\fi -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{P\v{r}edmluva}% - \def\refname{Reference}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitola}% - \def\appendixname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}% - \def\contentsname{Obsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% - \def\listtablename{Seznam tabulek}% - \def\indexname{Rejst\v{r}\'{\i}k}% - \def\figurename{Obr\'azek}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{\v{C}\'ast}% - \def\enclname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}% - \def\ccname{Na v\v{e}dom\'{\i}}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strana}% - \def\seename{viz}% - \def\alsoname{viz tak\'e}% - \def\proofname{D\r{u}kaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}% - }% -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or ledna\or \'unora\or - b\v{r}ezna\or dubna\or kv\v{e}tna\or \v{c}ervna\or \v{c}ervence\or - srpna\or z\'a\v{r}\'\i\or \v{r}\'{\i}jna\or listopadu\or - prosince\fi \space\number\year}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing - \languageshorthands{czech}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\q\let\q\v - \babel@save\w\let\w\r} -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\sq{'} - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{% - t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{% - d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}} -\def\lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em% - \else - l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}% - \fi} -\def\Lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}% - \else - L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}% - \fi} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s - \def\csprimeson{% - \catcode`\`\active \catcode`\'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s} - \def\csprimesoff{% - \catcode`\`12 \catcode`\'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s} - \begingroup\catcode`\`\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote} - \def\cs@openquote{% - \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq - \else \expandafter\clq - \fi}% - }\x - \begingroup\catcode`\'\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote} - {^\bgroup\prim@s}} - \def\cs@closequote{% - \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq - \else \expandafter\crq - \fi}% - }\x - \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= } - \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= } -\else - \initiate@active@char{"} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} - \expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"`}{\clqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"'}{\crqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"<}{\flqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{">}{\frqq} - \declare@shorthand{czech}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen} -\fi -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{% - \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}% - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne - \leavevmode - \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em - \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1} - {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1} - {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1} - {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi -\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes - \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=} - \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax} -\fi -\newcount\cs@wordlen -\begingroup\catcode`\-12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@hyphen{-} - \def\cs@endash{--} - \def\cs@emdash{---} - \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}} - \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@ - \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@} -}\x -\initiate@active@char{-} -\declare@shorthand{czech}{-}{% - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \ifhmode - \ifinner - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen - \fi} -\begingroup\catcode`\-\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n} - \def\cs@firsthyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen - \fi} - \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{% - \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n} - \def\cs@secondhyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash - \fi} -}\x -\def\cs@checkhyphen{% - \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\- - \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@ - \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword - \else - \cs@hyphen - \fi} -\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken} -\def\cs@gett@ken{% - \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}% - \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}% - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@examinetoken{% - \ifcat A\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifcat 0\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifx\char\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }% - \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}% - \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}% - \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}% - \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}% - \else - \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{% - \def\cs@token{#1}% - \ifx\cs@token\@empty - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }% - \else - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= } -\def\cs@addparam#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}} -\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=} -\def\cs@examinechar{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}} -\def\cs@checkcode#1{% - \ifnum0=#1 - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \else - \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne - \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen - \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}% - \else - \cs@splithyphen - \def\cs@next{\cs@word}% - \fi - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word} -\let\minus\cs@hyphen - -\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens} -\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens} -\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{czech}{split}{% - \addto\extrasczech{\cs@splitattr}} -\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax -\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}% - \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}% - \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \cs@deactivatehyphens - \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax - \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax} -\let\cs@looseness\looseness -\def\looseness{% - \ifcs@splithyphens - \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi - \cs@looseness} -\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else - \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption} - \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined - \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage - \def\selectlanguage{% - \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect - \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language - \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage - \else - \expandafter\selectlanguage - \fi} - \def\cs@selectlanguage{% - \cs@tempdisable{captions}% - \cs@tempdisable{date}% - \selectlanguage} - \def\cs@tempdisable#1{% - \def\@tempa{cs@#1}% - \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}% - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname - \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{% - \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname - \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname - \noexpand\@undefined}} - \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language - \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect - \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage - \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable - \fi -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined -\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else - \def\cs@check@enc{ - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble - \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined - \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined - \fi - \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined} - \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc} -\fi -\fi -\def\cs@undoiltw@{% - \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000 - \sfcode159=1000 - \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000 - \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000 - \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000 - \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000 - \uccode181=149 - \uccode185=153 - \uccode187=155 - \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0 - \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000 - \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000} -\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined -\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else - \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update - \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi - \cs@enc@update - \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language - \expandafter\ifx - \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename - \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi - \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax - \fi} -\fi\fi -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `czech.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty index a6291603982..d9ce4b85624 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `czech') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 98e36d4cdcf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `danish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% danish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{danish} - [2009/09/19 v1.3r Danish support from the babel system] -%% File `danish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit{danish}\captionsdanish -\ifx\l@danish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Danish} - \adddialect\l@danish0\fi -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\captionsdanish{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Litteratur}% - \def\abstractname{Resum\'e}% - \def\bibname{Litteratur}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Bilag}% - \def\contentsname{Indhold}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlagt}% - \def\ccname{Kopi til}% or Kopi sendt til - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Se}% - \def\alsoname{Se ogs{\aa}}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloseliste}% - }% -\def\datedanish{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or marts\or april\or maj\or juni\or - juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi - \space\number\year}} -\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasdanish{\languageshorthands{danish}} -\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{danish}{"/}{\textormath - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -\ldf@finish{danish} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `danish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty index 48cc01b3475..e8ccb844ebc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `danish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index af35926f37d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,186 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `dutch.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% dutch.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{dutch} - [2005/03/30 v3.8i Dutch support from the babel system] -%% File `dutch.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Dutch Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\def\bbl@tempa{dutch} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \ifx\l@dutch\undefined - \@nopatterns{Dutch} - \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined - \adddialect\l@dutch0 - \else - \adddialect\l@dutch\l@afrikaans - \fi - \fi - \begingroup - \catcode`\"\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def\captionsdutch{% - \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}% - \def\refname{Referenties}% - \def\abstractname{Samenvatting}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Hoofdstuk}% - \def\appendixname{B"ylage}% - \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgave}% - \def\listfigurename{L"yst van figuren}% - \def\listtablename{L"yst van tabellen}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Figuur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Deel}% - \def\enclname{B"ylage(n)}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{Aan}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{zie}% - \def\alsoname{zie ook}% - \def\proofname{Bew"ys}% - \def\glossaryname{Verklarende Woordenl"yst}% - } - }\x - \def\datedutch{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or mei\or juni\or - juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or november\or - december\fi - \space \number\year}} -\else - \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined - \@nopatterns{Afrikaans} - \ifx\l@dutch\undefined - \adddialect\l@afrikaans0 - \else - \adddialect\l@afrikaans\l@dutch - \fi - \fi - \def\captionsafrikaans{% - \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}% - \def\refname{Verwysings}% - \def\abstractname{Samevatting}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Hoofstuk}% - \def\appendixname{Bylae}% - \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgawe}% - \def\listfigurename{Lys van figure}% - \def\listtablename{Lys van tabelle}% - \def\indexname{Inhoud}% - \def\figurename{Figuur}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Deel}% - \def\enclname{Bylae(n)}% - \def\ccname{a.a.}% - \def\headtoname{Aan}% - \def\pagename{Bladsy}% - \def\seename{sien}% - \def\alsoname{sien ook}% - \def\proofname{Bewys}% - } - \def\dateafrikaans{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Januarie\or Februarie\or Maart\or April\or Mei\or Junie\or - Julie\or Augustus\or September\or Oktober\or November\or - Desember\fi - \space \number\year}} -\fi -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{dutch}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \umlautlow\umlautelow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{% - \umlauthigh} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\def\@trema#1{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{#1}{\"{#1}}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"a}{\textormath{\@trema a}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"e}{\textormath{\@trema e}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"i}{\textormath - {\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\"{\i}}\allowhyphens}% - {\ddot \imath}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"o}{\textormath{\@trema o}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"u}{\textormath{\@trema u}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"y}{\textormath{\ij{}}{\ddot y}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"Y}{\textormath{\IJ{}}{\ddot Y}} -\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"/}{\textormath - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `dutch.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty index ebfde1f3685..2e4c72ddcb8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `dutch') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index b4fac6a90f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,202 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `english.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% english.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{english} - [2005/03/30 v3.3o English support from the babel system] -%% File 'english.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@english\@undefined - \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined - \ifx\l@british\@undefined - \ifx\l@american\@undefined - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined - \ifx\l@canadian\@undefined - \ifx\l@australian\@undefined - \ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined - \@nopatterns{English} - \adddialect\l@english0 - \else - \let\l@english\l@newzealand - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@australian - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@canadian - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@USenglish - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@american - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@british - \fi - \else - \let\l@english\l@UKenglish - \fi -\fi -\ifx\l@british\@undefined - \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined - \adddialect\l@british\l@english - \adddialect\l@UKenglish\l@english - \else - \let\l@british\l@UKenglish - \fi -\else - \let\l@UKenglish\l@british -\fi -\ifx\l@american\@undefined - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined - \adddialect\l@american\l@english - \else - \let\l@american\l@USenglish - \fi -\else - \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined - \let\l@USenglish\l@american - \fi -\fi - -\ifx\l@canadian\@undefined - \adddialect\l@canadian\l@american -\fi -\ifx\l@australian\@undefined - \adddialect\l@australian\l@british -\fi -\ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined - \adddialect\l@newzealand\l@british -\fi - -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Preface}% - \def\refname{References}% - \def\abstractname{Abstract}% - \def\bibname{Bibliography}% - \def\chaptername{Chapter}% - \def\appendixname{Appendix}% - \def\contentsname{Contents}% - \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}% - \def\listtablename{List of Tables}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Figure}% - \def\tablename{Table}% - \def\partname{Part}% - \def\enclname{encl}% - \def\ccname{cc}% - \def\headtoname{To}% - \def\pagename{Page}% - \def\seename{see}% - \def\alsoname{see also}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% - } -\def\bbl@tempa{british} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{UKenglish} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{american} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{USenglish} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{canadian} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{australian} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{newzealand} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{UK} -\ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\ifcase\day\or - 1st\or 2nd\or 3rd\or 4th\or 5th\or - 6th\or 7th\or 8th\or 9th\or 10th\or - 11th\or 12th\or 13th\or 14th\or 15th\or - 16th\or 17th\or 18th\or 19th\or 20th\or - 21st\or 22nd\or 23rd\or 24th\or 25th\or - 26th\or 27th\or 28th\or 29th\or 30th\or - 31st\fi~\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi\space \number\year}} -\else - \def\bbl@tempa{AU} - \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi\space \number\year}} - \else - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or - December\fi \space\number\day, \number\year}} - \fi -\fi -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `english.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty index 73f7cacd1cf..3109bdd2d4a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `english') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 02e9ed9c2cc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `esperanto.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% esperanto.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{esperanto} - [2007/10/20 v1.4t Esperanto support from the babel system] -%% File 'esperanto.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -\LdfInit{esperanto}\captionsesperanto -\ifx\l@esperanto\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Esperanto} - \adddialect\l@esperanto0\fi -\addto\captionsesperanto{% - \def\prefacename{Anta\u{u}parolo}% - \def\refname{Cita\^\j{}oj}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografio}% - \def\chaptername{{\^C}apitro}% - \def\appendixname{Apendico}% - \def\contentsname{Enhavo}% - \def\listfigurename{Listo de figuroj}% - \def\listtablename{Listo de tabeloj}% - \def\indexname{Indekso}% - \def\figurename{Figuro}% - \def\tablename{Tabelo}% - \def\partname{Parto}% - \def\enclname{Aldono(j)}% - \def\ccname{Kopie al}% - \def\headtoname{Al}% - \def\pagename{Pa\^go}% - \def\subjectname{Temo}% - \def\seename{vidu}% a^u: vd. - \def\alsoname{vidu anka\u{u}}% a^u vd. anka\u{u} - \def\proofname{Pruvo}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosaro}% - } -\def\dateesperanto{% - \def\today{\number\day{--a}~de~\ifcase\month\or - januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or - julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or - decembro\fi,\space \number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{^} -\addto\extrasesperanto{\languageshorthands{esperanto}} -\addto\extrasesperanto{\bbl@activate{^}} -\addto\noextrasesperanto{\bbl@deactivate{^}} -\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^c}{\^{c}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^C}{\^{C}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^g}{\^{g}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^G}{\^{G}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^h}{h\llap{\^{}}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^H}{\^{H}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^j}{\^{\j}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^J}{\^{J}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^s}{\^{s}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^S}{\^{S}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^u}{\u u\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^U}{\u U\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens} -\def\esper#1{\@esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}} -\def\Esper#1{\@Esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}} -\def\@esper#1{% - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or \^c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or \^g\or - h\or h\llap{\^{}}\or i\or j\or \^\j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or - p\or r\or s\or \^s\or t\or u\or \u{u}\or v\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\def\@Esper#1{% - \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or \^C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or \^G\or - H\or \^H\or I\or J\or \^J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or - P\or R\or S\or \^S\or T\or U\or \u{U}\or V\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\addto\dateesperanto{\def\hodiau{la \today}} -\def\hodiaun{la \number\day --an~de~\ifcase\month\or - januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or - julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or - decembro\fi, \space \number\year} -\ldf@finish{esperanto} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `esperanto.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty index 63802eb61e4..31743fb5be7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `esperanto') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index e6d95b898ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,187 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `estonian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% estonian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{estonian} - [2009/03/08 v1.0k Estonian support from the babel system] -%% File `estonian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Estonian language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2009 -%% by Enn Saar, Tartu Astrophysical Observatory -%% Please report errors to: Jaan Vajakas jv at ut.ee -%% (or Enn Saar saar at aai.ee -%% or J. L. Braams babel at braams.xs4all.nl) -\LdfInit{estonian}\captionsestonian -\ifx\l@estonian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Estonian} - \adddialect\l@estonian0 -\fi -\addto\captionsestonian{% - \def\prefacename{Sissejuhatus}% - \def\refname{Viited}% - \def\bibname{Kirjandus}% - \def\appendixname{Lisa}% - \def\contentsname{Sisukord}% - \def\listfigurename{Joonised}% - \def\listtablename{Tabelid}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Joonis}% - \def\tablename{Tabel}% - \def\partname{Osa}% - \def\enclname{Lisa(d)}% - \def\ccname{Koopia(d)}% - \def\headtoname{}% - \def\pagename{Lk.}% - \def\seename{vt.}% - \def\alsoname{vt. ka}% - } -\begingroup \catcode`\"\active -\def\x{\endgroup -\addto\captionsestonian{% - \def\abstractname{Kokkuv~ote}% - \def\chaptername{Peat"ukk}% - \def\proofname{T~oestus}% - \def\glossaryname{S~onastik}% -}}\x -\begingroup \catcode`\"\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\month@estonian{\ifcase\month\or - jaanuar\or veebruar\or m"arts\or aprill\or mai\or juuni\or - juuli\or august\or september\or oktoober\or november\or - detsember\fi}} -\x -\def\dateestonian{% - \def\today{\number\day.\space\month@estonian - \space\number\year.\space a.}} -\def\et@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1} - -\@ifundefined{documentclass} - {\let\ifet@latex\iffalse} - {\let\ifet@latex\iftrue} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\initiate@active@char{~} -\addto\extrasestonian{\languageshorthands{estonian}} -\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@activate{"}\bbl@activate{~}} -\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasestonian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\extrasestonian{\umlautlow} -\addto\noextrasestonian{\umlauthigh} -\ifet@latex - \addto\extrasestonian{% - \expandafter\et@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\et@gentilde}} -\else - \addto\extrasestonian{\et@sdef\~{\et@gentilde}} -\fi -\def\et@gentilde#1{% - \if#1s\v{#1}\else\if#1S\v{#1}\else% - \if#1z\v{#1}\else\if#1Z\v{#1}\else% - \et@newtilde{#1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi} -\def\et@newtilde#1{% - \leavevmode\bgroup\U@D 1ex% - {\setbox\z@\hbox{\char126}\dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@ - \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}% - \accent126\fontdimen5\font\U@D #1% - \egroup} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand\dq{"} - \def\noexpand\til{~}} -\x -\ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{s}{178} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{S}{146} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{z}{186} - \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{Z}{154} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{'}{17} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{`}{18} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{<}{19} - \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{>}{20} -\else - \wlog{Warning: Hyphenation would work better for the T1 encoding.} -\fi -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~o}{\textormath{\~{o}\allowhyphens}{\tilde o}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~O}{\textormath{\~{O}\allowhyphens}{\tilde O}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check Z}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{""}{\dq} -\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~~}{\til} -\ldf@finish{estonian} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `estonian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty index 24c298f4774..3b7eea14d45 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `estonian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 827aade8c79..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `finnish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% finnish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{finnish} - [2007/10/20 v1.3q Finnish support from the babel system] -%% File `finnish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -\LdfInit{finnish}\captionsfinnish -\ifx\l@finnish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Finnish} - \adddialect\l@finnish0\fi -\addto\captionsfinnish{% - \def\prefacename{Esipuhe}% - \def\refname{Viitteet}% - \def\abstractname{Tiivistelm\"a} - \def\bibname{Kirjallisuutta}% - \def\chaptername{Luku}% - \def\appendixname{Liite}% - \def\contentsname{Sis\"alt\"o}% /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */ - \def\listfigurename{Kuvat}% - \def\listtablename{Taulukot}% - \def\indexname{Hakemisto}% - \def\figurename{Kuva}% - \def\tablename{Taulukko}% - \def\partname{Osa}% - \def\enclname{Liitteet}% - \def\ccname{Jakelu}% - \def\headtoname{Vastaanottaja}% - \def\pagename{Sivu}% - \def\seename{katso}% - \def\alsoname{katso my\"os}% - \def\proofname{Todistus}% - \def\glossaryname{Sanasto}% - }% -\def\datefinnish{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or - toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or - syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\fi - \space\number\year}} -\addto\extrasfinnish{% - \babel@savevariable\hyphenpenalty\hyphenpenalty=30% - \babel@savevariable\exhyphenpenalty\exhyphenpenalty=30% - \babel@savevariable\doublehyphendemerits\doublehyphendemerits=5000% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits=5000% - } -\addto\noextrasfinnish{} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\languageshorthands{finnish}} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\umlautlow\umlautelow} -\addto\noextrasfinnish{\umlauthigh} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\babel@save\-} -\addto\extrasfinnish{\def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ldf@finish{finnish} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `finnish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty index 8fd60acee53..d00dbe9eddc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `finnish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty index 73f6c505cf0..4f848e4d963 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `francais') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg deleted file mode 100644 index f83b7ca1136..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -%% frenchb.cfg: configuration file for frenchb.ldf -%% Daniel Flipo daniel.flipo at free.fr -%% File `frenchb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%%%%%%%% WARNING: THIS FILE SHOULD NO LONGER BE USED %%%%%%%%% -%% If you want to customise frenchb, please DO NOT hack into the code! -%% Do no put any code in this file either, please use the new command -%% \frenchbsetup{} with the proper options to customise frenchb. -%% -%% Add \frenchbsetup{ShowOptions} to your preamble to see the list of -%% available options and/or read the documentation. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index ebe446e025c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1217 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `frenchb.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% frenchb.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{frenchb} - [2010/08/21 v2.5a French support from the babel system] -%% File `frenchb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Frenchb language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg -%% Please report errors to: Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg -%% daniel.flipo at free.fr -\def\CurrentOption{french} -\LdfInit\CurrentOption\datefrench -\newif\ifLaTeXe -\let\bbl@tempa\relax -\ifx\magnification\@undefined - \ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined - \PackageError{frenchb.ldf} - {LaTeX-2.09 format is no longer supported.\MessageBreak - Aborting here} - {Please upgrade to LaTeX2e!} - \let\bbl@tempa\endinput - \else - \LaTeXetrue - \fi -\fi -\bbl@tempa -\ifx\l@french\@undefined - \ifx\l@francais\@undefined - \ifx\l@canadien\@undefined - \ifx\l@acadian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{French} - \adddialect\l@french0 - \else - \let\l@french\l@acadian - \fi - \else - \let\l@french\l@canadien - \fi - \else - \let\l@french\l@francais - \fi -\fi -\ifx\l@francais\@undefined - \let\l@francais\l@french -\fi -\ifx\l@frenchb\@undefined - \let\l@frenchb\l@french -\fi -\ifx\l@canadien\@undefined - \let\l@canadien\l@french -\fi -\ifx\l@acadian\@undefined - \let\l@acadian\l@french -\fi -\def\datefrancais{\datefrench} -\def\datefrenchb{\datefrench} -\def\extrasfrancais{\extrasfrench} -\def\extrasfrenchb{\extrasfrench} -\def\noextrasfrancais{\noextrasfrench} -\def\noextrasfrenchb{\noextrasfrench} -\newif\ifFBunicode -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname luatexversion\endcsname\relax -\else - \FBunicodetrue -\fi -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXrevision\endcsname\relax -\else - \FBunicodetrue -\fi -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=`\' - \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019="2019\fi} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=0 - \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019=0\fi} -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\long\def\STD@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - #1: #2\par - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -\newcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\space} -\newcommand*{\Fthinspace}{\thinspace} -\newif\ifFB@active@punct \FB@active@puncttrue -\newif\ifFB@xetex@punct -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXinterchartokenstate\endcsname\relax -\else - \FB@xetex@puncttrue\FB@active@punctfalse -\fi -\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue -\ifFB@xetex@punct - \PackageInfo{frenchb.ldf}{No need for active punctuation characters - \MessageBreak with this version of XeTeX! reported} - \@ifundefined{@for}{% - \def\@nnil{\@nil}% - \def\@empty{}% - \def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}% - \long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}% - \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else - \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}% - \long\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else - #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}% - \long\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil - \expandafter\@fornoop \else - #4\relax\expandafter\@iforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}% - \def\@tfor#1:={\@tf@r#1 }% - \long\def\@tf@r#1#2\do#3{\def\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\space\else - \@tforloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}% - \long\def\@tforloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil - \expandafter\@fornoop \else - #4\relax\expandafter\@tforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}% - }{}% - \newcount\FB@interchartokenstateORI - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthick - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthin - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctnul - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilo - \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilf - \def\FB@charclassesORI{} - \def\empty{} - \def\FB@parse#1,#2\endparse{\def\FB@class{#1}% - \def\FB@charclassesORI{#2}}% - \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@french}{% - \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty - \FB@interchartokenstateORI=\XeTeXinterchartokenstate - \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do - {\edef\FB@charclassesORI{\FB@charclassesORI% - \the\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char,}}% - \let\shorthandonORI\shorthandon - \let\shorthandoffORI\shorthandoff - \fi - \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=1 - \XeTeXcharclass `\: = \FB@punctthick - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthick = {% - \ifhmode\FDP@colonspace\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthick = {% - \FDP@colonspace}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthick = {% - \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace\fi}% - \@for\FB@char:={`\;,`\!,`\?}\do - {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctthin}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthin = {% - \ifhmode\FDP@thinspace\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthin = {% - \FDP@thinspace}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthin = {% - \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace\fi}% - \@for\FB@char:={`\[,`\(}\do - {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctnul}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctnul \FB@punctthin = {}% - \XeTeXcharclass"00AB = \FB@punctguilo - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo \z@ = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo 255 = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\ignorespaces\fi}% - \XeTeXcharclass"00BB = \FB@punctguilf - \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctthin \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctguilf = {% - \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\unskip\FBguill@spacing\fi}% - \def\shorthandoff##1{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{\protect\shorthandoff{;:!?} is - helpless with XeTeX,\MessageBreak use \protect\NoAutoSpacing - \space *inside a group* instead;\MessageBreak reported}% - }% - \def\shorthandon##1{}% - } - \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}{% - \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty - \else - \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do - {\expandafter\FB@parse\FB@charclassesORI\endparse - \XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@class}% - \def\FB@charclassesORI{}% - \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=\FB@interchartokenstateORI - \let\shorthandon\shorthandonORI - \let\shorthandoff\shorthandoffORI - \fi - } - \addto\extrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@french} - \addto\noextrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench} -\fi -\ifFB@active@punct - \initiate@active@char{:}% - \initiate@active@char{;}% - \initiate@active@char{!}% - \initiate@active@char{?}% - \declare@shorthand{french}{;}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string;} - \declare@shorthand{french}{!}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!} - \declare@shorthand{french}{?}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace - \else - \FDP@thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string?} - \declare@shorthand{french}{:}{% - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace - \else - \FDP@colonspace - \fi - \fi - \string:} - \declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:} - \declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!} - \declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?} - \declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;} - \addto\extrasfrench{% - \languageshorthands{french}% - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}% - \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}% - } - \addto\noextrasfrench{% - \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}% - \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}} -\fi -\newif\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue -\def\autospace@beforeFDP{% - \def\FDP@thinspace{\penalty\@M\Fthinspace}% - \def\FDP@colonspace{\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace}} -\def\noautospace@beforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty - \let\FDP@colonspace\@empty} -\ifLaTeXe - \def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\autospace@beforeFDP - \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue} - \def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\noautospace@beforeFDP - \FBAutoSpacePunctuationfalse} -\else - \let\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP\autospace@beforeFDP - \let\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP\noautospace@beforeFDP - \fi -\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP -\ifLaTeXe - \let\ttfamilyORI\ttfamily - \let\rmfamilyORI\rmfamily - \let\sffamilyORI\sffamily - \DeclareRobustCommand\ttfamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse - \noautospace@beforeFDP\ttfamilyORI}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\rmfamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI - \fi}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\sffamilyFB{% - \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI - \fi}% -\fi -\newcommand*{\NoAutoSpacing}{\FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse - \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi - \ifFB@xetex@punct\XeTeXinterchartokenstate=0\fi} -\newcommand*{\og}{\@empty} -\newcommand*{\fg}{\@empty} - -\ifLaTeXe -\else - \ifFBunicode - \def\guillemotleft{\char"00AB} - \def\guillemotright{\char"00BB} - \def\textquotedblleft{\char"201C} - \def\textquotedblright{\char"201D} - \else - \def\guillemotleft{\leavevmode\raise0.25ex - \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}} - \def\guillemotright{\raise0.25ex - \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}} - \def\textquotedblleft{``} - \def\textquotedblright{''} - \fi - \let\xspace\relax -\fi -\newcommand*{\FBguill@spacing}{\penalty\@M\hskip.8\fontdimen2\font - plus.3\fontdimen3\font - minus.8\fontdimen4\font} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@og}{\leavevmode\guillemotleft - \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi - \guillemotright\xspace} -\ifLaTeXe - \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\FB@og}% - \renewcommand*{\fg}{\FB@fg}} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\textquotedblleft}% - \renewcommand*{\fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \textquotedblright}} -\else - \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\let\og\FB@og - \let\fg\FB@fg} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\def\og{\textquotedblleft}% - \def\fg{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi\textquotedblright}} -\fi -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchguillemets} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets} -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{{\number\day}\ifnum1=\day {\ier}\fi \space - \ifcase\month - \or janvier\or f{\FBeacute}vrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or - juin\or juillet\or ao{\FBucirconflexe}t\or septembre\or - octobre\or novembre\or d{\FBeacute}cembre\fi - \space \number\year}} -\newif\ifFB@poorman -\newdimen\FB@Mht -\ifLaTeXe - \AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{scalefnt}} - \newcommand*{\FBsupR}{-0.12} - \newcommand*{\FBsupS}{0.65} - \newcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{\MakeLowercase{#1}} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up@fake}[1]{% - \settoheight{\FB@Mht}{M}% - \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{\FBsupR \FB@Mht}% - \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{-\FBsupS ex}% - \raisebox{\FB@Mht}{\scalefont{\FBsupS}{\FB@lc{#1}}}% - } - \def\FB@split#1#2#3#4\@nil{\def\FB@firstthree{#1#2#3}% - \def\FB@suffix{#4}} - \def\FB@x{x} - \def\FB@j{j} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up}[1]{% - \bgroup \FB@poormantrue - \expandafter\FB@split\f@family\@nil - \edef\reserved@a{\lowercase{% - \noexpand\IfFileExists{\f@encoding\FB@firstthree -sup.fd}}}% - \reserved@a - {\ifx\FB@suffix\FB@x \FB@poormanfalse\fi - \ifx\FB@suffix\FB@j \FB@poormanfalse\fi - \ifFB@poorman \FB@up@fake{#1}% - \else \FB@up@real{#1}% - \fi}% - {\FB@up@fake{#1}}% - \egroup} - \newcommand*{\FB@up@real}[1]{\bgroup - \fontfamily{\FB@firstthree -sup}\selectfont \FB@lc{#1}\egroup} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\fup}[1]{% - \@ifundefined{realsuperscript}% - {\FB@up{#1}\let\realsuperscript\undefined}% - {\bgroup\let\fakesuperscript\FB@up@fake - \realsuperscript{\FB@lc{#1}}\egroup}} - \providecommand*{\up}{\relax} -\else - \providecommand*{\up}[1]{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\sevenrm #1}} -\fi -\def\ieme{\up{\lowercase{e}}\xspace} -\def\iemes{\up{\lowercase{es}}\xspace} -\def\ier{\up{\lowercase{er}}\xspace} -\def\iers{\up{\lowercase{ers}}\xspace} -\def\iere{\up{\lowercase{re}}\xspace} -\def\ieres{\up{\lowercase{res}}\xspace} -\newcommand*{\FrenchEnumerate}[1]{% - #1\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.3em} -\newcommand*{\FrenchPopularEnumerate}[1]{% - #1\up{\lowercase{o}})\kern+.3em} -\def\primo{\FrenchEnumerate1} -\def\secundo{\FrenchEnumerate2} -\def\tertio{\FrenchEnumerate3} -\def\quarto{\FrenchEnumerate4} -\def\fprimo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate1} -\def\fsecundo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate2} -\def\ftertio){\FrenchPopularEnumerate3} -\def\fquarto){\FrenchPopularEnumerate4} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\No}{N\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\no}{n\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Nos}{N\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\nos}{n\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\begingroup\kern0pt - \scshape #1\endgroup} -\ifLaTeXe\else\let\scshape\relax\fi -\ifLaTeXe - \DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{94} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{126} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{T1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{T1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{T1} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\boi}{\textbackslash} - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degre}{\r{}} -\else - \def\T@one{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\T@one - \newcommand*{\degre}{\char6} - \else - \newcommand*{\degre}{\char23} - \fi - \newcommand*{\at}{\char64} - \newcommand*{\circonflexe}{\char94} - \newcommand*{\tild}{\char126} - \newcommand*{\boi}{$\backslash$} -\fi -\newcommand*{\FBagrave}{\`a} -\newcommand*{\FBegrave}{\`e} -\newcommand*{\FBeacute}{\'e} -\newcommand*{\FBucirconflexe}{\^u} -\ifFBunicode - \ifLaTeXe - \else - \def\degre{\char"00B0} - \def\FBagrave{\char"00E0} - \def\FBegrave{\char"00E8} - \def\FBeacute{\char"00E9} - \def\FBucirconflexe{\char"00FB} - \fi -\fi -\ifLaTeXe - \newcommand*{\degres}{\degre} - \def\Warning@degree@TSone{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - Degrees would look better in TS1-encoding: - \MessageBreak add \protect - \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble. - \MessageBreak Degrees used}} - \ifFBunicode\global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax\fi - \AtBeginDocument{\expandafter\ifx\csname M@TS1\endcsname\relax - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}% - \Warning@degree@TSone - \global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax}% - \let\textdegree\degres - \else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{% - \hbox{\UseTextSymbol{TS1}{\textdegree}}}% - \fi} -\else - \newcommand*{\degres}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}} -\fi -\newcount\std@mcc -\newcount\dec@mcc -\std@mcc=\mathcode`\, -\dec@mcc=\std@mcc -\@tempcnta=\std@mcc -\divide\@tempcnta by "1000 -\multiply\@tempcnta by "1000 -\advance\dec@mcc by -\@tempcnta -\newcommand*{\DecimalMathComma}{\iflanguage{french}% - {\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}{}% - \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}} -\newcommand*{\StandardMathComma}{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc - \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc} -\newcommand*{\nombre}[1]{{#1}\message{% - *** \noexpand\nombre no longer formats numbers\string! ***}}% -\let\FBstop@here\relax -\def\FBclean@on@exit{\let\ifLaTeXe\undefined - \let\LaTeXetrue\undefined - \let\LaTeXefalse\undefined} -\ifx\magnification\@undefined -\else - \def\FBstop@here{\let\STD@makecaption\relax - \FBclean@on@exit - \ldf@quit\CurrentOption\endinput} -\fi -\FBstop@here -\renewcommand*{\nombre}[1]{\Warning@nombre\numprint{#1}} -\newcommand*{\Warning@nombre}{% - \@ifundefined{numprint}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - \protect\nombre\space now relies on package numprint.sty, - \MessageBreak add \protect - \usepackage[autolanguage]{numprint}\MessageBreak - to your preamble *after* loading babel, \MessageBreak - see file numprint.pdf for other options.\MessageBreak - \protect\nombre\space called}% - \global\let\Warning@nombre\relax - \global\let\numprint\undefined - }{}% -} -\newcommand*{\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}{% - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{% - Type \protect\frenchbsetup{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers} - \MessageBreak Command \protect\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers\space - is no longer\MessageBreak defined in frenchb v.2,}} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\refname{R{\FBeacute}f{\FBeacute}rences}% - \def\abstractname{R{\FBeacute}sum{\FBeacute}}% - \def\bibname{Bibliographie}% - \def\prefacename{Pr{\FBeacute}face}% - \def\chaptername{Chapitre}% - \def\appendixname{Annexe}% - \def\contentsname{Table des mati{\FBegrave}res}% - \def\listfigurename{Table des figures}% - \def\listtablename{Liste des tableaux}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% - \def\tablename{{\scshape Table}}% - \def\partname{\protect\@Fpt partie}% - \def\@Fpt{{\ifcase\value{part}\or Premi{\FBegrave}re\or - Deuxi{\FBegrave}me\or Troisi{\FBegrave}me\or - Quatri{\FBegrave}me\or Cinqui{\FBegrave}me\or - Sixi{\FBegrave}me\or Septi{\FBegrave}me\or Huiti{\FBegrave}me\or - Neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or Dixi{\FBegrave}me\or Onzi{\FBegrave}me\or - Douzi{\FBegrave}me\or Treizi{\FBegrave}me\or - Quatorzi{\FBegrave}me\or Quinzi{\FBegrave}me\or - Seizi{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-septi{\FBegrave}me\or - Dix-huiti{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or - Vingti{\FBegrave}me\fi}\space\def\thepart{}}% - \def\pagename{page}% - \def\seename{voir}% - \def\alsoname{voir aussi}% - \def\enclname{P.~J. }% - \def\ccname{Copie {\FBagrave} }% - \def\headtoname{}% - \def\proofname{D{\FBeacute}monstration}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossaire}% - } -\AtBeginDocument{\let\captions@French\captionsfrench - \@ifundefined{captionsfrenchb}% - {\let\captions@Frenchb\relax}% - {\let\captions@Frenchb\captionsfrenchb}% - \@ifundefined{captionsfrancais}% - {\let\captions@Francais\relax}% - {\let\captions@Francais\captionsfrancais}% - \def\captionsfrench{\captions@French - \captions@Francais\captions@Frenchb}% - \def\captionsfrancais{\captionsfrench}% - \def\captionsfrenchb{\captionsfrench}% - \iflanguage{french}{\captionsfrench}{}% - } -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{canadien}{% - \def\captionscanadien{\captionsfrench}% - \def\datecanadien{\datefrench}% - \def\extrascanadien{\extrasfrench}% - \def\noextrascanadien{\noextrasfrench}% - }{} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{acadian}{% - \def\captionsacadian{\captionsfrench}% - \def\dateacadian{\datefrench}% - \def\extrasacadian{\extrasfrench}% - \def\noextrasacadian{\noextrasfrench}% - }{} -\newcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\PackageWarning{#1}{#2}} -\def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space} -\long\def\FB@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1\CaptionSeparator #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - #1\CaptionSeparator #2\par - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\@makecaption\STD@makecaption - \global\let\@makecaption\FB@makecaption - \else - \@ifundefined{@makecaption}% - {\let\@makecaption\undefined}% - {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {The definition of \protect\@makecaption\space - has been changed,\MessageBreak - frenchb will NOT customise it;\MessageBreak reported}% - }% - \fi - \let\FB@makecaption\relax - \let\STD@makecaption\relax -} -\addto\extrasfrench{% - \def\CaptionSeparator{\space\textendash\space}} -\addto\noextrasfrench{% - \def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}} -\let\listORI\list -\let\endlistORI\endlist -\def\FB@listsettings{% - \setlength{\itemsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% - \setlength{\parsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% - \setlength{\topsep}{0.8ex plus 0.4ex minus 0.4ex}% - \setlength{\partopsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}% - \@tempdima=\parskip - \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}% - \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}% -\def\listFB#1#2{\listORI{#1}{\FB@listsettings #2}}% -\let\endlistFB\endlist -\newcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{\textendash} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{\FrenchLabelItem} -\newif\ifFB@enterFrench \FB@enterFrenchtrue -\def\bbl@frenchlabelitems{% - \ifFB@enterFrench - \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi - \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii - \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii - \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv - \let\labelitemi\Frlabelitemi - \let\labelitemii\Frlabelitemii - \let\labelitemiii\Frlabelitemiii - \let\labelitemiv\Frlabelitemiv - \FB@enterFrenchfalse - \fi -} -\let\itemizeORI\itemize -\let\enditemizeORI\enditemize -\let\enditemizeFB\enditemize -\def\itemizeFB{% - \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else - \advance\@itemdepth\@ne - \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% - \expandafter - \listORI - \csname\@itemitem\endcsname - {\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}% - \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% - \ifnum\@listdepth=0 - \setlength{\itemindent}{\parindent}% - \else - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\parindent}% - \fi - \setlength{\itemsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}% - \@tempdima=\parskip - \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}% - \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}% - \fi} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems{% - \ifFB@enterFrench - \else - \let\Frlabelitemi\labelitemi - \let\Frlabelitemii\labelitemii - \let\Frlabelitemiii\labelitemiii - \let\Frlabelitemiv\labelitemiv - \let\labelitemi\@ltiORI - \let\labelitemii\@ltiiORI - \let\labelitemiii\@ltiiiORI - \let\labelitemiv\@ltivORI - \FB@enterFrenchtrue - \fi -} -\def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} -\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}% - {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {bigfoot package in use.\MessageBreak - frenchb will NOT customise footnotes;\MessageBreak - reported}}% - {\let\@footnotemarkORI\@footnotemark - \def\@footnotemarkFB{\leavevmode\unskip\unkern - \,\@footnotemarkORI}% - \ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes - \let\@footnotemark\@footnotemarkFB - \fi}% - } -\newcommand*{\dotFFN}{.} -\newcommand*{\kernFFN}{\kern .5em} -\newdimen\parindentFFN -\parindentFFN=10in -\def\ftnISsymbol{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote} -\long\def\@makefntextFB#1{\ifx\thefootnote\ftnISsymbol - \@makefntextORI{#1}% - \else - \parindent=\parindentFFN - \rule\z@\footnotesep - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@thefnmark}% - \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\z@ - \llap{\@thefnmark}\dotFFN\kernFFN - \fi #1 - \fi}% -\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}{}% - {\ifdim\parindentFFN<10in - \else - \parindentFFN=\parindent - \ifdim\parindentFFN<1.5em\parindentFFN=1.5em\fi - \fi - \let\@makefntextORI\@makefntext - \long\def\@makefntext#1{% - \ifFBFrenchFootnotes - \@makefntextFB{#1}% - \else - \@makefntextORI{#1}% - \fi}% - }% - } -\newcommand*{\AddThinSpaceBeforeFootnotes}{\FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue} -\newcommand*{\FrenchFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotestrue} -\newcommand*{\StandardFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotesfalse} -\newcommand*{\FrenchLayout}{% - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {\protect\FrenchLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak - \protect\frenchbsetup{GlobalLayoutFrench} instead.}% -} -\newcommand*{\StandardLayout}{% - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \FBIndentFirstfalse - \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {\protect\StandardLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak - \protect\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} instead.}% -} -\@onlypreamble\FrenchLayout -\@onlypreamble\StandardLayout -\DeclareTextSymbol{\FBtextellipsis}{LY1}{133} -\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\FBtextellipsis}{% - .\kern\fontdimen3\font.\kern\fontdimen3\font.\xspace} -\newcommand*{\Tdots@ORI}{\@xp\textellipsis} -\newcommand*{\Tdots@}{\Tdots@ORI} -\newcommand*{\Mdots@}{\@xp\mdots@} -\AtBeginDocument{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\dots}{\relax - \csname\ifmmode M\else T\fi dots@\endcsname}% - \@ifundefined{@xp}{\let\@xp\relax}{}% - \@ifundefined{mdots@}{\let\Tdots@ORI\textellipsis - \let\Mdots@\mathellipsis - \let\mdots@\undefined}{}} -\def\bbl@frenchdots{\let\Tdots@\FBtextellipsis} -\def\bbl@nonfrenchdots{\let\Tdots@\Tdots@ORI} -\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchdots} -\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchdots} -\newif\ifFBStandardLayout \FBStandardLayouttrue -\newif\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse -\newif\ifFBReduceListSpacing \FBReduceListSpacingfalse -\newif\ifFBCompactItemize \FBCompactItemizefalse -\newif\ifFBStandardItemLabels \FBStandardItemLabelstrue -\newif\ifFBStandardLists \FBStandardListstrue -\newif\ifFBIndentFirst \FBIndentFirstfalse -\newif\ifFBFrenchFootnotes \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse -\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse -\newif\ifFBOriginalTypewriter \FBOriginalTypewriterfalse -\newif\ifFBThinColonSpace \FBThinColonSpacefalse -\newif\ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers \FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbersfalse -\newif\ifFBFrenchSuperscripts \FBFrenchSuperscriptstrue -\newif\ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts \FBLowercaseSuperscriptstrue -\newif\ifFBPartNameFull \FBPartNameFulltrue -\newif\ifFBSuppressWarning \FBSuppressWarningfalse -\newif\ifFBShowOptions \FBShowOptionsfalse -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \iflanguage{french}{\FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue}% - {}% -} -\newcommand*{\frenchbsetup}[1]{% - \setkeys{FB}{#1}% -}% -\@onlypreamble\frenchbsetup -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \RequirePackage{keyval}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardLayout}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardLayout#1\endcsname - \ifFBStandardLayout - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \FBIndentFirstfalse - \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse - \else - \FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{GlobalLayoutFrench}[true]% - {\csname FBGlobalLayoutFrench#1\endcsname - \ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \iflanguage{french}% - {\FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \FBIndentFirsttrue - \FBFrenchFootnotestrue - \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `GlobalLayoutFrench' skipped: - \MessageBreak French is *not* - babel's last option.\MessageBreak}% - \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse}% - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{ReduceListSpacing}[true]% - {\csname FBReduceListSpacing#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{CompactItemize}[true]% - {\csname FBCompactItemize#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardItemLabels}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardItemLabels#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabels}{% - \renewcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeli}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabelii}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliii}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliv}{% - \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{#1}}% - \define@key{FB}{StandardLists}[true]% - {\csname FBStandardLists#1\endcsname - \ifFBStandardLists - \FBReduceListSpacingfalse - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBStandardItemLabelstrue - \else - \FBReduceListSpacingtrue - \FBCompactItemizetrue - \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse - \fi}% - \define@key{FB}{IndentFirst}[true]% - {\csname FBIndentFirst#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{FrenchFootnotes}[true]% - {\csname FBFrenchFootnotes#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{AutoSpaceFootnotes}[true]% - {\csname FBAutoSpaceFootnotes#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{AutoSpacePunctuation}[true]% - {\csname FBAutoSpacePunctuation#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{OriginalTypewriter}[true]% - {\csname FBOriginalTypewriter#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ThinColonSpace}[true]% - {\csname FBThinColonSpace#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}[true]% - {\csname FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{FrenchSuperscripts}[true]% - {\csname FBFrenchSuperscripts#1\endcsname} - \define@key{FB}{LowercaseSuperscripts}[true]% - {\csname FBLowercaseSuperscripts#1\endcsname} - \define@key{FB}{PartNameFull}[true]% - {\csname FBPartNameFull#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{SuppressWarning}[true]% - {\csname FBSuppressWarning#1\endcsname - \ifFBSuppressWarning - \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\relax}% - \else - \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{% - \PackageWarning{##1}{##2}}% - \fi} - \define@key{FB}{ShowOptions}[true]% - {\csname FBShowOptions#1\endcsname}% - \define@key{FB}{og}{% - \newcommand*{\FB@@og}{% - \iflanguage{french}% - {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@og\ignorespaces - \else\guillemotleft - \fi}% - {\guillemotleft}}% - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\AtBeginDocument - {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `og' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}% - \let\DeclareInputText\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}% - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}% - {\@tempcnta`#1\relax - \@ifundefined{mule@def}% - {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{\FB@@og}% - \let\mule@def\undefined}% - {\mule@def{11}{{\FB@@og}}}% - \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined - }% - {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\FB@@og}}% - \let\uc@dclc\undefined - }% - {\uc@dclc{171}{default}{\FB@@og}}% - }% - }% - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% - {\ifFB@xetex@punct - \else - \catcode`#1=\active - \bgroup - \uccode`\~`#1% - \uppercase{% - \egroup - \def~% - }{\FB@@og}% - \fi - }% - }% - \define@key{FB}{fg}{% - \newcommand*{\FB@@fg}{% - \iflanguage{french}% - {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@fg - \else\guillemotright - \fi}% - {\guillemotright}}% - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\AtBeginDocument - {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Option `fg' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}% - \let\DeclareInputText\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}% - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}% - {\@tempcnta`#1\relax - \@ifundefined{mule@def}% - {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{{\FB@@fg}}% - \let\mule@def\undefined - }% - {\mule@def{27}{{\FB@@fg}}}% - \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined - }% - {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{{\FB@@fg}}% - }% - \let\uc@dclc\undefined - }% - {\uc@dclc{187}{default}{{\FB@@fg}}}% - }% - }% - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% - {\ifFB@xetex@punct - \else - \catcode`#1=\active - \bgroup - \uccode`\~`#1% - \uppercase{% - \egroup - \def~% - }{{\FB@@fg}}% - \fi - }% - }% -} -\newcommand*{\FBprocess@options}{% - \ifFBReduceListSpacing - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listFB - \let\endlist\endlistFB}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \let\list\listFB - \let\endlist\endlistFB - \else - \let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\list\listORI - \let\endlist\endlistORI}% - \fi - \@ifpackageloaded{enumitem}{% - \FBCompactItemizefalse - \FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Setting CompactItemize=false for compatibility\MessageBreak - with enumitem package,}}% - {}% - \ifFBCompactItemize - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeFB - \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \let\itemize\itemizeFB - \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB - \else - \let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI - \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}% - \fi - \ifFBStandardItemLabels - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchlabelitems}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \bbl@frenchlabelitems - \else - \bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems - \fi}% - \fi - \ifFBIndentFirst - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchindent}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench - \bbl@frenchindent - \else - \bbl@nonfrenchindent - \fi}% - \else - \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}% - \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}% - \fi - \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation - \autospace@beforeFDP - \else - \noautospace@beforeFDP - \fi - \ifFBOriginalTypewriter - \else - \let\ttfamily\ttfamilyFB - \let\rmfamily\rmfamilyFB - \let\sffamily\sffamilyFB - \fi - \ifFBThinColonSpace\renewcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\Fthinspace}\fi - \@ifpackageloaded{numprint}% - {\ifnprt@autolanguage - \providecommand*{\npstylefrench}{}% - \ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers - \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{% - \npthousandsep{\,}% - \npdecimalsign{,}% - \npproductsign{\cdot}% - \npunitseparator{\,}% - \npdegreeseparator{}% - \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}% - }% - \else - \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{% - \npthousandsep{~}% - \npdecimalsign{,}% - \npproductsign{\cdot}% - \npunitseparator{\,}% - \npdegreeseparator{}% - \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}% - }% - \fi - \npaddtolanguage{french}{french}% - \fi}{}% - \ifFBFrenchSuperscripts - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}{\fup}}% - \else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}% - {\textsuperscript}}% - \fi - \ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts - \else - \renewcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{##1}% - \fi - \ifFBPartNameFull - \else\addto\captionsfrench{\def\partname{Partie}}\fi - \ifFBShowOptions - \GenericWarning{* }{% - * **** List of possible options for frenchb ****\MessageBreak - [Default values between brackets when frenchb is loaded *LAST*]% - \MessageBreak - ShowOptions=true [false]\MessageBreak - StandardLayout=true [false]\MessageBreak - GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true]\MessageBreak - StandardLists=true [false]\MessageBreak - IndentFirst=false [true]\MessageBreak - ReduceListSpacing=false [true]\MessageBreak - CompactItemize=false [true]\MessageBreak - StandardItemLabels=true [false]\MessageBreak - ItemLabels=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeli=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabelii=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeliii=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - ItemLabeliv=\textemdash, \textbullet, - \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak - FrenchFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak - AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak - AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]\MessageBreak - OriginalTypewriter=true [false]\MessageBreak - ThinColonSpace=true [false]\MessageBreak - ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true [false]\MessageBreak - FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak - LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak - PartNameFull=false [true]\MessageBreak - SuppressWarning=true [false]\MessageBreak - og= <left quote character>, fg= <right quote character> - \MessageBreak - ********************************************* - \MessageBreak\protect\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}} - \fi -} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \let\@aifORI\@afterindenttrue - \else \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \fi - \let\listORI\list - \let\endlistORI\endlist - \let\itemizeORI\itemize - \let\enditemizeORI\enditemize - \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi - \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii - \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii - \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv - \providecommand*{\xspace}{\relax}% - \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}{}% - {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% - \let\up\relax - \def\ieme{e\xspace}% - \def\iemes{es\xspace}% - \def\ier{er\xspace}% - \def\iers{ers\xspace}% - \def\iere{re\xspace}% - \def\ieres{res\xspace}% - \def\FrenchEnumerate#1{#1\degre\space}% - \def\FrenchPopularEnumerate#1{#1\degre)\space}% - \def\No{N\degre\space}% - \def\no{n\degre\space}% - \def\Nos{N\degre\space}% - \def\nos{n\degre\space}% - \def\og{\guillemotleft\space}% - \def\fg{\space\guillemotright}% - \let\bsc\textsc - \let\degres\degre - }% - \let\pdfstringdefDisableCommands\undefined}% - \FBprocess@options - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI\bbl@nonfrenchspacing - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax - \iflanguage{french}{\extrasfrench\captionsfrench}{\noextrasfrench}% - \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI - \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}% - {\begingroup \newcommand{\FBOTone}{OT1}% - \ifx\encodingdefault\FBOTone - \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {OT1 encoding should not be used for French. - \MessageBreak - Add \protect\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} to the - preamble\MessageBreak of your document,}% - \fi - \endgroup - \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined - }% - {\@ifundefined{DeclareUTFcharacter}% - {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}% - {Add \protect\usepackage{xltxtra} to the\MessageBreak - preamble of your document,}% - \let\DeclareUTFcharacter\undefined}% - {}% - }% -} -\loadlocalcfg{frenchb} -\FBclean@on@exit -\ldf@quit\CurrentOption -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `frenchb.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index d060c6c72e3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,845 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `galician.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% galician.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `galician.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Galcian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006 -%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008 -%% by Javier A. M\'ugica -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably) -%% jmugica at digi21.net -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal} - -\ProvidesLanguage{galician.ldf} - [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{galician}\captionsgalician -\ifx\undefined\l@galician - \@nopatterns{Galician} - \adddialect\l@galician0 -\fi -\edef\gl@savedcatcodes{% - \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~ - \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"} -\catcode`\~=\active -\catcode`\"=12 -\long\def\gl@delayed#1\then#2\else#3\fi{% - #1% - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi - {#2}{#3}} -\gl@delayed -\expandafter\ifx\csname documentclass\endcsname\relax\then - \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iffalse -\else - \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iftrue -\fi -\gl@delayed -\expandafter\ifx\csname newenvironment\endcsname\relax\then - \let\ifes@plain\iftrue -\else - \let\ifes@plain\iffalse -\fi -\addto\captionsgalician{% - \def\prefacename{Prefacio}% - \def\refname{Referencias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\'endice}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Indice de figuras}% - \def\listtablename{\'Indice de cadros}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice alfab\'etico}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Cadro}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Adxunto}% - \def\ccname{Copia a}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{P\'axina}% - \def\seename{v\'exase}% - \def\alsoname{v\'exase tam\'en}% - \def\proofname{Demostraci\'on}% - \def\glossaryname{Glosario}} - -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax - \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice}} -\else - \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice xeral}} -\fi -\def\dategalician{% - \def\today{\the\day~de \ifcase\month\or xaneiro\or febreiro\or - marzo\or abril\or maio\or xu\~no\or xullo\or agosto\or - setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or decembro\fi - \ \ifnum\year>1999\gl@yearl\else de\fi~\the\year}} -\def\galiciandatedo{\def\gl@yearl{do}} -\def\galiciandatede{\def\gl@yearl{de}} -\galiciandatedo -\def\selectgalician{% - \def\selectgalician{% - \def\selectgalician{% - \PackageWarning{galician}{Extra \string\selectgalician ignored}}% - \gl@select}} - -\@onlypreamble\selectgalician - -\def\gl@select{% - \let\gl@select\@undefined - \selectlanguage{galician}% - \catcode`\"\active\catcode`\~=\active} -\def\extrasgalician{% - \textgalician - \mathgalician - \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty - \galiciandeactivate{."'~<>}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \else - \shorthandsgalician - \fi} -\def\noextrasgalician{% - \ifx\textgalician\@empty\else - \notextgalician - \fi - \ifx\mathgalician\@empty\else - \nomathgalician - \fi - \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty\else - \noshorthandsgalician - \fi - \gl@reviveshorthands} -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\sptext - \def\sptext{\protect\gl@sptext}} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{% - {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.15ex - \else - \fontsize\ssf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.5ex - \fi - \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}} -\else %<<<<<< - \let\sptextfont\rm - \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{% - {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \advance\dimen@-0.75ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \else - \advance\dimen@-0.8ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \fi}} -\fi %<<<<<< -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\lsc - \def\lsc{\protect\gl@lsc} - \babel@save\msc - \def\msc{\protect\gl@msc}} - - \def\gl@@msc{\expandafter\@tempdima\f@size pt \divide\@tempdima by 200 \multiply\@tempdima by 219 - \edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdima}\selectfont} - \def\gl@msc{\let\gl@do@msc\gl@@msc\lsc} - \let\gl@do@msc\relax - - \def\gl@lsc#1{% - \leavevmode - \hbox{\gl@do@msc\scshape\selectfont - \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series - /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont - \PackageInfo{galician}{Replacing undefined sc font\MessageBreak - shape by faked small caps}% - \MakeUppercase{#1}% - \else - \MakeLowercase{#1}% - \fi}\let\gl@do@msc\relax} -\fi %<<<<<< -\newif\ifgl@listquot - -\ifes@plain\else %<<<<<< - \csname newtoks\endcsname\gl@quottoks - \csname newcount\endcsname\gl@quotdepth - - \ifx\quoting\c@undefined\def\next{\let\next\relax\newenvironment} - \else\def\next{\PackageInfo{galician}{Redefining quoting}\let\next\relax\renewenvironment} - \fi - \next{quoting} - {\leavevmode - \advance\gl@quotdepth1 - \csname lquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname% - \ifnum\gl@quotdepth=\@ne - \gl@listquotfalse - \let\gl@quotpar\everypar - \let\everypar\gl@quottoks - \everypar\expandafter{\the\gl@quotpar}% - \gl@quotpar{\the\everypar - \ifgl@listquot\global\gl@listquotfalse\else\gl@quotcont\fi}% - \fi - \toks@\expandafter{\gl@quotcont}% - \edef\gl@quotcont{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\noexpand - \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}} - {\csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname} - - \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}} - \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}} - \def\lquotii{``} - \def\rquotii{''} - \def\lquotiii{`} - \def\rquotiii{'} - - \let\gl@quotcont\@empty - \addto\@marginparreset{\let\gl@quotcont\@empty} - - \def\gl@listquot{% - \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname - \global\gl@listquottrue} -\fi %<<<<<< -\addto\textgalician{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\notextgalician{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} - -\mathchardef\gl@cdot="0201 -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\textellipsis - \babel@save\ldotp - \babel@save\cdotp% - \def\textellipsis{\hbox{...}\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} }% - \mathchardef\ldotp="013A% - \mathchardef\cdotp="0201% -} -\else %<<<<<< -\addto\textgalician{% - \babel@save\dots - \babel@save\ldotp - \babel@save\cdotp - \mathchardef\ldotp="013A% - \mathchardef\cdotp="0201% - \def\dots{\ifmmode\ldots\else...\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} \fi}% -} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\textgalician{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \babel@save\%% - \def\%{\unskip\,\percentsign{}}} -\else - \addto\textgalician{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \babel@save\%% - \def\%{\unskip\ifmmode\,\else$\m@th\,$\fi\percentsign{}}} -\fi -\addto\mathgalician{% - \babel@save\dotlessi - \def\dotlessi{\protect\gl@dotlessi}} - -\let\nomathgalician\relax %% Unused, but called - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@texti{\i} - \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\gl@texti} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne - \imath - \else - \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter - \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil - \escapechar=\count@ - \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}% - {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}% - \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname - \advance\count@"7000 - \mathchar\count@ - \fi}% - \else - \i - \fi} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\gl@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - \mathchar"7010 - \else - \i - \fi} -\fi %<<<<<< -\def\accentedoperators{% - \def\gl@op@ac##1{\acute{##1}}% - \def\gl@op@i{\acute{\dotlessi}}} -\def\unaccentedoperators{% - \def\gl@op@ac##1{##1}% - \def\gl@op@i{i}} -\accentedoperators - -\def\spacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\,} -\def\unspacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\@empty} -\unspacedoperators -\addto\mathgalician{% - \gl@operators} - -\ifes@LaTeXe\else %<<<<<< - \let\operator@font\rm - \def\@empty{} -\fi %<<<<<< - -\def\gl@operators{% - \babel@save\lim \def\lim{\mathop{\operator@font l\protect\gl@op@i m}}% - \babel@save\limsup \def\limsup{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,sup}}% - \babel@save\liminf \def\liminf{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,inf}}% - \babel@save\max \def\max{\mathop{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac ax}}% - \babel@save\inf \def\inf{\mathop{\operator@font \protect\gl@op@i nf}}% - \babel@save\min \def\min{\mathop{\operator@font m\protect\gl@op@i n}}% - \babel@save\bmod - \def\bmod{% - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu% - \mathbin{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu% - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}% - \babel@save\pmod - \def\pmod##1{% - \allowbreak\mkern18mu({\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\,\,##1)}% - \def\gl@a##1 {% - \gl@delayed - \if^##1^\then % is it empty? do nothing and continue - \gl@a - \else - \gl@delayed - \if&##1\then % is it &? do nothing and finish - \else - \begingroup - \let\,\@empty % \, is ignored when def'ing the macro name - \let\acute\@firstofone % same - \edef\gl@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}% - \def\,{\noexpand\gl@op@sp}% - \def\acute####1{% - \if i####1% - \noexpand\gl@op@i - \else - \noexpand\gl@op@ac####1% - \fi}% - \edef\gl@a{\endgroup - \noexpand\babel@save\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b - \def\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b{% - \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\nolimits}}% - \gl@a % It restores itself - \gl@a - \fi - \fi}% - \let\gl@b\galicianoperators - \addto\gl@b{ }% - \expandafter\gl@a\gl@b sen tx cosec arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tx senh & %\, will be set to \gl@op@sp - % - \babel@save\sin \let\sin\sen - \babel@save\arcsin \let\arcsin\arcsen - \babel@save\sinh \let\sinh\senh -} - -\def\galicianoperators{cotx txh} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}} - -\def\gl@set@shorthand#1{% - \expandafter\edef\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname - {\the\catcode`#1}% - \initiate@active@char{#1}% - \catcode`#1=\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname gl@math\string#1\expandafter\endcsname - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname} - -\def\gl@use@shorthand{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx\thepage\relax\then - \string - \else{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect\then - \noexpand - \else - \gl@use@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\def\gl@text@sh#1{\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname} -\def\gl@math@sh#1{\csname gl@math\string#1\endcsname} - -\def\gl@use@sh{% - \gl@delayed - \if@safe@actives\then - \string - \else{% - \gl@delayed - \ifmmode\then - \gl@math@sh - \else - \gl@text@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\gdef\gl@activate#1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \def~{\gl@use@shorthand~}}} - -\def\galiciandeactivate#1{% - \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\gl@spdeactivate\@tempa}} - -\def\gl@spdeactivate#1{% - \if.#1% - \mathcode`\.=\gl@period@code - \else - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \expandafter\let\expandafter~% - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \catcode`#1\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \fi} - -\def\gl@reviveshorthands{% - \gl@restore{"}\gl@restore{~}% - \gl@restore{<}\gl@restore{>}% - \gl@quoting} - -\def\gl@restore#1{% - \catcode`#1=\active - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \bbl@deactivate{~}}} -\begingroup -\catcode`\'=12 -\lccode`~=`' \lccode`'=`' -\lowercase{% -\gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \gl@delayed - \ifx~\@let@token\then - \pr@@@s - \else - {\gl@delayed - \ifx'\@let@token\then - \pr@@@s - \else - {\gl@delayed - \ifx^\@let@token\then - \pr@@@t - \else - \egroup - \fi}% - \fi}% - \fi}} -\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname @tabacckludge\endcsname\relax - \let\gl@tak\a -\else - \let\gl@tak\@tabacckludge -\fi - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\expandafter\gl@tak\string#1} - \let\a\@tabacckludge -\else\ifes@plain %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname a\string#1\endcsname} -\fi\fi %<<<<<< - -\expandafter\ifx\csname add@accent\endcsname\relax - \def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2} -\fi -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\@text@composite - \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite - {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3% - \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}% - \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}} -\else %<<<<<< - \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 } -\fi %<<<<<< -\addto\shorthandsgalician{\languageshorthands{galician}} -\let\noshorthandsgalician\relax -\def\galiciandecimal#1{\def\gl@decimal{{#1}}} -\def\decimalcomma{\galiciandecimal{,}} -\def\decimalpoint{\galiciandecimal{.}} -\decimalcomma - -\gl@set@shorthand{.} - -\@namedef{gl@math\string.}{% - \@ifnextchar\egroup - {\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}% - {\gl@text@sh.}} - -\declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax} -\addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \mathchardef\gl@period@code\the\mathcode`\.% - \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}% - \mathcode`\.="8000 % - \gl@activate{.}} - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \catcode`\.=12 - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{% - \string\catcode`\string\.=12}% - \fi} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.1}{\gl@decimal1} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.2}{\gl@decimal2} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.3}{\gl@decimal3} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.4}{\gl@decimal4} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.5}{\gl@decimal5} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.6}{\gl@decimal6} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.7}{\gl@decimal7} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.8}{\gl@decimal8} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.9}{\gl@decimal9} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{.0}{\gl@decimal0} -\gl@set@shorthand{"} -\def\gl@umlaut#1{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 } -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{"}% - \gl@activate{~}% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut - \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname - \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\gl@accent\~{126}}% - \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname - \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\gl@accent\'{19}}} -\else %<<<<<< - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{"}% - \gl@activate{~}% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut - \babel@save\~% - \def\~{\gl@accent\~{126}}% - \babel@save\'% - \def\'#1{\if#1i\gl@accent\'{19}\i\else\gl@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}} -\fi %<<<<<< -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"a}{\protect\gl@sptext{a}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"A}{\protect\gl@sptext{A}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"o}{\protect\gl@sptext{o}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"O}{\protect\gl@sptext{O}} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"u}{\"u} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"U}{\"U} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"i}{\"i} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"I}{\"I} - -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"<}{\begin{quoting}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{">}{\end{quoting}} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"=}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\char\hyphenchar\font\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"~} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {\char\hyphenchar\font}{\char\hyphenchar\font}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"r} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {}{r}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"R} - {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}% - {}{R}\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"/} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}% - \dimen@\ht\z@ - \advance\dimen@-1ex - \advance\dimen@\dp\z@ - \dimen@.31\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@ - \ifdim\dimen@>0pt - \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em - \else - \box\z@ - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"?} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{"!} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} - -\gl@set@shorthand{~} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~n}{\~n} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~N}{\~N} -\declare@shorthand{galician}{~-}{% - \leavevmode - \bgroup - \let\@sptoken\gl@dashes % This assignation changes the - \@ifnextchar-% \@ifnextchar behaviour - {\gl@dashes}% - {\hbox{\char\hyphenchar\font}\egroup}} -\def\gl@dashes-{% - \@ifnextchar-% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}} - -\def\deactivatetilden{% - \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax} -\expandafter\ifx\csname XML@catcodes\endcsname\relax - \addto\gl@select{% - \catcode`\<\active\catcode`\>=\active - \gl@quoting} - - \gl@set@shorthand{<} - \gl@set@shorthand{>} - - \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname} - \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname} - - \addto\shorthandsgalician{% - \gl@activate{<}% - \gl@activate{>}} - \ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \AtBeginDocument{% - \gl@quoting - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\gl@quoting}% - \fi}% - \fi %<<<<<< - - \def\activatequoting{% - \catcode`>=\active \catcode`<=\active - \let\gl@quoting\activatequoting} - \def\deactivatequoting{% - \catcode`>=12 \catcode`<=12 - \let\gl@quoting\deactivatequoting} - - \declare@shorthand{galician}{<<}{\guillemotleft{}} - \declare@shorthand{galician}{>>}{\guillemotright{}} -\fi - -\let\gl@quoting\relax -\let\deactivatequoting\relax -\let\activatequoting\relax -\def\gl@activeacute{% - \gl@set@shorthand{'}% - \addto\shorthandsgalician{\gl@activate{'}}% - \addto\gl@reviveshorthands{\gl@restore{'}}% - \addto\gl@select{\catcode`'=\active}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'a}{\@tabacckludge'a}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'A}{\@tabacckludge'A}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'e}{\@tabacckludge'e}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'E}{\@tabacckludge'E}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'i}{\@tabacckludge'i}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'I}{\@tabacckludge'I}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'o}{\@tabacckludge'o}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'O}{\@tabacckludge'O}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'u}{\@tabacckludge'u}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'U}{\@tabacckludge'U}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'n}{\~n}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{'N}{\~N}% - \declare@shorthand{galician}{''}{\textquotedblright}% - \let\gl@activeacute\relax} - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\gl@activeacute}{} -\else %<<<<<< - \gl@activeacute -\fi %<<<<<<% -\def\gl@enumerate#1#2#3#4{% - \def\gl@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} - -\def\gl@itemize#1#2#3#4{% - \def\gl@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - -\gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$} -\def\galiciandashitems{\gl@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}} -\def\galiciansymbitems{% - \gl@itemize - {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex - {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}% - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}} -\def\galiciansignitems{% - \gl@itemize - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}% - {$\m@th\triangleright$}} -\galiciansymbitems - -\def\gl@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{% - \if#21% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2a% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}% - \else\if#2A% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2i% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2I% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2o% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\protect\gl@sptext{o}}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname} - \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname - {\noexpand\gl@listquot\the\toks@#3}} - -\addto\layoutgalician{% - \def\gl@enumerate##1##2##3##4{% - \gl@enumdef{i}##1\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{ii}##2\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{iii}##3\@empty\@empty\@@ - \gl@enumdef{iv}##4\@empty\@empty\@@}% - \def\gl@itemize##1##2##3##4{% - \def\labelitemi{\gl@listquot##1}% - \def\labelitemii{\gl@listquot##2}% - \def\labelitemiii{\gl@listquot##3}% - \def\labelitemiv{\gl@listquot##4}}% - \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}% - \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi\theenumii}% - \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}% - \expandafter\gl@enumerate\gl@enum - \expandafter\gl@itemize\gl@item - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode\ll - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char40 \kern-0.19em\char40 }}% - \fi}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{% - \ifmmode\gg - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char41 \kern-0.19em\char41 }}% - \fi}% - \def\@fnsymbol##1% - {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or - *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or - l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or - x\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@Alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or - L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or - X\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue - \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname.\quad}% - \def\numberline##1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1\if&##1&\else.\fi\hfil}}% - \def\@roman##1{\protect\gl@roman{\number##1}}% - \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@msc{\romannumeral##1}}% - \def\glromanindex##1##2{##1{\protect\gl@msc{##2}}}} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \let\gl@activeacute\@undefined - \def\bbl@tempa{galician}% - \ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa - \AtBeginDocument{\layoutgalician}% - \addto\gl@select{% - \@ifstar{\let\layoutgalician\relax}% - {\layoutgalician\let\layoutgalician\relax}}% - \fi - \selectgalician} - -\fi %<<<<<< -\gl@savedcatcodes - -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} - -\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<< - \ldf@finish{galician} -\else %<<<<<< - \gl@select - \ldf@finish{galician} - \csname activatequoting\endcsname -\fi %<<<<<< - -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `galician.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty index ebd06b05761..73c95d310ed 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `galician') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 0253009bd8c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,196 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `germanb.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% germanb.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{germanb} - [2008/06/01 v2.6m German support from the babel system] -%% File `germanb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Germanb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\def\bbl@tempa{germanb} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{german} - \ifx\l@german\@undefined - \@nopatterns{German} - \adddialect\l@german0 - \fi - \let\l@germanb\l@german - \AtBeginDocument{% - \let\captionsgermanb\captionsgerman - \let\dategermanb\dategerman - \let\extrasgermanb\extrasgerman - \let\noextrasgermanb\noextrasgerman - } -\fi -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@german\@undefined - \@nopatterns{German} - \adddialect\l@german0 -\fi -\adddialect\l@austrian\l@german -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Vorwort}% - \def\refname{Literatur}% - \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}% - \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Anhang}% - \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt - \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% - \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Abbildung}% - \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel - \def\partname{Teil}% - \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n) - \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an - \def\headtoname{An}% - \def\pagename{Seite}% - \def\seename{siehe}% - \def\alsoname{siehe auch}% - \def\proofname{Beweis}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossar}% - } -\def\month@german{\ifcase\month\or - Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or - Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi} -\def\dategerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@german - \space\number\year}} -\def\dateaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month - J\"anner\else \month@german\fi \space\number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{german}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasgerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}% - \lccode25=25} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{german}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}% - {\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"S}{\SS} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"Z}{SZ} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}} -\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M - \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= } -\def\bbl@insertff{% - \if f\bbl@nextff - \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}} -\let\bbl@nextff=f -\declare@shorthand{german}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{german}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `germanb.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty index 329cbc0473e..9880a670669 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `germanb') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 1ede741a457..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `glbst.tex', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% galician.dtx (with options: `bblbst') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `galician.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Galcian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006 -%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008 -%% by Javier A. M\'ugica -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably) -%% jmugica at digi21.net -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal} - -\def\bbland{e} -\def\bbleditors{directores} \def\bbleds{dirs.\@} -\def\bbleditor{director} \def\bbled{dir.\@} -\def\bbledby{dirixido por} -\def\bbledition{edici\'on} \def\bbledn{ed.\@} -\def\bbletal{e outros} -\def\bblvolume{volumen} \def\bblvol{vol.\@} -\def\bblof{de} -\def\bblnumber{n\'umero} \def\bblno{n\sptext{o}} -\def\bblin{en} -\def\bblpages{p\'axinas} \def\bblpp{p\'axs.\@} -\def\bblpage{p\'axina} \def\bblp{p\'ax.\@} -\def\bblchapter{cap\'itulo} \def\bblchap{cap.\@} -\def\bbltechreport{informe t\'ecnico} -\def\bbltechrep{inf.\@ t\'ec.\@} -\def\bblmthesis{proxecto de fin de carreira} -\def\bblphdthesis{tesis doutoral} -\def\bblfirst {primeira} \def\bblfirsto {1\sptext{a}} -\def\bblsecond{segunda} \def\bblsecondo{2\sptext{a}} -\def\bblthird {terceira} \def\bblthirdo {3\sptext{a}} -\def\bblfourth{cuarta} \def\bblfourtho{4\sptext{a}} -\def\bblfifth {quinta} \def\bblfiftho {5\sptext{a}} -\def\bblth{\sptext{a}} -\let\bblst\bblth \let\bblnd\bblth \let\bblrd\bblth -\def\bbljan{xaneiro} \def\bblfeb{febreiro} \def\bblmar{marzo} -\def\bblapr{abril} \def\bblmay{maio} \def\bbljun{xu\~no} -\def\bbljul{xullo} \def\bblaug{agosto} \def\bblsep{setembro} -\def\bbloct{outubro}\def\bblnov{novembro}\def\bbldec{decembro} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `glbst.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 3133cc020f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,216 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `glromidx.tex', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% galician.dtx (with options: `indexgl') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `galician.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Galcian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006 -%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008 -%% by Javier A. M\'ugica -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably) -%% jmugica at digi21.net -%% J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal} - -\makeatletter - -\newcount\gl@converted -\newcount\gl@processed - -\def\gl@encap{`\|} -\def\gl@openrange{`\(} -\def\gl@closerange{`\)} - -\def\gl@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1} -\def\gl@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2} - -\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J% - (extension por omision .idx):} - -\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} -\ifin@ - \edef\gl@input@file{\expandafter\gl@split@file\answer\@@} - \edef\gl@input@ext{\expandafter\gl@split@ext\answer\@@} -\else - \edef\gl@input@file{\answer} - \def\gl@input@ext{idx} -\fi - -\typein[\answer]{^^JArquivo de destino^^J% - (arquivo por omision: \gl@input@file.eix,^^J% - extension por omision .eix):} -\ifx\answer\@empty - \edef\gl@output{\gl@input@file.eix} -\else - \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} - \ifin@ - \edef\gl@output{\answer} - \else - \edef\gl@output{\answer.eix} - \fi -\fi - -\typein[\answer]{% - ^^J?Usouse algun esquema especial de controles^^J% - de MakeIndex para encap, open_range ou close_range?^^J% - [s/n] (n por omision)} - -\if s\answer - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J% - (\string| por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@encap{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J% - (\string( por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@openrange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J% - (\string) por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\gl@closerange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi -\fi - -\newwrite\gl@indexfile -\immediate\openout\gl@indexfile=\gl@output - -\newif\ifgl@encapsulated - -\def\gl@roman#1{\romannumeral#1 } -\edef\gl@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\} - -\def\indexentry{% - \begingroup - \@sanitize - \gl@indexentry} - -\begingroup - -\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\gl@encap\relax -\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\gl@openrange\relax -\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\gl@closerange\relax - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@indexentry#1{% - \endgroup - \advance\gl@processed\@ne - \gl@encapsulatedfalse - \gl@bar@idx#1|\@@ - \gl@idxentry}% -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@idxentry#1{% - \in@{\gl@roman}{#1}% - \ifin@ - \advance\gl@converted\@ne - \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\gl@b|\ifgl@encapsulated\gl@p\fi glromanindex% - {\ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@slash\gl@a\fi}}{#1}}% - \else - \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\gl@b\ifgl@encapsulated|\gl@p\gl@a\fi}{#1}}% - \fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{% - \def\gl@b{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}% - \ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@encapsulatedtrue\gl@bar@eat#2\fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\gl@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\gl@p{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}% - \edef\gl@t{(}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p - \else\edef\gl@t{)}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p - \else - \edef\gl@a{\gl@p\gl@a}\let\gl@p\@empty% - \fi\fi} -} - -\endgroup - -\input \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext - -\immediate\closeout\gl@indexfile - -\typeout{*****************} -\typeout{procesouse: \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext } -\typeout{Li'nas lidas: \the\gl@processed} -\typeout{Li'nas convertidas: \the\gl@converted} -\typeout{Resultado en: \gl@output} -\ifnum\gl@converted>\z@ - \typeout{Xenere o 'indice a partir deste arquivo} -\else - \typeout{Non se realizou ning'un tipo de conversi'on} - \typeout{P'odese xenerar o arquivo directamente^^J% - de \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext} -\fi -\typeout{*****************} -\@@end -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `glromidx.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 44b5509a88a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `greek.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{greek} - [2005/03/30 v1.3l Greek support from the babel system] -%% File `greek.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Greek language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997, 2005 -%% by Apostolos Syropoulos -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: Apostolos Syropoulos -%% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or -%% apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr -%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl) -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\gdef\CurrentOption{greek}% -\ifx\l@greek\@undefined - \@nopatterns{greek} - \adddialect\l@greek0\fi -\bbl@declare@ttribute{greek}{polutoniko}{% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extrasgreek - \expandafter{\extraspolutonikogreek}% - \let\captionsgreek\captionspolutonikogreek - \let\gr@month\gr@c@month - \let\l@polutonikogreek\l@greek - \let\datepolutonikogreek\dategreek - \let\extraspolutonikogreek\extrasgreek - \let\noextraspolutonikogreek\noextrasgreek - } -\InputIfFileExists{lgrenc.def}{% - \message{Loading the definitions for the Greek font encoding}}{% - \errhelp{I can't find the lgrenc.def file for the Greek fonts}% - \errmessage{Since I do not know what the LGR encoding means^^J - I can't typeset Greek.^^J - I stop here, while you get a suitable lgrenc.def file}\@@end - } -\DeclareRobustCommand{\greektext}{% - \fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont - \def\encodingdefault{LGR}} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\textgreek}[1]{\leavevmode{\greektext #1}} -\def\outlfamily{\usefont{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n}} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textol}{\outlfamily} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\@ne\@ne} -\addto\captionsgreek{% - \def\prefacename{Pr'ologos}% - \def\refname{Anafor'es}% - \def\abstractname{Per'ilhyh}% - \def\bibname{Bibliograf'ia}% - \def\chaptername{Kef'alaio}% - \def\appendixname{Par'arthma}% - \def\contentsname{Perieq'omena}% - \def\listfigurename{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% - \def\listtablename{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% - \def\indexname{Euret'hrio}% - \def\figurename{Sq'hma}% - \def\tablename{P'inakas}% - \def\partname{M'eros}% - \def\enclname{Sunhmm'ena}% - \def\ccname{Koinopo'ihsh}% - \def\headtoname{Pros}% - \def\pagename{Sel'ida}% - \def\seename{bl'epe}% - \def\alsoname{bl'epe ep'ishs}% - \def\proofname{Ap'odeixh}% - \def\glossaryname{Glwss'ari}% - } -\let\captionspolutonikogreek\captionsgreek -\addto\captionspolutonikogreek{% - \def\refname{>Anafor`es}% - \def\indexname{E<uret'hrio}% - \def\figurename{Sq~hma}% - \def\headtoname{Pr`os}% - \def\alsoname{bl'epe >ep'ishs}% - \def\proofname{>Ap'odeixh}% -} -\def\gr@month{% - \ifcase\month\or - Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or - Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or - Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi} -\def\dategreek{% - \def\today{\number\day \space \gr@month\space \number\year}} -\def\gr@c@month{% - \ifcase\month\or >Ianouar'iou\or - Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or >April'iou\or Ma"'iou\or - >Ioun'iou\or >Ioul'iou\or A>ugo'ustou\or Septembr'iou\or - >Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi} -\def\Grtoday{% - \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\day}\space - \gr@c@month \space - \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\year}} -\addto\extrasgreek{\greektext} -\addto\noextrasgreek{\latintext} -\def\gr@ill@value#1{% - \PackageWarning{babel}{Illegal value (#1) for greeknumeral}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@false{% - \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@true{% - \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{\anwtonos}} -\anw@true -\def\greeknumeral#1{% - \ifnum#1<\@ne\space\gr@ill@value{#1}% - \else - \ifnum#1<10\expandafter\gr@num@i\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<100\expandafter\gr@num@ii\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<\@m\expandafter\gr@num@iii\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<\@M\expandafter\gr@num@iv\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<100000\expandafter\gr@num@v\number#1% - \else - \ifnum#1<1000000\expandafter\gr@num@vi\number#1% - \else - \space\gr@ill@value{#1}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -} -\def\Greeknumeral#1{% - \expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\greeknumeral{#1}}} -\let\latin@alph\@alph -\let\latin@Alph\@Alph -\def\greek@alph#1{\expandafter\greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}} -\def\greek@Alph#1{\expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \let\@alph\greek@alph - \let\@Alph\greek@Alph} -\addto\noextrasgreek{% - \let\@alph\latin@alph - \let\@Alph\latin@Alph} -\let\latin@roman\@roman -\let\latin@Roman\@Roman -\def\greek@roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@roman{#1}}} -\def\greek@Roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@Roman{#1}}} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \let\@roman\greek@roman - \let\@Roman\greek@Roman} -\addto\noextrasgreek{% - \let\@roman\latin@roman - \let\@Roman\latin@Roman} -\let\ltx@amp\& -\def\greek@amp{\textlatin{\ltx@amp}} -\addto\extrasgreek{\let\&\greek@amp} -\addto\noextrasgreek{\let\&\ltx@amp} -\def\gr@num@i#1{% - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\anw@print} -\def\gr@num@ii#1{% - \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@i} -\def\gr@num@iii#1{% - \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi - \ifnum#1=\z@\anw@false\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@ii} -\def\gr@num@iv#1{% - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi - \gr@num@iii} -\def\gr@num@v#1{% - \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi - \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi - \gr@num@iv} -\def\gr@num@vi#1{% - \katwtonos - \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi - \gr@num@v} -\begingroup - \@ifundefined{active@char\string!}{}{\catcode`!=12\relax} - \catcode`\~=12 - \lccode`\!=`\~ - \lowercase{\def\x{\endgroup - \def\greek@tilde{!}}\x} -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@save\~\let\~\greek@tilde} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`v}\lccode`v=`v% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\'}\lccode`\'=`\'% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\"}\lccode`\"=`\"} -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\<}\lccode`\<=`\<% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\>}\lccode`\>=`\>% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\~}\lccode`\~=`\~% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\|}\lccode`\|=`\|% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\`}\lccode`\`=`\`} -\addto\extrasgreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\"}\uccode`\"=`\"% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\'}\uccode`\'=159} %% 159 == ^^9f -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\~}\uccode`\~=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\>}\uccode`\>=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\<}\uccode`\<=159% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\|}\uccode`\|=`\|% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\`}\uccode`\`=159} -\@tempcnta=\lccode`\~ -\lccode`\~=159 -\lowercase{% - \initiate@active@char{~}% - \declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{}} -\lccode`\~=\@tempcnta -\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{\languageshorthands{greek}}% -\declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{\greek@tilde} -\DeclareTextCommand{\anwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FE\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\katwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FF\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\qoppa}{LGR}{\char"12\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\stigma}{LGR}{\char"06\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\sampi}{LGR}{\char"1B\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax} -\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `greek.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty index fe5bdab7ad0..0cdf1ac7ae7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `greek') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty deleted file mode 100644 index aeff09bdc8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `grmath.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% grmath.dtx (with options: `package') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% \CheckSum{126} -%% This is file `grmath.sty' -%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesPackage{grmath}[2001/02/12\space v1.2] -\typeout{Package: `grmath' v1.2\space <2001/02/12> (A. Syropoulos)} -\DeclareOption{grlog}{% - \def\log{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_{10}}\nolimits} - \def\ln{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_% - {\mathgroup\symoperators e}}\nolimits} -} -\DeclareOption{enlog}{% - \def\log{\mathop{\operator@font log}\nolimits} - \def\ln{\mathop{\operator@font ln}\nolimits} -} -\ExecuteOptions{grlog} -\ProcessOptions -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{% - \PackageError{grmath}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - }} -\DeclareSymbolFont{groperators}{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} -\SetSymbolFont{groperators}{bold}{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} -\def\sin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators hm}\nolimits} -\def\cos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sun}\nolimits} -\def\tan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators ef}\nolimits} -\def\arcsin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxhm}\nolimits} -\def\arccos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsun}\nolimits} -\def\arctan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxef}\nolimits} -\def\cot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sf}\nolimits} -\def\sec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators tem}\nolimits} -\def\csc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators stem}\nolimits} -\def\gcd{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators MKD}\nolimits} -\def\lcm{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators EKP}\nolimits} -\def\arccot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsf}\nolimits} -\def\arcsec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxtem}\nolimits} -\def\arccsc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxstem}\nolimits} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `grmath.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 2f54c8a9c91..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `grsymb.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% grsymb.dtx (with options: `package') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% \CheckSum{55} -%% This is file `grsymb.sty' -%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos. -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesPackage{grsymb}[1997/09/21\space v1.0] -\typeout{Package: `grsymb' v1.0\space <1997/09/21> (A. Syropoulos)} -\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{% - \PackageError{grsymb}{% - `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak - package hasn't been loaded}{% - The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak - are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak - typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak - it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax - } -\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\tao}{LGR}{\char"01\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Qoppa}{LGR}{\char"14\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\varqoppa}{LGR}{\char"13\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Sampi}{LGR}{\char"1A\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Stigma}{LGR}{\char"08\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\VarQoppa}{LGR}{\char"15\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax} -\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `grsymb.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 898577c2f1c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8OmegaHebrew.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8OmegaHebrew,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8OmegaHebrew.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\OmegaHebrewscale{0.9} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{m}{n}{<-> [\OmegaHebrewscale] OmegaHebrew }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8OmegaHebrew.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 85943b84d92..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8aharoni.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8aharoni,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8aharoni.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\Aharoniscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{aharoni}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharoni}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{b}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonibi}{} - -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8aharoni.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index df66a5e5a9e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8cmr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmr,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8cmr.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew default font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n} - {<-> david }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{it} - {<-> davidi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sl} - {<-> davidi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sc} - {<-> david }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{n} - {<-> davidb }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<-> davidb }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-> davidbi }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{it} - {<-> davidbi }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8cmr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 8dee0d27919..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8cmss.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmss,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8cmss.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew sans-serif font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{it} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sl} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sc} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{b}{n} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{sl} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{it} - {<-> nachlieli }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8cmss.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 7f5e826a01e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8cmtt.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmtt,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8cmtt.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew typewriter font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sl} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sc} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{b}{n} - {<-> miriam }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{sl} - {<-> miriam }{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{it} - {<-> miriam }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8cmtt.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd deleted file mode 100644 index e2d8089c8ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8david.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8david,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8david.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew serif font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\Davidscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{david}{\hyphenchar\font45} - -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] david}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{b}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidbi}{} - -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8david.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 23d0e26f991..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8drugulin.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8drugulin,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8drugulin.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew old serif font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\Drugulinscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{drugulin}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{b}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8drugulin.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def deleted file mode 100644 index 033b35ed965..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,138 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8enc.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8enc') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8enc.def} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - 8-bit Hebrew font encoding - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontEncoding{HE8}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sheva}{HE8}{192} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafsegol}{HE8}{193} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafpatah}{HE8}{194} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafqamats}{HE8}{195} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hiriq}{HE8}{196} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\tsere}{HE8}{197} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\segol}{HE8}{198} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\patah}{HE8}{199} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\qamats}{HE8}{200} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\holam}{HE8}{201} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\qubuts}{HE8}{203} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\dagesh}{HE8}{204} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\meteg}{HE8}{205} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\maqaf}{HE8}{206} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\rafe}{HE8}{207} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\paseq}{HE8}{208} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\shindot}{HE8}{209} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sindot}{HE8}{210} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\sofpasuq}{HE8}{211} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\doublevav}{HE8}{212} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\vavyod}{HE8}{213} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\doubleyod}{HE8}{214} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{HE8}{224} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{HE8}{225} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{HE8}{226} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{HE8}{227} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{HE8}{228} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{HE8}{229} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{HE8}{230} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{HE8}{231} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{HE8}{232} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{HE8}{233} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{HE8}{234} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{HE8}{235} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{HE8}{236} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{HE8}{237} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{HE8}{238} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{HE8}{239} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{HE8}{240} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{HE8}{241} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{HE8}{242} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{HE8}{243} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{HE8}{244} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{HE8}{245} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{HE8}{246} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{HE8}{247} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{HE8}{248} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{HE8}{249} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{HE8}{250} -\let\hebsin=\hebshin -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8enc.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 082914a1c27..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8frankruehl.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8frankruehl,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8frankruehl.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew serif font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\FrankRuehlscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{frank}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frank}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{sl} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{b}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankbi}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8frankruehl.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd deleted file mode 100644 index d19b4b181f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8miriam.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8miriam,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8miriam.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew monospaced font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\MiriamMonoscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{miriam}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriam}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{sl} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{b}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriambi}{} - -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8miriam.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 6d3a62847cb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8nachlieli.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8nachlieli,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8nachlieli.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\Nachlieliscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{nachlieli}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlieli}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{b}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielibi}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8nachlieli.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 07367eabab8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `he8yad.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8yad,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{HE8yad.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\KtavYadscale{1.0} -\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{yad}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{sl} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{b}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `he8yad.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 2f89eec3eb3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,441 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `hebcal.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `calendar') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -%% TeX & LaTeX macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one -%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Michail Rozman, misha@iop.tartu.ew.su -%% -\ProvidesPackage{hebcal} - [2005/03/30 v2.3h % - Hebrew calendar - Hebrew language support from the babel system] -\newif\if@full@hebrew@year -\@full@hebrew@yearfalse -\DeclareOption{full}{\@full@hebrew@yeartrue} -\ProcessOptions -\newcount\Hebrewday \newcount\Hebrewmonth \newcount\Hebrewyear -\def\Hebrewdate#1#2#3{% - \HebrewFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3} - {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \ifundefined{if@rl}% - \FormatForEnglish{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \else% - \FormatDate{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}% - \fi} -\def\Hebrewtoday{\Hebrewdate{\day}{\month}{\year}} -\let\hebrewtoday=\Hebrewtoday -\def\Hebrewsetreg{% - \HebrewFromGregorian{\day}{\month}{\year} - {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}} -\def\FormatDate#1#2#3{% - \if@rl% - \FormatForHebrew{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \else% - \FormatForEnglish{#1}{#2}{#3} - \fi} -\def\HebrewYearName#1{{% - \@tempcnta=#1\divide\@tempcnta by 1000\multiply\@tempcnta by 1000 - \ifnum#1=\@tempcnta\relax % divisible by 1000: disambiguate - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(% - \else % not divisible by 1000 - \ifnum#1<1000\relax % first millennium: disambiguate - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(% - \else - \ifnum#1<5000 - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}% - \else - \ifnum#1<6000 % current millenium, print without thousands - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \if@full@hebrew@year\else\advance\@tempcnta by -5000\fi - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{\@tempcnta}% - \else % #1>6000 - \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi}} -\def\HebrewMonthName#1#2{% - \ifnum #1 = 7 % - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'% - \else \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh% - \fi% - \else% - \ifcase#1% - % nothing for 0 - \or\hebtav\hebshin\hebresh\hebyod% - \or\hebhet\hebshin\hebvav\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebkaf\hebsamekh\heblamed\hebvav% - \or\hebtet\hebbet\hebtav% - \or\hebshin\hebbet\hebtet% - \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebalef'% - \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'% - \or\hebnun\hebyod\hebsamekh\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebalef\hebyod\hebyod\hebresh% - \or\hebsamekh\hebyod\hebvav\hebfinalnun% - \or\hebtav\hebmem\hebvav\hebzayin% - \or\hebalef\hebbet% - \or\hebalef\heblamed\hebvav\heblamed% - \fi% - \fi} -\def\HebrewDayName#1{\Hebrewnumeral{#1}} -\def\FormatForHebrew#1#2#3{% - \HebrewDayName{#1}~\hebbet\HebrewMonthName{#2}{#3},~% - \HebrewYearName{#3}} -\def\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish#1#2{% - \ifnum #1 = 7% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap Adar II\else Adar\fi% - \else% - \ifcase #1% - % nothing for 0 - \or Tishrei% - \or Heshvan% - \or Kislev% - \or Tebeth% - \or Shebat% - \or Adar I% - \or Adar II% - \or Nisan% - \or Iyar% - \or Sivan% - \or Tammuz% - \or Av% - \or Elul% - \fi - \fi} -\def\FormatForEnglish#1#2#3{% - \HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{#2}{#3} \number#1,\ \number#3} -\newcount\@common -\def\Remainder#1#2#3{% - #3 = #1% % c = a - \divide #3 by #2% % c = a/b - \multiply #3 by -#2% % c = -b(a/b) - \advance #3 by #1}% % c = a - b(a/b) -\newif\if@Divisible -\def\CheckIfDivisible#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmp = 0% \tmp == \count0 - temporary variable - \Remainder{#1}{#2}{\tmp}% - \ifnum \tmp = 0% - \global\@Divisibletrue% - \else% - \global\@Divisiblefalse% - \fi}} -\def\ifundefined#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax} -\newif\if@GregorianLeap -\def\IfGregorianLeap#1{% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{4}% - \if@Divisible% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{100}% - \if@Divisible% - \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{400}% - \if@Divisible% - \@GregorianLeaptrue% - \else% - \@GregorianLeapfalse% - \fi% - \else% - \@GregorianLeaptrue% - \fi% - \else% - \@GregorianLeapfalse% - \fi% - \if@GregorianLeap} -\def\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{% - {% - #3 = \ifcase #1% - 0 \or% % no month number 0 - 0 \or% - 31 \or% - 59 \or% - 90 \or% - 120 \or% - 151 \or% - 181 \or% - 212 \or% - 243 \or% - 273 \or% - 304 \or% - 334% - \fi% - \IfGregorianLeap{#2}% - \ifnum #1 > 2% % if month after February - \advance #3 by 1% % add leap day - \fi% - \fi% - \global\@common = #3}% - #3 = \@common} -\def\GregorianDaysInPriorYears#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpc = 4% % \tmpc==\count4 - \countdef\tmpb = 2% % \tmpb==\count2 - \tmpb = #1% % - \advance \tmpb by -1% % - \tmpc = \tmpb% % \tmpc = \tmpb = year-1 - \multiply \tmpc by 365% % Days in prior years = - #2 = \tmpc% % = 365*(year-1) ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 4% % \tmpc = (year-1)/4 - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus Julian leap days ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 100% % \tmpc = (year-1)/100 - \advance #2 by -\tmpc% % ... minus century years ... - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \divide \tmpc by 400% % \tmpc = (year-1)/400 - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus 4-century years. - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -\def\AbsoluteFromGregorian#1#2#3#4{% - {% - \countdef\tmpd = 0% % \tmpd==\count0 - #4 = #1% % days so far this month - \GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{\tmpd}% - \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior months - \GregorianDaysInPriorYears{#3}{\tmpd}% - \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior years - \global\@common = #4}% - #4 = \@common} -\newif\if@HebrewLeap -\def\CheckLeapHebrewYear#1{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 - \tmpa = #1% - \multiply \tmpa by 7% - \advance \tmpa by 1% - \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% - \ifnum \tmpb < 7% % \tmpb = (7*year+1)%19 - \global\@HebrewLeaptrue% - \else% - \global\@HebrewLeapfalse% - \fi}} -\def\HebrewElapsedMonths#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 - \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2 - \tmpa = #1% % - \advance \tmpa by -1% % - #2 = \tmpa% % #2 = \tmpa = year-1 - \divide #2 by 19% % Number of complete Meton cycles - \multiply #2 by 235% % #2 = 235*((year-1)/19) - \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% \tmpa = years%19-years this cycle - \tmpc = \tmpb% % - \multiply \tmpb by 12% % - \advance #2 by \tmpb% % add regular months this cycle - \multiply \tmpc by 7% % - \advance \tmpc by 1% % - \divide \tmpc by 19% % \tmpc = (1+7*((year-1)%19))/19 - - \advance #2 by \tmpc% % add leap months - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -\def\HebrewElapsedDays#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0 - \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1 - \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2 - \HebrewElapsedMonths{#1}{#2}% - \tmpa = #2% % - \multiply \tmpa by 13753% % - \advance \tmpa by 5604% % \tmpa=MonthsElapsed*13758 + 5604 - \Remainder{\tmpa}{25920}{\tmpc}% \tmpc == ConjunctionParts - \divide \tmpa by 25920% - \multiply #2 by 29% - \advance #2 by 1% - \advance #2 by \tmpa% % #2 = 1 + MonthsElapsed*29 + - \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek - \ifnum \tmpc < 19440% - \ifnum \tmpc < 9924% - \else% % New moon at 9 h. 204 p. or later - \ifnum \tmpa = 2% % on Tuesday ... - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% of a common year - \if@HebrewLeap% - \else% - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \ifnum \tmpc < 16789% - \else% % New moon at 15 h. 589 p. or later - \ifnum \tmpa = 1% % on Monday ... - \advance #1 by -1% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% at the end of leap year - \if@HebrewLeap% - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \else% - \advance #2 by 1% % new moon at or after midday - \fi% - \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek - \ifnum \tmpa = 0% % if Sunday ... - \advance #2 by 1% - \else% % - \ifnum \tmpa = 3% % Wednesday ... - \advance #2 by 1% - \else% - \ifnum \tmpa = 5% % or Friday - \advance #2 by 1% - \fi% - \fi% - \fi% - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -\def\DaysInHebrewYear#1#2{% - {% - \countdef\tmpe = 12% % \tmpe==\count12 - \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{\tmpe}% - \advance #1 by 1% - \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{#2}% - \advance #2 by -\tmpe% - \global\@common = #2}% - #2 = \@common} -\def\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{% - {% - \countdef\tmpf= 14% % \tmpf==\count14 - #3 = \ifcase #1% % Days in prior month of regular year - 0 \or% % no month number 0 - 0 \or% % Tishri - 30 \or% % Heshvan - 59 \or% % Kislev - 89 \or% % Tebeth - 118 \or% % Shebat - 148 \or% % Adar I - 148 \or% % Adar II - 177 \or% % Nisan - 207 \or% % Iyar - 236 \or% % Sivan - 266 \or% % Tammuz - 295 \or% % Av - 325 \or% % Elul - 400% % Dummy - \fi% - \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}% - \if@HebrewLeap% % in leap year - \ifnum #1 > 6% % if month after Adar I - \advance #3 by 30% % add 30 days - \fi% - \fi% - \DaysInHebrewYear{#2}{\tmpf}% - \ifnum #1 > 3% - \ifnum \tmpf = 353% % - \advance #3 by -1% % - \fi% % Short Kislev - \ifnum \tmpf = 383% % - \advance #3 by -1% % - \fi% % - \fi% - \ifnum #1 > 2% - \ifnum \tmpf = 355% % - \advance #3 by 1% % - \fi% % Long Heshvan - \ifnum \tmpf = 385% % - \advance #3 by 1% % - \fi% % - \fi% - \global\@common = #3}% - #3 = \@common} -\def\AbsoluteFromHebrew#1#2#3#4{% - {% - #4 = #1% - \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{#1}% - \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior months this year - \HebrewElapsedDays{#3}{#1}% - \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior years - \advance #4 by -1373429% % Subtract days before Gregorian - \global\@common = #4}% % 01.01.0001 - #4 = \@common} -\def\HebrewFromGregorian#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - {% - \countdef\tmpx= 17% % \tmpx==\count17 - \countdef\tmpy= 18% % \tmpy==\count18 - \countdef\tmpz= 19% % \tmpz==\count19 - #6 = #3% % - \global\advance #6 by 3761% approximation from above - \AbsoluteFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \tmpz = 1 \tmpy = 1% - \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \ifnum \tmpx > #4% % - \global\advance #6 by -1% Hyear = Gyear + 3760 - \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \fi% % - \advance #4 by -\tmpx% % Days in this year - \advance #4 by 1% % - #5 = #4% % - \divide #5 by 30% % Approximation for month from below - \loop% % Search for month - \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#5}{#6}{\tmpx}% - \ifnum \tmpx < #4% - \advance #5 by 1% - \tmpy = \tmpx% - \repeat% - \global\advance #5 by -1% - \global\advance #4 by -\tmpy}} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `hebcal.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 8656da7b20d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `hebfont.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `hebfont') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesPackage{hebfont} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew font switching commands - (test version: still liable to change)] -\def\ivritex@tmp{HE8} -\ifx\ivritex@tmp\HeblatexEncoding % - % compatibility with hebfonts: - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont} - - % an attempt to give some replacements to the original hebfonts: - % - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - % note that redis is larger than shstk - - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textaha}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdav}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdru}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textel} {\fontfamily{ellinia}\selectfont} - % \textfr is already declared above - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textmir}{\fontfamily{miriam}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textna} {\fontfamily{nachlieli}\selectfont} - % is this necessary: - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textyad} {\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont} - -\else% -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{crml}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{fr}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{redis}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{clas}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{shold}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{shscr}\selectfont} -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{shstk}\selectfont} -\fi -\if@compatibility - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\jm}{\normalfont\rmfamily\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\jm} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ds}{\normalfont\bfseries\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\ds} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\oj}{\normalfont\itshape\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\oj} - \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ta}{\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont}% - {\@nomath\ta} -\fi -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `hebfont.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index dba5ea2a2eb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,297 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `hebrew.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `hebrew') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{hebrew.ldf} - [2005/03/30 v2.3h % - Hebrew language definition from the babel system - Hebrew language support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{hebrew}{captionshebrew} -\ifx\l@hebrew\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Hebrew}% - \adddialect\l@hebrew0 -\fi -\providecommand{\HeblatexEncoding}{LHE}% -\providecommand{\HeblatexEncodingFile}{lheenc}% -\newcommand{\heblatex@set@encoding}[2]{ -} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifpackageloaded{fontenc}{% - \@ifl@aded{def}{% - \HeblatexEncodingFile}{\def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}}{}% - }{% - \input{\HeblatexEncodingFile.def}% - \def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}% - }} -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\captionshebrew{% - \def\prefacename{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebbet\hebvav\hebalef}}% - \def\refname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebmem\hebqof\hebvav\hebresh\hebvav\hebtav}}% - \def\abstractname{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebqof\hebtsadi\hebyod\hebresh}}% - \def\bibname{\@ensure@R{\hebbet\hebyod\hebbet\heblamed\hebyod\hebvav% - \hebgimel\hebresh\hebpe\hebyod\hebhe}}% - \def\chaptername{\@ensure@R{\hebpe\hebresh\hebqof}}% - \def\appendixname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun\hebsamekh\hebpe\hebhet}}% - \def\contentsname{\@ensure@R{% - \hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % - \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% - \def\listfigurename{\@ensure@R{% - \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% - \def\listtablename{\@ensure@R{% - \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ - \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% - \def\indexname{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebpe\hebtav\hebhet}}% - \def\figurename{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh}}% - \def\tablename{\@ensure@R{\hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebhe}}% - \def\partname{\@ensure@R{\hebhet\heblamed\hebqof}}% - \def\enclname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}% - \def\ccname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof\hebyod% - \hebfinalmem}}% - \def\headtoname{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\heblamed}}% - \def\pagename{\@ensure@R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}% - \def\psname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun.\hebbet.}}% - \def\seename{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe}}% - \def\alsoname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe \hebgimel% - \hebmemesof}}% - \def\proofname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebvav\hebkaf\hebhet\hebhe}} - \def\glossaryname{\@ensure@L{Glossary}}% <-- Needs translation -} -\@ifclassloaded{seminar}{% - \def\slidelabel{\bf \if@rl\R{\hebshin\hebqof\hebfinalpe{} \theslide}% - \else\L{Slide \theslide}% - \fi}% -}{} -\def\hebmonth#1{% - \ifcase#1\or \hebyod\hebnun\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or % - \hebpe\hebbet\hebresh\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or % - \hebmem\hebresh\hebfinaltsadi\or % - \hebalef\hebpe\hebresh\hebyod\heblamed\or % - \hebmem\hebalef\hebyod\or \hebyod\hebvav\hebnun\hebyod\or % - \hebyod\hebvav\heblamed\hebyod\or % - \hebalef\hebvav\hebgimel\hebvav\hebsamekh\hebtet\or % - \hebsamekh\hebpe\hebtet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebalef\hebvav\hebqof\hebtet\hebvav\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebnun\hebvav\hebbet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or % - \hebdalet\hebtsadi\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\fi} -\def\hebdate#1#2#3{% - \beginR\beginL\number#1\endL\ \hebbet\hebmonth{#2} - \beginL\number#3\endL\endR} -\def\hebday{\hebdate{\day}{\month}{\year}} -\def\datehebrew{\let\today=\hebday} -\addto\extrashebrew{% - \tohebrew% - \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginR\fi\fi} -\addto\noextrashebrew{% - \fromhebrew% - \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginL\fi\fi} -\def\sethebrew{\setrllanguage{hebrew}} -\def\unsethebrew{\unsetrllanguage{hebrew}} -\if@compatibility - \let\hebrewtext=\sethebrew - \let\nohebrewtext=\unsethebrew -\fi -\def\tohebrew{\@torl{hebrew}}% -\def\fromhebrew{\@fromrl} -\def\@@hebrew#1{\beginR{{\tohebrew#1}}\endR} -\def\@hebrew{\protect\@@hebrew} -\newif\if@gim@apost % whether we print apostrophes -\newif\if@gim@final % whether we use final or initial letters -\newcommand*{\hebrewnumeral}[1] % no apostrophe, no final letters - {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@apostfalse\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeral}[1] % apostrophe, no final letters - {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeralfinal}[1] % apostrophe, final letters - {{\@gim@finaltrue\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}} -\addto\extrashebrew{% - \let\saved@alph=\@alph% - \let\saved@Alph=\@Alph% - \renewcommand*{\@alph}[1]{\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}% - \renewcommand*{\@Alph}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}% - \def\Alphfinal#1{\expandafter\@Alphfinal\csname c@#1\endcsname}% - \providecommand*{\@Alphfinal}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeralfinal{\number#1}}} -\addto\noextrashebrew{% - \let\@alph=\saved@alph% - \let\@Alph=\saved@Alph} -\renewcommand{\theenumii} - {\if@rl\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumii}% - \else\protect\L{\protect\@@alph{\number\c@enumii}}\fi} -\renewcommand{\theenumiv} - {\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumiv}% - \else\protect\L{\protect\@@Alph{\number\c@enumiv}}\fi} -\def\label#1{\@bsphack - \if@rl - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii)\theenumii(}% - \protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginR\@currentlabel\endR}{\thepage}}}% - \else - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii(\theenumii)}% - \protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginL\@currentlabel\endL}{\thepage}}}% - \fi - \@esphack} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \let\@@appendix=\appendix% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix% - \renewcommand\thesection - {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@section}% - \protect\else\@@Alph\c@section\protect\fi}}} - {\renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix% - \renewcommand\thechapter - {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@chapter}% - \protect\else\@@Alph\c@chapter\protect\fi}}}}} -\newcommand*{\@hebrew@numeral}[1] -{\@hebrew{\@tempcnta=#1\@tempcntb=#1\relax - \divide\@tempcntb by 1000 - \ifnum\@tempcntb=0\gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax - \else{\@gim@apostfalse\@gim@finalfalse\@hebrew@numeral\@tempcntb}'% - \multiply\@tempcntb by 1000\relax - \advance\@tempcnta by -\@tempcntb\relax - \gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax - \fi -}} -\newcommand*{\gim@nomil}[1]{\@tempcnta=#1\@gim@prevfalse - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 100\relax % hundreds digit - \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no hundreds - \or\gim@print{100}{\hebqof}% - \or\gim@print{200}{\hebresh}% - \or\gim@print{300}{\hebshin}% - \or\gim@print{400}{\hebtav}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{500}{\hebqof}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{600}{\hebresh}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{700}{\hebshin}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{800}{\hebtav}% - \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\hebtav\gim@print{900}{\hebqof}% - \fi - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 10\relax % tens digit - \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no tens - \or % number between 10 and 19 - \ifnum\@tempcnta = 16 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-zayin - \else\ifnum\@tempcnta = 15 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-vav - \else \gim@print{10}{\hebyod}% - \fi % \@tempcnta = 15 - \fi % \@tempcnta = 16 - \or\gim@print{20}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalkaf\else\hebkaf\fi}% - \or\gim@print{30}{\heblamed}% - \or\gim@print{40}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalmem\else\hebmem\fi}% - \or\gim@print{50}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalnun\else\hebnun\fi}% - \or\gim@print{60}{\hebsamekh}% - \or\gim@print{70}{\hebayin}% - \or\gim@print{80}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalpe\else\hebpe\fi}% - \or\gim@print{90}{\if@gim@final\hebfinaltsadi\else\hebtsadi\fi}% - \fi - \ifcase\@tempcnta % print nothing if no ones - \or\gim@print{1}{\hebalef}% - \or\gim@print{2}{\hebbet}% - \or\gim@print{3}{\hebgimel}% - \or\gim@print{4}{\hebdalet}% - \or\gim@print{5}{\hebhe}% - \or\gim@print{6}{\hebvav}% - \or\gim@print{7}{\hebzayin}% - \or\gim@print{8}{\hebhet}% - \or\gim@print{9}{\hebtet}% - \fi -} -\newif\if@gim@prev % flag if a previous letter has been typeset -\newcommand*{\gim@print}[2]{% #2 is a letter, #1 is its value. - \advance\@tempcnta by -#1\relax% deduct the value from the remainder - \ifnum\@tempcnta=0% if this is the last letter - \if@gim@prev\if@gim@apost"\fi#2% - \else#2\if@gim@apost'\fi\fi% - \else{\@gim@finalfalse#2}\@gim@prevtrue\fi} -\let\hebr=\alph -\let\gim=\alph -\def\hebcopy{\protect\R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof}} -\def\hebincl{\protect\R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}} -\def\hebpage{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}} -\def\hebto{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebdalet}} -\def\hadgesh#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}% - \kern-.025em\copy0\kern-\wd0 - \kern.05em\copy0\kern-\wd0 - \kern-.025em\raise.0433em\box0 } -\if@compatibility - \def\piska#1{\item{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent} - \def\piskapiska#1{\itemitem{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent} -\fi -\let\makafgadol=\textendash -\let\makafanak=\textemdash -\let\geresh=\textquoteright -\let\opengeresh=\textquoteright -\let\closegeresh=\textquoteleft -\let\openquote=\textquotedblright -\let\closequote=\textquotedblleft -\let\leftquotation=\textquotedblright -\let\rightquotation=\textquotedblleft -\AtBeginDocument{\def\@rllanguagename{hebrew}} -\ldf@finish{hebrew} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `hebrew.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty index d21249581ed..45bb222d6eb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `hebrew') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty deleted file mode 100644 index b20c9b6e44a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `hebrew_newcode.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% heb209.dtx (with options: `newcode') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_newcode.sty} -\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc} -\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `hebrew_newcode.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 8edf90be28e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `hebrew_p.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% heb209.dtx (with options: `pccode') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_p.sty} -\RequirePackage[cp862]{inputenc} -\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `hebrew_p.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg index 9605c61b658..b2aa4446012 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg @@ -4,9 +4,10 @@ %% %% The original source files were: %% -%% babel.dtx (with options: `kernel,patterns') +%% babel.dtx (with options: `patterns') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -36,45 +37,28 @@ %% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution %% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with %% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% %% File 'babel.dtx' -%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package] +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] %% Babel package for LaTeX2e. %% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, %% TeXniek %% all rights reserved. -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +\xdef\bbl@format{\jobname} \ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% - \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }% \let\ProvidesFile\@undefined } - \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{% - \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% - } -\else - \let\bbl@tempa\ProvidesFile - \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% - \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }% - \bbl@tempa#1[#2 #3 #4]% - \let\ProvidesFile\bbl@tempa} - \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{% - \begingroup - \catcode`\ 10 % - \@makeother\/% - \@ifnextchar[%] - {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}} - \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{% - \wlog{Language: #1 #2}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}% - \endgroup} \fi \ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg} - [2008/07/08 v3.8m % - Babel language switching mechanism] + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % + Babel language switching mechanism] \ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined + \let\orig@dump\dump \input plain.def\relax \fi \ifx\language\@undefined @@ -82,12 +66,8 @@ \fi \ifx\newlanguage\@undefined \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language -\else - \countdef\last@language=19 -\fi -\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined \def\addlanguage#1{% - \global\advance\last@language \@ne + \global\advance\last@language\@ne \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi \else \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}% @@ -95,302 +75,134 @@ \global\chardef#1\last@language \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}} \else + \countdef\last@language=19 \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi} \fi -\def\adddialect#1#2{% - \global\chardef#1#2\relax - \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}} -\def\iflanguage#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi}% - \fi} -\edef\selectlanguage{% - \noexpand\protect - \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname - } -\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi -\ifx\documentclass\@undefined - \def\xstring{\string\string\string} -\else - \let\xstring\string -\fi -\xdef\bbl@language@stack{} -\def\bbl@push@language{% - \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}% - } -\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{% - \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}% - } -\def\bbl@pop@language{% - \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack - \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}% - } -\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% - \bbl@push@language - \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language - \bbl@set@language{#1}} -\def\bbl@set@language#1{% - \edef\languagename{% - \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty - \else \string#1\@empty\fi}% - \select@language{\languagename}% - \if@filesw - \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \fi} -\def\select@language#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax - \@noopterr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \originalTeX - \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX - \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname - \let\originalTeX\@empty}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \babel@beginsave - \csname captions#1\endcsname - \csname date#1\endcsname - \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax - \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin - \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - \fi} -\long\def\otherlanguage#1{% - \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}% - \ignorespaces - } -\long\def\endotherlanguage{% - \originalTeX - \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces - } -\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{% - \foreign@language{#1}% - } -\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{% - \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname - } -\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname} -\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{% - \begingroup - \originalTeX - \foreign@language{#1}% - #2% - \csname noextras#1\endcsname - \endgroup - } -\def\foreign@language#1{% - \def\languagename{#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \csname extras#1\endcsname - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - } -\def\bbl@patterns#1{% - \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \csname l@#1\endcsname - \else - \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi\relax -} -\def\hyphenrules#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{#1}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - } -\def\endhyphenrules{} -\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}% - \fi} -\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2} -\def\LdfInit{% - \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ - \catcode`\@=11\relax - \input babel.def\relax - \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax - \LdfInit} -\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi -\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi -\ifx\PackageError\@undefined - \def\@nolanerr#1{% - \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}% - \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}} - \def\@nopatterns#1{% - \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}% - \message{the language `#1'}% - \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \def\@noopterr#1{% - \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage} - \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}} - \def\@activated#1{% - \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}} -\else - \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}% - {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} - \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}% - {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak - the language `#1'\MessageBreak - I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}% - {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}} - \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{% - \PackageInfo{babel}{% - Making #1 an active character}} -\fi -\def\process@line#1#2 #3/{% - \ifx=#1 - \process@synonym#2 / +\toks8{Babel <3.9e> and hyphenation patterns for }% +\def\process@line#1#2 #3 #4 {% + \ifx=#1% + \process@synonym{#2}% \else - \process@language#1#2 #3/% + \process@language{#1#2}{#3}{#4}% \fi - } + \ignorespaces} \toks@{} -\def\process@synonym#1 /{% +\def\bbl@languages{} +\def\process@synonym#1{% \ifnum\last@language=\m@ne - \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname0\relax - \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language0} - \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname}% + \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\relax\process@synonym{#1}}% \else \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language - \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language} + \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}% \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname - \fi - } -\def\process@language#1 #2 #3/{% + \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname + \let\bbl@elt\relax + \edef\bbl@languages{\bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\last@language}{}{}}% + \fi} +\def\process@language#1#2#3{% \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname - \def\languagename{#1}% - \global\toks8\expandafter{\the\toks8#1, }% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@hook@everylanguage{#1}% + \bbl@get@enc#1::\@@@ \begingroup - \bbl@get@enc#1:\@@@ - \ifx\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty - \else - \fontencoding{\bbl@hyph@enc}\selectfont - \fi \lefthyphenmin\m@ne - \input #2\relax + \bbl@hook@loadpatterns{#2}% \ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne \else \expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{% \the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}% \fi \endgroup + \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else + \bbl@hook@loadexceptions{#3}% + \fi + \let\bbl@elt\relax + \edef\bbl@languages{% + \bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\language}{#2}{\bbl@tempa}}% \ifnum\the\language=\z@ - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname - \fi \the\toks@ - \fi - \toks@{}% - \def\bbl@tempa{#3}% - \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty - \else - \ifx\bbl@tempa\space + \toks@{}% + \fi} +\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2:#3\@@@{\def\bbl@hyph@enc{#2}} +\def\bbl@hook@everylanguage#1{} +\def\bbl@hook@loadpatterns#1{\input #1\relax} +\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\bbl@hook@loadpatterns +\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\bbl@hook@loadpatterns +\begingroup + \def\AddBabelHook#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname\relax + \def\next{\toks1}% \else - \input #3\relax + \def\next{\expandafter\gdef\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname####1}% + \fi + \next} + \ifx\directlua\@undefined + \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else + \input xebabel.def \fi + \else + \input luababel.def \fi - } -\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2\@@@{% - \def\bbl@tempa{#1}% - \def\bbl@tempb{#2}% - \ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty - \let\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty + \openin1 = babel-\bbl@format.cfg + \ifeof1 \else - \bbl@get@enc#2\@@@ - \edef\bbl@hyph@enc{\bbl@tempa}% - \fi} + \input babel-\bbl@format.cfg\relax + \fi + \closein1 +\endgroup +\bbl@hook@loadkernel{switch.def} \openin1 = language.dat +\def\languagename{english}% \ifeof1 \message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space I will try the file hyphen.tex} \input hyphen.tex\relax - \def\l@english{0}% - \def\languagename{english}% + \chardef\l@english\z@ \else \last@language\m@ne \loop \endlinechar\m@ne \read1 to \bbl@line \endlinechar`\^^M - \ifx\bbl@line\@empty - \else - \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space/}% - \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line - \ifx\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined - \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\languagename + \if T\ifeof1F\fi T\relax + \ifx\bbl@line\@empty\else + \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space\space\space}% + \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line\relax \fi - \fi - \iftrue \csname fi\endcsname - \csname if\ifeof1 false\else true\fi\endcsname \repeat - \language=0 - \let\languagename\bbl@defaultlanguage - \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined + \begingroup + \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{% + \global\language=#2\relax + \gdef\languagename{#1}% + \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}}% + \bbl@languages + \endgroup \fi \closein1 -\let\process@language\@undefined -\let\process@synonym\@undefined -\let\process@line\@undefined -\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined -\let\bbl@tempb\@undefined -\let\bbl@eq@\@undefined -\let\bbl@line\@undefined -\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined +\if/\the\toks@/\else + \errhelp{language.dat loads no language, only synonyms} + \errmessage{Orphan language synonym} +\fi \ifx\addto@hook\@undefined \else - \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{% - \expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\the\toks8 loaded.}} + \edef\bbl@tempa{% + \noexpand\typeout{\the\toks8 \the\last@language\space languages + loaded.}}% + \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{\bbl@tempa} \fi +\let\bbl@line\@undefined +\let\process@line\@undefined +\let\process@synonym\@undefined +\let\process@language\@undefined +\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined +\let\bbl@hyph@enc\@undefined +\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@everylanguage\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadpatterns\@undefined +\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\@undefined %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 04712c23bb2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,267 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `icelandic.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% icelandic.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{icelandic} - [2005/03/30 v1.1g Icelandic support from the babel system] -%% File iceland.dtx -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989--2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Icelandic Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1996--2005 -%% by Einar \'Arnason <einar@lif.hi.is> -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: Einar \'Arnason -%% einar at lif.hi.is -%% or to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -%% -\def\bbl@tempa{icelandic} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{icelandic} -\fi -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@icelandic\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Icelandic} - \adddialect\l@icelandic0 -\fi -\newif\if@Two@E \@Two@Etrue -\def\@FI@{\fi} -\ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined - \@Two@Efalse \def\@FI@{\relax} -\else - \if@compatibility \@Two@Efalse \fi -\@FI@ -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{icelandic}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasicelandic{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Form\'{a}li}% - \def\refname{Heimildir}% - \def\abstractname{\'{U}tdr\'{a}ttur}% - \def\bibname{Heimildir}% - \def\chaptername{Kafli}% - \def\appendixname{Vi{\dh}auki}% - \def\contentsname{Efnisyfirlit}% - \def\listfigurename{Myndaskr\'{a}}% - \def\listtablename{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% - \def\indexname{Atri{\dh}isor{\dh}askr\'{a}}% - \def\figurename{Mynd}% - \def\tablename{Tafla}% - \def\partname{Hluti}% - \def\enclname{Hj\'{a}lagt}% - \def\ccname{Samrit}% - \def\headtoname{Til:}% in letter - \def\pagename{Bla{\dh}s\'{\i}{\dh}a}% - \def\seename{Sj\'{a}}% - \def\alsoname{Sj\'{a} einnig}% - \def\proofname{S\"{o}nnun}% - \def\glossaryname{Or{\dh}alisti}% - } -\def\dateicelandic{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - jan\'{u}ar\or febr\'{u}ar\or mars\or apr\'{\i}l\or ma\'{\i}\or - j\'{u}n\'{\i}\or j\'{u}l\'{\i}\or \'{a}g\'{u}st\or september\or - okt\'{o}ber\or n\'{o}vember\or desember\fi - \space\number\year}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\let\ilq\grq -\let\irq\grq -\let\iflq\frq -\let\ifrq\flq -\let\ilqq\glqq -\let\irqq\grqq -\let\iflqq\frqq -\let\ifrqq\flqq -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\newdimen\pl@left -\newdimen\pl@down -\newdimen\pl@right -\newdimen\pl@temp -\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\k{}}\setbox2\hbox{p}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -\DeclareTextCommand{\oob}{T1}{\sob {o}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Oob}{T1}{\sob {O}{.7}{0}{0}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\ooob}{T1}{\sob {^^f3}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\OOob}{T1}{\sob {^^d3}{.7}{0}{0}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\sob {e}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\sob {E}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eeob}{T1}{\sob {^^e9}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\EEob}{T1}{\sob {^^c9}{1}{0}{.04}{0}} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"o}{\oob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"O}{\Oob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^f3}{\ooob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^d3}{\OOob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"e}{\eob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"E}{\Eob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^e9}{\eeob} -\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^c9}{\EEob} -\mathchardef\m@comma="013B \def\@comma@{\ifmmode\m@comma\else,\fi} -\def\f@thousandsep{\ifmmode\mskip5.5mu\else\penalty\@M\kern.3em\fi} -\newcommand{\decimalsep}{.} \newcommand{\thousandsep}{\@comma@} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\decimalsep{\@comma@}% - \def\thousandsep{\f@thousandsep}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\decimalsep{.}% - \def\thousandsep{\@comma@}} -\if@Two@E - \newcommand{\tala}[2][\decimalsep]{% - \def\@decimalsep{#1}\@tala#2\@empty,\@empty,\@nil} -\else - \newcommand{\tala}[1]{% - \def\@decimalsep{\decimalsep}\@tala#1\@empty,\@empty,\@nil} -\fi -\def\@tala#1,#2,#3\@nil{% - \ifx\@empty#2% - \@integerpart{#1}% - \else - \@integerpart{#1}\@decimalsep\@decimalpart{#2}% - \fi} -\def\@decimalpart#1{\@@decimalpart#1\@empty\@empty\@empty} -\def\@@decimalpart#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3% - \ifx\@empty#4% - \else - \thousandsep\expandafter\@@decimalpart\expandafter#4% - \fi} -\def\@integerpart#1{\@@integerpart{}#1\@empty\@empty\@empty} -\def\@@integerpart#1#2#3#4{% - \ifx\@empty#2% - \@addthousandsep#1\relax - \else - \ifx\@empty#3% - \@addthousandsep\@empty\@empty#1#2\relax - \else - \ifx\@empty#4% - \@addthousandsep\@empty#1#2#3\relax - \else - \@@integerpartafterfi{#1#2#3#4}% - \fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\@@integerpartafterfi#1\fi\fi\fi{\fi\fi\fi\@@integerpart{#1}} -\def\@addthousandsep#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3% - \if#4\relax - \else - \thousandsep\expandafter\@addthousandsep\expandafter#4% - \fi} -\ifx\sevenrm\@undefined - \ifx\@ptsize\@undefined - \let\upp@size\small - \else - \ifx\selectfont\@undefined - \ifcase\@ptsize - \let\upp@size\ixpt\or - \let\upp@size\xpt\or - \let\upp@size\xipt - \fi - \else - \ifcase\@ptsize - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@ixpt{10pt}\selectfont}\or - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xpt{11pt}\selectfont}\or - \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xipt{12pt}\selectfont} - \fi - \fi - \fi -\else - \let\upp@size\sevenrm -\fi -\if@Two@E - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{% - \leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\upp@size#1}} -\fi -\ifx\fmtname\LaTeXeFmtName - \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{T1}{6} - \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{OT1}{23} -\else - \def\T@one{T1} - \ifx\f@encoding\T@one - \newcommand{\grada}{\char6} - \else - \newcommand{\grada}{\char23} - \fi -\fi -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gradur}{% - \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\grada\hss}} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `icelandic.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty index eaac6a6627a..a333115ac6c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `icelandic') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 458cb61347f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `interlingua.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% interlingua.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{interlingua} - [2005/03/30 v1.6 Interlingua support from the babel system] -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{interlingua}{captionsinterlingua} -\ifx\undefined\l@interlingua - \@nopatterns{Interlingua} - \adddialect\l@interlingua0\fi - -\providehyphenmins{interlingua}{\tw@\tw@} -\def\captionsinterlingua{% - \def\prefacename{Prefacio}% - \def\refname{Referentias}% - \def\abstractname{Summario}% - \def\bibname{Bibliographia}% - \def\chaptername{Capitulo}% - \def\appendixname{Appendice}% - \def\contentsname{Contento}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de tabellas}% - \def\indexname{Indice}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabella}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Incluso}% - \def\ccname{Copia}% - \def\headtoname{A}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{vide}% - \def\alsoname{vide etiam}% - \def\proofname{Prova}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossario}% - } - -\def\dateinterlingua{% - \def\today{le~\number\day\space de \ifcase\month\or - januario\or februario\or martio\or april\or maio\or junio\or - julio\or augusto\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or - decembre\fi - \space \number\year}} - -\addto\extrasinterlingua{} -\addto\noextrasinterlingua{} -\ldf@finish{interlingua} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `interlingua.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty index 60357554a1d..4be3bc71758 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `interlingua') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 47a505f095c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `irish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% irish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{irish} - [2005/03/30 v1.0h Irish support from the babel system] -%% File `irish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{irish}\captionsirish -\ifx\l@irish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{irish} - \adddialect\l@irish0\fi -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\addto\captionsirish{% - \def\prefacename{R\'eamhr\'a}% <-- also "Brollach" - \def\refname{Tagairt\'{\i}}% - \def\abstractname{Achoimre}% - \def\bibname{Leabharliosta}% - \def\chaptername{Caibidil}% - \def\appendixname{Aguis\'{\i}n}% - \def\contentsname{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% - \def\listfigurename{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% - \def\listtablename{T\'abla\'{\i}}% - \def\indexname{Inn\'eacs}% - \def\figurename{L\'ear\'aid}% - \def\tablename{T\'abla}% - \def\partname{Cuid}% - \def\enclname{faoi iamh}% - \def\ccname{cc}% abrv. `c\'oip chuig' - \def\headtoname{Go}% - \def\pagename{Leathanach}% - \def\seename{f\'each}% - \def\alsoname{f\'each freisin}% - \def\proofname{Cruth\'unas}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - } -\def\dateirish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or - Ean\'air\or Feabhra\or M\'arta\or Aibre\'an\or - Bealtaine\or Meitheamh\or I\'uil\or L\'unasa\or - Me\'an F\'omhair\or Deireadh F\'omhair\or - M\'{\i} na Samhna\or M\'{\i} na Nollag\fi - \space \number\year}} -\addto\extrasirish{} -\addto\noextrasirish{} -\ldf@finish{irish} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `irish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty index 95d5ec26475..22a350213e7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `irish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 28faf1b8485..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,244 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `italian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% italian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{italian} - [2008/03/14 v1.2t Italian support from the babel system] -%% File `italian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% Claudio Beccari -%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it -\LdfInit{italian}{captionsitalian}% -\ifx\l@italian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Italian}% - \adddialect\l@italian0\fi -\addto\captionsitalian{% - \def\prefacename{Prefazione}% - \def\refname{Riferimenti bibliografici}% - \def\abstractname{Sommario}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Capitolo}% - \def\appendixname{Appendice}% - \def\contentsname{Indice}% - \def\listfigurename{Elenco delle figure}% - \def\listtablename{Elenco delle tabelle}% - \def\indexname{Indice analitico}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabella}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Allegati}% - \def\ccname{e~p.~c.}% - \def\headtoname{Per}% - \def\pagename{Pag.}% % in Italian the abbreviation is preferred - \def\seename{vedi}% - \def\alsoname{vedi anche}% - \def\proofname{Dimostrazione}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossario}% - }% -\def\dateitalian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - gennaio\or febbraio\or marzo\or aprile\or maggio\or giugno\or - luglio\or agosto\or settembre\or ottobre\or novembre\or - dicembre\fi\space \number\year}}% -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty - \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty - \clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000\@clubpenalty\clubpenalty}% -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits - \finalhyphendemerits50000000}% -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \lccode`'=`'}% -\addto\noextrasitalian{% - \lccode`'=0}% -\initiate@active@char{"}% -\addto\extrasitalian{\bbl@activate{"}\languageshorthands{italian}}% -\declare@shorthand{italian}{"}{% -\ifmmode - \def\it@next{''}% -\else - \def\it@next{\futurelet\it@temp\it@cwm}% -\fi -\it@next -}% -\def\it@@cwm{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}% -\def\it@@ocap#1{\it@ocap}\def\it@@ccap#1{\it@ccap}% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@cwm}{\let\it@@next\relax -\ifcat\noexpand\it@temp a% - \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm}% -\else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string|% - \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm\@gobble}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string<% - \def\it@@next{\it@@ocap}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp \string>% - \def\it@@next{\it@@ccap}% - \else - \if\noexpand\it@temp\string/% - \def\it@@next{\slash\@gobble}% - \else - \ifx\it@temp"% - \def\it@@next{``\@gobble}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -\it@@next}% -\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@unit}[1]{% - \textormath{\,\mbox{#1}}{\,\mathrm{#1}}}% - }% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ap}[1]{% - \textormath{\textsuperscript{#1}}{^{\mathrm{#1}}}}% -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ped}[1]{% - \textormath{$_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont#1}}$}{_\mathrm{#1}}}% -\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{% - \addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@save\unit\let\unit\bbl@unit}% - }% -\addto\extrasitalian{% - \babel@save\ap\let\ap\bbl@ap - \babel@save\ped\let\ped\bbl@ped - }% -\def\LtxSymbCaporali{% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{\mbox{% - \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont(\kern-0.20em(}% - \ignorespaces}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \mbox{% - \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont)\kern-0.20em)}}% -}% -\def\CaporaliFrom#1#2#3#4{% - \DeclareFontEncoding{#1}{}{}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{T1}{% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{T1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{OT1}{% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{OT1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi% - {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}} -\def\get@ae#1#2#3!{\def\bbl@ae{#1#2}}% -\def\@ifT@one@noCap{\expandafter\get@ae\f@family!% -\def\bbl@temp{ae}\ifx\bbl@ae\bbl@temp\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}% -\newif\if@CBgreekEncKnown -\IfFileExists{lgrcmr.fd}% - {\@CBgreekEncKnowntrue}{\@CBgreekEncKnownfalse} -\newif\if@CyrEncKnown -\IfFileExists{ot2cmr.fd}% - {\@CyrEncKnowntrue}{\@CyrEncKnownfalse}% -\def\CBgreekCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{% - \IfFileExists{lgrlcmss.fd}{\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - {\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}% - {\LtxSymbCaporali}}% - {\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip - \fi{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}% - }% -\def\CyrillicCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{\relax}% - {\DeclareFontEncoding{OT2}{}{}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}% - {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - {\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char62\relax}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}% - {{\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char60\relax}\ignorespaces}}}% -\@onlypreamble{\CBgreekCaporali}\@onlypreamble{\CyrillicCaporali}% -\def\T@unoCaporali{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{<<\ignorespaces}% - \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi>>}}% -\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one - \@ifT@one@noCap{% - \if@CBgreekEncKnown - \CBgreekCaporali - \else - \if@CyrEncKnown - \CyrilicCaporali - \else - \LtxSymbCaporali - \fi - \fi}% - {\T@unoCaporali}% -\else - \if@CBgreekEncKnown - \CBgreekCaporali - \else - \if@CyrEncKnown - \CyrilicCaporali - \else - \LtxSymbCaporali - \fi - \fi -\fi -\ldf@finish{italian}% -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `italian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty index f268e3e5f72..b33f346d483 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `italian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 0d9353ed9ae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,164 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `kurmanji.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% kurmanji.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{kurmanji} - [2009/06/25 v1.1 Kurmanji support from the babel system] -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2009 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit{kurmanji}{captionskurmanji} -\ifx\undefined\l@kurmanji - \@nopatterns{Kurmanji} - \adddialect\l@kurmanji0\fi -\bbl@declare@ttribute{kurmanji}{<attrib>}{% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraskurmanji - \expandafter{\extras<attrib>kurmanji}% - \let\captionskurmanji\captions<attrib>kurmanji - } -\providehyphenmins{kurmanji}{\tw@\tw@} -\def\captionskurmanji{% - \def\prefacename{Pe\c{s}gotin}% % Gotina Pe\c{s}\^i - \def\refname{Pirtuken bijart{\^\i}}% - \def\abstractname{Kurteb{\^\i}r}% % En\c{c}am - \def\bibname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya Pirtukan}% - \def\chaptername{Ser\^e}% - \def\appendixname{Teb{\^\i}n{\^\i}ya}% - \def\contentsname{Nav\^erok}% % Navedank - \def\listfigurename{Hejmara Dimena}% - \def\listtablename{Hejmara Kevalen}% - \def\indexname{Endeks}% - \def\figurename{Dimen\^e}% % Weney\^e - \def\tablename{Kevala}% - \def\partname{B\^e\c{s}a}% - \def\enclname{Dumahik}% % Duvik - \def\ccname{Belavker}% - \def\headtoname{Ji bo}% % Ji ... re - \def\pagename{R\^upel\^e}% - \def\seename{bin\^era}% % bala xwe bida - \def\alsoname{le v\^eya ji bin\^era}% - \def\proofname{Del{\^\i}l}% - \def\glossaryname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya l\^ekol{\^\i}n\^e}% -} -\def\datekurmanji{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or - \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or - \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or - \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi~\number\year}% - \def\ontoday{\number\day'\^e~\ifcase\month\or - \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or - \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or - \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or - \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi\^e~\number\year}% - \def\januaryname{\c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\februaryname{Sibat}% - \def\marchname{Adar}% - \def\aprilname{N\^{\i}san}% - \def\mayname{Gulan}% - \def\junename{Hez{\^\i}ran}% - \def\julyname{T{\^\i}rmeh}% - \def\augustname{Tebax}% - \def\septembername{\^Ilon}% - \def\octobername{\c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\novembername{\c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}% - \def\decembername{\c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}% -} -\def\datekurmanjialternate{% - \datekurmanji - \def\januaryname{R\^ebendan}% - \def\februaryname{Re\c{s}emih}% - \def\aprilname{Cotan}% % Avr\^el - \def\junename{P\^u\c{s}per}% - \def\augustname{Gelav\^ej}% - \def\septembername{Gelarezan}% % Rezber - \def\octobername{Kew\c{c}\^er}% - \def\novembername{Sermawez}% - \def\decembername{Berfandar}% -} -\def\datesymd{% - \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}% - } -\def\datesdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}% - } -\def\dategdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day.\space\number\month.\space\number\year}% - } -\initiate@active@char{^} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\languageshorthands{kurmanji}} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@activate{^}} -\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@deactivate{^}} -\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^c}{\c{c}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^C}{\c{C}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^e}{\^e\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^E}{\^E\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^i}{{\^\i}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^I}{\^I\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^s}{\c{s}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^S}{\c{S}\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^u}{\^u\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^U}{\^U\allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens} -\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} - -\ldf@finish{kurmanji} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `kurmanji.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 0ba24cc5c66..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,229 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `latin.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% latin.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% -%% Copyright 1999-2007 Claudio Beccari All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{latin.ldf} - [2008/07/06 v2.0l Latin support from the babel system] -%% File `latin.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -%% Claudio Beccari -%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it -\LdfInit{latin}{captionslatin} -\ifx\l@latin\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Latin} - \adddialect\l@latin0\fi -\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{medieval}{% - \addto\captionslatin{\def\prefacename{Pr{\ae}fatio}}% - \def\november{Nouembris}% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin - \expandafter{\extrasmedievallatin}% - } -\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{withprosodicmarks}{% - \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin - \expandafter{\extraswithprosodicmarks}% - } -\@namedef{captionslatin}{% - \def\prefacename{Praefatio}% - \def\refname{Conspectus librorum}% - \def\abstractname{Summarium}% - \def\bibname{Conspectus librorum}% - \def\chaptername{Caput}% - \def\appendixname{Additamentum}% - \def\contentsname{Index}% - \def\listfigurename{Conspectus descriptionum}% - \def\listtablename{Conspectus tabularum}% - \def\indexname{Index rerum notabilium}% - \def\figurename{Descriptio}% - \def\tablename{Tabula}% - \def\partname{Pars}% - \def\enclname{Adduntur}% Or " Additur" ? Or simply Add.? - \def\ccname{Exemplar}% Use the recipient's dative - \def\headtoname{\ignorespaces}% Use the recipient's dative - \def\pagename{Charta}% - \def\seename{cfr.}% - \def\alsoname{cfr.}% R.Tabacco never saw "cfr. atque" or similar forms - \def\proofname{Demonstratio}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossarium}% - } -\def\datelatin{% - \def\november{Novembris}% - \def\today{% - {\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont - \uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\day}}~\ifcase\month\or - Ianuarii\or Februarii\or Martii\or Aprilis\or Maii\or Iunii\or - Iulii\or Augusti\or Septembris\or Octobris\or \november\or - Decembris\fi - \space{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\year}}}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\extraslatin{% - \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty - \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty - \clubpenalty3000\@clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000} -\addto\extraslatin{% - \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits - \finalhyphendemerits50000000} -\addto\extrasmedievallatin{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\V}% - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\u}% - \lccode`\V=`\u \uccode`\u=`\V} -\addto\extrasmedievallatin{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^c6}% T1 \AE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^f7}% T1 \oe - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^f7}% T1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^d7}% T1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1d}% OT1 \AE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \oe - \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \OE - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1e}% OT1 \OE - \SetLatinLigatures} -\providecommand\SetLatinLigatures{% - \def\@tempA{T1}\ifx\@tempA\f@encoding - \catcode`\^^e6=11 \lccode`\^^e6=`\^^e6 \uccode`\^^e6=`\^^c6 % \ae - \catcode`\^^c6=11 \lccode`\^^c6=`\^^e6 % \AE - \catcode`\^^f7=11 \lccode`\^^f7=`\^^f7 \uccode`\^^f7=`\^^d7 % \oe - \catcode`\^^d7=11 \lccode`\^^d7=`\^^f7 % \OE - \else - \catcode`\^^1a=11 \lccode`\^^1a=`\^^1a \uccode`\^^1a=`\^^1d % \ae - \catcode`\^^1d=11 \lccode`\^^1d=`\^^1a % \AE (^^]) - \catcode`\^^1b=11 \lccode`\^^1b=`\^^1b \uccode`\^^1b=`\^^1e % \oe - \catcode`\^^1e=11 \lccode`\^^1e=`\^^1b % \OE (^^^) - \fi - \let\@tempA\@undefined - } -\addto\extraslatin{\def\ProsodicMarksOn{% - \GenericError{(latin)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}% - {Latin language error: \string\ProsodicMarksOn\space - is defined by setting the\MessageBreak - language attribute to `withprosodicmarks'\MessageBreak - If you continue you are likely to encounter\MessageBreak - fatal errors that I can't recover}% - {See the Latin language description in the babel - documentation for explanation}{\@ehd}}} -\addto\extraslatin{\let\ProsodicMarksOff\relax} -\@tempcnta=\catcode`\= -\@tempcntb=\catcode`\^ -\catcode`\= \active -\catcode`\^ \active -\addto\extraslatin{\languageshorthands{latin}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{^}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{=}}% -\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{^}}% -\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{=}}% -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\ProsodicMarks} -\def\ProsodicMarks{% - \def\ProsodicMarksOn{\catcode`\^ \active\catcode`\= \active}% - \def\ProsodicMarksOff{\catcode`\^ 7\catcode`\= 12\relax}% - \initiate@active@char{^}% - \initiate@active@char{=}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^a}{% - \textormath{\u{a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{a}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^e}{% - \textormath{\u{e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{e}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^i}{% - \textormath{\u{\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{\imath}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^o}{% - \textormath{\u{o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{^u}{% - \textormath{\u{u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{u}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=a}{% - \textormath{\={a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{a}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=e}{% - \textormath{\={e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{e}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=i}{% - \textormath{\={\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{\imath}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=o}{% - \textormath{\={o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{o}}}% - \declare@shorthand{latin}{=u}{% - \textormath{\={u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{u}}}% -} -\catcode`\= \@tempcnta -\catcode`\^ \@tempcntb -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOn\ProsodicMarksOn} -\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOff\ProsodicMarksOff} -\initiate@active@char{"}% -\addto\extraslatin{\bbl@activate{"}% -} -\declare@shorthand{latin}{"}{% - \ifmmode - \def\lt@@next{''}% - \else - \def\lt@@next{\futurelet\lt@temp\lt@cwm}% - \fi - \lt@@next -}% -\def\lt@allowhyphens{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip} -\newcommand*{\lt@cwm}{\let\lt@n@xt\relax - \ifcat\noexpand\lt@temp a% - \let\lt@n@xt\lt@allowhyphens - \else - \if\noexpand\lt@temp\string|% - \def\lt@n@xt{\lt@allowhyphens\@gobble}% - \fi - \fi - \lt@n@xt}% -\ldf@finish{latin} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `latin.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty index 2b8c1dba4fb..fcdf667135d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `latin') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index e3a1bb5e28b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrcmr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmr') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrcmr.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern] -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmr}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} {grmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sl} {grmo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{it} {grmi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sc} {grmc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ui} {grmu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{li} {grml} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{rs} {gmmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ro} {gmmo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sc} {grxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} {grxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sl} {grxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{it} {grxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ui} {grxu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{li} {grxl} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{rs} {gmxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ro} {gmxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{b}{li} {grbl} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<->ssub*cmr/bx/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrcmr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 5e0d352da4f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrcmro.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmro') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrcmro.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern Outline] -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmro}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n} {gomn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sl} {gomo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{it} {gomi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sc} {gomc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{ui} {gomu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sc} {goxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{n} {goxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sl} {goxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{it} {goxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{ui} {goxu} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{n} - {<->ssub*cmro/bx/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmro/bx/sc}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrcmro.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 1926c007edc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrcmss.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmss') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrcmss.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif] -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmss}{} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{n} {gsmn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sl} {gsmo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sc} {gsmc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{it} {gsmi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{ui} {gsmu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{iv} {gsme} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{uv} {gsma} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{n} {gsxn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sl} {gsxo} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sc} {gsxc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{it} {gsxi} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{ui} {gsxu} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{iv} {gsxe} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{uv} {gsxa} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrcmss.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 24440bf434e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrcmtt.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmtt') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrcmtt.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern Typewriter] -\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{% - \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>% - <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}} -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}% \hyphenchar = -1 -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{n} {gttn} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sl} {gtto} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sc} {gttc} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{it} {gtti} -\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{ui} {gttu} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sl} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sc} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{ui} - {<->ssub*cmtt/m/ui}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrcmtt.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 427a66f351c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlcmss.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlcmss') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmss.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif slide sizes] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmss}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glin}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glio}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glii}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmu}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwi}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glmc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glic}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glxc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glwc}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlcmss.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd deleted file mode 100644 index b2dbd3ae457..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlcmtt.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlcmtt') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmtt.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Computer Modern Typewriter slide sizes] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gltn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljn}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * glto}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Iit}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljo}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - ssub * lcmtt/m/it}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isl}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - ssub * lcmtt/m/Iit}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gltc}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isc}{% - <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28> - genb * gljc}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlcmtt.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 14cb1ae47c4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlmr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmr') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlmr.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Latin Modern] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{n}% - {<-5.5> grmn0500 <5.5-6.5> grmn0600 - <6.5-7.5> grmn0700 <7.5-8.5> grmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> grmn0900 <9.5-11> grmn1000 - <11-15> grmn1200 <15-> grmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{rs}% - {<-5.5> gmmn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmmn0600 - <6.5-7.5> gmmn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gmmn0900 <9.5-11> gmmn1000 - <11-15> gmmn1200 <15-> gmmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sl}% - {<-8.5> grmo0800 <8.5-9.5> grmo0900 - <9.5-11> grmo1000 <11-15> grmo1200 - <15-> grmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ro}% - {<-8.5> gmmo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmmo0900 - <9.5-11> gmmo1000 <11-15> gmmo1200 - <15-> gmmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{it}% - {<-7.5> grmi0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmi0800 <8.5-9.5> grmi0900 - <9.5-11> grmi1000 <11-15> grmi1200 - <15-> grmi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{li}% - {<-7.5> grml0700 - <7.5-8.5> grml0800 <8.5-9.5> grml0900 - <9.5-11> grml1000 <11-15> grml1200 - <15-> grml1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ui}% - {<-7.5> grmu0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmu0800 <8.5-9.5> grmu0900 - <9.5-11> grmu1000 <11-15> grmu1200 - <15-> grmu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sc}% - {<-7.5> grmc0700 - <7.5-8.5> grmc0800 <8.5-9.5> grmc0900 - <9.5-11> grmc1000 <11-15> grmc1200 - <15-> grmc1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{scsl}% - {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{} -%%%%%%%% bold and bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{n} - {<-5.5> grxn0500 <5.5-6.5> grx0600 - <6.5-7.5> grxn0700 <7.5-8.5> grxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> grxn0900 <9.5-11> grxn1000 - <11-15> grxn1200 <15-> grxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{rs} - {<-5.5> gmxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmx0600 - <6.5-7.5> gmxn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gmxn0900 <9.5-11> gmxn1000 - <11-15> gmxn1200 <15-> gmxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{it} - {<-7.5> grxi0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxi0800 <8.5-9.5> grxi0900 - <9.5-11> grxi1000 <11-15> grxi1200 - <15-> grxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{b}{li} - {<-7.5> grbl0700 - <7.5-8.5> grbl0800 <8.5-9.5> grbl0900 - <9.5-11> grbl1000 <11-15> grbl1200 - <15-> grbl1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{li} - {<-7.5> grxl0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxl0800 <8.5-9.5> grxl0900 - <9.5-11> grxl1000 <11-15> grxl1200 - <15-> grxl1728 - }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ui} - {<-7.5> grxu0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxu0800 <8.5-9.5> grxu0900 - <9.5-11> grxu1000 <11-15> grxu1200 - <15-> grxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> grxo0800 <8.5-9.5> grxo0900 - <9.5-11> grxo1000 <11-15> grxo1200 - <15-> grxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ro} - {<-8.5> gmxo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmxo0900 - <9.5-11> gmxo1000 <11-15> gmxo1200 - <15-> gmxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sc}% - {<-7.5> grxc0700 - <7.5-8.5> grxc0800 <8.5-9.5> grxc0900 - <9.5-11> grxc1000 <11-15> grxc1200 - <15-> grxc1728}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlmr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd deleted file mode 100644 index cbfa0c8f97e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlmro.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmro') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlmro.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Latin Modern Outline] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmro}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{n}% - {<-5.5> gomn0500 <5.5-6.5> gomn0600 - <6.5-7.5> gomn0700 <7.5-8.5> gomn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gomn0900 <9.5-11> gomn1000 - <11-15> gomn1200 <15-> gmr1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sl}% - {<-8.5> gomo0800 <8.5-9.5> gomo0900 - <9.5-11> gomo1000 <11-15> gomo1200 - <15-> gomo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{it}% - {<-7.5> gomi0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomi0800 <8.5-9.5> gomi0900 - <9.5-11> gomi1000 <11-15> gomi1200 - <15-> gomi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{ui}% - {<-7.5> gomu0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomu0800 <8.5-9.5> gomu0900 - <9.5-11> gomu1000 <11-15> gomu1200 - <15-> gomu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sc}% - {<-7.5> gomc0700 - <7.5-8.5> gomc0800 <8.5-9.5> gomc0900 - <9.5-11> gomc1000 <11-15> gomc1200 - <15-> gomc1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{scsl}% - {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{} -%%%%%%%% bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{n} - {<-5.5> goxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gox0600 - <6.5-7.5> goxn0700 <7.5-8.5> goxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> goxn0900 <9.5-11> goxn1000 - <11-15> goxn1200 <15-> goxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{it} - {<-7.5> goxi0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxi0800 <8.5-9.5> goxi0900 - <9.5-11> goxi1000 <11-> goxi1200 - <15-> goxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{ui} - {<-7.5> goxu0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxu0800 <8.5-9.5> goxu0900 - <9.5-11> goxu1000 <11-> goxu1200 - <15-> goxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> goxo0800 <8.5-9.5> goxo0900 - <9.5-11> goxo1000 <11-15> goxo1200 - <15-> goxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sc}% - {<-7.5> goxc0700 - <7.5-8.5> goxc0800 <8.5-9.5> goxc0900 - <9.5-11> goxc1000 <11-15> goxc1200 - <15-> goxc1728}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlmro.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 45829bcb14d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlmss.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmss') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlmss.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Latin Modern Sans Serif] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmss}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{n} - {<-8.5> gsmn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmn0900 <9.5-11> gsmn1000 - <11-15.5> gsmn1200 <15.5-> gsmn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{it} - {<-8.5> gsmi0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmi0900 <9.5-11> gsmi1000 - <11-15.5> gsmi1200 <15.5-> gsmi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{iv} - {<-8.5> gsme0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsme0900 <9.5-11> gsme1000 - <11-15.5> gsme1200 <15.5-> gsme1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{ui} - {<-8.5> gsmu0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmu0900 <9.5-11> gsmu1000 - <11-15.5> gsmu1200 <15.5-> gsmu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{uv} - {<-8.5> gsma0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsma0900 <9.5-11> gsma1000 - <11-15.5> gsma1200 <15.5-> gsma1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sl} - {<-8.5> gsmo0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmo0900 <9.5-11> gsmo1000 - <11-15.5> gsmo1200 <15.5-> gsmo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sc} - {<-8.5> gsmc0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsmc0900 <9.5-11> gsmc1000 - <11-15.5> gsmc1200 <15.5-> gsmc1728}{} -%%%%%%%% semibold condensed series substituted with medium series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{n} -{<-> ssub*lmss/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{sl} -{<-> ssub*/lmss/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{it} -{<->ssub*lmss/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%%%% bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{n} - {<-8.5> gsxn0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxn0900 <9.5-11> gsxn1000 - <11-15.5> gsxn1200 <15.5-> gsxn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sl} - {<-8.5> gsxo0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxo0900 <9.5-11> gsxo1000 - <11-15.5> gsxo1200 <15.5-> gsxo1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{it} - {<-8.5> gsxi0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxi0900 <9.5-11> gsxi1000 - <11-15.5> gsxi1200 <15.5-> gsxi1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{iv} - {<-8.5> gsxe0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxe0900 <9.5-11> gsxe1000 - <11-15.5> gsxe1200 <15.5-> gsxe1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{ui} - {<-8.5> gsxu0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxu0900 <9.5-11> gsxu1000 - <11-15.5> gsxu1200 <15.5-> gsxu1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{uv} - {<-8.5> gsxa0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxa0900 <9.5-11> gsxa1000 - <11-15.5> gsxa1200 <15.5-> gsxa1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sc} - {<-8.5> gsxc0800 - <8.5-9.5> gsxc0900 <9.5-11> gsxc1000 - <11-15.5> gsxc1200 <15.5-> gsxc1728}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlmss.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 1571a3aa1f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lgrlmtt.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmtt') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrlmtt.fd} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Latin Modern Typewriter] -\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{n} - {<-8.5> gttn0800 <8.5-9.5> gttn0900 - <9.5-11> gttn1000 <11-15> gttn1200 - <15-> gttn1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> ssub*lgr/lmtt/m/sl}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sl} - {<-8.5> gtto0800 <8.5-9.5> gtto0900 - <9.5-11> gtto1000 <11-15> gtto1200 - <15-> gtto1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sc} - {<-8.5> gttc0800 <8.5-9.5> gttc0900 - <9.5-11> gttc1000 <11-15> gttc1200 - <15-> gttc1728}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{scsl}{<-> ssub*lmtt/m/sc}{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lgrlmtt.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd deleted file mode 100644 index dfba8d4fcbd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheclas.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEclas,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheclas.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew classic font (by Joel M. Hoffman) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{clas}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{n} - {<-> s * [0.83345] hclassic }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * clas/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sl} - {<-> s * [0.69389] hcaption }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{it} - {<->ssub * clas/m/sl}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheclas.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 9690d512b60..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lhecmr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmr,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lhecmr.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew default font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n} - {<-> jerus10 }{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sl} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sc} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{b}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{sl} - {<-> telav10 }{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{it} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lhecmr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 6a572714e51..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lhecmss.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmss,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lhecmss.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew sans-serif font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{n} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * cmss/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sl} - {<->ssub * cmss/m/it}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{b}{n} - {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{sl} - {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lhecmss.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 1cfb0e3025a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lhecmtt.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmtt,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lhecmtt.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew typewriter font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{n} - {<-> telav10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * cmtt/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Italicized shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{it} - {<-> oldjaf10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sl} - {<->ssub * cmtt/m/it}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{n} - {<-> deads10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub * cmtt/bx/n}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lhecmtt.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 619e55dc892..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lhecrml.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcrml,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lhecrml.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{crml}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{n} - {<-> crml10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * crml/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sl} - {<-> crmlsl10 }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{it} - {<->ssub * crml/m/sl}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lhecrml.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def deleted file mode 100644 index 0a62af88f2c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheenc.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEenc') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheenc.def} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - 7-bit Hebrew font encoding - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontEncoding{LHE}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LHE}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LHE}{\textcircled{\scshape% - \@latin{r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LHE}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}} -\lccode``=`` -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{LHE}{96} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{LHE}{97} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{LHE}{98} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{LHE}{99} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{LHE}{100} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{LHE}{101} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{LHE}{102} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{LHE}{103} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{LHE}{104} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{LHE}{105} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{LHE}{106} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{LHE}{107} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{LHE}{108} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{LHE}{109} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{LHE}{110} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{LHE}{111} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{LHE}{112} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{LHE}{113} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{LHE}{114} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{LHE}{115} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{LHE}{116} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{LHE}{117} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{LHE}{118} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{LHE}{119} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{LHE}{120} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{LHE}{121} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{LHE}{122} -\let\hebsin=\hebshin -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheenc.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 1e1bee281fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lhefr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEfr,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lhefr.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew frank-ruehl font - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{fr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{n} - {<-> fr }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * fr/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sl} - {<-> frsl }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{it} - {<->ssub * fr/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{n} - {<-> frbx }{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{b}{n} - {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{sl} - {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lhefr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 7e5c8cb41ed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheredis.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEredis,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheredis.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J. Goldberg) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{redis}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{n}{% - <5> <6> redis7 - <7> <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * redis - <10.95> redis10 - <14.4> redis12 - <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redis17}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sc} - {<->ssub * redis/m/n}{} -%%%%%%% Slanted shape -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sl}{% - <5> <6> <7> rediss8 - <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * rediss - <10.95> rediss10 - <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> rediss12}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{it} - {<->ssub * redis/m/sl}{} -%%%%%%% Bold extended series -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{n}{% - <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <10.95> <12> - <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redisb10}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{b}{n} - {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{sl} - {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{it} - {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheredis.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd deleted file mode 100644 index 9e47d3e5d7d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheshold.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshold,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheshold.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shold}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shold}{m}{n} - {<-> shold10 }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheshold.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd deleted file mode 100644 index aa0ebe5b628..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheshscr.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshscr,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheshscr.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shscr}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shscr}{m}{n} - {<-> shscr10 }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheshscr.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd deleted file mode 100644 index be2e9a3de71..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lheshstk.fd', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshstk,nowarn') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{lheshstk.fd} - [2005/05/20 v1.2c % - Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher) - (test version: still liable to change)] -\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shstk}{} -\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shstk}{m}{n} - {<-> shstk10 }{} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lheshstk.fd'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index ee5c589c14c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `lsorbian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% lsorbian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{lsorbian} - [2008/03/17 v1.0g Lower Sorbian support from the babel system] -%% File `lsorbian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Lower Sorbian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008 -%% by Eduard Werner -%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de -%% -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@lowersorbian\@undefined - \ifx\l@lsorbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Lsorbian} - \adddialect\l@lsorbian\z@ - \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian - \else - \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian - \fi -\else - \let\l@lsorbian\l@lowersorbian -\fi -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Zawod}% - \def\refname{Referency}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitl}% - \def\appendixname{Dodawki}% - \def\contentsname{Wop\'simje\'se}% - \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}% - \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Wobraz}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{\'Z\v el}% - \def\enclname{P\'si\l oga}% - \def\ccname{CC}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{gl.}% - \def\alsoname{gl.~teke}% - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or maja\or - junija\or julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or - nowembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - wjelikego ro\v zka\or - ma\l ego ro\v zka\or - nal\v etnika\or - jat\v sownika\or - ro\v zownika\or - sma\v znika\or - pra\v znika\or - \v znje\'nca\or - po\v znje\'nca\or - winowca\or - nazymnika\or - godownika\fi \space \number\year}} -\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname - \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `lsorbian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty index 48f75de8165..b0707008b43 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `lsorbian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ba35d0551bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +%% +%% This is file `luababel.def', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% bbunicode.dtx (with options: `luatex') +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. +%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors +%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. +%% +%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. +%% --------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +%% +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel +%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without +%% such generated files. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is +%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional +%% information. +%% +%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +%% File `bbunicode.dtx' +%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e +%% Copyright (C) 2103 +%% by Javier Bezos +\directlua{% + require("luatex-hyphen") + Babel = {} + function Babel.bytes(line) + return line:gsub("(.)", + function (chr) return unicode.utf8.char(string.byte(chr)) end) + end + function Babel.begin_process_input() + if luatexbase and luatexbase.add_to_callback then + luatexbase.add_to_callback('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes,'Babel.bytes') + else + Babel.callback = callback.find('process_input_buffer') + callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes) + end + end + function Babel.end_process_input () + if luatexbase and luatexbase.remove_from_callback then + luatexbase.remove_from_callback('process_input_buffer','Babel.bytes') + else + callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.callback) + end + end +} +\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode} +\let\luabbl@stop\relax +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{encodedcommands}{% + \def\bbl@tempa{utf8}\def\bbl@tempb{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\else + \directlua{Babel.begin_process_input()}% + \def\luabbl@stop{% + \directlua{Babel.end_process_input()}}% + \fi}% +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{stopcommands}{% + \luabbl@stop + \let\luabbl@stop\relax} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{patterns}{% + \ifx\directlua\relax\else + \ifcsname lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language\endcsname \else + \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}% + \directlua{ + luatexhyphen.loadlanguage('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}', + '\the\language')}% + \fi + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{adddialect}{% + \ifx\directlua\relax\else + \directlua{ + luatexhyphen.adddialect('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}', + '\luatexluaescapestring{\string#2}') + }% + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{everylanguage}{% + \directlua{ + processnow = (tex.language == 0) or + (luatexhyphen.lookupname('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}') == nil)}% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}% + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadpatterns}{% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \input #1\relax + \fi} +\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadexceptions}{% + \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax + \input #1\relax + \fi + \directlua{processnow = nil}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `luababel.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 532d8be5d7f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,640 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `magyar.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% magyar.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{magyar} - [2005/03/30 v1.4j Magyar support from the babel system] -%% File `magyar.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Magyar Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% \'Arp\'ad B\'IR\'O -%% J\'ozsef B\'ERCES -\LdfInit{magyar}{caption\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@magyar\@undefined - \ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Magyar} - \adddialect\l@magyar0 - \else - \let\l@magyar\l@hungarian - \fi -\fi -\ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined - \let\l@hungarian\l@magyar -\fi -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{El\H osz\'o}% - \def\refname{Hivatkoz\'asok}% - \def\abstractname{Kivonat}% - \def\bibname{Irodalomjegyz\'ek}% - \def\chaptername{fejezet}% - \def\appendixname{F\"uggel\'ek}% - \def\contentsname{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% - \def\listfigurename{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% - \def\listtablename{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% - \def\indexname{T\'argymutat\'o}% - \def\figurename{\'abra}% - \def\tablename{t\'abl\'azat}% - \def\partname{r\'esz}% - \def\enclname{Mell\'eklet}% - \def\ccname{K\"orlev\'el--c\'\i mzettek}% - \def\headtoname{C\'\i mzett}% - \def\pagename{oldal}% - \def\seename{l\'asd}% - \def\alsoname{l\'asd m\'eg}% - \def\proofname{Bizony\'\i t\'as}% - \def\glossaryname{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}% - }% -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{% - \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or - \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or - j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or - okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi - \space\number\day.}} -\@namedef{ondate\CurrentOption}{% - \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or - \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or - j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or - okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi - \space\ifcase\day\or - 1-j\'en\or 2-\'an\or 3-\'an\or 4-\'en\or 5-\'en\or - 6-\'an\or 7-\'en\or 8-\'an\or 9-\'en\or 10-\'en\or - 11-\'en\or 12-\'en\or 13-\'an\or 14-\'en\or 15-\'en\or - 16-\'an\or 17-\'en\or 18-\'an\or 19-\'en\or 20-\'an\or - 21-\'en\or 22-\'en\or 23-\'an\or 24-\'en\or 25-\'en\or - 26-\'an\or 27-\'en\or 28-\'an\or 29-\'en\or 30-\'an\or - 31-\'en\fi} - \@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ontoday - \csname ondate\CurrentOption\endcsname} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\let\ontoday\@undefined} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\fnum@figure - \def\fnum@figure{\thefigure.\nobreakspace\figurename}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\fnum@table - \def\fnum@table{\thetable.\nobreakspace\tablename}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makecaption - \def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1. #2}% - \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize - {#1. #2\csname par\endcsname} - \else - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \vskip\belowcaptionskip}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@caption - \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{% - \csname par\endcsname - \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}{\ignorespaces #2}}% - \begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \if@minipage - \@setminipage - \fi - \normalsize - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #3}\csname par\endcsname - \endgroup}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@seccntformat - \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@sect - \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty - \else - \refstepcounter{#1}% - \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% - \fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #6{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \fi - #7}% - \else - \def\@svsechd{% - #6{\hskip #3\relax - \@svsec #8.}% - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \fi - #7}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#5}}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@ssect - \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{% - \@tempskipa #3\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #4{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}% - \endgroup - \else - \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5.}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#3}}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@begintheorem - \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1.}]\itshape}% - \babel@save\@opargbegintheorem - \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1\ (#3).}]\itshape}} -\@ifclassloaded{book}{% - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@part - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart.\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \fi - \markboth{}{}% - {\centering - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \huge\bfseries \thepart.\nobreakspace\partname - \csname par\endcsname - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \Huge \bfseries #2\csname par\endcsname}% - \@endpart}} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@chapter - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makechapterhead - \def\@makechapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter - \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{} - \csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \fi - \interlinepenalty\@M - \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }}}% -}{} -\@ifclassloaded{report}{% - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@chapter - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\@makechapterhead - \def\@makechapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{50\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{} - \csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \interlinepenalty\@M - \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak - \vskip 40\p@ - }}}% -}{} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright {% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}}% - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection.\quad - \fi - ##1}}}}% - \fi}% -}{} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{% - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\ps@headings} - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead} - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}} - \fi}% -}{} -\def\az{a\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}} -\def\Az{A\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}} -\def\az@#1{\@az{#1}\nobreakspace#1} -\def\@az#1{% - \hun@tempadef{relax}{relax}{#1}% - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb} -\def\hun@tempadef#1#2#3{% - \begingroup - \def\@safe@activesfalse{}% - \def\setbox ##1{}% to get rid of accents and special letters - \def\hbox ##1{}% - \def\accent ##1 ##2{##2}% - \def\add@accent ##1##2{##2}% - \def\@text@composite@x ##1##2{##2}% - \def\i{i}\def\j{j}% - \def\ae{a}\def\AE{A}\def\oe{o}\def\OE{O}% - \def\ss{s}\def\L{L}% - \def\d{}\def\b{}\def\c{}\def\t{}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax - \xdef\@tempa{#3}% - \else - \xdef\@tempa{\csname #2\endcsname}% - \fi - \else - \xdef\@tempa{\csname #1\endcsname}% - \fi - \endgroup} -\def\aref{\azr} -\def\Aref{\Azr} -\def\azr{a\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}} -\def\Azr{A\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}} -\def\azr@{\@ifnextchar ({\azr@@@}{\azr@@}} -\def\azr@@#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace\ref{#1}} -\def\azr@@@(#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace(\ref{#1}} -\def\@azr#1{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@firstoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi -} -\def\apageref{\azp} -\def\Apageref{\Azp} -\def\azp{a\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}} -\def\Azp{A\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}} -\def\azp@#1{\@azp{#1}\nobreakspace\pageref{#1}} -\def\@azp#1{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi -} -\def\acite{\azc} -\def\Acite{\Azc} -\def\azc{a\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}} -\def\Azc{A\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}} -\def\azc@{\@ifnextchar [{\azc@@}{\azc@@[]}} -\def\azc@@[#1]#2{% - \@azc{#2}\nobreakspace\def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\cite{#2}\else\cite[#1]{#2}\fi} -\def\@azc#1{\@@azc#1,\hbox!} -\def\@@azc#1,#2\hbox#3!{% - \hun@tempadef{hun@b@#1}{b@#1}{}% - \ifx\@tempa\empty - \else - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}% - \@tempb - \fi} -\def\hun@number@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \ifcat\noexpand#11% - \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname>47 - \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname<58 - \advance\count@ by \@ne - \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi\fi\fi} -\def\hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \ifcat\noexpand#1A% - \advance\count@ by \@ne - \hun@alph@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi} -\def\@@az@string#1#2{% - \ifx#1A% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1E% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1I% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1O% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1U% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \else - \count@\z@ - \hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox\hbox!% - \ifnum\count@=\@ne - \ifx#1F% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1L% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1M% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1N% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1R% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1S% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1X% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx#1Y% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\@@az#1#2\hbox#3!{% - \let\@tempa\@empty - \def\@tempb{z}% - \uppercase{% - \ifx5#1% - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \else\ifx1#1% - \count@\@ne - \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!% - \loop - \ifnum\count@>\thr@@ - \advance\count@-\thr@@ - \repeat - \ifnum\count@=\@ne - \let\@tempa\@tempb - \fi - \else - \@@az@string{#1}{#2}% - \fi\fi - }% - \@tempa} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\refstepcounter - \def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}% - \def\@currentlabel{\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}}% -} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \let\old@label\label - \def\label#1{\@bsphack - \old@label{#1}% - \begingroup - \let\romannumeral\number - \def\@roman##1{\number ##1}% - \def\@Roman##1{\number ##1}% - {\toks0={\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\number}% - \def\number##1{\the\toks0 ##1}\xdef\tempb@{\thepage}}% - \edef\@tempa##1{\noexpand\protected@write\@auxout{}% - {\noexpand\string\noexpand\hunnewlabel - {##1}{{\@currentlabel}{\tempb@}}}}% - \@tempa{#1}% - \endgroup - \@esphack}% -} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \let\label\old@label -} -\def\hunnewlabel#1#2{% - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\@tempa - \relax% \message{No need for def: #1}% - \else - \global\expandafter\let\csname hun@r@#1\endcsname\@tempa% - \fi -} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi} -\initiate@active@char{`} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \languageshorthands{magyar}% - \bbl@activate{`}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{`}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{``}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{c}{cs}}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{C}{CS}}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{d}{dz}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{D}{DZ}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{g}{gy}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{G}{GY}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{l}{ly}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{L}{LY}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{n}{ny}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{N}{NY}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{s}{sz}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{S}{SZ}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{t}{ty}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{T}{TY}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{z}{zs}}{z}} -\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`Z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{Z}{ZS}}{Z}} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `magyar.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty index 39c641f3d0c..73fd232d227 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `magyar') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty index 610c736d84a..d1c94a3c242 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `naustrian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 1b42f7d9056..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,162 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `ngermanb.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% ngermanb.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{ngermanb} - [2008/07/06 v2.6n new German support from the babel system] -%% File `ngermanb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% new Germanb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek, -%% Walter Schmidt. -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\def\bbl@tempa{ngermanb} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\CurrentOption{ngerman} -\fi -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@ngerman\@undefined - \@nopatterns{ngerman} - \adddialect\l@ngerman0 -\fi -\adddialect\l@naustrian\l@ngerman -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Vorwort}% - \def\refname{Literatur}% - \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}% - \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Anhang}% - \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt - \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% - \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}% - \def\indexname{Index}% - \def\figurename{Abbildung}% - \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel - \def\partname{Teil}% - \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n) - \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an - \def\headtoname{An}% - \def\pagename{Seite}% - \def\seename{siehe}% - \def\alsoname{siehe auch}% - \def\proofname{Beweis}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossar}% - } -\def\month@ngerman{\ifcase\month\or - Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or - Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi} -\def\datengerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@ngerman - \space\number\year}} -\def\datenaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month - J\"anner\else \month@ngerman\fi \space\number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{% - \languageshorthands{ngerman}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasngerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}% - \lccode25=25} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}% - {\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"S}{\SS} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"Z}{SZ} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `ngermanb.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty index 90262dba4a0..ed372645c58 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `ngermanb') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_oldcode.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/nil.ldf index cefe013873a..cbcaea124fd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_oldcode.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/nil.ldf @@ -1,19 +1,14 @@ %% -%% This is file `hebrew_oldcode.sty', +%% This is file `nil.ldf', %% generated with the docstrip utility. %% %% The original source files were: %% -%% heb209.dtx (with options: `oldcode') -%% +%% babel.dtx (with options: `nil') %% This is a generated file. %% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. +%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% %% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. @@ -29,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -42,16 +37,30 @@ %% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution %% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with %% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams, +%% File 'babel.dtx' +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] +%% Babel package for LaTeX2e. +%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, +%% TeXniek +%% all rights reserved. +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams %% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_oldcode.sty} -\RequirePackage[si960]{inputenc} -\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel} +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +\ProvidesLanguage{nil} + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % + Nil language] +\LdfInit{nil}{datenil} +\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined + \@nopatterns{nil} + \adddialect\l@nil0 +\else + \let\l@nil\l@nohyphenation +\fi +\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\m@ne\m@ne} +\let\captionsnil\@empty +\let\datenil\@empty +\ldf@finish{nil} %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z @@ -70,4 +79,4 @@ %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} \endinput %% -%% End of file `hebrew_oldcode.sty'. +%% End of file `nil.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 6b5ae7ef9f6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `norsk.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% norsk.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{norsk} - [2005/03/30 v2.0h Norsk support from the babel system] -%%File `norsk.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@norsk\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Norsk} - \adddialect\l@norsk0\fi -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\def\bbl@tempa{norsk} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \def\captionsnorsk{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Referanser}% - \def\abstractname{Sammendrag}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% or Litteraturoversikt - % or Litteratur or Referanser - \def\chaptername{Kapittel}% - \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks - \def\contentsname{Innhold}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% or Figurliste - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlegg}% - \def\ccname{Kopi sendt}% - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Se}% - \def\alsoname{Se ogs\aa{}}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}% - } -\else - \adddialect\l@nynorsk\l@norsk - \def\captionsnynorsk{% - \def\prefacename{Forord}% - \def\refname{Referansar}% - \def\abstractname{Samandrag}% - \def\bibname{Litteratur}% or Litteraturoversyn - % or Referansar - \def\chaptername{Kapittel}% - \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks - \def\contentsname{Innhald}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurar}% or Figurliste - \def\listtablename{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Vedlegg}% - \def\ccname{Kopi til}% - \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter - \def\pagename{Side}% - \def\seename{Sj\aa{}}% - \def\alsoname{Sj\aa{} \`{o}g}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}% - } -\fi -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or - juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember - \fi - \space\number\year}} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \languageshorthands{norsk}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"e}{\textormath{\bbl@disc e{\'e}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"E}{\textormath{\bbl@disc E{\'E}}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"k}{\textormath{\bbl@disc k{kk}}{k}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"K}{\textormath{\bbl@disc K{KK}}{K}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}} -\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M - \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= } -\def\bbl@insertff{% - \if f\bbl@nextff - \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}} -\let\bbl@nextff=f -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"-}{\penalty\@M\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `norsk.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty index 76a81f60762..d201d8a07bb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `norsk') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def index 9469b7473a3..e593ec7448e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbplain.dtx (with options: `code') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -40,25 +41,12 @@ %% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e %% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 %% by Johannes Braams -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\ifx\adddialect\@undefined - \def\@empty{} - \def\loadlocalcfg#1{% - \openin0#1.cfg - \ifeof0 - \closein0 - \else - \closein0 - {\immediate\write16{*************************************}% - \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}% - \immediate\write16{*}% - } - \input #1.cfg\relax - \fi - \@endofldf - } - \let\orig@dump=\dump +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +\def\@empty{} +\ifx\orig@dump\@undefined\else \def\dump{% \ifx\@ztryfc\@undefined \else @@ -71,6 +59,19 @@ \let\dump\orig@dump\let\orig@dump\@undefined\dump} \expandafter\endinput \fi +\def\loadlocalcfg#1{% + \openin0#1.cfg + \ifeof0 + \closein0 + \else + \closein0 + {\immediate\write16{*************************************}% + \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}% + \immediate\write16{*}% + } + \input #1.cfg\relax + \fi + \@endofldf} \long\def\@firstofone#1{#1} \long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1} \long\def\@secondoftwo#1#2{#2} @@ -90,12 +91,15 @@ \toks@\expandafter{#1#2}% \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}} \def\@namedef#1{\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname} +\def\@nameuse#1{\csname #1\endcsname} \def\@ifundefined#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\@firstoftwo \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo \fi} +\def\@expandtwoargs#1#2#3{% + \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand#1{#2}{#3}}\reserved@a} \ifx\@preamblecmds\@undefined \def\@preamblecmds{} \fi @@ -119,6 +123,7 @@ \@onlypreamble\AtEndOfPackage \def\@endofldf{} \@onlypreamble\@endofldf +\let\bbl@afterlang\@empty \ifx\if@filesw\@undefined \expandafter\let\csname if@filesw\expandafter\endcsname \csname iffalse\endcsname @@ -175,16 +180,16 @@ \def\@x@protect#1\fi#2#3{% \fi\protect#1% } -\def\bbl@tmpa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@} +\def\bbl@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@} \ifx\in@\@undefined \def\in@#1#2{% \def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{% \ifx\in@##2\in@false\else\in@true\fi}% \in@@#2#1\in@\in@@} \else - \let\bbl@tmpa\@empty + \let\bbl@tempa\@empty \fi -\bbl@tmpa +\bbl@tempa \def\@ifpackagewith#1#2#3#4{% #3} \def\@ifl@aded#1#2#3#4{} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index d05c1384dd4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,228 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `polish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% polish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{polish} - [2005/03/31 v1.2l Polish support from the babel system] -%% File `polish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Polish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Elmar Schalueck, Michael Janich -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{polish}\captionspolish -\ifx\l@polish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Polish} - \adddialect\l@polish0\fi -\addto\captionspolish{% - \def\prefacename{Przedmowa}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Streszczenie}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Rozdzia\l}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatek}% - \def\contentsname{Spis tre\'sci}% - \def\listfigurename{Spis rysunk\'ow}% - \def\listtablename{Spis tablic}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Rysunek}% - \def\tablename{Tablica}% - \def\partname{Cz\eob{}\'s\'c}% - \def\enclname{Za\l\aob{}cznik}% - \def\ccname{Kopie:}% - \def\headtoname{Do}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{Por\'ownaj}% - \def\alsoname{Por\'ownaj tak\.ze}% - \def\proofname{Dow\'od}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -\def\datepolish{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - stycznia\or lutego\or marca\or kwietnia\or maja\or czerwca\or lipca\or - sierpnia\or wrze\'snia\or pa\'zdziernika\or listopada\or grudnia\fi - \space\number\year}% -} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extraspolish{\languageshorthands{polish}} -\addto\extraspolish{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextraspolish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\newdimen\pl@left -\newdimen\pl@down -\newdimen\pl@right -\newdimen\pl@temp -\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{$_\mathchar'454$}\setbox2\hbox{p}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{OT1}{\sob a{.66}{.20}{0}{.90}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{OT1}{\sob A{.80}{.50}{0}{.90}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{OT1}{\sob e{.50}{.35}{0}{.93}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{OT1}{\sob E{.60}{.35}{0}{.90}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{T1}{\k a} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{T1}{\k A} -\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\k e} -\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\k E} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\aob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Aob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\eob}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Eob}} -\def\spb#1#2#3#4#5{% - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'023}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \ht1=\pl@down \dp1=-\pl@down - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -\def\skb#1#2#3#4#5{% - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'056}% - \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1 - \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0 - \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1 - \leavevmode - \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1} -\def\textpl{% - \def\lpb{\plll}% - \def\Lpb{\pLLL}% - \def\zkb{\.z}% - \def\Zkb{\.Z}} -\textpl -\let\lll=\l \let\LLL=\L -\def\plll{\lll} -\def\pLLL{\LLL} -\def\telepl{% - \def\lpb{\spb l{.45}{.5}{.4}{.8}}% - \def\Lpb{\spb L{.23}{.5}{.4}{.8}}% - \def\zkb{\skb z{.5}{.5}{1.2}{0}}% - \def\Zkb{\skb Z{.5}{.5}{1.1}{0}}} -\ifx\selectfont\@undefined - \ifx\prm\@undefined \addto\rm{\textpl}\else \addto\prm{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\pit\@undefined \addto\it{\textpl}\else \addto\pit{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\pbf\@undefined \addto\bf{\textpl}\else \addto\pbf{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psl\@undefined \addto\sl{\textpl}\else \addto\psl{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psf\@undefined \else \addto\psf{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\psc\@undefined \else \addto\psc{\textpl}\fi - \ifx\ptt\@undefined \addto\tt{\telepl}\else \addto\ptt{\telepl}\fi -\else - \expandafter\addto\csname selectfont \endcsname{% - \csname\f@encoding @pl\endcsname} -\fi -\expandafter\let\csname T1@pl\endcsname\textpl -\expandafter\def\csname OT1@pl\endcsname{% - \long\edef\curr@family{\f@family}% - \ifx\curr@family\ttdefault - \telepl - \else - \textpl - \fi} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"a}{\textormath{\aob}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"A}{\textormath{\Aob}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"c}{\textormath{\'c}{\acute c}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"C}{\textormath{\'C}{\acute C}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"e}{\textormath{\eob}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"E}{\textormath{\Eob}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"l}{\textormath{\lpb}{\ddot l}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"L}{\textormath{\Lpb}{\ddot L}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"n}{\textormath{\'n}{\acute n}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"N}{\textormath{\'N}{\acute N}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"o}{\textormath{\'o}{\acute o}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"O}{\textormath{\'O}{\acute O}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"s}{\textormath{\'s}{\acute s}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"S}{\textormath{\'S}{\acute S}} -\newcommand*{\polishrz}{% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot r}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot R}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute Z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\dq x}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\dq X}% - } -\polishrz -\newcommand*{\polishzx}{% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot Z}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute x}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute X}}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\dq r}% - \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\dq R}% - } -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{polish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\ldf@finish{polish} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `polish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty index 434612354fd..3d63fe60099 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `polish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 181d7a8923a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `portuges.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% portuges.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{portuges} - [2008/03/18 v1.2q Portuguese support from the babel system] -%% File `portuges.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Portuguese Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@portuges\@undefined - \ifx\l@portuguese\@undefined - \ifx\l@brazil\@undefined - \ifx\l@brazilian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Portuguese} - \adddialect\l@portuges0 - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@brazilian - \fi - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@brazil - \fi - \else - \let\l@portuges\l@portuguese - \fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges -\fi -\def\bbl@tempa{portuguese} -\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \let\bbl@tempb\@empty -\else - \def\bbl@tempa{portuges} - \ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa - \let\bbl@tempb\@empty - \else - \def\bbl@tempb{brazil} - \fi -\fi -\ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty - \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}% - \def\refname{Refer\^encias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografia}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}% - \def\contentsname{Conte\'udo}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Anexo}% - \def\ccname{Com c\'opia a}% - \def\headtoname{Para}% - \def\pagename{P\'agina}% - \def\seename{ver}% - \def\alsoname{ver tamb\'em}% - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}% - } - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or - Janeiro\or Fevereiro\or Mar\c{c}o\or Abril\or Maio\or Junho\or - Julho\or Agosto\or Setembro\or Outubro\or Novembro\or Dezembro% - \fi - \space de\space\number\year}} -\else - \expandafter - \adddialect\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges - \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}% - \def\refname{Refer\^encias}% - \def\abstractname{Resumo}% - \def\bibname{Refer\^encias Bibliogr\'aficas}% - \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}% - \def\contentsname{Sum\'ario}% - \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}% - \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}% - \def\indexname{\'Indice Remissivo}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Parte}% - \def\enclname{Anexo}% - \def\ccname{C\'opia para}% - \def\headtoname{Para}% - \def\pagename{P\'agina}% - \def\seename{veja}% - \def\alsoname{veja tamb\'em}% - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}% - \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}% - } - \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or - janeiro\or fevereiro\or mar\c{c}o\or abril\or maio\or junho\or - julho\or agosto\or setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or dezembro% - \fi - \space de\space\number\year}} -\fi -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{portuges}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasportuges{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\-} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}} -\def\ord{$^{\rm o}$} -\def\orda{$^{\rm a}$} -\let\ro\ord\let\ra\orda -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `portuges.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty index aab3ddcd3e9..2aa67457fe8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `portuges') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def deleted file mode 100644 index ceb2eb38aef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,812 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `rlbabel.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `rightleft') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\ProvidesFile{rlbabel.def} - [2005/03/30 v2.3h % - Right-to-Left support from the babel system - Hebrew language support from the babel system] -\ifx\TeXXeTstate\undefined\else% - \TeXXeTstate=1 -\fi -\ifx\beginL\@undefined% - \newlinechar`\^^J - \typeout{^^JTo avoid this error message,^^J% - run TeX--XeT or e-TeX engine instead of regular TeX.^^J} - \errmessage{Right-to-Left Support Error: use TeX--XeT or e-TeX - engine}% -\fi -\newif\if@rl -\AtBeginDocument{% Here we set the main document direction - \newif\if@rlmain% - \if@rl% e.g: if the options to babel were [english,hebrew] - \@rlmaintrue% - \else% e.g: if the options to babel were [hebrew,english] - \@rlmainfalse% - \fi% -} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\@torl}[1]{% - \if@rl\else% - \let\lr@encodingdefault=\encodingdefault% - \fi% - \def\@rllanguagename{#1}% - \def\encodingdefault{\csname#1encoding\endcsname}% - \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}% - \selectfont% - \@rltrue} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fromrl}{% - \if@rl% - \let\encodingdefault=\lr@encodingdefault% - \fi% - \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}% - \selectfont% - \@rlfalse} -\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% - \edef\languagename{% - \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty - \else \string#1\@empty\fi}% - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -\def\@@selectlanguage#1{% - \select@language{#1}% - \if@filesw - \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{#1}}% - \if@rl% - \addtocontents{cot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{fol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{tol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \else% - \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}% - \fi% - \fi} -\let\other@languagename=\languagename -\DeclareRobustCommand{\setrllanguage}[1]{% - \if@rl\else% - \let\other@languagename=\languagename% - \fi% - \def\languagename{#1}% - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\unsetrllanguage}[1]{% - \if@rl% - \let\languagename=\other@languagename% - \fi - \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}} -\let\next=\ -\def\HeblatexRedefineL{% - \def\L{\protect\pL}% -} -\HeblatexRedefineL -\def\pL{\protect\afterassignment\moreL \let\next= } -\def\moreL{\bracetext \aftergroup\endL \beginL\csname - from\@rllanguagename\endcsname} -\def\R{\protect\pR} -\def\pR{\protect\afterassignment\moreR \let\next= } -\def\moreR{\bracetext \aftergroup\endR \beginR\csname - to\@rllanguagename\endcsname} -\def\bracetext{\ifcat\next{\else\ifcat\next}\fi - \errmessage{Missing left brace has been substituted}\fi \bgroup} -\everydisplay{\if@rl\aftergroup\beginR\fi } -\def\@ensure@R#1{\if@rl#1\else\R{#1}\fi} -\def\@ensure@L#1{\if@rl\L{#1}\else#1\fi} -\def\rl@everypar{\if@rl{\setbox\z@\lastbox\beginR\usebox\z@}\fi} -\let\o@everypar=\everypar -\def\everypar#1{\o@everypar{\rl@everypar#1}} -\newcommand{\hmbox}[1]{\mbox{\R{#1}}} -\newcommand{\embox}[1]{\mbox{\L{#1}}} -\def\@brackets#1#2#3{\protect\if@rl #3#2#1\protect\else - #1#2#3\protect\fi} -\def\@@number#1{\ifmmode\else\beginL\fi#1\ifmmode\else\endL\fi} -\def\@@latin#1{\@@number{{\@fromrl#1}}} -\def\@number{\protect\@@number} -\def\@latin{\protect\@@latin} -\let\@@arabic=\@arabic -\let\@@roman=\@roman -\let\@@Roman=\@Roman -\let\@@alph=\@alph -\let\@@Alph=\@Alph -\def\@arabic#1{\@number{\@@arabic#1}} -\def\@roman#1{\@latin{\@@roman#1}} -\def\@Roman#1{\@latin{\@@Roman#1}} -\def\arabicnorl#1{\expandafter\@@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\make@lr#1{\begingroup - \toks@=\expandafter{#1}% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \def\noexpand#1{\noexpand\@number{\the\toks@}}}% - \x} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% - \@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \make@lr\thesection - \make@lr\thesubsection - \make@lr\thesubsubsection - \make@lr\theparagraph - \make@lr\thesubparagraph - \make@lr\thefigure - \make@lr\thetable - } - \make@lr\theequation -} -\let\@@TeX\TeX -\def\TeX{\@latin{\@@TeX}} -\let\@@LaTeX\LaTeX -\def\LaTeX{\@latin{\@@LaTeX}} -\let\@@LaTeXe\LaTeXe -\def\LaTeXe{\@latin{\@@LaTeXe}} -\def\list#1#2{% - \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax - \@toodeep - \else - \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne - \fi - \rightmargin\z@ - \listparindent\z@ - \itemindent\z@ - \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname - \def\@itemlabel{#1}% - \let\makelabel\@mklab - \@nmbrlistfalse - #2\relax - \@trivlist - \parskip\parsep - \parindent\listparindent - \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin - \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin - \if@rl - \advance\@totalleftmargin \rightmargin - \else - \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin - \fi - \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth - \ignorespaces} -\def\labelenumii{\@brackets(\theenumii)} -\def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\@brackets(\theenumii)} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{% - \section*{\contentsname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}% - \@starttoc{#1}} - \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{% - \section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}} - \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{% - \section*{\listtablename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}}}% - {% else report or book - \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{% - \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn% - \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}% - {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi} - \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{% - \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn% - \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi} - \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{% - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\else\@restonecolfalse\fi% - \chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}% - {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}% - \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}}% - \newcommand\lrtableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{toc}}% - \newcommand\lrlistoffigures{\@listoffigures{lof}}% - \newcommand\lrlistoftables{\@listoftables{lot}}% - \newcommand\rltableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{cot}}% - \newcommand\rllistoffigures{\@listoffigures{fol}}% - \newcommand\rllistoftables{\@listoftables{tol}}% - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{\if@rl\rltableofcontents% - \else\lrtableofcontents\fi} - \renewcommand\listoffigures{\if@rl\rllistoffigures% - \else\lrlistoffigures\fi} - \renewcommand\listoftables{\if@rl\rllistoftables% - \else\lrlistoftables\fi}}} -\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% - \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - {\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi #2\relax - \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@tocrmarg \parfillskip - -\if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax - \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi \@tempdima - \null\nobreak\hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi - {#4}\nobreak - \leaders\hbox{$\m@th - \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep - mu$}\hfill - \nobreak - \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor \beginL#5\endL}% - \par}% - \fi} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other -\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{% - \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}% - \begingroup - \setlength\@tempdima{3em}% - \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth - \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth - {\leavevmode - \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}}\par - \nobreak - \global\@nobreaktrue - \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}% - \endgroup - \fi}}} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% article class - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}% - \fi - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \Large\bfseries \partname~\thepart - \par\nobreak - \fi - \huge \bfseries #2% - \markboth{}{}\par}% - \nobreak - \vskip 3ex - \@afterheading}% -}{% report and book classes - \def\@part[#1]#2{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}% - \fi - \markboth{}{}% - {\centering - \interlinepenalty \@M - \normalfont - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax - \huge\bfseries \partname~\thepart - \par - \vskip 20\p@ - \fi - \Huge \bfseries #2\par}% - \@endpart}} -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty - \else - \refstepcounter{#1}% - \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% - \fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - #6{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% - \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \else - \def\@svsechd{% - #6{\hskip #3\relax - \@svsec #8}% - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}}% - \fi - \@xsect{#5}} -\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{% - \par - \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}% - \def\@fignm{figure} - \ifx#1\@fignm\addcontentsline{fol}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi% - \def\@tblnm{table} - \ifx#1\@tblnm\addcontentsline{tol}{#1}% - {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi% - \begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \if@minipage - \@setminipage - \fi - \normalsize - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par - \endgroup} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{}{% - \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{% - \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@ - \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}% - \begingroup - \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth - \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth - \leavevmode \bfseries - \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi\@tempdima - \hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi - #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}\par - \penalty\@highpenalty - \endgroup - \fi}}}} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% -\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}} -\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}}{} -\let\@@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol -\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{% - \if@rlmain% - \rl@outputdblcol% - \else% - \@@outputdblcol% - \fi% -} -\newcommand{\rl@outputdblcol}{% - \if@firstcolumn - \global \@firstcolumnfalse - \global \setbox\@leftcolumn \box\@outputbox - \else - \global \@firstcolumntrue - \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {\hb@xt@\textwidth {% - \hskip\columnwidth% - \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil - \hb@xt@\columnwidth {% - \box\@leftcolumn \hss}% - \hb@xt@\columnwidth {% - \hskip-\textwidth% - \box\@outputbox \hss}% - \hskip\columnsep% - \hskip\columnwidth}}% - \@combinedblfloats - \@outputpage - \begingroup - \@dblfloatplacement - \@startdblcolumn - \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi - {\@outputpage - \@startdblcolumn}% - \endgroup - \fi} -\let\@@footnoterule=\footnoterule -\def\footnoterule{\if@rl\hb@xt@\hsize{\hss\vbox{\@@footnoterule}}% - \else\@@footnoterule\fi} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{% - \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\headtoname{} - \ignorespaces\toname - \hfil \@date - \hfil \pagename{} \thepage\protect\if@rl\endR\fi} - \if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead} - \else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}} - \fi - \def\headfirst{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\fromlocation \hfill % - \telephonenum\protect\if@rl\endR\fi} - \def\ps@firstpage{% - \let\@oddhead\@empty - \def\@oddfoot{\raisebox{-45\p@}[\z@]{% - \hb@xt@\textwidth{\hspace*{100\p@}% - \ifcase \@ptsize\relax - \normalsize - \or - \small - \or - \footnotesize - \fi - \select@language{\headlanguage}\headfirst}}\hss}} - \renewcommand{\opening}[1]{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - \ifx\@empty\fromaddress% - \thispagestyle{firstpage}% - {\raggedleft\@date\par}% - \else % home address - \thispagestyle{empty}% - {\raggedleft - \if@rl\begin{tabular}{@{\beginR\csname% - to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}r@{\endR}}\ignorespaces - \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]% - \@date \end{tabular}\par% - \else\begin{tabular}{l}\ignorespaces - \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]% - \@date \end{tabular}\par% - \fi}% - \fi - \vspace{2\parskip}% - {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}% - \vspace{2\parskip}% - #1\par\nobreak} -} -{% article, report, book - \def\headeven{\protect\if@rl\beginR\thepage\hfil\rightmark\endR - \protect\else\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark} - \protect\fi} - \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\leftmark\hfil\thepage\endR - \protect\else{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage - \protect\fi} - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \if@twoside % two-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection\quad - \fi - ##1}}} - \else % one-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}}} - \fi - \def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark\@gobble - }}{% report and book - \if@twoside % two-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven} - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}} - \else % one-sided - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd} - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}} - \fi - \def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}% - \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark\@gobble - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - }}} -\AtBeginDocument{% - %I assume that \@textcolor is only defined by the package color - \ifx\@textcolor\@undefined\else% - % If that macro was defined before the beginning of the document, - % that is: the package was loaded: redefine it with bidi support - \def\@textcolor#1#2#3{% - \if@rl% - \beginL\protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}\beginR#3\endR}\endL% - \else% - \protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}#3}% - \fi% - }% - \fi% -} -\@ifclassloaded{prosper}{% - \def\thetrueSlideCounter{\arabicnorl{trueSlideCounter}} -}{} -\def\raggedright{% - \let\\\@centercr - \leftskip\z@skip\rightskip\@flushglue - \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip} -\let\@@raggedleft=\raggedleft -\let\@@raggedright=\raggedright -\renewcommand\raggedleft{\if@rl\@@raggedright% - \else\@@raggedleft\fi} -\renewcommand\raggedright{\if@rl\@@raggedleft% - \else\@@raggedright\fi} -\let\@@author=\author -\renewcommand{\author}[1]{\@@author{\if@rl\beginR #1\endR\else #1\fi}} -\let\@@MakeUppercase=\MakeUppercase -\def\MakeUppercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeUppercase{#1}\fi} -\let\@@MakeLowercase=\MakeLowercase -\def\MakeLowercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeLowercase{#1}\fi} -\let\@@@underline=\underline -\def\underline#1{\@@@underline{\if@rl\R{#1}\else #1\fi}} -\if@compatibility - \let\undertext=\underline -\fi -\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% - \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname - {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\noexpand\@number - {\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep - \@thmcounter{#1}}}% - \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% - \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} -\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{% - \trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ - \@brackets({#3})}]\itshape} -\@ifclassloaded{article}{}{% - % For pretty priniting - \def\@@chapapp{Chapter} - \def\@@thechapter{\@@arabic\c@chapter} - \def\@chapter[#1]#2{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - %\set@outputdblcol% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \typeout{\@@chapapp\space\@@thechapter.}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1} - \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}% - {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1} - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}{#1}% - \fi - \chaptermark{#1} - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{fol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \addtocontents{tol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \fi} - % - \def\@schapter#1{% - \let\headlanguage=\languagename% - %\set@outputdblcol% - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]% - \else - \@makeschapterhead{#1}% - \@afterheading - \fi}} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article - \renewcommand\appendix{\par - \setcounter{section}{0}% - \setcounter{subsection}{0}% - \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}} - }{% report and book - \renewcommand\appendix{\par - %\set@outputdblcol% - \setcounter{chapter}{0}% - \setcounter{section}{0}% - \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}% - % For pretty priniting - \def\@@chapapp{Appendix}% - \def\@@thechapter{\@@Alph\c@chapter} - \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}}}} -\def\@cite#1#2{\@brackets[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]} -\def\@biblabel#1{\@brackets[{#1}]} -\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw - {\let\protect\noexpand - \immediate - \if@rl\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\R{#1}}}% - \else\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\L{#1}}}\fi% - }\fi\ignorespaces} -\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other -\@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1] - {\section*{\refname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\refname}% - {\MakeUppercase\refname}}% - \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% - \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth - \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep - \@openbib@code - \usecounter{enumiv}% - \let\p@enumiv\@empty - \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty - \widowpenalty4000% - \sfcode`\.\@m} - {\def\@noitemerr - {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% - \endlist}}% -{\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{% - \chapter*{\bibname\@mkboth% - {\MakeUppercase\bibname}% - {\MakeUppercase\bibname}}% - \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% - \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth - \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep - \@openbib@code - \usecounter{enumiv}% - \let\p@enumiv\@empty - \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty - \widowpenalty4000% - \sfcode`\.\@m} - {\def\@noitemerr - {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% - \endlist}}}} -\def\@verbatim{% - \let\do\@makeother \dospecials% - \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs} -\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip% - \begin{center}% - #1: #2% - \end{center} \par% - \vskip\belowcaptionskip} -\newcommand{\bpart}[2]{\part{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bchapter}[2]{\chapter{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bsection}[2]{\section{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bsubsection}[2]{\subsection{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bsubsubsection}[2]{\subsubsection{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bcaption}[2]{% - \caption[\protect\if@rl \R{#1}\protect\else \L{#2}\protect\fi]{% - \if@rl\R{#1}\protect\\ \L{#2} - \else\L{#2}\protect\\ \R{#1}\fi}} -\newcommand{\bchapternn}[2]{\chapter*{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\newcommand{\bsectionnn}[2]{\section*{\protect\if@rl% - #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}} -\AtEndOfPackage{\rlAtEndOfPackage} -\def\rlAtEndOfPackage{% - \global\let\headlanguage=\languagename%\set@outputdblcol% -} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `rlbabel.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 7e8d24b026e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `romanian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% romanian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{romanian} - [2005/03/31 v1.2l Romanian support from the babel system] -%% File `romanian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Romanian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{romanian}\captionsromanian -\ifx\l@romanian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Romanian} - \adddialect\l@romanian0\fi -\addto\captionsromanian{% - \def\prefacename{Prefa\c{t}\u{a}}% - \def\refname{Bibliografie}% - \def\abstractname{Rezumat}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografie}% - \def\chaptername{Capitolul}% - \def\appendixname{Anexa}% - \def\contentsname{Cuprins}% - \def\listfigurename{List\u{a} de figuri}% - \def\listtablename{List\u{a} de tabele}% - \def\indexname{Glosar}% - \def\figurename{Figura}% % sau Plan\c{s}a - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Partea}% - \def\enclname{Anex\u{a}}% % sau Anexe - \def\ccname{Copie}% - \def\headtoname{Pentru}% - \def\pagename{Pagina}% - \def\seename{Vezi}% - \def\alsoname{Vezi de asemenea}% - \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{t}ie} % - \def\glossaryname{Glosar}% - }% -\def\dateromanian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - ianuarie\or februarie\or martie\or aprilie\or mai\or - iunie\or iulie\or august\or septembrie\or octombrie\or - noiembrie\or decembrie\fi - \space \number\year}} -\addto\extrasromanian{} -\addto\noextrasromanian{} -\ldf@finish{romanian} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `romanian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty index eb6609622c7..d2b1e670cc1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `romanian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty deleted file mode 100644 index a6b284f5b41..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,215 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `romanidx.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% spanish.dtx (with options: `indexes') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `spanish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Spanish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011 -%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com) -%% and -%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es) -%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably) -%% www.tex-tipografia.com -%% J.L. Braams -%% www.latex-project.org - - -\makeatletter - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\def\spanishindexchars#1#2#3{% - \edef\es@encap{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1\endcsname}% - \edef\es@openrange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#2\endcsname}% - \edef\es@closerange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#3\endcsname}}% - \spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}% - \ifx\documentclass\@twoclasseserror - \edef\es@idxfile{\jobname}% - \AtEndDocument{% - \addto\@defaultsubs{% - \immediate\closeout\@indexfile - \input{romanidx.sty}}}% - \expandafter\endinput - \fi}{} - -\newcount\es@converted -\newcount\es@processed - -\def\es@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1} -\def\es@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2} - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J% - (extension por omision .idx):}} - {\let\answer\es@idxfile} - -\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} -\ifin@ - \edef\es@input@file{\expandafter\es@split@file\answer\@@} - \edef\es@input@ext{\expandafter\es@split@ext\answer\@@} -\else - \edef\es@input@file{\answer} - \def\es@input@ext{idx} -\fi - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo de destino^^J% - (archivo por omision: \es@input@file.eix,^^J% - extension por omision .eix):}} - {\let\answer\es@idxfile} -\ifx\answer\@empty - \edef\es@output{\es@input@file.eix} -\else - \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer} - \ifin@ - \edef\es@output{\answer} - \else - \edef\es@output{\answer.eix} - \fi -\fi - -\@ifundefined{es@idxfile} - {\typein[\answer]{% - ^^J?Se ha usado algun esquema especial de controles^^J% - de MakeIndex para encap, open_range o close_range?^^J% - [s/n] (n por omision)}} - {\def\answer{n}} - -\if s\answer - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J% - (\string| por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@encap{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J% - (\string( por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@openrange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi - \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J% - (\string) por omision)} - \ifx\answer\@empty\else - \edef\es@closerange{% - `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname} - \fi -\fi - -\newwrite\es@indexfile -\immediate\openout\es@indexfile=\es@output - -\newif\ifes@encapsulated - -\def\es@scroman#1{#1} -\edef\es@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\} - -\def\indexentry{% - \begingroup - \@sanitize - \es@indexentry} - -\begingroup - -\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\es@encap\relax -\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\es@openrange\relax -\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\es@closerange\relax - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@indexentry#1{% - \endgroup - \advance\es@processed\@ne - \es@encapsulatedfalse - \es@bar@idx#1|\@@ - \es@idxentry}% -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@idxentry#1{% - \in@{\es@scroman}{#1}% - \ifin@ - \advance\es@converted\@ne - \immediate\write\es@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\es@b|\ifes@encapsulated\es@p\fi esromanindex% - {\ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@slash\es@a\fi}}{#1}}% - \else - \immediate\write\es@indexfile{% - \string\indexentry{\es@b\ifes@encapsulated|\es@p\es@a\fi}{#1}}% - \fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{% - \def\es@b{#1}\def\es@a{#2}% - \ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@encapsulatedtrue\es@bar@eat#2\fi} -} - -\lowercase{ -\gdef\es@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\es@p{#1}\def\es@a{#2}% - \edef\es@t{(}\ifx\es@t\es@p - \else\edef\es@t{)}\ifx\es@t\es@p - \else - \edef\es@a{\es@p\es@a}\let\es@p\@empty% - \fi\fi} -} - -\endgroup - -\input \es@input@file.\es@input@ext - -\immediate\closeout\es@indexfile - -\typeout{*****************} -\typeout{Se ha procesado: \es@input@file.\es@input@ext } -\typeout{Lineas leidas: \the\es@processed} -\typeout{Lineas convertidas: \the\es@converted} -\typeout{Resultado en: \es@output} -\ifnum\es@converted>\z@ - \typeout{Genere el indice a partir de ese archivo} -\else - \typeout{No se ha convertido nada. Se puede generar} - \typeout{el .ind directamente de \es@input@file.\es@input@ext} -\fi -\typeout{*****************} - -\@ifundefined{es@sdef}{\@@end}{} - -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `romanidx.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index b18b530f751..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,327 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `russianb.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% russianb.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{russianb} - [2008/03/21 v1.1r Russian support from the babel system] -%% File `russianb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Russianb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008 -%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings -%% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru -%% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl -\LdfInit{russian}{captionsrussian} -\ifx\l@russian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Russian} - \adddialect\l@russian0 -\fi -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax - \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Russian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\russianhyphenmins - \language\l@russian}% -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english}% -\let\Rus\Russian -\let\Eng\English -\let\cyrillictext\Russian -\let\cyr\Russian -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else - \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or - i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or - q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or - y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or - I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or - Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or - Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} -\fi -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% - \def\reserved@a{LWN}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \def\reserved@a{OT2}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \PackageWarning{babel}% - {No input encoding specified for Russian language} - \fi\fi} -\let\lat\latintext -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -\addto\captionsrussian{% - \def\prefacename{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyri\cyrs\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyri\cyre}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyrl\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyrery}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrya}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}% - \def\appendixname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% - \@ifundefined{thechapter}% - {\def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}% - {\def\contentsname{% - {\cyr\CYRO\cyrg\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyrl\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}% - \def\listfigurename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyri\cyrl\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrishrt}}% - \def\listtablename{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc}}% - \def\indexname{% - {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyre\cyrt\cyrn\cyrery\cyrishrt - \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\authorname{% - {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrishrt - \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}% - \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}% - \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl.}}% - \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrs\cyrh.}}% - \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrh.}}% - \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}% - \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.}}% - \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyrzh\cyre}}% - \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt - \cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrs\cyrt\cyrv\cyro}}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - } -\def\daterussian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - \cyrya\cyrn\cyrv\cyra\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyra\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\cyra\or - \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyrm\cyra\cyrya\or - \cyri\cyryu\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyri\cyryu\cyrl\cyrya\or - \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\cyra\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrn\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrn\cyro\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or - \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyra\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\fi - \ \number\year~\cyrg.}} -\addto\extrasrussian{\cyrillictext} -\addto\noextrasrussian{\latintext} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasrussian{\languageshorthands{russian}} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasrussian{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{russian}{"-}{% - \def\russian@sh@tmp{% - \if\russian@sh@next-\expandafter\russian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\russian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% - \futurelet\russian@sh@next\russian@sh@tmp} -\def\russian@sh@hyphen{% - \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\def\russian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi - \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined - \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -\declare@shorthand{russian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined - \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@} -\fi -\addto\extrasrussian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasrussian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRZH\or - \CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or - \CYRP\or\CYRR\or\CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or - \CYRC\or\CYRCH\or\CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYREREV\or\CYRYU\or - \CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrzh\or - \cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or - \cyrp\or\cyrr\or\cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or - \cyrc\or\cyrch\or\cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyrerev\or\cyryu\or - \cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits} -\def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} -\def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} -\def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} -\def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} -\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -\ldf@finish{russian} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `russianb.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty index 2f00cda724d..22f61e609c7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `russianb') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index bb6fff6bf60..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `samin.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% samin.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{samin} - [2004/02/20 v1.0c North Sami support from the babel system] -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{samin}{captionssamin} -\ifx\undefined\l@samin - \@nopatterns{Samin} - \adddialect\l@samin0\fi -\providehyphenmins{samin}{\tw@\tw@} -\def\captionssamin{% - \def\prefacename{Ovdas\'atni}% - \def\refname{\v Cujuhusat}% - \def\abstractname{\v Coahkk\'aigeassu}% - \def\bibname{Girjj\'ala\v svuohta}% - \def\chaptername{Kapihttal}% - \def\appendixname{\v Cuovus}% - \def\contentsname{Sisdoallu}% - \def\listfigurename{Govvosat}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeallat}% - \def\indexname{Registtar}% - \def\figurename{Govus}% - \def\tablename{Tabealla}% - \def\partname{Oassi}% - \def\enclname{Mielddus}% - \def\ccname{Kopia s\'addejuvvon}% - \def\headtoname{Vuost\'aiv\'aldi}% - \def\pagename{Siidu}% - \def\seename{geah\v ca}% - \def\alsoname{geah\v ca maidd\'ai}% - \def\proofname{Duo\dj{}a\v stus}% - \def\glossaryname{S\'atnelistu}% -}% -\def\datesamin{% - \def\today{\ifcase\month\or - o\dj{}\dj{}ajagem\'anu\or - guovvam\'anu\or - njuk\v cam\'anu\or - cuo\ng{}om\'anu\or - miessem\'anu\or - geassem\'anu\or - suoidnem\'anu\or - borgem\'anu\or - \v cak\v cam\'anu\or - golggotm\'anu\or - sk\'abmam\'anu\or - juovlam\'anu\fi - \space\number\day.~b.\space\number\year}% -}% -\addto\extrassamin{} -\addto\noextrassamin{} -\ldf@finish{samin} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `samin.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty index 3e7648a3b5f..339c1fc89df 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `samin') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index cdac51f98cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `scottish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% scottish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{scottish} - [2005/03/31 v1.0g Scottish support from the babel system] -%% File `scottish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{scottish}\captionsscottish -\ifx\l@scottish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{scottish} - \adddialect\l@scottish0\fi -\addto\captionsscottish{% - \def\prefacename{Preface}% <-- needs translation - \def\refname{Iomraidh}% - \def\abstractname{Br\`{\i}gh}% - \def\bibname{Leabhraichean}% - \def\chaptername{Caibideil}% - \def\appendixname{Ath-sgr`{\i}obhadh}% - \def\contentsname{Cl\`ar-obrach}% - \def\listfigurename{Liosta Dhealbh }% - \def\listtablename{Liosta Chl\`ar}% - \def\indexname{Cl\`ar-innse}% - \def\figurename{Dealbh}% - \def\tablename{Cl\`ar}% - \def\partname{Cuid}% - \def\enclname{a-staigh}% - \def\ccname{lethbhreac gu}% - \def\headtoname{gu}% - \def\pagename{t.d.}% abrv. `taobh duilleag' - \def\seename{see}% <-- needs translation - \def\alsoname{see also}% <-- needs translation - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -} -\def\datescottish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or - am Faoilteach\or an Gearran\or am M\`art\or an Giblean\or - an C\`eitean\or an t-\`Og mhios\or an t-Iuchar\or - L\`unasdal\or an Sultuine\or an D\`amhar\or - an t-Samhainn\or an Dubhlachd\fi - \space \number\year}} -\addto\extrasscottish{} -\addto\noextrasscottish{} -\ldf@finish{scottish} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `scottish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty index 8fe2fff5e00..08f8ca2939a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `scottish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index cde349e6805..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,140 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `serbian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% serbian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{serbian} - [2005/03/31 v1.0d Serbocroatian support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{serbian}\captionsserbian -\ifx\l@serbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Serbian} - \adddialect\l@serbian0\fi -\addto\captionsserbian{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}% - \def\bibname{Bibliografija}% - \def\chaptername{Glava}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatak}% - \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}% - \def\listfigurename{Slike}% - \def\listtablename{Tabele}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Deo}% - \def\enclname{Prilozi}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prima}% - \def\pagename{Strana}% - \def\seename{Vidi}% - \def\alsoname{Vidi tako\dj e}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -\def\dateserbian{% - \def\today{\number\day .~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or mart\or april\or maj\or - juni\or juli\or avgust\or septembar\or oktobar\or novembar\or - decembar\fi \space \number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasserbian{\languageshorthands{serbian}} -\addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"d}{\textormath{\dj}{\dj}}%% -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"D}{\textormath{\DJ}{\DJ}}%% -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\ifx\fmtname plain \else - \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse - \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} - \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI - \@afterindentfalse} - \addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@frenchindent} - \addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent} -\fi -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh -\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth -\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits} -\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits} -\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits} -\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits} -\ldf@finish{serbian} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `serbian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty index eaca180563f..db6e4afd98d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `serbian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def deleted file mode 100644 index bdc1a62a807..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `si960.def', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `si960') -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. - \ProvidesFile{si960.def} - [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file] -%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings. -%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva. -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams, -%% TeXniek -%% All rights reserved. -\makeatletter -%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the -%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file. -\makeatother -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `si960.def'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 8940617958a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,520 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `slovak.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% slovak.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{slovak} - [2008/07/06 v3.1a Slovak support from the babel system] -%% File `slovak.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Slovak Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2001 -%% by Jana Chlebikova -%% Copyright (C) 2002-2005 -%% by Tobias Schlemmer -%% Copyright (C) 2005-2008 -%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz) -%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik -%% babel at tesarici.cz -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@slovak\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Slovak} - \adddialect\l@slovak0\fi -\def\cs@iltw@{IL2} -\newif\ifcs@splithyphens -\cs@splithyphensfalse -\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined - \let\cs@compat@plain\relax - \message{csplain compatibility mode} -\else - \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{% - \let\cs@compat@latex\relax - \message{cslatex compatibility mode}} -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \ProvidesPackage{slovak}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Slovak style] - \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}} - \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}} - \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}} - \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse} - \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue} - \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax} - \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax} - \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax} - \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@} - \ProcessOptions - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \input il2enc.def - \fi - \def\CurrentOption{slovak} -\fi -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Predhovor}% - \def\refname{Literat\'ura}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literat\'ura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitola}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatok}% - \def\contentsname{Obsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% - \def\listtablename{Zoznam tabuliek}% - \def\indexname{Register}% - \def\figurename{Obr.}% - \def\tablename{Tabu\v{l}ka}% - \def\partname{\v{C}as\v{t}}% - \def\enclname{Pr\'{\i}loha}% - \def\ccname{cc.}% - \def\headtoname{Pre}% - \def\pagename{Str.}% - \def\seename{vi\v{d}}% - \def\alsoname{vi\v{d} tie\v{z}}% - \def\proofname{D\^okaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}% - }% -\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - janu\'ara\or febru\'ara\or marca\or apr\'{\i}la\or m\'aja\or - j\'una\or j\'ula\or augusta\or septembra\or okt\'obra\or - novembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@frenchspacing - \languageshorthands{slovak}} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\q\let\q\v} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else - \initiate@active@char{^} - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{^}} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{^}} - \initiate@active@char{"} - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{"}\umlautlow} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{"}\umlauthigh} - \initiate@active@char{'} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{'}} - \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{'}}% - }{} -\fi -\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\sq{'} - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else - \declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}\allowhyphens}{\ddot e}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}\allowhyphens}{\ddot E}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}\allowhyphens}% - {\ddot\imath}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}\allowhyphens}{\ddot I}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^c}{\textormath{\v{c}\allowhyphens}{\check{c}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^d}{\textormath{\q{d}\allowhyphens}{\check{d}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^l}{\textormath{\q{l}\allowhyphens}{\check{l}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^n}{\textormath{\v{n}\allowhyphens}{\check{n}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^o}{\textormath{\^{o}\allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check{s}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^t}{\textormath{\q{t}\allowhyphens}{\check{t}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check{z}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^C}{\textormath{\v{C}\allowhyphens}{\check{C}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^D}{\textormath{\v{D}\allowhyphens}{\check{D}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^L}{\textormath{\q{L}\allowhyphens}{\check{L}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^N}{\textormath{\v{N}\allowhyphens}{\check{N}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^O}{\textormath{\^{O}\allowhyphens}{\hat{O}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check{S}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^T}{\textormath{\v{T}\allowhyphens}{\check{T}}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check{Z}}} - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{% - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'a}{\textormath{\'a\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}a}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'e}{\textormath{\'e\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}e}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'i}{\textormath{\'\i{}\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}i}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'l}{\textormath{\'l\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'o}{\textormath{\'o\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}o}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'r}{\textormath{\'r\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}r}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'u}{\textormath{\'u\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}u}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'y}{\textormath{\'y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}y}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'A}{\textormath{\'A\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}A}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'E}{\textormath{\'E\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}E}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'I}{\textormath{\'I\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}I}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'L}{\textormath{\'L\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'O}{\textormath{\'O\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}O}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'R}{\textormath{\'R\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}R}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'U}{\textormath{\'U\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}U}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'Y}{\textormath{\'Y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}Y}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{''}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}} - }{} - % \end{macrocode} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"|}{% - \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen} -\fi -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{% - t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{% - d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}} - \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}} -\def\lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em% - \else - l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}% - \fi} -\def\Lcaron{% - \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}% - \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax - L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}% - \else - L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}% - \fi} -\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax - \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s - \def\csprimeson{% - \catcode``\active \catcode`'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s} - \def\csprimesoff{% - \catcode``12 \catcode`'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s} - \begingroup\catcode``\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote} - \def\cs@openquote{% - \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq - \else \expandafter\clq - \fi}% - }\x - \begingroup\catcode`'\active - \def\x{\endgroup - \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote} - {^\bgroup\prim@s}} - \def\cs@closequote{% - \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq - \else \expandafter\crq - \fi}% - }\x - \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= } - \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= } -\else - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"`}{\clqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"'}{\crqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"<}{\flqq} - \declare@shorthand{slovak}{">}{\frqq} -\fi -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{% - \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}% - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne - \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne - \leavevmode - \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em - \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1} - {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1} - {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens} -\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1} - {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1} - {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}} -\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq} -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi -\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes - \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=} - \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax} -\fi -\newcount\cs@wordlen -\begingroup\catcode`\-12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@hyphen{-} - \def\cs@endash{--} - \def\cs@emdash{---} - \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}} - \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@ - \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@} -}\x -\initiate@active@char{-} -\declare@shorthand{slovak}{-}{% - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \ifhmode - \ifinner - \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen - \fi - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen - \fi} -\begingroup\catcode`\-\active -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n} - \def\cs@firsthyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen - \fi} - \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{% - \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n} - \def\cs@secondhyph@n{% - \ifx -\cs@token - \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble - \else - \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash - \fi} -}\x -\def\cs@checkhyphen{% - \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\- - \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@ - \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword - \else - \cs@hyphen - \fi} -\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken} -\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken} -\def\cs@gett@ken{% - \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}% - \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}% - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@examinetoken{% - \ifcat A\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifcat 0\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}% - \else\ifx\char\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }% - \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}% - \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}% - \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}% - \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token - \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}% - \else - \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef - \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{% - \def\cs@token{#1}% - \ifx\cs@token\@empty - \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }% - \else - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= } -\def\cs@addparam#1{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}} -\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=} -\def\cs@examinechar{% - \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}% - \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}} -\def\cs@checkcode#1{% - \ifnum0=#1 - \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}% - \else - \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne - \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen - \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}% - \else - \cs@splithyphen - \def\cs@next{\cs@word}% - \fi - \fi \cs@next} -\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word} -\let\minus\cs@hyphen - -\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens} -\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens} -\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens} -\bbl@declare@ttribute{slovak}{split}{% - \addto\extrasslovak{\cs@splitattr}} -\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax -\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}% - \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}% - \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \cs@deactivatehyphens - \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax - \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax} -\let\cs@looseness\looseness -\def\looseness{% - \ifcs@splithyphens - \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi - \cs@looseness} -\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else - \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption} - \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined - \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage - \def\selectlanguage{% - \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect - \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language - \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage - \else - \expandafter\selectlanguage - \fi} - \def\cs@selectlanguage{% - \cs@tempdisable{captions}% - \cs@tempdisable{date}% - \selectlanguage} - \def\cs@tempdisable#1{% - \def\@tempa{cs@#1}% - \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}% - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname - \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{% - \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname - \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname - \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname - \noexpand\@undefined}} - \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language - \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect - \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage - \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable - \fi -\fi -\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined -\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else - \def\cs@check@enc{ - \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@ - \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble - \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n} - \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n} - \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined - \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined - \fi - \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined} - \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc} -\fi -\fi -\def\cs@undoiltw@{% - \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000 - \sfcode159=1000 - \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000 - \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000 - \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000 - \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000 - \uccode181=149 - \uccode185=153 - \uccode187=155 - \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0 - \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000 - \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000} -\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined -\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else - \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update - \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi - \cs@enc@update - \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language - \expandafter\ifx - \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let - \expandafter\csname - \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename - \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi - \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax - \fi} -\fi\fi -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `slovak.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty index dadf76e0e85..48928613bcc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `slovak') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index b0c44cb2d6e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `slovene.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% slovene.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{slovene} - [2005/03/31 v1.2m Slovene support from the babel system] -%% File `slovene.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{slovene}\captionsslovene -\ifx\l@slovene\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Slovene} - \adddialect\l@slovene0\fi -\addto\captionsslovene{% - \def\prefacename{Predgovor}% - \def\refname{Literatura}% - \def\abstractname{Povzetek}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Poglavje}% - \def\appendixname{Dodatek}% - \def\contentsname{Kazalo}% - \def\listfigurename{Slike}% - \def\listtablename{Tabele}% - \def\indexname{Stvarno kazalo}% used to be Indeks - \def\figurename{Slika}% - \def\tablename{Tabela}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Priloge}% - \def\ccname{Kopije}% - \def\headtoname{Prejme}% - \def\pagename{Stran}% - \def\seename{glej}% - \def\alsoname{glej tudi}% - \def\proofname{Dokaz}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -\def\dateslovene{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januar\or februar\or marec\or april\or maj\or junij\or - julij\or avgust\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi - \space \number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasslovene{\languageshorthands{slovene}} -\addto\extrasslovene{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasslovene{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"|}{% - \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}} -\ldf@finish{slovene} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `slovene.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty index 1f4948ae483..9cf43eca4b4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `slovene') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 73f2493886c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,799 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `spanish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% spanish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% File `spanish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Spanish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011 -%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com) -%% and -%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es) -%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably) -%% www.tex-tipografia.com -%% J.L. Braams -%% www.latex-project.org - - -\ProvidesLanguage{spanish.ldf} - [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system] -\LdfInit{spanish}\captionsspanish - -\edef\es@savedcatcodes{% - \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~ - \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\" - \catcode`\noexpand\:=\the\catcode`\:} -\catcode`\~=\active -\catcode`\"=12 -\catcode`\:=12 - -\ifx\undefined\l@spanish - \@nopatterns{Spanish} - \adddialect\l@spanish0 -\fi - -\def\es@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1} -\def\es@sDRC#1{\babel@save#1\DeclareRobustCommand*#1} - -\@ifundefined{documentclass} - {\let\ifes@latex\iffalse} - {\let\ifes@latex\iftrue} -\ifes@latex - -\@ifundefined{spanishoptions}{} -{\PassOptionsToPackage{\spanishoptions}{babel}} - -\def\es@genoption#1#2#3{% - \DeclareOption{#1}{}% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{#1}% - {\def\es@a{#1}% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\es@b\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname - \addto\es@b{,#2}% - \expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\es@b - \AtEndOfPackage{#3}}% - {}} - -\es@genoption{es-minimal} - {es-ucroman,es-noindentfirst,es-nosectiondot,es-noenumerate,% - es-noitemize,es-noquoting,es-notilde,es-nodecimaldot} - {\spanishplainpercent - \let\es@operators\relax} -\es@genoption{es-nolists} - {es-noenumerate,es-noitemize}{} -\es@genoption{es-sloppy} - {es-nolayout,es-noshorthands}{} -\es@genoption{es-noshorthands} - {es-noquoting,es-nodecimaldot,es-notilde}{} -\es@genoption{mexico} - {mexico-com,es-nodecimaldot}{} -\es@genoption{mexico-com} - {es-tabla,es-noquoting} - {\def\lquoti{``}\def\rquoti{''}% - \def\lquotii{`}\def\rquotii{'}% - \def\lquotiii{\guillemotleft{}}% - \def\rquotiii{\guillemotright{}}} - -\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{% - \DeclareOption{es-#1}{}% - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{es-#1}{#2}{#3}}% - -\def\es@optlayout#1#2{\es@ifoption{#1}{}{\addto\layoutspanish{#2}}} - -\else - -\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{\@namedef{spanish#1}{#2}} - -\fi - -\let\es@uclc\@secondoftwo -\es@ifoption{uppernames}{\let\es@uclc\@firstoftwo}{} - -\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro} -\es@ifoption{tabla}{\def\es@tablename{Ttabla}}{} -\es@ifoption{cuadro}{\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}}{} -\def\captionsspanish{% - \es@a{preface}{Prefacio}% - \es@a{ref}{Referencias}% - \es@a{abstract}{Resumen}% - \es@a{bib}{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}% - \es@a{chapter}{Cap\'{\i}tulo}% - \es@a{appendix}{Ap\'{e}ndice}% - \es@a{listfigure}{\'{I}ndice de \es@uclc Ffiguras}% - \es@a{listtable}{\'{I}ndice de \expandafter\es@uclc\es@tablename s}% - \es@a{index}{\'{I}ndice \es@uclc Aalfab\'{e}tico}% - \es@a{figure}{Figura}% - \es@a{table}{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\es@tablename}% - \es@a{part}{Parte}% - \es@a{encl}{Adjunto}% - \es@a{cc}{Copia a}% - \es@a{headto}{A}% - \es@a{page}{p\'{a}gina}% - \es@a{see}{v\'{e}ase}% - \es@a{also}{v\'{e}ase tambi\'{e}n}% - \es@a{proof}{Demostraci\'{o}n}% - \es@a{glossary}{Glosario}% - \@ifundefined{chapter} - {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice}}% - {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice \es@uclc Ggeneral}}} - -\def\es@a#1{\@namedef{spanish#1name}} -\captionsspanish -\def\es@a#1#2{% - \def\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1name\endcsname - {\expandafter\noexpand\csname spanish#1name\endcsname}} -\edef\captionsspanish{\captionsspanish} -\def\es@month#1{% - \expandafter#1\ifcase\month\or Eenero\or Ffebrero\or - Mmarzo\or Aabril\or Mmayo\or Jjunio\or Jjulio\or Aagosto\or - Sseptiembre\or Ooctubre\or Nnoviembre\or Ddiciembre\fi} - -\def\es@today#1{% - \ifcase\es@datefmt - \the\day~de \es@month#1% - \else - \es@month#1~\the\day - \fi - \ de\ifnum\year>1999\es@yearl\fi~\the\year} - -\def\datespanish{% - \def\today{\es@today\@secondoftwo}% - \def\Today{\es@today\@firstoftwo}} -\newcount\es@datefmt -\def\spanishreverseddate{\es@datefmt\@ne} -\def\spanishdatedel{\def\es@yearl{l}} -\def\spanishdatede{\let\es@yearl\@empty} -\spanishdatede -\def\selectspanish{% - \def\selectspanish{% - \def\selectspanish{% - \PackageWarning{spanish}{Extra \string\selectspanish ignored}}% - \es@select}} -\@onlypreamble\selectspanish -\def\es@select{% - \let\es@select\@undefined - \selectlanguage{spanish}} - -\let\es@shlist\@empty -\def\extrasspanish{% - \textspanish - \mathspanish - \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty - \expandafter\spanishdeactivate\expandafter{\es@shlist}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \else - \shorthandsspanish - \fi} -\def\noextrasspanish{% - \ifx\textspanish\@empty\else - \notextspanish - \fi - \ifx\mathspanish\@empty\else - \nomathspanish - \fi - \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty\else - \noshorthandsspanish - \fi - \csname es@restorelist\endcsname} - -\addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\sptext{\es@sptext}} - -\def\es@orddot{.} -\ifes@latex - \def\es@sptext#1{% - {\es@orddot - \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.15ex - \else - \fontsize\ssf@size\z@ - \selectfont - \advance\dimen@-1.5ex - \fi - \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}} -\else - \let\sptextfont\rm - \def\es@sptext#1{% - {\es@orddot - \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}% - \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa - \ifx\@tempb\@tempc - \advance\dimen@-0.75ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \else - \advance\dimen@-0.8ex - \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}% - \fi}} -\fi -\ifes@latex - \addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\lsc{\es@lsc}} - \def\es@lsc{\es@xlsc\MakeUppercase\MakeLowercase} - \def\es@xlsc#1#2#3{% - \leavevmode - \hbox{% - \scshape\selectfont - \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series - /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname - \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont - \PackageWarning{spanish}{Replacing `\curr@fontshape' by - \MessageBreak faked small caps}% - #1{#3}% - \else - #2{#3}% - \fi}} -\fi -\newif\ifes@listquot - -\ifes@latex - \csname newtoks\endcsname\es@quottoks - \csname newcount\endcsname\es@quotdepth - \newenvironment{quoting} - {\leavevmode - \advance\es@quotdepth\@ne - \csname lquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname% - \ifnum\es@quotdepth=\@ne - \es@listquotfalse - \let\es@quotpar\everypar - \let\everypar\es@quottoks - \everypar\expandafter{\the\es@quotpar}% - \es@quotpar{\the\everypar - \ifes@listquot\global\es@listquotfalse\else\es@quotcont\fi}% - \fi - \toks@\expandafter{\es@quotcont}% - \edef\es@quotcont{\the\toks@ - \expandafter\noexpand - \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}} - {\csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname} - \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}} - \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}} - \def\lquotii{``} - \def\rquotii{''} - \def\lquotiii{`} - \def\rquotiii{'} - \let\es@quotcont\@empty - \addto\@marginparreset{\let\es@quotcont\@empty} - \DeclareRobustCommand\es@listquot{% - \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname - \global\es@listquottrue} -\fi -\addto\textspanish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\notextspanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\addto\textspanish{% - \let\es@save@dot\.% - \es@sDRC\.{\@ifnextchar.{\es@dots}{\es@save@dot}}} -\def\es@dots..{\leavevmode\hbox{...}\spacefactor\@M} -\def\es@sppercent{\unskip\textormath{$\m@th\,$}{\,}} -\def\spanishplainpercent{\let\es@sppercent\@empty} -\addto\textspanish{% - \let\percentsign\%% - \es@sDRC\%{\es@sppercent\percentsign{}}} -\addto\mathspanish{\es@sDRC\dotlessi{\es@dotlessi}} -\let\nomathspanish\relax - -\ifes@latex - \def\es@texti{\i} - \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\es@texti} -\fi - -\ifes@latex - \def\es@dotlessi{% - \ifmmode - {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne - \imath - \else - \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter - \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil - \escapechar=\count@ - \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}% - {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}% - \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname - \advance\count@"7000 - \mathchar\count@ - \fi}% - \else - \i - \fi} -\else - \def\es@dotlessi{\textormath{\i}{\mathchar"7010}} -\fi - -\def\accentedoperators{% - \def\es@op@ac##1{\acute{\if i##1\dotlessi\else##1\fi}}} -\def\unaccentedoperators{% - \def\es@op@ac##1{##1}} -\accentedoperators -\def\spacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\,} -\def\unspacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\@empty} -\spacedoperators -\addto\mathspanish{\es@operators} - -\ifes@latex\else - \let\operator@font\rm -\fi -\def\es@operators{% - \es@sdef\bmod{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu - \mathbin{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu - \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}% - \@ifundefined{@amsmath@err}% - {\es@sdef\pmod##11{\allowbreak\mkern18mu - ({\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##11)}}% - {\es@sdef\mod##1{\allowbreak\if@display\mkern18mu - \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##1}% - \es@sdef\pmod##1{\pod{{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}% - \mkern6mu##1}}}% - \def\es@a##1 {% - \if^##1^% empty? continue - \bbl@afterelse - \es@a - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\if&##1% &? finish - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \begingroup - \let\,\@empty % ignore when def'ing name - \let\acute\@firstofone % id - \edef\es@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}% - \def\,{\noexpand\es@op@sp}% - \def\acute{\noexpand\es@op@ac}% - \edef\es@a{\endgroup - \noexpand\es@sdef\expandafter\noexpand\es@b{% - \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\es@c}}% - \es@a % restores itself - \es@a - \fi}% - \fi}% - \let\es@b\spanishoperators - \addto\es@b{ }% - \let\es@c\@empty - \expandafter\es@a\es@b l\acute{i}m l\acute{i}m\,sup - l\acute{i}m\,inf m\acute{a}x \acute{i}nf m\acute{i}n & % - \def\es@c{\nolimits}% - \expandafter\es@a\es@b sen tg arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tg & } -\def\spanishoperators{cotg cosec senh tgh } -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}} - -\def\es@set@shorthand#1{% - \expandafter\edef\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname - {\the\catcode`#1}% - \initiate@active@char{#1}% - \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \if.#1\else - \addto\es@restorelist{\es@restore{#1}}% - \addto\es@select{\shorthandon{#1}}% - \addto\shorthandsspanish{\es@activate{#1}}% - \addto\es@shlist{#1}% - \fi} - -\def\es@use@shorthand{% - \if@safe@actives - \bbl@afterelse - \string - \else - \bbl@afterfi - {\ifx\thepage\relax - \bbl@afterelse - \string - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \es@use@sh - \fi}% - \fi} - -\def\es@use@sh#1{% - \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect - \bbl@afterelse - \noexpand#1% - \else% - \bbl@afterfi - \textormath - {\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}% - {\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \fi} - -\gdef\es@activate#1{% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \def~{\es@use@shorthand~}}} - -\def\spanishdeactivate#1{% - \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\es@spdeactivate\@tempa}} - -\def\es@spdeactivate#1{% - \if.#1% - \mathcode`\.=\es@period@math\relax - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let~\es@period@code}% - \else - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \expandafter\let\expandafter~% - \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}% - \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax - \fi} -\def\es@restore#1{% - \shorthandon{#1}% - \begingroup - \lccode`\~=`#1 - \lowercase{% - \endgroup - \bbl@deactivate{~}}} -\def\es@declare#1{% - \@ifundefined{es@savecat\expandafter\string\@firstoftwo#1}% - {\@gobble}% - {\declare@shorthand{spanish}{#1}}} -\def\es@declarealt#1#2#3{% - \es@declare{#1}{#3}% - \es@declare{#2}{#3}} - -\ifes@latex\else - \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname} -\fi - -\@ifundefined{add@accent}{\def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}}{} -\ifes@latex - \def\es@accent#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\@text@composite - \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite - {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3% - \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}% - \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}} -\else - \def\es@accent#1#2#3{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 } -\fi - -\addto\shorthandsspanish{\languageshorthands{spanish}}% -\es@ifoption{noshorthands}{}{\es@set@shorthand{"}} -\def\es@umlaut#1{% - \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens - \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 } - -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \babel@save\bbl@umlauta - \let\bbl@umlauta\es@umlaut} -\let\noshorthandsspanish\relax - -\ifes@latex -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\es@accent\~{126}}% - \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\es@accent\'{19}}} -\else -\addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \es@sdef\~{\es@accent\~{126}}% - \es@sdef\'#1{\if#1i\es@accent\'{19}\i\else\es@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}} -\fi - -\def\es@sptext@r#1#2{\es@sptext{#1#2}} -\es@declare{"a}{\sptext{a}} -\es@declare{"A}{\sptext{A}} -\es@declare{"o}{\sptext{o}} -\es@declare{"O}{\sptext{O}} -\es@declare{"e}{\protect\es@sptext@r{e}} -\es@declare{"E}{\protect\es@sptext@r{E}} -\es@declare{"u}{\"u} -\es@declare{"U}{\"U} -\es@declare{"i}{\"{\i}} -\es@declare{"I}{\"I} -\es@declare{"c}{\c{c}} -\es@declare{"C}{\c{C}} -\es@declare{"<}{\guillemotleft{}} -\es@declare{">}{\guillemotright{}} -\def\es@chf{\char\hyphenchar\font} -\es@declare{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"=}{\bbl@allowhyphens\es@chf\hskip\z@skip} -\es@declare{"~} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{\es@chf}{\es@chf}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"r} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{r}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"R} - {\bbl@allowhyphens - \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{R}% - \bbl@allowhyphens} -\es@declare{"y} - {\@ifundefined{scalebox}% - {\ensuremath{\tau}}% - {\raisebox{1ex}{\scalebox{-1}{\resizebox{.45em}{1ex}{2}}}}} -\es@declare{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\es@declare{"/} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}% - \dimen@\ht\z@ - \advance\dimen@-1ex - \advance\dimen@\dp\z@ - \dimen@.31\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@ - \ifdim\dimen@>0pt - \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em - \else - \box\z@ - \fi} -\es@declare{"?} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} -\es@declare{"!} - {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}% - \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@} - -\def\spanishdecimal#1{\def\es@decimal{{#1}}} -\def\decimalcomma{\spanishdecimal{,}} -\def\decimalpoint{\spanishdecimal{.}} -\decimalcomma -\es@ifoption{nodecimaldot}{} - {\AtBeginDocument{\bgroup\@fileswfalse}% - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup - \let\es@period@code~% - \es@set@shorthand{.}% - \let~\es@period@code}% - \AtBeginDocument{\egroup}% - \@namedef{normal@char\string.}{% - \@ifnextchar\egroup - {\es@period@code}% - {\csname active@char\string.\endcsname}}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\es@period@code}% - \addto\shorthandsspanish{% - \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}% - \edef\es@period@math{\the\mathcode`\.}% - \babel@save\es@period@code - \ifnum\es@period@math="8000 - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let\es@period@code~}% - \else - \mathchardef\es@period@code\es@period@math\relax - \mathcode`\.="8000 % - \fi - \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\babel@save~}% - \es@activate{.}}% - \def\es@a#1{\es@declare{.#1}{\es@decimal#1}}% - \es@a1\es@a2\es@a3\es@a4\es@a5\es@a6\es@a7\es@a8\es@a9\es@a0} - -\es@ifoption{notilde}{}{\es@set@shorthand{~}} -\def\deactivatetilden{% - \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax} -\es@ifoption{tilden} - {\es@declare{~n}{\~n}% - \es@declare{~N}{\~N}} - {\let\deactivatetilden\relax} -\es@declarealt{~-}{"+}{% - \leavevmode - \bgroup - \let\@sptoken\es@dashes % Changes \@ifnextchar behaviour - \@ifnextchar-% - {\es@dashes}% - {\hbox{\es@chf}\egroup}} -\def\es@dashes-{% - \@ifnextchar-% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}% - {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}} - -\es@ifoption{noquoting}% - {\let\es@quoting\relax - \let\activatequoting\relax - \let\deactivatequoting\relax} - {\@ifundefined{XML@catcodes}% - {\es@set@shorthand{<}% - \es@set@shorthand{>}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}% - \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}% - \addto\es@restorelist{\es@quoting}% - \addto\es@select{\es@quoting}% - \ifes@latex - \AtBeginDocument{% - \es@quoting - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@nameuse{es@quoting}}% - \fi}% - \fi - \def\activatequoting{% - \shorthandon{<>}% - \let\es@quoting\activatequoting}% - \def\deactivatequoting{% - \shorthandoff{<>}% - \let\es@quoting\deactivatequoting}}{}} - -\es@declarealt{<<}{"`}{\begin{quoting}} -\es@declarealt{>>}{"'}{\end{quoting}} -\begingroup -\catcode`\'=12 -\gdef\es@activeacute{% - \es@set@shorthand{'}% - \def\es@a##1{\es@declare{'##1}{\@tabacckludge'##1}}% - \es@a a\es@a e\es@a i\es@a o\es@a u% - \es@a A\es@a E\es@a I\es@a O\es@a U% - \es@declare{'n}{\~n}% - \es@declare{'N}{\~N}% - \es@declare{''}{''}% - \let\es@pr@m@s\bbl@pr@m@s - \def\bbl@pr@m@s{% - \ifx'\@let@token - \bbl@afterelse - \pr@@@s - \else - \bbl@afterfi - \es@pr@m@s - \fi}% - \let\es@activeacute\relax} -\endgroup - -\ifes@latex - \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\es@activeacute}{} -\else - \es@activeacute -\fi -\def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{\def\es@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} -\def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{\def\es@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}} - -\ifes@latex -\es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$} -\def\spanishdashitems{\es@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}} -\def\spanishsymbitems{% - \es@itemize - {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex - {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}% - {\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}} -\def\spanishsignitems{% - \es@itemize{\textbullet}% - {$\m@th\circ$}% - {$\m@th\diamond$}% - {$\m@th\triangleright$}} -\spanishsymbitems -\def\es@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{% - \if#21% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2a% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}% - \else\if#2A% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2i% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2I% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}% - \else\if#2o% - \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\sptext{o}}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}% - \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname - {\noexpand\es@listquot\the\toks@#3}} -\def\es@guillemot#1#2{% - \ifmmode#1% - \else - \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M - \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}% - \char#2 \kern-0.19em\char#2 }}% - \fi} -\def\layoutspanish{% - \let\layoutspanish\@empty - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\ll{40}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\gg{41}}% - \def\@fnsymbol##1% - {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or - *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - k\or l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or - w\or x\or y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}% - \def\@Alph##1% - {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or - K\or L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or - W\or X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}} - -\es@optlayout{noenumerate}{% - \def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{% - \es@enumdef{i}#1\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{ii}#2\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{iii}#3\@empty\@empty\@@ - \es@enumdef{iv}#4\@empty\@empty\@@}% - \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}% - \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\theenumii}% - \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}% - \expandafter\es@enumerate\es@enum} -\es@optlayout{noitemize}{% - \def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{% - \def\labelitemi{\es@listquot#1}% - \def\labelitemii{\es@listquot#2}% - \def\labelitemiii{\es@listquot#3}% - \def\labelitemiv{\es@listquot#4}}% - \expandafter\es@itemize\es@item} -\let\esromanindex\@secondoftwo -\es@ifoption{ucroman} - {\def\es@romandef{% - \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\uppercase{##2}}}% - \def\@roman{\@Roman}}} - {\def\es@romandef{% - \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\es@scroman{##2}}}% - \def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\number##1}}% - \def\es@roman##1{\es@scroman{\romannumeral##1}}% - \DeclareRobustCommand\es@scroman{\es@xlsc\uppercase\@firstofone}}} -\es@optlayout{lcroman}{\es@romandef} -\newcommand\spanishlcroman{\def\@roman##1{\romannumeral##1}} -\newcommand\spanishucroman{\def\@roman{\@Roman}} -\newcommand\spanishscroman{\def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\romannumeral##1}}} -\es@optlayout{noindentfirst}{% - \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue - \@afterindenttrue} -\es@optlayout{nosectiondot}{% - \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}% - \def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1\if&\else.\fi\hfil}}} -\es@ifoption{nolayout}{\let\layoutspanish\relax}{} -\es@ifoption{sloppy}{\let\textspanish\relax\let\mathspanish\relax}{} -\es@ifoption{delayed}{}{\def\es@layoutspanish{\layoutspanish}} -\es@ifoption{preindex}{\AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{romanidx}}}{} -\AtEndOfPackage{% -\let\es@activeacute\@undefined -\def\bbl@tempa{spanish}% -\ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa - \@nameuse{es@layoutspanish}% - \addto\es@select{% - \@ifstar{\PackageError{spanish}% - {Old syntax--use es-nolayout}% - {If you don't want changes in layout\MessageBreak - use the es-nolayout package option}}% - {}}% - \AtBeginDocument{\layoutspanish}% -\fi -\selectspanish} -\fi -\es@savedcatcodes -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ifes@latex\else - \es@select -\fi -\ldf@finish{spanish} -\csname activatequoting\endcsname -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `spanish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty index c1b609b54aa..84dbb260f44 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `spanish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index a0446c49a40..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `swedish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% swedish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{swedish} - [2005/03/31 v2.3d Swedish support from the babel system] -%% File `swedish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{swedish}\captionsswedish -\ifx\l@swedish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Swedish} - \adddialect\l@swedish0\fi -\addto\captionsswedish{% - \def\prefacename{F\"orord}% - \def\refname{Referenser}% - \def\abstractname{Sammanfattning}% - \def\bibname{Litteraturf\"orteckning}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitel}% - \def\appendixname{Bilaga}% - \def\contentsname{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% - \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% - \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% - \def\indexname{Sakregister}% - \def\figurename{Figur}% - \def\tablename{Tabell}% - \def\partname{Del}% - \def\enclname{Bil.}% - \def\ccname{Kopia f\"or k\"annedom}% - \def\headtoname{Till}% in letter - \def\pagename{Sida}% - \def\seename{se}% - \def\alsoname{se \"aven}% - \def\proofname{Bevis}% - \def\glossaryname{Ordlista}% - }% -\def\dateswedish{% - \def\today{% - \number\day~\ifcase\month\or - januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or - juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or - december\fi - \space\number\year}} -\def\datesymd{% - \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}% - } -\def\datesdmy{% - \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}% - } -\providehyphenmins{swedish}{\tw@\tw@} -\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasswedish{\languageshorthands{swedish}} -\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\addto\noextrasswedish{\umlauthigh} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"w}{\textormath{{\aa}\allowhyphens}{\ddot w}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"W}{\textormath{{\AA}\allowhyphens}{\ddot W}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \bbl@allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"~}{% - \textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\allowhyphens} -\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\-} -\addto\extrasswedish{\def\-{\allowhyphens - \discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}} -\ldf@finish{swedish} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `swedish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty index 6b20c534e1b..b3e1577dfd6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `swedish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def index 2f0ab6227a5..d8fb0240f4f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% babel.dtx (with options: `kernel') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -36,15 +37,18 @@ %% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution %% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with %% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -%% %% File 'babel.dtx' -%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package] +%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package] %% Babel package for LaTeX2e. %% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams, %% TeXniek %% all rights reserved. -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl +%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams +%% TeXniek +%% by Javier Bezos +%% all rights reserved. +\def\bbl@version{3.9e} +\def\bbl@date{2013/04/15} \ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{% \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}% @@ -66,26 +70,18 @@ \endgroup} \fi \ProvidesFile{switch.def} - [2008/07/08 v3.8m % - Babel language switching mechanism] + [2013/04/15 v3.9e % + Babel language switching mechanism] \ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined - \def\adddialect{} \input plain.def\relax \fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname iflanguage\endcsname\relax \else -\expandafter\endinput -\fi \ifx\language\@undefined \csname newcount\endcsname\language \fi \ifx\newlanguage\@undefined \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language -\else - \countdef\last@language=19 -\fi -\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined \def\addlanguage#1{% - \global\advance\last@language \@ne + \global\advance\last@language\@ne \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi \else \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}% @@ -93,150 +89,194 @@ \global\chardef#1\last@language \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}} \else + \countdef\last@language=19 \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi} \fi \def\adddialect#1#2{% - \global\chardef#1#2\relax - \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}} + \global\chardef#1#2\relax + \bbl@usehooks{adddialect}{{#1}{#2}}% + \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}} +\def\bbl@fixname#1{% + \begingroup + \def\bbl@tempe{l@}% + \edef\bbl@tempd{\noexpand\@ifundefined{\noexpand\bbl@tempe#1}}% + \bbl@tempd + {\lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}% + {\uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}% + \@empty + {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}% + {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}% + \@empty + \edef\bbl@tempd{\endgroup\def\noexpand#1{#1}}% + \bbl@tempd} +\def\bbl@iflanguage#1{% + \@ifundefined{l@#1}{\@nolanerr{#1}\@gobble}\@firstofone} \def\iflanguage#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language + \bbl@iflanguage{#1}{% + \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language \expandafter\@firstoftwo \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi}% - \fi} + \fi}} +\let\bbl@select@type\z@ \edef\selectlanguage{% \noexpand\protect - \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname - } + \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname} \ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi \ifx\documentclass\@undefined \def\xstring{\string\string\string} \else \let\xstring\string \fi -\xdef\bbl@language@stack{} +\def\bbl@language@stack{} \def\bbl@push@language{% - \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}% - } + \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}} \def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{% - \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}% - } + \edef\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}} \def\bbl@pop@language{% \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack - \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}% - } + \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}} \expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{% \bbl@push@language \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language \bbl@set@language{#1}} +\def\BabelContentsFiles{toc,lof,lot}% \def\bbl@set@language#1{% \edef\languagename{% \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty - \else \string#1\@empty\fi}% + \else\string#1\@empty\fi}% \select@language{\languagename}% - \if@filesw - \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax\else + \if@filesw + \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}% + \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\BabelContentsFiles{% + \addtocontents{\bbl@tempa}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}}% + \bbl@usehooks{write}{}% + \fi \fi} \def\select@language#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax - \@noopterr{#1}% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax + \bbl@error + {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet}% + {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}% \else - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \originalTeX - \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX - \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname - \let\originalTeX\@empty}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \babel@beginsave - \csname captions#1\endcsname - \csname date#1\endcsname - \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax - \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin - \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi + \let\bbl@select@type\z@ + \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}% + \fi}} +\def\select@language@x#1{% + \ifcase\bbl@select@type + \bbl@ifsamestring\languagename{#1}{}{\select@language{#1}}% + \else + \select@language{#1}% + \fi} +\def\bbl@switch#1{% + \originalTeX + \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX\expandafter{% + \csname noextras#1\endcsname + \let\originalTeX\@empty + \babel@beginsave}% + \languageshorthands{none}% + \ifcase\bbl@select@type + \csname captions#1\endcsname + \csname date#1\endcsname + \fi + \bbl@usehooks{beforeextras}{}% + \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax + \bbl@usehooks{afterextras}{}% + \bbl@patterns{#1}% + \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin + \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax + \else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins + \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \fi} +\def\bbl@ifsamestring#1#2{% + \protected@edef\bbl@tempb{#1}% + \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}% + \protected@edef\bbl@tempc{#2}% + \edef\bbl@tempc{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempc}% + \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@secondoftwo \fi} \long\def\otherlanguage#1{% \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}% - \ignorespaces - } + \ignorespaces} \long\def\endotherlanguage{% - \originalTeX - \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces - } + \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces} \expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{% - \foreign@language{#1}% - } -\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{% - \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname - } -\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname} + \foreign@language{#1}} +\expandafter\let\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname\relax +\edef\foreignlanguage{% + \noexpand\protect + \expandafter\noexpand\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname} \expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{% \begingroup - \originalTeX \foreign@language{#1}% #2% - \csname noextras#1\endcsname - \endgroup - } + \endgroup} \def\foreign@language#1{% - \def\languagename{#1}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{\languagename}% - \languageshorthands{none}% - \csname extras#1\endcsname - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax + \bbl@warning + {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet\\% + I'll proceed, but expect unexpected results.\\% + Reported}% \fi - \fi - } + \let\bbl@select@type\@ne + \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}}} +\let\bbl@hyphlist\@empty +\let\bbl@hyphenation@\relax \def\bbl@patterns#1{% \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax - \csname l@#1\endcsname - \else - \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname - \fi\relax -} + \csname l@#1\endcsname + \edef\bbl@tempa{#1}% + \else + \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname + \edef\bbl@tempa{#1:\f@encoding}% + \fi\relax + \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{patterns}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}% + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@}{}{% + \begingroup + \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\number\language,}{,\bbl@hyphlist}% + \ifin@\else + \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{hyphenation}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}% + \hyphenation{% + \bbl@hyphenation@ + \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@#1}% + \@empty + {\space\csname bbl@hyphenation@#1\endcsname}}% + \xdef\bbl@hyphlist{\bbl@hyphlist\number\language,}% + \fi + \endgroup}} \def\hyphenrules#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined - \@nolanerr{#1}% - \else - \bbl@patterns{#1}% + \edef\languagename{#1}% + \bbl@fixname\languagename + \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{% + \expandafter\bbl@patterns\expandafter{\languagename}% \languageshorthands{none}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax - \else - \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins - \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax - \fi - \fi - } -\def\endhyphenrules{} + \expandafter\ifx\csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax + \else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins + \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax + \fi}} +\let\endhyphenrules\@empty \def\providehyphenmins#1#2{% \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}% \fi} -\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2} +\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\relax\righthyphenmin#2\relax} \def\LdfInit{% \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@ \catcode`\@=11\relax @@ -245,39 +285,55 @@ \LdfInit} \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi \ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi +\edef\bbl@nulllanguage{\string\language=0} \ifx\PackageError\@undefined - \def\@nolanerr#1{% - \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}% - \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}} - \def\@nopatterns#1{% - \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}% - \message{the language `#1'}% - \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \def\@noopterr#1{% - \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage} - \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}} - \def\@activated#1{% - \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}} + \def\bbl@error#1#2{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J(babel) }% + \errhelp{#2}\errmessage{\\#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@warning#1{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J(babel) }% + \message{\\#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@info#1{% + \begingroup + \newlinechar=`\^^J + \def\\{^^J}% + \wlog{#1}% + \endgroup} \else - \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}% - {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} - \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}% - {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak - the language `#1'\MessageBreak - I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0 - instead}} - \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{% - \PackageError{babel}% - {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}% - {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}} - \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{% - \PackageInfo{babel}{% - Making #1 an active character}} + \def\bbl@error#1#2{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageError{babel}{#1}{#2}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@warning#1{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageWarning{babel}{#1}% + \endgroup} + \def\bbl@info#1{% + \begingroup + \def\\{\MessageBreak}% + \PackageInfo{babel}{#1}% + \endgroup} \fi +\def\@nolanerr#1{% + \bbl@error + {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}% + {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}} +\def\@nopatterns#1{% + \bbl@warning + {No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for\\% + the language `#1' into the format.\\% + Please, configure your TeX system to add them and\\% + rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns\\% + preloaded for \bbl@nulllanguage\space instead}} +\let\bbl@usehooks\@gobbletwo %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 0750a5a53ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `turkish.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% turkish.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{turkish} - [2005/03/31 v1.2m Turkish support from the babel system] -%% File `turkish.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -%% Turkish Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005 -%% by Mustafa Burc -%% rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de -%% (40) 2503476 -\LdfInit{turkish}\captionsturkish -\ifx\l@turkish\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Turkish} - \adddialect\l@turkish0\fi -\addto\captionsturkish{% - \def\prefacename{\"Ons\"oz}% - \def\refname{Kaynaklar}% - \def\abstractname{\"Ozet}% - \def\bibname{Kaynak\c ca}% - \def\chaptername{B\"ol\"um}% - \def\appendixname{Ek}% - \def\contentsname{\.I\c cindekiler}% - \def\listfigurename{\c Sekil Listesi}% - \def\listtablename{Tablo Listesi}% - \def\indexname{Dizin}% - \def\figurename{\c Sekil}% - \def\tablename{Tablo}% - \def\partname{K\i s\i m}% - \def\enclname{\.Ili\c sik}% - \def\ccname{Di\u ger Al\i c\i lar}% - \def\headtoname{Al\i c\i}% - \def\pagename{Sayfa}% - \def\subjectname{\.Ilgili}% - \def\seename{bkz.}% - \def\alsoname{ayr\i ca bkz.}% - \def\proofname{Kan\i t}% - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation -}% -\def\dateturkish{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - Ocak\or \c Subat\or Mart\or Nisan\or May\i{}s\or Haziran\or - Temmuz\or A\u gustos\or Eyl\"ul\or Ekim\or Kas\i{}m\or - Aral\i{}k\fi - \space\number\year}} -\initiate@active@char{:} -\initiate@active@char{!} -\initiate@active@char{=} -\addto\extrasturkish{\languageshorthands{turkish}} -\addto\extrasturkish{% - \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{=}} -\addto\extrasturkish{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasturkish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -%%^^A JLB:: this code breaks during \begin{document} -%%^^A JLB: Needs fixing!! -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{:}{% - \ifmmode - \string:% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string:% - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{!}{% - \ifmmode - \string!% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace - \fi - \fi - \string!% - \fi} -\declare@shorthand{turkish}{=}{% - \ifmmode - \string=% - \else\relax - \ifhmode - \ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\kern\fontdimen2\font - \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font - \fi - \fi - \string=% - \fi} -\ldf@finish{turkish} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `turkish.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty index 51de47caea4..04d59fd4b33 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `turkish') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index cbd1d6d5fff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,321 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `ukraineb.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% ukraineb.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{ukraineb} - [2008/03/21 v1.1l Ukrainian support from the babel system] -%% File `ukraineb.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% ukraineb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2008 -%% by Andrij Shvaika ashv at icmp.lviv.ua -%% derived from the Russianb Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008 -%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su -%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl -\LdfInit{ukrainian}{captionsukrainian} -\ifx\l@ukrainian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Ukrainian} - \adddialect\l@ukrainian0 -\fi -\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding -\def\reserved@a#1#2{% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \edef\reserved@c{#2}% - \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c - \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c - \fi} -\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{% - \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}% - \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}% - \reserved@a{#1}{X2}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}% - \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}} -\cdp@list -\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax - \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax - \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax - \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax - \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined - \PackageError{babel}% - {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}% - {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak - You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak - \space\space - x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak - \space\space - lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}% - \else - \lowercase - \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}% - \fi -\fi -\DeclareRobustCommand{\Ukrainian}{% - \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\ukrainianhyphenmins - \language\l@ukrainian}% -\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{% - \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont - \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding - \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins - \language\l@english}% -\let\Ukr\Ukrainian -\let\Eng\English -\let\cyrillictext\Ukrainian -\let\cyr\Ukrainian -\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else - \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or - i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or - q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or - y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont - \ifcase#1\or - A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or - I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or - Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or - Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}% - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1} - \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1} - \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a} - \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A} -\fi -\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{% - \def\reserved@a{LWN}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \def\reserved@a{OT2}% - \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else - \PackageWarning{babel}% - {No input encoding specified for Ukrainian language} - \fi\fi} -\let\lat\latintext -\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext} -\addto\captionsukrainian{% - \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRV\cyrs\cyrt\cyru\cyrp}}% - \def\refname{% - {\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}% - \def\abstractname{% - {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrya}}% - \def\bibname{% - {\cyr\CYRB\cyrii\cyrb\cyrl\cyrii\cyro\cyrgup\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyrii\cyrya}}% - \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRR\cyro\cyrz\cyrd\cyrii\cyrl}}% - \def\appendixname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrd\cyra\cyrt\cyro\cyrk}}% - \def\contentsname{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% - \def\listfigurename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% - \def\listtablename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% - \def\indexname{{\cyr\CYRP\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}% - \def\authorname{{\cyr\CYRII\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyri\cyrishrt - \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}% - \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}% - \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl.}}% - \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyri\cyrn\cyra}}% - \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl\cyra\cyrd\cyrk\cyra}}% - \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyrii\cyrya}}% - \def\headtoname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro}}% - \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}% - \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.}}% - \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyro\cyrzh}} - \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyrya}}% - \def\glossaryname{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyrn\cyri\cyrk\ % - \cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyrm\cyrii\cyrn\cyrii\cyrv}}% - } -\def\dateukrainian{% - \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or - \cyrs\cyrii\cyrch\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyryu\cyrt\cyro\cyrg\cyro\or - \cyrb\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrz\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrk\cyrv\cyrii\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrch\cyre\cyrr\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyri\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrs\cyre\cyrr\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrv\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrs\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrzh\cyro\cyrv\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or - \cyrl\cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrp\cyra\cyrd\cyra\or - \cyrg\cyrr\cyru\cyrd\cyrn\cyrya\fi - \space\number\year~\cyrr.}} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\cyrillictext} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\latintext} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=`\'} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=0} -\initiate@active@char{"} -\addto\extrasukrainian{\languageshorthands{ukrainian}} -\addto\extrasukrainian{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\reserved@a{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\reserved@a -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"`}{\glqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"'}{\grqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"<}{\flqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{">}{\frqq} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"-}{% - \def\ukrainian@sh@tmp{% - \if\ukrainian@sh@next-\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@emdash - \else\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@hyphen\fi - }% - \futurelet\ukrainian@sh@next\ukrainian@sh@tmp} -\def\ukrainian@sh@hyphen{% - \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\def\ukrainian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2} -\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}% -\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}% - \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else - \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else - \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi} -\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi - \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi - \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}% -\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode - \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}% -\ifx\cyrdash\undefined - \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}} -\fi -\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces} -\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined - \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@} -\fi -\addto\extrasukrainian{\bbl@frenchspacing} -\addto\noextrasukrainian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing} -\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRIE\or - \CYRZH\or\CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRII\or\CYRYI\or\CYRISHRT\or - \CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or\CYRP\or\CYRR\or - \CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or\CYRC\or\CYRCH\or - \CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYRYU\or\CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname} -\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or - \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrie\or - \cyrzh\or\cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrii\or\cyryi\or\cyrishrt\or - \cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or\cyrp\or\cyrr\or - \cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or\cyrc\or\cyrch\or - \cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyryu\or\cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{% -\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters} -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault -\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding - \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault -\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding - \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault -} -\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} -\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} -\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} -\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} -\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits} -\addto\extrasrussian{% - \babel@save{\th}% - \let\ltx@th\th - \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}% - {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}% - } -\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} -\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} -\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits} -\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits} -\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits} -\def\nsd{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} -\def\nsk{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} -\def\NSD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRD}}\nolimits} -\def\NSK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRK}}\nolimits} - \def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} % ?????? - \def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} % ?????? -\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{% - \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi} -\ldf@finish{ukrainian} -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `ukraineb.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty index 1a4ff994e93..83f6289463a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `ukraineb') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index d1a5de345a6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,183 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `usorbian.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% usorbian.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{usorbian} - [2008/03/17 v1.0k Upper Sorbian support from the babel system] -%% File `usorbian.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Upper Sorbian Language Definition File -%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2004 -%% by Eduard Werner -%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de -%% -\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption} -\ifx\l@uppersorbian\@undefined - \ifx\l@usorbian\@undefined - \@nopatterns{Usorbian} - \adddialect\l@usorbian\z@ - \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian - \else - \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian - \fi -\else - \let\l@usorbian\l@uppersorbian -\fi -\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{% - \def\prefacename{Zawod}% - \def\refname{Referency}% - \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}% - \def\bibname{Literatura}% - \def\chaptername{Kapitl}% - \def\appendixname{Dodawki}% - \def\contentsname{Wobsah}% - \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}% - \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}% - \def\indexname{Indeks}% - \def\figurename{Wobraz}% - \def\tablename{Tabulka}% - \def\partname{D\'z\v el}% - \def\enclname{P\v r\l oha}% - \def\ccname{CC}% - \def\headtoname{Komu}% - \def\pagename{Strona}% - \def\seename{hl.}% - \def\alsoname{hl.~te\v z} - \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation - \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation - }% -\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or meje\or junija\or - julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or - nowembra\or decembra\fi - \space \number\year}} -\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{% - \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or - wulkeho r\'o\v zka\or ma\l eho r\'o\v zka\or nal\v etnika\or - jutrownika\or r\'o\v zownika\or sma\v znika\or pra\v znika\or - \v znjenca\or po\v znjenca\or winowca\or nazymnika\or - hodownika\fi \space \number\year}} -\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname - \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname -\initiate@active@char{"} -\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{usorbian}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@activate{"}} -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \bbl@deactivate{"}} -\begingroup \catcode`\^7 -\def\x{\endgroup - \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^Y}% - \lccode`\^^Y`\^^Y}} -\x -\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \babel@save\"\umlautlow} -\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \umlauthigh} -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@} -\begingroup \catcode`\"12 -\def\x{\endgroup - \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 } - \def\dq{"}} -\x -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}}{\ddot a}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}}{\ddot o}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}}{\ddot u}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}}{\ddot A}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}}{\ddot O}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}}{\ddot U}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}{\ddot\imath}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"s}{\textormath{\ss{}}{\@SS{}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"S}{SS} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"`}{% - \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"'}{% - \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"<}{% - \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{">}{% - \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"|}{% - \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}% - \allowhyphens}{}} -\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip} -\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}} -\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}} -\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens} -\ldf@finish\CurrentOption -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `usorbian.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty index 0e4927573e7..769381874e3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `usorbian') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf deleted file mode 100644 index 58bc629496c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `welsh.ldf', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% welsh.dtx (with options: `code') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors -%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system. -%% --------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. -%% -%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel -%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without -%% such generated files. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is -%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional -%% information. -%% -%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution -%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with -%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. -\ProvidesLanguage{welsh} - [2005/03/31 v1.0d Welsh support from the babel system] -%% File `welsh.dtx' -%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 -%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek -%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams -%% babel at braams.cistron.nl -\LdfInit{welsh}{captionswelsh} -\ifx\undefined\l@welsh - \@nopatterns{welsh} - \adddialect\l@welsh0\fi -\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@} -\def\captionswelsh{% - \def\prefacename{Rhagair}% - \def\refname{Cyfeiriadau}% - \def\abstractname{Crynodeb}% - \def\bibname{Llyfryddiaeth}% - \def\chaptername{Pennod}% - \def\appendixname{Atodiad}% - \def\contentsname{Cynnwys}% - \def\listfigurename{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% - \def\listtablename{Rhestr Dablau}% - \def\indexname{Mynegai}% - \def\figurename{Darlun}% - \def\tablename{Taflen}% - \def\partname{Rhan}% - \def\enclname{amgae\"edig}% - \def\ccname{cop\"\i au}% - \def\headtoname{At}% % `at' on letters meaning `to ( a person)' - % `to (a place)' is `i' in Welsh - \def\pagename{tudalen}% - \def\seename{gweler}% - \def\alsoname{gweler hefyd}% - \def\proofname{Prawf}% - \def\glossaryname{Rhestr termau}% - } -\def\datewelsh{% - \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\mathrm{a\tilde{n}}}$\else - \number\day\fi\space\ifcase\month\or - Ionawr\or Chwefror\or Mawrth\or Ebrill\or - Mai\or Mehefin\or Gorffennaf\or Awst\or - Medi\or Hydref\or Tachwedd\or Rhagfyr\fi - \space\number\year}} -\addto\extraswelsh{} -\addto\noextraswelsh{} -\ldf@finish{welsh} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `welsh.ldf'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty index 21e55d35949..cd8ace831b6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ %% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `welsh') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/xebabel.def index 7f96aa73ea8..289874aa2e2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrenc.def +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/xebabel.def @@ -1,12 +1,13 @@ %% -%% This is file `lgrenc.def', +%% This is file `xebabel.def', %% generated with the docstrip utility. %% %% The original source files were: %% -%% greek.fdd (with options: `LGRenc') +%% bbunicode.dtx (with options: `xetex') %% This is a generated file. %% +%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams. %% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors %% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved. %% @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". %% -%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams. +%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos. %% %% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel %% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without @@ -33,26 +34,26 @@ %% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional %% information. %% -%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in -%% this file to serve the needs of your installation. -%% -%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version -%% of this file under its original name. -%% -\ProvidesFile{lgrenc.def} - [2008/06/17 v2.3 % - Greek Encoding] -\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{} -\DeclareFontSubstitution{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} -\DeclareErrorFont{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LGR}{% - \textcircled{\textlatin{c}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LGR}{% - \textcircled{\textlatin{\textsc r}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LGR}{% - \textsuperscript{\textlatin{TM}}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\SS}{LGR}{% - \textlatin{SS}} +%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +%% File `bbunicode.dtx' +%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e +%% Copyright (C) 2103 +%% by Javier Bezos +\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode} +\let\xebbl@stop\relax +\AddBabelHook{xetex}{encodedcommands}{% + \def\bbl@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty + \XeTeXinputencoding"bytes"% + \else + \XeTeXinputencoding"#1"% + \fi + \def\xebbl@stop{\XeTeXinputencoding"utf8"}} +\AddBabelHook{xetex}{stopcommands}{% + \xebbl@stop + \let\xebbl@stop\relax} \endinput %% -%% End of file `lgrenc.def'. +%% End of file `xebabel.def'. |